1010XKworkshop PDF

Workshop Manual
X150 - XK
5.0L - 5.0L S/C
VIN B32753 to VIN B44939
TABLEOFCONTENTS
1:GeneralInformation
100:ServiceInformation
10000:GeneralInformation
DescriptionandOperation
AboutThisManual
ApplicationandUseofSpecifications
GeneralServiceInformation
HealthandSafetyPrecautions
HowToUseThisManual
ImportantSafetyInstructions
Road/RollerTesting
Solvents,SealantsandAdhesives
StandardWorkshopPractices
SymbolsGlossary
AirConditioning(A/C)SystemHealthandSafetyPrecautions
BatteryandBatteryChargingHealthandSafetyPrecautions
BodyRepairHealthandSafetyandGeneralPrecautions
BrakeSystemHealthandSafetyPrecautions
EngineCoolingSystemHealthandSafetyPrecautions
PetrolandPetrolEthanolFuelSystemsHealthandSafetyPrecautions
SupplementalRestraintSystem(SRS)HealthandSafetyPrecautions
WindowGlassHealthandSafetyPrecautions
10001:IdentificationCodes
IdentificationCodes
10002:JackingandLifting
Jacking
Lifting

10004:Noise,VibrationandHarshness
Noise,VibrationandHarshness(NVH)
DiagnosisandTesting
Noise,VibrationandHarshness(NVH)
10011:VehicleTransportationAidsandVehicleStorage
NewVehicleStorage
NewVehicleStorageForm
2:Chassis
204:Suspension
20400:SuspensionSystemGeneralInformation
Specification
WheelAlignmentAngles
DiagnosisandTesting
SuspensionSystem
GeneralProcedures
FrontToeAdjustment(57.65.01)
RearToeAdjustment(57.65.08)
FourWheelAlignment
FrontWheelBearingandWheelHubRunoutCheckVehiclesWith:High
PerformanceBrakes
FrontWheelBearingandWheelHubRunoutCheckVehiclesWith:StandardBrakes
RearWheelBearingandWheelHubRunoutCheckVehiclesWith:High
PerformanceBrakes
RearWheelBearingandWheelHubRunoutCheckVehiclesWith:StandardBrakes

20401:FrontSuspension
Specification
FrontSuspension
DiagnosisandTesting
FrontSuspension
RemovalandInstallation
FrontShockAbsorber
FrontLowerArm(60.35.53)
RearLowerArm(60.35.54)
RearLowerArmBushing(60.40.12)
ShockAbsorberBushing(60.30.16)(60.30.23)
FrontStabilizerBar
FrontStabilizerBarLink
StabilizerBarLinkBushing(60.10.03)
UpperArmLH
UpperArmRH
FrontWheelBearingandWheelHubV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
WheelKnuckle(60.25.23)
20402:RearSuspension
Specification
RearSuspension
DiagnosisandTesting
RearSuspension
LowerArm
RearShockAbsorber
RearStabilizerBar(64.35.08)V85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
RearStabilizerBarLink(64.35.24)
RearWheelBearing
TieBar
UpperArm(64.25.31)
20404:WheelsandTires
Specification
WheelsandTires
DiagnosisandTesting
WheelsandTires
WheelandTire(74.20.05)
TirePressureMonitoringSystem(TPMS)FrontAntenna
TirePressureMonitoringSystem(TPMS)RearAntenna
TirePressureMonitoringSystem(TPMS)ModuleConvertible
TirePressureMonitoringSystem(TPMS)Module2Door
TireLowPressureSensor
TirePressureMonitoringSystem(TPMS)Receiver
20405:VehicleDynamicSuspension
VehicleDynamicSuspension
DiagnosisandTesting
VehicleDynamicSuspension
AdaptiveDampingModule(86.56.35)Convertible
AdaptiveDampingModule(86.56.35)2Door
20406:RideandHandlingOptimization
RideandHandlingOptimization
205:Driveline
20500:DrivelineSystemGeneralInformation
DiagnosisandTesting
DrivelineSystem

20501:Driveshaft
Specification
Driveshaft
DiagnosisandTesting
Driveshaft
GeneralProcedures
DriveshaftRunoutandBalancing
Driveshaft
20502:RearDriveAxle/Differential
Specification
RearDriveAxleandDifferentialV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
DiagnosisandTesting
RearDriveAxleandDifferential
GeneralProcedures
DifferentialDrainingandFilling
DifferentialCase
DifferentialFrontBushing
DrivePinionSeal
RearHalfshaftSeal
DifferentialLockingMotor
20505:RearDriveHalfshafts
Specification
RearDriveHalfshafts
DiagnosisandTesting
RearDriveHalfshafts
RearHalfshaftV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
InnerConstantVelocity(CV)JointBoot(47.10.33)
OuterConstantVelocity(CV)JointBoot(47.10.32)
206:BrakeSystem
20600:BrakeSystemGeneralInformation
Specification
DiagnosisandTesting
BrakeSystem
GeneralProcedures
BrakeDiscRunoutCheck
BrakeSystemBleeding(70.25.03)
FrontBrakeDiscRunoutCheckWithWheelOnVehiclesWith:HighPerformance
Brakes
FrontBrakeDiscRunoutCheckWithWheelOnVehiclesWith:StandardBrakes
RearBrakeDiscRunoutCheckWithWheelOn
20603:FrontDiscBrake
Specification
FrontDiscBrake
BrakeCaliperVehiclesWith:HighPerformanceBrakes
BrakeCaliperVehiclesWith:StandardBrakes
BrakeDiscVehiclesWith:HighPerformanceBrakes
BrakeDiscVehiclesWith:StandardBrakes
BrakePadsVehiclesWith:HighPerformanceBrakes
BrakePadsVehiclesWith:StandardBrakes
20604:RearDiscBrake
Specification
RearDiscBrake
BrakeCaliperVehiclesWith:HighPerformanceBrakes
BrakeCaliperVehiclesWith:StandardBrakes
BrakeDiscVehiclesWith:HighPerformanceBrakes
BrakeDiscVehiclesWith:StandardBrakes
BrakePadsVehiclesWith:HighPerformanceBrakes
BrakePadsVehiclesWith:StandardBrakes
20605:ParkingBrakeandActuation
Specification
ParkingBrake
DiagnosisandTesting
ParkingBrake
GeneralProcedures
ParkingBrakeCableTensionRelease
ParkingBrakeCableLH
ParkingBrakeCableRH
ParkingBrakeModule(70.35.47)Convertible
ParkingBrakeModule(70.35.47)2Door
ParkingBrakeReleaseActuator
ParkingBrakeSwitch
20606:HydraulicBrakeActuation
Specification
HydraulicBrakeActuation
DiagnosisandTesting
HydraulicBrakeActuation
BrakeMasterCylinder(70.30.08)LHDRWD
BrakeMasterCylinder(70.30.08)RHDRWD
BrakeFluidReservoir(70.30.16)
BrakePedalandBracket(70.35.03)
20607:PowerBrakeActuation
Specification
BrakeBooster
DiagnosisandTesting
PowerBrakeSystem
BrakeBooster(70.50.17)LHDRWD
BrakeBooster(70.50.17)RHDRWD
BrakeVacuumPump
20609:AntiLockControlStabilityAssist
Specification
AntiLockControlStabilityAssistV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
DiagnosisandTesting
AntiLockControlStabilityAssist
AntiLockBrakeSystem(ABS)Module(70.60.02)
FrontWheelSpeedSensor
HydraulicControlUnit(HCU)(70.60.18)(70.60.19)
RearWheelSpeedSensor
YawRateSensorandAccelerometer
211:SteeringSystem
21100:SteeringSystemGeneralInformation
Specification
DiagnosisandTesting
SteeringSystem
GeneralProcedures
PowerSteeringSystemBleeding(57.15.02)
PowerSteeringSystemFilling
PowerSteeringSystemFlushing(57.15.08)
21102:PowerSteering
Specification
PowerSteering
PowerSteeringFluidCoolerVehiclesWithout:Supercharger
PowerSteeringFluidCoolerVehiclesWith:Supercharger
PowerSteeringFluidReservoir
PowerSteeringPump
SteeringGear
PowerSteeringPumptoSteeringGearPressureLine
SteeringGeartoFluidCoolerReturnHose
21103:SteeringLinkage
Specification
DiagnosisandTesting
SteeringLinkage
SteeringGearBoot(57.10.29)
TieRodEnd
21104:SteeringColumn
Specification
SteeringColumn
DiagnosisandTesting
SteeringColumn
SteeringColumn(57.40.01)
SteeringColumnLowerShaft(57.40.05)
SteeringWheel(57.60.01)
Clockspring
21105:SteeringColumnSwitches
Specification
DiagnosisandTesting
SteeringColumnSwitches
SteeringColumnLockActuator(57.40.41)
SteeringColumnMultifunctionSwitchLH(86.65.78)
SteeringColumnMultifunctionSwitchRH(86.65.41)
3:Powertrain
303:Engine
30300:EngineSystemGeneralInformation
DiagnosisandTesting
Engine
GeneralProcedures
BearingInspection
CamshaftBearingJournalClearance
CamshaftBearingJournalDiameter
CamshaftEndPlay
CamshaftLobeLift
CamshaftSurfaceInspection
ConnectingRodCleaning
ConnectingRodLargeEndBore
CrankshaftEndPlay
CrankshaftMainBearingJournalClearance
CylinderBoreOutofRound
CylinderHeadDistortion
ExhaustManifoldCleaningandInspection
PistonInspection
PistonPinDiameter
PistonPintoBoreDiameter
PistonRingEndGap
PistonRingtoGrooveClearance
ValveSpringFreeLength
ValveStemDiameter
LeakageTestUsingSmokeTestEquipment
30301A:EngineV8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
Engine
GeneralProcedures
EngineOilVacuumDrainingandFilling
EngineOilDrainingandFilling
FuelPumpCamshaftTimingCheck
FuelPumpCamshaftTimingAdjustment
CamshaftLH
CamshaftRH
CrankshaftFrontSeal
CrankshaftPulley
CrankshaftRearSeal
CylinderHead
CylinderHeadRH
EngineMountLH
EngineMountRH
ExhaustManifold
ExhaustManifoldRH
Flexplate
OilCooler
OilFilterElement
OilPan
OilPanExtension
OilPump
TimingCover
TimingDriveComponentsAssemblyPartNumber:INATimingDrive
TimingDriveComponentsAssemblyPartNumber:TsubakiTimingDrive
ValveCoverLH
ValveCoverRH
CylinderBlockOilGalleryPlug
FuelPumpCamshaftAssemblyPartNumber:INATimingDrive
FuelPumpCamshaftAssemblyPartNumber:TsubakiTimingDrive
LowerTimingCover
Removal
Engine
Installation
Engine
30301B:EngineV85.0LPetrol
Specification
Engine
GeneralProcedures
EngineOilVacuumDrainingandFilling
EngineOilDrainingandFilling
FuelPumpCamshaftTimingCheck
FuelPumpCamshaftTimingAdjustment
CamshaftLH
CamshaftRH
CrankshaftFrontSeal
CrankshaftPulley
CrankshaftRearSeal
CylinderHead
CylinderHeadRH
EngineMountLH
EngineMountRH
ExhaustManifold
ExhaustManifoldRH
Flexplate
IntakeManifold
OilCooler
OilFilterElement
OilPan
OilPanExtension
OilPump
TimingCover
TimingDriveComponentsAssemblyPartNumber:INATimingDrive
TimingDriveComponentsAssemblyPartNumber:TsubakiTimingDrive
ValveCoverLH
ValveCoverRH
CylinderBlockOilGalleryPlug
FuelPumpCamshaftAssemblyPartNumber:INATimingDrive
FuelPumpCamshaftAssemblyPartNumber:TsubakiTimingDrive
LowerTimingCover
Removal
Engine
Installation
Engine
30303A:EngineCoolingV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
EngineCooling
DiagnosisandTesting
EngineCooling
GeneralProcedures
CoolingSystemDrainingandVacuumFilling
CoolingSystemPartialDraining,FillingandBleedingV8S/C5.0LPetrol
CoolingSystemDraining,FillingandBleedingV8S/C5.0LPetrol
CoolingSystemPartialDraining,FillingandBleedingV85.0LPetrol
CoolingSystemDraining,FillingandBleedingV85.0LPetrol
AuxiliaryRadiator
CoolantExpansionTank
CoolantPumpV8S/C5.0LPetrol
CoolantPumpV85.0LPetrol
CoolingFanMotorandShroudV8S/C5.0LPetrol
CoolingFanMotorandShroudV85.0LPetrol
CoolingModuleV8S/C5.0LPetrol
CoolingModuleV85.0LPetrol
Radiator(26.40.01)V8S/C5.0LPetrol
Radiator(26.40.01)V85.0LPetrol
ThermostatHousingV8S/C5.0LPetrol
ThermostatHousingV85.0LPetrol
30303B:SuperchargerCoolingV8S/C5.0LPetrol
SuperchargerCooling
Radiator
30304A:FuelChargingandControlsV8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
FuelChargingandControls
DiagnosisandTesting
GeneralProcedures
FuelInjectionComponentCleaning
FuelInjectionComponentCleaningUsingPressureCleaner
FuelInjectors
FuelRailLH
FuelRailRH
LeftHandFuelRailHighPressureFuelPump
RightHandFuelRailHighPressureFuelPump
ThrottleBody
30304B:FuelChargingandControlsV85.0LPetrol
Specification
DiagnosisandTesting
GeneralProcedures
FuelInjectionComponentCleaning
FuelInjectionComponentCleaningUsingPressureCleaner
FuelInjectors
FuelRailLH
FuelRailRH
LeftHandFuelRailHighPressureFuelPump
RightHandFuelRailHighPressureFuelPump
ThrottleBody
30305:AccessoryDriveV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
AccessoryDrive
DiagnosisandTesting
AccessoryDrive
AccessoryDriveBeltV85.0LPetrol
AccessoryDriveBeltV8S/C5.0LPetrol
AccessoryDriveBeltIdlerPulleyV85.0LPetrol
AccessoryDriveBeltIdlerPulleyV8S/C5.0LPetrol
AccessoryDriveBeltTensionerV85.0LPetrol
AccessoryDriveBeltTensionerV8S/C5.0LPetrol
SuperchargerBelt
SuperchargerBeltIdlerPulley
SuperchargerBeltTensioner
30306:StartingSystemV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
StartingSystem
DiagnosisandTesting
StartingSystem
StartingSystemVehiclesWith:SmartKey
StartControlUnit
StarterMotor
30307:EngineIgnitionV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
EngineIgnition
DiagnosisandTesting
EngineIgnition
IgnitionCoilOnPlugV85.0LPetrol
IgnitionCoilOnPlugV8S/C5.0LPetrol
SparkPlugsV85.0LPetrol
SparkPlugsV8S/C5.0LPetrol
30308A:EngineEmissionControlV8S/C5.0LPetrol
EngineEmissionControl
DiagnosisandTesting
30308B:EngineEmissionControlV85.0LPetrol
DiagnosisandTesting
30312A:IntakeAirDistributionandFilteringV8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
IntakeAirDistributionandFiltering
DiagnosisandTesting
AirCleanerElement
AirCleanerLH
AirCleanerRH
AirCleanerOutletIntermediatePipeLH
AirCleanerOutletIntermediatePipeRH
AirCleanerOutletPipeLH
AirCleanerOutletPipeRH
AirCleanerOutletPipeTConnector
ChargeAirCooler
Supercharger
30312B:IntakeAirDistributionandFilteringV85.0LPetrol
Specification
DiagnosisandTesting
AirCleanerElement
AirCleanerLH
AirCleanerRH
AirCleanerOutletIntermediatePipeLH
AirCleanerOutletIntermediatePipeRH
AirCleanerOutletPipeLH
AirCleanerOutletPipeRH
AirCleanerOutletPipeTConnector
30313:EvaporativeEmissionsV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
EvaporativeEmissions
DiagnosisandTesting
EvaporativeEmissions
EvaporativeEmissionCanister
EvaporativeEmissionCanister
EvaporativeEmissionCanisterPurgeValveV85.0LPetrol
EvaporativeEmissionCanisterPurgeValveV8S/C5.0LPetrol
30314A:ElectronicEngineControlsV8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
ElectronicEngineControls
DiagnosisandTesting
GeneralProcedures
PowertrainControlModule(PCM)LongDriveCycleSelfTest
PowertrainControlModule(PCM)ShortDriveCycleSelfTest
CamshaftPosition(CMP)SensorLH
CamshaftPosition(CMP)SensorRH
CatalystMonitorSensorLH
CatalystMonitorSensorRH
CrankshaftPosition(CKP)Sensor
EngineControlModule(ECM)
EngineCoolantTemperature(ECT)Sensor
FrontKnockSensor(KS)LH
FrontKnockSensor(KS)RH
FuelRailPressure(FRP)Sensor
EngineOilLevelSensor
HeatedOxygenSensor(HO2S)LH
HeatedOxygenSensor(HO2S)RH
ManifoldAbsolutePressureandTemperature(MAPT)Sensor
MassAirFlow(MAF)Sensor
RearKnockSensor(KS)LH
RearKnockSensor(KS)RH
VariableValveTiming(VVT)OilControlSolenoidLH
VariableValveTiming(VVT)OilControlSolenoidRH
30314B:ElectronicEngineControlsV85.0LPetrol
Specification
DiagnosisandTesting
GeneralProcedures
PowertrainControlModule(PCM)LongDriveCycleSelfTest
PowertrainControlModule(PCM)ShortDriveCycleSelfTest
CamshaftPosition(CMP)SensorLH
CamshaftPosition(CMP)SensorRH
CatalystMonitorSensorLH
CatalystMonitorSensorRH
CrankshaftPosition(CKP)Sensor
EngineControlModule(ECM)
EngineCoolantTemperature(ECT)Sensor
EngineOilLevelSensor
FrontKnockSensor(KS)LH
FrontKnockSensor(KS)RH
FuelRailPressure(FRP)Sensor
HeatedOxygenSensor(HO2S)LH
HeatedOxygenSensor(HO2S)RH
ManifoldAbsolutePressureandTemperature(MAPT)Sensor
MassAirFlow(MAF)Sensor
RearKnockSensor(KS)LH
RearKnockSensor(KS)RH
VariableValveTiming(VVT)OilControlSolenoidLH
VariableValveTiming(VVT)OilControlSolenoidRH
307:AutomaticTransmission/Transaxle
30701:AutomaticTransmission/TransaxleV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
TransmissionDescription
DiagnosisandTesting
DiagnosticFlowChart
GeneralProcedures
TransmissionFluidLevelCheck
TransmissionFluidDrainandRefill
InputShaftSeal
ExtensionHousingSeal
TransmissionControlModule(TCM)andMainControlValveBody
TransmissionFluidPan,GasketandFilter
TransmissionSupportInsulator
Transmission,TransmissionFluidCoolerandTransmissionFluidCoolerTubes
TransmissionandTransmissionFluidCooler
Removal
Transmission
Installation
Transmission
30702:Transmission/TransaxleCoolingV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
TransmissionCooling
DiagnosisandTesting
TransmissionCooling
TransmissionFluidCoolerV85.0LPetrol
TransmissionFluidCoolerV8S/C5.0LPetrol
TransmissionFluidCoolerTubes
30705:AutomaticTransmission/TransaxleExternalControlsV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0L
Petrol
Specification
ExternalControls
DiagnosisandTesting
ExternalControls
DownshiftPaddleSwitch
EmergencyParkPositionReleaseLever
TransmissionControlSwitch(TCS)
TransmissionControlSwitch(TCS)Knob
UpshiftPaddleSwitch
309:ExhaustSystem
30900:ExhaustSystemV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
ExhaustSystem
DiagnosisandTesting
ExhaustSystem
CatalyticConverter
CatalyticConverterRH
ExhaustSoundEnhancementVacuumPump
ExhaustSoundEnhancementValve
ExhaustSystem
FrontMuffler
RearMuffler
310:FuelSystem
31000:FuelSystemGeneralInformation
GeneralProcedures
FuelSystemPressureReleaseV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
FuelTankDraining
QuickReleaseCoupling
QuickReleaseCouplingPushConnect
SpringLockCouplings
31001:FuelTankandLinesV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
FuelTankandLines
DiagnosisandTesting
FuelTankandLines
FuelLevelSender
FuelPumpandSenderUnit
FuelTank
FuelTankFillerPipe
31002:AccelerationControl
Specification
DiagnosisandTesting
AccelerationControl
AcceleratorPedal(19.20.01)
31003:SpeedControlV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
SpeedControl
DiagnosisandTesting
SpeedControl
GeneralProcedures
SpeedControlSensorAdjustment
SpeedControlDeactivatorSwitch(19.75.20)
SpeedControlSwitch
SpeedControlSensor
4:Electrical
412:ClimateControlSystem
41200:ClimateControlSystemGeneralInformation
Specification
DiagnosisandTesting
ClimateControlSystem
GeneralProcedures
AirConditioning(A/C)SystemFlushing
AirConditioning(A/C)SystemRecovery,EvacuationandCharging(82.30.30)
ContaminatedRefrigerantHandling
ElectronicLeakDetection
FluorescentDyeLeakDetection
RefrigerantOilAdding
RefrigerantSystemTests
41201:AirDistributionandFiltering
AirDistributionandFiltering
DiagnosisandTesting
AirDistributionandFiltering
CenterRegisters(82.20.38)
DriverSideRegister(82.20.39)
PassengerSideRegister(82.20.40)
PollenFilter(76.10.09)
41202:HeatingandVentilation
Specification
HeatingandVentilation
DiagnosisandTesting
HeatingandVentilation
AuxiliaryCoolantFlowPumpV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
BlowerMotor(82.25.66)
HeaterCore(80.20.29)
HeaterCoreandEvaporatorCoreHousing(82.25.21)
41203:AirConditioning
Specification
AirConditioning
DiagnosisandTesting
AirConditioning
AirConditioning(A/C)CompressorV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
BlowerMotorResistor
CondenserCoreV85.0LPetrol
CondenserCoreV8S/C5.0LPetrol
EvaporatorCore(82.25.20)
PressureCutoffSwitch(82.10.32)
ThermostaticExpansionValve(82.25.01)
ReceiverDrier
41204:ControlComponents
Specification
ControlComponents
DiagnosisandTesting
ControlComponents
AmbientAirTemperatureSensor
DefrostVent/RegisterBlendDoorActuatorLH
DefrostVent/RegisterBlendDoorActuatorRH
FootwellVent/DuctBlendDoorActuatorLH
FootwellVent/DuctBlendDoorActuatorRH
InVehicleTemperatureSensor(82.20.03)
RecirculationBlendDoorActuator(82.20.67)
SunloadSensor(82.20.70)
ClimateControlModule
ClimateControlAssembly(82.20.07)
413:InstrumentationandWarningSystems
41300:InstrumentClusterandPanelIllumination
InstrumentClusterandPanelIllumination
DiagnosisandTesting
InstrumentClusterandPanelIllumination
41301:InstrumentCluster
Specification
InstrumentCluster
DiagnosisandTesting
InstrumentCluster
InstrumentCluster(88.20.01)
InstrumentClusterLens
41306:Horn
Specification
Horn
DiagnosisandTesting
Horn
HornV85.0LPetrol
HornV8S/C5.0LPetrol
41308:InformationandMessageCenter
InformationandMessageCenter
DiagnosisandTesting
InformationandMessageCenter
41309:WarningDevices
DiagnosisandTesting
WarningDevices
LowWasherFluidWarningIndicatorSwitch(84.10.17)
41313:ParkingAid
Specification
ParkingAid
DiagnosisandTesting
ParkingAid
ParkingAidModule(86.80.39)
RearParkingAidSensor(86.54.14)(86.62.01)
FrontInnerParkingAidSensor(86.54.21)
FrontOuterParkingAidSensor(86.54.22)
414:BatteryandChargingSystem
41400:BatteryandChargingSystemGeneralInformation
BatteryCareRequirements
QuiescentDrain
DiagnosisandTesting
ChargingSystem
GeneralProcedures
BatteryCharging
41401:Battery,MountingandCables
Specification
BatteryandCables
DiagnosisandTesting
Battery
GeneralProcedures
BatteryDisconnectandConnect
Battery
41402:GeneratorandRegulatorV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
Specification
Generator
Generator
415:InformationandEntertainmentSystems
41500:InformationandEntertainmentSystemGeneralInformation
NavigationSystemMapUpdates
DiagnosisandTesting
AudioSystem
CellularPhone
41501A:AudioUnit
Specification
AudioSystem
DiagnosisandTesting
AudioSystem
Amplifier(86.50.10)
AudioUnit(86.50.03)
SteeringWheelAudioControls(86.50.42)
SatelliteRadioTuner
DigitalAudioModule
41501B:InformationandEntertainmentSystem
DiagnosisandTesting
AudioInputControlModule
41502:Antenna
Specification
Antenna
DiagnosisandTesting
Antenna
Antenna(86.51.17.60)
41503:Speakers
Specification
Speakers
DiagnosisandTesting
Speakers
FrontDoorSpeaker(86.50.13)
FrontDoorTweeterSpeaker(86.50.63)
SubwooferSpeaker(86.51.05)
QuarterPanelSpeaker(86.50.12)2Door
QuarterPanelSpeaker(86.50.12)Convertible
417:Lighting
41701:ExteriorLighting
Specification
ExteriorLighting
DiagnosisandTesting
Headlamps
GeneralProcedures
FrontFogLampAdjustment
HeadlampAdjustment(86.40.18)
ApproachLamp
FrontFogLamp(86.40.96)
HeadlampAssembly(86.41.33)
HeadlampBulb(86.42.14)VehiclesWith:HighIntensityDischargeHeadlamps
HeadlampLevelingModule
HeadlampLevelingFrontSensor
HeadlampLevelingRearSensor
HighMountedStoplamp(86.41.01)(86.41.32)
RearLampAssemblyV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
FogLampBulb
RearFogandReversingLamp2Door
RearFogandReversingLampConvertible
SideTurnSignalLamp
41702:InteriorLighting
InteriorLighting
DiagnosisandTesting
InteriorLighting
41704:DaytimeRunningLamps(DRL)
DaytimeRunningLamps(DRL)
DiagnosisandTesting
DaytimeRunningLamps(DRL)
418:ElectricalDistribution
41800:ModuleCommunicationsNetwork
Specification
CommunicationsNetwork
DiagnosisandTesting
CommunicationsNetwork
AuxiliaryJunctionBox(AJB)(86.70.55)
CentralJunctionBox(CJB)(86.70.72)
41801:ModuleConfiguration
DiagnosisandTesting
ModuleConfiguration
41802:WiringHarnesses
Specification
WiringHarness
GeneralProcedures
WiringHarnessRepair
FuelTankWiringHarnessModification
419:ElectronicFeatureGroup
41901A:AntiTheftActive
Specification
AntiTheftActive
DiagnosisandTesting
AntiTheftActive
Antenna
AntiTheftAlarmHorn(86.52.03)
RearIntrusionSensor
41901B:AntiTheftPassive
AntiTheftPassive
DiagnosisandTesting
AntiTheftPassive
GeneralProcedures
AntiTheftSecurityAccess
KeyProgrammingUsingDiagnosticEquipment
41902:RemoteConvenience
DiagnosisandTesting
UniversalTransmitter
GeneralProcedures
UniversalTransmitterProgramming
41907:NavigationSystem
Specification
NavigationSystem
DiagnosisandTesting
NavigationSystem
NavigationSystemAntenna(86.62.06)
NavigationSystemDisplayModule(86.62.07)
NavigationSystemModule(86.62.05)
41908:CellularPhone
Specification
CellularPhone
CellularPhoneAntenna(86.51.17)
TransceiverModule
41910:MultifunctionElectronicModules
Specification
ModuleControlledFunctions
DiagnosisandTesting
MultifunctionElectronicModule
DriverDoorModule(DDM)
DriverSeatModule(DSM)(86.75.28)
InformationandEntertainmentModule(86.53.48)
PassengerDoorModule(PDM)
RemoteKeylessEntry(RKE)Module
5:BodyandPaint
501:BodyandPaint
50102:FrontEndBodyPanels
AirDeflector
CowlVentScreen(76.10.01)
FenderSplashShield(76.10.90)
RadiatorSplashShield(76.22.90)
50103:BodyClosures
Specification
GeneralProcedures
HoodAlignment(76.16.02)
LuggageCompartmentLidAlignment(76.19.03)
LiftgateAlignment(76.19.54.60)
Hood(76.16.01)
LuggageCompartmentLid(76.19.01)
Door(76.28.04)
DoorCheckArm
Liftgate
50105:InteriorTrimandOrnamentation
Specification
APillarTrimPanel(76.13.31)
BPillarTrimPanel(76.13.28)
EngineCoverV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
FrontDoorTrimPanel(76.34.01)
Headliner(76.64.01)
ParcelShelf(76.67.06)
FrontScuffPlateTrimPanel(76.13.81)
ScuffPlateTrimPanel(76.13.81)
SunVisor(76.10.48)
LiftgateUpperTrimPanel(76.34.11)
LiftgateLowerTrimPanel
RearQuarterTrimPanel(76.13.73)2Door
RearQuarterTrimPanel(76.13.73)Convertible
RearQuarterTrimSlidingPanel
LoadspaceTrimPanel(76.13.73.60)2Door
LoadspaceTrimPanel(76.13.73.60)Convertible
LuggageCompartmentLidTrimPanel(76.19.05)
50108:ExteriorTrimandOrnamentation
Specification
FrontFenderMoulding
RearSpoiler(76.19.86.60)
RockerPanelMoulding(76.11.36)
50109:RearViewMirrors
Specification
RearViewMirrors
DiagnosisandTesting
RearViewMirrors
AutoDimmingInteriorMirror
ExteriorMirror(76.10.52)
ExteriorMirrorCover
ExteriorMirrorGlass
ExteriorMirrorMotor
50110:Seating
Specification
Seats
DiagnosisandTesting
Seats
HeaterMats
FrontSeat(76.70.01)
FrontSeatBackrestCover(76.70.15)
FrontSeatBackrestCover
FrontSeatBolster
FrontSeatBolsterPump
FrontSeatControlSwitch(86.75.46)
FrontSeatCushionCover(76.70.33)
FrontSeatLumbarMotor(86.75.44)
FrontSeatReclinerMotor(86.75.04)
RearSeatArmrest(76.70.39)
RearSeatBackrest(76.70.38)
RearSeatCushion(76.70.37)
FrontSeatBackrestHeaterMat(86.75.14)
FrontSeatCushionHeaterMat(86.75.13)
SeatBase
FrontSeatTrackMotor
DisassemblyandAssembly
RearSeatBackrest(76.70.48)VehiclesWith:40/20/40SplitSeat
50111:Glass,FramesandMechanisms
Specification
Glass,FramesandMechanisms
DiagnosisandTesting
Glass,FramesandMechanisms
FixedWindowGlass

GeneralProcedures
DoorWindowMotorInitialization
DoorWindowGlassAdjustment(76.31.03)
FrontDoorWindowGlass(76.31.01)
FrontDoorWindowRegulatorMotor(76.31.45)
FrontDoorWindowRegulator
WindowControlSwitch(86.25.08)
RearQuarterWindowGlass(76.31.31)Convertible
WindshieldGlass(76.81.40)
WindshieldGlass
RearQuarterWindowGlass(76.31.31)2Door
RearQuarterWindowRegulatorMotor(86.25.11)
50112:InstrumentPanelandConsole
Specification
InstrumentPanel
FloorConsole
FloorConsoleFinishPanel
GloveCompartment(76.52.03)
InstrumentPanel(76.46.01)
OverheadConsole(76.13.69)
InstrumentPanelLowerTrimPanel(76.46.11)
OverheadConsoleSwitchMoulding
50114:Handles,Locks,LatchesandEntrySystems
Specification
Handles,Locks,LatchesandEntrySystems
DiagnosisandTesting
DTC:With
Locks,LatchesandEntrySystems
DoorLockCylinderCover
ExteriorDoorHandle(76.58.07)
FrontDoorLockActuator(76.37.74)
FrontDoorLockCylinder(76.37.71)
LuggageCompartmentLidLatchActuator(76.19.25)
LuggageCompartmentLidLockCylinder(76.19.19)
LiftgateLockCylinder
LiftgateLatchActuator(86.25.65.60)
RadioFrequency(RF)Receiver
KeylessVehicleFrontAntenna
KeylessVehicleCenterAntenna
HoodLatch
50116:WipersandWashers
Specification
WipersandWashers
DiagnosisandTesting
WipersandWashers
HeadlampWasherJet(84.20.08)
HeadlampWasherPump(84.20.21)
RainSensor
WindshieldWasherPump(84.10.21)
WindshieldWasherReservoir(84.10.01)(84.10.03)
WindshieldWiperMotor(84.15.13)LHDRWD
WindshieldWiperMotor(84.15.13)RHDRWD
WiperPivotArm(84.15.03)
50118:ConvertibleTop
Specification
ConvertibleTop
DiagnosisandTesting
ConvertibleTop
GeneralProcedures
ConvertibleTopCompartmentLidAlignment
ConvertibleTopAlignment
ConvertibleTopBasePlateAdjustment
ConvertibleTopAssembly(76.86.15)
ConvertibleTopHeadliner(76.86.16)
ConvertibleTopLatch(76.86.19)
HeaderRailUpperTrimPanel(76.86.20)
HeaderRailWeatherstrip
ConvertibleTopCompartmentLid
ConvertibleTopCompartmentLidTrimPanel
ConvertibleTopCompartmentLidHinge
ConvertibleTopCompartmentLidMoulding
ConvertibleTopCompartmentLidLatch
ConvertibleTopCompartmentLidReleaseCables
ConvertibleTopCompartmentLidLatchandCableAssembly
ConvertibleTopMotor
HydraulicSystem,LiftCylinderandMotor
ConvertibleTopModule
ConvertibleTopTensionCylinder
ConvertibleTopCompartmentLidLiftCylinder
ConvertibleTopMaterial(76.86.12)
ConvertibleTopStriker
ConvertibleTopRearPanelLowerWeatherstrip
50119:Bumpers
Specification
FrontBumper(76.22.08)
FrontBumperCover
RearBumper(76.22.27)(76.22.52)
RearBumperCover(76.22.74)(76.22.77)
50120A:SafetyBeltSystem
Specification
SafetyBeltSystem
DiagnosisandTesting
SafetyBeltSystem
FrontSafetyBeltBuckle(76.73.49)
RearSafetyBeltBuckle(76.73.50)
RearSafetyBeltRetractor(76.73.18)2Door
FrontSafetyBeltRetractor(76.73.10)
RearSafetyBeltRetractor(76.73.18)Convertible
50120B:SupplementalRestraintSystem
Specification
AirBagSupplementalRestraintSystem(SRS)
DiagnosisandTesting
AirBagSupplementalRestraintSystem(SRS)
GeneralProcedures
AirBagDisposal

FrontImpactSeveritySensor
Driver Air Bag Module (76.73.39)
OccupantClassificationSensorV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
RestraintsControlModule(RCM)(76.73.48)
PassengerAirBagModule(76.73.37)
SideAirBagModule(76.73.47)
RolloverProtectionUnit
SideImpactSensor(76.73.53)Convertible
SideImpactSensor(76.73.53)2Door
50120C:PedestrianProtectionSystem
Specification
PedestrianProtectionSystem
DiagnosisandTesting
PedestrianProtectionSystem
PedestrianProtectionModule
PedestrianImpactSensor
PedestrianProtectionLatchActuator
PedestrianProtectionAccelerometer
PedestrianProtectionHoodActuatorLH
PedestrianProtectionHoodActuatorRH
50125A:BodyRepairsGeneralInformation
BodyRepairs
50125B:BodyRepairsCorrosionProtection
CorrosionProtection
50125C:BodyRepairsWaterLeaks
WaterLeaks
50126:BodyRepairsVehicleSpecificInformationandToleranceChecks
BodyandFrame
50127:FrontEndSheetMetalRepairs
Specification
FrontEndSheetMetal
FrontFender
FrontCrossmember
FenderApronPanel
FenderApronPanelReinforcement
FenderApronPanelClosingPanel
FrontSideMember
SideMemberDeformationElement
FrontSideMemberExtension
FrontWheelhouse
FenderApronPanelFrontExtension
FrontSideMemberSideExtension
AuxiliaryFrontCrossmember
FrontSideMemberSideExtensionMounting
FrontSideMemberToDeformationElementBracket
SuspensionTopMount
FrontSideMemberandSuspensionTopMountAssembly
WindshieldFrameConvertible
50128:RoofSheetMetalRepairs
Roof
RoofPanel
50129:SidePanelSheetMetalRepairs
SidePanelSheetMetal
RockerPanel
BulkheadLowerReinforcement
APillarAssembly
APillarOuterPanel
50130:RearEndSheetMetalRepairs
RearEndSheetMetal
RearWheelhouseOuter
RearInnerWheelhouseHalf
RearOuterWheelhouseHalf
RearLampMountingPanel
SpareWheelWell
RearSideMemberSection
QuarterPanelLowerExtension
QuarterPanelAssembly2Door
QuarterPanelAssemblyConvertible
BackPanelAssembly
RearSideMemberClosingPanel
RearSideMemberReinforcementPanel
WaterDrainPanelConvertible
WaterDrainPanelReinforcementConvertible
502:FrameandMounting
50200:UniBody,SubframeandMountingSystem
Specification
FrontSubframeV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
RearSubframeV85.0LPetrol/V8S/C5.0LPetrol
RearSubframeFrontBushing(64.25.34)
RearSubframeRearBushing(64.25.36)
Published: 11-May-2011
General Information - About This Manual

Description and Operation
Introduction
This manual covers diagnosis and testing and repair procedures.
It is structured into groups and sections, with specific system sections collected together under their relevant group.
A group covers a specific portion of the vehicle. The manual is divided into five groups, General Information, Chassis,
Powertrain, Electrical and Body and Paint. The number of the group is the first number of a section number.
Within Etis, the navigation tree will list the groups. After selecting a group the navigation tree will then list the sections
within that group. Each section has a contents list detailing Specifications, Description and Operation, Diagnosis and Testing,
General Procedures, Disassembly and Assembly, Removal and Installation.
References to LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand)

All LH and RH references to the vehicle are taken from a position sitting in the driver seat looking forward.
Vehicle LH and RH definition
Item
Part Number
Description
LH
RH
All LH and RH references to the engine are taken from a position at the flywheel looking towards the crankshaft front pulley.
Powertrain LH and RH definition
Item
Part Number
Description
front
right
rear
left
How to use Repair Procedures

This manual has been written in a format that is designed to meet the needs of technicians worldwide. It provides general
descriptions for accomplishing repair work with tested and effective techniques.
Important Safety Instructions

Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor vehicles
as well as the personal safety of the individual carrying out the work.
Anyone who departs from the instructions provided in this manual must first establish that personal safety or vehicle
integrity is not compromised by the choice of method, tools or components.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual
WARNING: Warnings are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Cautions are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in damage to the vehicle
or equipment being used.
NOTE: Notes are used to provide additional essential information required to carry out a complete and satisfactory repair.
Generic warnings or cautions are in their relevant description and operation procedure within section 100-00. If the generic
warnings or cautions are required for a procedure, there will be a referral to the appropriate description and operation
procedure.
If a warning, caution or note only applies to one step, it is placed at the beginning of the specific step.
Trustmark Authoring Standards (TAS) Repair Procedures

NOTE: TAS style procedures can be identified by steps that have no accompanying step text and the magenta color of the
electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps or clips.
A TAS removal and installation procedure uses a sequence of color illustrations to indicate the order to be followed when
removing/disassembling or installing/assembling a component.
Many of the TAS procedures will have the installation information within the removal steps. These procedures will have the
following note at the beginning of the procedure:
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
Reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets
The following list details the general policy for the reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets.
Types of self-locking nuts and bolts
NOTE: There are more types of self-locking fasteners available than shown in following illustration.
Item
Part Number
Description
Completely coated self-locking bolt
Partially coated self-locking bolt
Self-locking bolt with a locking washer
Self-locking nut with a plastic locking insert
Self-locking nut with thread deformation (3 dents)
Self-locking nut with thread deformation (squeeze of thread to oval shape)
Self-locking nut with integrated locking ring
All types of seals and gaskets must be discarded and new seals and gaskets installed unless otherwise stated within
the procedure.
Nuts and bolts with a chemical coating for locking and/or sealing and/or antiseize must be discarded unless the
procedure advises to reapply the coating with a specified material.
Nuts and bolts with a mechanical locking such as thread inserts, thread deformation or locking washers must be
discarded and new nuts and bolts installed unless otherwise stated within the procedure.
Torque to yield bolts must be discarded and new torque to yield bolts installed unless otherwise stated within the
procedure, recognizable by a tightening torque with more than one stage together with a torque angle.
Specification data
Specification procedures will only contain technical data that is not already part of a repair procedure.
Sequence of tasks
If components must be removed or installed in a specific sequence, the sequence will be identified numerically in a graphic
and the corresponding text will be numbered accordingly.
Special Tools, Equipment, Materials and Torque Figures
Special tools will be shown with the tool numbers in the illustration. The special tool numbers, general equipment, materials
and torque figures used for the procedure step will be shown in the text column.
TAS Graphics
Colors used in the graphic are as follows:
Blue - Component to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled.
Green and Brown - Additional components that need to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled prior to the
target component.
Yellow - Component that is touched or affected in a way but remains in the vehicle. It may be detached, attached,
moved, modified, checked, adjusted etc.

Magenta - Electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps and clips.
Pale Blue - Special tool(s) and general equipment.
One illustration may have multiple steps assigned to it.

Numbered pointers are used to indicate the number of electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps and
clips.
Items in the illustration can be transparent or use cutouts to show hidden details.
TAS Symbols
Symbols are used inside the graphics and in the text area to enhance the information display. The following paragraphs
describe the various types and categories of symbols.
For additional information, refer to: Symbols Glossary (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
Prohibition symbols advise on prohibited actions to either avoid damage or health and safety related risks. These symbols
are
Health and Safety symbols recommend the use of particular protection equipment to avoid or at least reduce the risk or
severity of possible injuries.
Warning symbols are used to indicate potential risks resulting from a certain component or area.
Instruction symbols are used to apply sealer, lubricant, weight, tape or cleaning detergent to a component.
Location symbols are used to show the location of a component or system within the vehicle.
Gearshift lever or selector lever position symbols are used to show which gearshift lever or selector lever position is to be
set.
Pointer symbols are used to draw attention to components and give special instructions such as a required sequence or
number of components. The number of components is reflected by the value inside the luty arrow. A sequence number is
located inside the circle. Numbers inside circles are also used to allocate special information such as tightening torques or
chemicals to a particular component.
Movement arrows are used to show three dimensional or rotational movements. These movements can include specific
values inside the symbol if required.
Standard tool symbols recommend the use of certain standard tools. These tools can include dimension values if required.
The following graphic illustrates a set of symbols that are used to provide detailed information on where to apply a material.
Measurement symbols provide detailed information on where to carry out a specific measurement. These symbols can
include specific values if required.
How to use Diagnosis and Testing procedures

Inspection and Verification
Visual Inspection Charts, Symptom Charts and other information charts (such as diagnostic routines) or supplement test
procedures with technical specifications will navigate the user to a specific test procedure.
Symptom Chart
The symptom chart indicates symptoms, sources and actions to address a condition.
Pinpoint Tests
For electrical systems, pinpoint test steps are used to identify the source of a concern in a logical, step-by-step manner.
Pinpoint tests have two columns: CONDITIONS and DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS.
The CONDITIONS column is used exclusively for graphics and icons (with or without captions) and the
DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS column provides direction to another test step or specific corrective actions.
The boxed numbers indicate the order in which the described action is to be carried out.
Component Tests
A component test is used when a component is tested in multiple pinpoint tests, or if a procedure is too complicated to be
formatted within a single page of the pinpoint test.
Graphics
Test graphics show the measurement or test to be carried out in a test step.
A representative tester graphic is used for voltmeters and ohmmeters.
If multiple measurements are made in a single graphic, the test leads are drawn with a solid line until the test lead splits to
indicate the multiple measurements, at which point dashed lines are used.
Breakout box type testers are represented by a double circle test pin. Test pins are labeled with the pin number.
General Information - Application and Use of Specifications

Torque Specifications
Torque specifications are shown in the torque specifications chart located at the front of the relevant section.
Published: 28-Dec-2012
General Information - General Service Information

Repairs and Replacements

When service parts are required, it is essential that only genuine Jaguar/Daimler replacements are used.
Attention is drawn to the following points concerning repairs and the installation of replacement parts and accessories:
Safety features embodied in the vehicle may be impaired if other than genuine parts are installed. In certain
territories, legislation prohibits the installation of parts which are not produced to the vehicle manufacturer's
specification.
Torque wrench setting figures given in this manual must be strictly adhered to. Locking devices, where specified,
must be installed. If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be renewed.
Owners purchasing accessories while travelling abroad should make sure that the accessory and its installed
location on the vehicle conform to mandatory requirements existing in their country of origin.
The vehicle warranty may be invalidated by the installation of other than genuine Jaguar/Daimler parts. All
Jaguar/Daimler replacements have the full backing of the factory warranty.
Jaguar/Daimler dealers are obliged to supply only genuine service parts.
Vehicle Specifications
Purchasers are advised that the specification details set out in this manual apply to a range of vehicles and not to any
specific one. For the specification of a particular vehicle, purchasers should consult their dealer.
The Manufacturer reserves the right to vary the specifications, with or without notice, and at such times and in such
manner as the Manufacturer thinks fit. Major as well as minor changes may be involved, in accordance with the
Manufacturer's policy of continuous improvement.
Whilst every effort is made to make sure the accuracy of the particulars contained in this manual, neither the
Manufacturer nor the Dealer, by whom the manual is supplied, shall in any circumstances be held liable for any
inaccuracy or the consequences thereof.
Service Repair Operation Numbering

A master index of numbered operations has been compiled for universal application to all vehicles manufactured by
Jaguar Land Rover Limited.
Each operation is allocated a number from the master index and cross-refers with an identical number in the Repair
Operation Times schedule. The number consists of six digits arranged in three pairs.
Each maintenance procedure in this manual is described in the sequence necessary to complete the operation in the
minimum time, as specified in the Repair Operation Times schedule.
References to Bank-1 and Bank-2

References to Bank-1 and Bank-2 are made with regard to the engine. When viewed from the flywheel the right-hand
bank will be Bank-1 and the left-hand bank will be Bank-2.
Special Tools
Any special tools and equipment required to perform a maintenance procedure, are shown at the beginning of each
procedure. When possible, illustrations are given to assist in identifying the tool needed.
Disconnecting/Connecting the Battery

Always stop the engine before disconnecting the battery negative lead and make sure the battery positive lead is
isolated i.e. wrapped in a suitable cloth.
WARNING: Radio code saving devices must not be used when conducting work on Air Bag or Fuel systems. It
must be noted that, when using these devices, the vehicle electrical system is still live albeit with a reduced current
flow.
NOTE: Before disconnecting the battery make sure that the radio receiver/cassette player/mini disc player and compact
disc player keycodes are known and, that no data is required from the Engine Control Module (ECM) as battery
disconnection will erase any fault codes and idle/drive values held in the Keep Alive Memory (KAM).
Always disconnect the battery before commencing repair operations which require:
The vehicle to be jacked up

Work on the engine
Work underneath the vehicle
Arc welding
Alternatively a Radio Code Saver may be used, when not working on the Air Bag or Fuel systems. With the battery
disconnected, a Radio Code Saver will allow sufficient current to pass to maintain the radio receiver/cassette
player/mini disc player and compact disc player memory, operate the clock and supply the door operated interior lights
while isolating the battery in the event of a short circuit.
Reconnecting the Battery
WARNING: If the battery has been on bench charge the cells may be giving off explosive hydrogen gas. Avoid
creating sparks, and if in doubt cover the vent plugs or covers with a damp cloth.
Always make sure that all electrical systems are switched OFF before reconnecting the battery to avoid causing sparks
or damage to sensitive electrical equipment.
Always reconnect the battery positive lead first and the negative last, ensuring that there is a good electrical contact
and the battery terminals are secure.
Restart the clock (where installed) and set it to the correct time.
Enter the radio receiver/cassette player/mini disc player and compact disc player keycodes and preset' frequencies, if
known.
Following reconnection of the battery, the engine should be allowed to idle until it has reached normal operating
temperature as the stored idle and drive values contained within the ECM have been lost. Allow the vehicle to idle for a
further three minutes. Drive the vehicle at constant speeds of approximately 48 km/h (30 mph), 64 km/h (40 mph), 80
km/h (50 mph), 96 km/h (60 mph) and 112 km/h (70 mph) for three minutes each. This will allow the ECM to relearn
idle and drive values, and may cause driveability concerns if the procedure is not carried out.
Connecting a Slave Battery Using Jump Leads
WARNING: If the slave battery has recently been charged and is gassing, cover the vent plugs or covers with a
damp cloth to reduce the risk of explosion should arcing occur when connecting the jump leads.
CAUTIONS:
A discharged battery condition may have been caused by an electrical short circuit. If this condition exists there
will be an apparently live circuit on the vehicle even when all circuits are switched off. This can cause arcing when the
jump leads are connected.
Whilst it is not recommended that the vehicle is jump started, it is recognized that this may occasionally be the
only practical way to mobilize a vehicle. In such an instance the discharged battery must be recharged immediately
after jump starting to avoid permanent damage.
Always make sure that the jump leads are adequate for the task. Heavy duty cables must be used.
Always make sure that the slave battery is of the same voltage as the vehicle battery. The batteries must be
connected in parallel.
Always make sure that switchable electric circuits are switched off before connecting jump leads. This reduces
the risk of sparks occurring when the final connection is made.
WARNING: Make sure that the ends of the jump leads do not touch each other or ground against the vehicle body
at any time while the leads are attached to the battery. A fully charged battery, if shorted through jump leads, can
discharge at a rate well above 1000 amps causing violent arcing and very rapid heating of the jump leads and
terminals, and can even cause the battery to explode.
Always connect the jump leads in the following sequence.
Slave battery positive first then vehicle battery positive.
Slave battery negative next and then vehicle ground at least, 300 mm (12 in) from the battery terminal e.g.
engine lifting bracket.

Always reduce the engine speed to idle before disconnecting the jump leads.
Before removing the jump leads, switch on the heater blower (high) or the heated rear screen, to reduce the voltage
peak when the leads are removed.
Always disconnect the jump leads in the reverse order to the connecting sequence and take great care not to short the
ends of the leads.
Do not rely on the generator to restore a discharged battery. For a generator to recharge a battery, it would take in
excess of 8 hours continuous driving with no additional loads placed on the battery.
Component Cleaning
To prevent ingress of dirt, accumulations of loose dirt and greasy deposits should be removed before disconnecting or
dismantling components or assemblies.
Components should be thoroughly cleaned before inspection prior to reassembly.
Cleaning Methods:
Dry Cleaning
Removal of loose dirt with soft or wire brushes
Scraping dirt off with a piece of metal or wood
Wiping off with a rag
CAUTION: Compressed air is sometimes wet so use with caution, especially on hydraulic systems.
Blowing dirt off with compressed air (Eye protection should be worn when using this method)
Removal of dry dust using vacuum equipment. This method should always be used to remove friction lining
material dust (asbestos particles)

Steam Cleaning
Calibration of Essential Measuring Equipment
WARNING: Failure to comply may result in personal injury or damage to components.
It is of fundamental importance that certain essential equipment e.g. torque wrenches, multimeters, exhaust gas
analysers, rolling roads etc., are regularly calibrated in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Use of Control Modules

Control modules may only be used on the vehicle to which they were originally installed. Do not attempt to use or test a
control module on any other vehicle.
Functional Test
On completion of a maintenance procedure, a thorough test should be carried out, to ensure the relevant vehicle
systems are working correctly.
Preparation
Before disassembly, clean the surrounding area as thoroughly as possible. When components have been removed,
blank off any exposed openings using grease-proof paper and masking tape. Immediately seal fuel, oil and hydraulic
lines when separated, using plastic caps or plugs, to prevent loss of fluid and the entry of dirt. Close the open ends of
oil ways, exposed by component removal, with tapered hardwood plugs or readily visible plastic plugs. Immediately a
component is removed, place it in a suitable container; use a separate container for each component and its associated
parts. Before dismantling a component, clean it thoroughly with a recommended cleaning agent; check that the agent
will not damage any of the materials within the component. Clean the bench and obtain marking materials, labels,
containers and locking wire before dismantling a component.
Dismantling
Observe scrupulous cleanliness when dismantling components, particularly when parts of the brake, fuel or hydraulic
systems are being worked on. A particle of dirt or a fragment of cloth could cause a dangerous malfunction if trapped in
these systems. Clean all tapped holes, crevices, oil ways and fluid passages with compressed air.
WARNING: Do not permit compressed air to enter an open wound. Always use eye protection when using
compressed air.
Make sure that any O-rings used for sealing are correctly reinstalled or renewed if disturbed. Mark mating parts to make
sure that they are replaced as dismantled. Whenever possible use marking materials which avoid the possibilities of
causing distortion or the initiation of cracks, which could occur if a center punch or scriber were used. Wire together
mating parts where necessary to prevent accidental interchange (e.g roller bearing components). Tie labels on to all
parts to be renewed and to parts requiring further inspection before being passed for reassembly. Place labelled parts
and other parts for rebuild in separate containers. Do not discard a part which is due for renewal until it has been
compared with the new part, to make sure that the correct part has been obtained.
Inspection
Before inspecting a component for wear or performing a dimensional check, make sure that it is absolutely clean; a
slight smear of grease can conceal an incipient failure. When a component is to be checked dimensionally against
figures quoted for it, use the correct equipment (surface plates, micrometers, dial gauges etc.) in serviceable condition.
The use of makeshift equipment can be dangerous. Reject a component if its dimensions are outside the limits quoted,
or if damage is apparent. A component may be reinstalled if its critical dimension is exactly to the limit size and it is
otherwise satisfactory. Use Plastigauge 12 Type PG-1 for checking bearing surface clearance, e.g. big end bearing shell
to crank journal. Instructions for the use of Plastigauge and a scale giving bearing clearances in steps of 0,0025 mm
(0.0001 in) are supplied with the package.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD)

This vehicle uses programmed electronic control systems to provide engine management and emission regulation,
automatic transmission operation and anti-lock braking control. These control systems are integral with the On-Board
Diagnostics (OBD) facility that is used in conjunction with either the Jaguar approved diagnostic system or the more
restricted scan tools.
The OBD information in this manual provides diagnostic and rectification procedures for emission related electrical and
mechanical systems. The information is intended to facilitate fault diagnosis and the subsequent rectification of the
vehicle without recourse to the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
The diagnosis and testing sections within the manual cover:
System principles of operation with links to the relevant Description and Operation sections
Self tests (where appropriate)
Inspection and Verification - manual checks, symptom and Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) driven diagnostic
charts with actions required to rectify concerns

Component tests (where appropriate)
Circuit Diagrams
To understand the relationship between the vehicle electrical system and the system circuit diagrams, Refer to the
Electrical Guide.
In the interest of clarity, single lines may represent multiple wires. Refer to the color code (1st alpha) followed by the
wire reference (numeric/alpha/numeric) to trace origin and destination.
e.g. BW 647B002. BW (black with white trace) 647 (wire reference) B002 (stage from origin).
Glossary of Terms
This glossary of terms is intended to cover mainly emissions-related (to SAE J 1930) terminology, and other
abbreviations that may be used in this manual.
The required term may be looked-up in the left-hand column, and subsequent columns give the standard acronym, unit
or abbreviation, and definition.
Term(s)
Air Conditioning
Accelerator Pedal Position
Acronym/Unit/Abbreviation
A/C
APP
After Bottom Dead Center

After Top Dead Center
Anti-lock Brake System
ABDC
ATDC
ABS
Alternating Current
Amplitude Modulation
Automatic Temperature
Control
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ampere
Ampere hour
Barometric Pressure
ac
AM
ATC
ATF
A
Ah
BARO
Battery positive voltage
B+
Before Bottom Dead Center

Before Top Dead Center
Bottom Dead Center
Battery Junction Box
Brake Pedal Position
Brake Horsepower
BBDC
BTDC
BDC
BJB
BPP
BHP
British Standard
BS
Brake Traction Control

System
Bus
BTCS
Coast Clutch Solenoid

Camshaft Position
Carbon dioxide
Topology of a communication
network
CCS
CMP
CO
Carbon monoxide
CO
Chlorofluorocarbon
Catalytic converter
CFC
Definition
Is a multitrack sensor which inputs the drivers demand
into the engine control module (ECM)
Event occurring after bottom dead center
Event occurring after top dead center
System which prevents wheel lock-up under braking by
sensing lack of rotation of a wheel(s) and diverting fluid
pressure away from it (them)
SI unit of current
Pressure of surrounding air at any given temperature
and altitude
The positive voltage from a battery or any circuit
connected directly to it
Event occurring before bottom dead center
Event occurring before top dead center
Lowest point of piston travel in a reciprocating engine
Effective horsepower developed by an engine or motor,

as measured by a brake applied to its output shaft
Standard specification issued by the British Standards
Institution
Indicates camshaft position

Colorless gas with a density of approximately 1.5 times
that of air
Poisonous gas produced as the result of incomplete
combustion
In-line exhaust system device used to reduce the level of
engine exhaust emissions
Celsius
Compact Disc
Cylinder Head Temperature
Sensor
Central Junction Box
Crankshaft Position
Clutch Pedal Position
Controller Area Network
CD
CHT Sensor
Constant Velocity
Cubic centimeter
Central Security Module
CV
cm
CSM
Data Link Connector
DLC
Driver Door Module

Driver Seat Module
Daytime Running Lamps
Deutsche Institut fur
Normung
Diagnostic Trouble Code
DDM
DSM
DRL
DIN
Direct current
dc
Domestic Data Bus

Digital Versatile Disc
Electronic Automatic
Temperature Control
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Temperature Sensor
Electronic Brake Force
Distribution
Engine Control Module
Electronic Crash Sensor
Engine Coolant Temperature
Engine Oil Pressure
European On-Board
Diagnostic
Electronic Pressure Control
Electrically Erasable
Programmable Read-Only
Memory
Erasable Programmable
Read-Only Memory
Evaporative Emission
D2B
DVD
EATC
CJB
CKP
CPP
CAN
DTC
EGR
EGRT
SI term for the Centigrade scale, with freezing point at

zero and boiling point at 100 degrees
A sensor for measuring the temperature of the cylinder
head
Indicates crankshaft position
Indicates clutch pedal position
A communication system which allows control modules
to be linked together
Electronic module to support security system

functionality
Connector providing access and/or control of the vehicle
information, operating conditions, and diagnostic
information
Electronic module to support driver door functionality
Electronic module to support driver seat functionality
German standards regulation body
An alpha/numeric identifier for a fault condition identified
by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system
Current which flows in one direction only, though it may
have appreciable pulsations in its magnitude
Sensing EGR function based on temperature change
EBD
ECM
ECS
ECT
EOP
EOBD
Electronic module to support engine functionality

Sensor to measure severity of impact
EPC
EEPROM
EPROM
EVAP
Flash Electrically Erasable

Memory
Front Electronic Module
Flash Erasable
Memory
Frequency Modulation
Fuel Pump Driver Module
Fuel Rail Pressure
Generic Electronic Module
Ground
FEEPROM
Global Positioning System

Global System for Mobile
Communication
Gross Vehicle Weight
GPS
GSM
System designed to prevent fuel vapor from escaping

into the atmosphere. Typically includes a charcoal filled
canister to absorb fuel vapor
FEM
FEPROM
FM
FPDM
FRP
GEM
GND
GVW
Electrical conductor used as a common return for an

electrical circuit or circuits, and with a relative zero
potential
Heated Oxygen Sensor
HO2S
Hydrofluorocarbon
High tension
Hydrocarbon
Idle Air Control
HFC
HT
HC
IAC
Intake Air Temperature

Inertia Fuel Shut-off
IAT
IFS
Input Shaft Speed

Key On, Engine Off
Key On, Engine Running
Kilogram (mass)
Kilogram (force)
Kilogram force per square
centimeter
Kilometer
Kilometer per hour
Kilopascal
Kilovolt
Knock Sensor
ISS
KOEO
KOER
kg
kgf
kgf/cm
Liquid Crystal Display
LCD
Lighting Control Module

Light Emitting Diode
Low Tension
LCM
LED
LT
Left-Hand
Left-Hand Drive
Mass Air Flow
LH
LHD
MAF
Manifold Absolute Pressure

and Temperature
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
MAP
MAPT
Meter (measurement)
Metric (screw thread, e.g.
M8)
Farad
Millimeter
Millimeter of mercury
Millisecond
Model year
Newton
Newton Meter
m
M
km
km/h
kPa
kV
KS
MIL
F
mm
mmHg
ms
MY
N
Nm
Negative Temperature
Coefficient
Naturally aspirated
NTC
Noise, Vibration and

Harshness
North American Specification
On-Board Diagnostic
NVH
NAS
OBD
Oxides of Nitrogen
Oxygen Sensor
Nox
O2S
On-board Refuelling Vapour

Recovery
ORVR
N/A
Electrically heated oxygen sensor which induces fuelling

corrections
Stepper motor driven device which varies the volume of

air by-passing the throttle to maintain the programmed
idle speed
Temperature of intake air
An inertia system that shuts off the fuel supply when
activated by pre-determined force limits brought about
by (e.g.) collision
Indicates input shaft speed
Sensor which detects the onset of detonation, and

signals the ECM to retard the ignition
Optical digital display system, to which applied voltage
varies the way the crystals reflect light, thereby
modifying the display
Primary circuit of the ignition system, linking the battery

to the primary winding in the ignition coil
System which provides information on the mass flow

rate of the intake air to the engine
Absolute pressure of the intake manifold air
A required on-board indicator to alert the driver of an

emission related malfunction
Unit of electrical capacitance
SI unit of force. 1 N = 0.2248 pounds force

SI unit of torque. Must not be confused with nm
(nanometer)
Fuelling system using intake air at atmospheric

pressure; not supercharged or turbocharged
Vehicles for sale in the USA and Canadian markets

A system that monitors some or all computer input and
output control signals. Signal(s) outside the predetermined limits imply a fault in the system or a related
system
A sensor which detects oxygen content in the exhaust
gases
Output State Control

Output Shaft Speed
Passenger Air Bag
Deactivation
Pulsed Secondary Air
Injection
Passive Anti-Theft System
Positive Crankcase
Ventilation
Parameter Identification
OSC
OSS
PAD
PAIR
PATS
PCV
PID
Park/Neutral Position
Pulse Width Modulation
Programmable Electronic
Control Units System
PNP
PWM
PECUS
Programmable Read-only
Memory
Portable Support Electronics
Power Steering Pressure
Polytetrafluoroethylene
Random Access Memory
PROM
Read Only Memory
ROM
Restraints Control Module
RCM
Radio Data System

Rear Electronic Module
Remote Keyless Entry
Right-hand
Right-hand drive
Research Octane Number
Rear Seat Module
Supercharger
RDS
REM
RKE
RH
RHD
RON
RSM
SC
Serial Communications Link

Standard Corporate Protocol
SCL
SCP
Supplemental Restraints
System
Shift Solenoid
Seat Control Module
SRS
SS
SCM
Secondary Air Injection
AIR
Service Repair Operation

(number)
SRO
Society of Automotive
Engineers
Timing/Coast Clutch
Solenoid
Torque Converter Clutch
Transmission Control
Indicator Lamp
Throttle Position
Top Dead Center
Transmission Control Module
SAE
PSE
PSP
PTFE
RAM
An index number referring to a parameter within a

module without knowledge of its storage location
Process whereby a common ECM is programmed on the

production line to suit the market requirements of a
particular vehicle
ROM with some provision for setting the stored data
after manufacture
Fast access memory store which is accessible for entry

or extraction of data
Fast access memory in which data is fixed and may not
be changed
Electronic module to support functionality of the
Supplemental Restraints System
Electronic module to support functionality of rear seats

An intake system which utilizes a supercharger
(mechanically driven device that pressurizes intake air,
thereby increasing density of charge air and the
consequent power output from a given displacement)
A high-speed, serial communications system linking all
body system control modules. Control messages and
data are passed between modules at up to 786
messages per second
Controls shifting in an automatic transmission

Module controlling the seat motor systems (not electric
raise/lower-only seats)
System used for a period of time each time the engine is
started, unless certain temperature criteria are met.
Pumps air directly into the exhaust system which
generates extra heat and reduces the time taken for the
catalytic converters to reach operating temperature
Number generated by Jaguar Methods & Techniques
system which relates to the time allowed to complete a
repair operation. Further information on the system can
be found in the separate Jaguar Publications (for each
model range) entitled 'Repair Operation Times'
T/CCS
TCC
TCIL
TP
TDC
TCM
Controls the shifting pattern of the (automatic)

transmission
Transmission Control Switch
TCS
Transmission Fluid
Temperature
Transmission Range
Turbine Shaft Speed
TFT
TR
TSS
Variable Assist Power

Steering
Variable Camshaft Timing
VAPS
Vehicle Identification
Number
Vehicle Speed Sensor
Worldwide Diagnostic
System
Wide Open Throttle
VIN
VCT
Modifies the operation of electronically controlled

transmissions
Indicates temperature of transmission fluid
The range in which the transmission is operating
Indicates rotational speed of transmission output shaft
or turbine shaft
VSS
WDS
A system by which the relationship of the crankshaft and

camshaft may be altered during engine running
Number assigned to the vehicle by the manufacturer,
primarily for licensing and identification purposes
Sensor which provides vehicle speed information
Jaguar approved diagnostic system
WOT
Full throttle position
General Information - Health and Safety Precautions

The Health and Safety Precautions subsection refers to some commonly used chemicals and materials, hazards
associated with their use, and safety measures to be taken. Some of these chemicals may be included in the following
list either in their own right or as an ingredient in a sealer or adhesive.
Acids and Alkalis

See also Battery Acids.
e.g. caustic soda, sulphuric acid.
Used in batteries and cleaning materials.
Irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, nose and throat. Cause burns. Can destroy ordinary protective clothing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear suitable protective impervious apron, gloves and goggles. Do not
breath mists.
Ensure access to eye wash bottles, shower and soap are readily available for splashing accidents.
Display Eye Hazard sign.
Air Bags
See also Fire, Chemical Materials - General
Highly flammable, explosive observe No Smoking policy.
Used as a part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), mounted in various positions around the vehicle.
The inflator contains a high-energetic propellant which, when ignited, produces a VERY HOT GAS (2500 C).
The gas generant used in air bags is Sodium Azide. This material is hermetically sealed in the module and is completely
consumed during deployment. No attempt should be made to open an air bag inflator as this will lead to the risk of
exposure to Sodium Azide. If a gas generator is ruptured, full protective clothing should be worn when dealing with the
spillage.
After normal deployment, gloves and safety goggles should be worn during the handling process.
Deployed air bags should be disposed of in a plastic bag in accordance with local regulations at an approved chemical
waste site.
Following any direct contact with gas generant.
Wash affected areas thoroughly with water
Seek medical assistance if necessary
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any SRS components. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the
battery negative cable and wait for one minute. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTE: The storage, transportation, disposal and/or recycling of air bag modules must be carried out in accordance with
all applicable federal, state and local regulations including, but not limited to, those governing building and fire codes,
environmental protection, occupational health and safety and transportation.
Air Bags - Do's
Do store in an air bag safe when not installed to the vehicle.
Do store modules in an upright position
Do keep modules dry
Do carry modules with the cover side pointing away from the body
Do place modules with their cover side upwards
Do carefully inspect modules for damage
Do stand to one side when connecting modules
Do make sure all test equipment is properly calibrated and maintained
Do wash you hands after handling deployed air bags
Do wear safety glasses when carrying out repairs to the SRS or when handling an air bag module
Only carry out a system test with the air bag modules fully installed
Do inspect the condition of the impact sensor mounting bracket and sensor flylead if the vehicle has been
involved in an impact. Replace if damaged, even if there has been no deployment.
Air Bags - Do Nots
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
store highly flammable material together with modules or gas generators

store gas generators at temperatures exceeding 80 C
store modules upside down
attempt to open a gas generator housing
expose gas generators to open flame or sources of heat
place anything on top of a module cover
use damaged modules
handle a deployed device or gas generator for at least 20 minutes
probe air bag module electrical connectors or any other SRS component
Air Conditioning Refrigerant

See also Chlorofluorocarbon, Chemical Materials
Highly flammable, combustible observe No Smoking policy.
Skin contact may result in frostbite.
Instructions given by the manufacturer must be followed. Avoid naked lights, wear suitable protective gloves and
goggles.
If refrigerant comes into contact with the skin or eyes, rinse the affected areas with water immediately. Eyes should
also be rinsed with an appropriate irrigation solution and should not be rubbed. SEEK MEDICAL ASSISTANCE IF
NECESSARY.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant - Do Nots
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
not
not
not
not
not
expose refrigerant bottles to sunlight or heat

expose refrigerant bottles to frost
drop refrigerant bottles
vent refrigerant to atmosphere under any circumstance
mix refrigerants i.e. R12 (Freon) and R134a
Antifreeze
See also Fire, Solvents.
e.g. isopropanol, ethylene glycol, methanol.
Highly flammable, flammable, combustible.
Used in vehicle coolant systems, brake air pressure systems, screenwash solutions.
Vapors may be given off from coolant antifreeze (glycol) when heated. Avoid breathing these vapors.
Antifreeze may be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities. Antifreeze, if swallowed can be fatal and
medical attention should be sought immediately.
These products must not be used in any cooling or industrial water system which is connected or linked to general, food
preparation or drinking water supplies.
Asbestos
Used in brake and clutch linings, transmission brake bands and gaskets. Jaguar original production and replacement
items are asbestos free.
See also Warning Symbols on Vehicles at the end of this subsection.
Breathing asbestos dust may cause lung damage or, in some cases, cancer.
The use of drum cleaning units, vacuum cleaning or damp wiping is preferred.
Asbestos dust waste should be dampened, placed in a sealed container and marked to make sure safe disposal. If any
cutting or drilling is attempted on materials containing asbestos the item should be dampened and only hand tools or
low speed power tools used.
Battery Acids
See also Acids and Alkalis.
Gases released during charging are explosive. Never use naked flames or allow sparks near charging or recently
charged batteries.
Ensure adequate ventilation.
Brake and Clutch Linings and Pads

See Asbestos.
Brake Fluids (Polyalkylene Glycols)

See also Fire.
Splashes to the skin and eyes may cause irritation. Avoid skin and eye contact as far as possible. Vapor inhalation
hazards do not arise at ambient temperatures because of the very low vapor pressure.
Brazing
See Welding.
Chemical Materials
See also Legal Aspects.
Chemical materials such as solvents, sealers, adhesives, paints, resin foams, battery acids, antifreeze, brake fluids,
fuels, oils and grease should always be used with caution and stored and handled with care. They may be toxic,
harmful, corrosive, irritant or highly flammable and give rise to hazardous fumes and dusts.
The effects of excessive exposure to chemicals may be immediate or delayed; briefly experienced or permanent;
cumulative; superficial; life threatening; or may reduce life-expectancy.
Chemical Materials - Do's
Do carefully read and observe hazard and precaution warnings given on material containers (labels) and in any
accompanying leaflets, posters or other instructions. Material health and safety data sheets can be obtained
from manufacturers
Do remove chemical materials from the skin and clothing as soon as practical after soiling. Change heavily soiled
clothing and have it cleaned
Do organise work practices and protective clothing to avoid soiling of the skin and eyes, and the breathing in of
vapors, aerosols, dusts or fumes
Do wash before breaks, before eating, smoking, drinking or using toilet facilities when handling chemical
materials
Do keep work areas clean, uncluttered and free from spills
Do store chemical materials according to national and local regulations
Do keep chemical materials out of the reach of children
Chemical Materials - Do Nots
Do not mix chemical materials except under the manufacturer's instructions; some chemicals can form other
toxic or harmful chemicals, give off toxic or harmful fumes or become explosive when mixed together
Do not spray chemical materials, particularly those based on solvents, in confined spaces e.g. when people are
inside a vehicle
Do not apply heat or flame to chemical materials except under the manufacturer's instructions. Some are highly
flammable and some may release toxic or harmful fumes

Do not leave containers open. Fumes given off can build up to toxic, harmful or explosive concentrations. Some
fumes are heavier than air and will accumulate in confined areas, pits etc.
Do not transfer chemical materials to unlabeled containers
Do not clean hands or clothing with chemicals. Chemicals, particularly solvents and fuels, will dry skin and may
cause irritation leading to dermatitis or be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities
Do not use emptied containers for other materials except when they have been cleaned under supervised
conditions
Do not sniff or smell chemical materials. Brief exposure to high concentrations of fumes can be toxic or harmful
Chlorofluorocarbons (CFC)
There is concern in the scientific community that CFCs and Halons are depleting the upper ozone layer which filters out
harmful ultraviolet radiation. Decreased filtration of ultraviolet radiation may result in increases in skin cancer, cataracts
and immune system suppression in humans, as well as decreased productivity of crops and aquatic systems.
CFCs are used primarily as refrigerants in vehicle air conditioning systems and as aerosol propellants. Halons are used
as fire extinguishants.
Jaguar supports worldwide elimination of CFC usage and it is recommended that Company subsidiaries and affiliates
should phase out CFC usage as soon as acceptable substitutes are commercially available.
Clutch Fluids
See Brake fluids.
Clutch Linings and Pads

See Asbestos.
Corrosion Protection Materials

See also Solvents, Fire.
Highly flammable, flammable observe No Smoking policy.
These materials are varied and the manufacturer's instructions should be followed. They may contain solvents, resins,
petroleum products etc. Skin and eye contact should be avoided. They should only be sprayed in conditions of adequate
ventilation and not in confined spaces.
Cutting
See Welding.
Dewaxing
See Solvents and Fuels (Kerosene).
Dusts
Powder, dusts or clouds may be irritant, harmful or toxic. Avoid breathing dusts from powdery chemical materials or
those arising from dry abrasion operations. Wear respiratory protection if ventilation is inadequate.
Fine dusts of combustible material can present an explosion hazard. Avoid explosive limits and/or sources of ignition.
Electric Shock
Electric shock can result from the use of faulty electrical equipment or from the misuse of equipment in good condition.
Ensure that electrical equipment is maintained in good condition and frequently tested. Faulty equipment should be
labelled and preferably removed from the work station.
Ensure that flexes, cables, plugs and sockets are not frayed, kinked, cut, cracked or otherwise damaged.
Ensure that electrical equipment and flexes do not come into contact with water.
Ensure that electrical equipment is protected by the correct rated fuse.
Never misuse electrical equipment and never use equipment which is in any way faulty. The results could be fatal.
Ensure that the cables of mobile electrical equipment cannot get trapped and damaged, such as in a vehicle hoist.
Ensure that the designated electrical workers are trained in basic First Aid.
In cases of electrocution:
Switch off the power supply before approaching the victim

If this is not possible push or drag the victim from the source of electricity using dry non-conductive material
Commence resuscitation if trained to do so
SUMMON MEDICAL ASSISTANCE
Engine Oils
See Lubricants and Grease.
Exhaust Fumes
These contain asphyxiating, harmful and toxic chemicals and particles such as carbon oxides, nitrogen oxides,
aldehydes, lead and aromatic hydrocarbons. Engines should be run only under conditions of adequate exhaust
extraction or general ventilation and not in confined spaces.
Gasolene (petrol) engine

There may not be adequate warning of odour or of irritation before toxic or harmful effects arise. These may be
immediate or delayed.
Fibre Insulation
See also Dusts.
Used in noise and sound insulation.
The fibrous nature of surfaces and cut edges can cause skin irritation. This is usually a physical and not a chemical
effect.
Precautions should be taken to avoid excessive skin contact through careful organization of work practices and the use
of gloves.
Fire
See also Welding, Foams, Legal Aspects.
Many of the materials found on or associated with the repair of vehicles are highly flammable. Some give off toxic or
harmful fumes if burnt.
Observe strict fire safety when storing and handling flammable materials or solvents, particularly near electrical
equipment or welding processes.
Ensure, before using electrical or welding equipment, that there is no fire hazard present.
Have a suitable fire extinguisher available when using welding or heating equipment.
www.JagDocs.com
First Aid
Apart from meeting any legal requirements it is desirable for someone in the workshop to be trained in First Aid
procedures.
Splashes in the eye should be flushed carefully with clean water for at least ten minutes.
Soiled skin should be washed with soap and water.
Individuals affected by inhalation of gases, fumes etc. should be removed to fresh air immediately. If effects persist,
consult a doctor.
If liquids are swallowed inadvertently, consult a doctor giving the information on the container or label. Do not induce
vomiting unless this action is indicated on the label.
Fluoroelastomer
See Viton.
Foams - Polyurethane
See also Fire.
Used in sound and noise insulation. Cured foams used in seat and trim cushioning.
Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Unreacted components are irritating and may be harmful to the skin and eyes. Wear gloves and goggles.
Individuals with chronic respiratory diseases, asthma, bronchial medical problems, or histories of allergic diseases
should not work in or near uncured materials.
The components, vapors or spray mists can cause direct irritation, sensitivity reactions and may be toxic or harmful.
Vapors and spray mists must not be inhaled. These materials must be applied with adequate ventilation and respiratory
protection. Do not remove the respirator immediately after spraying, wait until the vapor/mists have cleared.
Burning of the uncured components and the cured foams can generate toxic and harmful fumes. Smoking, naked
flames or the use of electrical equipment during foaming operations and until vapors/mists have cleared should not be
allowed. Any heat cutting of cured foams or partially cured foams should be conducted with extraction ventilation.
Freon
See Air Conditioning Refrigerant.
Fuels
See also, Fire, Legal Aspects, Chemicals and Solvents.
Avoid skin contact with fuel where possible. Should contact occur, wash the affected skin with soap and water.
Gasoline (Petrol)
Highly flammable - observe No Smoking policy.
Swallowing can result in mouth and throat irritation and absorption from the stomach can result in drowsiness and
unconsciousness. Small amounts can be fatal to children. Aspiration of liquid into the lungs e.g. through vomiting, is a
very serious hazard.
Gasoline dries the skin and can cause irritation and dermatitis on prolonged or repeated contact. Liquid in the eye
causes severe pain.
Motor gasoline may contain appreciable quantities of benzene, which is toxic upon inhalation, and the concentration of
gasoline vapors must be kept very low. High concentrations will cause eye, nose and throat irritation, nausea,
headache, depression and symptoms of drunkenness. Very high concentrations will result in rapid loss of consciousness.
Ensure there is adequate ventilation when handling and using gasoline. Great care must be taken to avoid the serious
consequences of inhalation in the event of vapor build up arising from spillages in confined spaces.
Special precautions apply to cleaning and maintenance operations on gasoline storage tanks.
Gasoline should not be used as a cleaning agent. It must not be siphoned by mouth. See First Aid.
Gas - oil (Diesel Fuel)

See warnings and cautions in relevant manual sections.
Combustible.
Gross or prolonged skin contact with high boiling point gas oils may also cause serious skin disorders including skin
cancer.
Kerosene (Paraffin)
Used also as heating fuel, solvent and cleaning agent.
Flammable - observe No Smoking policy.
Irritation of the mouth and throat may result from swallowing. The main hazard from swallowing arises if liquid
aspiration into the lungs occurs.
Liquid contact dries the skin and can cause irritation or dermatitis. Splashes in the eye may be slightly irritating.
In normal circumstances the low volatility does not give rise to harmful vapors. Exposure to mists and vapors from
kerosene at elevated temperature should be avoided (mists may arise in dewaxing). Avoid skin and eye contact and
make sure there is adequate ventilation.
Gas Cylinders
See also Fire.
Gases such as oxygen, acetylene, argon and propane are normally stored in cylinders at pressures of up to 13.790 kPa,
(2000 lb/in) and great care should be taken in handling these cylinders to avoid mechanical damage to them or to the
valve gear attached. The contents of each cylinder should be clearly identified by appropriate markings.
Cylinders should be stored in well ventilated enclosures, and protected from ice and snow, or direct sunlight. Fuel gases
(e.g. acetylene and propane) should not be stored in close proximity to oxygen cylinders.
Care should be exercised to prevent leaks from gas cylinders and lines, and to avoid sources of ignition.
Only trained personnel should undertake work involving gas cylinders.
Gases
See Gas Cylinders.
Gaskets (Fluoroelastomer)
See Viton.
General Workshop Tools and Equipment

It is essential that all tools and equipment are maintained in good condition and the correct safety equipment is used
where required.
Never use tools or equipment for any purpose other than that for which they were designed. Never over load
equipment such as hoists, jacks, axle and chassis stands or lifting slings. Damage caused by overloading is not always
immediately apparent and may result in a fatal failure the next time that the equipment is used.
Do not use damaged or defective tools or equipment, particularly high speed equipment such as grinding wheels. A
damaged grinding wheel can disintegrate without warning and cause serious injury.
Wear suitable eye protection when using grinding, chiselling or sand blasting equipment.
Wear a suitable breathing mask when using abrasive blasting equipment, working with asbestos-based materials or
using spraying equipment.
Ensure adequate ventilation to control dusts, mists and fumes.
High Pressure Air, Lubrication and Oil Test Equipment

See also Lubricants and Greases.
Always keep high pressure equipment in good condition, and regularly maintained, particularly at joints and unions.
Never direct a high pressure nozzle, e.g. diesel injector, at the skin as the fluid may penetrate to the under - lying
tissue etc., and cause serious injury.
Halon
See CFCs.
Legal Aspects
Many laws and regulations make requirements relating to health and safety in the use and disposal of materials and
equipment in workshops. Some of these laws which apply in the UK are listed. Similar laws exist for other territories:
The Factories Act (1961)

The Asbestos Regulations (1969)
Highly Flammable Liquids and Liquified Petroleum Gases Regulations (1972)
Control of Pollution Act (1974)
Health and Safety at Work Act (1974)
The Classification, Packaging and Labelling of Dangerous Substances Regulations (1978, 1981, 1983, 1984)
Control of Lead at Work Regulations (1980)
Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) Regulations (1989)
Abrasive Wheels Regulations (1970)
Reporting of injuries, diseases and dangerous occurrences regulations 1985 (RIDDOR)
Workshops should be familiar, in detail, with these and associated laws and regulations.
Consult the local factory inspectorate if in any doubt.
Lubricants and Greases

Avoid all prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oils. All lubricants and greases may be irritating to the eyes and
skin.
Used Engine Oil

Prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oil will result in the removal of natural oils from the skin, leading to
dryness, irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin cancer. Adequate means of skin protection and washing facilities must be provided.
Do not employ used engine oils as lubricants or for any application where appreciable skin contact is likely to occur.
There are publications describing the problems and advising on precautionary measures. For the UK a typical Health
and Safety Executive publication is: SHW 397: Cautionary Notice: Effects of mineral oil on the skin.
Health Protection Precautions
Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils
Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable
Do not put oily rags into pockets
Avoid contaminating clothing with oil
Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly
First Aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to enable easier removal of dirty oil and grease
from the skin
Wash with soap and water to make sure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help).
Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed
Do not use gasoline (petrol), kerosene (paraffin), diesel fuel (gas oil), thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay
Where practical, degrease components prior to handling
Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, goggles or face shields; in
addition an eye wash facility should be provided
Environmental Precautions
Burning used engine oil in small space heaters or boilers can be recommended only for units of approved design. In the
UK the heating system must meet the requirements of HM Inspectorate of Pollution for small burners of less than 0.4
MW. If in doubt check with the appropriate local authority and/or manufacturer of approved appliances.
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors or licensed waste disposal sites, or
to the waste oil reclamation trade, batteries should also be disposed off under similar arrangements. If in doubt, contact
the relevant local authority for advice on disposal facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil, antifreeze and automatic transmission fluid on to the ground, down sewers, drains, or into
water courses.
Noise
Some operations may produce high noise levels which could, in time, damage hearing. In these cases, suitable ear
protection must be worn.
Noise Insulation Materials

See Foams, Fibre Insulation.
0-Rings (Fluoroelastomer)
See Viton.
Paints
See also body and paint manual.
See also Solvents, Chemical Materials.
Highly flammable, flammable - observe No Smoking policy
Pressurized Equipment
See High Pressure Air, Lubrication and Oil Test Equipment.
Solder
Solders are a mixture of metals such that the melting point of the mixture is below that of the constituent metals
(normally lead and tin). Solder application does not normally give rise to toxic lead fumes, provided a gas/air flame is
used. Oxy-acetylene flames should not be used, as they are much hotter and will cause lead fumes to be produced.
Some fumes may be produced by the application of any flame to surfaces coated with grease etc. and inhalation of
these should be avoided.
Removal of excess solder should be undertaken with care, to make sure that fine lead dust is not produced, which can
give toxic effects if inhaled. Respiratory protection may be necessary.
Solder spillage and filings should be collected and removed promptly to prevent general air contamination by lead.
High standards of personal hygiene are necessary in order to avoid ingestion of lead or inhalation of solder dust from
clothing.
Solvents
See also Chemical Materials, Fuels (Kerosene), Fire.
e.g. acetone, white spirit, toluene, xylene, trichloroethane.
Used in cleaning and de-waxing materials, paints, plastics, resins, thinners etc.
Some may be highly flammable or flammable.
Skin contact will degrease the skin and may result in irritation and dermatitis following repeated or prolonged contact.
Some can be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities.
Splashes in the eye may cause severe irritation and could lead to loss of vision.
Brief exposure to high concentrations of vapors or mists will cause eye and throat irritation, drowsiness, dizziness,
headaches and, in the worst circumstances, unconsciousness.
Repeated or prolonged exposure to excessive but lower concentrations of vapors or mists, for which there might not be
adequate warning indications, can cause more serious toxic or harmful effects.
Aspiration into the lungs (e.g. through vomiting) is the most serious consequence of swallowing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear protective gloves, goggles and clothing if necessary.
Ensure good ventilation when in use, avoid breathing fumes, vapors and spray mists and keep containers tightly sealed.
Do not use in confined spaces.
When spraying materials containing solvents, e.g. paints, adhesive, coatings, use extraction ventilation or personal
respiratory protection in the absence of adequate general ventilation.
Do not apply heat or flame except under specific and detailed manufacturer's instructions.
Sound Insulation
See Fibre Insulation, Foams.
Suspended Loads
CAUTION: Never improvise lifting tackle.

There is always a danger when loads are lifted or suspended. Never work under an unsupported, suspended or raised
load e.g. suspended engine, etc.
Always make sure that lifting equipment such as jacks, hoists, axle stands, slings, etc., are adequate and suitable for
the job, in good condition and regularly maintained.
Transmission Brake Bands

See Asbestos.
Underseal
See Corrosion Protection.
Viton
In common with many other manufacturers' vehicles, some components installed to the Jaguar range have 'O' rings,
seals or gaskets which contain a material known as 'Viton'.
Viton is a fluoroelastomer, that is a synthetic rubber type which contains Fluorine. It is commonly used for 'O' rings,
gaskets and seals of all types. Although Viton is the most well known fluoroelastomer, there are others, including
Fluorel and Tecmoflon.
When used under design conditions fluoroelastomers are perfectly safe. If, however, they are exposed to temperatures
in excess of 400 C, the material will not burn, but will decompose, and one of the products formed is hydrofluoric acid.
This acid is extremely corrosive and may be absorbed directly, through contact, into the body.
'O' rings, seals or gaskets which have been exposed to very high temperatures will appear charred or as a black sticky
substance.
DO NOT, under any circumstances touch them or the attached components.
Enquiries should be made to determine whether Viton or any other fluoroelastomer has been used in the affected 'O'
ring, seal or gasket. If they are of natural rubber or nitrile there is no hazard. If in doubt, be cautious and assume that
the material may be Viton or any fluoroelastomer.
If Viton or any other fluoroelastomers have been used, the affected area should be decontaminated before the
commencement of work.
Disposable heavy duty plastic gloves should be worn at all times, and the affected area washed down using wire wool
and a limewater (calcium hydroxide) solution to neutralize the acid before disposing of the decomposed Viton residue
and final cleaning of the area. After use, the plastic gloves should be discarded carefully and safely.
Welding
See also Fire, Electric Shock, Gas Cylinders.
Welding processes include Resistance Welding (Spot Welding), Arc Welding and Gas Welding (and cutting).
Resistance Welding (Spot Welding)
This process may cause particles of molten metal to be emitted at a high velocity, and the eyes and skin must be
protected.
Arc Welding
This process emits a high level of ultraviolet radiation which may cause arc-eye and skin burns to the operator and to
other persons nearby. Gas-shielded welding processes are particularly hazardous in this respect. Personal protection
must be worn, and screens used to shield other people.
CONTACT LENS WEARERS ARE ADVISED TO REVERT TO ORDINARY SPECTACLES WHEN ARC WELDING as the arc
spectrum is believed to emit microwaves which dry out the fluid between the lens and the eye. This may result in
blindness when the lens is removed from the eye.
Metal spatter will also occur, and appropriate eye and skin protection is necessary.
The heat of the welding arc will produce fumes and gases from the metals being welded, the rods and from any applied
coatings or contamination on the surfaces being worked on. These gases and fumes may be toxic and inhalation of
these should be avoided. The use of extraction ventilation to remove the fumes from the working area may be
necessary particularly in cases where the general ventilation is poor, or where considerable welding work is anticipated.
In extreme cases or confined spaces where adequate ventilation cannot be provided, air-fed respirators may be
necessary.
Gas Welding (and Cutting)
Oxy-acetylene torches may be used for welding and cutting, and special care must be taken to prevent leakage of these
gases, with consequent risk of fire and explosion.
The process will produce metal spatter and eye and skin protection is necessary.
The flame is bright, and eye protection should be used, but the ultraviolet emission is much less than that from arc
welding, and lighter filters may be used.
The process itself produces few toxic fumes, but such fumes and gases may be produced from coatings on the work,
particularly during cutting away of damaged body parts, and inhalation of the fumes should be avoided.
In brazing, toxic fumes may be produced from the metals in the brazing rod, and a severe hazard may arise if brazing
rods containing cadmium are used. In this event particular care must be taken to avoid inhalation of fumes and expert
advice may be required.
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN BEFORE ANY WELDING OR CUTTING TAKES PLACE ON VESSELS WHICH HAVE
CONTAINED COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS, E.G. BOILING OR STEAMING OUT OF FUEL TANKS.
Warning Symbols on Vehicles

Decals showing warning symbols will be found on various vehicle components.
These decals must not be removed. The warnings are for the attention of owners/operators and persons carrying out
service or repair operations on the vehicle.
The most commonly found decals are reproduced below together with an explanation of the warnings.
1.
Components or assemblies displaying the warning triangle and open book symbol advise consultation of the
relevant section of the owners handbook before touching or attempting adjustments of any kind.
2.
Components or assemblies displaying the warning triangle with the electrified arrow and open book symbol give
warning of inherent high voltages. Never touch these with the engine running or the ignition switched on. See
Electric Shock in this subsection.
3.
Jaguar vehicles and replacement parts which contain asbestos are identified by this symbol. See Asbestos in this
subsection.
4.
Components or assemblies displaying this symbol give warning that the component contains a corrosive
substance. See Acids and Alkalis in this subsection.
5.
Vehicles displaying the caution circle with a deleted lighted match symbol, caution against the use of naked
lights or flames within the immediate vicinity due to the presence of highly flammable or explosive liquids or
vapors. See Fire in this subsection.
6.
All vehicles with the passenger air bag installed from the factory have a warning sticker attached to the
instrument panel, prohibiting the use of rear facing child seats in the front seating position. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury.
White Spirit
See Solvents.
Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Working on the fuel system results in fuel and fuel vapor being present in the atmosphere. Fuel vapor is extremely
flammable, hence great care must be taken whilst working on the fuel system. Adhere strictly to the following
precautions:
Do not smoke in the work area

Display 'no smoking' signs around the area
Disconnect the battery before working on the fuel system
Do not connect/disconnect electrical circuits, use electrical equipment or other tools or engage in working
practices which in any way may result in the production of sparks
Ensure that a CO fire extinguisher is close at hand
Ensure that dry sand is available to soak up any fuel spillage
Empty fuel using suitable fire proof equipment into an authorized explosion proof container
Do not empty fuel while working in a workshop or a pit
Ensure that working area is well ventilated
Ensure that any work on the fuel system is only carried out by experienced and well qualified maintenance
personnel
Ensure that fume extraction equipment is used where appropriate
Fume extraction equipment must be in operation when solvents are used e.g. Trichloroethane, white spirit, sbp3,
methylene chloride, perchlorethylene. Do not smoke in the vicinity of volatile degreasing agents.
Whenever possible, use a ramp or pit whilst working beneath a vehicle, in preference to jacking. Position chocks at the
wheels as well as applying the parking brake. Never rely on a jack alone to support a vehicle. Use axle stands, or blocks
carefully placed at the jacking points, to provide a rigid location. Check that any lifting equipment used has adequate
capacity and is fully serviceable. Ensure that a suitable form of fire extinguisher is conveniently located. When using
electrical tools and equipment, inspect the power lead for damage and check that it is properly earthed. Disconnect the
earth (grounded) terminal of the vehicle battery. Do not disconnect any pipes of the air conditioning refrigeration
system unless you are trained and instructed to do so. A refrigerant is used which can cause blindness if allowed to
come into contact with the eyes. Ensure that adequate ventilation is provided when volatile degreasing agents are being
used.
Adhere strictly to handling and safety instructions given on containers and labels. Keep oils and solvents away from
naked flames and other sources of ignition. Do not apply heat in an attempt to free seized nuts or fittings; as well as
causing damage to protective coatings, there is a risk of damage from stray heat to electronic equipment and brake
lines. Do not leave tools, equipment, spilt oil etc. around the work area. Wear protective overalls and use barrier cream
when necessary.
Environmental Protection
In some countries it is illegal to pour used oil onto the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water courses. The
burning of used engine oil in small space heaters or boilers is not recommended unless emission control equipment is
installed. Dispose of used oil through authorized waste disposal contractors, to licensed waste disposal sites or to the
waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the Local Authority for advice on disposal facilities.
General Information - How To Use This Manual

Workshop Manual Organization

This manual covers descriptive, diagnostic (including OBD), and repair aspects to service the vehicle effectively.
The manual is arranged in sections, each section dealing with a specific part of a vehicle system. For example, Section
412-03 [Air Conditioning] covers air conditioning, which is part of the climate control system.
The first digit of the section number indicates the group (in the above example this being Electrical). There are five
groups:
General Information.
Chassis.
Powertrain.
Electrical.
Body and Paint.
The second and third digits of the section number indicate the vehicle system (12 in the above example being Climate
Control).
The last two digits of the section number indicate the part of the system covered by the section (03 in the example
denotes Air Conditioning).
General Information - Important Safety Instructions

Safety Notice
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor
vehicles, as well as the safety of the person doing the work. This manual provides general directions for accomplishing
service and repair work with tested effective techniques. Following them will help assure reliability.
There are numerous variations in procedures, techniques, tools, and parts for servicing vehicles, as well as in the skill of
the person doing the work. This manual cannot possibly anticipate all such variations and provide advice or cautions as
to each. Accordingly, anyone who departs from the instructions provided in the manual must first establish that neither
personal safety or vehicle integrity is compromised from choices of methods, tools or parts.
General Information - Road/Roller Testing

Road or roller testing may be carried out for various reasons and a procedure detailing pre-test checks, through engine
starting and stopping, pre-driving checks, on-test checks to final checks on completion of the test is given in this
section.
Unless complete vehicle performance is being checked, the full road test procedure need not be carried out. Instead,
those items particularly relevant to the system/s being checked can be extracted.
Pre - Test Checks
WARNING: If the brake system hydraulic fluid level is low, pedal travel is excessive or a hydraulic leak is found, do
not attempt to road test the vehicle until the reason for the low fluid level, excessive pedal travel or hydraulic leak is
found and rectified.
It is suggested that pre-test checks, and functional tests of those systems/circuits which affect the safe and legal
operations of the vehicle, such as brakes, lights and steering, should always be carried out before the road or roller
test.
Engine oil level

Engine coolant level
Tires, for correct pressure, compatible types and tread patterns, and wear within limits
There is sufficient fuel in the tank to complete the test
All around the engine, transmission and under the vehicle for oil, coolant, hydraulic and fuel leaks. Make a note
of any apparent leaks and wipe off the surrounding areas to make it easier to identify the extent of the leak on
completion of the test
Starting the Engine
CAUTION: On initial drive away from cold and within the first 1.5 km (1 mile), do not depress accelerator pedal
beyond half travel until the vehicle has attained a minimum speed of 25 km/h (15 miles/h). Never operate at high
engine speed or with the accelerator pedal at full travel whilst the engine is cold.
With the ignition switched off, check:
The parking brake is applied
The transmission selector lever is in Park
All instrument gauges (except fuel gauge) read zero
With the ignition switched on, check:
Ignition controlled warning lamps come on

Engine coolant temperature gauge registers a reading compatible with the engine coolant temperature
Fuel gauge registers a reading appropriate to the fuel level in the tank
The operation of the parking brake and brake fluid level warning lamps
On Road or Roller Test Check:
CAUTION: If road testing, check the brake operation while still travelling at low speed before continuing with the
test. If the brakes pull to one side, or appear to be otherwise faulty, do not continue with the road test until the fault
has been found and rectified.
Initial gear engagement is smooth
Parking brake control operates smoothly and the parking brake releases quickly and completely
Transmission takes up the drive smoothly, without judder
The engine power output is satisfactory, full power is achieved, acceleration is smooth and pedal operation not
stiff or heavy, and engine speed returns to idle correctly
There is no excessive or abnormally colored smoke from the engine under normal driving, heavy load or overrun
conditions
Steering operation, including power steering, is smooth, accurate, not excessively heavy or with excessive free
play or vibration. Does not pull to one side and self centres smoothly after cornering
Speedometer, oil pressure warning lamp, coolant temperature gauge and tachometer register the correct
readings or operate correctly

Switches and controls operate smoothly and positively, warning lamps operate correctly and the direction
indicator control self cancels when the steering is returned to the straight ahead position
Heating and ventilation systems work correctly and effectively
Brake operation and efficiency
Brake Testing
WARNING: When brake testing, avoid breathing the smoke or fumes from hot brakes, this may contain asbestos
dust which is hazardous to health, see Health and Safety Precautions.
Avoid brake testing on busy roads where it can cause inconvenience or danger to other road users.
CAUTION: Brake testing which includes heavy brake applications should not be carried out with new brake
pads/discs or linings/drums until the components have bedded-in. New brake friction components will not reach full
efficiency until the bedding-in process is complete.
Test the brakes at several speeds within the normal operating range using both light and heavy pedal pressure. Note
any tendency to snatch, pull or drag, and any undue delay in application or release.
Allow the vehicle to coast and note any tendency to pull to one side, or evidence that the brakes are binding.
After stopping the vehicle (not immediately after a period of heavy braking), carefully check the brake temperature. A
disc which feels hot, or appreciably hotter than the others, indicates that the brake is binding.
After completion of the test, check for:
Oil, coolant, hydraulic, air and fuel leaks
Abnormal temperature of any moving components or assemblies, e.g. wheel hubs, transmission, axle etc., which
might indicate over tightness or lack of lubrication
General Information - Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives

WARNING: Always handle all solvents, sealers and adhesives with extreme care. Some contain chemicals or give
off fumes which can be dangerous to health. Always follow the manufacturers instructions. If in doubt about any
substance, particularly a solvent, DO NOT use it.
CAUTION: If in doubt about the suitability of any proprietary solvent or sealer for a particular application, contact
the manufacturer of the product for information regarding storage, handling and application.
The Solvents, Sealers and Adhesives subsection refers to some commonly used chemicals and materials, hazards
associated with their use, and safety measures to be taken.
Adhesives and Sealers

Highly flammable, flammable, combustible observe No Smoking policy.
Generally should be stored in No Smoking' areas. Cleanliness and tidiness in use should be observed e.g. disposable
paper covering benches; should be dispensed from applicators where possible; containers, including secondary
containers, should be labelled appropriately.
Solvent - based Adhesives/Sealers - See Solvents

Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Water - based Adhesives/Sealers

Those based on polymer emulsions and rubber latexes may contain small amounts of volatile toxic and harmful
chemicals. Skin and eye contact should be avoided and adequate ventilation provided during use.
Hot Melt Adhesives

In the solid state, they are safe. In the molten state they may cause burns and health hazards may arise from the
inhalation of toxic fumes.
Use appropriate protective clothing and a thermostatically controlled heater with a thermal cut - out and adequate
extraction.
Resin - based Adhesives/Sealers e.g. Epoxide and Formaldehyde Resin - based

Mixing should be carried out in well ventilated areas, as harmful or toxic volatile chemicals may be released.
Skin contact with uncured resins and hardeners can result in irritation, dermatitis, and absorption of toxic or harmful
chemicals through the skin. Splashes can damage the eyes.
Provide adequate ventilation and avoid skin and eye contact.
Anaerobic, Cyanoacrylate (Super - glues) and other Acrylic Adhesives

Many are irritant, sensitizing or harmful to the skin and/or respiratory tract. Some are eye irritants.
Skin and eye contact should be avoided and the manufacturer's instructions followed.
Cyanoacrylate adhesives (super-glues) MUST NOT contact the skin or eyes. If skin or eye tissue is bonded, cover with a
clean moist pad and seek immediate medical attention. Do not attempt to pull tissue apart. Use in well ventilated areas
as vapors can cause irritation to the nose and eyes.
For two - pack systems see Resin - based and Isocyanate Adhesives/Sealers.
Isocyanate (Polyurethane) Adhesives/Sealers

See also Resin - based Adhesives
Individuals suffering from asthma or respiratory allergies should not work with or near these materials as sensitivity
reactions can occur.
Over exposure is irritating to the eyes and respiratory system. Excessive concentrations may produce effects on the
nervous system including drowsiness. In extreme cases, loss of consciousness may result. Long term exposure to vapor
concentrations may result in adverse health effects.
Prolonged contact with the skin may lead to skin irritation and, in some cases, dermatitis.
Splashes entering the eye will cause discomfort and possible damage.
Any spraying should preferably be carried out in exhaust ventilated booths removing vapors and spray droplets from
the breathing zone.
Wear appropriate gloves, eye and respiratory protection.
Published: 24-Jan-2012
General Information - Standard Workshop Practices

Protecting the Vehicle

Always install covers to protect the fenders before commencing work in the engine compartment. Always install the
interior protection kit, wear clean overalls and wash hands or wear gloves before working inside the vehicle. Avoid
spilling hydraulic fluid, antifreeze or battery acid on the paintwork. In the event of spillage, wash off with water
immediately. Use polythene sheets in the luggage compartment to protect carpets. Always use the recommended
service tool, or a satisfactory equivalent, where specified. Protect temporarily exposed screw threads by replacing nuts
or installing caps.
Vehicle in Workshop
When working on a vehicle in the workshop always make sure that:
The parking brake is applied or the wheels are securely chocked to prevent the vehicle moving forwards or
backwards
If the engine is to be run, there is adequate ventilation, or an extraction hose to remove exhaust fumes is
installed
There is adequate room to jack up the vehicle and remove the wheels, if necessary
Fender covers are always installed if any work is to be carried out in the engine compartment
The battery is disconnected if working on the engine, underneath the vehicle, or if the vehicle is jacked up
CAUTION: When electric arc welding on a vehicle, always disconnect the generator wiring to prevent the
possibility of a surge of current causing damage to the internal components of the generator.
If using welding equipment on the vehicle, ensure a suitable fire extinguisher is readily available.
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Precautions
WARNING: Do not install rear facing child seats in the front passenger seat.
The SRS contains components which are potentially hazardous to service personnel if not handled correctly. The
following guidelines and precautions are intended to alert personnel to potential sources of danger and emphasise the
importance of ensuring the integrity of the SRS components installed to the vehicle.
WARNING: The following precautions MUST be adhered to when working on the SRS system:
The correct procedures must always be used when working on SRS components.
Persons working on the SRS system must be fully trained and have been issued with the safety
guidelines.
The airbag modules contain extremely flammable and hazardous compounds. Contact with water,
acids or heavy metals may produce harmful or explosive results. Do not dismantle, incinerate or
bring into contact with electricity before the unit has been deployed.
Always replace a seat belt assembly that has withstood the strain of a severe vehicle impact or if the
webbing shows signs of fraying.
Always disconnect the vehicle battery before carrying out any electric welding on a vehicle installed
with an SRS system.
CAUTION: Do not expose airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners to temperatures exceeding 85 C (185 F).
It should be noted that these precautions are not restricted to operations performed when servicing the SRS system.
The same care should be exercised when working on ancillary systems and components located in the vicinity of SRS
components; these include but are not limited to:
Steering wheel airbag, rotary coupler.

Passenger front airbag.
Head airbag modules - front and rear.
Seat belt pre-tensioners.
SRS harnesses, link leads and connectors.
Side (thorax) air bags.
Making the system safe

Before working on or in the vicinity of SRS components, make sure the system is rendered safe by performing the
following operations:
Remove the ignition key.
Disconnect battery, earth lead first.
Wait 2 minutes for the SRS power circuit to discharge before commencing work.
NOTE: The SRS uses energy reserve capacitors to keep the system active in the event of electrical supply failure under
crash conditions. It is necessary to allow the capacitors sufficient time to discharge (2 minutes) in order to avoid the
risk of accidental deployment.
Installation
In order to make sure system integrity, it is essential that the SRS system is regularly checked and maintained so that
it is ready for effective operation in the event of a collision. Carefully inspect SRS components before installation. Do
not install a part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation.
WARNING: The integrity of the SRS systems is critical for safety reasons. Make sure the following precautions are
always adhered to:
Do not install accessories or other objects to trim panels which cover ITS airbags.
Never install used SRS components from another vehicle or attempt to repair an SRS component.
When repairing an SRS system, only use genuine new parts.
Never apply electrical power to an SRS component unless instructed to do so as part of an approved
test procedure.
Special fixings are necessary for installing an airbag module do not use other fixings and make
sure that all fixings are tightened to the correct torque.
Always use new fixings when replacing an SRS component.
CAUTIONS:
Take care not to trap airbag modules when installing interior trim components.
Make sure SRS components are not contaminated by oil or grease.

NOTE: Following seat belt pre-tensioner deployment, the seat belts can still be used as conventional seat belts but will
need to be replaced as soon as possible to make sure full SRS protection.
NOTE: If the SRS components are to be replaced, the part number/bar code of the new unit must be recorded.
SRS component testing precautions
The SRS components are triggered using relatively low operating currents, always adhere to the following :
WARNING: Never use a multimeter or other general purpose equipment on SRS components. Use only T4 to
diagnose system faults.
WARNING: Do not use electrical test equipment on the SRS harness while it is connected to any of the SRS
components, it may cause accidental deployment and injury.
Handling and storage
Always observe the following precautions when handling SRS components:
Never drop an SRS component. The airbag diagnostic control unit is a particularly shock sensitive device and
must be handled with extreme care. Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners could deploy if subjected to a
strong shock.
Never wrap your arms around an airbag module. If a module has to be carried, hold it by the cover with the
cover uppermost and the base away from your body.
Never transport airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in the passenger compartment of a vehicle. Always
use the luggage compartment of the vehicle for carrying airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioner units.
Never attach anything to an airbag cover or any trim component covering an airbag module. Do not allow
anything to rest on top of an airbag module.
Always keep components cool, dry and free from contamination.
Never apply grease or cleaning solvents to seat belt pre-tensioner units, component failure could result.
Always store an airbag module with the deployment side uppermost. If it is stored deployment side down,
accidental deployment will propel the airbag module with sufficient force to cause serious injury.
Keep new airbag modules in their original packaging until just prior to installing. Place the old module in the
empty packaging for carriage.
WARNINGS:
When handling an inflatable tubular structure (ITS) airbag module, hold by the gas generator housing, DO NOT
hold by the airbag. Do not wrap the thumb around the gas generator while holding. Do not drape airbag over shoulder
or around neck. For seat buckle type pre-tensioners, hold by the piston tube, with the open end of the piston tube
pointing towards the ground and the buckle facing away from your body. Do not cover the end of the piston tube. DO
NOT hold buckle type pre-tensioners by the bracket assembly or cable. Never point the piston tube towards your body
or other people.
Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners are classed as explosive devices. For overnight and longer term
storage, they must be stored in a secure steel cabinet which has been approved as suitable for the purpose and has
been registered with the local authority.
Store airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in a designated storage area. If there is no designated storage
area available, store in the locked luggage compartment of the vehicle and inform the workshop supervisor.
CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag module making it inoperative. If you
suspect the airbag module has been damaged, install a new module and refer to the deployment/disposal procedures
for disposal of the damaged module.
SRS harness and connectors
Always observe the following precautions with regards to SRS system electrical wiring:
Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring.

Never install electrical equipment such as a mobile telephone, two-way radio or in-car entertainment system in
such a way that it could generate electrical interference in the airbag harness. Seek specialist advice when
installing such equipment.
NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by a special yellow outer sleeve protecting the wires (black with yellow stripe
protective coverings are sometimes used).
WARNING: Always make sure SRS wiring is routed correctly. Be careful to avoid trapping or pinching the SRS
wiring.
WARNING: Do not leave the connectors hanging loose or allow SRS components to hang from their harnesses.
Look for possible chafing points.
Side impact crash sensor inspection
After any degree of side body damage, inspect the side impact crash sensors. Replace a crash sensor if there is any sign
of damage.
CAUTION: Take extra care when painting or carrying out bodywork repairs in the vicinity of the crash sensors.
Avoid direct exposure of the crash sensors or link harnesses to heat guns, welding or spraying equipment. Take care
not to damage sensor or harness when reinstalling components.
Rotary coupler
CAUTION: Always follow the procedure for installing and checking the rotary coupler as instructed in the SRS
repairs section. Comply with all safety and installation procedures to make sure the system functions correctly. Observe
the following precautions:
Do not unlock and rotate the rotary coupler when it is removed from the vehicle.
Do not turn the road wheels when the rotary coupler is removed from the vehicle.
Always make sure the rotary coupler is removed and installed in its central position and with the front road
wheels in the straight ahead position - refer to SRS repair section for the correct removal and installation
procedure.
If a new rotary coupler is being installed, make sure the locking tab holding the coupler's rotational position is
not broken; units with a broken locking tab must not be used.
Airbag location labels

WAITING AIRBAG LOCATION AND DESIGN LABELS - DUE MARCH - NEIL HARRISON 46404
Airbag and pre-tensioner deployment
WARNING: During deployment parts of the airbag module become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after
deployment before touching the airbag module.
Deployment procedures and precautions as detailed in this manual should be strictly adhered to. Only personnel who
have undergone the appropriate training should undertake deployment of airbag and pre-tensioner modules. The
following precautions must be complied with:
Only use deployment equipment approved for the intended purpose.
Deployment of airbag / pre-tensioner modules must be performed in a well ventilated area which has been
designated for the purpose.

Make sure airbag / pre-tensioner modules are not damaged or ruptured before attempting to deploy.
Where local legislation exists, notify the relevant authorities of intention to deploy airbag and pretensioner units.
When deploying airbag pre-tensioner units, make sure that all personnel are at least 15 metres (45 feet) away
from the deployment zone.

Make sure deployment tool is connected correctly, in compliance with the instructions detailed in the SRS section
of this manual. In particular, make sure deployment tool is NOT connected to battery supply before connecting
to airbag module connector.
When deploying seat belt pre-tensioners, make sure pre-tensioner unit is secured correctly to the seat.
When removing deployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units, wear protective clothing. Use gloves and seal
deployed units in a plastic bag.
Following deployment of any component of the SRS system within the vehicle, all SRS components must be
replaced. DO NOT reuse or salvage any parts of the SRS system.
Do not lean over an airbag module when connecting deployment equipment.
If a vehicle is to be scrapped, undeployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units must be manually deployed. In this
case airbags can be deployed in the vehicle. Before deployment, make sure the airbag module is secure within its
correct mounting position. Deployment of the driver's airbag in the vehicle may damage the steering wheel; if the
vehicle is not being scrapped, deploy the module outside of the vehicle.
SRS Component Replacement Policy

CAUTIONS:
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) will log a crash fault after every impact which is severe enough to cause
airbag deployment. It is possible to have three crashes/impacts logged after one event where, for example, a
front, side and rollover has occurred. After the third fault is logged, the SRS warning lamp will be
illuminated and the RCM must be installed. After any airbag deployment a new RCM must be installed.
The SRS side impact sensor must be replaced if there are any signs of physical damage or if the restraints control
module (RCM) is registering a fault.
The following information details the policy for replacement of SRS components as a result of a vehicle accident.
Impacts which do not deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
Check for structural damage in the area of the impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures, longitudinals
and bracketry.
Impacts which deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
The replacement and inspection policy is dependent on the type and severity of the crash condition. The following
guidelines are the minimum that should be exercised as a result of the deployment of specific SRS components.
Check for structural damage in the area of impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures,
longitudinals and bracketry.
Front Airbag Deployment - Driver and Passenger

CAUTION: If the front airbags are deployed, the following components must be replaced:
Driver airbag module

Passenger airbag module
Fly leads (where applicable) connecting front airbag modules to SRS harness
Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioner
Rear seat belt pre-tensioners - if installed
Driver's seat belt retractor - if installed
Rotary coupler
Any front impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Restraints control module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
Additionally, the following items must be inspected for damage and replaced as necessary:
Front passenger's seat belt retractor and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage point
Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, body anchorage points and tongue latching function
Fascia moulding adjacent to passenger airbag module
Steering wheel
Front seat frames and head restraints
Steering column - if adjustment is lost or if there are signs of collapse
Seat belt height adjusters
Rear seat belts
Side Air Bags
CAUTION: If the side (thorax) air bags are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side of
the vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
Side (thorax) airbag
Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Restraints Control Module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
Front seat belts, retractors and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage points
Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, tongue latching function, and body anchorage points
Front seat frame and head restraints
Door trim casing
Rear seat belts
Head airbag modules
CAUTION: If the head airbag modules are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side of the
vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
Head airbag modules

Link lead between airbag gas generator and restraints control module (RCM) harness
Airbag retaining clips
Internal trim finisher
Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioners
Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Headlining
Component mounting brackets
Adjacent trim components
Rear impacts
CAUTION: If the seat belt pre-tensioners are deployed during a rear impact, the following components must be
replaced:
Seat belt pre-tensioners
Front and rear seat belt retractors used during the impact
General Information - Symbols Glossary

Symbols are used inside the graphics and in the text area to enhance the information display.
Movement Symbols
Movement symbols provide detailed information to a required component movement. These component movements can be
rotational or 1-3 dimensional movements.
Item
Part Number
Minor component movement clockwise/counterclockwise
Major component movement clockwise/counterclockwise
Component movement to the left/right/up/down
Component movement towards/away
3 dimensional component movement
2 dimensional component movement
3 dimensional component cycling
Turn Symbols
Description
3 dimensional component rotation
Turn symbols are used to provide further information on the direction or angle of component turns.
Item
Part Number
Description
Turn the component clockwise through 45
Turn the component counterclockwise through 45
Turn the component clockwise through 2 complete turns
Turn the component counterclockwise through 2 complete turns
Steering Wheel Symbols

Steering wheel symbols are used to provide further information to a required steering wheel position or steering column lock
status.
Item
Part Number
Description
Steering wheel in straight ahead position
Steering column lock locked
Steering column lock unlocked
Turn the steering wheel to the 90 left position
Turn the steering wheel to the 90 right position
Turn the steering wheel to the left-hand end position
Turn the steering wheel to the right-hand end position
Item
Part Number
Description
3, 4, 5-door body style
Wagon body style
Sports utility vehicle body style
Coupe body style
Convertible body style
Van body style
3, 4, 5-door body style - Top View
Wagon body style - Top View
Underview
10
Right-hand drive (RHD) vehicle
11
Left-hand drive (LHD) vehicle
Gearshift lever and selector lever position symbols

Gearshift lever and selector lever position symbols are used to show the lever position that is required to be selected to carry
out a procedure step.
Item
Part Number
Set the selector lever to the park (P) position
Set the selector lever to the reverse ) position
Set the selector lever to the neutral (N) position
Set the selector lever to the drive (D) position
Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the park (D) position
Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the manual (M) position
Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the shift down (-) position
Description
Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the shift up (+) position
8
9
10
Set the gearshift lever to the neutral (N) position
Further gearshift lever positions that may appear in illustrations
Screwdriver symbols
The screwdriver symbols are used to show which screwdriver bit is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
www.JagDocs.com
Item
Part Number
2
3
Description
Screwdriver
Cross bladed screwdriver
Flat bladed screwdriver
Hexagonal screwdriver
TORX screwdriver
Pliers symbols
The pliers symbols are used to show which pliers is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
Item
Part Number
-
1
2
Description
Combination pliers
Side cutter pliers
Securing ring pliers - inner
Securing ring pliers - outer
Hose clamp pliers
Locking pliers
Long nose pliers
Drill symbols
The drill symbols are used to show which type and size of drill bit is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
Item
Part Number
Drill bit with a specified diameter
Hole saw with a specified diameter
Stepped drill bit with a specified diameter
Tap with a specified diameter
Die with a specified diameter
Scraper for circular holes
Description
Scraper for straight edges
Cutting tool symbols

The cutting tool symbols are used to show which type of cutting tool is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
Item
Part Number
Description
Cutting knife
Air body saw
Scissors
Grinder
Jig saw
Plasma cutter
Sanding Paper
Drill through the shown number of body panel layers with a specified diameter
8
-
Drill through the shown number of body panel layers with a suitable diameter
10
Drill through 1 body panel layer with a specified diameter
11
Drill through 1 body panel layer with a suitable diameter
12
Wire brush
Apply Chemical or load symbols

The apply chemical or load symbols are used to show where to apply which type of chemical or load to carry out a procedure
step.
Item
Part Number
Apply a bead from the specified tube
Apply a bead from the specified cartridge
Apply the specified chemical with a brush
Apply the specified load to the specified component
Apply a bead with a specific diameter from the specified tube
Apply a bead with a specific diameter from the specified cartridge
Apply the specified chemical with a roller
Apply hot glue to the specified component
Apply the specified amount of fluid from the fluid can
10
Apply fluid from the fluid can
11
Clean the specified component with the specified material
12
Apply a broken bead from the specified tube
13
Apply the specified chemical from a spray can
14
Apply the specified lubricant to the specified component
15
Apply spot welds to the specified component
16
Apply a continuous weld to the specified component
17
Handle the fluid using a syringe
18
Extract the specified amount of fluid using a syringe
Description
Measurement symbols
The measurement symbols are used to show where to measure which type of measurement to carry out a procedure step.
Item
Part Number
Measure the current using a digital multimeter
Measure the voltage using a digital multimeter
Measure the resistance using a digital multimeter
Measure the length/distance
Check that the specified pressure is available using a suitable pressure gauge
Measure the pressure at the specified port using a suitable pressure gauge
Measure the time using a suitable stopwatch
Description
Wait for the specified period of time
8
-
The specified task requires the specified minimum temperature
10
The specified task requires the specified maximum temperature not to be exceeded
11
The specified task requires the specified temperature range
12
The specified task requires the specified temperature
13
Measure and check for the specified value using a dial indicator gauge
14
Measure and check for the specified MAX value using a dial indicator gauge
15
Measure and check for the specified MIN value using a dial indicator gauge
General equipment symbols

The general equipment symbols are used to show where to use which type of general equipment to carry out a procedure
step.
Item
Part Number
Hot air gun
Soldering iron
Scraper
Scriber
Securing strap
File with a specified size
Center punch
Description
Marker
8
-
Metal inert gas (MIG) welding equipment
10
Hose clamp
11
Interior trim remover
12
Vacuum cleaner
13
Strap wrench
14
Wedge
15
Pin Punch
Material symbols
The material symbols are used to show where to use which type of material to carry out a procedure step.
Item
Part Number
Remove/Install the specified blind rivet
Apply tape to the specified component/area
Remove/Install the specified cable tie
Description
Miscellaneous symbols
These symbols provide further information that is required to carry out a procedure step.
Item
Part Number
Set the ignition switch to the 0 position
Set the ignition switch to the II position
The procedure step requires the aid of the specified number of supporting technicians
Self contained breathing apparatus
General prohibition used in combination with another symbol
Do not use power tools
Visual check
Description
Noise check
8
-
Dispose the specified component
10
Replaced by item 9 (Dispose the specified component)
11
Set the engine speed to the specified value
12
Fully apply the parking brake lever
13
Fully release the parking brake lever
14
Do not dispose of batteries into the waste bin
15
Visual check using a mirror
16
Area/component must be dry
Mandatory Protective equipment - Health and safety symbols
The protective equipment symbols advise to use a mandatory protective equipment to avoid or at least reduce possible
health and safety risks.
Item
Part Number
Wear protective gloves
Wear face guard
Wear safety goggles
Description
4
5
6
Wear ear protectors
Wear safety goggles and ear protectors
Wear a respirator
Prohibition - Health and safety symbols and component damage

The prohibition symbols are used to prohibit the specified actions to avoid or at least reduce possible component damage and
Item
Part Number
Description
General prohibition symbol
No naked flames
No smoking
No water
Do not touch
Do not switch
No grinding
Warning symbols - Health and safety and component damage

The warning symbols are used to advise on hazardous conditions to avoid or at least reduce possible component damage and
Item
Part Number
Description
Hazardous voltage/Electrical shock/Electrocution
Fire Hazard/Highly flammable
Burn hazard/Hot surface
Automatic start-up
Toxic
Explosive material
Battery hazard
Corrosive material
Lifting hazard
10
Hand crush/Force from above
11
Cutting of fingers or hand
12
Pressure hazard
Control Diagram symbols - Description and Operation procedures

These symbols provide further information on the type of connectivity, direction of flow or type of data bus of a system.
Item
Part Number
Description
Mid-speed Controller Area Network (CAN)
High-speed Controller Area Network (CAN)
Local Interconnect Network (LIN)
Wires crossing not connected
General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C) System Health and Safety

Precautions
WARNINGS:
Only qualified technicians are allowed to work on air conditioning (A/C) systems.
Air conditioning (A/C) system components can become particularly hot or cold.
Make sure that the air conditioning (A/C) system is at ambient temperature before carrying out any repair.
When handling refrigerants, always wear protective goggles and gloves made of fluoroelastomer. Leather or fabric
gloves are not suitable.
SKIN CONTACT: If liquid refrigerant comes into contact with the skin, it produces severe frostbite. Immediately
flush affected areas with plenty of cold running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention.
EYE CONTACT: If refrigerant comes into contact with the eyes, immediately flush the eyes with plenty of running
water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention.
INHALED: Toxic gases generated when refrigerant is heated are hazardous to health. The gases have an irritating
smell and can cause lung damage. The symptoms can continue for a long time after having been in contact with the
gases. The gases can cause lung damage even if the amount of gas in the air is too small to smell.
Refrigerant is flammable and explosive.
Make sure that refrigerant bottles are not exposed to temperatures greater than 45C.
Make sure that the local regulations regarding work on air conditioning (A/C) systems are adhered to.
Make sure that refrigerant bottles are closed properly.
Gaseous refrigerant has a higher density than air. There is a danger of suffocation when working close to the
ground or in workshop pits.
Provide adequate ventilation when handling refrigerant.
Never release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
Only use special tools, equipment and lubricants that are approved for the type of refrigerant being used.
Always follow the manufacturers instructions for the correct servicing unit operating procedure.
CAUTIONS:
Do not mix refrigerant oils for different types of refrigerant.
Never mix different types of refrigerant or equipment intended for them.
Only use refrigerant in gas form when filling the system through the low-pressure connection.
Only use refrigerant in liquid form when filling the system through the high-pressure connection.
Refrigerant attacks certain plastics. Only use seals suitable for refrigerant.
If the air conditioning (A/C) compressor is damaged, the fixed orifice tube can become blocked with metal
particles.
Any sort of blockage in the refrigerant circuit will damage the air conditioning (A/C) compressor irreparably.
If the air conditioning (A/C) system has been opened for a period greater than 2 hours, a new receiver drier must
be installed and the evacuating time to be increased by a minimum of 2 hours.
NOTE: New air conditioning (A/C) compressors are delivered prefilled.
NOTE: Refrigerant oil in new air conditioning (A/C) compressors can contain Teflon, visible as white particles, which will
not harm the system.
General Information - Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety

Precautions
WARNINGS:
Batteries contain sulphuric acid, avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear safety goggles when working near
the battery to protect against possible splashing of the acid solution.
EYE CONTACT: If acid comes into contact with the eyes, flush immediately with plenty of running water for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: If acid comes into contact with the skin, flush immediately with plenty of running water for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
SWALLOWED: If acid is swallowed, rinse the mouth with plenty of water and then drink plenty of water or milk. Do
not induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases. Do not allow naked flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near
the battery.
When charging the battery shield your face and wear safety goggles. Provide adequate ventilation.
CAUTION: Boost charging with excessive current or voltage above 16 volts will damage the battery.
General Information - Body Repair Health and Safety and General

Precautions
General
Appropriate repair methods and carrying out repair and paint jobs correctly is particularly important to the operating
safety of vehicles and the safety of people.
WARNING: There is danger of injury through:
High voltage when electrical welding.

Do not perform welding work in a damp environment or on a wet substrate. Use suitable insulation underneath.
Welding spatter and UV radiation.
Wear protective clothing, gloves and welding mask or welding goggles.
Fire, explosion and hot surfaces in the work area.
Always have a suitable fire extinguisher available when using welding or heating equipment.
Remove flammable substances from the danger area. Remove the fuel tank and fuel pipes and hoses.
Welding and grinding near the battery presents the danger of explosion. Remove the battery before you start
working.
During paint work there is an increased danger of fire or explosion. Prevent any sparks being created. Fire, open
light and smoking are forbidden.
Always ventilate the workplace well and use an extraction system.
Wear protective footwear made from anti-static material.
Only use tools made of wood, brass or copper to clean stands and extraction ducts. Do not use tools made of
steel.
Only fill or decant paint materials in a specially marked area.
Inhalation and/or absorption through the skin of harmful substances.
Welding fumes grinding dusts and solvent vapours can be extremely harmful to the health.
Sealants, underbody protection and paint residues must not be burnt down with an unshielded flame, as this will
produce harmful substances.
Always ventilate the workplace well and use an extraction system.
Wear protective clothing.
Pyrotechnic components.
Disconnect the battery negative clamp and cover the battery terminal.
Remove any airbag components.
Noise
Cutting, grinding and alignment work can cause a noise level over 85 dB (A).
Always wear ear protection.
High Forces.
The various body areas are subject to very high forces during realignment work. Should any component
suddenly become detached during this process, there is a very great danger of injury.
Pulling chains and pulling shackles must be secured with arrester cables.
As well as these general instructions on the dangers in body and paint shops, you must observe:
All valid local national and international regulations governing Health and Safety at Work
Safety instructions of material equipment and tool manufacturers
For additional information, refer to: (100-00 General Information)

Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives (Description and Operation),
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Health and Safety Precautions (Description and Operation),
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions (Description and Operation).
Personal protection
Besides the body and limbs, several organs vital to life are in very particular danger. Because damage is mostly
irreparable, special attention and comprehensive protection is necessary.
Protective equipment
Always use the appropriate protective equipment:
Protective helmet or welding mask
Breathing protection
Protective clothes gloves and safety boots
Ear defenders
Extraction systems
Always carry out an operational check on your protective equipment every time before you start working!
Breathing protection
WARNING: Vapor or spray mist containing isocyanates as a paint base or hardener can cause toxic respiratory
disease (conditions similar to asthma) leading to permanent damage, even when inhaled in the lowest concentrations
The instructions for use provided by the manufacturer must be observed when working with breathing protection
equipment.
During painting work and in the preparations for painting, gases, vapors, mists or dusts can appear in dangerous
concentrations.
Breathing protection devices which are independent of the local atmosphere are most suitable.
In these types of isolation systems, a compressed air hose carries natural air from the compressor line into the
protective mask. During supply, the air undergoes pressure reduction, water removal, fine filtration and usually
warming to natural breath temperature.
Item
Part Number
Description
Protective hood with fresh air supply
Protective clothing
Protective gloves
Protective footwear
Only for short periods of work or minimal concentrations of hazardous substances breathing protection devices with a
combination filter is suitable as breathing protection equipment.
Item
Part Number
Activated charcoal filter
Coarse filter
Description
Filter masks with wadding, sponge or colloid filters and also paper masks are all unsuitable for working with coating
materials because they do not stop solvent vapors.
Eye protection
Cutting grinding welding solvents and paint bear fundamental risks for your eyes.
Damage ranging from irritation of the cornea to incurable illnesses is possible.
Solvents and paint even water based could not only be absorbed via your skin but also via your eyes.
Therefore always wear the appropriate eye protection for your work.
Protective goggles must be inert toward splashes of solvent, and must have side protection. Best protection during
spray painting is offered by full mask respirators or helmet respirators with built-in visor.
Skin protection
Spray painters must wear suitable protective work clothing (flame-proof and anti-static). Also, when working with water
based materials, comprehensive skin protection must be worn, because these materials are very easily absorbed
through the skin.
Change your protective clothing at proper intervals. Clothes contaminated with coating materials can easily catch fire.
Do not choose clothes or underwear with a large content of easy melting synthetic fiber, because this material
considerably increases the danger and degree of injuries (melted plastic on the skin!).
For areas of the skin which are not covered by protective clothing suitable skin protection cleaning and care agents
must be used.
Ear protection
Cutting grinding compressors and extractor fans and ducts are the main sources of noise in body and paint shops.
Always wear suitable ear protection like ear plugs or ear defenders.
Protection of the vehicle

Protect affected areas from weld spatter and dust during all welding and grinding work on the vehicle. If metallic dust
stays on the vehicle for some time, there is the likelihood of film rust formation. Grinding produces tiny spots of
damage to the paint surface, which may cause corrosion. Also use suitable protective measures to protect the interior
when performing repair operations which relate to the inside of the vehicle.
For this reason, make sure to:

Use carbon fiber blankets to protect the vehicle body and the interior.
Use covering film to protect the vehicle body from grinding dust and metal dust.
Use covering paper to protect the interior from grinding dust.
In addition, take into account:
Remove fuel supply components as necessary.

Protect working areas which are in danger of catching fire with a fireproof blanket.
Keep heat away from all components of the air conditioning system.
Remove all components in the space adjoining the repair area.
Electronic components
Increased use of comfort and safety electronics in modern vehicles requires additional attention to be paid during body
work.
Over voltages produced during welding can cause electronic systems to be damaged. In particular, the safety
instructions for performing welding work on vehicles with airbag systems must be adhered to.
WARNING: After disconnecting the power supply and before performing further work, a wait time of up to 15
minutes must be maintained, depending on the vehicle. Work on airbag systems may only be performed by persons
who have a relevant certificate of competence.
For additional information, refer to:
Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation),
Driver Lower Air Bag Module (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation),
Passenger Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation),
Side Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation),
Side Air Curtain Module (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation),
Restraints Control Module (RCM) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
Pay attention to the following points:
Disconnect the battery negative clamp and cover the battery terminal.
Disconnect the electrical connector at the airbag control module.
If welding is to be performed directly near a control module, it must be disconnected or removed.
Never connect the negative cable of the welder near an airbag or a control module.
Connect the negative cable of the welder close to the location of the weld.
General Information - Brake System Health and Safety Precautions

WARNINGS:
EYE CONTACT: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with the eyes. Wash hands
thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid comes into contact with the eyes, flush the eyes with plenty of cold running
water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. If swallowed, drink plenty of water. Seek
immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.
Only use new specified brake fluid from airtight containers.
CAUTION: If brake fluid is spilled on the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately washed down with cold
water.
General Information - Engine Cooling System Health and Safety

Precautions
WARNINGS:
Extreme care must be exercised when handling hot fluids. Always wash off spilled fluids from affected areas of
skin immediately.
Vapors may be given off from antifreeze when heated. Avoid breathing these vapors.
SKIN CONTACT: Antifreeze may be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities.
SWALLOWED: If antifreeze is swallowed, drink plenty of water, induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical
attention.
Antifreeze must not be used in any cooling or industrial water system that is connected or linked to general water
supplies.
General Information - Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health

and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Fuel may not give adequate warning before toxic or harmful effects arise.
Exposure to fuel can be harmful and can cause severe health damage or death.
Extreme care must be exercised when handling hot fluids. Always wash off spilled fluids from affected areas of
skin immediately.
Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may ignite when working on fuel systems. Do not allow naked
flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near fuel related components.
Fuel must not be used as a cleaning agent.
Keep fuel containers tightly closed, out of direct sunlight and in a cool area. Keep away from heat sources, ignition
sources and oxidizing agents.
SKIN CONTACT: Excessive or prolonged skin contact with diesel fuel may cause serious skin disorders including
skin cancer.
SKIN CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the skin and may cause dermatitis due to defatting effect. Remove
contaminated clothing. Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Seek medical attention for any persistent skin
irritation or abnormality. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
EYE CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the eyes. Flush with plenty of running water, blinking as often as
possible. Do not force the eyelid open. Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Fuel is moderately toxic and tends to foam on vomiting. If drawn into the lungs, inflammation may
develop. Do not induce vomiting. If spontaneous vomiting occurs place the victim in a forward position to reduce the
risk of fuel being drawn into the lungs. Give nothing by mouth. If breathing but unconscious, place in the recovery
position. If breathing has stopped, apply artificial respiration. Seek immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Fuel is toxic to the respiratory and other body systems. Exposure may result in various symptoms
including drowsiness, unconsciousness or severe health damage. Move a victim to fresh air. Keep a victim warm and at
rest. If unconscious, place in the recovery position. If not breathing, apply artificial respiration. Give cardiac massage if
necessary. Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that
absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components.
Make sure that the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible.
General Information - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and

Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Only qualified technicians are allowed to work on pyrotechnic components.
INHALED: Exposure to pyrotechnic residue may cause low blood pressure, severe headache, irritation of mucous
membranes, fainting, shortness of breath or rapid pulse. Move a victim to fresh air. Seek immediate medical attention.
EYE CONTACT: Exposure to unburned pyrotechnic residue may cause irritation, burning and etching of the eyes.
Flush immediately with plenty of cold running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
EYE CONTACT: Exposure to burned pyrotechnic residue may cause irritation, burning and etching of the eyes.
Flush immediately with diluted boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: Unburned pyrotechnic residue may be rapidly absorbed through the skin in toxic quantities. Wash
immediately with plenty of soap and water. Seek medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: Burned pyrotechnic residue may be rapidly absorbed through the skin in toxic quantities. Wash
with plenty of water. Do not use soap. Seek medical attention.
SWALLOWED: Unburned pyrotechnic residue is extremely toxic. If conscious drink plenty of water then induce
vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention. If unconscious, or in convulsions do not attempt to induce vomiting or give
anything by mouth. Seek immediate medical attention.
SWALLOWED: Burned pyrotechnic residue is extremely toxic. Drink plenty of water and seek immediate medical
attention.
The deployment key must only be accessible to authorized personnel.
Make sure that the deployment key remains removed from the deployment equipment except during deployment.
If permenantly disabling or enabling the passenger air bag a new seat belt for vehicles without or with a
passenger air bag must be installed.
Undeployed pyrotechnic components must not be deployed in the vehicle.
Pyrotechnic components must be deployed following local regulations.
Check thoroughly that no loose objects can be spread during the deployment of pyrotechnic components.
Pyrotechnic components must be transported following local regulations.
Never carry out any electrical measurement on disconnected, undeployed pyrotechnic components.
Pyrotechnic components must not be disassembled.
Pyrotechnic components are not interchangeable between vehicles.
Always carry a live air bag module away from the body with the air bag or trim cover pointing upwards.
Live air bag modules must be placed in a suitable cage when removed from the vehicle. The air bag or trim cover
must be facing upwards.
Do not install a rearward facing child safety seat to the passenger seat with an activated passenger air bag.
CAUTIONS:
Pyrotechnic components must not be subjected to temperatures higher than 110C.
Never install aftermarket accessories to the vehicle on or adjacent to the supplemental restraint system module.
General Information - Window Glass Health and Safety Precautions

WARNINGS:
Cured polyurethane (PU) adhesive can degrade if subjected to high temperatures. Isocyanide compounds can be
released when grinding or welding in close proximity to cured PU adhesive.
SKIN CONTACT: Prolonged exposure to polyurethane (PU) adhesive may cause skin irritation. If PU adhesive
comes into contact with the skin, remove any contaminated clothing. Immediately wash the skin with soap and water.
Seek medical attention for any persistent skin irritation or abnormality.
EYE CONTACT: Polyurethane (PU) adhesive may cause severe irritation or damage. If PU adhesive comes into
contact with the eyes, immediately flush eyes with plenty of running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek immediate
medical attention.
SWALLOWED: If polyurethane (PU) adhesive is swallowed, flush the mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
Provide rest, warmth and fresh air. Seek immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Persons having a respiratory allergy may have an allergic reaction when handling polyurethane (PU)
adhesive.
INHALED: Polyurethane (PU) adhesive can cause asthma like symptoms. Isocyanate vapor from primer or PU
adhesive can cause allergies in the respiratory tract.
INHALED: If polyurethane (PU) adhesive fumes are inhaled, move victim to fresh air. Provide oxygen if necessary.
If breathing stops, provide artificial respiration. Keep a victim warm and at rest. Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the direct glazing for bonded glass cutting blades are changed where the cutting depth changes to
avoid damage to the body and trim panels.
During the curing period of the PU adhesive, the door windows must be left open to avoid a build up of pressure
when the doors are opened and closed.
Identification Codes - Identification Codes

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

The official vehicle identification number (VIN) for title and registration purposes is stamped on a metal plate and fastened to
the instrument panel. It is positioned close on the left-hand side of the vehicle and is visible from the outside.
The VIN is also located on the vehicle certification label.
Item
Part Number
Description
VIN plate
Bar code label (USA)
VIN label (Europe/Rest of World shown)
VIN (Stamped)
www.JagDocs.com
Vehicle Identification Number (Typical)
Item
Part Number
World manufacturer identifier
Market, air bag specification
Transmission and steering code
Body code
Emission control system
Check digit
Model year
Assembly plant, model line
Production sequence number
Description
World Manufacturer Identifier

VIN Positions 1
Codes
SAJ
Manufacturer
Jaguar Land Rover Limited
Make
Jaguar
Type
Passenger car
Market, Air Bag Specification

VIN position 2
VIN code
A
K
W
X
Y
Description
Rest of World with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
Japan with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
USA with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
Canada with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
Mexico with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
Transmission, Steering Code

VIN Position 3
VIN Code
A
C
Description
Automatic LHS
Automatic RHS
Body Code
VIN Position 4
VIN Code
43
44
45
46
47
48
4D
4E
4F
4G
4H
4J
Description
Coupe (Rest of World)
Convertible (Rest of World)
Coupe Portfolio (Rest of World)
Convertible Portfolio (Rest of World)
XKRS Coupe (Rest of World)
XKRS Convertible (Rest of World)
Coupe (USA and Canada)
Convertible (USA and Canada)
Coupe Portfolio (USA and Canada)
Convertible Portfolio (USA and Canada)
XKRS Coupe (USA and Canada)
XKRS Convertible (USA and Canada)
Body Code - All except USA and Canada - XKRS 2012 model year
VIN Position 4
VIN Code
43
44
45
46
47
48
Description
2 Door Coupe
2 Door Convertible
2 Door Coupe Portfolio / XKR Speed pack
2 Door Convertible Portfolio / XKR Speed pack
2 Door Coupe XKR 75 LE / XKRS
2 Door Convertible XKR 75 LE / XKRS
Body Code USA and Canada - XKRS 2012 model year

VIN Position 4
VIN Code
4D
4E
4F
4G
4H
4J
Description
2 Door Coupe
2 Door Convertible
2 Door Coupe Portfolio / XKR Speed pack
2 Door Convertible Portfolio / XKR Speed pack
2 Door Coupe XKR 75 LE / XKRS
2 Door Convertible XKR 75 LE / XKRS
Engine Emission System - to the end of 11 model year

VIN Position 5
NOTE: *1 EU. Includes the following markets; Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Rep, Denmark, Eire, Estonia, Finland, France,
Germany, Greece, Holland, Hungary, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania,
Slovenia, Slovakia, Spain (incl. Canary Islands), Sweden and UK.
NOTE: *2 East Europe. Includes the following markets; Croatia and Serbia.
NOTE: *3 Russia. Includes the following markets; Belarus, Kazakhstan, Ukraine and Uzbekistan.
VIN
Code
F
G
P
R
P
R
X
Y
F
G
P
R
B
Engine
5.0L
5.0L
Supercharged
5.0L
5.0L
Supercharged
5.0L
5.0L
Supercharged
5.0L
5.0L
Supercharged
5.0L
5.0L
Supercharged
5.0L
5.0L
Supercharged
5.0L
Market
Algeria, Dominican Rep, Guatemala, Indonesia, Malaysia, *4 Middle East, Panama, Philippines,
Singapore, South Africa, Thailand and Tunisia
Argentina, Chile and China
*2 East Europe, *1 EU, Israel, Morocco, Norway, *3 Russia, Switzerland and Turkey and Taiwan
Brazil
Egypt and Syria
Japan
USA
C
B
C
B
C
P
R
5.0L
Supercharged
5.0L
5.0L
Supercharged
5.0L
5.0L
Supercharged
5.0L
5.0L
Supercharged
Canada
Mexico
Australia, Cyprus, Hong Kong, Malta, New Zealand and UK (and Eire)
Engine Emission System - XKRS 2012 model year

VIN Position 5
NOTE: *1 EU. Includes the following markets; Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Chile(diesel only), Croatia, Cyprus, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, India (gasoline only), Ireland, Italy, Latvia,
Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Moldova, Monaco, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, San
Marino, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, UK; (Canary Islands, Azores, Madeira, Martinique,
Guadeloupe, Reunion are included as remote parts of sovereign states).
NOTE: *2 With DPF, Australia, Belarus, Gibraltar, Hong Kong, Iceland, Israel, Korea (diesel only), Macau, Morocco, New
Zealand, Palestine, Singapore (diesel only), South Africa (Diesel), Taiwan, Tunisia
NOTE: *3 With-out DPF, Argentina, Bermuda, Chile (gasoline only), China, Guadeloupe, India (diesel only), Kazakhstan,
Mexico (diesel only), Morocco, Ukraine, Russia.
NOTE: *4 Rest Of World (ROW), includes the following markets; Barbados, Benin, Botswana, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Brunei,
Cameroon, Central African Republic, Chad, Congo, Costa Rica, Democratic Republic of Congo, Dominican Republic, Equatorial
Guinea, Ethiopia, Falklands, Fiji, Gabon, Gambia, Ghana, Guatemala, Guinea, Guinea Bissau, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Ivory
Coast, Lesotho, Liberia, Madagascar, Malawi, Mali, Mozambique, Mauritania, Namibia, New Caledonia, Niger, Panama, Papua
New Guinea, Rwanda, Sierra Leone, Singapore (gasoline only),Somalia, Swaziland, Tahiti, Tanzania, Togo, Trinidad &
Tobago, Uganda, Western Sahara, Zambia, Zimbabwe.
NOTE: *5 Emergent World, With-out OBD, includes the following markets; Albania, Angola, Bolivia, Colombia, Ecuador,
Georgia, Indonesia, Jamaica, Kenya, Kyrgystan, Macedonia, Malaysia, Mauritius, Nigeria, Paraguay, Peru, Philippines, South
Africa (gasoline only), Sri Lanka, Turkmenistan, Uruguay, Uzbekhistan, Venezuela, Vietnam.
NOTE: *6 Hot Climate, With-out OBD, includes the following markets; Algeria, Azerbaijan, Bahrain, Bangladesh for gasoline,
Bhutan, Dubai, Egypt, Iraq, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon (gasoline only), Libya, Oman, Pakistan, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Sudan,
Syria (gasoline only), Thailand, Tunisia, United Arab Emirates, Yemen.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
P
R
S
X
Y
5.0L Supercharged
5.0L
5.0L Supercharged
5.0L Supercharged
5.0L Supercharged
5.0L
5.0L Supercharged
5.0L
5.0L Supercharged
5.0L Supercharged
5.0L
5.0L Supercharged
USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea

Brazil
*4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
*1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
Brazil
Brazil
Check Digit
VIN Position 6
VIN Code
0 - 9 or X
Description
Calculated in accordance with American standard CFR part 565
Model Year
VIN Position 7
VIN Code
A
B
C
Description
2010 Model year
2011 Model year
2012 Model year
Assembly Plant and Model Line

VIN Position 8
VIN Code
L
M
Description
Castle Bromwich 5.0L Normally aspirated
Castle Bromwich 5.0L Supercharged
Production Sequence Number

VIN Position 9
Sequence Number
B00001 - B99999
VIN Label
VIN Label (Europe and Rest of world)
Item
Part Number
Description
Whole vehicle type approval (WVTA)
VIN
Gross vehicle weight
Gross train weight
Maximum permitted front axle loading
Maximum permitted rear axle loading
Date of manufacture
Interior trim code
Paint code
VIN Label (North America)
Item
Part Number
Description
Date of manufacture
VIN
Type
Interior trim code
Paint code
VIN Label (Saudi Arabia and Gulf States)
Item
Part Number
Date of manufacturer
VIN
Interior trim code
Paint code
VIN Label (Canada)
Description
Part Number
Number
Part
Item
1
Description
VIN
Paint code
Interior trim code
Type
VIN Label (China)
Item
Part Number
Trade mark
Vehicle type
Gross vehicle weight/Gross train weight
Occupant number
Engine specification
VIN
VIN Label (Argentina)
Description
Item
Part Number
VIN
Trade mark
Gross train weight
Date of manufacture
Interior trim code
Paint code
Description
Automatic Transmission Number

The serial number of the transmission unit is displayed on a metal label or bar code (if equipped) attached to the
transmission casing.
Engine Number - 5.0L and 5.0L Supercharged

The serial number is stamped on an engine web on the left-hand side of the cylinder block behind the engine mounting. The
emission code is also located here, on the transmission flange.
Jacking and Lifting - Jacking

Safety Precautions
WARNING: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to raise the vehicle for any other purpose. Refer to the Driver
Handbook when using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
The following safety precautions must be observed when raising the vehicle to carry out service operations:
Never rely on a jack alone to support a vehicle. Always use suitable vehicle stands to provide rigid support.
When working beneath a vehicle, whenever possible use a vehicle hoist instead of a jack and vehicle stands.
Make sure that the vehicle is standing on firm, level ground before using a jack.
Do not rely on the parking brake alone; chock the wheels and put the automatic transmission into Park if
possible.
Check that any lifting equipment used has adequate capacity for the load being lifted and is in correct working
order.
Jacking and Lifting - Lifting

Lifting PointsTwo-Post Lift

CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the hoist adapters to contact the steering linkage, suspension arms, stabilizer bar, rear subframe stabilizer
brackets or to compress the lower suspension arm stabilizer bar insulator. Damage to the suspension, exhaust and steering
linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters of two-post lift prior to lifting the
vehicle.
Never use the rear axle as a lift point. Damage to the rear axle seals and bushes may occur.
When using a two-post lift, a cushioned pad must be utilized to avoid body damage.
Lifting PointsFloor Jack and Axle Stands

CAUTIONS:
When using a floor jack, a cushioned pad must be utilized to avoid body damage.
When using axle stands, a cushioned pad must be utilized to avoid damage to the body.
Item
A
B
Description
Jacking point
Axle stand positioning point
Vehicle Recovery
NOTE: Prior to vehicle recovery, make sure the vehicle keys are available and the security system is disarmed.
Vehicle recovery methods are:
By transporter or trailer
Emergency towing
Transporter or Trailer Recovery
When the vehicle is being recovered by transporter or trailer:

The parking brake must be applied and the wheels chocked
The gear selector lever must be in Neutral. Do not select Park on automatic transmission vehicles, as the park lock
mechanism may be damaged by the forward and backward rocking motion of the vehicle
The vehicle must be securely tied down to the transporter or trailer
Emergency Towing
WARNING: If the engine is not running, the steering will become heavy and the force necessary to effectively apply the
brakes will be greatly increased.
CAUTION: A vehicle with a defective transmission must be recovered by transporter or trailer.
When the vehicle is being towed on its own wheels:

Local regulations for the towing of vehicles must be adhered to. In some countries the registration number of the
towing vehicle and an 'On Tow' sign or warning triangle must be displayed at the rear of the towed vehicle
The gear selector lever must be in Neutral
The ignition switch must be in position II to release the steering lock and to allow for the operation of the direction
indicators, horn and stop lamps

A distance of 0,8 km (0.5 mile) must not be exceeded
A speed of 48 km/h (30 mph) must not be exceeded
The tow rope must be attached to the front towing eye
Noise, Vibration and Harshness - Noise, Vibration and Harshness

(NVH)
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) is becoming more important as vehicles become more sophisticated and
passenger comfort levels increase. This section is designed to aid in the diagnosis, testing and repair of NVH concerns.
Noise is defined as sounds not associated with the operation of passenger compartment equipment that
interface with customer satisfaction.

Vibration is defined as impulses felt by the customer that are not caused by road surface changes.
Harshness is a ride quality issue where the customer feels that the vehicle response to the road surface is
sharply transmitted to the customer.
Diagnostic Theory
Diagnosis is more than just following a series of interrelated steps in order to find the solution to the specific condition.
It is a way of looking at systems that are not functioning the way they should and finding out why. Also it is knowing
how the system should work and whether it is working correctly.
There are basic rules for diagnosis. If these rules are followed, the cause of the condition is usually found the first time
through the system.
Know the System

Know how the parts go together.
Know how the system operates as well as its limits and what happens when the system goes wrong.
Sometimes this means checking the system against one that is known to be working correctly.
Know the History of the System

A clue in any one of these areas may save time:
How old or new is the system?

What kind of treatment has it had?
Has it been repaired in the past in such a manner that might relate to the present condition?
What is the repair history?
Know the History of the Condition

Did it start suddenly or appear gradually?
Was it related to some other occurrence such as a collision or previous part renewal?
Know how the condition made itself known; it may be an important clue to the cause.
Know the Probability of Certain Conditions Developing

Look for the simple rather than the complex.
For example:
Electrical conditions usually occur at connections rather than components.
An engine no-start is more likely to be caused by a loose wire or small adjustment rather than a sheared-off
camshaft.
Know the difference between impossible and improbable. Certain failures in a system can be improbable but still
happen.
New parts are just that, new. It does not mean they are always good functioning parts.
Do Not Cure the Symptom and Leave the Cause

Lowering the pressure in a front tire may correct the condition of a vehicle leaning to one side, but it does not correct
the original condition.
Be Positive the Cause is Found

Double check the findings.
What caused a worn component?
A loose transmission or engine mount could indicate that other mounts are also loose.
Diagnostic Charts
Charts are a simple way of expressing the relationship between basic logic and a physical system of components. They
help discover the cause of a condition in the least time. Diagnostic charts combine many areas of diagnosis into one
visual display:
probability of certain things occurring in a system

speed of checking certain components or functions before others
simplicity of carrying out certain tests before others
elimination of checking huge portions of a system by carrying out simple tests
certainty of narrowing down the search to a small portion before carrying out in-depth testing
The fastest way to find a condition is to work with the tools that are available. This means working with proven
diagnostic charts and the correct special equipment for the system.
Noise, Vibration and Harshness - Noise, Vibration and Harshness

(NVH)
Diagnosis and Testing
Principle of Operation
For a detailed description of Noise, Vibration and Harshness issues, refer to the Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Description and Operation).

1.
Verify the customer's concerns by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition.
2.
Visually inspect the vehicle to determine any obvious cause(s) of the concern(s).
3.
If the inspection reveals obvious causes that can be readily identified, repair as necessary.
4.
If the concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s) and refer to the Symptom Chart.
How To Use This Diagnostic Procedure Section

Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) concerns have become more important as vehicles have become more
sensitive to these vibrations. This section is designed as an aid to identifying these situations
The section provides diagnostic procedures based on symptoms. If the condition occurs at high speed, for
instance, the most likely place to start is under High Speed Shake
The road test procedure will tell how to sort the conditions into categories and how to tell a vibration from a
shake
A series of Road Test Quick Checks is provided to make sure that a cause is either pinpointed or eliminated
Name the condition, proceed to the appropriate section and locate the correct diagnosis. When the condition is
identified, the job is partly done

Follow the diagnostic procedure as outlined
Quick Checks are described within the step, while more involved tests and adjustments are outlined in General
Procedures
Always follow each step exactly and make notes to recall important findings later
Customer Interview
The road test and customer interview (if available) provide information that will help identify the concerns and will
provide direction to the correct starting point for diagnosis.
Identify the Condition

NVH problems usually occur in a number of areas:
tires
engine accessories
suspension
driveline
air leakage (wind noise)
squeaks and rattles
heating ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC)
electrical (e.g. motor noise)
transmission
engine
It is important, therefore, that an NVH concern be isolated into its specific area(s) as soon as possible. The easiest and
quickest way to do this is to carry out the Road Test as outlined.
Noise Diagnostic Procedure

Non-Axle Noise
The five most important sources of non-axle noise are exhaust, tires, roof racks, trim and mouldings, and transmission.
Therefore, make sure that none of the following conditions are the cause of the noise before proceeding with a driveline
tear down and diagnosis.
Under certain conditions, the pitch of the exhaust may sound very much like gear noise. At other times, it can
be mistaken for a wheel bearing rumble

Tires, especially snow tires, can have a high pitched tread whine or roar, similar to gear noise. Radial tires, to
some degree, have this characteristic. Also, any non-standard tire with an unusual tread construction may emit
a roar or whine type noise
Trim and mouldings can also cause whistling or a whining noise
Clunk may be a metallic noise heard when the automatic transmission is engaged in reverse or drive, or it may
occur when the throttle is applied or released. It is caused by backlash somewhere in the driveline
Bearing rumble sounds like marbles being tumbled. This condition is usually caused by a damaged wheel bearing
Noise Conditions
Gear noise is typically a howling or whining due to gear damage or incorrect bearing preload. It can occur at
various speeds and driving conditions, or it can be continuous

Chuckle is a particular rattling noise that sounds like a stick against the spokes of a spinning bicycle wheel. It
occurs while decelerating from approximately 64 km/h (40 miles/h) and can usually be heard all the way to a
stop. The frequency varies with vehicle speed
Knock is very similar to chuckle, though it may be louder and occurs on acceleration or deceleration. The tear
down will disclose what has to be corrected
Check and rule out tires, exhaust and trim items before disassembling the transmission to diagnose and correct gear
noise.
The noises described under Road Test usually have specific causes that can be diagnosed by observation as the unit is
disassembled. The initial clues are the type of noise heard on the road test and the driving conditions.
Vibration Conditions
NOTE: New Constant Velocity (CV) joints should not be installed unless disassembly and inspection revealed unusual
wear.
Clicking, popping or grinding noises may be caused by the following:
Cut or damaged CV joint boots resulting in inadequate or contaminated lubricant in the outboard or inboard CV
joint bearing housings

Loose CV joint boot clamps
Another component contacting the rear drive half shaft
Worn, damaged or incorrectly installed wheel bearing, suspension or brake component
Vibration at highway speeds may be caused by the following:
Out-of-balance front or rear wheels

Out-of-round tires
Driveline imbalance
Driveline run-out (alignment)
NOTE: Rear drive half shafts are not balanced and are not likely to contribute to rotational vibration disturbance.
Shudder or vibration during acceleration (including from rest) may be caused by the following:
Driveline alignment
Excessively worn or damaged outboard or inboard CV joint bearing housing
Excessively high CV joint operating angles caused by incorrect ride height. Check ride height, verify correct
spring rate and check items under Inoperative Conditions

Excessively worn driveshaft components
Leakage Conditions
1.
Inspect the CV joint boots for evidence of cracks, tears or splits.
2.
Inspect the underbody for any indication of grease splatter in the vicinity of the rear drive half shaft, outboard
and inboard CV joint boot locations, which is an indication of CV joint boot or CV joint boot clamp damage.
3.
Inspect the inboard CV joint bearing housing seal for leakage.
Inoperative Conditions
If a CV joint or rear drive half shaft pull-out occurs, check the following:
suspension components for correct location, damage or wear

bushings for wear
subframe for damage
bent or worn components
Stabilizer bar link
Left-hand rear suspension lower arm and bushing
Right-hand rear suspension lower arm and bushing
Rear wheel hub and rear drive half shaft
Road Test
A gear-driven unit will produce a certain amount of noise. Some noise is acceptable and may be audible at certain
speeds or under various driving conditions as on a newly paved blacktop road. The slight noise is in no way detrimental
and must be considered normal.
The road test and customer interview (if available) provide information needed to identify the condition and give
direction to the correct starting point for diagnosis.
1.
Make notes throughout the diagnosis routine. Make sure to write down even the smallest piece of information,
because it may turn out to be the most important.
2.
Do not touch anything until a road test and a thorough visual inspection of the vehicle have been carried out.
Leave the tire pressures and vehicle load just where they were when the condition was first observed. Adjusting
tire pressures, vehicle load or making other adjustments may reduce the conditions intensity to a point where it
cannot be identified clearly. It may also inject something new into the system, preventing correct diagnosis.
3.
Make a visual inspection as part of the preliminary diagnosis routine, writing down anything that does not look
right. Note tire pressures, but do not adjust them yet. Note leaking fluids, loose nuts and bolts, or bright spots
where components may be rubbing against each other. Check the luggage compartment for unusual loads.
4.
Road test the vehicle and define the condition by reproducing it several times during the road test.
5.
Carry out the Road Test Quick Checks as soon as the condition is reproduced. This will identify the correct
diagnostic procedure. Carry out the Road Test Quick Checks more than once to verify they are providing a valid
result. Remember, the Road Test Quick Checks may not tell where the concern is, but they will tell where it is
not.
Road Test Quick Checks

1.
24-80 km/h (15-50 miles/h): With light acceleration, a moaning noise is heard and possibly a vibration is felt in
the front floor pan. It is usually worse at a particular engine speed and at a particular throttle setting during
acceleration at that speed. It may also produce a moaning sound, depending on what component is causing it.
Refer to Tip-In Moan in the Symptom Chart.
2.
Acceleration/deceleration: With slow acceleration and deceleration, a shake is sometimes noticed in the steering
wheel/column, seats, front floor pan, front door trim panel or front end sheet metal. It is a low frequency
vibration (around 9-15 cycles per second). It may or may not be increased by applying brakes lightly. Refer to
Idle Boom/Shake/Vibration in the Symptom Chart.
3.
High speed: A vibration is felt in the front floor pan or seats with no visible shake, but with an accompanying
sound or rumble, buzz, hum, drone or booming noise. Coast with the clutch pedal depressed or shift control
selector lever in neutral and engine idling. If vibration is still evident, it may be related to wheels, tires, front
brake discs, wheel hubs or front wheel bearings. Refer to High Speed Shake in the Symptom Chart.
4.
Engine rpm sensitive: A vibration is felt whenever the engine reaches a particular rpm. It will disappear in
neutral coasts. The vibration can be duplicated by operating the engine at the problem rpm while the vehicle is
stationary. It can be caused by any component, from the accessory drive belt to the torque converter which
turns at engine speed when the vehicle is stopped. Refer to High Speed Shake in the Symptom Chart.
5.
Noise/vibration while turning: Clicking, popping, or grinding noises may be due to a worn, damaged, or
incorrectly installed front wheel bearing, rear drive half shaft or CV joint.
6.
Noise/vibration that is road speed relative: This noise/vibration can be diagnosed independent of engine speed
or gear selected (engine speed varies but torque and road speed remain constant). The cause may be a rear
drive axle/differential whine.
Road Conditions
An experienced technician will always establish a route that will be used for all NVH diagnosis road tests. The road
selected should be reasonably smooth, level and free of undulations (unless a particular condition needs to be
identified). A smooth asphalt road that allows driving over a range of speeds is best. Gravel or bumpy roads are
unsuitable because of the additional road noise produced. Once the route is established and consistently used, the road
noise variable is eliminated from the test results.
NOTE: Some concerns may be apparent only on smooth asphalt roads.
If a customer complains of a noise or vibration on a particular road and only on a particular road, the source of the
concern may be the road surface. If possible, try to test the vehicle on the same type of road.
Vehicle Preparation
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the vehicle before carrying out the road test. Note anything which is unusual.
Do not repair or adjust any condition until the road test is carried out, unless the vehicle is inoperative or the condition
could pose a hazard to the technician.
After verifying the condition has been corrected, make sure all components removed have been installed.
Lift Test
After a road test, it is sometimes useful to do a similar test on a lift.
When carrying out the high-speed shake diagnosis or engine accessory vibration diagnosis on a lift, observe the
following precautions:
WARNING: If only one drive wheel is allowed to rotate, speed must be limited to 55 km/h (35 miles/h) indicated
on the speedometer since actual wheel speed will be twice that indicated on the speedometer. Speed exceeding 55
km/h (35 miles/h) or allowing the drive wheel to hang unsupported could result in tire disintegration, differential failure,
constant velocity joint and drive half shaft failure, which could cause serious personal injury and extensive vehicle
damage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The suspension should not be allowed to hang free. When the CV joint is run at a very high angle, extra
vibration as well as damage to the seals and joints can occur.
The rear suspension lower arm should be supported as far outboard as possible. To bring the vehicle to its correct ride
height, the full weight of the vehicle should be supported in the rear by floor jacks.
REFER to: Jacking (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation) /
Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
1.
Raise and support the vehicle.

REFER to: Jacking (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation) /
Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
2.
Explore the speed range of interest using the Road Test Quick Checks as previously described.
3.
Carry out a coast down in neutral. If the vehicle is free of vibration when operating at a steady indicated speed
and behaves very differently in drive and coast, a transmission concern is likely.
Note, however, that a test on the lift may produce different vibrations and noises than a road test because of the effect
of the lift. It is not unusual to find vibrations on the lift that were not found in the road test. If the condition found on
the road can be duplicated on the lift, carrying out experiments on the lift may save a great deal of time.
Exhaust Neutralization Procedure

1.
Raise vehicle on lift and slacken all exhaust fixings.
2.
With all fixings loose, neutralize the exhaust system.
3.
Tighten all fixings to correct torque, starting at the rear-most point working towards the front of the vehicle.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
High-speed shake
Tip-in moan
Idle boom/shake/vibration, or shudder
Wheel end vibration analysis
Non-axle noise
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Possible Sources
Wheel end vibration
Engine/transmission
Driveline
Air cleaner
Power steering
Powertrain
Engine mounts
Exhaust system
Cable(s)/hoses(s)
Intake air distribution and filtering system
Engine mounts
Exhaust system
Belt/pulleys
Suspension/rear drive halfshaft and CV joints
Tires/wheels
Wheel bearings
CV joint boots
Trim/mouldings
A/C system
Accessories
Action
GO to Pinpoint Test A.
GO to Pinpoint Test B.
GO to Pinpoint Test C.
GO to Pinpoint Test D.
GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Pinpoint Tests
NOTE: These Pinpoint Tests are designed to take the technician through a step-by-step diagnosis procedure to
determine the cause of a condition. It may not always be necessary to follow the chart to its conclusion. Carry out only
the Pinpoint Test steps necessary to correct the condition. Then check operation of the system to make sure the
condition is corrected.
After verifying that the condition has been corrected, make sure all components removed have been installed.
PINPOINT TEST A : HIGH-SPEED SHAKE

TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: NEUTRAL COAST
DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
Carry out the neutral coast test.

1
Does the vibration disappear during the neutral coast test?
Yes
CHECK and INSTALL new engine/transmission mounts as necessary. REPEAT Road Test as
outlined.
No
GO to D1.
PINPOINT TEST B : TIP-IN MOAN

TEST
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK THE AIR CLEANER
Check the air cleaner.
1
Check the air cleaner, inlet tube, outlet tube, resonators and all other components associated
with the air induction system for correct installation and tightness of all connections.
Are the components OK?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
CORRECT the condition. REPEAT the Road Test as outlined.
B2: CHECK THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
Carry out the exhaust system neutralizing procedure in this section.
1
Is the exhaust system OK?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
REPAIR as necessary. RESTORE vehicle. REPEAT the Road Test as outlined.

B3: CHECK THE POWER STEERING
1
Remove the auxiliary drive belt and test for tip-in moan.
Is the tip-in moan OK?
Yes
REPAIR the power steering as necessary. For additional information, refer to
REFER to: Power Steering (211-02 Power Steering, Diagnosis and Testing).
No
outlined.
PINPOINT TEST C : IDLE BOOM/SHAKE/VIBRATION/SHUDDER

TEST
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK CABLE/HOSES
1
Check the engine compartment for any component that may be grounding between the engine
and body or chassis. Example: air conditioning (A/C) hoses.
Yes
GO to C2.
No
C2: CHECK INTAKE AIR DISTRIBUTION AND FILTERING SYSTEM
Check the intake air distribution and filtering system for loose/damaged components (primarily
1
upstream of the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor).
Yes
GO to C3.
No
CORRECT the condition. REPEAT the road test as outlined.
C3: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL DAMPER
Remove the driver air bag module and visually inspect the steering wheel damper for correct
1
installation or any touch condition.
Is the damper OK?
Yes
GO to C4.
No
C4: CHECK THE COOLING RADIATOR
1
Check the engine cooling radiator mountings and bushings for security and condition. Check the
radiator installation for any component that may have a touch condition.
Are the installation and bushings OK?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
C5: CHECK THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
Carry out the exhaust system neutralizing procedure in this section.
1
Is the exhaust system OK?
Yes
outlined.
No
REPAIR as necessary. REPEAT Road Test.
PINPOINT TEST D : WHEEL END VIBRATION ANALYSIS

TEST
CONDITIONS
D1: INSPECT THE TIRES
1
Inspect the tires.
REFER to: Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
Inspect the tires for:
Correct tire pressures
Correct tire size

Tire/wheel compatibility
Wear or damage
Tire beads correctly seated
Are the tires OK?
Yes
GO to D2.
No
REPAIR as necessary. REPEAT the Road Test as outlined.
D2: INSPECT WHEEL BEARINGS
Inspect the wheel bearings.
1
Are the wheel bearings OK?

Yes
GO to D3.
No
D3: INSPECT THE CONSTANT VELOCITY (CV) JOINT BOOTS
Inspect the CV joint boots.
1
Inspect for evidence of cracks, tears, splits or splattered grease
Are the CV joint boots OK?
Yes
GO to D4.
No
D4: INSPECT WHEEL AND TIRE RUNOUT
1
Inspect the wheel and tire runout.
Is the wheel and tire runout OK?

Yes
Balance the wheels and tires. Refer to the wheel balance equipment manufacturers
instructions.
No
REPAIR as necessary.
REFER to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and Testing).
REPEAT the Road Test as outlined.
PINPOINT TEST E : NON-AXLE NOISE

TEST
CONDITIONS
E1: INSPECT VEHICLE TRIM
1
Check the grille and trim mouldings to see if they are the source of the noise.
Are the vehicle trim components causing the noise?
Yes
INSTALL new trim or REPAIR as necessary.
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK THE A/C SYSTEM FOR NOISE
1
Check the A/C system components for noise by turning the A/C system on and off.
Is the A/C system causing the noise?
Yes
Diagnose the A/C system.
REFER to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,
Diagnosis and Testing).
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK NON-FACTORY ACCESSORIES
1
Inspect any accessories for being the source of the noise. Example: grounding body-to-frame,
antennas, visors, bug deflectors and fog lights.
Are the accessories the cause of the noise?
Yes
ADJUST, REPAIR or INSTALL new accessories or fasteners as required.
No
Verify the customer concern
Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage - New Vehicle Storage

INTRODUCTION
Standards
Vehicles may require storage for varying periods of time before the customer takes delivery. It is essential that a new Jaguar
vehicle is stored correctly, in order to ensure total customer satisfaction after the car is removed from storage and prepared
for sale.
This document establishes the MINIMUM STANDARDS required of franchise holders and appointed vehicle storage companies
by Jaguar Land Rover Limited for the storage of new vehicles, and may only be deviated from with the Companys
agreement. Any concerns should be discussed with your Franchise Regional Manager.
This information should be used in conjunction with the relevant Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI) information.
AREAS OF RESPONSIBILITY
Preventative Measures
Adequate preventative measures must be taken to ensure that each vehicle in stock is maintained in peak condition.
ARRIVAL
It is your responsibility to notify delivery companies immediately of any losses and/or transit damage identified on receipt of
the vehicle.
Where applicable, Vehicle Condition Reports (VCRs) must be endorsed accordingly, otherwise it is unlikely that the transit
insurance company will accept any claims for missing items or damage rectification.
STORAGE
Correct preparation of vehicles for storage is essential. The majority of new vehicles leaving Jaguar Land Rover Limited are
provided with the appropriate protection for transit. It is your responsibility to ensure that a vehicle storage department, or
specialist company, is sufficiently equipped to undertake the storage requirements endorsed in this publication. Whilst
vehicles are in storage, any deterioration or damage sustained is the sole responsibility of the storage operator
and must NOT be made the subject of a warranty claim.
DISPATCH
When removing vehicles from storage, you are responsible for procedures that ensure they are in a safe and roadworthy
condition.
VEHICLE STORAGE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION UPON ARRIVAL
A New Vehicle Storage History Sheet must be raised for every new vehicle upon arrival and should remain inside the
vehicle until despatch. This must contain a record of the vehicle condition and any rectification work carried out
during the storage period (see Storage History Sheet).
Vehicles must be checked for correct specification and/or shortages. Where this is incorrect the required parts should
be procured through normal channels and costs claimed back via the DDW system using the appropriate shortage or
misbuild program code.
Claims for rectifying incorrect specification items and/or shortages must be made in accordance with the conditions
detailed in Section C of the Warranty Policy and Procedures Manual.
NOTE: All missing items should be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage History Sheet and countersigned by an
authorized person.
Vehicles must be inspected for transit damage.
Delivery damage is not the responsibility of Jaguar Land Rover Limited and must not be made the subject of a
warranty claim. It is the responsibility of the Dealer/Retailer or vehicle storage company to identify any such damage
at the time of the new vehicle receipt and to ensure that the full details are recorded on the Delivery Receipt. Claims
for rectification of such damage must be directed to the Delivery Company.
Failure to notify the Delivery Company of damage details at the time of vehicle delivery will result in claims for
subsequent rectification being rejected.
Warranty claims for damage repairs may only be submitted where Jaguar Land Rover Limited responsibility is clearly
indicated. Examples falling into this category are paintwork damage during the fitment of trim or outward facing
dents on the door skin.
Warranty claims will not be accepted for any transit damage repaired or identified after the vehicle has been placed
into service.
A label should be suitably affixed to the inside of the windshield indicating the date of vehicle arrival. Labels must not
be stuck directly to the windshield but placed in a transparent licence holder, or alternatively stuck to a piece of cling
film and attached to the inside of the windshield. This will avoid damage to the windshield when removing labels.
Ignition and door keys must be suitably labelled and when the vehicle is locked, they must be held in a suitably
identified and secure office. All key numbers must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage History Sheet. All keys,
including spares, must be removed from the vehicle during storage for security reasons.
VEHICLE INSPECTION
The entire vehicle exterior must be inspected and, if necessary, washed thoroughly, including the underside and wheel
arches, to remove all dirt and mud deposits.
Any defects found during inspection must be rectified before the vehicle is stored.
Ensure that bumper and body side protectors are correctly located.
There are two main methods of vehicle storage:
Collective storage of several vehicles in an open compound.
Collective storage of a small number of vehicles, normally at the dealership/retailer and possibly under cover.
IDEALLY ALL VEHICLES SHOULD BE STORED IN A WELL VENTILATED AND TEMPERATURE-CONTROLLED BUILDING.
However, it is recognised that the majority of all vehicle storage is done in an open compound. Therefore, the following site
requirements must be observed and should be authorised with your Regional Manager.
The site should have a well-drained hard standing surface, preferably concrete or tarmac, which is free from
undergrowth.
The site and driveways must be kept clean and clear of any obstruction at all times.
The site must be enclosed by a secure intruder-proof perimeter fence and the gates securely locked. The site should
be under daily surveillance, with unauthorised access prevented at all times.

The site should be located away from areas subject to industrial fallout, sea spray or wind-blown dust and sand.
Where fallout conditions are unavoidable it will be necessary to monitor the exterior condition of all cars and wash as
necessary. Heavy contamination may require vehicles to have the transit protection coating removed and problems
arising from the contamination rectified. Once the transit coating has been removed, the vehicle must not be
returned to outdoor storage unless it is fully covered to provide the necessary protection against deterioration.
Mains water, tyre inflation and battery charging facilities must be available on site.
Hedges, shrubs and trees adjacent to the site should be kept trimmed and clear of parked vehicles.
Vehicles must not be parked under trees, overhead cables or other overhanging structures as bird droppings or other
types of contamination could occur.
VEHICLE PARKING
Vehicles must be parked tidily with a minimum of 600 mm (2 feet) between bumpers, front and rear.
There must be a full doors width clearance between the drivers door and any adjacent vehicle or obstruction.
Vehicles must be parked at least 1.2 metres (4 feet) away from any interior wall or, for outside storage, at least 2 metres (6
feet) away from any perimeter fence.
Vehicles must be moved on a first-in-first-out basis, subject to specification.
Item
Part Number
Description
Storage Outside
Storage Inside
FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT

Car wash facilities.
KATS (Special Tool) Decoater Gun.
KATS 8077 Remover Fluid.
Tyre inflation equipment with calibrated gauge 0 - 4.05 bar (0 - 60lbf/in).
All equipment used must be functionally capable of meeting the compliance requirements. Please refer to the approved
equipment document.
Jacking equipment.
Wheel brace.
The following materials must be available and must meet Jaguar specifications:
Engine oil.
Transmission fluid.
Brake fluid.
Distilled water.
Windscreen washer fluid.
Anti-freeze.
Access to trailer/recovery vehicle (Vehicles should not be towed).

Comprehensive filing system for vehicle records.
NOTE: Tools supplied with the vehicle must not be used for any rectification work prior to the prospective purchaser.
OPERATIONS REQUIRED DURING STORAGE PERIOD

REFERENCE CHART
The following chart gives a quick reference to the requirements necessary during the time a vehicle is in storage. A detailed
explanation of each operation is provided on subsequent pages.
If a vehicle remains in storage after 6 months recommence operations as from month 1.
OPERATION
1. IDENTIFICATION
2. INSPECTION
3. BATTERIES
4. COOLING SYSTEM
5. ENGINE
6. TIRES
7. PARKING BRAKE
8. DOORS, WINDOWS AND
VEHICLE INTERIOR
9. WINDSHIELD WIPER
BLADES
10. PAINTWORK
Markets with high ultraviolet
light
All other markets
UPON
RECEIPT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
30 days from 60 days from 90 days from

120 days
150 days
receipt
receipt
receipt
from receipt from receipt
.
.
.
.
.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
.
.
X
.
.
.
.
REMOVE TRANSIT COATING AFTER 270 DAYS
REMOVE TRANSIT COATING AFTER 180 DAYS
STORAGE OPERATIONS
BATTERIES
To make sure the correct standard of battery care, please see the Battery Care Requirements for New Vehicles (Dealer and
Retailer).
For requirements for receipt of a new vehicle, new vehicle storage and replacement batteries please see the battery care
requirements for new vehicles (dealer and service)
Place a label on the vehicle (or on New Vehicle Storage History Sheet) to indicate when a recharge will be required.
For additional information, refer to: New Vehicle Storage Form (100-11 Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage,
Description and Operation).
The battery condition should be checked prior to starting and/or moving the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to: Battery Care Requirements (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General Information,
The storage, handling and charging of batteries is not dangerous provided that the relevant battery manufacturers
recommendations are followed. However, a suitable storage and charging facility must be available and should be in
accordance with local legal requirements.
COOLING SYSTEM
It is ESSENTIAL to maintain the concentration of anti-freeze at the factory-fill condition. Failure to do so may cause
oxidisation of the cooling system leading to corrosion of the engine and heater core.
The coolant mixture specification is 50% plain water and 50% Jaguar anti-freeze, Coolant and Corrosion Inhibitor for frost
protection down to -36C (-33F).
Coolant specific gravity must be checked monthly using a high quality hydrometer with an appropriate range. At a coolant
temperature of 15C (60F), the correct specific gravity reading is 1.074. If the coolant is above or below this temperature,
the following corrections will enable accurate specific gravity readings to be taken:
For higher temperatures: add 0.004 to the specific gravity for each 5C (10F).
For lower temperatures: deduct 0.004 from the specific gravity for each 5C (10F).
If the specific gravity is correct but the cooling system requires topping up, mix anti-freeze and water to the correct
proportions and to the correct volume, then top up the system. Examine for leaks from the radiator and hoses and rectify as
necessary.
If the check shows that the coolant contains less than the required anti-freeze content, proceed as follows:
Carefully examine the radiator and all hoses for leaks and security of hose clamps.
Remove the header tank pressure cap and drain the cooling system as instructed in the relevant service manual.
Mix anti-freeze and water in the correct proportions and to the correct volume.
Close the drain plug and add the coolant until the level in the header tank is steady at MAX.
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE HEADER TANK PRESSURE CAP WHILE THE ENGINE IS HOT.
CAUTION: DO NOT use radiator anti-freeze solution in the windshield washer equipment or paint work will be damaged.
ENGINE
If the vehicle is stored for 30 days, the engine should be started, run at 1000 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) for one minute
from cold and then 2000 RPM per minute until the coolant temperature gauge shows normal.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Where fitted, remove the dipstick and check the engine oil level. If necessary, top up with the approved grade of engine oil.
On vehicles with an electronic oil level and temperature sensor, check the engine oil level using the procedures described in
the applicable Workshop Manual.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

If the system is not to be run for more than one month, it is recommended that the air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes (engine running at idle speed). This is to circulate refrigerant and oil to ensure the Orings and seals (especially the compressor) are kept lubricated and do not harden.
TIRES
For storage purposes, tires on fitted wheels must be inflated to and maintained at a maximum pressure of 3.60 bar (52
lbf/in2).
NOTE: Wheels must be rotated through 90 degrees in the forward direction monthly, to ensure that the tread is rotated
evenly during the storage period.
The spare wheel tire pressure must be maintained at the appropriate pressure specified in the Owners Handbook.
Tire condition should be inspected and defective tires replaced prior to removal from storage.
Guidance for Rotation of Tires
To ensure tires are rotated through a minimum of 90 degrees, apply a chalk mark on a front wheel tire wall at the current
centre contact point with the road surface. Move the car forwards until the chalk mark is at the horizontal position. This
process can be applied to a single car or to a row of vehicles and should ensure that all four wheels on each vehicle is
rotated by 90 degrees.
PARKING BRAKE
Vehicles with Manual Park Brake
The parking brake must NOT remain on during storage.
After parking:
Manual transmission vehicles: select first or reverse gear and release the parking brake
Automatic transmission vehicles: select P and release the parking brake.
Vehicles with Electric Park Brake (EPB)

For vehicles with EPB, the park brake will remain locked onto the brake disc during storage. Refer to the Workshop Manual,
General Procedures, Parking Brake and Actuation for EPB release procedure.
NOTE: For all vehicles with an Electronic Parking Brake (EPB), on manual transmission vehicles, first or reverse gear must be
selected before releasing the EPB. On automatic transmission vehicles 'Park' (P) must be selected before releasing the EPB.
Where possible the EPB must not remain on during storage. If, for any reason, it is not possible to perform the release
procedure, the operation of the EPB must be checked/monitored monthly during the road wheel rotation procedure.
AIR SUSPENSION - JAGUAR XJ AND XF SPORTBRAKE

During storage the air suspension system should be left in the transit mode. No other checks are necessary during storage
for this system.
DOORS, WINDOWS AND VEHICLE INTERIOR

Doors, windows, bonnet, boot lid and fuel filler flap must be closed and locked to prevent water and moisture ingress. A
check should be done each month for any signs of water ingress into the cars interior and luggage compartment. Any water
ingress points should be rectified immediately.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Depending on the model, where possible move the wiper arms and blades away from the windshield and leave in the
extended position.
PAINTWORK
Paintwork can be damaged if the protective coating remains on the vehicle for an extended period of time. In markets with
high levels of ultraviolet light (tropical or semi-tropical conditions), the protective coating MUST be removed after six
months. For all other markets the protective coating MUST be removed after nine months.
If storage is subsequently continued, the vehicle must be kept under cover and should be washed regularly (at least every
month).
REMOVAL FROM STORAGE

PROCEDURES
Before removal from storage area, all fluid levels including coolant, hydraulic fluids and lubricating oils must be checked and
replenished where necessary. Where a substantial loss has occurred the cause must be traced prior to moving the vehicle.
The New Vehicle Storage History Sheet must be checked and safety related faults rectified before the vehicle is moved from
the storage site. These checks are essential to ensure that the vehicle is safe to drive.
Tires must be adjusted to the pressures recommended in the relevant service manual or owners handbook.
Refit the vehicle battery if removed.
Check the operation of the lighting and signalling equipment.
TRANSIT PROTECTION COATING (WHERE FITTED)

REMOVAL OF TRANSIT PROTECTION COATING
During storage, the protective coating will collect airborne dirt and grit. Great care must be taken when removing the transit
coating so that damage to the paint film and exterior trim is avoided.
Removal of the transit protection coating should be carried out in accordance with the procedure detailed in the Pre-Delivery
Inspection (PDI) information.
When the vehicle is dispatched from the storage area, remove the New Vehicle Storage History Sheet and file in the vehicle
records.
STORAGE HISTORY SHEET

www.JagDocs.com
STORAGE HISTORY SHEET (Continued)
Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage - New Vehicle Storage

Form
Before carrying out any battery assessments. refer to the battery care requirements.
For additional information, refer to: Battery Care Requirements (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General
Information, Description and Operation).
NOTE: If the vehicle has been started within the previous 24 hours the surface charge must be removed prior to any
battery assessment
This form is to be used to record the battery condition for vehicles and parts by the dealer / retailer prior to handover to
the customer. If the vehicle is kept in storage longer than 150 days, a new form must be started.
For AGM batteries Midtronics EXP 1080 / GR1 tester must be used.
Follow the instructions on the Midtronics EXP 1080 / GR1 tester to assess battery condition.
TESTER RESULTS
GOOD BATTERY
GOOD RE-CHARGE
CHARGE AND RE-TEST
ACTION
Return to service.
Fully charge battery and return to service.
Fully charge battery. Remove surface charge. Re-test battery. If same result replace
battery.
REPLACE BATTERY OR BAD Verify surface charge removed. Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test. If result
CELL BATTERY
repeats after surface charge removal, replace battery. DO NOT RECHARGE.
UNABLE TO DO TEST
Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test.
Voltage Date Signature
Vehicle Arrival
Initial battery voltage and date of reading
taken
30 days from initial battery reading
Pre Delivery Inspection (PDI)
Customer Handover
Midtronics Code
Battery Voltage
Recharge Details (if any)
Post Charge Voltage
Midtronics Code
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Midtronics Code
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Midtronics Code
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Midtronics Code
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Midtronics Code
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
Midtronics Code
Battery Voltage
Post Charge Voltage
The battery voltage MUST be 12.55 volts or
above
Please make sure that any transit relays are refitted and / or the vehicle is put into transportation mode if the vehicle is
stored
Transit relay removal / vehicle placed in normal mode should only be completed a maximum of 72 hours prior to
handover to customer

MODEL:
KEY NUMBER:
VIN:
COLOR:
ARRIVAL DATE:
DOORS,
PARKING
WINDOWS
BRAKE - AND VEHICLE
OPERATIONS IDENTIFICATION INSPECTION COOLING SYSTEM ENGINE TIRES
OFF
INTERIOR
UPON
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RECEIPT
30 DAYS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
60 DAYS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
90 DAYS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
120 DAYS .
.
.
.
.
.
.
150 DAYS .
.
.
.
.
.
.
OPERATIONS
WINDSHIELD
PAINTWORK COMMENTS ON
INSPECTORS
WIPER BLADES
VEHICLE
SIGNATURE
CONDITION
AND DATE
UPON
.
.
NOTE: RECORD ANY .
RECEIPT
VEHICLE BODY
DAMAGE ON
SILHOUETTES THAT
FOLLOW
30 DAYS
.
.
.
.
60 DAYS
.
.
.
.
90 DAYS
.
.
.
.
120 DAYS .
.
.
.
150 DAYS .
.
.
.
Published: 17-Apr-2012
Suspension System - General Information Wheel Alignment Specification - Front
Item
Castor
Camber
Total toe
Item
Castor
Camber
Total toe
All Right-Hand Drive and Japan vehicles without dynamics pack

LH
RH
Decimal degrees
7.05 0.75
6.51 0.75
Degrees/minutes
7 03' 45'
6 31' 45'
Decimal degrees
-0.70 0.75
-0.30 0.75
Degrees/minutes
-0 42' 45'
-0 18' 45'
Decimal degrees
0.17 0.20
Degrees/minutes
0 10' 12'
All Right-Hand Drive and Japan vehicles with dynamics pack
LH
RH
Decimal degrees
7.20 0.75
6.65 0.75
Degrees/minutes
7 12' 45'
6 39' 45'
Decimal degrees
-1.0 0.75
-0.60 0.75
Degrees/minutes
-1 00' 45'
-0 36' 45'
Decimal degrees
0.25 0.20
Degrees/minutes
0 15' 12'
Split LH-RH
0.55 0.75
0 33' 45'
-0.40 0.75
-0 24' 45'
Split LH-RH
0.55 0.75
0 33' 45'
-0.40 0.75
-0 24' 45'
USA, Canada, Mexico and Dominican Republic vehicles without dynamics pack - Vehicles built up to VIN
B44679
Item
LH
RH
Split LH-RH
Castor
Decimal degrees
6.78 0.75
6.78 0.75
0 0.75
Degrees/minutes
6 47' 45'
6 47' 45'
0 0' 45'
Camber
Decimal degrees
-0.25 0.75
-0.75 0.75
0.50 0.75
Degrees/minutes
-0 15' 45'
-0 45' 45'
0 30' 45'
Total toe
Decimal degrees
0.17 0.20
Degrees/minutes
0 10' 12'
USA, Canada, Mexico and Dominican Republic vehicles with dynamics pack - Vehicles built up to VIN
B44679
Item
LH
RH
Split LH-RH
Castor
Decimal degrees
6.93 0.75
6.93 0.75
0 0.75
Degrees/minutes
6 56' 45'
6 56' 45'
0 0' 45'
Camber
Decimal degrees
-0.55 0.75
-1.05 0.75
0.50 0.75
Degrees/minutes
-0 33' 45'
-1 03' 45'
0 30' 45'
Total toe
Decimal degrees
0.25 0.20
Degrees/minutes
0 15' 0 12'
Item
Castor
Camber
Total toe
Item
Castor
Camber
Total toe
Item
Castor
Camber
Total toe
Item
Rest Of the World vehicles without dynamics pack - Vehicles built up to VIN B44679
LH
RH
Split LH-RH
Decimal degrees
6.78 0.75
6.78 0.75
0 0.75
Degrees/minutes
6 47' 45'
6 47' 45'
0 0' 45'
Decimal degrees
-0.40 0.75
-0.60 0.75
0.20 0.75
Degrees/minutes
-0 24' 45'
-0 36' 45'
0 12' 45'
Decimal degrees
0.17 0.20
Degrees/minutes
0 10' 12'
Rest Of the World vehicles with dynamics pack - Vehicles built up to VIN B44679
LH
RH
Split LH-RH
Decimal degrees
6.93 0.75
6.93 0.75
0 0.75
Degrees/minutes
6 56' 45'
6 56' 45'
0 0' 45'
Decimal degrees
-0.70 0.75
-0.90 0.75
0.20 0.75
Degrees/minutes
-0 42' 45'
-0 54' 45'
0 12' 45'
Decimal degrees
0.25 0.20
Degrees/minutes
0 15' 0 12'
Left hand drive vehicles without dynamics pack - Vehicles built VIN B44680 onwards
LH
RH
Split LH-RH
Decimal degrees
6.78 0.75
6.78 0.75
0 0.75
Degrees/minutes
6 47' 45'
6 47' 45'
0 0' 45'
Decimal degrees
-0.25 0.75
-0.75 0.75
0.50 0.75
Degrees/minutes
-0 15' 45'
-0 45' 45'
0 30' 45'
Decimal degrees
0.17 0.20
Degrees/minutes
0 10' 0 12'
Left hand drive vehicles with dynamics pack - Vehicles built VIN B44680 onwards
LH
RH
Split LH-RH
Castor
Decimal degrees
Degrees/minutes
Decimal degrees
Degrees/minutes
Decimal degrees
Degrees/minutes
Camber
Total toe
6.93 0.75
6 56' 45'
-0.55 0.75
-0 33' 45'
6.93 0.75
6 56' 45'
-1.05 0.75
-1 03' 45'
0.25 0.20
0 15' 0 12'
0 0.75
0 0' 45'
0.50 0.75
0 30' 45'
Wheel Alignment Specification - Rear
Naturally Aspirated (NA)

Item
Camber
Toe
Total toe
Rear thrust angle
Item
Camber
Toe
Total toe
Rear thrust angle
Decimal degrees
Degrees/minutes
Decimal degrees
Degrees/minutes
Decimal degrees
Degrees/minutes
Decimal degrees
Degrees/minutes
LH
RH
-0.60 0.75
-0.60 0.75
-0 36' 45'
-0 36' 45'
0.12 0.14
0.12 0.14
0 07' 0 08'
0 07' 0 08'
0.25 0.20
0 15' 12'
0 0.14
0 0' 8'
Supercharged (SC) without dynamics pack

LH
RH
Decimal degrees
-0.72 0.75
-0.72 0.75
Degrees/minutes
-0 43' 45'
-0 43' 45'
Decimal degrees
0.12 0.14
0.12 0.14
Degrees/minutes
0 07' 0 08'
0 07' 0 08'
Decimal degrees
0.25 0.20
Degrees/minutes
0 15' 12'
Decimal degrees
0 0.14
Degrees/minutes
0 0' 0 08'
Vehicles with dynamics pack
Item
Camber
Toe
Total toe
Rear thrust angle
Decimal degrees
Degrees/minutes
Decimal degrees
Degrees/minutes
Decimal degrees
Degrees/minutes
Decimal degrees
Degrees/minutes
LH
RH
-1.00 0.75
-1.00 0.75
-1 45'
-1 45'
0.12 0.14
0.12 0.14
0 07' 0 08'
0 07' 0 08'
0.25 0.20
0 15' 12'
0 0.14
0 0' 0 08'
Vehicle ride height
Naturally aspirated (NA)

Supercharged (SC) without dynamics pack
Supercharged (SC) with dynamics pack
Front
394 mm (15.51 inch)
392 mm (15.43 inch)
381 mm (15.00 inch)
Rear
394 mm (15.51 inch)
389 mm (15.31 inch)
379 mm (14.92 inch)
All the above figures are measured at "kerb" height -all fluids at full and a full fuel tank.
Tires must be inflated to normal pressure For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, Specifications).

Rear thrust angle = (LH toe - RH toe) 2
Ride height is measured from the centre of the wheel to the apex of the wheel arch, through the wheel centre
line.
Suspension System - General Information - Wheel Alignment Angles

Camber, caster and toe are adjustable on the front suspension system. Only the toe is adjustable on the rear
suspension system. Camber and caster are adjusted by means of eccentric cams on the lower arm mounting bolts. The
front toe is adjusted by use of the front tie-rod. The rear toe is adjusted by the use of toe link assemblies connecting
the knuckles to the rear sub-frame.
Camber
Negative Camber
Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct
effect on tire wear.
Caster
Item
Description
1
Positive caster
2
True vertical
3
Steering axis
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the ball joints when viewed from the side. The
caster specifications in this section will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and
driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear.
Toe
Positive Toe (Toe-In)
Negative Toe (Toe-Out)
The vehicle toe setting:

affects tire wear and directional stability.
Ride Height
NOTE: All ride height measurements are carried out with vehicle empty and 9 liters of fuel in the tank (showroom
condition). The vehicle must be driven above 40 km/h (25 miles/hour) for a minimum of five minutes to make sure that
the reservoir is full.
Front Ride Height Measurement
Item
1
Rear Ride Height Measurement
Item
1
Wheel Track
Description
Ride height
Description
Ride height
Item
1
2
Description
Front track
Rear track
Crabbing
Item
Description
1
Front track
2
Rear track
3
Crabbing angle
Crabbing is the condition in which the independent rear suspension (IRS) system is not square to the chassis. Heavily
crowned roads can give the illusion of crabbing.
Wander
Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel corrections to maintain
a straight path down a level road.
Shimmy
Shimmy, as observed by the driver, is rotational oscillations of the steering wheel which may come and go over time,
generally resulting from wheel and tire imbalances.
Shimmy can be experienced at any speed but generally between 80 to 145 km/h (50 to 90 miles/hour) and is most
often experienced on smooth roads at steady speeds.
Nibble
Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various road surfaces or
brake disc irregularity and observed by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel.
Poor Returnability of the Steering

Poor returnability of the steering is used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to center after a turn or the
steering correction is completed.
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation, felt by the hands on the steering wheel, that must be overcome to keep the vehicle going
straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with hands off the steering wheel.
A vehicle-related drift/pull, on a flat road, will cause a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path and
require constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (i.e., wind, road crown).
Vague On-Center Feel

Vague on-center feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as the wheel is
rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead (under 20 degrees of steering wheel
turn). Efforts may be said to be "flat on center".
In the diagnosis of a roadability problem, it is important to understand the difference between wander and
vague on-center feel.
Suspension System - General Information - Suspension System

For a detailed description of the suspension system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to:
Wheel Alignment Angles (204-00 Suspension System - General Information, Description and Operation),
Front Suspension (204-01 Front Suspension, Description and Operation),
Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Description and Operation).

1.
Verify the customer's concern by carrying out a road test on a smooth road. If any vibrations are apparent, refer
to
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Diagnosis and
Testing).
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity.
Visual Inspection Chart
Mechanical
Damaged tires
Wheel bearing(s)
Loose or damaged front or rear suspension components
Loose, damaged or missing suspension fastener(s)
Incorrect spring usage
Damaged or sagging spring(s)
Damaged or leaking shock absorber(s)
Damaged or leaking strut(s)
Worn or damaged suspension bushing(s)
Loose, worn or damaged steering system components
Damaged axle components
3.
If an obvious cause for an observed or reported condition is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step.
4.
If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the following Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Crabbing
Drift/Pull
Possible Sources
Incorrect rear thrust angle.
Front or rear suspension

components.
Drive axle damaged.
Unequal tire pressure.
Incorrect wheel alignment.
Tires.
Unevenly loaded or overloaded *

vehicle.
* Damaged steering components. *
Front Bottoming or
Brake drag.
Coil springs.
Action
CHECK the rear toe adjustment.
REFER to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension System General Information, Specifications) /
Rear Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System General Information, General Procedures).
INSPECT the front and rear suspension systems.
REPAIR or INSTALL new suspension components as
necessary.
REFER to: Front Suspension (204-01 Front Suspension,
Diagnosis and Testing) /
Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Diagnosis
and Testing).
INSTALL a new rear drive axle/differential.
REFER to: Axle Assembly (205-02 Rear Drive
Axle/Differential, Removal and Installation).
CHECK and ADJUST the tire pressures. INSPECT the tire
for excessive wear.
REFER to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
Specifications).
CHECK and ADJUST the wheel alignment.
REFER to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension System General Information, Specifications).
CHECK and ADJUST the tire pressures. INSPECT the tire
for excessive wear.
Specifications).
NOTIFY the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
CHECK the steering system.

REFER to: Steering System (211-00 Steering System General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
* CHECK the brakes.
REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
* CHECK the ride height. INSTALL new springs as
Riding Low
Incorrect Tire Wear
Rough ride
Shimmy or Wheel
Tramp
Incorrect tire pressure (rapid

center rib or inner and outer
edge wear).
Excessive front or rear toe

*
(rapid inner or outer edge wear).
Excessive negative or positive

camber (rapid inner or outer
edge wear).
* Tires out of balance (tires
cupped or dished).
* Spring(s)
Loose wheel nut(s).
Loose front suspension

fasteners.
Front wheel bearing(s).
Worn or damaged suspension

component bushing.
Wheel/tires.
Loose, worn or damaged ball

joint(s).
*
*
Loose, worn or damaged

steering components.
* Front wheel alignment.
Shock absorber(s).
Spring(s).
Poor self center action *

of the steering
Ball joints.
Steering components.
Unequal front or rear toe
settings.
*
*
Steering wheel offcenter
Sway or roll
*
*
*
*
Overloaded, unevenly or
incorrectly loaded vehicle.
* Loose wheel nut(s).
*
*
*
necessary.
REFER to: Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension,
Removal and Installation).
CHECK and ADJUST the tire pressure. INSPECT the tire
for excessive wear.
Specifications).
REFER to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, General Procedures).
REFER to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00 Suspension
BALANCE the tires.
Check and install new spring(s) as necessary.
Removal and Installation) /
Shock Absorber (204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
CHECK and TIGHTEN the wheel nuts to specification.
Specifications).
CHECK and TIGHTEN the suspension fasteners to
specification.
REFER to: Specifications (204-01 Front Suspension,
Specifications).
CHECK the wheel bearings.
REFER to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension,
CHECK and INSTALL new components as necessary.
REFER to: Rear Lower Arm Bushing (204-01 Front
Suspension, Removal and Installation) /
Shock Absorber Bushing (204-01 Front Suspension,
Stabilizer Bar Link Bushing (204-01 Front Suspension,
CHECK the wheels/tires. BALANCE or INSTALL new
wheel/tires as necessary.
REFER to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
CHECK the Ball Joint(s).
REFER to: Front Suspension (204-01 Front Suspension,
CHECK and INSTALL new shock absorber(s) as
necessary.
Installation).
CHECK and INSTALL new springs as necessary.
Installation).
CHECK the Ball Joints.
REFER to: Suspension System (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
System - General Information, General Procedures) /
Rear Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System General Information, General Procedures).
CHECK and TIGHTEN the wheel nut(s) to specification.

Specifications).
* Coil spring(s).
* CHECK and INSTALL new coil springs as necessary.
* Loose front stabilizer bar or rear * CHECK and TIGHTEN the stabilizer bar to specification.
stabilizer bar.
Vehicle Leans to One

Side
Vibration/Noise
Wander
Worn lower suspension arm

stabilizer bar insulators.
Shock absorber(s).
Unevenly loaded or overloaded

vehicle.
* Front or rear suspension
components.
Specifications) /
Specifications (204-02 Rear Suspension, Specifications).
* INSTALL new lower suspension arm stabilizer bar as
necessary.
REFER to: Stabilizer Bar Link (204-01 Front Suspension,
Rear Stabilizer Bar Link (204-02 Rear Suspension,
* CHECK and INSTALL new shock absorber(s) as
necessary.
Installation).
* NOTIFY the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
*
Shock absorber(s).
Coil spring(s).
Incorrect ride height. Lateral tilt *

out of specification.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Tires/wheels.
Wheel bearings.
Wheel hubs.
Brake components.
Suspension components.
Unevenly loaded or overloaded
vehicle.
* Ball joint(s).
*
*
*
*
Front wheel bearing(s).

Loose, worn or damaged
suspension components.
* Loose suspension fasteners.
*
*
INSPECT the front and rear suspension systems.

REPAIR or INSTALL new suspension components as
necessary.
CHECK and INSTALL new shock absorber(s) as
necessary.
Installation).
CHECK and INSTALL new spring(s) as necessary.
Installation).
CHECK the ride height. INSTALL new spring(s) as
necessary.
Installation).
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (10004 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Diagnosis and
Testing).
CHECK the Ball Joint(s).

REFER to: Suspension System (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
CHECK the wheel bearings.
CHECK and INSTALL new suspension components as
necessary.
CHECK and TIGHTEN the suspension fasteners to
specification.
Specifications) /
Specifications (204-02 Rear Suspension, Specifications).
CHECK and INSTALL new steering components.
REFER to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension System General Information, Specifications) /
Front Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System General Information, General Procedures).
*
Wheel alignment (excessive total *
front toe-out).
Component Tests
Ball Joint Inspection
NOTE: The front suspension is shown in the following procedures. The inspection of the rear suspension upper ball joint
is similar.
1.

REFER to: Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
2.
Prior to carrying out any inspection of the ball joints, inspect the front wheel bearings.
3.
CAUTION: The safety stand beneath the suspension lower arm must only support the weight of the
suspension and not the full weight of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
components.
Position a safety stand beneath the front suspension lower arm or rear suspension lower arm to be tested.
4.
While an assistant pulls and pushes the top and bottom of the tire, observe the relative movement between the
ball joint and the front suspension lower arm. Any movement at or exceeding the specification indicates a worn
or damaged ball joint. Install a new wheel knuckle as necessary.
REFER to: Wheel Knuckle (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
5.
While an assistant pulls and pushes the top and bottom of the tire, observe the relative movement between the
ball joint and the front suspension upper arm or rear suspension upper arm. Any movement at or exceeding the
specification indicates a worn or damaged ball joint. Install a new upper arm as necessary.
REFER to: Upper Arm LH (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation) /
Upper Arm RH (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation) /
Upper Arm (204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
6.
Remove the safety stand.
7.
Lower the vehicle.
Suspension System - General Information - Front Toe Adjustment

General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the vehicle is on a flat level surface.
Make sure the tire pressures are within specification.
Make sure that only the manufacturers' recommended four wheel alignment equipment is used.
Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead position.

1.
For wheel alignment information, refer to the suspension

specification section.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-00,
Specifications).
2.
Check the tie rod ends, suspension joints, wheel bearings and
wheels and tires for damage, wear and free play.
Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly adjusted
components.
3.
Check and adjust tire pressures.
4.
Position the vehicle on a calibrated, level, vehicle lift.
5.
Release the vehicle parking brake.
6.
Using only four-wheel alignment equipment approved by Jaguar,

check the wheel alignment.
7.
NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.

To adjust, loosen the tie rod end lock nuts.
8.
CAUTION: Do not allow the gaiter to twist.

NOTE: Both tie rods must be rotated by an equal
amount.
Adjust the front toe.
9.
10.
Tighten the tie rod end lock nuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).

Suspension System - General Information - Rear Toe Adjustment

General Procedures
CAUTIONS:

1.

Specifications).
2.
Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly adjusted
components.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.

To adjust, loosen the toe link locknuts.
8.

amount.
Adjust the rear toe.
9.
10.
Tighten the toe link locknuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).

Suspension System - General Information - Four-Wheel Alignment

General Procedures
CAUTIONS:

1.

Specifications).
2.
Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly
adjusted components.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.

To adjust, loosen the toe link locknuts.
8.

amount.
Adjust the rear toe.
9.
Tighten the toe link locknuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).

10.

To adjust the caster, loosen the front lower arm lock
nuts.
11.

Rotate the caster adjustment cam bolt.
12.
CAUTION: Make sure the caster adjustment bolt does not

rotate while the lock nut is being tightened.
Tighten the caster adjustment cam bolt nut.
Tighten the nut and bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
13.
CAUTION: Adjustments made to the camber

setting will affect the front toe setting. Therefore , the
camber and toe may need to be adjusted at the same
time.
To adjust the camber, loosen the rear lower arm lock
nuts.
14.

Rotate the camber adjustment cam bolt.
15.
CAUTION: Make sure the camber adjustment bolt does not

rotate while the lock nut is being tightened.
Tighten the camber adjustment cam bolt nut.
Tighten the nut and bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
16.

To adjust, loosen the tie rod end lock nuts.
17.

amount.
Adjust the front toe.
18.
Tighten the tie rod end lock nuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).
19.

Published: 14-Feb-2012
Suspension System - General Information - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout
Check Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH similar.
1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle stands.

Raise the front of the vehicle.
2.
Remove the front wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
3.
Remove the 2 brake caliper support bolts.

Push the brake caliper pistons back to release the pads from the disc.
Detach the brake caliper and position to one side with suitable tie strap.
4.
Remove the disc.

Remove the 2 clips.
5.
Mount special
tool 100-053
on the lower
caliper support
bracket as
shown.
A
spacer
washer
may be
required
under
the tool.
Use the
brake
caliper
support
bolt and
suitable
nut.
6.
Position
the Dial
Test
Indicator
(DTI)
gauge
probe on
the hub
flange as
shown.
7.
Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to measure hub runout. hub runout must not exceed
0.015 mm.
8.
If the hub runout exceeds the limit, install a new hub and bearing.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation) /
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension,
9.
If the hub runout is within the limit install the removed components.
10.
tighten the brake caliper bolts to 115 Nm.
Suspension System - General Information - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout
Check Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
RH illustration shown, LH similar.
1.

2.
Remove the front wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
3.

Push the brake caliper pistons back to release the pads from the disc.
Detach the brake caliper and position to one side with suitable tie strap.
4.
Remove the disc.

Remove the 2 clips.
5.
Mount special
tool 100-053
on the lower
caliper support
bracket as
shown.
A
spacer
washer
may be
required
under
the tool.
Use the
brake
caliper
support
bolt and
suitable
nut.
6.
Position
the Dial
Test
Indicator
(DTI)
gauge
probe on
the hub
flange as
shown.
7.
Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to measure hub runout. hub runout must not exceed
0.015 mm.
8.
If the hub runout exceeds the limit, install a new hub and bearing.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation) /
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension,
9.
If the hub runout is within the limit install the removed components.
10.
Tighten brake caliper bolts to 115 Nm.
This section contains no data
Suspension System - General Information - Rear Wheel Bearing and

Wheel Hub Runout Check Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
NOTE: It is recommended that the DTI is capable of measurements of 0.005 mm.
1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle

stands.
Raise the rear of the vehicle.
2.
Remove the rear wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04
Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
3.

Push the brake pads back to release the
brake caliper from the disc.
Detach the brake caliper and position to
one side with suitable tie strap.
4.
Remove the disc.

Remove the 2 clips.
5.
Mount special tool 100-053 on the lower caliper

support bracket as shown.
A spacer washer may be required under the
tool.
Use the brake caliper support bolt and
suitable nut.
6.
CAUTION: Take care not to contact the studs.

Position the Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge probe
on the hub flange as shown.
7.
Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to

measure hub runout. Hub runout must not exceed 0.025 mm.
8.
If the hub runout exceeds the limit, install a new hub and
bearing.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing (204-02
Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
9.
If the hub runout is within the limit install the removed

components.
10.
Tighten the brake support caliper bolts to 103 Nm.
Front Suspension Torque Specifications
CAUTION: Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle on the suspension.
Description
Front lower arm to rear lower arm - nut *:
Stage 1
Stage 2
Front lower arm to subframe - nut *
Rear lower arm to subframe - nut *
Rear lower arm to wheel knuckle ball joint - nut *
Shock absorber to spring - nut:
Active shock absorber
Passive shock absorber
Shock absorber and spring assembly to lower arm bolt
Shock absorber and spring assembly to top mount nuts
Stabilizer bar clamp to subframe - bolt
Stabilizer bar link to lower arm - nut *
Stabilizer bar link to stabilizer bar - nut *
Upper arm ball-joint - nut *
Upper arm to subframe brackets - nut *
Wheel bearing and hub assembly to wheel knuckle bolts *
* New nut/bolt must be installed.
Nm
lb-ft
60
135 degrees in clockwise
direction
175
175
92
44
135 degrees - clockwise
direction
129
129
68
50
27
175
37
20
129
27
20
55
70
43
90
60
90
40
52
32
66
44
66
Front Suspension - Front Suspension

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Right Hand (RH) wheel hub and bearing assembly
RH wheel knuckle
Upper control arm bush (2 off)
RH upper control arm
RH top mount plate
RH spring and damper assembly
Stabilizer link
RH lower lateral control arm
Front subframe
10
Left Hand (LH) lower lateral control arm
Description
LH spring and damper assembly
11
-
Upper control arm bush (2 off)
13
LH top mount plate
14
LH upper control arm
15
LH wheel knuckle
16
LH wheel hub and bearing assembly
17
LH lower control arm
18
Mounting bracket (2 off)
19
Stabilizer bar
20
Stabilizer bar bush (2 off)
21
RH lower control arm
12
INTRODUCTION
The front suspension is of a fully independent design. The front suspension components are attached to the front subframe
and the vehicle body. The subframe is attached to the vehicle body with four long bolts which pass through bushes located in
the subframe.
The front suspension on each side comprises:
Upper control arm

Lower lateral control arm
Lower control arm
Wheel knuckle and hub assembly
Stabilizer bar
Spring and damper assembly.
UPPER CONTROL ARM
Item
Part Number
Description
Bush (2 off)
Ball joint and locknut
Upper control arm
The forged aluminum upper control arm is a wishbone design with three mounting points. The two inner mounting points are
fitted with bushes. The outer mounting is fitted with a ball joint which locates in a hole in the wheel knuckle and is secured
with a locknut.
The inclination of the upper control arm axis provides an anti-dive and anti-squat action during vehicle braking and
acceleration and also improves castor trail which in turn improves steering 'feel'.
LOWER LATERAL CONTROL ARM
Item
Part Number
Description
Bush - subframe attachment
Lower lateral control arm
Spring and damper assembly attachment
Insert - stabilizer link attachment
Lower control arm attachment
Wheel knuckle attachment
The forged aluminum lower lateral control arm is fitted with a bush in its inner end which locates between brackets on the
subframe. The arm is secured with an eccentric bolt, an eccentric washer and a locknut which allow for the adjustment of the
suspension camber geometry.
The outer end of the control arm has a tapered hole which locates on a ball joint fitted to the wheel knuckle. Two cast
brackets on the forward face of the control arm allow for the attachment of the lower control arm. A threaded insert is fitted
behind the two cast brackets and provides for the attachment of the stabilizer link with a bolt. A bush is fitted to a cross-hole
in the control arm which provides the location for the forked attachment of the spring and damper assembly.
LOWER CONTROL ARM
Item
Part Number
Hydrabush
Lower control arm
Spherical bearing
Description
The cast lower control arm is fitted with a hydrabush in its inner end which locates between brackets on the subframe. The
arm is secured with an eccentric bolt, an eccentric washer and a locknut which allow for adjustment of the castor and
camber geometry.
The outer end of the control arm is fitted with a spherical bearing and locates between the cast brackets on the lower lateral
control arm. The lower lateral control arm and lower control arm together form a wishbone design.
WHEEL KNUCKLE
Item
Part Number
Description
Upper control arm attachment
Ball joint locknut
Ball joint locknut
Bolt - hub attachment (2 off)
Torx bolt - hub attachment (2 off)
Steering tie rod ball joint attachment
Dust shield attachment
Ball joint - lower lateral arm attachment
Wheel hub and bearing assembly
10
Wheel knuckle
The cast aluminum wheel knuckle is a swan neck design which provides the attachment for the upper control arm and lower
lateral control arm. The lower lateral control arm locates on a non serviceable ball joint integral with the wheel knuckle. The
lower boss on the knuckle provides for the attachment of the steering gear tie-rod ball joint.
The wheel knuckle also provides the mounting locations for the wheel hub and bearing assembly, the wheel speed sensor,
the brake caliper and the brake dust shield, which is retained with 3 rivets.
The wheel hub and bearing assembly is a non-serviceable component that requires replacement as a complete assembly. A
magnetic encoder ring for the wheel speed sensor is incorporated into the wheel bearing. The assembly is secured to the
knuckle with 2 bolts and 2 Torx bolts.
www.JagDocs.com
STABILIZER BAR
Item
Part Number
Description
Stabilizer bar
Bolt (4 off)
Bracket (2 off)
Locknut (2 off)
Ball joint (2 off)
Stabilizer link (2 off)
Locknut (2 off)
Bolt (2 off)
Bush (2 off)
The stabilizer bar is attached to the front of the subframe with bushes and mounting brackets. The pressed steel brackets
locate over the bushes and are attached to the cross member with bolts screwed into threaded locations in the subframe.
The stabilizer bar has crimped, 'anti-shuffle' collars pressed in position on the inside edges of the bushes. The collars prevent
sideways movement of the stabilizer bar.
The stabilizer bar is manufactured from 32 mm diameter, manganese steel bar. Each end of the stabilizer bar curves
rearwards to attach to a ball joint on a stabilizer link. Each stabilizer link is secured to a bush in the lower lateral arm with a
bolt and locknut. The links allow the stabilizer bar to move with the wheel travel providing maximum effectiveness.
SPRING AND DAMPER ASSEMBLY
Item
Part Number
Description
Damper self locking nut
Top mount self locking nut (4 off)
Spring packer
Gaiter
Spring aid
Damper
Bolt
Spring
Upper spring seat
10
Top mount
The spring and damper assemblies are located between the lower lateral arm and the front suspension housing in the inner
wing. There are two damper variants:
A conventional oil damped damper.
On vehicles with the adaptive dynamics system, a continuously variable adaptive damper.
For additional information, refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Description
and Operation).
Different combinations of springs and dampers are available depending on the vehicle model. The conventional and adaptive
damper assemblies are of a similar construction.
The dampers are a monotube design with a spring seat welded onto the damper tube. The lower end of the damper has a
forked mounting with a cross hole and captive nut. The fork locates over the lower lateral control arm and is secured with a
bolt.
The damper functions by restricting the flow of oil through internal galleries in the damper piston, providing damping of
undulations in the road surface.
The damper piston is connected to a damper rod which is sealed at its exit point from the damper body. The threaded outer
end of the damper rod locates through a hole in the top mount. A self locking nut secures the top mount to the damper rod.
On adaptive dampers an electrical connector is incorporated into the outer end of the damper rod.
The damper rod is fitted with a spring aid which prevents the top mount making contact with the top of the damper body
during full suspension compression and also assists with the suspension tune.
The spring rate of the coil springs can differ between models and are color coded for identification. The coil spring locates on
a spring packer and a lower spring seat which is integral with the damper body. The spring locates in an upper spring seat
which is located on the underside of the top mount.
The top mount has four studs which locate through mating holes in the vehicle inner wing and are secured with self locking
nuts.
Front Suspension - Front Suspension

workshop manual.REFER to: (204-01)
Front Suspension (Description and Operation),
Front Suspension (Description and Operation),
Front Suspension (Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Damaged suspension dampers
3.
proceeding to the next step
4.
If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the following Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Evidence of fluid on suspension
damper
Possible Cause
Action
Fluid on damper from an external
Damper not faulty, do not
source
renew
Fluid leaking from damper
PINPOINT TEST A : DAMPER FLUID LEAK DIAGNOSIS

TEST CONDITIONS
A1: ASSESS LEAK
NOTE: Residual oil left over from the damper assembly process may create oil staining on the damper tube. This will
not affect the function of the damper.
NOTE: Slight seepage is considered normal.
Assess the extent of the oil leakage
1
Is the leakage serious enough to indicate that the damper seal has failed?
Yes
No
Damper not faulty, do not renew.
PINPOINT TEST B : CONFIRM LEAK

TEST CONDITIONS
B1: ROAD TEST
1
Clean all traces of oil from the damper
Drive the vehicle over a speed bump or similar ten times

2
Is any fluid visible on the outside of the damper?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : DAMPER STICKOUT TEST

TEST CONDITIONS
C1: DAMPER STICKOUT TEST
NOTE: If a significant quantity of fluid has leaked out of the damper, the dividing piston will be displaced upwards in
the tube by the pressure of the gas below it. This will limit the downward travel of the piston.
Remove the suspension strut assembly
1
REFER to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01, Removal
and Installation).
Remove the spring
Remove the bump stop
Push the damper piston fully into the damper tube
Measure and record the stickout dimension (the

distance between the damper tube cap and the
piston rod shoulder)
Is the stickout dimension greater than 12.0mm?

Yes
Damper unserviceable. Install a new suspension
damper. Enclose a record of the stickout dimension
with the returned part.
No
Damper serviceable. Re-assemble and re-install the
suspension strut
REFER to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01, Removal
and Installation).
Front Suspension - Front Shock Absorber

Removal and Installation
Removal
1.
WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported

only by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
2.
Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal
and Installation).
3.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball

joint rotating.
4.
5.
6.
CAUTION: Discard the nut.
CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolt.
Discard the nut.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the

component prior to removal.
Make sure that the shock absorber and
spring assembly is installed to the special

tool with the lower mount retaining nut
facing upwards.
12.
13.
CAUTIONS:
Take extra care when handling the

component.
Note the fitted position of the component

prior to removal.
Make sure that the top mount assembly
and isolator remain in position while

removing shock absorber.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Make sure that these components

are installed to the noted removal position.
Torque: 27 Nm
2.
3.
4.
5.
Torque: 27 Nm
6.
7.
Torque: 175 Nm
8.
Torque:
Stage 1: 60 Nm
Stage 2: 135
9.
Torque: 90 Nm
10.
11.

joint rotating.
1
Torque: 43 Nm
2
Torque: 70 Nm
12.
and Installation).
Front Suspension - Front Lower Arm

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the LH front wheel and tire.

3.
NOTE: Note the fitted position.

Release the forward lower control arm.
Remove the 2 bolts and discard the nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the forward lower control arm.

Install the bolt and tighten the new nut to 60 Nm (44
lb.ft) + 135 degrees.
Tighten the 14mm bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
2.
Install the wheel and tire.

3.

check the wheel alignment, and adjust if required.
Front Suspension - Rear Lower Arm

Removal
1.

2.

3.

joint rotating.
Disconnect the LH stabilizer bar link.
Remove and discard the 2 nuts.
4.
Disconnect the height sensor link.
5.
Release the forward lower control arm.

Remove the bolt and discard the nut.
6.
Release the shock absorber from the lower arm.

Remove the Torx bolt.
7.

Remove the lower arm nut and bolt; discard the
nut.
8.
CAUTION: Make sure the ball joint seal is not

damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the premature
failure of the joint.
Remove the LH lower arm.
Remove and discard the nut.
Using the special tool, release the ball joint from
the lower suspension arm.
Installation
1.
NOTE: Align to the position noted on removal.

Install the lower suspension arm.
Tighten the nut and bolt to 175 Nm.
2.
Install the forward lower control arm.

Install the bolt and tighten the new nut to 60 Nm + 135
degrees.
3.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball joint

rotating.
Install the lower arm ball joint
Clean the component mating faces.
Tighten the nut to 92 Nm.
4.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the component from

rotating.
Install the stabilizer bar link.
Tighten the nuts to 43 Nm.
5.
Connect the height sensor link.
6.

7.

check the wheel alignment, and adjust if required.
Front Suspension - Rear Lower Arm Bushing

Special Tool(s)
Rear lower arm bushing remover and installer
204-464
Rear lower arm bushing remover

204-333
Rear lower arm bushing installer

204-332

204-465

204-334
Removal
1.

2.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Lower Arm (204-01
Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
3.

Using the special tools, remove and discard the lower
arm rear bushings.
Installation
1.
Install the special tools to the rear lower arm.

Tighten the bolts.
2.

Position the bushing in the special tool.
3.
Using the special tools, partially install the lower arm

bushing.
4.
Change the special tools, then complete installation of

the bushing.
5.

Front Suspension - Shock Absorber Bushing

Special Tool(s)
Replacer support-bush
204-337
Replacer-bush
204-338
Remover-bush
204-336
Remover support-bush
204-335
Removal
1.

2.
Remove the front lower suspension arm.

3.
NOTE: Take note of the fitted position of the bush.

Using the special tools, remove the shock absorber
bushing.
Installation
1.
2.
Install the bushing into the special tool.

Using the special tools, install the shock absorber
bushing.
3.

Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar

Removal
1.

stands.
2.
and Installation).
3.
CAUTION: Discard the nuts.

On both sides.
1
Torque: 43 Nm
2
Torque: 70 Nm
4.
Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal
and Installation).
5.
6.
7.
Torque: 55 Nm
8.
9.
Installation
1.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar Link

Removal
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.
CAUTION: Discard the nuts.

1
Torque: 43 Nm
2
Torque: 70 Nm
Installation
1.
Front Suspension - Stabilizer Bar Link Bushing

Special Tool(s)
Bush installer
204-340
Bush remove
204-342
Support
204-341
Support
204-339
Removal
1.

2.

3.
Using the special tools, remove and discard the

stabilizer bar link bushing.
Installation
1.
2.
Using the special tools, install the stabilizer bar link

bushing.

Front Suspension - Upper Arm LH

Removal
1.
2.
Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery,

Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
3.
Refer to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal

and Installation).
4.
Refer to: Engine Control Module (ECM) (303-14B Electronic Engine

Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5.
Torque: 70 Nm
6.
Torque: 70 Nm
7.
Installation
1.
Front Suspension - Upper Arm RH

Removal
1.
2.

3.
Refer to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal

and Installation).
4.
Refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8

5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5.
Torque: 70 Nm
6.
Torque: 70 Nm
7.
Installation
1.
Front Suspension - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub V8 5.0L

Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

stands.
2.
Torque: 112 Nm
3.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
5.
CAUTION: Discard the bolts.

NOTE: Secure with cable ties.
Torque: 115 Nm
6.
7.
CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolts.
Make sure that the area around the

component is clean and free of foreign material.
Do not attempt to release the wheel hub by

hitting it with a hammer directly, loosen the wheel
hub retaining bolts partially before applying an
even amount of force to the head of each bolts to
release the wheel hub from the wheel knuckle.
Failure to follow this instruction may cause damage

to the component.
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may
occur, but the essential information is always
correct.
NOTE: Install the components to their original
fitted positions.
Torque: 90 Nm
Installation
1.
Front Suspension - Wheel Knuckle

Special Tool(s)
Ball joint splitter
204-327
Removal
1.

2.
Remove the hub assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front
Suspension, Removal and Installation).
3.
Remove the brake disc shield.

Remove the 3 rivets.
4.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the

component from rotating.
Disconnect the steering gear tie rod end ball joint.
Remove and discard the tie rod end
retaining nut.
5.

joint rotating.
Disconnect the upper arm from the wheel knuckle.
6.
CAUTION: Make sure the ball joint seal is not

damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the
premature failure of the joint.
joint rotating.
Remove the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tool, release the ball joint
from the lower suspension arm.
Installation
1.

rotating.
Install the wheel knuckle.
2.
Install the brake disc shield.

Install the rivets.
Repeat the above procedure for the other side.
3.

rotating.
Connect the upper arm and wheel knuckle.
4.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the component from

rotating.
Connect the tie-rod end ball joint.
5.
Install the hub assembly.

Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front
Rear Suspension Torque Specifications
Description
Halfshaft/hub - nut *
Lower arm to subframe - nut *
Lower arm to wheel knuckle - nut *
Shock absorber to spring - nut:
Active shock absorber
Passive shock absorber
Shock absorber and spring assembly to top mount - nuts
Shock absorber and spring assembly to lower arm - bolt
Stabilizer bar clamp to subframe - nut *
Stabilizer bar link to lower arm - nut *
Stabilizer bar link to stabilizer bar - nut *
Toe link to subframe - ball joint nut *
Toe link to wheel knuckle - nut *
Upper arm to subframe - nut *
Upper arm to wheel knuckle - ball-joint nut *
Wheel bearing to wheel knuckle - bolts
Nm
300
164
150
lb-ft
221
121
110
50
27
27
133
55
48
48
90
55
97
90
70
37
20
20
98
40
35
35
66
40
71
66
52
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Right Hand (RH) wheel hub and bearing assembly
RH upper control arm
RH spring and damper assembly
RH top plate
Bush - upper control arm
Left Hand (LH) top plate
LH spring and damper assembly
Stabilizer link
Toe-link (2 off)
10
Ball joint
11
LH wheel knuckle
12
LH wheel hub and bearing assembly
13
LH upper control arm
14
LH lower control arm
15
Bush - lower control arm
16
Bush - upper control arm
17
Mounting bracket (2 off)
18
Bush (2 off)
19
Stabilizer bar
20
Rear crossbeam
INTRODUCTION
The rear suspension is a double wishbone design which is attached to a rear crossbeam. The crossbeam is attached to the
vehicle body with 4 long bolts which pass through bushes located in the crossbeam.
The rear suspension on each side comprises:
Upper control arm

Lower control arm
Toe-link
Wheel knuckle and hub assembly
Stabilizer bar
Spring and damper assembly.
UPPER CONTROL ARM
Item
Part Number
1
2
Description
Bolt
Bush
Locknut
Bolt
Bush
Locknut
Upper control arm
Ball joint
Washer
10
Locknut
The cast aluminum upper control arm is a wishbone design with 3 mounting points. Two bushed mountings locate in brackets
on the crossbeam. The outer end has a ball joint which mates with the wheel knuckle.
LOWER CONTROL ARM
Item
Part Number
Bolt
Bush
Locknut
Bolt
Bush
Caged nut
Lower control arm
Spring and damper assembly attachment
Description
Stabilizer link attachment
10
Locknut
11
Bolt
The cast aluminum lower control arm is a wishbone design with 3 bushed mounting points. Two bushes locate between
brackets on the crossbeam and the outer bush locates in the wheel knuckle.
The rear of the control arm has mounting points for the spring and damper assembly and the stabilizer link.
TOE-LINK
Item
Part Number
Description
Locknut
Washer
Inner rod and ball joint
Locknut
Outer rod
Bolt
Outer ball joint
Locknut
The toe-link is located between the wheel knuckle and brackets on the rear crossbeam.
The toe-link comprises an inner rod with integral ball joint. The inner ball joint has a threaded spigot which locates in a
bracket on the crossbeam and is secured with a washer and locknut. The rod has an internal thread which accepts the outer
rod.
The outer rod has a ball joint at its outer end which is located between 2 brackets on the wheel knuckle, and is secured with
a bolt and locknut.
The length of the toe-link can be adjusted by rotating the inner and outer rods. This allows for adjustment of the toe angle
for the rear wheel. Once set the inner and outer rods can be locked in position by tightening a locknut against the inner rod.
WHEEL KNUCKLE
Item
Part Number
Description
Hub attachment bolt (4 off)
Upper control arm attachment
Wheel knuckle
Toe-link attachment
Wheel hub and bearing assembly
Half shaft nut
Brake dust shield attachment
Lower control arm attachment
Brake caliper attachment
The wheel knuckle is an aluminum casting which provides for the attachment of the upper and lower control arms and the
toe-link. The wheel knuckle also provides the mounting locations for the wheel hub and bearing assembly, the wheel speed
sensor, the brake caliper and the brake dust shield, which is secured with 3 rivets.
The wheel hub and bearing assembly is a non-serviceable component that requires replacement as a complete assembly. It
is secured to the wheel knuckle with 4 bolts. A magnetic encoder ring for the wheel speed sensor is incorporated into the
wheel bearing.
STABILIZER BAR
Item
Part Number
Description
Stabilizer bar
Bracket (2 off)
Bush (2 off)
Locknut (2 off)
Stabilizer link (2 off)
Locknut (2 off)
Caged nut (2 off)
Bolt (2 off)
8
The stabilizer bar is attached to the top of the crossbeam with 2 bushes and mounting brackets. The brackets are secured to
the crossbeam with bolts and caged nuts. The stabilizer bar has crimped, 'anti-shuffle' collars pressed in position on the
inside edges of the bushes. The collars prevent sideways movement of the stabilizer bar.
The stabilizer bar is manufactured from manganese steel and has a diameter of 17 mm (0.669 in.). The torsional rate of the
stabilizer bar differs between models, and is color coded for identification.
Each end of the stabilizer bar curves rearward to attach to a ball joint on each stabilizer link. Each link is attached via a
second ball joint to a cast bracket on the lower control arm which is secured with a locknut. The links allow the stabilizer bar
to move with the wheel travel providing maximum effectiveness.
The stabilizer bar is attached to the forward face of the chassis front subframe. The stabilizer bar is attached to the subframe
with 2 rubber bushes. Pressed steel brackets locate over the bushes and are attached to the cross member with bolts
screwed into threaded locations in the subframe.
SPRING AND DAMPER ASSEMBLY
Item
Part Number
Description
Damper rod self locking nut
Top mount self locking nut
Spring
Spring packer
Spring aid
Damper
Bolt
Gaiter
Upper spring seat
10
Top mount
The spring and damper assemblies are attached to cast brackets on the lower control arms and to the rear floor side
member assemblies via the 4 studs in the top plate. As on the front suspension, there are three variants of spring and
damper assembly:
A conventional oil damped damper.
On vehicles with the adaptive dynamics system, a continuously variable adaptive damper.
and Operation).
Different combinations of springs and dampers are available depending on the vehicle model. The conventional and adaptive
dampers are of a similar construction.
The dampers are a monotube design with a spring seat welded onto the damper tube. The lower end of the damper has a
bushed mounting which locates in the lower control arm and is secured with a bolt.
The damper functions by restricting the flow of hydraulic fluid through internal galleries in a piston, providing damping of
undulations in the road surface.
The damper piston is connected to a damper rod which is sealed at its exit point from the damper body. The threaded outer
end of the damper rod locates through a hole in the top mount. A self locking nut secures the top mount to the damper rod.
On adaptive dampers an electrical connector is incorporated into the outer end of the damper rod.
The damper rod is fitted with a spring aid which prevents the top mount making contact with the top of the damper body
during full suspension compression and also assists with the suspension tune.
The spring rate of the coil springs can differ between models and are color coded for identification. The coil spring locates on
a spring packer and a lower spring seat which is integral with the damper body. The spring locates in an upper spring seat
which is located on the underside of the top mount.
The top mount has 4 studs which locate through mating holes in the vehicle rear floor side member and are secured with self
locking nuts.
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension

workshop manual.REFER to: (204-02)
Rear Suspension (Description and Operation),
Rear Suspension (Description and Operation),
Rear Suspension (Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Damaged suspension dampers
3.
4.
If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the following Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Evidence of fluid on suspension
damper
Possible Cause
Action
Fluid on damper from an external
Damper not faulty, do not
source
renew
Fluid leaking from damper
PINPOINT TEST A : DAMPER FLUID LEAK DIAGNOSIS

TEST CONDITIONS
A1: ASSESS LEAK
NOTE: Residual oil left over from the damper assembly process may create oil staining on the damper tube. This will
not affect the function of the damper.
NOTE: Slight seepage is considered normal.
Assess the extent of the oil leakage
1
Is the leakage serious enough to indicate that the damper seal has failed?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST B : CONFIRM LEAK

TEST CONDITIONS
B1: ROAD TEST
1
Clean all traces of oil from the damper
Drive the vehicle over a speed bump or similar ten times

2
Is any fluid visible on the outside of the damper?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : DAMPER STICKOUT TEST

TEST CONDITIONS
C1: DAMPER STICKOUT TEST
NOTE: If a significant quantity of fluid has leaked out of the damper, the dividing piston will be displaced upwards in
the tube by the pressure of the gas below it. This will limit the downward travel of the piston.
Remove the suspension strut assembly
1
REFER to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
(204-02, Removal and Installation).

Remove the spring
Remove the bump stop
Push the damper piston fully into the damper tube
Measure and record the stickout dimension (the

distance between the damper tube cap and the
piston rod shoulder)
Is the stickout dimension greater than 12.0mm?

Yes
Damper unserviceable. Install a new suspension
damper. Enclose a record of the stickout dimension
with the returned part.
No
Damper serviceable. Re-assemble and re-install the
suspension strut
REFER to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
Rear Suspension - Lower Arm

Removal
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.
Torque: 103 Nm
4.
5.
WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is

installed.
Torque: 48 Nm
6.
Torque: 133 Nm
7.
CAUTION: Make sure the wheel knuckle is

supported. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in damage to the vehicle.
Torque: 150 Nm
8.
Torque: 192 Nm
9.
CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is

installed.
Torque: 192 Nm
Installation
1.
2.
Carry out the final suspension tightening with the vehicle on its
wheels.
Rear Suspension - Rear Shock Absorber

Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.
and Installation).
Vehicles with convertible top

3.
Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel - Convertible (501-05 Interior

Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Vehicles without convertible top

4.
Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel - 2-Door (501-05 Interior Trim

and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
All vehicles
5.
Torque: 27 Nm
6.
CAUTIONS:

prior to removal.
Make sure the alignment mark points

towards the front of the vehicle.
Torque: 133 Nm
7.
Make sure that the spring and shock
absorber assembly is installed to the spring

compressor with the alignment mark facing
upwards.
8.
9.
CAUTIONS:
Take extra care when handling the

component.

prior to removal.
Torque: 27 Nm
Installation
1.
Rear Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Bar V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L

Petrol
Removal
1.

2.
Remove the rear subframe assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and
Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
3.

Disconnect the LH rear ABS sensor.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Release the 2 clips.
Carefully tie the harness aside.
Repeat the above procedure for the other
side.
4.
Disconnect the electronic parking brake actuator

electrical connector.
Release the electrical connector.
5.
Remove the headlamp leveling sensor link.
6.

Release both stabilizer bar links.

Remove the bump stops.
7.
Remove the stabilizer bar bushings.

Release the bushings.
8.
With assistance, remove the rear stabilizer bar.

Raise the suspension arms, to release the
bar.
Installation
1.
With assistance, install the rear stabilizer bar.
2.
Install the stabilizer bar bushings.

Tighten to 55 Nm.
3.

Install the stabilizer bar links.
Install the bump stops.
Tighten to 48 Nm.
4.
Connect the electronic parking brake actuator

Secure the electrical connector.
5.
Install the height sensor link.
6.
Connect the LH rear ABS sensor.

Connect the electrical connector.
Carefully secure the clips.
side.
7.
Install the rear subframe.

Rear Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Bar Link

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the LH rear wheel and tire.

3.

joint rotating.
Remove the LH stabilizer bar link.
Installation
1.

rotating.
Install the stabilizer bar link.
Tighten the nuts to 48 Nm (35 lb.ft).
2.

Rear Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing

Special Tool(s)
204-250
Wheel bearing install and removal tool
204-269
Flange remover forcing screw
204-305
Remover, Wheel Bearing
204-726
Remover/Installer, Wheel Bearing
204-727A
Installer, Wheel Bearing
204-791
Installer, Wheel Bearing
205-491
Hub puller
205-491-1
Adapter nuts
205-725
Remover/Installer, Wheel Hub
Removal
1.

stands
2.
and Installation).
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to detach

the halfshaft from the hub assembly, failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the
halfshaft.
Special Tool(s): 205-491, 205-491-1, 204-269
10.

11.
Special Tool(s): 204-726, 205-725
12.
Special Tool(s): 204-305, 204-726, 205-725
13.
14.
Special Tool(s): 204-726
Installation
1.
NOTE: Make sure correct alignment of the bearing

is maintained when installing into the hub carrier.
Special Tool(s): 204-727A, 204-791
2.
3.
NOTE: Make sure the correct alignment of the

drive flange is maintained when installing into the
hub carrier and bearing assembly.
Special Tool(s): 204-726, 204-250
4.
CAUTION: The final tightening of the

suspension components must be carried out with
the vehicle on its wheels.
Torque: 96 Nm
5.
CAUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger

tight.
NOTE: The wheel hub nut is not tightened at this
stage.
6.

Torque: 190 Nm
7.

Torque: 63 Nm
8.
9.
Torque: 6 Nm
10.
Torque: 103 Nm
11.
CAUTION: Do not use air tools to install the

nut. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the component.
Torque: 300 Nm
12.
and Installation).
Rear Suspension - Tie Bar

Removal
1.

2.

3.

joint rotating.
Remove the tie rod.
Remove and discard the 2 tie-rod end
retaining nuts.
Installation
1.

rotating.
Install the tie rod.
Tigten the new inner nut to 90 Nm (59 lb.ft).
Tighten the new outer nut to 55 Nm (41 lb.ft).
2.

3.

check and adjust the wheel alignment.
Rear Suspension - Upper Arm

Special Tool(s)
Brake pedal hold down tool JDS 9013
Removal
1.

2.

3.
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint

finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove
the fluid and clean the area with water.
NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this
operation.
Disconnect the brake hose from the brake caliper.
Using the special tool, press and hold the
brake pedal.
Remove and discard the two sealing
washers.
4.
Release the rear wheel speed sensor lead.
5.
Remove the LH upper arm.

LH rear: Remove the upper arm 2 nuts and
bolts.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: The final tightening of the upper arm must be

carried out with the vehicle on it's wheels.
Install the upper arm.
Tighten the nuts and bolts to 97 Nm (72 lb.ft).
Tighten the nut to 90 Nm (66 lb.ft).
2.

Connect the brake hose to the brake caliper.
Install 2 new sealing washers.
Tighten the union to 35 Nm (26 lb.ft).
3.
Install the rear wheel speed sensor lead.
4.

5.
Bleed the brake system.

For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding
(206-00 Brake System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Wheels and Tires Wheel and Tire Specification
NOTE: Spare wheel assembly not fitted with runflat tires.

NOTE: As tire fitment can vary in individual markets, consult the vehicle handbook or tire label for further information.
Wheel Size
8.5" x 18"
9.5"v x 18"
8.5" x 19"
8.5" x 19" (runflat)
9.5" x 19"
9.5" x 19" (runflat)
8.5" x 20"
9.5" x 20"
4" x 18"
Tire Type
Continental Sport Contact 2
Continental Sport Contact 2
Dunlop Sport 01
Dunlop Sport 01 DSST
Dunlop Sport 01
Dunlop Sport 01 DSST
Dunlop Sport Maxx Directional
Dunlop Sport Maxx Directional
Pirelli (spare)
Tire Size
245/45R 18 96Y
275/40R 18 99Y
245/40R 19 94Y
245/40R 19 94Y
275/35R 19 96Y
275/35R 19 96Y
255/35R 20 97Y
285/30R 20 99Y
T135/80R 18 104M
Tire Pressures
Description
All Derivatives
Front
2.1 bar (30 lb/in)
Tire Pressure
Rear
2.3 bar (33 lb/in)
Space Saver Spare

4.2 bar (60 lb/in)
Description
Wheel nuts
Tire low pressure sensor
Nm
125
6.5
lb-ft
92
5
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires

INTRODUCTION
A number of alloy wheels are available ranging from 18 in. to 20 in. diameter. The rim widths are 8.5 or 9.0 in. for front
wheels and 9.5 or 10.5 in. for rear wheels. An alloy space saver wheel is a standard fitment, except for vehicles fitted with
run-flat tires.
A Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is also available as a standard or optional fitment dependant on market. The
TPMS is a driver warning system if a tire pressure is outside predetermined thresholds.
A 'run-flat' tire option is available with the 19 in. wheel option. Vehicles fitted with these tires have the TPMS fitted as
standard and are not supplied with a spare wheel, vehicle jack or wheel brace.
WHEELS
Item
Part Number
Description
Venus (8.5J X 18 Front/9.5J X 18 Rear)
Carelia (8.5J X 19 Front/9.5J X 19 Rear)
Sabre - Run-flat tires (8.5J X 19 Front/9.5J X 19 Rear)
Jupiter (8.5J X 19 Front/9.5J X 19 Rear)
Senta (8.5J X 20 Front/9.5J X 20 Rear)
Cremona (8.5J X 20 Front/9.5J X 20 Rear)
Vortex (9.0J X 20 Front/10.5J X 20 Rear)
Space saver wheel (4J X 18)
TIRES
Tires are available in a number of sizes and tread patterns dependent on vehicle specification. Tire sizes are as follows:
T135/80R18 (space saver wheel)

245/45ZR18 Front / 275/40ZR18 Rear
245/40ZR19 Front / 275/35ZR19 Rear
255/35ZR20 Front / 285/30ZR20 Rear
255/35ZR20 Front / 295/30ZR20 Rear.
WARNING: Tires should be inflated to the recommended pressures (shown on a label on the 'B' pillar) only when the
tires are cold (ambient temperature). If the tires have been subjected to use or exposed to direct sunlight, move the vehicle
into a shaded position and allow the tires to cool before checking/adjusting the pressures.
Tire Changing
NOTE: The TPMS valve should be serviced using the suitable service kit, each time the tyre is dismounted, to ensure an air
tight seal. Attention should be made to the detail of fitting this kit.
On vehicles fitted the TPMS, care must be taken when removing and refitting tires to ensure that the tire pressure sensor is
not damaged.
Vehicles fitted with TPMS can be visually identified by an external metal locknut and valve of the tire pressure sensor on the
road wheels. Vehicles without TPMS will have rubber tire valve.
Item
Part Number
Description
Tire valve and pressure sensor
Tire fitting/removal tool initial start position
High tire and bead tension area
Low tire and bead tension area
When removing the tire, the bead breaker must not be used within 90 degrees of the tire valve in each direction on each
side of the tire.
When using the tire removal machine, the fitting arm start position must be positioned as shown in the tire changing
illustration for each side of the tire. The wheel can then be rotated through 180 degrees in a counter-clockwise direction.
This will relieve tension from the tire bead allowing the remaining 180 degrees of the tire to be manually pulled from the rim.
When refitting the tire, position the fitting arm as shown. Rotate the tire and take care that the bead on the low tension side
of the tire does not damage the sensor.
Run-Flat Tires
Run-flat tires can be handled, fitted and removed using the same principles as used for normal low profile and highperformance tires, with two exceptions:
They are always fitted with tire pressure sensors
They have thicker bead cores and more rigid sidewalls which require special care when being mounted on the rims.
It is recommended that the tire fitting machine is fitted with plastic rollers for the upper and lower bead. This will ensure that
the bead is removed gently, protecting the rims and the tire pressure sensors.
Adequate amounts of special fitting lubricant must be used to ensure that the sidewalls move with the minimum exertion and
locate on the rim flange correctly.
Run-flat tires can be identified by the marking 'RSC' on the tire sidewall.
NOTE: Vehicles fitted with run-flat tires are not supplied with a spare wheel, vehicle jack or wheel brace.
TREAD Act - NAS Only

Vehicles supplied to the North American markets must comply with the legislation of the Transport Recall Enhancement,
Accountability and Documentation (TREAD) act. Part of the requirement of the TREAD act is for the vehicle to display a label
which defines the recommended tire inflation pressure, load limits and maximum load of passengers and luggage weight the
vehicle can safely carry. This label will be specific to each individual vehicle and will be installed on the production line. The
label is positioned on the driver's side 'B' pillar on NAS vehicles and the inside rear face of the LH door on Canadian
specification vehicles.
This label must not be removed from the vehicle. The label information will only define the specification of the vehicle as it
came off the production line. It will not include dealer or owner fitted accessory wheels and tires of differing size from the
original fitment.
If the label is damaged or removed for body repair, it must be replaced with a new label specific to that vehicle. A new label
is requested from Jaguar parts and will be printed specifically for the supplied VIN of the vehicle.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Tire pressure sensor (4 off)
Initiator (4 off)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) receiver
TPMS module
OVERVIEW
The TPMS is a driver assistance system which assists the driver to maintain the tire pressures at the optimum level. The
TPMS is a standard fitment on North American Specification (NAS) vehicles and an optional fitment in other markets. The
TPMS system has the following benefits:
Improve fuel consumption

Maintain ride and handling characteristics
Reduce the risk of rapid tire deflation - which may be caused by under inflated tires
Comply with legislation requirements in relevant markets.
CAUTION: The TPMS is not intended as a replacement for regular tire pressure and tire condition checks and should be
considered as additional to good tire maintenance practices.
The TPMS measures the pressure in each of the tires on the vehicle (the space saver spare wheel is not monitored) and
issues warnings to the driver if any of the pressures deviate from defined tolerances.
NOTE: During a 'blow-out' a very rapid reduction in pressure is experienced. The system is not intended to warn the driver of
a 'blow-out', since it is not possible to give the driver sufficient warning that such an event is occurring, due to its short
duration. The design of the TPMS is to assist the driver in keeping the tires at the correct pressure, which will assist to
reduce the likelihood of a tire 'blow-out' occurring.
The controlling software for the TPMS is located within a TPMS module. The software detects the following:
the tire pressure is below the recommended low pressure value - under inflated tire
the position of the tire on the vehicle.
The system comprises a TPMS module, a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver, 4 initiators and 4 tire pressure sensors (the space
saver spare wheel is not fitted with a sensor).
The TPMS module is located behind the Left Hand (LH) rear passenger seat, behind the Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) and the
TPMS RF receiver is located on the AJB mounting bracket. The front initiators are positioned at the front of the wheel arches,
behind the fender splash shields. The rear initiators are positioned at the rear of the rear wheel arches, behind the fender
splash shields.
The 4 initiators are hard wired to the TPMS module. The initiators transmit 125 KHz Low Frequency (LF) signals to the tire
pressure sensors which respond by modifying the mode status within the RF transmission. The 315 or 433 MHz RF signals
are detected by the RF receiver which is connected directly to the TPMS module. The received RF signals from the tire
pressure sensors are passed to the TPMS module and contain identification, pressure, temperature and acceleration
information for each wheel and tire.
The TPMS module communicates with the instrument cluster via the medium speed CAN bus to provide the driver with
appropriate warnings. The TPMS module also indicates status or failure of the TPMS or components.
Tire Location and Identification

The TPMS can identify the position of the wheels on the vehicle and assign a received tire pressure sensor identification to a
specific position on the vehicle, for example FL (front left), FR (front right), RL (rear left) and RR (rear right). This feature is
required because of the different pressure targets and threshold between the front and rear tires.
The wheel location is performed automatically by the TPMS module using an 'auto-location' function. This function is fully
automatic and requires no input from the driver. The TPMS module automatically re-learns the position of the wheels on the
vehicle if the tire pressure sensors are replaced or the wheel positions on the vehicle are changed.
The TPMS software can automatically detect, under all operating conditions, the following:
one or more new tire pressure sensors have been fitted

one or more tire pressure sensors have stopped transmitting
TPMS module can reject identifications from tire pressure sensors which do not belong to the vehicle
two 'running' wheels on the vehicle have changed positions.
If a new tire pressure sensor is fitted on any 'running' wheel, the module can learn the new sensor identification
automatically when the vehicle is driven for more than 15 minutes at a speed of more than 20 km/h (12.5 mph).
The tire learn and location process is ready to commence when the vehicle has been stationary or travelling at less than 12
mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. This is known as 'parking mode'. The learn/locate process requires the vehicle to be driven
at speeds of more than 12 mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. If the vehicle speed reduces to below 12 mph (20 km/h), the
learn process timer is suspended until the vehicle speed increases to more than 12 mph (20 km/h), after which time the
timer is resumed. If the vehicle speed remains below 12 mph (20 km/h) for more than 15 minutes, the timer is set to zero
and process starts again.
If the tire pressure sensors fitted to the running wheels vehicle are changed, the module can learn the new sensor
identifications automatically. The learn function requires no manual intervention by the driver.
Spare Tire Identification

Tire pressure sensors are not fitted to the space saver spare wheel and therefore the spare wheel is not monitored.
Initiators
Four initiators are fitted to the vehicle. The front initiators are located near the front of the front wheel arches, behind the
fender splash shields. The rear initiators are located at the rear of the rear wheel arches, behind the fender splash shields.
Each initiator has a connector which connects to the vehicle body harness.
The initiator is a passive, LF transmitter. The initiators transmit their signals which are received by the tire pressure sensors,
prompting them to modify their mode status.
The TPMS module energises each initiator in turn using LF drivers. The corresponding tire pressure sensor detects the LF
signal and responds by modifying the mode status within the RF transmission.
Tire Pressure Sensor
The TPMS uses active tire pressure sensors which are located on each wheel, inside the tire cavity. The sensor incorporates
the tire valve and is secured in the wheel by a nut on the outside of the wheel. The sensor contains a Printed Circuit Board
(PCB) which houses a Positive Temperature Co-efficient (PTC) sensor, a Piezo pressure sensor. a radio receiver and
transmitter and a lithium battery.
The tire pressure sensors use the PTC sensor and the Piezo sensor to periodically measure the pressure and temperature of
the air inside the tire. The data is transmitted by RF data signals at either 315 MHz or 433 MHz dependant on market
requirements.
The RF transmission from the sensor contains a unique identification code in its transmission data. This allows the TPMS to
identify the wheel on the vehicle. If the sensor is replaced on a 'running' wheel, the new sensor identification will be learnt
when the vehicle is driven at speed of more than 20 km/h (12.5 mph) for 15 minutes.
The tire pressure sensor can also detect when the wheel is rotating. In order to preserve battery power, the sensor uses
different transmission rates when the wheel is stationary or moving.
The care points detailed in 'Tire Changing' earlier in this section must be followed to avoid damage to the sensor. If a new
sensor is fitted, a new nut, seal and washer must also be fitted and the sensor nut tightened to the correct torque as given in
the Service Repair Manual.
Instrument Cluster Indications
Item
Part Number
Description
Low tire pressure warning indicator
Message centre
The warning indications to the driver are common on all vehicles fitted with TPMS. The driver is alerted to system warnings
by a low tire pressure warning indicator in the instrument cluster and an applicable text message in the message centre.
The TPMS module passes system status information to the instrument cluster on the medium speed CAN bus. The
instrument cluster then converts this data into illumination of the warning indicator and display of an appropriate message.
When the ignition is switched on, the warning indicator is illuminated for 3 seconds for a bulb check.
NOTE: If the vehicle is not fitted with the TPMS, the warning indicator will not illuminate.
The instrument cluster checks, within the 3 second bulb check period, for a CAN bus message from the TPMS. During this
time the TPMS performs internal tests and CAN bus initialisation. The warning indicator will be extinguished if the TPMS
module does not issue a fault message or tire pressure warning message.
If a TPMS fault warning message is detected by the instrument cluster at ignition on, the warning indicator will illuminate on
vehicles up to 2007.25MY and will flash on vehicles from 2007.25MY for 72 seconds after the 3 second bulb check period and
then remain permanently illuminated.
If a tire pressure warning message is detected by the instrument cluster at ignition on, the warning indicator will extinguish
briefly after the 3 second bulb check period, before re-illuminating to indicate a tire pressure warning.
The following table shows the warning indicator functionality for given events:
Event
Instrument Cluster Indications
Low pressure warning limit reached in one Warning indicator illuminated. 'CHECK TYRE PRESSURE' message displayed and
wheel
applicable tire highlighted on display.
Low pressure warning limit reached in one Warning indicator illuminated. 'CHECK ALL TYRE PRESSURES' message displayed.
or more wheels in low speed mode (only if
programmed or learning)
TPMS fault
On vehicles up to 2007.25MY - Warning indicator permanently illuminated. On
vehicles from 2007.25MY - Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then
permanently illuminated. 'TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message displayed.
No transmission from a specific tire
Warning indicator illuminated. 'TYRE NOT MONITORED' message displayed and
pressure sensor or Specific tyre pressure
Amber LED flashes for 72 seconds. Amber LED illuminated at next and
sensor fault
subsequent ignition on cycle.
No transmission from more than one tyre
Warning indicator illuminated. 'TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message
pressure sensor or More than one tyre
displayed and Amber LED flashes for 72 seconds. Amber LED illuminated at next
pressure sensor fault
and subsequent ignition on cycle.
CAN signals missing
On vehicles up to 2007.25MY - Warning indicator permanently illuminated. On
vehicles from 2007.25MY - Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then
permanently illuminated. 'TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message displayed.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; F = RF Transmission; N = Medium speed CAN bus; W = LF Transmission
Item
Part Number
Battery
Megafuse (175A)
Megafuse (175A)
Central Junction Box (CJB)
Auxiliary junction box
TPMS module
Description
TPMS receiver
7
-
Initiators
Tire pressure sensors
10
Instrument cluster
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Each time the vehicle is driven the TPMS module activates each initiator in turn to transmit a LF 125 KHz signal to each tire
pressure sensor. The LF signal is received by the tire pressure sensor which responds by transmitting a 315 or 433 MHz
(depending on market) signal which is received by the RF receiver. The signal contains coded data which corresponds to
sensor identification, air pressure, air temperature and acceleration data and is passed to the TPMS module.
When the vehicle has been parked for more than 15 minutes and then driven at a speed of more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h),
the initiators fire in turn for 6 seconds on all 433 MHz vehicles or for 18 seconds on 315 MHz vehicles in the following order:
Front left
6 second pause (for the TPMS module to detect a response from the tire pressure sensor)
Front right
6 second pause
Rear right
6 second pause
Rear left
6 second pause.
Each tire pressure sensor responds in turn which allows the TPMS module to establish the sensor positions at the start of the
drive cycle. This process is repeated up to three times but less if the sensor positions are already known. The process is
known as 'Auto Location' and takes 2 to 4 minutes to complete.
During this period the tire pressure sensors transmit at regular intervals, once every 5 seconds (once every 15 seconds on
315 MHz vehicles). For the remainder of the drive cycle the tire pressure sensors transmit once every 60 seconds or more
often if a change of tire pressure is sensed until the vehicle stops and the TPMS returns to the parking mode.
Once the wheel positions have been established, the initiators stop transmitting the LF signal and do not transmit again until
the vehicle has been parked for more than 15 minutes.
The warning appears in the instrument cluster message centre when the inflation pressure has fallen to 25% of the nominal
pressure. The displayed message will also include the position(s) of the affected wheel(s) displayed on a vehicle graphic.
The TPMS enters 'Parking Mode' after the vehicle speed has been less than 20 km/h (12.5 mph) for 15 minutes. In parking
mode the tire pressure sensors transmit a coded RF signal once every 13 hours. If the tire pressure decreases by more than
0.06 bar (1 lbf/in2), the sensor will transmit more often if pressure in the tire is being lost.
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires

For a detailed description of the wheels and tires, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Description and Operation).
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does
not guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor
vehicle.
1.
Verify the customer complaint. As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist in
diagnosing the cause(s). Confirm which of the following two warning types (A or B) exist for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System when the ignition status is switched from 'OFF' to 'ON'
(A) Check Tire Pressure Warnings. A low tire pressure warning will continuously illuminate the low
tire pressure warning lamp. This warning may be accompanied by a text message such as CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE (refer to owner literature). The manufacturer approved diagnostic system does NOT need to
be used. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are not generated with this type of warning. To extinguish this
warning it is essential that, with the ignition 'ON', all vehicle tires (including the spare) are to be set to
the correct pressure as stated in the vehicle handbook or as indicated on the placard label in the
passenger/driver door aperture. It is not necessary to drive the vehicle to clear 'check tire
pressure' warnings - just changing the tire pressure causes the tire low pressure sensor to
transmit new data.
NOTE: The tire pressures should be set by:
Using a calibrated tire pressure gauge
With 'cold' tires (vehicle parked in the ambient temperature for at least one hour, not in a garage
with an artificial ambient temperature)

NOTE: If the tire pressure warning does not clear within two minutes, it is likely that the gauge is not
correctly calibrated or the tires are 'warm'. Carry out the following steps until the warning has cleared:
Increase the tire pressures by 3psi
Wait a further two minutes
When the tires are at ambient temperature and a calibrated gauge is available, reset the tire
pressures to the correct pressure.

NOTE: Tire pressure adjustments are part of routine owner maintenance. Tire pressure adjustments that
are required due to a lack of owner maintenance are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.
(B) System Fault Warnings. When a system fault is detected, the low tire pressure warning lamp will
flash for approximately 75 seconds prior to being continuously illuminated. Visually inspect for obvious
signs of damage and system integrity. Check for the presence of tire low pressure sensors on all four
wheels (note: a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one).
2.
Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
NOTE: If the tester fails to communicate with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module, the following actions are
recommended:
Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse, inspect and re-install (if intact). Test to see if
communications have been re-established.

Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System ignition fuse (if applicable), inspect and re-install (if intact). Test to
see if communications have been re-established.

With ignition status set to 'ON', refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Tire Pressure Monitoring
System module for power, ignition and ground supplies .

Carry out CAN network integrity test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
DTC Index
CAUTION: When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit,
part number 3548-1358-00
NOTE: If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to
the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component.
NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. If this is the case, match the
five digits from the scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits
give extra information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
NOTE: When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three decimal
places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM
leads into account.
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
NOTE: If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may
be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
DTC
Description
C1A56- Left Front Tire Pressure
31
Sensor and Transmitter
Assembly-no signal
68
Assembly-event
information

91
Assembly-parametric

93
Assembly-no operation
C1A5711
C1A5712
C1A5713
C1A5831
Left Front Initiator-circuit

short to ground
short to battery
open
Right Front Tire Pressure
Assembly-no signal
C1A58- Right Front Tire Pressure

68
Assembly-event
information

91
Assembly-parametric

93
C1A5911
C1A5912
Right
circuit
Right
circuit
Front Initiatorshort to ground

Front Initiatorshort to battery
Possible Cause
Missing, incompatible or
defective tire low pressure

sensor or radio frequency
receiver
Information only - vehicle
exposed to extreme
temperature environment
and/or tire low pressure
sensor low battery voltage
event
has reported out of range
information for pressure,
temperature or
acceleration
No tire low pressure
sensor can be localized at
this position due to an
initiator or tire low
pressure sensor
malfunction
Left front initiator circuit
is short to ground
is short to power
open
receiver
exposed to extreme
event
temperature or
acceleration
pressure sensor
malfunction
Right front initiator circuit
is short to ground
is short to power
Action
GO to Pinpoint Test F.
No action required.
Replace defective tire low pressure sensor. Refer

to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
GO to Pinpoint Test G.
GO to Pinpoint Test B. Refer to Pinpoint test B1

GO to Pinpoint Test B. Go to Pinpoint test B2
GO to Pinpoint Test B. Go to Pinpoint test B9
No action required.
Replace defective tire low pressure sensor. refer

GO to Pinpoint Test C. Go to Pinpoint test C1

C1A59Right Front Initiatorcircuit open

13
C1A60- Left Rear Tire Pressure
31
Assembly-no signal
68
Assembly-event
information

91
Assembly-parametric

93
C1A6111
C1A6112
C1A6113
C1A6231
Left Rear Initiator-circuit

short to ground
short to battery
open
Right Rear Tire Pressure
Assembly-no signal
C1A62- Right Rear Tire Pressure

68
Assembly-event
information

91
Assembly-parametric

93
C1A6311
C1A6312
C1A6313
C1A6468
Right Rear Initiatorcircuit short to ground

Right Rear Initiatorcircuit short to battery
Right Rear Initiatorcircuit open
Spare Wheel Tire
Pressure Sensor and
Transmitter Assemblyevent information
C1A6491
Spare Wheel Tire

Pressure Sensor and
Transmitter Assemblyparametric
C1A6493
Spare Wheel Tire

Pressure Sensor and
Transmitter Assembly-no
operation
C1D19- External Receiver Data
open
receiver
exposed to extreme
event
temperature or
acceleration
pressure sensor
malfunction
Left rear initiator circuit
short to ground
short to power
open
receiver
exposed to extreme
event
temperature or
acceleration
pressure sensor
malfunction
Right rear initiator circuit
short to ground
short to power
open
exposed to extreme
event
temperature or
acceleration
receiver
Tire pressure monitoring

No action required.
Replace defective tire low pressure sensor, refer

GO to Pinpoint Test D. Go to Pinpoint test D1

No action required.

GO to Pinpoint Test E. Go to Pinpoint test E1

No action required.

GO to Pinpoint Test H.
11
Line-circuit short to
ground
C1D1912
External Receiver Data

Line-circuit short to
battery
C1D1987
External Receiver Data

Line-missing message
U0010Medium Speed CAN

88
Communication Bus-bus
off
U0140- Lost communication with
00
body control module-no
sub type information
U0142- Lost Communication With
00
Body Control Module "B"
-no sub type information
U015500
Lost Communications
With Instrument Panel
Cluster (IPC) Control
Module-no sub type
information
00
HVAC Control Module-no
system radio frequency

receiver or data line
circuit is short to ground
GO to Pinpoint Test I.
circuit is short to power
Radio Frequency reception
GO to Pinpoint Test J.
blocked
receiver faulty
circuits open circuit
sensors
CAN bus fault
Carry out CAN network integrity tests. Refer to the
electrical wiring diagrams and check CAN network
for short, open circuit.
CAN bus fault
Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
Central Junction Box fault Central Junction Box power and ground supplies
for short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
integrity tests.
CAN bus fault
Auxiliary Junction Box
Auxiliary Junction Box power and ground supplies
fault
integrity tests.
CAN bus fault
Instrument cluster fault
instrument cluster power and ground supplies for
short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
integrity tests.
CAN bus fault
Climate control module
U0300- Internal Control Module

00
Software Incompatibilityno sub type information
U041500
Invalid Data Received

From Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) Control
Module-no subtype
information
U042400

From HVAC Control
Module-no sub type
information
U1A14- CAN Initialisation Failure49
internal electronic failure
U300055
Control Module-not
configured
U3000- Control Module-missing

message
87
U300281
Number - invalid serial
data received

climate control module power and ground supplies
fault
integrity tests.
Incompatible tire pressure Check correct tire pressure monitoring system
monitoring system
module is installed to vehicle specification,
module for vehicle CAN
otherwise suspect the Auxiliary Junction Box.
network
Invalid data received from Check Anti-Lock Braking System control module
the Anti-Lock Braking
and Instrument Cluster for related DTCs and refer
System Control Module to the relevant DTC Index. Carry out CAN network
CAN bus fault
integrity tests.
Anti-Lock Braking System
fault
HVAC control module fault Check climate control module for related DTCs and
refer to relevant DTC Index.
system module fault

Install a new tire pressure monitoring module.

Refer to the new module/component installation
note at the top of the DTC Index.
Check and amend the car configuration file.
system configuration data

is invalid
Tire pressure monitoring Check the Auxiliary Junction Box for related DTCs
system configuration data and refer to the relevant DTC Index. Carry out
not received
CAN network integrity test.
NOTE: This DTC indicates that the tire pressure
system module and
monitoring system module is not the original part
vehicle VIN mis-match
installed to the vehicle at the factory/dealer and
could have been substituted. Refer to the note
above the DTC index about replacing components
which may remain under manufacturer warranty.
Re-install the original or a new tire pressure
monitoring system control module.
Component Tests
Wheels and Tires
For wheel and tire specification information (pressures, torques, etc).
When replacing wheels or tires, local legislation regarding health and safety must be complied with.
If the vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitoring System installed, only Jaguar approved wheels and tires should be used. If
the wheel and tire size is changed (for example from R18 to R20) the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module should
be updated with the correct pressure information appropriate to the new wheel and tire set. Update the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System module using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
As a general guideline, only replace tires in pairs or as a set, and only with tires of equivalent size and specification.
Confirm the symptoms of the customer complaint.
As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist in diagnosing the cause(s).
1.
Before a road test, carry out a basic inspection to make sure the vehicle is safe and legal to drive.
Basic inspection
Correct tire inflation

Legal tire tread depth
Cuts/Bulges in tire sidewall(s)
Tire ply separation
Embedded objects
Wheel rim damage
Correct tire installation (specification, direction of rotation, etc)
Any obvious distortion of the tire (flat/high spots)
Worn/Damaged steering or suspension components
Road test
If the results of the basic inspection are acceptable, carry out a road test to confirm the symptoms.
To reproduce the symptoms, test the vehicle on similar roads to those on which the fault occurs and at similar speeds
(provided it is legal to do so).
If the vibration or noise can be reproduced, note the speed at which it occurs and see if it is possible to drive through
the symptom, meaning, is it possible to alter the fault by driving faster or slower than the speed at which it occurs?
If it is possible, it is likely that the fault is caused by an imbalance in the wheel or tire.
If the vibration or noise gets worse as the vehicle speed increases, it is likely that the fault is caused by distortion in the
wheel or tire, or worn or damaged components.
Distortion checks
Check for distortion by raising the vehicle so that the wheels are free and placing an axle stand or similar fixed object
next to each wheel in turn.
If the stand is placed at the tread of the tire, the tire can be checked for ovality by turning the wheel by hand and
checking for high or low spots where the gap between the tread and the stand increases or reduces.
If the stand is placed next to the wheel rim or tire sidewall, the wheel and tire can be checked for run-out in a similar
way.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : C1D1911 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER
DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
TEST CONDITIONS
A1: C1D1911 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
1
Ignition off.
2
Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, CA131.
Measure the resistance between

CA131, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Negative terminal
Is the resistance less than 5 Ohms?

Yes
GO to A2.GO to A2.
No
GO to A3.GO to A3.
A2: C1D1911 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector,
1
CA109.
2
CA131, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to A4.GO to A4.
A3: C1D1911 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
TO GROUND
Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, CA131.
1
2
Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system run On Demand Self Test (0x0202).
Is the DTC C1D1911 set?

Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
Investigate possible cause of intermittent failure.
A4: C1D1911 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
TO GROUND
Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector,
1
CA109.
2
3

Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module.
No
PINPOINT TEST B : LEFT FRONT LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

TEST CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1
Ignition off.
2
Disconnect the left hand front low-frequency initiator

electrical connector, FB013.
Measure the resistance between:

FB013, harness side
Pin 2
Battery
Negative terminal
Is the resistance less than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to B5.
No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
1
FB013, harness side
Pin 2
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
GO to B6.
No
GO to B3.
B3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1
FB013, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
GO to B7.
No
GO to B4.
B4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
1
FB013, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
GO to B8.
No
GO to B9.
B5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module
1
connector, CA072.

FB013, harness side
Pin 2
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. This circuit contains
intermediate connectors, FB001 and FL070. For additional
information, refer to the wiring diagram. Clear the DTC
and run an On Demand Self Test (ODST) using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
rectification.
No
INSTALL a new Tire Pressure Monitoring System module.
REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module Convertible (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module - 2Door (Removal and Installation).
1
connector, CA072.

FB013, harness side
Pin 2
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
rectification.
No
1
connector, CA072.

FB013, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
rectification.
No
1
connector, CA072.

FB013, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
rectification.
No
B9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
1
CA072, harness side
Pin 14
FB013, harness side

Pin 2
Is the resistance greater than 5 ohms?

Yes
REPAIR the high resistance circuit. This circuit contains
rectification.
No
GO to B10.
B10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
1
CA072, harness side
Pin 13
FB013, harness side

Pin 1

Yes
rectification.
No
INSTALL a new left hand front low-frequency initiator.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front
Antenna (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
PINPOINT TEST C : RIGHT FRONT LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

TEST CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1
Ignition off.
2
Disconnect the right hand front low-frequency initiator
www.JagDocs.com
electrical connector, FB012.

FB012, harness side
Pin 2
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
GO to C5.
No
GO to C2.
C2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
1
FB012, harness side
Pin 2
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
GO to C6.
No
GO to C3.
C3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1
FB012, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
GO to C7.
No
GO to C4.
C4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
1
FB012, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
GO to C8.
No
GO to C9.
C5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
1
connector, CA072.
2
FB012, harness side
Pin 2
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes

rectification.
No
1
connector, CA072.
2
FB012, harness side
Battery
Pin 2
Positive terminal

Yes
rectification.
No
1
connector, FB072.
2
FB012, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
rectification.
No
1
connector, CA072.
2
FB012, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
rectification.
No
C9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
1
CA072, harness side
Pin 16
FB012, harness side

Pin 2

Yes
rectification.
No
GO to C10.
C10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
1
CA072, harness side
Pin 15
FB012, harness side

Pin 1

Yes
rectification.
No
INSTALL a new right hand front low-frequency initiator.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front
Installation).
PINPOINT TEST D : LEFT REAR LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

TEST CONDITIONS
D1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
Ignition off.
1
2
3
Disconnect the left hand rear low-frequency initiator

electrical connector, RB010.
RB010, harness side
Pin 2
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
GO to D5.
No
GO to D2.
D2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
1
RB010, harness side
Pin 2
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
GO to D6.
No
GO to D3.
D3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1
RB010, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
GO to D7.
No
GO to D4.
D4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
1
RB010, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
GO to D8.
No
GO to D9.
D5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
1
connector, CA072.
2
RB010, harness side
Pin 2
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
intermediate connector, RB001. For additional

rectification.
No
1
connector, CA072.
2
RB010, harness side
Battery
Pin 2
Positive terminal

Yes
rectification.
No
1
connector, CA072.
2
RB010, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
rectification.
No
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module -
Convertible (Removal and Installation),

1
connector, CA072.
2
RB010, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
rectification.
No
D9: CHECK THE INITIATOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
1
CA072, harness side
Pin 6
RB010, harness side

Pin 2

Yes
rectification.
No
GO to E1.
D10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
1
CA072, harness side
Pin 5
RB010, harness side

Pin 1

Yes
rectification.
No
INSTALL a new rear left hand low-frequency initiator.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear
Installation).
PINPOINT TEST E : RIGHT REAR LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

TEST CONDITIONS
E1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
Ignition off.
Disconnect the right hand rear low-frequency initiator

electrical connector, RB009.
RB009, harness side

Pin 2
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
GO to E5.
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
1
RB009, harness side
Pin 2
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
GO to E6.
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1
RB009, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
GO to E7.
No
GO to E4.
E4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
1
RB009, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
GO to E8.
No
GO to E9.
E5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
1
connector, CA072.
2
RB009, harness side
Pin 2
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes

rectification.
No
1
connector, CA072.
2
RB009, harness side
Pin 2
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
rectification.
No
1
connector, CA072.
2
RB009, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Negative terminal

Yes
rectification.
No
1
connector, CA072.
2
RB009, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
rectification.
No
E9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
1
CA072, harness side
Pin 8
RB009, harness side

Pin 2

Yes
rectification.
No
GO to E10.
E10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
1
CA072, harness side
Pin 7
RB009, harness side

Pin 1

Yes
rectification.
No
INSTALL a new rear right hand low-frequency initiator.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear
Installation).
PINPOINT TEST F : MISSING, INCOMPATIBLE OR DEFECTIVE RUNNING TIRE LOW PRESSURE

SENSOR OR RECEIVER
TEST
CONDITIONS
F1: CHECK FOR CORRECT WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY AND TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
1
Establish that a full size running wheel and tire assembly has a tire low pressure sensor installed.
As a visual confirmation, a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber
one and cannot be installed to a mini/space saver spare wheel.
Is a full size wheel and tire assembly with tire low pressure sensor installed?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
Install the correct wheel and tire assembly or tire low pressure sensor, of correct frequency, in
accordance with that defined in the manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low
pressure sensor application.
F2: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse and re-install it. Clear DTCs and
1
leave the vehicle stationary for 15 minutes, then drive it at a speed greater than 15.5 mph (25
kph) continuously for at least 10 minutes.
(Note: If the vehicle speed drops below this value, the drive time to complete the test will need to be increased.)
The use of the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal Tire pressure
monitor system status learn mode status will verify the completion of the test when the value
returns to Inactive.
Check for additional DTCs C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031, C1A6231, with identical time stamps.
Have all four DTCs logged with identical time stamps in the tire pressure monitoring system module?
Yes
Replace the tire pressure monitoring system radio frequency receiver.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Receiver (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal
and Installation).
No
GO to F3.
F3: VERIFY THE POSITION OF THE DEFECTIVE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
Check tire pressure monitoring system DTCs.
1
Are any C1AXX31 DTCs logged?
Yes
Install the correct tire low pressure sensor, of correct frequency, in accordance with that defined
in the manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application, to the
position identified by the logged DTC.
REFER to: Tire Low Pressure Sensor (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
No
No further action is required.
(Note: The use of the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal Tire pressure monitor system status
learn completed successfully will verify the successful completion of the test.)
PINPOINT TEST G : LOCALIZATION FAILURE

TEST
CONDITIONS
G1: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1
Check for additional DTCs: C1A5711, C1A5712, C1A5713. C1A5911, C1A5912, C1A5913,
C1A6111, C1A6112, C1A6113, C1A6311, C1A6312, C1A6313.
Are any of the DTCs listed above also logged?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index and remedial actions.
No
GO to G2.
G2: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
Check for additional DTCs: C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031 or C1A6231
1
Is a C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031 or C1A6231 DTC also logged?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index and remedial actions.
No
GO to G3.
G3: CHECK INITIATOR INSTALLATION
Check for correct installation of Initiator. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
1
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (Removal and Installation).
Is the Initiator correctly installed?
Yes
GO to G4.
No
Rectify as required. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (Removal and Installation).
G4: CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN INITIATOR HARNESS
1
Locate and remove module blue connector L.
Measure the resistance across the relevant initiator circuits within the blue connector.
2
Is the resistance less than 1 Ohm?
Yes
A value of less than 1 Ohm indicates a short circuit, rectify the short circuit as required.
No
position identified by the logged DTC.
REFER to: Tire Low Pressure Sensor (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
PINPOINT TEST H : SPARE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR NO OPERATION

TEST
CONDITIONS
H1: ESTABLISH THE TYPE OF SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY INSTALLED
Establish the type of spare wheel and tire assembly Installed.
1
Is the spare wheel a mini/space saver type?
Yes
Tire low pressure sensors are not installed to mini/space-saver spare wheels. Tire low pressure
sensors are installed to full size spare wheels only. The DTC is to be ignored and no repair action
is required.
No
GO to H2.
H2: ESTABLISH THAT THE SPARE WHEEL HAS A TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR INSTALLED
Establish that the spare wheel has a tire low pressure sensor installed, considering the following
1
additional information:
a) As a visual confirmation, the tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a
rubber one.
Is a tire low pressure sensor installed?
Yes
GO to H3.
No
A new spare tire low pressure sensor should be installed. Note: Refer to the note above the DTC
index about replacing components which may remain under manufacturer warranty. Refer to the
relevant section of the workshop manual.
H3: CONFIRM OPERATION OF THE SPARE WHEEL PRESSURE SENSOR
Deflate the spare tire, in close proximity to the vehicle, until it is completely deflated.
1
Complete an ignition cycle to ignition on and verify that the instrument cluster reports a spare
tire pressure warning for approximately 20 seconds.
Re-inflate the spare tire, in close proximity to the vehicle, to the recommended spare tire
3
pressure.
Complete an ignition cycle to ignition on and verify that the instrument cluster no longer reports
4
a spare tire pressure warning.
Does the instrument cluster continue to report a spare tire pressure warning?
Yes
GO to H4.
No
No repair action is required. It is possible that the customer may have placed items in the
vehicle's luggage compartment that prevented correct RF reception.
H4: VERIFY THAT THE SPARE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR ID HAS BEEN CORRECTLY PROGRAMMED TO
THE MODULE
1
Remove tire low pressure sensor. Record the 8 character hexadecimal ID written on the casing.
2
2
3
Use the approved diagnostic system to read the spare tire sensor ID from the module. Refer to
the relevant procedure in the workshop manual.
Compare the IDs from steps 1 & 2.
Do the IDs match?

Yes
Replace the spare tire low pressure sensor. Refer to the relevant installation section in the
workshop manual.
The identification for the sensor must be programmed into the tire pressure monitoring system
module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. The identification code is provided
on a label with the complete assembly and is also printed on the casing of each sensor.
No
Program the spare tire sensor ID, recorded in step 1, to the module using the approved
diagnostic system. The identification code is provided on a label with the complete assembly and
is also printed on the casing of each sensor.
Repeat test to ensure correct operation.GO to H3.
PINPOINT TEST I : C1D1912 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA
LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER
TEST CONDITIONS
I1: C1D1912 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER
Ignition off.
1
2

CA131, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
GO to I2.
No
GO to I3.
I2: C1D1912 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector,
1
CA109.
2
CA131, harness side
Pin 1
Battery
Positive terminal

Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to I4.
I3: C1D1912 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
TO POWER
1
2
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
I4: C1D1912 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
TO POWER
Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector,
1
CA109.
2
3
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST J : C1D1987 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA
LINE MISSING MESSAGE
TEST
CONDITIONS
J1: C1D1987 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE MISSING MESSAGE
1
Yes
GO to J2.
No
GO to J5.
J2: C1D1987 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT
Ignition off.
1
2
Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector, CA109

CA131, harness side
Pin 1
CA109, harness side

Pin4
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?

Yes
GO to J3.
No
REPAIR the high resistance/open circuit in wiring harness.
J3: C1D1987 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER
Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector, CA109
1
2
3
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.GO to J4.
No
J4: C1D1987 CHECK TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE
1
Yes
No
Test is complete. No further action is required.
J5: C1D1987 CHECK WHEELS HAVE TIRE SENSORS INSTALLED
NOTE: As a visual check, a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one
and cannot be installed to a mini/space saver spare wheel.
1
Check that all full size running wheel and tire assemblies have tire low pressure sensors
installed.
Is a full size wheel and tire assembly with tire low pressure sensor installed to all running wheel
positions?
Yes
GO to J6.
No
If agreed with the customer install correct tire low pressure sensors in accordance with that
defined in the manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application,
as required.
(Note: Confirm why the vehicle has non-Tire Pressure Monitoring System wheel & tire assemblies installed before installing tire
low pressure sensors, which are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.)
J6: C1D1987 CHECK TIRE SENSOR COMPATIBILITY TO TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM RECEIVER
1
Remove tire low pressure sensor from 1 wheel.
Verify the tire low pressure sensor part number from the information on the casing.
2
Is the tire low pressure sensor the correct part for the vehicle?
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.Carry out the following to verify repair.
Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse and re-install it. Clear DTCs and
leave the vehicle stationary for 15 minutes, then drive it at a speed greater than 15.5 mph (25
kph) continuously for at least 10 minutes.
(Note: If the vehicle speed drops below this value, the drive time to complete the test will need to be increased. The use of the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal Tire pressure monitor system status learn mode status
will verify the completion of the test when the value returns to Inactive.)
No
position(s) identified.
(Note: Confirm why the vehicle has incorrect Tire Pressure Monitoring System wheel & tire assemblies installed before installing
tire low pressure sensors, which are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.)
Wheels and Tires - Wheel and Tire

Removal
1.

stands.
2.
TORQUE: 125 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Apply a small amount of grease to the bore and

spigot areas of the wheel before installation. Make sure the
grease does not come into contact with the vehicles braking
components and the wheel stud threads. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front

Antenna
Removal
1.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.

For additional information, refer to: Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Front Antenna (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
2.
Turn the steering on to full lock for access.

3.
Release the front of the fender splash shield.

Remove the 5 Torx bolts.
Tie the splash shield aside.
4.
Remove the tire pressure antenna.

Remove the 2 clips.
Installation
1.
Install the tire pressure antenna.

Install the clips.
2.
Install the fender splash shield.

Tighten the Torx bolts.
3.
Connect the battery ground cable.

For additional information, refer to: Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Front Antenna (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear

Antenna
Removal
1.

For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect and
Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General
Procedures).
2.

3.

4.
Release the rear lower edge of the rear fender

splash shield.
5.
Remove the tire pressure antenna.

Remove the 2 clips.
Installation
1.

Install the clips.
2.

3.
Install the wheel and tire assembly.

4.

Procedures).
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Module Convertible
Removal
1.
Remove the cover and disconnect the battery ground cable.

Specifications).
2.
Make the SRS system safe.
3.
Remove the LH roll over protection unit.

4.
Remove the rear seat RH backrest retaining

bracket.
Remove the 2 nuts and 2 bolts.
5.
Remove the RH roll over protection unit.

6.
Release the auxiliary junction box mounting

bracket.
Remove the 3 nuts.
7.
Remove the tire pressure monitoring module.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors.
Installation
1.
Install the tire pressure monitoring module.

Connect the electrical connectors.
2.
Secure the auxiliary junction box mounting bracket.

3.
Install the rear seat RH backrest retaining bracket.

4.
Install the RH roll over protection unit.

Tighten the Torx bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
5.
Install the LH roll over protection unit.
6.
Connect the battery ground cable and install the cover.

Specifications).
7.
Using WDS, configure a new module.
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module 2Door
Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.
Remove the rear seat backrest.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat Backrest (501-10
Seating, Removal and Installation).
3.

bracket.
Remove the 3 nuts.
4.
Remove the tire pressure monitoring module.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the tire pressure monitoring module.

2.

3.
Install the rear seat backrest.

4.

Specifications).
5.
Wheels and Tires - Tire Low Pressure Sensor

Removal
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that the valve seal and steel washer is replaced each time a tire is changed to avoid
a seal failure. The seal and washer must be replaced if the sensor is removed. Removal of the sensor retaining nut must
be regarded as sensor removal. The valve cap must always be in place except when inflating, releasing pressure or
checking pressure.
1.

2.
Remove the wheel and tire.

3.
4.
Remove the wheel trim.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the tire low pressure

sensor, release the tire bead from the rim, 180 degrees from
the valve.
Remove the tire from the wheel.
5.
CAUTIONS:
Do not push on the valve.
If the tire low pressure sensor is to be reinstalled, a new washer, seal and nut must be
installed.
Remove the tire low pressure sensor.
Remove the nut.
Release and withdraw the sensor along the
valve axis.
6.
If necessary, install a new seal and washer.

Remove and discard the seal and washer.
Install a new washer and seal, making sure
the valve remains pressed fully onto its
seat.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Do not use compressed air to clean the sensor.

Do not clean the sensor with solvents or cleaning agents of any
type, use a clean dry cloth.
2.
CAUTION: Do not apply any lubricant to the

new valve.
NOTE: If the sensor is replaced on a 'running'
wheel, the new sensor identification will be learnt
in the first 15 minutes of the vehicle is being
driven. If a new sensor is fitted to the spare wheel
the identification for that sensor must be
programmed into the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) module using WDS. The
identifcation code is provided on a label with the
complete assembly and is also printed on the
sensor assembly.
Install the tire low pressure sensor.
Install and hand tighten the nut whilst
keeping the sensor in place.
Tighten the nut to 6.5 Nm (4.8 lb.ft).
3.
Install the tire and balance the wheel.
4.

5.
Install the wheel trim.
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Receiver

Removal
1.

2.
3.
Installation
1.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
RH (right hand) front spring and damper assembly
RH front accelerometer
RH rear suspension height sensor
RH rear spring and damper assembly
ADCM (adaptive damping control module)
Rear accelerometer
LH (left hand) rear spring and damper assembly
LH rear suspension height sensor
LH front spring and damper assembly
10
LH front accelerometer
LH front suspension height sensor
RH front suspension height sensor
11
12
Description
INTRODUCTION
A continuously variable damping system, known as adaptive dynamics, is available on certain models. Adaptive dynamics is
an electronically controlled suspension system which continuously adjusts the damping characteristics of the suspension
dampers in reaction to the current driving conditions.
The system is controlled by an ADCM (adaptive damping control module). The ADCM receives signals from three
accelerometers, four suspension height sensors and from other vehicle systems to determine vehicle state, body and wheel
motions, and driver inputs. These signals are used by the ADCM to continuously control the damping characteristics of each
damper to the appropriate level, to give the optimum body control and vehicle ride.
The ADCM also contains the controller for the electronic differential, if fitted.
DAMPERS
Item
Part Number
Description
Front spring and damper assembly
Rear spring and damper assembly
CAUTION: The dampers look identical to those on the CATS (computer active technology suspension) system of 4.2L
vehicles, but have a different part number. Resistance across the solenoid pins of an adaptive dynamics damper should be 2
to 3.5 ohms; if more than 5 ohms, you should suspect that the damper is from a CATS system.
The adaptive dynamics dampers are monotube, nitrogen gas and oil filled units. The dampers are continuously variable,
which allows the damping force to be electrically adjusted when the vehicle is being driven. The dampers provide the
optimum compromise between vehicle control and ride comfort.
The dampers have an electrical connector on the end of the piston rod, in the center of the top mount.
In each damper, the damping adjustment is achieved by a solenoid operated variable orifice, which opens up an alternative
path for oil flow within the damper. When de-energized the bypass is closed and all the oil flows through the main (firm)
piston. When energized the solenoid moves an armature and control blade, which work against a spring. The control blade
incorporates an orifice which slides inside a sintered housing to open up the bypass as required. In compression, oil flows
from the lower portion of the damper through a hollow piston rod, a separate soft (comfort) valve, the slider housing and
orifice and into the upper portion of the damper, thereby bypassing the main (firm) valve. In rebound the oil flows in the
opposite direction.
In the firm setting oil flows through the main (firm) valve only, but when the bypass is opened by any amount the oil flows
through both valves in a pressure balance. When fully energized the solenoid moves the armature and therefore the slider to
the maximum extension and opens the orifice completely. The damper operates continuously between these two boundary
conditions.
The solenoid in each damper is operated by a 526 Hz PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ADCM. The ADCM
controls the PWM duty ratio to provide 1.5 A to operate the damper in the soft setting. When de-energized (0.0 A) the
damper is in the firm setting. The current varies continuously as required to increase and decrease the damping individually
in each of the dampers.
Sectioned Views of Damper Operating States
Item
Part Number
Description
Firm setting
Soft setting
Main oil flow
Bypass oil flow
1
2
Bypass valve (open)
Main valve
Tube
Bypass valve (closed)
Piston and rod assembly
ACCELEROMETERS
Three accelerometers are used in the adaptive dynamics system. The accelerometers are located as follows:
One each on the front edge of the LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand) A pillars.
One in the luggage compartment, in the rear LH corner adjacent to the rear lamp assembly.
The accelerometers measure acceleration in the vertical plane and output a corresponding analogue signal to the ADCM. The
algorithms in the ADCM calculate the heave, pitch and roll motions of the vehicle, which are used by the controller to control
road induced body motion.
Each accelerometer is connected to the ADCM via three wires, which supply ground, 5 V supply and signal return.
The sensing element comprises a single parallel plate capacitor, one plate of which moves relative to the other dependant on
the force (acceleration) applied. This causes the capacitance to change as a function of applied acceleration. This capacitance
is compared with a fixed reference capacitor in a bridge circuit and the signal is processed by means of a dedicated
integrated circuit to generate an output voltage that varies as a function of applied acceleration. The sensors output a signal
voltage of approximately 1 V/g 0.05 V/g. When the vehicle is stationary, each accelerometer outputs approximately 2
volts.
SUSPENSION HEIGHT SENSORS
Four suspension height sensors are used in the adaptive dynamics system, two for the front suspension and two for the rear
suspension. A front suspension height sensor is attached to each side of the front subframes and connected by a sensor arm
and sensor link to the related lower lateral arm of the front suspension. A rear suspension height sensor is attached to each
side of the rear subframe and connected by a sensor arm and sensor link to the related upper control arm of the rear
suspension.
The RH suspension height sensors are dual output, with separate outputs for the adaptive damping system and for the AFS
(adaptive front lighting system). The LH suspension height sensors are single output, for the adaptive damping system only.
www.JagDocs.com
On each suspension height sensor, the sensor arm and sensor link convert linear movement of the suspension into rotary
movement of the sensor shaft. The suspension height sensors measure suspension displacement at each corner of the
vehicle and output a corresponding analogue signal to the ADCM. The algorithms in the ADCM calculate the position, velocity
and frequency content of the signals and use the results for wheel control.
Each suspension height sensor is connected to the ADCM via three wires, which supply ground, 5 V supply and signal return.
The sensing element consists of an array of Hall effect devices arranged to measure the direction of the magnetic field of a
small magnet attached to the end of the sensor shaft. As the sensor shaft rotates, so do the lines of magnetic flux from the
magnet. The signals from the Hall effect elements are processed by means of a dedicated integrated circuit to generate an
output voltage that varies as the sensor shaft is rotated. The sensor has a measurement range of 40 around its nominal
position and the nominal sensitivity is 57 mV/ of shaft rotation.
ADAPTIVE DAMPING CONTROL MODULE (ADCM)
The ADCM is installed on the right side of the passenger compartment rear bulkhead, behind the RH rear seat back (and
behind the RH roll over protection hoop on convertible models).
System Fault Message

If a fault is detected by the ADCM, a message is sent via the high speed CAN (controller area network) to the instrument
cluster and the message ADAPTIVE DYNAMICS FAULT is displayed. The ADCM also logs an appropriate DTC (diagnostic
trouble code). The ADCM can be interrogated using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
When a fault is detected, the ADCM implements a strategy based on the type of fault. If there is an electrical power fault, or
the ADCM cannot control the dampers, they default to the firm condition. If a sensor fails that only affects one or more
control modes then an intermediate damper setting is used as the lower threshold and the remaining working modes can
demand higher damping as required. In the event of a high speed CAN bus fault, the dampers are fixed at an intermediate
setting (no control) or default to the firm condition, depending on the severity of the fault.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
BJB (battery junction box) (175 A megafuse)
AJB (auxiliary junction box)
CJB (central junction box)
ATC (automatic temperature control) module
Fuse 14 (15 A) - from delayed power-off relay
Rear accelerometer
Instrument cluster
JaguarDrive selector module
10
ABS (anti-lock brake system) module
11
TCM (transmission control module)
12
ECM (engine control module)
13
RH rear damper
14
RH front damper
15
LH front damper
16
LH rear damper
17
LH rear suspension height sensor
RH rear suspension height sensor
19
LH front suspension height sensor
20
RH front accelerometer
21
RH front suspension height sensor
22
ADCM
23
LH front accelerometer
18
The ADCM uses a combination of information from other system modules and data from the accelerometers and suspension
height sensors to measure the vehicle and suspension states and driver inputs. Using this information, the ADCM applies
algorithms to control the dampers for the current driving conditions.
The ADCM receives the following signals on the high speed CAN bus from the stated system components:
Brake Pressure - ABS (anti-lock brake system) module.

Brake Pressure Quality Factor - ABS module.
Car Configuration Parameters - AJB (auxiliary junction box).
Center Differential Range Actual - ECM (engine control module).
Engine Speed - ECM.
Engine Speed Quality Factor - ECM.
Engine Torque Flywheel Actual - ECM.
Engine Torque Flywheel Actual Quality Factor - ECM.
Gear Position Target - TCM (transmission control module).
Lateral Acceleration - ABS module.
Power Mode (Ignition Signal) - CJB (central junction box).
Power Mode Quality Factor - CJB.
Roll Stability Control Mode - ABS module.
Steering Wheel Angle - ABS module.
Steering Wheel Angle Speed - ABS module.
Steering Wheel Angle Status - ABS module.
Terrain Mode Requested - JaguarDrive selector.
Torque Converter Slip - TCM.
Vehicle Information Parameters HS - AJB
Vehicle Speed - ABS module.
Vehicle Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Front Left Wheel Speed - ABS module.
Front Left Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Front Right Wheel Speed - ABS module.
Front Right Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Rear Left Wheel Speed - ABS module.
Rear Left Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Rear Right Wheel Speed - ABS module.
Rear Right Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
The ADCM also outputs information on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems as follows:
Fault Message - instrument cluster.
Terrain Mode Change Status - JaguarDrive selector.
Terrain Mode - JaguarDrive selector.
The ADCM monitors the input signals and operates the damper solenoids. The input signals are used in control functions and
a force required for each damper, for each function, is calculated. An arbitrator monitors the force requirements from each
function and apportions a force to a damper. The force is converted to the appropriate current and sent to the damper.
The control functions are as follows:
Body Control Uses CAN and accelerometer inputs. Calculates road induced body motions 100 times a second and
sets each damper to the appropriate level to maintain a flat and level body.
Roll Rate Control Uses CAN inputs. Predicts vehicle roll rate due to driver steering inputs 100 times a second and
increases damping to reduce roll rate.

Pitch Rate Control Uses CAN inputs. Predicts vehicle pitch rate due to driver throttle and braking inputs 100 times a
second and increases damping to reduce pitch rate.

Bump Rebound Control Uses suspension height sensor inputs. Monitors the position of the wheel 500 times a
second and increases the damping rate as the damper approaches the end of its travel.
Wheel Hop Control Uses suspension height sensor and CAN inputs. Monitors the position of the wheel 500 times a
second and detects when the wheel begins to vibrate at its natural frequency and increases the damping to reduce
vertical wheel motion.
Under normal road conditions when the vehicle is stationary with the engine running, the dampers are set to the firm
condition to reduce power consumption.
The ADCM receives its power supply via a relay and fuse in the CJB. The relay remains energized for a period of time after
the ignition is off. This allows the ADCM to record and store any DTC relating to adaptive dynamics system faults.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension

For a detailed description of the adaptive damping system operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension,
vehicle.
1.
Verify the customer concern.
2.

Mechanical
Coil spring(s)
Shock absorber(s)
Accelerometer(s) installation
Height sensor(s) installation
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Wiring harness/electrical connectors
Accelerometer(s)
Adaptive Damping Control Module
Height sensor(s)
3.
If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer
to the DTC index.
DTC Index
part number 3548-1358-00.
NOTE: If a control module fault is suspected and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation,
prior to the installation of a new module.
NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five-digit codes. Match the five-digits from
the scan tool to the first five-digits of the seven-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give additional
information read by the manufacturer approved diagnostic system).
NOTE: When performing electrical voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three
decimal places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the
DMM leads into account.
NOTE: Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion.
NOTE: If DTCs are logged and, after carrying out the pinpoint tests, a fault is not identified, an intermittent concern
may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
DTC
C101D12
Description
Left Front
vertical
acceleration
sensor - short to
power
Possible Cause
Left Front vertical
acceleration sensor
circuit short to power
Action
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front
vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to power or
another circuit. Repair circuit, clear the DTC and retest the
system
C101D14
Left Front
vertical
acceleration
sensor - short to
ground, open
circuit
C101DLeft Front
22
vertical
acceleration
sensor - signal
amplitude >
maximum
C101D26
Left Front
vertical
acceleration
sensor - signal
rate of change
below threshold
C101D78
Left Front
vertical
acceleration
sensor alignment or
adjustment
incorrect
C101ERight Front
12
vertical
acceleration
sensor - short to
power
C101ERight Front
14
vertical
acceleration
sensor - short to
ground, open
circuit
C101ERight Front
22
vertical
acceleration
sensor - signal
amplitude >
maximum
C101E26
C101E78
Right Front
vertical
acceleration
sensor - signal
rate of change
below threshold
Right Front
vertical
acceleration
sensor alignment or
adjustment
incorrect
C1024System
00
Temporarily
Disabled Due To
Power
Interruption
During Driving no sub type
information
Left Front vertical
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front vertical

acceleration sensor
acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open circuit. If
circuit short to ground, no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace sensor, clear
open circuit
DTC and retest the system
Vertical acceleration
sensor fault
Left front vertical
With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Left Front Vertical
Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to 2.1
acceleration sensor
volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts, loose
insecurely mounted
connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then suspect
Left front vertical
faulty sensor/incorrectly fitted sensor. Check the sensor is
acceleration sensor
signal circuit short to correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as required. Refer
to the new module/component installation note at the top of
another circuit
the DTC Index, clear DTC and retest system
Left front vertical
acceleration sensor
internal fault
Left front vertical
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Left Front
acceleration sensor
Vertical Accelerometer signal circuit for faults, if circuit is
signal circuit short to
correct suspect faulty sensor, refer to the new
another circuit
module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index. Replace the sensor, clear the DTC and retest the system
Left front vertical
acceleration sensor
internal fault
Left front vertical
Check Left Front Vertical Accelerometer for location and
acceleration sensor
security, if correct suspect faulty Accelerometer, refer to the
bracket bent
new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
Left front vertical
Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
acceleration sensor
retest the system
damaged
Right Front vertical
acceleration sensor
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front

system
Right Front vertical
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front

acceleration sensor
vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open
circuit short to ground,
circuit. If no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace
open circuit
sensor, clear DTC and retest the system
sensor fault
Right front vertical
With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Right Front
acceleration sensor Vertical Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to
insecurely mounted
2.1 volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts,
loose connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then
acceleration sensor
suspect faulty sensor/incorrectly fitted sensor. Check the
sensor is correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as
another circuit
required. Refer to the new module/component installation note
at the top of the DTC Index, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Front
acceleration sensor
another circuit
acceleration sensor
internal fault
Check Right Front Vertical Accelerometer for location and
acceleration sensor
bracket bent
acceleration sensor
retest the system
damaged
Loss of power to
control module whilst

driving
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power and

ground circuits to Adaptive Damping Control Module for
intermittent or poor connection. Repair wiring circuits as
required, clear DTC and retest the system
C1030- Left Rear vertical

12
acceleration
sensor - short to
power
14
acceleration
sensor - short to
ground, open
circuit
22
acceleration
sensor - signal
amplitude >
maximum

26
acceleration
sensor - signal
rate of change
below threshold

78
acceleration
sensor alignment or
adjustment
incorrect
C1A03- Left Front Height
Sensor - circuit
12
short to power

14
Sensor - circuit
short to ground
or open

21
Sensor - signal
amplitude <
minimum
Left Rear vertical
acceleration sensor
Left rear vertical
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear

system
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear
vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open
circuit. If no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace
sensor, clear DTC and retest the system
acceleration sensor
open circuit
sensor fault
Left Rear vertical
With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Left Rear Vertical
acceleration sensor
Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to 2.1
insecurely mounted
volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts, loose
Left Rear vertical
connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then suspect
acceleration sensor
faulty sensor/incorrectly fitted sensor. Check the sensor is
signal circuit short to correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as required. Refer
another circuit
to the new module/component installation note at the top of
Left Rear vertical
the DTC Index, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
Left Rear vertical
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Left Rear
acceleration sensor
another circuit
Left Rear vertical
acceleration sensor
internal fault
Left Rear vertical
Check Left Rear Vertical Accelerometer for location and
acceleration sensor
bracket bent
Left Rear vertical
acceleration sensor
retest the system
damaged
Height sensor circuit
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Left
shorted to another
Height Sensor circuit for short to power, If circuit correct
cable
suspect Sensor internal fault, replace as required
height sensor internal
fault
Wiring to sensor
Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
(signal) open circuit
connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water
Wiring to height
ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at Control
sensor partial short to
Module. A: Check for short circuits between any of the 3
ground
terminals and vehicle ground. B: Check for electrical continuity
Wiring to height
between the two connectors for each of the 3 terminals.
sensor short to other
Reconnect electrical connector at Control Module only. C:
cable
Check voltages at terminals within height sensor connector
Height sensor internal (sensor not connected), with respect to vehicle body. Voltage
electrical fault
to sensor ground connection should be ~0v Voltage to sensor
signal connection should be ~0v Voltage to sensor supply
connection should be ~5v All voltages should be within
0.15v
Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height sensor
not connected
fixings were slackened or found to be loose or if a height
Height sensor or
sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be rebracket loose
calibrated. Confirm that the correct height sensor part number
Height sensor bracket
is fitted, as specified in the service parts database. To check
bent
height sensor: Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor
Incorrect height
and inspect connecter pins & terminals for evidence of
calibration
corrosion or water ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect
Height sensor linkage harness at Control Module. A: Check for short circuits between
toggled
any of the 3 terminals and vehicle ground. B: Check for
Height sensor water electrical continuity between the two connectors for each of the
3 terminals. Reconnect electrical connector at Control Module
ingress
Wiring to height
only. C: Check voltages at terminals within height sensor
connector (sensor not connected), with respect to vehicle
ground
body. Voltage to sensor ground connection should be ~0v
Voltage to sensor signal connection should be ~0v Voltage to
Wiring to height
sensor short to other sensor supply connection should be ~5v All voltages should be
cable
within 0.15v. To check sensor operation on the vehicle:
Check for water ingress around the height sensors, electrical
Height sensor
connectors or shaft end. Check for excessive movement in the
electrical fault
Height sensor linkage
shaft in all directions. Raise vehicle (ideally on wheels-free
bent
ramp) until suspension on corner under investigation is at
Incorrect height
rebound to gain access to height sensor. Access may be
sensor fitted

22
Sensor - signal
amplitude >
maximum
not connected
Height sensor or
bracket loose
bent
Incorrect height
calibration
toggled
Height sensor water
ingress
Wiring to height

ground
Wiring to height
cable
Height sensor
electrical fault
bent
Incorrect height
sensor fitted

Sensor - wrong
76
mounting
position
78
Sensor alignment or
adjustment
incorrect
C1A04Right Front
12
Height Sensor circuit short to
power
C1A04Right Front
14
Incorrect height
calibration
Incorrect height
calibration
shorted to another
cable
fault
Wiring to sensor
Wiring to height
improved by removing road wheel. Carefully disconnect the

height sensor link from the upper suspension arm. Monitor the
height sensor signal voltage output for the height sensor under
investigation. Position the sensor arm so it is in the mid
position and confirm that the voltage is around 2.5 volts. Move
the sensor arm over the range 40 around the mid position
and confirm that the voltage changes smoothly between
around 0.2 volts and 4.8 volts. If voltages are incorrect or do
not change smoothly then replace sensor. NOTE: For angles of
movement beyond 40, the sensor signal will clamp to a
voltage of ~0.15v or ~4.85v, depending on position of sensor
lever. This is normal. When investigation is complete, refit
height sensor link to upper arm. If any fixings to the height
sensor body or mounting bracket were slackened or found to
be loose or if a height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride
height MUST be re-calibrated. Refer to the relevant section of
the workshop manual for the calibration procedure
Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height sensor
sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be recalibrated. Confirm that the correct height sensor part number
harness at Control Module. A: Check for short circuits between
electrical continuity between the two connectors for each of the
sensor supply connection should be ~5v All voltages should be
Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system

Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Right


ground or open
C1A04Right Front
21
Height Sensor signal amplitude
< minimum
C1A04Right Front
22
> maximum

ground
Wiring to height
cable
electrical fault
0.15v
not connected
Height sensor or
bent
Incorrect height
calibration
toggled
ingress
Wiring to height
ground
Wiring to height
cable
Height sensor
electrical fault
bent
Incorrect height
sensor fitted
not connected
Height sensor or
bent
Incorrect height
calibration
toggled
ingress
Wiring to height
ground
Wiring to height
cable
Height sensor
electrical fault
bent
Incorrect height
sensor fitted
C1A04Right Front
76
Height Sensor wrong mounting
position
C1A04Right Front
78
Height Sensor alignment or
adjustment
incorrect
C1A05- Left Rear Height
12
Sensor - circuit
short to power

14
Sensor - circuit
short to ground
or open

21
Sensor - signal
amplitude <
minimum
Incorrect height
calibration
Incorrect height
calibration

Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Left

shorted to another
cable
fault
Wiring to sensor
Wiring to height
ground
Wiring to height
cable
electrical fault
0.15v
not connected
Height sensor or
bent
Incorrect height
calibration
toggled
ingress
Wiring to height
ground
Wiring to height
cable
Height sensor
electrical fault
bent
Incorrect height
sensor fitted

22
Sensor - signal
amplitude >
maximum
not connected
Height sensor or
bracket loose
bent
Incorrect height
calibration
toggled
Height sensor water
ingress
Wiring to height

ground
Wiring to height
cable
Height sensor
electrical fault
bent
Incorrect height
sensor fitted

76
Sensor - wrong
mounting
position
78
Sensor alignment or
adjustment
incorrect
C1A06Right Rear
12
power
C1A06Right Rear
14
ground or open
Incorrect height
calibration
Incorrect height
calibration


Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Right

shorted to another
cable
fault
Wiring to sensor
Wiring to height
ground
Wiring to height
cable
electrical fault
C1A06Right Rear
21
< minimum
not connected
Height sensor or
bracket loose
bent
Incorrect height
calibration
toggled
Height sensor water
ingress
Wiring to height

ground
Wiring to height
cable
Height sensor
electrical fault
bent
Incorrect height
sensor fitted
C1A06Right Rear
22
> maximum
not connected
Height sensor or
bracket loose
bent
Incorrect height
calibration
toggled
Height sensor water
ingress
Wiring to height

ground
Wiring to height
cable
Height sensor
electrical fault
bent
Incorrect height
sensor fitted

0.15v
C1A06Right Rear
76
Height Sensor wrong mounting
position
C1A06Right Rear
Height Sensor 78
alignment or
adjustment
incorrect
C110CLeft Front
01
Damper
Solenoid General
electrical failure
C110CLeft Front
18
Damper
Solenoid - circuit
current below
threshold
C110CLeft Front
19
Damper
Solenoid - circuit
current above
threshold
C110CLeft front
14
damper solenoid
- short to
ground, open
circuit
C110CLeft front
1D
damper solenoid
C110C64
Left Front
Damper
Solenoid - signal
plausibility
failure
C110D01
Right Front
Damper
Solenoid General
electrical failure
C110DRight Front
18
Damper
Solenoid - circuit
current below
threshold
C110DRight Front
19
Damper
Solenoid - circuit
current above
threshold
C110DRight front
14
damper solenoid
- short to
ground, open
circuit
C110DRight front
1D
damper solenoid
Incorrect height
calibration
Incorrect height
calibration
Left front damper
solenoid circuit fault
Front Left Damper
Actuator open circuit

at startup
Front Left Damper
Solenoid circuit
current above
threshold



damper solenoid circuit for faults, If no faults are evident
suspect a faulty control module, refer to the new module
installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Damper Solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms

Left front damper
Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
solenoid circuit - short
manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check left front damper solenoid
Left front damper
circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and install a
failure
new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
Left front damper
to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check left front damper solenoid
circuit
circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check and
Left front damper
install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy
failure
and procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
Front Left Damper
Solenoid Measured
Current control loop
failed
Front Left Damper
Solenoid open circuit
Right front damper
Front Right Damper

at startup
Front Right Damper
Solenoid circuit
current above
threshold
Right front damper


to ground, open circuit
electrical circuit diagrams and check Right front damper
Right front damper
solenoid circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and
failure
Right front damper
C110D64
Right Front
Damper
Solenoid - signal
plausibility
failure
C110E01
Left Rear
Damper
Solenoid General
electrical failure
C110ELeft Rear
18
Damper
Solenoid - circuit
current below
threshold
C110ELeft Rear
19
Damper
Solenoid - circuit
current above
threshold
C110ELeft Rear
14
damper solenoid
- short to
ground, open
circuit
C110ELeft Rear
1D
damper solenoid
C110E64
Left Rear
Damper
Solenoid - signal
plausibility
failure
C110F18
Right Rear
Damper
Solenoid - circuit
current below
threshold
C110FRight Rear
19
Damper
Solenoid - circuit
current above
threshold
C110FRight Rear
14
damper solenoid
- short to
ground, open
circuit
C110FRight Rear
1D
damper solenoid
C110F64
Right Rear
Damper
Solenoid - signal
plausibility
failure
to ground/power, open
electrical circuit diagrams and check Right front damper
circuit
solenoid circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check
Right front damper
and install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty
failure
policy and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
Front Right Damper
Solenoid Measured
failed
Front Right Damper
Left Rear damper
Rear Left Damper

at startup
Rear Left Damper
Solenoid circuit
current above
threshold


Left Rear damper
to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear damper solenoid
Left Rear damper
circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and install a
failure
new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
Left Rear damper
to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear damper solenoid
circuit
circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check and
Left Rear damper
failure
Rear Left Damper
Solenoid Measured
failed
Rear Left Damper
Rear Right Damper
at startup
Rear Right Damper
Solenoid circuit
current above
threshold
Right Rear damper

electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Rear damper
Right Rear damper
solenoid circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and
failure
Right Rear damper
to ground/power, open
electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Rear damper
circuit
solenoid circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check
Right Rear damper
and install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty
failure
policy and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
Rear Right Damper
Solenoid Measured
failed
Rear Right Damper
C1B14- Sensor Supply

1C
Voltage A - out
of range
C1B15- Sensor Supply

1C
Voltage B - out
of range
U0001- High speed CAN

88
communication
bus - bus off
U0100Lost
00
Communication
With ECM/PCM A
- no sub type
information
U0101Lost
00
Communication
with TCM - no
sub type
information
U0103Lost
00
Communication
With Gear Shift
Control Module
A - no sub type
information
U0121Lost
00
Communication
With Anti-Lock
Brake System
(ABS) Control
Module - no sub
Left Front Height
Sensor or Right Front

Height Sensor or Left
Rear Height Sensor or
Right Rear Height
Sensor supply partial
short to other circuit
or ground
Left Front Height
Height Sensor or Left
Rear Height Sensor or
Right Rear Height
Sensor internal failure
Internal control
module failure
Left Front Vertical
Acceleration Sensor or
Right Front Vertical
Left Rear Vertical
Right Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor
supply partial short to
other circuit or
ground. Left Front
Vertical Acceleration
Sensor or Left Rear
Sensor or Right Rear
Sensor supply partial
short to other circuit
or ground
Left Front Vertical
Right Front Vertical
Left Rear Vertical
Right Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor
internal failure
Internal control
module failure
Lost Communication
With Engine Control
Module (ECM) (CAN
Bus circuit fault)
Missing message from
ECM
Lost Communication
with Transmission
control module (TCM)
(CAN Bus circuit fault)
Lost Communication
With Gear Shift

Module (GSM) (CAN
Bus circuit fault)
Lost Communication
With Anti-Lock Brake

Module (CAN Bus
circuit fault)
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor supply

for circuit fault. Check all height sensors. Check module sensor
supply output voltage measured voltage should be between
4.995 volts and 4.85 volts
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor supply

for circuit fault. Check all Vertical Acceleration Sensors. Check
control module sensor supply output voltage Measured voltage
should be between 4.995 volts and 4.85 volts
Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the

electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit for faults,
check CAN circuits for open circuits or shorts to power, ground
or other circuits
Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus for circuit fault
Check Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to

the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus for circuit
fault
Check Gear Shift Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the

electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus for circuit faults
Check Anti lock Brake System Control Module for stored DTCs.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus
circuit to Anti lock Brake System Control Module for circuit
faults
type information
U0132Lost
00
Communication
With Suspension
Control Module
A - no sub type
information
U0136Lost
00
Communication
With Differential
Control Module Rear - no sub
type information
U0140Lost
00
Communication
With Body
Control Module no sub type
information
U0142Lost
00
Communication
With Body
Control Module
B - no sub type
information
U0155Lost
00
Communication
With Instrument
Panel Cluster
(IPC) Control
Module - no sub
type information
U0300- Internal control
00
module software
incompatibility
U0401- Invalid Data
68
Received from
ECM/PCM A event
information
U0402- Invalid Data
68
Received from
TCM - event
information
U0404- Invalid Data
68
Received from
Gear Shift
Control Module
A
U0415- Invalid Data
68
Received From
Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)
Control Module event
information
U0421- Invalid Data
68
Received from
Suspension
Control Module
A event
information
U0422- Invalid Data
68
Received From
Body Control
Module - event
information
U0437- Invalid Data
68
Received From
Differential
Control Module Rear - event
information
Lost Communication
With Air Suspension

Control Module (CAN
Bus circuit fault
Lost Communication
With Rear Differential

Control Module (CAN
Bus circuit fault)
Lost Communication
With Body Control

Module (Front Smart
Junction Box) (CAN
Bus circuit fault)
Lost Communication
rear smart junction

box (CAN Bus circuit
fault)
Lost Communication

Module (CAN bus
circuit fault)
CAN master
configuration ID
incorrect
from Engine Control
Module
Check Air Suspension Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to

the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit to Air
Suspension Control Module for circuit faults
Check Rear Differential Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer

to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus circuit to
Rear Differential Control Module for circuit faults
Check Body Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the

electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit to Body
Control Module for faults
Check Rear Smart Junction Box for stored DTCs. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus circuit to Rear
Smart Junction Box for faults
Check Instrument Panel Cluster for stored DTCs. Refer to the

electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus to Instrument
Panel Cluster for circuit fault
Check Front Smart Junction Box vehicle configuration file,

check part number of adaptive damping control module
Check Engine Control Module for DTCs. Refer to the relevant
DTC index
Invalid Data Received Check for Transmission Control Module DTCs. Refer to relevant
from Transmission
control module
Invalid data received
from gear shift control

module
* Invalid Data
Received From AntiLock Brake System
(ABS) Control Module
DTC index
Check Gear Shift Control Module for DTCs. Refer to the

relevant DTC index
Check for Anti lock Brake System DTCs. Refer to the relevant
DTC index
Invalid Data Received Check Air Suspension Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to
From Air Suspension

Control Module
From Body Control

Module (Front Smart
Junction Box)
From Rear Differential

Control Module
the relevant DTC index
Check Body Control Module (Front Smart Junction Box) for

stored DTCs. Refer to the relevant DTC index
Check Rear Differential Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer

to the relevant DTC index
U0443- Invalid Data

68
Received From
Body Control
Module B - event
information
U1A14- CAN initialization
00
failure - no sub
type information
U2100Initial
00
Configuration
Not Complete no sub type
information
U2101- Control Module

00
Configuration
Incompatible no sub type
information
U3000- Control module 01
General
Electrical Failure
U3000- Control Module 04
System Internal
Failure

special memory
failure
program
memory failure

watchdog /
safety Micro
controller failure
not activated

missing
calibration
U3003- Battery voltage 1C
circuit voltage
out of range
U3003- Battery Voltage

- signal compare
62
failure
From body control

module B (Rear Smart
Junction Box)
CAN network harness
short, disconnected
Check rear smart junction box for DTCs and refer to relevant
DTC index
Refer to circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit for fault
(short to power, ground or open circuit)
Car Configuration Data
Install car config to Front Smart Junction Box. Clear DTC and
not loaded (New Body
retest systems
Control Module (Front
Smart Junction Box)
fitted to vehicle and
not initialized)
Internal Body Control
Module (Front Smart
Junction Box) failure
Car Configuration Data
Carry out the new module software installation procedure
transmitted over CAN
does not match
adaptive damping
control module
internal config
General electrical
Check integrity of electrical connectors and pins to module.
failure
Check damper negative circuits for short to Ground. Refer to
the new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
Install a new Adaptive Damping Control Module.
Module Internal failure Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check all damper
solenoid circuits for short to power. If no harness faults are
found suspect adaptive damping control module. Install a new
module, refer to new module installation note at top of DTC
Index
Module Internal failure
Suspect Adaptive Damping Control Module internal failure.
Install a new module, refer to the new module/component
Module Internal failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power and
ground circuit for fault. Clear DTC turn off ignition, wait 1
minute. Turn on ignition, check for DTCs. If DTC returns
suspect Adaptive Damping Control Module internal failure.
Install a new module, refer to the new module/component
Module Internal
If this DTC is logged contact your local in-market support
Failure
Adaptive Damping
Control Module has

been replaced and not
programmed
Adaptive damping
control module has
been replaced and no
software is installed
Circuit voltage out of
range (Supply Voltage
at adaptive damping
control module <
10.5v or Supply
Voltage at adaptive
damping control
module > 18v for 30s)
High Resistance
Connections
Adaptive Damping
Control module
Internal Failure
Install the latest software / Carry out the new-module

(software) install procedure
Refer to the workshop manual. Install the latest software /

Carry out the new-module (software) install procedure
Check the battery is in good condition and fully charged, refer

to the battery care manual. Refer to the starting and charging
section of the workshop manual and check the performance of
the charging system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check power and ground circuit to adaptive damping
control module for faults, including intermittent high resistance
Check the battery is in good condition and fully charged, refer

to the battery care manual. Refer to the starting and charging
section of the workshop manual and check the performance of
the charging system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check power and ground circuit to adaptive damping
control module for faults, including intermittent high resistance
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Adaptive Damping Module Convertible

Removal
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment, the restraints control module backup power supply must be depleted. Wait at
least one minute after disconnecting the battery ground cable(s) before commencing any repair or adjustment to the
supplemental restraint system (SRS), or any component(s) adjacent to the SRS sensors. Failure to follow these
Always wear safety glasses when working on an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling an air bag module.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, do not use radio key code savers when working on the
supplemental restraint system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of injury in the event of premature deployment, always carry a live air bag module with
the bag and trim cover pointed away from the body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, live air bag modules must only be placed on work benches
which have been ground bonded and with the trim cover facing up. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Never probe the electrical connectors of air bag modules or any other supplemental restraint system component.
Painting over the driver air bag module trim cover or instrument panel could lead to deterioration of the trim cover
and air bags. Do not for any reason attempt to paint discolored or damaged air bag module trim covers or instrument
panel. Install a new component. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
1.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-01
Battery, Mounting and Cables, Specifications).
2.
WARNING: Make sure that sufficient time has elapsed after

disconnecting the battery ground cable(s), before commencing
work on the supplemental restraint system (SRS). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Make the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) safe.
3.

For additional information, refer to: Rollover Protection Unit
(501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and
Installation).
4.
Remove the active damping module.

Remove the 4 nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the active damping module.

2.

Installation).
3.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Adaptive Damping Module 2-Door

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the active damping module.

Remove the 4 nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the active damping module.

2.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Instrument cluster
DLM (differential locking module)
INTRODUCTION
JaguarDrive control is a selectable vehicle optimization system designed to fine-tune the driving characteristics of the vehicle
by accommodating different driving conditions or driving styles. The system allows the performance envelope of the vehicle
to be stretched and prevents the necessity for a single, compromised configuration for all conditions. JaguarDrive control
increases the vehicle's abilities by changing the characteristics of engine mapping, transmission shifts, stability and traction
interventions, suspension settings and, on SC (supercharger) vehicles, the electronic differential settings.
JAGUARDRIVE CONTROLS
Item
Part Number
Description
Winter mode button
DSC/TracDSC mode button
Dynamic mode button
The system is controlled by buttons adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector on the floor console. The buttons allow the selection
of one of the following three modes:
Special modes off.
Winter mode.
Dynamic mode.
The instrument cluster will display the selected JaguarDrive control mode in the message center.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).
The JaguarDrive control system uses a combination of a number of vehicle sub-systems to achieve the required vehicle
characteristics for the mode selected. The following sub-systems make up the JaguarDrive control system:
EMS (engine management system). For additional information, refer to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and
Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Automatic transmission.
For additional information, refer to: Transmission Description (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Brake system.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (206-09
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Description and Operation).
Adaptive dynamics.
and Operation).
Electronic differential control (SC vehicles only).
For additional information, refer to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-02 Rear
Drive Axle/Differential, Description and Operation).
The JaguarDrive control software is stored in the JaguarDrive selector module located below the JaguarDrive selector. The
module detects the selection made using the buttons and transmits a signal on the high speed CAN (controller area network)
bus, which is received by each of the sub-system control modules.
Each of the affected sub-system control modules contain software, which applies the correct operating parameters to their
controlled system for the JaguarDrive control mode selection made.
Each sub-system control module also provides feedback for the selected mode so that the JaguarDrive control software can
check that all systems have changed to the correct operating parameters.
NOTE: The JaguarDrive control system is a co-ordinating system only. It CANNOT generate a fault in one of the participating
sub-systems. All participating sub-systems should be FULLY diagnosed before assuming a fault with JaguarDrive control. The
JaguarDrive selector module should not be replaced until all other options have been exhausted.
Winter Mode
To activate winter mode, press the winter mode button briefly (not less than 500 ms) to activate or de-activate the mode.
NOTE: Winter mode cannot be active at the same time as dynamic mode.
When active the winter mode icon and message appear in the instrument cluster message center to confirm the activation.
Dynamic Stability Control
Press the DSC (dynamic stability control) mode button briefly (not less than 300 ms) to switch between DSC and TracDSC.
The instrument cluster message center will display either DSC ON or TRAC DSC depending on which selection is made. When
TracDSC is selected, the DSC warning lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated and the DSC button is illuminated.
TracDSC is intended only for use on dry tarmac by suitably experienced drivers.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (206-09 Anti-Lock
Control - Stability Assist, Description and Operation).
DSC can be manually switched off by pressing the DSC mode button for more than 10 seconds. Confirmation is given by a
chime from the instrument cluster, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster message center and the DSC warning
lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated.
NOTE: DSC is operational at all times when the engine is running unless manually switched off.
Dynamic Mode
To activate dynamic mode, press the button briefly. The dynamic mode button is illuminated. Dynamic mode confirmed
message is displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
NOTE: Dynamic mode cannot be active at the same time as winter mode.
In transmission sport mode and manual mode, the driver has full control over the transmission shift points and the TCM
(transmission control module) will not intervene to prevent engine overspeed (i.e. automatic upshifts are inhibited). In this
setting, the gear indicator in the instrument cluster will turn amber at high engine speeds to indicate an appropriate manual
upshift point.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
175 A megafuse
CJB (central junction box) fuse 17
Diagnostic socket
High speed CAN connection to other systems
ECM
TCM
ABS module
DLM
10
ADCM
11
12
Instrument cluster
Engine Management System
The EMS varies the accelerator pedal maps to change the amount of torque per percentage of pedal travel. The EMS can also
change the accelerator pedal response to control the allowed torque change relative to the speed of pedal travel.
Each driving mode uses a combination of operating parameters for each sub-system. Changing between driving modes
initiates a different set of operating characteristics, which will be noticeable to the driver. The driver will notice differences in
engine response when, for example, the accelerator pedal is held in a constant position and the driving mode is changed
from winter to dynamic, the driver will notice the torque and engine speed increase. Similarly, if the mode is changed from
normal or dynamic to winter, the driver will notice a reduction in torque and engine speed.
NOTE: The change in torque and engine speed can take approximately 30 seconds and care must be taken not to confuse the
JaguarDrive control system operation with an EMS fault.
The TCM changes the shift maps for the JaguarDrive control mode selected. This changes the shift points providing early or
late upshifts and downshifts. For example, on slippery surfaces in winter mode the transmission will select 2nd gear for
starting from a standstill on a flat surface to minimize wheel slip.
Anti-Lock Braking System Control

The ABS (anti-lock brake system) module controls several vehicle functions and adjusts the operating parameters of these
functions to optimize the selected JaguarDrive control mode. Traction control uses different slip/acceleration thresholds to
improve traction and vehicle composure. For example, the system sensitivity is increased on slippery surfaces to reduce
wheel spin.
If TracDSC is selected or DSC is switched off, then subsequently the JaguarDrive control mode is changed, DSC is
automatically switched back on.
The stability control uses different threshold values for the selected mode, reducing the requirement for the driver to change
the DSC system mode for optimum performance in various driving scenarios.
Incorrect Mode Usage

Selection of an inappropriate mode is discouraged in the following ways:
The active mode icon is continually displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
In dynamic mode, when the ignition has been in the off position continuously for more than 6 hours, the JaguarDrive
control system defaults to the special modes off (DSC on).

Selection of an inappropriate mode for the conditions will not endanger the driver or immediately cause damage to the
vehicle. Continued use of an inappropriate mode may reduce the life of some components. The driver may notice a different
vehicle response, with the engine and transmission responses being different than in the special modes off.
Driver Information
The message center contains the JaguarDrive control mode icons, which display the currently selected mode. If no symbol is
displayed, no special mode is selected and the system is in special modes off.
In dynamic mode when the transmission is in sport and manual mode, the gear information is displayed in amber when the
appropriate engine speed is reached for the optimum sporty change point.
Diagnostics
The JaguarDrive control system relies on the correct functionality of the sub-systems. If one of the sub-systems develops a
fault, the JaguarDrive control system will not function, even though the fault is not in the JaguarDrive control system.
The JaguarDrive selector module and the mode buttons should only be investigated if there are no apparent faults in any of
the sub-systems. If a fault in a sub-system is subsequently corrected, the JaguarDrive control system will function normally
after an engine on and off cycle.
JaguarDrive Control Sub-System Faults
If a fault occurs in a sub-system, the driver is alerted by the illumination of a warning indicator and/or an appropriate
message for that sub-system in the instrument cluster message center. No JaguarDrive control message will be shown when
a failed sub-system displays its own message.
When a sub-system fault is present and the driver attempts to select a different JaguarDrive control mode or at the next
ignition on cycle, a message WINTER MODE FAULT or DYNAMIC MODE FAULT will appear in the message center. This
generally implies that the JaguarDrive control system has a fault, but only because a sub-system fault is preventing its
operation. This message will be displayed once per ignition cycle, but is repeated if a further selection is made by the driver
using the JaguarDrive control buttons or at the next ignition on cycle.
NOTE: The message WINTER MODE FAULT or DYNAMIC MODE FAULT can also in very rare circumstances be generated by a
fault in the JaguarDrive selector module.
NOTE: It is not possible for the JaguarDrive selector module to cause any fault behavior (warning indicator illumination or
message generation) in any of the sub-systems. Illumination of a sub-system warning indicator and/or a sub-system related
message will never be associated with a JaguarDrive selector module or JaguarDrive control system fault.
The sub-system control modules can detect a fault with the CAN bus signal from the JaguarDrive selector module. If a fault
in the JaguarDrive control system is detected, the sub-system control modules will operate in the special modes off setting.
The sub-system control modules will record a fault code for a failure of the JaguarDrive control CAN signal. These faults can
be retrieved using the Jaguar approved diagnostic tool and will provide useful information to indicate investigation of the
JaguarDrive selector module or the CAN bus network.
JaguarDrive Control System or Selector Module Fault
If a fault occurs in the JaguarDrive control system, all button icon LED (light emitting diode) will be turned off (if applicable,
background illumination will remain on) and pressing of the JaguarDrive control buttons is ignored. The instrument cluster
message center will display a message WINTER MODE FAULT or DYNAMIC MODE FAULT when the fault occurs, if the fault is
present and the driver attempts to select a special mode (if the control module is able to do this) or at the next ignition on
cycle.
The JaguarDrive control buttons and selector module are an integrated unit. If a fault occurs in either component, the whole
unit will require replacement, however, this is extremely unlikely.
CAN Bus Faults
If a CAN bus fault exists and prevents JaguarDrive control system operation, all of the JaguarDrive control button icon LED
will be illuminated and pressing of the JaguarDrive control buttons is ignored.
If the instrument cluster does not receive a JaguarDrive control system CAN bus message from the JaguarDrive selector
module, the message SPECIAL MODE UNAVAILABLE will be displayed when the fault occurs and will be repeated at every
ignition on cycle.
User Error
A special mode change will not occur while DSC or ABS is active (including ABS cycling). This may be misinterpreted as a
system fault.
Driveline System - General Information - Driveline System

For a detailed description of driveline operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to:
Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Halfshafts (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation).
CAUTION: Only serviceable items can be renewed or adjusted. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the
warranty of the component being rejected.
Certain driveline trouble symptoms are also common to the engine, transmission, wheel bearings, tires, and other parts
of the vehicle. For this reason, make sure that the cause of the trouble is in the driveline before adjusting, repairing, or
installing any new components. For additional information,
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Diagnosis and Testing).
1.
Verify the customer concern by carrying out a road test of the vehicle.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage and system integrity.
3.
4.
If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Identify the Condition

Gear Howl and Whine
Howling or whining of the ring gear and pinion is due to an incorrect gear pattern, gear damage or incorrect bearing
preload.
Bearing Whine
Bearing whine is a high-pitched sound similar to a whistle. It is usually caused by worn/damaged pinion bearings, which
are operating at driveshaft speed. Bearing noise occurs at all driving speeds. This distinguishes it from gear whine
which is speed dependent.
As noted, pinion bearings make a high-pitched, whistling noise, usually at all speeds. If however there is only one
pinion bearing that is worn/damaged, the noise may vary in different driving phases.
A wheel bearing noise can be mistaken for a pinion bearing noise.
www.JagDocs.com
Chuckle
Chuckle that occurs on the coast driving phase is usually caused by excessive clearance between the differential gear
hub and the differential case bore.
Damage to a gear tooth on the coast side can cause a noise identical to a chuckle. A very small tooth nick or ridge on
the edge of a tooth can cause the noise.
Knock
Knock, which can occur on all driving phases, has several causes including damaged teeth or gearset.
A gear tooth damaged on the drive side is a common cause of the knock.
Clunk
Clunk is a metallic noise heard when the automatic transmission is engaged in REVERSE or DRIVE. The noise may also
occur when the throttle is applied or released. Clunk is caused by transmission calibration, backlash in the driveline or
loose suspension components and is felt or heard in the vicinity of the rear drive axle.
Bearing Rumble
Bearing rumble sounds like marbles being tumbled. This condition is usually caused by a worn/damaged wheel bearing.
The lower pitch is because the wheel bearing turns at only about one-third of the driveshaft speed. Wheel bearing noise
also may be high-pitched, similar to gear noise, but will be evident in all four driving modes.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Noise is at constant tone over a *
narrow vehicle speed range.
Usually heard on light drive and
coast conditions.
Noise is the same on drive or
*
coast
*
*
*
Possible Sources
Rear drive axle.
Noise is produced with the

vehicle standing and driving
Engine.
Transmission.
Transmission calibration.
Transmission Mount.
Transmission.
Suspension components.
Backlash in the driveline.
Engine idle speed set too high.
Engine mount.
Inadequate or contaminated
Loud clunk in the driveline

when shifting from reverse to
forward
Clicking, popping, or grinding
Road.
*
Worn or damaged driveshaft joint. *
Driveshaft center bearing.
*
Wheel bearing.
*
Action
For additional information,GO to Pinpoint
Test B. .
Normal conditions.
INSTALL new components as necessary.
INSTALL new components as necessary.
CHECK and INSTALL a new wheel bearing as
necessary.
REFER to: Wheel Bearing (204-02 Rear
For additional information,
REFER to: Engine (303-00 Engine System General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
REFER to: Diagnostic Strategy (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Diagnosis
and Testing).
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic
system, re-configure the Transmission
Control Module (TCM) with the latest
available calibration.
INSPECT and INSTALL new transmission
mounts as necessary.
REFER to: Diagnostic Strategy (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Diagnosis
and Testing).
INSPECT and INSTALL new suspension
components as necessary.
INSPECT and INSTALL new driveline
Check and adjust the idle speed as
necessary.
INSPECT and INSTALL new engine mounts
as necessary.
INSPECT, CLEAN and LUBRICATE with new
noises
Vibration at highway speeds
Shudder, Vibration During

Acceleration
Lubricant Leak
lubrication in the rear drive

grease as necessary.
halfshaft constant velocity (CV)
joint.
* Another component contacting the * INSPECT and REPAIR as necessary.
rear drive halfshaft.
* Wheel bearings, brakes or
* INSPECT and INSTALL new components as
suspension components.
necessary.
* Out-of-balance wheel(s) or tire(s). * BALANCE and INSTALL new wheel(s) and
tire(s) as necessary.
REFER to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels
and Tires, Removal and Installation).
* Driveline out of
* For additional information, refer to the
balance/misalignment.
Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
* Driveshaft center bearing touching * Check for correct spacer washer thickness.
body mounting point.
INSPECT and INSTALL new washers as
necessary.
* Powertrain/driveline misalignment. * CHECK for misalignment. INSTALL new
components as necessary. For driveshaft
alignment, GO to Pinpoint Test B.
* High constant velocity (CV) joint
* CHECK the ride height and VERIFY the
operating angles caused by
correct spring rate. INSTALL new
incorrect ride height.
* Rear drive axle breather.
* Check oil level and correct as necessary.
* Damaged seal.
* INSTALL new components as necessary.
* Rear drive axle filler plug.
* Rear drive axle rear cover joint.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : EXCESSIVE DRIVELINE NOISE
TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK NOISE FROM VEHICLE ON ROAD TEST
Road test vehicle to determine load and speed conditions when noise occurs.
1
2
Assess the noise with different gears selected.
Does the noise occur in different gears at the same vehicle speed?
Yes
INSTALL a new rear drive axle/differential assembly.
REFER to: Axle Assembly (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and Installation).
RE-TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REFER to: Engine (303-00 Engine System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing) /
Diagnostic Strategy (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Diagnosis and Testing).
PINPOINT TEST B : DRIVESHAFT ALIGNMENT

TEST CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK DRIVESHAFT COMPOUND ANGLE
1
Remove exhaust system and center heat shield.

REFER to: Exhaust System (309-00 Exhaust System,
Place inclinometer (special tool number 501-F007) on
flat surface and calibrate.
Using the inclinometer check the angle of the

driveshaft rearwards of the center bearing and note
the reading (reading one)
Check the angle of the driveshaft forward of the

center bearing and note the reading (reading two).
Subtract reading two from reading one to obtain the
compound angle of the driveshaft. The correct
specification for the driveshaft compound angle is 1.1
0.3
Is driveshaft compound angle correct?

Yes
GO to B2.
No
Adjust driveshaft center bearing height by adding or
removing shims (refer to parts catalogue for selection
of shims available) and re-check compound angle. GO
to B2.
B2: CHECK CENTER BEARING ALIGNMENT
1
Check the center bearing is aligned at 90 to front

section of driveshaft.
Is the center bearing aligned correctly?

Yes
Driveshaft alignment is correct. Install center heat
shield and exhaust system.
No
Undo but do not remove center bearing bolts, align
center bearing to front section of driveshaft, tighten
bolts to correct torque.
REFER to: Specifications (205-01 Driveshaft,
Specifications).
Install center heat shield and exhaust system.
Driveshaft Torque Specifications
Item
Center bearing - bolt*
Driveshaft balance - nut*
Driveshaft flange to differential flange - nut/bolt*
Driveshaft flange to transmission flange - nut/bolt*
Nm
40
12
88
127
lb-ft
29
9
65
94
lb-in
-
Driveshaft - Driveshaft
COMPONENT LOCATION
INTRODUCTION
The driveshaft consists of the following components:
A two-piece welded steel tube with a splined center slip joint.

One universal joint.
A center bearing.
A flexible joint and a plunging joint.
The two-piece driveshaft is manufactured from lightweight steel and is used to transmit drive from the engine, via the
transmission, to the differential. The driveshaft aligns with the centerline of the vehicles body and is supported by a center
bearing.
The driveshafts front tube is of a swaged construction, designed to collapse in a controlled manner in the event of the vehicle
being involved in a front-end collision. Low friction splines at the center of the driveshaft provide the driveshaft's plunge
capability.
A flexible coupling is used to connect the driveshaft assembly to the transmission, allowing for angular movement of the
drive shafts due to acceleration and braking. The center universal joint is lubricated during manufacture and sealed for life.
This joint is positioned to a specified angle using shims between the center bearing and the body.
Driveshaft
Item
Part Number
Description
Rear driveshaft tube
Differential
Differential plunging joint
Universal joint
Center bearing
Transmission
Collapsible front driveshaft tube
Transmission flexible joint
REFER to: Driveline System (205-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Driveshaft - Driveshaft Runout and Balancing

General Procedures
1.
For additional information, refer to the Jaguar Approved

Diagnostic System.
Special Tool(s)
205-932
Remover, Driveshaft
Removal
NOTE: Select NEUTRAL before disconnecting the battery, to allow the driveshaft to be turned.
1.

2.

3.
Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00 Exhaust System - V8 5.0L

Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION: Under no circumstances must the

flexible coupling (or it's fixings) be loosened or
removed from the driveshaft.
8.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the joint or

gaiter, do not allow the driveshaft to hang.
NOTE: Make sure that the special tool is correctly
installed to the recess on the driveshaft.
9.

NOTE: Using a suitable hammer and drift, make
sure that you only hit the corner edges of the
special tool to remove the driveshaft.
10.
Installation
1.
2.
CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger-tight

at this stage.
NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark on the

driveshaft is correctly aligned to the alignment
mark on the differential case.
Torque: 75 Nm
3.
NOTE: This step only applies if a new driveshaft is

being installed.
NOTE: Using the 3mm hole on the differential case
flange and paint alignment mark on the driveshaft
(as indicated). Make sure that the alignment marks
are correctly aligned.
Torque: 75 Nm
4.
flexible coupling (or it's fixings) be loosened or

Torque: 127 Nm
5.
Torque: 40 Nm
6.
Torque: 5 Nm
7.
8.
9.
Torque: 7 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm

10.

11.

Lower the vehicle.
Rear Drive Axle/Differential General Specifications
Item
Differential Ratio
Specification
3.31 : 1
Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Differential fluid type 5.0L NA

Differential fluid type 5.0L SC
Specifications
Castrol SAFXO 75W90
Castrol BOT 720 75W90
Capacities
Liters
0.9 liters
1.3 liters
Differential fluid capacity 5.0L NA

Differential fluid capacity 5.0L SC
Item
Differential flange to driveshaft flange - nuts/bolts*
Differential flange to pinion shaft - nut*
Differential front mounting - bolt*
Differential rear mounting - bolt*
NOTE: A = refer to the procedure for correct torque sequence.
Nm
73
A
90
163
lb-ft
54
66
120
lb-in
-
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential V8 5.0L

COMPONENT LOCATION
Open Differential
Electronic Differential
Item
Part Number
Description
Electronic differential
INTRODUCTION
The differential converts the 'angle of drive' through 90 and distributes drive, via the rear drive halfshafts, to the rear
wheels.
Two types of differential are installed on 5.0L vehicles. An open differential on naturally aspirated vehicles and an electronic
differential on SC (supercharger) vehicles. Both types of differential are attached to the rear subframe at four mounting
points. Each mounting point incorporates an insulator to reduce NVH (noise, vibration and harshness). The insulators in the
forward mounting points are installed in the differential. The insulators in the rear mounting points are installed in the rear
subframe.
OPEN DIFFERENTIAL
Item
Part Number
Description
Cover
LH (left hand) rear drive halfshaft oil seal
Filler/Level plug
Input flange
Front mounting points with insulators
Carrier
Rear mounting points
Breather
RH (right hand) rear drive halfshaft oil seal
10
Magnetic drain plug
The open differential is a conventional design using a hypoid gear layout. The final drive ratio is 3.31:1.
The outer casing comprises two parts; a cover and a carrier. The carrier provides locations for all the internal components.
Nine bolts attach the cover to the carrier. The cover and carrier have cast fins, which assist rigidity and cooling. A breather is
fitted to the top of the carrier.
Exploded View of Open Differential
Item
Part Number
Description
Bolt (9 off)
Oil seal
Cover
Shim
Bearing assembly
Bolt (10 off)
Differential case
Bearing assembly
Oil seal
10
Oil slinger inner
11
Oil slinger outer
12
Input flange
13
Pinion nut
14
Collapsible spacer
15
Shim
16
Bearing assembly
17
Pinion shaft
LH mounting insulator inner
19
LH mounting insulator rubber
20
LH mounting insulator outer
21
Carrier
22
RH mounting insulator inner
23
RH mounting insulator rubber
24
RH mounting insulator outer
25
Oil seal
26
Drain plug
27
Breather tube
28
Breather cap
29
Shim
30
Bearing assembly
31
Drive gear
32
Shaft
33
Planet gear (2 off)
34
Thrust washer (2 off)
35
Sun gear (2 off)
36
Spacer (2 off)
37
Roll pin
38
Fill/Level plug
18
The open differential comprises a pinion shaft with a hypoid gear, and a crown wheel drive gear attached to a differential
case. The differential case houses two planet gears and two sun gears.
An input flange is installed on the externally splined outer end of the pinion shaft and retained by a pinion nut. The input
flange has six threaded holes for the driveshaft attachment bolts. An oil slinger and oil seal are installed in the carrier to seal
the input flange. The hypoid gear of the pinion shaft mates with the drive gear.
Ten bolts attach the drive gear to the differential case. The differential case is mounted on taper roller bearings located in
machined bores in the carrier and the cover. Shims are installed behind the bearing cups to apply the correct bearing preload
and hypoid backlash.
The differential case has a through hole, which provides location for a shaft. Two planet gears are installed on the shaft, with
thrust washers between the planet gears and the differential case. A roll pin locks the shaft to the differential case.
Two sun gears are located in pockets in the differential case and mesh with the planet gears. Spacers are fitted between the
sun gears and the differential case to give the correct mesh contact between the planet gears and the sun gears. Each sun
gear has a machined bore with internal splines and a machined groove. The splines transfer drive to the rear drive halfshafts.
The groove provides positive location for the snap ring fitted to the inboard end of the rear drive halfshafts.
Oil seals are installed in the carrier and the cover to seal the rear drive halfshafts.
The open differential contains a quantity of oil for splash lubrication of the internal components. A magnetic drain plug is
installed in the bottom of the carrier and a filler/level plug is installed in the cover.
ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIAL
Item
Part Number
Description
Cover
LH rear drive halfshaft oil seal
Filler/Level plug
Temperature sensor
Motor
Input flange
Front mounting points with insulator assemblies
Carrier
Rear mounting points
10
Breather
11
RH rear drive halfshaft oil seal
12
Magnetic drain plug
The electronic differential has the same functionality as the open differential, but it also incorporates a locking and torque
biasing function to give improved traction performance and vehicle dynamic stability.
The basic construction of the electronic differential is similar to the open differential. However, the electronic differential also
has the following:
Two additional planet gears in the differential case, to cater for the higher torque of the SC engine.
A multi-plate clutch and actuator assembly installed on the LH (left-hand) sun gear.
A motor and reduction gearbox, attached to the cover.
A temperature sensor installed in the cover.
The DLM (differential locking module) operates the motor of the electronic differential under the control of the ADCM
(adaptive damping control module).
Exploded View of Electronic Differential
Item
Part Number
Description
Circlip
Bearing assembly
Input actuator
Actuator balls
Output actuator
Thrust race
Shim
Thrust plate
Dished washer
Bolt (10 off)
11
Clutch basket
12
Multi-plate clutch and pressure disc
13
Differential case
14
Screw (2 off)
15
Bearing assembly
16
Oil seal
17
Oil slinger inner
18
Oil slinger outer
19
Input flange
20
Pinion nut
21
Collapsible spacer
22
Shim
23
Bearing assembly
24
Pinion shaft
25
Mounting insulator inner (2 off)
26
Mounting insulator rubber (2 off)
27
Mounting insulator outer (2 off)
28
Carrier
29
Oil seal
30
Drain plug
31
Breather tube
32
Breather cap
33
Shim
34
Bearing assembly
35
Drive gear
36
Shim
37
RH sun gear
38
Circlip
39
Thrust washer (4 off)
40
Planet gear (4 off)
41
Pin (2 off)
42
Shaft
43
LH sun gear
44
Shim
45
Bearing assembly
46
Shim
47
Dowel (2 off)
48
Bolt (4 off)
49
Reduction gear casing
50
Reduction gear
51
Shaft
52
Temperature sensor
53
O-ring seal
54
Motor
55
Screw (4 off)
56
Cover
57
Output actuator locking pin
58
Bolt (9 off)
59
Filler/Level plug
60
Oil seal
10
The multi-plate clutch is contained in a clutch basket attached to the differential case with the drive gear securing bolts.
Alternate plates of the clutch pack are keyed to the clutch basket and the LH sun gear. A pressure disc is installed on the
outer end of the clutch pack and keyed to the clutch basket. A thrust plate on the end of the clutch basket incorporates lugs
which extend through the clutch basket onto the pressure disc.
The actuator assembly is mounted on bearings on the outboard end of the clutch basket, against the thrust race. The
actuator assembly consists of input and output actuators separated by five ball bearings. A locking pin in the cover engages
with a slot in the output actuator to prevent it turning, but allow it to move axially. The input actuator engages with the
reduction gearbox and is free to rotate relative to the cover. Ball bearings locate in curved grooves in the mating faces of the
input and output actuators. The bottom surface of each groove incorporates a ramp. Rotation of the input actuator forces the
ball bearings up the ramps in the grooves and induces an axial movement in the output actuator. The thrust race and
pressure disc transfer the axial movement from the output actuator to the clutch pack.
Section Through Multi-plate Clutch
Item
Part Number
Description
Actuator
Multi-plate clutch
Differential
The motor is a 12 Vdc motor that adjusts the frictional loading of the multi-plate clutch, via the reduction gearbox and the
actuator assembly, under the control of the DLM. Adjusting the frictional loading of the multi-plate clutch adjusts the locking
torque between the crown wheel drive gear and the sun gear.
Four bolts attach the motor to the reduction gearbox, which is located in position on the cover with two dowels, and secured
with four bolts. An O-ring seals the joint between the motor and the reduction gearbox.
The motor is driven by a 12 V PWM (pulse width modulated) feed from the DLM. The motor also incorporates the following
connections with the DLM:
A motor temperature sensor, to prevent excessive use from damaging the motor.
Two Hall effect motor position sensors, to enable closed loop control of the motor.
The temperature sensor provides a differential oil temperature signal to the DLM, to prevent excessive use from damaging
the multi-plate clutch.
Differential Locking Module

The DLM controls the operation of the motor on the electronic differential. The DLM is attached to a bracket located on the
LH side of the luggage compartment, immediately forward of the tail lamp, behind the trim.
The DLM receives three battery feeds from the AJB (auxiliary junction box) and an ignition feed from the CJB (central
junction box). A connection with the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus allows the DLM to communicate with the
ADCM.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIAL

Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
BJB (battery junction box) (2 x 175 A megafuses)
Motor
DLM
Oil temperature sensor
ADCM
Open Differential
Rotational input from the drive shaft is passed via the input flange to the pinion shaft and pinion gear. The angles of the
pinion gear to the drive gear moves the rotational direction through 90.
The transferred rotational motion is now passed to the drive gear, which in turn rotates the differential case. The planet
gears rotate with the differential case and transfer rotational motion to the LH and RH (right-hand) sun gears, which rotate
the rear drive halfshafts.
When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, the torque applied through the differential to each sun gear is equal. In
this condition both rear drive halfshafts rotate at the same speed. The planet gears do not rotate and effectively lock the sun
gears to the differential case.
If the vehicle is turning, the outer wheel will be forced to rotate faster than the inner wheel by having a greater distance to
travel. The differential senses the torque difference between the sun gears. The planet gears rotate on their shaft to allow
the outer wheel to rotate faster than the inner one.
Electronic Differential
The multi-plate clutch prevents excessive differential slip and therefore maximizes the traction performance of the vehicle.
This is fundamentally different from 'braked' traction control systems, which can only counteract differential slip when it
occurs.
A certain amount of differential slip is required to allow the vehicle to turn corners and to remain stable under control of the
ABS (anti-lock brake system). The ADCM monitors the driver's demands through primary vehicle controls and automatically
sets the slip torque in the differential. The system is completely automatic and does not require any special driver input.
The multi-plate clutch actively controls the torque flow through the differential and optimizes the torque distribution in the
driveline. The clutch biases the torque from the differential to the wheel with the higher grip and prevents the wheel with the
lower grip from spinning.
The differential strategy in the ADCM includes:
A pre-loading function, increasing locking torque with increased driving torque.
A slip controller to decrease locking torque for optimum comfort, e.g. parking.
The ADCM memorizes the position of the motor when the ignition is switched off.
CAN bus messages used by the ADCM include wheel speed, steering angle, automatic transmission speed, temperature
information, car configuration, axle ratios and mode inputs.
The ADCM also sends messages via the CAN bus to tell other control modules on the network the status of the electronic
differential. The clutch torque and default mode status are some of the main signals sent out by the ADCM.
If the DLM or ADCM are replaced, a Jaguar approved diagnostic system must be connected to the vehicle and the differential
self-calibration procedure must be performed. This procedure must also be performed if the motor or electronic differential is
replaced.
If a fault occurs with the electronic differential, the ADCM, the DLM, or one of the required input signals, the ADCM records
an error code and displays a warning in the message center.
The following messages can be displayed:
Message
EDIFF NOT
AVAILABLE
EDIFF SYSTEM
FAULT
Description
Differential temperature has reached the overheat threshold. System deactivated until
temperature returns within limits.
Fault has occurred with electronic differential. System deactivated until fault rectified.
www.JagDocs.com
Chime
Single
Single
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential

For a detailed description of the Rear Drive Axle and Differential, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
in the workshop manual. REFER to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-02 Rear
Drive Axle/Differential, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
1.
2.

Mechanical
Electrical
Fixings that secure Rear Differential Control Module (Heat
path for Module Heatsink)
Fuses/Relays
Damaged, Loose or Corroded Connector(s)
Damage to Wiring Loom/Incorrect Location,
Stretched or Taught
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer
to the DTC index.
DTC Index
NOTE: If the control module is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module.
NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. Match the five digits from
the scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give extra
information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
places and with a current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads
into account.
NOTE: If the Rear Differential Control Module, Rear Differential Actuator or the Rear Differential are replaced the on
demand self test (ODST) must be carried out to calibrate the components.
DTC
P056200
Description
System Voltage Low - no
P0563- System Voltage High - no
Possible Cause
System voltage low at ECU
Action
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check, power and ground circuit for fault
(supply voltage less than 9

volts)
System voltage high
Check Engine control module for stored DTCs ,
00
P060400
(supply voltage supply

greater than 16 volts)
Internal Control Module

(RAM) Error - no sub type
information
P0605- Internal Control Module
00
Read Only Memory (ROM)
Error - no sub type
information
P0606- Control Module Processor 00
no sub type information
Module internal fault
P0607Control Module
00
Performance - no sub type
information
P0652- Sensor Reference Voltage B

00
Circuit Low - no sub type
information
Motor position sensor
P0653- Sensor Reference Voltage B

00
Circuit High - no sub type
information
Motor position sensor
P0666- PCM / ECM / TCM Internal

00
Temperature Sensor A
Circuit - no sub type
information
Internal ECU temperature
P071200
Suspect Rear Differential Control Module, refer

to the new module installation note at the top
of the DTC Index

of the DTC Index
Clear DTCs, cycle ignition if DTC returns
suspect Rear Differential Control Module, refer
of the DTC Index
check, Rear Differential Actuator - Motor
Position Sensor Circuit for fault. If circuit is
correct suspect Rear Differential Control
Module, refer to the new module installation
note at the top of the DTC Index
Position Sensor circuit for fault. If wiring
integrity is correct suspect the Rear Differential
Control Module, refer to the new module
Investigate security of Rear Differential Control
Module fixings. The units heatsink is through
its mounting, if fixings secure, suspect Rear
Differential Control Module, refer to the new
module installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
Temperature Sensor circuit for open circuit or
short to ground
Temperature Sensor circuit for short circuit to
power or motor circuit. Repair short circuit.
Clear DTCs, cycle ignition. If DTC returns
suspect the Rear Differential Actuator, refer to
the new module / component installation note
at the top of the DTC Index
Clear DTCs. Cycle ignition, Carry out on
demand self test (ODST), record DTCs. Clear
DTCs. Cycle ignition. Road test. If DTC reoccurs
suspect mechanical fault with Rear Differential,
refer to the new component installation note at
the top of the DTC Index
Position Hall Sensor signal circuit (A or B) open
circuit or short to ground
Position Hall Sensor signal circuit (A or B) short
to power or motor circuit
DTCs. Cycle ignition. Road test. If DTC reoccurs
suspect mechanical fault with Rear Differential,
refer to the new component installation note at
Suspect Rear Differential Actuator, refer to the
new component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index. Replace Rear Differential
Actuator, Clear DTCs. Cycle ignition, Carry out
on demand self test (ODST), record DTCs.
supply below 5.7 V
supply above 8.3 V Internal control module

failure
sensor value above 105

Degrees C
Transmission Fluid
information
P0713Transmission Fluid
00
information
Rear Differential Actuator -
P0806Clutch Position Sensor

00
Circuit Range/Performance
- no sub type information
Mismatch of actual and
P080700
Open circuit or short to
Clutch Position Sensor

information
P0808Clutch Position Sensor

00
information
P080A- Clutch Position Not Learned
00
P089400
Transmission Component
Slipping - no sub type
information
Suspect charging system fault. Refer to the

electrical circuit diagrams and check, power
and ground circuit for fault
of the DTC Index
Motor Temperature Sensor

open circuit or short circuit
to ground
Rear Differential Actuator Motor Temperature Sensor
short circuit to power
expected/calculated
actuator position
ground of DC Motor
Position Sensor signal A or
B
Short circuit to power
supply of DC Motor Position
Sensor signal A or B
On demand self test
(ODST) Re-calibration
failed. RDCM runs with
default values
Internal Magnetic Brake of
Actuator is slipping
P090000
P090100
Clutch Actuator Circuit /

Open - no sub type
information
Clutch Actuator Circuit
Range/Performance - no
P0902- Clutch Actuator Circuit Low

00
P0903- Clutch Actuator Circuit High

00
P160300
EEPROM Malfunction - no
P1783Transmission
00
Overtemperature Condition
P186ADifferential Lock-up
00
Actuator Brake Control
Circuit / Open - no sub
type information
P186BDifferential Lock-up
00
information
P186CDifferential Lock-up
00
information
P186D- Clutch Actuator Stuck - no
00
P274200
P274300
P278500
P278700
U000188
U010000
Transmission Fluid
Temperature Sensor B
information
Transmission Fluid
Temperature Sensor B
information
Clutch Actuator
Temperature Too High - no
Clutch Temperature Too
High - no sub type
information
High Speed CAN
Communication - Bus off
Lost Communication With
ECM/PCM "A" - no sub type
information

00
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Control Module - no
00
Suspension Control Module
"B" - no sub type
information
00
Instrument Panel Cluster
(IPC) Control Module - no
Open circuit of DC Motor
power supply circuit

Both DC Motor supply leads
are short circuited against

each other or H-bridge
overload detected
Short circuit to ground of
Motor supply cable
Clear DTCs. Cycle ignition. Road test.

check, Rear Differential Actuator - Clutch
Actuation Motor circuit for open circuit
Actuation Motor circuit for circuit fault

Actuation Motor circuit for circuit short to
ground
Short circuit to power of
Motor supply cable
Actuation Motor circuit for circuit short to
power
Module internal fault Suspect Rear Differential Control Module, refer
EEPROM failure detected
of the DTC Index
Rear Differential Oil
Clear DTCs . Allow vehicle to cool , read DTCs if
Temperature Sensor value DTC reoccurs suspect Rear Differential Actuator
above 160 Degrees C
- Motor Temperature Sensor fault
Open circuit of DC Motor
Brake supply circuit
check, Rear Differential Actuator - Brake
Solenoid Circuit for open circuit
Short circuit to ground of
DC Motor Brake supply

circuit

Solenoid circuit for short to ground
Short circuit to power of DC

Solenoid circuit for short to power or motor
circuit
Clutch Actuation Motor
fault
DTCs. Cycle ignition. If DTC reoccurs suspect
Rear Differential Actuator, refer to the new
Index
Temperature Sensor short
check, Rear Differential Actuator - Oil
circuit to ground
Temperature sensor for short circuit to ground
Motor Brake supply circuit

Temperature Sensor short
circuit to power

check, Rear Differential Actuator - Oil
Temperature sensor for short circuit to power
or motor circuit
Clutch Actuator
Suspect Rear Differential Actuator, refer to the
Temperature Sensor value new component installation note at the top of
above 150 Degrees C
the DTC Index
Rear Differential Clutch
Suspect mechanical fault with Rear Differential,
Pack temperature value refer to the new component installation note at
above 200 Degrees C
High speed CAN bus off
Carry out the CAN network integrity tests using
detected
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Check ECM for stored DTCs. Refer to the
engine control module
electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus
(ECM) (CAN Bus circuit
circuit to ECM for circuit fault
fault)
Check ABS Control Module for stored DTCs.
(ABS) Control Module (CAN check Can Bus circuit to ABS Control Module
Bus circuit fault)
for circuit fault
Check Suspension Control Module "B" for
stored DTCs. Refer to the electrical circuit
"B" (CAN Bus circuit fault)
diagrams and check Can Bus circuit to
Suspension Control Module "B" for circuit fault
Check Instrument Panel Cluster for stored
DTCs. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
(IPC) Control Module (CAN and check Can Bus circuit to Instrument Panel
Bus circuit fault)
Cluster for circuit fault

00
Software Incompatibility no sub type information
U0415- Invalid Data Received From
68
(ABS) Control Module event information
68
Body Control Module event information
U043A- Invalid Data Received From
68
"B" - event information
68
Body Control Module "B" event information
U1A14- CAN Initialization Failure 49
internal electronic failure
P070264
System Electrical - signal
plausibility failure
Wrong Master Config ID
received or Signal missing

Invalid data receive
Incorrect software installed Check/confirm the

part number of installed Rear Differential
Control Module is correct
Check Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Control
Module for stored DTCs
Check Body Control Module for stored DTCs

stored DTCs

stored DTCs for stored DTCs

of the DTC Index
check, Motor Temperature Sensor and Oil
Sump Temperature Sensors and circuit for fault
Implausibility of Motor
Temperature Sensor and

Oil Sump Temperature
Sensor readout detected.
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Draining and Filling

General Procedures
Check
1.
Refer to: Specifications (205-02, Specifications).
2.

stands.
3.
Clean the area around the lubricant filler
plug.
Position container to collect fluid loss.
4.
Clean the area around the drain plug.
Remove the fluid drain plug.
Drain the differential lubricant.
Adjustment
1.
Clean the drain plug.
Torque: 27 Nm
2.
CAUTIONS:
Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to

the filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the
differential with lubricant, and not to act as a level
indicator.
Make sure the correct specification and

quanity of oil is used.
Fill the differential with the correct amount
of lubricant.
3.
Clean the filler plug.
Torque: 27 Nm
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Case

Special Tool(s)
205-932
Remover, Driveshaft
Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.
Refer to: Rear Halfshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

(205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
3.

4.
Torque: 7 Nm
5.
6.
Torque: 10 Nm
WARNING: Make sure the axle assembly is

supported.
K-Frame bolts
Torque:
M10 40 Nm
M12 133 Nm
Subframe bolts
Torque:
Stage 1: 60 Nm
Stage 2: 240
7.
8.

NOTE: Make sure that the special tool is correctly
installed to the recess on the driveshaft.
Torque: 75 Nm
9.

NOTE: Using a suitable hammer and drift, make
sure that you only hit the corner edges of the
special tool to remove the driveshaft.
Vehicles with supercharger

10.
All vehicles
11.
Support the rear differential casing.

12.
Torque:
M14 190 Nm
M12 90 Nm
Installation
All vehicles
1.
NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark on the driveshaft is

correctly aligned to the alignment mark on the differential case.
2.
NOTE: This step only applies if a new driveshaft is

being installed.
NOTE: Using the 3mm hole on the differential case
flange and paint alignment mark on the driveshaft
(as indicated). Make sure that the alignment marks
are correctly aligned.
Torque: 75 Nm
3.
Check and top-up the differential case.

Torque: 34 Nm

4.
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Front Bushing

Special Tool(s)
204-274
Bush install and removal tool
204-275
204-335
204-601
Bush install tool
303-1121
Installer, Crankshaft Seal
Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Differential Case (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential,

3.
Installation
1.
NOTE: Make sure the new bushes are installed in the correct
orientation.
.
Special Tool(s): 204-275, 204-601, 303-1121, 204-274
2.

Published: 19-Aug-2011
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Drive Pinion Seal

Special Tool(s)
204-264
Pinion Seal Replacer
204-265
Remover/Installer, Drive Pinion Seal
204-266
Adapter for 204-265
204-267
Adapter for 204-265
204-269
205-053
Retainer, Drive Flange
205-053-03
Adapter, Drive Pinion Flange
Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Driveshaft - TD4 2.2L Diesel (205-01, Removal and

Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - V6 3.0L Petrol (205-01 Driveshaft,
Refer to: Driveshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-01
Driveshaft, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft,
3.
NOTE: Measure for installation.

Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the pinion
shaft.
4.
Installation
NOTE: Accurately scribe a line to mark the drive

pinion shaft to the drive pinion nut and pinion
flange.
5.
Special Tool(s): 205-053, 205-053-03
6.
Special Tool(s): 204-266, 204-265, 204-269
7.
NOTE: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.
1.
2.
3.
Special Tool(s): 204-267, 204-266, 204-265
4.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the drive pinion flange has no end

float and is free to rotate.
Make sure that the drive pinion flange scribed

mark is aligned and is never tightend short of the
scribed mark on the drive pinion shaft and is no
more than a maximum of 5 degrees past the
scribed mark on the drive pinion shaft.
NOTE: Using the special tool, counter hold the
drive pinion flange.
NOTE: Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the
pinion shaft to previous noted depth.
Special Tool(s): 205-053, 205-053-03
5.

Torque: 34 Nm
6.
Refer to: Driveshaft - TD4 2.2L Diesel (205-01, Removal and

Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - V6 3.0L Petrol (205-01 Driveshaft,
Refer to: Driveshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-01
Driveshaft, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft,
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Halfshaft Seal

Removal
1.

1.
Installation

Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Locking Motor

Removal
1.
Refer to: Differential Draining and Filling (205-02 Rear Drive

Axle/Differential, General Procedures).
2.
3.
4.
CAUTION: Take extra care when handling the

component.
5.
CAUTION: Make sure that the exhaust

system is supported with a suitable transmission
stand.
correct.
6.
7.
8.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces

are clean and free of foreign material.
Torque: 11 Nm
Apply a suitable amount of approved
sealant to one of the mating faces.
2.
3.
Torque: 7 Nm
4.
5.

correct.

component.
6.
Torque: 25 Nm
7.
8.
Torque: 25 Nm
Refer to: Differential Draining and Filling (205-02 Rear Drive

Axle/Differential, General Procedures).
Rear Drive Halfshafts Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Specifications
Optimal LN 584 LO
Loctite WSK-M2G349-A4
Constant velocity (CV) grease

Driveshaft locking compound
Capacities
Liters
140g
120g
Grease for inner CV joint/boot

Grease for outer CV joint/boot
Item
Halfshaft/hub - nut *
Nm
300
lb-ft
222
lb-in
-
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts

COMPONENT LOCATION
INTRODUCTION
The rear drive halfshafts are of unequal length and both inner and outer joints are of the CV (constant velocity) type, with
plunging inboard and fixed outboard capability allowing for suspension movement.
Dust shields are installed on the inner CV joints to protect the connections with the differential.
The inner and outer CV joints are linked by a solid bar halfshaft. The outer CV joint is a spline interferance-fit into the wheel
hub. The inner CV joint is of a spline slide-fit arrangement and is retained in the differential with the aid of a spring clip.
Item
Part Number
Description
Outer CV joint
Outer CV joint gaiter
Rear drive halfshaft
Inner CV joint gaiter
Inner CV joint
Dust shield
Spring clip
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts

REFER to: Driveline System (205-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Halfshaft V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L

Petrol
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
204-269
205-491
Hub puller
205-491-1
Adapter nuts
308-005
Remover, Axle oil seal
308-621-1
Installer, Halfshaft Oil Seal
308-621-2
Installer/Guide, Halfshaft Oil Seal
www.JagDocs.com
Materials
Name
Specification
Thread Locking HS WSK-M2G349-A4 / 6U7J-M2G349-AA
Removal
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.
4.
NOTE: With assistance, remove the halfshaft

retaining nut, and retain it for the install
procedure.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to detach

the halfshaft from the hub assembly, failure to
halfshaft.
Special Tool(s): 205-491-1, 205-491, 204-269
10.

11.
12.
NOTE: Component illustrated, removed for clarity.

Special Tool(s): 100-012, 308-005
13.
Installation
1.
Clean the components mating faces.

2.
NOTE: Component illustrated, removed for clarity.

Special Tool(s): 100-012, 308-621-1, 308-621-2
3.
CAUTION: Install a new circlip.

Apply a 3 mm (0.125) diameter bead of sealant to
the halfshaft splines.
Material: Thread Locking HS (WSK-M2G349-A4 /
6U7J-M2G349-AA)
4.
Install the halfshaft oil seal plutector.
5.
CAUTIONS:
Do not install the rear halfshaft fully at this

stage.
Only install the rear halfshaft until the

halfshaft splines have past the halfshaft oil seal.
6.
Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal plutector.
7.
CAUTION: Make sure that the rear halfshaft

circlip is installed correctly by pulling the halfshaft
gently to make sure it is engaged.
8.

Torque: 90 Nm
9.
CAUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger

tight.
NOTE: The wheel hub nut is not tightened at this
stage.
10.

Torque: 150 Nm
11.

Torque: 55 Nm
12.
Torque: 6 Nm
13.
14.
Torque: 103 Nm
15.
CAUTION: Do not use air tools to install the

nut. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Torque: 300 Nm
16.

Torque: 34 Nm
17.
and Installation).
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot

Removal
CAUTION: The inboard joint has angularly adjusted roller (AAR) joints. AAR joints have no internal retaining
mechanism and can separate.
1.

2.
Remove the halfshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Halfshaft - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts,
3.
NOTE: Position and secure component in a bench vice

fitted with soft jaws.
Remove and discard the CV joint boot outer retaining
clamp.
4.
Remove the outer CV joint.

Carefully release the clip.
5.

Remove the outer CV joint boot.
Remove and discard the CV joint boot inner
retaining clamp.
Installation
1.
Clean and inspect the components for deterioration.
2.

Install the CV joint boot.
Secure the clip.
3.
NOTE: Check that the circlip is fully engaged.

Install the outer CV joint.
4.
CAUTION: Only use lubricants meeting the Jaguar

specification.
Pack the CV joint with the grease supplied.
5.
CAUTION: Ensure enough air is present in the CV boot

before the retaining clip is secured.
Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.
Secure the clip.
6.
Install the halfshaft.

Rear Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot

Removal
CAUTION: The inboard joint has angularly adjusted roller (AAR) joints. AAR joints have no internal retaining
mechanism and can separate.
1.

2.
Remove the halfshaft.

3.
NOTE: Position and secure component in a bench vice

fitted with soft jaws.
Remove and discard the CV joint boot outer retaining
clamp.
4.
CAUTION: Use a soft face hammer or soft drift to

release the C V joint from the retaining circlip.
Remove the outer CV joint.
5.
Remove and discard the circlip.
6.

Remove the outer CV joint boot.
Remove and discard the CV joint boot inner
retaining clamp.
Installation
1.
Clean and inspect the components for deterioration.
2.

Install the CV joint boot.
Secure the clip.
3.
Install the circlip.
4.
NOTE: Check that the circlip is fully engaged.

Install the outer CV joint.
5.
CAUTION: Only use lubricants meeting the Jaguar

specification.
Pack the CV joint with the grease supplied.
6.
CAUTION: Ensure enough air is present in the CV boot

before the retaining clip is secured.
Install the CV joint boot to the CV joint.
Secure the clip.
7.
Install the halfshaft.

Brake System - General Information Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
CAUTION: Do not use brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 on 2006my vehicles onwards. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: Brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 has now been superseded by Shell ESL Super Dot 4 which is the Jaguar
recommended brake fluid. Shell ESL Super Dot 4 can be used on all model years.
Item
Brake fluid
Specification
Shell ESL Dot 4
Brake Lining and Disc Specifications
Item
Front brake pad material nominal thickness
Front brake pad material minimum thickness
Rear brake pad material nominal thickness
Rear brake pad material minimum thickness
Front brake disc diameter - Vehicles with standard brakes
Front brake disc diameter - Vehicles with high performance brakes
New front brake disc nominal thickness - Vehicles with standard brakes
New front brake disc nominal thickness - Vehicles with high performance brakes
Worn front brake disc minimum thickness - Vehicles with standard brakes
Worn front brake disc minimum thickness - Vehicles with high performance brakes
Rear brake disc diameter - Vehicles with standard brakes
Rear brake disc diameter - Vehicles with high performance brakes
New rear brake disc nominal thickness - Vehicles with standard brakes
New rear brake disc nominal thickness - Vehicles with high performance brakes
Worn rear brake disc minimum thickness - Vehicles with standard brakes
Worn rear brake disc minimum thickness - Vehicles with high performance brakes
Maximum front brake disc runout (installed)
Maximum rear brake disc runout (installed)
Maximum front hub face runout (installed)
Maximum rear hub face runout (installed)
Front brake sliding caliper single piston diameter - Vehicles with standard brakes
Front brake sliding caliper double piston diameter - Vehicles with high performance brakes
Rear brake sliding caliper single piston diameter
Front brake caliper bleed screw
Rear brake caliper bleed screw
Specification
13 mm (0.51 in)
2 mm (0.08 in)
10.8 mm (0.43 in)
2 mm (0.08 in)
355 mm (14.0 in)
380 mm (15.0 in)
32 mm (1.26 in)
36 mm (1.42 in)
30 mm (1.18 in)
34 mm (1.34 in)
326 mm (12.8 in)
376 mm (14.8 in)
20 mm (0.79 in)
26 mm (1.02 in)
18 mm (0.72 in)
24 mm (0.94 in)
0.075 mm ( 0.003 in)
0.09 mm ( 0.004 in)
0.015 mm ( 0.0006 in)
0.025 mm ( 0.0009 in)
60 mm (2.36 in)
42 mm (1.66 in)
45 mm (1.77 in)
14 Nm (10 lb-ft)
14 Nm (10 lb-ft)
Brake System - General Information - Brake System

For a detailed description of the brake system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to:
Front Disc Brake (206-03, Description and Operation),
Rear Disc Brake (206-04, Description and Operation),
Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Description and Operation),
Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and Operation),
Brake Booster (206-07, Description and Operation),
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (206-09, Description and Operation).

NOTE: Prior to carrying out any diagnosis, make sure that the brake system warning indicator is functional.
Visually examine the front and rear wheel and tire assemblies for damage such as uneven wear patterns, tread worn
out or sidewall damage. Verify the tires are the same size, type and, where possible, same manufacturer. Replace the
damaged wheel or excessively worn tire.
REFER to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
Wheels and tires must be cleared of any foreign matter and tire pressures adjusted to the correct specification.
If the tires exhibit uneven wear or feathering, the cause must be corrected. Check the steering and suspension
components for damage or wear and, if necessary, check and adjust front wheel alignment.
REFER to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension System - General Information, Specifications) /
Front Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System - General Information, General Procedures).
Mechanical
Brake master cylinder
Brake caliper piston(s)
Brake discs
Wheel bearings
Brake pads
Power brake booster
Brake pedal linkage
Brake booster vacuum hose
Tires
Debris
Road Test
Electrical
Parking brake actuator
Parking brake module
Parking brake switch
Damaged or corroded wiring harness
Brake master cylinder fluid level switch
Carry out a road test to compare actual vehicle braking performance with the performance standards expected by the
driver. The ability of the test driver to make valid comparisons and detect performance deficiencies will depend on
experience.
The driver should have a thorough knowledge of brake system operation and accepted general performance guidelines
to make good comparisons and detect performance concerns.
An experienced brake technician will always establish a route that will be used for all brake diagnosis road tests. The
roads selected will be reasonably smooth and level. Gravel or bumpy roads are not suitable because the surface does
not allow the tires to grip the road equally. Crowned roads should be avoided because of the large amount of weight
shifted to the low set of wheels on this type of road. Once the route is established and consistently used, the road
surface variable can be eliminated from the test results.
Before a road test, obtain a complete description of the customer concerns or suspected condition. From the
description, the technician's experience will allow the technician to match possible causes with symptoms. Certain
components will be tagged as possible suspects while others will be eliminated by the evidence. More importantly, the
customer description can reveal unsafe conditions which should be checked or corrected before the road test. The
description will also help form the basic approach to the road test by narrowing the concern to specific components,
vehicle speed or conditions.
Begin the road test with a general brake performance check. Keeping the description of the concern in mind, test the
brakes at different vehicle speeds using both light and heavy pedal pressure. To determine if the concern is in the front
or rear braking system, use the brake pedal and then use the parking brake control. If the condition (pull, vibration,
pulsation) occurs only with the parking brake, the concern is in the rear brake system.
If the concern becomes evident during this check, verify it fits the description given before the road test. If the concern
is not evident, attempt to duplicate the condition using the information from the description.
If a concern exists, use the Symptom Chart in order to isolate it to a specific sub-system and condition description.
From this description, a list of possible sources can be used to further narrow the cause to a specific component or
condition.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Brakes noisy
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Possible Sources
Brake pads.
Brake discs.
Wheels require balancing.
Wheel hub nuts.
Brake caliper mounting bolts.
Brake pads.
Foreign material/scratches/corrosion on
brake disc contact surfaces.
Excessive brake disc thickness variation.
Excessive brake disc runout.
Wheel bearing wear or failure.
Suspension bushing wear or failure.
Steering bushing wear or failure.
Tire pressures/wear.
Brake calipers.
Brake pads.
Brake discs.
Wheel alignment adjustment.
Wheel bearing.
Suspension bushings and ball joints.
Air in brake system.
Leak in hydraulic system.
Brake booster/master cylinder.
Brake pads.
Leak in hydraulic system.
Brake pads.
Brake pads.
Brake booster.
Brake pads.
Brake calipers.
Parking brake control
applied/malfunction.
Seized parking brake cables.
Seized caliper slide pins.
Seized brake caliper.
Brake booster.
Pedal gear.
Hydraulic system.
Brake pads.
Brake discs.
Hub and bearing assembly.
Fluid level.
Brake fluid level sensor.
Parking brake control.
Electrical circuit.
*
*
Brake pedal binding.

*
*
Vibration when brakes are *
applied
*
*
*
*
The brakes pull or drift
The pedal feels spongy
The pedal goes down fast
The pedal goes down

slowly
Excessive brake pedal
effort
Brake lockup during light
brake pedal force
Brakes drag
Excessive/Erratic brake
pedal travel
The red brake warning

indicator is always on
Slow or incomplete brake

pedal return
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Action
Go to Pinpoint Test B.
Go to Pinpoint Test F.
FILL the system to specification. CHECK

for leaks.
INSTALL a new brake master cylinder fluid
reservoir.
REFER to: Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-06
Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
REFER to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking
Brake and Actuation, Diagnosis and
Testing).
REFER to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking
Brake and Actuation, Diagnosis and
Testing).
GO to Pinpoint Test K.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : BRAKES NOISY
TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: INSPECT BRAKE PADS
Inspect the condition of the front and rear brake pads. Check for damage to any anti-squeal
1
shims.
Are the brake pads OK?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
CLEAN the front brake pads or INSTALL new front brake pads if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03, Removal and Installation).
CLEAN the rear brake pads or INSTALL new rear brake pads if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
Test vehicle for presence of brake squeal.
A2: INSPECT BRAKE DISCS
Inspect the brake discs for excessive corrosion, wear or disc thickness variation.
1
Does excessive corrosion, wear or disc thickness variation exist?
Yes
INSTALL new front brake discs and brake pads.
REFER to: Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation) /
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
. INSTALL new rear brake discs and brake pads.
REFER to: Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation) /
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Vehicle is OK.
PINPOINT TEST B : VIBRATION WHEN BRAKES ARE APPLIED

TEST
CONDITIONS
B1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) without applying brakes.
1
Is the vibration present?
Yes
TEST for noise vibration and harshness.
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness,
REPEAT road test if necessary.
No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK FOR BRAKE VIBRATION
Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) with light and medium application on the
1
brake pedal.
Is a vibration present?
Yes
CHECK the brake caliper mounting bolts and wheel hub nuts and TIGHTEN as necessary. CHECK
the balance of all road wheels and tyres and REPAIR as necessary. CHECK the brake discs for
excessive wear, runout, thickness variation or cracks. INSTALL new brake discs and brake pads as
necessary. GO to B3.
No
Vehicle is OK.
B3: IS VIBRATION STILL PRESENT UNDER BRAKE APPLICATION?
1
Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) with light and medium application on the
brake pedal.
Is a vibration present?
Yes
CHECK for wear or failure of steering gear bushings. CHECK for wear or failure of steering gear
ball joints. CHECK for wear or failure of front wheel bearings, suspension bushings and ball joints.
CHECK for wear or failure of rear wheel bearings, suspension bushings and ball joints. REFER to
relevant section in workshop manual and INSTALL new parts as necessary.
No
Vehicle is OK.
PINPOINT TEST C : THE BRAKES PULL OR DRIFT

TEST
CONDITIONS
C1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1
Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal.
Does the vehicle pull or drift?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
Vehicle is OK.
C2: INSPECT TIRE CONDITION/PRESSURE
1
Check for excessive tire wear or incorrect pressures.
Are the tires at the correct pressure and in good condition?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
ADJUST the tire pressures or INSTALL new tires if excessively worn. TEST the system for normal
operation.
C3: CHECK CALIPERS
1
Check the disc brake caliper pistons and pins for binding, leaking or sticking.
Do the disc brake caliper pistons and pins bind, leak or stick?
Yes
RECTIFY sticking pins and INSTALL new brake calipers as necessary.
REFER to: Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation) /
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
No
GO to C4.
C4: INSPECT BRAKE DISCS
Check the brake discs for excessive damage, thickness variation or runout.
1
REFER to: Brake Disc Runout Check (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Does excessive damage or runout exist?
Yes
INSTALL new brake discs and brake pads as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C5.
C5: INSPECT THE FRONT HUB AND WHEEL BEARING ASSEMBLY
Check the front hub and wheel bearing assembly.
1
Are the wheel bearings OK?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
INSTALL new wheel bearings.
REFER to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front
C6: CHECK SUSPENSION BUSHINGS AND BALL JOINTS.
Check all suspension bushings and ball joints.
1
Are the suspension bushings and ball joints OK?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
INSTALL new front suspension bushings and ball joints as necessary. INSTALL new rear
suspension bushings and ball joints as necessary. REFER to the relevant section in the workshop
manual.
C7: CHECK VEHICLE ALIGNMENT
Check the vehicle alignment.
1
REFER to: Front Subframe (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and
Installation).
Is the alignment within specification?
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
Adjust the alignment as necessary.
REFER to: Front Subframe (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and
Installation).
PINPOINT TEST D : THE PEDAL FEELS SPONGY

TEST
CONDITIONS
D1: CHECK FOR SPONGY PEDAL (ENGINE OFF)
1
Check for a firm brake pedal.
Is the brake pedal effort and brake pedal travel normal?
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
GO to D2.
D2: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE (ENGINE OFF)
1
Pump the brake pedal 10 times and hold on the final application.
Does the brake pedal feel firm on final application?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
BLEED the brake system.
REFER to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General
Procedures).
D3: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE (ENGINE ON)
1
Engine is idle.
2
Apply the brake pedal lightly three or four times.
Wait 15 seconds for the vacuum to recover.
Push down on the brake pedal until it stops moving downward or an increased resistance to
the brake pedal travel occurs.
Hold the brake pedal in the applied position while increasing the engine speed to 2000
revs/min.
Release the accelerator pedal.
5
6
Does the brake pedal move downward as the engine speed returns to idle?
Yes
GO to D4.
No
CHECK the vacuum to brake booster.
D4: CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
Check the brake master cylinder reservoir fluid level.
1
Is the fluid level OK?
Yes
Procedures).
No
CHECK for leaking brake system and RECTIFY as necessary. ADD fluid and BLEED the brake
system.
Procedures).
TEST the system for normal operation. REPEAT road test if necessary.
PINPOINT TEST E : THE PEDAL GOES DOWN FAST

TEST
CONDITIONS
E1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal.
1
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL-PRESSURIZE SYSTEM
Pump the brake pedal rapidly (five times).
1
Does the brake pedal travel build up and then hold?
Yes

Procedures).
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK FOR BRAKE SYSTEM LEAKS
Check for external brake system leaks. For additional information, refer to brake master
1
cylinder component test in this section.
Are leaks found?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary, ADD fluid and BLEED brake system.
Procedures).
No
System is OK.
PINPOINT TEST F : THE PEDAL GOES DOWN SLOWLY

TEST
CONDITIONS
F1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE - CHECK BRAKE PEDAL OPERATION
Check if the condition occurs during actual stopping application by applying the brake pedal
1
while the vehicle is moving.
Does the condition occur when the vehicle is moving?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
GO to F3.
F2: CHECK FOR BRAKE SYSTEM LEAKS
1
Check for external brake system leaks. For additional information, refer to brake master
cylinder component test in this section.
Are there any external brake system leaks?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. ADD fluid and BLEED the brake system.
Procedures).
No
GO to F3.
F3: CARRY OUT A BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER BYPASS TEST
Test for brake master cylinder bypass condition. Refer to Brake master cylinder component
1
test in this section.
Are any concerns found?
Yes
INSTALL a new brake master cylinder, ADD fluid and BLEED the brake system.
Procedures).
No
System is OK.
PINPOINT TEST G : EXCESSIVE BRAKE PEDAL EFFORT

TEST
CONDITIONS
G1: CHECK BRAKE PADS
Check the brake pads for wear, contamination, correct installation, damage and type.
1
Yes
INSTALL the front brake pads correctly or INSTALL new front brake pads if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
INSTALL the rear brake pads correctly or INSTALL new rear brake pads if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation. REPEAT road test.
No
GO to G2.
G2: CHECK VACUUM
1
Disconnect the vacuum hose from the brake booster.
Connect a vacuum/pressure tester to the vacuum hose.
Run the engine at normal operating temperature.
Record the vacuum reading.
Is the reading 40.5 kPa (12 in-Hg) or greater?

Yes
GO to G3.
No
LOCATE and REPAIR the source of low vacuum. TEST the system for normal operation.
G3: INSPECT SYSTEM
Switch the engine off.
1
2
Reconnect the vacuum hose.
Inspect the brake booster, rubber grommet, and all vacuum plumbing for cracks, holes,
damaged connections, or missing clamps.
4
Pump the brake pedal several times to exhaust the vacuum. Push down on the brake pedal and
hold.
Does the brake pedal move down when the engine is started?
Yes
Vacuum system is OK.
No
GO to G4.
G4: CHECK POWER BRAKE BOOSTER VALVE
Check the brake booster valve. For additional information, refer to Brake Booster component
1
test in this section.
Is the power brake booster valve OK?
Yes
CHECK the brake booster. For additional information, refer to Brake Booster component test in
this section. INSTALL a new brake booster if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Booster - RHD RWD (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation) /
Brake Booster - LHD RWD (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
No
INSTALL a new brake booster valve. TEST the system for normal operation.
3
PINPOINT TEST H : BRAKE LOCKUP DURING LIGHT BRAKE PEDAL FORCE

TEST
CONDITIONS
H1: TEST BRAKE LOCKUP
Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal lightly.
1
Do the brakes lockup?
Yes
GO to H2.
No
Vehicle is OK.
H2: INSPECT BRAKE PADS
Inspect brake pads for contamination, correct installation, damage and type.
1
Yes
INSTALL the front brake pads correctly or INSTALL new front brake pads if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
INSTALL the rear brake pads correctly or INSTALL new rear brake pads if necessary.
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
TEST the system for correct operation.
No
GO to H3.
H3: INSPECT BRAKE CALIPERS
Inspect brake calipers for binding, leaking or sticking.
1
Yes
INSTALL the brake calipers correctly or INSTALL new brake calipers as necessary.
and Installation) /
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
No
Vehicle is OK.
PINPOINT TEST I : BRAKES DRAG

TEST
CONDITIONS
I1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
Road test the vehicle and apply the brakes.
1
Are the brakes functioning correctly?
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
GO to I2.
I2: CHECK BRAKE CALIPERS
Check the front caliper pistons and pins for binding, leaking or sticking.
1
and Installation).
Check the rear caliper pistons and pins for binding, leaking or sticking.
REFER to: Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation).
Do the disc brake caliper pistons and pins bind, leak or stick?
Yes
INSPECT the brake calipers and parking brake cables. INSTALL new components as necessary.
Test the system for normal operation. Road test vehicle if necessary.
No
GO to I3.
I3: CHECK BRAKE BOOSTER
1
Check the brake booster connecting rod alignment and travel.
Is the connecting rod OK?
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
INSTALL a new brake booster.
Installation) /
PINPOINT TEST J : EXCESSIVE/ERRATIC BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL

TEST
CONDITIONS
J1: TEST ON ROUGH ROAD
1
Road test the vehicle on rough road conditions.
Apply the brakes slowly.
2
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
GO to J2.
J2: CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
Check the brake master cylinder reservoir fluid level.
1
Is the fluid level OK?
Yes
GO to J3.
No
CHECK brake master cylinder reservoir sealing points. For additional information, refer to Brake
master cylinder component test in this section. ADD brake fluid and BLEED the brake system.
Procedures).
TEST the system for normal operation. REPEAT road test if necessary.
J3: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE
Run engine at idle speed.
1
2
Apply the brake pedal lightly three or four times.
Wait 15 seconds for the vacuum to replenish.
4
5
Push down on the brake pedal until it stops moving downward or an increased resistance to the
brake pedal travel occurs.
Hold the brake pedal in the applied position while increasing the engine speed to 2000 revs/min.
Release the accelerator pedal.
Does the brake pedal move downward as the engine speed returns to idle?
Yes
GO to J4.
No
CHECK the vacuum to the brake booster.

J4: CHECK THE FRONT WHEEL BEARING ASSEMBLY
1
Check the front wheel bearing assembly.
Are the front wheel bearings loose?
Yes
INSTALL a new front wheel bearing if damaged.
REFER to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front
No
CHECK the front brake discs for thickness variances.
PINPOINT TEST K : SLOW OR INCOMPLETE BRAKE PEDAL RETURN

TEST
CONDITIONS
K1: CHECK FOR BRAKE PEDAL RETURN
1
Run the engine at idle while making several brake applications.
2
Pull the brake pedal rearward with approximately 44.5 N (10lb) force.
Release the brake pedal and measure the distance to the toe board.
Make a hard brake application.
Release the brake pedal and measure the brake pedal to toe board distance. The brake pedal
should return to its original position.
Does the brake pedal return to its original position?
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
GO to K2.
K2: CHECK FOR BRAKE PEDAL BINDING
Disconnect the brake booster from the brake pedal. Check the brake pedal to ensure free
1
operation.
Is the brake pedal operating freely?
Yes
INSTALL a new brake booster.
Installation) /
No
REPAIR or INSTALL new brake pedal. TEST the system for normal operation.
Component Tests
Brake Booster
1.
Check all hoses and connections. All unused vacuum connectors should be capped. Hoses and their connections
should be correctly secured and in good condition with no holes and no collapsed areas. Inspect the valve on the
brake booster for damage.
2.
Check the hydraulic brake system for leaks or low fluid.
3.
With the automatic transmission in PARK, stop the engine and apply the parking brake. Pump the brake pedal
several times to exhaust all vacuum in the system. With the engine switched off and all vacuum in the system
exhausted, apply the brake pedal and hold it down. Start the engine. If the vacuum system is operating, the
brake pedal will tend to move downward under constant foot pressure. If no motion is felt, the vacuum booster
system is not functioning.
4.
Remove the vacuum hose from the brake booster. Manifold vacuum should be available at the brake booster end
of the hose with the engine at idle speed and the automatic transmission in PARK. Make sure that all unused
vacuum outlets are correctly capped, hose connectors are correctly secured and vacuum hoses are in good
condition. When it is established that manifold vacuum is available to the brake booster, connect the vacuum
hose to the brake booster and repeat Step 3. If no downward movement of the brake pedal is felt, install a new
brake booster.
5.
Operate the engine for a minimum of 10 seconds at a fast idle. Stop the engine and allow the vehicle to stand
for 10 minutes. Then, apply the brake pedal with approximately 89 N (20lb) of force. The pedal feel (brake
application) should be the same as that noted with the engine running. If the brake pedal feels hard (no power
assist), install a new valve and then repeat the test. If the brake pedal still feels hard, install a new brake
booster. If the brake pedal movement feels spongy, bleed the brake system.
REFER to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General Procedures).
Brake Master Cylinder

Usually, the first and strongest indicator of anything wrong in the brake system is a feeling through the brake pedal. In
diagnosing the condition of the brake master cylinder, check pedal feel as evidence of a brake concern. Check for brake
warning lamp illumination and the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir.
Normal Conditions
The following conditions are considered normal and are not indications that the brake master cylinder is in need of
repair.
Modern brake systems are designed to produce a pedal effort that is not as hard as in the past. Complaints of
light pedal efforts should be compared to the pedal efforts of another vehicle of the same model and year.
The fluid level will fall with brake pad wear.
Abnormal Conditions
Changes in the brake pedal feel or brake pedal travel are indicators that something could be wrong in the brake system.
The diagnostic procedure and techniques use brake pedal feel, warning indicator illumination and low brake fluid level
as indicators to diagnosing brake system concerns. The following conditions are considered abnormal and indicate that
the brake master cylinder is in need of repair:
NOTE: Prior to carrying out any diagnosis, make sure the brake system warning indicator is functional.
Brake pedal goes down fast. This could be caused by an external or internal leak.
Brake pedal goes down slowly. This could be caused by an internal or external leak.
Brake pedal is low or feels spongy. This condition may be caused by no fluid in the brake master cylinder,
reservoir cap vent holes clogged or air in the hydraulic system.

Brake pedal effort is excessive. This may be caused by a bind or obstruction in the pedal/linkage, a faulty non-
return valve, booster or insufficient booster vacuum.

Rear brakes lock up during light pedal force. This may be caused by damaged brake pads, a partially applied
parking brake, a damaged ABS sensor or bearing failure.

Brake pedal effort erratic. This condition could be caused by the brake booster or incorrectly installed brake
pads.
Brake warning indicator is on. This may be caused by low fluid level or float assembly damaged.
Non Pressure Leaks

Any reduced fluid volume in the brake master cylinder reservoir may be caused by two types of none pressure external
leaks.
Type 1: An external leak may occur at the brake master cylinder reservoir cap because of incorrect positioning of the
gasket and cap. Reposition cap and gasket.
Type 2: An external leak may occur at the brake master cylinder reservoir mounting seals. Repair such a leak by
installing new seals and make sure that the brake master cylinder reservoir retaining bolt is correctly installed.
Brake System - General Information - Brake Disc Runout Check

General Procedures
Check
1.
Remove the wheel and tire.

2.
Install all wheel nuts and tighten equally to 20 Nm (15 lb.ft).

Make sure that the brake disc is fully seated against the
hub face.
3.
Install a dial test indicator gauge and holding fixture to a

suitable mounting point.
4.
NOTE: If the runout is outside specification, check the hub face

runout.
Using the dial test indicator, measure the inner and outer faces
of the brake disc.
Specifications) /
Specifications (206-04, Specifications).
1. Position the gauge so that it contacts the disc 10 mm
(0.4 in) from the outer edge.
2. Slowly rotate the hub/disc assembly. Note the reading.
5.
If a front hub runout check is required, remove the front brake

disc.
For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc - Vehicles With:
Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
6.
If a rear hub runout check is required, remove the rear brake

disc.
Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
7.
NOTE: The hub surface should be free from dirt and corrosion.
Do not use abrasive cloths to clean hub faces.
Using the dial test indicator, measure the hub face runout.
1. Position the gauge so that it contacts the mounting tube
between the stud and the chamfer.
2. Slowly rotate the hub and note the runout. For additional
information, refer to the specification chart.
If the front hub runout exceeds the specifications, install
a new hub, brake disc and recheck.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing
and Wheel Hub - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (20401 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
If the rear hub runout exceeds the specifications, install
a new hub, brake disc and recheck.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing
(204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
8.
If the front hub face is within specification, install a new brake

disc.
Standard Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
If the rear hub face is within specification, install a new disc.
Standard Brakes (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
9.

Brake System - General Information - Brake System Bleeding

General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with new, clean brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with
water.
NOTE:
1.

2.
Check that the brake fluid lines are secure and that there are no
signs of a brake fluid leak. If a brake fluid leak is detected,
investigate and rectify the cause of the leak before bleeding the
brakes.
3.
Remove the brake master cylinder cover.

Remove the 4 clips.
4.
WARNING: Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids

to enter the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of
the correct specification from airtight containers.
Do not mix brands of brake fluid as they may not
be compatible.
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint

finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove
the fluid and clean the area with water.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap.
5.
Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.
6.
Install the bleed tube to the right hand rear brake caliper bleed
screw and immerse the free end of the bleed tube in a bleed jar,
containing a small quantity of approved brake fluid.
Remove the bleed screw covers.
7.
Loosen the bleed screw by one-half to threequarters of a turn.
8.
CAUTION: The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with

new, clean brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
NOTE: If the bleed tube used, does not have a one way valve
the bleed screw will need to be closed before the brake pedal is
returned to the rest position. Then opened again and the
procedure repeated for each pedal application.
With assistance, depress the brake pedal steadily through its full
stroke and allow it to return to the rest position. Repeat the
procedure until brake fluid, clean and air-free flows into the
bleed jar.
9.
CAUTION: Make sure the bleed screw cap is installed after

bleeding. This will prevent corrosion to the bleed screw.
With the brake pedal fully depressed, tighten the bleed screw.
Vehicles with standard brakes: Tighten the front caliper
bleed screw to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft).
Vehicles with high performance brakes: Tighten the front
caliper bleed screw to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
Tighten the rear bleed screw to 15 Nm (11 lb.ft).
10.

11.
WARNING: Braking efficiency may be

seriously impaired if an incorrect bleed sequence is
used.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each
brake caliper, following the above sequence.
12.
13.
Apply the brakes and check for leaks.
14.
Install the brake fluid reservoir cap.
15.
Install the brake master cylinder cover.

Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout Check With Wheel On Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
1.
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the

essential information is always correct.
NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH similar
NOTE: All measurements must taken with the wheel installed.
2.

stands.
3.
Mount the DTI Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge to the bolt as
shown with tool 100-053.
4.
Make sure the DTI is securely mounted.
5.
Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the outer edge

of the disc.
Zero DTI and rotate road wheel one
complete revolution to measure disc
runout.
6.
Position the DTI probe in the centre of the disc.

runout.
7.
8.
Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the inner edge

of the disc.
runout.
NOTE: The disc runout limit is 0.075 mm.

If the disc runout exceeds the limit check the hub drive flange
and bearing runout.
Wheel Hub Runout Check - Vehicles With: High Performance
Brakes (204-00 Suspension System - General Information,
General Procedures).
9.
If hub runout is within the limit replace the brake disc.

10.
Install the wheel.

Tighten the road wheel nuts in sequence as
shown above to the following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 60 Nm.
Stage 3: 125 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
11.
Re-check the disc runout as detailed above.

12.
Remove DTI and install the bolt. 90 Nm.
Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout Check With Wheel On Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
1.

NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH similar
NOTE: All measurements must taken with the wheel installed.
2.

stands.
3.
Mount the Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge to the bolt as shown
with tool 100-053.
4.
Make sure the DTI is securely mounted.
5.

of the disc.
runout.
6.
7.
8.

runout.

of the disc.
runout.

and bearing runout.
Wheel Hub Runout Check - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
(204-00 Suspension System - General Information, General
Procedures).
9.

10.
Install the wheel.

shown above to the following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 60 Nm.
Stage 3: 125 Nm.
11.
Re-check the disc runout as detailed above.

12.
Remove DTI and install the bolt. 90 Nm.
Brake System - General Information - Rear Brake Disc Runout Check With Wheel On
General Procedures
1.

NOTE: All measurements must be taken with the wheel
installed.
2.

stands.
Raise the rear of the vehicle.
3.
Modify tool 100-053 with an M8 bolt and nut as

shown.
4.
Mount the DTI Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge on

the tool as shown.
5.
Securely mount the DTI on the bottom calliper

mounting bolt, a spacer washer maybe required
under the tool.
6.

of the disc.
runout.
7.

runout.
8.

of the disc.

runout.
9.

and bearing runout.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub Runout Check - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
(204-00 Suspension System - General Information, General
Procedures).
10.

11.
Install the wheel.

shown to the following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 60 Nm.
Stage 3: 125 Nm.
Published: 18-Sep-2012
Front Disc Brake Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
NOTE: Brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 has now been superseded by Shell ESL Dot 4 which is the Jaguar recommended
brake fluid. Shell ESL Dot 4 can be used on all model years.
Item
Brake Fluid
Description
Brake caliper anchor plate retaining bolts
Brake caliper retaining bolts
Brake hose retaining bolt
Specification
Shell ESL Dot 4
Nm
115
58
42
lb-ft
85
43
31
lb-in
-
Front Disc Brake - Front Disc Brake

COMPONENT LOCATION - NATURALLY ASPIRATED VEHICLES

NOTE: LH (left-hand) installation shown, RH (right-hand) installation similar.
Item
Part Number
Description
Brake pad wear sensor
Caliper body
Anti-rattle spring
Piston
Piston seal
Piston dust cover
Inboard brake pad
Outboard brake pad
Retaining washer (2 off)
10
11
Brake disc
Rivet (2 off)
12
Heat shield
13
Front wheel knuckle/hub and bearing assembly
14
Caliper bolt (2 off)
15
Caliper carrier
16
Guide pin dust cover (2 off)
17
Guide pin bush (2 off)
18
Guide pin (2 off)
19
Bleed screw
20
Bleed screw dust cap
COMPONENT LOCATION - SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES

NOTE: LH installation shown, RH installation similar.
Item
Part Number
Description
Caliper body
Anti-rattle spring
Piston (2 off)
Piston seal (2 off)
Piston dust cover (2 off)
Inboard brake pad
Outboard brake pad
10
Brake disc
11
Rivet (2 off)
12
Heat shield
13
Front wheel knuckle/hub and bearing assembly
14
15
Caliper carrier
16
17
18
Guide pin (2 off)
19
Bleed screw
20
INTRODUCTION
The front braking system features ventilated brake discs with single (naturally aspirated vehicles) or dual (SC (supercharger)
vehicles) piston sliding calipers. On naturally aspirated vehicles the discs are 355 mm (13.98 in.) diameter x 32 mm (1.26
in.) thick. On SC vehicles the discs are 380 mm (14.96 in.) diameter x 36 mm (1.42 in.) thick.
The brake disc is manufactured from cast iron. The disc is retained on the wheel hub by two retaining washers and the wheel
nuts.
Each caliper is mounted within a fixed carrier that is secured to the front wheel knuckle with two bolts. On SC vehicles the
calipers are painted. Each outboard brake pad is installed with a pressed steel anti-rattle spring. On SC vehicles a badge is
formed on the anti-rattle spring. The inboard brake pad of the LH brake incorporates a wear sensor.
NOTE: New pad wear sensor leads need to be fitted whenever the brake pads are changed irrespective of the brake pad
warning sensor being triggered.
The brake pad wear sensor is wired in series with a wear sensor on the RH rear brake and the instrument cluster. If the
thickness of one of the brake pads connected to a wear sensor decreases to a predetermined limit, the instrument cluster
illuminates the brake warning indicator.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
Front brake pad wear sensor
Instrument cluster
Rear brake pad wear sensor
Power distribution box
When hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the piston(s) extends to force the inner pad against the brake disc. The
caliper reacts and slides along two guide pins to bring the outer pad into contact with the brake disc.
When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the brake pad wear sensor goes open
circuit. When the instrument cluster detects the open circuit, it illuminates the amber LED (light emitting diode) in the brake
warning indicator, displays an appropriate warning in the message center and sounds a warning chime.
Published: 02-Oct-2012
Front Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Vehicles With: High Performance

Brakes
Removal
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the
area with water.
1.

2.
Remove the left-hand front wheel and tire.

and Installation).
3.
4.
CAUTION: Always plug any open connections

to prevent contamination.
NOTE: To prevent the loss of brake fluid, using the
special tool apply the brake pedal and set to 40mm
( 1.6 in ) below the rest position.
NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION: Removal of the clips is a delicate

procedure, damage will occur if any force is used.
Lever the anti-rattle spring in the center of
the spring until either side is released.
8.
WARNING: If the brake caliper piston seal is

damaged a new brake caliper must be installed.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to

hang on the brake hose.
9.

Release the clip.
10.
Installation
1.
WARNING: Do not use compressed air to clean brake

components. Dust from friction materials can be harmful if
inhaled.
CAUTION: As the piston is pushed back into the caliper

housing, the brake fluid level in the reservoir will rise. Do not
allow the reservoir to overflow.
Press the piston into the caliper housing.
2.
Apply grease C2C-39930 to the areas
indicated.
3.
4.
5.

Torque: 58 Nm
6.

Secure the bottom arm of the anti-rattle
spring under the bottom anchor bracket of

the caliper.
Compress the upper spring arm into the
correct position, under the upper anchor
bracket, whilst retaining the logo plate.
Using the screw-driver, tap the central
locating tag into the locked position.
7.

Torque: 42 Nm
8.
9.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the road wheels are in the

straight ahead position.
Make sure that excessive force is not used.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that the brake hose is not twisted

and is correctly located.
Pull downwards at the position shown.
10.
Refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00 Brake System General Information, General Procedures).
11.
and Installation).
Front Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Vehicles With: Standard Brakes

Removal
area with water.
1.

2.

and Installation).
3.
4.

Remove and discard the two sealing
washers.
5.

6.


7.
Release the clip.
8.
Installation
1.

inhaled.

2.
indicated.
3.
4.
5.
Torque: 58 Nm
6.

the caliper.
7.
Torque: 42 Nm
8.
9.
CAUTIONS:



10.
11.
and Installation).
Front Disc Brake - Brake Disc Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in pairs.

1.

2.
Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes

(206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
3.
Torque: 115 Nm
4.
Remove the 2 clips.
5.
Repeat the above procedure on the opposite side.
1.
Installation
Front Disc Brake - Brake Disc Vehicles With: Standard Brakes

Removal

1.

2.
Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03

Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
3.
Torque: 115 Nm
4.
Remove the 2 clips.
5.
1.
Installation
Front Disc Brake - Brake Pads Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
area with water.
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6.

7.


8.

Release the clip.
9.
10.
11.
Installation
1.

inhaled.

2.
3.
indicated.
4.
5.
6.

Torque: 58 Nm
7.


the caliper.
8.
9.
CAUTIONS:



10.
11.
and Installation).
Front Disc Brake - Brake Pads Vehicles With: Standard Brakes

Removal
area with water.
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.
4.

5.


6.

Release the clip.
7.
8.
9.
1.

inhaled.
Installation

2.
3.
indicated.
4.
5.
6.

Torque: 58 Nm
7.


the caliper.
8.
9.
CAUTIONS:



10.
11.
and Installation).
Rear Disc Brake Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
NOTE: Brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 has now been superseded by Shell ESL Dot 4 which is the Jaguar recommended
brake fluid. Shell ESL Dot 4 can be used on all model years.
Item
Brake fluid
Specification
Shell ESL Dot 4
Description
Brake hose to brake caliper
Brake caliper anchor plate
Brake caliper retaining bolts
Brake caliper logo badge retaining bolts - Vehicles with high performance brakes
Nm lb-ft lb-in
42
31
103 76
28
21
10
7
-
Rear Disc Brake - Rear Disc Brake

COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: RH (right-hand)SC (supercharger) vehicle installation shown, other installations similar.
Item
Part Number
Description
Brake disc
Rivet (3 off)
Dust shield
Rear wheel knuckle/hub and bearing assembly
10
11
Guide pin (2 off)
Caliper body
12
Piston
13
Piston dust cover and seal
14
Inboard brake pad
15
Outboard brake pad
16
Anti-rattle spring
17
Caliper carrier
18
Bleed screw
19
20
Knurled pin
21
Handbrake actuation lever
22
Tension spring
INTRODUCTION
The rear braking system on both the naturally aspirated and SC vehicles features ventilated brake discs with single piston
sliding calipers. On naturally aspirated vehicles the discs are 326 mm (12.83 in.) diameter x 20 mm (0.79 in.) thick. On SC
vehicles the discs are 376 mm (14.80 in.) diameter x 26 mm (1.02 in.) thick.
The brake disc is manufactured from cast iron. The disc is retained on the wheel hub by two retaining washers and the wheel
nuts.
Each caliper is mounted within a fixed carrier that is secured to the rear wheel knuckle with two bolts. The brake calipers on
SC vehicle are painted and also include a badge. The badge must be removed in order to renew the brake pads. Each inboard
brake pad is installed with a wire anti-rattle spring. The inboard brake pad of the RH brake incorporates a wear sensor.
NOTE: New pad wear sensor leads need to be fitted whenever the brake pads are changed irrespective of the brake pad
warning sensor being triggered.
The brake pad wear sensor is wired in series with a wear sensor on the LH (left-hand) front brake and the instrument cluster.
If the thickness of one of the brake pads connected to a wear sensor decreases to a predetermined limit, the instrument
cluster illuminates the brake warning indicator.
Also incorporated into each rear brake caliper carrier is the parking brake mechanism.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05, Description and Operation).
Repairs
CAUTION: Do not use the 'Emergency Release' tool to allow work to be carried out on the rear brakes. Work can only
be carried out on the rear brakes after the 'parking brake unjam' routine is run.
Before carrying out any work on the rear brakes, the Jaguar approved diagnostic system must be connected and the 'parking
brake unjam' routine run.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General
Procedures).
When all work is carried out on the rear brakes, the parking brake system will require resetting.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05, Diagnosis and Testing).
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
175 A megafuse
Front brake pad wear sensor
Instrument cluster
Rear brake pad wear sensor
Central junction box
When hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the piston extends to force the inner pad against the brake disc. The
caliper reacts and slides along two guide pins to bring the outer pad into contact with the brake disc.
When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the brake pad wear sensor goes open
circuit. When the instrument cluster detects the open circuit, it illuminates the amber LED (light emitting diode) in the brake
warning indicator, displays an appropriate warning in the message center and sounds a warning chime.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01, Description and Operation).
Rear Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Vehicles With: High Performance

Brakes
Removal
WARNING: Failure to release the tension and calibrate the electric parking brake during rear parking brake related
service procedures, could cause the parking brake to function incorrectly or become inoperative.
area with water.
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.
Refer to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05 Parking

Brake and Actuation, General Procedures).
4.
5.

Torque: 10 Nm
6.
CAUTIONS:
Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
If brake fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the

affected area must be immediately washed down
with cold water.
Torque: 42 Nm
7.

8.

Release the clip.
9.


Torque: 28 Nm
10.
Installation
1.
2.
Rear Disc Brake - Brake Caliper Vehicles With: Standard Brakes

Removal
area with water.
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.

4.
5.
CAUTIONS:
Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
If brake fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the

affected area must be immediately washed down
with cold water.
Torque: 42 Nm
6.

7.

Release the clip.
8.


Torque: 28 Nm
9.
Installation
1.
2.
Rear Disc Brake - Brake Disc Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal

1.

2.

(206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
3.
Torque: 103 Nm
4.
Remove the 2 clips.
Installation
1.
Rear Disc Brake - Brake Disc Vehicles With: Standard Brakes

Removal

1.

2.

Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
3.
Torque: 103 Nm
4.
Remove the 2 clips.
Installation
1.
Rear Disc Brake - Brake Pads Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Special Tool(s)
206-080
Brake caliper piston retractor tool
206-081
303-588
Remover, Crankshaft Pulley/Damper
Removal
WARNINGS:
Failure to release the tension and calibrate the electric parking brake during rear parking brake related service
procedures, could cause the parking brake to function incorrectly or become inoperative.
Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct specification from
airtight containers. Do not mix brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
area with water.
NOTE: Only extraction bolt from special tool 303-588 is used.
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.

4.
5.

Torque: 10 Nm
6.

7.

Release the clip.
8.


Torque: 28 Nm
9.
10.

Using the special tools, fully retract the
brake caliper piston.
11.
12.
Installation
1.
NOTE: The brake pad wear sensor retaining tang

must be installed to the sensor prior to installation
to the brake pad.
2.
3.
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Disc Brake - Brake Pads Vehicles With: Standard Brakes

Special Tool(s)
206-080
206-081
303-588
Remover, Crankshaft Pulley/Damper
Removal
WARNINGS:
Failure to release the tension and calibrate the electric parking brake during rear parking brake related service
procedures, could cause the parking brake to function incorrectly or become inoperative.
Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct specification from
airtight containers. Do not mix brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
area with water.
NOTE: Only extraction bolt from special tool 303-588 is used.
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.

4.
5.

6.

Release the clip.
7.


Torque: 28 Nm
8.
9.

Using the special tools, fully retract the
brake caliper piston.
10.
11.
Installation
1.
NOTE: The brake pad wear sensor retaining tang

must be installed to the sensor prior to installation
to the brake pad.
2.
3.
Parking Brake and Actuation Torque Specifications
Item
Parking brake actuator - bolts
Parking brake module - nuts
Parking brake switch- bolts
Nm
20
4
6
lb-ft
15
3
4
lb-in
35
53
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Stoplamp switch
Parking brake control module
Caliper and disc assemblies
Brake warning indicator - All except NAS (North American specification) vehicles
Brake warning indicator - NAS vehicles
INTRODUCTION
The parking brake is an electrically actuated system that operates on the rear brake calipers. Two cables are connected to
the rear brake calipers, and act directly on the same pistons used for normal, hydraulic rear brake actuation.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Disc Brake (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Description and Operation).
The parking brake is controlled by the parking brake control module. In response to commands from the driver through the
parking brake switch, the module controls operation of the parking brake actuator. The actuator adjusts the tension of the
brake cables to apply and release the rear brake calipers.
Features of the parking brake include:
Manual apply
Manual release
Automatic apply
Automatic release.
For more information on parking brake operation, refer to the Owner's Handbook.
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
The parking brake switch is mounted in the floor console, rearward of the gear selector. The switch has three states:
Apply: When the switch is pulled up to apply the parking brake
Release: When the switch is pushed down to release the parking brake
Neutral: The central default position. The switch returns to this position regardless of parking brake status.
The parking brake switch contains a pair of microswitches for both the apply and release actions. The parking brake control
module provides an individual hardwired electrical feed to each of the 4 mircoswitches plus a single ground connection,
allowing it to constantly monitor switch status.
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL MODULE
The parking brake control module is mounted behind the auxiliary junction box and is connected to the vehicles electrical
wiring by two mulitplugs. The control module is also connected to the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus, allowing
it to communicate with other vehicle systems.
The control module monitors the condition of the parking brake switch through a series of hardwired electrical connections
and controls operation of the parking brake actuator accordingly.
PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR
The parking brake actuator is mounted on the rear cross beam, underneath the vehicle. Operation of the actuator is
controlled by the control module in response to parking brake switch requests from the driver.
A hall sensor is located within the actuator and provides positional information back to the control module. The principle
function of the hall sensor is to ensure the actuator fully releases the parking brake when a static release request is made.
The signal provided by the hall sensor is compared to configuration information contained within the control module software
to determine when a full release has been carried out.
Further information on the hall sensor can be found in the 'Principles of Operation' section below.
STOPLAMP SWITCH
The stoplamp switch is mounted on the brake pedal bracket. One of the prerequisites for releasing the parking brake is that
the foot brake is applied. The parking brake control module is able to determine the position of the footbrake by monitoring
the status of the stoplamp switch via a hardwired electrical connection.
The stoplamp switch also forms part of the ABS (anti-lock brake system) and the speed control system.
For additional information, refer to: Speed Control (310-03 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description
and Operation).
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Depending on market specification, the instrument cluster may contain a red and an amber brake warning indicator, or only
a red brake warning indicator. The functionality of the warning indicators is shown in the table below.
Indicator
Status
Details
Red
Illuminated
Parking brake applied
Red
Flashing
Parking brake electrical failure
Amber
Illuminated
Parking brake electrical failure
If a parking brake failure warning indicator is active, the message 'CANNOT APPLY PARK BRAKE' or 'PARK BRAKE FAULT' will
also appear in the instrument cluster message center. If the vehicle is moving with the parking brake applied, the message
'PARK BRAKE ON' will appear in the message center accompanied by a chime from the instrument cluster.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center, Description
and Operation).
NOTE: NAS vehicles utilize different instrument cluster symbols and brake warning indicators.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item
Part Number
Battery
BJB (battery junction box)
CJB (central junction box) (175 A megafuse)
Parking brake control module
Stoplamp switch
Description
Instrument cluster
7
-
Adaptive speed control module
10
Static Apply
The parking brake control module receives a vehicle speed signal from the ABS module on the high speed CAN bus. If the
parking brake switch is pulled to the 'Apply' position and vehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h), the control module will
instigate its 'Static Apply' mode and drive the actuator to apply full parking brake force to the rear wheels.
The parking brake control module monitors the current drawn by the actuator and compares this to information held within
its configuration software to determine when full braking force has been applied.
Dynamic Apply
There are two 'Dynamic Apply' modes; low speed dynamic and high speed dynamic. The low speed dynamic mode operates
at speeds between 2 mph (3 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). The high speed dynamic mode operates at speeds above 20 mph
(32 km/h)
If the parking brake switch is pulled up to the 'Apply' position and vehicle speed is within the low speed dynamic range, the
control module drives the actuator to apply full parking brake force to the rear wheels.
If the parking brake switch is pulled up to the 'Apply' position and vehicle speed is within the high speed dynamic range, the
control module will apply braking force to the rear wheels at a slower rate until full braking load is reached or the switch is
released. The rate with which braking force is applied is controlled by the control module, which monitors both current drawn
by the actuator and positional information from the actuator hall sensor and compares this to information held within its
configuration software.
Drive Away Release

The parking brake control module will initiate its 'Drive Away Release' function and automatically release the parking brake if
the following conditions are detected:
The engine is running
D (drive), or R (reverse) is selected
Positive throttle movement is detected
The control module receives messages of gear selector lever position and throttle angle over the high speed CAN bus from
the gear selector module and the ECM (engine control module) respectively.
Release from Park

The parking brake control module will initiate its 'Release from Park' function and automatically release the parking brake if
the gear selector is moved from P (park) to any position except N (neutral).
NOTE: A 'between gears' positioning of the gear selector level will not initiate 'Release from Park'.
Repairs
Before carrying out any work on the parking brake system, the Jaguar approved diagnostic tester must be connected and the
'parking brake unjam' routine run. The routine can be found in the 'Vehicle Configuration' area, under the 'Set-up and
Configuration' menu. After any work has been carried out on the parking brake, the system will require resetting.
CAUTION: Do not use the 'Emergency Release' tool to allow work to be carried out on the parking brake. Work can only
be carried out on the parking brake system after the 'parking brake unjam' routine has been run.
Resetting
If the electrical supply is disconnected from the parking brake control module, the actuator will loose its position memory. On
battery re-connection and ignition on, 'APPLY FOOT AND PARK BRAKE' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message
center indicating the parking brake requires resetting. To reset the parking brake, press and hold the foot brake. While
holding the foot brake in position, move the parking brake switch to the 'Apply' position.
Operating Voltages
The control module will only operate the actuator if the power supply from the battery is between 9 V and 16 V. At any
voltage within this range, the actuator is able to fully tighten and release the brake cables. If the power supply falls outside
of the range, a fault code is stored in the parking brake control module and can be retrieved using a Jaguar approved
diagnostic tester.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake

For a detailed description of the Parking Brake operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation)
Parking Brake (Description and Operation),
Parking Brake (Description and Operation),
Parking Brake (Description and Operation).
Parking Brake Calibration

The parking brake system must be calibrated whenever the battery has been disconnected or has been in a state of
discharge, or repairs have been carried out to the rear service or parking brake system.
NOTE: If new rear brake pads have been installed, pressure must be applied to the brake pedal a minimum of five times
prior to calibration of the parking brake system.
To calibrate the parking brake system:
1.
Place gear selector lever in 'P' Park position.
2.
Release parking brake cable tension to service position.

REFER to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General Procedures).
3.
Set the ignition status to 'ON'.
4.
Apply and hold the footbrake then pull up the parking brake switch.
5.
To release the parking brake, apply and hold the footbrake then release and press down the parking brake
switch.
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Parking brake cable
Brake caliper
Brake pads
Stabilizer bar drop link caps
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Check for bent/corroded pins
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and
proceed to the DTC Index , alternatively, verify the customer concern and refer to the Symptom Chart.
DTC Index
the scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give additional
places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the DMM
leads into account.
DTC
B114264
Description
Ignition status 1signal plausibility
failure
C1127- Position Sensor - No

31
Signal
C1129- Actuator engage 39

incorrect has too few
pulses
C11293A
Actuator engage incorrect has too

many pulses
C112A- Actuator disengage 39

incorrect has too few
pulses
C1D00- Park brake apply
11
switch - circuit short
to ground
15
switch circuit - circuit
short to battery or
open
1C
switch - voltage out
of range
Possible Cause
The hard wired ignition status
signal does not agree with

CAN messages. Ignition power
supply is detected open circuit
when ignition status is set to
'ON'
Parking brake motor hall effect
position sensor power circuit
fault
position sensor ground circuit
fault
position sensor signal circuit
fault
Mechanical fault with
sensor/actuator
Motor engage current reached
before full apply travel
distance
Service brake adjustment
incorrect after brake lining
replacement
Brake cables broken, seized,
trapped.
Caliper malfunction
Motor engage current not
reached or travelled too far
upon apply
Service brake adjustment
incorrect after brake lining
replacement
Brake cables broken, seized,
trapped.
Caliper malfunction
intermittent motor or circuit open circuit
Actuator malfunction
Connector fault - bent, loose
or corroded pin(s)
Harness fault - short to ground
Switch fault
or corroded pin(s)
Harness fault - short to power
or open circuit
Switch fault
or corroded pin(s)
Harness fault - low resistance
to ground
Action
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
parking brake module ignition power supply for
short to ground, open circuit
Inspect mechanical linkages for faults/damage.

Repair as required. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check parking brake motor hall
effect position sensor circuits for short, open
circuit. Check and install a new sensor actuator as
required
Carry out parking brake calibration procedure.

check for mechanical failure of parking brake
system
Carry out parking brake calibration procedure.

check for mechanical failure of parking brake
system
Check for additional motor or circuit DTCs and

refer to DTC index. check for mechanical failure of
parking brake
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
switch primary and secondary apply circuits for
short to ground. Repair circuit faults or install a
new switch as required
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
switch primary and secondary apply circuits for
short to power or open circuit. Repair circuit faults
or install a new switch as required
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
primary parking brake apply switch circuits for
short to ground. Check and install a new switch as
required
Switch fault
C1D0062
Park brake apply

switch - signal
compare failure
C1D0064
Park brake apply

switch - signal
C1D01- Park brake release

11
to ground
15
to battery or open

1C
switch - voltage out
of range
C1D0162
Park brake release

switch - signal
compare failure
C1D0164
Park brake release

switch - signal
P1536- Parking Brake Switch

Circuit - signal
62
compare failure
P1536- Parking Brake Switch

66
Circuit - signal has
too many
transitions / events
P1571- Brake Switch - signal

64
U0001High speed CAN

87
communication bus missing message
U0001High speed CAN
88
communication Bus bus off
U0100- Lost communication
00
with ECM
00
with gear shift
control module A
Apply switch active then release switch active,

or corroded pin(s)
refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
Harness fault
apply/release switch circuits. Check and install a
new switch as required
Switch fault
or corroded pin(s)
parking brake primary and secondary apply
Harness fault - primary or
circuits. Check and install a new switch as
secondary apply circuit
required
Switch fault
park brake primary and secondary circuit for short
or corroded pin(s)
to ground. Check and install a new switch as
Harness fault - short to ground
required
Switch fault
or corroded pin(s)
parking brake primary and secondary release
Harness fault - open circuit
circuits for open circuits or short to battery. Check
Harness fault - short to battery
and install a new switch as required
Switch fault
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test park
or corroded pin(s)
brake switch primary and secondary switch
Harness fault - low resistance
circuits for low resistance to ground. Check and
to ground
install a new switch as required
Switch fault
Release switch active then apply switch active.
or corroded pin(s)
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
Harness fault
switch circuits for open circuits or shorts. Repair
Switch fault
circuit or replace switch as required
Primary and secondary release switch inputs
or corroded pin(s)
signals do not match. Check connectors for
Harness fault
damaged pins, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Switch fault
and check switch circuits for open circuits or
shorts. Repair circuit or replace switch as required
Wiring harness fault
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Switch internal fault
all the switch apply, release and return circuits for
short circuit or open circuit. If no fault with wiring
harness suspect switch has an internal fault. Refer
to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
module/component is suspect
System abuse
NOTE: The Electric Parking Brake system will be
locked out if the module receives more then 30
Switch internal fault
apply/release requests within 1 minute
Cycle the ignition to clear the fault mode. Clear
the DTC and test the system. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check all the switch
apply, release and return circuits for short circuit
or open circuit. If no fault with wiring harness
suspect switch has an internal fault. Refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
The signal from the hardwired brake pedal switch
Brake pedal switch fault
does not agree with the brake status message
broadcast on CAN. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the brake pedal switch
circuits for short circuit or open circuit. If there
are no wiring harness faults suspect switch. Refer
to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
All CAN messages are detected Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
missing at Ignition ON
DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
CAN Bus circuit fault
Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
system
ECM off Bus
system
Transmission shift module off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Bus
system. Check the transmission shift module for
related DTCs and refer to the DTC index

00
with speed control
front distance range
sensor
00
with anti-lock brake
system
00
with instrument
cluster
U030000
Internal control
module software
incompatibility
U0401- Invalid data received

00
from ECM
00
from gear shift
control module A
00
from anti-lock brake
system (ABS) control
module
00
from Central Junction
Box (CJB)

00
from instrument
cluster

64
from speed control
front distance range
sensor
U2001Reduced system
68
function - event
information
U2005Vehicle speed 64
signal implausibility
failure
U200DControl module
4B
output power A over temperature
U2011- Motor - circuit short
11
to ground
U2011- Motor - circuit short
12
to battery
U2011- Motor - circuit open
13
U300047
Control module watchdog/safety

micro controller
failure
U3002- Vehicle Identification
Speed control module off bus

system. Check the speed control module for
related DTCs and refer to the DTC index
ABS module off Bus
system. Check the anti-lock brake system module
for related DTCs and refer to the DTC index
Instrument cluster off Bus
system. Check the instrument cluster control
module for related DTCs and refer to the DTC
index
Invalid configuration message
Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
is received
approved diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and
retest. If the DTC is still logged suspect the
Parking Brake module, refer to the new module
Invalid message from the ECM No fault with parking brake system if this DTC is
logged. Check ECM for DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index
Invalid message from the
No fault with parking brake system if this DTC is
transmission shift module
logged. Check transmission shift module for DTCs
and refer to the DTC Index
Invalid message from the anti- No fault with parking brake system if this DTC is
lock brake system module
logged. Check anti-lock control - stability assist
module for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index
Invalid message from the CJB

logged. Check CJB for DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index.
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00
Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Invalid message from the
instrument cluster
logged. Check the instrument cluster for DTCs and
refer to DTC Index.
REFER to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument
Cluster, Diagnosis and Testing).
Incorrect apply request from
the speed control when the
logged. Check the speed control module for DTCs
conditions were not correct
and refer to DTC Index
Invalid or missing message

logged. Check the anti-lock control - stability
assist module for DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index.
REFER to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
(206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist,
Implausible speed message
from the anti-lock brake
logged. Check anti-lock control - stability assist
system module
module for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index
Actuator FET circuit over
Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
current / over temperature
actuator circuit for low resistance. Repair circuit
faults or install a new actuator as required
Electric park brake motor
output short to ground
actuator circuit for short to ground. Repair circuit
output short to power
actuator circuit for short to power. Repair circuit
output open circuit
actuator circuit for open circuit. Repair circuit
Defective ECU
Lost communication with secondary micro
processor, check power and ground connections to
ECU. Clear DTC, perform battery reset and retest
system. If DTC reoccurs suspect the Parking
Brake control module, refer to the new module
Vehicle/component VIN misInstall original module, check for parking brake
from ABS with ignition OFF
and vehicle speed > 3Kph
81
Number (VIN)
U300362
Battery voltage
U3006- Control module input

16
power A - circuit
voltage below
threshold

17
power A - circuit
voltage above
threshold

14
power B - circuit
short to ground or
open
match between RJB and

parking brake module, module
installed from donor vehicle
Mis-match of battery voltage,
of 2 volts or lower, between
parking brake module and RJB
ECU logic voltage is high (over
18 volts for 40mS)
Charging system fault
related DTCs and refer to DTC Index. If DTC

remains suspect parking brake module, refer to
new module installation note at top of DTC Index
system
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check power
supplies and ground connections to the park brake
control module. Check battery voltage and
charging system. Repair wiring harness or
charging system as required, clear DTC, perform
battery reset. Retest system
ECU logic voltage is low (below Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check power
8 volts for 2000mS)
supplies and ground connections to the park brake
control module. Check battery voltage and
charging system. Repair wiring harness or
charging system as required, clear DTC, perform
battery reset. Retest system
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check ECU
or corroded pin(s)
high power feed circuit for open circuits or short
Harness fault
to ground. Repair wiring harness as required,
clear DTC
Symptom Chart
Symptom
The parking brake will not
engage or release (with no
parking brake warning
message)
Possible Cause
Cables fouled, trapped or damaged
Cables incorrectly routed or installed
Rear lining wear
Service brake incorrectly adjusted following
lining change
Caliper malfunction
The parking brake will not

engage or release (with
parking brake warning
message)
Cables fouled, trapped or damaged

Cables incorrectly routed or installed
Rear lining wear
Actuator malfunction
Caliper malfunction
No communication with the

parking brake module
Fuse
Module off Bus
CAN network error
Parking brake module fault
'Park brake Fault' displayed

on message center with
associated warning lamps
Brakes drag
Parking brake system fault
Parking brake not re-calibrated after battery
has been disconnected or has been in a

state of discharge, or repairs have been
carried out to the rear service or parking
brake system
Service brake system fault
Action
Check the rear and primary
cables for correct installation

and damage
Inspect the rear brake linings
for wear
Re-calibrate the parking brake,
refer to the calibration
procedure
Check the rear service brake
for correct installation and
operation
Check the rear and primary
cables for correct installation
and damage
Inspect the rear brake linings
for wear
Re-calibrate the parking brake,
procedure
Check the rear service brake
for correct installation and
operation
Check fuses
Ensure battery is fully charged
and in serviceable condition.
Check battery voltage at
Check CAN network using
manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Check the parking brake
module for DTCs and refer to
DTC Index
Re-calibrate parking brake,
procedure
Check the service brake for
correct operation
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable Tension Release

General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Electric parking brake release tool 206-082. Only to be used for EMERGENCY brake
release
Electric parking brake release tool link lead 206-082-01. Only to be used for EMERGENCY brake
release
CAUTIONS:
Ensure the vehicle transmission is in park position before the cable tension is released.
The warranty of the electric parking brake release tool will be invalidated if the casing has been removed.
NOTE: The tools shown must only be used in the event of an emergency.
1.
WARNING: Always use Jaguar approved diagnostic

equipment to release the cable tension, when carrying out
repair operations on the electric park brake which require cable
tension release.
Connect the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment to release
the electric parking brake cable tension.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
2.
WARNING: The procedure below should only

be used in emergency situations, to release the
electric park brake. All calibration of the parking
brake system will be lost, and the parking brake
will need to be re-calibrated to function correctly.
Release the auxiliary junction box access cover.
Release from the clip.
3.
Disconnect the parking brake module.

Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors in the
sequence illustrated.
4.
5.
Connect the special tool.
Release the parking brake cable tension.

An audible 'click', signals complete parking
brake cable tension release.
6.
Remove the special tool.

Reverse the removal sequence, connect and
secure the electrical connectors.
7.
Secure the auxiliary junction box access cover.

Align the pegs and secure the clip.
8.
WARNING: Calibrate the electric park brake using Jaguar

approved diagnostic equipment. If Jaguar approved diagnostic
equipment is not available disconnect the battery for
approximatly 30 seconds , the vehicle will then prompt the
driver to carry out the calibration procedure as per the vehicle
hand book on re-connection.
Re-calibrate the electric park brake.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable LH

Removal
1.

2.

3.
Refer to: Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

(502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal
and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
1.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable RH

Removal
1.

2.

3.

and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
1.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Module Convertible

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

For additional information, refer to: Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering (501-20B
Supplemental Restraint System, General Procedures).
3.

Installation).
4.
Remove the rear seat RH backrest retaining

bracket.
5.

6.

bracket.
Remove the 3 nuts.
7.
Remove the parking brake module.

Remove the 3 nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the parking brake module.

2.

3.
Install the rear seat RH backrest retaining bracket.

4.

5.

Installation).
6.

Specifications).
7.
Connect WDS to the vehicle and configure a new module.
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Module 2-Door

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

3.

bracket.
Remove the 3 nuts.
4.
Remove the parking brake module.

Remove the 3 nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the parking brake module.

2.

3.

4.

Specifications).
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Release Actuator

Removal
1.

2.

3.

and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
1.
2.
CAUTION: Calibrate the electric park brake using Jaguar

approved diagnostic system. If the Jaguar approved diagnostic
system is not available disconnect the battery for approximately
30 seconds, the vehicle will then prompt the driver to carry out
the calibration procedure as per the vehicle hand book on reconnection.
Calibrate the electric parking brake (EPB) using the diagnostic
tool.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Switch

Removal
1.

2.
CAUTION: Protect the surrounding trim to

avoid damage.
3.
CAUTION: It is imperative that no damage is

caused to the electrical connector or the module.
Torque: 3 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Make sure that all diagnostic trouble codes

(DTCs) have been removed after the road test.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation General
Item
Brake master cylinder diameter
Specification
26.9 mm
Brake fluid
Specifications
Shell ESL (Dot 4)
Item
Bleed nipple - front brake caliper
Bleed nipple - front brake caliper (Supercharged models)
Bleed nipple - rear brake caliper
Brake master cylinder to brake booster - nuts
Brake tube to components - union nut
Master cylinder reservoir to master cylinder
Master cylinder reservoir to master cylinder (Supercharged models)
Pedal bracket
Nm
8
14
14
25
17
6
4
25
lb-ft
6
10
10
18
13
4
3
18
lb-in
70
53
35
-
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Brake master cylinder and fluid reservoir
Brake pedal
Stoplamp switch
Brake pipes
Brake booster
INTRODUCTION
The hydraulic brake system is a diagonally split dual line system, and consists of the brake pedal, brake master cylinder and
hydraulic pipes and hoses.
The brake pipes distribute pressure from the master cylinder to the four corners of the vehicle via the ABS (anti-lock brake
system) module. Braided steel hoses are used to connect the brake pipes to the front and rear calipers.
BRAKE PEDAL
The brake pedal is mounted in a bracket attached to the rear side of the engine bulkhead. The bracket also contains the
accelerator pedal. A clevis pin connects the brake pedal to the push rod of the brake booster.
The stoplamp switch is mounted in the brake pedal bracket and operated by the brake pedal. There are two switches in the
stoplamp switch, which close when the brake pedal is pressed to output 'brake applied' signals. When closed, one switch
connects a ground to the ECM (engine control module). The second switch connects battery power from the CJB (central
junction box) to the:

CJB
ECM
EPB (electronic parking brake) module.
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER AND FLUID RESERVOIR

NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) version shown, RHD (right-hand drive) version similar.
Item
Part Number
Description
Brake fluid level switch electrical connector
Brake fluid reservoir cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Primary circuit inlet port
Brake master cylinder
Secondary circuit outlet port
Primary circuit outlet port
Torx bolt
Secondary circuit inlet port
10
Reservoir to master cylinder seal (2 off)
The brake master cylinder is attached to the front of the brake booster, on the drivers side of the engine compartment. The
brake master cylinder consists of a cylinder housing containing two pistons in tandem. The rear piston produces pressure for
the primary braking circuit and the front piston produces pressure for the secondary circuit.
The fluid reservoir is mounted on top of the master cylinder to provide a supply of brake fluid for the primary and secondary
circuits.
Brake Fluid Level Switch

The brake fluid level switch is located in the fluid reservoir and is hardwired to the instrument cluster. When the level of fluid
in the reservoir reaches a predetermined low level, the switch contacts close and provide a return signal to the instrument
cluster, which illuminates the red brake warning indicator, and displays the red warning triangle and BRAKE FLUID LOW in
the instrument cluster message center.
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT
Item
Part Number
Description
LH (left hand) front brake
RH (right hand) rear brake
LH rear brake
RH front brake
Primary circuit inlet port
Secondary circuit inlet port
The HCU (hydraulic control unit) is attached to the ABS module in the LH (left-hand) front wheel arch. The HCU is a four
channel unit that modulates the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes under control of the ABS module.
CAUTION: The ABS module and the HCU are a single unit and must not be separated. There are no serviceable parts
within the brakes modulator.
The primary and secondary outlets of the master cylinder are connected to the primary and secondary circuits within the
HCU. The primary circuit in the HCU has separate outlet ports to the RH (right-hand) front and LH rear brakes. The
secondary circuit in the HCU has separate outlet ports to the LH front and RH rear brakes.
Each of the HCU circuits contains the following components to control the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes:
A normally open, solenoid-operated pilot valve, to enable active braking.
A normally closed, solenoid-operated priming valve, to connect the brake fluid reservoir to the dual circuit return
pump during active braking.

A dual circuit return pump, driven by an electric motor, to generate hydraulic pressure for active braking and return
brake fluid to the reservoir.

Normally open, solenoid-operated inlet valves and normally closed, solenoid-operated outlet valves, to modulate the
hydraulic pressure in the individual brakes.

An accumulator and a relief valve, to allow the fast release of pressure from the brakes.
Filters, to protect the internal components from contamination.
Hydraulic Control Unit Schematic
Item
Part Number
Secondary circuit
Master cylinder
Fluid reservoir
Primary circuit
HCU
Pressure sensor
Priming valve
Pilot valve
Pilot valve
10
Priming valve
11
Return pump
12
Motor
13
Return pump
14
Inlet valve
15
Relief valve
16
Accumulator
17
Inlet valve
18
Inlet valve
19
Accumulator
20
Relief valve
21
Inlet valve
22
Outlet valve
23
Outlet valve
24
Outlet valve
25
Outlet valve
26
Right front brake
Description
Left rear brake
27
28
29
Right rear brake
Left front brake
Brake Master Cylinder
When the brake pedal is pressed, the front push rod in the brake booster pushes the master cylinder primary piston along
the bore of the housing. This produces pressure in the primary pressure chamber which, in conjunction with the primary
spring, overcomes the secondary spring and simultaneously moves the secondary piston along the bore. The initial
movement of the pistons away from the piston stops closes the primary and secondary center valves in the master cylinder.
Further movement of the pistons then pressurizes the fluid in the primary and secondary chambers and thus the brake
circuits. The fluid in the chambers behind the pistons is unaffected by the movement of the pistons and can flow unrestricted
through the inlet ports between the chambers and the reservoir.
Hydraulic Control Unit

The HCU has three operating modes:
Normal braking/EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
ABS braking
Active braking.
Normal Braking/EBD
Initially, all of the solenoid-operated valves are de-energized. Operating the brake pedal produces a corresponding increase
or decrease of pressure in the brakes, through the open pilot valves and inlet valves. If the ABS module determines that EBD
is necessary, it energizes the inlet valves for both rear brakes, to isolate the brakes from any further increase in hydraulic
pressure.
ABS Braking
If the ABS module determines that ABS braking is necessary, it energizes the inlet and outlet valves of the related brake and
starts the return pump. The inlet valve closes to isolate the brake from pressurized fluid; the outlet valve opens to release
pressure from the brake into the accumulator, and the inlet side of the return pump. The reduced hydraulic pressure allows
the wheel to accelerate. The ABS module then operates the inlet and outlet valves to modulate the pressure in the brake to
apply the maximum braking effort without locking the wheel. Control of the valves for each wheel takes place individually.
Active Braking Mode
The active braking mode is used to generate and control hydraulic pressure to the brakes for functions other than normal
braking/EBD and ABS braking, i.e. DSC (dynamic stability control), CBC (corner brake control), ETC (electronic traction
control), EBA (emergency brake assist), understeer control and electronic brake prefill (on vehicles with ASC (adaptive speed
control)).
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (206-09 Anti-Lock
Control - Stability Assist, Description and Operation).
For active braking, the ABS module energizes the pilot valves and priming valves, starts the return pump and energizes the
inlet valves and outlet valves when required. Brake fluid, drawn from the reservoir through the master cylinder and priming
valve, is pressurized by the return pump and supplied to the inlet valves. The ABS module then operates the inlet valves and
outlet valves, as required, to modulate the pressure in the individual brakes. Some noise may be generated during active
braking.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation

For additional information, refer to
REFER to: Brake System (206-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Master Cylinder LHD RWD

Removal
area with water.
1.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Fluid Reservoir (20606 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
2.
3.
Release and disconnect the electrical connector.

Fully loosen the bolt.
NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this operation.

Disconnect the brake master cylinder lines.
4.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing

the components, ensure the area around the joint
faces and connections are clean. Plug open
connections to prevent contamination.
Remove the brake master cylinder.
Remove the 2 nuts.
5.
Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1.
Install a new O-ring seal.
2.
Install the brake master cylinder.

3.
Connect the brake master cylinder lines.

Tighten the brake line unions to 17 Nm (13 lb.ft).
4.
Connect and secure the electrical connector.

Tighten the bolt.
5.
Install the brake fluid reservoir.

Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Master Cylinder RHD RWD

Removal
area with water.
1.
Remove the coolant expansion tank.

For additional information, refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank
2.

5.
3.
Release the plenum box sidewall.

Remove the 4 bolts.
4.
Remove the coolant expansion tank mounting

bracket.
Remove the 3 nuts.

Disconnect the brake master cylinder lines.
6.

Remove the 2 nuts.
7.
Installation
1.
2.

3.
Connect the brake master cylinder lines.

4.
Install the plenum chamber panel.

Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
5.
Install the coolant expansion tank mounting bracket.

6.

7.
Install the coolant expansion tank.

Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Fluid Reservoir

Removal
area with water.
1.

Remove the air intake cover.
Remove the 4 clips.
2.
Siphon the fluid from the brake master cylinder.

Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid spillage.
3.
Disconnect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch electrical

connector.
4.

operation.
Remove and discard 2 brake fluid reservoir
seals.
Installation
1.
Clean the components.
2.
Install the brake fluid reservoir.

Install new brake fluid reservoir seals.
Tighten the Torx bolt to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
3.
Connect the low brake fluid warning indicator switch electrical

connector.
4.

Procedures).
5.
Install the air intake cover.

Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Pedal and Bracket

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.
Remove the instrument panel.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel (501-12
Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
3.
Remove the windshield wiper arms.

For additional information, refer to: Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16
Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).
4.
Remove the throttle pedal assembly.

Remove the 3 Torx screws.
5.
Release the brake switch.

Rotate clockwise approximately 30 degrees.
6.
Release the brake booster.

Remove the brake pedal clevis pin.
Remove the 4 nuts.
7.
8.
Remove the nuts from the brake pedal bracket.

Remove the 5 nuts.
NOTE: Working from the engine bay.

Remove the 4 clips.
9.

Remove the 3 clips.
10.
Remove the plenum chamber panel.

Release the retaining clip.
Disconnect the washer jet hose.
11.
Remove the brake pedal bracket.

Remove sealant for access to the bulkhead
screw heads.
Remove the 4 screws.
Release the electrical harness clip.
Installation
1.
Install the brake pedal bracket.

Align to the studs and lightly tighten the nuts.
Install and tighten the bulkhead screws.
Apply sealant to the bulkhead screw heads.
Secure the electrical harness with the clip.
2.
Tighten the brake pedal bracket nuts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
3.

Connect the washer jet hose.
4.

5.

6.
Secure the brake booster.

Install the brake pedal clevis pin.
7.
Install the brake switch.
8.
Install the throttle pedal assembly.

Install the Torx screws.
9.
Install the windshield wiper arms.

For additional information, refer to: Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16
Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).
10.
Install the instrument panel.

11.

Specifications).
Power Brake Actuation General
Item
Brake booster - boost ratio
Brake booster - boost ratio (Supercharged models)
Specification
5.8:1
6.2:1
Item
Brake booster to bulk head/pedal bracket - nuts
Nm
25
lb-ft
18
lb-in
-
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster


NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) installation shown, LHD (left-hand drive) installation similar.
Item
Part Number
Description
Brake booster
Vacuum pipes
Vacuum pump

NOTE: LHD installation shown, RHD installation similar.
Item
Part Number
Description
Vacuum pipes
Brake booster
Vacuum pump
INTRODUCTION
Power assistance for the braking system is provided by a vacuum operated non-active brake booster. The vacuum is provided
by a vacuum pump and the intake manifold, which are connected to the brake booster by plastic pipes.
BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster gives a boost ratio of 6.2 : 1 to the effort applied to the brake pedal. The brake booster is attached to the
driver side of the engine compartment bulkhead with a gasket, and four studs and nuts.
The input push rod within the brake booster is connected to the brake pedal. The output rod locates in the primary piston of
the brake master cylinder.
For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and Operation).
VACUUM PIPES
NOTE: RHD naturally aspirated installation shown, other installations similar.
Item
Part Number
Description
Brake booster connector/check valve
Brake booster
Intake manifold rear cover
In-line check valve
5
Vacuum pump
Plastic pipes connect the brake booster to the intake manifold and the vacuum pump to provide the vacuum for the brake
booster. The connection with the brake booster contains a check valve to maintain the vacuum in the brake booster. An in-line
check valve near the connection with the intake manifold prevents air being drawn from the intake manifold and fuel vapor
from entering the pipes.
VACUUM PUMP
Item
Part Number
Description
Vacuum pipe connection
Cover
Vane
Oil tube
Drive gear
Seal
Rotor
The vacuum pump is a mechanically driven vane pump installed on the front of the engine sump body and driven by the
auxiliary camshaft. Two bolts attach the vacuum pump to the sump body. A seal is installed in a groove on the mating face of
the vacuum pump.
The vacuum pump drive gear locates on the end of the rotor and engages with slots in the front of the auxiliary camshaft. An
oil tube in the center of the rotor supplies engine oil from the auxiliary camshaft to lubricate the vacuum pump. Exhaust air
from the vacuum pump is expelled into the engine sump through the sump body.
Power Brake Actuation - Power Brake System

REFER to: Brake System (206-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster LHD RWD

Removal
1.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Master Cylinder - LHD
RWD (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
2.

Remove the driver's side footwell trim panel.
Carefully release the 3 clips.
3.

4.
Release the vacuum pipe.
5.
Remove the brake booster.

Remove the 4 nuts.
6.
Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1.
Install new gaskets.
2.
Install the brake booster.

3.
Connect the vacuum hose.
4.
5.
Install the driver's side footwell trim panel.

Carefully align and secure the clips.
6.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Master Cylinder - LHD
RWD (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster RHD RWD

Removal
1.
2.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Master
Cylinder - RHD RWD (206-06 Hydraulic Brake
Actuation, Removal and Installation).
CAUTION: Removal of the clips is a delicate procedure,

damage will occur if any force is used.
3.

4.
Release the vacuum pipe.
5.
Remove the brake booster.

Remove the 4 nuts.
6.
Installation
1.
2.
Install the brake booster.

3.
Connect the vacuum hose.
4.
5.

6.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Master Cylinder RHD RWD (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Vacuum Pump

Removal
1.

2.
Drain the engine oil.

3.
4.
Torque: 12 Nm
Installation
1.
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist Torque Specifications
Item
Brake tubes to hydraulic control unit - union nut
Hydraulic control unit bracket to vehicle - bolt
Hydraulic control unit to bracket - bolt
Rear wheel speed sensor - bolt
Steering angle sensor - screw
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer - nut
Nm
17
9
9
9
4
9
lb-ft
13
7
7
7
3
7
lb-in
79
79
79
35
-
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist V8

5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
RH (right hand) front wheel speed sensor
Steering angle sensor
Instrument cluster
RH rear wheel speed sensor
LH (left hand) rear wheel speed sensor
Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor
LH front wheel speed sensor
INTRODUCTION
The ABS (anti-lock brake system) and DSC (dynamic stability control) system features a Bosch modulator, which is an
integrated four-channel HCU (hydraulic control unit) and ABS module. The unit is installed in the brake hydraulic circuit
between the brake master cylinder and the four brake calipers.
The ABS module is connected to the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus, and actively interacts with other vehicle
system control modules and associated sensors to receive and transmit current vehicle operating information.
When required, the ABS module will actively intervene and operate the HCU during braking or vehicle maneuvers to correct
the vehicle attitude, stability, traction or speed. During incidents of vehicle correction, the ABS module may also request the
ECM (engine control module) to control engine power in order to further stabilize and correct the vehicle.
To provide full system functionality, the ABS and DSC system comprise the following components:
DSC switch.
Four wheel speed sensors.
Steering angle sensor.
Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor.
Stoplamp switch.
Instrument cluster indicator lamps.
Integrated ABS module and HCU.
Two variants of ABS module are available, Bosch ESP8.1 and Bosch ESPplus8.1. The Bosch ESPplus8.1 system is fitted
to vehicles with ASC (adaptive speed control) and incorporates a feature known as 'electronic brake prefill'.
The ABS provides the following brake functions that are designed to assist the vehicle or aid the driver:
ABS.
DSC, including TracDSC.
CBC (corner brake control).
EBD (electronic brake force distribution).
ETC (electronic traction control).
EBA (emergency brake assist).
EDC (engine drag-torque control).
Understeer control.
Electronic brake prefill (vehicles with ASC only).
All the brake functions listed are automatically active when the ignition is in power mode and the engine is running. The DSC
system can be selected to off using the DSC switch.
WARNING: Although the vehicle is fitted with DSC, it remains the drivers responsibility to drive safely according to the
prevailing conditions.
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL SWITCH
The DSC switch is mounted in the floor console adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector.
DSC becomes active whenever the engine is running. A momentary press of the switch allows the driver to toggle between
the standard DSC settings and the optimized TracDSC settings. The message TRAC DSC or DSC ON will temporarily be
displayed in the instrument cluster message center. The amber DSC warning indicator in the instrument cluster remains
illuminated while TracDSC is selected.
The DSC can be switched off by pressing and holding the switch for more than 10 seconds.
In each case the message DSC OFF will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center to confirm DSC has been
switched off. The amber DSC warning indicator in the instrument cluster will remain illuminated. The system can be switched
back on again by simply pressing and releasing the switch. The message DSC ON will then temporarily appear in the
instrument cluster message center to confirm the system is on.
NOTE: Switch requests may be delayed if the switch is pressed while a DSC operation is taking place. The switch request will
be displayed in the instrument cluster but the ABS module will not initiate any stability changes until it is safe to do so.
DSC returns to ON at the beginning of each ignition cycle, regardless of the previous setting. The exception to this is when
the ignition is switched off only briefly and the ABS module remains powered, as indicated by the continued illumination of
the P indicator on the JaguarDrive selector.
If a fault is detected with the DSC switch, the ABS module defaults to the DSC on setting and any switch requests are
ignored.
WARNING: It is recommended that when using show chains, DSC is switched on and JaguarDrive control winter mode
is selected.
WHEEL SPEED SENSORS
Item
Part Number
Description
Front wheel speed sensor
Rear wheel speed sensor
An active wheel speed sensor is installed in each wheel hub to provide the ABS module with a rotational speed signal from
each road wheel. The head of each front wheel speed sensor is positioned close to a magnetic encoder ring incorporated into
the inboard seal of the wheel bearing. The head of each rear wheel speed sensor is positioned close to a magnetic encoder
ring incorporated into the rear wheel bearing assembly. Each encoder ring contains 46 north and south poles. A fly lead
connects each sensor to the vehicle harness.
The wheel speed sensors each have a signal and a return connection with the ABS module. When the ignition is ON the ABS
module supplies a signal feed to the wheel speed sensors and monitors the return signals. Any rotation of the road wheels
induces current fluctuations in the return signals, which are converted into individual wheel speeds and overall vehicle speed
by the ABS module.
The ABS module broadcasts the individual wheel speeds and the vehicle speed on the high speed CAN bus for use by other
systems.
If a wheel speed sensor fault is detected by the ABS module, 'ABS FAULT' will be displayed in the instrument cluster
message center and an amber warning indicator will illuminate.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
The steering angle sensor measures the steering wheel angle and the rate of change of the steering wheel angle. These
measurements are received by the ABS module and broadcast on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
The steering angle sensor is mounted on the steering column upper shroud mounting bracket, immediately behind the
multifunction switches, and is secured by two screws. A fly lead connects the sensor to the passenger compartment wiring
harness via a four pin multiplug.
The sensor is housed in a 'U' shaped plastic casing and contains two offset LED (light emitting diode) facing two detectors.
An encoder ring is mounted on the inner steering column shaft and intersects the LED's and detectors. The encoder ring
contains 60 slots which break and restore the light beams between the LED's and the detectors as the steering wheel is
rotated. The ABS module is able to determine the direction of rotation of the steering wheel by monitoring when the light
beams change state. The LED's and detectors are mounted in such a way that only one beam will change state, either to
broken or restored, at any one time.
The center (straight ahead) position of the steering wheel has to be learned by the ABS module every time the ignition is
switched ON. The steering angle sensor is unable to determine the center position so inputs from the yaw rate and lateral
acceleration sensor and wheel speed signals are also used by the ABS module to help it perform this process. If extreme
weather conditions are present, for example ice causing extreme wheel spin or understeer/oversteer, the ABS module may
not be able to determine the center position of the steering wheel. In this situation 'DSC NOT AVAILABLE' will be displayed in
the instrument cluster message center and the amber warning indicator will illuminate.
'DSC NOT AVAILABLE' will also be displayed if the ABS module detects a steering angle sensor fault. The amber warning
indicator will illuminate until the fault is rectified.
YAW RATE AND LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR
The yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor is mounted on the transmission tunnel, forward of the gear selector module.
The sensor is secured by 2 screws and connects to the vehicle wiring via a 4 pin multiplug.
When the ignition is ON, the sensor receives a power feed from the CJB (central junction box). The ground path for the
sensor is located on the instrument panel cross-car beam. The sensor measures the yaw rate and lateral acceleration of the
vehicle, providing values to the ABS module via a dedicated, private high speed CAN bus connection. The ABS module
broadcasts these values on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
If a sensor fault is detected by the ABS module, 'DSC NOT AVAILABLE' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message
center and the amber warning indicator will illuminate.
STOPLAMP SWITCH
The stoplamp switch is mounted on the brake pedal box and is connected to the vehicle harness via a four pin multiplug.
When the brake pedal is pressed, the switch contacts close. This allows a hard wired signal feed to be sent to the ECM. A
stoplamp switch status message is then sent from the ECM to the ABS module on the high speed CAN bus. The ABS module
is then able to control braking force accordingly in conjunction with the HCU.
NOTE: The stoplamp switch also forms part of the speed control system.
BRAKE WARNING INDICATORS
Item
Part Number
Description
ABS warning indicator (all except USA, Canada and Mexico) - also shared with EPB (electronic
parking brake) warning
ABS warning indicator (Canada and Mexico only) - not shared with EPB warning
ABS warning indicator (USA only) - not shared with EPB warning
DSC warning indicator
Brake warning indicator (all except USA)
Brake warning indicator (USA only)
The instrument cluster and message center contains warning indicators and warning messages to display the operating
status of the anti-lock control - stability assist functions. The warning indicators and messages provide a visual notification of
either a system warning or information indication to the driver. There are three warning indicators on the instrument cluster,
which vary dependant on market, and several types of message relating to the anti-lock control - stability assist functions.
The DSC OFF message is accompanied by an audible warning.
The following anti-lock control - stability assist warning indicators are installed in the instrument cluster:
An amber ABS warning indicator.
A red brake warning indicator.
An amber DSC warning indicator.
ABS MODULE
The ABS module is secured to a mounting bracket located in the LH (left-hand) front wheel arch. The module is mounted on
the rear face of the HCU, which it uses to control all braking and stability functions by modulating hydraulic pressure to the
individual wheel brakes.
Two types of ABS modules are available; one for vehicles with standard speed control, one for vehicles fitted with adaptive
speed control.
If an ABS modulator fault is detected, 'ABS FAULT' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center and the amber
warning indicator will illuminate.
CAUTION: The ABS module and the HCU comprise a single unit and must not be separated.
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT

The HCU is a four channel unit, secured to a mounting bracket located in the LH front wheel arch. The HCU modulates the
supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes under the control of the ABS module.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; V = Private CAN bus.
Item
Part Number
Battery
BJB (battery junction box) (175A megafuse)
CJB (central junction box
LH front wheel speed sensor
LH rear wheel speed sensor
RH rear wheel speed sensor
RH front wheel speed sensor
Stoplamp switch
10
Diagnostic socket
11
Instrument cluster
12
ECM
13
DSC switch
14
Other systems
15
Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor
16
17
Description
ABS module
ABS controls the speed of all road wheels to ensure optimum wheel slip when braking at the adhesion limit. The wheels are
prevented from locking to retain effective steering control of the vehicle.
The brake pressures are modulated separately for each wheel. Rear brake pressures are controlled to maintain rear stability
on split friction surfaces.
Dynamic Stability Control

DSC uses brakes and powertrain torque control to assist in maintaining the yaw stability of the vehicle. While the ignition is
energized the DSC function is permanently enabled, unless selected off using the DSC switch.
DSC enhances driving safety in abrupt maneuvers and in under-steer or over-steer situations that may occur in a bend. The
ABS module monitors the yaw rate and lateral acceleration of the vehicle, steering input and individual wheel speeds, then
selectively applies individual brakes and signals for powertrain torque adjustments to reduce under-steer or over-steer
conditions.
In general:
In an under-steer situation the inner wheels are braked to counteract the yaw movement towards the outer edge of
the bend.
In an over-steer situation the outer wheels are braked to prevent the rear end of the vehicle from pushing towards
the outer edge of the bend.

The ABS module monitors the tracking stability of the vehicle using inputs from the wheel speed sensors, the steering angle
sensor, and the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor. The tracking stability is compared with stored target data.
Whenever the tracking stability deviates from the target data, the ABS module intervenes by applying the appropriate control
strategy.
The following interactions occur in an intervention situation:
High speed CAN signal to the ECM, to reduce engine torque.
Application of braking to the appropriate corner of the vehicle.
TracDSC
TracDSC is an alternative setting of DSC with reduced system interventions. With TracDSC engaged, traction may be
somewhat increased, although stability may be reduced compared to normal DSC. TracDSC is intended for use only on dry
tarmac by suitably experienced drivers and should not be selected for other surfaces or by drivers with insufficient skill and
training to operate the vehicle safely with the TracDSC function engaged. The less restrictive TracDSC setting may be
preferred, for example, by expert drivers engaged in high performance driving on dry tarmac surfaces such as tracks and
circuits.
WARNING: Vehicle safety may be reduced by inappropriate use of TracDSC. TracDSC should only be used in suitable
conditions.
Briefly pressing and releasing the DSC switch will switch the vehicle between normal DSC settings and TracDSC settings. To
confirm which setting has been selected, either DSC ON or TracDSC will be temporarily displayed in the instrument cluster
message center.
When TracDSC is selected, the amber DSC warning indicator located in the instrument cluster will illuminate. The warning
indicator will remain illuminated unless TracDSC becomes active. At this point the warning indicator will flash.
NOTE: If speed control is engaged it will automatically disengage if DSC or TracDSC becomes active.
Corner Brake Control

CBC (corner brake control) influences the brake pressures, below and within DSC and ABS thresholds, to counteract the
yawing moment produced when braking in a corner. CBC produces a correction torque by limiting the brake pressure on one
side of the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution

EBD limits the brake pressure applied to the rear wheels. When the brakes are applied, the weight of the vehicle transfers
forwards, reducing the ability of the rear wheels to transfer braking effort to the road surface. This may cause the rear
wheels to slip and make the vehicle unstable.
EBD uses the ABS braking hardware to automatically optimize the pressure to the rear brakes, below the point where ABS is
normally invoked.
NOTE: Only the rear brakes are controlled by the EBD function.
Electronic Traction Control

ETC (electronic traction control) attempts to optimize forward traction by reducing engine torque, or by applying the brake of
a spinning wheel until traction is regained.
ETC is activated if an individual wheel speed is above that of the vehicle reference speed (positive slip) and the brake pedal
is not pressed. The brake is applied to the spinning wheel, allowing the excess torque to be transmitted to the non-spinning
wheel through the drive line. If necessary, the ABS module also sends a high speed CAN bus message to the ECM to request
a reduction in engine torque.
When the DSC function is selected off using the DSC switch, the braking and engine torque reduction features are both
disabled.
Emergency Brake Assist

EBA assists the driver in emergency braking situations by automatically increasing the applied braking effort. The ABS
module invokes EBA when:
The brake pedal is rapidly pressed.
The brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation.
When the brake pedal is rapidly pressed, the ABS module increases the hydraulic pressure to all of the brakes until the
threshold for ABS operation is reached. This action applies the maximum braking effort for the available traction. The ABS
module monitors for the sudden application of the brakes, using inputs from the brake pedal switch and from the pressure
sensor within the HCU. With the brake pedal pressed, if the rate of increase of hydraulic pressure exceeds the predetermined
limit, the ABS module invokes emergency braking.
When the brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation, the ABS module increases the
hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes up to the ABS threshold.
EBA operation continues until the driver releases the brake pedal, sufficiently for the hydraulic pressure in the HCU to drop
below a threshold value stored in the ABS module.
Engine Drag-Torque Control

EDC (engine drag-torque control) prevents wheel slip caused by any of the following:
A sudden decrease in engine torque when the accelerator is suddenly released.
A downshift using the Jaguar sequential shift function.
When the ABS module detects the onset of wheel slip without the brakes being applied, the ABS module signals the ECM via
the high speed CAN bus to request a momentary increase in engine torque.
Understeer Control
Understeer Logic Control is a proactive system which monitors the vehicle for understeer by comparing signals from the yaw
rate and lateral acceleration sensor with signals from the steering angle sensor and wheel speed sensors.
When the ABS module detects the onset of understeer, the ABS module signals the ECM via the high speed CAN bus to
request a decrease in engine torque. At the same time the ABS module will control the HCU to apply brake pressure to the
relevant wheels to correct the understeer.
Electronic Brake Prefill (Vehicles With ASC Only)

Electronic brake prefill (Bosch ESPplus8.1) senses any rapid throttle lift off, activating a small brake hydraulic pressure
build-up of approximately 3 to 5 bar (43.5 to 72.5 lbf/in) in anticipation of the brakes being applied.
This application produces a quicker brake pedal response and consequently slightly shorter stopping distances. The system
supports vehicles with ASC.
When the ABS module detects rapid throttle lift off (from the signals received from the ECM over the high speed CAN bus), it
controls the HCU to apply a low brake pressure to assist in a quicker brake application.
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist

For a detailed description of the Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist system, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
1.
2.
Confirm if the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) warning light was illuminated, or still is.
NOTE: An intermittent fault may allow the warning light to go off. This does not necessarily mean the fault is not
present. Some warnings will appear to clear when the ignition is cycled. This is often because the warning has flagged
as a result of one of the vehicle's on-board diagnostic routines having run to detect the fault. If the same routine is not
run when the ignition status is set to ON, the warning will not re-flag until the routine does run.
3.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Brake fluid level
Vacuum system
Wheel speed sensor installation
Wheel speed sensor air gap
Magnetic pulse wheel(s) (damaged/contaminated)
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer cluster installation
Incorrect wheel or tire size
Electrical
Warning light operation
Fuses
Wheel speed sensors
Connectors/Pins
Harnesses
Steering wheel rotation sensor
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer cluster
Booster pressure sensor
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
4.
5.
If the cause is not visually evident check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
NOTE: If the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
prior to the installation of a new HCU.
into account.
DTC
C002109
Description
Brake Booster
Performance
C003038
Left Front Tone

Wheel - signal
frequency incorrect
C003112
Left Front Wheel

Speed Sensor short to battery
Electrical wiring harness
Left Front Wheel

Speed Sensor circuit short to
ground or open
Left Front Wheel

Speed Sensor signal
shape/waveform
failure
Left Front Wheel

Speed Sensor signal erratic
C003114
C003125
C00312F
C0031- Left Front Wheel

31
Speed Sensor - no
signal
Possible Cause
No vacuum available from
engine due to split/leaking

hose etc
Brake booster servo has
failed due to lack of vacuum
Left front magnetic pulse
ring damaged/contaminated
Incorrect component
installed
* Sensor internal fault
fault
Sensor internal fault
fault
fault
fault
fault
Magnetic pulse ring de-
magnetised or damaged
C003162
Left Front Wheel

Speed Sensor signal compare
failure
fault
Action
Check integrity of brake booster vacuum hose.
Check and install a new brake booster as

required
Check the left front magnetic pulse ring for
damage or contamination. Clean or replace as

required. If no damage/contamination found,
suspect wheel speed sensor. Refer to the
module/component is suspect. To validate the
repair and extinguish the lamps, the vehicle
needs to be driven above 9mph/15kph for
more than 10 seconds
check the wheel speed sensor circuit for short
to power. Repair harness as required. If no
harness fault found, suspect wheel speed
sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
Procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
to ground or open circuit. Repair harness as
required. If no harness fault found, suspect
wheel speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedures manual if a
check the wheel speed sensor circuit for partial
or intermittently grounded signal circuit. Repair
harness as required. If no harness fault found,
needs to be driven above 9mph/15kph
check the wheel speed sensor circuit for
intermittent short to power, ground or open
circuit. Repair harness as required. If no
suspect. To validate the repair and extinguish
the lamps, the vehicle needs to be driven
above 9mph/15kph
check the wheel speed sensor circuit for open
circuit or high resistance. Check connectors for
damage or corrosion. Check the wheel speed
sensor for correct location and contamination.
Check the magnetic pulse wheel for
contamination, damage or de-magnetisation.
Clean or replace the sensor or wheel bearing as
required. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
above 9mph/15kph
above 9mph/15kph
C003164
Left Front Wheel

Speed Sensor signal plausibility
failure
Incorrect wheels/tyres
installed
fault
EMC influences on left front
C003211
Left Front wheel

Speed Sensor
Supply - circuit
short to ground
C003338
Right Front Tone

Wheel - signal
frequency incorrect
wheel speed sensor and

supply line
Magnetic pulse wheel
damaged/contaminated, demagnetised
fault
Right front magnetic pulse
Incorrect component
installed
C0034- Right Front Wheel

12

14
ground or open

25
Speed Sensor signal
shape/waveform
failure

2F

Speed Sensor - no
31
signal
fault
fault
fault
fault
fault
Check the correct wheels and tyres are
installed. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

and check the wheel speed sensor circuit for
intermittent short to power, or ground. Check
for EMC influences on the speed sensor and
circuits. Check magnetic pulse wheel for
damage/contamination and de-magnetisation.
Repair Wiring harness, install a new sensor or
wheel bearing as required. Refer to the
to ground. Repair harness as required. If no
suspect
Check the right front magnetic pulse ring for
suspect
above 9mph/15kph
above 9mph/15kph
62
failure

64
failure
fault
installed
fault
EMC influences on right

11
Speed Sensor
Supply - circuit
short to ground
front wheel speed sensor

and supply line
fault
C003638
Left Rear Tone

Wheel - signal
frequency incorrect
Left rear magnetic pulse
C003712
Left Rear Wheel

Left Rear Wheel

ground or open
Left Rear Wheel

Speed Sensor signal
shape/waveform
failure
Left Rear Wheel

C003714
C003725
C00372F
C0037- Left Rear Wheel

31
Speed Sensor - no
Incorrect component
installed
fault
fault
fault
fault
fault

above 9mph/15kph
Repair wiring harness, install a new sensor or
suspect
Check the left rear magnetic pulse ring for
suspect
above 9mph/15kph
signal
C003762
C003764
Left Rear Wheel

failure
Left Rear Wheel

failure
fault
installed
fault
EMC influences on left rear
C003811
Left Rear Wheel

Speed Sensor
Supply - circuit
short to ground
C003938
Right Rear Tone

Wheel - signal
frequency incorrect

supply line
fault
Right rear magnetic pulse
Incorrect component
installed
C003A- Right Rear Wheel

12

14
ground or open

25
Speed Sensor signal
shape/waveform
failure

2F
Speed Sensor -
fault
fault
fault
fault

above 9mph/15kph
above 9mph/15kph
suspect
Check the right rear magnetic pulse ring for
required. . If no damage/contamination found,
suspect
signal erratic

31
Speed Sensor - no
signal
fault

62
failure

64
failure
fault
installed
fault
EMC influences on left rear
C003B- Right Rear Wheel

11
Speed Sensor
Supply - circuit
short to ground

supply line
fault
C0047Brake Booster
16
Pressure Sensor circuit voltage
below threshold
Brake booster pressure
C0047Brake Booster
1C
Pressure Sensor circuit voltage out
of range
C0047Brake Booster
29
Pressure Sensor signal invalid
sensor supply circuit voltage below threshold

HCU failure
sensor supply circuit voltage out of range 4.5v5.3v

sensor failure
HCU failure
sensor signal 1 circuit short to ground, power,

open circuit
sensor signal 2 circuit short to ground, power,

above 9mph/15kph
above 9mph/15kph
above 9mph/15kph
suspect
Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this
DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check brake booster pressure
sensor power supply for short to ground. Check
and install a new HCU as required, refer to the
new module/component installation note at the
top of the DTC Index
sensor power supply for short, high resistance.
Establish if sensor or HCU is at fault. Check and
install a new brake booster pressure sensor or
HCU as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
diagrams and check brake booster signal 1 and
2 circuits for short to ground, power, open
circuit. Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains,
suspect the brake booster pressure sensor,
open circuit
sensor failure
C0047Brake Booster
62
Pressure Sensor signal compare
failure
NOTE: Fault detected during

braking event
sensor signal circuits 1 and

2 - shorted together
C0047Brake Booster
64
Pressure Sensor signal plausibility
failure
NOTE: Fault detected during nonbraking event

Signal plausibility failure
fault
sensor failure
C0062Longitudinal
28
Acceleration Sensor
- signal bias level
out of range/zero
adjustment failure
C0062Longitudinal
Acceleration Sensor
54
- missing
calibration
Yaw sensor insecurely
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor 08

bus
signal /message
failures

Yaw sensor fault

circuit short to
ground or open

Sensor fault
C0063- Yaw Rate Sensor 1C

circuit voltage out
of range
Yaw rate sensor power
mounted
Yaw sensor fault
The longitudinal
acceleration sensor has not
been calibrated
Mounting bracket
bent/misaligned
distribution fault
Yaw sensor internal fault
check and install a new sensor as required,

refer to the new module/component installation
note at the top of the DTC Index. To validate
the repair and extinguish the lamps, start the
engine and apply the foot brake
sensor signal circuits 1 and 2 for shorting
together. Repair any harness faults found and
retest. To validate the repair and extinguish
the lamps, start the engine and apply the foot
brake
diagrams and check brake booster signal 1 and
2 circuits for short to ground, power, open
damage or corrosion. Repair any harness faults
found and retest. If DTC remains, suspect the
brake booster pressure sensor, check and
install a new sensor as required, refer to the
new module/component installation note at the
top of the DTC Index. To validate the repair
and extinguish the lamps, start the engine and
apply and release the foot brake
Check the yaw sensor is securely mounted. If
the mounting is secure suspect the yaw sensor,
Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
manual if a module/component is suspect
Check the longitudinal acceleration sensor has
been calibrated
If it has been calibrated check that the sensor
is aligned correctly, check for bent mounting

bracket
To validate the calibration/repair, ignition on
and wait 10 seconds. Check lamps remain
extinguished
Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and
check the integrity of the power and ground
supplies to the yaw sensor. Check the integrity
of the bus connections. Repair any harness
faults found and retest. If no harness faults are
found suspect the yaw sensor, Refer to the
repair, ignition on and wait 10 seconds. Check
lamps remain extinguished.
check the high speed CAN circuit between the
yaw sensor and the Anti-Lock Braking System
Hydraulic Control Unit for short to ground or
open circuit. Repair any harness faults found
and retest. If no harness faults are found
suspect the yaw sensor, Refer to the Warranty
check the power and ground supplies to the
yaw sensor. Check power circuit for short to
ground or open circuit. Check ground circuit for
short to power or open circuit. Repair any
harness faults found and retest. If no harness
faults are found suspect the yaw sensor, Refer
to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual
if a module/component is suspect
To confirm the repair and extinguish the
warning lamps, clear the DTC, cycle the
ignition state to off, then return the ignition
state to on and wait up to 10 seconds

signal rate of
change

signal bias level out
of range/zero
adjustment failure
checksum error
mounted
Yaw sensor connector
insecure
Yaw sensor fault
Hydraulic Control Unit fault
mounted
Yaw sensor fault
Yaw sensor fault

internal electronic
failure
Yaw rate sensor internal

signal plausibility
failure
The vehicle has been

incorrect assembly
C101F49
Generic Valve
Failure - internal
electronic failure
C1A77- Valve Relay Supply

16
Circuit - voltage
below threshold
electronic failure
operated on a
dynamometer/rolling road
Yaw rate sensor incorrectly
installed
Yaw rate sensor fault
Incorrect yaw sensor
installed
Valve relay supply circuit
fault
Valve relay ground circuit
fault
C1A9012
Wheel Speed
Sensor Supply circuit short to
Check the yaw sensor is securely mounted.
Check the yaw sensor harness connector is

securely located. Refer to the electrical wiring
diagrams and check the power and ground
supplies to the yaw sensor. Check circuits for
intermittent open circuit or high resistance.
Repair any harness faults found and retest. If
no harness faults are found suspect the yaw
sensor or Anti-Lock Braking System Hydraulic
Control Unit, Refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
Check the yaw sensor is securely mounted. If
the mounting is secure suspect the yaw sensor,
Replace the yaw sensor, clear the DTC and
retest the system. If the DTC remains install a
new Anti-Lock Braking System Hydraulic
Control Unit. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
check the power and ground supplies to the
yaw sensor. Repair any harness faults found
and retest. If no harness faults are found
suspect the yaw sensor, Refer to the Warranty
NOTE: This DTC can be set if the vehicle is operated
on a dynamometer/rolling road, if this is the case the
DTC should be stored as a historic DTC
This DTC is set if the information coming from
the yaw sensor is deemed to be implausible

when compared with other sensor information
such as steering angle sensor. Check that the
yaw sensor is correctly installed on the vehicle.
If the sensor is installed correctly suspect the
sensor has an internal fault. Refer to the
Check the part number of the yaw sensor and
fit the correct sensor as required
manual if a module/component is suspect.
Check and install a new Anti-Lock Braking
System Hydraulic Control Unit
check the valve relay supply circuit for open
circuit or short to ground. Check the valve
relay ground circuit for open circuit
state to on and wait up to 10 seconds. If
required road test the vehicle at a speed above
20 KPH
This DTC is set if at least one wheel speed
sensor supply circuit is short to power. Refer to
the electrical wiring diagrams and check the
battery
C1A95Wheel speed
4A
Sensor - incorrect
component
installed
Incorrect wheel speed
C1A9564
Wheel Speed
Sensor - signal
sensor installed
installed
fault
wheel speed sensor circuits for short to power.

Repair wiring harness as required. Clear the
DTC and retest the system
Check and install the correct wheel speed
sensor
NOTE: This DTC could be set by a flat tyre which
would give a continuous different rate of speed when
compared to other 3 wheels, if this is the case the DTC
should be stored as a historic DTC
damaged/contaminated or
de-magnetised
EMC influences on wheel
speed sensors and supply
circuits
Wheel speed sensor internal
fault
C1A96- Brake Light Switch

- signal plausibility
64
failure
Brake pedal switch out of
adjustment
Brake pedal switch circuit
faults
Brake pedal switch fault
C1A9724
Lateral
Accelerometer signal stuck high
Sensor Internal Fault
C1A9849
Yaw Rate Sensor
Internal electronic failure
C1A9864
Yaw Rate Sensor
NOTE: This DTC may set due to a

sustained period of steep uphill
driving (>35% for four seconds)
Check that approved wheels and tyres are

and check the wheel speed sensor circuits for
the wheel speed sensors and pulse wheels for
contamination/damage or de-magnetisation.
Clear the DTC and retest the vehicle. If the
fault remains check the wheel speed sensor
circuits for possible EMC interference. Examine
the output from the sensors using an
oscilloscope to identify inconsistent patterns or
spikes. Repair wiring harness or replace wheel
speed sensors or wheel bearings as required.
This DTC is set when the signal from the brake
pedal position switch is contradicted by the
signal from the master cylinder pressure
sensor. Check the adjustment of the brake
pedal position switch. Check the Engine Control
Module for brake pedal switch related DTCs.
Check brake pedal switch circuits for open
circuit. Repair wiring as required or install a
replacement switch as required. Switch the
ignition state to on, press and release brake
pedal at least once
This DTC is set when the lateral accelerometer
produces an erroneous signal with the vehicle
stationary. Suspect sensor, refer to the
Check and install a new sensor as required,
refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
Check the Yaw rate sensor is correctly installed
to the vehicle. Check and install a new sensor
as required, refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
mounted to the vehicle

Yaw rate sensor failure
C1A98- Yaw Rate Sensor 92

performance or
incorrect operation
C1A98- Yaw Rate Sensor 96
component internal
failure
C1A98- Yaw Rate Sensor 2F

signal erratic
Check the mounting of the yaw rate sensor and
mounted to the vehicle.
correct or replace sensor as required. Refer to

the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
Clear the DTC and retest the system. If the
installed
fault remains check for additional DTCs and
Yaw rate sensor wiring fault
refer to the DTC index. Check the Yaw sensor
EMC influences on yaw rate
is mounted correctly on the vehicle. Check the
sensor and circuits
wiring connections to the sensor are correct
Yaw rate sensor internal
and secure. Check for any sources of EMC
fault
interference with the sensor or circuits. If no
external causes are evident suspect the sensor.
The signal from the yaw
NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault
rate sensor has been
condition is present and should be ignored. Clear the
suspicious for > 2 minutes DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
www.JagDocs.com
but has not yet moved fully

to fault condition
diagnosis
Information only, regard as normal operation.
Clear the DTC and retest the system

C1A99- Pressure Sensor 28
signal bias level out
of range / zero
adjustment failure
Pedal box adjustment
incorrect
Pedal box fault
Control Module fault
C1B0016
C1B001C
Steering Angle
Sensor - circuit
voltage below
threshold
Steering angle sensor not
Steering Angle
Sensor - circuit
voltage out of
range

C1B00Steering Angle
Sensor - signal rate
27
of change above
threshold
initialised and calibrated

Harness fault
C1B0049
Steering Angle
Sensor - internal
electronic failure
C1B0064
Steering Angle
Sensor - signal
C1B00Steering Angle
66
Sensor - signal has
too many
transitions/events
installed in the correct

position
internal fault

position
Yaw rate sensor not
position
internal fault

internal fault
C1B0068
Steering Angle
Sensor - event
information
Conditions not met under
C1B0216
Return Pump circuit voltage

below threshold
which the sensor can learn

the centre position
Check the pedal box is adjusted/operating
correctly, perform any necessary adjustments,

clear DTC and retest system. If DTC resets
suspect Anti-Lock Braking System Control
Module. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
The sensor is calibrated at every new ignition
cycle, every time the vehicle is driven away
from standstill. The DTC indicates that the
steering offset exceeded allowed values and
that the calibration process was restarted.
Check for a disturbance of the ignition supply
to the sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the steering angle sensor
wiring harness and circuits for open circuits,
short to ground. Refer to the Warranty Policy
and Procedures manual if a module/component
is suspect
check the steering angle sensor wiring harness
and sensor signal circuits for open circuits,
short to power or ground. Refer to the
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, check
the wiring harness connection at the steering
angle sensor for security and check circuits for
intermittent faults. Clear DTC and retest
system. The sensor is calibrated at every new
ignition cycle, every time the vehicle is driven
away from standstill. If fault returns suspect
suspect
Check the installed position of the steering
angle sensor. Remove and reinstall if required.
Clear DTC. The sensor is calibrated at every
new ignition cycle, every time the vehicle is
driven away from standstill. Retest system. If
fault returns suspect sensor. Refer to the
This DTC is set when there is conflicting
information coming from the Steering Angle
Sensor and the Yaw Rate Sensor. Check both
of these sensors to ensure they are correctly
installed on the vehicle. Check for other related
DTCs. Clear the DTC. The sensor is calibrated
at every new ignition cycle, every time the
vehicle is driven away from standstill. If the
DTC returns suspect the Steering Angle Sensor.
check the steering angle circuits for short
circuit to each other. If no harness faults are
found suspect the steering angle sensor, refer
to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual
if a module/component is suspect
Information only, regard as normal operation.
Clear the DTC and retest the system. Switch
the ignition state to on, engine running,
accelerate > 5.4 kph with steering input
check the return pump supply and ground
circuits for short to ground or open circuit
C1B02Return Pump 49
internal electronic
failure
Internal fault within the
C200995
Front Axle Wheel

Speed Sensors
Swapped incorrect assembly
Vehicle unevenly loaded

Incorrect tyres installed
C200A95
Rear Axle Wheel

Speed Sensors
Swapped incorrect assembly
Vehicle unevenly loaded

Incorrect tyres installed

U0001- High Speed CAN

88
Communication bus
- bus off
U0074Control Module
13
Communication Bus
B off - circuit open
U0074Control Module
88
Communication Bus
B off - bus off
U010000
Lost
Communication
With ECM/PCM A no sub type
information
Power distribution fault

U010087
Lost
Communication
With ECM/PCM "A"
- Missing message

U010100
Lost
Communication
With TCM - no sub
type information


state to on and drive the vehicle above
9mph/15kph
Install a new hydraulic control unit. Refer to
the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
state to on and drive the vehicle above
9mph/15kph
Check the vehicle is not unevenly loaded
(heavy on one side). Check that approved
wheels and tyres are installed. Refer to
electrical circuit diagrams and check if the front
wheel speed sensor connectors are transposed
or incorrectly attached at the wiring harness
connector
Check the vehicle is not unevenly loaded
(heavy on one side). Check that approved
wheels and tyres are installed. Refer to
electrical circuit diagrams and check if the rear
wheel speed sensor connectors are transposed
or incorrectly attached at the wiring harness
connector
check the power and ground connections to the
module. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, complete a CAN network
integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the CAN network
module. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the private CAN bus circuits between
the Yaw Rate Sensor and the Anti-Lock Braking
System control module for open circuit
module. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the private CAN bus circuits between
the Yaw Rate Sensor and the Anti-Lock Braking
System control module for short to ground,
short to power open circuit. check for insecure
connectors
diagrams and check the CAN network between
the Engine Control Module and the Anti-Lock
Braking System Control Module
the Engine Control Module and the Anti-Lock
U010187
Lost
Communication
with TCM - missing
message

U010300
Lost
Communication
With Gear Shift
Control Module A no sub type
information

U010387
Lost
Communication
With Gear Shift
Module - Missing
message

U010400
Lost
Communication
With Cruise Control
Module - no sub
type information

U010487
Lost
Communication
With Cruise Control
Module - missing
message
Invalid brake demand
pressure received from the

Adaptive Speed Control
Module

the Transmission Control Module and the AntiLock Braking System Control Module
the Transmission Control Module and the AntiLock Braking System Control Module
the Transmission Shift Control Module and the
Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module
the Transmission Shift Control Module and the
the Adaptive Speed Control Module and the
NOTE: This DTC can be set by either lost
communication over CAN or by the ABS receiving an
invalid brake demand pressure from the Adaptive
Speed Control Module
Check for Adaptive Speed Control Module
related DTCs
U012300
Lost
Communication
With Yaw Rate
Sensor Module - no
sub type
information

Sensor failure
U012387
Lost
Communication
With Yaw Rate
Sensor Module missing message
Yaw rate sensor HS CAN
circuit - open circuit

Yaw rate sensor ignition
supply circuit - short to

ground, open circuit
Sensor failure

the Adaptive Speed Control Module and the
Yaw Rate Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
the Yaw Rate Sensor Module and the Anti-Lock
If no harness faults are found, suspect the yaw
rate sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
Yaw Rate Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
the Yaw Rate Sensor Module and the Anti-Lock
If no harness faults are found, suspect the yaw
rate sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
U012800
Lost
Communication
With Park Brake
Control Module - no
sub type
information

U012887
Lost
Communication
With Park Brake
Control Module Missing message

U013900
Lost
Communication
With Suspension
Control Module B no sub type
information

U014000
Lost
Communication
With Central
Junction Box - no
sub type
information

U015500
Lost
Communication
With Instrument
Panel Cluster (IPC)
Control Module - no
sub type
information

U030000
Internal Control
Module Software
Incompatibility - no
sub type
information
The Anti-Lock Braking
U040168
Invalid Data
Received From
ECM/PCM - event
information
Event information - engine
U040268
Invalid Data
Received From
Transmission
Control Module event information
U0404Invalid Data
68
Received From
Gear Shift Module A
- event information
U0405Invalid Data
68
Received From
System Control Module is

not compatible with the
vehicle
control module related

concern
Event information -
Module related concern
Event information transmission shift module

related concern
Event information - speed
control module related

suspect
the Park Brake Control Module and the AntiLock Braking System Control Module
the Park Brake Control Module and the AntiLock Braking System Control Module
the Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module
and the Adaptive Damping Control Module
the Central Junction Box and the Anti-Lock
the Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module
and the Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Control
Module
Check the Anti-Lock Braking System control
module part number, install the correct part as
suspect
Check the Engine Control Module for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Check the Transmission Control Module for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
Check the Transmission Shift Module for
Dynamic Stability Control switch related DTCs

and refer to the relevant DTC index
Check the Speed Control Module for related
Cruise Control
Module - event
information
U0417Invalid Data
68
Received From Park
Brake Control
Module - event
information
U0443Invalid Data
68
Received From
Body Control
Module "B"
U1A14- CAN Initialisation
00
Failure - no sub
type information
U200168
Reduced System
Function - event
information
U200D- Control Module

14
Output Power A circuit short to
ground or open
U210100
Control Module
configuration
Incompatible - no
sub type
information
U2101Control Module
68
configuration
Incompatible event information
U230054
Central
Configuration missing calibration
U3000- Control Module -
concern
Event information - electric
park brake control module

related concern
Event information
Check the Electric Park Brake Control Module
for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC

index
Check the RJB for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index

Event information - The

diagrams and check the CAN network
Check and install a new Anti-Lock Braking
System Hydraulic Control Unit as required
pump motor wear estimator

has reached a preset limit
which mean that the AntiLock Braking System
control module will no
longer support adaptive
speed control
NOTE: This monitoring is based on detecting that the
Vacuum boost pressure
supply voltage from the ABS modulator is out of range
sensor failure (V6 petrol
(4.5V 5.3 V)
variants only)
Steering angle sensor fault
HCU failure
Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module.
Check the circuits between the steering angle
sensor and the Anti-Lock Braking System
Control Module, in particular check the steering
angle sensor ground at the Anti-Lock Braking
System Control Module connector pin. On V6
Petrol variants check the circuits between the
vacuum boost pressure sensor and the AntiLock Braking System Control Module, in
particular check the vacuum boost pressure
sensor power supply at the Anti-Lock Braking
System Control Module connector pin. If no
wiring harness faults are found and the power
and ground supplies to the vacuum boost
pressure sensor, steering angle sensor and
Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module are
ok then suspect (1) the vacuum boost pressure
sensor, (2) the steering angle sensor, (3) the
Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module.
Check/amend the car configuration file in the
Control Module variant code
Central Junction Box using the manufacturer
value not supported on this
approved diagnostic system
vehicle
Control Module has been

substituted from another
vehicle
A new Anti-Lock Braking
System Control Module has
been installed
Configuration missing
NOTE: The DTC is only for information and the system

will have full functionality
Check if the Anti-Lock Braking System Control
Module has been previously installed to another

vehicle, if so: Install the correct Anti-Lock
Braking System Control Module for this vehicle.
If the Anti-Lock Braking System Control Module
is new, cycle the ignition ON/OFF and clear the
DTC. Retest the system
Check/amend the car configuration file using
Check Anti-Lock Braking System Control
45
program memory
failure
Control Module memory

failure

internal electronic
failure
U3000- Control Module 4B

over temperature
Control Module internal

electronic failure
valve overheat protection

has been activated
Module, clear DTC and retest system. If the

fault returns install a new Anti-Lock Braking
System Hydraulic control Unit. Refer to the
Install a new Anti-Lock Braking System
NOTE: This DTC may be set if the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system has been operating the
valves for a prolonged period
Allow the Anti-Lock Braking System Hydraulic

event information
U300087
Control Module missing message
U300281
Vehicle
Identification
Number - invalid
serial data received
U300362
Battery Voltage signal compare

failure
U300616
Control Module
Input Power A circuit voltage
below threshold
U300617
Control Module
Input Power A circuit voltage
above threshold
U30061C
Control Module
Input Power A circuit voltage out
of range
Control Unit to cool, Clear the DTC and retest

the system
Event information - Anti Check for other DTCs relating to wheel speed,
Lock Braking System
yaw rate, steering angle and component
intervention in progress for
failures. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
an unfeasible length of time
suspect
Error/mismatch in Car
Download the Car Configuration File from the
Configuration file
RJB using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, check and amend to suit
vehicle specification
The Anti-Lock Braking
NOTE: The module will continue to work normally even
System Hydraulic Control
with the stored DTC
Unit has previously been
installed to another vehicle
Check and install the original, or a new AntiLock Braking System Hydraulic Control Unit.
There is a difference of
more than 2 volts between
check the power and ground supply circuits to
the power supply to the
the Central Junction Box and the Anti-Lock
Braking System Hydraulic Control Unit. Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit and
wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest the
the Central Junction Box
system
Power supply voltage low at
the Anti-Lock Braking System Hydraulic Control
Unit for open circuit, short to ground. Repair
wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest the
system
Power supply voltage high
Suspect overcharging. Check the Engine
at Anti-Lock Braking
Control Module for charging related DTCs and
System Hydraulic Control
refer to the relevant DTC index. Refer to the
Unit
workshop manual and battery care manual and
check the vehicle charging circuit performance.
Rectify any charging circuit concerns and clear
the DTC. Retest the system
Power supply voltage
momentarily low at the
the Anti-Lock Braking System Hydraulic Control
Unit for intermittent open circuit, short to
ground, or high resistance. Check the Engine
Control Module for charging related DTCs and
refer to the relevant DTC index. Refer to the
workshop manual and battery care manual and
check the vehicle battery condition and
charging circuit performance. Rectify any
battery or charging circuit concerns and clear
the DTC. Retest the system
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

Module
Removal
NOTE: The ABS Module is part of the hydraulic control unit (HCU) and cannot be serviced separately.
1.
Remove the HCU.

For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Control Unit
(HCU) (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Removal and
Installation).
Installation
1.
Install the HCU.

Installation).
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Front Wheel Speed Sensor

Removal
1.

2.
3.
and Installation).
4.

Torque: 6 Nm
5.
6.

Disconnect the wheel speed sensor
Installation
1.
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)

Special Tool(s)
Brake pedal hold down tool
JDS9013
Removal
area with water.
1.

2.

Procedures).
3.
Remove the front LH fender splash shield.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Splash Shield (50102 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
4.
NOTE: To prevent the loss of brake fluid, using the special tool
apply the brake pedal and set to 40mm ( 1.6 in ) below the rest
position.
Using the special tool, press and hold the brake pedal.
5.
Disconnect the hydraulic control unit (HCU)

6.

operation.
Disconnect the 6 brake pipe unions.
7.
NOTE: Note the fitted position of the locating pegs.

Remove the HCU and pipe assembley.
8.

Remove the HCU.
Disconnect the 6 brake pipe unions.
9.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the

component is removed for access only.
Remove the HCU bracket.
Installation
1.
Install the HCU bracket.

2.
Connect the brake pipe unions.

3.
NOTE: When installing the HCU , make sure the locating peg fits
securely into the grommet.
Install the HCU and pipe assembley.
Position the locating peg.
4.
5.
6.

Procedures).
7.

8.

Procedures).
9.
Using WDS, configure a new HCU.
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor

Removal
1.
WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only

by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
2.
Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
3.
CAUTION: Make sure that the harness retaining

bracket is not removed. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the harness.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the clip.
4.

Torque: 6 Nm
Installation
1.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is installed to the position

noted on removal.
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Yaw Rate Sensor and

Accelerometer
Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Floor Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,

3.
CAUTION: Make sure that all diagnostic

trouble codes (DTCs) have been removed after the
road test.
NOTE: Make sure that this component is installed
to the noted removal position.
Torque: 6 Nm
Installation
1.
Steering System - General Information Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Power steering fluid
Specifications
Dextron 3
Steering System - General Information - Steering System

For a detailed description of the steering system operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of
the workshop manual.
REFER to: Power Steering (211-02 Power Steering, Description and Operation) /
Steering Linkage (211-03 Steering Linkage, Description and Operation) /
Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Description and Operation) /
Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Tire condition/pressure
Fluid level
Leaks
Security, condition and correct installation of suspension components
Security, condition and correct installation of steering system
Electrical
Fuses
Harnesses for
damage/corrosion
Electrical connector(s)
Damaged/corroded pins
components
CAUTION: If a steering gear assembly is returned under warranty with leaking output shaft seals, but there is also
damage to the steering gear boot/boots the steering gear warranty will be invalid. This is due to the steering gear
output shaft seals being damaged due to foreign materials entering the steering gear boot and damaging the steering
gear output shaft seals thereafter.
3.
4.
If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the symptom chart.
Symptom Charts
WARNING: It is not possible to CHECK the torque of a patchlock bolt, if the torque is suspected to be low, the bolt
must be REMOVED/DISCARDED and a new bolt MUST be INSTALLED and torqued to the correct value.
Fluid Leakage
NOTE: Confirm the position of the fluid leak. CLEAN the area of the leak, inspect the area and confirm the exact
position. Ensure the fluid is not from another system on the vehicle.
Symptom
Possible Causes
Overfilled system
Steering gear
Damaged fluid
cap/reservoir
Power steering
fluid leakage
Loose or damaged
hoses and fittings

O-ring or Dowty seals
Fluid cooler
Action
CORRECT the fluid level as necessary
Install new steering gear.
REFER to: Steering Gear (211-02 Power Steering,
INSTALL a new fluid cap/reservoir.
REFER to: Power Steering Fluid Reservoir - Vehicles
Without: Supercharger (211-02 Power Steering, Removal
and Installation).
TIGHTEN the hose connection or latch plate fixing to the
recommended torque.
REFER to: Specifications (211-02 Power Steering,
Specifications).
INSTALL new components as necessary
INSTALL new O-ring or Dowty seals as necessary
INSTALL new fluid cooler.
REFER to: Power Steering Fluid Cooler - Vehicles Without:
Supercharger (211-02 Power Steering, Removal and

Installation).
INSTALL a new power steering pump.
REFER to: Power Steering Pump - Vehicles Without:
Supercharger (211-02 Power Steering, Removal and
Installation).
Power steering pump
Functional
Symptom
Possible Causes
Action
CHECK the steering
Steering wheel
misalignment
Steering not correctly centred
Steering wheel loose
Excess play in the steering linkage
Steering gear not correctly adjusted
alignment.
REFER to: Specifications
(204-00 Suspension System General Information,
Specifications).
CHECK and TIGHTEN the
steering wheel retaining bolt
as necessary.
REFER to: Steering Wheel
(211-04 Steering Column,
INSTALL new components as
necessary
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to
adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure
to follow this instruction will
invalidate the steering gear warranty
(causing excessive backlash)

INSTALL a new steering gear
Lower steering column universal joint
pinch bolts loose
Excessive free play at
steering wheel (refer to

the Steering Linkage
Inspection and Backlash
(Free play) Check in this
section)
Excessive wear in steering column
universal joints
Steering gear mounting bolts loose or
damaged
Wear in steering gear tie-rod end ball
joints
NOTE: Inner ball joint wear is rare. The
steering gear installed to all Jaguar vehicles has
a spring loaded pinion to ensure the correct
level of engagement between the rack and
pinion. This play is optimized with the steering
gear in the central position and should not be
confused with inner ball joint wear. Check for
vertical motion in the inner ball joint with the
steering gear in the central position.
Wear in steering gear inner ball joints
as necessary.
REFER to: Steering Gear
(211-02 Power Steering,
CHECK and TIGHTEN the
lower steering column pinch
bolts as necessary.
Specifications).
INSTALL a new steering
column or steering column
lower shaft as necessary.
REFER to: Steering Column
Steering Column Lower Shaft
CHECK/TIGHTEN and INSTALL
new steering gear mounting
bolts as necessary.
Specifications).
INSTALL new tie-rod ends as
necessary.
REFER to: Tie Rod End (21103 Steering Linkage, Removal
and Installation).
INSTALL new steering gear as
necessary.
Wear in suspension ball joints/bushings
necessary
Steering gear not correctly adjusted

Contamination of brake pads and discs
Veer under braking
Seized front brake caliper slide pins or
piston
Damaged brake discs
Uneven tire wear

Incorrect tire pressure
Incorrect geometry adjustment
as necessary.
RECTIFY the source of the
contamination and INSTALL
new brake pads and discs as
necessary.
REFER to: Brake Disc Vehicles With: Standard
Brakes (206-03 Front Disc
Brake, Removal and
Installation) /
Brake Disc - Vehicles With:
High Performance Brakes
(206-03 Front Disc Brake,
Brake Pads - Vehicles With:
Standard Brakes (206-03
Front Disc Brake, Removal
and Installation) /
Brake Pads - Vehicles With:
RECTIFY sticking slide pins
and INSTALL new calipers as
necessary.
REFER to: Brake Caliper Vehicles With: Standard
Brake, Removal and
Installation) /
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With:
INSTALL new brake discs as
necessary.
REFER to: Brake Disc Vehicles With: Standard
Brake, Removal and
Installation) /
Brake Disc - Vehicles With:
For further information on
diagnosis of uneven tire wear.
REFER to: Suspension System
ADJUST tire pressures.
(204-04 Wheels and Tires,
Specifications).
NOTE: Dealerships must keep a copy

of the BEFORE and AFTER geometry
figures with job card for future
reference
ADJUST as necessary.
Vehicle is unevenly loaded or
overloaded

Specifications).
Notify the customer of
incorrect vehicle loading
Steering gear is not correctly adjusted

Loose, damaged or worn front
suspension components
Vehicle pulls to one side
when driving on a level

surface
Loose, damaged or worn rear
Incorrect brake operation
Incorrect underbody alignment
Incorrect tire pressure or tire size
Vehicle is unevenly or excessively
loaded
Incorrect toe adjustment
Vehicle wanders from
as necessary.
TIGHTEN and INSTALL new
front suspension components
as necessary.
(204-01 Front Suspension,
Specifications).
rear suspension components
as necessary.
(204-02 Rear Suspension,
Specifications).
For further information on
diagnosis of the brake
system.
REFER to: Brake System
(206-00 Brake System General Information,
SET underbody alignment
referring to the Removal and
Installation procedures for
instruction.
REFER to: Front Subframe
(502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe
and Mounting System,
Rear Subframe (502-00 UniBody, Subframe and Mounting
System, Removal and
Installation).
CHECK and ADJUST the tire
pressure.
Specifications).
INSTALL a new tire as
necessary.
REFER to: Wheel and Tire
Notify the customer of
incorrect vehicle loading
Specifications) /
Front Toe Adjustment (20400 Suspension System General Information, General
Procedures).
TIGHTEN and INSTALL a new
tie-rod end as necessary.
side to side when driven

straight ahead and the
steering wheel is held in
a firm position
(211-03 Steering Linkage,

Specifications) /
Loose or worn steering gear tie-rod end
Tie Rod End (211-03 Steering
(s)
Linkage, Removal and
Installation).
TIGHTEN and INSTALL a new
suspension ball joint assembly
as necessary.
Loose or worn suspension ball joint(s)
Specifications) /
Wheel Knuckle (204-01 Front
Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
TIGHTEN the steering column
universal joint pinch bolt to
Steering column universal joint pinch
the correct torque.
bolt loose
Specifications).
rear suspension components
Loose or worn rear suspension
as necessary.
components
(204-02 Rear Suspension,
Specifications).
CHECK/ADJUST the tire
pressure and INSTALL correct
tire as necessary.
Incorrect tire pressure, size or type
Specifications) /
Wheel and Tire (204-04
Wheels and Tires, Removal
and Installation).
reference
Incorrect geometry adjustment
Steering column/steering column lower

Poor self center action of
shaft interference
the steering
Steering column shroud fouling on the
steering wheel
Steering column universal joints binding
or stiff
Steering column lower shaft floor seal
incorrectly installed, binding or

damaged

Specifications).
CHECK the steering column
and steering column lower
shaft are free from
interference from the engine
harness, sound proofing and
floor covering
Correctly INSTALL/ALIGN as
necessary
INSTALL a new upper or lower
steering column as necessary.
Correctly INSTALL and
INSTALL new lower shaft as
necessary.
Lower Shaft (211-04 Steering
Column, Removal and
Installation).
INSTALL a new tie-rod end as
Binding or damaged steering gear tie-
rod(s)
necessary.
REFER to: Tie Rod End (21103 Steering Linkage, Removal
and Installation).
Loose, damaged or worn front
Low power steering fluid
Damaged Front End Accessory Drive
(FEAD) belt tensioner
Power steering hose or fluid cooler

Excessive steering efforts
restriction
required during low

speed/rapid manoeuvring
and/or during parking
manoeuvres
Fluid aeration
Steering transducer not closed - no feed
voltage or cable fault
NOTE: REFER to the power steering pressure

check in this section.
Power steering fluid delivery pressure or
flow too low

Internal steering gear leakage
Steering operation is very
heavy when VEHICLE IS

IN MOTION AT LOW
SPEED, but when
stationary manoeuvring
is NORMAL
Steering transducer open early
Speedometer signal error
Steering transducer not open, (no
power steering fluid flow)

Speedometer signal error
Steering operation is very
light when VEHICLE IN

MOTION AT HIGHER
SPEED, but when
stationary manoeuvring
is NORMAL
Power steering fluid low pressure
pipe/hose restricted flow

as necessary.
Specifications).
CHECK and RECTIFY any fluid
leakage.
REFER to: Steering System
(211-00 Steering System General Information,
Fill to correct level
INSTALL a new FEAD belt
tensioner.
REFER to: Accessory Drive
Belt Tensioner - Vehicles
Without: Supercharger (30305 Accessory Drive, Removal
and Installation).
CHECK hoses and cooler for
restriction/damage and
necessary.
REFER to: Power Steering
Fluid Cooler - Vehicles
Without: Supercharger (21102 Power Steering, Removal
and Installation).
BLEED the system.
System Bleeding (211-00
Steering System - General
Information, General
Procedures).
Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and test steering
transducer circuit
INSTALL a new power
steering pump or steering
gear as necessary.
Pump - Vehicles Without:
Supercharger (211-02 Power
Steering, Removal and
Installation) /
Steering Gear (211-02 Power
Installation).
transducer circuit
Check for vehicle speed
related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index
transducer circuit
relevant DTC Index
CHECK for kinking or
blockage of pipe/hose
Ensure CORRECT
INSTALLATION and INSTALL a
new power steering fluid low
pressure pipe/hose as
necessary
INSTALL a new reservoir,
refill with fluid and bleed the

system.
Fluid reservoir filter blocked
Lower steering column interference
Incorrect steering geometry
Fluid Reservoir - Vehicles

Without: Supercharger (21102 Power Steering, Removal
and Installation) /
Power Steering System
Bleeding (211-00 Steering
System - General
Information, General
Procedures).
CHECK the steering column is
free from interference from
the engine harness, sound
proofing or the floor covering
reference.
CHECK the front wheel
alignment.
Specifications).
NOTE: Refer to the power steering
pressure check in this section
Steering operation is
If the power steering system
heavy in one direction

Faulty rotary valve/seal
Tire fouling on the wheel arch liner or
Damaged steering gear cylinder feed
pipe
pressure is low but the power

steering pump maximum
output pressure is correct
INSTALL a new steering gear.
CHECK for correct installation
or damage to wheel arch liner
and suspension components.
Correctly INSTALL and
necessary
CHECK tire for correct size,
type and pressure
necessary
CHECK and RECTIFY any fluid
leaks. Refer to the fluid
leakage symptom charts in
this section
Fill power steering system to
correct level
If the power steering system
Faulty rotary valve/seal
pressure is low but the power

steering pump maximum
output pressure is correct,
INSTALL a new steering gear.
INSTALL a new power
NOTE: Refer to the power steering pressure

check in this section
Power steering fluid delivery pressure or
flow too low
steering pump or steering

gear as necessary.
Installation) /
Internal steering gear leakage
Fluid loss at the power steering pump
shaft seal
Steering column universal joints binding
or stiff
Steering operation is
heavy in both directions
Seized front ball joints
Seized or worn steering gear
Lower steering column interference
Incorrect speedometer signal
Steering operation varies
Steering transducer circuit fault
from heavy to light when

driving at constant speed
Steering column universal joint binding
or stiff
Uncharacteristic
effort/speed relationship
Steering transducer circuit fault
Incorrect tire pressure, size or type
Excessive kick-back
through steering wheel

NOTE: Inner ball joint wear is rare. The
steering gear installed to all Jaguar vehicles
have a spring loaded pinion to ensure the
correct level of engagement between the rack
and pinion. This play is optimized with the
steering gear in the central position and should
not be confused with inner ball joint wear.
Steering Gear (211-02 Power

Installation).
INSTALL a new power
steering pump as necessary.
Installation).
necessary.
REFER to: Wheel Knuckle
REFER to: (204-01 Front
Suspension)
Upper Arm LH (Removal
and Installation),
Upper Arm RH (Removal
and Installation).
INSTALL new steering gear as
necessary.
CHECK the steering column is
free from interference from
the engine harness, sound
proofing and floor covering
relevant DTC Index
transducer circuit
transducer circuit
CHECK/ADJUST the tire
pressure and INSTALL correct
tire as necessary.
Specifications) /
Wheel and Tire (204-04
Wheels and Tires, Removal
and Installation).
INSTALL new steering gear
and tie-rod ends as

necessary.
Check for vertical motion in the inner ball joint

with the steering gear in the central position.
Tie Rod End (211-03 Steering

Linkage, Removal and
Installation).
Badly worn steering gear/linkage

Loose or worn front suspension
components/bushings
Column will not adjust

Column will not move to
Electrical/electronic failure
memory position
Motor locked/jammed
Column easy entry/exit
does not function
Electrical/electronic failure

as necessary.
Specifications).
CHECK column adjust switch
datalogger signal using the
diagnostic system
CHECK fuses/relays
Check instrument cluster for
column movement/memory
related DTCs and refer to DTC
Index.
REFER to: Instrument Cluster
(413-01 Instrument Cluster,
If DTCs B1C3314, B1C3514
are stored, and the column
inches when the switch is
activated and there is no
memory recall function, there
will be an existing fault with
the circuit, if the column
function is OK the fault is
intermittent
are stored, these should be
ignored in this case
CHECK condition of wiring and
connectors
CHECK column calibration.
The BAR code information is
located in the right hand
luggage compartment floor
area below the carpet
CHECK seat control memory
module
CHECK to see if mechanism
has reached hard end stops
Free mechanism
Replace motor with
appropriate service kit
Turn column adjust switch to
AUTO position, check that
'Column Adjust AUTO' text is
displayed in the instrument
cluster message center
CHECK column adjust switch
datalogger signal using the
diagnostic system
CHECK fuses/relays
Check instrument cluster for
column movement/memory
related DTCs and refer to DTC
Index.
REFER to: Instrument Cluster
(413-01 Instrument Cluster,
are stored, and the column
inches when the switch is
activated and there is no
memory recall function, there
will be an existing fault with
the circuit, if the column
function is OK the fault is
intermittent
When driver memory
recall requested from

driver switch pack Column and exterior
mirrors DO NOT move to
memory position - Driver
seat DOES move to
memory position
When passenger memory
recall requested from
passenger switch pack Column, exterior mirrors
and passenger seat ALL
move to memory position
Driver seat has passenger seat module
installed
Passenger seat has driver seat module
installed
are stored, these should be

ignored in this case
CHECK condition of wiring and
connectors
CHECK column calibration.
The BAR code information is
located in the right hand
luggage compartment floor
area below the carpet
CHECK seat control memory
DTC Index
Install the correct module to
the driver seat
Install the correct module to
the passenger seat
Internal lock failure

column lock circuit
Install a new steering column
lock as necessary
Electromechanical
Steering column lock will

not operate
Noise
Symptom
Possible Causes
Action
CHECK for leaks and RECTIFY as necessary.
level
NOTE: Look for small air bubbles
visible in the fluid, air may also get
trapped in the hydraulic system
Air in hydraulic system
Continuous noise
Power steering pipe/hose in
contact with the vehicle

body
Power steering pipe/hose
restricted or twisted
Power steering pump
mounting bolts loose

Noise gets worse
when system is
loaded
level
Aerated fluid
Low power steering pump
pressure
FEAD belt incorrectly

Front End Accessory
Drive (FEAD) belt
tensioned or glazed
For further information refer to the symptom

charts for leakage in this section. FILL power
steering fluid reservoir to correct level
BLEED the power steering system.
REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding
(211-00 Steering System - General
Information, General Procedures).
CHECK and REPOSITION, or INSTALL new IF
damaged/deformed, power steering pipe/hose

CHECK and CLEAR restriction to pipe/hose
REPOSITION power steering pipe/hose.
INSTALL new pipe/hose IF permanently

damaged/deformed
TIGHTEN the power steering pump mounting
bolts to the correct torque.
REFER to: Specifications (211-02 Power
Steering, Specifications).
CHECK and FILL power steering fluid reservoir
to correct level
Bleed the power steering system.
REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding
(211-00 Steering System - General
CHECK power steering pump pressure. If the
pump pressure is low, INSTALL a new power
steering pump.
REFER to: Power Steering Pump - Vehicles
Without: Supercharger (211-02 Power
Steering, Removal and Installation).
CHECK FEAD belt tension
CHECK FEAD belt condition and INSTALL a
new belt as necessary.

REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt - Vehicles
squeal
Chirp noise from the
steering pump when

a load is applied
Scrape/grind noise
from behind steering

wheel while steering
Click
Squeak
Knock
Rattle
Noise while adjusting
Without: Supercharger (303-05 Accessory

Drive, Removal and Installation).
CHECK FEAD belt tension
CHECK FEAD belt condition and INSTALL a
new belt as necessary.
Loose or worn FEAD belt
REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt - Vehicles
Without: Supercharger (303-05 Accessory
Steering column shroud foul
Correctly INSTALL the steering column shroud
condition or clockspring
to eliminate the foul condition
INSTALL a new clockspring as necessary.
REFER to: Clockspring (211-04 Steering
Column, Removal and Installation).
Foreign objects
REMOVE foreign objects from between
steering column shroud and steering
wheel/steering column rotating components
Clockspring or steering
Correctly INSTALL and INSTALL new
column multifunction switch
LH
Column, Removal and Installation) /
Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH
(211-05 Steering Column Switches, Removal
and Installation).
Loose universal joint pinch
INSTALL a new universal joint pinch bolt and
bolt
TIGHTEN to correct specification.
REFER to: Specifications (211-04 Steering
Column, Specifications).
Steering column shroud
APPLY Krytox spray to steering column shroud
joints
joints
Clockspring
INSTALL new clockspring as necessary.
Column, Removal and Installation).
Loose fixings (universal
TIGHTEN fixings to correct specification.
joint pinch bolt and steering
column fixings)
Foreign objects
REMOVE foreign objects from between
steering column shroud and steering
wheel/steering column rotating components
Loose fixings
TIGHTEN steering column fixings to correct
specification.
Electric motor/solenoid
NOTE: Before carrying out repairs/replacement,
assess column adjustment noise levels against other
vehicles of the same model
column
Install new components as necessary
Motor spindle/lead screw
Lubricate lead screw
Vibration
Symptom
Wheel Fight (Kick Back) -
condition where roughness is

felt in the steering wheel by the
driver when the vehicle is driven
over rough surfaces
Possible Causes
Loose or worn steering
components/bushings
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust

the steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this
instruction will invalidate the steering gear
warranty.
TIGHTEN and INSTALL new steering
Loose or worn suspension
components/bushings
Nibble (Shimmy) - condition
where oscillation of the steering

wheel occurs (not vertical which
is Shake). This is driven by road
wheel imbalance
Action
Road wheel and tire
condition
components/bushings as necessary
suspension components/bushings as
necessary
CHECK for wheel and tire damage.
necessary.
REFER to: Wheel and Tire (204-04
Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
CHECK for tire uniformity. INSTALL
new tire(s) as necessary
Road wheel imbalance

Shake - condition where vertical
vibration of the steering

wheel/column occurs (not
oscillation which is Nibble)
NOTE: Vibration smooths out

after several miles of driving
Road wheel imbalance
due to tire flat-spotting
CHECK and ADJUST road wheel
balance as necessary
ENSURE tires installed are to Jaguar
specification. INSTALL new tires as

necessary
CHECK and ADJUST tire pressures to
correct specification
Component Tests
Steering Linkage Inspection and Backlash (Free play) Check
CAUTION: Steering gear boots must be handled carefully to avoid damage. Use new clamps when installing
steering gear boots.
Inspect the boots for cuts, deterioration, twisting or distortion. Check the steering gear boots to make sure they are
tight. Install new boots or clamps as necessary.
NOTE: The following steps must be carried out with assistance.
1.
With the wheels in the straight ahead position, gently turn the steering wheel to the left and the right to check
for free play.
2.
Free play should be between 0 and 6 mm (0 and 0.24 in) at the steering wheel rim. If the free play exceeds this
limit, either the ball joints are worn, the lower steering column joints are worn or the backlash of the steering
gear is excessive.
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this instruction will invalidate the
steering gear warranty.
3.
The backlash of the steering gear cannot be adjusted, install a new steering gear if excessive backlash is
diagnosed.
4.
Grasp the steering wheel firmly and move it up and down and to the left and right without turning the wheel to
check for column bearing wear, steering wheel or steering column.
Power Steering Fluid Condition Check

1.
Run the engine for 2 minutes.
2.
Check the power steering fluid system level.
3.
Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances should be dark reddish, not brown or
black.
4.
Using a suitable clean syringe extract a suitable amount of fluid from the reservoir.
5.
Allow the fluid to drip onto a facial tissue and examine the stain.
6.
If evidence of solid material is found, the power steering fluid system should be drained for further inspection.
7.
If fluid contamination or steering component failure is confirmed by the sediment in the power steering fluid
system, REFER to Steering Fault Diagnosis by Symptom Charts in this section.
www.JagDocs.com
Power Steering Pressure Test

Test Equipment
Item
Part Number
Description
1
211-011
Pressure Gauge Hose
2
211-011-08
Pump Return Hose
3
211-011-07
Pump Return Hose Connector
4
211-011-03/2
Test Equipment to High Pressure Hose Adaptor
5
211-011-03/1
Pump High Pressure Outlet to Hose Adaptor
6
211-011-02
Pump Adaptor to Control Valve Hose
7
211-011-01
Control Valve
8
211-011
Pressure Gauge
9
'O' Ring Seal
The measurement of the maximum system pressure, (which is governed by the pressure relief valve) is achieved by
inserting the Service Tool (pressure gauge and adaptors) into the fluid circuit of the power steering system. Run the
engine at idle speed, turn the steering from lock to lock and read the maximum pressure recorded on the gauge.
Installing Test Equipment

To install the pressure test equipment:
Place a suitable drain tray below the power steering pump.
Install a hose clamp on the reservoir to pump hose prior to disconnecting any hoses, to avoid unnecessary loss
of fluid.
Disconnect the hose from the power steering pump high pressure outlet.
Install the pump outlet to hose adaptor (5). Do not omit the 'O' ring seal (9).
Connect the power steering pump adaptor to control valve hose (6) of the test equipment.
Install the adaptor (4) in the high pressure hose previously removed from the power steering pump outlet.
Connect the connector (3) of the test equipment hose (2) to the adaptor (4).
Remove the hose clamp from the reservoir hose.
Start the engine to check the system pressure.
With the control valve (7) OPEN and the engine idling, the following system pressures may be checked:
During turning when static (dry parking pressure).
When the steering is held on full lock (maximum system pressure or pressure relief).
With the steering at rest (idle pressure or back pressure).
CAUTIONS:
To avoid excessive heating of the power steering pump when CHECKING the pressure, do not close the valve for
more than 5 seconds maximum.
When CHECKING the pump pressure DO NOT drive the vehicle with the test equipment installed.
With the control valve (7) CLOSED the power steering pump maximum output pressure can be checked.
Removing Test Equipment

To remove the test equipment:
Install a hose clamp on the reservoir to power steering pump hose.
Removing the test equipment is a reversal of the installation instructions.

Install a new 'O' ring seal (9) to the power steering pump high pressure outlet to hose connection.
Install the original hose to the power steering pump.
Remove the clamp from the reservoir to the power steering pump hose.
Top-up the reservoir fluid.
Bleed the power steering system.
REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding (211-00 Steering System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Description of Terms
General Steering System Noises
Boom
Rhythmic sound like a drum roll or distant thunder. May cause pressure on the ear drum.
Buzz
Low-pitched sound, like a bee. Usually associated with vibrations.
Chatter
Rapidly repeating metallic sound.
Chuckle
Rapid noise that sounds like a stick against the spokes of a spinning bicycle wheel.
Chirp
High pitched rapidly repeating sound, like chirping birds.
Click
Light sound, like a ball point pen being clicked.
Click/Thump
Heavy metal-to-metal sound, like a hammer striking steel.
Grind
Abrasive sound, like a grinding wheel or sandpaper rubbing against wood.
Groan/Moan
Continuous, low-pitched humming sound.
Groan/Howl
Low, guttural sound, like an angry dog.
Hiss
Continuous sound like air escaping from a tire valve.
Hum
Continuous sound of varying frequencies, like a wire humming in the wind.
Knock
Heavy, loud repeating sound like a knock on a door.
Ping
Similar to knock, except at higher frequency.
Rattle
A sound suggesting looseness, such as marbles rolling around in a can.
Roar
Deep, long, prolonged sound like an animal, or winds and ocean waves.
Rumble
Low, heavy continuous sound like that made by wagons or thunder.
Scrape
Grating noise like one hard plastic part rubbing against another.
Squeak
High-pitched sound like rubbing a clean window.
Squeal
Continuous, high-pitched sound like running finger nails across a chalkboard.
Tap
Light, hammering sound like tapping pencil on edge of table. May be rhythmic or intermittent.
Whirr/Whine
High-pitched buzzing sound, like an electric motor or drill.
Whistle
Sharp, shrill sound, like wind passing a small opening.
Specific Steering System Noise Types

Belt Squeal
Belt squeal is a high frequency air-borne noise generated by slippage of the ribbed Vee belt on the power steering pump
pulley. Squeal increases with system loading and at full lock.
Clonk
Clonk is a structure-borne noise heard as a loose-sounding rattle or vibration coming from the steering column. Clonk
can be identified by driving and turning over cobblestones, rough roads, or high frequency bumps such as 25-50 mm
tall tar strips. Clonk requires a tie-rod load impact.
Column Knock
Column knock is a loose-sounding rattle or vibration generated by the steering column shaft contacting other portions
of the column assembly. The noise is both audible and tactile. Column knock is generated by driving over cobblestones
or rough pavement. It is not necessary to turn the steering wheel to create this noise.
Column Rattle
Column rattle is a metallic sounding noise created when applying a highly impulsive force to the steering wheel. Column
rattle is often used to combine the more general group of column noises including clonk and column knock. Column
rattle noises can be caused by clonk, knock, loose column components, bonus parts etc. A series of parked, straight-line
driving, and cornering tests should be carried out to isolate the source/sources.
Grinding/Scrape
Grinding is a low frequency noise in the column when the steering wheel is turned. It is generally caused by
interference between moving components such as the steering wheel to steering column shroud.
Grunt (Squawk/Whoop)
Grunt is a 'honking' sound elicited when coming off one of the steering stops. Grunt is generally excited during parking
manoeuvres with a low to medium speed steering input.
Hiss (Swish)
Hiss or Valve Hiss is a high-frequency sound coming from the steering gear when the system is loaded. It is a rushing
or 'swish' noise that doesn't change frequency with RPM. Hiss is the general noise generated by the flow of hydraulic
fluid through restrictions in the steering system. Restrictions include the rotary steering valve, power steering tubes,
connectors, tuning orifices, etc. Hiss can be air-borne and structure-borne, but the structure-borne path through the
steering intermediate shaft is usually dominant.
Moan (Groan)
Moan is the general structure-borne noise of the steering system. Moan is primarily transmitted to the driver via the
body structure through the pump mount, engine mounts, power steering lines and power steering brackets. On some
vehicles, moan is a loud humming noise, often present when the wheel is turned and the system is loaded. It may
change frequency with engine RPM and if the system is loaded or unloaded.
Steering Gear Knock (Steering Gear Slap)
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this instruction will invalidate the
steering gear warranty.
Steering gear knock is a rattle sound and steering wheel vibration caused by separation of the steering gear and pinion
while driving over bumps. It is a structure-borne noise transmitted through the intermediate shaft and column. Steering
gear knock can also be heard as a 'thump' or impact noise that occurs with the vehicle stationary when the steering
wheel is released from a loaded position and allowed to return to rest. Noise occurs with the engine on or off.
Rattles
Rattles are noises caused by knocking or hitting of components in the steering system. Steering rattles can occur in the
engine compartment, the suspension, or the passenger compartment. Rattles can be caused by loose components,
movable and flexible components, and improper clearances.
Squeaks/Scrapes
Squeaks/Scrapes are noises due to friction or component rubbing anywhere in the steering system. Squeaks/Scrapes
have appeared in steering linkages and joints, in column components and in column and steering wheel trim.
Weep
Weep is an air-borne noise, occasionally generated when turning the steering across lock at a constant rate. When
present on a vehicle the noise, once initiated can often be maintained across a large proportion of the available steering
movement.
Whistle
Whistle is similar to hiss but is louder and of a higher frequency. It is also more of a pure tone noise than hiss. Whistle
is air-borne and is generated by a high flow rate of hydraulic fluid through a small restriction.
Zip
Zip noise is the air-borne noise generated by power steering pump cavitation when power steering fluid does not flow
freely through the suction hose from the reservoir to the pump. Zip primarily occurs during cold weather at start-up.
Steering System Vibrations and Harshness

Buzz
Buzz is a tactile rotary vibration felt in the steering wheel when steering inputs are slow. Buzz can also be called a
grinding feel and it is closely related to grunt and is caused by high system gain with low damping. Buzz is generally
excited during parking manoeuvres with low to medium speed steering input.
Buzz (Electrical)
A different steering buzz can be caused by pulse width modulated (PWM) electric actuators used in variable assist
steering systems. This buzz is felt by turning the ignition key to run without starting the engine and holding onto the
steering wheel. In extreme cases, the buzz can be felt with the engine running also.
Column/Steering Wheel Shake

Column shake is a low frequency vertical vibration excited by primary engine vibrations.
Nibble (Shimmy)
Steering nibble is a rotary oscillation or vibration of the steering wheel, which can be excited at a specific vehicle speed.
Nibble is driven by wheel and tire imbalance exciting a suspension recession mode, which then translates into steering
gear travel and finally steering wheel nibble.
Shudder (Judder)
Shudder is a low frequency oscillation of the entire steering system (tire, wheels, steering gear and linkage, etc.) when
the vehicle is steered during static-park or at low speeds. Shudder is very dependent on road surface.
Torque/Velocity Variation (Phasing/Effort Cycling)

Steering wheel torque variation occurring twice in one revolution is normally as a result of problems with the lower
steering column (intermediate shaft), but foul conditions generally result in either constant stiffness or single point
stiffness. Depending upon the orientation of the joints, the steering can feel asymmetric (torque falling off in one
direction and rising in the other) or else it can simply have pronounced peaks and troughs as the steering moves from
lock to lock.
Wheel Fight (Kick Back)

Wheel fight is excess feedback of sudden road forces through the steering system and back to the driver. It is evaluated
at all vehicle speeds over cobblestones, rough roads, and potholes. The tires, wheels, and suspension generate forces
into the steering systems. Steering friction, hydraulic damping, hydraulic compliance, mechanical compliance, steering
ratio, and assist gain all affect how much is transmitted to the driver.
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System

Bleeding
General Procedures
1.
Clean power steering fluid reservoir around the filler cap and
fluid indicator.
Check the power steering fluid, if aerated, wait until fluid
is free from bubbles then top-up reservoir to UPPER level
mark with recommended fluid.
2.
CAUTION: Fluid must always be present in

the reservoir during bleeding.
Remove the filler cap and fill to the MAX level
mark.
Install the reservoir filler cap.
3.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 seconds, stop the
engine.
Check the power steering fluid, if aerated, wait until fluid
is free from bubbles then top-up reservoir to UPPER level
mark with recommended fluid.
4.
CAUTION: Do not hold steering on full lock for longer than

10 seconds.
Start the engine and turn steering fully lock to lock, stop the
engine.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
5.
Start and run the engine for 2 minutes, turn the steering fully
lock to lock.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.

Filling
General Procedures
Draining
1.
2.

stands.
3.
and Installation).
4.
Using a syringe, remove the PAS fluid from the reservoir.
5.
CAUTIONS:

Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
Filling
1.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is clean, free

of foreign material and lubricant.
Torque: 20 Nm
2.

Fill the power steering reservoir.
3.
Install the vacuum hand pump to the power steering fluid

reservoir.
4.
NOTE: Apply the maximum vacuum possible on the reservoir for

1 minute.
Apply a vacuum to the power steering fluid reservoir.
5.
Remove the vacuum hand pump from the power steering fluid
reservoir.
6.

7.
Run the engine for 30 seconds.
Turn the steering fully lock-to-lock, stop the engine.
8.

reservoir.
9.

1 minute.
10.
reservoir.
11.

12.

13.

reservoir.
14.

1 minute.
15.
reservoir.
16.

17.
18.
Install the power steering fluid reservoir cap.
19.
and Installation).

Flushing
General Procedures
NOTE: If heavy steering or contamination within the power steering system is found, it is necessary to carry out the
system flush procedure as detailed below. If any components have been replaced in the power steering system the
procedure below must be carried out in full.
1.
Remove the power steering fluid reservoir cap.
2.
Using a suitable syringe, remove the power steering fluid from

the power steering fluid reservoir.
3.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping

fluids.
Detach the power steering fluid reservoir.
Detach but do not remove the power
steering fluid reservoir.
Release the power steering fluid return
hose from the power steering fluid
reservoir.
If a quick release coupling is fitted to the
power steering return hose, release the
power steering fluid return hose from the
coupling by removing the clip.
4.

fluids.
NOTE: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use
new blanking caps.
Using a suitable blanking cap, cap the power
steering reservoir return pipe.
5.

fluids.
NOTE: Make sure the extended pipe is not kinked
or twisted and is correctly secured with hose clips.
Attach a suitable pipe to the power steering return
hose to allow the fluid to drain.
6.
NOTE: The suitable funnel should have the a

capacity of 4 litres and O-ring seal
NOTE: The suitable funnel must be tightly sealed
to the power steering fluid reservoir to avoid fluid
leakage.
Install a suitable funnel onto the power steering
fluid reservoir.
7.

Raise and support the vehicle with the wheels just clear of the
ground.
8.
CAUTIONS:
Steps 8 and 9 must be carried out within 2 - 3 seconds of

each other. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the power steering system.

Using the suitable funnel, top up the power steering system with
the specified fluid. Make sure the fluid level is maintained at two
thirds full in the funnel.
9.
CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the power steering fluid level in

the power steering fluid reservoir to fall below the
minimum power steering fluid level. Failure to
power steering system.
Make sure the engine is switched off as soon

as the full 4 litres of power steering fluid has
entered the power steering fluid reservoir.
Flush the power steering system.
Start the engine
With assistance turn the steering slowly
lock to lock 3 times at approximately 1
revolution every 5 seconds.
Continue to flush the power steering
system until 4 litres of power steering fluid
has been added to the power steering
reservoir. This should take approximately
30 seconds.
10.

fluids.
Remove the suitable funnel.
11.

fluids.
Remove the suitable pipe to the power steering
return hose.
12.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

If a quick release coupling is fitted to the power steering return
hose, connect the power steering fluid return hose to the
coupling by installing the clip.
13.
Install a new power steering fluid reservoir. For additional

information, refer to: (211-02)
Power Steering Torque Specifications
Description
Power steering fluid cooler retaining bolts
Power steering fluid reservoir retaining bolts
Power steering pipe connection to steering gear retaining bolt
Steering gear retaining bolts
Steering column lower joint retaining bolt
Power steering pump pulley retaining bolts
air intake pipe retaining bolts
Power steering pump oil supply line bolt
Power steering pump retaining bolts
Thermostat housing retaining bolt
Nm
10
10
15
100
35
25
10
25
25
25
lb-ft
7
7
11
74
26
18
7
18
18
18
lb-in
-
Power Steering - Power Steering

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Tie-rod
Servotronic valve
Power steering pump
Power steering fluid reservoir
Steering gear
Power steering fluid cooler and hoses
INTRODUCTION
The power steering system comprises a ZF manufactured rack and pinion Servotronic 2 steering gear, a power steering
pump, a fluid reservoir, a fluid cooler and fluid hoses. The steering gear is an end take-off rack and pinion power assisted
unit with the addition of road speed proportional ZF Servotronic 2 assistance.
The steering rack is connected to the front wheel knuckles by adjustable tie-rods. The tie-rods allow for adjustment to
centralize the steering wheel and also adjust the toe setting of the front wheel geometry.
The steering gear has a variable ratio rack. This provides conventional response when the steering is in the center, straight
ahead position, but provides more direct and faster steering as the turning angle increases. The variable ratio provides
precise and rapid steering response at high speeds and provides optimized steering of the vehicle when maneuvering into
parking spaces, turning in tight areas and when cornering in extreme conditions.
Fluid is supplied to the steering gear by a fixed displacement vane pump, belt driven from the crankshaft pulley. The pump is
mounted on the LH (left-hand) side of the engine, above the A/C (air conditioning)compressor.
A fluid reservoir is positioned at the front LH side of the engine compartment, forward of the front suspension housing. A
fluid cooler is located in front of the engine cooling radiator.
Servotronic 2 adds electronic control and speed sensitive steering to the steering gear. The Servotronic 2 feature provides
easy and comfortable steering operation when parking, improved 'road feel' at increased road speeds and adds an
integrated, positive center feel feature which optimizes steering wheel torque during high speed driving.
The Servotronic 2 system is controlled by software which is incorporated into the instrument cluster. The software responds
to road speed signals and controls the power assistance via a transducer valve located on the steering gear valve housing.
STEERING GEAR
Item
Part Number
Description
Input shaft
Valve unit
Servotronic valve
Pressure/Return pipes
Tie-rod
Locknut
Tie-rod end
Locknut
Steering gear boots
10
Mounting bolts and washers
11
Pinion housing
12
Pressure/Return connection from/to pump
The steering gear is located at the rear of the engine and attached to the front sub-frame. The gear is secured to the subframe with three bolts and washers which screw into threaded tubes which are integral with the sub-frame.
The steering gear comprises an aluminum, cast, valve housing which contains the hydraulic valve unit and Servotronic valve.
The mechanical steering rack and the hydraulic actuator are located in a steel cylinder which is attached to the cast valve
housing.
The steering gear uses a rack with an integrated piston which is guided on plain bearings within the cylinder and the valve
housing. The pinion, which is attached to the valve unit, runs in bearings and meshes with the rack teeth. The rack is
pressed against the pinion by a spring loaded yoke which ensures that the teeth mesh with the minimum of play. The pinion
is connected to the valve unit via a torsion bar. The rotary motion of the steering wheel is converted into linear movement of
the rack by the rack and pinion mechanism and is initiated by the valve unit. This movement is transferred into movement of
the road wheels by adjustable tie-rods.
The teeth angles at the center of the rack vary from those at the end sections. It is this variation in teeth angles which
provides the variable ratio.
The piston of the hydraulic actuator is located on the rack bar. Each side of the piston is connected to fluid pressure or fluid
return via external metal pipes which are connected to the valve unit.
Each end of the rack bar has a threaded hole which provides for the fitment of the tie-rod. The external ends of the gear are
sealed with boots which prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The tie-rod has a long threaded area which allows for the
fitment of the tie-rod end. The thread allows for the adjustment of the steering toe. When the correct toe setting is achieved,
a locknut is tightened against the tie-rod end preventing inadvertent movement.
The gear has a central hole machined along most of its length. The hole allows the air in the boots to be balanced when the
steering is turned. The boots are serviceable items and are retained on the gear housing and the tie-rod with clips.
Valve Unit
Item
Part Number
Description
Pressure/return to/from steering gear
Return fluid chamber
Cut-off valve
Radial groove
Servotronic transducer valve
Fluid feed radial groove
Radial groove
Orifice
Balls
10
Compression spring
11
Torsion bar
12
Valve rotor
13
Reaction piston
14
Reaction chamber
15
Centering piece
16
Return to reservoir
17
Pressure supply from pump
18
Pinion
19
Steering gear rack bar
20
Valve sleeve
The valve unit is an integral part of the steering gear. The principle function of the valve unit is to provide power assistance
(i.e. when parking) to optimize the effort required to turn the steering wheel.
The pinion housing of the valve is an integral part of the main steering gear casting. The pinion housing has four machined
ports which provide connections for pressure feed from the power steering pump, return fluid to the reservoir and pressure
feeds to each side of the cylinder piston.
The valve unit comprises an outer sleeve, an input shaft, a torsion bar and a pinion shaft. The valve unit is co-axial with the
pinion shaft which is connected to the steering column via the input shaft. The valve unit components are located in the
steering gear pinion housing which is sealed with a cap.
The outer sleeve is located in the main bore of the pinion housing. Three annular grooves are machined on its outer
diameter. PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene) rings are located between the grooves and seal against the bore of the pinion
housing. Holes are drilled radially in each annular groove through the wall of the sleeve. The bore of the outer sleeve is
machined to accept the input shaft. Six equally spaced slots are machined in the bore of the sleeve. The ends of the slots are
closed and do not continue to the end of the outer sleeve. The radial holes in the outer sleeve are drilled into each slot.
The input shaft has two machined flats at its outer end which allow for the attachment of the steering column intermediate
shaft yoke. The flats ensure that the intermediate shaft is fitted in the correct position. The inner end of the input shaft
forms a dog-tooth which mates with a slot in the pinion shaft. The fit of the dog-tooth in the slot allows a small amount of
relative rotation between the input shaft and the pinion shaft before the dog-tooth contacts the wall of the slot. This ensures
that, if the power assistance fails, the steering can be operated manually without over stressing the torsion bar. The central
portion of the input shaft has equally spaced longitudinal slots machined in its circumference. The slots are arranged
alternately around the input shaft.
The torsion bar is fitted inside the input shaft and is an interference fit in the pinion shaft. The torsion bar is connected to the
input shaft by a drive pin. The torsion bar is machined to a smaller diameter in its central section. The smaller diameter
allows the torsion bar to twist in response to torque applied from the steering wheel in relation to the grip of the tires on the
road surface.
The pinion shaft has machined teeth on its central diameter which mate with teeth on the steering gear rack. A slot,
machined in the upper end of the pinion shaft mates with the dog-tooth on the input shaft. The pinion shaft locates in the
pinion housing and rotates on ball and roller bearings.
Servotronic Valve
The Servotronic transducer valve is located in a port in the side of the steering gear valve housing. The valve is sealed in the
housing with an O-ring seal and is secured with two long screws into threaded holes in the housing. The Servotronic valve is
a transducer controlled valve which responds to control signals supplied from Servotronic software in the instrument cluster.
The Servotronic valve determines the hydraulic reaction at the steering gear rotary valve and controls the input torque
required to turn the steering wheel. The Servotronic system allows the steering to be turned with the optimum effort when
the vehicle is stationary or manoeuvered at slow speed. The hydraulic reaction changes proportional to the vehicle speed,
with the required steering effort increasing as the vehicle moves faster. At high speeds, the Servotronic system provides the
driver with a good feedback through the steering providing precise steering and improved stability.
The instrument cluster receives road speed signals from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module and calculates the correct
controlling signal for the Servotronic valve. The Servotronic software within the instrument cluster has a diagnostic capability
which allows a Jaguar approved diagnostic system to check the tune of the steering and retrieve fault codes relating to the
Servotronic valve. Two fault codes are stored relating to the valve for positive connection short to ground or battery and
negative connection short to ground or battery.
The Servotronic software within the instrument cluster also contains a number of steering maps which are selected via the
car configuration file depending on the vehicle model and tire fitment.
If a failure of the Servotronic valve or software occurs, the system will suspend Servotronic assistance and only a default
level of assistance will be available. Fault codes relating to the fault are stored in the instrument cluster. No warning lamps
are illuminated and the driver may be aware of the steering being 'heavier' than usual.
POWER STEERING PUMP
Item
Part Number
Pulley
Pump body
High pressure outlet port (to steering gear)
Low pressure suction port (from reservoir)
Description
The power steering pump is a positive displacement, vane type pump which supplies a constant fluid flow to the steering
gear valve unit. The power steering pump is driven by a Poly Vee belt from the crankshaft pulley.
The pump has an internal pressure relief valve and a flow control valve. The pressure relief valve limits the maximum
pressure supplied to the steering gear to 115 bar (1668 lbf/in2) 4 bar (58 lbf/in2). The flow control valve limits the
maximum flow to 8.5 l/min (2.25 US galls/min) 0.50 l/min (0.13 US galls/min) regardless of engine speed. The pump has
a displacement of 11 cm3/rev (0.67 in3/rev).
A shaft runs longitudinally through the pump. One end of the shaft is fitted with a drive pulley, which is secured by three
bolts. The opposite end of the shaft is closed by a cover. The shaft runs in bearings located in the body and oil seals at each
end of the shaft prevent leakage of hydraulic fluid. The pump contains ten vanes which rotate within a cam ring and are
driven by the shaft. As the vanes rotate, the cam ring causes the space between the vanes to increase. This causes a
depression between the vanes and fluid is drawn from the reservoir via the suction hose into the space between the vanes.
As the shaft rotates, the inlet port is closed to the vanes which have drawn in fluid, trapping the fluid between the vanes.
The cam ring causes the space between the vanes to reduce and consequentially compresses and pressurizes the hydraulic
fluid trapped between them.
Further rotation of the shaft moves the vanes to the outlet port. As the vanes pass the port plate the pressurized fluid passes
from the pump outlet port into the pressure hose to the steering gear.
The pressurized fluid is subject to control by the flow control and pressure relief valve. The flow control valve maintains a
constant flow of fluid supplied to the steering gear irrespective of engine speed variations. The pressure relief valve limits the
maximum pressure on the output side of the pump. A metering orifice is included in the discharge port of the pump. If the
pressure in the orifice reaches a predetermined level, a spring loaded ball in the center of the flow control valve is lifted from
its seat and allows pressurized fluid to recirculate within the pump.
The pressure relief valve will operate if the discharge from the pump is restricted, i.e. steering held on full lock. If the output
from the pump is blocked, all output is recirculated through the pump. In this condition, as no fresh fluid is drawn into the
pump from the reservoir, the fluid temperature inside the pump will increase rapidly. Consequentially, periods of operation of
the steering gear on full lock should be kept to a minimum to prevent overheating of the pump and the fluid within it.
RESERVOIR
Item
Part Number
Description
Mounting bolt (2 off)
Cap
Maximum oil level
Minimum oil level
Bracket
Feed to pump
Return from cooler
The reservoir is located in the engine compartment, forward of the LH suspension turret. A bracket attached to the reservoir
is bolted via two rubber mounts, to two brackets on the front body crossmember.
The reservoir is a plastic molding with an integral 100 micron, non-serviceable filter. Two molded ports at the base of the
reservoir provide for attachment of the fluid supply hose to the power steering pump and fluid return hose from the fluid
cooler.
The reservoir is fitted with a removable cap which is screwed into the reservoir body. The cap has a dip stick with different
diameters which denote the minimum and maximum fluid levels.
The reservoir has a fluid capacity to the maximum level of 400 cm3 (0.85 US pints).
HOSES AND FLUID COOLER

NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) installation shown, RHD installation similar.
Item
Part Number
Description
Cooling module (reference)
Clip
Power steering fluid cooler
Restrictor
Reservoir suction pipe
Reservoir return pipe
Steering gear pressure and return pipes
Power steering pump pressure pipe
Hoses
A mixture of metal pipes and rubber hoses are used in the power steering system. The high pressure pipe from the pump
and the return pipe to the cooler from the steering gear are attached to one mounting plate. The pipe connections are sealed
with O-ring seals and the plate is secured with a bolt screwed into the steering gear.
The pump high pressure pipe is attached to the pump with a special elbow, banjo bolt and washers.
A restrictor is installed in the return line from the fluid cooler to the reservoir. The restrictor optimizes power steering system
performance in terms of hydraulic NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) (water-hammer, grunt, shudder etc.) and vehicle
dynamics (steering feel/damping).
Fluid Cooler
The fluid cooler is located in the return circuit from the steering gear to the reservoir. The cooler is an aluminum fin and tube
design. Cool air entering the front of the vehicle passes over the cooler and flows through the fins. The fins act as heat
exchangers, conducting heat from the fluid as it passes through the tube.
The cooler is located near the top of the cooling pack.
The following hydraulic circuits show power steering operation and fluid flow for the steering in a straight ahead, neutral
position and when turning right. The circuit diagram for turning left is similar to that shown for turning right.
Power Steering in Neutral Position
NOTE: Circuit shows steering rotary valve in neutral position with the vehicle not moving.
Item
Part Number
Description
Return fluid control groove
Radial groove
Feed fluid control groove
Radial groove
Axial groove
Feed fluid control edge
Feed fluid radial groove
Return fluid control edge
10
Cut-off valve
11
Radial groove
12
13
-
Radial groove
15
Orifice
16
Balls
17
Compression spring
18
19
Torsion bar
20
Valve rotor
21
Reaction piston
22
Reaction chamber
23
Centering piece
24
Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
25
Power steering pump
26
Inner track rod
27
Pinion
28
Valve sleeve
29
Steering gear
30
Steering gear housing
31
Power assist cylinder - right
32
Piston
33
Power assist cylinder - left
14
When the engine is started, the power steering pump draws fluid from the reservoir down the low pressure suction line. The
fluid passes through the pump and is delivered at pressure, via a hose, to the steering rack valve unit.
The pressurized fluid flows through a connecting bore in the valve and, via the feed fluid radial groove and the transverse
bores in the valve sleeve, passes to the feed fluid control groove of the valve rotor.
In the neutral (straight ahead) position, the fluid passes over the open feed fluid control edges to all valve sleeve axial
grooves. The fluid then passes through return fluid control edges and the return fluid grooves of the valve rotor, back to the
reservoir passes via the fluid cooler.
Simultaneously, the radial grooves of the valve and their associated pipes provide a connection the left and right power assist
cylinders.
Power Steering in Right Turn Position
NOTE: Circuit shows steering rotary valve in right turn position, at high vehicle speed and with rapid steering corrections. The
Servotronic transducer valve is fully open and the maximum hydraulic reaction is limited by the cut-off valve.
Item
Part Number
Description
Return fluid control groove
Radial groove
Feed fluid control groove
Radial groove
Axial groove
Feed fluid control edge
Return fluid control edge
10
Cut-off valve
11
Radial groove
12
13
14
Radial groove
15
Orifice
16
Balls
17
Compression spring
18
19
Torsion bar
20
Valve rotor
21
Reaction piston
22
Reaction chamber
23
Centering piece
24
Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
25
Power steering pump
26
Inner track rod
27
Pinion
28
Valve sleeve
29
30
Steering gear
Steering gear housing
31
Power assist cylinder - right
32
Piston
33
Power assist cylinder - left
When the steering wheel is turned to the right, the steering rack and piston moves to the left in the piston bore. The valve
rotor is rotated to the right (clockwise) and pressurized fluid is directed over the further opened feed fluid control edges and
to the associated axial grooves, the radial groove and via an external pipe to the left power assist cylinder chamber. The
pressure applied to the piston from the left power assist cylinder chamber provides the hydraulic assistance.
An adaptable pressure build-up is achieved by the partially or fully closed feed fluid control edges restricting or preventing a
connection between the fluid pressure inlet and the other axial grooves connected to the radial groove.
Simultaneously, the fluid pressure outlet to the pressurized axial grooves are restricted or partially restricted by the closing
return fluid control edges. The fluid displaced by the piston from the right power assist cylinder chamber, flows through an
external pipe to the radial grooves. From there the fluid passes to the associated axial grooves and on to the return fluid
control grooves, via the further opened return fluid control edges.
The return flow of fluid to the reservoir passes via interconnecting bores which lead to the return fluid chamber. When the
steering wheel is turned to the left the operating sequence is as above but the pressure is applied to the opposite side of the
piston.
Servotronic Operation
The Servotronic software contains a number of steering maps which are selected via the car configuration file depending on
the vehicle mode and tire fitment.
If a failure of the Servotronic valve or software occurs, the system will suspend Servotronic assistance and only normal
power steering wheel be available. Fault codes relating to the fault are stored, but no warning lamps are illuminated and the
driver may be aware of the steering being 'heavier' than usual.
When the vehicle is manoeuver into and out of a parking space (or other similar manoeuver), the Servotronic software uses
road speed data from the ABS module to determine the vehicle speed, which in this case will be slow or stationary. The
Servotronic software analyses the signals and outputs an appropriate control current to the Servotronic transducer valve. The
Servotronic valve closes and prevents fluid flowing from the feed fluid radial groove to the reaction chamber. An orifice also
ensures that there is return pressure in the reaction chamber. This condition eliminates any 'reaction' ensuring that the
steering is very light to operate, reducing the effort required to turn the steering wheel.
As the vehicle is driven and the road speed increases, the Servotronic software analyses the road speed signals from the ABS
module and reduces the amount of control current supplied to the Servotronic valve which increases the reaction pressure.
This modifies the input torque applied through the steering wheel and provides the driver with an improved 'road feel'
allowing precise steering and directional stability.
Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid Cooler Vehicles Without:

Supercharger
Removal
1.

2.
3.
Refer to: Power Steering System Filling (211-00 Steering

4.
5.
6.
7.
Torque: 10 Nm
8.
9.
Torque: 10 Nm
10.
Installation
1.
www.JagDocs.com
Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid Cooler Vehicles With:

Supercharger
Removal
1.

2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Installation
1.
Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

Removal
1.

2.
3.
Refer to: Power Steering System Filling (211-00 Steering System General Information, General Procedures).
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.
Installation
1.
Power Steering - Power Steering Pump

Removal
1.

2.
3.

4.
Torque: 25 Nm
5.
NOTE: Do not loosen the bolts more than 2 turns.

Torque: 25 Nm
6.
7.
8.
9.
Torque: 10 Nm
10.
Torque: 25 Nm
11.
Torque: 25 Nm
12.
Torque: 25 Nm
13.
Torque: 10 Nm
14.
15.

16.
Installation
1.
Power Steering - Steering Gear

Removal
CAUTIONS:
Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the clockspring
and steering wheel switches may occur.
NOTE: Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead position.
1.

2.

stands.
3.
and Installation).
4.
5.
NOTE: RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.
6.
7.
CAUTION: Discard the bolt.

Torque: 35 Nm
8.
9.
CAUTIONS:


Torque: 15 Nm
10.
Torque: 100 Nm
Installation
1.
2.
Refer to: Power Steering System Bleeding (211-00 Steering

3.
Refer to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System General Information, General Procedures).
Power Steering - Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line

Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.

stands.
3.

4.
Torque: 11 Nm
5.
NOTE: Do not loosen the bolts more than 2 turns.

Torque: 25 Nm
6.
7.
8.
Lower the vehicle.

9.
Torque: 10 Nm
10.
11.
Torque: 10 Nm
12.
Torque: 25 Nm
13.
WARNING: Fluid loss is unavoidable, use

absorbent cloth or a container to collect the fluid.

NOTE: Discard the sealing washers.
Torque: 28 Nm
14.
Raise the vehicle.
Left-hand drive vehicles

15.
16.

Torque: 35 Nm
17.
Torque: 100 Nm
All vehicles
18.
19.
Torque: 63 Nm
CAUTION: Support the engine on a jack. The angle may

need to be adjusted during this procedure.
Support the engine with the lifting equipment.
20.
Torque: 48 Nm
21.

correct.
Using a suitable wooden block, support the
engine on the subframe.

Lower the transmission jack.
22.
Torque: 25 Nm
23.
Torque: 25 Nm
24.

NOTE: RHD shown, LHD is similar.
Installation
1.
Published: 03-Jun-2011
Power Steering - Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose

Removal
All vehicles
1.

stands.
2.

3.

4.
Right-hand drive vehicles

5.
Installation
1.
2.

Steering Linkage Torque Specifications
Item
Tie rod end ball-joint to wheel knuckle - nut*
Tie rod end - locking nut*
* New nuts/bolts must be installed.
Nm
75
55
lb-ft
55
40
lb-in
-
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage

REFER to: Steering System (211-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
Steering Linkage - Steering Gear Boot

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the tie-rod end. For additional information, refer to:

(211-03 Steering Linkage)
Tie Rod End (Removal and Installation),
Tie Rod End (Removal and Installation).
3.

Remove the locknut.
4.
NOTE: Clean the components general area prior to

dismantling.
Remove the steering gear boot.
Installation
1.
Install the steering gear boot.

2.

Install the locknut.
3.
Install the tie-rod end. For additional information, refer to:

(211-03 Steering Linkage)
Tie Rod End (Removal and Installation),
Tie Rod End (Removal and Installation).
4.

check and adjust the wheel alignment.
For additional information, refer to: Front Toe Adjustment (20400 Suspension System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Steering Linkage - Tie Rod End

Removal
1.

2.

Torque: 55 Nm
3.
CAUTION: This step is to allow correct tool alignment to

the tie rod end.
Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
(206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
4.
CAUTION: Make sure that the ball joint ball

does not rotate.
Torque: 133 Nm
5.

Installation
1.
2.
Refer to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00 Suspension System General Information, General Procedures).
Steering Column Torque Specifications
Item
Clock spring to steering column - bolt
Lower steering column, bearing-carrier to body - bolt
Lower steering column, bearing to bearing carrier - bolt
Lower steering column to steering gear - universal-joint pinch bolt*
Steering column to vehicle body - nuts
Steering column to lower steering column - universal-joint pinch bolt*
Steering wheel to steering column - bolt
* New nuts/bolts must be installed.
Nm
7
9
9
30
24
30
62
lb-ft
5
7
7
22
18
22
46
lb-in
62
80
80
-
Steering Column - Steering Column

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Steering wheel
Gear change paddle switch (if fitted)
Column adjust switch
Lower shroud
Rake adjustment housing
Reach adjustment housing
Column adjustment motor
Lower column - upper collapse shaft
Bulkhead bearing assembly
10
Lower column - lower collapse shaft
11
Electric steering column lock (all except NAS (North American specification)
12
Column mounting plate
13
Upper shroud
INTRODUCTION
The steering column comprises the upper column assembly, the lower column assembly and the steering wheel. The three
components are positively connected together to pass driver rotary input from the steering wheel to a linear output of the
steering gear.
The upper column assembly contains electrical adjustment for steering wheel reach and rake and also provides the location
for the ignition switch, the electric steering column lock mechanism and the steering angle sensor.
The steering column is attached to the in-vehicle crossbeam. Crash load absorption is provided by a 'peeling tube'
mechanism.
Column adjustment is provided by a single motor for both reach and rake adjustment. Operation of the column adjustment is
controlled by a four way joystick type switch located in the column lower shroud. Column adjustment is an integral part of
the driver position memory system and also incorporates an entry/exit mode to allow the driver additional room to enter and
exit the vehicle.
On all except NAS vehicles, an electric steering column lock is positioned on the column assembly. Where fitted, the electric
steering column lock is an integral function of the active anti-theft system.
Two plastic shrouds are fitted to the upper column assembly. The lower shroud is fitted with an energy absorbing foam pad
to minimize leg injury in the event of an accident.
The lower column assembly comprises two splined shafts connected by a universal joint in the center. The splines of the
upper shaft locate in a flexible coupling which in turn is located in the yoke on the lower shaft of the upper column assembly.
The splines allow the shaft to collapse in the event of an accident. The flexible coupling controls axial and torsional
movements and also assists with noise and vibration damping.
A bulkhead mounted bearing is located on the upper shaft and supports the lower column as it passes from the passenger
compartment to the engine compartment.
The splines on the lower shaft locate in a universal joint which in turn is connected to the steering gear input shaft. The
lower column assembly incorporates a crash collapse mechanism in the form of a 'tube-in-tube' design.
The steering wheel locates on a splined shaft in the upper column assembly and is secured with a bolt. The steering wheel
houses the driver's airbag and switches for the audio system, gear change (if fitted) and speed control. A clockspring is used
to connect to the vehicle harness.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
BJB (battery junction box) (175 A megafuse x 2)
Electric steering column lock (all except NAS vehicles)
High speed CAN connection to other systems
Rake adjustment solenoid and potentiometer
Reach adjustment solenoid and potentiometer
Steering column adjustment motor
10
Instrument cluster
11
Steering column adjustment switch

REFER to: Steering System (211-00, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com

Special Tool(s)
Clockspring locking tool
211-326
Driver air bag module remover

501-106
Removal
1.

2.
3.
Remove the instrument panel lower trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Lower
Trim Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and
Installation).
4.
Remove the steering column lower cowl.

If installed, disconnect the steering column
and foot pedal control switch electrical
connector.
5.
CAUTION: Do not turn the steering wheel

with the steering column lower shaft disconnected
as damage to the clockspring and steering wheel
switches may occur.
Check the road wheels are in the straight ahead
position, then remove the steering column
universal joint upper clamp bolt.
6.
7.
Release the steering column.

Loosen but do not remove the 4 nuts.
Remove the steering column upper cowl.

8.
9.
Disconnect the upper steering column wiring

harness connections.
Release the 3 wiring harness clips.
Disconnect the steering angle sensor electrical connector.

10.
Remove the steering column.

Remove the 4 nuts.
11.

Using the special tool, remove the driver air bag
module.
Rotate the steering wheel for access to
slots.
12.

Remove the steering wheel.
Loosen, but do not fully remove the bolt.
Release the steering wheel from the spline.
Remove the bolt.
Release the electrical harness.
13.
CAUTIONS:
Failing to install the clockspring special tool, may

result in damage to vehicle.
Do not dismantle the clockspring, it has no

serviceable parts and must be replaced as a complete
assembly.
Install the special tool to the clockspring.
14.
Remove the clockspring.

15.

Remove the steering angle sensor.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the reluctor ring.
Installation
1.
Install the steering angle sensor.

Install the reluctor ring.
Install the bolts and tighten to 3 Nm (2.2 lb.ft).
2.
Install the clockspring.

Install the Torx bolts and tighten to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
3.
4.

Install the steering wheel.
Check the clockspring is aligned.
Position the electrical harness.
Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb.ft).
5.
Install the driver air bag module.

6.
Install the steering column.

Install the 4 nuts, do not tighten at this time.
7.
Connect the steering angle sensor electrical connector.

Secure the 3 clips.
8.
Connect the steering harness electrical connectors

Secure the 3 clips.
9.
Install the steering column upper cowl.

Install the screws.
10.
Secure the steering column.

11.
Connect the steering column lower shaft to the steering column.

Align the shafts.
12.
Install the steering column lower cowl.

If installed, connect the steering column and foot pedal
switch electrical connector.
Secure in the clips.
Install the screws.
13.
Install the instrument panel lower trim panel.

Installation).
14.

15.

16.
Loosen the upper bolt from the steering column lower universal
joint.
Allow the steering column lower universal joint to settle.
17.
Connect WDS and configure the steering angle sensor.
Steering Column - Steering Column Lower Shaft

Removal
1.
Turn the steering wheel to the straight ahead position.
2.

3.
Remove the steering column lower universal joint

assembly for access.
Remove and discard the 2 bolts.
4.
Remove the instrument panel lower trim panel.

Installation).
5.
Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the steering

column.
Remove the bolt.
6.
Remove the steering column lower shaft.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Release the bearing carrier.
Discard the gasket.
7.

Remove the bearing carrier.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1.
Install the bearing carrier.

Install a new gasket.
2.
Install the steering column lower shaft.

3.
Connect the steering column lower shaft to the steering column.

Align the shafts.
4.
Raise the vehicle.
5.
Install the steering column lower universal joint assembly.

Align the shafts.
Tighten the new bolts to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
6.
Install the instrument panel lower trim panel.

Installation).
Steering Column - Steering Wheel

Special Tool(s)
211-326
Removal
1.

2.
3.
Remove the driver air bag module.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (50120B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
4.

Remove the bolt.
5.
CAUTIONS:
Failing to install the clockspring special tool, may

result in damage to vehicle.
Do not dismantle the clockspring, it has no

serviceable parts and must be replaced as a complete
assembly.
Do not allow the clockspring to unwind.

Install the special tool to the clockspring.
6.

Remove the upshift and downshift paddle switches.
Release the assembly.
Repeat the procedure and remove the
opposite hand.
7.
Remove the steering wheel switch assembly.

Disconnect the electrical connectors.
opposite hand.
8.
Remove the air bag housing.

9.
Remove the air bag ground cable.

Remove the Torx screw.
Installation
1.
Install the air bag ground cable.

Install the Torx screw.
2.
Install the air bag housing.

Secure the electrical harness.
Install the Torx bolts and tighten to 6 Nm
(4 lb.ft).
3.
Install the steering wheel switch assembly.

Connect and secure the electrical
connectors.
Repeat the above procedure on the
opposite hand.
4.
Install the upshift and downshift paddle switches.

connector.
Tighten to 3 Nm.
Repeat the above procedure on the
opposite hand.
5.
CAUTION: Make sure that the arrow on the

cassette is centered and pointing vertically prior to
the steering wheel installation. On removal of the
special tool keep the clockspring cables taught to
prevent the cassette moving from the set position.
Do not allow the clockspring to unwind. Failure to
component.
6.
CAUTION: Check the alignment arrow is still

in the vertical position with the wheels straight
ahead to make sure that the directional indicator
cancellation is central.
Install the steering wheel.
7.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (50120B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
8.

Steering Column - Clockspring

Special Tool(s)
211-326
Removal
WARNINGS:
Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when
handling an air bag module.
Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk
of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant
combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. Failure to follow this
Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment, which may result
in personal injury. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Air bag modules with discolored or damaged trim covers must be replaced, not repainted.
Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for
deformation. If damaged, replace the sensor whether or not the air bag is deployed.
To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before
repairing or replacing any air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components. To deplete the backup power
supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait one minute. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Make sure the wheels are in the straight-ahead position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
1.

Procedures).
2.

System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General
3.
For additional information, refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-
20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).

4.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that special tool 211-326 is

installed to the clockspring.

straight ahead position, failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Remove the bolt.
5.
CAUTION: Failing to install the special tool to

the clockspring may result in damage to the
vehicle.
6.
7.
TORQUE: 6 Nm
9.
CAUTION: Make sure no damage is occured

to the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this
10.

11.
12.
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that special tool 211-326 is

installed to the clockspring.
Make sure that the arrow on the cassette is

centered and pointing vertically (make sure that
the steering wheel has remained in the 12
o'clock position and that it has not been
turned by +/- 360 degrees) prior to the
steering wheel installation. On removal of the
special tool, keep the clockspring cables taught to
prevent the cassette moving from the set position.
NOTE: Make sure that the road wheels are in the
straight ahead position, failure to follow this
Steering Column Switches Torque Specifications
Item
Gearshift paddle switch
Speed and audio control switch
Steering column lock actuator
Nm
2.5
3.5
9
lb-ft
7
lb-in
22
31
80
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches

For a detailed description of the steering column switches, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Switches
Steering column lock
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Wiring Harness
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, check for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
into account.
DTC
B100D51
Description
Column lock
authorisation
Possible Cause
Not programmed
B100D62
Column lock
authorisation signal compare
failure
CAN fault
Steering column lock fault
Incorrect module installed
(Steering column
lock/Instrument cluster)
Target ID synchronisation
error following reprogramming
Noise/EMC related error
Action
Check ignition, power and ground supplies to
steering column lock and instrument cluster. Resynchronise ID by re-configuring the steering
column lock as a new module
Check CAN network between steering column lock
and instrument cluster. Check power and ground
supplies to steering column lock and instrument
cluster. Confirm the correct modules are installed.
Re-synchronize ID by re-configuring the steering
column lock as new. Check CAN network for
interference/EMC related issues
B100D64
Column lock
authorisation signal plausibility
failure
B100D87
Column lock
authorisation missing message
CAN fault
Check CAN network to steering column lock. Check

power and ground supplies to steering column lock
and instrument cluster
CAN fault
Low voltage at steering
Check CAN network between steering column lock

and instrument cluster. Check power and ground
cluster
column lock < 8V

U000188
High speed CAN

communication bus
Vehicle CAN bus off condition
U030000
Internal control
module software
incompatibility
Invalid configuration
U300049
Control Module
U300087
Control Module
Missing message
U300281
Vehicle
Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle/component mis-
message is received
match. Corrupt VIN data

being transmitted, module
previously installed to other
vehicle

system
retest. If the DTC is still logged suspect the steering
column lock, refer to the new module installation
Install a new steering column lock, refer to the new
module installation note at the top of the DTC Index
approved diagnostic system. Check steering column
lock for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index. Check
CAN network integrity using the manufacturer
Install original module, check for DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC Index
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Lock Actuator

Special Tool(s)
5 point security torx bit
418-535
Removal
1.
Remove the steering column.

For additional information, refer to Section 211-04 Steering
Column.
2.
Remove the steering column lock actuator.

Using the special tool, remove the steering
column lock actuator retaining bolts.
Installation
1.

Tighten to 9 Nm.
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH

Removal
1.

connector.
2.

3.
Remove the steering column multifunction switch.

Depress the 2 clips.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Make sure the electrical harness is not trapped

during the installation.
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH

Removal
1.

2.

For additional information, refer to: General Service Information
(100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
3.
Remove the instrument panel, lower trim panel.

Installation).
4.

connector.
5.

6.
Remove the steering column multifunction switch.

Installation
1.
Install the multifunction switch.

Align the lugs and secure the clips.
2.
Install the steering column upper cowl.

Install the screws.
3.
Install the steering column lower cowl.

If installed, connect the steering column and foot pedal
switch electrical connector.
Install the screws.
4.
Install the instrument panel, lower trim panel.

Installation).
5.

Engine System - General Information - Engine

Special Tool(s)
Oil pressure testing adaptor, 303-1451
Oil pressure testing gauge, 303-871
For a detailed description of the 5.0L engine, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop
manual.
REFER to: Engine (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).

1.
Verify the customer concern by operating the system.
2.

Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Coolant leaks
Oil leaks
Leaks in the fuel system
Visibly damaged or worn parts
Loose or missing fixings
Electrical
Fuses
Loose or corroded electrical connectors
Harnesses
Sensors
3.
4.
Symptom Chart
NOTE: If an engine is suspect, when the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty refer to the Warranty Policy
and Procedure manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new engine.
NOTE: Due to the possibility of loose carbon, that has become trapped between the valve face and seat, effecting the
pressure readings, when carrying out a compression test and some cylinders are found to have low pressures, install
the spark plugs, road test the vehicle and re-test the suspect cylinders. If the correct pressures are restored, no further
action is required.
Symptom
All engine related issues
Difficult to start hot and
cold
Action
Check ECM for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to DTC Index.
Carry out general engine checks:
Compression test. Refer to component tests in this section.
Valve clearances
Spark plug condition and color
Poor idle
Ensure the air intake system is free from leaks

Valve clearances
Check for collapsed catalytic converter/blocked exhaust system
Check long and short term fuel trim datalogger signals
Readings up to 10%: may be considered as acceptable if the readings are equal
bank to bank
Positive readings of between 10-20%: check for air leaks in air intake system
Negative readings of between 10-20%: check for over fuelling e.g. leaking injectors,
high fuel pressure

Readings above 20%: check for DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
Carry out a vacuum gauge check. Refer to component tests in this section
Insufficient
power/Insufficient
compression
Ensure the air intake system is free from leaks

Valve clearances
Check for collapsed catalytic converter/blocked exhaust system
Check long and short term fuel trim datalogger signals
Readings up to 10%: may be considered as acceptable if the readings are equal
bank to bank
Positive readings of between 10-20%: check for air leaks in air intake system
Negative readings of between 10-20%: check for over fuelling e.g. leaking injectors,
high fuel pressure

Readings above 20%: check for DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
Carry out a vacuum gauge check. Refer to component tests in this section
Oil consumption
Carry out oil leak check followed by an oil consumption test. Refer to the component
tests in this section

If oil consumption is excessive:
Check the integrity of the engine breather system
Valve clearances
Noise
Refer to the Special Service Messages on the Electronic Product Quality Report
(EPQR) system for sound files. If the symptom does NOT compare to any of the
sound files, contact Dealer Technical Support (DTS)
DTC Index
For a complete list of all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section
303-14. REFER to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing).
Component Tests
Engine Oil Leaks
NOTE: Before installing new gaskets or oil seals, make sure that the fault is clearly established.
If the oil leak cannot be identified clearly by a visual inspection, carry out an Ultraviolet test:
Fluorescent Oil Additive Method

1.
Clean the engine with a suitable cleaning fluid (brake cleaner).
2.
Drain the engine oil and refill with recommended oil, premixed with Diesel Engine Oil Dye or equivalent. Use a
minimum 14.8 ml (0.5 ounce) to a maximum 29.6 ml (1 ounce) of fluorescent additive to all engines. If oil is not
premixed, fluorescent additive must first be added to the crankcase.
3.
Run engine for 15 minutes. Stop the engine and inspect all seal and gasket areas for leaks using a 12 Volt
Master UV Diagnostic Inspection Kit or equivalent. A clear bright yellow or orange area will identify leak. For
extremely small leaks, several hours may be required for the leak to appear.
4.
As necessary, pressurize the main oil gallery system to locate leaks due to incorrectly sealed, loose or cocked
plugs. If the flywheel bolts leak oil, look for sealer on the threads.
5.
Repair all leaks as necessary.
Compression Test
General Remarks
NOTE: Removing fuses and disconnecting electrical components may cause the Engine Control Module (ECM) to log
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). After the measurements have been carried out, DTCs should be cleared from memory
by connecting to the Manufacturer Approved Diagnostic System.
NOTE: Only check the compression pressure with the valves set to the prescribed clearance (if this can be adjusted).
The compression pressure should be checked with the engine at operating temperature.
Check the Compression Pressure
WARNING: Move gear selector lever to 'P' position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
1.
Remove the fuel pump relay.
2.
Start the engine - the engine will start, run for a few seconds then stall.
3.
Remove the spark plugs.
4.
Install the compression tester.
5.
Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch OFF, using the auxiliary starter
switch, crank the engine a minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading.
6.
Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes.
7.
Install the removed components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening torques.
8.
Clear all DTCs from the ECM.
Interpretation of the Results

NOTE: Due to the possibility of loose carbon that has become trapped between the valve face and seat effecting the
pressure readings, when carrying out a compression test and cylinders are found to have low pressures, install the
spark plugs, road test the vehicle and re-test the suspect cylinders. If the correct pressures are restored, no further
action is required.
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is within 75% of
the highest reading.
If the cylinder pressures are found to be low, carry out a leakdown test to determine the location of the fault (if any
leakback can be heard through the engine breather system suspect the piston rings, if any leakback can be heard
through the inlet system suspect the inlet valve or seat, if any leakback can be heard through the exhaust manifold
suspect the exhaust valve or seat. If the measurements for two cylinders next to each other are both too low then it is
very likely that the cylinder head gasket between them is burnt through. This can also be recognized by traces of
engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil).
Oil Consumption Test

The amount of oil an engine uses will vary with the way the vehicle is driven in addition to normal engine-to-engine
variation. This is especially true during the first 16,100 km (10,000 miles) when a new engine is being broken in or until
certain internal components become conditioned. Vehicles used in heavy-duty operation may use more oil. The
following are examples of heavy-duty operation:
Trailer towing applications
Severe loading applications
Sustained high speed operation
www.JagDocs.com
Engines need oil to lubricate the following internal components:
Cylinder block cylinder walls

Pistons and piston rings
Intake and exhaust valve stems
Intake and exhaust valve guides
All internal engine components
When the pistons move downward, a thin film of oil is left on the cylinder walls. As the vehicle is operated, some oil is
also drawn into the combustion chambers past the intake and exhaust valve stem seals and burned.
The following are examples of conditions that can affect oil consumption rates:
Engine size
Operator driving habits
Ambient temperatures
Quality and viscosity of oil
Engine is being run in an overfilled condition (check the oil level at least five minutes after a hot shutdown with
the vehicle parked on a level surface. The oil level should not be above the top of the cross-hatched area and
the letter "F" in FULL).
Operation under varying conditions can frequently be misleading. A vehicle that has been run for several thousand
miles on short trips or in below-freezing ambient temperatures may have consumed a "normal" amount of oil. However,
when checking the engine oil level, it may measure up to the full mark on the oil level indicator due to dilution
(condensation and fuel) in the engine crankcase. The vehicle then might be driven at high speeds on the highway where
the condensation and fuel boil off. The next time the engine oil is checked it may appear that a liter of oil was used in
about 160 km (100 miles). Oil consumption rate is about one liter per 2,400 km (1,500 miles).
Make sure the selected engine oil meets Jaguar specification and the recommended API performance category "SG" and
SAE viscosity grade as shown in the vehicle Owner's Guide. It is also important that the engine oil is changed at the
intervals specified for the typical operating conditions.
The following diagnostic procedure is used to determine the source of excessive oil consumption.
NOTE: Oil use is normally greater during the first 16,100 km (10,000 miles) of service. As mileage increases, oil use
decreases. High speed driving, towing, high ambient temperature and other factors may result in greater oil use.
1.
Define excessive consumption, such as the number of miles driven per liter of oil used. Also determine
customers driving habits, such as sustained high speed operation, towing, extended idle and other
considerations.
2.
Verify that the engine has no external oil leaks as described under Engine Oil Leaks in this section.
3.
Carry out an oil consumption test:

Run the engine to normal operating temperature. Switch engine OFF and allow oil to drain back for at
least five minutes .
With vehicle parked on level surface, check the engine oil level.
If required, add engine oil to set level exactly to the FULL mark.
Record the vehicle mileage.
Instruct the customer to return for a level check after driving the vehicle as usual for 1,610 km (1000
miles).
Check the oil level under the same conditions and at the same location as the initial check.
NOTE: If the oil consumption rate is unacceptable go to Step 4.

4.
Check the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) system. Make sure the system is not plugged.
5.
Check for plugged oil drain-back holes in the cylinder head and cylinder block.
6.
If the condition still exists after carrying out the above tests go to step 9.
7.
Carry out a cylinder compression test. Refer to the Compression Test procedure in this section. This can help
determine the source of oil consumption such as valves, piston rings or other areas.
8.
Check valve guides for excessive guide clearance. Install new valve stem seals after verifying valve guide
clearance.
9.
Worn or damaged internal engine components can cause excessive oil consumption. Small deposits of oil on the
tips of the spark plugs can be a clue to internal oil consumption.
Intake Manifold Vacuum Test

Bring the engine to normal operating temperature. Connect a vacuum gauge or equivalent to the intake manifold. Run
the engine at the specified idle speed.
The vacuum gauge should read between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg) depending upon the engine condition and the altitude
at which the test is performed. Subtract 4.0193 kPa (1 in-Hg) from the specified reading for every 304.8 m (1,000 feet)
of elevation above sea level.
The reading should be steady. As necessary, adjust the gauge damper control (where used) if the needle is fluttering
rapidly. Adjust damper until needle moves easily without excessive flutter.
Interpreting Vacuum Gauge Readings

A careful study of the vacuum gauge reading while the engine is idling will help pinpoint trouble areas. Always conduct
other appropriate tests before arriving at a final diagnostic decision. Vacuum gauge readings, although helpful, must be
interpreted carefully.
Most vacuum gauges have a normal band indicated on the gauge face.
The following are potential gauge readings. Some are normal; others should be investigated further.
1.
NORMAL READING: Needle between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg) and holding steady.
2.
NORMAL READING DURING RAPID ACCELERATION: When the engine is rapidly accelerated, the needle will drop
to a low (not to zero) reading. When the throttle is suddenly released, the needle will snap back up to a higher
than normal figure.
3.
NORMAL FOR HIGH-LIFT CAMSHAFT WITH LARGE OVERLAP: The needle will register as low as 51 kPa (15 in-Hg)
but will be relatively steady. Some oscillation is normal.
4.
WORN RINGS OR DILUTED OIL: When the engine is accelerated, the needle drops to 0 kPa (0 in-Hg). Upon
deceleration, the needle runs slightly above 74 kPa (22 in-Hg).

5.
STICKING VALVES: When the needle remains steady at a normal vacuum but occasionally flicks (sharp, fast
movement) down and back about 13 kPa (4 in-Hg), one or more valves may be sticking.
6.
BURNED OR BENT VALVES: A regular, evenly-spaced, downscale flicking of the needle indicates one or more
burned or damaged valves. Insufficient hydraulic valve tappet or hydraulic lash adjuster clearance will also
cause this reaction.
7.
POOR VALVE SEATING: A small but regular downscale flicking can mean one or more valves are not seating
correctly.
8.
WORN VALVE GUIDES: When the needle oscillates over about a 13 kPa (4 in-Hg) range at idle speed, the valve
guides could be worn. As engine speed increases, the needle will become steady if guides are responsible.
9.
WEAK VALVE SPRINGS: When the needle oscillation becomes more violent as engine RPM is increased, weak
valve springs are indicated. The reading at idle could be relatively steady.
10.
LATE VALVE TIMING: A steady but low reading could be caused by late valve timing.
11.
IGNITION TIMING RETARDED: Retarded ignition timing will produce a steady but somewhat low reading.
12.
INSUFFICIENT SPARK PLUG GAP: When spark plugs are gapped too close, a regular, small pulsation of the
needle can occur.
13.
INTAKE LEAK: A low, steady reading can be caused by an intake manifold or throttle body gasket leak.
14.
BLOWN HEAD GASKET: A regular drop of fair magnitude can be caused by a blown head gasket or warped
cylinder head to cylinder block surface.
15.
RESTRICTED EXHAUST SYSTEM: When the engine is first started and is idled, the reading may be normal, but as
the engine RPM is increased, the back pressure caused by a clogged muffler, kinked tail pipe or other concerns
will cause the needle to slowly drop to 0 kPa (0 in-Hg). The needle then may slowly rise. Excessive exhaust
clogging will cause the needle to drop to a low point even if the engine is only idling.
When vacuum leaks are indicated, search out and correct the cause. Excess air leaking into the system will upset the
fuel mixture and cause concerns such as rough idle, missing on acceleration or burned valves. If the leak exists in an
accessory such as the power brake booster, the unit will not function correctly. Always repair vacuum leaks.
Engine Oil Pressure Check

NOTE: Prior to checking the engine oil pressure, a road test of 6 miles (10 kilometres), must be carried out. Do not
attempt to attain engine normal operating temperature by allowing the engine to idle.
1.
Disconnect the battery ground cable. Refer to section 414-00 - Charging System - General Information of the
workshop manual
2.
WARNINGS:
The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent scalding.
Wear protective gloves.

Remove the engine oil filter element
REFER to: Oil Filter Element (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
NOTE: Ensure the oil filter element is not contaminated during this procedure
3.
Install the oil filter element into special tool (Oil filter adapter number 303-1451)
4.
Install the special tool (Oil filter adapter number 303-1451) to the engine. Torque: 25 Nm
5.
Install the special tool (Oil pressure testing gauge, 303-871) and tighten the union
6.
Connect the battery ground cable
7.
Refer to owner hand book, check and top-up the engine oil if required
8.
Start and run the engine
9.
Note the oil pressure readings with the engine running at idle and 3500 RPM
10.
Turn off the engine
11.
Disconnect the battery ground cable
12.
Remove the special tools

1. Clean the components
13.
Install the engine oil filter element

REFER to: Oil Filter Element (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
NOTE: Ensure the oil filter element is not contaminated during this procedure
14.
Connect the battery ground cable
15.
Refer to owner hand book, check and top-up the engine oil if required
Engine System - General Information - Bearing Inspection

General Procedures
1.
Inspect bearings for the following defects.

1. Cratering - fatigue failure
2. Spot polishing - incorrect seating.
3. Imbedded dirt engine oil.
4. Scratching - dirty engine oil.
5. Base exposed - poor lubrication.
6. Both edges worn - journal damaged.
7. One edge worn - journal tapered or bearing not
seated.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Bearing Journal

Clearance
General Procedures
1.
NOTE: Make sure that the following stages are followed

exactly. The tappets or followers must be removed to
carry out this measurement.
NOTE: Make sure that the camshaft is to specification.
NOTE: The bearing caps and journals should be free
from engine oil and dirt.
Position on a length of plastigage on the bearing cap.
Insert the camshaft, without lubrication, into
the cylinder head.
Position a plastigage strip, which should be
equal to the width of the bearing cap, on the
bearing journal.
2.
Install the camshaft bearing caps.

Follow the relevant tightening sequence.
3.
NOTE: Do not strike the bearing caps.

Remove the camshaft bearing caps.
Follow the relevant loosening sequence.
4.
Using the special tool, read off the measurement.

Compare the width of plastigage with the plastigage
scale.
The value that is read off is the bearing clearance.
If the values are not to specification install a new
camshaft.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Bearing Journal

Diameter
General Procedures
1.
Determine the diameter of the camshaft journals.

Using a micrometer measure the diameter at
90 degrees intervals to determine if the
journals are out-of-round.
Measure at two different points on the journal
to determine if there is any tapering.
If the measurements are out of the specified
range, install a new camshaft.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft End Play

General Procedures
1.
NOTE: Make sure that the camshaft is to specification.

Using the special tool, measure the end play.
Slide the camshaft in both directions. Read
and note the maximum and minimum values
on the dial indicator gauge.
1. End play = maximum value minus
minimum value.
If the measurement is out of specification,
install new components.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Lobe Lift

General Procedures
1.
Measure the diameter (1) and diameter (2) with a vernier

caliper. The difference in measurements is the lobe lift.
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Surface Inspection

General Procedures
1.
Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the active

area. Minor pitting is acceptable outside the active area.
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Cleaning

General Procedures
1.
CAUTION: Do not use a caustic cleaning solution or

damage to connecting rods may occur.
Mark and separate the parts and clean with solvent. Clean the
oil passages.
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Large End Bore

General Procedures
1.
2.
Measure the bearing bore in two directions. The difference is the

connecting rod bore out-of-round. Verify the out-of-round is
within specification.
Measure the bearing bore diameter in two directions. Verify

the bearing bore is within specification.
Engine System - General Information - Crankshaft End Play

General Procedures
1.
Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Brackets,

measure the end play.
Measure the end play by lifting the crankshaft
using a lever.
If the value is out of the specification, install
new thrust half rings to take up the end float
and repeat the measurement.
Engine System - General Information - Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal

Clearance
General Procedures
CAUTION: THESES PROCEDURES SHOULD NOT BE CARRIED OUT DURING THE MANUFACTURERS
WARRANTY PERIOD.
1.
NOTE: Example - *PJEAL* - Crankshaft Main Journal

Diameter.
Read the grade letters from LEFT to RIGHT = FRONT to REAR of
engine eg. for this example engine, the crank journal at the front
of the engine is grade P, and at the rear is grade L.
The selection of main bearing shells is described in the
following chart.
2.
NOTE: Example - *ABAA* - Crankshaft (Big End Bearing)

Crankpin Diameter
NOTE: For vehicles built up to 2002 MY.
NOTE: If the crankshaft main bearing carrier retaining bolts
have been marked with a center punch dot, they must be
discarded and new bolts installed.
engine eg. for this example engine, the crankpin at the front of the
engine is grade A and at the rear is also grade A.
Grade A = 56,000 to 55,994 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code
- Blue).
Grade B = 55,994 to 55,988 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code
- Green).
Grade C = 55,988 to 55,982 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code
- Yellow).
3.
NOTE: Example - *ABAA* - Crankshaft (Big End Bearing)

Crankpin Diameter
NOTE: For vehicles built from 2002 MY.

NOTE: If the crankshaft main bearing carrier retaining bolts
have been marked with a center punch dot, they must be
discarded and new bolts installed.
engine eg. for this example engine, the crankpin at the front of the
engine is grade A and at the rear is also grade A.
Grade A = 53,000 to 52,994 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code
- Blue).
Grade B = 52,994 to 52,988 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code
- Green).
Grade C = 52,988 to 52,982 mm (Bearing Shell Color Code
- Yellow).
4.
NOTE: Example - *21222122* - Cylinder Bore and Piston

The cylinder bore grades read from LEFT to RIGHT as follows:
Bank 2 - Cylinder 1, Bank 2 - Cylinder 2, Bank 2 - Cylinder
3, Bank 2 - Cylinder 4, Bank 1 - Cylinder 4,
Bank 1 - Cylinder 3, Bank 1 - Cylinder 2, Bank 1 - Cylinder
1.
(Note, in earlier publications Bank 1 was described
as A-Bank and Bank 2 as B-Bank)
Grade 1 Bore = 85,990 to 86,000 mm.
Grade 2 Bore = 86,000 to 86,010 mm.
Grade 3 Bore = 86,010 to 86,020 mm.
5.
NOTE: Example - *WPPNN* - Crankshaft Main Bearing Bore

in Cylinder Block
engine eg. for this example engine, the crank journal bore at the
front of the engine is grade W, and at the rear is grade N.
The selection of main bearing shells is described in the
following JOURNAL DIAMETER AND MAIN BEARING
BORE CHART.
6.
JOURNAL DIAMETER AND MAIN BEARING BORE CHART
7.
NOTE: THIS PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE CARRIED OUT

WHEN REPLACIING MAIN BEARING SHELLS.
NOTE: Refer to the JOURNAL DIAMETER AND MAIN BEARING
BORE CHART in step 6 for tolerance and bearing information.
The number in each diagonal band represents a PAIR of color
coded main bearing shells which must be used with a specific
journal, depending on the combination of journal diameter and
crankshaft bore diameter. The color codes for each band are as
follows:
1. Blue / Green and Blue / Green
2. Blue / Green and Blue
3. Blue and Blue
4. Blue and Green
5. Green and Green
6. Green and Yellow
7. Yellow and Yellow
Consider crankshaft journal 5 (from the example grade
markings on the cylinder block) - the cylinder block bore is
Grade N and the crankshaft journal diameter is Grade L.
From the chart, it will be seen that the point of intersection
is in Band 4 which equates to one Blue shell and one Green
shell.
When the appropriate pair of color codes have been
selected for a journal, either color may be installed to the

cylinder block or to the bedplate, but, the shell which is to
be installed to the cylinder block must have an oil groove
and the shell which is to be installed to the bedplate must
be plain.
8.
NOTE: THIS PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE CARRIED OUT

WHEN A REPLACMENT CRANKSHAFT OR CYLINDER BLOCK
HAS BEEN FITTED.
NOTE: Refer to the JOURNAL DIAMETER AND MAIN BEARING
BORE CHART in step 6 for tolerance and bearing information.
The thickness grade of all main bearing shells are to be selected to
give a total running clearance of not less than 0.022 mm or
greater than 0.040 mm.
Each bearing bore in the block/bedplate assembly should
be measured at two mutually perpendicular diameters 45
to the vertical in the middle of the bearing.
The minimum diameter of the two is to be used.
Each crankshaft main bearing journal should be measured
dynamically at a point in line with the middle of each
bearing.
When the appropriate pair of color codes have been
selected for a journal, either color may be installed to the
cylinder block or to the bedplate, but, the shell which is to
be installed to the cylinder block must have an oil groove
and the shell which is to be installed to the bedplate must
be plain.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Bore Out-of-Round

General Procedures
1.
NOTE: The main bearing caps or lower crankcase must be

in place and tightened to the specified torque; however,
the bearing shells should not be installed.
Measure the cylinder bore with an internal micrometer.
Carry out the measurements in different directions
and at different heights to determine if there is any
out-of-roundness or tapering.
If the measurement is out of the specified range,
hone out the cylinder block or install a new block.
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Head Distortion

General Procedures
1.
Measure the cylinder block/cylinder head distortion.

Using the special tool, measure the mating
face distortion.
If the value is not to specification rework the
mating face.
Engine System - General Information - Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and

Inspection
General Procedures
1.
Inspect the cylinder head joining flanges of the exhaust

manifold for evidence of exhaust gas leaks.
2.
Inspect the exhaust manifold for cracks, damaged gasket

surfaces, or other damage that would make it unfit for further
use.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Inspection

General Procedures
1.
CAUTION: Do not use any aggressive cleaning fluid

or a wire brush to clean the piston.
Carry out a visual inspection.
Clean the piston skirt, pin bush, ring grooves and
crown and check for wear or cracks.
If there are signs of wear on the piston skirt,
check whether the connecting rod is twisted or
bent.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin Diameter

General Procedures
1.
NOTE: The piston and piston pin are a matched pair.

Do not mix up the components.
Measure the piston pin diameter.
Measure the diameter in two directions.
If the values are not to specification, install a
new piston and a new piston pin.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin to Bore Diameter

General Procedures
1.
NOTE: The piston and piston pin form a matched pair. Do not
mix up the components.
Measure the diameter of the piston pin bore.
Measure the diameter in two directions.
If the values are not to specification, install both a new
piston and a new piston pin.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring End Gap

General Procedures
1.
CAUTION: Do not mix up the piston rings. Install

the piston rings in the same position and location.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring gap.
The values given in the specification refer to a
gauge ring used during production.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring-to-Groove

Clearance
General Procedures
1.
NOTE: The piston ring must protrude from the piston

groove. To determine the piston ring clearance, insert
the Feeler Gauge right to the back of the groove,
behind the wear ridge.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring
clearance.
Engine System - General Information - Valve Spring Free Length

General Procedures
1.
Using a vernier gauge, measure the free length of each

valve spring. Verify the length is within specification.
Engine System - General Information - Valve Stem Diameter

General Procedures
1.
Using a micrometer measure the diameter of the valve

stems.
If the measurements are not to specification,
install a new valve.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Leakage Test Using Smoke Test

Equipment
General Procedures
CAUTION: The compressed air line supply pressure must be between 3.5 and 12 bar (50 and 175 psi) for the
smoke test equipment to function correctly. Do not exceed this pressure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the smoke test equipment.
NOTE: The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully charged before carrying out this procedure.
NOTE: On vehicles with 3.0L TDV6, it will be necessary to insert smoke at both air cleaner outlet pipes independently if
the right hand turbocharger and associated hoses are to be tested.
NOTE: In some cases it may be necessary to remove undertrays, trim or engine covers to obtain access to all potential
leak locations.
NOTE: For further information regarding operation of the test equipment refer to the manufacturers operators manual
supplied with the kit.
1.
WARNING: Use an additional support to

prevent the hood from falling if the smoke test
equipment is secured to the hood. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in personal injury.
Install the smoke test equipment to a suitable
location under the hood.
2.
Connect a suitable compressed air line to the smoke test

equipment.
3.
Connect the smoke test equipment positive power cable to the

battery positive terminal.
4.
WARNING: Do not connect the smoke test equipment

negative cable to the battery negative terminal.
Connect the smoke test equipment negative cable to a suitable
body ground point.
5.
NOTE: A flashing green light indicates low battery

voltage. In this case, place the battery on charge
and make sure that the battery is fully charged
before using the smoke test equipment.
Observe the power indicator lamp on the smoke
test equipment. Make sure that a continuous green
light is displayed.
6.
NOTE: In some cases it may be necessary to

remove the air cleaner(s) to allow access to the air
cleaner outlet pipes.
NOTE: In some cases it will be necessary to cap
one of the air cleaner outlet pipes. Use the
blanking caps supplied in the kit to cap the open
orifice.
Disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe(s).
7.
NOTE: Make sure the smoke test equipment

adapter is a good fit to the air cleaner outlet pipe.
This must be an air tight seal.
Connect the smoke test equipment supply hose to
the air cleaner outlet pipe.
1. Install the appropriate adapter to the air
cleaner outlet pipe.
2. Connect the smoke test equipment supply
hose to the adapter link hose.
8.
NOTE: The flow control valve must be in the fully

open position.
NOTE: Smoke is produced for 5 minutes. The
smoke test equipment will automatically switch off
after this period of time.
Switch the smoke test equipment on.
9.
10.
Remove the oil filler cap, and observe until a constant flow of
smoke is visible leaving the oil filler orifice. Install the oil filler
cap.
NOTE: The longer smoke is allowed to exit from a leak, the
more fluorescent dye will be deposited at a leak location.
Using the torch supplied in the kit set to white light, look for
escaping smoke. Alternatively, use the ultraviolet light to look
for fluorescent dye deposits at the source of a leak.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Engine Data
Engine
Maximum Engine
Maximum Engine
Engine Description Capacity Torque (EEC) (SAE) Power (EEC) (SAE)
90 "Vee" 8
4.999 ccm
625 Nm at 2.500 375 kW at 6.000 Cylinder 32 Valves
5.500 RPM
6.500 RPM
Compression
Ratio
9.5 0.50
Bore
Stroke
92.509 93 0.1
0.009 mm
mm
Engine Firing Order
Firing Order
1:2:7:3:4:5:6:8
Engine Valve Clearance (cold)
Intake Valve
0.20 0.02
Exhaust Valve
0.25 0.02
Spark Plugs
Specification
ILKR6C-10
Spark Plug Gap

1 mm
Lubricants,Fluids,Sealers and Adhesives
Description
Engine Oil
Sealant
Core plug and stub pipe retainer
Jaguar Premium Cooling System Fluid
Specification
WSS-M2C925-A
WSE-M4G323-A6
WSK-M2G349-A7
WSS-M97B44-D
Capacities
Description
Engine oil, initial fill
Engine oil, service fill with oil filter change
Liters
8.90
7.25
Cylinder Head and Valve Train
Item
Cylinder head maximum permitted warp (mm) (flatnes specfication)
overall
over 150x150 mm area
over 25x25 mm area
Valve guide inner diameter (mm)
Intake valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line)
Exhaust valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line)
Valve stem to guide clearance intake diametrical (mm)
Valve stem to guide clearance exhaust diametrical (mm)
Valve head diameter intake (mm)
Valve head diameter exhaust (mm)
Intake valve face angle (degrees)
Exhaust valve face angle (degrees)
Valve stem diameter intake (mm)
Valve stem diameter exhaust (mm)
Valve spring free length (mm) - inlet
Valve spring free length (mm) - exhaust
Valve spring installed height (mm) - inlet
Valve spring installed height (mm) - exhaust
Camshaft lobe lift intake (mm)
Camshaft lobe lift exhaust (mm)
Camshaft journal to cylinder head bearing surface clearance diametrical (mm)
Camshaft journal diameter - all positions
Bearing diameter - all positions
Camshaft journal maximum run out limit (mm)
Camshaft journals to end journals
Camshaft journals to adjacent journals
Camshaft journal maximum out of round (mm) - all journals
Torque Specification
NOTE: A = Refer to procedure for correct torque sequence.
Specification
0.08
0.05
0.02
5.51 0.01
117.21 0.1
94.39 0.1
0.022 - 0.057
0.03 - 0.065
36 0.1
30 0.1
44.875 0.125
44.875 0.125
5.4705 0.0075
5.4625 0.0075
46.1
46.1
35.74
35.1
10
9.36
0.025 - 0.065
26.965 0.01
27.01 0.01
0.03
0.015
0.005
Description
Engine cover mounting bolts
Accessory drive belt tensioner retaining bolt
Supercharger belt idler/tensioner bracket retaining bolts
Secondary drive belt idler retaining bolts
Power steering pump bracket to engine retaining bolts
Generator retaining bolts
Starter motor retaining bolts
Air conditioning compressor retaining bolts
Engine mounting to engine mounting bracket retaining nuts
Engine mounting to subframe retaining nuts
Engine mounting bracket to engine retaining bolts
Crankshaft damper pulley retaining LH threaded bolt
Flexplate retaining bolts
Exhaust manifold heat shield retaining bolts
Exhaust manifold retaining bolts
Engine wiring harness bracket retaining bolts
Intercooler retaining bolts
Intake manifold retaining bolts
Oil Cooler retaining bolts
Knock sensor (KS) retaining bolt
Ignition coil retaining bolts
Spark plugs
Fuel rail retaining bolts
High pressure fuel pipe retaining bolts
High pressure fuel pump retaining bolts
Oil filter housing assembly retaining bolts
Oil filter cap
Lifting eye bolts
Manifold absolute pressure and temperature (MAPT) sensor sensor retaining bolts
Coolant pump retaining bolts
Variable valve timing (VVT) oil control solenoid retaining bolts
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor retaining bolts
Camshaft cover retaining bolts
Front upper timing cover retaining bolts
Front lower timing cover retaining bolts
Engine rear cover retaining bolts
VVT to camshaft retaining bolts
Camshaft bearing caps retaining bolts
Primary timing chain fixed guide retaining bolts
Primary timing chain tensioner retaining bolts
Primary timing chain tensioner guide blade retaining bolts
Auxiliary chain tensioner guide retaining bolts
Auxiliary chain fixed guide retaining bolt
Oil pump sprocket retaining bolt
Cylinder head retaining bolts
Engine oil level (EOL) sensor retaining bolt
Oil pan to oil sump body retaining bolts
Oil sump body to engine retaining bolts
Oil pan drain plug
Oil transfer tube to Oil pan body retaining bolts
Oil pump to engine block retaining bolts
Pick-up pipe to oil pump retaining bolts
Windage tray retaining bolts
Piston cooling jet retaining bolts
Engine block coolant draining plug
Connecting Rod bolts
Stage 1
Stage 2
Main bearing cap
M10 bolt Stage 1
M10 bolt Stage 2
M8 bolt Stage 1
M8 bolt Stage 2
Nm
10
lb-ft
7
40
30
25
18
40
30
25
18
25
18
48
35
48
35
25
18
48
35
63
46
48
35
200 + 270 148 + 180
45 + 90
33 + 90
A
A
10
7
25
18
25
18
13
10
20
14
8
20
15
A
A
12
9
12
9
28
21
25 + 90
18 + 90
5
12
9
10
7
10
7
13
10
12
9
A
A
32
24
11
8
12
9
12
9
25
18
21
15
12
9
21
15
A
12
9
12
9
25
18
23
17
11
8
25
18
12
9
25
18
12
9
50
37
lb-in
71
44
-
10
50
7
37
25
57 + 70
15
33 + 75
18
42 + 70
11
24 + 75
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine

EXTERNAL VIEW
INTRODUCTION
The 5.0L SC (supercharger) gasoline engine is a liquid cooled V8 unit featuring direct fuel injection, four overhead camshafts
and four valves per cylinder. All four camshafts incorporate VCT (variable camshaft timing).
The main structural components of the engine are all manufactured from aluminum alloy. The engine is built around a very
stiff, lightweight, enclosed V, deep skirt cylinder block. A structural windage tray is bolted to the bottom of the cylinder block
to further improve the block stiffness, minimize NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) and help reduce oil foaming. To further
enhance the stiffness of the lower engine structure, a heavily ribbed sump body is installed. The sump body also helps to
reduce engine noise.
Engine Structure
Item
Part Number
Description
LH (left hand) cylinder head (bank B)
Cylinder block
Windage tray
Sump body
Sump pan
RH (right hand) cylinder head (bank A)
CYLINDER BLOCK
The cylinder block is a 90 degree configuration with cast-in iron cylinder liners and an open deck die-cast coolant jacket. The
low volume coolant jacket gives good warm-up times and low piston noise levels. The longitudinal flow design of the coolant
jacket, with a single cylinder head coolant transfer port in each bank, provides good rigidity and head gasket sealing.
The cylinders in each bank are numbered from 1 to 4, with number 1 at the front.
Engine Data Location
Item
Part Number
Description
Engine data location
Engine data is marked on the cylinder block at the rear of the RH cylinder bank.
CRANKSHAFT
The crankshaft is made from spheroidal graphite cast iron, which, compared with grey cast iron, has higher mechanical
strength, ductility and increased shock resistance. The undercut and rolled fillets also improve strength. Eight counterbalance weights ensure low vibration levels and the large, cross-drilled main bearing journals are designed to contribute to
stiffness.
An oil groove in the upper half of each main bearing transfers the oil into the crankshaft for lubrication of the connecting rod
bearings. A thrust washer is installed each side of the top half of the center main bearing.
Crankshaft Data Location
Item
Part Number
Description
Pin journal classification and plant identification
Main journal classification
Date and time codes
The main bearings are numbered 1 to 5 starting from the front of the engine. There are five grades of main bearing
available, each being color coded. Journal sizes are marked on the rear of the crankshaft.
For additional information, refer to: Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Clearance (303-00 Engine System - General
Crankshaft Installation
Item
Part Number
Description
Coolant drain plug
Torque converter access plug
Drive plate
Rear cover
Main bearing cap
Identification mark
Front cover
Front pulley
8
The main bearing caps are made from cast iron and are cross bolted to increase rigidity. An identification mark on the
bearing cap faces the front of the engine.
At the front of the crankshaft, a tuned torsional vibration damper is incorporated into the crankshaft front pulley. At the rear
of the crankshaft a pressed steel drive plate, with a steel starter ring gear, is installed to transfer drive from the engine to
the transmission. The reluctor ring for the CKP (crankshaft position) sensor is integrated into the perimeter of the drive
plate.
The crankshaft seals are located in the front and rear covers.
PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS
The diameter of each piston is graded and precisely matched to each cylinder bore to help reduce noise. In the vertical
plane, the pistons have a slight barrel form, which helps to ensure a reliable oil film is maintained between the piston and
the cylinder bore. A solid film lubricant coating is applied to both reaction faces of the piston to reduce wear and improve
fuel economy.
A three-ring piston-sealing system is used. The steel top ring is treated with a PVD (physical vapor deposition) peripheral
coating. PVD is a coating technique where material can be deposited with improved properties to ensure good cylinder bore
compatibility and wear resistance. A Napier center ring helps cylinder pressure and oil management, while the three-piece oil
control lower ring is produced from nitrided steel.
The pistons are cooled with engine oil from four piston cooling jets installed under the valley of the cylinder block. Each
piston cooling jet sprays oil onto the underside of the two adjacent pistons, one from each cylinder bank.
The connecting rods are forged from high strength steel. The cap is fracture-split from the rod to ensure precision reassembly for bearing shell alignment. There are three grades of large end bearing available, each being color coded.
Cap Alignment with Connecting Rod
Item
Part Number
Description
Alignment marks
Connecting rod
Cap
Bearings
The correct alignment of the cap with the connecting rod is indicated by marks on adjacent faces of the two components.
Connecting Rod and Piston Orientation
Item
Part Number
Description
Front of engine
Alignment mark
LH side (bank B)
Alignment mark
RH side (bank A)
Piston orientation arrow
The orientation of the connecting rods and pistons on the crankshaft are given below:
Bank A - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod alignment
marks must face the rear of the engine.

Bank B - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod alignment
marks must face the front of the engine.
CYLINDER HEADS
NOTE: RH (right-hand) (A bank) cylinder head shown, LH (left-hand) (B bank) cylinder head similar.
The cylinder heads are manufactured in gravity die cast aluminum alloy and are unique for each cylinder bank. Deep-seated
bolts reduce distortion and secure the cylinder heads to the cylinder block.
Each cylinder is served by four valves. To help achieve the required gas-flow characteristics, these are arranged
asymmetrically around the cylinder bore. Each cylinder has a centrally mounted fuel injector and spark plug.
The cylinder head gasket is of a multi-layer steel construction.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
NOTE: LH (B bank) installation shown, RH (A bank) installation similar.
Item
Part Number
Description
Cylinder head
Gasket
Heat shield
Gasket
Exhaust manifold
Bolt (8 off)
Heat shield
Bolt (4 off)
Spacer (8 off)
The high SiMo (silicon molybdenum) cast iron exhaust manifolds are unique for each cylinder bank. Each exhaust manifold
installation includes two metal gaskets and two heat shields. Spacers on the securing bolts allow the manifolds to expand
and contract with changes of temperature while maintaining the clamping loads.
VALVE TRAIN
Item
Part Number
Description
Inlet camshafts
Exhaust camshaft
Inverted tooth timing chain
Nylon chain guide
Auxiliary chain tensioner
Auxiliary drive chain
Oil pump drive
Auxiliary drive camshaft
Timing chain tensioner
10
Tensioner lever
11
VCT unit
12
VCT solenoids
The lightweight valve train provides good economy and noise levels and is chain driven from the crankshaft.
Double overhead camshafts on each cylinder head operate the valves. For each cylinder head, an inverted tooth timing chain
transfers drive from the crankshaft to the VCT unit on the front of each camshaft. Graded tappets enable setting of inlet and
exhaust valve clearances.
Each timing chain has a hydraulic tensioner operated by engine oil pressure. The chain tensioners incorporate a ratchet
mechanism, which maintains tension while the engine is stopped to eliminate start-up noise. The chains are lubricated with
engine oil from jets located at the front of the engine block. Nylon chain guides control chain motion on the drive side.
Item
Part Number
Description
VCT units
Intake camshaft VCT solenoid
Camshaft position sensors
Exhaust camshaft VCT solenoid
The VCT system varies the timing of the intake and exhaust camshafts to deliver optimum engine power, efficiency and
emissions. The timing of the intake camshafts has a range of 62 degrees of crankshaft angle. The timing of the exhaust
camshafts has a range of 50 degrees of crankshaft angle.
In the base timing position:
The intake camshafts are fully retarded.
The exhaust camshafts are fully advanced.
VCT Operating Ranges
Camshaft
Valve Opens
Valve Closes
Intake
29 degrees BTDC (before top dead center) to 33 degrees ATDC (after top dead center) 207 to 269 degrees ATDC
Exhaust
244 to 194 degrees BTDC
6 to 56 degrees ATDC
The system consists of a VCT unit and a VCT solenoid for each camshaft. The ECM (engine control module) controls the
system using PWM (pulse width modulation) signals to the VCT solenoids.
The torsional energy generated by the valve springs and the inertia of the valve train components are used to operate the
system.
Variable Camshaft Timing Units
The VCT units change the position of the camshafts in relation to the timing chains.
Item
Part Number
Description
Bolt (3 off)
VCT unit
Filter
Camshaft
Inner plate
Housing and sprocket
Rotor assembly
Reed plate
Spring and lock pin
10
Spring (3 off)
11
Tip seal (3 off)
12
Spring (2 off)
13
Tip seal (2 off)
14
Spring
15
Dowel pin
16
Bias spring
17
18
Snap ring
Reluctor ring
19
Center plate
20
Snap ring
21
Screw (6 off)
22
Spool valve
23
Outer plate
Each VCT unit is attached to the camshaft by three bolts. A rotor assembly and a reed plate are installed inside a sprocket
housing, which consists of a sprocket, an outer plate and an inner plate held together by six screws.
A reluctor ring, for the CMP (camshaft position) sensor, a center plate and a bias spring are installed at the front of the VCT
unit. The ends of the bias spring locate on the center plate assembly and the sprocket housing, to give a turning moment to
the camshaft in the advance direction. A snap ring locates the reluctor ring on to a sleeve installed in the center of the rotor
assembly. The opposite end of the sleeve locates in a bore in the front face of the camshaft, which contains a filter.
A spring and spool valve are installed in the rotor assembly sleeve and retained by a snap ring. The spring keeps the spool
valve in contact with the armature of the related VCT solenoid.
Each VCT unit is supplied with engine oil from an oil gallery in the cylinder head, through the camshaft front bearing cap and
a bore in the center of the camshaft.
Variable Camshaft Timing Solenoids
The VCT solenoids control the position of the spool valves in the VCT units.
The VCT solenoids are installed in the front upper timing covers, immediately in front of their related VCT units. Each VCT
solenoid is secured with two screws and sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface with the
engine harness.
Each VCT solenoid incorporates a spindle that acts on the spool valve in the related VCT unit to advance and retard the
camshaft timing. The VCT solenoids operate independently and are controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM.
Variable Camshaft Timing Operation
When the engine is running, the compression and expansion of the valve springs causes momentary increases and decreases
in the torque acting on the camshafts. These momentary changes of torque are sensed in the VCT units and used to change
the camshaft timing.
Camshaft Torsional Energy (For a Single Valve Event)
Item
Part Number
Description
Camshaft torque
Camshaft rotation (degrees)
Valve opening
Peak lift
Valve closing
1000 rev/min
4000 rev/min
7000 rev/min
Inertia effects from valve train rotating components
Force caused by valve spring
Bias torque from friction
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Base Timing
NOTE: Intake camshaft VCT unit shown. For exhaust camshaft VCT unit, read advance for retard and retard for advance.
Item
Part Number
Description
Advance chamber
Retard chamber
Sprocket housing
Rotor assembly
Lock pin
Sleeve
Engine oil supply from camshaft
Inlet check valve
Lock pin drain
10
Spool valve
11
Advance check valve
12
Retard check valve
NOTE: The following description is for intake camshaft VCT units. For exhaust camshaft VCT units, read advance for retard,
and retard for advance.
At engine start-up, once the engine oil pressure in the camshaft is sufficient to open the inlet check valve, engine oil flows
across the spool valve, through the advance and retard check valves and into the advance and retard chambers. During the
start cycle, the ECM signals the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve into the sleeve and connect the lock pin to inlet oil
pressure. The inlet oil pressure causes the lock pin to retract from the inner plate and unlock the rotor assembly and
camshaft from the sprocket housing.
There is a constant supply of oil to the VCT to ensure the unit remains filled during operation.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Advance
To advance the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve so that the advance
chamber oil passage is closed and the retard chamber oil passage is connected to inlet oil.
Each momentary increase of the torque acting on the camshaft generates a pressure pulse in the retard chamber. Oil moves
from the retard chamber, through the spool valve and the advance check valve to the advance chamber, to equalize the
pressures in the two chambers. The displacement of oil from the retard chamber causes the rotor assembly to advance in
relation to the sprocket housing. Each momentary decrease of torque acting on the camshaft also generates a pressure pulse
in the advance chamber, but, with the advance chamber oil passage closed, no movement of oil between the advance and
retard chambers occurs and the rotor assembly cannot move in the retard direction.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Null
Once the camshaft has reached the required timing position the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to set the spool
valve in the null position. In the null position, the advance and retard chamber oil passages are both closed by the spool
valve and the rotor assembly is hydraulically locked to the sprocket housing.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Retard
To retard the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve to close the retard
chamber oil passage and connect the advance chamber oil passage to the inlet oil.
Each momentary decrease of the torque acting on the camshaft causes oil to transfer from the advance chamber, through
the spool valve and the retard check valve to the retard chamber, and so retard the camshaft timing.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Item
Part Number
Description
Oil pump outlet tube
Anti-drain valve
Oil cooler
Oil filter
Piston cooling jets
Timing chain lubrication jets
Oil evacuation tube
Oil pump
Oil temperature and level sensor
10
Oil pick-up
The oil pump is attached to the underside of the windage tray. The input shaft of the oil pump is driven from the front of the
crankshaft, by the auxiliary chain, at 0.87 engine speed.
The oil pump draws oil from the sump pan through a centrally mounted pick-up pipe. The oil is pressurized and pumped
through an output tube to the cylinder block. After passing through an anti-drain valve and a plate type oil cooler, the oil is
filtered by a replaceable cartridge installed on the front of the RH cylinder head.
The output from the oil filter is distributed through oil galleries in the cylinder heads and cylinder block. All moving parts are
lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurized oil is also provided for the VCT system, the timing chain tensioners, the
piston cooling jets and the timing chain lubrication jets.
The oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure the rapid
return of the oil to the sump pan. System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the LH cylinder head cover.
An oil evacuation tube is installed to allow oil to be drawn from the sump pan. The upper end of the oil evacuation tube is
located under the oil filler cap.
An oil drain plug is installed in the RH side of the sump pan.
Oil Pump Nominal Operating Pressures
Engine Speed, rev/min

Idle
1500
3000
3000
3000
Temperature, C (F)
20 (68)
20 (68)
40 (104)
110 (230)
130 (266)
Pressure, bar (lbf/in2)

2.0 (29.0)
6.0 (87.0)
6.2 (90.0)
5.0 (72.5)
4.0 (58.0)
Oil Level Monitoring

Oil level monitoring is provided by an oil level and temperature sensor that measures the oil level in the sump pan. The oil
level can be displayed in the message center of the instrument cluster.
Oil Level and Temperature Sensor
The oil level and temperature sensor supplies the ECM with a signal containing the level and temperature of the oil in the
sump pan. The oil level and temperature sensor is secured to the bottom of the sump pan with three screws and sealed with
a gasket.
The oil level and temperature sensor sends an ultrasonic pulse vertically upward and measures the time taken for the pulse
to be reflected back from the top surface of the oil. This time is compared with the time taken for an ultrasonic pulse to
travel a reference distance within the oil level and temperature sensor to determine the oil level. The oil level reading is
combined with the oil temperature reading and transmitted in a PWM signal to the ECM.
Oil Level and Temperature Sensor Specifications
Feature
Power source
Details
Battery Voltage
Level Accuracy
Temperature Accuracy
Operating Level Range
Operating Temperature
Range
2 mm (0.08 in.) at temperatures of -30 C (-22 F)) and above; (4 mm (0.16 in.) at
temperatures below -30 C (-22 F))
2 C (3.6 F)
116 to 147 mm (4.57 to 5.79 in.)
-40 to 160 C (-40 to 320 F)
Oil Level Check

For additional information, refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
For accuracy, oil level checks should be performed with the vehicle on level ground when the oil is hot. The vehicle needs to
stand for approximately 10 minutes, after the engine is switched off, to allow the oil to drain back into the sump pan and the
oil level to stabilize. The oil level system will not give a reading until the oil level has stabilized.
With the ignition on, the engine stopped and the transmission in P (park), repeatedly press the trip button on the end of the
LH multifunction switch until the oil level icon and applicable message are displayed in the fuel gage/trip computer area of
the message center, as shown below:
Item
Part Number
Description
Oil level is between 50% and 100% of recommended level. No top-up required.
Oil level is between 12.5% and 50% percent of recommended level. Add 0.5 liter (0.53 US
quart) of oil.
Oil level is between 0% and 12.5% of recommended level. Add 1 liter (1.06 US quarts) of oil.
Oil level is above maximum for safe operation. Reduce oil level to recommended level.
Oil level is below minimum for safe operation. Add 1.5 liters (1.59 US quarts) of oil, then
recheck level.
Oil level is stabilizing. Wait 10 minutes and then recheck level. If this display is accompanied
by the message ENGINE OIL LEVEL MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT, a fault with the oil level
monitoring system is indicated.
System Fault Warning

If there is a fault with the system, in addition to being displayed during an oil level check, the message ENGINE OIL LEVEL
MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT will be temporarily displayed when the ignition is first switched on.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1484
Vacuum Pump, Oil Drain
303-1484-01
Adapter for 303-1484
Draining
WARNING: The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent
scalding.
CAUTION: Correct installation of the oil filler cap can be obtained by tightening the cap until hard stop.
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is parked on level ground.
NOTE: Clean the components general area prior to dismantling.
1.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop
the engine.
2.
3.
CAUTION: Allow 10 minutes from turning the

engine off before starting oil extraction.
Refer to: Engine Cover - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (50105 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
4.
Loosen the element cover 4 complete turns
to allow engine oil to drain from the filter

cover.
5.
Using the oil vacuum pump drain the oil out
through the oil extraction tube.

Special Tool(s): 303-1484, 303-1484-01
6.
Remove the oil vacuum pump.
7.
8.
NOTE: Discard the O-ring seals.
Filling
1.
NOTE: Install new O-ring seals.

Lubricate the oil filter element O-ring seal with
clean engine oil.
2.
CAUTION: Tighten the component finger tight

first.
Torque: 25 Nm
3.
CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is left for 5 minutes

from filling with oil and that the engine oil level is reading at
least minimum (by following Steps 7-11), before starting the
engine.
Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles
without supercharger:
Refer to: Specifications (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L
Petrol, Specifications).
Fill the engine with oil - for filling values on vehicles with
supercharger:
Refer to: Specifications (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L
Clean any residual engine oil from the oil filler cap area.
4.
5.
CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle has been left for 5
minutes from filling with oil.
Follow the Steps 7-11 before starting the engine.
6.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
7.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the selector lever and the gearshift

mechanism are in the park (P) position.
Make sure that the hood is open.

Turn the ignition on.
8.
Scroll through the trip menu to access the
engine oil level display.
9.
Press the cruise control cancel button twice
within 2 seconds.
10.
The message center display will revert to
the normal display in the trip computer.


Check that the oil level display shows an oil
level reading.
Only after having started and run the
engine for 10 minutes (as indicated in Step

6), switch off the engine, then stabilizing
for 10 minutes, take a reading from the oil
level display and, if necessary top up with
engine oil.
11.
NOTE: If instructed to follow Steps 7-11 in a previous step,

return to Step 6 and continue the procedure.
Turn the ignition off.
12.
Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil level to stabilize if there has
been additional oil top up.
13.
NOTE: The following steps are to update the

average oil level value.
Press and hold the cruise control cancel
button for more than 2 seconds.
14.
The message center display will revert to the normal
display in the trip computer.

15.
16.
17.

Make sure that the average oil level value
has now been updated.
18.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Draining and Filling

General Procedures
Draining
scalding.
1.
CAUTION: Make sure the engine is warm.

Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop the
engine.
2.
3.
4.

cover.
Make sure that the O-ring seal is exposed.
5.
NOTE: Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain from the oil
filter housing.
6.
7.
8.
NOTE: Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the oil filter element.

9.
and Installation).
10.
CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping oil.
Allow at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to

drain.
NOTE: Discard the sealing washer.
Filling
1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the area around

the component is clean and free of foreign
material.
NOTE: Install a new sealing washer.
Torque: 24 Nm
2.
and Installation).
3.

clean engine oil.
4.

first.
Torque: 25 Nm
5.

engine.
supercharger:
6.
7.
8.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
9.
CAUTIONS:


10.
11.
within 2 seconds.
12.


level reading.

engine oil.
13.

14.
15.

16.

17.
18.

19.

20.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check

General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1613
Alignment Tool, Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing
Check
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
4.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping oil.

NOTE: Collect the engine oil in a clean container.
5.
6.
CAUTIONS:
Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.
Make sure that the crankshaft is fully locked.

Install the Special Tool(s): 303-1447
7.
Using a suitable marker, mark the position of the

crankshaft pulley as illustrated.
8.
9.
NOTE: Discard the seal.
10.
11.
Remove the Special Tool(s): 303-1447
If required, carefully adjust the crankshaft position

to allow correct installation of the special tool.
Install the Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1613
12.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when

adjusting the crankshaft position.
NOTE: If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be
installed, adjustment of the fuel pump camshaft
timing will be required.
If required, carefully adjust the crankshaft
position to allow correct installation of the

special tool.
If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be
installed, adjustment of the fuel pump

camshaft timing will be required.
Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing
Adjustment (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L
Petrol, General Procedures).
13.
14.
Remove the Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1613
NOTE: Install a new seal.

Torque: 12 Nm
15.
16.
17.
Torque: 10 Nm
18.

Torque: 24 Nm
19.

20.

engine.
supercharger:
21.
22.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
23.
CAUTIONS:


24.
25.
within 2 seconds.
26.


level reading.

engine oil.
27.

28.
29.

30.

31.
32.
33.

34.
and Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment

General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1613
Adjustment
1.

2.

3.
Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check (303-01B Engine V8 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
4.
Refer to: Lower Timing Cover (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

5.
CAUTIONS:

Inspect the 3 timing chain oil nozzles for

signs of damage, install as necessary.
6.
NOTE: Using a suitable tie strap, position the

tensioner to one side.
Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1613
Torque: 12 Nm
7.

8.
9.
Torque: 10 Nm
10.

Torque: 24 Nm
11.

12.

engine.
supercharger:
13.
14.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
15.
CAUTIONS:


16.
17.
within 2 seconds.
18.


level reading.

engine oil.
19.

20.
21.

22.

23.
24.
25.

26.
and Installation).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft LH

Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that the orientation and code on the top of the camshaft bearing caps is noted (along with
the bank - A or B), so that on installation the components are installed to their original position. Failure to follow this
instruction may cause damage to the vehicle.
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Timing Drive Components (303-01, Removal and

Installation).
4.
CAUTIONS:
Rotate the camshafts until all the valves are

at their minimum open point.
Evenly and progressively, release the

camshaft bearing caps.
NOTE: Remove the camshaft bearing caps. Note:
their position, orientation and markings. Each is
marked with its position (number) and an
orientation (arrow).
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
Prior to installing the camshafts, position the

crankshaft 45 degrees ATDC cylinder 1A to prevent
valve/piston collision.
Make sure that the camshafts and camshaft

bearing caps are installed in their original
locations.
Evenly and progressively install and tighten

the camshaft bearing caps.
NOTE: Lubricate the camshafts and the camshaft
bearing caps with EP90 oil (or 75/90 viscosity oil
www.JagDocs.com
will suffice) prior to installation.

Torque: 3 Nm
2.
NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence.

Torque: 12 Nm
3.
CAUTION: Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.

Rotate the crankshaft untill the camshaft lobe on the valve
being checked is 180 degrees from the maximum opening
position.
4.
NOTE: If the valve clearance is incorrect, continue to the next

step. If the valve clearance is correct, continue to step 8.
Using feeler gauge check the gap between the tappet and the
camshaft lobe and check against specifications table.
5.
CAUTIONS:
Do not use a magnet to remove the tappet.
Use the following formula to calculate the required bucket

thickness. Original thickness + measured clearance - desired
clearance = required bucket thickness.
Remove the tappet and measure the thickness.
6.
NOTE: If a new tappet is installed then go back to step 1 of the

install procedure.
Install a new tappet if required.
7.
8.

Installation).
9.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft RH

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.

Installation).
4.
CAUTIONS:


Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:



locations.

Torque: 3 Nm
2.

Torque: 12 Nm
3.

position.
4.

5.
CAUTIONS:


6.

install procedure.
7.
8.

Installation).
9.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Front Seal

Special Tool(s)
303-1434
Remover/Installer, Front Crankshaft Seal
Removal
1.
Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and
Cables, General Procedures).
2.
Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
3.
CAUTION: Do not over tighten the crankshaft front seal.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
vehicle.
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
Do not over tighten the crankshaft front seal. Failure to follow this
Take extra care not to damage the seal.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Pulley

Special Tool(s)
303-1437
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer
303-1438
Crankshaft Damper Bolt Remover/Installer
303-1439
Crankshaft Damper Removal Plate
303-1440
Crankshaft Damper Removal/Installation Stud
303-1441
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer Body
303-1448
Locking Tool
Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
(303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
4.
Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06 Starting System - V8 5.0L

5.
6.
7.
Install the special tool.

8.
CAUTION: Before removing the crankshaft

pulley bolt, note the numbers on the bolt head. If
the bolt head shows 10.9, the bolt must be
removed counter clockwise. If the bolt head shows
12.9, the bolt must be removed clockwise. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the crankshaft.
Note the markings on the crankshaft pulley bolt.
9.
10.

Special Tool(s): 303-1438, 303-1437
11.
12.
Torque: 65 Nm
NOTE: The graphic shows the tool position for LH

thread only, RH thread will be the opposite.
Using a suitable stand, support the special tool.
13.

NOTE: The thread is left handed.
NOTE: The crankshaft pulley bolt will be very tight.
14.
15.
NOTE: If the crankshaft damper is fitted with an

early RH thread crankshaft bolt then the pulley can
be removed with a standard puller.
16.
17.

18.

19.

20.
21.
CAUTION: Discard the friction washer after

removing the crankshaft pulley.
NOTE: Make sure to clean the threads in the end of
the crankshaft and that the crank nose is free of
any foreign materials.
22.
23.
Installation
1.
Apply RTV sealant to the crankshaft pulley
keyway.
Make sure that the RTV sealant is applied in
a 2mm diameter bead.

Make sure that when the RTV sealant is
applied that the RTV sealant is level with

the top of the keyway.
2.
CAUTION: Install a new friction washer

before installing the crankshaft pulley.
NOTE: Skip to step 11 for engines fitted with early
RH thread crankshaft bolt.
3.
4.

Torque: 15 Nm
5.
6.
CAUTION: Rotate the crankshaft pulley

installation tool anti-clockwise until the pulley is
fully located, do not over tighten. Failure to do this
may result in damge to the components.
7.
8.
9.
10.
WARNING: Make sure that a new bolt is

installed.
Apply loctite 270 to the thread of the bolts.
Torque: 65 Nm
11.
12.

installed.
13.
14.
Torque: 65 Nm
15.

16.
Torque: 200 Nm
17.
NOTE: The use of a torque multiplyer capable of

600Nm will be required.
Torque: 270
Make sure that the socket is turned through
270 degrees not the torque wrench.
18.
19.
20.

Torque: 65 Nm
21.
22.
23.

24.
Refer to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
(303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
25.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Rear Seal

Special Tool(s)
303-1442
Rear Crankshaft Seal Installer
303-1443
Rear Crankshaft Cover Alignment Tool
Removal
1.
Refer to: Flexplate (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

2.
Installation
1.

Special Tool(s): 303-1442, 303-1443
2.

Torque: 11 Nm
3.
4.
Torque: 11 Nm
Refer to: Flexplate (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

4.
Refer to: Exhaust Manifold (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5.
6.

correct.
CAUTION: Discard the seals.
7.
8.
NOTE: Discard the gasket.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: An acceptable flatness of the

cylinder head is 0.1mm.
NOTE: For cylinder head with distortion above the
maximum allowance, the cylinder head material
must be measured.
Check cylinder head face for distortion, across the
center and from corner to corner.
2.
WARNING: Make sure care is taken when

handling the cylinder head gasket.
CAUTION: The head gasket must be installed

over the cylinder block dowels.
NOTE: Install a new cylinder head gasket.
3.
CAUTION: Make sure that new cylinder head

bolts are installed.
Torque: 20 Nm
4.

Torque: 35 Nm
5.

Torque: 90
6.

Torque: 120
7.
Torque: 25 Nm
8.

Torque: 12 Nm
9.
CAUTION: Install the new seals.

Torque: 10 Nm
10.
11.

12.
Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

13.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head RH

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

4.

5.
6.
CAUTIONS:
Discard the seal.
LH illustration shown, RH is similar.

NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.
7.
8.
9.
NOTE: Clamp the hose to minimize coolant loss.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
CAUTIONS:
If a new cylinder head has been installed

then new tappets must be installed.
If the cylinder head is being removed without

a new component being installed, the tappets must
be installed in their original positions.
18.
19.
Installation
1.

must be measured.
2.

CAUTION: The head gasket must be installed

over the cylinder block dowels.
NOTE: Install a new gasket.
3.

Torque: 20 Nm
4.

Torque: 35 Nm
5.

Torque: 90
6.

Torque: 120
7.
8.
Torque: 25 Nm

Torque: 12 Nm
9.
CAUTIONS:


Lubricate the valve tappets with clean engine oil.
10.
11.
CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be

installed.
NOTE: Install a new engine oil filter.
12.
Torque: 12 Nm
13.
Torque: 20 Nm
14.
Torque: 20 Nm
15.

Torque: 10 Nm
16.
CAUTION: Install a new seal.

Torque: 12 Nm
17.
Torque: 25 Nm
18.
Torque: 25 Nm
19.

20.
Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

21.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount LH

Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
All vehicles
4.


5.
6.

Torque: 35 Nm
7.
Torque: 100 Nm
All vehicles
8.
Torque: 63 Nm
9.
Torque: 48 Nm
10.

Torque: 48 Nm
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount RH

Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
All vehicles
4.


5.
6.

Torque: 35 Nm
7.
Torque: 100 Nm
Installation
1.
All vehicles
8.
Torque: 10 Nm
9.
Torque: 63 Nm
10.
Torque: 48 Nm
11.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold

Special Tool(s)
303-1444-01
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
E115262
303-1444-02
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.

3.
Refer to: Power Steering Pump (211-02 Power Steering,

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

11.

correct.
12.
All vehicles
13.
14.
Refer to: Catalytic Converter (309-00 Exhaust System - V8 5.0L

15.
16.

NOTE: Make sure that the position of the spacers is
noted before removal of the manifold.
17.

Installation
All vehicles
1.
Torque: 45 Nm
2.

Special Tool(s): 303-1444-01, 303-1444-02
3.
NOTE: If a new cylinder head is installed use the

special tools in the illustration.
Special Tool(s): 303-1444-02
4.
CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are

installed.
NOTE: Install the spacers in the noted position.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.

installed.
Torque: 10 Nm
7.
Torque: 18 Nm
8.
9.

10.

11.
Torque: 100 Nm
12.

installed.
correct.
Torque: 35 Nm
All vehicles
13.
Torque: 25 Nm
14.
Torque: 25 Nm
15.
Torque: 10 Nm
16.
Torque: 10 Nm
17.
Torque: 25 Nm
18.
Torque: 3 Nm
19.
Torque: 3 Nm
20.

21.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold RH

Removal
1.

2.
3.
Refer to: Catalytic Converter RH (309-00 Exhaust System - V8

4.
Torque: 12 Nm
5.
Torque: 48 Nm
6.

Torque: 35 Nm
7.
Torque: 100 Nm
8.
9.
10.

11.

Installation
1.
Torque: 45 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
2.

3.

4.

installed.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.

installed.
Torque: 10 Nm
7.
Torque: 18 Nm
8.
9.
Torque: 12 Nm
10.
11.
Torque: 48 Nm

Torque: 35 Nm
12.
Torque: 100 Nm
13.
14.

15.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Flexplate

Removal
1.

2.
3.
Refer to: Transmission (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Installation).
4.
CAUTIONS:
Install all the bolts finger tight before final

tightening.
The bolts can only be used 3 times, mark the

bolts with a center punch. If 2 punch marks are
visible, discard the bolts.
Make sure that no components fall off during

removal.
Install the bolts in the noted position.

NOTE: Make sure the crankshaft and flexplate
mating faces are clean before installation.
NOTE: Make sure that the crankshaft is not
rotated.
NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts working
diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1: 45 Nm
Stage 2: 90
Installation
1.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Cooler

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Supercharger (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and

Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4.
Refer to: Cooling System Draining and Vacuum Filling (303-03A

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
5.
6.
7.
CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping coolant.

Torque: 13 Nm
8.

9.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that these components are

installed to the noted removal position.
Install new o-ring seals
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:

tightening.

Install the new seals.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Filter Element

Removal
1.
2.
Allow the engine oil to drain from the oil
filter element housing for two minutes.
3.
4.
1.
Installation
2.
Torque: 25 Nm
3.
4.
Start and run the engine.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pan

Removal
1.

stands.
2.
Refer to: Engine Oil Level Sensor (303-14B Electronic Engine

3.
Installation
1.
Apply a continuous bead of RTV sealant (Loctite

5901) 3 mm diameter, around the flange as
indicated.
2.
3.
Torque: 12 Nm
Refer to: Engine Oil Level Sensor (303-14B Electronic Engine

Published: 21-Nov-2011
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pan Extension

Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Lower Timing Cover Alignment tool
303-1442
303-1443
Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

4.
Refer to: Engine (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

Removal).
5.
CAUTIONS:


removal.
rotated.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
NOTE: The high-pressure fuel pumps are removed

from the illustration for clarity.
16.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
17.
18.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
19.
20.
21.
22.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
Discard the fuel pipes.
23.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
24.
25.

fluids.
26.

fluids.
27.
28.

fluids.
29.
30.
31.

fluids.

fluids.
32.
33.

dismantling.
34.
NOTE: Discard the component.
35.
36.
NOTE: Make sure to use the aluminium lug

provided on the oil pan extension to lever against.
37.

Installation
1.
Torque: 8 Nm
2.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean

and free of foreign material.
Use only a plastic scraper when removing the

sealing material.
Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6 (Loctite
5901G) to the areas shown, and tighten the

bolts within 7 minutes.
3.

Torque: 25 Nm
4.
CAUTIONS:


sealing material.
Apply RTV sealant WSE-M4G323-A6
(Loctite 5901G) to the areas shown, and

tighten the bolts within 7 minutes.
5.

Torque: 12 Nm
6.

5901G) to the areas shown, and tighten the bolts
within 7 minutes.
7.

NOTE: Install new lower timing cover.
Install the bolts, but do not tighten fully at this
stage.
8.

Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
9.
Torque: 12 Nm
10.
11.
12.
Torque: 10 Nm
Special Tool(s): 303-1442, 303-1443
Remove the special tools.

13.

Torque: 11 Nm
14.
Torque: 11 Nm
15.
Torque: 11 Nm
16.
NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail high-pressure fuel

pump bucket with clean engine oil.
17.
CAUTION: Tighten the Torx screws a turn at

a time until the correct torque is achieved.
pump O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Torque: 11 Nm
18.
Loosen the Torx screws half a turn each.
19.
20.

21.

Torque: 11 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
22.
23.
24.
CAUTIONS:
Install new high-pressure fuel supply lines.
Lubricate only the union threads with clean

engine oil.
NOTE: Remove and discard the blanking caps.
NOTE: Install the bolt and unions fully finger tight
before final tightening.
25.
CAUTION: Care must be taken when

positioning the fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump
cover to one side.
NOTE: Fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump cover
shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 11 Nm
26.

cover to one side.
Torque: 11 Nm
27.
NOTE: Do not tighten at this stage.

28.
Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
29.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
30.
NOTE: Install the bolt and unions finger tight

Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
31.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
32.
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
33.
34.
Torque: 25 Nm
35.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
36.
37.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
38.

39.
40.
Torque: 40 Nm
41.
Torque: 25 Nm
42.
Torque: 25 Nm
43.
Torque: 55 Nm
44.
Torque: 12 Nm
45.
CAUTION: Install all the bolts finger tight

Torque: 25 Nm
46.
47.

Torque: 48 Nm
48.
CAUTIONS:

tightening.


rotated.
diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1: 45 Nm
Stage 2: 90
49.
Refer to: Engine (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

Removal).
50.

51.
Lower the vehicle.
52.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pump

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Oil Pan Extension (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

4.
NOTE: Tsubaki timing drive only.
5.
NOTE: INA timing drive only.
6.
7.
CAUTION: Remove and discard the O-ring

seal.
8.

seals.
9.

seal.
Installation
1.
NOTE: Lubricate and install the new O-ring seals.
2.

Torque:
M8 25 Nm
M6 12 Nm
3.
4.
Torque: 12 Nm
5.
Torque: 21 Nm
6.

Install the lower timing chain making sure the
coloured chain links align correctly with the fuel
rail high-pressure fuel pumps camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket markings.
7.
CAUTION: Make sure that the tensioner

spring is correctly located.
Torque: 21 Nm
8.

coloured chain links align correctly with the fuel rail
high-pressure fuel pumps camshaft and crankshaft
sprocket markings.
9.

Torque: 21 Nm
10.

11.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Timing Cover

Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-05

Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
4.
Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

(303-05 Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
5.
Refer to: Thermostat Housing - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-03A

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
6.
Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

7.
Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

8.

9.
10.
11.
Installation
1.

2.

3.

Torque: 12 Nm
4.

Torque: 12 Nm
5.
6.

within 7 minutes.

stage.
7.

Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
8.

9.
Torque: 12 Nm
10.
Torque: 12 Nm
11.
Torque: 12 Nm
12.

13.
Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

14.
Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

15.

and Installation).
16.
Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

(303-05 Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
17.
Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-05

and Installation).
18.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Timing Drive Components Assembly Part

Number: INA Timing Drive
Special Tool(s)
303-1445
Timing Tool Camshaft Alignment
303-1447
Timing Tool
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1452
Camshaft Rotating Tool
303-1482
Tensioner Tool
Removal
CAUTION: Check all timing components for wear and install new components if required.
1.

Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting
and Cables, General Procedures).
2.

3.
Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
4.
5.

6.
CAUTION: If the noted postion of the woodruff key

is at the 9 o'clock position, then a new flexplate must be
installed. If the woodruff key is in the 6 o'clock position
then proceed with the next step.
Note the position of the crankshaft woodruff key.
7.
8.
9.
10.
CAUTION: If the variable valve timing (VVT) units

are knocked or dropped then the VVT must be replaced.
Remove the timing chain with the VVT units.
11.
12.
13.
14.
CAUTION: If the VVT is knocked or dropped then

the VVT must be replaced.
15.
16.
CAUTION: Discard the friction washer.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Install a new friction washer.
www.JagDocs.com
2.
Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Install the special tool to each Camshaft.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
Carefully rotate the camshafts if the position is
not as shown.
5.
Install the special tool 303-1445 to the rear of the
camshafts making sure the key way's are

correctly located into each slot on each of the
camshafts.
6.
CAUTIONS:
Do not overturn the camshafts.
Tighten the wing nuts finger tight. Failure to follow

this instruction may result in damage to the components.
Using a suitable tool, carefully rock the camshaft
clockwise then anti-clockwise. Turn the special

tool locking nuts until there is no movement left
in camshafts.
Repeat steps 3- 6 for the camshafts on the other
cylinder head.
7.
CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the camshaft to rotate.
If the VVT is knocked or dropped then the VVT

must be replaced.
Install the timing chain with the variable valve
timing (VVT) units.
8.
Make sure that all the timing chain alignment marks are in the
positions shown.
9.
Torque: 25 Nm
10.
Make sure the tensioner piston is fully extended. Then

fully depress and lock the tensioner piston with the
grenade pin before installation, failure to do this may
result in damage to the engine.
11.
CAUTION: Do not release the timing chain tensioner

locking pin at this stage.
Torque: 10 Nm
12.
CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the camshafts to rotate.

must be replaced.
Install the timing chain with the VVT units.
13.
positions shown.
14.
15.
Torque: 25 Nm

16.

Torque: 10 Nm
17.
18.
CAUTION: Do not use mechanical force.

Make sure that the tensioners are fully deployed.
19.
Release and reposition the oil suction tube to one
side.
20.
21.
CAUTIONS:
Apply the torque to the end of the special tool.
Make sure that the torque wrench is aligned with

the special tool as illustrated in the graphic.
Install the torque wrench to the special tool.
Torque: 35 Nm
22.
CAUTION: Make sure that the torque wrench does

not move whilst tightening the VVT bolts.
NOTE: Make sure to tighten the exhaust VVT unit bolts
first.
Torque: 32 Nm
23.
Install the oil suction tube.
Torque: 10 Nm
24.
25.
CAUTIONS:

Torque: 35 Nm
26.

NOTE: Make sure to tighten the inlet VVT unit bolts first.
Torque: 32 Nm
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
CAUTION: Install the crankshaft pulley bolt with an

M16 washer to prevent damage to the crankshaft on
installation.
Torque: 50 Nm
32.
33.
Rotate the engine two complete turns clockwise.
34.

35.
36.
37.
38.
CAUTIONS:
If the special tool cannot be installed, return to step

22 of the installation until the special tool 303-1445 is
installed correctly.
If directed to step 22, make sure that the VVT unit

retaining bolts are loosened prior to installing the special
tool(s).
39.
CAUTION: If the special tool cannot be installed,

the timing chain installation steps must be repeated.
40.
41.
42.
43.
Torque: 10 Nm
44.
and Installation).
45.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Timing Drive Components Assembly Part

Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Special Tool(s)
303-1445
303-1447
Timing Tool
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1452
303-1482
Tensioner Tool
Removal
1.

2.

3.
4.

5.

6.
and Installation).
7.
8.
9.
10.

11.
12.
13.
14.

15.
16.
CAUTION: Discard the friction washers.
Installation
1.
2.
CAUTION: Install new friction washers.
Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Install the special tool to the LH bank Camshafts.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
not as shown.
5.

camshafts.
6.
CAUTIONS:


in camshafts.
cylinder head.
7.
CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.
timing (VVT) units.
8.
positions shown.
9.
Torque: 25 Nm
10.

Torque: 10 Nm
11.
CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.
12.
positions shown.
13.
Torque: 25 Nm
14.

Torque: 10 Nm
15.
16.

17.
www.JagDocs.com
18.

19.
side.
20.
21.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the torque wench is aligned with the

special tool as illustrated in the graphic.
Torque: 35 Nm
22.

first.
Torque: 32 Nm
23.
Torque: 10 Nm
24.
25.
CAUTIONS:


Torque: 35 Nm
26.

Torque: 32 Nm
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.

installation.
Torque: 50 Nm
32.
33.

34.
35.
36.
37.

38.
CAUTIONS:


tool(s).
39.

40.
41.
42.
43.
Torque: 10 Nm
44.
and Installation).
45.

Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover LH

Removal
1.

2.
3.

4.
Refer to: Fuel Rail LH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5.

correct.
Torque: 10 Nm
6.

correct.
7.

correct.
Installation
1.
2.

Torque: 13 Nm
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover RH

Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8

5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
3.

4.
5.

correct.
6.

correct.
Installation
1.
2.

Torque: 13 Nm
Published: 23-Jul-2011
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Block Oil Gallery Plug

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Exhaust Manifold RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

4.
5.
Torque: 48 Nm
6.
7.
Torque:
Stage 1: 40 Nm
Stage 2: 180
Installation
1.
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part

Number: INA Timing Drive
Removal
NOTE: Some illustrations may show the engine removed for clarity.
1.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,
Specifications).
2.

stands.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION: Take extra care when removing

the component, prevent damage to the mating
faces.
1.

Installation
2.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the

mating faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Torque: 21 Nm
4.
Torque: 12 Nm
5.

sprocket markings.
6.

Torque: 21 Nm
7.

8.

Specifications).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part

Number: Tsubaki Timing Drive
Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

stands.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.

faces.
1.

Installation
2.

mating faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Torque: 21 Nm
4.
Torque: 12 Nm
5.

6.

Torque: 21 Nm
7.

8.

Specifications).
Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Lower Timing Cover

Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.

4.
5.
6.
Refer to: Brake Vacuum Pump (206-07 Power Brake Actuation,

7.
Installation
1.

within 7 minutes.
2.

stage.
3.

Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
4.
5.
Torque: 12 Nm

6.
7.
Torque: 25 Nm
NOTE: Install the bolt finger tight before final

tightening.
Torque: 40 Nm
8.
Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

9.

10.

engine.
supercharger:
11.
12.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
13.
CAUTIONS:


14.
15.
within 2 seconds.
16.


level reading.

engine oil.
17.

18.
19.

20.

21.
22.
23.

24.
and Installation).

Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-1435
Engine Lifting Brackets Rear
303-1436
Engine Lifting Bracket Front
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12A Intake

Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
4.
Refer to: Cowl Vent Screen (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
5.

Installation).
6.

Procedures).
7.
Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A, General

Procedures).
8.
Evacuate the air conditioning (A/C) system.

Refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation
and Charging (412-00 Climate Control System - General
9.
10.
11.
Refer to: Hood (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and

Installation).
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Special Tool(s): 303-1435, 303-1436
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
CAUTION: Take extra care when handling the component.

NOTE: This step requires the aid of another technician.
Remove the special tool supporting the engine.
38.
NOTE: This step requires the aid of another

technician.
Using a suitable tool, remove the engine.

Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-1435
303-1436
1.

technician.
Using a suitable tool, install the engine.
2.

3.
Torque: 45 Nm
4.
Torque: 25 Nm
5.
Torque: 10 Nm
6.
Torque: 25 Nm
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Torque: 6 Nm
14.
Torque: 3 Nm
15.
Torque: 4 Nm
16.
17.
18.
Torque: 10 Nm
19.
Torque: 12 Nm
20.
Torque: 12 Nm
21.
22.
Torque: 25 Nm
23.
Special Tool(s): 303-1435, 303-1436
24.
Torque: 25 Nm
25.
26.
27.
28.

Installation).
29.
Torque: 45 Nm
30.
Torque: 45 Nm
31.

32.
Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01, General

Procedures).
33.

Procedures).
34.

Installation).
35.

Installation).
36.
37.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol Engine Data
Engine
Maximum Engine
Maximum Engine
Compression
Engine Description Capacity Torque (EEC) (SAE) Power (EEC) (SAE)
Ratio
90 "Vee" 8
4.999 ccm 515 Nm at 3.500 RPM 283 kW at 6.500 RPM
11.5 0.5
Cylinder 32 Valves
Bore
Stroke
92.509 93 0.1
0.009 mm
mm
Engine Firing Order
Firing Order
1:2:7:3:4:5:6:8
Engine Valve Clearance (cold)
Intake Valve
N/A
Exhaust Valve
0.25 mm 0.02
Specification
ILKR6C-10
Spark Plug Gap

1 mm
Spark Plugs
Lubricants,Fluids,Sealers and Adhesives
Description
Engine Oil
Sealant
Core plug and stub pipe retainer
Jaguar Premium Cooling System Fluid
Specification
WSS-M2C925-A
WSE-M4G323-A6
WSK-M2G349-A7
WSS-M97B44-D
Capacities
Description
Engine oil, initial fill
Engine oil, service fill with oil filter change
Liters
8.75
7.25
Cylinder Head and Valve Train
Item
Cylinder head maximum permitted warp (mm) (flatnes specfication)
overall
over 150x150 mm area
over 25x25 mm area
Valve guide inner diameter (mm)
Intake valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line)
Exhaust valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line)
Valve stem to guide clearance intake diametrical (mm)
Valve stem to guide clearance exhaust diametrical (mm)
Valve head diameter intake (mm)
Valve head diameter exhaust (mm)
Intake valve face angle (degrees)
Exhaust valve face angle (degrees)
Valve stem diameter intake (mm)
Valve stem diameter exhaust (mm)
Valve spring free length (mm) - inlet
Valve spring free length (mm) - exhaust
Valve spring installed height (mm) - inlet
Valve spring installed height (mm) - exhaust
Camshaft lobe lift intake (mm)
Camshaft lobe lift exhaust (mm)
Camshaft journal to cylinder head bearing surface clearance diametrical (mm)
Camshaft journal diameter - all positions
Bearing diameter - all positions
Camshaft journal maximum run out limit (mm)
Camshaft journals to end journals
Camshaft journals to adjacent journals
Camshaft journal maximum out of round (mm) - all journals
Torque Specification
NOTE: A = Refer to procedure for correct torque sequence.
Specification
0.08
0.05
0.02
5.51 0.01
97.63 0.1
94.39 0.1
0.022 - 0.057
0.03 - 0.065
36 0.1
30 0.1
44.875 0.125
44.875 0.125
5.4705 0.0075
5.4625 0.0075
43.43
46.1
34.49
35.1
5.5 (low) 10.53 (high)
9.36
0.025 - 0.065
26.965 0.01
27.01 0.01
0.03
0.015
0.005
Description
Engine cover mounting bolts
Nm
10
lb-ft
7
lb-in
-

Accessory drive belt idler retaining bolt
Power steering pump bracket to engine retaining bolts
Air conditioning compressor retaining bolts
Engine mounting to engine mounting bracket retaining nuts
Engine mounting to subframe retaining nuts
Engine mounting bracket to engine retaining bolts
Crankshaft damper pulley retaining LH threaded bolt
Flexplate retaining bolts
Exhaust manifold heat shield retaining bolts
Exhaust manifold retaining bolts
Engine wiring harness bracket retaining bolts
Knock sensor (KS) retaining bolt
Ignition coil retaining bolts
Spark plugs
Fuel rail retaining bolts
High Pressure fuel pipe retaining bolts
High pressure fuel pump retaining bolts
Oil filter housing assembly retaining bolts
Oil filter cap
Lifting eye bolts
CPS solenoid retaining bolts
Variable valve timing (VVT) oil control solenoid retaining bolts
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor retaining bolts
Camshaft cover retaining bolts
Front upper timing cover retaining bolts
Front lower timing cover retaining bolts
Engine rear cover retaining bolts
VVT to camshaft retaining bolts
Camshaft bearing caps retaining bolts
Primary timing chain fixed guide retaining bolts
Primary timing chain tensioner retaining bolts
Primary timing chain tensioner guide blade retaining bolts
Auxiliary chain tensioner guide retaining bolts
Auxiliary chain fixed guide retaining bolt
Oil pump sprocket retaining bolt
Cylinder head retaining bolts
Engine oil level (EOL) sensor retaining bolt
Oil pan to oil sump body retaining bolts
Oil sump body to engine retaining bolts
Oil pan drain plug
Oil transfer tube to Oil pan body retaining bolts
Oil pump to engine block retaining bolts
Pick-up pipe to oil pump retaining bolts
Windage tray retaining bolts
Engine block coolant draining plug
Connecting Rod bolts
Stage 1
Stage 2
Main bearing cap
M10 bolt Stage 1
M10 bolt Stage 2
M8 bolt Stage 1
M8 bolt Stage 2
40
25
25
25
48
48
25
48
63
48
200 + 270
45 + 90
A
A
10
25
13
20
8
20
A
A
12
12
28
25 + 90
12
12
10
10
13
12
A
A
32
11
12
12
25
21
12
21
A
12
12
25
23
11
25
12
25
50
30
18
18
18
35
35
18
35
46
35
148 + 270
33 + 90
7
18
10
14
15
9
9
21
18 + 90
9
9
7
7
10
9
24
8
9
9
18
15
9
15
9
9
18
17
8
18
9
18
37
71
-
10
50
7
37
25
57 + 70
15
33 + 75
18
42 + 70
11
24 + 75
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine

EXTERNAL VIEW
INTRODUCTION
The 5.0L NA (naturally aspirated) gasoline engine is a liquid cooled V8 unit featuring direct fuel injection, four overhead
camshafts and four valves per cylinder. All four camshafts incorporate VCT (variable camshaft timing). The intake camshafts
and valves also incorporate CPS (camshaft profile switching).
The main structural components of the engine are all manufactured from aluminum alloy. The engine is built around a very
stiff, lightweight, enclosed V, deep skirt cylinder block. A structural windage tray is bolted to the bottom of the cylinder block
to further improve the block stiffness, minimize NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) and help reduce oil foaming. To further
enhance the stiffness of the lower engine structure, a heavily ribbed sump body is installed. The sump body also helps to
reduce engine noise.
Engine Structure
Item
Part Number
Description
LH (left hand) cylinder head (bank B)
Cylinder block
Windage tray
Sump body
Sump pan
RH (right hand) cylinder head (bank A)
CYLINDER BLOCK
The cylinder block is a 90 degree configuration with cast-in iron cylinder liners and an open deck die-cast coolant jacket. The
low volume coolant jacket gives good warm-up times and low piston noise levels. The longitudinal flow design of the coolant
jacket, with a single cylinder head coolant transfer port in each bank, provides good rigidity and head gasket sealing.
The cylinders in each bank are numbered from 1 to 4, with number 1 at the front.
Engine Data Location
Item
Part Number
Description
Engine data location
Engine data is marked on the cylinder block at the rear of the RH cylinder bank.
CRANKSHAFT
The crankshaft is made from spheroidal graphite cast iron, which, compared with grey cast iron, has higher mechanical
strength, ductility and increased shock resistance. The undercut and rolled fillets also improve strength. Eight counterbalance weights ensure low vibration levels and the large, cross-drilled main bearing journals are designed to contribute to
stiffness.
An oil groove in the upper half of each main bearing transfers the oil into the crankshaft for lubrication of the connecting rod
bearings. A thrust washer is installed each side of the top half of the center main bearing.
Crankshaft Data Location
Item
Part Number
Description
Pin journal classification and plant identification
Main journal classification
Date and time codes
The main bearings are numbered 1 to 5 starting from the front of the engine. There are five grades of main bearing
available, each being color coded. Journal sizes are marked on the rear of the crankshaft.
For additional information, refer to: Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Clearance (303-00 Engine System - General
Crankshaft Installation
Item
Part Number
Description
Coolant drain plug
Torque converter access plug
Drive plate
Rear cover
Main bearing cap
Identification mark
Front cover
Front pulley
8
The main bearing caps are made from cast iron and are cross bolted to increase rigidity. An identification mark on the
bearing cap faces the front of the engine.
At the front of the crankshaft, a tuned torsional vibration damper is incorporated into the crankshaft front pulley. At the rear
of the crankshaft a pressed steel drive plate, with a steel starter ring gear, is installed to transfer drive from the engine to
the transmission. The reluctor ring for the CKP (crankshaft position) sensor is integrated into the perimeter of the drive
plate.
The crankshaft seals are located in the front and rear covers.
PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS
The diameter of each piston is graded and precisely matched to each cylinder bore to help reduce noise. In the vertical
plane, the pistons have a slight barrel form, which helps to ensure a reliable oil film is maintained between the piston and
the cylinder bore. A solid film lubricant coating is applied to both reaction faces of the piston to reduce wear and improve
fuel economy.
A three-ring piston-sealing system is used. The steel top ring is treated with a PVD (physical vapor deposition) peripheral
coating. PVD is a coating technique where material can be deposited with improved properties to ensure good cylinder bore
compatibility and wear resistance. A Napier center ring helps cylinder pressure and oil management, while the three-piece oil
control lower ring is produced from nitrided steel.
The connecting rods are forged from high strength steel. The cap is fracture-split from the rod to ensure precision reassembly for bearing shell alignment. There are three grades of large end bearing available, each being color coded.
Cap Alignment with Connecting Rod
Item
Part Number
Description
Alignment marks
Connecting rod
Cap
Bearings
The correct alignment of the cap with the connecting rod is indicated by marks on adjacent faces of the two components.
Connecting Rod and Piston Orientation
Item
Part Number
Description
Front of engine
Alignment mark
LH side (bank B)
Alignment mark
RH side (bank A)
Piston orientation arrow
The orientation of the connecting rods and pistons on the crankshaft are given below:
Bank A - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod alignment
marks must face the rear of the engine.

Bank B - The arrow on the piston crown must face the front of the engine and the cap and connecting rod alignment
marks must face the front of the engine.
CYLINDER HEADS
NOTE: RH (right-hand) (A bank) cylinder head shown, LH (left-hand) (B bank) cylinder head similar.
The cylinder heads are manufactured in gravity die cast aluminum alloy and are unique for each cylinder bank. Deep-seated
bolts reduce distortion and secure the cylinder heads to the cylinder block.
Each cylinder is served by four valves. To help achieve the required gas-flow characteristics, these are arranged
asymmetrically around the cylinder bore. Each cylinder has a centrally mounted fuel injector and spark plug.
The cylinder head gasket is of a multi-layer steel construction.
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
NOTE: LH (B bank) installation shown, RH (A bank) installation similar.
Item
Part Number
Description
Cylinder head
Gasket
Heat shield
Gasket
Exhaust manifold
Bolt (8 off)
Heat shield
Bolt (4 off)
Spacer (8 off)
The high SiMo (silicon molybdenum) cast iron exhaust manifolds are unique for each cylinder bank. Each exhaust manifold
installation includes two metal gaskets and two heat shields. Spacers on the securing bolts allow the manifolds to expand
and contract with changes of temperature while maintaining the clamping loads.
www.JagDocs.com
VALVE TRAIN
Item
Part Number
Description
VCT solenoids
CPS solenoids
Inverted tooth timing chain
Nylon chain guide
Auxiliary chain tensioner
Oil pump drive
Auxiliary drive camshaft
Timing chain tensioner
10
Tensioner lever
11
VCT unit
Camshafts
Item
Part Number
Description
Intake camshaft
Exhaust camshaft
The lightweight valve train provides good economy and noise levels and is chain driven from the crankshaft.
Double overhead camshafts on each cylinder head operate the valves. For each cylinder head, an inverted tooth timing chain
transfers drive from the crankshaft to the VCT unit on the front of each camshaft. Graded tappets enable setting of exhaust
valve clearances. Switchable tappets with hydraulic lash adjusters are installed on the intake valves.
Each timing chain has a hydraulic tensioner operated by engine oil pressure. The chain tensioners incorporate a ratchet
mechanism, which maintains tension while the engine is stopped to eliminate start-up noise. The chains are lubricated with
engine oil from jets located at the front of the engine block. Nylon chain guides control chain motion on the drive side.
Item
Part Number
Description
VCT units
Intake camshaft VCT solenoid
Camshaft position sensors
Exhaust camshaft VCT solenoid
The VCT system varies the timing of the intake and exhaust camshafts to deliver optimum engine power, efficiency and
emissions. The timing of the intake camshafts has a range of 62 degrees of crankshaft angle. The timing of the exhaust
camshafts has a range of 50 degrees of crankshaft angle.
In the base timing position:
The intake camshafts are fully retarded.
The exhaust camshafts are fully advanced.
VCT Operating Ranges
Camshaft
Valve Opens
Valve Closes
Intake - Low Lift 27 degrees BTDC (before top dead center) to 35 degrees ATDC (after top dead
187 to 249 degrees
center)
ATDC
Intake - High
37 degrees BTDC to 25 degrees ATDC
213 to 275 degrees
Lift
ATDC
Exhaust
244 to 194 degrees BTDC
6 to 56 degrees ATDC
The system consists of a VCT unit and a VCT solenoid for each camshaft. The ECM (engine control module) controls the
system using PWM (pulse width modulation) signals to the VCT solenoids.
The torsional energy generated by the valve springs and the inertia of the valve train components are used to operate the
system.
Variable Camshaft Timing Units

The VCT units change the position of the camshafts in relation to the timing chains.
Item
Part Number
Description
Bolt (3 off)
VCT unit
Filter
Camshaft
Inner plate
Housing and sprocket
Rotor assembly
Reed plate
Spring and lock pin
10
Spring (3 off)
11
Tip seal (3 off)
12
Spring (2 off)
13
Tip seal (2 off)
14
Spring
15
Dowel pin
16
Bias spring
17
18
Snap ring
Reluctor ring
19
Center plate
20
Snap ring
21
Screw (6 off)
22
Spool valve
23
Outer plate
Each VCT unit is attached to the camshaft by three bolts. A rotor assembly and a reed plate are installed inside a sprocket
housing, which consists of a sprocket, an outer plate and an inner plate held together by six screws.
A reluctor ring, for the CMP (camshaft position) sensor, a center plate and a bias spring are installed at the front of the VCT
unit. The ends of the bias spring locate on the center plate assembly and the sprocket housing, to give a turning moment to
the camshaft in the advance direction. A snap ring locates the reluctor ring on to a sleeve installed in the center of the rotor
assembly. The opposite end of the sleeve locates in a bore in the front face of the camshaft, which contains a filter.
A spring and spool valve are installed in the rotor assembly sleeve and retained by a snap ring. The spring keeps the spool
valve in contact with the armature of the related VCT solenoid.
Each VCT unit is supplied with engine oil from an oil gallery in the cylinder head, through the camshaft front bearing cap and
a bore in the center of the camshaft.
Variable Camshaft Timing Solenoids
The VCT solenoids control the position of the spool valves in the VCT units.
The VCT solenoids are installed in the front upper timing covers, immediately in front of their related VCT units. Each VCT
solenoid is secured with two screws and sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface with the
engine harness.
Each VCT solenoid incorporates a spindle that acts on the spool valve in the related VCT unit to advance and retard the
camshaft timing. The VCT solenoids operate independently and are controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM.
Variable Camshaft Timing Operation
When the engine is running, the compression and expansion of the valve springs causes momentary increases and decreases
in the torque acting on the camshafts. These momentary changes of torque are sensed in the VCT units and used to change
the camshaft timing.
Camshaft Torsional Energy (For a Single Valve Event)
Item
Part Number
Description
Camshaft torque
Camshaft rotation (degrees)
Valve opening
Peak lift
Valve closing
1000 rev/min
4000 rev/min
7000 rev/min
Inertia effects from valve train rotating components
Force caused by valve spring
Bias torque from friction
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Base Timing

NOTE: Intake camshaft VCT unit shown. For exhaust camshaft VCT unit, read advance for retard and retard for advance.
Item
Part Number
Description
Advance chamber
Retard chamber
Sprocket housing
Rotor assembly
Lock pin
Sleeve
Engine oil supply from camshaft
Inlet check valve
Lock pin drain
10
Spool valve
11
Advance check valve
12
Retard check valve
NOTE: The following description is for intake camshaft VCT units. For exhaust camshaft VCT units, read advance for retard,
and retard for advance.
At engine start-up, once the engine oil pressure in the camshaft is sufficient to open the inlet check valve, engine oil flows
across the spool valve, through the advance and retard check valves and into the advance and retard chambers. During the
start cycle, the ECM signals the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve into the sleeve and connect the lock pin to inlet oil
pressure. The inlet oil pressure causes the lock pin to retract from the inner plate and unlock the rotor assembly and
camshaft from the sprocket housing.
There is a constant supply of oil to the VCT to ensure the unit remains filled during operation.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Advance
To advance the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve so that the advance
chamber oil passage is closed and the retard chamber oil passage is connected to inlet oil.
Each momentary increase of the torque acting on the camshaft generates a pressure pulse in the retard chamber. Oil moves
from the retard chamber, through the spool valve and the advance check valve to the advance chamber, to equalize the
pressures in the two chambers. The displacement of oil from the retard chamber causes the rotor assembly to advance in
relation to the sprocket housing. Each momentary decrease of torque acting on the camshaft also generates a pressure pulse
in the advance chamber, but, with the advance chamber oil passage closed, no movement of oil between the advance and
retard chambers occurs and the rotor assembly cannot move in the retard direction.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Null
Once the camshaft has reached the required timing position the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to set the spool
valve in the null position. In the null position, the advance and retard chamber oil passages are both closed by the spool
valve and the rotor assembly is hydraulically locked to the sprocket housing.
Variable Camshaft Timing Unit Schematic - Retard
To retard the camshaft timing, the ECM adjusts the signal to the VCT solenoid to move the spool valve to close the retard
chamber oil passage and connect the advance chamber oil passage to the inlet oil.
Each momentary decrease of the torque acting on the camshaft causes oil to transfer from the advance chamber, through
the spool valve and the retard check valve to the retard chamber, and so retard the camshaft timing.
Camshaft Profile Switching
The CPS (camshaft profile switching) system switches the intake valves between two cam profiles which have different lift
and period. The low lift profile improves driveability and emissions at lower engine speeds. The high lift profile improves
power and torque output at higher engine speeds.
The intake camshafts have three lobes for each valve. The two outer lobes have identical profiles that produce the high lift of
10.53 mm (0.415 in.). The central lobe produces the low lift of 5.50 mm (0.217 in.). Switching between cam profiles is
performed by a switchable tappet on each intake valve. The switchable tappets are operated by engine oil controlled by a
CPS solenoid on each cylinder head. Operation of the CPS solenoids is controlled by the ECM.
Camshaft Profile Switching Solenoids
The CPS solenoids control the supply of engine oil pressure to the locking pins in the switchable tappets, to switch the
tappets between the two cam profiles.
A CPS solenoid is installed on the rear of each cylinder block. Each CPS solenoid has a pintle installed in a sleeve, which
incorporates oil inlet and outlet holes. The sleeve is installed at the junction of oil galleries in the cylinder head, with the oil
inlet and outlet holes aligned with the galleries. Movement of the pintle in the sleeve controls a connection between the oil
galleries. When the CPS solenoid is energized, the pintle connects an oil supply gallery to the gallery along the outboard side
of the switchable tappets. When the CPS solenoid is de-energized, the oil gallery along the outboard side of the switchable
tappets is connected to drain.
The CPS solenoids receive a fused battery supply from the main relay. The ECM switches a ground connection to operate the
solenoids.
Switchable Tappets
Item
Part Number
Description
Outer tappet
Outer locking pin
Inner locking pin
Return spring
Lash adjuster oil inlet
Lash adjuster
Lost motion spring
CPS oil inlet
Anti-rotation lug
The switchable tappets are installed on the intake valves, in bores in the cylinder heads. The cylinder heads incorporate
engine oil galleries along the inboard and outboard sides of the bores. The inboard oil galleries (between the tappets and the
spark plug/fuel injector bores) supply an oil feed to the locking pins in the switchable tappets. The outboard oil galleries
(over the inlet ports) supply an oil feed to the hydraulic lash adjusters in the switchable tappets.
Each switchable tappet consists of inner and outer tappets, which can operate independently or be locked together by locking
pins. A hydraulic lash adjuster on the bottom of the inner tappet locates on the intake valve stem.
In low lift, the intake valve lift is controlled by the inner tappets, which run on the center lobes of the intake camshafts. The
outer tappets run on the outer lobes of the intake camshafts, and move up and down the inner tappets without affecting the
valve lift. The lost motion springs keep the outer tappets in contact with the outer lobes. Movement of the inner tappets is
transferred to the intake valves through the hydraulic lash adjusters.
In high lift, engine oil is supplied to the locking pins, which lock the outer tappets to the inner tappets. Intake valve lift is
controlled by the outer tappets, which run on the outer lobes of the intake camshafts. Movement of the outer tappets is
transferred to the intake valves through the locking pins, the inner tappets and the hydraulic lash adjusters.
Item
Part Number
Description
Intake camshaft
Inner tappet
Outer tappet
Outer cam profile (high lift)
Inner cam profile (low lift)
Locking pin oil pressure inlet
Outer locking pin
Inner locking pin
Outer tappet lost motion spring
10
Valve spring
Camshaft Profile Switching Operation

The switching point is speed and load dependent. This strategy ensures that switching occurs at air flow neutral points in the
engine's operation and is imperceptible to the driver.
At engine speeds from idle up to the range of 2825 - 4250 rev/min (depending on engine load), the CPS solenoids are deenergized and the switchable tappets are set to low lift. At engine speeds above the 2825 - 4250 rev/min range, the CPS
solenoids are energized by the ECM and the switchable tappets are set to high lift. There is a 200 rev/min hysteresis when
switching from high lift to low lift with decreasing engine speed. Switching between lift settings occurs within one revolution
of the camshaft.
Switching is only enabled at engine oil temperatures of 20 C (68 F) and above. At oil temperatures below 20 C (68 F),
CPS operation is disabled and the switchable tappets remain in the low lift setting. CPS operation is also disabled if a CPS
solenoid fails. When CPS operation is disabled, engine speed is limited to 5000 rev/min.
The ECM can diagnose the operation of the CPS solenoids and store fault related DTC (diagnostic trouble code) if it detects a
failure.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Item
Part Number
Description
Oil pump outlet tube
Anti-drain valve
Oil cooler
Oil filter
Timing chain lubrication jets
Oil evacuation tube
Oil pump
Oil temperature and level sensor
Oil pick-up
The oil pump is attached to the underside of the windage tray. The input shaft of the oil pump is driven from the front of the
crankshaft, by the auxiliary chain, at 0.87 engine speed.
The oil pump draws oil from the sump pan through a centrally mounted pick-up pipe. The oil is pressurized and pumped
through an output tube to the cylinder block. After passing through an anti-drain valve and a plate type oil cooler, the oil is
filtered by a replaceable cartridge installed on the front of the RH cylinder head.
The output from the oil filter is distributed through oil galleries in the cylinder heads and cylinder block. All moving parts are
lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurized oil is also provided for the VCT system, the CPS system, the timing chain
tensioners and the timing chain lubrication jets.
The oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure the rapid
return of the oil to the sump pan. System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the LH cylinder head cover.
An oil evacuation tube is installed to allow oil to be drawn from the sump pan. The upper end of the oil evacuation tube is
located under the oil filler cap.
An oil drain plug is installed in the RH side of the sump pan.
Oil Pump Nominal Operating Pressures

Idle
1500
3000
3000
3000
Temperature, C (F)
20 (68)
20 (68)
40 (104)
110 (230)
130 (266)
Pressure, bar (lbf/in2)

2.0 (29.0)
6.0 (87.0)
6.2 (90.0)
5.0 (72.5)
4.0 (58.0)
Oil Level Monitoring

Oil level monitoring is provided by an oil level and temperature sensor that measures the oil level in the sump pan. The oil
level can be displayed in the message center of the instrument cluster.
Oil Level and Temperature Sensor
The oil level and temperature sensor supplies the ECM with a signal containing the level and temperature of the oil in the
sump pan. The oil level and temperature sensor is secured to the bottom of the sump pan with three screws and sealed with
a gasket.
The oil level and temperature sensor sends an ultrasonic pulse vertically upward and measures the time taken for the pulse
to be reflected back from the top surface of the oil. This time is compared with the time taken for an ultrasonic pulse to
travel a reference distance within the oil level and temperature sensor to determine the oil level. The oil level reading is
combined with the oil temperature reading and transmitted in a PWM signal to the ECM.
Oil Level and Temperature Sensor Specifications
Feature
Power source
Level Accuracy
Details
Battery Voltage
2 mm (0.08 in.) at temperatures of -30 C (-22 F)) and above; (4 mm (0.16 in.) at
Temperature Accuracy
Operating Level Range
Operating Temperature
Range
temperatures below -30 C (-22 F))

2 C (3.6 F)
116 to 147 mm (4.57 to 5.79 in.)
-40 to 160 C (-40 to 320 F)
Oil Level Check

For additional information, refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
For accuracy, oil level checks should be performed with the vehicle on level ground when the oil is hot. The vehicle needs to
stand for approximately 10 minutes, after the engine is switched off, to allow the oil to drain back into the sump pan and the
oil level to stabilize. The oil level system will not give a reading until the oil level has stabilized.
With the ignition on, the engine stopped and the transmission in P (park), repeatedly press the trip button on the end of the
LH multifunction switch until the oil level icon and applicable message are displayed in the fuel gage/trip computer area of
the message center, as shown below:
Item
Part Number
Description
Oil level is between 50% and 100% of recommended level. No top-up required.
Oil level is between 12.5% and 50% percent of recommended level. Add 0.5 liter (0.53 US
quart) of oil.
Oil level is between 0% and 12.5% of recommended level. Add 1 liter (1.06 US quarts) of oil.
Oil level is above maximum for safe operation. Reduce oil level to recommended level.
Oil level is below minimum for safe operation. Add 1.5 liters (1.59 US quarts) of oil, then
recheck level.
Oil level is stabilizing. Wait 10 minutes and then recheck level. If this display is accompanied
by the message ENGINE OIL LEVEL MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT, a fault with the oil level
monitoring system is indicated.
System Fault Warning

If there is a fault with the system, in addition to being displayed during an oil level check, the message ENGINE OIL LEVEL
MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT will be temporarily displayed when the ignition is first switched on.
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling

General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1484
Vacuum Pump, Oil Drain
303-1484-01
Adapter for 303-1484
Draining
scalding.
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is parked on level ground.
1.
the engine.
2.
3.
CAUTION: Allow 10 minutes from turning the

engine off before starting oil extraction.
4.

cover.
5.
Using the oil vacuum pump drain the oil out
through the oil extraction tube.

Special Tool(s): 303-1484, 303-1484-01
6.
Remove the oil vacuum pump.
7.
8.
NOTE: Discard the O-ring seals.
Filling
1.

clean engine oil.
2.

first.
Torque: 25 Nm
3.

engine.
supercharger:
4.
5.
6.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
7.
CAUTIONS:


8.
9.
within 2 seconds.
10.


level reading.

engine oil.
11.

12.
13.

14.

15.
16.
17.

18.
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Draining and Filling

General Procedures
Draining
scalding.
1.
CAUTION: Make sure the engine is warm.

Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop the
engine.
2.
3.
4.

cover.
Make sure that the O-ring seal is exposed.
5.
NOTE: Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain from the oil
filter housing.
6.
7.
8.
Remove and discard the oil filter element.

9.
and Installation).
10.
CAUTIONS:
Allow at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to

drain.
Filling
1.

material.
Torque: 24 Nm
2.
and Installation).
3.

clean engine oil.
4.

first.
Torque: 25 Nm
5.

engine.
supercharger:
6.
7.
8.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
9.
CAUTIONS:


10.
www.JagDocs.com
11.
within 2 seconds.
12.


level reading.

engine oil.
13.

14.
15.

16.

17.
18.

19.

20.
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check

General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1613
Check
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
4.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping oil.

NOTE: Collect the engine oil in a clean container.
5.
6.
CAUTIONS:
Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.
Make sure that the crankshaft is fully locked.

7.
Using a suitable marker, mark the position of the

crankshaft pulley as illustrated.
8.
9.
NOTE: Discard the seal.
10.
11.
If required, carefully adjust the crankshaft position

to allow correct installation of the special tool.
Install the Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1613
12.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when

adjusting the crankshaft position.
NOTE: If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be
installed, adjustment of the fuel pump camshaft
timing will be required.
If required, carefully adjust the crankshaft
position to allow correct installation of the

special tool.
If the crankshaft timing tool cannot be
installed, adjustment of the fuel pump

camshaft timing will be required.
Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing
Adjustment (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L
13.
14.
Remove the Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1613
NOTE: Install a new seal.

Torque: 12 Nm
15.
16.
17.
Torque: 10 Nm
18.

Torque: 24 Nm
19.

20.

engine.
supercharger:
21.
22.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
23.
CAUTIONS:


24.
25.
within 2 seconds.
26.


level reading.

engine oil.
27.

28.
29.

30.

31.
32.
33.

34.
and Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Adjustment

General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1447
Timing Tool
JLR-303-1613
Adjustment
1.

2.

3.
Refer to: Fuel Pump Camshaft Timing Check (303-01B Engine V8 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
4.

5.
CAUTIONS:

Inspect the 3 timing chain oil nozzles for

signs of damage, install as necessary.
6.
NOTE: Using a suitable tie strap, position the

tensioner to one side.
Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1613
Torque: 12 Nm
7.

8.
9.
Torque: 10 Nm
10.

Torque: 24 Nm
11.

12.

engine.
supercharger:
13.
14.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
15.
CAUTIONS:


16.
17.
within 2 seconds.
18.


level reading.

engine oil.
19.

20.
21.

22.

23.
24.
25.

26.
and Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft LH

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.

Installation).
4.
CAUTIONS:


Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:


locations.

Torque: 3 Nm
2.

Torque: 12 Nm
3.

position.
4.

NOTE: On vehicles without supercharger the inlet camshaft
valve clearances cannot be checked.
5.
CAUTIONS:

6.

install procedure.
7.
8.

Installation).
9.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft RH

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.

Installation).
4.
CAUTIONS:


Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:


locations.

Torque: 3 Nm
2.

Torque: 12 Nm
3.

position.
4.

NOTE: On vehicles without supercharger the inlet camshaft
valve clearances cannot be checked.
5.
CAUTIONS:


6.

install procedure.
7.
8.

Installation).
9.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Front Seal

Special Tool(s)
303-1434
Remover/Installer, Front Crankshaft Seal
Removal
1.
Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and
Cables, General Procedures).
2.
Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
3.
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
Do not over tighten the crankshaft front seal. Failure to follow this
Take extra care not to damage the seal.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Pulley

Special Tool(s)
303-1437
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer
303-1438
Crankshaft Damper Bolt Remover/Installer
303-1439
Crankshaft Damper Removal Plate
303-1440
Crankshaft Damper Removal/Installation Stud
303-1441
Crankshaft Damper Remover/Installer Body
303-1448
Locking Tool
Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud - V8 5.0L Petrol (30303A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
4.

5.
6.
CAUTION: Before removing the crankshaft

pulley bolt, note the numbers on the bolt head. If
the bolt head shows 10.9, the bolt must be
removed counter clockwise. If the bolt head shows
12.9, the bolt must be removed clockwise. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the crankshaft.
Note the markings on the crankshaft pulley bolt.
7.
8.

Special Tool(s): 303-1437, 303-1438
9.
10.
Torque: 65 Nm

11.

NOTE: The crankshaft pulley bolt will be very tight.
NOTE: The thread is left handed.
12.
13.
NOTE: If the crankshaft damper is fitted with an

early RH thread crankshaft bolt then the pulley can
be removed with a standard puller.
14.

15.
16.

17.

18.

www.JagDocs.com
19.
20.
CAUTION: Discard the friction washer after

removing the crankshaft pulley.
21.
22.
Installation
1.
Apply RTV sealant to the crankshaft pulley keyway.
2.
CAUTION: Install a new friction washer

before installing the crankshaft pulley.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

installed.
12.
13.
14.
Torque: 65 Nm
15.

16.
17.
Torque: 200 Nm
NOTE: The use of a torque multiplyer capable of

600Nm will be required.
Torque: 270
Make sure that the socket is turned through
270 degrees not the torque wrench.
18.
19.
20.
Torque: 65 Nm
21.
22.

23.
Refer to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud - V8 5.0L Petrol (30303A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
24.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Rear Seal

Special Tool(s)
303-1442
303-1443
Removal
1.
Refer to: Flexplate (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal

and Installation).
2.
Installation
1.

Special Tool(s): 303-1442, 303-1443
2.

Torque: 11 Nm
3.
4.
Torque: 11 Nm
Refer to: Flexplate (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal

and Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

4.

5.
Refer to: Intake Manifold (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

6.
7.
8.
CAUTION: Discard the seal.

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
CAUTIONS:


20.
21.
Installation
1.

2.

CAUTIONS:
The head gasket must be installed over the

cylinder block dowels.

3.

Torque: 20 Nm
4.

Torque: 35 Nm
5.

Tighten the bolts 1 to 10, a further 90 degrees.
6.

7.
8.
Torque: 25 Nm

Torque: 12 Nm
9.
CAUTIONS:


10.
Torque: 12 Nm
11.
12.
Torque: 12 Nm

Torque: 10 Nm
13.
14.
15.
16.

Torque: 12 Nm
17.
18.
CAUTION: Install new o-ring seals

Torque: 12 Nm
19.
20.
Torque: 20 Nm
21.
22.
Torque: 20 Nm
Torque: 12 Nm
23.

24.
Refer to: Camshaft LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

25.

26.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Head RH

Removal
1.

2.
3.

4.
Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

5.

6.
7.
8.
CAUTIONS:
Discard the seal.

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
CAUTIONS:


20.
21.
Installation
1.

must be measured.
2.
CAUTIONS:
Use care when installing the cylinder head.

Damage to the cylinder block, cylinder head or
cylinder head gasket may result.
The head gasket must be installed over the

cylinder block dowels.
www.JagDocs.com
3.
Torque: 20 Nm
4.
Torque: 35 Nm
5.
6.
7.
Torque: 25 Nm
8.
Torque: 12 Nm
9.
CAUTIONS:


10.

Torque: 12 Nm
11.
CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be

installed.
NOTE: Install a new engine oil filter.
12.
Torque: 12 Nm
13.
Torque: 20 Nm
14.
Torque: 20 Nm
15.

Torque: 10 Nm
16.

Torque: 12 Nm
17.
Torque: 25 Nm
18.
Torque: 25 Nm
19.

20.
Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

21.

22.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount LH

Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
All vehicles
4.


5.
6.

Torque: 35 Nm
7.
Torque: 100 Nm
All vehicles
8.
Torque: 63 Nm
9.
Torque: 48 Nm
10.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1.
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Mount RH

Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
All vehicles
4.


5.
6.

Torque: 35 Nm
7.
Torque: 100 Nm
All vehicles
8.
Torque: 10 Nm
9.
Torque: 63 Nm
10.
Torque: 48 Nm
11.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1.
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold

Special Tool(s)
303-1444-01
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
E115262
303-1444-02
Exhaust Manifold Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.

3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

11.

correct.
12.
All vehicles
13.
14.

15.
16.

17.

Installation
All vehicles
1.
Torque: 45 Nm
2.

Special Tool(s): 303-1444-01, 303-1444-02
3.

Special Tool(s): 303-1444-02
4.

installed.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.

installed.
Torque: 10 Nm
7.
Torque: 18 Nm
8.
9.

10.

11.
Torque: 100 Nm
12.

installed.
correct.
Torque: 35 Nm
All vehicles
13.
Torque: 25 Nm
14.
Torque: 25 Nm
15.
Torque: 10 Nm
16.
Torque: 10 Nm
17.
Torque: 25 Nm
18.
Torque: 3 Nm
19.
Torque: 3 Nm
20.

21.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Manifold RH

Removal
1.

2.
3.

4.
Torque: 12 Nm
5.
Torque: 48 Nm
6.

Torque: 35 Nm
7.
Torque: 100 Nm
8.
9.
10.

11.

Installation
1.
Torque: 45 Nm
2.

3.

4.

installed.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.

installed.
Torque: 10 Nm
7.
Torque: 18 Nm
8.
9.
Torque: 12 Nm
10.
11.
Torque: 48 Nm

Torque: 35 Nm
12.
Torque: 100 Nm
13.
14.

15.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Flexplate

Removal
1.

2.
3.

Installation).
4.
CAUTIONS:

tightening.


removal.

rotated.
diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1: 45 Nm
Stage 2: 90
Installation
1.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Intake Manifold

Removal
1.

2.
3.
4.
Refer to: Throttle Body (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5.
6.
7.
Torque: 8 Nm
8.
9.
10.
Torque: 8 Nm

Torque: 25 Nm
11.
12.
Torque: 10 Nm
13.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.

2.
Torque: 25 Nm
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Cooler

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.

4.

Procedures).
5.
6.
7.
CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping coolant.

Torque: 13 Nm
8.

9.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that these components are

installed to the noted removal position.
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:

tightening.


Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Filter Element

Removal
1.
2.
Allow the engine oil to drain from the oil
filter element housing for two minutes.
3.
4.
Installation
1.
2.
Torque: 25 Nm
3.
Check and top up the engine oil.
4.
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pan

Removal
1.

stands.
2.
Refer to: Engine Oil Level Sensor (303-14A Electronic Engine

Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
3.
Installation
1.


2.

Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Refer to: Engine Oil Level Sensor (303-14A Electronic Engine

Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pan Extension

Special Tool(s)
303-1433
303-1442
303-1443
Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.

4.
Refer to: Engine (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Installation).

5.
CAUTIONS:


removal.
rotated.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

14.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
15.
16.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
17.
18.
19.
20.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
Discard the fuel pipes.
21.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
22.
23.

fluids.
24.

fluids.
25.
26.

fluids.
27.

fluids.
28.

fluids.
29.
30.
31.

dismantling.
32.
NOTE: Discard the component.
33.
34.
NOTE: Make sure to use the aluminium lug

provided on the oil pan extension to lever against.
35.

Installation
1.
Torque: 8 Nm
2.
CAUTIONS:


sealing material.
5901G) to the areas shown, and tighten the

bolts within 7 minutes.
3.

Torque: 25 Nm
4.
CAUTIONS:


sealing material.

5.

Torque: 12 Nm
6.

within 7 minutes.
7.

NOTE: Install new lower timing cover.
stage.
8.

Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
9.

10.
Torque: 12 Nm
11.
12.
13.
Torque: 10 Nm
Special Tool(s): 303-1442, 303-1443
Remove the special tools.

14.

Torque: 11 Nm
15.
Torque: 11 Nm
16.
Torque: 11 Nm
17.

18.

Torque: 11 Nm
19.
20.
21.

22.

Torque: 11 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
23.
24.
25.
CAUTIONS:

engine oil.
26.

cover to one side.
Torque: 11 Nm
27.

cover to one side.
Torque: 11 Nm
28.

29.
Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
30.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
31.

Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
32.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
33.
Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
34.
35.
Torque: 25 Nm
36.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 8 Nm
37.
38.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
39.

40.
41.
Torque: 40 Nm
42.
Torque: 25 Nm
43.
Torque: 12 Nm
44.

Torque: 25 Nm
45.
46.

Torque: 48 Nm
47.
CAUTIONS:

tightening.


rotated.
diagonally.
Torque:
Stage 1: 45 Nm
Stage 2: 90
48.
Refer to: Engine (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol, Installation).
49.

50.
Lower the vehicle.
51.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Oil Pump

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Oil Pan Extension (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

seals.
9.
1.
Lubricate and install the new O-ring seals.
2.
Torque:
M8 25 Nm
M6 12 Nm
Installation
3.
Lubricate and install a new O-ring seal.
4.
Torque: 12 Nm
5.
Torque: 21 Nm
6.

7.

Torque: 21 Nm
8.

sprocket markings.
9.

Torque: 21 Nm
10.

11.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Timing Cover

Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-05

and Installation).
4.
Refer to: Thermostat Housing - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-03A Engine

Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
5.
Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

6.
Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

7.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Installation
1.


2.


3.

Torque: 12 Nm
4.

Torque: 12 Nm
5.

within 7 minutes.
6.

stage.
7.

Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
8.
Torque: 12 Nm
9.
Torque: 12 Nm
10.
Torque: 12 Nm
11.
Torque: 40 Nm
12.

tightening.
Torque: 40 Nm
13.

14.
Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

15.
Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

16.

Installation).
17.
Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-05

and Installation).
18.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Timing Drive Components Assembly Part Number:

INA Timing Drive
Special Tool(s)
303-1445
303-1447
Timing Tool
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1452
303-1482
Tensioner Tool
Removal
1.

2.
3.

and Installation).
4.
5.

6.

7.
8.
9.
10.

11.
12.
13.
14.

www.JagDocs.com
15.
16.
CAUTION: Discard the friction washer.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Install a new friction washer.
2.
Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Install the special tool to each Camshaft.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
not as shown.
5.

camshafts.
6.
CAUTIONS:


in camshafts.
cylinder head.
7.
CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.
timing (VVT) units.
8.
positions shown.
9.
Torque: 25 Nm
10.

11.

Torque: 10 Nm
12.
CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.
13.
positions shown.
14.
Torque: 25 Nm
15.

16.

Torque: 10 Nm
17.
18.

19.
side.
20.
21.
CAUTIONS:

Torque: 35 Nm
22.

first.
Torque: 32 Nm
23.
Torque: 10 Nm
24.
25.
CAUTIONS:

Torque: 35 Nm
26.

Torque: 32 Nm
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.

installation.
Torque: 50 Nm
32.
33.
34.

35.
36.
37.
38.
CAUTIONS:


tool(s).
39.

40.
41.
42.
43.
Torque: 10 Nm
44.
and Installation).
45.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Timing Drive Components Assembly Part Number:

Tsubaki Timing Drive
Special Tool(s)
303-1445
303-1447
Timing Tool
303-1448
Locking Tool
303-1452
303-1482
Tensioner Tool
Removal
1.

2.

3.
4.

5.

6.
and Installation).
7.
8.
9.
10.

11.
12.
13.
14.

15.
16.
CAUTION: Discard the friction washers.
Installation
1.
2.
CAUTION: Install new friction washers.
Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Install the special tool to the LH bank Camshafts.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
not as shown.
5.

camshafts.
6.
CAUTIONS:


in camshafts.
cylinder head.
7.
CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.
timing (VVT) units.
8.
positions shown.
9.
Torque: 25 Nm
10.

Torque: 10 Nm
11.
CAUTIONS:

must be replaced.
12.
positions shown.
13.
Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
14.

Torque: 10 Nm
15.
16.

17.
18.

19.
side.
20.
21.
CAUTIONS:

Torque: 35 Nm
22.

first.
Torque: 32 Nm
23.
Torque: 10 Nm
24.
25.
CAUTIONS:


Torque: 35 Nm
26.

Torque: 32 Nm
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.

installation.
Torque: 50 Nm
32.
33.

34.
35.
36.
37.

38.
CAUTIONS:


tool(s).
39.

40.
41.
42.
43.
Torque: 10 Nm
44.
and Installation).
45.

Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover LH

Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Fuel Rail LH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8

3.
4.
5.
Torque: 10 Nm
6.
Installation
1.
2.

Torque: 13 Nm
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Valve Cover RH

Removal
1.

2.

3.
4.
5.
Installation
1.
2.

Torque: 13 Nm
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Cylinder Block Oil Gallery Plug

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Exhaust Manifold RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

4.
5.
Torque: 48 Nm
6.
7.
Torque:
Stage 1: 40 Nm
Stage 2: 180
Installation
1.
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part Number:

INA Timing Drive
Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

stands.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.

faces.
1.

Installation
2.

mating faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Torque: 21 Nm
4.
Torque: 12 Nm
5.
6.

sprocket markings.

Torque: 21 Nm
7.

8.

Specifications).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump Camshaft Assembly Part Number:

Tsubaki Timing Drive
Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

stands.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.

faces.
1.

Installation
2.

mating faces.
Torque: 12 Nm
3.
Torque: 21 Nm
4.
Torque: 12 Nm
5.

6.

Torque: 21 Nm
7.

8.

Specifications).
Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol - Lower Timing Cover

Special Tool(s)
303-1433
Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.

4.
5.
6.

7.
Installation
1.

within 7 minutes.
2.

stage.
3.

Torque:
M6 12 Nm
M8 20 Nm
4.
5.
Torque: 12 Nm

6.
7.
Torque: 40 Nm

tightening.
Torque: 40 Nm
8.

9.

10.

engine.
supercharger:
11.
12.
the engine.
Check for leaks.
13.
CAUTIONS:

14.
15.
within 2 seconds.
www.JagDocs.com
16.


level reading.

engine oil.
17.

18.
19.

20.

21.
22.
23.

24.
and Installation).

Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-1435
303-1436
1.

2.

stands.
3.
4.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12B Intake

Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
5.

Installation).
6.

Procedures).
7.

Procedures).
8.

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Installation).
14.
15.
16.
17.
Special Tool(s): 303-1435, 303-1436
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.

Remove the engine support.
39.

technician.
Using a suitable tool, remove the engine.

Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-1435
303-1436
1.

technician.
Using a suitable tool, install the engine.
2.

Using the special tool, support the engine.
3.
Torque: 45 Nm
4.
Torque: 25 Nm
5.
Torque: 10 Nm
6.
Torque: 25 Nm
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Torque: 6 Nm
14.
Torque: 3 Nm
15.
Torque: 4 Nm
16.
17.
18.
Torque: 10 Nm
19.
Torque: 12 Nm
20.
21.
22.
23.
Torque: 12 Nm
24.
25.
Special Tool(s): 303-1436, 303-1435
Torque: 25 Nm
26.
27.

Installation).
28.
Torque: 45 Nm
29.
Torque: 45 Nm
30.

31.

Procedures).
32.

Procedures).
33.

Installation).
34.

Installation).
35.
36.

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Capacities
Liters
9.5
13.8
Vehicles without supercharger

Specifications
Coolant fluid
WSS M97B44-D
Coolant concentration - will provide frost protection to -40C (-40F)
50%
Specific gravity of coolant at 20C (68F), to protect against frost down to -40C (-40F)
1.068
NOTE: The coolant is of the Organic Acid Technology (OAT) type and must not be mixed with other types of coolant.
General Specifications
Item
Cooling system type
Radiator
Expansion tank
Pressure cap rating
Thermostat:
Starts to open
Fully open
Cooling fan
Coolant pump
Low temperature radiator (Intercooler circuit) - vehicles
with supercharger
Auxiliary Coolant pump (Intercooler circuit) - vehicles with
supercharger
Engine oil cooler
Transmission oil cooler
Auxiliary radiator SC only
Specifications
Pressurised, thermostatically controlled with remote header
tank
Cross flow with separate sub cooled section at top to feed
trans oil cooler
Remote - fitted with a bleed screw and low coolant level
sensor
1.4 bar (140 kPa) (20 lbf/in)
88 C (190 F)
96 C (205 F)
Electronically controlled
Centrifugal flow impellor, belt driven from crankshaft
Cross flow, twin pass in front of condenser
Centrifugal type, 35w 12V DC electric motor
Oil to coolant located in V of engine
Oil to coolant plate type cooler located on LH chassis
longitudinal
Cross flow single pass located in front of and below low
temperature radiator
Item
Coolant outlet pipe bolts
Upper water outlet pipe bolts
Coolant expansion tank retaining bolt
Coolant fan motor and shroud retaining nuts
Thermostat Housing retaining bolt
Radiator upper mounting bracket retaining bolts
Radiator drain plug
Coolant bleed screw(s)
Nm
11
11
7
7
11
10
11
25
2
3
lb-ft
8
8
8
7
8
18
2
lb-in
62
62
18
-
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Cooling

Item
Part Number
Engine vent hose
Coolant expansion tank
Coolant supply/expansion hose
Engine oil cooler
Engine block heater (110 V version shown) or drain plug
Radiator upper hose
Transmission fluid cooler
Transmission fluid cooler supply and return hoses
Throttle body heater hose
10
Heater manifold
Description
Heater core supply and return hoses
11
-
Cooling fan
13
12
Radiator lower hose
14
Thermostat
15
Coolant pump
16
Radiator
17
Throttle
18
Outlet tube
Item
Part Number
Engine vent hose
Coolant supply/expansion hose
Engine oil cooler
Engine block heater (110 V version shown) or drain plug
Description
Radiator upper hose
6
-
Supercharger cooling system connecting hose
Auxiliary radiator supply hose
Auxiliary radiator
10
11
Transmission fluid cooler supply and return hoses
12
Throttle body heater hose
13
Heater manifold
14
Heater core supply and return hoses
15
Auxiliary radiator return hose
16
Cooling fan
17
Radiator lower hose
18
Thermostat
19
Coolant pump
20
Radiator
21
Throttle
22
Outlet tube
INTRODUCTION
The engine cooling system maintains the engine within an optimum temperature range under changing ambient and engine
operating conditions. The system is a pressurized expansion tank system with continuous bleeds to separate air from the
coolant and prevent the formation of air locks. The engine cooling system also provides:
Heating for:
The passenger compartment. For additional information, refer to 412-02 Heating and Ventilation.
The throttle body.
Cooling for:
The engine oil cooler. For additional information, refer to 303-01A Engine - 5.0L, Vehicles With: Supercharger or 30301B Engine - 5.0L, Vehicles Without: Supercharger.
The transmission fluid cooler. For additional information, refer to 307-02 Transmission Cooling.
The primary components of the engine cooling system are the:
Coolant pump.
Thermostat.
Radiator.
Auxiliary radiator (SC (supercharger) vehicles only).
Cooling fan.
Expansion tank.
Engine oil cooler.
Outlet tube and heater manifold.
Connecting hoses and pipes.
COOLANT PUMP
Item
Part Number
Description
Inlet connection
Pump body
Outlet flange to RH cylinder head
Outlet to engine oil cooler
Outlet flange to LH cylinder head
Pulley
Bleed pipe connection (containing check valve)
The body of the coolant pump contains an impeller attached to a shaft supported in a bearing assembly. The impeller is
driven by a pulley, pressed on to the front of the shaft, which is driven by the accessory drive belt. For additional
information, refer to 303-05 Accessory Drive.
Two coolant outlet flanges attach the coolant pump to the front of the cylinder heads. A pipe connects a further coolant
outlet to a pipe from the engine oil cooler. A bleed connector is installed in the front of the coolant pump, adjacent to the
coolant inlet connection from the thermostat. A check valve is incorporated into the bleed connection.
THERMOSTAT
Item
Part Number
Description
Screw (3 off)
Lower body
Upper body
Thermostat
Seal
The thermostat is a multi-stage device located in the coolant pump inlet to provide fast response and control of the engine
outlet temperature.
The thermostat allows rapid engine warm-up by preventing coolant flow through the radiator and by limiting coolant flow
through the cylinder block when the engine is cold. During warm-up and at engines speeds above approximately 1800
rev/min, a by-pass valve opens to control the coolant flow and pressure, to protect the engine components. When the
thermostat opening reaches 6 mm (0.24 in.), the by-pass flow is shut-off. When the thermostat opening exceeds 6 mm
(0.24 in.), the radiator coolant flow is further controlled up to the point where the thermostat is fully open. At this point
maximum radiator coolant flow is achieved to provide maximum cooling.
On both naturally aspirated and supercharger vehicles, the thermostat begins to open at 88 - 90 C (190 - 194 F) and is
fully open at 102 C (216 F).
RADIATOR
Radiator (Naturally Aspirated Vehicles)
Item
Part Number
Description
Locating spigot (2 off)
Upper hose connection
Support (2 off)
Drain plug
Lower hose connection
Transmission fluid cooler inlet hose connection
www.JagDocs.com
Radiator (Supercharger Vehicles)
Item
Part Number
Description
Locating spigot (2 off)
Upper hose connection
Supercharger cooling system connection
Auxiliary radiator inlet hose connection
Support (2 off)
Drain plug
Lower hose connection
Auxiliary radiator outlet hose connection
Transmission fluid cooler inlet hose connection
The radiator is a cross flow type with an aluminum core and plastic end tanks. The radiator is part of the cooling module and
is attached to the vehicle by locating spigots and supports integrated into the end tanks. The supports are installed in rubber
bushes located in mounting brackets on the front subframe. The locating spigots are installed in rubber bushes located in
mounting brackets on the front crossmember.
The two end tanks incorporate connections for the upper and lower hoses, the coolant supply hose of the transmission fluid
cooler and, on SC vehicles, the supply and return hoses of the auxiliary radiator. A drain plug is installed in the bottom of the
LH (left-hand) end tank.
AUXILIARY RADIATOR (SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES ONLY)
Item
Part Number
Description
Outlet hose connection
Inlet hose connection
The auxiliary radiator is connected in parallel with the (main) radiator to increase the engine cooling capacity on SC vehicles.
The auxiliary radiator is mounted horizontally in an air deflector attached to the front of the charge air radiator. The two end
tanks of the auxiliary radiator incorporate connections for the supply and return hoses that connect it to the main radiator.
COOLING FAN
Cooling Fan (Naturally Aspirated Vehicles)
Item
Part Number
Description
Shroud
Motor and fan control module
Harness
Fan
Cooling Fan (Supercharger Vehicles)
Item
Part Number
Description
Shroud
Motor and fan control module
Harness
Fan
An electric, variable speed cooling fan is installed in a shroud attached to the rear of the radiator. The cooling fan is operated
by a fan control module, integrated into the electric motor, under the control of the ECM (engine control module). An
electrical connector at the RH (right-hand) side of the shroud provides the interface between the cooling fan harness and the
vehicle wiring.
EXPANSION TANK
Item
Part Number
Description
Filler cap
Bleed screw
Vent hose connection
Level markings
Expansion hose connection
Level sensor
The expansion tank is installed on the RH side of the engine compartment, immediately behind the suspension turret. A filler
cap, bleed screw and level sensor are incorporated into the expansion tank. MAX and MIN level markings are molded onto
the exterior of the tank.
The expansion tank provides the following functions:
Service fill.
Coolant expansion during warm-up.
Air separation during operation.
System pressurization by the filler cap.
The expansion tank has an air space of approximately 0.5 liter (1.06 US pints), above the MAX level, to allow for coolant
expansion.
OUTLET TUBE AND HEATER MANIFOLD

Outlet Tube
Item
Part Number
Description
Outlet tube on naturally aspirated vehicles
Outlet tube on supercharger vehicles
Bleed hose connection
Radiator upper hose connection
Cylinder block connections
Thermostat hose connection
Heater Manifold
Item
Part Number
Throttle body heater hose connection
RH cylinder head connection
Engine coolant temperature sensor
LH cylinder head connection
3
4
5
Description
Heater core supply hose connection
ENGINE COOLANT
The engine coolant is formulated to last for ten years or 240,000 km (150,000 miles). The coolant is silicate free and must
not be mixed with conventional engine coolant.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item
Part Number
Battery

Cooling fan
5
6
Description
Engine Cooling Flow Diagram - Naturally Aspirated Vehicles
Item
Part Number
Description
Expansion tank
Heater core
RH cylinder head
Cylinder block
Throttle
Engine oil cooler
Heater manifold
LH cylinder head
10
Check valve
11
12
Thermostat
Radiator
13
Coolant pump
14
Bleed screw
Engine Cooling Flow Diagram - Supercharger Vehicles
Item
Part Number
Description
Expansion tank
Heater core
RH cylinder head
Cylinder block
Throttle
Engine oil cooler
Heater manifold
LH cylinder head
10
Check valve
11
Thermostat
Radiator
13
Coolant pump
14
Auxiliary radiator
15
Connection with SC cooling system
16
Bleed screw
12
When the engine is running, the coolant is circulated around the engine cooling system by the coolant pump. From the
coolant pump, coolant flows through the cylinder heads and the engine oil cooler into the cylinder block and the heater
manifold.
In the cylinder block, the coolant flows forwards to the outlet tube. When the coolant is cold, the thermostat is closed and the
coolant flows direct from the outlet tube back to the coolant pump. Once the coolant reaches operating temperature the
thermostat begins to open, to control system temperature, and coolant flows from the outlet tube to the coolant pump via
the radiator and, on SC vehicles, the auxiliary radiator. When the thermostat is open, the coolant flow through the radiator(s)
also generates a coolant flow through the transmission fluid cooler.
From the heater manifold the coolant flows through the electronic throttle and the heater core, in parallel circuits that are
unaffected by the position of the thermostat. From the electronic throttle, the coolant merges with bleed coolant from the
coolant pump and the outlet tube and flows to the expansion tank. From the heater core, the coolant flows back to the inlet
of the coolant pump.
Expansion and contraction of the coolant is accommodated by an air space in the expansion tank and the compliance of the
flexible hoses.
If the coolant level in the expansion tank decreases below a predetermined value, the level sensor connects a ground to the
instrument cluster, which activates the appropriate warning. For additional information, refer to 413-01 Instrument Cluster.
The cooling fan is operated by a fan control module integrated into the cooling fan motor. The fan control module regulates
the voltage, and thus speed, of the cooling fan motor in response to a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ECM.
The ECM calculates the required fan speed from the engine temperature, A/C (air conditioning) system pressure and
transmission fluid temperature. Under hot operating conditions, the fan may continue to operate for 4 minutes after the
engine has been switched off.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Cooling

For a detailed description of the engine cooling system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of
the workshop manual. REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and
Operation).
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor vehicle.
1.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Coolant leaks
Coolant Hoses
Radiator
Heater core
Accessory drive belt
Viscous fan
Electrical
Fuses
Harnesses
Loose or corroded connector(s)
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor
3.
If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the
next step.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Coolant loss
Overheating
Engine not
reaching normal
temperature
Possible Causes
Action
Hoses
Carry out a visual inspection. If there are no obvious leaks, carry out a cooling
Hose connections
system pressure test. Rectify any leaks as necessary.
Radiator
Water pump
Heater core
Gaskets
Engine casting cracks
Engine block core
plugs
Low/Contaminated
Check the coolant level and condition. Carry out a cooling system pressure test.
coolant
Rectify any leaks as necessary. Check the thermostat and rectify as necessary.
Thermostat
Check the viscous fan operation, make sure the viscous fan rotates freely.
Viscous fan
Check for obstructions to the air flow over the radiator. Rectify as necessary.
ECT sensor
Restricted air flow
over the radiator
Thermostat
Check the thermostat operation. Check the viscous fan operation, make sure
Viscous fan
the viscous fan is not seized. Rectify as necessary.
Thermostat
Electric fan
Fan speed module
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Engine Control Module (ECM) , please refer to Section
303-14. REFER to:
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling System

Draining and Vacuum Filling
General Procedures
Draining
1.
WARNINGS:
Release the cooling system pressure by

slowly turning the coolant expansion tank cap a
quarter of a turn. Cover the expansion tank cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of
scalding. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in personal injury.
Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.
CAUTION: Since injury such as scalding could

be caused by escaping steam or coolant, make
sure the vehicle cooling system is cool prior to
carrying out this procedure
2.

3.

fluids.
Filling
1.
Torque: 2 Nm
2.
Lower the vehicle.
3.
CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained

at 50%.
Refill the cooling system.
Install the cooling system vacuum refill adaptor to the
expansion tank.
Fill the cooling system to the upper level mark of the
coolant expansion tank.

4.
5.
Set the heater controls to maximum.
6.
Start the engine and idle until hot air is emited at the face
registers.
7.
Switch the heater off.
8.
Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM for eight minutes.
9.
CAUTION: Switch off the engine and allow the coolant

temperature to go cold.
10.
Visually check the engine and cooling system for signs of

coolant leakage.
11.
WARNING: When releasing the cooling system pressure,

cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.
CAUTIONS:
Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping

steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle cooling system is cool
prior to carrying out this procedure
Make sure the coolant level remains above the "COLD FILL
RANGE" lower level mark.
NOTE: When the cooling system is warm, the coolant will be
approximately 10mm above the upper level mark on the
expansion tank with the cap removed.
Check and top-up the coolant if required.

Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
1.
WARNINGS:


carrying out this procedure.
2.

stands.
3.

fluids.
Filling
1.
Torque: 2 Nm
2.
Lower the vehicle.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Raise the coolant expansion tank 50mm
from its original position.
7.
8.
9.
CAUTION: Make sure that the clip from the

connector remains with the connector.

Fill the coolant expansion tank to the rim and continue until
coolant is visable from the outlet.
10.
11.
Once coolant is visable from the outlet, connect

the pipe.
NOTE: This step may take approximatley 10 minutes as the

coolant level will drop slowly.
Continue to fill the coolant expansion tank to the rim until the
coolant level stops dropping.
12.
13.
14.

15.
16.
Torque: 23 Nm
17.
18.
WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.

19.
20.
Start the engine.
21.
Continue to top-up with coolant with the engine at idle.
22.
Increase the engine speed to 1500rpm for 2 minutes.
23.
Continue to top-up with coolant with engine idling until
hot air is emitted from face vents.

When hot air is emitted from the vents, switch the
heater off.
24.
Install the coolant expansion tank cap while the

engine is at idle.
25.

26.

coolant leakage.
27.

CAUTIONS:

prior to carrying out this procedure.

Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
1.
WARNINGS:


2.

stands.
3.
and Installation).
4.

fluids.
5.
6.

fluids.
Carry out the procedure up to step 1 in the filling section three

times, filling the cooling system with clean water at the first two
drains. At the third refill, use a suitable measuring tool to make
sure that the cooling system maintains a 50% mix.
Filling
1.
Torque: 2 Nm
2.
Torque: 50 Nm
3.
and Installation).
4.
Lower the vehicle.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.


12.
13.

the pipe.

14.
15.
16.

17.
18.
Torque: 23 Nm
19.
20.

21.
www.JagDocs.com
22.
Start the engine.
23.
24.
25.

heater off.
26.
27.

engine is at idle.

28.

coolant leakage.
29.

CAUTIONS:


Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
1.
WARNINGS:


2.

stands.
3.

fluids.
Filling
1.
Torque: 2 Nm
2.
Lower the vehicle.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

9.

10.
11.

the pipe.

12.
13.
14.

15.
16.
Torque: 23 Nm
17.
18.

19.
20.
Start the engine.
21.
22.
23.

heater off.
24.
25.

engine is at idle.

26.

coolant leakage.
27.

CAUTIONS:


Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Draining
1.
WARNINGS:


2.

stands.
3.
4.
and Installation).
5.

fluids.
6.
7.

fluids.
Carry out the procedure up to step 1 in the filling section three

times, filling the cooling system with clean water at the first two
drains. At the third refill, use a suitable measuring tool to make
sure that the cooling system maintains a 50% mix.
Filling
3.
1.
Torque: 2 Nm
2.
Torque: 50 Nm
Lower the vehicle.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.


10.
11.

the pipe.

12.
13.
14.

15.
16.

17.
18.
Start the engine.
19.
20.
21.

heater off.
22.
23.

engine is at idle.

24.
Torque: 23 Nm
25.

coolant leakage.
26.

CAUTIONS:

27.
28.
and Installation).
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Auxiliary Radiator

Removal
1.

Procedures).
2.
Refer to: Radiator Splash Shield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
3.
4.
Torque: 7 Nm
5.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
1.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Coolant Expansion

Tank
Removal
WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do not remove the filler
cap from the coolant expansion tank while the system is hot.
CAUTIONS:
Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at 50%.
Correct installation of the Coolant expansion tank cap can be obtained by tightening the cap until an audible click
is heard.
1.
2.
Torque: 23 Nm
3.
WARNING: Release the cooling system

pressure by slowly turning the coolant expansion
tank cap a quarter of a turn. Cover the expansion
tank cap with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding. Failure to follow this
4.
5.
6.
Torque: 9 Nm

fluids.
7.
Installation
1.
2.
Check and top-up the coolant.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Coolant Pump V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

3.
4.
Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
5.
Refer to: Supercharger Belt (303-05 Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L

6.
7.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the accessory drive belt is

correctly located on each pulley.
Clean and inspect the accessory drive belt

pulleys for damage.
8.
Torque: 40 Nm
9.
10.

CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the

paint finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately
remove the coolant and clean the area with water.
Torque: 12 Nm
11.

Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the gaskets are correctly located.
Install all the bolts finger tight before final tightening.

NOTE: Install new gaskets.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Coolant Pump V8

5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

3.
Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding V8 5.0L Petrol (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
4.

Installation).
5.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe LH (303-12A

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
6.
CAUTIONS:


pulleys for damage.
7.
8.
Torque: 40 Nm
9.
10.

CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the

paint finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately
remove the coolant and clean the area with water.
Torque: 12 Nm
11.
CAUTIONS:

prior to removal.
Discard the seals.
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
Install all the bolts finger tight before final tightening.
Make sure that the gaskets are correctly located.

NOTE: Install new gaskets.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling Fan Motor
and Shroud V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

Installation).
3.

4.
5.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe RH (303-12A

6.

7.
Torque: 9 Nm
8.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
10.
11.
Torque: 25 Nm
12.
13.
Torque: 30 Nm
CAUTION: Make sure to protect the

paintwork.
Torque: 23 Nm
14.
15.
Torque: 7 Nm
16.
Installation
1.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling Fan Motor
and Shroud V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

Installation).
3.

4.
5.

6.

7.
8.
Torque: 7 Nm
9.
10.
11.
Torque: 25 Nm
12.
13.
Torque: 30 Nm

paintwork.
Torque: 23 Nm
14.
15.
Torque: 7 Nm
16.
Installation
1.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling Module V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.

Procedures).
5.

Installation).
6.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH (303-12A Intake Air

Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
7.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH (303-12A Intake Air

Installation).
8.
9.
Refer to: Auxiliary Radiator (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L

10.
11.
Torque: 25 Nm
12.
Torque: 23 Nm
13.

paintwork.
Torque: 30 Nm
14.
15.
16.
Torque: 30 Nm
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are

sealed. Use new blanking caps.
Torque: 8 Nm
24.
Installation
1.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Cooling Module V8

5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.

Procedures).
5.

Installation).
6.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe LH (303-12A Intake Air

Installation).
7.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe RH (303-12A Intake Air

Installation).
8.
9.
10.
Torque: 25 Nm
11.
Torque: 23 Nm
12.

paintwork.
Torque: 30 Nm
13.
14.
Torque: 5 Nm
15.
16.
17.
Torque: 9 Nm
18.
19.

correct.
Torque: 8 Nm
20.
Installation
1.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Radiator V8 S/C

5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

3.

Installation).
4.

5.

6.

7.
8.
9.
Torque: 7 Nm
10.
Torque: 25 Nm
11.

paintwork.
Torque: 23 Nm
12.
13.
14.
Torque: 30 Nm
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Torque: 7 Nm
21.
22.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
1.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Radiator V8 5.0L

Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

3.

Procedures).
4.

5.

6.
7.
8.
Torque: 7 Nm
9.
10.
Torque: 25 Nm
11.
Torque: 23 Nm
12.

paintwork.
Torque: 30 Nm
13.
14.
15.
Torque: 5 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
16.
17.
18.
Torque: 7 Nm
19.
20.
21.

Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
1.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Thermostat

Housing V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

stands.
2.
Refer to: Air Cleaner LH (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and

3.

Procedures).
4.
5.
6.
7.
NOTE: The retaining clips cannot be removed from

the pipe.
8.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Thermostat

Housing V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

stands.
2.
Refer to: Air Cleaner LH (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and

3.

Procedures).
4.
5.
NOTE: The retaining clips cannot be removed from

the pipe.
6.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger Cooling

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Intake manifold assemblies
Supply hoses to charge air coolers
Charge air radiator
Charge air coolant pump
Engine cooling system connecting hose
Return hoses from charge air coolers
INTRODUCTION
The supercharger cooling system cools the pressurized charge air from the supercharger. The supercharger cooling system
consists of:
A charge air coolant pump.

A charge air radiator.
Two charge air coolers.
Connecting hoses and pipes.
The supercharger cooling system is operationally independent of the engine cooling system, but connected to it by a hose
installed between the charge air radiator and the radiator of the engine cooling system. The connection with the engine
cooling system accommodates thermal expansion and retraction of the coolant in the supercharger cooling system, and
enables filling and draining of the supercharger cooling system.
CHARGE AIR COOLANT PUMP
Item
Part Number
Description
Coolant outlet connection
Coolant inlet connection
Electrical connector
The charge air coolant pump is an electric pump attached to the RH (right-hand) side of the charge air radiator. Hoses
connect the inlet of the charge air coolant pump to the charge air radiator, and the outlet to the charge air coolers. An
electrical connector provides the interface between the motor of the charge air coolant pump and the vehicle wiring.
CHARGE AIR RADIATOR
Item
Part Number
Description
Pipe clip bracket (2 off)
Coolant outlet connection
Lower attachment bracket (2 off)
Coolant inlet connection
Upper attachment bracket (2 off)
Expansion hose connection (with engine cooling system)
The charge air radiator is a cross flow type with an aluminum core and plastic end tanks. The charge air radiator is installed
in the cooling module, in front of the A/C (air conditioning) condenser. Brackets on the end tanks attach the charge air
radiator to the front of the engine cooling system radiator.
The RH end tank incorporates the coolant inlet and outlet connections, and a connection for the hose to the engine cooling
system. Hoses connect the inlet of the charge air radiator to the charge air coolers, and the outlet to the charge air coolant
pump.
CHARGE AIR COOLERS

A charge air cooler is installed in each intake manifold.
For additional information, refer to: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
Power distribution box (intercooler water pump relay and fuse 24)
Supercharger Cooling Flow Diagram
Item
Part Number
Description
RH charge air cooler
Engine
LH (left hand) charge air cooler
Expansion hose connection (with engine cooling system)
Charge air radiator
Electrical power for the charge air coolant pump is supplied from the intercooler water pump relay in the power distribution
box. When the intercooler water pump relay is energized, it connects power from the battery, via the BJB (battery junction
box) and CJB (central junction box), to the charge air coolant pump. Operation of the intercooler water pump relay is
controlled by the ECM (engine control module). The intercooler water pump relay is energized continuously while the ignition
is in power mode 6.
When the charge air coolant pump is running, coolant flows from the pump outlet through the charge air coolers, the charge
air radiator and back to the pump inlet.
Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Radiator

Removal
1.

stands.
2.

3.
4.
5.
Torque: 7 Nm
6.
7.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
1.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol WARNINGS:
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related
components. Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground the vehicle to earth and maintain the ground connection
until the work is complete.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, make sure the area around the joint faces and
connections are clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
NOTE: Tighten the fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line unions and fuel rail crossover pipe unions as it is instructed
in service manual.
Description
Ignition coil-on-plugs retaining bolts
Spark plugs
Fuel rail retaining bolt
Fuel rail crossover pipe unions
Fuel rail crossover pipe retaining bolts
Fuel pressure regulator
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line unions
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line M8 bolt
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line M5 nut
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line shield M10 bolt
Fuel rail high-pressure fuel pump fuel line shield M6 bolt
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump torx bolts
Throttle body retaining bolts
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolts
Steering column lower universal joint assembly bolts
Engine compartment brace retaining bolts
Nm
lb-ft
lb-in
7
62
20
15
Stage 1 - 20 Stage 2 - 30 Stage 1 - 15 Stage 2 - 22
21
15
12
9
33
24
21
15
25
18
11
8
6
53
29
21
11
8
12
9
10
7
25
18
100
74
35
26
10
7
45
33
-
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Charging and
Controls
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Crossover tube
LH (left hand) fuel rail
Fuel injector
HP (high pressure) fuel lines
HP fuel pumps and covers
RH (right hand) fuel rail
FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor
LP (low pressure) fuel lines
Description
INTRODUCTION
The fuel charging and controls system is a gasoline DI (direct injection) system controlled by the ECM (engine control module).
The fuel charging and controls system consists of:
LP and HP fuel lines.

Two HP fuel pumps.
Two fuel rails and a crossover tube.
A FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor.
Eight fuel injectors.
LP fuel from the pump in the fuel tank is pressurized by the HP fuel pumps and supplied to the fuel injectors via the fuel rails and
crossover tube. The ECM controls the fuel injectors and HP fuel pumps to inject the required volume of fuel into the combustion
chambers.
LOW AND HIGH PRESSURE FUEL LINES
Item
Part Number
Description
LP fuel lines
HP fuel lines
Acoustic cover
Heat reflective and insulation sleeves
The LP fuel line connects the HP fuel pumps to the fuel delivery line from the fuel tank and lines system. A quick release
connector at the start of the LP fuel line is held in a clip integrated into the LH (left-hand) ignition coils cover. P-clips secure the
LP fuel line to the rear of each cylinder head and to the RH (right-hand) side of the cylinder block. A heat reflective and
insulation sleeves are installed on the LP fuel line where it runs behind the RH exhaust manifold.
The HP fuel lines connect the HP fuel pumps to the RH fuel rail and the crossover tube. Two P-clips and a pipe clamp attach the
HP fuel lines to the cylinder block and the RH cylinder head respectively. An integral bracket on the front HP fuel line is attached
to a stud on the front-upper RH timing cover. An acoustic cover is installed on the bottom of the front HP fuel line.
HIGH PRESSURE FUEL PUMPS
Item
Part Number
Description
Crankshaft
Auxiliary camshaft
Tappet
HP fuel pump
Acoustic cover
The two HP fuel pumps are identical mechanically-driven pumps installed on the RH side of the sump body, behind the
generator. An O-ring seals each of the HP fuel pumps in the sump body. The front HP fuel pump is identified as No. 1 pump; the
rear HP fuel pump is identified as No. 2 pump. An acoustic cover is installed on each of the HP fuel pumps.
The HP fuel pumps are single-plunger pumps. The plunger of each pump extends through the sump body and the carrier of the
auxiliary camshaft. A tappet on the end each plunger is operated by a two-lobe cam on the auxiliary camshaft. A spring installed
on the outside of the plunger ensures the plunger and tappet remain in contact with the cam.
The auxiliary camshaft is driven by the crankshaft, via the auxiliary drive chain, at engine speed. The auxiliary camshaft is timed
to match the pump delivery strokes with crankshaft position.
HP Fuel Pump Schematic
Item
Part Number
Description
PRV (pressure relief valve)
To HP fuel lines
Check valve
Plunger
From LP fuel lines
Damper chamber
Fuel metering valve
In addition to the plunger, each HP fuel pump contains:
A
A
A
A
damper chamber.
fuel metering valve.
check valve.
PRV.
The damper absorbs pressure pulses from the plunger when the fuel metering valve is open at the start of the delivery stroke.
The fuel metering valve regulates the output pressure from the HP fuel pump. The fuel metering valve is a normally open
solenoid valve controlled by the ECM. During the inlet stroke of the plunger the fuel metering valve is de-energized, which allows
LP fuel into the pumping chamber. The ECM energizes the fuel metering valve closed during the delivery stroke of the plunger,
which forces the fuel in the pumping chamber through the check valve into the HP lines. By changing the closing point of the fuel
metering valve, the ECM can determine the volume of fuel output during the delivery stroke, and thus the pressure in the HP
side of the system.
The check valve prevents the return of HP fuel to the pumping chamber during the inlet stroke of the plunger.
The PRV protects the HP side of the system from excessive pressure if there is a failure of the fuel metering valve. If the pump
delivery pressure increases to 195 - 204 bar (2828 - 2959 lbf/in2), the PRV opens and returns fuel to the inlet side of the
plunger.
FUEL RAILS AND CROSSOVER TUBE
Item
Part Number
Description
LH fuel rail
Crossover tube
RH fuel rail
FRP sensor
Fuel injector
The fuel rails and crossover tube are made from stainless steel. Bolts attach each fuel rail to the related cylinder head. The
crossover tube connects the front high pressure line to the LH fuel rail, which ensures there is equal pressure in the two fuel
rails. Four P-clips attach the crossover tube to the intercooler-tank top.
The rear of the RH fuel rail incorporates a threaded boss for installation of the FRP sensor.
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
The FRP sensor provides the ECM with a continuous signal of fuel rail pressure. The FRP sensor is installed in the rear of the RH
fuel rail. The FRP sensor is screwed into a threaded boss in the fuel rail. A flying lead and three pin connector provides the
interface with the engine harness.

The FRP sensor contains a steel diaphragm fitted with strain gages, which are incorporated into a Wheatstone bridge. The output
from the Wheatstone bridge is processed by the ECM to derive a pressure value.
FUEL INJECTORS
The fuel injectors spray fuel from the fuel rail directly into the combustion chambers. The fuel injectors are installed close to the
center of the combustion chambers, between the inlet and exhaust valves and next to the spark plug.
The fuel injectors are a push fit in the fuel rails and the cylinder heads. On each fuel injector, a rubber O-ring seals the head of
the fuel injector in the fuel rail. A teflon ring seals the nozzle of the fuel injector in the cylinder head. A clamp locks each fuel
injector to the fuel rail.
Each fuel injector contains a solenoid-operated needle valve, which opens when the solenoid winding is energized. While the
needle valve is open, fuel is sprayed into the combustion chamber. The solenoid winding is connected to a power feed and a
ground from the ECM, which operates the fuel injectors with a two stage power supply. Initially the ECM supplies the fuel
injectors with 65 V, then once the boost current reaches 11 A the power supply is switched to battery voltage. The ECM meters
the amount of fuel injected into the combustion chambers by adjusting the time that the solenoid winding is energized.
There are six holes around the tip of the nozzle through which the fuel is sprayed. Two of the holes direct fuel below the spark
plug. The other four holes direct fuel evenly around the remainder of the combustion chamber.
If a fuel injector fails, the engine will suffer from unstable idle speed, poor NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) and poor
emissions performance.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
No. 1 HP fuel pump
No. 2 HP fuel pump
Fuel injectors
ECM
FRP sensor
The ECM controls the output from the HP fuel pumps to deliver the required volume of fuel at pressures up to 150 bar (2175
lbf/in2).
The ECM uses the signal from the FRP sensor to calculate the time the fuel injectors need to be energized to deliver the correct
mass of fuel to the combustion chambers.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Charging and
Controls
Principles of Operation
For a detailed description of the fuel charging and controls system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls
- V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
not guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Fuel level
Fuel leaks
Damaged fuel lines
Damaged push connect fittings
Fuel contamination/grade/quality
Throttle body
Damaged fuel tank filler pipe cap
Damaged fuel tank filler pipe
Electrical
Fuses
Harnesses
Sensor(s)
Engine Control Module (ECM)
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Engine cranks, but does not
fire
Engine cranks and fires, but

will not start
Difficult cold start
Difficult hot start
Possible Causes
Engine breather system
Action
Ensure the engine breather system is free from
restriction and is correctly installed. Check for ignition
system, fuel system and electronic engine control
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
disconnected/restricted
Ignition system
Fuel system
Electronic engine control
Evaporative emissions purge
Check for evaporative emissions, fuel system and
valve
ignition system related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Fuel pump
DTC Index
Spark plugs
HT short to ground
(tracking) check rubber
boots for cracks/damage
Ignition system
Engine coolant level/antiCheck the engine coolant level and condition. Ensure
freeze content
the battery is in a fully charged and serviceable
Battery
condition. Check for electronic engine controls, engine
Electronic engine controls
emissions, fuel system and evaporative emissions
system related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
(EGR) valve stuck open
Index
Fuel pump
Purge valve
Injector leak
Check for injector leak, install new injector as
required. Check for electronic engine controls,
Purge valve
Fuel pump
Ignition system
EGR valve stuck open
evaporative emissions, fuel system, ignition system

and engine emission system related DTCs and refer
to the relevant DTC Index
Difficult to start after hot

soak (vehicle standing,
engine off, after engine has
reached operating
temperature)
Injector leak
Purge valve
Fuel pump
Ignition system

Engine stalls soon after start
Breather system
ECM relay
Ignition system
Air intake system restricted
Air leakage
Fuel lines
Fuel pressure, fuel pump,
fuel lines
Injector leak
Air leakage
Throttle motor
Restricted accelerator pedal
travel (carpet, etc)
Ignition system
Transmission malfunction
Fuel pump/lines
Air leakage
Ignition system
Sticking variable camshaft
timing (VCT) hub
Fuel pump/lines
Throttle motor
Ignition system
Fuel pump/lines
Air leakage
Sticking VCT hub
Throttle motor

restriction and is correctly installed. Check for
electronic engine control, ignition system and fuel
Index. Check for blockage in air filter element and air
intake system. Check for air leakage in air intake
system
Engine hesitates/poor
acceleration
Engine backfires
Engine surges
Engine detonates/knocks
No throttle response
Poor throttle response
Breather system
Traction control event
Air leakage
Check for fuel system related DTCs and refer to the

relevant DTC Index. Check for injector leak, install
new injector as required. Check for air leakage in air
intake system. Ensure accelerator pedal is free from
restriction. Check for electronic engine controls,
ignition, engine emission system and transmission
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Check for fuel system failures. Check for air leakage

in intake air system. Check for electronic engine
controls, ignition system and VCT system related
Check for fuel system failures. Check for electronic

engine controls, throttle system and ignition system
controls and VCT system related DTCs and refer to
the relevant DTC Index
Check for electronic engine controls and throttle
Index
electronic engine controls, transmission and traction
control related DTCs and refer to the related DTC
Index. Check for air leakage in intake air system
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Engine Control Module (ECM), please refer to
Section 303-14. REFER to:
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injection Component
Cleaning
General Procedures
General Equipment
Pneumatic vacuum gun
Cleaning
WARNINGS:
Do not carry out any repairs to the fuel system with the engine running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek immediate medical attention.
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined area and arrange ' No Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the vehicle.
Wash hands thoroughly after fuel handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors are
always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Before using the cleaning fluid, protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that all parts removed from the vehicle are placed on the lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that clean non-plated tools are used. Clean tools using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, prior to starting
work on the vehicle.
Use a steel topped workbench and cover it with clean, lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible. Foreign matter
from work on clutches, brakes or from machining or welding operations can contaminate the fuel system and may result in later
malfunction.
1.
Using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, brush the components
being removed and the surrounding area.
2.
Using a pneumatic vacuum gun, remove all traces of foreign material.

General Equipment: Pneumatic vacuum gun
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injection

Component Cleaning Using Pressure Cleaner
General Procedures
Cleaning
WARNINGS:
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek immediate medical
attention.
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined area and arrange ' No Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the
vehicle.
Wash hands thoroughly after fuel handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop,
seek medical attention.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable
vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible.
Foreign matter from work on clutches, brakes or from machining or welding operations can contaminate the fuel system
and may result in later malfunction.
Before using the cleaning fluid, protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking
material.
1.
CAUTION: Make sure the correct additive is used in this

step. Failure to carry out this instruction may cause damage to
the vehicle.
Open the fuel filler door and remove the cap.
Empty the fuel additive into the fuel filler pipe.
Install the fuel filler cap and close the fuel filler door.
2.
3.
4.
Release the breather from the air intake elbow.
CAUTION: Make sure the correct additive is

used in this step. Failure to carry out this
Install the cleaning equipment to a suitable
5.
Remove the cleaning equipment filler cap.
Empty the induction system cleaning fluid
into the cleaning equipment.

Install the filler cap.
6.
Position the intake system cleaning tool into intake

elbow and secure with the clamp.
7.
Connect a suitable compressed air line to
the cleaning equipment.

Set the pressure to 4 bar.
8.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
Open the ball valve on the cleaning
equipment and allow the cleaning fluid to

spray into the intake elbow.
Raise the engine speed to 1200 rpm and
hold until the cleaning fluid spray has
stopped.
10.
Close the ball valve.
Release the air pressure in the cleaning equipment.
Disconnect the air line.
11.
12.
Connect the breather to the air intake elbow.
13.
Start the engine.
Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
Raise the engine speed to 1500 rpm and hold for 3
minutes until a temperature of 70C is achieved.

Switch off the engine.
14.
Connect the approved diagnostic equipment to the vehicle.
15.
Follow on screen prompts and check for DTC's (Diagnostic

Trouble Codes).
16.
Clear the DTC's following the on screen procedure.
17.
Disconnect the approved diagnostic equipment from the vehicle.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injectors

Removal
1.

Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - V8
1.
Installation

Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - V8
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail LH

Special Tool(s)
303-1450
Spark Plug Remover/Installer
310-197
Remover, Fuel Injector
310-198
Installer, Teflon Seal
310-199
Re-shape Tool, Teflon Seal
310-200-01
Fuel Rail Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
310-200-02
Fuel Rail Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that tools and equipment are clean, free of foreign material and lubricant.
1.
Refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and

Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation).
2.
Refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C

5.0L Petrol (310-00 Fuel System - General Information, General
Procedures).
3.

4.
Refer to: Fuel Injection Component Cleaning (303-04A Fuel

Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
5.
6.
Torque: 45 Nm
7.
8.

fluids.
9.
12.
10.

fluids.
11.

fluids.

13.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
14.
15.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
16.

17.
18.
19.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
20.
Lower the vehicle.

21.
22.
23.
NOTE: RH shown LH similar.

24.
CAUTION: Make a note of the fuel injector

clamp alignment to the fuel rail prior to removal.
25.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the special tool is located

correctly to the fuel injector prior to removing the
fuel injector.
Make sure that the special tool is held square

to the fuel injector during removal.
Make sure that all open ports are covered to

prevent any foreign material ingress.
26.
27.
CAUTION: If the fuel injector is being

removed without a new component being installed,
the fuel injector clamp must remain with the fuel
injector it is removed with.
CAUTIONS:
Do not use a knife to remove the Teflon seal

as damage could occur to the fuel injector.
Do not cut the Teflon seal to deep as damage

could occur to the fuel injector.
Pinch the Teflon seal to allow the tool to cut

the Teflon seal without damaging the fuel injector.
28.
Installation
CAUTION: Do not use any sharp tools to

remove the O-ring seal as damage could occur to
the fuel injector.
1.
Install new O-ring seals.
2.
Install new Teflon seals.

3.
4.
CAUTION: If the original fuel injector is being

installed, the original fuel injector clamp must
installed with the fuel injector it was removed with.
5.
CAUTION: If a new cylinder head has been

installed then the special tool 310-200-02 without
the thread must be used to install the fuel rail.
Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
6.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the area around the open fuel

injector ports are clean and free of foreign material
and lubricant prior to installing the fuel injector.
When Installing the fuel injector(s), make

sure that the Teflon seal is clean and free of
foreign material and lubricant.
7.
CAUTIONS:
If new fuel injectors are installed, a new

injector clamp must be installed
Make sure that the fuel injector is aligned

and installed into the fuel rail correctly, as noted in
the removal step.
Tighten the fuel rail retaining bolts a turn at a

time until the correct torque is achieved.
NOTE: Lubricate the fuel injector O-ring seals with

clean engine oil.
Torque: 20 Nm
8.
Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
9.
Torque: 20 Nm
10.
NOTE: Tighten in the sequence indicated.

Torque:
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
2
3
1
4
30
30
30
30
Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm
11.

Torque: 20 Nm
12.
13.
Torque: 7 Nm
14.
CAUTION: Lubricate only the union threads

with clean engine oil.
15.
Lower the vehicle.

16.

17.

18.

Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
19.

Torque: 21 Nm
20.

Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
21.
22.
Lower the vehicle.
23.
24.
NOTE: Lubricate the union threads with clean

engine oil.
27.
25.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
26.
Torque: 21 Nm

28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Torque: 45 Nm
33.
Torque: 45 Nm
34.
35.

Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail RH

Special Tool(s)
303-1450
310-197
310-198
310-199
310-200-01
310-200-02
Removal
1.

and Operation).
2.

Procedures).
3.

4.

Procedures).
5.
6.
Torque: 45 Nm
7.
8.
9.

fluids.
10.
11.

fluids.

12.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
13.
14.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
15.

16.
17.
18.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
19.
Lower the vehicle.
20.
21.
NOTE: LH shown RH similar.
22.
23.
24.

alignment to the fuel rail prior to removal.
25.
CAUTIONS:

fuel injector.


26.

27.
CAUTIONS:



28.

the fuel injector.
Installation
1.
2.

3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.

5.

Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
6.
CAUTIONS:


7.
CAUTIONS:


the removal step.


clean engine oil.
Torque: 20 Nm
8.

Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
9.

Torque: 20 Nm
10.

Torque:
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
2
3
1
4
30
30
30
30
Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm
11.
12.

Torque: 20 Nm
13.

Torque: 7 Nm
14.
15.

16.
Lower the vehicle.

17.

18.

19.

Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
20.

Torque: 21 Nm
21.

Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
22.
23.
Lower the vehicle.
24.
25.

engine oil.
28.
26.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
27.
Torque: 21 Nm

29.
30.
31.
32.
Torque: 10 Nm
33.
Torque: 45 Nm
34.
35.

Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Left-Hand Fuel Rail
High-Pressure Fuel Pump
Removal
1.

and Operation).
2.

Procedures).
3.

4.
5.
Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01 Engine - 5.0L,
Vehicles Without: Supercharger, General Procedures).
6.

Procedures).
7.
8.

fluids.
9.
10.

fluids.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe RH (303-12B

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
11.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
12.
13.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
14.

15.
Refer to: Engine Mount RH (303-01B Engine - V8 5.0L Petrol,

16.
Refer to: Generator (414-02 Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L

17.
18.
19.
20.
CAUTIONS:
Remove and discard the high-pressure fuel

supply lines.

new blanking caps.
21.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
22.
23.

fluids.
Loosen the Torx screws a turn each at a time.
24.

fluids.
1.

2.

Installation

Torque: 12 Nm
3.
4.
5.
CAUTIONS:

engine oil.
6.

cover to one side.
Torque: 12 Nm
7.
Lower the vehicle.
8.

9.

10.

Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
11.

Torque: 21 Nm
12.

Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
13.
Torque: 21 Nm
14.

Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
15.
16.
Torque: 25 Nm
17.

18.

19.
Lower the vehicle.

20.
21.

engine oil.
22.
23.
24.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm

and Installation).
25.
26.
27.
28.

29.
30.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Right-Hand Fuel Rail
High-Pressure Fuel Pump
Removal
All vehicles
1.

and Operation).
2.

Procedures).
3.

4.
5.
Vehicles With: Supercharger, General Procedures).
6.

Procedures).
7.
8.

fluids.
9.
10.

fluids.

11.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
12.
13.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
14.

15.
Refer to: Engine Mount RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

16.


17.
18.
All vehicles
19.
20.
21.
22.
CAUTIONS:

supply lines.

new blanking caps.
23.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
24.
25.

fluids.
26.

fluids.
Installation
All vehicles
1.

2.
CAUTION: Tighten on both sides

simultaneously.
Torque: 12 Nm
3.
4.
5.
CAUTIONS:

engine oil.
6.

cover to one side.
Torque: 12 Nm
7.
Lower the vehicle.

8.

9.

10.

Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
11.

Torque: 21 Nm
12.

Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
13.
Torque: 21 Nm
14.

Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
15.
16.
Torque: 25 Nm

17.
Torque: 100 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
18.
Torque: 35 Nm
All vehicles
19.

20.
Refer to: Engine Mount RH (303-01A Engine - V8 S/C 5.0L

21.
Lower the vehicle.

22.
23.

engine oil.
24.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
25.
26.
Torque: 21 Nm

27.
28.
29.
30.

31.
Vehicles With: Supercharger, General Procedures).
32.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Throttle Body

Removal
1.

2.

3.

Procedures).
4.
5.

Installation).
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Torque: 10 Nm
11.
12.
Torque: 10 Nm
CAUTIONS:
Take extra care when removing the throttle

body, failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the manifold absolute pressure and
temperature (MAPT) sensor.
Do not attempt to clean the throttle body

bore, build up of deposits reduces air leakage past
the throttle plate at the fully closed position.
Installation
1.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol WARNINGS:
in personal injury.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, make sure the area around the joint faces and
connections are clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
NOTE: Tighten the fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line unions and fuel rail crossover pipe unions as it is instructed
in service manual.
Description
Ignition coil-on-plugs retaining bolts
Spark plugs
Fuel rail retaining bolt
Fuel rail crossover pipe unions
Fuel rail crossover pipe retaining bolts
Fuel pressure regulator
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line unions
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump fuel line M5 nut
Fuel rail high pressure fuel pump torx bolts
Throttle body retaining bolts
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolts
Steering column lower universal joint assembly bolts
Engine compartment brace retaining bolts
Nm
lb-ft
lb-in
7
62
20
15
Stage 1 - 20 Stage 2 - 30 Stage 1 - 15 Stage 2 - 22
21
15
8
71
33
24
21
15
25
18
11
8
6
53
29
21
11
8
12
9
10
7
25
18
100
74
35
26
10
7
45
33
-
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Charging and Controls
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Crossover tube
LH (left hand) fuel rail
Fuel injector
HP (high pressure) fuel lines
HP fuel pumps and covers
RH (right hand) fuel rail
FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor
LP (low pressure) fuel lines
Description
INTRODUCTION
The fuel charging and controls system is a gasoline DI (direct injection) system controlled by the ECM (engine control module).
The fuel charging and controls system consists of:
LP and HP fuel lines.

Two HP fuel pumps.
Two fuel rails and a crossover tube.
A FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor.
Eight fuel injectors.
LP fuel from the pump in the fuel tank is pressurized by the HP fuel pumps and supplied to the fuel injectors via the fuel rails and
crossover tube. The ECM controls the fuel injectors and HP fuel pumps to inject the required volume of fuel into the combustion
chambers.
LOW AND HIGH PRESSURE FUEL LINES
Item
Part Number
Description
LP fuel lines
HP fuel lines
Acoustic cover
Heat reflective and insulation sleeves
The LP fuel line connects the HP fuel pumps to the fuel delivery line from the fuel tank and lines system. A quick release
connector at the start of the LP fuel line is held in a clip integrated into the LH (left-hand) ignition coils cover. P-clips secure the
LP fuel line to the rear of each cylinder head and to the RH (right-hand) side of the cylinder block. A heat reflective and
insulation sleeves are installed on the LP fuel line where it runs behind the RH exhaust manifold.
The HP fuel lines connect the HP fuel pumps to the RH fuel rail and the crossover tube. Two P-clips and a pipe clamp attach the
HP fuel lines to the cylinder block and the RH cylinder head respectively. An integral bracket on the front HP fuel line is attached
to a stud on the front-upper RH timing cover. An acoustic cover is installed on the bottom of the front HP fuel line.
HIGH PRESSURE FUEL PUMPS
Item
Part Number
Description
Crankshaft
Auxiliary camshaft
Tappet
HP fuel pump
Acoustic cover
The two HP fuel pumps are identical mechanically-driven pumps installed on the RH side of the sump body, behind the
generator. An O-ring seals each of the HP fuel pumps in the sump body. The front HP fuel pump is identified as No. 1 pump; the
rear HP fuel pump is identified as No. 2 pump. An acoustic cover is installed on each of the HP fuel pumps.
The HP fuel pumps are single-plunger pumps. The plunger of each pump extends through the sump body and the carrier of the
auxiliary camshaft. A tappet on the end each plunger is operated by a two-lobe cam on the auxiliary camshaft. A spring installed
on the outside of the plunger ensures the plunger and tappet remain in contact with the cam.
The auxiliary camshaft is driven by the crankshaft, via the auxiliary drive chain, at engine speed. The auxiliary camshaft is timed
to match the pump delivery strokes with crankshaft position.
HP Fuel Pump Schematic
Item
Part Number
Description
POV (pressure relief valve)
To HP fuel lines
Check valve
Plunger
From LP fuel lines
Damper chamber
Fuel metering valve
In addition to the plunger, each HP fuel pump contains:
A
A
A
A
damper chamber
fuel metering valve
check valve
PRV (pressure relief valve)
The damper absorbs pressure pulses from the plunger when the fuel metering valve is open at the start of the delivery stroke.
The fuel metering valve regulates the output pressure from the HP fuel pump. The fuel metering valve is a normally open
solenoid valve controlled by the ECM. During the inlet stroke of the plunger the fuel metering valve is de-energized, which allows
LP fuel into the pumping chamber. The ECM energizes the fuel metering valve closed during the delivery stroke of the plunger,
which forces the fuel in the pumping chamber through the check valve into the HP lines. By changing the closing point of the fuel
metering valve, the ECM can determine the volume of fuel output during the delivery stroke, and thus the pressure in the HP
side of the system.
The check valve prevents the return of HP fuel to the pumping chamber during the inlet stroke of the plunger.
The PRV protects the HP side of the system from excessive pressure if there is a failure of the fuel metering valve. If the pump
delivery pressure increases to 195 - 204 bar (2828 - 2959 lbf/in2), the PRV opens and returns fuel to the inlet side of the
plunger.
FUEL RAILS AND CROSSOVER TUBE
Item
Part Number
Description
LH fuel rail
Crossover tube
Fuel injector
RH fuel rail
FRP sensor
The fuel rails and crossover tube are made from stainless steel. Bolts attach each fuel rail to the related cylinder head. The
crossover tube connects the front high pressure line to the LH fuel rail, which ensures there is equal pressure in the two fuel
rails. Two P-clips attach the crossover tube to the intake manifold.
The rear of the RH fuel rail incorporates a threaded boss for installation of the FRP sensor.
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
The FRP sensor provides the ECM with a continuous signal of fuel rail pressure. The FRP sensor is installed in the rear of the RH
fuel rail. The FRP sensor is screwed into a threaded boss in the fuel rail. A flying lead and three pin connector provides the
interface with the engine harness.

The FRP sensor contains a steel diaphragm fitted with strain gages, which are incorporated into a Wheatstone bridge. The output
from the Wheatstone bridge is processed by the ECM to derive a pressure value.
FUEL INJECTORS
The fuel injectors spray fuel from the fuel rail directly into the combustion chambers. The fuel injectors are installed close to the
center of the combustion chambers, between the inlet and exhaust valves and next to the spark plug.
The fuel injectors are a push fit in the fuel rails and the cylinder heads. On each fuel injector, a rubber O-ring seals the head of
the fuel injector in the fuel rail. A teflon ring seals the nozzle of the fuel injector in the cylinder head. A clamp locks each fuel
injector to the fuel rail.
Each fuel injector contains a solenoid-operated needle valve, which opens when the solenoid winding is energized. While the
needle valve is open, fuel is sprayed into the combustion chamber. The solenoid winding is connected to a power feed and a
ground from the ECM, which operates the fuel injectors with a two stage power supply. Initially the ECM supplies the fuel
injectors with 65 V, then once the boost current reaches 11 A the power supply is switched to battery voltage. The ECM meters
the amount of fuel injected into the combustion chambers by adjusting the time that the solenoid winding is energized.
There are six holes around the tip of the nozzle through which the fuel is sprayed. Two of the holes direct fuel below the spark
plug. The other four holes direct fuel evenly around the remainder of the combustion chamber.
If a fuel injector fails, the engine will suffer from unstable idle speed, poor NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) and poor
emissions performance.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
No. 1 HP fuel pump
No. 2 HP fuel pump
Fuel injectors
ECM
FRP sensor
The ECM controls the output from the HP fuel pumps to deliver the required volume of fuel at pressures up to 150 bar (2175
lbf/in2).
The ECM also uses the signal from the FRP sensor to calculate the time the fuel injectors need to be energized to deliver the
correct mass of fuel to the combustion chambers.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Charging and

Controls
For a detailed description of the fuel charging and controls system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls
- V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Fuel level
Fuel leaks
Damaged fuel lines
Throttle body
Electrical
Fuses
Harnesses
Sensor(s)
3.
4.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
fire

will not start
Difficult hot start
Possible Causes
Action
Ignition system
Fuel system
valve
Fuel pump
DTC Index
Spark plugs
HT short to ground
Ignition system
freeze content
Battery
Index
Fuel pump
Purge valve
Injector leak
Purge valve
Fuel pump
Ignition system


reached operating
temperature)
Injector leak
Purge valve
Fuel pump
Ignition system

Breather system
ECM relay
Ignition system
Air leakage
Fuel lines
fuel lines
Injector leak
Air leakage
Throttle motor
Ignition system
Fuel pump/lines
Air leakage
Ignition system
timing (VCT) hub
Fuel pump/lines
Throttle motor
Ignition system
Fuel pump/lines
Air leakage
Sticking VCT hub
Throttle motor

system
acceleration
Engine backfires
Engine surges
Breather system
Air leakage



Index
DTC Index
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injection Component

Cleaning
General Procedures
General Equipment
Pneumatic vacuum gun
Cleaning
WARNINGS:
Do not carry out any repairs to the fuel system with the engine running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek immediate medical attention.
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined area and arrange ' No Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the vehicle.
Wash hands thoroughly after fuel handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors are
always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Before using the cleaning fluid, protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that all parts removed from the vehicle are placed on the lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that clean non-plated tools are used. Clean tools using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, prior to starting
work on the vehicle.
Use a steel topped workbench and cover it with clean, lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible. Foreign matter
from work on clutches, brakes or from machining or welding operations can contaminate the fuel system and may result in later
malfunction.
1.
Using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, brush the components
being removed and the surrounding area.
2.
Using a pneumatic vacuum gun, remove all traces of foreign material.

General Equipment: Pneumatic vacuum gun
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injection Component

Cleaning Using Pressure Cleaner
General Procedures
Cleaning
WARNINGS:
attention.
vehicle.
in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible.
Foreign matter from work on clutches, brakes or from machining or welding operations can contaminate the fuel system
and may result in later malfunction.
Before using the cleaning fluid, protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking
material.
1.
CAUTION: Make sure the correct additive is used in this

step. Failure to carry out this instruction may cause damage to
the vehicle.
Empty the fuel additive into the fuel filler pipe.
Install the fuel filler cap and close the fuel filler door.
2.
3.
4.
Release the breather from the air intake elbow.
CAUTION: Make sure the correct additive is

used in this step. Failure to carry out this
Install the cleaning equipment to a suitable
5.
Remove the cleaning equipment filler cap.
Empty the induction system cleaning fluid
into the cleaning equipment.

Install the filler cap.
6.
Position the intake system cleaning tool into intake

elbow and secure with the clamp.
7.
Connect a suitable compressed air line to
the cleaning equipment.

Set the pressure to 4 bar.
8.
9.
Open the ball valve on the cleaning
equipment and allow the cleaning fluid to

spray into the intake elbow.
Raise the engine speed to 1200 rpm and
hold until the cleaning fluid spray has
stopped.
10.
Close the ball valve.
Release the air pressure in the cleaning equipment.
Disconnect the air line.
11.
12.
Connect the breather to the air intake elbow.
13.
Start the engine.
minutes until a temperature of 70C is achieved.

14.
Connect the approved diagnostic equipment to the vehicle.
15.
Follow on screen prompts and check for DTC's (Diagnostic

Trouble Codes).
16.
Clear the DTC's following the on screen procedure.
17.
Disconnect the approved diagnostic equipment from the vehicle.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Injectors

Removal
1.

1.
Installation

Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail LH

Special Tool(s)
303-1450
310-197
310-198
310-199
310-200-01
310-200-02
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that tools and equipment are clean, free of foreign material and lubricant.
1.

and Operation).
2.

Procedures).
3.

4.

Procedures).
5.
6.
7.
8.
Torque: 45 Nm
9.

fluids.
10.
11.

and Installation).
12.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
13.
14.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
15.

16.
17.
18.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
19.
Lower the vehicle.

20.
21.
www.JagDocs.com
22.

23.

clamp alignment to the fuel rail prior to removal.
24.
CAUTIONS:

fuel injector.


25.
26.

CAUTIONS:



27.

the fuel injector.
Installation
1.
2.

3.
4.

5.

Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
6.
CAUTIONS:


7.
CAUTIONS:


the removal step.


clean engine oil.
Torque: 20 Nm
8.
Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
9.
Torque: 20 Nm
10.

Torque:
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
2
3
1
4
30
30
30
30
Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm
11.

Torque: 20 Nm
12.
13.
Torque: 7 Nm
14.

15.
Lower the vehicle.

16.

17.

18.

Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
19.

Torque: 21 Nm
20.

Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
21.
22.
Lower the vehicle.
23.
24.

engine oil.
27.
25.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
26.
Torque: 21 Nm

and Installation).
28.
29.
30.
31.
Torque: 45 Nm
32.
Torque: 45 Nm
33.
34.

Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail RH

Special Tool(s)
303-1450
310-197
310-198
310-199
310-200-01
310-200-02
Removal
1.

and Operation).
2.

Procedures).
3.

4.

Procedures).
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

and Installation).
11.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
12.
13.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
14.

15.
16.
17.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
18.
Lower the vehicle.

19.
20.
21.
22.
23.

alignment to the fuel rail prior to removal.
24.
CAUTIONS:

fuel injector.


25.

26.
CAUTIONS:



27.

the fuel injector.
Installation
1.
2.

3.
4.

5.

Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
6.
CAUTIONS:


7.
CAUTIONS:


the removal step.

clean engine oil.
Torque: 20 Nm
8.

Special Tool(s): 310-200-01, 310-200-02
9.

Torque: 20 Nm
10.

Torque:
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
Bolt
2
3
1
4
30
30
30
30
Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm
11.
12.

Torque: 20 Nm
13.

Torque: 7 Nm
14.
15.

16.
Lower the vehicle.

17.

18.

19.

Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
20.

Torque: 21 Nm
21.

Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
22.
23.
Lower the vehicle.

24.
25.

engine oil.
26.
27.
28.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm

and Installation).
29.
30.
31.
Torque: 10 Nm
32.
Torque: 45 Nm
33.
34.

www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Left-Hand Fuel Rail HighPressure Fuel Pump
Removal
1.

and Operation).
2.

Procedures).
3.

4.
5.
6.

Procedures).
7.
8.
9.

and Installation).
10.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
11.
12.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
13.

14.

15.

16.
17.
18.
19.
CAUTIONS:

supply lines.

new blanking caps.
20.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
21.
22.

fluids.
23.

fluids.
1.

2.

Installation

Torque: 12 Nm
3.
4.
5.
CAUTIONS:

engine oil.
6.

cover to one side.
Torque: 12 Nm
7.
Lower the vehicle.
8.

9.

10.

Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
11.

Torque: 21 Nm
12.

Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
13.
Torque: 21 Nm
14.

Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
15.
16.
Torque: 25 Nm
17.

18.

19.
Lower the vehicle.

20.
21.

engine oil.
22.
23.
24.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
Torque: 21 Nm

and Installation).
25.
26.
27.

28.
29.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Right-Hand Fuel Rail HighPressure Fuel Pump
Removal
All vehicles
1.

and Operation).
2.

Procedures).
3.

4.
5.
6.

Procedures).
7.
8.
9.

and Installation).
10.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
11.
12.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
13.

14.

15.


16.
17.
All vehicles
18.
19.
20.
21.
CAUTIONS:

supply lines.

new blanking caps.
22.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
23.
24.

fluids.
25.

fluids.
Installation
All vehicles
1.

2.

Torque: 12 Nm
3.
4.
5.
CAUTIONS:

engine oil.
6.

cover to one side.
Torque: 12 Nm
7.
Lower the vehicle.

8.

9.

10.

Torque:
Unions (1) 21 Nm
M6 (2) 11 Nm
M8 (3) 25 Nm
M5 nut (4) 6 Nm
11.

Torque: 21 Nm
12.

Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
M6 11 Nm
13.
Torque: 21 Nm
14.

Torque:
M10 29 Nm
M6 11 Nm
15.
16.
Torque: 25 Nm

17.
Torque: 100 Nm
18.
Torque: 35 Nm
All vehicles
19.

20.

21.
Lower the vehicle.

22.
23.

engine oil.
24.
Torque:
Unions 21 Nm
Bolts 8 Nm
25.
26.
Torque: 21 Nm

and Installation).
27.
28.
29.

30.
31.
Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Throttle Body

Removal
1.

2.
3.
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
Torque: 10 Nm
6.
7.
Torque: 18 Nm
8.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean the

throttle body bore, build up of deposits reduces air
leakage past the throttle plate at the fully closed
position.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and
free of foreign material.
Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Description

Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolt - all vehicles
Accessory drive belt center idler pulley retaining bolt - vehicles without supercharger
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolt to tensioner bracket - vehicles with supercharger
Supercharger belt tensioner bracket retaining bolt
Supercharger belt tensioner retaining bolt
Supercharger belt 76mm idler pulley retaining bolt
Supercharger belt 90mm idler pulley retaining bolt
Nm
40
40
25
40
25
40
40
56
lb-ft lb-in
30
30
19
30
19
30
30
41
-
Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Accessory Drive

Item
Part Number
Description
Coolant pump
Power steering pump
Belt tensioner
A/C (air conditioning) compressor
Primary drive belt
Crankshaft pulley/torsional vibration damper
Idler pulley
Generator
Idler pulley
COMPONENT LOCATION - SUPERCHARGED VEHICLES
Item
Part Number
Description
Primary accessory drive
Secondary accessory drive
Coolant pump
Power steering pump
Primary drive belt
A/C compressor
Belt tensioner
Crankshaft pulley/torsional vibration damper
Idler pulley
Generator
Idler pulley
10
Supercharger
11
Idler pulley
12
Belt tensioner
13
Secondary drive belt
14
Idler pulley
www.JagDocs.com
INTRODUCTION
The accessory drive is a belt sysem powered by a pulley attached to the front of the crankshaft. The crankshaft pulley, which
incorporates a torsional vibration damper, drives a single (primary) drive belt on NA (naturally aspirated) vehicles and two
(primary and secondary) drive belts on SC (supercharger) vehicles. An automatic belt tensioner in each belt run maintains
the drive belt at the correct tension. Together with idler pulleys, the belt tensioner also guides the drive belt clear of
obstructions and sets the correct 'wrap-around' of the accessory component drive pulleys to ensure a slip-free drive.
Primary Drive Belt

On both NA and SC vehicles the primary drive belt is a six-ribbed poly-V belt that drives the:
Coolant pump
Power steering pump
A/C (air conditioning) compressor
Generator.
Secondary Drive Belt

On SC vehicles the secondary drive belt is an eight-ribbed poly-V belt that drives the SC.
Belt Tensioners
Each belt tensioner consists of an idler pulley on the end of a spring loaded pivot arm. The pivot arm can be turned clockwise
(viewed from the front of the engine) for removal and installation of the belt.
The belt tensioner is calibrated to automatically maintain the correct tension in the related drive belt.

For a detailed description of the accessory drive system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Accessory Drive (303-05 Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
Visual Inspection
3.
Mechanical
Belt drive belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)
Belt tension
Pulley alignment
Coolant pump
Belt tensioner assembly
Air conditioning compressor
Power steering pump
Crankshaft pulley
Generator
Deflection pulley
Cooling fan pulley
If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding
to the next step.
CAUTION: If the engine is run without the accessory drive belts connected to eliminate driven components, diagnostic
trouble codes, (DTCs) may be set which must be cleared before the vehicle is returned to the owner. The engine should not
be run for more than 2-3 minutes with the belts disconnected. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
vehicle.
4.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Noise
Drive belt does

not hold tension
Possible Causes
Belt condition
Belt tension
Pulleys misaligned
Driven components
(including tensioners)
Belt condition
Tensioner fault
Action
Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner
function. Check the pulley alignment. Check the driven components for
excessive resistance to rotation. Rectify as necessary.
Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner
function. Rectify as necessary.
DTC Index

Belt V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
and Installation).
4.
CAUTIONS:


pulleys for damage.
Installation
1.

Belt V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

3.

stands.
4.
and Installation).
5.
Torque: 55 Nm
6.
Torque: 25 Nm
7.
CAUTIONS:

correctly aligned to the pulleys. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in damage to the
vehicle.

pulleys for damage.
correct.
Installation
1.

Belt Idler Pulley V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

Installation).
3.

4.
5.
Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the accessory belt is correctly aligned to the

pulleys. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage
to the vehicle.
Clean and inspect the accessory drive belt pulleys for

damage.

Belt Idler Pulley V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.
5.
Torque: 25 Nm
6.
Torque: 40 Nm
1.
CAUTIONS:
Installation

to the vehicle.

damage.

Belt Tensioner V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

Installation).
3.

4.
Note the fitted position.
5.
Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:

to the vehicle.

damage.

Belt Tensioner V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

Installation).
3.

4.
5.
Torque: 40 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:

to the vehicle.

damage.
Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger

Belt
Removal
1.

2.

Installation).
3.

4.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Make sure the supercharger belt is correctly

aligned to the pulleys. Failure to follow this instruction may
Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger Belt

Idler Pulley
Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe RH (303-12A Intake

Installation).
3.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12A Intake Air
Installation).
4.
5.
Torque: 55 Nm
Installation
1.

aligned to the pulleys. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the vehicle.
Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Supercharger Belt

Tensioner
Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe T-Connector (303-12A Intake Air
Installation).
3.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe RH (303-12A Intake

Installation).
4.
5.
Torque: 55 Nm
Installation
1.

aligned to the pulleys. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the vehicle.
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Description

Battery positive terminal connector retaining nut
Solenoid terminal connector retaining nut
Nm
47
10
7
lb-ft
35
7
-
lb-in
62
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Starting System

COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: Installation on supercharged engine shown, installation on naturally aspirated engine similar.
INTRODUCTION
The starter motor is manufactured by Denso and is rated at 1.8 kW. The motor is geared directly to the pinion. The motor is
a series wound motor with an overrunning clutch. The interior of the motor is ventilated through a breather tube attached to
the underside of the motor housing.
The starter motor is located on the rear right side of the engine sump body. The motor is installed in an aperture in the
sump body and the pinion is engaged with the ring gear of the flexplate assembly. A ground cable for the starter motor is
connected to one of the starter motor securing points.
A heat shield is attached to the starter motor, at the point closest to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter.
A heavy duty cable, which supplies the electrical power to turn the starter motor, is connected to the battery positive
terminal via the positive remote charge terminal and a 400 A megafuse.
At the starter motor, the cable is connected to a copper terminal plate. The terminal plate and a heavy duty cable from the
generator are connected to a terminal stud on the solenoid. The power feed from the starter relay, to energize the solenoid,
is connected to a second terminal stud on the solenoid.
Starer Motor Assembly
Item
Part Number
Terminal cover
Terminal bolt
Terminal plate
Eyelet terminal (power lead from generator)
Spring washer
Nut
Breather tube
Bolt (2 off)
Heat shield
Description
Nut
10
-
Spring washer
12
11
Eyelet terminal (power lead from battery)
13
Starter solenoid
14
Pinion gear
15
Electric motor
16
Eyelet terminal (power feed from starter solenoid)
17
Anti-rotation washer
18
Nut
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item
Part Number
Battery
Positive remote charge terminal
Starter motor
Power distribution box (starter relay)
Description
ECM
5
-
CJB
BJB (400 A megafuse)
Engine crank requests are monitored by the passive anti-theft system and, if valid, passed on to the ECM (engine control
module). For additional information, refer to Anti-Theft - Passive (419-01B Anti-Theft - Passive, Description and Operation).
When the ECM receives a crank request, it energizes the starter relay in the power distribution box. The energized starter
relay supplies power from the CJB (central junction box) to energize the starter solenoid. The energized solenoid then
connects the power feed from the battery to the starter motor via the positive remote charge terminal.
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Starting System

For a detailed description of the starting system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
of the workshop manual. REFER to: Starting System (303-06 Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Starter motor
Engine (turns freely)
Electrical
Battery
Fuses
Starter relay
Wiring harness(es)
Damaged, loose or corroded connectors
Ignition switch
Generator
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
3.
4.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
The engine does
not crank (starter
motor does not
turn)
The engine does

not crank (starter
motor does turn)
Engine cranks too
slowly
Possible Causes
Action
Make sure the gear selector is in the P or N position. Check the
position (vehicles with
battery condition and state of charge. Check for DTCs indicating
automatic transmission)
an immobilizer fault. Check the starter motor relay, ignition
Battery
switch and generator circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Starter relay
Check for TCM and ECM DTCs. Check that the engine turns
Invalid key code received by
freely.
Harness/Connectors
Starter motor
Ignition switch
Generator
(TCM)
(ECM)
Engine seized
Starter motor installation
Check the starter motor installation (fasteners tight, starter
Starter motor
motor square to engine, etc). Check the flywheel/drive plate
Flywheel/Drive plate ring
ring gear teeth for damage, foreign objects, etc.
gear
Battery
Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check the
Harness/Connectors
starter motor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the
Starter motor
engine oil grade and condition.
Gear selector not in P or N
Oil grade
Engine cranks too

fast
Excessive starter
motor noise
Low engine compression
Check the engine compressions.
Starter motor
Flywheel/Drive plate ring
Check the starter motor installation (fasteners tight, motor

square to engine, etc). Check the starter motor casing
condition. Check the flywheel/drive plate ring gear teeth for
damage, foreign objects, etc.
gear
Starter motor
installation/casing
DTC Index
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Starting

System Vehicles With: Smart Key
For a detailed description of the starting system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Steering column
Brake pedal
Smart key
Steering Wheel
Electrical
Fuses
Harnesses and connectors
Warning lamp operation
Smart key operation
Engine start operation
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) and refer to the DTC Index.
CAUTIONS:
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor
vehicle
When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit, part
number 3548-1358-00
the warranty policy and procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in
NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the
scan tool to the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information read
by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system)
NOTE: When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places
and with a current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the digital multimeter
leads into account
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
NOTE: Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion
NOTE: If diagnostic trouble codes are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an
intermittent concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
Symptom Chart
Symptom - Message Displayed

Smart key not found - Refer to handbook
NOTE: Back up start - 10MY onwards
Symptom - Possible Cause

Ignition mode fails to switch on
Ignition mode fails to switch on
Action
Smart key not found - Refer to handbook

Press start and brake
Steering column locked
NOTE: For diesel engines
Engine fails to crank

Ignition switches off after 3 seconds
Ambient temperatures below zero
Engine still not cranking
Pin Point Test

PINPOINT TEST A : SMART KEY NOT FOUND - REFER TO HANDBOOK
TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: IGNITION MODE FAILS TO SWITCH ON
NOTE: In normal operation, pressing the start button for one second will cause the vehicle to enter the ignition mode.
If the procedures below are followed the engine should crank
NOTE: For automatic transmission vehicles, ensure the brake pedal is depressed and the park or neutral selected
Ensure the smart Key is within the cabin area. Check the smart key is not close to any electrical
1
devices e.g. Smart phones, laptops, laptop cases, games consoles and game console bags,
briefcases, metal objects etc. All can affect the system performance and may block its
communication with the vehicle. If the smart key battery low warning message has been displayed
it is likely that the smart key battery has insufficient charge. Refer to section 'Back Up Start' for
10MY onwards
Has the vehicle started?
Yes
No further action required
No
Check and install a new battery as required. Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
contact dealer technical support
PINPOINT TEST B : BACK UP START - 10MY ONWARDS - SMART KEY NOT FOUND - REFER TO
HANDBOOK
TEST
CONDITIONS
B1: IGNITION MODE FAILS TO SWITCH ON
NOTE: In normal operation, pressing the start button for one second will cause the vehicle to enter the ignition mode.
If the procedures below are followed the engine should crank
On pressing the start button, smart key not found. When this warning is displayed the smart
1
key should be brought into close proximity with the immobilize antenna unit. Hold the key in the
location and press the start button again. If this process fails the first time, try repositioning the
key around the immobilize antenna unit location, repeat the sequence again
Yes
No
Contact dealer technical support
PINPOINT TEST C : PRESS START AND BRAKE - (MESSAGE DISPLAYED)

TEST
CONDITIONS
C1: ENGINE FAILS TO CRANK
NOTE: Conditions for starting in addition to pressing the start button are
NOTE: If the engine can be heard to crank there is no fault with the smart key
NOTE: If the locking pin is still engaged, turn the steering wheel to overcome the side load
NOTE: Start authorisation defined as Ignition functions, Steering column lock engagement, Engine immobilize and
smart key authorisation
Check that there is sufficient brake pressure, (Automatic transmission only). Attempt another
1
start making sure that the brake pedal is pressed firmly so the message is no longer displayed.
In certain conditions this may require a more effort than usual
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST D : STEERING COLUMN LOCKED - (MESSAGE DISPLAYED)

TEST
CONDITIONS
D1: IGNITION SWITCHES OFF AFTER 3 SECONDS
NOTE: Conditions for starting in addition to pressing the start button are
NOTE: If the engine can be heard to crank there is no fault with the smart key
NOTE: If the locking pin is still engaged, turn the steering wheel to overcome the side load
NOTE: Start authorisation defined as Ignition functions, Steering column lock engagement, Engine immobilize and
smart key authorisation
Unlock the vehicle using the key fob, within 3 minutes of unlocking ensure the steering wheel can
1
rotate freely. Perform a further lock and unlock check and attempt to start vehicle. If the steering
'column locked' message is still displayed, Lock the vehicle with the key fob and ensure the
column is locked (If installed) by turning the steering wheel. Then unlock the vehicle ensuring
the column Steering wheel can turn freely. Now perform another start attempt
Did the engine start?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST E : ENGINE STILL NOT CRANKING

TEST
CONDITIONS
E1: AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW ZERO
Hold the start button down for at least 4 seconds while starting the vehicle
1
Switch the ignition on, the passive anti theft system (PATS) LED should now be illuminated.
Start the engine, the PATS LED should switch off after 3 seconds
Did the engine start?
Yes
No
2
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Start Control

Unit
Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Floor Console Finish Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel

and Console, Removal and Installation).
3.
4.
5.
Torque: 6 Nm
6.
Torque: 2 Nm
7.
Torque: 2 Nm
Installation
1.
Starting System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Starter Motor

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
and Installation).
4.
Torque: 6 Nm
5.
CAUTION: Make sure that the protective

cover is correctly installed over the electrical
connector.
Torque: 12 Nm
6.
CAUTION: Make sure that the protective

cover is correctly installed over the electrical
connector.
Torque: 12 Nm
7.
NOTE: The upper bolt will remain captive.

Torque: 48 Nm
8.
Installation
1.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Item

Firing order
Spark plug type - Vehicles with supercharger
Spark plug type - Vehicles without supercharger
Description
Spark plugs
Ignition coil-on-plug retaining bolts
Specification
1:2:7:3:4:5:6:8
ILKAR6C-10
ILKAR6C-10
Nm
20
7
lb-ft
15
5
lb-in
-
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Ignition

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
RFI (radio frequency interference) suppressor
Spark plug (8 off)
Ignition coil (8 off)
INTRODUCTION
The engine ignition system is a coil-on-plug, single spark system controlled by the ECM (engine control module). An iridium
tipped spark plug is installed in each combustion chamber, between the inlet and exhaust valves, and an ignition coil is
installed on each spark plug. A RFI (radio frequency interference) suppressor is connected to the power feed to the ignition
coils.
IGNITION COILS
The ignition coils are installed in the cylinder head covers, under the NVH (noise, vibration and harshness) covers. Each
ignition coil locates on a spark plug and is secured to the related cylinder head cover with a single screw. Each ignition coil
incorporates a three pin electrical connector for connection to the engine harness.
Each ignition coil contains a primary and a secondary winding. The primary winding receives electrical power from the
ignition relay in the power distribution box. A power stage in the primary winding allows the ECM to interrupt the power
supply, to induce a voltage in the secondary winding and thus the spark plug. A diode in the ground side of the secondary
winding reduces any undesirable switch-on voltage, to prevent misfiring into the intake manifold. The power stage limits the
maximum voltage and current in the primary winding, to protect the power stage and limit the voltage in the secondary
winding.
RFI SUPPRESSOR
The RFI (radio frequency interference) suppressor is installed on the engine harness carrier at the rear of the engine.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
Power distribution box (ignition relay)
RFI suppressor
LH (left hand) cylinder bank ignition coil (4 off)
RH (right hand) cylinder bank ignition coil (4 off)
ECM
The ignition coils are supplied with electrical power from the battery via a 175 A megafuse in the BJB (battery junction box),
the CJB (central junction box) and the ignition relay in the power distribution box. The control signal for the ignition relay is
supplied by the CJB.
The ECM sends a separate signal to each ignition coil to trigger the power stage switching. The ECM calculates the dwell time
from the battery voltage and engine speed, to ensure a constant energy level is produced in the secondary coil each time the
power stage is switched. This ensures sufficient spark energy is available without excessive primary current flow, which
avoids overheating and damage to the ignition coils.
The ECM calculates the ignition timing for individual cylinders from:
Engine speed
Camshaft position
Engine load
Engine temperature
The knock control function
The shift control function
The idle speed control function.
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Ignition

For a detailed description of the engine ignition system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Engine Ignition (303-07 Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Engine oil level
Cooling system coolant level
Fuel level
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valves
Electrical
Fuses
Wiring harness
Ignition coils
Sensor(s)
3.
4.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
fire

will not start
Difficult hot start
Possible Causes
Action
Ignition system
Fuel system
valve
Fuel pump
DTC Index
Spark plugs
HT short to ground
Ignition system
freeze content
Battery
Index
Fuel pump
Purge valve
Injector leak
Purge valve
Fuel pump
Ignition system

reached operating
temperature)
Injector leak
Purge valve
Fuel pump
Ignition system

Breather system
ECM relay
Ignition system
Air leakage
Fuel lines
fuel lines
Injector leak
Air leakage
Throttle motor
Ignition system
Fuel pump/lines
Air leakage
Ignition system
timing (VCT) hub
Fuel pump/lines
Throttle motor
Ignition system
Fuel pump/lines
Air leakage
Sticking VCT hub
Throttle motor

system
acceleration
Engine backfires
Engine surges
Breather system
Air leakage



Index
DTC Index
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Ignition Coil-OnPlug V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.
3.
4.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
1.
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Ignition Coil-OnPlug V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.
3.

coolant.
4.
5.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
1.
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Spark Plugs V8

5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
303-1450
Removal
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Torque: 7 Nm
6.

material.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
1.
Engine Ignition - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Spark Plugs V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
303-1450
Removal
1.

2.
3.
4.

coolant.
5.
6.
NOTE: Naturally aspirated graphic shown,

supercharged is similar.

Torque: 7 Nm
7.

material.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
1.
Engine Emission Control - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Emission Control

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Part load breather
Full load breather
INTRODUCTION
The engine emission control system reduces the level of hydrocarbon emissions released to atmosphere from the engine. The
engine emission control system consists of a PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) system with part and full load breathers.
Piston blow-by gases are drawn through the breathers into the engine air intake and added to the air charge. The resultant
depression in the engine sump, front covers and cylinder head covers reduces the load on the joint seals in those areas.
PART LOAD BREATHER
Item
Part Number
Description
Flexible hose
Baffle plate
Oil drain
PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) valves
Oil separator
The part load breather consists of an oil separator, two PCV valves and a flexible hose. The oil separator and the PCV valves are
installed in the top of the RH (right-hand) cylinder head cover. The flexible hose connects the RH cylinder head cover to the
inlet of the SC (supercharger).
The oil separator is installed in a channel in the top of the cylinder head cover. A baffle plate, which incorporates a gas inlet and
an oil drain, is installed over the channel. The two PCV valves are installed on the outside of the cylinder head cover and
connected in parallel in the gas outlet from the channel to the flexible hose. The PCV valves prevent reverse flow into the
cylinder head cover when there is minimal depression in the inlet of the SC.
FULL LOAD BREATHER
Item
Part Number
Description
Flexible hose
Two-way valve
Oil drain
Baffle plate
Oil separator
The full load breather consists of an oil separator, a two-way valve and a flexible hose. The oil separator and the two-way valve
are installed in the top of the LH (left-hand) cylinder head cover. The flexible hose connects the LH cylinder head cover to the
LH air duct of the intake air distribution and filtering system.
an oil drain, is installed over the channel. The two-way valve is installed in the gas outlet from the channel. The two-way valve
prevents reverse flow into the cylinder head cover when there is minimal depression in the air duct.
Engine Emission Control - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Emission

Control
For a detailed description of the engine emission control system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08A Engine Emission Control - V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Exhaust gas recirculation system
Breather hoses
Positive crankcase ventilation valve
Fuel level
Throttle body
Electrical
Fuses
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve
3.
4.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Difficult to
start cold
Engine stalls
soon after
start
Poor throttle
response
Possible Causes
Action
Battery
For battery information, CKP sensor, fuel system and purge valve
Crankshaft Position (CKP)
tests, refer to relevant workshop manual section. Check the EGR
sensor
valve.
Fuel system
valve
Breather system
Check the engine breather hoses, PCV, etc. Check the Engine
Control Module (ECM) relay operation. For MAF sensor, ignition
system tests, air intake and fuel line information, refer to
relay
relevant workshop manual section.
MAF sensor
Ignition system
Air filter restricted
Air leakage
Fuel lines
APP sensor malfunction
For APP, TP, ECT, MAF sensor tests, intake system checks and
TP sensors
transmission information, refer to relevant workshop manual
ECT sensor
section. Check the breather system hoses, PCV, etc.
MAF sensor
Air leakage
Breather system
DTC Index
Engine Emission Control - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Emission Control

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Part load breather
Full load breather
INTRODUCTION
The engine emission control system reduces the level of hydrocarbon emissions released to atmosphere from the engine. The
engine emission control system consists of a PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) system with part and full load breathers.
Piston blow-by gases are drawn through the breathers into the engine air intake and added to the air charge. The resultant
depression in the engine sump, front covers and cylinder head covers reduces the load on the joint seals in those areas.
PART LOAD BREATHER
Item
Part Number
Description
Flexible hose
Baffle plate
Oil drain
PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) valve
Oil separator
The part load breather consists of an oil separator, two PCV valves and a flexible hose. The oil separator and the PCV valves are
installed in the top of the RH (right-hand) cylinder head cover. The flexible hose connects the RH cylinder head cover to the
inlet of the intake manifold.
an oil drain, is installed over the channel. The two PCV valves are installed on the outside of the cylinder head cover and
connected in parallel in the gas outlet from the channel to the flexible hose. The PCV valves prevent reverse flow into the
cylinder head cover when there is minimal depression in the intake manifold.
FULL LOAD BREATHER
Item
Part Number
Description
Flexible hose
Two-way valve
Oil drain
Baffle plate
Oil separator
The full load breather consists of an oil separator, a two-way valve and a flexible hose. The oil separator and the two-way valve
are installed in the top of the LH (left-hand) cylinder head cover. The flexible hose connects the LH cylinder head cover to the
LH air duct of the intake air distribution and filtering system.
an oil drain, is installed over the channel. The two-way valve is installed in the gas outlet from the channel. The two-way valve
prevents reverse flow into the cylinder head cover when there is minimal depression in the air duct.
Engine Emission Control - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Emission Control

For a detailed description of the engine emission control system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08B Engine Emission Control - V8
5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Exhaust gas recirculation system
Breather hoses
Positive crankcase ventilation valve
Fuel level
Throttle body
Electrical
Fuses
3.
4.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Difficult to
start cold
Engine stalls
soon after
start
Poor throttle
response
Possible Causes
Action
Battery
For battery information, CKP sensor, fuel system and purge valve
Crankshaft Position (CKP)
tests, refer to relevant workshop manual section. Check the EGR
sensor
valve.
Fuel system
valve
Breather system
Check the engine breather hoses, PCV, etc. Check the Engine
Control Module (ECM) relay operation. For MAF sensor, ignition
system tests, air intake and fuel line information, refer to
relay
MAF sensor
Ignition system
Air filter restricted
Air leakage
Fuel lines
APP sensor malfunction
For APP, TP, ECT, MAF sensor tests, intake system checks and
TP sensors
transmission information, refer to relevant workshop manual
ECT sensor
section. Check the breather system hoses, PCV, etc.
MAF sensor
Air leakage
Breather system
DTC Index
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Description

Air cleaner retaining bolts
Supercharger retaining bolts
Charge air cooler lower assembly retaining bolts
Throttle body retaining studs
Charge air cooler top assembly retaining bolts
Manifold absolute pressure and temperature (MAPT) sensor
Coolant outlet pipe
Nm
8
25
20
10
25
5
11
lb-ft
18
15
7
18
8
lb-in
71
44
-
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Intake Air
Distribution and Filtering
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Supercharger and intake manifolds
Noise feedback system
Air intakes, air cleaners and air ducts
INTRODUCTION
The intake air distribution and filtering system comprises:
Dual air intakes, air cleaners and air ducts.
A supercharger and intake manifolds.
A noise feedback system.
AIR INTAKES, AIR CLEANERS AND AIR DUCTS
Item
Part Number
Description
Hose clamp
Mounting grommet and bracket
Throttle to T piece duct
Hose clamp
Hose clamp
Full load breather connector stub
LH engine intake duct
Hose clamp
10
Upper quarter wave resonator
11
Lower quarter wave resonator
12
Hose clamp
13
LH air cleaner
14
LH air intake
15
Quarter wave resonator
16
17
18
LH outlet duct
19
20
Throttle T-piece duct
21
22
RH outlet duct
23
24
25
Pollution sensor bracket
26
27
RH air intake
RH air cleaner
29
Hose clamp
30
Lower quarter wave resonator
31
Upper quarter wave resonator
32
Hose clamp
33
34
RH engine intake duct
28
The air intakes supply air from behind the front bumper to the air cleaners. A grommet and bracket attaches each air intake
to the related side air deflector of the radiator. Quarter wave tubes are installed on the air intakes to reduce air induction
noise. The RH (right-hand) air intake incorporates a bracket for the pollution sensor.
The air cleaners are located forward of the front wheels, behind the fender splash shields. Two mounting points, both
consisting of a grommet installed on a bracket, attach each of the air cleaners to the fender extension of the related front
side member and to a bracket on the front bumper beam. Each air cleaner consists of a casing with inlet and outlet
connections. A removable cassette drawer holds a tray and a replaceable air cleaner element. Two screws secure the cassette
drawer in the closed position in the casing. The underside of the casing incorporates a drain valve to prevent the
accumulation of water in the air cleaner. The outlet connection of each air cleaner incorporates a MAFT (mass air flow and
temperature) sensor.
Air Cleaner
Item
Part Number
Inlet connection
MAFT sensor
Outlet connection
Air cleaner element
Screws
Cassette
Casing
Description
The air ducts direct the air from the air cleaners to the electric throttle. The air ducts consist of LH (left-hand) and RH outlet
ducts, LH and RH engine intake ducts and a throttle T-piece duct. Hose clamps connect the ducts together and to the air
cleaners and the electric throttle.
The air ducts incorporate the following mounting points, which all consist of a grommet installed on a bracket:
One on each outlet duct, attached to the related front side member.
One on each engine intake duct, attached to brackets on the front cross member.
One on the throttle T-piece duct, attached to a bracket on the RH cylinder head.
The air ducts also incorporate the following:

On the outlet ducts, quarter wave tubes to reduce air induction noise.
On the LH engine intake duct, a resonator, to reduce air induction noise, and a connector stub for the engine full load
breather pipe.
On the throttle T-piece, a resonator, to reduce air induction noise, and a connector stub for the vacuum tube of the
bypass valve actuator on the supercharger.
SUPERCHARGER AND INTAKE MANIFOLDS

The SC (supercharger) increases the pressure, and thus mass, of the air supplied to the engine, to increase the engine's
power output. Two separate intake manifolds direct air from the SC to the cylinder inlet ports.
The intake manifolds are attached to their related cylinder heads and the sides of the SC. Two dowels locate the SC in
position on the cylinder block. A charge air cooler tank top is installed on top of the SC and intake manifolds to form the air
duct from the SC outlet to the intake manifolds. A charge air cooler is installed in each intake manifold.
The charge air cooler tank top incorporates four studs for the attachment of the engine cover. A NVH (noise, vibration and
harshness) pad is attached to the side of each intake manifold.
www.JagDocs.com
Supercharger and Intake Manifolds - Assembled
Item
Part Number
Description
Engine cover rear attachment points
Vacuum connector stub
MAPT (manifold absolute pressure and temperature) sensor
SC filler/level plug
Symposer inlet pipe connection
Dowels
Engine cover front attachment points
EVAP (evaporative emissions) connector stub
Part load breather connector stub
10
MAP (manifold absolute pressure ) sensor
11
Bypass valve pneumatic actuator
12
Outlet ports
13
Inlet port
14
Pulley
15
Coolant inlet and outlet connections
Supercharger and Intake Manifolds - Exploded
Item
Part Number
Description
M08 x 35 mm screw (19 off)
Charge air cooler tank top
Gasket
LH charge air cooler
M08 x 30 mm crew (3 off)
LH intake manifold
10
Gasket
11
NVH pad
12
M08 x 50 mm screw
13
Bypass valve
14
SC
15
Gasket
16
RH intake manifold
17
M08 x 30 mm crew (3 off)
M08 x 50 mm screw
19
NVH pad
20
21
22
RH charge air cooler
23
M08 x 150 mm screw
18
Supercharger
The SC is a Roots blower with high angle helix rotors driven at 2.1 x engine speed by the secondary belt of the accessory
drive.
The two rotors of the SC are contained in a housing. The ends of the rotors are supported in bearings in the front cover and
the bearing plate. A rear cover seals the bearing plate and incorporates a filler/level plug for lubricant. A pulley transfers
power from the accessory drive to the shaft of one of the rotors.
A pneumatic actuator on the front cover is attached to a by-pass valve in the housing. The bypass valve regulates a flow of
air from the outlet of the SC back to the inlet side of the rotors, to control the outlet pressure of the SC. Hoses connect the
pneumatic actuator to the throttle T-piece of the air ducts, upstream of the electric throttle, and to the front cover,
downstream of the electric throttle. A lever connects the actuating rod of the pneumatic actuator to the shaft of the bypass
valve. A screw in the front cover limits movement of the lever in the closed direction to allow calibration of the SC output.
The front cover also incorporates:
The SC air inlet and mounting face for the electric throttle.
A connector stub for the part load breather.
A MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor.
A connector stub for a hose from the EVAP (evaporative emission) canister purge valve.
Intake Manifolds
Each intake manifold is attached to the SC with three screws and a bolt. Two dowels ensure correct alignment of each intake
manifold. The RHD (right-hand drive) intake manifold incorporates a connection port for the noise feedback system. The LH
intake manifold incorporates:
A connector stub for the brake vacuum system.
A MAPT (manifold absolute pressure and temperature) sensor.
NOISE FEEDBACK SYSTEM
Item
Part Number
Description
Outlet adapter
Clip
Feedback tube
Clip
Resonator
Vacuum hose - tuning valve to pneumatic actuator
Tuning valve
Vacuum hose - tuning valve to brake vacuum system
Pneumatic valve
10
Symposer
11
Inlet pipe
12
Outlet pipe
The noise feedback system generates a sporty, powerful engine sound in the passenger compartment, at high engine load
and speed settings, to enhance the driving experience. The noise feedback system consists of a symposer system, a
feedback tube and a resonator. Activation of the noise feedback system is controlled by the ECM (engine control module).
Symposer System
The symposer system modifies induction sound waves of a specific frequency range, at given engine settings, to produce the
required engine sound. The symposer system consists of:
An inlet pipe and flange.

A symposer and pneumatic valve assembly.
A tuning valve and associated vacuum tubes.
An outlet pipe.
An outlet adapter.
The inlet pipe and flange transfer induction noise from the RH intake manifold to the symposer. The pipe is a push fit on the
symposer and the flange, which is attached to the rear face of the RH intake manifold.
The symposer contains two pairs of chambers, one pair on the inlet side and one pair on the outlet side. The inlet pipe
connects to one of the chambers on the inlet side of the symposer, and the pneumatic valve connects to one of the
chambers on the outlet side of the symposer. A calibrated orifice in the inlet pipe connection on the symposer limits the
range of sound waves that pass through it. A 'paddle' installed in a diaphragm forms the separating wall in each pair of
chambers. The paddle is able to pivot about its lateral axis where it passes through the wall that separates the two pairs of
chambers.
Symposer
Item
Part Number
Description
Diaphragm
Paddle
Isolator
Inlet chamber (sealed)
Outlet chamber (open to pneumatic valve)
Screw (8 off)
Pneumatic valve
Outlet chamber
Inlet chamber (open to inlet pipe)
10
Inlet pipe connection
The pneumatic valve controls the flow of sound from the symposer outlet. It is a normally-closed valve connected directly to
the outlet of the symposer and operated by vacuum pressure. Two isolators, one on the pneumatic valve and one on the
symposer, locate the assembly on a bracket attached to the SC rear cover.
The tuning valve controls the application of vacuum pressure to the pneumatic valve. Two screws attach the tuning valve to
the same bracket as the symposer and pneumatic valve. The tuning valve is a normally-closed solenoid-operated valve
installed in the vacuum line between a T-connection in the brake vacuum system and the pneumatic valve. A vent cap on the
tuning valve allows atmospheric pressure into the vacuum line to the pneumatic valve when the tuning valve is closed.
The outlet pipe carries sound from the pneumatic valve to the feedback tube via the outlet adapter. The outlet pipe is a push
fit on the pneumatic valve and in the outlet adapter. A screw attaches the outlet adapter to an engine harness bracket
installed between the two intake manifolds.
Feedback Tube
The feedback tube transfers the sound from the symposer system to the resonator. Clips secure the feedback tube to the
outlet adapter of the symposer system and to the resonator.
Resonator
The resonator directs the sound from the feedback tube into the passenger compartment. The resonator is installed in the
passenger compartment side of the engine bulkhead, on two mounting grommets each consisting of an isolator and a
compression limiter.
CONTROL DIAGRAM (NOISE FEEDBACK SYSTEM)

NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
Power distribution box (EMS secondary relay)
Tuning valve
ECM
Supercharger
At closed or partially open throttle positions, the bypass valve is fully open, allowing a flow of air from the SC outlet back to
the inlet side. This results in little or no pressure increase across the SC. Progressive opening of the throttle reduces the
depression downstream of the electric throttle. This is sensed by the pneumatic actuator, which moves to close the bypass
valve. As the bypass valve closes there is a corresponding increase in the outlet pressure from the SC, which increases
engine power output.
Noise Feedback System

Sound waves from the RH intake manifold are filtered by the calibrated orifice in the inlet pipe connection on the symposer.
The sound waves make the paddle oscillate and generate pulsations in the outlet chambers. When the pneumatic valve is
open, the pulsations are transmitted through the outlet pipe and feedback tube to the resonator in the passenger
compartment.
The tuning valve of the noise feedback system receives a power feed from the power distribution box and is connected to
ground through the ECM. At lower engine loads and speeds the ECM keeps the ground open circuit and the tuning valve is
de-energized closed. Atmospheric pressure is sensed at the pneumatic valve through the vent cap on the tuning valve, which
keeps the pneumatic valve closed and prevents sound from the symposer entering the feedback system.
At higher engine loads and speeds the ECM connects the tuning valve to ground. The tuning valve energizes, blanks off the
atmospheric vent and opens the vacuum line between the brake vacuum system and the pneumatic valve. The depression in
the brake vacuum system is sensed at the pneumatic valve, which opens and allows sound from the symposer into the
feedback system.
The status of the pneumatic valve at various engine loads and speeds is given below:
Pneumatic Valve Status
NOTE: Values are for valve opening with increasing engine load and speed. Deduct 0.05 g/rev and 50 rev/min for valve
closing with decreasing engine load and speed.
Engine Load: g/rev

1.30
1.35
1.40
1.60
1.80
2.50
3.00
3.50
0
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
500
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
1000
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Engine Speed: rev/min

2500
3000
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
4000
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Open
5800
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Open
6500
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Intake Air
For a detailed description of the intake air distribution and filtering system and operation, refer to the relevant
Description and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (303-12A
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Electrical
Hoses and ducts (damage/connections)
Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor
Air cleaner element (contaminated/blocked)

Restricted air intake
Supercharger
Supercharger (cooling fan) drive belt
Supercharger seals and gaskets
Charge air coolers (damage/connection)
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor

Manifold Absolute Pressure/Temperature (MAPT) sensor
Throttle body
Harness (security/damage)
Connections (security/damage)
3.
4.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Vehicle does not
start/hard
starting/poor
performance
Excessive intake
noise
Lack of boost
Noise
Possible Causes
Restricted/Blocked air
intake
Action
Clear the restriction. Replace the air cleaner element as
necessary. Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Restricted/Blocked air
cleaner element
Intake pipe
Check the intake system and hoses for correct

disconnected/damaged
installation/damage. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
after the air cleaner
section.
Air cleaner assembly
incorrectly
assembled/damaged
Supercharger drive belt
Check the supercharger and drive belt. Check the charge air
broken/slipping
coolers. Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
Supercharger fault
Supercharger air intake
fault
Major air leakage (after the
supercharger)
Supercharger drive belt
Check the supercharger and drive belt. Remove the
slipping
supercharger drive belt and recheck for noise. Turn the
Supercharger fault
supercharger by hand and check for excessive resistance.
Major air leakage (after the Check for excessive play at the supercharger pulley. Check the
supercharger)
charge air coolers. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
section.
DTC Index
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner
Element
Removal
NOTE: LH air cleaner element procedure shown, RH is similar.
1.
and Installation).
2.
3.
4.
Installation
1.
LH
Removal
1.

2.
remove the left-hand wheel and tire.

and Installation).
3.
4.
5.
Installation
1.
RH
Removal
1.

2.
Remove the right-hand front wheel and tire.

and Installation).
3.
4.
5.
6.
Installation
1.
Outlet Intermediate Pipe LH
Removal
1.
2.
Torque: 10 Nm
3.
Installation
1.
Outlet Intermediate Pipe RH
Removal
1.
2.
Installation
1.
Outlet Pipe LH
Removal
1.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe LH (303-12B

and Installation).
2.

3.

and Installation).
4.
5.
Installation
1.
Outlet Pipe RH
Removal
1.

and Installation).
2.

3.

and Installation).
4.
5.
Installation
1.
Outlet Pipe T-Connector
Removal
1.
Refer to: Engine Cover - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (501-05
Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2.
3.
4.
Installation
1.
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Charge Air
Cooler
Removal
1.

2.

3.
4.
Refer to: Fuel Injection Component Cleaning (303-04A Fuel Charging

and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
5.

Procedures).
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
WARNINGS:
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open

flame of any type when working on or near any fuel
related components. Highly flammable vapors are always
present and may ignite. Failure to follow these

CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the fuel line union does not rotate.

Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new
blanking caps.
15.
Torque: 10 Nm
16.
17.
Torque: 10 Nm
18.
Torque: 10 Nm
19.
20.
NOTE: Install and lightly tighten bolts in sequence illustrated.

NOTE: Complete the tightening sequence.
NOTE: Remove and discard the gasket.
Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1.

2.
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco

or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors are
always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these
NOTE: Lubricate the union threads with clean engine oil.
3.
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco

or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors are
always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these
Torque:
Union 21 Nm
M6 12 Nm
4.
WARNINGS:

After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be

checked visually for leaks. Failure to follow these
Torque: 21 Nm
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Supercharger

Special Tool(s)
303-1449-01
Supercharger Installation Guide Pins - Threaded
303-1449-02
Supercharger Installation Guide Pins - Unthreaded
Removal
CAUTION: If a new cylinder head has been installed, then new taptite bolts must be used to install the
supercharger.
NOTE: New taptite bolts when used cut their own threads on the first application.
1.

2.

3.
Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
4.
Refer to: Throttle Body (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5.

6.
Refer to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature (MAPT)

Sensor (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L
7.
8.
9.
10.
Discard the gaskets.
11.

12.
13.
14.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: If a new cylinder head has been installed, then

new taptite bolts must be used to install the supercharger.
NOTE: New taptite bolts when used cut their own threads on the
first application.
2.
Torque: 25 Nm
3.
Torque: 25 Nm
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.
CAUTIONS:
If a new cylinder head has been

installed then the special tool 303-1449-02
without the thread must be used to install
the supercharger.
If a new cylinder head has been

installed, then new taptite bolts must be
used to install the supercharger.
NOTE: New taptite bolts when used cut
their own threads on the first application.
Special Tool(s): 303-1449-01, 303-144902
7.

8.

9.

Special Tool(s): 303-1449-01, 303-1449-02
Torque: 25 Nm
10.

Torque: 25 Nm
11.
12.
13.
Refer to: Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature (MAPT)

Sensor (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L
14.

15.
Refer to: Throttle Body (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
16.
Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
17.

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol Description

Air cleaner retaining bolts
Throttle body retaining studs
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
Intake hose to throttle body
Intake hose support bracket
Nm
8
17
25
5
4
8
lb-ft
13
18
-
lb-in
71
44
35
71
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol - Intake Air

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Intake manifold
Air intakes, air cleaners and air ducts
INTRODUCTION
The intake air distribution and cleaning system comprises:
Dual air intakes, air cleaners and air ducts.
An intake manifold.
A noise feedback system.
AIR INTAKES, AIR CLEANERS AND AIR DUCTS
Item
Part Number
Description
Hose clamp
Noise feedback tube connector stub
Hose clamp
Hose clamp
Full load breather connector stub
LH (left hand) engine intake duct
Hose clamp
10
Helmholtz resonator
11
12
Hose clamp
13
LH air cleaner
14
LH air intake
15
16
LH outlet duct
17
Throttle T-piece duct
18
Hose clamp
19
RH outlet duct
20
21
22
Pollution sensor bracket
23
RH (right hand) air intake
24
RH air cleaner
25
Hose clamp
26
27
28
29
Helmholtz resonator
RH engine intake duct
The air intakes supply air from behind the front bumper to the air cleaners. A grommet and bracket attaches each air intake
to the related side air deflector of the radiator. The RH (right-hand) air intake incorporates a bracket for the pollution sensor.
The air cleaners are located forward of the front wheels, behind the fender splash shields. Two mounting points, both
consisting of a grommet installed on a bracket, attach each of the air cleaners to the fender extension of the related front
side member and to a bracket on the front bumper beam. Each air cleaner consists of a casing with inlet and outlet
connections. A removable cassette drawer holds a tray and a replaceable air cleaner element in the casing. Two screws
secure the cassette drawer in the closed position in the casing. The underside of the casing incorporates a drain valve to
prevent the accumulation of water in the air cleaner. The outlet connection of each air cleaner incorporates a MAFT (mass air
flow and temperature) sensor.
Air Cleaner
Item
Part Number
Description
Inlet connection
MAFT sensor
Outlet connection
Air cleaner element
Screws
Cassette
Casing
The air ducts direct the air from the air cleaners to the electric throttle. The air ducts consist of LH (left-hand) and RH outlet
ducts, LH and RH engine intake ducts and a throttle T-piece duct. Hose clamps connect the ducts together and to the air
cleaners and the electric throttle.
The air ducts incorporate the following mounting points, which all consist of a grommet installed on a bracket:
One on each outlet duct, attached to the related front side member.
One on each engine intake duct, attached to brackets on the front cross member.
One on the throttle T-piece duct, attached to a bracket on the RH cylinder head.
The air ducts also incorporate the following:

On the outlet ducts, quarter wave tubes and Helmholtz resonators to reduce air induction noise.
On the LH engine intake duct, a connector stub for the engine full load breather pipe.
On the throttle T-piece, a connector stub for the noise feedback tube.
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Item
Part Number
Description
Engine cover rear attachment points
Engine harness shield attachment points
Cover plate
Brake booster vacuum connection
Outlet ports
Evaporative emissions connection
Inlet port
MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor
Part load breather connection
10
Fuel crossover tube attachment points
11
Engine cover front attachment points
The intake manifold is installed between the cylinder heads and directs air from the electric throttle to the individual
cylinders. The inlet port connects to a central chamber in the intake manifold. Eight separate tracts connect the central
chamber to the outlet ports. A cover plate seals the rear of the intake manifold.
The intake manifold incorporates:
A stub pipe for connection of the part load breather.

A stub pipe for connection of the evaporative emissions system.
A MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor.
A vacuum connection for the brake booster.
Threaded inserts to provide attachment points for the electric throttle, fuel crossover tube, engine cover and an
engine harness shield.
Compression limiters in the cylinder head attachment points.

Seals in the inlet and outlet ports.
A VIS (variable intake system).
Variable Intake System
Item
Part Number
Description
Cassette
Cover plate
RH pneumatic actuator
Vent cap
Tuning valve
Vacuum connector
LH pneumatic actuator
Vacuum hoses
10
Drive shaft
11
Flap valve
The VIS changes the length of the tracts in the intake manifold to improve the air flow to the cylinders, which improves the
engine power and torque.
A cassette in the intake manifold contains eight flap valves, each located in an opening part-way along one of the tracts. Two
drive shafts connect the flap valves together in two groups of four. Each drive shaft is connected to a pneumatic actuator
installed on the cover plate of the intake manifold.
A tuning valve, also installed on the cover plate, controls the application of vacuum pressure to the pneumatic actuators. The
tuning valve is a normally-closed solenoid-operated valve installed in the vacuum line between the cover plate and the
pneumatic actuators. A vent cap on the tuning valve allows atmospheric pressure into the vacuum line to the pneumatic
actuators when the tuning valve is closed.
The ECM (engine control module) controls the operation of the tuning valve.
NOISE FEEDBACK SYSTEM
Item
Part Number
Description
Clip
Feedback tube
Clip
Resonator
Grommet assembly
The noise feedback system generates a sporty, powerful engine sound in the passenger compartment to enhance the driving
experience. The noise feedback system consists of a feedback tube and a resonator.
The feedback tube transfers induction sound waves into the resonator. Clips secure the feedback tube to the resonator and
to the throttle T-piece air duct.
The resonator modifies sound waves of a specific frequency range to produce the required engine tone and sound volume.
The resonator is installed in the passenger compartment side of the engine bulkhead, mounted on two grommet assemblies
consisting of an isolator and a compression limiter.
CONTROL DIAGRAM (VARIABLE INTAKE SYSTEM)

NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
Power distribution box (EMS secondary relay)
Tuning valve
ECM
Variable Intake System
The flap valves can be set to one of two positions, to produce short or long intake tracts in the intake manifold. Short intake
tracts are produced with the flap valves closed. Long intake tracts are produced with the flap valves open. The flap valves
are closed at engine speeds up to 4700 rev/min and open at engine speeds of 4700 rev/min and above, with a hysteresis of
50 rev/min.
The intake manifold tuning valve receives a power feed from the power distribution box and is connected to ground through
the ECM. To close the flap valves, the ECM connects the intake manifold tuning valve to ground. The energized intake
manifold tuning valve blanks off the atmospheric vent and opens the vacuum line between the cover plate and the
pneumatic actuators. The depression in the intake manifold is sensed at the pneumatic actuators, which turn the drive shafts
and move the flap valves to the closed position.
To open the flap valves, the ECM disconnects the ground connection and the intake manifold tuning valve is de-energized
closed. Atmospheric pressure is sensed at the pneumatic actuators through the vent cap on the intake manifold tuning valve
and the flap valves move to the open position.
Flap Valves Closed
Flap Valves Open
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol - Intake Air

For additional information.
REFER to: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner

Element
Removal
NOTE: LH air cleaner element procedure shown, RH is similar.
1.
and Installation).
2.
3.
4.
Installation
1.
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner LH

Removal
1.

2.
remove the left-hand wheel and tire.

and Installation).
3.
4.
5.
Installation
1.
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner RH

Removal
1.

2.

and Installation).
3.
4.
5.
6.
Installation
1.
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol - Air Cleaner Outlet
Intermediate Pipe LH
Removal
1.
2.
Torque: 10 Nm
3.
Installation
1.
Intermediate Pipe RH
Removal
1.
2.
Installation
1.
Pipe LH
Removal
1.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Intermediate Pipe LH (303-12B

and Installation).
2.

3.

and Installation).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
Installation
1.
Pipe RH
Removal
1.

and Installation).
2.

3.

and Installation).
4.
5.
Installation
1.
Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Torque Specifications
Description
Evaporative emission canister retaining nuts
Nm
7
lb-ft
-
lb-in
62
Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Evaporative

Emissions
COMPONENT LOCATION (ALL EXCEPT NORTH AMERICAN SPECIFICATION)

NOTE: System on supercharger vehicle shown, system on naturally aspirated vehicle similar.
Item
Part Number
Description
EVAP (evaporative emissions) canister
Vapor pipe (filler head communication) - fuel tank to filler pipe
Vapor pipe - EVAP canister to EVAP canister purge valve
Vapor pipe - fuel tank to EVAP canister
EVAP canister purge valve
COMPONENT LOCATION (NORTH AMERICAN SPECIFICATION)

NOTE: System on naturally aspirated vehicle shown, system on supercharger vehicle similar.
Item
Part Number
Description
EVAP canister
DMTL (diagnostic module - tank leakage) filter
Vapor pipe (filler head communication) - fuel tank to filler pipe
Atmospheric vent pipe - DMTL pump to filter
DMTL pump
Vapor pipe - EVAP canister to EVAP canister purge valve
Vapor pipe - fuel tank to EVAP canister
EVAP canister purge valve
INTRODUCTION
The EVAP (evaporative emission) system reduces the level of hydrocarbons released into the atmosphere by fuel vapor venting
from the fuel tank. The system comprises of an EVAP canister, an EVAP purge valve and interconnecting vapor pipes. The vapor
pipes are connected to the system components using quick release connectors.
Fuel vapor is generated by the fuel in the tank and the amount of vapor produced increases as the fuel heats up. Fuel vapor can
flow freely to the EVAP canister via the tank venting system.
On NAS vehicles the vapor generated in the fuel tank during refueling flows without restriction to the EVAP canister.
On all vehicles except NAS, the vapor is restricted in its path to the EVAP canister, but can flow freely during the refueling operation
to atmosphere via the fuel filler pipe opening.
The vapor passes into the EVAP canister where it is absorbed and stored by the charcoal. Because there is a limit to the amount of
vapor the canister can contain, the fuel vapor is purged from the canister when the engine is running and burned in the engine.
DIAGNOSTIC MODULE - TANK LEAKAGE PUMP (NAS ONLY)
The DMTL (diagnostic module - tank leakage) pump periodically checks the EVAP system and the fuel tank for leaks when the
ignition is switched off. The DMTL system comprises the previously described components of the EVAP system with the following
additional components; a DMTL pump and a DMTL filter.
The DMTL pump is connected to the atmospheric vent of the EVAP canister and incorporates an electric air pump, a PTC (positive
temperature coefficient) heating element, a normally open change-over valve and a reference orifice. The DMTL pump is only
operated when the ignition is switched off and is controlled by the ECM (engine control module). The ECM also monitors the electric
air pump operation and the change-over valve for faults.
The DMTL filter protects the pump from dust being drawn into the system when the pump is being operated. The filter is located on
the fuel filler head and is connected to the DMTL pump by a vapor pipe.
The DMTL test is performed after the engine has stopped following a run of 10 minutes or more, providing that the vehicle fuel tank
is between 15 and 85% full, the ambient temperature is above 0 C (32 F) and less than 40 C (104 F) and the vehicle was not
started for at least 180 minutes prior to this run.
The DMTL pump is driven to pressurize the fuel tank and the current is measured with the change-over valve in different states.
A comparison of the current draw in each state indicates the degree of any leak, and the ECM then sets the appropriate DTC
(diagnostic trouble code).
DMTL Pump Operation

To check the fuel tank and the EVAP system for leaks, the ECM operates the DMTL pump and monitors the current draw. Initially,
the ECM establishes a reference current by pumping air through the reference orifice and back to atmosphere. Once the reference
current is determined, the ECM closes the change-over valve, which seals the EVAP system. The EVAP canister purge valve remains
de-energized and is therefore closed. The output from the air pump is diverted from the reference orifice and into the EVAP system.
When the change-over valve is closed, the load on the air pump falls to zero. Providing there are no leaks, the air pump will begin
to pressurize the EVAP system and the load and current draw in the pump increases. By monitoring the rate and level of the current
increase, the ECM can determine if there is a leak in the EVAP system.
During normal vehicle operation, 15 seconds after the engine has started, the ECM energizes the heating element in the pump to
prevent condensation formation and possible incorrect readings. The heater remains energized until either the engine and ignition
are off (if no DMTL test is running) or until after the DMTL test is completed."
Leaks are classified as:
Minor - equivalent to a hole diameter of 0.5 to 1.0 mm (0.02 to 0.04 in.).
Major - equivalent to a hole diameter of 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) or greater.
The ECM performs a check for major leaks each time the ignition is switched off, providing the following conditions are met:
The vehicle speed is zero.
The engine speed is zero.
The atmospheric pressure is above 70 kPa (10.15 lbf/in2), i.e. the altitude is less than approximately 3047 m (10000 feet).
The ambient temperature is between 0 and 40 C (32 and 104 F).
The EVAP canister vapor concentration factor is 5 or less (where 0 is no fuel vapor, 1 is stoichiometric fuel vapor and greater
than 1 is rich fuel vapor).

The fuel tank level is valid and between 15 and 85% of nominal capacity.
The engine running time during the previous cycle was more than 10 minutes.
The battery voltage is between 10 and 15 volts.
The last engine off time was more than 180 minutes.
No errors are detected with the EVAP components, the ambient air temperature and the fuel level.
NOTE: A leak test can be performed using a Jaguar recognized diagnostic tool. This overrides the above conditions and is useful for
checking correct system and component operation.
The ECM performs a check for minor leaks after every 2nd major leak check.
When the leak check is complete, the ECM stops the DMTL pump and opens (de-energizes) the change-over valve.
If the fuel filler cap is opened or refueling is detected during the leak check, by a sudden drop in the current draw or a rise in the
fuel level, the ECM aborts the leak check.
If a leak is detected during the check, the ECM stores an appropriate fault code in its memory. If a leak is detected on two
consecutive checks, the ECM illuminates the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) in the instrument cluster on the next drive cycle.
The duration of a leak check can be between 60 and 900 seconds depending on the results and fuel tank level.
EVAP CANNISTER
EVAP Canister (All Except NAS)
Item
Part Number
Description
FPDM (fuel pump driver module) mounting bracket
Atmospheric vent
Connector for vapor pipe to EVAP canister purge valve
Connector for vapor pipe from fuel tank
EVAP Canister (NAS)
Item
Part Number
FPDM mounting bracket
Connector for DMTL pump
DMTL pump bracket
Connector for vapor pipe to EVAP canister purge valve
Connector for vapor pipe from fuel tank
Description
The EVAP canister is located immediately behind the fuel tank. Two bolts attach the EVAP canister to the underside of the center
floor section.
The EVAP canister contains a bed of activated charcoal or carbon. The charcoal is produced using special manufacturing techniques
to treat the charcoal with oxygen. The oxygen treatment opens up millions of pores between the carbon atoms resulting in a highly
porous charcoal with a very large effective surface area which is capable of absorbing large quantities of fuel vapor. Once treated
the charcoal is known as 'activated' carbon or charcoal. The EVAP canister on NAS vehicles uses a higher grade of charcoal to meet
the stricter emissions' regulations.
A mounting bracket on the RH (right-hand) end of the EVAP canister contains the FPDM (fuel pump driver module). For additional
information, refer to 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines.
On all except NAS vehicles, the EVAP canister has a capacity of 1400 cc (85.4 in.3). Two connectors on the EVAP canister allow for
the attachment of the vapor pipe from the fuel tank and the vapor pipe to the EVAP canister purge valve. An atmospheric vent is
located on the underside of the EVAP.
On NAS vehicles, the EVAP canister has a capacity of 3000 cc (183 in.3). Three connectors on the EVAP canister allow for the
attachment of the vapor pipe from the fuel tank, the vapor pipe to the EVAP canister purge valve and the DMTL pump.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
The EVAP canister purge valve is located on the LH (left-hand) side of the engine, below the ignition coils cover. A vapor pipe is
routed from the EVAP canister purge valve to the inlet of the intake manifold (naturally aspirated vehicles) or the supercharger
(supercharged vehicles). The EVAP canister purge valve is controlled by the ECM and is operated when engine operating conditions
are correct to allow purging of the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge valve is a solenoid operated valve which is closed when
de-energized.
A vapor pipe, which runs parallel with the fuel delivery line under the LH side of the vehicle, connects the EVAP canister purge valve
to the EVAP canister.
The EVAP canister purge valve is operated at 10 Hz by a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ECM. At this high frequency,
the pulses of fuel vapor flow into the intake manifold/supercharger in an almost continuous flow. The valve operates between 7%
and 100% duty or mark space ratio (percentage open time).
Atmospheric pressure is higher than the pressure at the inlet of the intake manifold/supercharger under all throttle settings and
engine running conditions. It is this pressure differential that causes air to flow through the EVAP system to the engine.
The ECM waits until the engine is running above 55 C (131 F) coolant temperature with closed loop fuel operational before the
purging process is activated. Under these conditions the engine should be running smoothly with no warm up enrichment. The EVAP
canister purge valve duty (and flow) is initially ramped slowly because the vapor concentration is unknown (a sudden increase in
purge could cause unstable engine running or cause it to stall due to an extremely "rich" air/fuel mixture). The concentration is
then determined from the amount of adjustment that the closed loop fueling is required to make to achieve the target Air Fuel Ratio
(AIR). Once the concentration has been determined, the purge flow can be increased rapidly and the injected fuel can be proactively adjusted to compensate for the known purge vapor and the target AIR control is maintained.
When the purging process is active, fresh air is drawn into the EVAP canister via the DMTL filter and pump on NAS vehicles, or via
the vent port on the EVAP canister of non NAS vehicles.
Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Evaporative Emissions

For a detailed description of the evaporative emission system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to:
Evaporative Emissions (303-13 Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and
Operation),
Evaporative Emissions (303-13A, Description and Operation),
Evaporative Emissions (303-13A, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Fuel filler cap and seal
Fuel filler neck
DMTL fresh air filter (restriction, etc)
Fuel tank (leaks, damage, etc)
Fuel lines and joints, etc
Carbon canister
Purge valve
Electrical
Fuses
Connectors
Harness
Purge valve
Diagnostic module fuel tank leak (DMTL) pump
Diagnostic module fuel tank leak (DMTL) pump module
3.
4.
5.
Where K-Line, Vacutec or other proprietary smoke test equipment is available, it should be utilized to assist with
Evaporative Emissions System leak diagnosis.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Difficulty in filling fuel
tank
Fuel smell
'Check Fuel Filler Cap'
displayed on Message
Center
Possible Causes
Action
Check for restrictions/damage, etc
tank and the carbon canister outlet/atmospheric
(see visual inspection)
port
System leak
Check for leaks, check the purge
Purge valve inoperative
valve operation
Fuel filler cap missing/not tightened after
Check the fuel filler cap and seal
refuelling
Restriction in the vapour line between the fuel
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
Evaporative Leak OBD Fault Rectification Guide

Determine Which DTC Has Been Stored
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, choose diagnostic session, then choose the following symptom
paths : Powertrain/engine system/fuel vapour and odor, Powertrain/engine system/fuel tank,
Electrical/instruments/warning lamps/engine malfunction lamp/lamp illuminated, Powertrain/engine
system/engine performance/fuel consumption high
NOTE: This guide covers DTCs that relate to evaporative leak monitoring, as listed in the table below
DTC
Description
P0442-00
DMTL small leak
P0447-00
DMTL COV electrical low (open)
P0448-00
DMTL COV electrical high
P0455-00
DMTL rough leak
P2401-00
DMTL pump electrical low (open)
P2402-00
DMTL pump electrical high
P2404-2F
DMTL noise fault
P2404-29
DMTL reference leak
P2405-00
DMTL reference current low
P2406-00
DMTL reference current high
P2450-00
DMTL COV stuck open
P2451-00
DMTL COV stuck closed
P240B-00
DMTL heater electrical low (open)
P240C-00
DMTL heater electrical high
Attempt To Replicate The Fault Using The "Fuel Leak Check" Forced Test
1.
Record any DTCs that has been logged
2.
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, in the Recommendations tab run the Fuel Leak Check
forced test
3.
For the test to run the fuel level must be between 15% and 85%
4.
During this procedure the engine must be off
5.
The possible responses from the test and the associated DTCs are listed below
6.
If again no fault is found it could suggest that the failure mode is a borderline condition (refer to section 3) or
that it was caused by incorrect fitment of the fuel cap or the fuel filler neck is at fault therefore it is important
not disturb the fuel cap
7.
Disconnect purge pipe from the purge valve, observe the condition of connection (the seating and condition of
the "O" ring) and then reconnect. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, run Purge Valve Self
Test (to clean the purge valve) then run the Fuel Leak Check
8.
If the test failed, a smoke test is required to determine the cause of the leak
NOTE: P240B & P240C are not included in the Fuel Leak Check forced test (these monitors run at every ignition on
and complete within 30 seconds)
Response Description
Function running: Reference leak measurement
Function running: Rough leak measurement
Function running: Small leak measurement
Function running: 2nd ref leak measurement
Function running: COV Cleaning
Function aborted due to conditions: Vbatt conditions not correct
(too high/ low)
Function aborted due to conditions: Variation Ref. I (reference
current) too high
Function aborted due to conditions: DMTL electrical fault
Function aborted due to conditions: Maximum diagnostic time
exceeded
Function aborted due to conditions: Crash detected
Function aborted due to conditions: Refuel detected
ID
1
2
3
4
5
11
Equivalent DTC
12
P2404-29
13
14
P0447, P0448
15
20
Function aborted due to conditions: Filler cap opened

Function aborted due to conditions: Engine start
Function aborted due to conditions: Noisy current measurement
Function aborted due to conditions: Ambient temp outside range
Function aborted due to conditions: Ambient pressure outside range
Function aborted due to conditions: Other conditions
Function complete - Tight system, fault free
Function complete - Fine leak detected
Function complete - Rough leak detected
Function complete - Module error
21
23
24
P2404-2F
26
27
29
30
31
P0442
32
P0455
33 P2401, P2402, P2450, P2451, P2405, P2406,
P2404-29
Function complete - Medium leak detected
34
P0442, P0455
Read The "Ranking values" To Determine How Far Away The Result Is From The Failure Threshold
9.
When the Fuel Leak Check forced test has completed the test results (known as ranking values) will be
displayed
10.
These should be compared against the limits shown in the table below
11.
If the test result is borderline then there is a risk that a failure will occur at a later date (during customer usage
of the vehicle)
12.
To avoid this the vehicle should be carefully checked for any small leaks
Ranking Value
Normal Result For Tight System
Rough Leak (40 thou+)
0 > = 50
Small Leak (20 thou+)
0 > = 60
TRACE THE ROOT CAUSE OF THE FAULT
Leak Failure Condition

>= 128
>= 128
The list below provides some suggested actions to help trace the root cause of the fault
Each action should be followed up with a Fuel Leak Check forced test (and ranking value check) in order to determine
if any improvement has been made
DTC Fault Description
P0442- DMTL small leak
00
Fault Rectification Actions after smoke test

1. Inspect / refit filler cap after smoke test (inspect filler neck for correct fitment to
pocket so that filer neck protrudes)

2. Run engine at idle; Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, run
Purge Valve Self Test (to clean the purge valve)

3. Check that the DMTL module wiring connector has been installed correctly and
that the seals around the connector body and individual wires are in good condition
4. Check all fuel system connections are correctly installed and secure
5. Visually inspect purge canister, purge pipes, fuel tank and filler neck for any
obvious damage
6. Try isolating the purge valve by fitting a blanking plug to the purge pipe
7. Carry out a smoke test
8. Replace the DMTL module
P044700
DMTL COV
electrical low
(open)
P044800
P045500
DMTL COV
electrical high
DMTL rough leak
P2401-
DMTL pump
1. Check fuse
2. Check that fuse fits tightly into the fuse holder
3. Check that the DMTL module wiring connector has been fitted correctly
4. Check wiring harness continuity between DMTL module and ECU connectors
5. Replace DMTL module
1. Check wiring
1. Inspect / refit filler cap after smoke test (inspect filler neck for correct fitment to
pocket so that filer neck protrudes)
2. Run engine at idle; Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, run
"Purge Valve Self Test" (to help clean the purge valve)
3. Check that the DMTL module wiring connector has been installed correctly and
that the seals around the connector body and individual wires are in good condition
(surprisingly, this is a potential leakage path!)
4. Check all fuel system connections are correctly installed and secure
5. Visually inspect purge canister, purge pipes, fuel tank and filler neck for any
obvious damage
6. Try isolating the purge valve by fitting a blanking plug to the purge pipe
7. Carry out a smoke test
1. Check fuse
00
electrical low
(open)
P240200
P24042F
P240429
P240500
P240600
P245000
P245100
P240B00
DMTL pump
electrical high
DMTL noise fault
DMTL reference
leak
DMTL reference
current low
DMTL reference
current high
DMTL COV stuck
open
DMTL COV stuck
close
DMTL heater
electrical low
(open)
2. Check that fuse fits correctly into the fuse holder

1. Check wiring
Replace DMTL module
Replace DMTL module

Replace DMTL module
1. Check for any blockages in the DMTL ventilation pipe & filter
Replace DMTL module
Replace DMTL module
1. Check fuse
2. Check that fuse fits tightly into the fuse holder
P240CDMTL heater
1. Check wiring
00
electrical high
Pre and 10MY Denso/Bosch PCM Systems
CAUTION: The Maximum pressure of the EVAP system is 0.07 bar do not exceed
NOTE: Apart from the purge valve connection, it is recommended to smoke test the EVAP system without disturbing
any joints associated with the system, this will determine the leak more accurately and quickly
1. Remove rear wheel arch liner to access fuel filler neck
2. On the fuel filler neck the DMTL filter will be visible as shown in picture. Unclip filter housing from fuel filler
neck to gain better access to DMTL filter

3. Remove carefully the top of filter to expose filter and remove
4. Attach rubber adapter to tip of smoke machine nozzle to ensure tight seal to filter housing. Disconnect the
purge pipe from purge valve; this will be an escape point for the smoke to exit
5. Allow tester to complete self-test and green READY light to turn ON 2. For best Tester performance;
completely unwind Testers supply hose

6. Press Smoke on control panel to fill EVAP system with smoke vapour. The control panel Smoke light will light
indicating smoke production. The smoke setting is on a 15 minute timer. Pressing the Smoke button again turns
Tester off. It is normal for the flow meter ball, while in the smoke mode, not to be as steady as when it is in the
Test mode. Note: The pressure gauge is active only after smoke cycle is complete
7. Continue introducing smoke into the EVAP System until the flow meters ball stops descending and this
assures the system test pressure is met and smoke will appear from the purge pipe, then close off purge pipe
with special tool (Test Adapter Hose/EVAP Port 310-142)
NOTE: Special tool (Test Adapter Hose/EVAP Port 310-142)
CAUTION: On some vehicles, the DMTL filter can not be removed, in these instances fill the system through the
purge valve and smoke will appear from the filter
Pre 10MY Vehicles
On pre 10MY DMTL systems, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, select Measurement application
session then select the Recommendations tab which will give you access to Datalogger. Then select Engine
systems then select the Output state control data-logger signal Engine output 1 diagnostic module tank
leakage -change over valve active which will close the system. Then select Engine output 1 diagnostic module
tank leakage pump active this will pressurize the EVAP system
10MY vehicles
On 10MY vehicles a smoke test application is available so therefore only smoke fill the system and then run the
application
8. Follow the EVAP system path with the halogen light provided and looks for the smoke exiting the leak(s) or
use the UV light provided and look for the dye deposited at the exact location of the leak(s)
9. Repair the leak(s) and perform the Fuel Leak Check application again or smoke test to verify repair, as well
as to make sure there are no additional leaks in the EVAP system

The UltraTraceUV smoke solutions dye feature is especially helpful when the leak is in an area that is not readily
visible, as on the top of the fuel tank or behind a panel. Once you gain access to the area of the leak, wear the yellow
UV glasses and shine the UV light provided to identify the exact location of the leak(s). Smoke exiting a very small leak
is even easier to see with lower pressure. If you encounter smoke leaking out of an area but find it difficult to pinpoint
exactly where the source of the leak is; try reducing the pressure in the system being tested by turning the Tester OFF
and allow the pressure to dissipate. The longer a particular leak is allowed to leak, the more fluorescent dye material
will be deposited at that leak. With some vapour system leaks, the leak may only present itself under vacuum and not
under pressure. If equipment permits, test the system in both states. Purge valve faults [P0441, P0444, P0458 and
P0459] should all inhibit DMTL leak test and therefore need to be resolved prior to any DMTL issues. For this reason,
when smoke testing the vapour system, it should be sufficient to enter the system at the connection up stream of the
purge valve. If no leak is found then testing the remainder of the system up to the purge valve is recommended
NOTE: It may be possible to search for small leaks using a gas analyzer and looking for HC (hydro carbon) spikes. This
should enable leaks to be detected in areas of the vapor system that our out of sight of the technician. The solenoid
should be deactivated after five minutes to prevent potential damage. Check that connector and individual terminals are
sealed correctly
Phase-One (quantifying the leak)
1. Connect the tester supply hose to vehicle EVAP system. > Refer to appropriate vehicle application
2. Determine if the vehicles EVAP system you are testing is governed by a .020 (0.5 mm) or .040 (1 mm)
acceptable leak standard. Press the appropriate calibration standard on the testers control panel and observe
the position of the flow meter ball. > This function automatically turns off in 10 seconds
3. Position the flow meter's pointer flag so that it aligns with the measurement observed in step 2 above. > This
sets PASS / FAIL mark
4. Close vehicles EVAP Vent Solenoid. > Refer to appropriate vehicle application
5. Press TEST on control panel and fill EVAP system. > This introduces 5-minutes of nitrogen gas
6. Look for flow meter ball to stop descending indicating that the vehicle system is full. > Fill time 1-4 minutes
depending on system volume

7. Compare flow meter ball reading to pointer flag. > ABOVE flag = FAIL (go to Phase-Two). > BELOW flag =
PASS (test complete)

Testing With Pressure and Vacuum Decay
In addition to quantifying the leak with the Phase-One flow test, the Tester allows you the flexibility of testing the
vehicles EVAP system by using either Pressure Decay or Vacuum Decay methods. Below are instructions for
performing both decay tests
Pressure-Decay Test
NOTE: The Pressure Decay test is best performed immediately after the Phase-one flow test, since the system has
already built up pressure
At the completion of the Phase-one flow test, the EVAP system is fully pressurized, since the Phase-one test uses
pressure to perform its flow test. Testing pressure decay with the Vacutec 522B-J/LR is very simple. All you need to
do is the following:
1. Allow tester to complete self-test and green READY light to turn ON
2. Connect Tester supply hose to vehicle EVAP system
3. Close vehicles EVAP Vent solenoid > Refer to appropriate vehicle application
4. Press VACUUM switch on the tester control panel
NOTE: The vacuum switch is on a 30-second timer, which should be sufficient time to draw the appropriate
vacuum from the EVAP system. Press VACUUM switch again if additional time is required
5. After vacuum timer turns off, observe the vacuum gauge for any decay (loss of vacuum) indicating a leak in
the EVAP system
NOTE: Disconnect the Tester from the vehicle after the Vacuum Decay Test. The fuel pressure in the vehicles fuel tank
is constantly changing due to the vehicles fuel volatility and that could cause the Testers pressure gauge to exceed its
maximum reading limits
Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Evaporative Emission Canister
Removal
WARNING: Refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General
1.

2.

3.
4.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
1.
Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Evaporative Emission Canister
Removal
1.

2.

3.
4.
5.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
1.
Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.
2.
3.

fluids.
Installation
1.
Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Evaporative

Emission Canister Purge Valve V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.
2.

coolant.
3.
4.
Installation
1.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Torque Specifications
Description
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor(s) retaining bolt
Heated oxygen sensor (H02S)
Catalyst monitor sensor
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor retaining bolt
Knock sensor(s) (KS) retaining bolt
Fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor
Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature (MAPT) Sensor
Engine Oil Level Sensor retaining bolts
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid(s) retaining bolts
Engine Control Module (ECM) retaining bolts
Fuse box retaining screws
Engine wiring harness connector bolt
Engine wiring harness retaining bracket bolts
ECM retaining bracket bolts
Nm
10
48
48
10
20
32
5
11
10
7
4
3
6
7
lb-ft
7
35
35
7
15
24
8
7
-
lb-in
44
62
35
27
53
62
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Electronic Engine

Controls
COMPONENT LOCATION - SHEET 1 OF 3
Item
Part Number
Description
MAFT (mass air flow and temperature) sensor
CMP (camshaft position) sensors
Knock sensors
CKP (crankshaft position) sensor
CMP sensors
MAFT sensor
ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor (ECT 2)
Electronic throttle
Item
Part Number
Description
ECT sensor (ECT 1)
MAPT (manifold absolute pressure and temperature) sensor
Upstream HO2S (heated oxygen sensor)
Downstream HO2S
Downstream HO2S
Upstream HO2S
Item
Part Number
Description
AAT (ambient air temperature) sensor
APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor
INTRODUCTION
The EEC (electronic engine control) system operates the engine to generate the output demanded by the accelerator pedal
and loads imposed by other systems. The EEC system has an ECM (engine control module) that uses a torque-based
strategy to evaluate inputs from sensors and other systems, then produces outputs to engine actuators to produce the
required torque.
The EEC system controls the following:
Charge air
Fueling
Ignition timing
Valve timing
Cylinder knock
Idle speed
Engine cooling fan
Evaporative emissions
On-board diagnostics
Immobilization system interface
Speed control.
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
The ECM is installed behind the suspension turret on the LH (left-hand) side of the engine compartment, on a bracket
attached to the longitudinal and the wheel arch apron panel.
The ECM has the capability of adapting its fuel and ignition control outputs in response to several sensor inputs.
The ECM receives inputs from the following:
CKP (crankshaft position) sensor.

CMP (camshaft position) sensors (4 off).
ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor.
Knock sensors (4 off).
MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor.
MAFT (mass air flow and temperature) sensors (2 off).
MAPT (manifold absolute pressure and temperature) sensor.
Throttle position sensor.
Heated oxygen sensors (4 off).
APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor.
Ambient air temperature sensor.
FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor. For additional information, refer to 303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls.
Engine cooling fan. For additional information, refer to 303-03A Engine Cooling.
Stoplamp switch. For additional information, refer to 206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist.
Speed control cancel/suspend switch. For additional information, refer to 310-03 Speed Control.
Oil level and temperature sensor. For additional information, refer to 303-01A Engine.
Fuel LP (low pressure) sensor. For additional information, refer to 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines.
Fuel pump driver module. For additional information, refer to 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines.
The ECM provides outputs to the following:
Electronic throttle.
Main relay.
Heaters elements of the heated oxygen sensors (4 off).
Fuel injectors (8 off). For additional information, refer to 303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls.
Ignition coils (8 off). For additional information, refer to 303-07 Engine Ignition.
VCT (variable camshaft timing) solenoids (4 off). For additional information, refer to 303-01A Engine.
Noise feedback system tuning valve. For additional information, refer to 303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering.
EVAP (evaporative emission) canister purge valve. For additional information, refer to 303-13 Evaporative Emissions.
Engine starter relay. For additional information, refer to 303-06 Starting System.
Intercooler water pump relay. For additional information, refer to 303-03B Supercharger Cooling.
Generator. For additional information, refer to 414-02 Generator and Regulator.
HP fuel pumps. For additional information, refer to 303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls.
DMTL (diagnostic module - tank leakage). For additional information, refer to 303-13 Evaporative Emissions.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The CKP sensor is an inductive sensor that allows the ECM to determine the angular position of the crankshaft and the
engine speed.
The CKP sensor is installed in the rear left side of the sump body, in line with the engine drive plate. The sensor is secured
with a single screw and sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The head of the CKP sensor faces a reluctor ring pressed into the outer circumference of the engine drive plate. The reluctor
ring has a 60 minus 2 tooth pattern. There are 58 teeth at 6 intervals, with two teeth removed to provide a reference point
with a centerline that is 21 BTDC (before top dead center) on cylinder 1 of bank A.
If the CKP sensor fails, the ECM:
Uses signals from the CMP sensors to determine the angular position of the crankshaft and the engine speed
Adopts a limp home mode where engine speed is limited to a maximum of 3000 rev/min.
With a failed CKP sensor, engine starts will require a long crank time while the ECM determines the angular position of the
crankshaft.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSORS
The CMP sensors are MRE (magneto resistive element) sensors that allow the ECM to determine the angular position of the
camshafts. MRE sensors produce a digital output which allows the ECM to detect speeds down to zero.
The four CMP sensors are installed in the front upper timing covers, one for each camshaft.
Each CMP sensor is secured with a single screw and sealed with an O-ring. On each CMP sensor, a three pin electrical
connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The head of each CMP sensor faces a sensor wheel attached to the front of the related VCT unit.
If a CMP sensor fails, the ECM:

Defaults to base mapping for the ignition timing, with no cylinder correction
Disables the VCT system.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSORS
The ECT sensors are NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistors that allow the ECM to monitor the engine coolant
temperature.
There are two identical ECT sensors installed, which are identified as ECT 1 and ECT 2. Each sensor is secured with a twistlock and latch mechanism, and is sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface between the
sensor and the engine harness.
ECT 1
ECT 1 is installed in the heater manifold, at the rear of the RH (right-hand) cylinder head. The input from this sensor is used
in calibration tables and by other systems.
ECT 2
ECT 2 is installed in the lower hose connector which attaches to the bottom of the thermostat. The input from this sensor is
used for OBD (on-board diagnostic) 2 diagnostics and, in conjunction with the input from ECT 1, to confirm that the
thermostat is functional.
KNOCK SENSORS
The knock sensors are piezo-ceramic sensors that allow the ECM to employ active knock control and prevent engine damage
from pre-ignition or detonation.
Two knock sensors are installed on the inboard side of each cylinder head, one mid-way between cylinders 1 and 2, and one
mid-way between cylinders 3 and 4. Each knock sensor is secured with a single screw. On each knock sensor, a two pin
electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The ECM compares the signals from the knock sensors with mapped values stored in memory to determine when detonation
occurs on individual cylinders. When detonation is detected, the ECM retards the ignition timing on that cylinder for a
number of engine cycles, then gradually returns it to the original setting.
The ECM cancels closed loop control of the ignition system if the signal received from a knock sensor becomes implausible.
In these circumstances the ECM defaults to base mapping for the ignition timing. This ensures the engine will not become
damaged if low quality fuel is used. The MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) will not illuminate, although the driver may notice
that the engine 'pinks' in some driving conditions and displays a drop in performance and smoothness.
The ECM calculates the default value if one sensor fails on each bank of cylinders
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
The MAP sensor allows the ECM to calculate the load on the engine, which is used in the calculation of fuel injection time.
The MAP sensor is installed in the air inlet of the SC (supercharger). The sensor is secured with a single screw and sealed
with an O-ring. A three pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
If the MAP sensor fails, the ECM adopts a default value of 1 bar (14.5 lbf/in.2).
With a failed MAP sensor, the engine will suffer from poor starting, rough running and poor driveability.
MASS AIR FLOW AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS
The MAFT sensors allow the ECM to measure the mass and the temperature of the air flow into the engine. The mass air flow
is measured with a hot film element in the sensor. The temperature of the air flow is measured with a NTC thermistor in the
sensor. The mass air flow is used to determine the fuel quantity to be injected in order to maintain the stoichiometric air/fuel
mixture required for correct operation of the engine and the catalytic converters.
There are two MAFT sensors installed, one in each air cleaner outlet duct. Each MAFT sensor is secured with two screws and
sealed with an O-ring. On each MAFT sensor, a five pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
If the hot film element signal fails the ECM invokes a software backup strategy to calculate the mass air flow from other
inputs. Closed loop fuel control, closed loop idle speed control and evaporative emissions control are discontinued. The
engine will suffer from poor starting, poor throttle response and, if the failure occurs while driving, the engine speed may dip
before recovering.
If the NTC thermistor signal fails the ECM adopts a default value of 25 C (77 F) for the intake air temperature.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The MAPT sensor allows the ECM to calculate the air charge density immediately before it enters the cylinders. This is used
to adjust the ignition timing relative to the boost pressure, and to monitor the performance of the charge air coolers.
The MAPT sensor is installed in the rear of the LH intake manifold. The sensor is secured with a single screw and sealed with
an O-ring. A four pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
THROTTLE POSITION SENSORS

The TP (throttle position) sensors allow the ECM to determine the position and angular rate of change of the throttle blade.
There are two TP sensors located in the electronic throttle. See below for details of the electronic throttle.
If aTP sensor fails, the ECM:
Adopts a limp home mode where engine speed is limited to a maximum of approximately 2000 rev/min
Discontinues evaporative emissions control
Discontinues closed loop control of engine idle speed.
With a failed TP sensor, the engine will suffer from poor running and throttle response.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSORS
Item
Part Number
Description
Upstream heated oxygen sensor
Downstream heated oxygen sensor
The heated oxygen sensors allow the ECM to measure the oxygen content of the exhaust gases, for closed loop control of the
fuel:air mixture and for catalytic converter monitoring.
An upstream heated oxygen sensor is installed in the outlet of each exhaust manifold, which enables independent control of
the fuel:air mixture for each cylinder bank. A downstream heated oxygen sensor is installed in each catalytic converter,
which enables the performance of the catalytic converters to be monitored.
Oxygen sensors need to operate at high temperatures in order to function correctly. To achieve the high temperatures
required, the sensors are fitted with heater elements that are controlled by a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the
ECM. The heater elements are operated immediately after each engine start and during low load conditions when the
temperature of the exhaust gases is insufficient to maintain the required sensor temperature. The PWM duty cycle is
carefully controlled to prevent thermal shock to cold sensors. A non-functioning heater delays the sensors readiness for
closed loop control and increases emissions.
The upstream heated oxygen sensors produce a constant voltage, with a variable current that is proportional to the lambda
ratio. The downstream heated oxygen sensors produce an output voltage dependant on the ratio of the exhaust gas oxygen
to the ambient oxygen.
The heated oxygen sensors age with mileage, increasing their response time to switch from rich to lean and lean to rich. This
increase in response time influences the ECM closed loop control and leads to progressively increased emissions. Measuring
the period of rich to lean and lean to rich switching monitors the response rate of the upstream sensors.
Diagnosis of electrical faults is continually monitored in both the upstream and downstream sensors. This is achieved by
checking the signal against maximum and minimum threshold, for open and short circuit conditions.
If a heated oxygen sensor fails:
The ECM defaults to open loop fueling for the related cylinder bank
The CO (carbon monoxide) and emissions content of the exhaust gases increases
The exhaust smells of rotten eggs (hydrogen sulphide).
With a failed heated oxygen sensor, the engine will suffer from unstable operation and reduced performance.
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
The APP sensor allows the ECM to determine the driver requests for vehicle speed, acceleration and deceleration. The ECM
uses this information to determine the setting of the electronic throttle.
The APP sensor is installed on the pedal box and secured with three screws. A six pin electrical connector provides the
interface with the vehicle harness. The accelerator pedal is connected to a spindle on the RH side of the APP sensor.
The APP sensor is a twin track potentiometer. Each track receives an independent power supply from the ECM and returns an
independent analog signal to the ECM. Both signals contain the same positional information, but the signal from track 2 is
half the voltage of the signal from track1 at all positions.
If both signals have a fault, the ECM adopts a limp home mode, which limits the engine speed to 2000 rev/min maximum.
The ECM constantly checks the range and plausibility of the two signals and stores a fault code if it detects a fault.
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The AAT (ambient air temperature) sensor is a NTC thermistor that allows the ECM to monitor the temperature of the air
around the vehicle. The ECM uses the AAT input for a number of functions, including engine cooling fan control. The ECM
also transmits the ambient temperature on the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus for use by other control
modules.
The AAT sensor is installed in the LH exterior mirror, with the bulb of the sensor positioned over a hole in the bottom of the
mirror casing.
The ECM supplies the sensor with a 5 V reference voltage and a ground, and translates the return signal voltage into a
temperature.
If there is a fault with the AAT sensor, the ECM calculates the AAT from the temperature inputs of the MAFT sensors. If the
AAT sensor and the temperature inputs of the MAFT sensors are all faulty, the ECM adopts a default ambient temperature of
20 C (68 F).
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
The ECM uses the electronic throttle to regulate engine torque.

The electronic throttle is installed between the T piece duct, of the intake air distribution and filtering system, and the inlet of
the SC. For additional information, refer to 303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering.
The throttle plate is operated by an electric DC (direct current) motor integrated into the throttle body. The ECM uses a PWM
signal to control the DC motor. The ECM compares the APP sensor inputs against an electronic map to determine the
required position of the throttle plate. The ECM and electronic throttle are also required to:
Monitor requests for cruise control operation

Automatically operate the electronic throttle for accurate cruise control
Perform all dynamic stability control engine interventions
Monitor and carry out maximum engine speed and road speed cut outs
Provide different engine maps for the ride and handling optimization system.
A software strategy within the ECM calibrates the position of the throttle plate at the beginning of each ignition cycle. When
the ignition is turned on, the ECM performs a self test and calibration routine by fully closing the throttle plate and then
opening it again. This tests the default position springs and allows the ECM to learn the position of the closed hard stop.
Subsequently the ECM keeps the throttle plate a minimum of 0.5 degree from the closed hard stop.
MAIN RELAY
The main relay is used to initiate the power up and power down routines within the ECM. The main relay is installed in the
PDB (power distribution box).
When the ignition is turned on, battery voltage is applied to the ignition sense input. The ECM then starts its power up
routines and energizes the main relay.
When the ignition is turned off, the ECM maintains its powered up state while it conducts the power down routines (up to 20
minutes in extreme cases, when cooling fans are required) and on completion will turn off the main relay.
ECM Adaptions
The ECM has the ability to adapt the input values it uses to control certain outputs. This capability maintains engine
refinement and ensures the engine emissions remain within the legislated limits. The components which have adaptions
associated with them are:
The APP sensor

The heated oxygen sensors
The MAFT sensors
The CKP sensor
Oxygen and MAFT Sensors

There are several adaptive maps associated with the fueling strategy. Within the fueling strategy the ECM calculates shortterm adaptions and long term adaptions. The ECM will monitor the deterioration of the heated oxygen sensors over a period
of time. It will also monitor the current correction associated with the sensors.
The ECM will store a fault code in circumstances where an adaption is forced to exceed its operating parameters. At the
same time, the ECM will record the engine speed, engine load and intake air temperature.
Crankshaft Position Sensor

The characteristics of the signal supplied by the CKP sensor are learned by the ECM. This enables the ECM to set an adaption
and support the engine misfire detection function. Due to the small variation between different drive plates and different CKP
sensors, the adaption must be reset if either component is renewed, or removed and refitted. It is also necessary to reset
the drive plate adaption if the ECM is renewed or replaced. The ECM supports four drive plate adaptions for the CKP sensor.
Each adaption relates to a specific engine speed range. The engine speed ranges are detailed in the table below:
Adaption
1
2
3
4

1800 - 3000
3001 - 3800
3801 - 4600
4601 - 5400
Misfire Detection
Legislation requires that the ECM must be able to detect the presence of an engine misfire. It must be able to detect misfires
at two separate levels. The first level is a misfire that could lead to the legislated emissions limit being exceeded by a given
amount. The second level is a misfire that may cause catalytic converter damage.
The ECM monitors the number of misfire occurrences within two engine speed ranges. If the ECM detects more than a
predetermined number of misfire occurrences within either of these two ranges, over two consecutive journeys, it will record
a fault code and details of the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant temperature. In addition, the ECM monitors the
number of misfire occurrences that happen in a 'window' of 200 engine revolutions. The misfire occurrences are assigned a
weighting according to their likely impact on the catalytic converters. If the number of misfires exceeds a given value, the
ECM stores catalytic converter damage fault codes, along with the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant
temperature.
The signal from the CKP sensor indicates how fast the poles on the drive plate are passing the sensor tip. A sine wave is
generated each time a pole passes the sensor tip. The ECM can detect variations in drive plate speed by monitoring the sine
wave signal supplied by the crankshaft position sensor. By assessing this signal, the ECM can detect the presence of an
engine misfire. At this time, the ECM will assess the amount of variation in the signal received from the CKP sensor and
assign a roughness value to it. This roughness value can be viewed within the real time monitoring feature using Jaguar
approved diagnostic equipment. TheECM will evaluate the signal against a number of factors and will decide whether to
record the occurrence or ignore it. The ECM can assign a roughness and misfire signal for each cylinder.
Diagnostics
The ECM stores each fault as a DTC (diagnostic trouble code). The DTC and associated environmental and freeze frame data
can be read using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, which can also read real time data from each sensor, the adaption
values currently being employed and the current fueling, ignition and idle speed settings.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Electronic Engine

Controls
For a detailed description of electronic engine controls, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Engine oil level and condition
Fuel level
Throttle body
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) belt
Air cleaner condition
Electrical
Fuses
Wiring harness
Sensor(s)
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, verify the customer concern and refer to the Symptom Chart below,
alternatively, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Engine non-start
Engine does not crank
Possible Cause
Security
system /Immobilizer
engaged
Engine in shut-down mode
ECM relay
Battery
Starting system
Engine seized
Action
Check that the security system is
disarmed
Read DTCs and refer to DTC Index in
this section for ECM relay tests

Ensure the battery is in fully charged
and serviceable condition

For starting system tests refer to the
relevant section of the workshop manual

For engine system tests refer to the

Engine cranks, but does not fire
Ignition system
Fuel system
Engine cranks and fires, but will

not start
purge valve
Fuel pump
Spark plugs
Ignition coil failure(s)
Difficult to start
Check engine coolant
level/anti-freeze content
Battery
Ensure the engine breather system is
free from restriction and is correctly

installed
For ignition system tests refer to the
For fuel system tests refer to the
this section for electronic engine control
tests
For purge valve tests refer to the
Check the engine coolant level and
condition. Refer to the relevant sections

of the workshop manual

Exhaust gas recirculation

Fuel pump
purge valve
Difficult hot start
Injector leak
purge valve
Fuel pump
Ignition system
Difficult to start after hot soak

(vehicle standing, engine off, after
engine has reached operating
temperature)
Injector leak
purge valve
Fuel pump
Ignition system
Engine cranks too fast/slow
Engine stalls
Compressions high/low
Battery
Starting system
Breather system
ECM relay
Ignition system
Air leakage
Fuel lines
Ensure the battery is in a fully charged
and serviceable condition. Refer to the

battery care manual and the relevant
sections of the workshop manual.
tests
Refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual and check the
and associated hoses and connections.
workshop manual and check the purge
valve and associated hoses and
connections.
workshop manual, carry out injector
leak tests, install new injectors as
necessary.
tests
connections.
necessary.
tests
connections.
workshop manual, carry out
compression tests.

installed
tests
Engine stalls on overrun
ECM relay
Throttle position (TP)
Engine stalls at steady speed
ECM relay
sensors
crankshaft position sensor
TP sensors
Engine stalls with speed control

enabled
Engine stalls when manoeuvring
ECM relay
ECM relay
TP sensors
Additional engine loads
(PAS, air conditioning, etc)

CAN malfunction
Poor driveability
Engine hesitates/poor acceleration
fuel lines
Injector leak
Air leakage
Ignition system
EGR valve stuck
Restricted pedal travel
(carpet, etc)
Engine backfires
Fuel pump, fuel lines

Air leakage
Ignition system
timing (VCT) hub
Engine surges

Ignition system

Fuel pump, fuel lines, fuel
quality
Air leakage
Sticking VCT hub

Check for blockage in air cleaner
element and air intake system
Check for leakage in air intake system
this section for ECM relay and TP sensor
tests
this section for ECM relay, crankshaft
position sensor, and TP sensor tests
this section for ECM relay, and TP sensor
tests
Check for excessive loads being placed
on the engine from PAS, air conditioning
systems etc.
Refer to the workshop manual or
transmission troubleshooting guide for
transmission system tests.
workshop manual and the electrical
wiring diagrams to perform CAN
network tests.
Carry out fuel injector leak tests, install
new injectors as necessary.
Check for leakage from air intake
system
tests
Ensure accelerator pedal is free from
restriction
system
tests
this section for VCT system tests
tests
tests
system

Speed control inhibited or disabled
Default mode enabled

Speed control, brake switch
CAN fault
Breather system
Air leakage
Engine defaults, warning light and

messages. Refer to the owner
handbook

tests
Check message center for default
message, read DTCs and refer to DTC
Index
workshop manual for speed control, and
brake switch tests.
tests
network tests.
Ensure engine breather system is free
from restriction and is correctly installed
tests
tests
DTC Index
WARNING: Fuel injector voltage will reach 65Volts during operation and have a high current requirement.
NOTE: If the module/component is suspect and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedure manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation,
prior to the installation of a new module/component.
DTC
B10A231
Description
Crash Input - No signal
Possible Causes
NOTE: - Circuit SRS_SIGNAL Loss of communication between
restraints control module and

engine control module
Action
diagrams and check restraints

control module pulse width
modulated SRS signal line
circuit, hard wired connection
between engine control module
and restraints control module
for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open
circuit. Repair circuit as
required, clear the DTC and
retest
B10ACCruise Control Switch 81

Invalid serial data received
B10AC82
Cruise Control Switch Alive / sequence counter

incorrect / not updated
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch - Value

83
of signal protection
calculation incorrect
B10ACCruise Control Switch 96

Component internal failure
B10FF68
Ignition Control - Event

information
The engine control module has
received an invalid command from

the steering wheel switch pack
Cruise buttons alive counter is not
incrementing. Which suggests

that the LIN bus is faulty
Steering wheel module is not
connected
Steering wheel module failure
Cruise buttons checksum

incorrect, incorrect cruise switches
fitted to vehicle
Speed control switch circuit, open
circuit, short circuit to power,

short circuit to ground,
disconnected
Speed control switch failure
Steering wheel module failure
Spark plug(s) fault

Ignition coil(s) fault
Clear the DTC and press all the
steering wheel switches, recheck for DTCs. Refer to the

electrical circuit diagrams and
check the speed control switch
circuit for open circuit, short
circuit to power, short circuit to
ground, disconnected
Check and install a new
steering wheel module as
required. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual,
or determine if any prior
approval programme is in
operation, prior to the
installation of a new
module/component
diagrams and check the speed
control switch circuit for open
disconnected
diagrams and check the LIN
bus between steering wheel
module and the CAN gateway
module/component
Check and install new cruise
switches as required. Refer to
the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation,
prior to the installation of a
new module/component
Check for related DTCs in other
central junction boxes
diagrams and check the speed
control switch circuit for open
disconnected
Check and install a new speed
control switch as required.
module/component
Refer to repair manual and
check spark plug(s) for
condition and security. Replace
any defective components as
required
Refer to electrical wiring
diagrams and check ignition
coil circuit for intermittent open
short circuit to ground
Check and install a new coil(s)
B11DB- Battery Monitoring Module 01

General electrical failure
NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY Charging system fault

Battery monitoring signal line
circuit fault
Vehicle battery fault
B11DB- Battery Monitoring Module 87

Missing message
NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY Battery signal line circuit fault
B120668
Crash Occurred - Event

information
NOTE: - Circuit SRS_SIGNAL Engine control module has

detected the vehicle has crashed event information DTC only
C003100
C003400
Left Front Wheel Speed

Sensor - No sub type
information
Right Front Wheel Speed
information
C003700
Left Rear Wheel Speed

information
C003ARight Rear Wheel Speed
00
information
P0010- Intake (A) Camshaft Position
13
Actuator (Bank 1) - Circuit
open
Invalid data received from anti-
lock braking system module - left

front wheel speed signal fault
Invalid data received from antilock braking system module right front wheel speed signal
fault
Invalid data received from antilock braking system module - left
rear wheel speed signal fault
Invalid data received from antilock braking system module right rear wheel speed signal fault
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A Intake (A) camshaft position
actuator (Bank 1) open circuit

Engine control module interface
harness open circuit

00
Timing - Over-Advanced
(Bank 1) - No sub type
information
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A Intake (A) camshaft position


P0013Exhaust (B) Camshaft
13
Position Actuator (Bank 1) -
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A -
as required. Refer to the

warranty policy and procedures
manual, or determine if any
prior approval programme is in
module/component
Refer to electrical wiring
diagrams and check charging
system for faults. Perform any
repairs required
Refer to the electrical wiring
diagrams and check the battery
monitoring system module
circuit to ground, short circuit
to power
Refer to the workshop manual
and the battery care manual,
inspect the vehicle battery and
ensure it is fully charged and
serviceable before performing
further tests
diagrams and check the battery
monitoring system module
to power
diagrams and check the LIN
circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit
diagrams and check the engine
control module to restraints
control module circuit for short
to power, open circuit. Repair
circuit as required, clear the
DTC and retest
Check anti-lock braking system
module for related DTCs and
refer to relevant DTC index

diagrams and check intake (A)
camshaft position actuator
(Bank 1) circuit for open circuit
diagrams and check engine
control module interface
harness for open circuit
diagrams and check intake (A)
diagrams and check exhaust
Circuit open
Exhaust (B) camshaft position

P001500
P001600
P001700
P001800
P001900
Exhaust (B) Camshaft

Position Timing - OverRetarded (Bank 1) - No sub
type information
Crankshaft Position Camshaft Position

Correlation - Bank 1 Sensor
A - No sub type information

B - No sub type information

A - No sub type information

B - No sub type information

13
Actuator (Bank 2) - Circuit
open
P0023Exhaust (B) Camshaft
13
Position Actuator (Bank 2) Circuit open
P002672
Intake Valve Control

Solenoid Circuit
Range/Performance (Bank 1)
- Actuator stuck open
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A Exhaust (B) camshaft position
actuator (Bank 1) open circuit,

short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A The relative positions of the
crankshaft position sensor and

cam timing plate teeth are not
correct
Engine timing incorrect
Timing chain installed incorrectly
Variable valve timing forced fully
advanced
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A The relative positions of the

camshaft timing plate teeth are
not correct
advanced
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B The relative positions of the

not correct
advanced
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B The relative positions of the

not correct
advanced
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B Intake valve solenoid 2 open
circuit
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B Exhaust (B) Camshaft Position
actuator (Bank 2) circuit, open

circuit
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A Intake valve solenoid 1 angle less
than target
Intake valve solenoid 1 slow or
not operating
(B) camshaft position actuator

Check for related DTC P036500. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check
exhaust (B) camshaft position
actuator (Bank 1) for open
circuit, short circuit to ground,
Check engine timing. Check
camshaft sensor timing plate is
installed correctly. Check
timing chain is installed
correctly
Check for related DTC P0365-
00. Check engine timing. Check

correctly
(Bank 1) for open circuit, short
to power
correctly

correctly
diagrams and check intake

valve solenoid 2 for open circuit

Check operation of intake valve
solenoid 1. Check and install a

new intake valve solenoid 1 as
P002677

Solenoid Circuit
- Commanded position not
reachable
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A Intake valve solenoid 1 angle
greater than target

Intake valve solenoid 1 not
returning to target in time

Intake valve solenoid 1 stuck
advanced
P002772
Exhaust Valve Control

Solenoid Circuit
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A Exhaust valve solenoid 1 angle
less than target

Exhaust valve solenoid 1 slow or
not operating
P002777

Solenoid Circuit
reachable
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A Exhaust valve solenoid 1 angle
greater than target

Exhaust valve solenoid 1 not

Exhaust valve solenoid 1 stuck
advanced
P002872

Solenoid Circuit
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B Intake valve solenoid 2 angle less
than target
Intake valve solenoid 2 slow or
not operating
P002877

Solenoid Circuit
reachable
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B Intake valve solenoid 2 angle
greater than target


Intake valve solenoid 2 stuck
advanced
P002972

Solenoid Circuit
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B Exhaust valve solenoid 2 angle
less than target

Exhaust valve solenoid 2 slow or
not operating
P002977

Solenoid Circuit
reachable
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B Exhaust valve solenoid 2 angle
greater than target


Exhaust valve solenoid 2 stuck
advanced

module/component
module/component
Check operation of exhaust
valve solenoid 1. Check and
install a new exhaust valve
solenoid 1 as required. Refer to
module/component
module/component
P0031- HO2S Heater Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit HTR_CTRL_A_UPSTREAM

11
Low (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Circuit short to ground
NOTE: LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER A Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
heater control circuit (Bank 1,

Sensor 1) circuit short circuit to
ground

13
Low (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Circuit open

Sensor 1) circuit, open circuit

12
High (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Circuit short to battery

power
P0036- HO2S Heater Control Circuit

00
(Bank 1, Sensor 2) - No sub
type information
NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_A Catalyst oxygen sensor heater
circuit control fuse failure

Post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
heater control circuit short circuit

to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit
Catalyst oxygen sensor heater
circuit control relay circuit short
circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit
circuit control relay failure
failure
P0051- HO2S Heater Control Circuit NOTE: - Circuit HTR_CTRL_B_UPSTREAM

11
Low (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit short to ground
NOTE: LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER B -
Using the manufacturer

check datalogger signal,
Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater
Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1
(0x03A1)
diagrams and check pre
catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
Sensor 1) circuit for short
circuit to ground
(0x03A1)
Sensor 1) circuit for open
circuit
(0x03A1)
circuit to power
(0x03A2)
diagrams and check post
sensor fuse for open circuit
sensor circuit for short circuit to
open circuit
diagrams and check catalyst
oxygen sensor heater circuit
control relay circuit for short
to power, open circuit
catalyst oxygen sensor heater
control relay, as required.
Check and install a new post
catalyst oxygen sensor-odd as
module/component
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-even

ground

13
Low (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit open
NOTE: LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER B Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-even

Sensor 1) circuit, open circuit

12
High (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit short to battery
NOTE: LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER B Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-even

power
P0054HO2S Heater Resistance

NOTE: - Circuit HTR_CTRL_A_UPSTREAM
00
type information
NOTE: LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER A Catalyst oxygen sensor heater


open circuit, high resistance
power, open circuit
failure
P0056- HO2S Heater Control Circuit

00
type information
NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_B Post catalyst oxygen sensor-even

open circuit

(0x03A4)
catalyst oxygen sensor-even
circuit to ground
(0x03A4)
Sensor 1) circuit for open
circuit
(0x03A4)
circuit to power
(0x03A1)
module/component
(0x03A5)

power, open circuit
Post catalyst oxygen sensor-even
failure
P0060HO2S Heater Resistance

NOTE: - Circuit HTR_CTRL_B_UPSTREAM
00
type information
NOTE: LR - Circuit UHEGO HEATER B Catalyst oxygen sensor heater


power, open circuit
failure
P006929
MAP - Barometric Pressure

Correlation - Signal invalid
Manifold absolute pressure sensor
failure
Engine control module failure

open circuit
catalyst oxygen sensor-even,
module/component
(0x03A5)
catalyst oxygen sensor-even as
module/component
Barometric Pressure Sensor
Voltage (0x035A). Check for
related manifold absolute
pressure sensor DTCs
diagrams and check manifold
absolute pressure sensor circuit
circuit
Check and install new manifold
absolute pressure sensor as
required. Check and install a
new engine control module as
P0071- Ambient Air Temperature

Sensor Range/Performance 21
Signal amplitude < minimum
NOTE: Jaguar - Circuit

AMBIENT_TEMP_SENSOR NOTE: LR - Circuit TAMB TEMP Ambient air temperature sensor
circuit short circuit to ground,

short circuit to power, open circuit
Temperature and manifold
circuit to power, open circuit
Ambient air temperature sensor
failure
absolute pressure sensor failure
P0071- Ambient Air Temperature NOTE: - Circuit AMBIENT_TEMP_SENSOR

22
Sensor Range/Performance Signal amplitude >
maximum
NOTE: LR - Circuit TAMB TEMP Ambient air temperature sensor

failure
absolute pressure sensor failure

00
Sensor Circuit Low - No sub
type information

module/component
Ambient Air Temperature
Sensor Voltage (0x03BA)
diagrams and check ambient
air temperature sensor circuit
circuit
diagrams and check
temperature and manifold
circuit
ambient air temperature sensor
as required. Check and install a
new temperature and manifold
module/component
circuit
diagrams and check
temperature and manifold
circuit
as required. Check and install a
new temperature and manifold
module/component

failure

Sensor Circuit High - No sub
00
type information
ground circuit high resistance,

open circuit
signal circuit short circuit to power
failure
P007BCharge Air Cooler

23
Temperature Sensor Circuit
- Signal stuck low
NOTE: - Circuit TMAP_TEMP_SENSOR -

24
- Signal stuck high

29
Charge air cooler temperature
sensor circuit poor / intermittent

connection
sensor failure
sensor circuit short circuit to

sensor failure

module/component
check datalogger signals
for short circuit to ground, high
resistance, short circuit to
power. Check connector
terminals for corrosion or
damage
module/component
Charge Air Temperature
Voltage (0x03EE)
diagrams and check charge air
cooler temperature sensor
circuit for poor, intermittent
connection
Check and install a new charge
air cooler temperature sensor
module/component
Voltage (0x03EE)
module/component
- Signal invalid
sensor circuit short circuit to

ground, open circuit, short circuit
to power
sensor failure
P007CCharge Air Cooler

00
Low (Bank 1) - No sub type
information
P007DCharge Air Cooler

00
High (Bank 1) - No sub type
information
P0087- Fuel Rail/System Pressure 00

Too Low - No sub type
information
NOTE: - Circuit
FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR -
sensor (Bank 1) circuit short

circuit to ground, open circuit,
high resistance
sensor (Bank 1) failure
sensor (Bank 1) circuit short

circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance
sensor (Bank 1) failure
Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit
short circuit to ground, open

circuit, high resistance
Fuel rail pressure sensor failure
Fuel lines leaking or restricted
Fuel pump failure
P0088- Fuel Rail/System Pressure 00

Too High - No sub type
information
NOTE: - Circuit

Voltage (0x03EE)
ground, open circuit, short
circuit to power
module/component
(Bank 1) circuit for short circuit
to ground, open circuit, high
resistance
(Bank 1) as required. Refer to
(Bank 1) circuit for short circuit
to power, open circuit, high
resistance
(Bank 1) as required. Refer to
check datalogger signal, Fuel
Rail Pressure Sensor - High
Range Sensor Voltage
(0x0377)
diagrams and check fuel rail
pressure sensor circuit for short
circuit to ground, open circuit,
high resistance
Check for fuel pump related
DTCs. Check fuel lines for
leakage or restriction
Check and install new fuel rail
pressure sensor as required.
Check and install a new fuel
pump as required. Refer to the
module/component
Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit
short to each other, high

resistance, short circuit to power
Fuel rail pressure sensor failure
P008A- Low Pressure Fuel System

00
Pressure - Too Low - No sub
type information
NOTE: - Circuit
LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR Low pressure fuel sensor circuit
failure, short circuit to ground,

Fuel pump driver module circuit
Low pressure fuel
Fuel pump driver module failure
P008B- Low Pressure Fuel System

00
Pressure - Too High - No sub
type information
NOTE: - Circuit
LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR Low pressure fuel sensor circuit

Fuel pump driver module circuit
Blockage or restriction in low
pressure fuel line
Low pressure fuel sensor failure
P00AB23

Sensor 1 Circuit
NOTE: - Circuit
INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_B -

(0x0377)
to each other, high resistance,
Check and install new fuel rail
Refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual, or
Rail Pressure - Low Range
Sensor Voltage (0x0376)
Check fuel system for leakage
diagrams and check low
pressure fuel sensor circuit for
diagrams and check fuel pump
driver module circuit short
Check and install a new low
pressure fuel sensor as
new fuel pump driver module
module/component
diagrams and check low
pressure fuel sensor circuit for
circuit to power, open circuit.
Check for blockage or
restriction in low pressure fuel
line
Check and install a new low
pressure fuel sensor as
new fuel pump driver module
module/component
- Signal stuck low
P00AB24

Sensor 1 Circuit
- Signal stuck high
Intake air temperature sensor
bank 2 circuit short circuit to

bank 2 failure
NOTE: - Circuit
INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_B Intake air temperature sensor

power
bank 2 failure
P00AB29

Sensor 1 Circuit
- Signal invalid
NOTE: - Circuit

ground, open circuit, short circuit
to power
bank 2 failure
P00ACIntake Air Temperature

00
Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank
2) - No sub type information
NOTE: - Circuit
bank 2 sensing circuit short circuit

to ground, high resistance,
disconnected
bank 2 failure
check datalogger signal, Intake

Air Temperature Sensor Bank 2
(0x0312)
diagrams and check intake air
temperature sensor bank 2
Check and install a new intake
air temperature sensor bank 2
module/component
(0x0312)
circuit for short circuit to power
module/component
(0x0312)
to power
module/component
(0x0312)
ground, open circuit, high
resistance, disconnected
connector
P00ADIntake Air Temperature

00
Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank
NOTE: - Circuit
bank 2 sensing circuit short

bank 2 failure
P00C6- Fuel Rail Pressure Too Low 00

Engine Cranking - No sub
type information
P0101- Mass or Volume Air Flow A

00
Circuit Range/Performance No sub type information
No fuel at pump
Injector stuck open
Fuel pressure sensor signal stuck
Fuel pump failure
Intake air distribution and filtering
components incorrectly installed

Leakage from intake air system
Blocked air cleaner element(s)
Blocked engine breather
Blockage in intake air system
Mass air flow sensor seal failure
Connector is disconnected,
connector terminal is backed out,

connector terminal corrosion
Mass air flow sensor circuit, short
power, open circuit, high
resistance
Carbon build-up on throttle blade
Blocked injectors
Blocked catalysts
Mass air flow sensor failure
module/component
(0x0312)
circuit for short ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance. Check for
backed out or damaged
connector pins
module/component
Check fuel supply to both
pumps (if engine runs then
supply is not suspect). If
engine does not run perform
fuel prime routine. Use fuel
pump diagnostic routine to
determine if one pump has
failed, if so replace pump. If a
fuel injector is stuck open the
exhaust will smell of fuel and
fuelling adaptions may indicate
rich shift. Perform checks for as
DTC P0191-00
pump as required. Refer to the
module/component
approved smoke tester check
intake air distribution and
filtering components for
leakage and correct installation
Check air cleaner element is
free from restriction and in
serviceable condition
Ensure the engine breather
system is correctly installed
and in serviceable condition
Check for mass air flow sensor
seal integrity and correct
installation
Inspect connectors for signs of
water ingress, and pins for
damage and/or corrosion
diagrams and check mass air
flow sensor circuit for short
resistance
Make sure throttle blade is
clean of carbon
Check for blocked injectors
Check for blocked catalysts
Clear the DTC and retest
Refer to the relevant section of
P010200
Mass or Volume Air Flow A

Circuit Low - No sub type
information
P010300
Mass or Volume Air Flow A

Circuit High - No sub type
information
P010600
Manifold Absolute
Pressure/BARO Sensor
Range/Performance - No sub
type information
Fuse failure

resistance
resistance
Blockage in air intake system
NOTE: - Circuit MAP_SENSOR Blocked air cleaner element(s)

Intake manifold air leak

Engine breather leak
Carbon build up on throttle plate
Exhaust system blocked
failure
BARO sensor failure
workshop manual. Reset

fuelling adaptions and carry out
Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) Long Drive Cycle SelfTest
Check and install new mass air
flow sensor as required
Check for fuse failure
resistance
check datalogger signal, Mass
Air Flow Sensor, Bank 1
(0x0314)
resistance
Check air intake system for
blockage
free from restriction
Check for leak from air intake
system, rectify as required
clean of carbon
Check for blocked exhaust
manifold absolute pressure
sensor as required. Check for
related BARO sensor DTC
P0107Manifold Absolute
00
Pressure/BARO Sensor Low No sub type information
NOTE: - Circuit MAP_SENSOR Manifold absolute pressure sensor

failure
P0108Manifold Absolute
00
Pressure/BARO Sensor High No sub type information
NOTE: - Circuit MAP_SENSOR Manifold absolute pressure sensor
circuit short circuit to power, open

failure
P010B- Mass or Volume Air Flow B

00


resistance
Blocked injectors
Blocked catalysts
P010C00
Mass or Volume Air Flow B

information
Fuse failure
P0069-29. Refer to the

module/component
sensor as required. Refer to the
module/component
for short circuit to power, open
sensor as required. Refer to the
module/component
installation
resistance
clean of carbon


resistance
P010D00
Mass or Volume Air Flow B

information
P010FMass or Volume Air Flow

00
Sensor A/B Correlation - No
resistance
Blockage in air intake system


resistance
Blocked injectors
Blocked catalysts


resistance
Air Flow Sensor 2 Voltage
(0x0503)
resistance
blockage
installation
resistance
clean of carbon
P011123

Sensor 1 Circuit
Range/Performance - Signal
stuck low
NOTE: - Circuit
INLET_AIR_TEMP_SENSOR_A Intake air temperature sensor

failure
P011124

Sensor 1 Circuit
stuck high
NOTE: - Circuit

circuit
failure
P011129

Sensor 1 Circuit
invalid
NOTE: - Circuit

failure
P0112Intake Air Temperature

00
Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank
NOTE: - Circuit

failure
P0113Intake Air Temperature

00
Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank
NOTE: - Circuit

failure

temperature sensor circuit for
air temperature sensor as
module/component
circuit
module/component
module/component
high resistance
module/component
P0116- Engine Coolant Temperature NOTE: - Circuit COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR

23
Sensor 1 Circuit
stuck low
Battery reset carried out when the
engine was warm/hot
Engine coolant temperature
sensor 1 sensing circuit
intermittent high resistance
sensor 1 failure

24
Sensor 1 Circuit
stuck high
sensor 1 failure
Battery reset carried out when the
engine was warm/hot

29
Sensor 1 Circuit
invalid
Low coolant level
sensor 1 sensing circuit intermittent high resistance
sensor 1 failure
Possible airlock in cooling system

16
Sensor 1 Circuit Low - Circuit
voltage below threshold
sensor 1 circuit short circuit to

module/component
check datalogger signal, Engine
Coolant Temperature Sensor
Voltage (0x0357)
Check for related DTC P261087. Start the engine and switch
off. Clear DTC and re-test
coolant temperature sensor 1
circuit for intermittent high
resistance
Check and install a new engine
module/component
Voltage (0x0357)
Check for related DTC P261087. Start the engine and switch
off. Clear DTC and re-test
resistance
module/component
Fill cooling system to correct
level and specification
Voltage (0x0357)
resistance
Check and install new engine
module/component
Bleed cooling system
Voltage (0x0357)
ground
sensor 1 failure

17
Sensor 1 Circuit High Circuit voltage above
threshold
power, open circuit, sensor
disconnected
sensor 1 failure
P012100
P012200
Throttle/Pedal Position
Sensor A Circuit
type information
Sensor A Circuit Low - No
Corrupt engine control module
software flash
Engine control module power
supply circuit open circuit, high

resistance
Engine control module damage
through water ingress, internal
fault
NOTE: - Circuit
THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_1 Throttle position sensor 1 circuit

circuit
Throttle position sensor 1 failure
P0123-
NOTE: - Circuit

ground
Check and install a new Engine
module/component
Voltage (0x0357)
disconnected
Check and install new engine
module/component
check and install latest relevant
level of software to the engine
control module
control module power supply
circuit for open circuit, high
resistance
control module as required.
diagrams and check throttle
position sensor 1 circuit for
circuit
Clear DTC and repeat
automated diagnostic
procedure using the
diagnostic system. If DTC
remains suspect the electronic
throttle unit
electronic throttle unit as
module/component
00
Sensor A Circuit High - No

THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_1 Throttle position sensor 1 circuit

Throttle position sensor 1 failure
P0125- Insufficient Coolant Temp For

00
Closed Loop Fuel Control No sub type information
Coolant temperature sensor 1
P0126- Insufficient Coolant Temp For

26
Stable Operation - Signal
rate of change below
threshold
Thermostat stuck open

Coolant temperature coolant
P0128- Coolant Thermostat (Coolant

00
Temp Below Thermostat
Regulating Temperature) No sub type information

Cooling fans running continuously
P0131- O2 Circuit Low Voltage (Bank

00
1, Sensor 1) - No sub type
information
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd
circuit, open circuit, high

resistance
sensor 1 failure
sensor circuit, short circuit to

open circuit
or at a high duty
disconnected
variable circuit, short circuit to

ground
variable circuit, open circuit
heater fault
failure
diagrams and check throttle

procedure using the
remains suspect the electronic
throttle unit
module/component
resistance
coolant temperature sensor 1.
open circuit
Check for related coolant
temperature coolant sensor
faults. Check and install a new
thermostat as required. Refer
to the warranty policy and
Check for related coolant
temperature coolant sensor
faults
Check cooling fans for correct
operation. Repair as required
thermostat as required. Refer
Check pre-catalyst oxygen
sensor odd connector is
connected
diagrams and check precatalyst oxygen sensor odd
variable circuit for short circuit
sensor odd heater circuit
Check and install a new precatalyst oxygen sensor odd as
P0131O2 Sensor Circuit Low

1A
Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Circuit resistance below
threshold
NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_A_VARIABLE Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd
disconnected

ground
heater fault
failure
P0132O2 Sensor Circuit High

1B
Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Circuit resistance above
threshold
disconnected

power
heater fault
failure
P0132O2 Circuit High Voltage

00
type information
disconnected

power
heater fault
failure
P0133- O2 Circuit Slow Response

00
type information
NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_A_VARIABLE Exhaust leak

Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd to
engine control module wiring

shield high resistance
Fuel control system fault
failure

module/component
connected
module/component
connected
module/component
connected
module/component
sensor odd is correctly installed
in exhaust manifold
Check for and rectify any
exhaust leak between cylinder
head and catalytic converter
diagrams and check precatalyst oxygen sensor odd to
shield for high resistance

Check fuel control system for
failure
Check and install a new pre-
P0134O2 Circuit No Activity

00
Detected (Bank 1, Sensor 1)
- No sub type information

failure

00
information
NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_A Post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
sensing circuit short circuit to

ground, high resistance, open
circuit
Damaged or blocked catalyst
Air leak between catalyst and
exhaust manifold
Post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
failure

00
type information

power
tip damaged, blocked, poisoned
Catalyst blocked
failure

00
type information
NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_A Excessive oil consumption

catalyst oxygen sensor odd as

module/component
open circuit
module/component
catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
sensing circuit for short circuit
open circuit
Check for damaged or blocked
catalyst
Check for air leak between
catalyst and exhaust manifold
Check and install new post
module/component
to power
Check post catalyst oxygen
sensor - odd, tip for damage,
blockage, poisoned, install a
new sensor as required
Check for blocked catalyst
Check and install new catalyst
as required. Check and install
new post catalyst oxygen
sensor - odd, as required. Refer
Check for excessive oil
consumption. Repair as
required
Check for related DTCs. Check
post catalyst oxygen sensor odd, tip for damage, blockage,
poisoned, install a new sensor

00

high resistance, open circuit
exhaust manifold
failure
P014100
O2 Heater Circuit (Bank 1,

Sensor 2) - No sub type
information
NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_A Post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,

exhaust manifold
failure
P0148- Fuel Delivery Error - Signal

65
has too few transitions /
events
Injector(s) circuit, short circuit to

high resistance
Injector(s) failure
Engine control module internal
failure

module/component
to ground, short circuit to
power, high resistance, open
circuit
sensor - odd, tip for damage,
new sensor as required
consumption. Repair as
required
module/component
(0x03A2)
circuit
module/component
Check for related injector DTCs
diagrams and check injector(s)
circuit for, short circuit to
high resistance
Check and install a new injector
(s) as required. Check and
install a new engine control
module as required. Refer to
P0148- Fuel Delivery Error - Signal

has too many transitions /
66
events
P014932
Fuel Timing Error - Signal

low time < minimum
P014935
Fuel Timing Error - Signal

high time > maximum

1A
Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 1) Circuit resistance below
threshold

high resistance
Injector(s) failure
failure

high resistance
Injector(s) failure
failure

high resistance
Injector(s) failure
failure
NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_B_VARIABLE Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - even
circuit short circuit to ground

Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - even
failure

1B
Voltage (Bank 2 Sensor 1) Circuit resistance above
threshold
NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_B_VARIABLE Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - even
circuit short circuit to power,

disconnected
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - even

high resistance
high resistance
high resistance
diagrams and check precatalyst oxygen sensor - even
ground
Check and install new pre
catalyst oxygen sensor - even.
diagrams and check precatalyst oxygen sensor - even
power, disconnected
Check and install new pre
failure

00
type information
NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_B_VARIABLE Exhaust leak

Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even
to engine control module wiring

to engine control module signal
failure

00
NOTE: - Circuit UHEGO_B_VARIABLE Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even
to engine control module wiring

to engine control module signal
failure

00
information
NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_B Post catalyst oxygen sensor -
even, sensing circuit short circuit

to ground, high resistance, open
circuit
exhaust manifold
Post catalyst oxygen sensor even, tip damaged, blocked,
poisoned
Post catalyst oxygen sensor -
even, failure

sensor even is correctly
installed in exhaust manifold
Check for and rectify any
exhaust leak between cylinder
head and catalytic converter
diagrams and check precatalyst oxygen sensor even to
diagrams and check Precatalyst oxygen sensor even to
engine control module signal
ground
Check fuel control system for
failure
Check and install a new precatalyst oxygen sensor even as
module/component
sensor even is correctly
installed in exhaust manifold
engine control module signal
circuit
Check and install a new precatalyst oxygen sensor even as
module/component
catalyst oxygen sensor - even,
open circuit
sensor - even, tip for damage,
blockage, poisoned

00
type information

to power
poisoned
Post catalyst oxygen sensor even, failure

00
type information
NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_B Excessive oil consumption

Post catalyst oxygen sensor -
even, tip damaged, blocked,

poisoned

00

exhaust manifold
poisoned
P016100
O2 Heater Circuit (Bank 2,

Sensor 2) - No sub type
information
NOTE: - Circuit HTR_HEGO_B Post catalyst oxygen sensor -

Post catalyst oxygen sensor even, sensing circuit fuse failure

module/component
to power
blockage, poisoned
module/component
consumption, repair as required
new sensor as required. Refer
circuit
blockage, poisoned
module/component
circuit
diagrams and check Post
sensing circuit fuse, replace as
required
P0171- System Too Lean (Bank 1) 00

No sub type information
Air leak upstream of MAF/IAT
sensor bank 1
MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 circuit
failure
MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 failure
circuit failure
failure
Post-catalyst oxygen sensor odd
circuit failure
failure
P0172- System Too Rich (Bank 1) 00

Restricted air cleaner

Leaking fuel injector(s)
circuit failure
failure
circuit failure
failure
P0174- System Too Lean (Bank 2) 00

Air leak upstream of MAF/IAT
sensor bank 2
failure
circuit failure

module/component
diagrams and check MAF/IAT
sensor circuit, for short circuit
to ground, short circuit power,
system
Check for additional MAF/IAT
sensor bank 1 related DTCs and
Check for additional precatalyst oxygen sensor odd
related DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC index
Check for additional postcatalyst oxygen sensor odd
relevant DTC index
Check for leaking injectors,
install new injector(s) as
module/component
Check for additional precatalyst oxygen sensor odd
relevant DTC index
Check for additional postcatalyst oxygen sensor odd
relevant DTC index
failure
Post-catalyst oxygen sensor even
circuit failure
failure
P0175- System Too Rich (Bank 2) 00


failure
circuit failure
failure
circuit failure
failure
P018BFuel Pressure Sensor B

29
Circuit Range/Performance Signal invalid
NOTE: - Circuit
LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR Fuel Filter or fuel system
restriction
Fuel system leak
Fuel pump pressure sensor circuit

resistance
Fuel pump pressure sensor failure
P018C00
Fuel Pressure Sensor B

information
NOTE: - Circuit
LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR Fuel pump pressure sensor circuit

resistance

system
Check for additional precatalyst oxygen sensor even
relevant DTC index
Check for additional postcatalyst oxygen sensor even
relevant DTC index
system
Check for additional precatalyst oxygen sensor even
relevant DTC index
Check for additional postcatalyst oxygen sensor even
relevant DTC index
Check for related fuel pump
DTCs
Check the fuel system for
restrictions or blockages
high resistance
pump pressure sensor as
module/component
resistance
P018D00
Fuel Pressure Sensor B

information
NOTE: - Circuit
LOW_PRESS_FUEL_PRESS_SENSOR Fuel pump pressure sensor circuit

resistance
P0191- Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor A

00
NOTE: - Circuit
FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR Fuel rail pressure sensor short

resistance
Fuel rail pressure sensor A failure

00
information
NOTE: - Circuit
FUEL_HIGH_PRESS_SENSOR Fuel rail pressure sensor short

resistance

00
NOTE: - Circuit

module/component
resistance
module/component
(0x0377)
pressure sensor A circuit for
short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground, high
resistance, open circuit,
terminal damage or corrosion
Check and install a new fuel rail
pressure sensor A as required.
(0x0377)
information
Fuel rail pressure sensor short

resistance
P0196Engine Oil Temperature

NOTE: - Circuit OIL_QUALITY_SENSOR 23
Sensor Range/Performance Signal stuck low
Oil temperature - level sensor
high resistance
failure
P0196Engine Oil Temperature

Sensor Range/Performance Signal stuck high
circuit short circuit to power
failure
P020004
Injector Circuit - System

internal failures
Engine control module injector
circuit power failure

supply open circuit

Engine control module ground
supply open circuit
P020049
Injector Circuit - Internal

electronic failure

(0x0377)
check datalogger signal, Sump
Oil Temperature - Measured
(0x03F3)
diagrams and check oil
temperature - level sensor
ground, intermittent high
resistance
Check and install new oil
temperature - level sensor as
module/component
(0x03F3)
temperature - level sensor
circuit for intermittent short
circuit to power
Check and install new oil
temperature - level sensor as
module/component
control module injector power
circuit for open circuit
diagrams and check the power
and ground connections to the
module
Check for misfire DTCs, if
present suspect the engine
control module
Check for misfire DTCs, if
present suspect the engine
control module
P02004B
Injector Circuit - Over

temperature
P0201- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit /

13
Open - Circuit open
NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A INJECTOR_1A_COMMON Fuel injector no.1 circuit open
circuit

If combined with misfire codes
for one or both injector sets,
then no service rectification is
proposed
diagrams and check fuel
injector no.1 circuit for open
circuit, disconnected injector,
high resistance
Injector disconnected
Injector high resistance

Open - Circuit open
13
NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B INJECTOR_1B_COMMON Fuel injector no.2 circuit open
circuit

high resistance

13
Open - Circuit open
circuit

high resistance

Open - Circuit open
13
circuit

high resistance

13
Open - Circuit open
circuit

high resistance

13
Open - Circuit open
circuit

high resistance

13
Open - Circuit open
circuit

high resistance

13
Open - Circuit open
NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_4B INJECTOR_4B_COMMON -

Fuel injector no.8 circuit open
P0222Throttle/Pedal Position
00
Sensor/Switch B Circuit Low
circuit
NOTE: - Circuit
THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_2 Throttle/pedal position
sensor/switch B circuit open

circuit, short circuit to ground
Throttle/pedal position
sensor/switch B failure
00
Sensor/Switch B Circuit High
NOTE: - Circuit
THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_2 Throttle/pedal position

circuit, short circuit to power
P0231- Fuel Pump Secondary Circuit

NOTE: - Circuit
Low - Signal stuck low
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG 23
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2POS Fuel pump driver module signal

open circuit
Fuel pump driver module is not
energized with the ignition on
P0232- Fuel Pump Secondary Circuit

NOTE: - Circuit
24
Low - Signal stuck high
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2POS Fuel pump driver module signal

open circuit
Fuel pump driver module is not
energized with the ignition on

high resistance
diagrams and check

throttle/pedal position
sensor/switch B circuit for open
sensor/switch B as required.
diagrams and check
sensor/switch B circuit for open
sensor/switch B as required.
Check for related DTCs P023224
driver module signal circuit for
circuit
driver module is energized with
the ignition on. Repair as
required
pump driver module as
module/component
Check for related DTCs P023123
driver module signal circuit for
circuit
driver module is energized with
the ignition on. Repair as
required
pump driver module as
module/component
P0236- Turbocharger/Supercharger NOTE: - Circuit TMAP_PRESS_SENSOR 00

Boost Sensor A Circuit
type information
Intake manifold air leak
2 circuit short circuit to ground,
Engine breather leak
Carbon build up on throttle plate
Exhaust system blocked
2 failure
BARO sensor failure

Boost Sensor A Circuit Low No sub type information
2 failure

Boost Sensor A Circuit High No sub type information
circuit 2 short circuit to power,
2 failure
P0251- Injection Pump Fuel Metering

NOTE: - Circuit
13
Control A - Circuit open
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG -

system, rectify as required


absolute pressure sensor 2
clean of carbon
Check for blocked exhaust
Check for related BARO sensor
DTC P0069-29
sensor 2 as required. Refer to
resistance
resistance
pressure sensor circuit for open
circuit
Fuel rail pressure sensor circuit,
open circuit
NOTE: - Circuit
11
Control A Low - Circuit short HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG to ground
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG -

circuit to ground

NOTE: - Circuit
12
Control A High - Circuit short HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG to battery

circuit to power

NOTE: - Circuit
13
Control B - Circuit open
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_2NEG -

pressure sensor circuit for open
circuit
open circuit
NOTE: - Circuit
11
Control B Low - Circuit short HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG to ground

circuit to ground

NOTE: - Circuit
12
Control B High - Circuit short HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG to battery

circuit to power
P025C- Fuel Pump Module Control

14
Circuit Low - Circuit short to
ground or open
P025D- Fuel Pump Module Control

12
Circuit High - Circuit short to
battery
P0261- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit
11
Low - Circuit short to ground

NOTE: - Circuit FPDM control Fuel pump driver module control

open circuit
NOTE: - Circuit FPDM control Fuel pump driver module control

NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A INJECTOR_1A_COMMON Fuel injector no.1 circuit short

12
Low - Circuit short to battery
circuit to ground
P026201
Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit

High - General electrical
failure
circuit to power
P026212

High - Circuit short to
battery

power

11
circuit to power
NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B INJECTOR_1B_COMMON Fuel injector no.2 circuit short

12
circuit to ground
P026501

failure
circuit to power
P0265-

power
NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B -

circuit to ground, open circuit

circuit to power

injector no.1 circuit for short
circuit to ground

circuit to power

to power

circuit to power

circuit to ground

circuit to power

to power
12

battery
INJECTOR_1B_COMMON Fuel injector no.2 circuit short

11
circuit to power

12
circuit to ground
P026801

failure
circuit to power
P026812

battery

power

11
circuit to power

12
circuit to ground
P027101

failure
circuit to power
P027112

battery

power

11
circuit to power

12
circuit to ground
P027401

failure
circuit to power
P027412

battery

power
circuit to power

circuit to power

circuit to ground

circuit to power

to power

circuit to power

circuit to ground

circuit to power

to power

circuit to power

circuit to ground

circuit to power

to power

circuit to power

11

12
circuit to ground
P027701

failure
circuit to power
P027712

battery

power

11
circuit to power

12
circuit to ground
P028001

failure
circuit to power
P028012

battery

power

11
circuit to power

12
circuit to ground
P028301

failure
circuit to power
P028312

battery

power
P02EE01

Range/Performance General electrical failure
circuit to power
NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A INJECTOR_1A_COMMON Cylinder 1 injector low circuit

circuit to ground

circuit to power

to power

circuit to power

circuit to ground

circuit to power

to power

circuit to power

circuit to ground

circuit to power

to power

circuit to power
diagrams and check cylinder 1

injector circuit for short circuit
to power, short circuit together

Cylinder 1 injector low circuit
shorted to high circuit

Cylinder 1 injector failure
P02EE- Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit

1C
Range/Performance - Circuit
voltage out of range
NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1A INJECTOR_1A_COMMON Engine control module failure
P02EF01

NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B INJECTOR_1B_COMMON Cylinder 2 injector low circuit


P02EF- Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit

1C
NOTE: - Circuit INJECTOR_1B INJECTOR_1B_COMMON Engine control module failure
P02F001



P02F0- Cylinder 3 Injector Circuit

1C
P02F101




1C
P02F201



cylinder 1 injector as required.

approved diagnostic system,
check engine control module,
for related DTCs and refer to

1C
P02F301




1C
P02F401




1C
P02F501




1C
P030000
Random Misfire Detected No sub type information
Poor fuel quality

Catalyst/exhaust system blockage
Spark plug(s) fouled or failed
Coil(s) failure
Injector(s) circuit short circuit to

open circuit
Injector(s) failure
Fuel system excessively too lean
or too rich
Camshaft position sensor failure

blockages, repair as required
Check the catalyst/exhaust
system for blockage, repair as
required
Check and install a new spark
plug(s) as required
as required
P0301- Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected 00

Poor fuel quality

Coil(s) failure

open circuit
Injector(s) failure
or too rich

Poor fuel quality

Coil(s) failure

open circuit
Injector(s) failure
or too rich

open circuit
(s) as required
Check for air leaks within the
intake system
camshaft position sensor as
required
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required

Poor fuel quality

Coil(s) failure

open circuit
Injector(s) failure
or too rich

Poor fuel quality

Coil(s) failure

open circuit
Injector(s) failure
or too rich

Poor fuel quality


required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
Coil(s) failure

open circuit
Injector(s) failure
or too rich

Poor fuel quality

Coil(s) failure

open circuit
Injector(s) failure
or too rich

Poor fuel quality

Coil(s) failure

open circuit
Injector(s) failure
or too rich

required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
required
plug(s) as required
as required

Poor fuel quality

Coil(s) failure

open circuit
Injector(s) failure
or too rich
P031300
Misfire Detected With Low

Fuel - No sub type
information
Poor fuel quality

Coil(s) failure

open circuit
Injector(s) failure
or too rich

open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
P0316- Misfire Detected On Startup

00
(First 1000 Revolutions) - No
Poor fuel quality

Coil(s) failure

open circuit
Injector(s) failure
or too rich
P0327- Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_1A_POS

00
(Bank1) - No sub type
information
Poor sensor contact with the
cylinder block
Knock sensor bank 1 front circuit

circuit
Knock sensor bank 1 front failure
P0328- Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_1A_POS

00
information
cylinder block
high resistance, short circuit to

power
P032C- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_2A_POS
www.JagDocs.com

required
required
plug(s) as required
as required
open circuit
(s) as required
intake system
required
Ensure a good electrical contact
with the cylinder block
diagrams and check knock
sensor bank 1 front circuit for
circuit
Check and install a new knock
sensor bank 1 front as
module/component
short circuit to power, high
resistance
module/component
00

information
cylinder block

P032D- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit High NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_2A_POS

00
information
cylinder block

power
P0332- Knock Sensor 2 Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_1B_POS

00
information
cylinder block
Knock sensor bank 1 rear circuit

circuit
Knock sensor bank 1 rear failure
P0333- Knock Sensor 2 Circuit High NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_1B_POS

00
information
cylinder block

P0335- Crankshaft Position Sensor A

02
Circuit - General signal
failure
NOTE: - Circuit CRANK_SENSOR Crankshaft position sensor circuit

circuit to power, high resistance,
disconnected
Crankshaft position sensor failure

NOTE: - Circuit CRANK_SENSOR -

module/component
resistance
module/component
sensor bank 1 rear circuit for
circuit
sensor bank 1 rear as required.
diagrams and check crankshaft
position sensor circuit for short
to power, high resistance,
disconnected
Check and install new
crankshaft position as required.
31
Circuit - No signal
Crankshaft position sensor circuit
- short circuit to ground, short

disconnected

00
NOTE: - Circuit CRANK_SENSOR Crankshaft position sensor circuit

disconnected
Crankshaft position sensor gap
incorrect, foreign matter on
sensor face, damaged teeth on
rotor
P033C- Knock Sensor 4 Circuit Low NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_2B_POS

00
information
cylinder block

P033D- Knock Sensor 4 Circuit High NOTE: - Circuit KNOCK_SENSOR_2B_POS

00
information
cylinder block

power
P0340- Camshaft Position Sensor A

02
Circuit (Bank 1 or single
sensor) - General signal
failure
NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_A Camshaft position sensor bank 1
inlet sensor circuit short circuit to

high resistance, disconnected
Camshaft position sensor bank 1
inlet sensor gap incorrect, foreign
matter on sensor face, damaged
rotor
inlet sensor failure

disconnected
disconnected
Check crankshaft position
sensor for damage and check
air gap (check at 90 intervals,
should be no greater than
4.5mm)
resistance
diagrams and check camshaft
position sensor bank 1 inlet
Check camshaft position sensor
bank 1 inlet sensor for correct
installation and damage
camshaft position sensor bank
1 inlet as required. Refer to the

31
Circuit (Bank 1 or single
sensor) - No signal
NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_A Camshaft position sensor bank 1

rotor

00
(Bank 1 or single sensor) No sub type information
NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_A -

02
Circuit (Bank 2) - General
signal failure
NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_B -

rotor

rotor

31
Circuit (Bank 2) - No signal
NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_B Camshaft position sensor bank 2
inlet sensor circuit - short circuit

rotor

module/component
module/component
module/component
module/component

00
information
NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_B -
P0351Ignition Coil A
13
Primary/Secondary Circuit Circuit open
NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1A -
P0352Ignition Coil B
13
NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1B -
P0353Ignition Coil C
13
P0354Ignition Coil D
13
P0355Ignition Coil E
13
P0356Ignition Coil F
13
P0357Ignition Coil G
13
P0358Ignition Coil H
13
P0365- Camshaft Position Sensor B

02
signal failure
NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_A -
inlet sensor circuit - short circuit

matter on sensor face, target
rotor run-out
Ignition coil 1 open circuit

Ignition coil 1 disconnected
Ignition coil high resistance







outlet sensor circuit short circuit


module/component
Check target rotor for run out,
repair as required
module/component
coil 1 circuit for open circuit,
disconnected ignition coil, high
resistance

resistance

resistance

resistance

resistance

resistance

resistance

resistance

position sensor bank 1 outlet
outlet sensor gap incorrect,

foreign matter on sensor face,
damaged rotor
outlet sensor failure

00
information
NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_A -

02
signal failure
NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_B -

target rotor run-out

damaged rotor

00
information
P0420- Catalyst System Efficiency

00
Below Threshold (Bank 1) No sub type information
NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_B Camshaft position sensor bank 2

damaged rotor, rotor run-out
Catalytic converter failure due to
overheating damage caused by

misfire and/or lean combustion
poisoning caused by excessive oil
bank 1 outlet sensor for correct

1 outlet as required. Refer to
Check target run-out, repair as
required
Check target rotor, repair as
required
check for misfire/lean
combustion related DTCs and
refer to the relevant DTC index
consumption and/or contaminated

fuel
Check the oil and fuel
condition/level
Check the catalytic converter
for damage
P0430- Catalyst System Efficiency

00
Below Threshold (Bank 2) No sub type information
P0441- Evaporative Emission System

Incorrect Purge Flow - No
00
NOTE: - Circuit PURGE_VALVE -
overheating damage caused by

misfire and/or lean combustion
poisoning caused by excessive oil
consumption and/or contaminated
fuel
Evaporative emission system
hoses, pipes or connection failure

Purge control valve circuit short

resistance
Purge control valve failure

00
Leak Detected (small leak)No sub type information
Fuel filler cap not sealing/missing

Diagnostic module tank leakage
connector not sealed

Purge valve dirty
Evaporative emission system leak
Fuel tank, filler neck leak
module failure

13
Purge Control Valve Circuit
Open - Circuit open
NOTE: - Circuit PURGE_VALVE Purge control valve open circuit,

NOTE: - Circuit COV -
catalytic converter bank 1 as

module/component
check for misfire/lean
combustion related DTCs and
Check the oil and fuel
condition/level
Check the catalytic converter
for damage
catalytic converter bank 2 as
module/component
Check all evaporative emission
system hoses, pipes and
connection are serviceable,
repair/replace as required
diagrams and check purge
control valve circuit for short
Check and install a new purge
control valve as required. Refer
Check fuel tank filler cap for
sealing/missing. Check and
install a new fuel tank filler cap
as required
Check evaporative emission
system for leak using
appropriate smoke/leak tester
Carry out a purge valve self
test to clean the purge valve
Check fuel tank and filler neck
for leakage, replace as required
diagnostic module tank leakage
diagrams and check purge
control valve circuit for open
circuit, disconnected purge
valve, high resistance
00
Vent Control Circuit Open No sub type information
NOTE: LR - Circuit CHANGE OVER VALVE

module circuit open circuit

module circuit fuse blown / not

secure in holder
module failure

00
Vent Control Circuit Shorted
NOTE: - Circuit COV NOTE: LR - Circuit CHANGE OVER VALVE

module circuit, short circuit to

open circuit
module failure

00
Leak Detected (very small
leak) - No sub type
information
Fuel filler cap not sealing/missing

connector not sealed

Purge valve dirty
Evaporative emission system leak
module failure

11
High - Circuit short to ground

12
battery
P0461- Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit
29
invalid
NOTE: - Circuit PURGE_VALVE Evaporative emission system
purge control valve circuit short

circuit to ground
NOTE: - Circuit PURGE_VALVE Evaporative emission system
purge control valve circuit short

circuit to power
Fuel level sensor circuit open
Fuel level sensor stuck
Fuel level sensor failure
diagrams and check diagnostic

module tank leakage module
Check diagnostic module tank
leakage module fuse and
replace as required
module tank leakage module
open circuit
Check fuel tank filler cap for
sealing/missing. Check and
install a new fuel tank filler cap
as required
Check evaporative emission
system for leak using
appropriate smoke/leak tester
Carry out a purge valve self
test to clean the purge valve
Check fuel tank and filler neck
for leakage, replace as required
diagrams and check
evaporative emission system
purge control valve circuit for
diagrams and check

evaporative emission system
purge control valve circuit for
diagrams and check fuel level

open circuit
Check for stuck level sensor
level sensor as required. Refer
P0461- Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit
2F
erratic
P048104
Fan 2 Control Circuit System internal failures
Fuel level sensor circuit short

power, open circuit
Fuel level sensor track damaged
diagrams and check fuel level

open circuit
Check level sensor track for
damage
level sensor as required. Refer
Electric Fan PWM Control Commanded Duty Cycle
(0x03F9)
Check and install a new cooling
fan control unit as required.
(0x03F9)
(0x03F9)
diagrams and check cooling fan
control unit circuit for short
circuit to ground
(0x03F9)
control unit circuit for short
circuit to power
(0x03F9)
control unit circuit for open
circuit
NOTE: - Circuit RAD_FAN_PWM Damaged cooling fan control unit

Cooling fan control unit failure
P048109
Fan 2 Control Circuit Component failures

P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit - Circuit

11
short to ground
NOTE: - Circuit RAD_FAN_PWM Cooling fan control unit circuit

12
short to battery

13
open
open circuit

16
NOTE: - Circuit RAD_FAN_PWM Charging system fault

Discharged battery

17
voltage above threshold
NOTE: - Circuit RAD_FAN_PWM Charging system fault

Discharged battery
P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit - Signal

38
frequency incorrect

P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit - Over

4B
temperature

P048193
Fan 2 Control Circuit - No

operation

Blocked cooling fan control unit

(0x03F9)
circuit to ground
generator as required
Check and install a new battery
as required
(0x03F9)
circuit to ground
generator as required
Check and install a new battery
as required
(0x03F9)
(0x03F9)
(0x03F9)
Check for blocked or
obstruction to fan rotor

P048196
Fan 2 Control Circuit Component internal failure

P048197
Fan 2 Control Circuit Component or system

operation obstructed or
blocked

Blocked cooling fan control unit
P050081
Vehicle Speed Sensor A Invalid serial data received
Wheel speed sensor fault
P050082
Vehicle Speed Sensor A Alive / sequence counter

Anti-lock braking system module
P050083
Vehicle Speed Sensor A Value of signal protection

Incorrect level of anti-lock braking
not on bus
system module software

Incorrect level of engine control
module software
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor A 85

Signal above allowable range
P0501Vehicle Speed Sensor A
62
compare failure
has reported a speed above 300

km/h
Vehicle speed from the anti-lock
braking system module does not
match the calculated vehicle
speed from the engine control
module

(0x03F9)
(0x03F9)
Check for blocked or
obstruction to fan rotor
module and engine control
diagrams and check anti-lock
braking system module circuit
circuit
Clear DTC and re-test
level of software to the antilock braking system module
control module
Check engine control module
for related vehicle speed DTCs
and refer to relevant DTC index
module and transmission
control module for related DTCs
and refer to relevant DTC index
Check the vehicle tire sizes are
correct
P050400
Brake Switch A / B
Correlation - No sub type
information
No brake pressure signal available
from anti-lock braking module

Brake switch 1 and Brake switch 2
sense circuit short circuit to

open circuit
Brake switch 1 failure
P050464
Brake Switch A / B
Correlation - Signal
NOTE: - Circuit BRAKE_SW BRAKE_SW_2 Brake fluid leak

Brake switch incorrectly
installed/adjusted
Brake switch 1 sense circuit short
circuit to Brake switch 2 sense

Brake switch failure
P0506- Idle Air Control System RPM

00
Lower Than Expected - No
Air intake restriction

Front end accessory drive

24
Lower Than Expected Signal stuck high

Air intake system air leak between
overload (defective/seized
component)
MAF/IAT sensor and throttle

Intake air leak between throttle
and manifold
Engine crankcase breather leak
overload (defective/seized
component)

00
Higher Than Expected - No

and manifold

23
Higher Than Expected Signal stuck low


and manifold
P050B23
Cold Start Ignition Timing

Performance - Signal stuck
low
Ignition coil(s)faulty
Ignition coils circuit noise
Check Anti-Lock braking

Check for brake fluid leaks
braking system module circuit
circuit
diagrams and check brake
switch circuit for short circuit to
open circuit
Check and install a new brake
switch 1 as required. Refer to
Check for brake fluid leaks
switch 1 circuit for short circuit
to brake switch 2
Check brake switch is correctly
installed and adjusted
switch as required. Refer to the
module/component
Ensure the air intake system is
Check the front end accessory
drive belt and components for
failure, repair as required
throttle and inlet manifold
Check for engine breather
system leak
Check the front end accessory
drive belt and components for
failure
system leak
system leak
coil circuit for short circuit to
open circuit
P050B24
P050E00
Cold Start Ignition Timing

Performance - Signal stuck
high
Cold Start Engine Exhaust

Temperature Too Low - No
Incorrect coolant temperature
sensor installed
Coolant temperature sensor circuit

circuit
Coolant temperature sensor
failure
P051212
Starter Request Circuit Circuit short to battery
NOTE: - Circuit CRANK_REQUEST Crank request circuit between
engine control module and central

junction box short circuit to power
P051214
Starter Request Circuit Circuit short to ground or

open
P0513- Incorrect Immobilizer Key 00

NOTE: - Circuit CRANK_REQUEST Crank request circuit between
engine control module and central

junction box short circuit to
Security key invalid
Controller area network data
corruption

control module to ignition coil
as required
coils circuit for corrosion, high
resistance
open circuit
control module to ignition coil
as required
coils circuit for corrosion, high
resistance
Check the correct coolant
temperature sensor is installed
diagrams and check coolant
circuit
Check and install a new coolant
temperature sensor as
module/component
diagrams and check crank
request circuit between engine
control module and central
junction box for short circuit to
power
diagrams and check crank
request circuit between engine
control module and central
junction box for short circuit to
Check for CAN network
interference/engine control
module related error
Low battery voltage
P052A00
Cold Start Intake (A)

Camshaft Position Timing
Over-Advanced (Bank 1) No sub type information
NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_A Engine oil pressure too low

Intake valve solenoid 1 circuit

Intake valve solenoid 1 failure
Timing chains stretched beyond
allowable limits
P052B00

Over-Retarded (Bank 1) - No
NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_A Engine oil pressure too low


allowable limits
P052C00

NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_B Engine oil pressure too low


allowable limits
P052D00

NOTE: - Circuit CAM_IN_SENSOR_B Engine oil pressure too low


allowable limits

complete a CAN network
integrity test
Check the vehicle charging
system for faults, repair as
required
Check engine oil level and top
up as required
valve solenoid 1 sensor circuit
valve solenoid 1 sensor as
required
Check service history /mileage
Check and install new timing
chains as required
up as required
required
chains as required
up as required
required
chains as required
up as required
required

chains as required
P054A00
Cold Start Exhaust (B)

NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_A Engine oil pressure too low

Exhaust valve solenoid 1 circuit

Exhaust valve solenoid 1 failure
allowable limits
P054B00

NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_A Engine oil pressure too low


allowable limits
P054C00

NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_B Engine oil pressure too low


allowable limits
P054D00

NOTE: - Circuit CAM_EX_SENSOR_B Engine oil pressure too low



up as required
exhaust valve solenoid 1 sensor
as required
chains as required
up as required
as required
chains as required
up as required
as required
chains as required
up as required
allowable limits
P056013
System Voltage - Circuit

open
NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY Engine control module power
supply circuit, open circuit

Engine control module battery
monitor disconnected
P0562- System Voltage Low - No sub
00
type information
NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY Battery circuit high resistance

Generator circuit open circuit,
high resistance
Generator failure
P056300
System Voltage High - No

NOTE: - Circuit BATTERY Battery circuit high resistance

Generator over charging
P0572- Brake Switch A Circuit Low 17

Circuit voltage above
threshold
NOTE: - Circuit BRAKE_SW Brake switch 2 sense circuit short
circuit to ground
installed/adjusted
Customer is driving with foot
resting on brake pedal

P0573- Brake Switch A Circuit High 16

Circuit voltage below
threshold
circuit to ground
Brake switch 2 sense circuit open
circuit
installed/adjusted


as required
chains as required
control module battery monitor
diagrams and check battery
circuit for high resistance
diagrams and check generator
resistance
generator as required. Refer to
diagrams and check battery
circuit for high resistance
generator as required. Refer to
to ground
Ensure customer is not driving
with foot resting on brake pedal
module/component
switch 1 circuit for open circuit
switch 2 circuit for open circuit
P0578- Cruise Control Multi-Function

00
Input A Circuit Stuck - No
Speed control circuit, output
P057B- Brake Pedal Position Sensor

87
Circuit Range/Performance Missing message
Brake pressure signal missing
P0590- Cruise Control Multi-Function

00
Input B Circuit Stuck - No
Active speed limiter switch stuck
P0600- Serial Communication Link 49

signal stuck
Speed control switch stuck
from anti-lock braking system

control module
software
supply fault
through water ingress
P0601Internal Control Module

43
Memory Check Sum Error Special memory failure
software flash
supply fault

45
Memory Check Sum Error Program memory failure
software flash
supply fault

module/component
diagrams and check speed
control switch circuit for short
circuit to ground
Check for stuck speed control
switch, install a new switch
pack as required. Refer to the
module/component
Check the anti-lock braking
system control module for
relevant DTC index
Check for active speed limiter
DTCs within gear shift module
Check and install a new gear
shift module as required. Refer
control module
power supply circuit for open
circuit
for signs of water ingress
control module
circuit
control module
P060442

(RAM) Error - General
memory failure
software flash
supply fault
P060443

(RAM) Error - Special
memory failure
software flash
supply fault
P060444

(RAM) Error - Data memory
failure
software flash
supply fault
P0605- Internal Control Module Read

00
Only Memory (ROM) Error No sub type information
software flash
supply fault

circuit
control module
circuit
control module
circuit
control module
circuit
control module
circuit


29
Only Memory (ROM) Error Signal invalid
software flash
supply fault

42
Only Memory (ROM) Error General memory failure
software flash
supply fault

44
Only Memory (ROM) Error Data memory failure
software flash
supply fault

46
Only Memory (ROM) Error Calibration / parameter
memory failure
software flash
supply fault

control module
circuit
control module
circuit
control module
circuit
control module
circuit

48
Only Memory (ROM) Error Supervision software failure
software flash
supply fault

64
Only Memory (ROM) Error Signal plausibility failure
software flash
supply fault
P060601
Control Module Processor General electrical failure
software flash
supply fault
P060604
Control Module Processor System internal failures
software flash
supply fault

control module
circuit
control module
circuit
control module
circuit
control module
circuit
P060605
Control Module Processor System programming

failures
software flash
supply fault
P060641
Control Module Processor General checksum failure
software flash
supply fault
P060642
Control Module Processor General memory failure
software flash
supply fault
P060643
Control Module Processor Special memory failure
software flash
supply fault

control module
circuit
control module
circuit
control module
circuit
control module
circuit
P060644
Control Module Processor Data memory failure
software flash
supply fault
P060647
Control Module Processor Watchdog / safety micro

controller failure
software flash
supply fault
P0606- Control Module Processor 48

Supervision software failure
software flash
supply fault
P060649
Control Module Processor Internal electronic failure
software flash
supply fault

control module
circuit
control module
circuit
control module
circuit
control module
circuit
P0607- Control Module Performance

00
software flash
supply fault
P061043
Control Module Vehicle

Options Error - Special
memory failure
software flash
Corrupt rear junction box software
flash
Corrupt central junction box
software flash
P0615- Starter Relay Circuit - Circuit NOTE: - Circuit STARTER_RELAY_NEG 13

open
Starter relay control circuit open
circuit
Starter relay failure
P061611
Starter Relay Circuit Low Circuit short to ground
NOTE: - Circuit STARTER_RELAY_NEG Starter relay control circuit short
circuit to ground
P0617- Starter Relay Circuit High 12

Circuit short to battery
NOTE: - Circuit STARTER_RELAY_NEG Starter relay control circuit short
circuit to power
P061AInternal Control Module

00
Torque Performance - No sub
type information
Manifold air flow sensor(s) failure

Electronic throttle unit failure

control module
circuit
Clear the DTC and re-test
control module
Re-configure the rear junction
box using the manufacturer
Re-configure the central
junction box using the
diagnostic system
diagrams and check starter
relay control circuit for open
circuit
Check and install a new starter
relay as required. Refer to the
module/component
relay control circuit for short
circuit to ground
module/component
relay control circuit for short
circuit to power
module/component
Check for related DTCs
Check manifold air flow sensors
are reading correctly
manifold air flow sensor(s) as
required
Check throttle position sensors
are reading the same position

Check throttle body is clear of
any deposits
P061A04

Torque Performance System internal failures

29
Torque Performance - Signal
invalid

Intake system air leak

Throttle position sensors are
reading incorrectly
Atmospheric pressure sensor
failure

64
Torque Performance - Signal
P061B62

Torque Calculation
Performance - Signal
compare failure


Engine breather system leak
Manifold air flow sensor failure
Throttle position sensors are
reading incorrectly

module/component
required
any deposits
module/component
Check intake air system for
leaks
Check and install a new air flow
sensor(s) as required
any deposits
required
leaks and is correctly installed
module/component
leaks
Check engine breather system
for leaks
failure
P062001
Generator Control Circuit General electrical failure
NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A Generator B+ or battery terminal
disconnected/poor connection
Charging circuit short, open circuit
Generator failure
P0627- Fuel Pump A Control Circuit /

00
Open - No sub type
information
NOTE: - Circuit
HIGH_PRESS_FUEL_PUMP_CTRL_1NEG
High pressure fuel pump 1 circuit
P062A- Fuel Pump A Control Circuit

00
type information
P063000
VIN Not Programmed or

Incompatible - ECM/PCM No sub type information
to fuel pump driver module short

resistance
Invalid fuel pump duty requested
by the engine control module
Car configuration file to CAN VIN
mismatch
New engine control module fitted
and incorrectly configured

New central junction box fitted
and incorrectly configured
P063422
PCM / ECM/ TCM Internal

Temperature Too High Signal amplitude >
maximum
temperature too high
manifold air flow sensor as

required
required
Check for good/clean contact at
generator B+ and battery
terminal connectors
circuit for short circuit, open
circuit
procedure using the
diagnostic system
If DTC remains, check and
install a new generator as
module/component
diagrams and check high
pressure fuel pump 1 circuit for
high resistance
diagrams and check the fuel

pump driver module circuit for
high resistance
control module, clear DTC and
re-test
Re-configure the central
junction box using the
diagnostic system, clear DTC
and re-test
Clear the DTC. With the ignition
off, wait 10 minutes and recheck DTC
Check the engine control
module does not have
additional external covering or
obstructions which may cause
overheating
P06344B
PCM / ECM / TCM Internal

Temperature A Too High Over temperature
P0642- Sensor Reference Voltage A

00
information
temperature too high
NOTE: - Circuit SENSOR_5V_SUPPLY Short circuit to power of a 5V
output pin, either in the harness,

or a connector
Internal short circuit in a faulty
component
00
information
NOTE: - Circuit SENSOR_5V_SUPPLY Short circuit to ground of a 5V
output pin, either in the harness,

or a connector
Internal short circuit in a faulty
component
P0657- Actuator Supply Voltage A
13
Circuit / Open - Circuit open
NOTE: Jaguar - Circuit IMTV NOTE: LR - Circuit MANIFOLD TUNING

VALVE -
Clear the DTC. With the ignition
off, wait 10 minutes and recheck DTC

Check the engine control
module does not have
additional external covering or
obstructions which may cause
overheating
diagrams and check 5V supply
ground open circuit, high
resistance, terminal damage or
corrosion
for sensor related DTCs and
diagrams and check 5V supply
open circuit, high resistance,
for sensor related DTCs and
manifold tuning solenoid circuit
for open circuit
Intake manifold tuning solenoid

11
ground
circuit, open circuit

VALVE -

for short circuit to ground

12
battery

VALVE -

for short circuit to power
P065B- Generator Control Circuit

16

NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A Generator B+ or battery terminal
disconnected/poor connection
Charging circuit short, open circuit
Generator failure
Battery failure

terminal connectors
circuit
Ensure the battery is in a fully
charged and serviceable
condition. Refer to the battery
care manual and the relevant
sections of the workshop
manual
procedure using the
P065B- Generator Control Circuit

17
NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A Charging circuit short circuit to
power
Generator failure
Battery failure
P065C00
Generator Mechanical
Performance - No sub type
information
NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A Poor front end accessory belt
tension
Generator pulley loose/failure
Generator failure

00
Temperature Sensor A Circuit
Low - No sub type
information

Temperature Sensor A Circuit
00
High - No sub type
information
P068773
ECM/PCM Power Relay

Control Circuit High Actuator stuck closed
temperature sensor failure
NOTE: - Circuit EMS_MAIN_RLY Engine control module relay

remains, check and install a
new generator as required.
terminal connectors
circuit
manual
procedure using the
remains, check and install a
new generator as required.
Check front end accessory belt
for condition/contamination and
correct tension
Check generator pulley for
failure
procedure using manufacturer
If DTC remains check and
install a new generator as
module/component
control module relay circuit for
Engine control module relay
failure
P069500
Fan 3 Control Circuit Low No sub type information
NOTE: - Circuit E_BOX_FAN E-Box cooling fan circuit short
circuit to ground
E-Box cooling fan failure
P0696- Fan 3 Control Circuit High 12

NOTE: - Circuit E_BOX_FAN E-Box cooling fan circuit short
circuit to power
P0696- Fan 3 Control Circuit High 13

Circuit open
NOTE: - Circuit E_BOX_FAN E-Box cooling fan circuit open
circuit
P0721- Output Shaft Speed Sensor

85
Circuit Range/Performance Signal above allowable range
86
P0724- Brake Switch B Circuit High 17
threshold
Transmission control module has
reported a fault in the shaft speed

signal
Transmission control module has
taken to 8 seconds or longer to
change range
circuit to power
installed/adjusted

P0850- Park / Neutral Switch Input

86
Circuit - Signal invalid
NOTE: - Circuit PN_SW Intermittent fault on Park/Neutral
signal from gear shift module

CAN network failure between gear
shift module and engine control

module
control module relay as

module/component
diagrams and check E-Box
cooling fan circuit for short
circuit to ground
Check and install a new E-Box
cooling fan as required. Refer
cooling fan circuit for short
circuit to power
cooling fan circuit for open
circuit
Check transmission control
Check transmission control
to power
module/component
Check gear shift module for
relevant DTC index
diagrams and check
Park/Neutral switch input
open circuit

8F
Circuit - Erratic
NOTE: - Circuit PN_SW Intermittent fault on Park/Neutral
signal from gear shift module

CAN network failure between gear
shift module and engine control

module

14
ground or open

12
battery
P0A1A- Generator Control Module 87
Missing message
NOTE: - Circuit PN_SW Park/Neutral switch input circuit

circuit
NOTE: - Circuit PN_SW Park/Neutral switch input circuit

NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A Generator to engine control
module LIN circuit open circuit
P0A1A- Generator Control Module 88

Bus off
NOTE: - Circuit LIN_A Generator to engine control
module LIN circuit open circuit
P0A3B- Generator Over Temperature

00
Cooling fan not operating

Coolant level low
P0A3B- Generator Over Temperature

68
- Event information

Coolant level low
P115D- Mass Air Flow Circuit Offset 00

NOTE: - Circuit MAF_SENSOR_A MAF_SENSOR_B NOTE: Customer likely to report
hesitation.
Air cleaner blocked

integrity test
Check gear shift module for
relevant DTC index
diagrams and check
open circuit
integrity test
diagrams and check
park/neutral switch input circuit
open circuit
diagrams and check

park/neutral switch input circuit
generator and engine control

module LIN circuit
connectors/pins
Check for engine control
module hardware DTCs and
Clear DTCs and repeat
procedure using the
diagnostic system
generator and engine control
module LIN circuit
connectors/pins
Check for engine control
module hardware DTCs and
Clear DTCs and repeat
procedure using the
diagnostic system
Check for correct cooling fan
operation
Check coolant level. Clear DTC
and re-test
Check for correct cooling fan
operation
Check coolant level. Clear DTC
and re-test
Air Flow Sensor 2 Voltage
(0x0503)
Check air cleaner for blockage
leaks
Air intake leak

Engine breather blocked
Air intake blockage
Carbon build up on throttle blade
Mass air flow sensor circuit, high
resistance
P131500
Persistent Misfire - No sub

type information
P1316- Injector Driver Module Codes

00
Detected - No sub type
information
P1593- Cruise Control Monitor Fault 64

P160300
EEPROM Malfunction - No
Check engine breather system
for blockages
Check for carbon build up on
throttle blade
Check for related mass air flow
DTCs P0102 or P0103
Blocked catalyst(s)

flow sensor circuit for high
resistance
Check and install a new mass
air flow sensor as required.
Check for cylinder mis-fire,
ignition and injector DTCs and
refer to the DTC index
open circuit
Check for fuel system failure
plug(s) as required
Check and install a new ignition
coil as required
Carry out cylinder compression
tests
Check exhaust system for
blockage
Check for cylinder mis-fire,
ignition and injector DTCs and
refer to the DTC index
open circuit
Check for fuel system failure
plug(s) as required
Check and install a new ignition
coil as required
tests
Check exhaust system for
blockage
check and up-date the car
configuration file as required.
Clear the DTC and retest. If the
problem persists, contact
dealer technical support
Engine control module to ignition
coil primary circuit fault (cylinder

misfire detected DTC also flagged)
Fuel injector circuit fault(s)
(injector DTCs also flagged)
Fuel delivery pressure low
Spark plug failure/fouled/incorrect
gap
Ignition coil failure
Cylinder compression low
Exhaust system blockage
Engine control module to ignition
coil primary circuit fault (cylinder

misfire detected DTC also flagged)
Fuel injector circuit fault(s)
Spark plug failure/fouled/incorrect
gap
Ignition coil failure
Speed control monitor fault. The
engine control module performs a

independent check of the cruise
status
software flash
supply fault
P2088- A Camshaft Position Actuator

11
Control Circuit Low Bank 1 Circuit short to ground
12
Control Circuit High Bank 1 Circuit short to battery
P2090- B Camshaft Position Actuator
11
12
11
12
11
12
P209600
Post Catalyst Fuel Trim

System Too Lean Bank 1 No sub type information
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A Intake valve solenoid 1 short
circuit to ground
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_A Intake valve solenoid 1 short
circuit to power
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A Exhaust valve solenoid 1 short
circuit to ground
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_A Exhaust valve solenoid 1 short
circuit to power
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B Intake valve solenoid 2 short
circuit to ground
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_IN_B Intake valve solenoid 2 short
circuit to power
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B Exhaust valve solenoid 2 short
circuit to ground
NOTE: - Circuit VFS_EX_B Exhaust valve solenoid 2 short
circuit to power
NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_A Post catalyst oxygen sensor odd,

circuit
exhaust manifold
Air leak between the two oxygen
sensors
Post catalyst oxygen sensor odd,
failure
P2097Post Catalyst Fuel Trim

00
System Too Rich Bank 1 - No
NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_A -

control module
valve solenoid 1 for short
circuit to ground

circuit to power

circuit to ground

circuit to power

circuit to ground

circuit to power

circuit to ground

circuit to power

open circuit
Check for air leak between the
two oxygen sensors
catalyst oxygen sensor odd, as
module/component

circuit
exhaust manifold
sensors
failure
P209800

System Too Lean Bank 2 No sub type information
NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_B Post catalyst oxygen sensor even,

circuit
exhaust manifold
sensors
Post catalyst oxygen sensor even,
failure
P2099Post Catalyst Fuel Trim

00
System Too Rich Bank 2 - No
NOTE: - Circuit HEGO_SENSOR_B Post catalyst oxygen sensor even,

circuit
exhaust manifold
sensors
Post catalyst oxygen sensor even,
failure
P210500
P211819
Throttle Actuator Control

System - Forced Engine
Shutdown - No sub type
information
Throttle Actuator Control

Motor Current
current above threshold
NOTE: - Circuit THROTTLE_MOTOR_NEG THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS Engine speed or torque limitation
has been activated as a result of

engine control module, throttle
pedal position sensor, or torque
faults
NOTE: - Circuit THROTTLE_MOTOR_NEG THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS Throttle motor control circuit short

power, high resistance
circuit fault

open circuit
two oxygen sensors
catalyst oxygen sensor odd, as
module/component
catalyst oxygen sensor even,
open circuit
two oxygen sensors
module/component
open circuit
two oxygen sensors
module/component
Check for any DTCs relating to
engine control module, throttle
pedal position sensor, or torque
faults and refer to the DTC
index
diagrams and check electronic

throttle unit circuit for short
to power, high resistance
control module ground circuit
for faults
clean of carbon
Check the system is operating
P211900
Throttle Actuator Control NOTE: - Circuit THROTTLE_MOTOR_NEG Throttle Body

THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS Range/Performance - No sub
type information
circuit fault
Electronic throttle unit return
spring faulty
Electronic throttle unit limp home
spring faulty
P211929

THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS Range/Performance - Signal
invalid
Stuck / sticking throttle blade
P211964

THROTTLE_MOTOR_POS Range/Performance - Signal
Stuck / sticking throttle blade
00
Sensor/Switch D Circuit Low
NOTE: - Circuit
THROTTLE_POSITION_SENSOR_1 Accelerator pedal position sensor

open circuit
Accelerator pedal position sensor
1, VREF circuit open circuit
1 failure
correctly and the DTC does not

return
module/component
clean of carbon
control module ground circuit
for faults
return
module/component
Ensure throttle blade is free of
any carbon build-up / other
obstructions
return
module/component
Ensure throttle blade is free of
any carbon build-up / other
obstructions
return
module/component
diagrams and check accelerator
pedal unit, accelerator pedal
circuit
Check accelerator pedal unit,
VREF circuit for open circuit
procedure using the
diagnostic system
install a new accelerator pedal
00
Sensor/Switch D Circuit High
NOTE: - Circuit
1 circuit short circuit to power


1 failure
00
Sensor/Switch E Circuit Low
NOTE: - Circuit

open circuit
2 failure
00
Sensor/Switch E Circuit High
NOTE: - Circuit
2 circuit short circuit to power


2 failure
00
Sensor/Switch A / B Voltage
Throttle pedal position sensor
circuit 1 and 2 short circuit to

unit as required. Refer to the

module/component
procedure using the
diagnostic system
module/component
circuit
procedure using the
diagnostic system
module/component
procedure using the
diagnostic system
module/component
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check throttle pedal position
sensor circuit 1 and 2 for short circuit
information
09
Sensor/Switch A / B Voltage
Correlation - Component
Failures
64
Sensor/Switch D / E Voltage
information
P2169- Exhaust Pressure Regulator
13
Vent Solenoid Control

11
Vent Solenoid Control Circuit

12
Vent Solenoid Control Circuit
high - Circuit short to battery
open circuit
to ground, short circuit to power, open

circuit
Throttle pedal position sensor
and check throttle pedal position
open circuit
circuit
Accelerator pedal position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check accelerator pedal position
open circuit
circuit
ACTIVE_EXT_VALVE diagrams and check active
exhaust solenoid valve circuit
for open circuit
Active exhaust solenoid valve
circuit open circuit
ACTIVE_EXT_VALVE diagrams and check active
Active exhaust solenoid valve
ACTIVE_EXT_VALVE Active exhaust solenoid valve
P2183- Engine Coolant Temperature

23
Sensor 2 Circuit
stuck low

NOTE: - Circuit
COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR_2 Engine coolant temperature
sensor 2 circuit high resistance,

open circuit
sensor 2 failure

24
Sensor 2 Circuit
stuck high
NOTE: - Circuit

power
sensor 2 failure

29
Sensor 2 Circuit
invalid
NOTE: - Circuit

open circuit, short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power
sensor 2 failure

16
Sensor 2 Circuit Low - Circuit
NOTE: - Circuit
COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR_2 -
diagrams and check active


circuit for high resistance, open
circuit
module/component
module/component
module/component

open circuit, short circuit to
ground
sensor 2 failure

Sensor 2 Circuit High 17
threshold
NOTE: - Circuit
COOLANT_TEMP_SENSOR_2 Ignition turned on with an
ambient temperature of below 40c

power
sensor 2 failure
P219A00
Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio

Imbalance - No sub type
information
NOTE: Post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd &

Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
Other oxygen sensor related DTCs
Air leak in the exhaust system
between post catalyst oxygen

sensor-odd and catalyst
between catalyst and exhaust
manifold flange
between pre catalyst oxygen
sensor-odd and post catalyst
oxygen sensor-odd
Air leak around pre catalyst
oxygen sensor-odd
Air leaks within the intake system
Air leak around fuel injector(s)
bank 1
Air leak around spark plug(s)
bank 1
Low fuel pressure, fuel injector(s)
leak, fuel system leak bank 1
sticking
Airpath blockage between throttle
butterfly and inlet poppet valve
failure
Cylinder head gasket failure

module/component
module/component
check the engine control
module for oxygen sensor
relevant DTC index. Record any
available freeze frame data
Check for air leaks in the
exhaust system between post
catalyst oxygen sensor-odd and
catalyst
exhaust system between
flange
exhaust system between pre
catalyst oxygen sensor-odd and
post catalyst oxygen sensorodd
Check for air leaks around pre
intake system
Check for air leak around fuel
injector(s) bank 1
Check for air leak around spark
plug(s) bank 1
Check for low fuel pressure,
fuel injector(s) leak, fuel
system leak bank 1
Check for camshaft position
actuator sticking
Check for airpath blockage
between throttle butterfly and
inlet poppet valve
check. Record the results
Check and install a post
module/component
clear DTC and retest

P219B00
Bank 2 Air-Fuel Ratio

Imbalance - No sub type
information
NOTE: Post catalyst oxygen sensor-even

& Pre catalyst oxygen sensor-even
Other oxygen sensor related DTCs
between post catalyst oxygen

sensor-even and catalyst
between catalyst and exhaust
manifold flange
between pre catalyst oxygen
sensor-even and post catalyst
oxygen sensor-even
Air leak around pre catalyst
oxygen sensor-even
Air leaks within the intake system
Air leak around fuel injector(s)
bank 2
Air leak around spark plug(s)
bank 2
Low fuel pressure, fuel injector(s)
leak, fuel system leak bank 2
sticking
Airpath blockage between throttle
butterfly and inlet poppet valve
failure
Cylinder head gasket failure
P2228- Barometric Pressure Circuit

00
Low - No sub type
information
Barometric pressure sensor failure
P2229- Barometric Pressure Circuit

00
Low - No sub type
information
Barometric pressure sensor failure
(internal engine control module

failure)
(internal engine control module

failure)

check the engine control
module for oxygen sensor
relevant DTC index. Record any
available freeze frame data
exhaust system between post
and catalyst
exhaust system between
flange
exhaust system between pre
and post catalyst oxygen
sensor-even
Check for air leaks around pre
intake system
Check for air leak around fuel
injector(s) bank 2
Check for air leak around spark
plug(s) bank 2
Check for low fuel pressure,
fuel injector(s) leak, fuel
system leak bank 2
Check for camshaft position
actuator sticking
Check for airpath blockage
between throttle butterfly and
inlet poppet valve
check. Record the results
Check and install a post
catalyst oxygen sensor-even as
module/component
clear DTC and retest
Voltage (0x035A)
Voltage (0x035A)
P2279- Intake Air System Leak - No

00
Part load breather pipe
disconnected
Brake vacuum pipe disconnected
Excessive intake air leak
P2300Ignition Coil A Primary

11
Control Circuit Low - Circuit
short to ground
P2301Ignition Coil A Primary
12
Control Circuit High - Circuit
short to battery
P2303Ignition Coil B Primary
11
short to ground
P2304Ignition Coil B Primary
12
short to battery
P2306Ignition Coil C Primary
11
short to ground
P2307Ignition Coil C Primary
12
short to battery
P2309Ignition Coil D Primary
11
short to ground
P2310Ignition Coil D Primary
12
short to battery
P2312Ignition Coil E Primary
11
short to ground
P2313Ignition Coil E Primary
12
short to battery
P2315Ignition Coil F Primary
11
short to ground
P2316Ignition Coil F Primary
12
short to battery
P2318Ignition Coil G Primary
11
short to ground
P2319Ignition Coil G Primary
12
short to battery
NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1A Ignition coil 1 circuit short circuit
to ground
to power
NOTE: - Circuit IGNITION_1B Ignition coil 2 circuit short circuit
to ground
to power
to ground
to power
to ground
to power
to ground
to power
to ground
to power
to ground
to power
Check part load breather pipe
for leaks or disconnected
Check brake vacuum pipe for
leaks or disconnected
leaks
coil 1 circuit for short circuit to
ground

power

ground

power

ground

power

ground

power

ground

power

ground

power

ground

power
P2321Ignition Coil H Primary

11
short to ground
P2322Ignition Coil H Primary
12
short to battery
00
Leak Detection Pump Control
information
to ground
to power
NOTE: - Circuit FUEL_LEAK_PUMP Diagnostic module tank leakage
fuse failure

open circuit
failure

00
Leak Detection Pump Control
information
NOTE: - Circuit FUEL_LEAK_PUMP Diagnostic module tank leakage

failure

29
Leak Detection Pump Sense
NOTE: - Circuit FUEL_LEAK_PUMP -

2F
Circuit Range/Performance Signal erratic

00
information

00
failure
failure

failure

ground

power
Check diagnostic module tank
leakage fuse for failure and

security in holder
module tank leakage circuit for
circuit
module/component
module/component
module/component
module/component
short circuit to ground, high
resistance, open circuit
module/component
Check for blockage in the
Blockage in diagnostic module
tank leakage ventilation pipe
information
Blockage in diagnostic module
tank leakage ventilation pipe

P240A- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit PUMP_HEATER_CONTROL

00
Leak Detection Pump Heater
Circuit / Open - No sub type
information
P240B- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit PUMP_HEATER_CONTROL
00
information
heater circuit short circuit to
ground, high resistance
P240C- Evaporative Emission System NOTE: - Circuit PUMP_HEATER_CONTROL
00
information
heater circuit short circuit to
power
P2450- Evaporative Emission Control
NOTE: - Circuit COV 00
System Switching Valve
Performance/Stuck Open - NOTE: LR - Circuit CHANGE OVER VALVE
failure
P2451- Evaporative Emission Control
NOTE: - Circuit COV 00
System Switching Valve
Performance/Stuck Closed NOTE: LR - Circuit CHANGE OVER VALVE
failure
P250CEngine Oil Level Sensor
Circuit Low - Signal stuck low
Oil temperature level sensor

failure
P250D24
Engine Oil Level Sensor

Circuit High - Signal stuck
high
NOTE: - Circuit OIL_QUALITY_SENSOR Oil temperature level sensor

failure

module/component
module tank leakage heater



module/component
module/component
(0x03F3)
temperature level sensor circuit
Check and install a new oil
temperature level sensor as
module/component
(0x03F3)
temperature level sensor circuit
Check and install a new oil
P2544- Torque Management Request

64
Input Signal A - Signal
Inappropriate request from anti-
P2544- Torque Management Request

92
Input Signal A - Performance
or incorrect operation
Inappropriate request from anti-
P2600Coolant Pump A Control

13
lock braking system
lock braking system
NOTE: XF - Circuit
IC_COOLANT_PMP_CTRL - XK - Circuit
INT_WATERPUMP_RLY -
temperature level sensor as

module/component
Check for related DTCs within
anti-lock braking system
module and refer to the
relevant DTC index
integrity test
Check for related DTCs within
module and refer to the
relevant DTC index
integrity test
pump A control circuit for open
circuit
Coolant pump A control circuit
P2601- Coolant Pump Control Circuit

00
type information
open circuit
NOTE: XF - Circuit
INT_WATERPUMP_RLY -
Check coolant level and top up
as required
Check the cooling system for
blockages or trapped hoses

Coolant level low
Blocked cooling system
open circuit
Coolant pump A failure

11
ground
NOTE: XF - Circuit
INT_WATERPUMP_RLY -

pump A control circuit for open
circuit
Check and install a new coolant
pump A as required. Refer to
pump A control circuit for short
circuit to ground

12
battery

NOTE: XF - Circuit
INT_WATERPUMP_RLY -

pump A control circuit for short
circuit to power

P2610- ECM/PCM Internal Engine Off
Timer Performance - No sub
00
type information

Central junction box fault
CAN network error
P2610- ECM/PCM Engine Off Timer

84
Performance - Signal below
allowable range

sensor fault
Ambient temperature sensor fault
Low battery voltage
CAN network error
Check for DTCs related to any
of the components listed and

integrity test
coolant temperature sensor
P2610- ECM/PCM Engine Off Timer

85
Performance - Signal above
allowable range

sensor fault
Low battery voltage
CAN network error
P2610- ECM/PCM Internal Engine Off

87
Timer Performance - Missing
message

sensor fault
CAN network error
U0001High Speed CAN

88
Communication Bus - Bus off
NOTE: - Circuit HS_CAN_NEG HS_CAN_POS High speed CAN bus circuit, short
circuit to ground
High speed CAN bus circuit, short
circuit to power
High speed CAN bus, open circuit
U010100
Lost Communication with

TCM - No sub type
information

open circuit
circuit
Check the battery voltage,
repair as required
integrity test
open circuit
circuit
Check the battery voltage,
repair as required
integrity test
of the components listed, and
open circuit
circuit
integrity test
diagrams and check CAN
network for short circuit to
open circuit
carry out network integrity test
CAN link engine control
module/transmission control
module network malfunction
Transmission control module
failure

check transmission control
integrity test
diagrams and check
transmission control module
U0103- Lost Communication with

00
Gear Shift Control Module A No sub type information
CAN link engine control

module/gear shift module network
malfunction

00
Cruise Control Module - No
Vehicle configured for speed
U012100

Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) Control Module - No

00
Park Brake Control Module No sub type information
control, but speed control module

is not installed
CAN Link engine control
module/speed control module
network malfunction
Speed control module power or
ground circuit, open circuit

module/anti-lock braking system
power or ground circuit, open
circuit

module/electronic parking brake
signal missing network
malfunction

00
Suspension Control Module A
CAN link/suspension control

00
Restraints Control Module No sub type information
Lost communication with
U0151-
restraints control module over

CAN or hardwired link
Lost communication due to
power and ground circuit for

open circuit
Check CAN harness to
transmission control module,
repair as necessary
diagrams and check power and
ground connections to the gear
shift module
integrity test
Check vehicle has correct
speed control module installed
check speed control module,
integrity test
diagrams and check speed
control module power and
ground circuit for open circuit
Check CAN harness to speed
control module, repair as
necessary
check anti-lock braking system
integrity test
braking system module power
and ground circuit for open
circuit
Check CAN harness to anti-lock
braking system module, repair
as necessary
ground supplies to electronic
parking brake
integrity test
ground supplies to suspension
control module
integrity test
ground supplies to restraints
control module
integrity test
Check restraints control module
87
Restraints Control Module Missing message
U015500

(IPC) - No sub type
information
restraints control module fault
CAN link between engine control
module and instrument cluster

fault

00
Vehicle Immobilizer Control
Module - No sub type
information
Security challenge response
U0300Internal Control Module

00
Software Incompatibility - No
Engine control module has
timeout
Battery fault
incorrect software installed

The engine control module is in
expulsion mode. An incorrect

specification engine control
module has been installed to the
vehicle

00
Transmission engine control
U0402- Invalid Data Received from

08
TCM - Bus signal / message
failures
Transmission engine control
module request corruption

High speed CAN bus circuit failure,
short, open circuit

64
TCM - Signal plausibility
Transmission to engine control
for associated DTCs and refer

to relevant DTC index
ground supplies to restraints
control module
integrity test
ground supplies to instrument
cluster
integrity test
ground supplies to the electric
steering column lock
Check for related CAN DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC
index
manual
integrity test
Check and install the correct
engine control module software
Check and install the correct
engine control module as
module/component
module, for DTCs and refer to
integrity test
diagrams and check high speed
CAN bus circuit for short circuit,
open circuit
integrity test
open circuit
failure
High speed CAN bus signal
corruption

82
TCM - Alive / sequence
counter incorrect / not
updated

83
TCM - Value of signal
protection calculation
incorrect

00
(ABS) Control Module - No
Electronic throttle unit, throttle
shaft-speed faults
shaft-speed faults
position sensor 1 failure

Electronic throttle unit, throttle
position sensor 2 failure

Electronic throttle unit harness
short, open circuit

64
(ABS) Control Module Signal plausibility failure
Invalid request from anti-lock
braking system
Torque up request higher than
expected from anti-lock braking

system

67
(ABS) Control Module Signal incorrect after event
Torque up request higher than

00
Vehicle Immobilizer Control
information
Security code mis-match

This DTC will be logged if the

81
Gateway "A" - Invalid serial
data received
expected from anti-lock braking

system
encrypted data exchange does not

match between engine control
module and the instrument cluster
or central junction box
The LIN to high speed CAN

gateway has informed the engine
control module of a failure

integrity test
open circuit
check for electronic throttle
unit DTCs repair as necessary
diagrams and check electronic
unit harness for short circuit,
open circuit
check anti-lock braking system,
for DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
open circuit
check anti-lock braking system,
for DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
open circuit
Check CAN network between
engine control module,
instrument cluster and central
junction box
ground circuit to engine control
Check correct engine control
installed
Re-synchronise ID by reconfiguring the engine control
as new modules
This DTC has been inhibited in
the engine control module, as
the LIN bus flag is set during
normal operation
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Powertrain Control

Module (PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures
WARNING: Where possible, all road tests should be on well surfaced and dry roads. Always comply with speed
limits and local traffic regulations.
NOTE: This procedure is an overcheck only. If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant system must be
carried out and claimed against.
NOTE: The vehicle must exceed 50mph (80 km/h) during the road test.
1.
Connect the diagnostic equipment to the vehicle.
2.
Follow on screen prompts and check for engine management

fault codes.
3.
Clear the fault codes following the on screen procedure.
4.
Disconnect the diagnostic equipment from the vehicle.
5.
NOTE: Make sure cruise control is not engaged.

Make sure the engine temperature is above 60 C (140 F).
Carry out a road test and perform the following operations.
1. Accelerate to 55 mph (88 km/h) in 5th gear and cruise
for 2 minutes with the engine speed at or above
1800rpm.
2. Lift off the throttle and allow the vehicle to decelerate
until the engine speed is less than 1000 rpm.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Release brake, allow the vehicle to move with no throttle
for 1 minute.
5. Road test is now complete.
6.
7.
NOTE: If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant

system must be carried out and claimed against.
fault codes.
8.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Powertrain Control

Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures
1.
2.

fault codes.
3.
4.
Start the engine.

minutes until a temperature of 70C (158 F) is
achieved.
5.

fault codes.
6.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft Position

(CMP) Sensor LH
Removal
All vehicles
1.


2.

and Installation).

3.

Installation).
All vehicles
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of
foreign material.
Make sure that the sensor tip is clean and free of foreign
material.
NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft Position

(CMP) Sensor RH
Removal
All vehicles
1.


2.

and Installation).

3.

Installation).
All vehicles
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
material.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Catalyst Monitor

Sensor LH
Removal
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
4.
5.

6.
7.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
If accidentally dropped or knocked install a new sensor.
Make sure the catalyst monitor sensor wiring harness is

not twisted more than 180 degrees and is not in contact with
either the exhaust or driveshaft.
Make sure the anti-seize compound does not contact the

catalyst monitor sensor tip.
NOTE: If the original sensor is to be installed, apply lubricant
meeting specification ESE-M12A4-A to the thread of the sensor.
2.
NOTE: For NAS vehicles only.
If required, carry out a long drive cycle.

Refer to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Long Drive Cycle
Self-Test (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol,
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Catalyst Monitor

Sensor RH
Removal
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
4.
5.
6.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:


2.

Self-Test (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Position

(CKP) Sensor
Removal
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.

dismantling.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
Make sure that the component is clean, free of foreign

material and lubricant.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Control Module

(ECM)
Removal
1.

2.
3.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
Torque: 6 Nm
6.
7.
8.
Torque: 7 Nm
Torque: 9 Nm
Installation
1.
2.
Configure the engine control module (ECM) using the diagnostic

tool.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Coolant

Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Removal
1.

2.
3.

Procedures).
4.
Lift the tang and rotate the engine coolant
temperature (ECT) sensor counterclockwise.
Installation
1.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Front Knock Sensor

(KS) LH
Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
1.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Front Knock Sensor

(KS) RH
Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
1.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail Pressure

(FRP) Sensor
Removal
1.

Procedures).
2.
3.
WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping

fluids.
4.

fluids.

Torque: 32 Nm
Installation
1.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Level

Sensor
Removal
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.
Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01D, General

Procedures).
4.

fluids.
Torque: 11 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be installed.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Heated Oxygen Sensor

(HO2S) LH
Special Tool(s)
310-121
Wrench, H02S
Removal
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
4.

5.
6.
7.
8.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:

HO2S tip.
Make sure the HO2S wiring harness is not twisted more

than 180 degrees and is not in contact with either the exhaust
or driveshaft.
2.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Heated Oxygen Sensor

(HO2S) RH
Special Tool(s)
310-121
Wrench, H02S
Removal
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
4.

5.
6.
7.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:

HO2S tip.

or driveshaft.
2.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Manifold Absolute

Pressure and Temperature (MAPT) Sensor
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.
Torque: 5 Nm
Installation
1.
2.

If required, carry out a short drive cycle.
Refer to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Mass Air Flow (MAF)
Sensor
Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Air Cleaner RH (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and

3.
Installation
1.
2.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Rear Knock Sensor

(KS) LH
Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
1.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Rear Knock Sensor

(KS) RH
Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
1.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Variable Valve Timing

(VVT) Oil Control Solenoid LH
Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.


3.

and Installation).

4.

Installation).
All vehicles
5.
6.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
2.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Variable Valve Timing

(VVT) Oil Control Solenoid RH
Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.


3.

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).

4.

Installation).
All vehicles
5.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
2.

Refer to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle SelfTest (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol Torque Specifications
Description
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor(s) retaining bolt
Heated oxygen sensor (H02S)
Catalyst monitor sensor
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor retaining bolt
Knock sensor(s) (KS) retaining bolt
Fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor
Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature (MAPT) Sensor
Engine Oil Level Sensor retaining bolts
Variable Valve Timing (VVT) Oil Control Solenoid(s) retaining bolts
Engine Control Module (ECM) retaining bolts
Fuse box retaining screws
Engine wiring harness connector bolt
Engine wiring harness retaining bracket bolts
ECM retaining bracket bolts
Nm
10
48
48
10
20
32
5
11
10
7
4
3
6
7
lb-ft
7
35
35
7
15
24
8
7
-
lb-in
44
62
35
27
53
62
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Electronic Engine Controls

Item
Part Number
Description
MAFT (mass air flow and temperature) sensor
CMP (camshaft position) sensors
Knock sensors
CKP (crankshaft position) sensor
CMP sensors
MAFT sensor
ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor (ECT 2)
Electronic throttle
Item
Part Number
Description
ECT sensor (ECT 1)
Upstream HO2S (heated oxygen sensor)
Downstream HO2S
Downstream HO2S
Upstream HO2S
Item
Part Number
Description
AAT (ambient air temperature) sensor
INTRODUCTION
The EEC (electronic engine control) system operates the engine to generate the output demanded by the accelerator pedal
and loads imposed by other systems. The EEC system has an ECM (engine control module) that uses a torque-based
strategy to evaluate inputs from sensors and other systems, then produces outputs to engine actuators to produce the
required torque.
The EEC system controls the following:
Charge air
Fueling
Ignition timing
Valve timing
Cylinder knock
Idle speed
Engine cooling fan
On-board diagnostics
Immobilization system interface
Speed control.
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
The ECM is installed behind the suspension turret on the LH (left-hand) side of the engine compartment, on a bracket
attached to the longitudinal and the wheel arch apron panel.
The ECM has the capability of adapting its fuel and ignition control outputs in response to several sensor inputs.
The ECM receives inputs from the following:
CKP (crankshaft position) sensor.

CMP (camshaft position) sensors (4 off).
ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensors (2 off).
Knock sensors (4 off).
MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor.
MAFT (mass air flow and temperature) sensors (2 off).
Throttle position sensor.
Heated oxygen sensors (4 off).
APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor.
Ambient air temperature sensor.
FRP (fuel rail pressure) sensor. For additional information, refer to 303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls.
Stoplamp switch. For additional information, refer to 206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist.
Speed control cancel/suspend switch. For additional information, refer to 310-03 Speed Control.
Oil level and temperature sensor. For additional information, refer to 303-01B Engine.
Fuel LP (low pressure) sensor. For additional information, refer to 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines.
The ECM provides outputs to the following:
Main relay.
Heaters elements of the heated oxygen sensors (4 off).
Fuel injectors (8 off). For additional information, refer to 303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls.
Ignition coils (8 off). For additional information, refer to 303-07 Engine Ignition.
VCT (variable camshaft timing) solenoids (4 off). For additional information, refer to 303-01B Engine.
Camshaft profile switching solenoids (2 off). For additional information, refer to 303-01B Engine.
Variable intake system tuning valve. For additional information, refer to 303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering.
EVAP (evaporative emission) canister purge valve. For additional information, refer to 303-13 Evaporative Emissions.
Engine starter relay. For additional information, refer to 303-06 Starting System.
Generator. For additional information, refer to 414-02 Generator and Regulator.
HP fuel pumps. For additional information, refer to 303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls.
DMTL (diagnostic module - tank leakage). For additional information, refer to 303-13 Evaporative Emissions.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
The CKP sensor is an inductive sensor that allows the ECM to determine the angular position of the crankshaft and the
engine speed.
The CKP sensor is installed in the rear left side of the sump body, in line with the engine drive plate. The sensor is secured
with a single screw and sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The head of the CKP sensor faces a reluctor ring pressed into the outer circumference of the engine drive plate. The reluctor
ring has a 60 minus 2 tooth pattern. There are 58 teeth at 6 intervals, with two teeth removed to provide a reference point
with a centerline that is 21 BTDC (before top dead center) on cylinder 1 of bank A.
If the CKP sensor fails, the ECM:
Uses signals from the CMP sensors to determine the angular position of the crankshaft and the engine speed
Adopts a limp home mode where engine speed is limited to a maximum of 3000 rev/min.
With a failed CKP sensor, engine starts will require a long crank time while the ECM determines the angular position of the
crankshaft.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSORS
The CMP sensors are MRE (magneto resistive element) sensors that allow the ECM to determine the angular position of the
camshafts. MRE sensors produce a digital output which allows the ECM to detect speeds down to zero.
The four CMP sensors are installed in the front upper timing covers, one for each camshaft.
Each CMP sensor is secured with a single screw and sealed with an O-ring. On each CMP sensor, a three pin electrical
connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The head of each CMP sensor faces a sensor wheel attached to the front of the related VCT unit.
If a CMP sensor fails, the ECM:
Defaults to base mapping for the ignition timing, with no cylinder correction
Disables the VCT system.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSORS
The ECT sensors are NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistors that allow the ECM to monitor the engine coolant
temperature.
There are two identical ECT sensors installed, which are identified as ECT 1 and ECT 2. Each sensor is secured with a twistlock and latch mechanism, and is sealed with an O-ring. A two pin electrical connector provides the interface between the
sensor and the engine harness.
ECT 1
ECT 1 is installed in the heater manifold, at the rear of the RH (right-hand) cylinder head. The input from this sensor is used
in calibration tables and by other systems.
ECT 2
ECT 2 is installed in the lower hose connector which attaches to the bottom of the thermostat. The input from this sensor is
used for OBD (on-board diagnostic) 2 diagnostics and, in conjunction with the input from ECT 1, to confirm that the
thermostat is functional.
KNOCK SENSORS
The knock sensors are piezo-ceramic sensors that allow the ECM to employ active knock control and prevent engine damage
from pre-ignition or detonation.
Two knock sensors are installed on the inboard side of each cylinder head, one mid-way between cylinders 1 and 2, and one
mid-way between cylinders 3 and 4. Each knock sensor is secured with a single screw. On each knock sensor, a two pin
electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
The ECM compares the signals from the knock sensors with mapped values stored in memory to determine when detonation
occurs on individual cylinders. When detonation is detected, the ECM retards the ignition timing on that cylinder for a
number of engine cycles, then gradually returns it to the original setting.
The ECM cancels closed loop control of the ignition system if the signal received from a knock sensor becomes implausible.
In these circumstances the ECM defaults to base mapping for the ignition timing. This ensures the engine will not become
damaged if low quality fuel is used. The MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) will not illuminate, although the driver may notice
that the engine 'pinks' in some driving conditions and displays a drop in performance and smoothness.
The ECM calculates the default value if one sensor fails on each bank of cylinders
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
The MAP sensor allows the ECM to calculate the load on the engine, which is used in the calculation of fuel injection time.
The MAP sensor is installed in the air inlet of the intake manifold. The sensor is secured with a single screw and sealed with
an O-ring. A three pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
If the MAP sensor fails, the ECM adopts a default value of 1 bar (14.5 lbf/in.2).
With a failed MAP sensor, the engine will suffer from poor starting, rough running and poor driveability.
MASS AIR FLOW AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS
The MAFT sensors allow the ECM to measure the mass and the temperature of the air flow into the engine. The mass air flow
is measured with a hot film element in the sensor. The temperature of the air flow is measured with a NTC thermistor in the
sensor. The mass air flow is used to determine the fuel quantity to be injected in order to maintain the stoichiometric air/fuel
mixture required for correct operation of the engine and the catalytic converters.
There are two MAFT sensors installed, one in each air cleaner outlet duct. Each MAFT sensor is secured with two screws and
sealed with an O-ring. On each MAFT sensor, a five pin electrical connector provides the interface with the engine harness.
If the hot film element signal fails the ECM invokes a software backup strategy to calculate the mass air flow from other
inputs. Closed loop fuel control, closed loop idle speed control and evaporative emissions control are discontinued. The
engine will suffer from poor starting, poor throttle response and, if the failure occurs while driving, the engine speed may dip
before recovering.
If the NTC thermistor signal fails the ECM adopts a default value of 25 C (77 F) for the intake air temperature.
www.JagDocs.com
THROTTLE POSITION SENSORS

The TP (throttle position) sensors allow the ECM to determine the position and angular rate of change of the throttle blade.
There are two TP sensors located in the electronic throttle. See below for details of the electronic throttle.
If aTP sensor fails, the ECM:
Adopts a limp home mode where engine speed is limited to a maximum of approximately 2000 rev/min
Discontinues evaporative emissions control
Discontinues closed loop control of engine idle speed.
With a failed TP sensor, the engine will suffer from poor running and throttle response.
HEATED OXYGEN SENSORS
Item
Part Number
Description
Upstream heated oxygen sensor
Downstream heated oxygen sensor
The heated oxygen sensors allow the ECM to measure the oxygen content of the exhaust gases, for closed loop control of the
fuel:air mixture and for catalytic converter monitoring.
An upstream heated oxygen sensor is installed in the outlet of each exhaust manifold, which enables independent control of
the fuel:air mixture for each cylinder bank. A downstream heated oxygen sensor is installed in each catalytic converter,
which enables the performance of the catalytic converters to be monitored.
Oxygen sensors need to operate at high temperatures in order to function correctly. To achieve the high temperatures
required, the sensors are fitted with heater elements that are controlled by a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the
ECM. The heater elements are operated immediately after each engine start and during low load conditions when the
temperature of the exhaust gases is insufficient to maintain the required sensor temperature. The PWM duty cycle is
carefully controlled to prevent thermal shock to cold sensors. A non-functioning heater delays the sensors readiness for
closed loop control and increases emissions.
The upstream heated oxygen sensors produce a constant voltage, with a variable current that is proportional to the lambda
ratio. The downstream heated oxygen sensors produce an output voltage dependant on the ratio of the exhaust gas oxygen
to the ambient oxygen.
The heated oxygen sensors age with mileage, increasing their response time to switch from rich to lean and lean to rich. This
increase in response time influences the ECM closed loop control and leads to progressively increased emissions. Measuring
the period of rich to lean and lean to rich switching monitors the response rate of the upstream sensors.
Diagnosis of electrical faults is continually monitored in both the upstream and downstream sensors. This is achieved by
checking the signal against maximum and minimum threshold, for open and short circuit conditions.
If a heated oxygen sensor fails:
The ECM defaults to open loop fueling for the related cylinder bank
The CO (carbon monoxide) and emissions content of the exhaust gases increases
The exhaust smells of rotten eggs (hydrogen sulphide).
With a failed heated oxygen sensor, the engine will suffer from unstable operation and reduced performance.
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
The APP sensor allows the ECM to determine the driver requests for vehicle speed, acceleration and deceleration. The ECM
uses this information to determine the setting of the electronic throttle.
The APP sensor is installed on the pedal box and secured with three screws. A six pin electrical connector provides the
interface with the vehicle harness. The accelerator pedal is connected to a spindle on the RH side of the APP sensor.
The APP sensor is a twin track potentiometer. Each track receives an independent power supply from the ECM and returns an
independent analog signal to the ECM. Both signals contain the same positional information, but the signal from track 2 is
half the voltage of the signal from track 1 at all positions.
If both signals have a fault, the ECM adopts a limp home mode, which limits the engine speed to 2000 rev/min maximum.
The ECM constantly checks the range and plausibility of the two signals and stores a fault code if it detects a fault.
The AAT (ambient air temperature) sensor is a NTC thermistor that allows the ECM to monitor the temperature of the air
around the vehicle. The ECM uses the AAT input for a number of functions, including engine cooling fan control. The ECM
also transmits the ambient temperature on the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus for use by other control
modules.
The AAT sensor is installed in the LH exterior mirror, with the bulb of the sensor positioned over a hole in the bottom of the
mirror casing.
The ECM supplies the sensor with a 5 V reference voltage and a ground, and translates the return signal voltage into a
temperature.
If there is a fault with the AAT sensor, the ECM calculates the AAT from the temperature inputs of the MAFT sensors. If the
AAT sensor and the temperature inputs of the MAFT sensors are all faulty, the ECM adopts a default ambient temperature of
20 C (68 F).
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
The ECM uses the electronic throttle to regulate engine torque.

The electronic throttle is installed between the T piece duct, of the intake air distribution and filtering system, and the inlet of
the SC (supercharger). For additional information, refer to 303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering.
The throttle plate is operated by an electric DC (direct current) motor integrated into the throttle body. The ECM uses a PWM
signal to control the DC motor. The ECM compares the APP sensor inputs against an electronic map to determine the
required position of the throttle plate. The ECM and electronic throttle are also required to:
Monitor requests for cruise control operation

Automatically operate the electronic throttle for accurate cruise control
Perform all dynamic stability control engine interventions
Monitor and carry out maximum engine speed and road speed cut outs
Provide different engine maps for the ride and handling optimization system.
A software strategy within the ECM calibrates the position of the throttle plate at the beginning of each ignition cycle. When
the ignition is turned on, the ECM performs a self test and calibration routine by fully closing the throttle plate and then
opening it again. This tests the default position springs and allows the ECM to learn the position of the closed hard stop.
Subsequently the ECM keeps the throttle plate a minimum of 0.5 degree from the closed hard stop.
MAIN RELAY
The main relay is used to initiate the power up and power down routines within the ECM. The main relay is installed in the
PDB (power distribution box).
When the ignition is turned on, battery voltage is applied to the ignition sense input. The ECM then starts its power up
routines and energizes the main relay.
When the ignition is turned off, the ECM maintains its powered up state while it conducts the power down routines (up to 20
minutes in extreme cases, when cooling fans are required) and on completion will turn off the main relay.
ECM Adaptions
The ECM has the ability to adapt the input values it uses to control certain outputs. This capability maintains engine
refinement and ensures the engine emissions remain within the legislated limits. The components which have adaptions
associated with them are:
The APP sensor

The heated oxygen sensors
The MAFT sensors
The CKP sensor
Oxygen and MAFT Sensors

There are several adaptive maps associated with the fueling strategy. Within the fueling strategy the ECM calculates shortterm adaptions and long term adaptions. The ECM will monitor the deterioration of the heated oxygen sensors over a period
of time. It will also monitor the current correction associated with the sensors.
The ECM will store a fault code in circumstances where an adaption is forced to exceed its operating parameters. At the
same time, the ECM will record the engine speed, engine load and intake air temperature.
Crankshaft Position Sensor

The characteristics of the signal supplied by the CKP sensor are learned by the ECM. This enables the ECM to set an adaption
and support the engine misfire detection function. Due to the small variation between different drive plates and different CKP
sensors, the adaption must be reset if either component is renewed, or removed and refitted. It is also necessary to reset
the drive plate adaption if the ECM is renewed or replaced. The ECM supports four drive plate adaptions for the CKP sensor.
Each adaption relates to a specific engine speed range. The engine speed ranges are detailed in the table below:
Adaption
1
2
3
4

1800 - 3000
3001 - 3800
3801 - 4600
4601 - 5400
Misfire Detection
Legislation requires that the ECM must be able to detect the presence of an engine misfire. It must be able to detect misfires
at two separate levels. The first level is a misfire that could lead to the legislated emissions limit being exceeded by a given
amount. The second level is a misfire that may cause catalytic converter damage.
The ECM monitors the number of misfire occurrences within two engine speed ranges. If the ECM detects more than a
predetermined number of misfire occurrences within either of these two ranges, over two consecutive journeys, it will record
a fault code and details of the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant temperature. In addition, the ECM monitors the
number of misfire occurrences that happen in a 'window' of 200 engine revolutions. The misfire occurrences are assigned a
weighting according to their likely impact on the catalytic converters. If the number of misfires exceeds a given value, the
ECM stores catalytic converter damage fault codes, along with the engine speed, engine load and engine coolant
temperature.
The signal from the CKP sensor indicates how fast the poles on the drive plate are passing the sensor tip. A sine wave is
generated each time a pole passes the sensor tip. The ECM can detect variations in drive plate speed by monitoring the sine
wave signal supplied by the crankshaft position sensor. By assessing this signal, the ECM can detect the presence of an
engine misfire. At this time, the ECM will assess the amount of variation in the signal received from the CKP sensor and
assign a roughness value to it. This roughness value can be viewed within the real time monitoring feature using Jaguar
approved diagnostic equipment. TheECM will evaluate the signal against a number of factors and will decide whether to
record the occurrence or ignore it. The ECM can assign a roughness and misfire signal for each cylinder.
Diagnostics
The ECM stores each fault as a DTC (diagnostic trouble code). The DTC and associated environmental and freeze frame data
can be read using Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, which can also read real time data from each sensor, the adaption
values currently being employed and the current fueling, ignition and idle speed settings.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Electronic Engine Controls

For a detailed description of electronic engine controls, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol,

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Electrical
Fuses
Wiring harness
Sensor(s)
Actuators
Gear Shift Module (GSM)
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) control module
Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL)
Controller Area Network (CAN) circuit
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) circuit(s)
Engine oil level and condition

Fuel level
Throttle body
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) belt
Air cleaner condition
Air intake ducting
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, verify the customer concern and refer to the Symptom Chart below,
alternatively, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Engine non-start
Engine does not crank
Possible Cause
Security
system /Immobilizer
engaged
Engine in shut-down mode
ECM relay
Battery
Starting system
Engine seized
Action
Check that the security system is
disarmed

Ensure the battery is in fully charged
and serviceable condition


For engine system tests refer to the

Engine cranks, but does not fire
Ignition system
Fuel system
Engine cranks and fires, but will

not start
purge valve
Fuel pump
Spark plugs
Ignition coil failure(s)
Difficult to start

installed
tests
For purge valve tests refer to the
Difficult hot start
Check engine coolant
Check the engine coolant level and
level/anti-freeze content
Battery
Fuel pump
purge valve
condition. Refer to the relevant sections

of the workshop manual
sections of the workshop manual
tests
and associated hoses and connections
connections
necessary
tests
connections
necessary
tests
connections.
workshop manual, carry out
compression tests.
Injector leak
purge valve
Fuel pump
Ignition system
Difficult to start after hot soak

(vehicle standing, engine off, after
engine has reached operating
temperature)
Injector leak
purge valve
Fuel pump
Ignition system
Engine cranks too fast/slow
Engine stalls
Compressions high/low
Battery
Starting system
Breather system
ECM relay
Ignition system

installed
Air leakage
Fuel lines
Engine stalls on overrun
ECM relay
Throttle Position (TP)
Engine stalls at steady speed
ECM relay
sensors
TP sensors
Engine stalls with speed control

enabled
Engine stalls when manoeuvring
ECM relay
ECM relay
TP sensors
Additional engine loads
(PAS, air conditioning, etc)

CAN malfunction
Poor driveability
Engine hesitates/poor acceleration
fuel lines
Injector leak
Air leakage
Ignition system
(EGR) valve stuck
Restricted pedal travel
(carpet, etc)
Engine backfires

Air leakage
Ignition system
Sticking Variable Camshaft
Timing (VCT) actuators
Engine surges

Ignition system

Fuel pump, fuel lines, fuel
quality

tests
Check for blockage in air cleaner
element and air intake system
this section for ECM relay and Throttle
Position (TP) sensor tests
this section for ECM relay, crankshaft
position sensor, and TP sensor tests
this section for ECM relay, and TP sensor
tests
Check for excessive loads being placed
on the engine from PAS, air conditioning
systems etc.
transmission system tests
network tests
Carry out fuel injector leak tests, install
new injectors as necessary
system
tests
Ensure accelerator pedal is free from
restriction
system
tests
this section for Variable Camshaft
Timing (VCT) system tests
tests
tests
Air leakage
Sticking VCT hub
Speed control inhibited or disabled

Speed control, brake switch
CAN fault
Breather system
Air leakage
Engine defaults, warning light and

messages. Refer to the owner
handbook

system
tests
Check message center for default
message, read DTCs and refer to DTC
Index
workshop manual for speed control, and
brake switch tests
tests
network tests
Ensure engine breather system is free
from restriction and is correctly installed
tests
tests
DTC Index
WARNING: Fuel injector voltage will reach 65Volts during operation and have a high current requirement.
NOTE: If the module/component is suspect and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the
DTC
B10A231
Description
Crash Input - No
signal
Possible Causes
Loss of communication
between Restraints Control

Module (RCM) and Engine
Control Module (ECM)
Action
Restraints Control Module (RCM) Pulse Width
Modulated (PWM) SRS signal line circuit, hard
wired connection between Engine Control Module
(ECM) and Restraints Control Module (RCM) for
short to ground, short to power, open circuit.
Repair circuit as required, clear DTC and retest
system to confirm repair.
B10AC- Cruise Control Switch 81

invalid serial data
received

alive / sequence
updated

value of signal
incorrect
component internal
failure
B10FF68
Ignition Control Event information
B11DB01
Battery Monitoring
Module - General
Electrical Failure
B11DB87
Battery Monitoring
Module - missing
message
B120668
Crash Occurred event information
C0031Left Front Wheel

00
Speed Sensor - No sub
type information
C0034Right Front Wheel
00
type information
C0037- Left Rear Wheel Speed
00
information
C003ARight Rear Wheel
00
type information
P001013
Intake (A) Camshaft

Position Actuator
(Bank 1) - circuit open
P0013- Exhaust (B) Camshaft

13
Position Actuator
The Engine Control Module
Clear the DTC and press all the steering wheel

(ECM) has received an
switches, re-check for DTCs. Refer to the electrical
invalid command from the
circuit diagrams and check the Cruise control
steering wheel switch pack
switch circuit for open circuit, short to power,
short to ground, disconnected. Check and install a
new Steering Wheel Module (SWM) as required.
Cruise Buttons alive counter Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the Cruise control switch circuit for open circuit,
is not incrementing. Which
short to power, short to ground, disconnected.
suggests that the LIN bus is
Check and install a new Steering Wheel Module
faulty
(SWM) as required.
Steering Wheel Module
(SWM) is not connected
(SWM) failure
Cruise buttons checksum
Check and install new cruise switches as required.
incorrect, incorrect cruise
switches fitted to vehicle
Cruise control switch circuit,
Check for related DTCs in other Central Junction

Box (CJB)s. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the Cruise control switch circuit for open
circuit, short to power, short to ground,
disconnected. Check and install a new cruise
control switch as required. Check and install a new
Steering Wheel Module (SWM) as required.
Refer to repair manual and check spark plug(s) for
condition and security. Replace any defective
components as required. Refer to electrical wiring
diagrams and check ignition coil circuit for
intermittent open circuit, short to power, short to
ground. Check and install a new coil(s) as
required.
Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check
Battery monitoring signal
charging system for faults. Perform any repairs
line circuit fault
required. Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams
Vehicle battery fault
and check the Battery Monitoring System (BMS)
module circuit for open circuit, short to ground,
short to power. Refer to the battery care manual
and check and install a new battery.
Battery signal line circuit
fault
the Battery Monitoring System (BMS) module
circuit for open circuit, short to ground, short to
power.
Engine control Module (ECM) Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
has detected the vehicle has
the Engine Control Module (ECM) to Restraints
crashed - event information Control Module (RCM) circuit for short to ground,
DTC only
short to power, open circuit. Repair circuit as
required, clear DTC and retest system to confirm
repair.
Invalid data received from Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module for
related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
(ABS) module - left front
wheel speed signal fault
(ABS) module - right front
(ABS) module - left rear
(ABS) module - right rear
Intake (A) camshaft position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
actuator (Bank 1) open
Intake (A) camshaft position actuator (Bank 1)
circuit
open circuit for open circuit. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check Engine Control Module
(ECM) interface harness
(ECM) interface harness for open circuit.
open circuit
Exhaust (B) camshaft
position actuator (Bank 1)
Exhaust (B) camshaft position actuator (Bank 1)
open circuit, short to power,
short to ground,
disconnected
Cruise Control Switch failure
(SWM) failure
Spark plug(s) fault
Ignition coil(s) fault
open circuit

00
Position Timing - OverRetarded (Bank 1) No sub type
information
P0016- Crankshaft Position 00
Camshaft Position
Correlation - Bank 1
Sensor A - No sub type
information

Camshaft Position
Sensor B - No sub type
information

Camshaft Position
Sensor A - No sub type
information

Camshaft Position
Sensor B - No sub type
information
P001A- Intake (A) Cam Profile

13
Control Circuit (Bank
1) - circuit open
P001B- Intake (A) Cam Profile
11
Control Circuit Low
(Bank 1) - circuit short
to ground
P001C- Intake (A) Cam Profile
12
Control Circuit High
to battery
P001D- Intake (A) Cam Profile
13
Control Circuit (Bank
2) - circuit open
P001E- Intake (A) Cam Profile
11
Control Circuit Low
to ground
P001F- Intake (A) Cam Profile
12
Control Circuit High
to battery
P0020- Intake (A) Camshaft
13
Position Actuator
13
Position Actuator
P0026- Intake Valve Control
72
Solenoid Circuit
Range/Performance
(Bank 1) - actuator
stuck open
P0026- Intake Valve Control
77
Solenoid Circuit
(ECM) interface harness

open circuit
Exhaust (B) camshaft
position actuator (Bank 1)
open circuit, short to
ground, short to power
open circuit for open circuit. Refer to the electrical

(ECM) interface harness for open circuit.
Check for related DTC code P0365-00. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check Exhaust (B)
camshaft position actuator (Bank 1) for open
circuit, short to ground, short to power.
The relative positions of the
Check engine timing. Check camshaft sensor

timing plate is installed correctly. Check timing
and cam timing plate teeth
chain is installed correctly.
are not correct
Timing chain installed
incorrectly
The relative positions of the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
exhaust (B) camshaft position actuator (Bank 1)
and camshaft timing plate
for open circuit for open circuit, short to ground,
teeth are not correct
short to power. Check for related DTC code P0365 Engine timing incorrect
00. Check engine timing. Check camshaft sensor
incorrectly
incorrectly
incorrectly
Camshaft profile switching
solenoid bank 1 open circuit
camshaft profile switching solenoid bank 1 for
open circuit.
solenoid bank 1 circuit short camshaft profile switching solenoid bank 1 circuit
to ground
for short to ground

to power
for short to power.

camshaft profile switching solenoid bank 2 for
open circuit.
to ground
for short to ground
solenoid bank 2 open circuit

to power
for short to power.
Intake valve solenoid 2 open
circuit

intake valve solenoid 2 for open circuit.
Exhaust (B) Camshaft

Position actuator (Bank 2)
exhaust (B) camshaft position actuator (Bank 2)
Intake valve solenoid 1
Check operation of intake valve solenoid 1. Check
angle less than target
and install a new intake valve solenoid 1 as
Intake valve solenoid 1 slow
required.
or not operating
angle greater than target

P002772
P002777
P002872
P002877
P002972
P002977
P003111
Range/Performance
(Bank 1) commanded position
not reachable
Solenoid Circuit
Range/Performance
(Bank 1) - actuator
stuck open
Solenoid Circuit
Range/Performance
not reachable
Solenoid Circuit
Range/Performance
(Bank 2) - actuator
stuck open
Solenoid Circuit
Range/Performance
not reachable
Solenoid Circuit
Range/Performance
(Bank 2) - actuator
stuck open
Solenoid Circuit
Range/Performance
not reachable
HO2S Heater Control
Circuit Low (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) - circuit
short to ground
P0031- HO2S Heater Control

13
Sensor 1) - circuit
open

12
Circuit High (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) - circuit
short to battery

00
Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor
2) - no sub type
information

stuck advanced
Exhaust valve solenoid 1
slow or not operating
required.
Check operation of exhaust valve solenoid 1.

Check and install a new exhaust valve solenoid 1
as required.

as required.
stuck advanced
Intake valve solenoid 2 slow
required.
or not operating

stuck advanced
slow or not operating

required.

as required.

as required.
stuck advanced
Pre catalyst oxygen sensorUsing the manufacturer approved diagnostic
odd heater control circuit
system check datalogger signal, Oxygen Sensor
(Bank 1, Sensor 1) circuit
(O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1
short to ground
(0x03A1). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check pre catalyst oxygen sensor-odd heater
control circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 1) circuit for short
to ground.
(Bank 1, Sensor 1) circuit,
open circuit
control circuit (Bank 1, Sensor 1) circuit for open
circuit.
short to power
to power.
Catalyst oxygen sensor
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
heater circuit control fuse
failure
Post catalyst oxygen sensor- (0x03A2). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
odd heater control circuit and check post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd sensor
short to ground, power,
fuse for open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
open circuit
diagrams and check post catalyst oxygen sensor Catalyst oxygen sensor
odd sensor circuit for short to ground, power, open
heater circuit control relay circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check catalyst oxygen sensor heater circuit control
power, open circuit
relay circuit for short to ground, power, open
circuit. Check and install a new catalyst oxygen
heater circuit control relay
sensor heater control relay, as required. Check
failure
and install a new post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd
Post catalyst oxygen sensoras required.
odd failure
P003C00
A Camshaft Profile
Control
Performance /Stuck
Off (Bank 1) - no sub
type information
P003EA Camshaft Profile

00
Control Performance/
Stuck Off (Bank 2) no sub type
information

11
Sensor 1) - circuit
short to ground

13
Sensor 1) - circuit
open

12
Circuit High (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) - circuit
short to battery
P005400
HO2S Heater
Resistance (Bank 1,
Sensor 2) - no sub
type information

00
Circuit (Bank 2, Sensor
2) - no sub type
information
Oil supply blockage to
Check for the presence of oil at the camshaft

camshaft profile switching
profile switching solenoid. Check for catalyst
solenoid
oxygen sensor related DTCs. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check camshaft profile
failure, giving false flag
switching solenoid bank 1 circuit for short to
power, short to ground, open circuit. Check and
solenoid bank 1 circuit fault install a new operation camshaft profile switching
solenoid bank 1 as required. Clear DTC and road
solenoid bank 1 fault
test the vehicle. If fault remains contact Dealer
Technical Support before carrying out any further
work.
Oil supply blockage to
Check for the presence of oil at the camshaft
camshaft profile switching
profile switching solenoid. Check for catalyst
solenoid
oxygen sensor related DTCs. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check camshaft profile
failure, giving false flag
switching solenoid bank 2 circuit for short to
power, short to ground, open circuit. Check and
solenoid bank 2 circuit fault install a new operation camshaft profile switching
solenoid bank 2 as required. Clear DTC and road
solenoid bank 2fault
test the vehicle. If fault remains contact Dealer
Technical Support before carrying out any further
work.
short to ground
to ground.
(Bank 2, Sensor 1) circuit,
open circuit
control circuit (Bank 2, Sensor 1) circuit for open
circuit.
short to power
to power.
failure
Post catalyst oxygen sensor- (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
odd heater control circuit and check post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd sensor
open circuit, high resistance diagrams and check post catalyst oxygen sensor Catalyst oxygen sensor
odd sensor circuit for short to ground, power, open
circuit, high resistance. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check catalyst oxygen sensor
power, open circuit
heater circuit control relay circuit for short to
ground, power, open circuit. Check and install a
new catalyst oxygen sensor heater control relay,
failure
as required. Check and install a new post catalyst
Post catalyst oxygen sensoroxygen sensor-odd as required.
odd failure
Post catalyst oxygen sensorUsing the manufacturer approved diagnostic
even heater control circuit
open circuit
and check post catalyst oxygen sensor-even
sensor circuit for short to ground, power, open
circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
power, open circuit
check catalyst oxygen sensor heater circuit control
relay circuit for short to ground, power, open
circuit. Check and install a new catalyst oxygen
failure
sensor heater control relay, as required. Check
Post catalyst oxygen sensorand install a new post catalyst oxygen sensoreven failure
even, as required.
P006000
HO2S Heater
Resistance (Bank 2,
Sensor 2) - no sub
type information
P0069MAP - Barometric
29
Pressure Correlation signal invalid
P007121
Ambient Air
Temperature Sensor
Range/Performance signal amplitude <
minimum
P007122
Ambient Air
Temperature Sensor
Range/Performance Signal amplitude >
maximum
P007200
Ambient Air
Temperature Sensor
Circuit Low - no sub
type information
P007300
Ambient Air
Temperature Sensor
Circuit High - no sub
type information
P007B23
Charge Air Cooler

Temperature Sensor
Circuit
Range/Performance
(Bank 1) - signal stuck
low

failure
Post catalyst oxygen sensorodd heater control circuit
power, open circuit
failure
Post catalyst oxygen sensorodd failure
(MAP) sensor failure
(ECM) internal fault
Ambient air temperature
sensor circuit short to

ground, power, open circuit
absolute pressure sensor
power, open circuit
sensor failure
failure
power, open circuit
sensor failure
failure
resistance
sensor failure
sensor ground circuit high

sensor signal circuit short to
power
sensor failure
Charge air cooler
temperature sensor circuit
poor / intermittent
connection
Charge air cooler

and check post catalyst oxygen sensor-odd sensor
diagrams and check post catalyst oxygen sensorodd sensor circuit for short to ground, power, open
circuit, high resistance. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check catalyst oxygen sensor
heater circuit control relay circuit for short to
new catalyst oxygen sensor heater control relay,
as required. Check and install a new post catalyst
oxygen sensor-odd as required.
system check datalogger signal, Barometric
Pressure Sensor Voltage (0x035A). Check for
related Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
DTCs. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit for
Check and install new manifold absolute pressure
sensor as required. Check and install a new Engine
Control Module (ECM) as required. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.
system check datalogger signal, Ambient Air
Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x03BA). Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check ambient
air temperature sensor circuit for short to ground,
power, open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check temperature and manifold
absolute pressure sensor circuit for short to
new ambient air temperature sensor as required.
Check and install a new temperature and manifold
absolute pressure sensor as required.
diagrams and check temperature and manifold
absolute pressure sensor circuit for short to
Check and install a new temperature and manifold
absolute pressure sensor as required.
open circuit, high resistance. Check and install a
system check datalogger signals Ambient Air
high resistance, short to power. Check connector
terminals for corrosion or damage. Check and
install a new ambient air temperature sensor as
required.
system check datalogger signal, Charge Air
Temperature Voltage (0x03EE). Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check charge air
cooler temperature sensor circuit for poor,
intermittent connection, check and install a new
P007B24
Charge Air Cooler

Temperature Sensor
Circuit
Range/Performance
high
P007B29
Charge Air Cooler

Temperature Sensor
Circuit
Range/Performance
(Bank 1) - signal
invalid
P0087Fuel Rail/System
00
Pressure - Too Low no sub type
information
P0088Fuel Rail/System
00
Pressure - Too High no sub type
information
P008ALow Pressure Fuel

00
System Pressure - Too
Low - no sub type
information
P008BLow Pressure Fuel

00
System Pressure - Too
High - No sub type
information
P00ABIntake Air
23
Temperature Sensor 1
Circuit
Range/Performance
low
P00ABIntake Air
24
Circuit
Range/Performance
high
P00ABIntake Air
29
charge air cooler temperature sensor as required.

short to ground, open circuit
Charge air cooler
cooler temperature sensor circuit for short to
ground, open circuit. Check and install a new
charge air cooler temperature sensor as required.
Charge air cooler
short to ground, open
circuit, short to power
Charge air cooler
cooler temperature sensor circuit for short to
ground, open circuit, short to power. Check and
install a new charge air cooler temperature sensor
as required.
Fuel rail pressure sensor
circuit short to ground, open system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
Sensor - High Range Sensor Voltage (0x0377).
failure
fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for short to ground,
Fuel lines leaking or
open circuit, high resistance. Check for fuel pump
restricted
related DTCs. Check fuel lines for leakage or
Fuel pump failure
restriction. Check and install new fuel rail pressure
sensor as required. Check and install a new fuel
pump as required.
circuit short to each other, system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
high resistance, short to
power
fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for short to each
failure
other, high resistance, short to power. Check and
install new fuel rail pressure sensor as required.
Low pressure fuel sensor
circuit failure, short to
system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
- Low Range Sensor Voltage (0x0376). Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check low
(FPDM) circuit short to
pressure fuel sensor circuit for short to ground,
ground, power, open circuit power, open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
Low pressure fuel
diagrams and check Fuel Pump Driver Module
(FPDM) circuit short to ground, power, open
(FPDM) failure
circuit. Check and install a new low pressure fuel
sensor as required. Check and install a new Fuel
Pump Driver Module (FPDM) as required.
power, open circuit
the electrical circuit diagrams and check low
(FPDM) circuit short to
pressure fuel sensor circuit for short to ground,
power, open circuit. Check for blockage or
Blockage or restriction in low restriction in low pressure fuel line. Refer to the
pressure fuel line
electrical circuit diagrams and check Fuel Pump
Driver Module (FPDM) circuit short to ground,
failure
power, open circuit. Check and install a new low
pressure fuel sensor as required. Check and install
(FPDM) failure
a new Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM) as
required.
Intake air temperature
sensor bank 2 circuit short
system check datalogger signal, Intake Air
Temperature Sensor Bank 2 (0x0312). Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check intake air
sensor bank 2 failure
temperature sensor bank 2 circuit for short to
intake air temperature sensor bank 2 as required.
to power
power. Check and install a new intake air
temperature sensor bank 2 as required.
Charge air cooler
Circuit
Range/Performance
(Bank 2) - signal
invalid
to ground, open circuit,

short to power
P00ACIntake Air
00
Circuit Low (Bank 2) no sub type
information

sensor bank 2 sensing circuit
short to ground, high
P00ADIntake Air
00
Circuit High (Bank 2) No sub type
information

sensor bank 2 sensing circuit
short ground, short to
resistance
P00C6- Fuel Rail Pressure Too

00
Low - Engine Cranking
- no sub type
information
No fuel at pump
Injector stuck open
Fuel pressure sensor signal
stuck
Fuel pump failure
P010100
Mass or Volume Air

Flow A Circuit
Range/Performance No sub type
information
P010200
Mass or Volume Air

Flow A Circuit Low No sub type
information
Intake air distribution and
filtering components
incorrectly installed
Leakage from intake air
system
Blocked air cleaner element
(s)
Blockage in intake air
system
Mass air flow sensor seal
failure
connector terminal is backed
out, connector terminal
corrosion
Mass air flow sensor circuit,
circuit to power, open
Carbon build-up on throttle
blade
Blocked injectors
Blocked catalysts
Fuse failure

corrosion

temperature sensor bank 2 circuit for open circuit,
short to ground, short to power. Check and install
a new intake air temperature sensor bank 2 as
required.
ground, open circuit, high resistance, disconnected
connector. Check and install a new intake air
temperature sensor bank 2 circuit for short
ground, short to power, open circuit, high
resistance. Check for backed out or damaged
connector pins. Check and install a new intake air
Check fuel supply to both pumps (if engine runs
then supply is not suspect). If engine does not run
perform fuel prime routine. Use fuel pump
diagnostic routine to determine if one pump has
failed, if so replace pump. If a fuel injector is stuck
open the exhaust will smell of fuel and fuelling
adaptions may indicate rich shift. perform checks
for as DTC P0191-00. Check and install a new fuel
pump as required.
Using the manufacturer approved smoke
tester check intake air distribution and
filtering components for leakage and
correct installation
Check air cleaner element is free from
restriction and in serviceable condition
correctly installed and in serviceable
condition
Check for mass air flow sensor seal
integrity and correct installation
Inspect connectors for signs of water
ingress, and pins for damage and/or
corrosion
check mass air flow sensor circuit for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
Make sure throttle blade is clean of carbon
Refer to the relevant section of workshop
manual. Reset fuelling adaptions and carry
out Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Long
Drive Cycle Self-Test
Check and install new mass air flow sensor
as required
corrosion
as required
P010300
Mass or Volume Air

Flow A Circuit High No sub type
information
P010B00
Mass or Volume Air

Flow B Circuit
Range/Performance No sub type
information
P010C00
Mass or Volume Air

Flow B Circuit Low No sub type
information
P010D00
Mass or Volume Air

Flow B Circuit High No sub type
information
Using the manufacturer approved

corrosion
(s)
Blockage in air intake
system
diagnostic system check datalogger signal,

Mass Air Flow Sensor, Bank 1 (0x0314)
corrosion
Check air intake system for blockage
as required
condition
corrosion
as required
corrosion
as required
Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system check datalogger signal,
Mass Air Flow Sensor 2 Voltage (0x0503)
corrosion
system
(s)
system
failure
corrosion
blade
Blocked injectors
Blocked catalysts
Fuse failure

corrosion

corrosion
(s)
Blockage in air intake
system

Check air intake system for blockage
P010F00
Mass or Volume Air

Flow Sensor A/B
Correlation - No sub
type information
P0111Intake Air
23
Circuit
Range/Performance signal stuck low
P0111Intake Air
24
Circuit
Range/Performance signal stuck high
P0111Intake Air
29
Circuit
Range/Performance signal invalid
P0112Intake Air
00
Circuit Low (Bank 1) no sub type
information
P0113Intake Air
00
Circuit High (Bank 1) no sub type
information
P0116Engine Coolant
23
Circuit

as required
system
(s)
condition
system
failure
corrosion
corrosion
blade
Blocked injectors
Blocked catalysts
as required
sensor short to ground, open intake air temperature sensor circuit for short to
ground, open circuit, high resistance. Check and
install a new intake air temperature sensor as
sensor failure
required.
intake air temperature sensor circuit for short to
power, open circuit
power, open circuit. Check and install a new intake
air temperature sensor as required.
sensor failure
ground, power, open circuit ground, power, open circuit. Check and install a
new intake air temperature sensor as required.
sensor failure
ground, short to power,
ground, short to power, open circuit, high
resistance. Check and install a new intake air
sensor failure
power, open circuit, high resistance. Check and
resistance
install a new intake air temperature sensor bank 1
as required.
sensor failure
system check datalogger signal, Engine Coolant
intermittent high resistance Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x0357). Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check engine
sensor 1 failure
coolant temperature sensor 1 circuit for
Battery reset carried out
intermittent high resistance. Check and install a
when the engine was
new engine coolant temperature sensor 1 as
warm/hot
required. Check for related DTC P2610- 87. Start
the engine and switch off. Clear DTC and re-test.
P0116Engine Coolant
24
Circuit

sensor 1 failure
Battery reset carried out
when the engine was
warm/hot
P0116Engine Coolant
29
Circuit
Range/Performance Signal invalid
Low coolant level

P0117Engine Coolant
16
Circuit Low - circuit
voltage below
threshold
P0118Engine Coolant
17
Circuit High - Circuit
voltage above
threshold
P0121- Throttle/Pedal Position

00
Sensor A Circuit
Range/Performance no sub type
information
Corrupt Engine Control

00
Sensor A Circuit Low no sub type
information
sensor 1 sensing circuit intermittent high resistance

sensor 1 failure
Possible airlock in cooling
system
sensor 1 circuit short to

ground
sensor 1 failure

disconnected
sensor 1 failure
Module (ECM) software flash

(ECM) power supply circuit
(ECM) damage through
water ingress, internal fault
Throttle position sensor 1
circuit short to ground, open
circuit
failure

00
Sensor A Circuit High no sub type
information
P0125- Insufficient Coolant

00
Temp For Closed Loop
Fuel Control - no sub
type information
P012626
Insufficient Coolant
Temp For Stable
Operation - signal rate
of change below
threshold
P0128- Coolant Thermostat
00
(Coolant Temp Below
Thermostat Regulating
Temperature) - no sub
circuit short to ground, short

failure

Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x0357). Refer to
coolant temperature sensor 1 circuit for
intermittent high resistance. Check and install a
required. Check for related DTC P2610- 87. Start
the engine and switch off. Clear DTC and re-test.
Fill cooling system to correct level and
specification. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system check datalogger signal, Engine
Coolant Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x0357).
engine coolant temperature sensor 1 circuit for
intermittent high resistance. Check and install new
engine coolant temperature sensor 1 as required,
Bleed cooling system.
coolant temperature sensor 1 circuit for short to
ground. Check and install a new Engine coolant
temperature sensor 1 as required.
coolant temperature sensor 1 circuit for short to
power, open circuit, sensor disconnected. Check
and install new engine coolant temperature sensor
1 as required.
Re-configure the Engine Control Module (ECM)
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check Engine Control Module (ECM) power supply
circuit for open circuit, high resistance. Check and
install a new Engine Control Module (ECM)as
required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module is suspect.
throttle position sensor 1 circuit for short to
ground, open circuit. Clear DTC and repeat
automated diagnostic procedure using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system. If DTC
remains suspect the electronic throttle unit, check
and install a new electronic throttle unit as
throttle position sensor 1 circuit for short to
ground, short to power, open circuit. Clear DTC
and repeat automated diagnostic procedure using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. If
DTC remains suspect the electronic throttle unit,
check and install a new electronic throttle unit as
open circuit, high resistance. Check and install a
new engine coolant temperature sensor 1.
1 circuit, open circuit, high

resistance
sensor 1 failure
Check for related coolant temperature coolant
Cooling fans running
sensor faults. Check and install a new thermostat
continuously or at a high
as required. Check cooling fans for correct
duty
operation. Repair as required.
Check for related coolant temperature coolant
Coolant temperature coolant sensor faults. Check and install a new thermostat
sensor circuit, short to

as required. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

and check engine coolant temperature sensor 1
type information
P0131- O2 Circuit Low Voltage
00
(Bank 1, Sensor 1) no sub type
information
P013200
O2 Circuit High
Voltage (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) - no sub
type information
P013300
O2 Circuit Slow
Response (Bank 1,
Sensor 1) - no sub
type information
P0134- O2 Circuit No Activity

Detected (Bank 1,
00
Sensor 1) - no sub
type information
00
information
P013800
P013900
O2 Circuit High
Voltage (Bank 1,
Sensor 2) - no sub
type information
O2 Circuit Slow
Response (Bank 1,
Sensor 2) - no sub
type information
00
Detected (Bank 1,
Sensor 2) - no sub
type information
open circuit
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
odd disconnected
odd variable circuit, short to

ground
odd variable circuit, open
circuit
odd heater fault
odd failure
odd disconnected
odd variable circuit, short to
power
odd variable circuit, open
circuit
odd heater fault
odd failure
Exhaust leak
odd to Engine Control
Module (ECM) wiring shield
high resistance
odd failure
odd circuit short to ground,

short to power, open circuit
odd failure
Post catalyst oxygen sensor
- odd, sensing circuit short
open circuit
Damaged or blocked catalyst
Air leak between catalyst
and exhaust manifold
- odd, failure
to power
- odd, tip damaged, blocked,
poisoned
Catalyst blocked
- odd, failure
poisoned
Excessive oil consumption
to ground, power, high
poisoned
- odd, failure
circuit for short to ground, short to power, open

circuit.
Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd connector is
connected. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd variable
circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check precatalyst oxygen sensor odd heater circuit. Check
and install a new pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd
as required.
Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd connector is

connected. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd variable
circuit for short to power, open circuit. Check precatalyst oxygen sensor odd heater circuit. Check
and install a new pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd
as required.
Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd is correctly

installed in exhaust manifold. Check for and rectify
any exhaust leak between cylinder head and
catalytic converter. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
odd to Engine Control Module (ECM) wiring shield
for high resistance. Check fuel control system for
failure. Check and install a new pre-catalyst
oxygen sensor odd as required.
pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd circuit for short to
ground, short to power, open circuit. Check and
install a new pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd as
required.
post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd, sensing circuit
for short to ground, high resistance, open circuit.
Check for damaged or blocked catalyst. Check for
air leak between catalyst and exhaust manifold.
Check and install new post catalyst oxygen sensor
- odd, as required.

for short to power. Check post catalyst oxygen
sensor - odd, tip for damage, blockage, poisoned,
install a new sensor as required. Check for blocked
catalyst. Check and install new catalyst as
required. Check and install new post catalyst
oxygen sensor - odd, as required.
Check for related DTCs. Check post catalyst
oxygen sensor - odd, tip for damage, blockage,
poisoned, install a new sensor as required. Check
for excessive oil consumption. Repair as required.
for short to ground, power, high resistance, open
circuit. Check for air leak between catalyst and
exhaust manifold. Check post catalyst oxygen
sensor - odd, tip for damage, blockage, poisoned,
install a new sensor as required. Check for
excessive oil consumption. Check and install new
post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd, as required.
P014100
O2 Heater Circuit
information
P014865
Fuel Delivery Error signal has too few

P014866
Fuel Delivery Error signal has too many

P014932
Fuel Timing Error signal low time <

minimum
P014935
Fuel Timing Error signal high time >

maximum
P0151- O2 Sensor Circuit Low

1A
Voltage (Bank 2
Sensor 1) - circuit
resistance below
threshold
P0152- O2 Sensor Circuit Low
1B
Voltage (Bank 2
Sensor 1) - circuit
resistance above
threshold
P0153O2 Circuit Slow
00
Response (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) - no sub
type information

00
Detected (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) - no sub
type information

and check post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd,
sensing circuit for short to ground, power, high
resistance, open circuit. Check for air leak between
catalyst and exhaust manifold. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
failure
Post catalyst oxygen sensor oxygen sensor heater circuit control relay circuit
for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check
- odd, failure
and install a new catalyst oxygen sensor heater
control relay, as required. Check and install new
post catalyst oxygen sensor - odd, as required.
Injector(s) circuit, short to
Check for related injector DTCs. Refer to the
ground, short to power, high electrical circuit diagrams and check Injector(s)
resistance
circuit for, short to ground, short to power, high
Injector(s) failure
resistance. Check and install a new injector(s) as
required. Check and install a new Engine Control
(ECM) internal failure
Module (ECM) as required. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual if a module is
suspect.
resistance
Injector(s) failure
suspect.
resistance
Injector(s) failure
suspect.
resistance
Injector(s) failure
suspect.
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
even circuit short to ground pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - even circuit for short
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor to ground. Check and install new pre catalyst
even failure
oxygen sensor - even.
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor -
even circuit short to power,

disconnected
Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even failure
Exhaust leak
even to Engine Control
high resistance
Module (ECM) signal circuit
short to ground
even failure
Exhaust leak
high resistance

pre-catalyst oxygen sensor - even circuit for short
to power, disconnected. Check and install new pre
Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even is correctly
even to Engine Control Module (ECM) wiring shield
for high resistance. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
even to Engine Control Module (ECM) signal circuit
for short to ground. Check fuel control system for
failure. Check and install a new pre-catalyst
oxygen sensor even as required.
Check pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even is correctly

00
information
even to Engine Control Module (ECM) wiring shield

for high resistance. Refer to the electrical circuit
Module (ECM) signal circuit
diagrams and check Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor
even to Engine Control Module (ECM) signal circuit
Check fuel control system for failure. Check and
install a new pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even as
even failure
required.
Post catalyst oxygen sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
- even, sensing circuit short post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, sensing circuit
to ground, high resistance, for short to ground, high resistance, open circuit.
open circuit
Check for air leak between catalyst and exhaust
manifold. Check post catalyst oxygen sensor and exhaust manifold
even, tip for damage, blockage, poisoned, install a
new sensor as required. Check and install new
- even, tip damaged,
post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, as required.
blocked, poisoned
- even, failure
P015800
O2 Circuit High
Voltage (Bank 2,
Sensor 2) - no sub
type information

- even, sensing circuit short post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, sensing circuit
to power
for short to power. Check for air leak between
catalyst and exhaust manifold. Check post catalyst
oxygen sensor - even, tip for damage, blockage,
Post catalyst oxygen sensor poisoned, install a new sensor as required. Check
and install new post catalyst oxygen sensor blocked, poisoned
even, as required.
- even, failure
P015900
O2 Circuit Slow
Response (Bank 2,
Sensor 2) - no sub
type information
Detected (Bank 2,
00
Sensor 2) - no sub
type information
P016100
O2 Heater Circuit
information
P0171System Too Lean

00
(Bank 1) - no sub type
information

blocked, poisoned
Excessive oil consumption
- even, sensing circuit short
blocked, poisoned
- even, failure
- even, sensing circuit short
- even, sensing circuit fuse
failure
failure
- even, failure
Air leak upstream of
MAF/IAT sensor bank 1
circuit failure
failure
odd circuit failure
odd failure
Post-catalyst oxygen sensor
odd circuit failure
odd failure
Check post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, tip for

damage, blockage, poisoned, install a new sensor
as required. Check for excessive oil consumption,
repair as required.
post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, sensing circuit
exhaust manifold. Check post catalyst oxygen
sensor - even, tip for damage, blockage, poisoned,
install a new sensor as required. Check and install
new post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, as
required.

post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, sensing circuit
exhaust manifold. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check catalyst oxygen sensor heater
circuit control relay circuit for short to ground,
diagrams and check Post catalyst oxygen sensor even, sensing circuit fuse, replace as required.
Check and install a new catalyst oxygen sensor
heater control relay, as required. Check and install
new post catalyst oxygen sensor - even, as
required.
Check for leak from air intake system. Check for
additional MAF/IAT sensor bank 1 related DTCs
and refer to relevant DTC Index. Check for
additional Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor odd related
DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Check for
additional Post-catalyst oxygen sensor odd related
DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
P0172System Too Rich

00
information
P0174System Too Lean

00
information
P0175System Too Rich

00
information
P018B- Fuel Pressure Sensor B

29
Circuit
P018C- Fuel Pressure Sensor B

00
type information
P018D- Fuel Pressure Sensor B

00
type information
P019100
Fuel Rail Pressure

Sensor A Circuit
information
P0192Fuel Rail Pressure

00
Sensor A Circuit Low -

Check air cleaner element is free from restriction.

Check for leaking injectors, install new injector(s)
as required. Check for additional MAF/IAT sensor
failure
bank 1 related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
Index. Check for additional Pre-catalyst oxygen
odd circuit failure
sensor odd related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
Index. Check for additional Post-catalyst oxygen
odd failure
sensor odd related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
Index.
odd circuit failure
odd failure
Air leak upstream of
Check for leak from air intake system. Check for
additional MAF/IAT sensor bank 2 related DTCs
and refer to relevant DTC Index. Check for
circuit failure
additional Pre-catalyst oxygen sensor even related
DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Check for
failure
additional Post-catalyst oxygen sensor even
even circuit failure
even failure
even failure
Check air cleaner element is free from restriction.
Check for leaking injectors, install new injector(s)
as required. Check for additional MAF/IAT sensor
circuit failure
bank 2 related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
Index. Check for additional Pre-catalyst oxygen
failure
sensor even related DTCs and refer to relevant
DTC Index. Check for additional Post-catalyst
oxygen sensor even related DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC Index.
even failure
even failure
Fuel Filter or fuel system
restriction
Fuel system leak
- Low Range Sensor Voltage (0x0376). Check for
Fuel pump pressure sensor related fuel pump DTCs. Check the fuel system for
circuit short to ground, short restrictions or blockages. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check fuel pump pressure
resistance
sensor circuit for short to power, open circuit, high
Fuel pump pressure sensor
resistance. Check and install a new fuel pump
failure
circuit short to ground, short system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
resistance
the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel pump
pressure sensor circuit for short to power, open

circuit, high resistance. Check and install a new
failure
fuel pump pressure sensor as required.
circuit short to ground, short system check datalogger signal, Fuel Rail Pressure
resistance
the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel pump
pressure sensor circuit for short to power, open

circuit, high resistance. Check and install a new
failure
fuel pump pressure sensor as required.
short to ground, short to
resistance
Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor A
fuel rail pressure sensor A circuit for short to
failure
power, short to ground, high resistance, open
circuit, terminal damage or corrosion. Check and
install a new Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor A as
required.
no sub type
information
P0193Fuel Rail Pressure

00
information
P019623
Engine Oil
Temperature Sensor
P019624
Engine Oil
Temperature Sensor
P020004
Injector Circuit System Internal

Failures
P020049
Injector Circuit internal electronic

failure
P0200- Injector Circuit - over

4B
temperature
P0201Cylinder 1 Injector
13
Circuit / Open - circuit
open
13
open
13
open
13
open
13
open
13
open
13
open

resistance
failure

required.
resistance
failure
required.
Oil temperature - level
system check datalogger signal, Sump Oil
Temperature - Measured (0x03F3). Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check oil
sensor failure
temperature - level sensor circuit for short to
ground, intermittent high resistance. Check and
install new oil temperature - level sensor as
required.
sensor circuit short to power
sensor failure
temperature - level sensor circuit for intermittent
short to power. Check and install new oil
temperature - level sensor as required.
Check Engine Control Module (ECM) injector power
(ECM) injector circuit power circuit for open circuit. Check for misfire DTCs, if
failure
present suspect the Engine Control Module (ECM).
Check and install a new Engine Control Module
(ECM) fault
(ECM) as required. Refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module is suspect.
Check for misfire DTCs, if present suspect the
(ECM) fault
Engine Control Module (ECM). Check and install a
new Engine Control Module (ECM) as required.
Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual if a module is suspect.
If combined with misfire codes for one or both
(ECM) fault
injector sets, then no service rectification is
proposed.
Fuel injector no.1 circuit
open circuit
fuel injector no.1 circuit for open circuit,
disconnected injector, high resistance.
open circuit
open circuit
open circuit
open circuit
open circuit
open circuit
13
open
00
Sensor/Switch B
type information
00
Sensor/Switch B
type information
P0231- Fuel Pump Secondary
23
Circuit Low - signal
stuck low
P0232- Fuel Pump Secondary

24
Circuit Low - Signal
stuck high
P025113
P025311
P025412
P025613
P025811
P025912
P025C14
P025D12
P026111
P026112
P026201
Injection Pump Fuel

Metering Control A circuit open
Injection Pump Fuel
Metering Control A
Low - circuit short to
ground
Injection Pump Fuel
Metering Control A
High - circuit short to
battery
Injection Pump Fuel
Metering Control B circuit open
Injection Pump Fuel
Metering Control B
ground
Injection Pump Fuel
Metering Control B
battery
Fuel Pump Module
Control Circuit Low circuit short to ground
or open
Fuel Pump Module
Control Circuit High circuit short to battery
Cylinder 1 Injector
short to ground
Cylinder 1 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 1 Injector
Circuit High - General
Electrical Failure
open circuit
circuit, short to ground
(FPDM) signal circuit short to
(FPDM) is not energized with
the ignition on
(FPDM) failure


throttle/pedal position sensor/switch B circuit for
open circuit, short to ground. Check and install a
new throttle/pedal position sensor/switch B as
required.
throttle/pedal position sensor/switch B circuit for
open circuit, short to power. Check and install a
new throttle/pedal position sensor/switch B as
required.
Check for related DTCs P0232-24. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check Fuel Pump
Driver Module (FPDM) signal circuit for short to
ground, open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
(FPDM) is energized with the ignition on. Repair as
required. Check and install a new Fuel Pump
Driver Module (FPDM) as required. Refer to the
module is suspect.
Check for related DTCs P0231-23. Refer to the
(FPDM) signal circuit short to electrical circuit diagrams and check Fuel Pump
Driver Module (FPDM) signal circuit for short to
ground, open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit
(FPDM) is not energized with
the ignition on
(FPDM) is energized with the ignition on. Repair as
required. Check and install a new Fuel Pump
(FPDM) failure
Driver Module (FPDM) as required. Refer to the
module is suspect.
fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for open circuit.

(FPDM) control circuit, short

(FPDM) control circuit, short

to power
short to ground
short to power

power

fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for short to ground.

fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for short to power.

fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for open circuit.
fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for short to ground.

fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for short to power.

Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM) circuit short to
ground, open circuit.
Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM) circuit short to
power.
fuel injector no.1 circuit for short to ground.
fuel injector no.1 circuit for short to power.
fuel injector no.1 circuit for short to ground, short
to power.
P026212
P026411
P026412
P026501
P026512
P026711
P026712
P026801
P026812
P027011
P027012
P027101
P027112
P027311
P027312
P027401
P027412
P027611
P027612
P027701
P027712
P027911
P027912
P028001
Cylinder 1 Injector
Circuit High - circuit
short to battery
Cylinder 2 Injector
short to ground
Cylinder 2 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 2 Injector
Electrical Failure
Cylinder 2 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 3 Injector
short to ground
Cylinder 3 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 3 Injector
Electrical Failure
Cylinder 3 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 4 Injector
short to ground
Cylinder 4 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 4 Injector
Electrical Failure
Cylinder 4 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 5 Injector
short to ground
Cylinder 5 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 5 Injector
Electrical Failure
Cylinder 5 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 6 Injector
short to ground
Cylinder 6 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 6 Injector
Electrical Failure
Cylinder 6 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 7 Injector
short to ground
Cylinder 7 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 7 Injector
short to power
short to ground
short to power

power
short to power
short to ground
short to power

power
short to power
short to ground
short to power

power
short to power
short to ground
short to power

power
short to power
short to ground
short to power

power
short to power
short to ground
short to power

to power.
to power.
to power.
to power.
to power.
P028012
P028211
P028212
P028301
P028312
P02EE01
P02EE1C
P02EF01
P02EF1C
P02F001
P02F01C
P02F101
P02F11C
P02F201
P02F21C
P02F301
P02F3-
Electrical Failure
Cylinder 7 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 8 Injector
short to ground
Cylinder 8 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 8 Injector
Electrical Failure
Cylinder 8 Injector
short to battery
Cylinder 1 Injector
Circuit
Range/Performance General Electrical
Failure
Cylinder 1 Injector
Circuit
Range/Performance circuit voltage out of
range
Cylinder 2 Injector
Circuit
Failure
Cylinder 2 Injector
Circuit
range
Cylinder 3 Injector
Circuit
Failure
Cylinder 3 Injector
Circuit
range
Cylinder 4 Injector
Circuit
Failure
Cylinder 4 Injector
Circuit
range
Cylinder 5 Injector
Circuit
Failure
Cylinder 5 Injector
Circuit
range
Cylinder 6 Injector
Circuit
Failure
Cylinder 6 Injector
power
short to power
short to ground
short to power

power
short to power
to power.
to power.
Cylinder 1 injector low

cylinder 1 injector circuit for short to power,
shorted together. Check and install a new cylinder
circuit shorted to high circuit
1 injector as required.
Check Engine Control Module (ECM) for related
misfire DTCs and refer to this DTC Index.





1C
P02F401
P02F41C
P02F501
P02F51C
P030000
Circuit
range
Cylinder 7 Injector
Circuit
Failure
Cylinder 7 Injector
Circuit
range
Cylinder 8 Injector
Circuit
Failure
Cylinder 8 Injector
Circuit
range
Random Misfire
Detected - no sub type
information
P0301Cylinder 1 Misfire
00
information
00
information
00
information


Poor fuel quality

Catalyst/exhaust system

misfire DTCs and refer to this DTC Index. Check
blockage
the fuel system for blockages, repair as required.
Spark plug(s) fouled or
Check the catalyst/exhaust system for blockage,
failed
repair as required. Check and install a new spark
Injector(s) circuit short to
plug(s) as required. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check injector(s) circuit for short to
open circuit
Injector(s) failure
new injector(s) as required. Check for air leaks
Fuel system excessively too within the intake system. Check and install a new
lean or too rich
camshaft position sensor as required.
Camshaft position sensor
failure
Poor fuel quality
blockage
failed
open circuit
Injector(s) failure
lean or too rich
failure
Poor fuel quality
blockage
failed
open circuit
Injector(s) failure
lean or too rich
failure
Poor fuel quality
blockage
failed
open circuit
Injector(s) failure
lean or too rich
failure
00
information
00
information
00
information
00
information
00
information
P0313- Misfire Detected With

00
Low Fuel - no sub type
information
Poor fuel quality

blockage
failed
open circuit
Injector(s) failure
lean or too rich
failure
Poor fuel quality
blockage
failed
open circuit
Injector(s) failure
lean or too rich
failure
Poor fuel quality
blockage
failed
open circuit
Injector(s) failure
lean or too rich
failure
Poor fuel quality
blockage
failed
open circuit
Injector(s) failure
lean or too rich
failure
Poor fuel quality
blockage
failed
open circuit
Injector(s) failure
lean or too rich
failure
Poor fuel quality
blockage
failed
P031600
Misfire Detected On
Startup (First 1000
Revolutions) - no sub
type information
P0327- Knock Sensor 1 Circuit

00
Low (Bank1) - no sub
type information

00
High (Bank 1) - no sub
type information
P032C- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit

00
type information
P032D- Knock Sensor 3 Circuit

00
High (Bank1) - no sub
type information

00
type information

00
type information
P033502
Crankshaft Position
Sensor A Circuit General signal failure
P0335- Crankshaft Position

31
Sensor A Circuit - no
signal
P0336-
Crankshaft Position

open circuit
Injector(s) failure
Fuel system excessively too
lean or too rich
failure
Poor fuel quality
blockage
failed
open circuit
Injector(s) failure
Fuel system excessively too
lean or too rich
failure
cylinder block
Knock sensor bank 1 front
circuit
failure
cylinder block
circuit high resistance, short
to power
failure
cylinder block
circuit short to ground
failure
cylinder block
to power
failure
cylinder block
Knock sensor bank 1 rear
circuit
failure
cylinder block
failure
Crankshaft position sensor
disconnected
failure
circuit - short to ground,
short to power, high
failure

within the intake system. Check and install a new

within the intake system. Check and install a new
Ensure a good electrical contact with the cylinder

block. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check knock sensor bank 1 front circuit for short to
knock sensor bank 1 front as required.

power, high resistance. Check and install a new

ground. Check and install a new knock sensor
bank 2 front as required.

check knock sensor bank 1 rear circuit for short to
knock sensor bank 1 rear as required.

power. Check and install a new knock sensor bank
1 rear as required.
crankshaft position sensor circuit for short to
ground, short to power, high resistance,
disconnected. Check and install new crankshaft
position as required.
disconnected. Check and install new crankshaft
position as required.
00
Sensor A Circuit
information
P033C- Knock Sensor 4 Circuit

00
Low (Bank 2) - no sub
type information
P033D- Knock Sensor 4 Circuit

00
type information
P0340Camshaft Position
02
Sensor A Circuit (Bank
1 or single sensor) General signal failure
31
1 or single sensor) no signal
P034100
Camshaft Position
Sensor A Circuit
Range/Performance
(Bank 1 or single
sensor) - no sub type
information
02
2) - General signal
failure
31
2) - no signal

disconnected
gap incorrect, foreign matter
on sensor face, damaged
teeth on rotor
failure
cylinder block
failure
cylinder block
to power
failure
bank 1 inlet sensor circuit
power, high resistance,
disconnected
bank 1 inlet sensor gap
sensor face, damaged rotor
bank 1 inlet sensor failure
disconnected
disconnected
disconnected
bank 2 inlet sensor circuit short to ground, short to
disconnected

disconnected. Check crankshaft position sensor for
damage and check air gap (check at 90 intervals,
should be no greater than 4.5mm). Check and
install new crankshaft position as required.

ground. Check and install a new knock sensor
bank 2 rear as required.
knock sensor bank 2 rear as required.

camshaft position sensor bank 1 inlet sensor
circuit for short to ground, short to power, high
resistance, disconnected. Check camshaft position
sensor bank 1 inlet sensor for correct installation
and damage. Check and install a new camshaft
position sensor bank 1 inlet as required.






P034600
Camshaft Position
Sensor A Circuit
Range/Performance
information
P035113
Ignition Coil A
Primary/Secondary
Circuit - circuit open
Ignition Coil B
Primary/Secondary
Ignition Coil C
Primary/Secondary
Ignition Coil D
Primary/Secondary
Ignition Coil E
Primary/Secondary
Ignition Coil F
Primary/Secondary
Circuit - Circuit Open
Ignition Coil G
Primary/Secondary
Ignition Coil H
Primary/Secondary
Camshaft Position
Sensor B Circuit (Bank
1) - General signal
failure
P035213
P035313
P035413
P035513
P035613
P035713
P035813
P036502
P036600
Camshaft Position
Sensor B Circuit
Range/Performance
information
02
Sensor B Circuit (Bank
2) - performance or
incorrect operation
bank 2 inlet sensor circuit short to ground, short to

disconnected
sensor face, target rotor
run-out
bank 1 outlet sensor circuit
disconnected
bank 1 outlet sensor gap
bank 1 outlet sensor failure
disconnected
sensor face, target rotor
run-out
disconnected

and damage. Check target rotor for run out, repair
as required. Check and install a new camshaft

ignition coil 1 circuit for open circuit, disconnected
ignition coil, high resistance.
camshaft position sensor bank 1 outlet sensor
sensor bank 1 outlet sensor for correct installation
position sensor bank 1 outlet as required.

and damage. Check target run-out, repair as
required. Check and install a new camshaft

P039100
Camshaft Position
Sensor B Circuit
Range/Performance
information
P042000
Catalyst System
Efficiency Below
Threshold (Bank 1) no sub type
information
P043000
Catalyst System
Efficiency Below
Threshold (Bank 2) no sub type
information
P0441- Evaporative Emission

00
System Incorrect
Purge Flow - no sub
type information

00
System Leak Detected
(small leak)- no sub
type information

13
System Purge Control
Valve Circuit Open circuit open
00
System Vent Control
Circuit Open - no sub
type information

00
System Vent Control
Circuit Shorted - no

00
System Leak Detected
(very small leak) - no

disconnected
sensor face, damaged rotor,
rotor run-out
Catalytic converter failure
due to overheating damage
caused by misfire and/or
lean combustion
due to poisoning caused by
excessive oil consumption
and/or contaminated fuel
due to overheating damage
caused by misfire and/or
lean combustion
due to poisoning caused by
excessive oil consumption
and/or contaminated fuel
Evaporative Emission (EVAP)
system hoses, pipes or
connection failure
Purge control valve circuit
resistance
Purge control valve failure
Fuel filler cap not
sealing/missing
Diagnostic Module Tank
Leakage (DMTL) connector
not sealed
Purge valve dirty
leak
Leakage (DMTL) module
failure
Purge control valve open
circuit, high resistance,
disconnected

circuit fuse blown / not
secure in holder
failure
circuit, short to ground,
short to power, open circuit
failure
Fuel filler cap not
sealing/missing
Leakage (DMTL) connector

and damage. Check target rotor, repair as
required. Check and install a new camshaft
Check for misfire/lean combustion DTCs and refer

to DTC Index in this section. Check the oil and fuel
condition/level. Check the catalytic converter for
damage. Check and install a new catalytic
converter bank 1 as required. Refer to the
component is suspect.
Check for misfire/lean combustion DTCs and refer
to DTC Index in this section. Check the oil and fuel
condition/level. Check the catalytic converter for
damage. Check and install a new catalytic
converter bank 2 as required. Refer to the
Check all Evaporative Emission (EVAP) system
hoses, pipes and connection are serviceable,
repair/replace as required. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check purge control valve
circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit.
Check and install a new purge control valve as
procedures manual if a component is suspect.
Check fuel tank filler cap for sealing/missing.
Check and install a new fuel tank filler cap as
required. Check EVAP system for leak using
appropriate smoke/leak tester. Carry out a purge
valve self test to clean the purge valve. Check fuel
tank and filler neck for leakage, replace as
required. Check and install a new Diagnostic
Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) module as required.

purge control valve circuit for open circuit,
disconnected purge valve, high resistance.
Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) module
circuit for open circuit. Check Diagnostic Module
Tank Leakage (DMTL) module fuse and replace as

Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) module
circuit for short to ground, short to power, open
circuit. Check and install a new Diagnostic Module
Tank Leakage (DMTL) module as required. Refer to
the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.
Check fuel tank filler cap for sealing/missing.
Check and install a new fuel tank filler cap as
required. Check EVAP system for leak using
appropriate smoke/leak tester. Carry out a purge
not sealed
valve self test to clean the purge valve. Check fuel

tank and filler neck for leakage, replace as
leak
failure
Evaporative emission system Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
purge control valve circuit
evaporative emission system purge control valve
short to ground
circuit for short to ground.
Purge valve dirty

11
Valve Circuit High circuit short to ground
12
Valve Circuit High circuit short to battery
P0461- Fuel Level Sensor A
29
Circuit
P04612F
Fuel Level Sensor A

Circuit
Range/Performance signal erratic
P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit 04

system internal
failures

component failures

short to ground

short to battery

circuit open

circuit voltage below
threshold

circuit voltage above
threshold
Evaporative emission system Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
purge control valve circuit

short to power
evaporative emission system purge control valve

circuit for short to power.
Fuel level sensor circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit, short to ground,

short to power
Fuel level sensor stuck
fuel level sensor circuit for short to ground, short

to power, open circuit. Check for stuck level
sensor. Check and install a new fuel level sensor
as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
Fuel level sensor circuit
fuel level sensor circuit for short to ground, short
power, open circuit
to power, open circuit. Check level sensor track for
Fuel level sensor track
damage. Check and install a new fuel level sensor
damaged
as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
Damaged cooling fan control
unit
system check datalogger signal, Electric Fan PWM
Cooling fan control unit
Control - Commanded Duty Cycle (0x03F9). Check
failure
and install a new cooling fan control unit as
unit
failure
Control - Commanded Duty Cycle (0x03F9). Refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check cooling
fan control unit circuit for short to ground.
fan control unit circuit for short to power.
fan control unit circuit for open circuit.
Discharged battery
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
charging circuit for open circuit, short to ground.
Check and install a new alternator as required.
Check and install a new battery as required. Refer
to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.
Discharged battery
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
charging circuit for open circuit, short to ground.
Check and install a new alternator as required.
Check and install a new battery as required. Refer
to the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module is suspect.

signal frequency
incorrect
P0481- Fan 2 Control Circuit 4B

Over temperature
unit
failure
unit
failure

no operation
unit
Blocked cooling fan control
unit
failure
component internal
failure
unit
failure

component or system
operation obstructed
or blocked
unit
Blocked cooling fan control
unit
failure
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor
81
A - invalid serial data
received
82
A - alive / sequence
updated

83
A - value of signal
incorrect

85
A - signal above
allowable range
62
A Range/Performance
- signal compare
failure
P050400
Brake Switch A / B
Correlation - no sub
type information
P050464
Brake Switch A / B
Correlation - signal
P050600
Idle Air Control

System RPM Lower
Than Expected - no
Wheel speed sensor fault

for block or obstruction to fan rotor. Check and
install a new cooling fan control unit as required.
for block or obstruction to fan rotor. Check and
install a new cooling fan control unit as required.
Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module for
Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module and

Engine Control Module (ECM) for related DTCs and
refer to relevant DTC Index. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) module circuit for short to ground,
power, open circuit.
Incorrect level of Anti-lock
Clear DTC and re-test. Re-configure the Anti-lock
Braking System (ABS)
Braking System (ABS) module using the
module software
manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Re Incorrect level of Engine
configure the Engine Control Module (ECM) using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
software
Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module for
(ABS) module has reported
a speed above 300 km/h
Vehicle speed from the AntiCheck Engine Control Module (ECM) for related
lock Braking System (ABS)
vehicle speed DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
module does not match the
Index. Check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
calculated vehicle speed
module and Transmission Control Module (TCM)
from the Engine Control
for related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
Module (ECM)
Check the vehicle tire sizes are correct.
No brake pressure signal
Check Anti-Lock braking module for related DTCs
available from Anti-Lock
and refer to relevant DTC Index. Check for brake
(ABS) braking module
fluid leaks. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Brake switch 1 and Brake and check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module
switch 2 sense circuit short
to ground, short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open circuit
brake switch circuit for short to ground, power,
open circuit. Check and install a new brake switch
1 as required.
Brake fluid leak
Check for brake fluid leaks. Refer to the electrical
Brake switch 1 sense circuit circuit diagrams and check brake switch 1 circuit
short to power
for short to power. Check and install a new brake
switch 1 as required.
Ensure the air intake system is free from
restriction. Check the FEAD belt and components
(FEAD) overload
for failure, repair as required.
(defective/seized
(ABS) module not on bus
component)
P050624
Idle Air Control

System RPM Lower
Than Expected - signal
stuck high
P050700
Idle Air Control

System RPM Higher
Than Expected - no
P050723
Idle Air Control

System RPM Higher
Than Expected - signal
stuck low
P050BCold Start Ignition

23
Timing Performance signal stuck low
P050BCold Start Ignition

24
Timing Performance signal stuck high
P050ECold Start Engine

00
Exhaust Temperature
Too Low - no sub type
information
P0512- Starter Request Circuit

12
- circuit short to
battery
P0512- Starter Request Circuit

14
- circuit short to
ground or open
P0513- Incorrect Immobilizer

00
Key - no sub type
information
P052A- Cold Start Intake (A)

Air intake system air leak

restriction. Check for air leak between MAF/IAT
sensor and throttle. Check for air leak between
throttle and inlet manifold. Check for engine
breather system leak. Check the FEAD belt and
components for failure.
between MAF/IAT sensor

and throttle
Intake air leak between
throttle and manifold
Engine crankcase breather
leak
(FEAD) overload
(defective/seized
component)
Check for air leak between MAF/IAT sensor and
throttle. Check for air leak between throttle and
and throttle
inlet manifold. Check for engine breather system
leak.
leak
restriction. Check for air leak between MAF/IAT
sensor and throttle. Check for air leak between
and throttle
throttle and inlet manifold. Check for engine
breather system leak.
leak
ignition coil circuit for short to ground, power,
open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
(ECM) faulty
and check Engine Control Module (ECM) to ignition
coil circuit for short to power. Check and install a
new coil(s) as required. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check ignition coils circuit for
corrosion, high resistance. Check and install a new
Engine Control Module (ECM) as required. Refer to
module is suspect.
ignition coil circuit for short to ground, power,
open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
(ECM) faulty
and check Engine Control Module (ECM) to ignition
coil circuit for short to power. Check and install a
new coil(s) as required. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check ignition coils circuit for
corrosion, high resistance. Check and install a new
Engine Control Module (ECM) as required. Refer to
module is suspect.
Incorrect coolant
Check the correct coolant temperature sensor is
temperature sensor installed installed. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Coolant temperature sensor and check coolant temperature sensor circuit for
circuit short to ground, open short to ground, open circuit. Check and install a
circuit
new coolant temperature sensor as required.
failure
Crank request circuit
between Engine Control
crank request circuit between Engine Control
Module (ECM) and Central
Module (ECM) and Central Junction Box (CJB) for
Junction Box (CJB) short to
short to power.
power
Crank request circuit
crank request circuit between Engine Control
Module (ECM) and Central
Module (ECM) and Central Junction Box (CJB) for
Junction Box (CJB) short to
short to ground, open circuit.
Security key invalid
Check for CAN network interference/Engine
Controller Area Network
Control Module (ECM) related error. Carry out the
(CAN) data corruption
CAN network integrity test using the manufacturer
Low battery voltage
approved diagnostic system. Check the vehicle
charging system for faults, repair as required.
Engine oil pressure too low
Check engine oil level and top up as required.
00
Camshaft Position
Timing Over-Advanced
information
P052B- Cold Start Intake (A)

00
Camshaft Position
Timing Over-Retarded
information
P052C- Cold Start Intake (A)

00
Camshaft Position
information
P052D- Cold Start Intake (A)

00
Camshaft Position
information
P054A- Cold Start Exhaust (B)

00
Camshaft Position
information
P054B- Cold Start Exhaust (B)

00
Camshaft Position
information
P054C- Cold Start Exhaust (B)

00
Camshaft Position
information
P054D- Cold Start Exhaust (B)

00
Camshaft Position
information
P056013
System Voltagecircuit open

circuit short to ground, open intake valve solenoid 1 sensor circuit for short to
install a new intake valve solenoid 1 sensor as
failure
required. Check service history /mileage. Check
Timing chains stretched
and install new timing chains as required. Refer to
beyond allowable limits
failure
failure
failure
circuit short to ground, open exhaust valve solenoid 1 sensor circuit for short to
install a new exhaust valve solenoid 1 sensor as
failure
failure
failure
failure
(ECM) power supply circuit, Engine Control Module (ECM) power supply circuit
open circuit
P0562- System Voltage Low 00

no sub type
information
P0563- System Voltage High 00

no sub type
information
P0572- Brake Switch A Circuit

17
Low - circuit voltage
above threshold
P0573- Brake Switch A Circuit
16
High - circuit voltage
below threshold
(ECM) battery monitor

disconnected
Battery circuit high
resistance
Alternator circuit open
Alternator failure
Battery circuit high
resistance
Alternator over charging
Brake switch 2 sense circuit


open circuit
P057800
Cruise Control MultiFunction Input A

Circuit Stuck - no sub
type information
P057B- Brake Pedal Position
87
Sensor Circuit
Range/Performance missing message
P0590- Cruise Control Multi00
Function Input B
Circuit Stuck - no sub
type information
Cruise control circuit, output
P0600- Serial Communication

49
Link - internal
electronic failure
signal stuck
Cruise control switch stuck
Brake pressure signal
missing from Anti-lock

control module
Active Speed Limiter (ASL)
switch stuck
Module (ECM) software

(ECM) power supply fault


water ingress
P0601Internal Control
43
Module Memory Check
Sum Error - special
memory failure
45
Module Memory Check
Sum Error - program
memory failure
P060442
Internal Control
Module Random
Access Memory (RAM)
Error - general
memory failure
P060443
Internal Control
Module Random
Access Memory (RAM)
Error - Special

water ingress

water ingress

water ingress

for open circuit. Refer to the electrical circuit

diagrams and check Engine Control Module (ECM)
battery monitor circuit for open circuit.
battery circuit for high resistance. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check alternator
circuit for open circuit, high resistance. Check and
install a new alternator as required. Refer to the
battery circuit for high resistance. Check and
install a new alternator as required. Refer to the
brake switch 2 circuit for short to ground. Check
and install a new brake switch 2 as required.
brake switch 1 circuit for open circuit. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check brake switch
2 circuit for open circuit. Check and install a new
brake switch 2 as required.
cruise control switch circuit for short to ground.
Check for stuck speed control switch, install a new
switch pack as required.
Check the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) control
module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index.
Check for Active Speed Limiter (ASL) DTCs within
Gear Shift Module (GSM). Check and install a new
Gear Shift Module (GSM) as required. Refer to the
module is suspect.
system. Check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
supply circuit for open circuit. Check Engine
Control Module (ECM) for signs of water ingress.
system, check Engine Control Module (ECM) power
memory failure

water ingress
P060444
Internal Control
Module Random
Access Memory (RAM)
Error - Data memory
failure
P060500
Internal Control
Module Read Only
Memory (ROM) Error no sub type
information
P060529
Internal Control
Module Read Only
Memory (ROM) Error signal invalid
P060542
Internal Control
Module Read Only
Memory (ROM) Error general memory
failure
P060544
Internal Control
Module Read Only
Memory (ROM) Error data memory failure
P060546
Internal Control
Module Read Only
Memory (ROM) Error calibration / parameter
memory failure
P060548
Internal Control
Module Read Only
Memory (ROM) Error supervision software
failure
P060564
Internal Control
Module Read Only
Memory (ROM) Error signal plausibility
failure
P060601
Control Module
Processor - general
Electrical Failure

water ingress

water ingress

water ingress

water ingress

water ingress

water ingress

water ingress

water ingress



water ingress
P060604
Control Module
Processor - system
internal failures
P060605
Control Module
Processor - system
programming failures
P060641
Control Module
Processor - general
checksum failure
P060642
Control Module
Processor - general
memory failure
P060643
Control Module
Processor - special
memory failure
P060644
Control Module
Processor - data
memory failure

water ingress

water ingress

water ingress

water ingress

water ingress

water ingress
P0606Control Module
47
Processor - watchdog /
safety micro controller
failure
P0606Control Module
48
Processor - supervision
software failure
P060649
Control Module
Processor - internal
electronic failure

water ingress

water ingress


water ingress
P0607Control Module
00
Performance - no sub
type information
P0610- Control Module Vehicle

43
Options Error - special
memory failure
P0615- Starter Relay Circuit 13

circuit open
P0616- Starter Relay Circuit
11
ground
P0617- Starter Relay Circuit
12
battery
P061AInternal Control
00
Module Torque
type information
P061A04
Internal Control
Module Torque
Performance - System
Internal Failures
P061A29
Internal Control
Module Torque
Performance - signal
invalid
P061A64
Internal Control
Module Torque
P061B62
Internal Control
Module Torque
Calculation
compare failure
P062001
Generator Control
Circuit - General
Electrical Failure

water ingress
Clear the DTC and re-test. Re-configure the Engine
Control Module (ECM) using the manufacturer
Corrupt Rear Junction (RJB ) approved diagnostic system. Re-configure the Rear
Junction Box (RJB) using the manufacturer
Box software flash
approved diagnostic system. Re-configure the
Corrupt Central Junction Box
Central Junction Box (CJB) using the manufacturer
(CJB) software flash
approved diagnostic system.
Starter relay control circuit
open circuit
starter relay control circuit for open circuit. Check
and install a new starter relay as required.
short to ground
starter relay control circuit for short to ground.
Check and install a new starter relay as required.
short to power
starter relay control circuit for short to power.
Check and install a new starter relay as required.
Manifold air flow sensor(s)
Check for related DTCs. Check manifold air flow
failure
sensors are reading correctly. Check and install a
Electric throttle unit failure new manifold air flow sensor(s) as required. Check
throttle position sensors are reading the same
position. Check throttle body is clear of any
deposits. Check and install a new electric throttle
unit as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
Check for related DTCs. Check manifold air flow
failure
sensors are reading correctly. Check and install a
Electric throttle unit failure new manifold air flow sensor(s) as required. Check
throttle position sensors are reading the same
position. Check throttle body is clear of any
deposits. Check and install a new electric throttle
unit as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a component is suspect
Check for related DTCs. Check intake air system
for leaks. Check manifold air flow sensors are
failure
reading correctly. Check and install a new air flow
Electric throttle unit failure
sensor(s) as required. Check throttle position
Accelerator pedal position
sensors are reading the same position. Check
sensor failure
throttle body is clear of any deposits. Check and
install a new electric throttle unit as required.
failure
Check and install a new accelerator pedal position
sensor as required. Check and install a new Engine
module is suspect.
Check for related DTCs. Check intake air system
Manifold air flow sensor(s) for leaks and is correctly installed. Check manifold
failure
air flow sensors are reading correctly. Check and
install a new manifold air flow sensor(s) as
required.
Check intake air system for leaks. Check engine
Engine breather system leak breather system for leaks. Check and install a new
Manifold air flow sensor
manifold air flow sensor as required. Check and
failure
install a new electric throttle unit as required.
Electric throttle unit failure Check and install a new accelerator pedal position
Accelerator pedal position sensor as required. Check and install a new Engine
sensor failure
failure
module is suspect.
Generator B+ or battery
Check for good/clean contact at generator B+ and
terminal disconnected/poor battery terminal connectors. Refer to the electrical
connection
circuit diagrams and check charging circuit for
Charging circuit short, open
short, open circuit. Clear DTC and repeat
circuit
Generator failure
P0627- Fuel Pump A Control

00
Circuit / Open - no sub
type information
P062A00
Fuel Pump A Control

Circuit
information
P0630- VIN Not Programmed
00
or Incompatible ECM/PCM - no sub
type information
P0634PCM / ECM/ TCM

22
Internal Temperature
Too High - signal
amplitude > maximum
P0634PCM / ECM / TCM
4B
A Too High - over
temperature
P0642Sensor Reference
00
Voltage A Circuit Low no sub type
information
P0643Sensor Reference
00
Voltage A Circuit High
- no sub type
information
P065B16
Generator Control
Circuit
Range/Performance circuit voltage below
threshold
P065B17
Generator Control
Circuit
Range/Performance circuit voltage above
threshold
P065C- Generator Mechanical

00
type information
High pressure fuel pump 1
circuit to Fuel Pump Driver

Module (FPDM) short to
ground, power, open circuit,
high resistance
Invalid fuel pump duty
requested by the Engine
Car Configuration File (CCF)

remains suspect the generator, check and install a
new generator as required. Refer to the warranty
policy and procedures manual if a component is
suspect.
high pressure fuel pump 1 circuit for short to
ground, power, open circuit, high resistance.

the Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM) circuit for
short to ground, power, open circuit, high
resistance.

to CAN VIN mismatch
New Engine Control Module
system, clear DTC and re-test. Re-configure the
(ECM) fitted and incorrectly Central Junction Box (CJB) using the manufacturer
configured
approved diagnostic system. Check and install a
New Central Junction Box
(CJB) fitted and incorrectly
configured
Clear the DTC. With the ignition off, wait 10
(ECM) internal temperature
minutes and re-check DTC. Check and install a
too high
Clear the DTC. With the ignition off, wait 10
minutes and re-check DTC. Check and install a
too high
Short circuit to power of a
5V output pin, either in the 5V supply circuit for short to ground open circuit,
harness, or a connector
high resistance, terminal damage or corrosion.
Internal short circuit in a
Check Engine Control Module (ECM) for sensor
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
faulty component
Short circuit to ground of a
5V output pin, either in the 5V supply circuit for short to power open circuit,
harness, or a connector
high resistance, terminal damage or corrosion.
Internal short circuit in a
Check Engine Control Module (ECM) for sensor
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
faulty component
Generator B+ or battery
terminal disconnected/poor battery terminal connectors. Refer to the electrical
connection
Charging circuit short, open
circuit
Generator failure
Battery failure
new generator as required. Ensure the battery is in
a fully charged and serviceable condition. Refer to
the battery care manual and the relevant sections
of the workshop manual. Refer to the warranty
suspect.
Charging circuit short to
power
battery terminal connectors. Refer to the electrical
Generator failure
Battery failure
new generator as required. Ensure the battery is in
a fully charged and serviceable condition. Refer to
the battery care manual and the relevant sections
of the workshop manual. Refer to the warranty
suspect.
Poor front end accessory
Check front end accessory belt for
belt tension
condition/contamination and correct tension.
Generator pulley
Check generator pulley for failure. Clear DTC and
loose/failure
repeat automated diagnostic procedure using
Generator failure
P0660- Intake Manifold Tuning

13
Valve Control Circuit
Low - Bank 1 - circuit
open
11
short to ground
12
short to battery
00
Sensor A Circuit Low no sub type
information
00
information
P0687- ECM/PCM Power Relay
73
Control Circuit High actuator stuck closed
P069500
Fan 3 Control Circuit

Low - no sub type
information
P0696- Fan 3 Control Circuit
12
battery
P0696- Fan 3 Control Circuit
13
High - circuit open
P072185
Output Shaft Speed

Sensor Circuit
Range/Performance signal above allowable
range
P0721- Output Shaft Speed
86
Sensor Circuit
P0850- Park / Neutral Switch
86
Input Circuit - signal
invalid

8F
Input Circuit - erratic

14
Input Circuit Low circuit short to ground
or open
12
Input Circuit Low circuit short to battery
P0A1AGenerator Control
87
Module - missing

remains check and install a new generator as
Intake manifold tuning valve Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
intake manifold tuning valve circuit for open
circuit.
Intake manifold tuning valve
Intake manifold tuning valve

sensor failure

sensor failure
(ECM) relay circuit short to

power
(ECM) relay failure
E-Box fan circuit short to
ground
E-Box fan failure
E-Box fan circuit short to
power
E-Box fan failure
E-Box fan circuit open circuit
E-Box fan failure

intake manifold tuning valve circuit for short to
ground.
manifold tuning valve circuit for short to power.



Engine Control Module (ECM) relay circuit for short
to power. Check and install a new Engine Control
Module (ECM) relay as required.

E-Box fan circuit for short to ground. Check and
install a new E-Box fan as required.
E-Box fan circuit for short to power. Check and
install a new E-Box fan as required.
E-Box fan circuit for open circuit. Check and install
a new E-Box fan as required.
Check Transmission Control Module (TCM) for
(TCM) has reported a fault in
the shaft speed signal
(TCM) has taken to 8

seconds or longer to change
range
Intermittent fault on
Park/Neutral signal from
CAN network failure between
and Engine Control Module
(ECM)
Intermittent fault on
Park/Neutral signal from
GSM
CAN network failure between
and Engine Control Module
(ECM)
circuit

Generator to Engine Control
Module (ECM) Engine
Check Transmission Control Module (TCM) for

Check Gear Shift Module (GSM) for related DTCs

and refer to relevant DTC Index. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check Park/Neutral
switch input circuit for short to ground, power,
open circuit. Carry out the CAN network integrity
test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
Check Gear Shift Module (GSM) for related DTCs
and refer to relevant DTC Index. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check Park/Neutral
switch input circuit for short to ground, power,
open circuit. Carry out the CAN network integrity
system.
park/neutral switch input circuit for short to
ground, open circuit.
park/neutral switch input circuit for short to
power.
Check for good/clean contact at generator and
Engine Control Module (ECM) LIN circuit
P0A1A88
message
Control Module (ECM) LIN

Generator/Engine Control
Module (ECM) failure
Generator Control
Module - bus off
Generator to Engine Control
P0A3BGenerator Over
68
Temperature - event
information
P115D- Mass Air Flow Circuit
00
Offset - no sub type
information
P1315- Persistent Misfire - No

00
P1316- Injector Driver Module

00
Codes Detected - no
P1593- Cruise Control Monitor

64
Fault - signal
P1603- EEPROM Malfunction 00

no sub type
information
Module (ECM) Engine

Control Module (ECM) LIN
Generator/Engine Control
Module (ECM) failure

Coolant level low
NOTE: Customer likely to
connectors/pins. Refer to the electrical circuit

diagrams and check generator circuit for open
circuit. Check for Engine Control Module (ECM)
hardware DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
Clear DTCs and repeat automated diagnostic
procedure using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. If DTC remains check and
install a new generator/Engine Control Module
Check for good/clean contact at generator and
Engine Control Module (ECM) LIN circuit
connectors/pins. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check generator circuit for open
circuit. Check for Engine Control Module (ECM)
hardware DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
Clear DTCs and repeat automated diagnostic
diagnostic system. If DTC remains check and
install a new generator/Engine Control Module
Check for correct cooling fan operation. Check
coolant level. Clear DTC and re-test.

system check datalogger signal, Mass Air Flow
Sensor 2 Voltage (0x0503). Check air cleaner for
blockage.
Check air intake system for leaks. Check
Air cleaner blocked
engine breather system for blockages. Check for
Air intake leak
carbon build up on throttle blade. Check for
Engine breather blocked
related mass air flow DTCs P0102 or P0103. Refer
Air intake blockage
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check mass
Carbon build up on throttle
air flow sensor circuit for high resistance. Check
blade
and install a new mass air flow sensor as
required .
high resistance
Blocked catalyst(s)
Check for cylinder mis-fire, ignition and injector
(ECM) to ignition coil
DTCs and refer to the DTC Index. Refer to the
primary circuit fault (cylinder electrical circuit diagrams and check ignition coil
misfire detected DTC also
flagged)
Check for fuel system failure. Check and install a
Fuel injector circuit fault(s) new spark plug(s) as required. Carry out cylinder
compression tests. Check exhaust system for
blockage.
Spark plug
failure/fouled/incorrect gap
Check for cylinder mis-fire, ignition and injector
(ECM) to ignition coil
DTCs and refer to the DTC Index. Refer to the
primary circuit fault (cylinder electrical circuit diagrams and check ignition coil
misfire detected DTC also
flagged)
Check for fuel system failure. Check and install a
Fuel injector circuit fault(s) new spark plug(s) as required. Carry out cylinder
compression tests. Check exhaust system for
blockage.
Spark plug
failure/fouled/incorrect gap
Cruise control monitor fault. Check the car configuration and contact the Jaguar
Landrover helpdesk.
(ECM) performs a
independent check of the
cruise status
report hesitation.
water ingress
P208811
P208912
P209011
P209112
P209211
P209312
P209411
P209512
P209600
A Camshaft Position
Actuator Control
Circuit Low Bank 1 circuit short to ground
A Camshaft Position
Actuator Control
Circuit High Bank 1 circuit short to battery
B Camshaft Position
Actuator Control
B Camshaft Position
Actuator Control
A Camshaft Position
Actuator Control
A Camshaft Position
Actuator Control
B Camshaft Position
Actuator Control
B Camshaft Position
Actuator Control
System Too Lean Bank
1 - no sub type
information
P2097- Post Catalyst Fuel Trim

00
System Too Rich Bank
1 - no sub type
information

00
System Too Lean Bank
2 - no sub type
information

00
System Too Rich Bank
2 - no sub type
information

Intake valve solenoid 1 short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to ground
intake valve solenoid 1 for short to ground.
to power
short to ground
short to power
intake valve solenoid 1 for short to power.

exhaust valve solenoid 1 for short to ground.

exhaust valve solenoid 1 for short to power.
to ground
intake valve solenoid 2 for short to ground.
to power
short to ground
short to power
odd, sensing circuit short to

ground, high resistance,
open circuit
Air leak between the two
oxygen sensors
odd, failure
odd, sensing circuit short to
open circuit
oxygen sensors
odd, failure
even, sensing circuit short to
open circuit
oxygen sensors
even, failure
even, sensing circuit short to
open circuit
oxygen sensors
intake valve solenoid 2 for short to power.

exhaust valve solenoid 2 for short to ground.

exhaust valve solenoid 2 for short to power.

manifold. Check for air leak between the two
oxygen sensors. Check and install new post
catalyst oxygen sensor odd, as required.

catalyst oxygen sensor odd, as required.

post catalyst oxygen sensor even, sensing circuit
catalyst oxygen sensor even, as required.

post catalyst oxygen sensor even, sensing circuit
catalyst oxygen sensor even, as required.
even, failure
P210500
Throttle Actuator
Control System Forced Engine
Shutdown - no sub
type information
P2118Throttle Actuator
19
Control Motor Current
Range/Performance circuit current above
threshold
00
Control Throttle Body
information
29
64
Range/Performance signal plausibility
failure
00
Sensor/Switch D
type information

00
Sensor/Switch D
type information

00
Sensor/Switch E
type information

00
Sensor/Switch E
type information
Engine speed or torque
limitation has been activated

as a result of Engine Control
Module (ECM), throttle pedal
position sensor, or torque
faults
Throttle motor control circuit
short to ground, power, high
resistance
(ECM) ground circuit fault
blade
Electronic throttle unit
failure
Check for any DTCs referring to Engine Control

Module (ECM), throttle pedal position sensor, or
torque faults.

electric throttle unit circuit for short to ground,
power, high resistance. Refer to the electrical
(ECM) ground circuit for faults. Make sure throttle
blade is clean of carbon. Check the system is
operating correctly and the DTC does not return.
Check and install a new electronic throttle unit as
Carbon build-up on throttle Make sure throttle blade is clean of carbon. Refer
blade
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Engine
Control Module (ECM) ground circuit for faults.
(ECM) ground circuit fault
Check the system is operating correctly and the
DTC does not return. Suspect electronic throttle
return spring faulty
unit faulty. Check and install a new electronic
Electronic throttle unit limp
throttle unit as required. Refer to the warranty
home spring faulty
suspect.
Stuck / sticking throttle
Ensure throttle blade is free of build-up / other
blade
obstructions. Suspect electric throttle unit faulty.
Check and install a new electric throttle unit as
Stuck / sticking throttle
Ensure throttle blade is free of build-up / other
blade
obstructions. Suspect electric throttle unit faulty.
Check and install a new electric throttle unit as
Electronic throttle unit,
throttle position sensor 1
electronic throttle unit, throttle position sensor 1
circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check
circuit
electronic throttle unit, VREF circuit for open
Electronic throttle unit, VREF circuit. Clear DTC and repeat automated diagnostic
diagnostic system. If DTC remains suspect the
electronic throttle unit, check and install a new
failure
electronic throttle unit as required. Refer to the
circuit for short to power. Check electronic throttle
Electronic throttle unit, GREF unit, GREF circuit for open circuit. Clear DTC and
repeat automated diagnostic procedure using the
failure
circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check
circuit
electronic throttle unit, VREF circuit for open
Electronic throttle unit, VREF circuit. Clear DTC and repeat automated diagnostic
diagnostic system. If DTC remains suspect the
electronic throttle unit, check and install a new
failure
electronic throttle unit as required. Refer to the
circuit for short to power. Check electronic throttle
Electronic throttle unit, GREF unit, GREF circuit for open circuit. Clear DTC and
repeat automated diagnostic procedure using the

Throttle pedal position
sensor circuit 1 and 2 short
throttle pedal position sensor circuit 1 and 2 for
to ground, short to power,
open circuit
failure

00
Sensor/Switch A / B
Voltage Correlation no sub type
information
09
Sensor/Switch A / B
Voltage Correlation Component Failures
64
Sensor/Switch D / E
Voltage Correlation No sub type
information
P2183Engine Coolant
23
Circuit
P2183Engine Coolant
24
Circuit
P2183Engine Coolant
29
Circuit
Throttle pedal position

sensor circuit 1 and 2 short
throttle pedal position sensor circuit 1 and 2 for
to ground, short to power,
open circuit
Analogue Pedal Position
(APP) sensor circuit 1 and 2 Analogue Pedal Position (APP) sensor circuit 1 and
short to ground, short to 2 for short to ground, short to power, open circuit.
power, open circuit
P2184Engine Coolant
16
voltage below
threshold
P2185Engine Coolant
17
voltage above
threshold
P222800
Barometric Pressure
type information
P222900
Barometric Pressure
type information
P227900
Intake Air System

Leak - no sub type
information
P2300- Ignition Coil A Primary

11
P2301- Ignition Coil A Primary
12
Control Circuit Low -
sensor 2 circuit high

sensor 2 failure
power
sensor 2 failure
power
sensor 2 failure
sensor 2 failure
Ignition turned on with an
ambient temperature of
below -40c
power
sensor 2 failure
Barometric pressure sensor
failure (internal Engine
Control Module (ECM) fault)

high resistance, open circuit. Check and install a
required.
short to power. Check and install a new engine
coolant temperature sensor 2 as required.
high resistance, open circuit, short to ground,
short to power. Check and install a new engine
coolant temperature sensor 2 as required.

high resistance, open circuit. Check and install a
required.
Clear the DTC and re-test. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check engine coolant
temperature sensor 2 circuit for short to power.
Check and install a new engine coolant
temperature sensor 2 as required.

Pressure Sensor Voltage (0x035A). Suspect the
Barometric pressure sensor
failure (internal Engine
Control Module (ECM) fault) Pressure Sensor Voltage (0x035A). Suspect the
Part load breather pipe
Check for related DTCs. Check part load breather
disconnected
pipe for leaks or disconnected. Check brake
Brake vacuum pipe
vacuum pipe for leaks or disconnected. Check
disconnected
intake air system for leaks.
Excessive intake air leak
Ignition coil 1 circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground
ignition coil 1 circuit for short to ground.
power
ignition coil 1 circuit for short to power.
circuit short to battery

P2303- Ignition Coil B Primary
11
P2304- Ignition Coil B Primary
12
Control Circuit Low circuit short to battery
P2306- Ignition Coil C Primary
Control Circuit Low 11
P2307- Ignition Coil C Primary
12
P2309- Ignition Coil D Primary
11
P2310- Ignition Coil D Primary
12
P2312- Ignition Coil E Primary
11
P2313- Ignition Coil E Primary
12
P2315- Ignition Coil F Primary
11
P2316- Ignition Coil F Primary
12
P2318- Ignition Coil G Primary
11
P2319- Ignition Coil G Primary
12
P2321- Ignition Coil H Primary
11
P2322- Ignition Coil H Primary
12
00
System Leak Detection
Pump Control Circuit
Low - no sub type
information

00
Pump Control Circuit
High - no sub type
information
29
Pump Sense Circuit
Range/Performance Signal invalid
2F
Pump Sense Circuit
Range/Performance signal erratic
00
Pump Sense Circuit
Low - no sub type
information
ground
power
ground
power
ground
power
ground
power
ground
power
ground
power
ground
power
Check Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL)

Leakage (DMTL) fuse failure fuse for failure and security in holder. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check Diagnostic
Leakage (DMTL) circuit short Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) circuit for short to
Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) as
Leakage (DMTL) failure
Leakage (DMTL) circuit short Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) circuit for
to power
short to power. Check and install a new Diagnostic
Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) as required. Refer to
module is suspect.
Check and install a new Diagnostic Module Tank
Leakage (DMTL) as required. Refer to the warranty
suspect.

suspect.

Leakage (DMTL) circuit short Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) circuit for
short to ground, high resistance, open circuit.
open circuit

00
Pump Sense Circuit
High - no sub type
information
P240A- Evaporative Emission
00
Pump Heater Circuit /
Open - no sub type
information
P240B- Evaporative Emission
00
Pump Heater Circuit
Low - no sub type
information
P240C- Evaporative Emission
00
Pump Heater Circuit
High - no sub type
information
00
Control System
Switching Valve
Performance/Stuck
Open - no sub type
information
00
Control System
Switching Valve
Performance/Stuck
Closed - no sub type
information
P250CEngine Oil Level
23
Sensor Circuit Low signal stuck low
P250DEngine Oil Level

24
Sensor Circuit High signal stuck high

suspect.
Blockage in Diagnostic
Check for blockage in the Blockage in Diagnostic
Module Tank Leakage
Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) ventilation pipe.
(DMTL) ventilation pipe
Leakage (DMTL) circuit,
open circuit
suspect.
Leakage (DMTL) circuit,
Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) heater
open circuit
circuit for open circuit. Check and install a new
Diagnostic Module Tank Leakage (DMTL) as
Leakage (DMTL) heater
circuit short to ground, high
circuit for short to ground, high resistance.
resistance
Leakage (DMTL) heater


failure

failure
P2544- Torque Management

64
Request Input Signal A
failure
Inappropriate request from
P2544- Torque Management

92
Request Input Signal A
- performance or
incorrect operation
Inappropriate request from
P261000
ECM/PCM Internal
Engine Off Timer
type information

(ABS)

(ABS)
(IPC) fault
fault

circuit for short to power.

suspect.

suspect.

temperature level sensor circuit for short to
ground. Check and install a new oil temperature
level sensor as required. Refer to the warranty
suspect.
temperature level sensor circuit for short to power.
Check and install a new oil temperature level
sensor as required. Refer to the warranty policy
Check for related DTCs within Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) module and refer to the relevant
DTC index. Carry out the CAN network integrity
system.
Check for related DTCs within Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) module and refer to the relevant
DTC index. Carry out the CAN network integrity
system.
Check for DTCs related to any of the components
listed and refer to relevant DTC Index. Carry out
the CAN network integrity test using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
CAN network error
P261084
ECM/PCM Engine Off

Timer Performance signal below allowable
range

(IPC) fault
listed and refer to relevant DTC Index. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check engine
fault
coolant temperature sensor circuit for short to
Engine coolant temperature ground, power, open circuit. Refer to the electrical
sensor fault
Ambient temperature sensor
fault
Low battery voltage
CAN network error
P261085
ECM/PCM Engine Off

Timer Performance signal above allowable
range
(IPC) fault
fault
sensor fault
fault
Low battery voltage
CAN network error
P261087
ECM/PCM Internal
Engine Off Timer
Performance - missing
message
(IPC) fault
fault
sensor fault
fault
CAN network error
U0001High Speed CAN

88
Communication Bus bus off
High speed CAN bus circuit,
short to ground
High speed CAN bus circuit,
short to power
High speed CAN bus, open
circuit diagrams and check ambient air

temperature sensor circuit for short to ground,
power, open circuit. Check the battery voltage,
repair as required. Carry out the CAN network
integrity test using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system.
listed and refer to relevant DTC Index. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check engine
ground, power, open circuit. Refer to the electrical
power, open circuit. Check the battery voltage,
repair as required. Carry out the CAN network
diagnostic system.
listed, and refer to relevant DTC Index, refer to
ground, power, open circuit, refer to the electrical
power, open circuit, carry out the CAN network
diagnostic system.
CAN network for short to ground, power, open
circuit. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, carry out network integrity
test.
circuit
U010100
Lost Communication
with TCM - no sub
type information
U0103- Lost Communication

00
with Gear Shift Control
Module A - no sub type
information
00
With Cruise Control
Module - no sub type
information

00
With Anti-lock Braking
information
U012800
Lost Communication
With Park Brake
Control Module - no
CAN link Engine Control

Module (ECM)/Transmission system, check Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Control Module (TCM)
for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
network malfunction
Transmission Control Module system, carry out network integrity test. Refer to
(TCM) fault
the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Transmission Control Module (TCM) power and
ground circuit for open circuit. Check CAN harness
to Transmission Control Module (TCM), repair as
necessary.
CAN link Engine Control
Module (ECM)/Gear Shift
power and ground connections to the Gear Shift
Module (GSM) network
Module (GSM). Carry out the CAN integrity tests
malfunction
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic tool.
Vehicle configured for speed
Check vehicle has correct speed control module
control, but speed control
installed. Using the manufacturer approved
module is not installed
diagnostic system, check speed control module,
CAN Link Engine Control
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module for DTCs
Module (ECM)/speed control
and refer to the relevant DTC Index. Using the
module network malfunction manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry
Speed control module power out network integrity test. Refer to the electrical
or ground circuit, open
circuit diagrams and check speed control module
circuit
power and ground circuit for open circuit. Check
CAN harness to speed control module, repair as
necessary.
Module (ECM)/Anti-lock
system, check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Index. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, carry out network integrity
(ABS) module power or
test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground circuit, open circuit
check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module
power and ground circuit for open circuit. Check
CAN harness to Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
module, repair as necessary.
Module (ECM)/Electronic
power and ground supplies to Electronic Parking
Parking Brake (EPB) signal Brake (EPB). Carry out the CAN network integrity
missing network malfunction test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
U013200
Lost Communication
with Suspension
Control Module A - no

00
with Restraints Control
information
87
with Restraints Control
Module - missing
message

00
with Instrument Panel
Cluster (IPC) - no sub
type information
U016700
Lost Communication
with Vehicle
Immobilizer Control
information
U030000
Internal Control
Module Software
U0402- Invalid Data Received

00
From Transmission
Control Module - no

08
from TCM - bus
signal / message
failures

64
from TCM - Signal

82
from TCM - alive /
sequence counter
83
from TCM - Value of
signal protection
00
From Anti-lock Braking
information
CAN link/suspension control

module network malfunction power and ground supplies to suspension control
module. Carry out the CAN network integrity test
system.
power and ground supplies to restraints control
(RCM) over CAN or
module. Carry out the CAN network integrity test
hardwired link
system.
Lost communication due to
Check Restraints Control Module for associated
Restraints Control Module DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Refer to the
(RCM) fault
electrical circuit diagrams and check power and
ground supplies to restraints control module. Carry
out the CAN network integrity test using the
CAN link between Engine
Control Module (ECM) and
power and ground supplies to Instrument Panel
Cluster. Carry out the CAN network integrity test
(IPC) fault
system.
Security challenge response Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
timeout
power and ground supplies to the Electric Steering
Battery fault
Column Lock (ESCL). Check for related CAN DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC index. Ensure the
battery is in a fully charged and serviceable
condition. Refer to the battery care manual and
the relevant sections of the workshop manual.
Carry out the CAN network integrity test using the
Check and install the correct Engine Control
(ECM) has incorrect software
Module (ECM) software. Check and install the
installed
correct Engine Control Module (ECM) as required.
(ECM) is in expulsion mode.
An incorrect specification
(ECM) has been installed to
the vehicle
Transmission Engine Control
system, check Transmission Control Module (TCM),
Module (ECM) request
corruption
system, carry out network integrity test. Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check high
speed CAN bus circuit for short, open circuit.
Transmission Engine Control
Module (ECM) request
corruption
High speed CAN bus circuit
failure, short, open circuit
Transmission to Engine
request corruption
High speed CAN bus signal
corruption
(TCM) shaft-speed faults system, check Transmission Control Module (TCM),
(TCM) shaft-speed faults

failure

system, check for electronic throttle unit DTCs
repair as necessary. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check electronic unit harness for
short circuit, open circuit. Refer to the warranty
failure

suspect, if the electronic throttle unit is suspect.
harness short, open circuit

64
Module - signal
67
Module - signal
incorrect after event
00
From Vehicle
Immobilizer Control
information

81
From Gateway "A" invalid serial data
received
Invalid request from Anti-

lock Braking System (ABS) system, check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS), for
Torque up request higher DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index. Refer to
than expected from Anti-lock
Torque up request higher
than expected from Anti-lock system, check Anti-lock Braking System (ABS), for
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index. Refer to
Security code mis-match
Check CAN network between Engine Control
This DTC will be logged if
Module (ECM), Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) and
the encrypted data
Central Junction Box (CJB). Refer to the electrical
exchange does not match
circuit diagrams and check power and ground
circuit to Engine Control Module (ECM) and
Module (ECM) and the
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC). Check correct
Engine Control Module (ECM) and Instrument
(IPC) or Central Junction Panel Cluster (IPC) installed. Re-synchronise ID by
Box (CJB)
re-configuring the Engine Control Module (ECM)
and Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) as new
modules.
The LIN to high speed CAN This DTC has been inhibited in the Engine Control
gateway has informed the
Module (ECM), as the LIN bus flag is set during
normal operation.
(ECM) of a failure
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Powertrain Control Module

(PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures
WARNING: Where possible, all road tests should be on well surfaced and dry roads. Always comply with speed
limits and local traffic regulations.
NOTE: The vehicle must exceed 50mph (80 km/h) during the road test.
1.
2.

fault codes.
3.
4.
5.
NOTE: Make sure cruise control is not engaged.

Make sure the engine temperature is above 60 C (140 F).
Carry out a road test and perform the following operations.
1. Accelerate to 55 mph (88 km/h) in 5th gear and cruise
for 2 minutes with the engine speed at or above
1800rpm.
2. Lift off the throttle and allow the vehicle to decelerate
until the engine speed is less than 1000 rpm.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Release brake, allow the vehicle to move with no throttle
for 1 minute.
5. Road test is now complete.
6.
7.

fault codes.
8.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Powertrain Control Module

(PCM) Short Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures
1.
2.

fault codes.
3.
4.
Start the engine.

minutes until a temperature of 70C (158 F) is
achieved.
5.

fault codes.
6.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft Position (CMP)

Sensor LH
Removal
All vehicles
1.


2.

and Installation).

3.

Installation).
All vehicles
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
material.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Camshaft Position (CMP)

Sensor RH
Removal
All vehicles
1.


2.

and Installation).

3.

Installation).
All vehicles
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
material.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Catalyst Monitor Sensor

LH
Removal
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
4.
5.

6.
7.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:


2.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Catalyst Monitor Sensor

RH
Removal
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
4.
5.
6.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:


2.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Crankshaft Position (CKP)

Sensor
Removal
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.

dismantling.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
Make sure that the component is clean, free of foreign

material and lubricant.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Control Module

(ECM)
Removal
1.

2.
3.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
Torque: 6 Nm
6.
7.
8.
Torque: 7 Nm
Torque: 9 Nm
Installation
1.
2.
Configure the engine control module (ECM) using the diagnostic

tool.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Coolant

Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Removal
1.

2.
3.

Procedures).
4.
Lift the tang and rotate the engine coolant
temperature (ECT) sensor counterclockwise.
Installation
1.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Engine Oil Level Sensor

Removal
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.
Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01D, General

Procedures).
4.

fluids.
Torque: 11 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be installed.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Front Knock Sensor (KS)

LH
Removal
1.

2.

3.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
1.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Front Knock Sensor (KS)

RH
Removal
1.

2.

3.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
1.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP)

Sensor
Removal
1.

Procedures).
2.
3.
4.

fluids.

Torque: 32 Nm
Installation
1.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Heated Oxygen Sensor

(HO2S) LH
Special Tool(s)
310-121
Wrench, H02S
Removal
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
4.

5.
6.
7.
8.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:

HO2S tip.

or driveshaft.
2.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Heated Oxygen Sensor

(HO2S) RH
Special Tool(s)
310-121
Wrench, H02S
Removal
1.

2.

3.
and Installation).
4.

5.
6.
7.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:

HO2S tip.

or driveshaft.
2.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Manifold Absolute Pressure

and Temperature (MAPT) Sensor
Removal
1.
2.
Torque: 5 Nm
Installation
1.
2.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Mass Air Flow (MAF)

Sensor
Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Air Cleaner RH (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and

3.
Installation
1.
2.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Rear Knock Sensor (KS)

LH
Removal
1.

2.

3.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
1.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Rear Knock Sensor (KS)

RH
Removal
1.

2.

3.
Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
1.
Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Variable Valve Timing

(VVT) Oil Control Solenoid LH
Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.


3.

and Installation).

4.

Installation).
All vehicles
5.
6.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
2.

Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol - Variable Valve Timing (VVT)

Oil Control Solenoid RH
Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.


3.

Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).

4.

Installation).
All vehicles
5.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
2.

Refer to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Short Drive Cycle SelfTest (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

high temperature grease

transmission fluid
Specifications
Molecote FB180 / Jaguar 8309
Shell M1375.4
Capacities
Liters
10.0
10.0
6.0
Transmission fluid vehicles without supercharger

Transmission fluid vehicles with supercharger
Service fill
NOTE: * New nut/bolt must be installed

NOTE: A = refer to the procedure for correct torque sequence
Item
Crossmember to vehicle body retaining bolts
Fluid pan, gasket and filter retaining bolts
Mass damper to crossmember retaining bolts
Output shaft flange retaining nut*
Selector lever to transmission retaining nut
Support insulator to crossmember retaining bolts
Support insulator to transmission retaining bolts
Flexplate to torque converter retaining bolts
Torque converter housing to engine
Transmission control module and Main control valve body retaining bolts
Transmission fluid - drain plug
Transmission fluid - fill plug
Transmission heat shield
Nm
48
8
10
60
12
70
48
62
48
8
8
A
9
lb-ft
35
7
44
9
52
35
46
35
7
lb-in
71
71
71
-
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Transmission Description

COMPONENT LOCATION
INTRODUCTION
The ZF 6HP28 transmission is an electronically controlled, hydraulically operated, six speed automatic unit. The hydraulic and
electronic control elements of the transmission, including the TCM (transmission control module), are incorporated in a single
unit located inside the transmission and is known as 'Mechatronic'.
On SC (supercharger) models, the transmission used is an uprated derivative of the ZF 6HP28 transmission used in the 5.0L
naturally aspirated models.
The ZF 6HP28 transmission has the following features:
Designed to be maintenance free
Transmission fluid is 'fill for life'
The torque converter features a controlled slip feature with electronically regulated control of lock-up, creating a
www.JagDocs.com
smooth transition to the fully locked condition

Shift programs controlled by the TCM
Electronic park lock, controlled by the TCM, with a mechanical emergency release
ASIS (adaptive shift strategy), to provide continuous adaptation of shift changes to suit the driving style of the
driver, which can vary from sporting to economical.

Connected to the ECM (engine control module) via the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus for
communications
Default mode if major faults occur
Diagnostics available from the TCM via the high speed CAN bus.
The transmission selections are made using the rotary JaguarDrive selector in the floor console and two paddle switches on
the steering wheel.
For additional information, refer to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V8 5.0L
TRANSMISSION
The transmission comprises the main casing which houses all of the transmission components. The main casing also
incorporates an integral bell housing.
A fluid pan is attached to the lower face of the main casing and is secured with bolts. The fluid pan is sealed to the main
casing with a gasket. Removal of the fluid pan allows access to the Mechatronic valve block. The fluid pan has a magnet
located around the drain plug which collects any metallic particles present in the transmission fluid.
A fluid filter is located inside the fluid pan. If the transmission fluid becomes contaminated or after any service work, the
fluid pan with integral filter must be replaced.
The integral bell housing provides protection for the torque converter assembly and also provides the attachment for the
gearbox to the engine cylinder block. The torque converter is a non-serviceable assembly which also contains the lock-up
clutch mechanism. The torque converter drives a crescent type pump via drive tangs. The fluid pump is located in the main
casing, behind the torque converter.
The main casing contains the following major components:
Input shaft
Output shaft
Mechatronic valve block which contains the solenoids, speed sensors and the TCM
Three rotating multiplate drive clutches
Two fixed multiplate brake clutches
A single planetary gear train and a double planetary gear train.
Item
Part Number
Torque converter lock-up clutch
Torque converter
Fluid pump
Single planetary gearset
Clutch A
Clutch B
Description
Clutch E
7
-
Brake C
Brake D
10
Double planetary gearset
11
Park lock gear
12
Output shaft
13
Park lock pawl
14
Drain plug
15
Magnet
16
Pressure regulator
17
Mechatronic valve block
18
Fluid filter
19
Fluid pan
20
Input shaft
21
Bell housing
TORQUE CONVERTER
Item
Part Number
Impeller
Turbine
Stator
Freewheel clutch
Torque converter hub
Stator shaft
Turbine shaft
Drive plate
Journal - Drive plate/crankshaft location
10
Torque converter cover
11
Lock-up clutch plate
12
Description
Lock-up clutch piston
The torque converter is the coupling element between the engine and the transmission and is located in the bell
housing, on the engine side of the transmission. The driven power from the engine crankshaft is transmitted hydraulically
and mechanically through the torque converter to the transmission. The torque converter is connected to the engine by a
drive plate attached to the rear of the crankshaft.
The torque converter comprises an impeller, a stator and a turbine. The torque converter is a sealed unit with all components
located between the converter housing cover and the impeller. The two components are welded together to form a sealed,
fluid filled housing. With the impeller welded to the converter housing cover, the impeller is therefore driven at engine
crankshaft speed.
The converter housing cover has four threaded bosses, which provide for attachment of the engine drive plate. The threaded
bosses also provide for location of special tools which are required to remove the torque converter from the bell housing.
Impeller
Fluid Flow
Item
Part Number
Description
Turbine
Stator
3
Impeller
When the engine is running the rotating impeller acts as a centrifugal pump, picking up fluid at its center and discharging it
at high velocity through the blades on its outer rim. The design and shape of the blades and the curve of the impeller body
cause the fluid to rotate in a clockwise direction as it leaves the impeller. This rotation improves the efficiency of the fluid as
it contacts the outer row of blades on the turbine.
The centrifugal force of the fluid leaving the blades of the impeller is passed to the curved inner surface of the turbine via the
tip of the blades. The velocity and clockwise rotation of the fluid causes the turbine to rotate.
Turbine
The turbine is similar in design to the impeller with a continuous row of blades. Fluid from the impeller enters the turbine
through the tip of the blades and is directed around the curved body of the turbine to the root of the blades. The curved
surface redirects the fluid back in the opposite direction to which it entered the turbine, effectively increasing the turning
force applied to the turbine from the impeller. This principle is known as torque multiplication.
When engine speed increases, turbine speed also increases. The fluid leaving the inner row of the turbine blades is rotated in
a counter-clockwise direction due to the curve of the turbine and the shape of the blades. The fluid is now flowing in the
opposite direction to the engine rotation and therefore the impeller. If the fluid was allowed to hit the impeller in this
condition, it would have the effect of applying a brake to the impeller, eliminating the torque multiplication effect. To prevent
this, the stator is located between the impeller and the turbine.
Stator
The stator is located on the splined transmission input shaft via a freewheel clutch. The stator comprises a number of blades
which are aligned in an opposite direction to those of the impeller and turbine. The main function of the stator is to redirect
the returning fluid from the turbine, changing its direction to that of the impeller.
The redirected fluid from the stator is directed at the inner row of blades of the impeller, assisting the engine in turning the
impeller. This sequence increases the force of the fluid emitted from the impeller and thereby increases the torque
multiplication effect of the torque converter.
Stator Functions
NOTE: The following illustration shows a typical stator
Item
Part Number
Description
Blades
Stator held fluid flow redirected
Stator rotates freely
Roller
Converter at coupling speed
Fluid flow from turbine
Converter multiplying
Fluid flow from impeller
Drive from engine
10
Impeller
11
Stator
12
Turbine
13
Output to transmission
Fluid emitted from the impeller acts on the turbine. If the turbine is rotating at a slower speed than the fluid from the
impeller, the fluid will be deflected by the turbine blades in the path 'A'. The fluid is directed at and deflected by the stator
blades from path 'B' to path 'C'. This ensures that the fluid is directed back to the pump in the optimum direction. In this
condition the sprag clutch is engaged and the force of the fluid on the stator blades assists the engine in rotating the
impeller.
As the rotational speed of the engine and therefore the turbine increases, the direction of the fluid leaving the turbine
changes to path 'D'. The fluid is now directed from the turbine to the opposite side of the stator blades, rotating the stator in
the opposite direction. To prevent the stator from resisting the smooth flow of the fluid from the turbine, the sprag clutch
releases, allowing the stator to rotate freely on its shaft.
When the stator becomes inactive, the torque converter no longer multiplies the engine torque. When the torque converter
reaches this operational condition it ceases to multiply the engine torque and acts solely as a fluid coupling, with the impeller
and the turbine rotating at approximately the same speed.
The stator uses a sprag type, one way, freewheel clutch. When the stator is rotated in a clockwise direction the sprags twist
and are wedged between the inner and outer races. In this condition the sprags transfer the rotation of the outer race to the
inner race which rotates at the same speed.
One Way Free Wheel Clutch Typical
Item
Part Number
Description
Sprags
Inner race
Outer race
Sprag and cage assembly
Sprag outer race
Sprag inner race
Retaining ring
The free wheel clutch can perform three functions; hold the stator stationary, drive the stator and free wheel allowing the
stator to rotate without a drive output. The free wheel clutch used in the ZF 6HP28 transmission is of the sprag type and
comprises an inner and outer race and a sprag and cage assembly. The inner and outer races are pressed into their related
components with which they rotate. The sprag and cage assembly is located between the inner and outer races.
The sprags are located in a cage which is a spring which holds the sprags in the 'wedge' direction and maintains them in
contact with the inner and outer races.
Referring to the illustration, the sprags are designed so that the dimension 'B' is larger than the distance between the inner
and outer race bearing surfaces. When the outer race rotates in a clockwise direction, the sprags twist and the edges across
the dimension 'B' wedge between the races, providing a positive drive through each sprag to the inner race. The dimension
'A' is smaller than the distance between the inner and outer race bearing surfaces. When the outer race rotates in an anticlockwise direction, the dimension 'A' is too small to allow the sprags to wedge between the races, allowing the outer race to
rotate freely.
On the illustration shown, when the outer race is rotated in a clockwise direction, the sprags twist and are 'wedged' between
the inner and outer races. The sprags then transfer the rotation of the outer race to the inner race, which rotates at the
same speed.
Lock-Up Clutch Mechanism

The TCC (torque converter clutch) is hydraulically controlled by an EPRS (electronic pressure regulating solenoid), which is
controlled by the TCM. This allows the torque converter to have three states of operation as follows:
Fully engaged
Controlled slip variable engagement
Fully disengaged.
The TCC is controlled by two hydraulic spool valves located in the valve block. These valves are actuated by pilot pressure
supplied via a solenoid valve which is also located in the valve block. The solenoid valve is operated by PWM (pulse width
modulation) signals from the TCM to give full, partial or no lock-up of the torque converter.
Item
Part Number
Description
Unlocked condition
Locked condition
Clutch plate
Clutch piston
Torque converter body
Turbine
Impeller
Stator
Piston chamber
Turbine chamber
8
The lock-up clutch is a hydro-mechanical device which eliminates torque converter slip, improving fuel consumption. The
engagement and disengagement is controlled by the TCM to allow a certain amount of controlled 'slip'. This allows a small
difference in the rotational speeds of the impeller and the turbine which results in improved shift quality. The lock-up clutch
comprises a piston and a clutch friction plate.
In the unlocked condition, the oil pressure supplied to the piston chamber and the turbine chamber is equal. Pressurized fluid
flows through a drilling in the turbine shaft and through the piston chamber to the turbine chamber. In this condition the
clutch plate is held away from the torque converter body and torque converter slip is permitted.
In the locked condition, the TCC spool valves are actuated by the EPRS. The fluid flow in the unlocked condition is reversed
and the piston chamber is vented. Pressurized fluid is directed into the turbine chamber and is applied to the clutch piston.
The piston moves with the pressure and pushes the clutch plate against the torque converter body. As the pressure
increases, the friction between the clutch plate and the body increases, finally resulting in full lock-up of the clutch plate with
the body. In this condition there is direct mechanical drive from the engine crankshaft to the transmission planetary gear
train.
FLUID PUMP
The fluid pump is an integral part of the transmission. The fluid pump is used to supply hydraulic pressure for the operation
of the control valves and clutches, to pass the fluid through the transmission cooler and to lubricate the gears and shafts.
The ZF 6HP28 fluid pump is a crescent type pump and is located between the intermediate plate and the torque converter.
The pump has a delivery rate of 16 cm3 per revolution.
Item
Part Number
Description
Securing ring
Shaft oil seal
O-ring seal
Pump housing
Ring gear
Crescent spacer
Roller bearing
Impeller
Centering pin
10
Spring washer
11
Outlet port (high pressure)
12
Inlet port (low pressure)
The pump comprises a housing, a crescent spacer, an impeller and a ring gear. The housing has inlet and outlet ports to
direct flow and is located in the intermediate plate by a centering pin. The pump action is achieved by the impeller, ring gear
and crescent spacer.
The crescent spacer is fixed in its position by a pin and is located between the ring gear and the impeller. The impeller is
driven by drive from the torque converter hub which is located on a needle roller bearing in the pump housing. The impeller
teeth mesh with those of the ring gear. When the impeller is rotated, the motion is transferred to the ring gear which rotates
in the same direction.
The rotational motion of the ring gear and the impeller collects fluid from the intake port in the spaces between the teeth.
When the teeth reach the crescent spacer, the oil is trapped in the spaces between the teeth and is carried with the rotation
of the gears. The spacer tapers near the outlet port. This reduces the space between the gear teeth causing a build up of
fluid pressure as the oil reaches the outlet port. When the teeth pass the end of the spacer the pressurized fluid is released
into the outlet port.
The fluid emerging from the outlet port is passed through the fluid pressure control valve. At high operating speeds the
pressure control valve maintains the output pressure to the gearbox at a predetermined maximum level. Excess fluid is
relieved from the pressure control valve and is directed, via the main pressure valve in the valve block, back to the pump
inlet port. This provides a pressurized feed to the pump inlet which prevents cavitation and reduces pump noise.
MECHATRONIC VALVE BLOCK

The Mechatronic valve block is located in the bottom of the transmission and is covered by the fluid pan. The valve block
houses the TCM, electrical actuators, speed sensors and control valves which provide all electro-hydraulic control for all
transmission functions. The Mechatronic valve block comprises the following components:
TCM
Pressure regulator solenoids
Shift control solenoid
Damper
Hydraulic spool valves
Selector valve
Temperature sensor
Turbine speed sensor
Output shaft speed sensor.
Sensors
Speed Sensors
The turbine speed sensor and the output shaft speed sensor are Hall effect type sensors located in the Mechatronic valve
block and are not serviceable items. The TCM monitors the signals from each sensor to determine the input (turbine) speed
and the output shaft speed.
The turbine speed is monitored by the TCM to calculate the slip of the torque converter clutch and internal clutch slip. This
signal allows the TCM to accurately control the slip timing during shifts and adjust clutch application or release pressure for
overlap shift control.
The output shaft speed is monitored by the TCM and compared to engine speed signals received on the CAN bus from the
ECM. Using a comparison of the two signals the TCM calculates the transmission slip ratio for plausibility and maintains
adaptive pressure control.
Temperature Sensor
The temperature sensor is also located in the Mechatronic valve block. The TCM uses the temperature sensor signals to
determine the temperature of the transmission fluid. These signals are used by the TCM to control the transmission
operation to promote faster warm-up in cold conditions or to assist with fluid cooling by controlling the transmission
operation when high fluid temperatures are experienced. If the sensor fails, the TCM will use a default value and a fault code
will be stored in the TCM.
Damper
There is one damper located in the valve housing. The damper is used to regulate and dampen the regulated pressure
supplied via EPRS. The damper is load dependent through modulation of the damper against return spring pressure.
The damper comprises a piston, a housing bore and a spring. The piston is subject to the pressure applied by the spring. The
bore has a connecting port to the function to which it applies. Fluid pressure applied to the applicable component (i.e. a
clutch) is also subjected to the full area of the piston, which moves against the opposing force applied by the spring. The
movement of the piston creates an action similar to a shock absorber, momentarily delaying the build up of pressure in the
circuit. This results in a more gradual application of clutches improving shift quality.
Spool Valves
The valve block spool valves control various functions of the transmission. The spool valves are of conventional design and
are operated by fluid pressure.
Each spool valve is located in its spool bore and held in a default (unpressurized) position by a spring. The spool bore has a
number of ports which allow fluid to flow to other valves and clutches to enable transmission operation. Each spool has a
piston which is waisted to allow fluid to be diverted into the applicable ports when the valve is operated.
When fluid pressure moves a spool, one or more ports in the spool bore are covered or uncovered. Fluid is prevented from
flowing or is allowed to flow around the applicable waisted area of the spool and into another uncovered port. The fluid is
either passed through galleries to actuate another spool, operate a clutch or is returned to the fluid pan.
DRIVE CLUTCHES
Multiplate Drive or Brake Clutch Typical
Item
Part Number
Description
Input shaft
Main pressure supply port
Piston
Cylinder external plate carrier
Clutch plate assembly
Baffle plate
Diaphragm spring
Output shaft
Bearing
10
Dynamic pressure equalization chamber
11
Piston chamber
12
Lubrication channel
There are three drive clutches and two brake clutches used in the ZF 6HP28 transmission. Each clutch comprises one or
more friction plates dependent on the output controlled. A typical clutch consists of a number of steel outer plates and inner
plates with friction material bonded to each face.
On SC models, the uprated transmission includes additional clutch plates to enable the transmission to manage the
additional power output of the SC engine.
The clutch plates are held apart mechanically by a diaphragm spring and hydraulically by dynamic pressure. The pressure is
derived from a lubrication channel which supplies fluid to the bearings etc. The fluid is passed via a drilling in the output
shaft into the chamber between the baffle plate and the piston. To prevent inadvertent clutch application due to pressure
build up produced by centrifugal force, the fluid in the dynamic pressure equalization chamber overcomes any pressure in
the piston chamber and holds the piston off the clutch plate assembly.
When clutch application is required, main pressure from the fluid pump is applied to the piston chamber from the supply
port. This main pressure overcomes the low pressure fluid present in the dynamic pressure equalization chamber. The piston
moves, against the pressure applied by the diaphragm spring, and compresses the clutch plate assembly. When the main
pressure falls, the diaphragm spring pushes the piston away from the clutch plate assembly, disengaging the clutch.
PLANETARY GEAR TRAINS

The planetary gear trains used on the ZF 6HP28 transmission comprise a single web planetary gear train and a double web
planetary gear train. These gear trains are known as Lepelletier type gear trains and together produce the six forward gears
and the one reverse gear.
Single Web Planetary Gear Train

The single web planetary gear train comprises:
Sunwheel
Three (naturally aspirated versions) or four (SC versions) planetary gears
Planetary gear carrier (spider)

Ring gear or annulus.
Item
Part Number
Description
Cylinder
Baffle plate
Ring gear
Sun gear
Planetary gear spider
Torque converter input shaft

6
Torque Converter Input Shaft
Item
Part Number
Planetary gear spider
Planetary gears (short)
Ring gear
Output shaft
Planetary gear carrier
Sunwheel
Description
Double planetary gears (long)

Sunwheel
The double planetary gear train comprises:
Two sunwheels
Three short planetary gears
Three long planetary gears
Planetary gear carrier
Ring gear or annulus
ELECTRONIC PARK LOCK

The park lock is electronically actuated by solenoid valve located in the valve block. The park lock is engaged by a
mechanical spring system comprising a parking disc and a lock cylinder controlled by a solenoid valve.
The park lock is engaged when the TCM receives a park request from the JaguarDrive selector. When the park lock is
released, a solenoid valve in the valve housing directs hydraulic pressure to the lock cylinder, which moves the piston within
the cylinder and releases the park lock pawl at the rear of the transmission by means of a connecting rod. The solenoid on
the lock cylinder is energized and locks the cylinder piston in the unlocked position. Additional locking of the piston is
achieved with ball catches within the lock cylinder.
When park is selected, the solenoid on the lock cylinder is de-energized, the ball catches are released and the piston is free
to move in the lock cylinder. The solenoid in the valve housing is also de-energized. The spring loaded parking disc pulls the
cylinder piston in the park direction which allows the park disc to move on its mounting. This movement is transferred via the
connecting rod to parking pawl, which is engaged in the park lock gear.
If an electrical failure occurs, the park lock can be manually released by means of an emergency park release lever located in
the floor console. The lever is connected to the parking disc by a cable and allows the park lock to be released manually. For
additional information, refer to 307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

The TCM is an integral part of the Mechatronic valve block which is located at the bottom of the transmission, within the fluid
pan. The TCM is the main controlling component of the transmission.
The TCM processes signals from the transmission speed and temperature sensors, ECM and other vehicle systems. From the
received signal inputs and pre-programmed data, the module calculates the correct gear, torque converter clutch setting and
optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; B = K bus; D = High speed CAN bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
TCM
JaguarDrive selector
Diagnostic socket
Instrument cluster
ECM
Clockspring
10
Steering wheel audio switches
11
Downshift paddle switch
12
Upshift paddle switch
Power Flows
Operation of the transmission is controlled by the TCM, which electrically activates various solenoids to control the
transmission gear selection. The sequence of solenoid activation is based on programmed information in the TCM memory
and physical transmission operating conditions such as vehicle speed, throttle position, engine load and JaguarDrive selector
position.
Item
Part Number
Description
Torque input from engine
Torque converter lock-up clutch
Single web planetary gear carrier
Single web planetary gears
Single web sunwheel 1
Double web sunwheel 2
Double web planetary gears - long
Double web planetary gear carrier
Double web planetary gears - short
10
Double web sunwheel 3
11
Torque output from transmission
Multiplate clutch
Multiplate clutch
Multiplate brake
Multiplate brake
Multiplate clutch
Engine torque is transferred, via operation of single or combinations of clutches to the 2 planetary gear trains. Both gear
trains are controlled by reactionary inputs from brake clutches to produce the 6 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. The ratios
are as follows:
Gear
Ration
1st
4.171
2nd
2.340
3rd
1.521
4th
1.143
5th
0.867
6th
0.691
Reverse
3.403
Shift Elements
Item
Part Number
Description
Turbine shaft
Stator shaft
Single web planetary gear train
Ring gear 1
Clutch A
Clutch B
Clutch E
Brake clutch C
Fixed connection to transmission housing
10
Shaft key
11
Brake clutch D
12
Double web planetary gear train
13
Planetary gears - long
14
Ring gear 2
15
Sunwheel 2
16
Sunwheel 3
17
Double web planetary gear carrier
18
Planetary gears - short
19
Single web planetary gear carrier
20
Sunwheel 1
The shift elements are three rotating multiplate clutches (A, B and E) and two fixed multiplate brakes and D). All shifts
from 1st to 6th gears are power-on overlapping shifts. Overlapping shifts can be described as one of the clutches continuing
to transmit drive at a lower main pressure until the next required clutch is able to accept the input torque.
The shift elements, clutches and brakes are actuated hydraulically. Fluid pressure is applied to the required clutch and/or
brake, pressing the plates together and allowing drive to be transmitted through the plates. The purpose of the shift
elements is to perform power-on shifts with no interruption to traction and smooth transition between gear ratios.
Power Flow 1st Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector valve spool are in the 'D' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
converter turbine shaft to the ring gear 1 of the single web planetary gear train and the outer plate carrier of clutch 'E'.
Ring gear 1 drives the planetary gears which rotate around sunwheel 1. This drives the planetary gear carrier 1 and also the
outer plate carrier of clutch 'A' and the inner plate carrier of clutch 'B'.
When clutch 'A' is engaged, sunwheel 3 in the double web planetary gear train is driven and meshes with the short planetary
gears.
The double web planetary gear train is locked against the transmission housing by brake 'D'. This allows ring gear 2 (output
shaft) to be driven in the same direction as the engine via the long planetary gears.
NOTE: Refer to 'Shift Elements' illustration for key
Power Flow 2nd Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector spool valve are in the 'D' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
gears.
Sunwheel 2 is locked to the transmission housing by brake clutch 'C'. The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with
the short planetary gears, roll around the fixed sunwheel 2 and transmit drive to the double web planetary gear train carrier
and ring gear 2 in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow 3rd Gear
gears.
Sunwheel 2 is driven via clutch 'B' which is engaged. The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with the short
planetary gears, cannot roll around the fixed sunwheel 2 and therefore transmit drive to the locked double web planetary
gear train carrier in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow 4th Gear
converter turbine shaft to ring gear 1 of the single web planetary gear train and the outer plate carrier of clutch 'E'.
gears.
The double web planetary gear carrier is driven via clutch 'E' which is engaged. The long planetary gears, which are also
meshed with the short planetary gears and the double web planetary gear carrier, drive ring gear 2 in the direction of engine
rotation.
Power Flow 5th Gear
gears.
The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with the short planetary gears and the double web planetary gear carrier,
drive ring gear 2 in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow 6th Gear
Clutches 'A' and 'B' are released, removing the effect of the single web planetary gear train.
Clutch brake 'C' is applied which locks sunwheel 2 to the transmission housing.
Clutch 'E' is engaged and drives the double web planetary gear carrier. This causes the long planetary gears to rotate around
the fixed sunwheel 2 and transmit drive to ring gear 2 which is driven in the direction of engine rotation.
Power Flow Reverse Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector spool valve are in the 'R' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
Ring gear 1 drives the planetary gears of the single web planetary gear train which rotate around the fixed sunwheel 1. This
transmits the drive to the single web planetary gear carrier, the outer plate carrier of clutch 'A' and the inner plate carrier of
clutch 'B'.
With clutch 'B' applied, sunwheel 2 in the double web planetary gear train is driven and meshes with the long planetary
gears.
The double web planetary gear carrier is locked to the transmission housing by brake clutch 'D'. This allows ring gear 2 to be
driven in the opposite direction to engine rotation by the long planetary gears.
Instrument Cluster
Item
Part Number
Description
Transmission selected gear status
MIL (malfunction indicator lamp)
Message center
The instrument cluster is connected to the TCM via the high speed CAN bus. Transmission status is transmitted by the TCM
and displayed to the driver in one of two displays in the instrument cluster. For additional information, refer to 413-01
Instrument Cluster.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp

The MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) is located in the tachometer in the instrument cluster. Transmission related faults
which may affect the vehicle emissions output will illuminate the MIL.
The MIL is illuminated by the ECM on receipt of a relevant fault message from the TCM on the high speed CAN. The nature of
the fault can be diagnosed using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system which reads the fault codes stored in the TCM
memory.
Transmission Status Display
The transmission status display is located in a LCD (liquid crystal display) at the top of the instrument cluster, between the
speedometer and the tachometer. The LCD shows the JaguarDrive selector position or the selected gear when in manual
'Jaguar Sequential Shift' mode.
The following table shows the displays and their descriptions.
Symbol
Description
P
Park selected
R
Reverse selected
N
Neutral selected
D
Drive selected
S
Sport mode selected
1
1st gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
2
2nd gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
3
3rd gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
4
4th gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
5
6
The message center is located in the lower center of the instrument cluster. The message center is a LCD to relay vehicle
status and operating information to the driver and can display messages relating to a number of the vehicle systems. If a
transmission fault occurs, the message center will display the message 'GEARBOX FAULT'.

The TCM outputs signals to control the shift control solenoid valve and the EPRS to control the hydraulic operation of the
transmission.
The TCM processes signals from the transmission speed and temperature sensors, the ECM and other vehicle systems. From
the received signal inputs and pre-programmed data, the module calculates the correct gear, torque converter clutch setting
and optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control.
The ECM supplies the engine management data over the high speed CAN bus. The TCM requires engine data to efficiently
control the transmission operation, for example; flywheel torque, engine speed, accelerator pedal angle, engine
temperature. The steering angle sensor and the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module also supply data to the TCM on the
high speed CAN bus. The TCM uses data from these systems to suspend gear changes when the vehicle is cornering and/or
the ABS module is controlling braking or traction control.
Using the signal inputs and the memorized data, the TCM control program computes the correct gear and torque converter
lock-up clutch setting and the optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control. Special output-side
modules (power output stages, current regulator circuits), allow the TCM to control the solenoid valves and pressure
regulators and consequently precisely control the hydraulics of the automatic transmission. In addition, the amount and
duration of engine interventions are supplied to the engine management by way of the CAN bus.
The transmission has a fully electronic JaguarDrive selector with no Bowden cable connection to the transmission. The
transmission selections are made using a rotary JaguarDrive selector which rises from the floor console once the engine is
running. Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector to any of the five positions is sensed by the TCM via the high speed CAN bus.
The TCM then reacts according to the selected position. The 'S' (sport) position selection allows the TCM to operate the
transmission using the semi-automatic 'Jaguar Sequential Shift'.
Gear selections are sensed by the TCM when the driver operates the steering wheel paddle switches. Once the JaguarDrive
selector position is confirmed, the TCM outputs appropriate information on the high speed CAN bus.
If the JaguarDrive selector is in 'D', 'Jaguar Sequential Shift' is temporary and will cancel after a time period or can be
cancelled by pressing and holding the + paddle for approximately 2 seconds.
If the JaguarDrive selector is in 'S', 'Jaguar Sequential Shift' is permanent and can only be cancelled by pressing and holding
the + paddle for approximately 2 seconds or by moving the JaguarDrive selector to the 'D' position.
The TCM can be reprogrammed using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system using a flash code. The TCM processor has a
440 kb internal flash memory. Of this capacity, approximately 370 kb are used by the basic transmission program. The
remainder, approximately 70 kb is used to store vehicle-specific application data.

Engine Stall
If the vehicle stalls it will coast down in gear, with the transmission providing drive to the engine. A restart can be attempted
at this point and the engine may start and the driver can continue.
If the coast down speed reduces such that the speed of the engine is less than 600 rev/min, the transmission will go to
neutral, D illumination will flash in the instrument cluster. The driver needs to select neutral or park and then press the
brake pedal to restart the engine.
If the start/stop button is pressed when driving, the message ENGINE STOP BUTTON PRESSED is displayed in the message
center but there will be no change to the ignition state. If the driver requires to switch off the engine, the start/stop button
must be pressed for a second time. The engine will be stopped and will be back driven by the transmission as the vehicle
coasts down. When the engine speed is less than 600 rev/min the transmission engages neutral (flashing D illumination in
the instrument cluster). When vehicle speed is less than 2 km/h (1.2 mph) Park is engaged. The JaguarDrive selector
automatically rotates back to its lowered P position and the vehicle ignition is switched off.
The park engagement is prevented in a stall case as the ignition power is on and D was the last selected gear. The park
engagement speed at ignition off is from the least value of the wheel speeds (CAN signal) and transmission output speed
(internal signal).

- Diagnostic Flow Chart
For a detailed description of the automatic transmission/transaxle, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section n the workshop manual. REFER to: Transmission Description (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Fluid Level and Condition Check
CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is low as internal failure can result.
NOTE: The transmission fluid temperature must not be allowed to exceed 50C (122F) whilst checking level. Should
the temperature rise above this figure, abort the check and allow the transmission fluid to cool to below 30C (86F).
This vehicle is not equipped with a fluid level indicator. An incorrect level may affect the transmission operation and
could result in transmission damage. To correctly check and add fluid to the transmission.
REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
High Fluid Level

A fluid level that is too high may cause the fluid to become aerated due to the churning action of the rotating internal
parts. This will cause erratic control pressure, foaming, loss of fluid from the vent tube and possible transmission
damage. If an overfill condition is identified, with the engine at idle ensure the fluid temperature is within the specified
range and allow the excess fluid to drain until a small thread of fluid runs from the filler/level plug hole.
Low Fluid Level

A low fluid level could result in poor transmission engagement, slipping, or damage. This could also indicate a leak in
one of the transmission seals or gaskets.
REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Adding Fluid
CAUTION: The use of any other type of transmission fluid other than that specified can result in transmission
damage.
If fluid needs to be added, add fluid in 0.50 liter increments through the fill hole Opening. Do not overfill the fluid. For
fluid type, refer to the General Specification chart in this section.
REFER to: Specifications (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Specifications).
Fluid Condition Check

1.
Check the fluid level.

REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
2.
Observe the color and the odor of the fluid. The color under normal circumstances should be Honey.
3.
Allow the fluid to drip onto a facial tissue and examine the stain.
4.
If evidence of solid material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further inspection.
NOTE: In the event of a transmission unit replacement for internal failure, the oil cooler and pipes must also be
replaced.

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Damaged/stuck shift mechanism
Damaged automatic transmission
casing
Electrical
Hydraulic
Blown fuse(s)
Damaged, loose or corroded
Fluid level too
connectors
Wiring harness
Poor condition of fluid

Fluid leak
high/low
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
NOTE: If the control module/transmission is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
prior to the installation of a new module/transmission.
DTC
P012186
Description
Sensor A Circuit
Range/Performance - signal
invalid
P0219- Engine Overspeed Condition
86
- signal invalid
P0500- Vehicle Speed Sensor A 81
invalid serial data received
P0501Vehicle Speed Sensor A
81
Range/Performance invalid
P0561- System Voltage Unstable 1C
Circuit voltage out of range
P056221
System Voltage Low signal amplitude <

minimum
P056322
System Voltage High signal amplitude >

maximum
Possible Cause
Action
Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
Sensor Fault (Data

received over CAN Bus)
Engine speed too low or
Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs

too high (Data received
over CAN Bus)
Vehicle Speed Sensor
Check DSC module for stored DTCs
fault (Data received
over CAN Bus)
Vehicle Speed receive Check Anti-lock braking system module for stored
over CAN Bus does not DTCs. Check correct Differential is installed to the
match Transmission
vehicle
Output-Shaft speed
Power supply voltage
Check Engine control module for stored DTCs.
out of range when
Check Charging System and Battery condition
engine running
Circuit low voltage.
Refer to Circuit diagrams and check Power and
Battery supply voltage
Ground Circuit for fault. Check Engine control
to Transmission Control module for stored DTCs. Check Charging System
Module (Transmission
and Battery condition
control module)
High Battery charge,
alternator fault
Check Charging System and Battery condition

41
Memory Check Sum Error general checksum failure
P060400

(RAM) Error - no sub type
information
41
Read Only Memory (ROM)
Error - general checksum
failure
P0606Transmission control
04
module Processor - System
Internal Failures
P060626
Software error
Transmission control
module failure
Shift-by-Wire fault
General checksum
failure
Micro controller
component faults
module Processor - signal
rate of change below
threshold
49
module Processor-internal
electronic failure
Micro controller
04
module Processor - System
Internal Failures
Micro controller
P061306
Micro controller
module Processor Algorithm Based Failures
component faults
Micro controller
component faults
component faults
component faults
11
module Processor - Circuit
Short to Ground
Watchdog fault
12
Short to Battery
Watchdog fault
13
Open
Watchdog fault
14
Short to Ground or Open
Watchdog fault
P061321
amplitude < minimum
Watchdog fault
P061322
amplitude > maximum
Watchdog fault
P061347
module Processor watchdog / safety Micro
controller failure
49
module Processor - internal
electronic failure
Watchdog fault
Micro controller
component faults
P061368
module Processor-Event
Information
Watchdog fault
P061B-
Re-configure the Transmission control module

system, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains,
Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
new Transmission control module as required,
02
Torque Calculation
Performance - general
signal failure
P061BInternal Control Module
26
Torque Calculation
Performance - signal rate of
change below threshold
P062FInternal Control Module
04
EEPROM Error - System
Internal Failures
module - positive torque

signal not valid
module positive torque

signal not valid
EEPROM communication
error

21
Circuit Low - signal
amplitude < minimum
Sensor supply voltage

22
Circuit High - signal
amplitude > maximum
Sensor supply voltage
fault low
fault high

13
Circuit / Open - Circuit
Open
Actuator supply
(pressure control valves
etc) Open Circuit

1C
Circuit / Open - Circuit
Actuator supply
etc) voltage plausibility
fault

11
Circuit Low - Circuit Short
to Ground
Actuator supply
etc) voltage Short to
Ground
Actuator supply
etc) voltage Short to
Power

12
Circuit High - Circuit Short
to Battery
P066701
P066704
P066749
P070002
P070022
P070075
PCM / Engine control

module / Transmission
control module Internal
Range/Performance General Electrical Failure
Range/Performance System Internal Failures
Range/Performance internal electronic failure
System (MIL Request) General signal failure
System (MIL Request) signal amplitude >
maximum
System (MIL Request) Emergency Position Not
Reachable
Internal Electronic
Failure
Internal electronic
failure
General Signal failure
Double fault from

Refer to electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Transmission control module connector for signs
of water ingress or damage, check pin 7 for Short
to Power or Ground (should NOT be connected
and harness terminal should have a bung fitted).
If no fault identified, suspect the Transmission
control module. Check and install a new
Transmission control module as required, refer to
the new module/component installation note at


Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and

Investigate as required
If any of the following DTCs are also present;

P074013, P096712, P273912, P273012, P272112,
P096312, P276312, P097112, suspect the
Transmission control module, check and install a
Emergency Position Not Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and
Reachable
investigate as required
monitoring of internal
power supply and
pressure
regulator/solenoid
control software
P071013
Transmission Fluid
Circuit - Circuit Open
Transmission fluid
P071101
Transmission Fluid
- General Electrical Failure
P071122
Transmission Fluid
- signal amplitude >
maximum
Signal amplitude >
P071211
Transmission Fluid
to Ground
Transmission fluid
P071301
Transmission Fluid
Circuit High-General
Electrical Failure
P071312
Transmission Fluid
Circuit High - Circuit Short
to Battery
Transmission fluid
temperature sensor
Circuit Open Circuit
maximum. Excessive
jump in temperature
temperature sensor
Circuit Short to Ground
temperature sensor
Circuit Short to Power
P0716- Turbine/Input Shaft Speed

14
Sensor A Circuit
Range/Performance Circuit Short to Ground or
Open
21
Sensor A Circuit
amplitude < minimum
Turbine/Input Shaft

22
Sensor A Circuit
amplitude > maximum
Turbine/Input Shaft

12
Sensor A Circuit No Signal Circuit Short to Battery
Turbine/input shaft

12
Circuit - Circuit Short to
Battery
Transmission output

14
Circuit - Circuit Short to
Ground or Open
Transmission output

22
maximum
Transmission output

27
- signal rate of change
above threshold
Output shaft speed
Speed Sensor Circuit

Short to Ground or
Open Circuit
Turbine/Input Shaft
Speed Sensor signal too

small
Speed Sensor signal

above maximum
speed sensor A Circuit

Short to Power
shaft speed sensor

shaft speed sensor

or Open Circuit
shaft speed sensor

signal above maximum
negative gradient too

high
Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the

Transmission control module. Install a new
Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
driving vehicle until normal operating temperature
is achieved. Reads DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect
the Transmission control module. Install a new
Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
64
- signal plausibility failure
P073107
Incorrect Gear RatioMechanical Failures
P073207
P073307
P073407
P073507
P073607
P074013

Solenoid Circuit / Open Circuit Open
P074107

Solenoid Circuit
Performance/Stuck Off Mechanical Failures
P0745- Pressure Control Solenoid A

04
- System Internal Failures

48
- Supervision Software
Failure
P0758- Shift Solenoid B Electrical 12
Circuit Short to Battery
P0758- Shift Solenoid B Electrical 13

Circuit Open
P077171
Shift Solenoid E
Performance/Stuck Off actuator stuck
P0775- Pressure Control Solenoid B

04

48

Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code reMechanical Failures
detects suspect Transmission (gearbox) internal
fault. Install a new Transmission as required, refer
to the new module/component installation note at
Pressure control
solenoid 2 Circuit Open
Circuit
Too high slip at torque Suspect torque converter lockup clutch. Install a
converter clutch.
new torque converter, refer to the new
Mechanical Failures
module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index. If transmission fluid is in very
poor condition and dirty, install a new
transmission, refer to the new module/component
System Internal Failures Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Supervision Software Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Failure
Circuit Short to Power Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Solenoid valve 1 or
Pressure control
Solenoid G Circuit Open refer to the new module/component installation
Circuit
Actuator stuck
System Internal Failures Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Supervision Software Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Failure
Failure
P078107
1-2 Shift - Mechanical

Failures
Gear Ratio Monitoring.
P078177
2-1 Shift - commanded

position not reachable
P078207

P078277

P078307

Failures
P078377

P078407

Failures
P078477

P0798- Pressure Control Solenoid C

1A
Electrical - Circuit
Resistance Below Threshold
1E
Electrical - Circuit Short to
Ground
21
Electrical - signal amplitude
< minimum
P0814- Transmission Range Display
62
Circuit - signal compare
failure
P0826- Up and Down Switch circuit
08
- Bus Signal Message
Failures
P0826- Up and Down Switch Circuit
81
- invalid serial data received
P0826- Up and Down Switch Circuit

88
- Bus off
P082907

Failures
Mechanical Failures
Mechanical Failures
Mechanical Failures
Mechanical Failures
Mechanical Failures
Mechanical Failures
Mechanical Failures
Mechanical Failures
Pressure control
solenoid C Circuit
resistance below
threshold
Pressure control
solenoid C electrical
Pressure Control
Solenoid C Electrical
signal amplitude <
minimum
Transmission Range
Display Circuit signal
compare failure
Invalid CAN signal from

Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code redetects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
Check Central junction box and Instrument cluster
for stored DTCs. Check gear change switches for
correct operation. Refer to circuit diagrams and
check CAN bus for a circuit fault
Check Central junction box and Instrument cluster
for stored DTCs. Check Gear Change Switches for
correct operation. Refer to Circuit diagrams and
check CAN Bus for Circuit fault
BCM/Instrument cluster
Stuck switch
CAN bus circuit fault
Invalid Can signal from
BCM / Instrument
cluster
Stuck switch
CAN Bus Circuit fault
SWM to BCM /
Check Central junction box and Steering Wheel
Instrument cluster LIN
Ice Switches for stored DTCs. Refer to Circuit
Bus failure
diagrams and check LIN Bus for Circuit fault
detects suspect Transmission internal fault. Install
P082977
6-5 Shift - Commanded

Position Not Reachable
Mechanical Failures
P084F- Park / Neutral Switch Input

01
Circuit - General Electrical
Failure
Wrong voltage level

01
Circuit - General Electrical
Failure

02
Circuit - General signal
failure
General signal failure

29
Circuit - signal invalid
Signal invalid

1C
Circuit - circuit voltage out
of range
detected on Park/No
Park signal
range
P0919- Gear Shift Position Control

93
Error - no operation
No shifting despite
P0919- Gear Shift Position Control

94
Error - unexpected
operation
Shifting without driver
P0938- Hydraulic Oil Temperature

29
Sensor Range/Performance
- signal invalid
Transmission fluid

12
Short to Battery
Pressure control
solenoid 1 Circuit Short
to Power

13
Control Circuit / Open Circuit Open
Pressure Control

14
Control Circuit / Open Circuit Short to Ground or
Open
11
Short to Ground
Pressure Control
driver request
request
temperature compared
with module
temperature fault
Solenoid B Control
Circuit Open
Solenoid B Control
or Open
Pressure control
to Ground
a new Transmission as required, refer to the new

the DTC Index
Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code redetects suspect Transmission internal fault. Install
a new Transmission as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index
Check for correct output at Transmission control
module park signal pin (check in all positions) 12
volts in Park, 0 volts in all other positions. If fault
identified, suspect the Transmission control
module. Install a new Transmission control
module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index. If no fault identified, check Park
signal circuit to Transmission Shift Module for
short, open circuit.
Check park lock mechanism. If park lock
operation is correct, suspect the transmission
transmission control module as required. Refer to
the warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
Check park lock mechanism. If park lock
operation is correct, suspect the transmission
transmission control module as required. Refer to
the warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
Check park lock mechanism, if park lock operation
correct suspect the Transmission control module.
Install a new Transmission control module as
required, refer to the new module/component
Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
driving vehicle until normal operating temperature
is achieved. Read DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect

12
Short to Battery

to Power

14
Open
11
Short to Ground
Pressure control
to Ground or Open
Circuit
Pressure control
to Ground

12
Short to Battery
Pressure control
to Power
P0972- Shift Solenoid A Control

22
maximum
11
to Ground
14
to Ground or Open
P09731A
Shift Solenoid A Control

Circuit Low - Circuit
P09731E
Shift Solenoid A Control

Circuit Low - Circuit
Resistance Out Of Range
Pressure control
Pressure control
solenoid 1 current too

large
Shift solenoid A control
Pressure control
to Ground or Open
Circuit
Shift Solenoid A control
circuit resistance below
threshold
Shift Solenoid A control
circuit resistance out of

range
P0976- Shift Solenoid B Control

11
to Ground
Solenoid valve 2 Circuit
P0976- Shift Solenoid B Control

14
to Ground or Open
Solenoid valve 2 Circuit
P1674- Control Module Software

04
Corrupted - System Internal
Failures
System internal failures
Short to Ground
Short to Ground or
Open Circuit
P167448
Control Module Software

Corrupted - Supervision
Software Failure
Supervision software
P170707
Transfer Case Neutral or

Park/Neutral Indication
Circuit - commanded
Transfer case neutral or
P170772

Circuit - Actuator Stuck
Open
Transfer case neutral or
P1707-
Commanded position
failure
park/neutral indication
circuit - mechanical
failures
park/neutral indication
circuit - Actuator stuck
open

Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging
and disengaging the parking lock several times. If
the DTC recurs, check parking lock components
and replace as required. If no faulty park lock
component is found Clear DTC and the DTC
returns suspect the Transmission control module.
77
Circuit - commanded
not reachable
P270007
Transmission Friction
Element A Apply Time
Range/Performance Mechanical Failures
P270107
Element B Apply Time
P270207
Element C Apply Time
P270307
Element D Apply Time
P270407
Element E Apply Time
Mechanical Failures
Mechanical Failures
Mechanical Failures
Mechanical Failures
Mechanical Failures
P2713- Pressure Control Solenoid D

04

48
Failure
Supervision software

22
> maximum
Pressure Control
failure

1E
Solenoid D Electrical
signal amplitude >
maximum
Pressure control
solenoid D circuit
resistance below
threshold
Pressure control
solenoid D circuit
resistance out of range

14
Open
11
Short to Ground
Pressure control
solenoid D Circuit Short
to Ground or Open
Circuit
Pressure control
to Ground

12
Short to Battery
Pressure control
to Power

1A
P2722- Pressure Control Solenoid E

04
Pressure Control

48
Failure
Pressure Control
Solenoid E system
internal failures
Solenoid E supervision
control software failure


22
> maximum
1A
1E
Pressure Control
Solenoid E Electrical
signal amplitude >
maximum
Pressure control
solenoid E electrical
resistance below
threshold
Pressure control
solenoid E circuit

14
Open
11
Short to Ground
Solenoid E Control
or Open Circuit
Pressure control
solenoid E Circuit Short
to Ground

12
Control Circuit High-Circuit
Short to Battery
Pressure control
solenoid E Circuit Short
to Power
P2731- Pressure Control Solenoid

04
F-System Internal Failures
Pressure Control
Solenoid F no sub type
information
P2731- Pressure Control Solenoid F

48
Failure
Pressure Control

22
Electrical-signal amplitude
> maximum
Pressure Control

1A
Electrical-Circuit Resistance
Below Threshold
1E
Electrical-Circuit Resistance
Out Of Range
14
Open
11
Short to Ground
Pressure Control
Solenoid F supervision
software failure
Solenoid F Electrical
signal amplitude >
maximum
Pressure control
solenoid F electrical
circuit resistance below
threshold
Pressure control
solenoid F electrical
circuit resistance out of
range
Pressure Control
Solenoid F Control
or Open
Pressure Control
Solenoid F Control

12
Short to Battery
Pressure Control
P276312
Pressure control
solenoid F Circuit Short
to Power

Pressure Control Solenoid
Short to Battery
P2764- Torque Converter Clutch
11
Short to Ground
P2764- Torque Converter Clutch
1A
Control Circuit Low-Circuit
P27641E

Solenoid F Control
Torque converter clutch

pressure control
solenoid control Circuit
Short to Ground
Torque converter clutch
pressure control
solenoid control circuit
resistance below
threshold
Torque converter clutch Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
pressure control
Control Circuit Low-Circuit

P2807- Pressure Control Solenoid G
11
- Circuit Short to Ground

12
- Circuit Short to Battery

13
- Circuit Open

14
- Circuit Short to Ground or
Open
B108782
LIN Bus "A" - alive /

sequence counter
B1087LIN Bus "A" - value of

83
signal protection calculation
incorrect
B108787
LIN Bus "A" - missing

message
B108788
LIN Bus "A" - Bus off
U0001High Speed CAN

88
Communication Bus - Bus
off
82
Engine control module/PCM
"A" - alive / sequence
updated
83
"A" - value of signal
incorrect
87
"A" - missing message

82
Gear Shift Control Module
A-alive / sequence counter
83
Gear Shift Control Module A
- value of signal protection
87
- missing message
82
Vehicle Dynamics Control
solenoid control circuit

Park solenoid Circuit Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Short to Ground
Short to Power
Open Circuit
Park solenoid Circuit
Carry out any diagnostic pinpoint tests associated
Short to Ground or
with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
Open Circuit
diagnostic system. Suspect the Transmission
control module. Install a new Transmission control
the DTC Index
Alive counter fault
Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Transmission control module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN
Bus)
Checksum error
Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs
Transmission control module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN
Bus)
GSM is NOT visible to
Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs
the Transmission control Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
module on the LIN Bus Transmission control module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short or Open Circuit (LIN Bus)
LIN Bus Circuit fault.
Check hardware of LIN Transmission control module to Transmission shift
module for Short, Open Circuit (LIN Bus). Check
connection between
transmission and GSM
Transmission Shift Module for related DTCs
CAN Bus off
CAN Bus for Circuit fault
Alive counter fault
Check Engine control module for stored DTCs
Checksum fault
Check Engine control module for stored DTCs
CAN Timeout
NOTE: Do NOT install a new Engine control

module if an Engine control module Timeout DTC
is only logged in the Transmission control module,
the failure is NOT with the Engine control module
Alive counter fault

Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Check Transmission shift module for stored DTCs.
Checksum fault

CAN Timeout

Alive counter fault
Check Anti-lock braking system for stored DTCs.

Module - alive / sequence

updated
83
Module - value of signal
incorrect
87
Module - missing message
00
Steering Angle Sensor
information
87
Park Brake Control Module missing message
82
Body Control Module alive / sequence counter
83
Body Control Module - value
87
Body Control Module missing message
87
(Instrument cluster) Control
Module - missing message
U0300Control Module - event
information
68

08
A - Bus Signal Message
Failures
68
A - event information
86
A - Signal Invalid
68
- event information
81
- Invalid Serial Data
Received
68
Module - event information
68
Body Control Module event information
U101B- Lost Communication With
87
GSM - Multiple Bus-missing
message
U300049
Control Module - internal

electronic failure
U3000- Control Module - Circuit

4B
resistance above threshold
Checksum fault

CAN Timeout

Lost Communication
Check Steering angle sensor for stored DTCs.

With Steering Angle

Sensor Module
CAN timeout electronic
Check Electronic Parking Brake Module for stored

DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Alive counter fault
Check Central junction box for stored DTCs. Check

CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Checksum fault

CAN Timeout

CAN timeout instrument Check Instrument cluster for stored DTCs. Check
cluster
Transmission software
does not match vehicle

network
Inaccurate engine
speed, torque
information
Inaccurate engine
speed, torque
information
Inaccurate engine
speed, torque
information
Incorrect CAN data
received from
Transmission shift
module
Incorrect LIN data
received from
Transmission shift
module
Event information brake
information
Event information
Check Central junction box software level, Check

Transmission control module Software level,
Update software as required using the
manufacturer approved process
Check Engine control module for stored DTCs,
Check CAN Bus circuit for faults

Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN
Bus for Circuit fault

invalid Power mode
information
Missing message lost Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
communication with
Transmission Shift
Module (multiple Bus)
Internal electronic
failure
Internal electronic
Check and correct oil level. Check hydraulic flow
failure
through oil cooler and pipe circuit for restriction or
blockage. If no restrictions found, suspect the
U300081
Control Module - invalid

U300194
Control Module Improper

Shutdown - unexpected
operation

Vehicle or Engine type Reflash the Transmission control module using the
signal incorrect from
manufacturer approved process
BCM or incorrect
module software
installed
Control Module
Check Engine control module For Power
Improper Shutdown
(generator) faults. Check Power and Ground
(voltage related)
Circuit and Battery for fault. Clear DTCs. Road
Test. If DTC reoccurs suspect the Transmission
control module. Install a new Transmission control
the DTC Index

- Transmission Fluid Level Check
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
307-452
Wrench, Transmission Filler Plug
Activation
WARNINGS:
Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.
Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.

1.
The following steps must be observed before starting the
transmission fluid level check.

The vehicle must be on a horizontal ramp.
The parking brake must be applied.
The engine must be running for 2 minutes with the
transmission control switch (TCS) in the "P" position.

2.
CAUTION: Make sure that the transmission fluid

temperature is below 30 degrees before starting the fluid level
check.
Connect Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment to the vehicle.
3.
Apply, and hold, the footbrake.
Move the selector lever from 'P' through all the gear
positions, pausing in each gear position for 2-3 seconds

and return to the 'P' position.
4.

stands.
5.
Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02, Removal and Installation).
6.
Place a suitable container under the transmission fluid fill plug.
7.
CAUTIONS:
The transmission fluid level must only be

checked when the temperature of the fluid is
between 30 degrees and 50 degrees. The fluid
level obtained will be incorrect if the reading is
outside this temperature range.
Discard the seal.

8.
NOTE: Use transmission fluid meeting Jaguar

specification.
If the transmission fluid does not come out of the
transmission fluid fill plug hole the transmission
fluid level is insufficient. If this is the case add the
transmission fluid in 0.5 liter units into the
transmission fluid fill plug hole until fluid comes
out.
9.
NOTE: Make sure the transmission fluid

temperature does not exceed 50 C (122 F). If
the transmission fluid temperature does exceed 50
C (122 F) stop the transmission fluid level check
and allow the transmission fluid to cool until the
temperature is below 30 C (86 F).
Allow the transmission fluid to drain from the
transmission fluid filler plug hole until the flow
almost stops.
10.

Using the special tool, install the new transmission
fluid fill plug.
11.
CAUTION: Make sure the transmission fluid fill

plug is tightened to the correct specification. Failure to
vehicle.
To make sure the transmission fill plug is
torqued to the correct specification. Using the

special tool and torque wrench the following
calculation steps must be followed.
Step 1. Multiply 35 Nm by the effective length
of the torque wrench (1).
Step 2. Add the effective length of the special
tool (2) to the effective length of the torque
wrench (1).
Step 3. Divide the total of step 1 by the total
of step 2.
Step 4. Set the torque wrench to the figure
arrived at in step 3.
Tighten the transmission fluid fill plug to the
torque given by the calculation.
12.
13.
Remove the container.
14.
15.
Lower the vehicle.
16.
Disconnect the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment from the

vehicle.

- Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
307-452
Wrench, Transmission Filler Plug
WARNINGS:
Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.
Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.
1.

stands.
2.
3.
Place a container under the transmission.

4.

5.
CAUTION: Discard the component.

Allow the fluid to drain.
6.
CAUTION: Make sure that a new component

is installed.
Torque: 8 Nm
7.
NOTE: Use transmission fluid meeting Jaguar

specification.
Refill the transmission with fluid.
8.
Allow the transmission fluid to drain from the

transmission fluid filler plug hole until the flow
almost stops.
9.

Loosely install the transmission fluid fill
plug.
10.
CAUTION: Make sure the transmission fluid fill

plug is tightened to the correct specification. Failure to
vehicle.
To make sure the transmission fill plug is
11.
torqued to the correct specification. Using the

special tool and torque wrench the following
calculation steps must be followed.
Step 1. Multiply 35 Nm by the effective length
of the torque wrench (1).
Step 2. Add the effective length of the special
tool (2) to the effective length of the torque
wrench (1).
Step 3. Divide the total of step 1 by the total
of step 2.
Step 4. Set the torque wrench to the figure
arrived at in step 3.
Tighten the transmission fluid fill plug to the
torque given by the calculation.
Carry out a transmission fluid level check.

Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic

- Input Shaft Seal
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
100-012-01
Slide Hammer Adapter
307-613
Holding Pins, Torque Converter
308-246
Installer, Front Seal
308-375
Remover, Input and Output Seal
Removal
1.
Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01, General

Procedures).
2.

3.
Refer to: Transmission - 3.0L Diesel (307-01, Removal).
4.
5.
CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the edges of

the component.
Discard the seal.

Special Tool(s): 100-012, 100-012-01, 308-375
Installation
1.

2.
NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark is

visable through the inspection hole as illustrated.
3.
CAUTION: Make sure the torque converter is

fully located into the oil pump drive.
4.
Refer to: Transmission - 3.0L Diesel (307-01B, Installation).
5.

Procedures).

- Extension Housing Seal
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
100-012-01
Slide Hammer Adapter
204-264
Pinion Seal Replacer
205-053
Retainer, Drive Flange
303-D121
Puller, General Purpose
308-375
Remover, Input and Output Seal
Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and

Installation).
4.
Refer to: Transmission Support Insulator (307-01 Automatic

5.
CAUTION: Discard the nut.

6.
7.
Special Tool(s): 303-D121

Special Tool(s): 100-012, 100-012-01, 308-375
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:

Install a new seal.

2.
WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is

installed.
Torque: 60 Nm
3.
Refer to: Transmission Support Insulator (307-01 Automatic

4.

Installation).
5.


- Transmission Control Module (TCM) and Main Control Valve Body
Removal
NOTE: The transmission control module (TCM) is part of the main control valve body and cannot be serviced separately.
1.

Procedures).
2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter (307-01

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
4.
5.
6.
CAUTION: Discard the component.
7.

fluids.
NOTE: Note the position of the manual park brake
release.
8.
9.
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that when fully fitted, all seals

protrude by the same amount.

Install a new seal block.
2.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that when fully fitted, all seals

protrude by the same amount.
3.
CAUTION: Make sure the manual park

release is correctly engaged.
Torque: 8 Nm
4.
CAUTION: Make sure that a new component

is installed.
5.
6.
7.
Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter (307-01

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
8.

Procedures).
9.
If a new component has been installed, configure using Jaguar

approved diagnostic equipment.
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter
Removal
1.

Procedures).
2.
3.
4.
Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
5.
6.
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur,

but the essential information is always correct.
7.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the area around the component is

clean and free of foreign material.

Torque: 8 Nm
Installation
1.

- Transmission Support Insulator
Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
WARNING: Secure the component to the

transmission jack.
Torque: 48 Nm
6.
Torque: 48 Nm
7.
Torque: 70 Nm
Installation
1.

- Transmission, Transmission Fluid Cooler and Transmission Fluid
Cooler Tubes
Special Tool(s)
303-021
Engine support bracket
303-1435
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.
1.

2.

stands.
3.
Refer to: Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes (307-02

Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
4.

5.
6.
7.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Make sure that the alignment mark is
visible through the inspection hole on

removal of the last torque converter bolt.
20.
21.

flexible coupling (or its fixings) be loosened or
WARNING: Make sure that the transmission is secured

with suitable retaining straps.
Using a suitable stand, support the transmission.
22.
23.
24.
CAUTION: Make sure that the torque

converter remains in the transmission.
technician.
Install the torque converter retainer.
25.

coolant.
NOTE: Clamp the hoses to minimize coolant loss.
26.

coolant.
27.
Installation
1.
2.
Torque: 5 Nm
3.
4.

technician.
Remove the torque converter retainer.
5.
Torque: 45 Nm
6.
7.
Torque: 45 Nm
Remove the support.

8.
9.
Torque: 127 Nm

Make sure that the alignment mark is visible through the
inspection hole on installation of the first torque converter bolt.
10.
Torque: 45 Nm
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Torque: 10 Nm
18.
Torque: 48 Nm
19.
Torque: 6 Nm
20.
Torque: 40 Nm
21.
22.

23.
24.
25.

26.

27.

28.
Check and top up the cooling system as required.
29.
Set the heater controls to HOT.
30.
CAUTION: Observe the engine temperature warning light.

If the warning light is displayed, switch off immediately and
allow to cool. Failure to follow this instruction may cause
Start the engine and allow to idle until hot air is emited at the
face registers.
31.

Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM and maintain at 2000 RPM
until the engine cooling fan operates.
32.

33.

coolant leakage.
Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
34.
WARNINGS:
When releasing the cooling system pressure, cover the

coolant expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.

CAUTIONS:

35.


- Transmission and Transmission Fluid Cooler
Special Tool(s)
303-021
303-1435
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.
1.

2.

stands.
3.

4.

5.
6.
7.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
visible through the inspection hole on

20.
21.

flexible coupling (or its fixings) be loosened or

22.
23.
24.

technician.
25.

coolant.
26.

coolant.
27.
Installation
1.
2.
Torque: 5 Nm
3.
4.

technician.
5.
Torque: 45 Nm
6.
7.
Torque: 45 Nm
Remove the support.

8.
9.
Torque: 127 Nm

Make sure that the alignment mark is visible through the
10.
Torque: 45 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Torque: 10 Nm
18.
Torque: 48 Nm
19.
Torque: 6 Nm
20.
Torque: 40 Nm
21.
22.

23.
24.
25.

26.

27.

28.
Check and top up the cooling system as required.
29.
Set the heater controls to HOT.
30.

Start the engine and allow to idle until hot air is emited at the
face registers.
31.

Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM and maintain at 2000 RPM
until the engine cooling fan operates.
32.

33.

coolant leakage.
Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
34.
WARNINGS:
When releasing the cooling system pressure, cover the

coolant expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.

CAUTIONS:

35.


- Transmission
Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-1436
1.

2.

stands.
3.

4.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
visable through the inspection hole on

20.
21.

22.
23.
24.

technician.

- Transmission
Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-1436
1.

technician.
2.
Torque: 45 Nm
3.
4.
Torque: 45 Nm
Remove the support.

5.
6.
Torque: 127 Nm

Make sure that the alignment mark is visable through the
7.
Torque: 45 Nm
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Torque: 10 Nm
15.
Torque: 48 Nm
16.
Torque: 6 Nm
17.
Torque: 40 Nm
18.
19.
Remove the special tool supporting the engine.
20.
21.
22.

23.

24.

Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Torque Specifications
Item
Fluid cooler tubes to transmission retaining bolts
Fluid cooler tubes support bracket retaining nut
Nm
22
10
lb-ft
16
7
lb-in
-
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Transmission Cooling

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Latch-plate
Feed hose and pipe (from transmission)
Engine coolant hose connections
Return hose and pipe (to transmission)
INTRODUCTION
Transmission cooling is provided by a transmission fluid cooler, which transfers heat from the transmission to the engine
cooling system. The transmission fluid cooler is attached to a mounting bracket on the front subframe, in the front left corner
of the engine compartment.
Two hose and pipe assemblies connect the transmission fluid cooler to the automatic transmission. Two engine coolant hose
connections are incorporated into the top of the transmission fluid cooler for the supply and return of coolant from the
engine cooling system.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cooling (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description
and Operation).
Fluid from the pump in the automatic transmission flows through the feed hose and pipe to the transmission fluid cooler. The
fluid then flows through the transmission fluid cooler, and the return hose and pipe, to the sump of the automatic
transmission.
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Transmission Cooling

For a detailed description of the automatic transmission cooling system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: Transmission Cooling (307-02 Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - V8 5.0L

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Feed and return tubes
Connections to the automatic transmission and the automatic transmission fluid cooler
Automatic transmission fluid level
3.
4.
Symptom Chart
Condition
Over heating of the
automatic
transmission
Over heating of the
automatic
transmission
Possible Causes
Obstruction in the automatic
transmission fluid cooler
Loss of automatic
transmission fluid
Connections to the automatic

transmission and the automatic
transmission fluid cooler
Leak at oil cooler
Loss of automatic
transmission fluid
Obstruction in the automatic

transmission fluid tubes
Action
Flush out the automatic transmission fluid cooler with new
automatic transmission fluid. If the flushing is unsuccessful,
install a new transmission fluid cooler.
Flush out the automatic transmission fluid cooler tubes with
new automatic transmission fluid. If the flushing is
unsuccessful install new automatic transmission fluid cooler
tubes.
Check the integrity of the tubes, connections and seals. Check
the torque of the tube fixings.
Check the integrity of tubes, connections and seals. Check the
torque of the tube fixings.
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Transmission Fluid Cooler V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

stands.
2.

3.
Refer to: Cooling System Draining and Vacuum Filling (303-03,

4.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
5.
6.
7.
Torque: 5 Nm
Installation
1.
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Transmission Fluid Cooler V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

stands.
2.

3.
Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03,

4.
Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12, Removal and Installation).

5.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
6.
7.
8.
Torque: 5 Nm
Installation
1.
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Removal
1.

stands.
2.
Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01, General

Procedures).
3.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
4.
Torque: 11 Nm
5.
Torque: 23 Nm
6.

correct.
Installation
1.
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V8 5.0L

Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Item
Upshift paddle switch to steering wheel retaining bolt
Downshift paddle switch to steering wheel retaining bolt
Transmission control switch (TCS) to floor console bracket retaining bolts
Emergency park position release lever cable bracket to transmission housing retaining bolts
Nm lb-ft lb-in
3
27
3
27
3
27
11
8
-
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol - External Controls
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Upshift (+) paddle switch
Downshift (-) paddle switch
Emergency park release
INTRODUCTION
The external controls for the transmission consist of a JaguarDrive selector, two paddle switches and an emergency park
release.
The JaguarDrive selector transmits driver transmission selections to the TCM (transmission control module). The paddle
switches allow the driver to initiate gear shifts when the transmission is in the sequential shift manual mode. The emergency
park release ensures the transmission is kept in neutral during vehicle recovery operations.
JAGUARDRIVE SELECTOR
The Jaguardrive selector is a rotary selector installed in the top of the JaguarDrive selector module. The JaguarDrive selector
module is located in the floor console and controls the vehicle optimization functions on the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to: Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Description and
Operation).
The TCM allows the transmission to be operated as a conventional automatic unit by selecting P, R, N, D on the JaguarDrive
selector.
Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector allows the selection of P (park), R (reverse), N (neutral) and D (drive). By depressing
the JaguarDrive selector and rotating clockwise from the D position, S (sport) mode can be selected. The JaguarDrive
selector is fully electronic rotary transmission selector with no mechanical connection to the transmission.
The JaguarDrive selector rises from the JaguarDrive selector module once the engine is running. When the engine is stopped
with the JaguarDrive selector in any position other than N, it retracts into the JaguarDrive selector module again. If the
selector is in position N when the engine is stopped, it remains in the raised position for up to 10 minutes, for use in a drive
through car wash for example. After 10 minutes the selector automatically retracts into the JaguarDrive selector module. The
selector also retracts if P is selected within the 10 minute period.
If the JaguarDrive selector does not rise from the console when the engine is started, but electrical power is supplied to the
selector, the retracted selector can still be rotated to make selections. If electrical power to the JaguarDrive selector is lost,
the selector will not rise from the console when the engine is started and the retracted selector will not rotate.
The JaguarDrive selector contains an internal interlock solenoid to prevent the selector from being rotated when the engine
is not running.
The engine can be stopped with the JaguarDrive selector in any position. Once the engine is stopped the selector will
automatically reset to the P position and the transmission park lock will be engaged, except if the selector is moved to the N
position when the engine is stopped.
PADDLE SWITCHES
Two gear change 'paddle' switches are fitted at the rear of the steering wheel and allow the driver to operate the
transmission as a semi-automatic manual gearbox using the Jaguar sequential shift feature.
Each paddle switch has 3 connections; ground, illumination PWM (pulse width modulation) supply and ground switch signal.
The paddle switches are hardwired to the steering wheel audio switches. Operation of the paddle switch completes a ground
path to the audio switch assembly. The audio switch assembly converts the completed ground signal into a LIN (local
interconnect network) bus signal which is passed via the clockspring to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster
converts the signal into a high speed CAN (controller area network) bus signal to the TCM.
Pulling the LH (left-hand) downshift - paddle provides down changes and pulling the RH (right-hand) upshift (+) paddle
provides up changes. The first operation of either paddle, after sport mode is selected, puts the transmission into permanent
manual Jaguar sequential shift mode. Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector back to the D position, returns the transmission to
conventional automatic operation.
Temporary operation of manual Jaguar sequential shift mode can also be operated with the JaguarDrive selector in the D
position. Operation of either the upshift or downshift paddles activates the manual mode operation. If the JaguarDrive
selector is in D, Jaguar sequential shift will cancel after a time period or can be cancelled by pressing and holding the +
paddle for approximately 2 seconds.
EMERGENCY PARK RELEASE
Item
Part Number
Description
Strap
Locking cylinder
Operating lever
Cable guide bracket
Upper cable
Cable joint
Lower cable
Cable bracket
Park interlock lever
10
Operating lever base
11
Latch
The emergency park release consists of an operating lever that is connected to a park interlock lever on the transmission by
an upper and lower cable assembly.
One end of the operating lever is attached to a base by a hinge pin. A locking cylinder is installed in the other end of the
operating lever, to secure the operating lever to the base. A strap is attached to the operating lever, next to the locking
cylinder, to pull on when raising the operating lever. The base is installed on top of the transmission tunnel, under the cubby
box of the floor console. An access panel for the operating lever is located under the twin cup holder in the cubby box.
The park interlock lever is attached to the transmission selector shaft.
When operated, the emergency park release turns the transmission selector shaft and locks the transmission in neutral.
In the event of the vehicle requiring recovery, the park lock can be released manually with the use of the emergency park
release mechanism. To release the park lock:
Remove the trim cover from the rear of the floor console and locate the emergency park release lever.
Rotate the locking mechanism of the lever 90 degrees counterclockwise.
Apply the footbrake, pull the lever upwards and ensure it is locked in the vertical position.
Raising the emergency park release lever causes the emergency park release cable to rotate the park interlock lever on the
transmission, which disengages the parking pawl and engages neutral. This allows the vehicle to freewheel.
To re-engage the park lock:

Hold the strap on the emergency park release lever, release the latch and lower the lever to the horizontal position.
Lock the lever by turning the locking mechanism 90 degrees clockwise.
Install the trim cover.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
TCM
Diagnostic socket
Instrument cluster
ECM
Steering wheel audio switch
10
Clockspring
11
12
Four additional switches are located adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector and control the JaguarDrive control functions.
For additional information, refer to: Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Description and
Operation).
JaguarDrive Selector
Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector to any of the five positions is sensed by the TCM via the high speed CAN bus. A LIN bus
connection is also provided but is only used in the event of a CAN bus failure as a back-up. The TCM then reacts according to
the selected position. The JaguarDrive selector is a magnetic system using Hall effect sensors to determine the position of the
selector.
The S position selection allows the TCM to operate the transmission using the semi-automatic Jaguar sequential shift. Gear
selections are sensed by the TCM when the driver operates the steering wheel paddle switches. Once the JaguarDrive
selector position is confirmed, the TCM outputs appropriate information on the high speed CAN bus which is received by the
instrument cluster to display the gear selection information in the message center.
and Operation).
The paddles can also be used on a temporary basis when the JaguarDrive selector is in the D position to override the
automatic gear selection if required.
PARK INTERLOCK AND NEUTRAL LOCK

Neutral lock is a new feature introduced as a requirement for the JaguarDrive selector. The selector is always locked at
ignition on when the engine is not running, except after an engine stall when the selector is not in P or N.
If, when driving with the JaguarDrive selector in S, D or R at a speed of more than 5 km/h (3 mph), the driver selects P or N:
Without the brake pedal pressed, the JaguarDrive selector will be immediately locked once the vehicle speed falls to
below 5 km/h (3 mph).

With the brake pedal pressed, the JaguarDrive selector will remain locked for as long as the brake pedal remains
pressed, regardless of vehicle speed.

The transmission will only engage park once the vehicle speed is less than 2 km/h (1 mph).
If the driver selects N and releases the brake pedal with a vehicle speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the JaguarDrive
selector will be locked 2 seconds after N is selected. The selector will remain locked until the driver presses the brake pedal
again.
To ensure that a driver request to change from a non-driving range (N for example) to a driving range (D for example), the
park interlock and neutral lock features are used in conjunction with the intermediate position.
If the transmission receives a range change request without the brake pedal pressed, the TCM initiates a soft lock function.
The transmission will remain in park or neutral, depending on the starting position.
If a transmission position letter is flashing in the message center and the vehicle has no drive, the driver must:
Press the brake pedal.
Reselect N or P on the JaguarDrive selector.
Select the required driving range, ensuring that the brake pedal is pressed.
Rocking Function
The rocking function is a new feature introduced to compliment the neutral lock function. For all changes from a non-driving
range to a driving range, it is necessary to press the brake pedal (to release either the park interlock or neutral lock).
In situations where the driver will require to change the gear selection from R to D, or from D to R, without brake pedal input
(car park maneuvering, 3 point turns or 'rocking' the vehicle from a slippery surface for example), the rocking function gives
a 2 second lock delay when N is selected on the JaguarDrive selector and the brake pedal is not pressed.
Intermediate Position
If the JaguarDrive selector is rotated slowly from P to S and back to position P with the brake pedal pressed, the R or D
position display letter in the message center will flash and the transmission will remain in park or neutral depending on the
previous starting position of the selector.
If the brake pedal is released when R or D is flashing in the message center and the JaguarDrive selector is rotated to the R
or D position, the required range will not be selected and the transmission will remain in park or neutral, depending on the
previous starting position. This feature is known as soft lock.
If the driving range letter in the message center is flashing and the vehicle has no drive, the driver should depress the brake
pedal to reselect N or P, and then select the required driving range while the brake pedal remains pressed.

Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - External Controls
For a detailed description of the automatic transmission controls, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
in the workshop manual. REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Electrical
Check for stuck/jammed switches and
buttons
Visibly damaged or worn components
Loose or missing fasteners
Fuses/Relays
Damaged, Loose or Corroded Connector(s)
Damage to Wiring Loom/Incorrect Location, Stretched or
Taught
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
NOTE: If the control module/transmission is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
prior to the installation of a new module/transmission.
DTC
B108708
B1087-
Description
LIN Bus "A" - Bus
Signal / Message
Failures
LIN Bus "A" -
Possible Causes
LIN Bus "A" Error
Transmission control module LIN
Action
check LIN input signal circuit for short,
open circuit
81
invalid serial data

received
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - alive /

82
sequence counter
incorrect / not
updated
B1087- LIN Bus "A" - value
83
B108787
LIN Bus "A" missing message
B1142- Ignition Status 1 62

signal compare
failure
B123C- Dynamic Stability
01
Control Status
Indicator - General
Electrical Failure
B123D- Dynamic Stability

64
Control Button signal plausibility
failure
B123F01
Adaptive Speed
Limiter Mode
Indicator - General
Electrical Failure
B124164
Adaptive Speed
Limiter Button signal plausibility
failure
B124264
Winter Button signal plausibility

failure
B1243- Winter Button Mode

01
Indicator - General
Electrical Failure
B1244-
Dynamic / Sport
message error: complement fault

open circuit faults. Check Transmission
control module for related DTCs and refer
to relevant DTC Index
message error: Alive counter fault
message error: checksum fault
message error: missing message
Hardwired Ignition and CAN powermode Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
signals differ
check ignition supply circuit for short,
open circuit
Dynamic stability control LED failure
Suspect transmission shift module, check
operation of the Dynamic stability control
button status illumination, check and
install new transmission shift module as
required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the
Dynamic stability control button may be Check for normal Dynamic stability control
stuck, May be due to a faulty button or
button functionality. If it operates
to the user holding the button for a
normally then no further action required.
prolonged period. (Dynamic stability If the Dynamic stability control button fails
control button detected as pressed for to operate normally then may be due to
30 seconds) (S1)
an internal fault, check and install new
transmission shift module as required,
refer to the new module/component
installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
Adaptive Speed Limiter LED failure
operation of the active speed limiter
button status illumination, check and
May be due to a faulty button or to the Check for normal adaptive speed limiter
user holding the button for a prolonged
button functionality. If it operates
period (Adaptive Speed Limiter button normally then no further action required.
detected as pressed for 30 seconds)
If the adaptive speed limiter button fails
to operate normally then may be due to
an internal fault, check and install new
Index
May be due to a faulty button or to the
Check for normal winter button
user holding the button for a prolonged functionality. If it operates normally then
period. (Winter button detected as
no further action required. If the winter
pressed for 30 seconds)
button fails to operate normally then may
be due to an internal fault, check and
Winter LED failure
operation of the winter button status
illumination, check and install new
Index
May be due to a faulty button or to the
Check for normal dynamic mode button
64
Button - signal
B124501
Dynamic / Sport
Button Mode
Indicator - General
Electrical Failure
C113A- Wake up Control 62

signal compare
failure
44
Module Keep Alive
Memory (KAM)
Error - data
memory failure
44
Module Random
Access Memory
(RAM) Error - data
memory failure
45
Module Read Only
Memory (ROM)
Error - program
memory failure
P0606Control Module
2F
Processor - signal
erratic
P060647
Control Module
Processor watchdog / safety
Micro controller
failure
P0705- Transmission Range
09
Sensor A Circuit
(PRNDL Input) Component Failures
46
Sensor A Circuit
(PRNDL Input) calibration /
parameter memory
failure
86
Sensor A Circuit
(PRNDL Input) signal invalid
01
Display Circuit General Electrical
Failure
P081C- Park Input Circuit 64

signal plausibility
failure
user holding the button for a prolonged functionality. If it operates normally then
period. (Dynamic/Performance button no further action required. If the dynamic
detected as pressed for 30 seconds)
mode button fails to operate normally
then may be due to an internal fault,
check and install new transmission shift
Dynamic / Sport LED Failure
operation of the dynamic mode button
status illumination, check and install new
Index
Hardwired delayed power and CAN Bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Engine Running status differ.
check hardwired wake up (start stop
illumination) input circuit for short, open
circuit
Transmission shift module Internal
failure
and install new transmission shift module
as required, refer to the new
failure
failure
failure
failure
PRNDS sensor fault
PRNDS calibration missing/invalid
Received signal incorrect

PRNDS LED failure
operation of PRNDS display, check and
Hardwired Park and Transmission
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
control module Position Display signals check Park input signal circuit for short,
are not consistent
open circuit. Check Transmission control
module for Park signal failure DTCs. Check
operation of signal - should be set (equal
to vehicle supply voltage) when
transmission in P and un-set (equal to
P084F- Park/Neutral Switch

11
Output Circuit circuit short to
ground
P084FPark / Neutral
15
Switch Output
Circuit - circuit
short to battery or
open
P176A- Transmission Range
01
Selector Up and
Down Position
Circuit - General
Electrical Failure
Park/neutral signal circuit short to
ground
Park/neutral signal circuit short to
power or open circuit
Raise/Lower mechanism up / down
sensor fault

13
Selector Up and
Down Position
Raise/Lower mechanism current sense

19
Selector Up and
Down Position
Circuit - circuit
current above
threshold
Raise/Lower mechanism motor over

94
Selector Up and
Down Position
Circuit - unexpected
operation
Motor current detected while gear
P176B- Transmission Range

71
Selector Up and
Down Position
Control Error actuator stuck
Raise Lower failure. Note: Can be due
P176C- Transmission Range

07
Selector Lock
Control Error Mechanical Failures
Gear selector movement detected while

11
Selector Lock
Control Error circuit short to
ground
Short to ground detected while solenoid
fault
current
selector knob not moving up or down

for 100ms
to driver abuse! If DTC is detected then

test raise/lower functionality to confirm
OK with no abuse forces or obstructions
present. Only replace Transmission shift
module if raise/lower issues are present
with no abuse forces or obstructions
present.
locked. DTC set after 100ms. Park lock

failure Transmission shift module has
detected that the selector has been
turned while a lock request has been
received from the Transmission control
module This is usually due to the driver
releasing the brake pedal with the
selector in between positions and does
not represent a fault.
active for 100ms.
vehicle ground) when transmission in

R,N,D,S
check the park/neutral signal circuit for
short to ground
check the park/neutral signal circuit for
short to power or open circuit
Cycle ignition, clear DTC and retest. If

fault persists, check and install new
transmission shift module as required.
Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any
prior approval programme is in operation,
prior to the installation of a new
module/component
module/component
module/component
module/component
Check that no visible obstructions are
present and test for normal raise/lower
operation. If transmission shift module
raises and lowers normally then no further
action is required. If the transmission shift
module fails to raise and lower normally
even though no obstructions or abuse
forces are present then may be due to an
internal fault, check and install new
Index
Check for normal shift interlock
lock/unlock operation, and check for short
circuit DTCs. If the transmission shift
module locks and unlocks normally then
no further action is required. If the
transmission shift module fails to lock
normally when fully in the P position then
may be due to an internal fault, check and
operation of the shift interlock, check and

12
Selector Lock
Control Error circuit short to
power
73
Selector Lock
Control Error actuator stuck
closed
U0001- High Speed CAN

88
Communication Bus
- bus off
00
With ECM/PCM "A" missing message

00
with TCM - missing
message

00
With Anti-Lock
Brake System
(ABS) Control
Module - missing
message
00
With Suspension
Control Module "B"
- missing message

00
With Instrument
Panel Cluster (IPC)
Control Module missing message
U030000
Internal Control
Module Software
sub type
information
U040192
Invalid Data
Received From
ECM/PCM performance or
incorrect operation
U040264
Invalid Data
Received from
Transmission
control module signal plausibility
failure

operation of the shift interlock, check and
Solenoid Unlock Failure. This may be
Check for normal shift interlock
due either to the user applying a
lock/unlock operation. If the transmission
prolonged rotational force against the
shift module locks and unlocks normally
selector lock mechanism while it is
then no further action is required. If the
attempting to unlock or due to an
transmission shift module fails to lock and
internal failure
unlock normally then may be due to an
internal fault, check and install new
Index
HS CAN Failure (Bus Off)
check CAN bus for short, open circuit
Short to power detected for 100ms.
Lost communication with the engine

check the CAN Bus connection to the
engine control module for short, open
circuit. Check the engine control module
for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC Index
Lost communication with the
transmission control module
TCM_PosDisp signal not received for
transmission control module for short,
75mS. (S3)
open circuit. Check the transmission
Lost communication with the anti-lock Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
brake system (ABS) control module
check the CAN Bus connection to the anti Message containing TCSSwitchSports is lock brake system (ABS) control module
not received for 450mS. (S3)
for short, open circuit. Check the anti-lock
brake system (ABS) control module for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC Index
Lost communication with the
suspension control module "B"
Message containing SUMB signals is not suspension control module "B for short,
received for 750mS. (S3)
open circuit. Check the suspension control
module "B" for related DTCs and refer to
Lost communication with instrument
panel cluster
Message containing Powermode is not
instrument panel cluster for short, open
received for 350mS. (S3)
circuit. Check the instrument panel cluster
for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC Index
Invalid master configuration ID received
Re-configure the RJB using the
Clear DTC and re-test, if DTC remains
suspect the transmission shift module.
Check and install a new module as
Jaguar Drive Optimisation Winter/
Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to
Performance modes not available. Fault
message if a Jaguar Drive Optimization
mode button is pressed
Message received from Engine Control
Module indicates it is unable to support
Jaguar Drive Optimisation modes.
Implausible lock request received
Unexpected lock data received from
Transmission control module. Check for
additional communication DTCs and follow
relevant service actions. If no other
communication DTCs present, check
Transmission control module for related
control module
Engine speed signal not received for
450mS (S3)
U040281
Invalid Data
Received from
Transmission
control module invalid serial data
received
U0402Invalid Data
82
Received from
Transmission
control module alive / sequence
counter incorrect /
not updated
U0402Invalid Data
83
Received from
Transmission
control module value of signal
protection
U0402Invalid Data
92
Received from
Transmission
control module performance or
incorrect operation
U0415Invalid Data
92
Received From AntiLock Brake System
(ABS) Control
Module performance or
incorrect operation
U0422Invalid Data
08
Received From
Body Control
Module - Bus
Signal / Message
Failures
U0422Invalid Data
81
Received From
central junction box
- invalid serial data
received
U0422Invalid Data
92
Received From
- performance or
incorrect operation
U043AInvalid Data
92
Received From
Suspension Control
Module "B" performance or
incorrect operation
U101A- Lost Communication
86
With Transmission
control module
(Multiple Bus) signal invalid
U1A1404
CAN Initialization
Failure - System
Internal Failures
U20124A
Car Configuration
Parameter(s) incorrect
component installed
Transmission control module CAN
message error: complement fault

Check Transmission control module for
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
If no fault found then refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
bus for short, open circuit
Alive Counter fault detected (Stuck,

jumps or Fault Flag). More than 1 fault DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
in 200ms.
Calculated checksum for Transmission

control module message data does not DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
match received checksum. More than 1
fault in 200ms.
Message received from Transmission

Control Module indicates it is unable to DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
support Jaguar Drive Optimisation
modes.
Information only. Message received
from Anti-Lock Brake System module

indicates it is unable to support Jaguar
Drive Optimisation modes.
Update bit for powermode signal not
received from central junction box.

Possible CAN fault
Invalid powermode complement data
received from central junction box
Message received from power assisted
steering module indicates that it is

unable to support Jaguar Drive
Optimisation modes
Information only, Suspension Module
unable to support Jaguar Drive

Optimisation modes (Invalid data is
received from the SUMB)
CAN and LIN bus failed. FOR
Check ABS module for DTCs and refer to

Check central junction box for DTCs and

refer to the relevant DTC Index
Check central junction box for DTCs and

refer to the relevant DTC Index
Check instrument cluster and central

junction box for DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index. If no fault found then
refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check CAN bus for short, open circuit
related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC Index
Check for Transmission control module

CAN and/or LIN DTCs present in
transmission shift module then refer to
actions for these specific DTCs. If no
additional Transmission control module
CAN and/or LIN DTCs present in
transmission shift module then no further
action required
Signal configuration not present /
incorrect.
Mismatch detected between vehicle
Check correct transmission shift hardware
configuration and installed gear selector
variant is installed for the vehicle
variant. Check correct part fitted, and if
configuration - i.e. for supercharged
fault still present, check vehicle
variants, transmission shift modules with
INFORMATION ONLY - No action
necessary if no additional CAN or LIN
DTCs present
configuration
U2100- Initial Configuration

00
Not Complete - no
sub type
information
Transmission shift module not fully
configured.
U300316
Battery Voltage circuit voltage

below threshold
Low voltage detected at Transmission
U300317
Battery Voltage circuit voltage

above threshold
Battery Voltage signal compare
failure
High voltage detected at Transmission
U300362
shift module (Battery voltage < 8.5V for

660mS)
shift module (Battery voltage > 16.5V

for 660mS)
Measured voltage different to CAN
received voltage (Voltage difference >
2V for > 10s)
dynamic mode button should be installed

only. All other vehicles should contain
hardware without the dynamic mode
button. If correct hardware installed then
check/amend car configuration
parameters using the manufacturer
Ensure battery is in a fully charged and
serviceable condition, refer to the battery
care manual. Check ECM for alternator
related DTCs, Check battery power feed
circuit to Transmission shift module, Clear
DTCs, Cycle ignition
Check ECM for alternator/over charging
related DTCs, Clear DTCs, Cycle ignition
Compare vehicle voltage to voltage
present at the Transmission shift module,
Repair fault, Clear DTCs, Cycle ignition

S/C 5.0L Petrol - Downshift Paddle Switch
Removal
1.
Torque: 3 Nm
2.
Installation
1.
NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed correctly.


Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Emergency Park Position Release Lever
Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.

4.
Torque: 11 Nm
5.
Torque: 25 Nm
6.
Torque: 10 Nm
7.
CAUTION: Make sure that the cable is

correctly routed.
NOTE: Note the routing of the emergency park
brake release cable.
8.
9.
10.

correct.
Torque: 6 Nm
Installation
1.

Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Removal
1.

2.

avoid damage.
3.
CAUTION: It is imperative that no damage is

caused to the electrical connector or the module.
Torque: 3 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Make sure that all diagnostic trouble codes


Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Knob
Removal
1.
2.
WARNING: The brake pedal must not be

depressed whilst tightening the retaining screw.
CAUTION: Make sure the Torx screw is not

over tightened. Failure to follow this instruction will
Torque: 1.3 Nm
Installation
1.

S/C 5.0L Petrol - Upshift Paddle Switch
Removal
1.
Torque: 3 Nm
2.
Installation
1.
NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed correctly.

Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Torque Specifications
Description
Catalytic converter retaining bolts
Rear muffler support retaining bolts
Exhaust securing strap nuts
Exhaust support retaining bolts
Nm
40
25
55
25
lb-ft
30
18
40
18
lb-in
-
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust System

Item
Part Number
Description
Rear section
Center section
LH (left hand) front section
RH (right hand) front section
Item
Part Number
Description
Rear section
Active exhaust system
LH front section
RH front section
Center section
INTRODUCTION
The exhaust systems on both NA (naturally aspirated) and SC (supercharger) vehicles are manufactured from stainless
steels and have four separate sections:
LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand) front sections
A center section
A rear section.
The sections of the exhaust system are connected together with slip joints and clamps.
FRONT SECTIONS
NOTE: LH front section shown, RH front section is mirror image.
Item
Part Number
Description
Flange
Inlet pipe
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) boss
Outlet pipe
Catalytic converter
Each of the front sections consists of an inlet pipe, a catalytic converter and an outlet pipe welded together. A flange on the
inlet pipe connects the front section to the related exhaust manifold on the engine. The flange has two holes which locate on
studs in the exhaust manifold and is secured with flanged nuts.
In the catalytic converters, the exhaust gases are passed through honeycombed ceramic elements coated with a special
surface treatment called 'washcoat'. The washcoat increases the surface area of the ceramic elements by a factor of
approximately 7000. On top of the washcoat is a coating containing palladium and rhodium, which are the active
constituents for converting harmful emissions into inert by-products. The palladium and rhodium take oxygen from nitrogen
oxides, to leave nitrogen, and combine the oxygen with carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons to leave carbon dioxide and
water.
CENTER SECTION
Naturally Aspirated Vehicles
Item
Part Number
Description
Inlet pipe
Mounting rubbers
Outlet pipe
Front muffler
Front to center section joint clamps
The center section has two inlet and outlet pipes and a muffler all welded together. A plate is welded between the inlet pipes
at the front of the center section. Two suspension rubbers connect hangers on the outlet pipes to hangers on the underside
of the body.
The muffler consists of an outer case and two end plates, which contain two perforated tubes and a baffle plate.
Supercharger Vehicles
Item
Part Number
Description
Intermediate pipe
Outlet pipe
Mounting rubbers
Air deflector shield
Center muffler
Front muffler
Front to center section joint clamps
8
Inlet pipe
The center section has two inlet, intermediate and outlet pipes, and two mufflers all welded together. Two plates are welded
between the inlet pipes at the front of the center section. Two suspension rubbers connect hangers on the outlet pipes to
hangers on the underside of the body.
An air deflector shield is attached to four brackets on the outlet pipes. The air deflector shield directs cooling air on to the
electronic differential at high vehicle speeds.
The front muffler consists of an outer case and two end plates, which contain two perforated tubes and a baffle plate. The
center muffler consists of upper and lower shells, which contain perforated pipes, installed inside over-pipes, and three baffle
plates.
REAR SECTION
Naturally Aspirated Vehicles
Item
Part Number
Description
Mounting rubber
Rear muffler
Outlet pipe
Finisher
Mounting rubber
Semi-active muffler valve
Inlet pipe
Center to rear section joint clamps
9
Mounting rubber
The rear section has two inlet and outlet pipes welded to a muffler. A polished stainless steel finisher is installed on each of
the outlet pipes. Three suspension rubbers connect hangers on the muffler to hangers and a bracket on the underside of the
body.
The muffler consists of upper and lower shells, which contain inlet pipes connected to SAM (semi active muffler) valves, and
perforated inner pipes supported in five baffle plates. The inner pipes connect to the outlet pipes.
The SAM valves vary the tone of the exhaust to give a more sporty sound at higher engine speeds. The SAM valves are
normally closed, spring loaded check valves.
The SAM valves are non serviceable and the muffler is replaced as a complete assembly.
Supercharger Vehicles
Item
Part Number
Description
Rear muffler
Mounting rubber
Exhaust valve
Outlet pipes
Finishers
Exhaust valve
Mounting rubber
Inlet pipe
Center to rear section joint clamps
10
Mounting rubber
The rear section has two inlet pipes and four outlet pipes welded to a muffler. A stiffener plate is welded between each pair
of outlet pipes. A polished stainless steel finisher is installed on each of the outlet pipes. Three suspension rubbers connect
hangers on the muffler to hangers and a bracket on the underside of the body.
The muffler consists of upper and lower shells, which contain perforated inlet and inner pipes supported in five baffle plates.
An exhaust valve is installed in the outboard outlet pipe on each side of the muffler. The exhaust valves are part of the
active exhaust system.
Active Exhaust System
Item
Part Number
Description
Bracket and isolator mounts
Vacuum pump
Solenoid valve
LH exhaust valve
Pipe
Pipe carrier
RH exhaust valve
Reservoir
Restrictor
10
Check valve
The active exhaust system allows exhaust gases to bypass the muffler to produce a more sporty exhaust sound. In addition
to the exhaust valves, the active exhaust system has:
A vacuum pump
A solenoid valve
A reservoir
Related pipes, which incorporate a restrictor and a check valve.
Each exhaust valve consists of a normally open plate valve and pneumatic actuator.
The vacuum pump, solenoid valve and reservoir are attached to a bracket installed in the left rear wheel housing, behind the
wheel arch liner. Plastic pipes are connected between the vacuum pump, reservoir and solenoid valve, and between the
solenoid valve and the two exhaust valves. The pipes to the RH exhaust valve are located in pipe carriers attached to the
rear floor brace.
In the pipes between the solenoid valve and the exhaust valves, a restrictor is installed in parallel with a check valve. The
restrictor slows the flow of air through the pipes, to damp the opening of the exhaust valves. The check valve ensures air
flows only through the restrictor when the exhaust valves are opened, but allows the restrictor to be by-passed when the
exhaust valves are closed, to give an undamped closing movement.
The solenoid valve controls the operation of the exhaust valves by connecting them to the reservoir and vacuum pump or to
atmosphere. Atmospheric pressure enters the solenoid valve through a filter attached to a vent.
Operation of the active exhaust system is controlled by the ECM (engine control module).
CONTROL DIAGRAM (SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES ONLY)

NOTE: A = Hardwired
Part Number
Number
Part
Item
1
Description
Battery
Vacuum pump
Solenoid valve
ECM
Semi Active Muffler Valves (Naturally Aspirated Vehicles Only)
At low engine speeds the SAM valves are closed and restrict the flow through the muffler, which produces a more refined
exhaust sound. At higher engine speeds the increased pressure in the exhaust system opens the SAM valves and the
increased flow through the muffler produces a sportier exhaust sound.
Active Exhaust System (Supercharger Vehicles Only)

The position of the exhaust valves set by the ECM depends on engine speed, throttle angle and operating mode of the
transmission. At startup the exhaust valves are always open, to enhance the exhaust sound.
When the transmission is in the manual (sequential shift) mode, the exhaust valves are permanently open. When the
transmission is in the normal or sport mode, the position of the exhaust valves depends on engine speed and load, as
detailed in the following table:
Exhaust Valve Opening Strategy (Normal and Sport Transmission Modes)
Engine Speed: rev/min

Throttle Angle: %
700
1000
1100
2000
2500
3000
3750
4000>
0
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
15
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
20
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
30
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
40
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
50
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
60
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
80>
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
The ECM energizes the active exhaust relay in the AJB (auxiliary junction box) 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on.
When the relay is energized, it supplies power to the vacuum pump and the solenoid valve. The vacuum pump is connected
to ground and runs continuously while the relay is energized, maintaining a depression in the reservoir and pipes to the
solenoid valve.
The solenoid valve is connected to ground through the ECM. When the ECM determines the exhaust valves require closing, it
connects the solenoid valve to ground. When the solenoid valve energizes, it opens the pipe connection from the reservoir
and vacuum pump to the exhaust valves, and closes the atmospheric vent. The depression at the reservoir and vacuum
pump is then sensed at the exhaust valves, via the check valve, and the exhaust valves close. When the ECM determines the
exhaust valves require opening, it disconnects the solenoid valve from ground. The solenoid valve de-energizes and closes
the pipe connection to the exhaust valves, and opens the atmospheric vent. Atmospheric pressure is then sensed at the
exhaust valves, via the restrictor, and the exhaust valves open.
Active Exhaust System Schematic
Item
Part Number
Description
Vacuum pump
Reservoir
Solenoid valve
Filter
Valve
Check valve
Restrictor
RH exhaust valve
LH exhaust valve

For a detailed description of the exhaust system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Exhaust System (309-00 Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description
and Operation).

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Leaks
Metal fatigue
Pipes, mufflers and catalytic converters
Joints
Mountings
Clearance around components
3.
4.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Excessively
noisy/leaking exhaust
Possible Cause
Exhaust system/components
Action
Inspect exhaust system, refer to Visual Inspection
above
Rectify leaks or Install new components as
Exhaust excessively
noisy at low speed
Exhaust sound enhancement
Loss of power
Restricted exhaust system

Exhaust sound enhancement
valve stuck open
valve stuck closed

Fuel system
Ignition system
necessary. Refer to Removal and Installation

instructions in this section
Install new muffler and tailpipe assembly.
REFER to: Rear Muffler (309-00 Exhaust System V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Install new exhaust components as necessary.
Refer to relevant Removal and Installation
instructions in workshop manual
Check for fuel system, ignition system, and
electronic engine controls DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Catalytic

Converter
Removal
1.

stands.
2.
and Installation).
3.

4.
5.

Torque: 40 Nm
6.
Installation
1.
2.

Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Catalytic

Converter RH
Removal
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.

4.
5.
6.
NOTE: Tighten the top nut first.

Torque:
Top nut 40 Nm
Bottom nut 40 Nm
7.
NOTE: If the original sensor is to be installed,

apply lubricant meeting specification ESE-M12A4-A
to the thread of the sensor.
Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1.
2.

Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Sound

Enhancement Vacuum Pump
Removal
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.
Torque: 10 Nm
4.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
1.
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Exhaust Sound

Enhancement Valve
Removal
WARNING: Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.
1.

2.

Installation
1.

Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.

component.
All vehicles
3.
Torque: 25 Nm
4.
Torque: 25 Nm
5.
6.
Torque: 50 Nm
7.

technician.
8.

technician.
9.

Installation
1.
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Front Muffler

Removal
1.

stands.
2.
Refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00 Exhaust System - V8 5.0L

3.
Torque: 25 Nm
4.
5.
Torque: 50 Nm
6.

technician.
Installation
1.
Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Rear Muffler

Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.

component.
All vehicles
3.
Torque: 25 Nm
4.
Torque: 50 Nm
5.

technician.
6.

technician.
7.

Installation
1.
Fuel System - General Information - Fuel System Pressure Release V8

General Procedures
Draining
1.
Remove the fuel pump fuse.
2.
Remove the fuel filler cap.
3.
CAUTION: When depressurising the fuel system, make

sure that there is no throttle input. Failure to follow this
Start the engine and allow it to idle until the engine stalls.
4.
Crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure

that the fuel rail pressure is released.
Filling
1.
NOTE: Make sure all repairs have been carried out before
proceeding to the following steps.
Install the fuel pump fuse.
2.
Install the fuel filler cap.
3.
Read and clear stored DTC fault codes.
Fuel System - General Information - Fuel Tank Draining

General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Fuel drain adaptor
310-154
WARNINGS:
vehicle.
in personal injury.
The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during this operation. Ensure that all necessary precautions are taken to prevent
fire and explosion.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, ensure the area around the joint faces and connections
are clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
1.

Specifications).
2.
Remove the rear RH seat cushion cover.

3.
Position the underseat sound deadner, to gain

access to the fuel tank grommet.
4.
Remove the rubber grommet.

5.
Cut the sealing plug from the top of the 2 drain

ports.
6.
Connect the fuel tank drain equipment ground cable to the

vehicle.
7.
Remove the fuel from the tank, via the 2 drain ports, to drain
the left and right sides of the fuel tank.
8.
Remove the fuel drain equipment.

9.
WARNING: After the fuel tank drain is

complete always fit the sealing covers over the
drain ports. Failure to do so will mean that fuel
vapour can escape.
Install the drain port sealing covers.
10.
Install the grommet.

11.
Position the sound deadner.
12.
Install the RH rear seat cushion.

13.
Refill the fuel tank.
14.

Specifications).
Fuel System - General Information - Quick Release Coupling

General Procedures
Disconnect
1.
WARNINGS:
Place the vehicle in a quarantined area and arrange "No

Smoking/Petrol Fumes" signs about the vehicle.
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground

the vehicle to earth and maintain the ground connection until
the work is complete.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of

any type when working on or near any fuel related components.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on

or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors
are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these
The fuel system remains pressurized for a long time after

the ignition is switched off. The fuel pressure must be relieved
before attempting any repairs. Failure to follow these

checked visually for leaks. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for fuel

spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling
precautions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
If taken internally do not induce vomiting, seek immediate

medical attention. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or
eyewash solution and seek medical attention.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling, as prolonged

contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
Relieve the fuel system pressure.
For additional information, refer to Pressure Relief in this
section.
2.
Disconnect the quick release fitting.

1. Release the retaining clip.
2. Disconnect the quick release fitting.
Connect
1.
To connect, reverse the disconnect procedure.
Fuel System - General Information - Quick Release Coupling - Push

Connect
General Procedures
Disconnect
1.
WARNINGS:
Place the vehicle in a quarantined area and arrange "No

Smoking/Petrol Fumes" signs about the vehicle.
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground

the vehicle to earth and maintain the ground connection until
the work is complete.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of

any type when working on or near any fuel related components.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on

or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors
are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these
The fuel system remains pressurized for a long time after

the ignition is switched off. The fuel pressure must be relieved
before attempting any repairs. Failure to follow these

checked visually for leaks. Failure to follow these instructions
This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for fuel

spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling
precautions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
If taken internally do not induce vomiting, seek immediate

medical attention. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or
eyewash solution and seek medical attention.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling, as prolonged

contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
Relieve the fuel system pressure.
For additional information, refer to Pressure Relief in this
section.
2.
Disconnect the push connect fitting.

Press the collar.
Disconnect the push connect fitting.
Connect
1.
To connect.
Support the male stub.
Push the connector fitting onto the stub until an
audible click can be heard.
Check the connection by a gentle tug test.
Fuel System - General Information - Spring Lock Couplings

General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Fuel spring lock decoupling tool 310-D005
WARNINGS:
Place the vehicle in a quarantined area and arrange "No Smoking/Petrol Fumes" signs about the vehicle.
in personal injury.
The fuel system remains pressurized for a long time after the ignition is switched off. The fuel pressure must be
relieved before attempting any repairs. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually for leaks. Failure to follow this instruction may
This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for fuel spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling
precautions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
If taken internally, do not induce vomiting, seek immediate medical attention. Failure to follow these instructions
attention.
Make sure the garter spring snaps over the male end of the spring lock coupling.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, ensure the area around the joint faces and connections
are clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
www.JagDocs.com
1.
2.
Release the fuel line safety clip.
3.
4.
Close the special tool and push it into the female end of
the spring lock coupling.
Disconnect the spring lock coupling.

Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid
spillage.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Connect the spring lock coupling.

Install a new garter spring.
Check the spring lock coupling, to make sure it is

correctly connected.
Attach the fuel line safety clip.
Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol General Specifications
Item
Fuel system type
Fuel tank construction
Fuel filter
Fuel tank sender unit
Fuel Pump:
Type/location
Operating pressure
Maximum output press at key on key off
Electronic - returnless
Stainless steel pressings
Mounted internally to the fuel tank
Mounted on the body of the fuel pump
Electric - submersible - located in the fuel tank
4.5 bar - 65lbf/in
6.3 bar - 91lbf/in
Capacities
Fuel tank capacity
Liters
71.1 (total) / 70.6 (useable)
Item
Fuel tank filler pipe bracket to vehicle
Fuel tank strap to vehicle - bolt
Fuel/vapor tube bracket to vehicle - bolt
Nm
7
35
7
lb-ft
5
26
5
lb-in
62
62
Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Tank and
Lines
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Fuel tank
FPDM (fuel pump driver module)
Fuel filler pipe
Vent pipe
Fuel LP (low pressure) sensor
Fuel delivery line
INTRODUCTION
The fuel tank and lines is an electronically controlled returnless system that delivers a continuous supply of LP fuel to the fuel
charging and control system on the engine. For additional information, refer to:
Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
The fuel tank and lines has:
A
A
A
A
A
A
fuel tank.
FPDM (fuel pump driver module).
fuel filler pipe.
vent pipe.
fuel delivery line.
fuel LP sensor.
FUEL TANK
Item
Part Number
Description
Internal vent pipes
Vent connector - to EVAP (evaporative emissions) canister
Baffle plate (2 off)
Remote pump housing
Fuel level sensor
6
7
Fuel level sensor
Pump module
Lower pressing
Upper pressing
10
Mounting flange
11
PVV (pressure ventilation valve)
12
Fuel filler check valve
13
Vent connector - to fuel filler pipe
14
LVS (liquid vapor separator)
The fuel tank is a saddle type tank made of upper and lower pressings of stainless steel. Two baffle plates are installed in the
fuel tank to reduce fuel surge.
Two metal straps attach the fuel tank to the underside of the vehicle, just forward of the rear suspension. A heat shield is
attached to the metal straps and to two brackets on the underside of the fuel tank. Isolator pads are bonded to the top of the
fuel tank at the contact points between the fuel tank and the vehicle.
Incorporated into the fuel tank are:
A pump module.
A mounting flange.
A PVV.
A LVS and related vent pipes.
A remote pump housing and related fuel pipes.
Two fuel level sensors.
A fuel filler check valve.
Pump Module
Item
Part Number
Electrical connector (connects to vehicle wiring at mounting flange)
Electrical connector (connects to mounting flange ground)
Fuel connector (supply to mounting flange)
PVV
Description
Housing
5
-
Filter
Fuel pump
RH (right hand) fuel level sensor
Jet pump
10
Electrical connector (connects to LH fuel level sensor)
The pump module takes fuel from both sides of the fuel tank and supplies it to the fuel delivery line via the PVV and the
mounting flange. The pump module is mounted in the RH (right-hand) side of the fuel tank, on a bayonet fitting welded to
the bottom of the fuel tank.
A swirl pot is integrated into the base of the pump module housing. A 60 micron filter is attached to the swirl pot inlet at the
base of the housing.
The fuel pump is an electric, variable speed, vane pump installed in the top of the housing. The pump has a maximum rated
flow of 234 liters/hour (61.82 US gallons/hour) at 12.2 V and 4.5 bar (65.3 lbf/in.2).
The inlet of the fuel pump is located in the center of the swirl pot. Pipes connect the two outlet ports of the fuel pump to the
PVV and to a jet pump on top of the housing. The jet pump draws fuel from the LH (left-hand) side of the fuel tank through a
suction pipe connected to the remote pump housing. A 'spider trap' in the remote pump housing prevents the ingress of
larger pieces of debris.
Operation of the fuel pump is controlled by the FPDM. The fuel pump is connected to the FPDM via an electrical connector on
the underside of the mounting flange.
Mounting Flange
Item
Part Number
RH drain connector
Fuel delivery line connector (with transportation blank installed)
Filter bowl
Electrical connector (from ground point)
Inlet connector (from PVV)
Ground point
Description
Mounting flange
7
8
6
LH drain connector
Electrical connector (connects to vehicle wiring)
The mounting flange filters the fuel before it enters the fuel delivery line and provides the fuel and electrical interfaces
between the interior and exterior of the fuel tank. The mounting flange is installed in the top of the fuel tank on the RH side.
A gasket, retainer ring, clamp ring and six nuts secure the mounting flange to the top of the fuel tank. The mounting flange
aperture provides access to the fuel tank interior.
A connector for the fuel delivery line is located in the top of the mounting flange. Two drain connectors, one for each side of
the fuel tank, are located in the mounting flange. Under the RH drain connector is a pipe that extends to the bottom of the
tank. Under the LH drain connector is a stub pipe, which connects to a pipe attached to the remote pump housing on the LH
side of the fuel tank.
The bowl on the underside of the mounting flange contains a fuel filter element and incorporates the fuel inlet connector. The
fuel filter element is non-serviceable and can only be replaced by replacing the mounting flange. Two cables connect an
electrical connector to a ground point on the base of the filter bowl.
A six pin electrical connector, located between the drain connectors, provides the electrical connection between the vehicle
wiring and the mounting flange ground point, the fuel pump and the fuel level sensors.
Pressure Ventilation Valve
The PVV is installed in the pipe between the pump module and the mounting flange to protect the system from excess
pressure. The PVV releases fuel back into the tank if pressure in the pipe increases to 7.3 to 8.3 bar (105.9 to 120.4 lbf/in.2).
Liquid Vapor Separator
Item
Part Number
Description
ROV (roll over valve)
Vent pipes
2
3
4
FLVV (fuel level vent valve)
OPRV (over pressure relief valve)
The LVS prevents the escape of liquid fuel through to the fuel tank vent pipes. The LVS is installed in a bracket in the top
center of the fuel tank. Vent pipes connect the LVS to two connectors in the upper rear corners of the fuel tank. The RH
connector is for a vent pipe connected to the top of the fuel filler pipe. The LH connector is for a vent pipe connected to the
EVAP (evaporative emission) canister.
For additional information, refer to: Evaporative Emissions (303-13 Evaporative Emissions - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol, Description and Operation).
Three valves are incorporated into the LVS:
An OPRV, to relieve any excess pressure in the fuel tank into the LVS
A FLVV, to limit the maximum fuel level when filling the fuel tank
A ROV, to prevent the escape of fuel through the vent pipes if the vehicle overturns, and allow the fuel tank to vent
when the FLVV is closed (i.e. when the fuel tank is full).
Vapor leaving the fuel tank passes through either the FLVV or the ROV during normal vehicle use. During filling, if the fuel
reaches the full level the FLVV closes and prevents fuel vapor passing through to the LVS. This causes the pressure in the
fuel tank to rise, which in turn causes the pump filling nozzle to cut off at approximately 17 mbar (0.25 lbf/in2).
The ROV contains a valve that closes if the vehicle overturns, and prevents liquid fuel escaping from the fuel tank through
the vent pipes.
The ball in the top of the ROV provides a pressure hold function, which is set at 45 mbar (0.65 lbf/in2). This prevents trickle
filling or over filling of the fuel tank.
Remote Pump Housing
Item
Part Number
Description
LH fuel level sensor
Remote pump housing
Pipe (from LH drain connector on mounting flange)
Pipe (to jet pump on pump module)
The remote pump housing is where fuel from the LH side of the fuel tank is drawn from to fill the swirl pot in the pump
module. The remote pump housing is installed on the front face of the LH rear baffle. Clips integrated into the remote pump
housing hold the LH fuel level sensor and the pipe from the LH drain connector on the mounting flange.
Fuel Level Sensors
Two identical fuel level sensors are installed in the fuel tank. One is mounted on the pump module and one is mounted on
the remote pump housing. The fuel level sensors are connected to the BJB (battery junction box) via the connector on the
mounting flange.
The fuel level sensors are magnetic passive position sensors. Each sensor consists of a sealed housing that contains 51 film
resistors mounted in an arc on a ceramic surface. The film resistors range in value from 51.2 to 992.11 Ohms and are wired
in series with individual contacts. A soft magnetic foil with 51 flexible contacts is mounted a small distance above the film
resistors. A magnet, located below the ceramic surface, is attached to a lever and float arm.
The magnet pulls the flexible contacts onto the opposing film resistor contacts, forming an electrical circuit. As the float arm
moves, the magnet follows the arc of film resistors and changes the point at which the flexible contacts are pulled onto the
opposing film resistor contacts, which changes the resistance in the circuit.
Sensor Operating Principle
Item
Part Number
Description
Magnetic foil
Spacer
Ceramic surface
Magnet
Resistance film
Fuel Filler Check Valve
The fuel filler check valve prevents the escape of fuel through the fuel filler pipe if the vehicle overturns. The fuel filler check
valve is installed in a stub pipe in the rear right corner of the fuel tank and sealed with an O-ring seal.
A door on the fuel filler check valve is normally held closed by a spring. During filling, the weight of fuel in the fuel filler pipe
is sufficient to open the door and allow fuel into the fuel tank.
FUEL PUMP DRIVER MODULE
The FPDM controls the speed of the fuel pump to match the fuel demand of the engine. The FPDM is installed in the RH end
of the evaporative emission canister.
The pump speed required is calculated by the ECM (engine control module) and transmitted to the FPDM in a PWM (pulse
width modulation) signal.
FUEL FILLER PIPE
Item
Part Number
Description
Baffle
Flapper
Hose
Pipe
Vent pipe connector
Filler cap
Tether
The top of the fuel filler pipe is located above the right rear wheel. The filler cap is a conventional screw in type which is
secured to the vehicle with a tether. The filler cap is covered by a plastic door, which has a locking motor controlled by the
active anti-theft system.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active, Description and Operation).
The fuel filler pipe is a stainless steel fabrication which is secured to the vehicle body by two brackets and a flange. A stub
pipe is incorporated into the top of the fuel filler pipe for connection of a vent pipe from the fuel tank. A baffle and flapper
are installed in the top of the fuel filler pipe. The baffle restricts the diameter of the fuel nozzle that can be used to fill the
fuel tank.
The bottom of the fuel filler pipe locates in a flexible hose attached to the fuel filler stub pipe in the rear right corner of the
fuel tank. Both ends of the hose are secured with worm drive clamps.
VENT PIPE
The vent pipe connects the vent connector at the right rear corner of the fuel tank to the stub pipe in the head of the fuel
filler pipe. Quick release connectors attach the vent pipe to the vent connection and the stub pipe. Cable ties secure the vent
pipe to the fuel filler pipe.
FUEL DELIVERY LINE

The fuel delivery line delivers fuel from the mounting flange to the engine compartment. The fuel delivery line is routed
along the front of the fuel tank and under the floor of the vehicle on the LH side. Clips secure the fuel delivery line in place
on the fuel tank and under the floor. At the front LH corner of the fuel tank a manifold is installed in the fuel delivery line to
allow installation of the fuel LP sensor.
FUEL LP SENSOR
The fuel LP sensor supplies a pressure signal to the ECM to enable closed loop control of the fuel pump. The fuel LP sensor is
installed in a manifold in the fuel delivery line, at the front left corner of the fuel tank.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Part Number
Item
Description
Battery
RH fuel level sensor
LH fuel level sensor
Fuel pump
FPDM
ECM
Instrument cluster
10
Fuel LP sensor
Fuel Level Sensors
The AJB (auxiliary junction box) sends a separate signal to each of the fuel level sensors. As the float arms of the fuel level
sensors move, the resistance across the fuel level sensors changes. Thus the level in the fuel tank determines the value of
the signals from the AJB.
From the two signal values the AJB derives a fuel quantity, which it incorporates into a medium speed CAN (controller area
network) message for the instrument cluster.
In addition to using the fuel quantity signal itself, the instrument cluster also transmits it on the high speed CAN for the
electronic engine controls system. For additional information, refer to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Fuel Pump
The FPDM is powered by a supply from the fuel pump relay in the AJB. The fuel pump relay is energized on opening the
driver's door, pressing the start button only or pressing the start button and the footbrake (which initiates engine cranking).
The FPDM supplies power to the fuel pump, and adjusts the power to control the speed of the fuel pump and thus the
pressure and flow in the fuel delivery line.
A PWM signal from the ECM tells the FPDM the required speed for the fuel pump. The on time of the PWM signal represents
half the fuel pump speed, e.g. if the PWM signal has an on time of 50%, the FPDM drives the pump at 100%.
The FPDM will only energize the fuel pump if it receives a valid PWM signal, with an on time of between 4% and 50%. To
switch the fuel pump off, the ECM transmits a PWM signal with an on time of 75%.
The output pressure from the fuel pump will change with changes of engine demand and fuel temperature. The ECM monitors
the input from the fuel LP sensor and adjusts the speed of the fuel pump as necessary to maintain a nominal output pressure
of 450 kPa (4.5 bar; 65.3 lbf/in.2), except during engine start-up. At engine start-up the target pressure for the fuel delivery
line is 630 kPa (6.3 bar; 91.4 lbf/in.2).
If the SRS (supplemental restraint system) outputs a crash signal on the high speed CAN, the ECM de-energizes the fuel
pump relay to prevent any further fuel being pumped to the engine.
If the ECM does not detect pressure in the fuel delivery line, it stops, or refuses to start, the engine and stores the
appropriate DTC (diagnostic trouble code).
The ECM receives a monitoring signal from the FPDM. Any FPDMDTC are stored by the ECM.
DTC can be retrieved from the ECM using the IDS (Integrated Diagnostic System). The FPDM itself cannot be interrogated by
the IDS.
Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Tank and
Lines
For a detailed description of the fuel tank and lines system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Fuel level
Fuel leaks
Damaged fuel lines
Throttle body
Electrical
Fuses
Harnesses
Sensor(s)
3.
4.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
fire

will not start
Difficult hot start
Possible Causes
Action
Ignition system
Fuel system
valve
Fuel pump
DTC Index
Spark plugs
HT short to ground
Ignition system
freeze content
Battery
Index
Fuel pump
Purge valve
Injector leak
Purge valve
Fuel pump
Ignition system


reached operating
temperature)
Injector leak
Purge valve
Fuel pump
Ignition system

Breather system
ECM relay
Ignition system
Air leakage
Fuel lines
fuel lines
Injector leak
Air leakage
Throttle motor
Ignition system
Fuel pump/lines
Air leakage
Ignition system
timing (VCT) hub
Fuel pump/lines
Throttle motor
Ignition system
Fuel pump/lines
Air leakage
Sticking VCT hub
Throttle motor

system
acceleration
Engine backfires
Engine surges
Breather system
Air leakage



Index
DTC Index
Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Level
Sender
Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Fuel Pump and Sender Unit (310-01 Fuel Tank and
Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
3.
Installation
1.
Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Pump
and Sender Unit
Removal
1.

and Operation).
2.

3.
Refer to: Fuel Tank (310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L
4.
5.
Torque: 10 Nm
6.
7.
8.

fuel tank level sensor float and arm.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the fuel tank

level sensor float and arm.
Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Tank
Removal
1.

and Operation).
2.

3.
Refer to: Fuel Tank Draining (310-00 Fuel System - General

4.

and Installation).
5.

fluid.
6.

Torque: 25 Nm
7.

Installation
1.
Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Fuel Tank
Filler Pipe
Removal
1.
2.
Refer to: Fuel Tank Draining (310-00 Fuel System - General

3.
Remove the right-hand wheel and tire.

and Installation).
4.
5.
Remove the right-hand wheel arch liner.
Remove the right-hand halfshaft.

6.
NOTE: Non federal market vehicles only.

Torque: 7 Nm
7.
NOTE: Federal market vehicles only.

Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
1.
Acceleration Control Torque Specifications
Item
Accelerator pedal to bracket - screw
Nm
10
lb-ft
7
lb-in
-
Acceleration Control - Acceleration Control

For a detailed description of the acceleration control systems, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in
REFER to: Acceleration Control (310-02 Acceleration Control, Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Electrical
Fuses
Wiring harness
Sensor(s)
Accelerator pedal
Throttle body
3.
4.
If the concern is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
NOTE: If a module or component is suspect, and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the
DTC
P012100
P012200
Description
sensor circuits TP 1 and TP
2 - range/performance
Possible Cause
TP sensor sensing
circuits TP 1 and TP
2 - short to power,
high resistance
TP sensor failure

sensor circuit TP 1 - low
input
TP sensor sensing
circuit TP 1 - short to
ground, high
resistance
TP sensor failure
Action
Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
this DTC using the manufacturer approved

diagnostic system
Install a new throttle body as necessary.
REFER to: Throttle Body (303-04 Fuel
Charging and Controls - Vehicles Without:
Supercharger, Removal and Installation).
diagnostic system

P012300
P022200
P022300

sensor circuit TP 1 - high
input
TP sensor sensing

input
TP sensor sensing

input
TP sensor sensing
P022700 Accelerator Pedal Position

(APP) sensor circuit APP 1 low input
P022800 Accelerator pedal position
(APP) sensor circuit APP 1
high input
P210129 Throttle actuator control
motor circuit
range/performance
P210162
P210164
P210629
circuit TP 2- short to
power
TP sensor failure
APP sensor circuit
APP 1 - short to
ground, high
resistance
APP sensor circuit
APP 1 - short to
power
Jammed throttle
blade, gearing or
motor
Jammed throttle
Throttle actuator control

motor circuit
range/performance
Jammed throttle
Throttle actuator motor

control circuit
range/performance
(commanded position not
reachable)
P210329 Throttle actuator motor
control circuit high
P210500
circuit TP 2 - short to
ground, high
resistance
TP sensor failure

motor circuit
range/performance
P210177
P210364
circuit TP1 - short to

power
TP sensor failure

control circuit high - signal

system - forced engine
shutdown
system - forced limited
power
blade, gearing or
motor
blade, gearing or
motor
Throttle blade stuck
open
Intake air system

diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system

diagnostic system
diagnostic system
Install a new throttle body. Refer to the new
test throttle actuator control motor circuit for
short to ground, power, high resistance.
Compare throttle position sensor 1 and 2
datalogger signals, if signals are comparable
install a new throttle body.
diagnostic system
Install a new throttle body. Refer to the new
Check for throttle related DTCs and refer to
DTC Index in this section
Check intake air system for leaks
leak
Throttle motor
control circuit - short
to power
ECM fault
Throttle motor
to power
ECM fault
Throttle MIL request
due to fuel cut

Signal invalid

diagnostic system
Refer to new module installation Note at top
of DTC Index
diagnostic system
Refer to new module installation Note at top
of DTC Index
diagnostic system
Install a new throttle body.
Refer to the new module/component
P210664

system - forced limited
power
Signal plausibility
P211800

control current
range/performance
P211900

throttle body
range/performance - spring
Throttle motor
to ground, power,
high resistance
Throttle spring faulty

(APP) sensor D circuit low
input
(APP) sensor D circuit high
input
(APP) sensor 1 and 2
voltage correlation
voltage correlation

voltage correlation
voltage correlation
failure
APP sensor circuit 2 -

diagnostic system
low input
APP sensor circuit 2 -
high input
APP sensor circuit 1
and 2 range
performance - subprocessor
APP sensor excessive difference
between raw values
of circuit 1 and 2 sub-processor
and 2 range
performance - subprocessor
and 2 range
performance

diagnostic system
diagnostic system
Check APP sensor circuits 1 and 2 for short
to ground, power and high resistance. Clear
the DTCs and retest. If the code remains,
replace the APP sensor
diagnostic system
Check APP sensor circuits 1 and 2 for short
to ground, power and high resistance. Clear

the DTCs and retest. If the code remains,
replace the APP sensor
diagnostic system
Acceleration Control - Accelerator Pedal

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the throttle pedal assembly.

Installation
1.
Install the throttle pedal assembly.

2.

Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol General Specifications
Speed control sensor - vertical alignment
90 0.75
Item
Speed control module retaining nut
Speed control sensor retaining bolts
Speed control sensor, adjusment - lock nut
Nm
5
5
5
lb-ft
-
lg-in
44
44
44
Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Speed Control

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Adaptive speed control sensor (adaptive speed control system only)
Stoplamp switch
Instrument cluster warning lamps and icons
Adaptive speed control module (adaptive speed control system only)
Forward alert switch (adaptive speed control system only)
Steering wheel mounted speed control switches (standard speed control system)
Steering wheel mounted speed control switches (adaptive speed control system)
INTRODUCTION
There are two variants of speed control available, a standard system and an adaptive system. The standard system
maintains a set speed selected by the driver until operation is suspended or cancelled by a further input from the driver and
is controlled by the ECM (engine control module). The adaptive system includes the same functionality as the standard
system, but also has the ability to:
Reduce vehicle speed, to less than the set speed, in order to maintain a selected distance behind a slower moving
vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle back to the set speed, once the way ahead is clear, after reducing the set speed because of a
slower moving vehicle

Alert the driver when the vehicle comes within a given distance of a slower moving vehicle.
The standard system and the adaptive system both have the following components:
A set +/- switch
A RESUME switch
A CANCEL switch.
Both systems also use:

The ECM
The stoplamp switch
The APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor.
The adaptive system incorporates the following additional components:
An adaptive speed control module

An adaptive speed control sensor
A forward alert switch
A time gap switch.
STANDARD SPEED CONTROL

The standard speed control system is integrated with the EEC (electronic engine control) system and uses fueling
intervention to automatically maintain a set vehicle speed. Once engaged, the system can also be used to accelerate the
vehicle without using the accelerator pedal.
The standard speed control system also uses inputs from the stoplamp switch, the APP sensor, the ECM and the ABS (antilock brake system) module.
The standard speed control is operated by the driver using only the steering wheel switches. When standard speed control is
active, the ECM controls the electronic throttle to adjust the fuel supply as required to maintain the set speed.
The minimum set speed for standard speed control is 18 mph (30 (km/h). Speed control is automatically suspended if the
following conditions apply:
Vehicle speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h)

The brake pedal is pressed
The cancel button is pressed
Neutral, park or reverse gear is selected
The difference between actual speed and the set speed is too great
When the vehicle speed reaches a maximum speed of 120 mph (192 km/h)
If the accelerator pedal is used to accelerate beyond the set speed for too long.
Speed Control Switches
Item
Part Number
Description
Set speed adjustment switch
CANCEL switch
RESUME switch
There are three standard speed control switches:

Cancel
Resume.
The standard speed control switches are located on the RH (right-hand) side of the steering wheel. The switches are
connected via fly leads to the audio control switches. The standard speed control switches are resistive ladder type switches
which vary the resistance of a 5 volt signal sent to them. The signal is returned along a LIN (local interconnect network) bus
from the audio control switches to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster routes the control signals to the ECM on the
medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
Speed control is engaged by rotating the speed adjustment switch to the + or - positions. Once engaged the speed can be
varied by the speed adjustment switch. Each press of the speed adjustment switch will increase or decrease the set speed in
steps of 1 mph (2 km/h).
ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL

The adaptive speed control system uses a forward looking radar sensor to scan the road ahead, looking for objects that are
moving at a different rate to itself. When a target is identified the adaptive speed control system will monitor the time gap
between it and the target vehicle. When that gap falls below a set driver selected level the adaptive speed control system
will intervene slowing the vehicle by backing off the throttle and/or applying the brakes, until the correct gap is attained. The
driver can chose between four gap settings, 1, 1.4, 1.8 and 2.2 seconds.
The system will detect but not react to the following:
Vehicles in the oncoming lane

Stationary vehicles
Pedestrians
Vehicles not in the same lane.
Adaptive speed control is active when the vehicle is moving. Adaptive speed control only functions when a set speed is
entered in normal speed control mode. The adaptive speed control system only intervenes with the set speed when it detects
a target vehicle, and then only if the minimum time gap is breached.
It is important to note that the system is intended for use in limited driving situations, does not remove control and
responsibility from the driver, and at all times can be quickly overridden. The adaptive speed control system is not a collision
warning system and will not react to stationary objects. The system does not operate below a minimum speed of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h) since it is unsuitable for use in cities or congested traffic. The system is best suited to main
roads/ highways with gradual bends.
The ECM, throttle body and throttle control are unchanged from those used for the standard speed control variants.
Radar Sensing
The adaptive speed control system is based on the use of a front mounted radar sensor. The sensor transmits a 1.5 wide
beam forward of the vehicle and detects the returning signals reflected off other vehicles and objects ahead.
The 1.5 wide radar beam is mechanically scanned at a rate of 10 sweeps/second across a total arc of 15 centered on the
longitudinal axis of the vehicle. The radar operates at millimetric wavelengths (76 - 77 GHz) and transmits a frequency
modulated continuous wave signal at a relatively low power level (no high power pulses).
With the ignition switched ON, the adaptive speed control module is powered up but no radar transmissions are emitted until
the vehicle is in motion.
The radar sensor detects three primary parameters of objects within the scanned arc. These are:
Range
Relative velocity
Angle.
Range
The radar sensor detects the presence and ranges of different vehicles and objects within the scanned arc up to a distance of
approximately 130 meters (426.5 feet). The transmitted signal frequency changes continuously in a cyclic pattern
(modulation). This means that, in the time taken for the signal wave front, to travel to and from a target vehicle (or other
object), the transmission frequency will have changed. The difference between the received signal frequency and the new
transmission frequency is proportional to the distance between the transmitting vehicle and the target vehicle.
Relative Velocity
When the signal is reflected off a vehicle moving at a different speed (opening or closing gap) an effect known as the
Doppler shift causes an extra frequency modulation to be imposed on the signal. This Doppler frequency varies with the
relative speed of the vehicle being followed, enabling the system to differentiate between vehicles traveling at different
speeds and also between moving vehicles and stationary objects.
Angle
Using a narrow angle beam to scan horizontally enables the system to distinguish between vehicles in different lanes and
between vehicles and roadside objects.
Follow Mode
A set speed is selected in the normal speed control manner and this speed is maintained until a slower vehicle is
encountered in the lane ahead. When the vehicle ahead comes within the effective range of the radar sensor, the system
identifies it as a target vehicle and an icon is illuminated on the instrument cluster to indicate that the system is in "follow
mode". When the distance between the two vehicles closes to a set time gap, the adaptive speed control system closes the
throttle and if necessary applies the brakes to maintain the set time gap. Follow mode is effectively a closed loop system. If
several vehicles are ahead, the closest vehicle is chosen as the target to follow. If the target vehicle moves out of radar
range, or if either vehicle changes lane or drops below the minimum operating speed, the system exits follow mode and the
follow mode icon is extinguished. The adaptive speed control system will only raise its speed to the originally set speed, it
will not accelerate past this speed to maintain a time gap.
Driver operation of the foot brake or control switches will immediately cancel adaptive speed control.
When the vehicle is in follow mode the follow mode warning indicator is illuminated in the instrument cluster and the current
gap setting will be displayed in the message center.
Item
Part Number
Description
Follow mode warning indicator
Forward alert warning indicator
System Restrictions
The adaptive speed control system is only intended to provide enhanced speed control as described above in certain
restricted conditions.
The following points should be noted:
Automatic braking is limited to approximately 30% of full pressure (0.3 G deceleration) and is intended to provide a
smooth, gradual deceleration in follow mode conditions. Harsh braking by the target vehicle or following the target
vehicle down to very low speeds or to a halt will require driver override of the brakes
While the radar sensor detects moving and stationary targets for assessment of the environment ahead, the system
does not react to or provide any control in situations other than follow mode conditions. Stationary or slow moving
vehicles (below 6 mph (10 km/h)), pedestrians, objects on the road and oncoming vehicles in the same lane are not
recognized.
WARNING: It must be emphasized that the adaptive speed control system is not a collision warning or avoidance
system and that, other than the limited conditions of follow mode, driver intervention will be necessary to control the vehicle
speed.
In follow mode, some situations may cause target ambiguities for the detection system. These situations include:
The nearby presence of a third vehicle when driving on a line slightly offset to the target vehicle
Vehicles edging into the lane ahead which are not detected by the system until they have moved into the radar
beam.
On the approach to, or exit from a bend, a target vehicle may be lost or a new target acquired as vehicles ahead change
their angular position with respect to the radar sensor. On a straight road, if the sensing vehicle is in follow mode below its
selected set speed, losing the target vehicle will cause the sensing vehicle to accelerate to this set speed. This acceleration is
undesirable either on, or entering a bend when the target is suddenly lost, and in this situation the system inhibits the
resumption of the set speed.
The speed control system compares vehicle speed data from the ABS system with the relative speed of an external object as
detected by the radar sensor to ascertain whether the object is stationary or not.
NOTE: If tires are fitted which are different in diameter from those specified for the vehicle, the vehicle speed calculated by
the ABS will not be the true road speed. This situation may cause stationary objects to be falsely identified as moving
vehicles and result in automatic deceleration on a clear road.
Adaptive Speed Control Switches
Item
Part Number
Description
Time gap switch
Cancel switch
Resume switch
The adaptive speed control system is controlled from the steering wheel switches. The switches are the same as used for
normal speed control with the addition of an extra time gap setting switch. The time gap setting switch allows the driver to
adjust the time gap to one of four pre-set time gaps. The selected time gap is displayed in the vehicle message center.
The time gap will return to the default gap (the third setting) each time the ignition is cycled.
Adaptive Speed Control Module

The adaptive speed control module is located on the bottom of the RH A pillar. The control module is connected to the other
vehicle systems via the high speed CAN bus. Signals from the adaptive speed control forward looking radar sensor are
received on a dedicated CAN bus between the two modules.
Adaptive Speed Control Radar Sensor

The adaptive speed control radar sensor is located centrally behind the front bumper cover. The sensor is connected to the
adaptive speed control module via a private CAN bus. If the unit is replaced in service the unit must be re-aligned vertically.
Horizontal alignment is achieved by putting the sensor in service mode with a Jaguar approved diagnostic system. The
vehicle is then driven for a short period while the sensor calibrates itself. Calibration is complete when the 'follow' icon in the
instrument cluster stops flashing.
Forward Alert
The forward alert system utilizes the adaptive speed control system components. Forward alert is turned on and off
independently of adaptive speed control, via a switch mounted in the lower outboard knee bolster switchpack. Forward alert
will notify the driver by means of a chime, and warning indicator in the instrument cluster and indication in the message
center, when a target vehicle comes into range. The system will NOT use throttle or brake intervention to slow the vehicle.
Forward Alert Switch
The forward alert switch is connected to the instrument cluster in a resistive ladder with the luggage compartment opening
switch and the fuel filler flap switch. The instrument cluster sends the forward alert information to the adaptive speed control
module on the CAN bus.
WARNING: This system is intended as a driver aid and should be used as such. The system is NOT a collision warning
or avoidance device.
The system sensitivity can be adjusted in the same manner as the adaptive speed control, via the steering wheel mounted
switches. Each adjustment is accompanied by a message in the message center.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired connection; D = High speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus; U = Private CAN
Item
Part Number
Description
APP sensor
Stoplamp switch
Electric throttle
ECM
Instrument cluster
Clockspring
Steering wheel speed control switches (adaptive speed control version shown)
10
11
12
Diagnostic socket
13
Adaptive speed control sensor (adaptive speed control system only)
14
Forward alert switch (adaptive speed control system only)
15
Adaptive speed control module (adaptive speed control system only)

There are two options of speed control available, adaptive speed control and non-adaptive speed control. For a detailed
description of the speed control systems, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to: Speed Control (310-03 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Description and
Operation).

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Speed control sensor
Ensure the speed control sensor is free from obstructions
Speed control module
Electrical
Fuses
Wiring harness
Steering wheel switches
Brake switch
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively, check for
Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (vehicles with adaptive system installed)

An incorrectly aligned speed control sensor can cause incorrect system operation. Before starting any repair work on
the speed control system, on vehicles with the adaptive system installed, check the adjustment of the speed control
sensor.
REFER to: Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (310-03 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Speed control inhibited or
disabled
Possible Cause
Supply voltage to
Unable to regulate/adjust
vehicle speed
Unable to cancel speed
control from steering wheel
Unable to cancel speed
control from brake pedal
speed control module

Supply voltage to
speed control sensor
Steering wheel speed
control switch(s)
Steering wheel speed
control switch circuit
Throttle sensors
Brake switch
Steering wheel switch
malfunction
Steering wheel switch
malfunction
Brake switch
malfunction
Action
Check for Network related DTCs that could be
caused by power failure to the module or sensor

and refer to DTC Index.
For steering wheel speed control switch and circuit
tests. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Check for engine throttle position sensor DTCs and
refer to the relevant DTC Index.
For brake switch tests. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
For speed control switch circuit tests. GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
For speed control switch circuit tests. GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
For brake switch tests. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
DTC Index
NOTE: If a module or component is suspect, and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the
into account.
DTC
B1A8481
C1A6754
Description
Car configuration data
Possible Cause
RJB reporting invalid car
configuration parameters
alignment angle - out of
range
C1A67- Speed control sensor - Yaw

81
rate sensor
Speed control sensor out
of alignment
Yaw rate voltage - out of
range
C1A6787
Speed control sensor Missing data
C1A6796
Speed control sensor Internal sensor failure
Internal hardware failure
C1A6797
C1A6798
Speed control sensor reduced visibility

Speed control sensor temperature high
Sensor reduced visibility
P174E- ABS wheel speed correlation

81
- active speed output error
U000188
High speed CAN

communication Bus
U010000
Lost communications with

ECM
U010100

TCM
U012100

ABS
U012800

U015500

instrument cluster
U030000
Internal control module

software incompatibility
Incorrect or missing data from

speed control sensor
Action
Re-configure RJB using manufacturer approved
diagnostic system and re-test
Carry out speed control sensor adjustment
procedure.
REFER to: Speed Control Sensor Adjustment
(310-03 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
system
system
Install a new speed control sensor.
REFER to: Speed Control Sensor (310-03 Speed
Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
This DTC will be cleared automatically when
environmental conditions allow
This DTC will be cleared automatically when
environmental conditions allow
internal temperature
exceeded threshold
Follow speed is misUsing the manufacturer approved diagnostic
calculated to too high a system, clear the DTC and re-test. If the DTC is
value
logged contact Dealer Technical Support
Vehicle CAN Bus off
condition
system
ECM missing message
system
TCM missing message
system
ABS missing message
system
Parking brake missing
message
system
Instrument cluster
missing message
system
message is received
approved diagnostic system. Clear DTCs and retest. If DTC still logged, suspect speed control
module. Refer to new module installation note at
top of DTC Index
U030055
Control module software

incompatibility - module
configuration failure
U0401- Invalid data received from

00
ECM - ECM cancel fault

67
ECM - ECM resume fault
81
ECM - speed control
inhibited by ECM
81
ABS
67
parking brake module parking brake apply
acknowledge
81
00
CJB
81
instrument cluster
RJB
00
U1A00Private CAN Bus circuit
88
U1A1449
CAN initialisation failure
U2101Control module
00
configuration incompatible
U300041
Control module
U300042
U300049
Control module
Control module
RJB - at least one of the

car configuration
approved diagnostic system. Clear DTCs and reparameters is not
test
configured
ECM did not respond
Check ECM for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
properly to speed control
cancel or auto brake
cancel request
ECM did not respond
properly to speed control
resume request
Speed control inhibited
by ECM
Stability assist fault
Check ABS module for DTCs and refer to DTC

Index
Parking brake module did Check parking brake module for DTCs and refer
not respond properly to
to DTC Index
apply request
Speed control inhibited
Check parking brake module for DTCs and refer

by parking brake module
to DTC Index
CJB message not upCheck CJB for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
dated
Instrument cluster not
Check instrument cluster for DTCs and refer to
enabled for adaptive
DTC Index
speed control
RJB message not upCheck RJB for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
dated
Private CAN Bus off
Refer to wiring diagrams and test Private CAN
condition
Bus circuit between speed control module and
speed control sensor for circuit faults
Internal electronic failure Install a new speed control module, refer to the
new module installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
Data sent from RJB is
Re-configure RJB using manufacturer approved
diagnostic tool, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC
invalid
remains check RJB for DTCs and refer to DTC
Index
Internal micro controller Install a new speed control module, refer to new
error
module installation note at top of DTC Index
Checksum fault
Internal RAM test fault Install a new speed control module, refer to new
Internal control module Install a new speed control module, refer to the
failure
new module installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : SPEED CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT TESTS
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the back-up power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any supplemental restraint system (SRS) components. To deplete the back-up
power supply energy, disconnect the battery GROUND cable and wait two minutes. Failure to follow this instruction
TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL SWITCH FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1
Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2
Wait two minutes for the system to become safe.
Disconnect the speed control switch connector SW009.

speed control switch connector SW009, pin 02, component side
Is the resistance 4310 ohms?

Yes
GO to A2.
No
INSTALL a new speed control switch assembly.
REFER to: Speed Control Switch (310-03 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
A2: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL RESUME SWITCH CIRCUIT
1
Operate the RESUME switch.
Does the resistance switch between 4310 ohms and 2110 ohms when the switch is operated?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
A3: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL SET+ SWITCH CIRCUIT
1
Operate the SET+ switch.
Yes
GO to A4.
No
A4: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL HEADWAY REDUCTION SWITCH CIRCUIT
1
Operate the HEADWAY REDUCTION switch.
2
Yes
GO to A5.
No
A5: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL HEADWAY INCREASE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1
Operate the HEADWAY INCREASE switch.
2
Yes
GO to A6.
No
A6: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL SET- SWITCH CIRCUIT
1

Operate the SET- switch.
Yes
GO to A7.
No
A7: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL CANCEL SWITCH CIRCUIT
1
Operate the CANCEL switch.
2
Does the resistance switch between 4310 ohms and zero ohms when the switch is operated?
Yes
GO to A8.
No
A8: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1
speed control switch connector SW009, pin 02, harness side
steering wheel audio control switch connector SW004, pin 02, harness side
Yes
REPAIR the circuit speed control switch connector SW009, pin 02 to clockspring connector
SW004, pin 02. For additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the system for
normal operation.
No
GO to A9.
A9: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SPEED CONTROL SWITCH FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1
speed control switch connector SW009, pin 03, harness side
steering wheel audio control switch connector SW004, pin 03, harness side
Yes
REPAIR the circuit speed control switch connector SW009, pin 02 to clockspring connector
normal operation.
No
No fault has been identified with the speed control switch or circuit, check integrity of
connections. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the LIN circuit between the steering
wheel audio switch and the instrument cluster. Test the steering wheel audio switch.
PINPOINT TEST B : BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT TEST

TEST
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK THE BRAKE SWITCH FUNCTION, WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL RELEASED
1
Set ignition status to OFF.
2
Disconnect the brake switch connector CA142.

Brake switch connector CA142, pin 02 component side

Yes
INSTALL a new brake switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK THE BRAKE SWITCH FUNCTION, WITH THE BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED
1
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
INSTALL a new brake switch. TEST the system for normal operation.
B3: CHECK THE BRAKE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1
Brake switch connector CA142, pin 03
GROUND
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the brake switch connector CA142, pin 03 and GROUND. For
additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to B4.
B4: CHECK THE ECM TO BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect the ECM connector, FL072.
1

ECM connector FL072, pin 40

Yes
GO to B5.
No
No fault is indicated with the brake switch or circuit. Check the integrity of all connections and
Disconnect intermediate electrical connector FL002.
1

ECM connector FL072, pin 40
Intermediate electrical connector FL002, pin 13

Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the ECM connector FL072, pin 40 and intermediate electrical
connector FL002, pin 13. For additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the
system for normal operation.
No
GO to B6.
1
Intermediate electrical connector FL002, pin 13

Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the brake switch connector CA142, pin 02 and intermediate electrical
connector FL002, pin 13. For additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the
No
No fault is indicated with the brake switch or circuit. Check the integrity of all connections and

Sensor Adjustment
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
501-F007
Inclinometer
Adjustment
1.

stands.
2.
Refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and

Installation).
3.
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a

level surface.
4.

level surface.
Using the special tool, check the adaptive
cruise control (ACC) radar is level, (+/- 0.5

degrees).
Special Tool(s): 501-F007
5.
NOTE: Do not release the lock nut.

level surface.
Adjust using an internal Torx Bit.
If the vertical alignment has to be adjusted
by more than 2 degrees, then carry out the

service alignment procedure.
6.

stands.
7.

Installation).
8.
Configure the ACC module using the diagnostic tool.

This procedure is required if:
A new ACC radar and, or ACC module are installed.
The ACC radar needed to be removed or is misaligned in
its position due to another repair operation.
9.
From the diagnostic tool menu, select: Service Alignment
Mode.
The follow indicator will now be flashing, this indicates
that the vehicle is in "service alignment" and now

requires driving.
The vehicle speed must be above 30 mph (48 kph).
Choose a road with plenty of stationary objects, like
street lights, road signs, or barriers. Use an inside or
outside lane.
Following vehicles too closely will obscure the stationary
targets from the radar, a time gap of 2 seconds is
recommended.
A straight road will produce a quicker and better result,
although the process will still operate on a curved road.
The time that the ACC module takes to align will vary,
depending on the route, speed, number of targets, and
individual module.
When the flashing follow indicator light extinguishes, the
ACC system is now functional, and a required vehicle
speed can now be set by the driver and the ACC system
will operate as normal.

Deactivator Switch
Removal
NOTE: This component also functions as the brake pedal switch.
1.

2.

Installation
CAUTION: During installation of the brake switch, make sure the brake pedal is not depressed at any time.
Depressing the pedal may cause: poor operation of the brake light switch and brake lights, diagnostic trouble codes to
be logged and/or failure of the vehicle to start.
1.

Secure the clip.
2.


Switch
Removal
1.

Refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00, Description and
Operation).
2.
Refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental

Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
3.
Refer to: Upshift Paddle Switch (307-05 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
4.
Refer to: Downshift Paddle Switch (307-05 Automatic

5.
Torque: 3 Nm
6.
Torque: 3 Nm
7.
Torque: 6 Nm
8.
Installation
1.

Sensor
Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.

Installation).
4.
Refer to: Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (310-03 Speed

Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
5.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all diagnostic trouble codes

Do not remove the speed control sensor

adjustment stud lock nut.
NOTE: Make sure that the sensor is aligned after
installation as described in the speed control
sensor adjustment procedure.
Torque: 5 Nm
Installation
1.
Climate Control System - General Information Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Description
Air conditoning (A/C) refrigerant
A/C compressor oil
Specification
HFC 134a
ND-OIL8
Capacities
Description
A/C refigerant
Grammes
750
Refrigerant Oil Adding Capacities
NOTE: Rotate the A/C compressor shaft at least 6 to 8 turns when draining the refrigerant oil.
Item
Mililiters
Condenser core
Add 33
and desiccant bag
Evaporator
Add 46
A/C compressor 1. Drain old A/C compressor. With drain plug removed and ports uncapped, rotate shaft to remove
oil and measure the amount of oil captured. 2. Drain new A/C compressor into a clean vessel. With
drain plug removed and ports uncapped, rotate shaft to remove oil. Then add back a quantity of
the new oil that is identical to the quantity of oil removed from the old A/C compressor. However,
if this quantity is less than 30ml, then make it up to 30ml.
A/C lines - If air
Add 10 per line
conditioning has
been operational.
Climate Control System - General Information - Climate Control

System

NOTE: All Air Conditioning (A/C) related tests should be run in an ambient temperature of at least 10C (50F).
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Coolant level
Refrigerant leaks (UV lamp)
Drive belt
Compressor
Cooling fan
Control flap(s)
Duct(s)
Register(s)
Cabin air filter
Hose(s)
Coolant pump
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Circuit
Blower motor
Compressor
Cooling fan
Actuators
Climate control assembly
3.
Listen for any unusual noises during climate control system operation.
4.
Inspect the refrigerant system with an ultraviolet (UV) lamp for traces of UV sensitive leak trace dye.
5.
6.
If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system.
Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C)

System Flushing
General Procedures
1.
WARNINGS:
Use extreme care and observe all safety precautions related to the
use of refrigerants. Due to refrigerant hazards, always wear safety
goggles and non-penetrable gloves when working on or flushing air
conditioning (A/C) systems. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
When flushing the A/C system, refer to the manufacturers

equipment instructions for additional information. Failure to do so may
result in system damage or personal injury.
The A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of

any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts shop bulk refrigerant
at risk of contamination. If the vehicle A/C refrigerant is contaminated,
refer the customer to return to the repair facility that performed the last
A/C repair. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C
recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C
refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as
hazardous waste. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers
equipment instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Prior to using the A/C flushing equipment for the first time, follow
the operating instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Prior to flushing, remove and discard the desiccant sack.

Depending on the equipment used, other A/C components may have to
be removed prior to flushing. For additional information, refer to the
manufacturers equipment instructions before flushing the A/C system.
Recover the refrigerant.
For additional information, refer to Air conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging in this section.
2.
Remove the desiccant sack.

For additional information, refer to Section 412-03 Air Conditioning.
3.
Flush the system. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers

equipment instructions.
4.
Install new refrigerant lines if blocked with debris.
5.
Install a new desiccant sack.

For additional information, refer to Section 412-03 Air Conditioning.
6.
Add the required amount of oil to the A/C system depending on the
repair procedure.
For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding in this section.
7.
Evacuate and charge the A/C system.

For additional information, refer to Air conditioning (A/C) System
8.
Carry out fluorescent dye leak detection test.

For additional information, refer to Flourescent Dye Leak Detection in this
section.
9.
Check the A/C system for correct operation.
Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C)

System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
General Procedures
1.
WARNING: Servicing must be carried out by personnel

familliar with both vehicle system and the charging and testing
equipment. All operations must be carried out in a well
ventilated area away from open flame and heat sources.
NOTE: The receiver drier need only be changed under the
following circumstances: There is dirt in the refrigerant circuit
( eg. compressor seizure ), the system is leaking and refrigerant
has been lost to atmosphere, or the refrigerant circuit has been
open more than 24 hours, due to repair.
Refrigerant recovery.
2.
Remove the dust covers from the high and low

pressure connections.
3.
Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate

connections.
4.
Open the valves on the connections.
5.
Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.
6.
Turn the process switch to the correct position.
7.
Turn the main switch to 'ON'.
8.
WARNING: Refrigerant must always be recycled before reuse to ensure that the purity of the refrigerantis high enough for
safe use in the air conditioning system. Recycling should always
be carried out with equipment which is design certified by
Underwriter Laboratory Inc. for compliance with SEA J1991.
Other equipment may not recycle refrigerant to the required
level of purity. R143a Refrigerant Recover Recycling Recharging
station must not be used with any other type of
refrigerant.Refrigerant R134a from domestic and comercial
sources must not be used in motor vehicles air conditioning
systems.
Allow the system to recover the refrigerant from the system.
9.
Close the valves on the refrigerant station.
10.
Turn the main switch 'OFF'.
11.
Close the valves on the connections.
12.
Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.
13.
Install the dust covers to the connectors.
14.
Open the tap at the rear of the station to drain the refrigerant
oil.
15.
Measure and record the quantity of refrigerant oil recovered

from the system.
16.
Close the tap at the rear of the station.
17.
Evacuation.
18.
Remove the dust covers from the high and low pressure
connections.
19.
Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate

connections.
20.
Open the valves on the connections.
21.
Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.
22.
Turn the process switch to the correct position.
23.
Turn the main switch to 'ON'.
24.
Allow the station to evacuate the A/C system.
25.
CAUTION: The system must be evacuated immediatley

before recharging commences. Delay between evacuation and
recharging is not permitted
26.
Close the valves on the refrigerant station.
27.
Close the valve on the oil charger.
28.
Disconnect the yellow line from the refrigerant station.
29.
Remove the cover from the oil charger.
30.
Pour the correct quantity of refrigerant oil into the oil charger.
31.
Install the cover to the oil charger.
32.
Connect the yellow line to the refrigerant station.
33.
Open the valve on the oil charger.
34.
Move the pointer on the refrigerant gauge to mark the position

of the refrigerant drop.
35.
Slowly open the correct valve on the refrigerant to allow the

vacuum to pull the refrigerant into the system.
36.
Close the valve on the refrigerant station when the correct

amount of refrigerant has been drawn into the air conditioning
system.
37.
Turn the main switch 'OFF'.
38.
Close the valves on the connections.
39.
Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.
Recharging
Climate Control System - General Information - Contaminated

Refrigerant Handling
General Procedures
1.
If contaminated refrigerant is detected DO NOT recover the

refrigerant into your R-134a OR R-12 recovery/recycling
equipment. Take the follow actions:
1. Repeat the test to verify contaminated refrigerant is
present.
2. Advise the customer of the contaminated A/C system
and any additional cost to repair the system. The
customer may wish to return to the repair facility
performing the last A/C repair.
3. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable
recovery only equipment designed for capturing and
storing contaminated refrigerant. This equipment must
only be used to recover contaminated refrigerant to
prevent the spread to other vehicles. As an alternative,
contact an A/C repair facility in your area with the proper
equipment to perform the repair.
4. On completion of the recovery of the contaminated
refrigerant, it will be necessary to carry out the A/C
system flushing procedure.
For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (AC)
System Flushing in this section.
Climate Control System - General Information - Electronic Leak

Detection
General Procedures
1.
WARNING: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where

A/C leak testing is to be carried out. If the surrounding air is
contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate
this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as
antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner, or other cleaning
solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well
ventilated area, is very helpful in removing small traces of
contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector.
Attach an R-134a manifold gauge set or use a UL-approved
recovery/recycling device such as an R-134a A/C refrigerant
center (which meets SAE Standard J 1991). For additional
information, refer to the manufacturers equipment instructions.
Both gauges should indicate 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at
24C (75F) with the engine off.
If little or no pressure is indicated, carry out the air
conditioning (A/C) system recovery, evacuation and
charging procedure.
For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (AC)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging in this
section.
2.
Use an R134-a Automatic calibration halogen leak detector to

leak test the refrigerant system. For additional information,
refer to the manufacturers equipment instructions.
3.
If a leak is found, carry out the air conditioning (A/C) system

recovery procedure.
For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (AC) System
Climate Control System - General Information - Fluorescent Dye Leak

Detection
General Procedures
1.
WARNING: Eye protection glasses supplied with the

ultraviolet (UV) lamp should be used to protect eyesight from
harm.
NOTE: The air conditioning (A/C) system has an R-134a leak
trace dye wafer incorporated into the desiccant bag. The exact
location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow/green
glow of the tracer dye. Since more than one leak may exist,
always inspect each component. If it is necessary to add dye
(due to a severe leakage for example) use proprietary tracer
dye injection equipment.
Check for leaks using ultraviolet (UV) lamp.
2.
Check all components, fittings and lines of the A/C system.
3.
Carry out the repair. For additional information, refer to Section

412-03 Air Conditioning.
4.
After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak trace dye
with a general purpose oil solvent.
5.
Check the A/C system for correct operation.
6.
Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and
inspecting with the (UV) lamp.
Climate Control System - General Information - Refrigerant Oil Adding

General Procedures
Activation
CAUTIONS:
Collect the refrigerant oil in a clean measuring cylinder.
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.
1.
NOTE: This step only needs to be carried out when

removing the air conditioning (A/C) compressor.
Torque: 15 Nm
2.
NOTE: This step only needs to be carried out when

removing the air conditioning (A/C) compressor.
Rotate the A/C compressor shaft at least 6 to 8
turns when draining the refrigerant oil.
3.
CAUTIONS:
The refrigerant oil top-up quantity must not exceed the

refrigerant oil fill quantity.
If other A/C components are being renewed in addition to

the A/C compressor, there is no need to top up with additional
refrigerant oil, apart from filling the A/C compressor.
Top up with the calculated quantity of new refrigerant oil.
4.
Climate Control System - General Information - Refrigerant System

Tests
General Procedures
1.
WARNINGS:
Use extreme care and observe all safety precautions

related to the use of refrigerants. Failure to follow this
The A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used before the

recovery of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts
shop bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle A/C
refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to return to the
repair facility that carried out the last A/C repair. If the
customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C
recovery equipment that is designated for recovering
contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant
must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment,
follow the equipment manufacturers procedures and
instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
NOTE: Jaguar Land Rover Limited supports the efficient usage,
recovery and recycling of the refrigerant used in passenger car
air conditioners. Jaguar Land Rover Limited recommends the
use of UL-approved recovery/recycling device such as R-134a
A/C refrigerant center (which meets SAE Standard J 1991)
during any A/C system repair and recharge procedure which
requires that the system be evacuated.
Use R-134a A/C Refrigerant Centre to evacuate and recover the
A/C system.
Follow the equipment manufactures procedures and
instructions for use of equipment.
Air Distribution and Filtering - Air Distribution and Filtering

COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: right-hand drive (RHD) shown, left-hand drive (LHD) similar
Item
Part Number
Description
Windshield vents
Windshield and side window air duct
Driver side window vent
Driver instrument panel register
Driver instrument panel duct
Driver footwell duct
Center instrument panel register
Air deflector nozzle
Passenger footwell duct
10
Passenger instrument panel duct
Passenger instrument panel register
12
Passenger side window vent
13
Air intake
14
Water shield
15
Cabin air filter
11
INTRODUCTION
The air distribution and filtering system controls the distribution and quality of air supplied to the vehicle interior. The system
consists of:
Air ducts
Air registers and vents
A cabin air filter
Air Distribution and Filtering - Air Distribution and Filtering

For additional information, refer to Section 412-00 Climate Control System - General Information
Air Distribution and Filtering - Center Registers

Removal
1.
Remove the information and entertainment module.

For additional information, refer to: Information and
Entertainment Module (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules,
2.
NOTE: The Torx screws may not be fitted.

Remove the center register.
Carefully release the component.
Installation
1.

Carefully install the center register.
2.
Install the information and entertainment module.

For additional information, refer to: Information and
Entertainment Module (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules,
Air Distribution and Filtering - Driver Side Register

Removal
1.
Remove the instument panel driver's side

reinforcement trim panel.
2.
CAUTION: Care must be taken to avoid

damage to the mating surfaces.
Remove the driver side register trim panel.
Installation
1.
Install the driver side register trim panel.

2.
Install the instument panel driver's side reinforcement trim

panel.
Align the pegs and secure with the clips.
Air Distribution and Filtering - Passenger Side Register

Removal
1.
Remove the instrument panel passenger side

2.
Remove the passenger side register.

Installation
1.
Install the passenger side register.

2.
Install the instrument panel passenger side reinforcement trim

panel.
Air Distribution and Filtering - Pollen Filter

Removal
1.
Open the hood.

2.

Remove the 3 clips.
3.
Release the pollen filter housing cover.

Release from the 2 clips.
4.
CAUTION: Remove any debris from the filter

aperture.
Remove the pollen filter.
Installation
1.
Install the pollen filter.
2.
Secure the pollen filter housing cover.
3.

4.
Close the hood.
Heating and Ventilation Torque Specifications
Item
Auxiliary coolant flow pump retaining bolt
Air conditioning (A/C) lines retaining bolt
Nm
7
6
lb-ft
-
lb-in
62
53
Heating and Ventilation - Heating and Ventilation

COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) shown, LHD (left-hand drive) similar
Item
Part Number
Description
Blower relay
Ventilation outlets (2 off)
Heater assembly
Blower motor control module
Blower
Air inlet
Heater coolant pump
INTRODUCTION
The heating and ventilation system controls the temperature and flow of air supplied to the vehicle interior. The system is
dual zone, and can provide different temperature settings for the Left Hand (LH) and Right Hand (RH) side of the cabin. The
system can be operated in 'Automatic' or 'Manual' mode, with temperature settings being selected using the control switches
located below the TSD.
For information on how to operate the heating and ventilation system, refer to the Owner's Handbook.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE
Many of the features and operations of the heating and ventilation system are controlled by the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) module, which is located on the end of the air inlet duct casing.
For additional information, refer to: Control Components (412-04 Control Components, Description and Operation).
AIR INLET DUCT
Item
Part Number
Description
ATC module
Fresh/recirculated air door
Fresh/recirculated air door motor
Blower motor and fan assembly
The air inlet duct is installed behind the instrument panel on the passenger side. Inlet air passes through the cabin
filter and into the air inlet duct where it enters the blower. A servo motor mounted on the air inlet duct allows fresh or
recirculated air to be selected. Operation of the fresh/recirculated door is controlled by the ATC module.
BLOWER
The blower is contained within the air inlet duct assembly and consists of an open hub, centrifugal fan powered by an electric
motor. Operation of the blower is controlled by the ATC module using a relay located in the auxiliary junction box and the
blower motor control module. The blower motor control module is installed in the air inlet duct downstream of the blower,
where any heat generated during operation is dissipated by the air flow.
HEATER ASSEMBLY
Item
Part Number
Description
A/C evaporator
Heater coolant pipes
Windshield distribution door motor
RH temperature blend motor
Heater core
LH temperature blend motor
Face and feet distribution door motor
The heater assembly controls the temperature of the air supplied to the air distribution ducts, as directed by the ATC module.
The heater assembly is installed on the vehicle center line, between the instrument panel and the engine bulkhead.
The heater assembly consists of a casing which contains the Air Conditioning (A/C) evaporator, the heater core, 2 air
distribution control doors, and 2 temperature blend control doors.
The A/C evaporator is controlled as part of the A/C system.
For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (412-03 Air Conditioning, Description and Operation).
The heater core provides the heat source to warm the air being supplied to the cabin. The heater core is an aluminium 2
pass, fin and tube heat exchanger, and is installed across the width of the heater housing. Two aluminium tubes attached to
the heater core extend through the engine bulkhead and connect to the engine cooling system. When the engine is running,
coolant is constantly circulated through the heater core by the coolant pump.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cooling (303-03, Description and Operation).
HEATER COOLANT PUMP
A heater coolant pump is mounted on the RH rear face of the radiator housing. The pump is electrically driven and provides
the necessary flow rate of engine coolant to the heater core. Operation of the pump is controlled by the Central Junction Box
(CJB) on receipt of medium speed Controller Area Network (CAN) bus signals from the ATC module.
The pump will run when the engine is running and operates at a single speed. The CJB broadcasts pump status over the
medium speed CAN bus for use by other vehicle systems.
NOTE: The pump can be forced to run when the engine is not running if required.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cooling (303-03, Description and Operation).
VENTILATION OUTLETS
The ventilation outlets allow the free flow of air through the passenger compartment. The outlets are installed in the LH and
RH rear quarter panels, below the tail lamps.
Each ventilation outlet consists of a grille covered by a soft rubber flap, and is effectively a non-return valve. The flaps open
and close automatically depending on the differential between cabin and outside air pressures.
Operation of the heating and ventilation system is controlled by the ATC module.
Heating and Ventilation - Heating and Ventilation

REFER to:
Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Control Components (412-04 Control Components, Diagnosis and Testing).
Heating and Ventilation - Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump V8 5.0L

Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Cooling System Draining and Vacuum Filling (303-03

Engine Cooling 5.0L, General Procedures).
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
1.
2.

Heating and Ventilation - Blower Motor

Removal
1.

Remove the passenger side footwell trim panel.
Remove the 3 clips.
2.
Remove the blower motor.

Installation
1.
Install the blower motor.
2.
Install the passenger side footwell trim panel.

Heating and Ventilation - Heater Core

Removal
1.

2.

Specifications).
3.
Remove the heater and evaporator core housing.

For additional information, refer to: Heater Core and Evaporator
Core Housing (412-02 Heating and Ventilation, Removal and
Installation).
4.
Remove the RH side footwell heater duct.

5.
Remove the heater core.

Remove the coolant pipe clamp.
Remove the screw.
Remove the heater core retaining bracket.
Remove the screw.
Position the RH footwell duct mounting
bracket aside for access.
Loosen the screw.
6.

Remove the heater core, inlet and outlet pipes.
Release the 2 clamps.
Remove and discard both O-ring seals.
Installation
1.
NOTE: Lubricate the seals with coolant.

Install the heater core, inlet and outlet pipes.
Install the clamps and tighten the screws.
2.
Install the heater core.

Secure the heater core retaining bracket.
Install the screw.
Install the coolant pipe clamp.
Install the screw.
Align the footwell duct mounting bracket and tighten the
screw.
3.
Install the RH side footwell heater duct.

Install the screws.
4.
Install the heater and evaporator core housing.

For additional information, refer to: Heater Core and Evaporator
Core Housing (412-02 Heating and Ventilation, Removal and
Installation).
5.

Specifications).
Heating and Ventilation - Heater Core and Evaporator Core Housing

Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.

3.

4.
Recover the A/C refrigerant.

5.
Drain the coolant.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Draining
and Vacuum Filling (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8

6.
Drain the coolant.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding - Vehicles With: Supercharger (303-03A,
All vehicles
7.

Disconnect the heater supply and return hoses.
Position a container to collect the fluid.
Carefully release the clips.
8.

faces and connections are clean and dry. Plug open
Disconnect the A/C lines.
Remove the bolt.
Remove and discard both O-ring seals.
9.

Position the carpet aside for access.
Release both footwell lamp holders.
Remove the 5 nuts.
Remove the bolt.
Installation
All vehicles
1.
2.
NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil.

Connect the A/C lines.
3.
Connect the heater supply and return hoses.

Secure the clips.
4.

5.


6.
Refill and bleed the cooling system.

Filling and Bleeding - Vehicles With: Supercharger (303-03A,

7.
Refill and bleed the cooling system.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Draining
and Vacuum Filling (303-03A Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
All vehicles
8.
Fill the A/C system.
Air Conditioning - Air Conditioning

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Evaporator
Thermostatic expansion valve
High pressure line
Low pressure line
Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor
Receiver/Drier
Condenser
Refrigerant pressure sensor
High pressure servicing connection
10
Low pressure servicing connection
INTRODUCTION
The A/C system transfers heat from the vehicle interior to the outside atmosphere to provide the heater assembly with
dehumidified cool air. The A/C system is a sealed, closed loop system, filled with a charge weight of R134a refrigerant as the
heat transfer medium. Oil is added to the refrigerant to lubricate the internal components of the A/C compressor.
Operation of the A/C system is controlled by the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) module.
A/C COMPRESSOR
Item
Part Number
Description
Pressure relief valve
Outlet port
Inlet port
Solenoid valve
Pulley
The A/C compressor circulates refrigerant around the system by compressing low pressure, low temperature vapour from the
evaporator and discharging the resultant high pressure, high temperature vapour to the condenser.
The A/C compressor is a permanently engaged variable displacement unit which is driven by the engine accessory drive belt.
To protect the system from excessive pressure, a pressure relief valve is installed in the outlet side of the A/C compressor.
The pressure relief valve vents excess pressure into the engine compartment.
CONDENSER
Item
Part Number
Description
Right Hand (RH) end tank
Condenser core
Left Hand (LH) end tank
Mounting brackets (4 off)
Low pressure line connector block
High pressure line connector block
Receiver drier outlet pipe
Receiver drier inlet pipe
Receiver drier
The condenser transfers heat from the refrigerant to the surrounding air to convert the high pressure vapour from the
compressor into a liquid. The condenser is installed immediately in front of the radiator. Two brackets on each end tank
attach the condenser to the end tanks of the radiator.
The condenser is classified as a sub-cooling condenser and consists of a fin and tube heat exchanger core installed between
2 end tanks. Divisions in the end tanks separate the heat exchanger into a 4 pass upper (condenser) section and a 2 pass
lower (sub-cooler) section.
The LH end tank provides the connections to the high pressure line from the A/C compressor and the low pressure line to the
evaporator.
The RH end tank provides the connections to the receiver drier.
RECEIVER DRIER
The receiver drier is mounted on the condenser RH end tank and removes solid impurities and moisture from the refrigerant.
It also provides a reservoir for liquid refrigerant to accommodate changes of heat load at the evaporator.
NOTE: The receiver drier is part of the condenser assembly and is not serviceable separately.
Refrigerant entering the receiver drier passes through a filter and a desiccant pack, then collects in the base of the unit
before flowing through the outlet pipe back to the condenser.
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant pressure sensor is located in the high pressure/temperature refrigerant line between the condenser and the
thermostatic expansion valve.
THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE
Item
Part Number
Description
Metering valve
Housing
Diaphragm
Temperature sensor
Outlet passage from evaporator
Inlet passage to evaporator
The thermostatic expansion valve meters the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator, to match the refrigerant flow with the
heat load of the air passing through the evaporator.
The thermostatic expansion valve is a block type valve located behind the heater assembly, and attached to the inlet and
outlet ports of the evaporator. The thermostatic expansion valve consists of an aluminium housing containing inlet and outlet
passages. A ball and spring metering valve is installed in the inlet passage and a temperature sensor is installed in the outlet
passage. The temperature sensor consists of a temperature sensitive tube connected to a diaphragm. The bottom end of the
temperature sensitive tube acts on the ball of the metering valve. Pressure on top of the diaphragm is controlled by the
evaporator outlet temperature conducted through the temperature sensitive tube. The bottom of the diaphragm senses
evaporator outlet pressure.
Liquid refrigerant flows through the metering valve into the evaporator. The restriction across the metering valve reduces
the pressure and temperature of the refrigerant. The restriction also changes the liquid stream of refrigerant into a fine
spray, to improve the evaporation process. As the refrigerant passes through the evaporator, it absorbs heat from the air
flowing through the evaporator. The increase in temperature causes the refrigerant to vaporise and increase in pressure.
The temperature and pressure of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator acts on the diaphragm and temperature sensitive
tube, which regulate the metering valve opening and so control the volume of refrigerant flowing through the evaporator.
The warmer the air flowing through the evaporator, the more heat available to evaporate refrigerant and thus the greater
volume of refrigerant allowed through the metering valve.
EVAPORATOR
The evaporator is installed in the heater assembly, between the blower and the heater matrix, to absorb heat from the
exterior or recirculated air. Low pressure, low temperature refrigerant changes from liquid to vapour in the evaporator,
absorbing large quantities of heat as it changes state.
Most of the moisture in the air passing through the evaporator condenses into water, which drains out of the vehicle by
passing through a drain tube to the underside of the vehicle.
REFRIGERANT LINES
To maintain similar flow velocities around the A/C system, the diameter of the refrigerant lines varies to suit the 2
pressure/temperature regimes. Larger diameter pipes are installed in the low pressure/temperature regime and smaller
diameter pipes are installed in the high pressure/temperature regime.
Low and high pressure charging connections are incorporated into the refrigerant lines for system servicing.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Refrigerant liquid; B = Refrigerant vapour; C = Air flow
www.JagDocs.com
Item
Part Number
Description
Evaporator
Thermostatic expansion valve
High pressure servicing connection
Engine cooling fan
Condenser
Receiver/Drier
Variable displacement A/C compressor
Low pressure servicing connection
10
Blower
To accomplish the transfer of heat, the refrigerant is circulated around the system, where it passes through 2
pressure/temperature regimes. In each of the regimes the refrigerant changes state, during which process maximum heat
absorption or dissipation occurs.
The low pressure/temperature regime is from the thermostatic expansion valve, through the evaporator to the compressor.
The refrigerant decreases in pressure and temperature at the thermostatic expansion valve then changes state from a liquid
to a vapour in the evaporator to absorb heat.
The high pressure/temperature regime is from the compressor, through the condenser and receiver drier assembly to the
thermostatic expansion valve. The refrigerant increases in pressure and temperature as it passes through the compressor,
then releases heat and changes state from a vapour to a liquid in the condenser.
Operation of the A/C system is controlled by the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) module.
The A/C system works in conjunction with the heating and ventilation system, and the air distribution and filtering system.
For additional information, refer to:
Heating and Ventilation (412-02 Heating and Ventilation, Description and Operation),
Air Distribution and Filtering (412-01, Description and Operation).
Air Conditioning - Air Conditioning

REFER to:
Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Control Components (412-04 Control Components, Diagnosis and Testing).
Air Conditioning - Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor V8 5.0L Petrol/V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.
5.
Torque: 8 Nm
6.
CAUTIONS:
Immediately cap all refrigerant lines to

prevent ingress of dirt and moisture.

new blanking caps.
Torque: 9 Nm
7.
8.
CAUTIONS:

new blanking caps.
Take care not to damage the O-ring seals

during installation.
Torque: 25 Nm
Installation
1.
Air Conditioning - Blower Motor Resistor

Removal
1.

Remove the 3 clips.
2.
Remove the blower motor resistor.

Installation
1.
Install the blower motor resistor.

Install the screws.
2.

Air Conditioning - Condenser Core V8 5.0L Petrol

Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.
5.
6.
Torque: 5 Nm
7.

Torque: 8 Nm
8.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
1.

Air Conditioning - Condenser Core V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.
5.
Refer to: Radiator (303-03B Supercharger Cooling - V8 S/C 5.0L

6.

Torque: 8 Nm
7.
Torque: 7 Nm
Installation
1.

Air Conditioning - Evaporator Core

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

3.
Remove the TXV assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Thermostatic Expansion
Valve (412-03 Air Conditioning, Removal and Installation).
4.

Remove the A/C pipes.
Release the clamp.
Release the clip.
Release the foam pad and the upper
section of the clamp.
5.
Remove the coolant pipe clamp.

Remove the screw.
6.
Carefully separate the evaporator housing.

Remove the 10 clips.
Release the blower motor harness clip.
Release the 2 evaporator housing clips.
7.
Remove the evaporator core.

Carefully remove the evaporator core
temperature sensor.
Installation
1.
NOTE: Make sure all components are clean.

Install the evaporator core.
Carefully install the evaporator core temperature sensor.
2.
CAUTION: Make sure the evaporator temperature sensor

harness does not become trapped.
Install the evaporator housing cover.
Install the clips.
Install the screws.
3.
Install the coolant pipe clamp.

Install the screw.
4.
Install the A/C pipes.

Install the foam pad.
Install the clamp.
Install the screws.
5.
Install the TXV assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Thermostatic Expansion
Valve (412-03 Air Conditioning, Removal and Installation).
6.

Specifications).
Air Conditioning - Pressure Cutoff Switch

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.
Recover the A/C refrigerant.
3.
Remove the engine cover.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Cover (501-05,
4.
Remove the air intake duct.

Remove the bolt.
5.

components, ensure the area around the joint
Remove the pressure cutoff switch.
Installation
1.

Install the pressure cutoff switch.
Tighten the cutoff switch to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2.
Install the air intake duct.

Tighten the clips.
3.
Recharge the A/C system.
4.
Install the engine cover.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Cover (501-05,
5.

Specifications).
Air Conditioning - Thermostatic Expansion Valve

Removal
1.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00, Specifications).
2.
WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a

jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
3.

For additional information, refer to: Heater Core and Evaporator Core
Housing (412-02 Heating and Ventilation, Removal and Installation).
4.
CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
Remove the TXV assembly.
Carefully cut and release the insulation for access.
Remove the 2 Allen bolts.
Remove and discard the 4 O-ring seals.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Lubricate the new seals with clean refrigerant oil.

NOTE: Make sure all component mating faces are clean.
Install the TXV assembly.
Install the new O-ring seals.
Install and tighten the Allen bolts to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
Replace the TXV insulation.
2.

For additional information, refer to: Heater Core and Evaporator Core
Housing (412-02 Heating and Ventilation, Removal and Installation).
3.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00, Specifications).
Air Conditioning - Receiver Drier

Removal
1.

stands.
2.

3.
4.
5.

correct.
Torque: 12 Nm
6.

correct.
Installation
1.
Control Components Torque Specifications
Item
Climate control module and audio/cd module assembly to instrument panel - bolt
Climate control and audio/cd modules to assembly bracket - bolt
Climate control and audio/cd modules to assembly bracket - screw
Nm lb-ft lb-in
3
27
3
27
2.5
22
Control Components - Control Components

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Pollution sensor (if fitted)
Description
Sunload/Light sensor
Windshield distribution (defrost) stepper motor
Right-Hand (RH) temperature blend stepper motor
Cabin humidity and temperature sensor
Evaporator temperature sensor
Control switches
Left-Hand (LH) temperature blend stepper motor
10
Face/feet distribution stepper motor
11
12
Blower motor
13
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) module
14
15
Air intake servo motor
16
Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor solenoid valve
INTRODUCTION
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module controls the A/C (air conditioning) system and the heating and ventilation
system to regulate the temperature, volume, and distribution of air into the cabin.
The system is a fully automatic dual zone system capable of maintaining individual temperature levels selected for the LH
(left-hand) and RH (right-hand) sides of the cabin. Manual overrides for the system include intake air source, blower speed
and air distribution. These selections can be made using either the Touch Screen Display (TSD) or the control switches
located below the TSD.
For information on how to operate the A/C system and the heating and ventilation system, refer to the Owner's Handbook.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE
The ATC module is mounted on the end of the blower motor casing, behind the instrument panel. The ATC module processes
inputs from the TSD, the control switches located below the TSD, and the system sensors. In response to these inputs, the
ATC module outputs control signals to the A/C system and the heating and ventilation system.
In addition to controlling the A/C system and the heating and ventilation system, the ATC module also controls the following:
The seat heaters.
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Description and Operation).
The rear window heater.
For additional information, refer to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
The windshield heater.
For additional information, refer to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
The exterior mirror heaters.
For additional information, refer to: Rear View Mirrors (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Description and Operation).
The steering wheel heater (if fitted).
For additional information, refer to: Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and
Operation).
Two electrical connectors provide the interface between the ATC module, and the vehicle wiring. The ATC module uses
hardwired inputs from the system sensors, the LIN (local interconnect network) bus to communicate with the stepper motors
and the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus to communicate with other control modules on the vehicle.
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR SOLENOID VALVE

The A/C compressor solenoid valve is integral with the A/C compressor. Operation of the solenoid valve is controlled by the
ATC module using a hardwired drive current of differing values. By controlling the flow of refrigerant through the
compressor, the solenoid valve can control the A/C system pressure and the evaporator operating temperature.
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant pressure sensor provides the ATC module with a pressure input from the high pressure side of the refrigerant
system. The refrigerant pressure sensor is located in the refrigerant line between the condenser and the thermostatic
expansion valve.
The ATC module supplies a 5 V reference voltage to the refrigerant pressure sensor and receives a return signal voltage,
between 0 V and 5 V, related to system pressure.
The ATC module uses the signal from the pressure sensor to protect the refrigerant system from extremes of pressure. The
ATC module transmits the A/C pressure, along with the compressor drive current value, to the instrument cluster on the
medium speed CAN bus. These signals are broadcast to the ECM (engine control module) on the high speed CAN bus to allow
it to calculate the torque being applied to the engine by the compressor.
To protect the system from extremes of pressure, the ATC module sets the A/C compressor to the minimum flow position if
the pressure:
Decreases to 2.1 0.2 bar (31.5 3 lbf/in); the ATC module loads the A/C compressor again when the pressure
increases to 2.3 0.2 bar (33.4 3 lbf/in)

Increases to 31 1 bar (450 14.5 lbf/in); the ATC module loads the A/C compressor again when the pressure
decreases to 26 1 bar (377 14.5 lbf/in)
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The evaporator temperature sensor is a NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistor that provides the ATC module
with a temperature signal from the downstream side of the evaporator. The evaporator temperature sensor is mounted
directly onto the evaporator matrix fins.
The ATC module uses the input from the evaporator temperature sensor to control the load of the A/C compressor and thus
the operating temperature of the evaporator.
CABIN HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The cabin humidity and temperature sensor is installed behind a grill on the drivers side of the instrument panel. The
temperature inside the cabin is measured by a NTC thermistor. A motor within the sensor assembly draws cabin air in
through the grill and over the thermistor. The motor is provided a battery voltage feed by a relay located within the CJB
(central junction box).
Humidity inside the cabin is measured by a sensor element made up of film capacitors on different substrates. The dielectric
is a polymer which absorbs or releases water proportional to the relative humidity of the air being drawn through the sensor
and thus changes the capacitance of the capacitor. For protection, the sensor element is contained in a nylon mesh cover.
Humidity within the cabin is controlled by raising and lowering the evaporator temperature. An increase in evaporator
temperature increases the moisture content in the air entering the cabin. Lowering the evaporator temperature reduces the
moisture content in the air entering the cabin.
The ambient air temperature sensor is a NTC thermistor that provides the ATC module with an input of external air
temperature. The sensor is hard wired to the ECM and its signal is transmitted to the instrument cluster on the high speed
CAN bus. The instrument cluster acts as a gateway and transmits the ambient air temperature signal to the ATC module on
the medium speed CAN bus. The sensor is mounted on the vehicle center line behind the lower front grill, and can be
accessed from underneath the vehicle.
SUNLOAD/LIGHT SENSOR
The sunload/light sensor consists of 2 photoelectric cells that provide the ATC module with inputs of light intensity; one as
sensed coming from the left of the vehicle and one as sensed coming from the right. The inputs are a measure of the solar
heating effect on vehicle occupants, and are used by the ATC module to adjust blower speed, temperature and distribution to
improve comfort.
NOTE: The solar sensor is also used as part of the Autolamp feature and also contains the active anti-theft alarm indicator
LED (light emitting diode).
For additional information, refer to: Exterior Lighting (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Description and Operation) /
Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active, Description and Operation).
The sensor is installed in the center of the instrument panel upper surface and is powered by a 5 V feed from the instrument
cluster.
POLLUTION SENSOR
Up to 2009 MY, a pollution sensor was installed only on Japanese specification vehicles. From 2009 MY, the pollution sensor
is a standard fit in all markets.
The pollution sensor allows the ATC module to monitor the ambient air for the level of hydrocarbons and oxidised gases such
as nitrous oxides, sulphur oxides and carbon monoxide. The sensor is mounted in the RH front corner of the engine
compartment.
The pollution sensor is powered by an ignition controlled voltage feed from the CJB and provides the ATC module with
separate signals of hydrocarbon and oxidised gases. With a pollution sensor fitted, the ATC module can control the air intake
source to reduce the amount of contaminants entering the cabin. This function is fully automatic, but can be overridden by
manual selection of the air source using the recirculation control switch below the TSD.
If there is a fault with the sensor, the ATC module disables automatic operation of the recirculation door.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus
Item
Part Number
Battery
Control switches
Pollution sensor
Description
Instrument cluster
7
-
Cabin humidity and temperature sensor
A/C compressor solenoid
10
RH temperature blend stepper motor
11
12
Face/feet distribution stepper motor
13
LH temperature blend stepper motor
14
Air intake servo motor
15
Blower motor
16
17
Evaporator temperature sensor
18
ATC module
19
CJB
20
Sunload/Light sensor
21
Megafuse (175A)
Air Intake Control
The source of intake air is automatically controlled unless overridden by pressing the air recirculation switch located below
the TSD. Under automatic control, the ATC module determines the required position of the recirculation door from its
'comfort' algorithm and, if fitted, the pollution sensor.
The recirculation door is operated by an electric motor. The ATC module provides analogue signals to the motor along a
hardwired connection. A potentiometer in the motor supplies the ATC module with a position feedback signal for closed loop
control.
Air Temperature Control

Cooled air from the evaporator enters the heater assembly, where temperature blend doors direct a proportion of the air
through the heater core to produce the required output air temperature.
The 2 temperature blend doors operate independently to enable individual temperature settings for the left and right sides of
the cabin. The temperature blend doors are operated by stepper motors, which are controlled by the ATC module using LIN
bus messages.
The ATC module calculates the temperature blend stepper motor positions required to achieve the selected temperature and
compares it against the current position. If there is any difference, the ATC module signals the stepper motors to adopt the
new position.
Air temperature is controlled automatically unless maximum heating (HI) or maximum cooling (LO) is selected. When
maximum heating or cooling is selected, a 'comfort' algorithm in the ATC module adopts an appropriate strategy for air
distribution, blower speed, and air source.
Temperature control of one side of the cabin can be compromised by the other side of the cabin being set to a high level of
heating or cooling. True maximum heating or cooling (displayed as 'HI' or 'LO' on the TSD) can only be selected from the
driver's side temperature control button. If 'HI' or 'LO' is selected from the driver's side, the passenger side temperature will
be automatically set to match the driver's side.
When economy mode is selected by pressing the 'Econ' TSD soft button, no cooling of the intake air will take place. The
minimum output air temperature from the system will be ambient air temperature plus any heat pick up in the air intake
path.
Blower Motor Control

Operation of the blower motor is controlled by the ATC module. The ATC module monitors a feedback voltage from the
blower motor control module. In response to the feedback voltage, the ATC module provides a drive signal back to the
blower motor control module which is used to regulate the voltage flow across the blower motor and hence regulate blower
speed. The blower motor is provided with a battery voltage feed from the blower motor relay, which is located within the
auxiliary junction box.
When the A/C system is in automatic mode, the ATC module determines the blower speed required from its 'comfort'
algorithm. When the A/C system is in manual mode, the ATC module operates the blower at the speed selected using either
the rotary control switch or the '+/-' soft buttons on the TSD.
The ATC module also controls blower motor speed to compensate for the ram effect on intake air produced by forward
movement of the vehicle. As vehicle speed, and consequently the ram effect increases, blower motor speed is reduced.
Air Distribution Control

Two air distribution doors are used to direct air into the cabin. The doors are operated by stepper motors, which are
controlled by the ATC module using LIN bus messages.
When the A/C system is in automatic mode, the ATC module automatically controls air distribution into the cabin in line with
its 'comfort' algorithm. Automatic control is overridden if any of the TSD air distribution soft buttons are selected. Air
distribution in the cabin will remain as selected until the 'Auto' switch is pressed or a different manual selection is made.
Programmed Defrost
When the 'DEF' button is pressed, the ATC module instigates the programmed defrost function. When selected, the ATC
module configures the system as follows:
Automatic mode off

Selected temperature unchanged
Air inlet set to fresh air
Air distribution set to windshield
Blower speed set to level 6
Windshield and rear screen heaters on.
The programmed defrost function can be cancelled by one of the following:
Selecting any air distribution switch on the TSD

Pressing the 'AUTO' switch below the TSD
A second press of the 'DEF' button
Switching the ignition OFF
NOTE: The blower speed can be adjusted without terminating the programmed defrost function.
A/C Compressor Control

When A/C is selected ('Econ' off) the ATC module maintains the evaporator at an operating temperature that varies with the
cabin cooling requirements. If the requirement for cooled air decreases, the ATC module raises the evaporator operating
temperature by reducing the flow of refrigerant provided by the A/C compressor.
NOTE: The ATC module closely controls the rate of temperature increase to avoid introducing moisture into the cabin.
If the requirement for cooled air increases, the ATC module lowers the evaporator operating temperature by increasing the
flow of refrigerant provided by the A/C compressor.
When economy mode is selected by pressing the 'Econ' TSD soft button, the compressor current signal supplied by the ATC
module holds the A/C compressor solenoid valve in the minimum flow position, effectively switching off the A/C function.
The ATC module incorporates limits for the operating pressure of the refrigerant system. When the system approaches the
high pressure limit the compressor current signal is progressively reduced until the system pressure decreases. When the
system pressure falls below the low pressure limit the compressor current signal is held at its lowest setting so that the A/C
compressor is maintained at its minimum stroke. This avoids depletion of the lubricant from the A/C compressor.
A/C Compressor Torque

The ATC module transmits refrigerant pressure and A/C compressor current values to the ECM over the medium speed then
high speed CAN bus, using the instrument cluster as a gateway. The ECM uses these values to calculate the torque being
used to drive the A/C compressor. The ECM compares the calculated value with its allowable value and if necessary forces
the ATC module to inhibit the A/C compressor by transmitting the 'ACClutchInhibit' CAN message. This forces the ATC
module to reduce the drive current to the A/C compressor solenoid valve, which reduces refrigerant flow. This in turn
reduces the torque required to drive the A/C compressor.
By reducing the maximum A/C compressor torque, the ECM is able to reduce the load on the engine when it needs to
maintain vehicle performance or cooling system integrity.
Cooling Fan Control

The ATC module determines the amount of condenser cooling required from the refrigerant pressure sensor, since there is a
direct relationship between the temperature and pressure of the refrigerant. The cooling requirement is broadcast to the ECM
on the medium speed CAN bus. The ECM then controls the temperature of the condenser using the cooling fan.
www.JagDocs.com
For additional information, refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - Vehicles Without:
Supercharger, Description and Operation).
Windshield Heater
The ATC module controls operation of the windshield heater using 2 relays in the power distribution box. When a request is
made for windshield heater operation, the ATC module broadcasts a message to the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus. On
receipt of this message, the CJB energises the relays by providing a ground path for both relay coils. This allows a battery
feed to flow across the relays to power the left and right heater elements.
NOTE: Windshield heater operation is only enabled when the engine is running.
There are 2 modes of windshield heater operation; manual and automatic.
Manual operation is activated by pressing the windshield heater control switch. When the switch is pressed, the ATC module
illuminates a LED in the switch and powers the heater elements for 6.5 minutes.
The switch LED remains illuminated until the windshield heater switch is pressed a second time (to switch the system off),
the heating phase is completed, or the engine stops. If the engine is re-started within 30 seconds the windshield heater
resumes the previous heating phase.
There are 2 variants of automatic operation; automatic operation at the start of a journey and automatic operation during a
journey.
Automatic operation at the start of a journey is initiated if the ambient air temperature is below 5 C (41 F) at the start of a
journey. In this instance, the ATC module will automatically power the windshield heater elements and illuminate the switch
LED for 6.5 minutes. The windshield heater can be switched off during this period by pressing the control switch or stopping
the engine.
Automatic operation during a journey is initiated when low ambient air temperatures are experienced and the vehicle has
been travelling for a set period of time above a threshold speed. In this instance, no feedback is given to the driver to inform
him the windshield heater is operational (the switch LED is not illuminated) and the duration of operation is variable
depending upon the ambient air temperature, vehicle speed and the amount of time the vehicle has been travelling.
Rear Window Heater

The ATC module controls operation of the rear window heater using a relay in the auxiliary junction box. When a request is
made for rear window heater operation, the ATC module broadcasts a message to the auxiliary junction box on the medium
speed CAN bus. On receipt of this message, the auxiliary junction box energises the relay by providing a ground path for the
relay coil. This allows a battery feed to flow across the relay to power the rear window heater element.
NOTE: Rear window heater operation is only enabled when the engine is running.
There are 2 modes of rear window heater operation; manual and automatic.
Manual operation is activated by pressing the rear window heater control switch. When the switch is pressed, the ATC
module illuminates a LED in the switch and powers the heater element for 21 minutes.
The switch LED remains illuminated until the rear window heater switch is pressed a second time (to switch the system off),
the heating phase is completed, or the engine stops. If the engine is re-started within 30 seconds the rear window heater
resumes the previous heating phase.
There are 2 variants of automatic operation; automatic operation at the start of a journey and automatic operation during a
journey.
Automatic operation at the start of a journey is initiated if the ambient air temperature is below 5 C (41 F) at the start of a
journey. In this instance, the ATC module will automatically power the rear window heater element and illuminate the switch
LED for 21 minutes. The rear window heater can be switched off during this period by pressing the control switch or stopping
the engine.
Automatic operation during a journey is initiated when low ambient air temperatures are experienced and the vehicle has
been travelling for a set period of time above a threshold speed. In this instance, no feedback is given to the driver to inform
him the rear window heater is operational (the switch LED is not illuminated) and the duration of operation is variable
depending upon the ambient air temperature, vehicle speed and the amount of time the vehicle has been travelling.
Exterior Mirror Heaters

Exterior mirror heater operation is determined by ambient air temperature and windshield wiper status. When ambient air
temperature reaches a pre-determined level, the ATC module broadcasts an exterior mirror heating request to the door
modules over the medium speed CAN bus. On receipt of this message, the door modules provide feed and ground
connections to both exterior mirror heater elements.
NOTE: Operation of the exterior mirror heaters is fully automatic and not controllable by the driver.
The amount of time the exterior mirror heaters are operational increases if the windshield wipers are switched on. This
ensures the mirrors remain mist free in damp and wet conditions, where there is an increased risk of misting.
Seat Heaters
There are 4 seat heater settings available; Off, 1, 2 or 3, which can be set through the TSD. The heat setting is relayed to
the vehicle occupants through a graduated display on the TSD.
Operation of the heated seats is controlled by the ATC module. When the ATC module receives a heating request from the
TSD, it broadcasts a message to the CJB over the medium speed CAN bus. The CJB then provides a hardwired 12 V supply to
the 3 heater elements contained within each seat. The 3 heater elements, 2 in the seat cushion and 1 in the seat squab, are
wired in series.
The ATC module monitors seat temperature using a temperature sensor located in each seat cushion. The CJB provides the
temperature sensors with a 5 V supply. The level of the returned voltage back to the CJB is proportional to the seat
temperature. The value of the return signal is broadcast to the ATC module over the medium speed CAN bus which it then
converts into a temperature value to allow it to control seat temperature to the required level.
The ATC module will suspend or disable operation of the seat heaters if any of the following occur:
Battery voltage exceeds 16.5 0.3 V for more than 5 seconds. Seat heating is re-enabled when battery voltage
decreases to 16.2 0.3 V

If a short or open circuit is detected
If the seat heat temperature rises significantly above the target temperature setting.
The graduated display on the TSD remains illuminated until the seat heaters are turned off or the engine stops. If the engine
is restarted within 30 seconds the seat heater resumes the previous heating level.
Steering Wheel Heater

The steering wheel heater has 1 heat setting and can be turned on and off by pressing the soft button located on the seat
heater TSD screen. The on/off status of the steering wheel heater is relayed to the vehicle occupants through the TSD. When
the ignition is switched off, the heater will reset to off.
Power for the heater element is supplied by the CJB on receipt of a request from the ATC module over the medium speed
CAN bus. Temperature control for the heater element is provided by the steering wheel heater control module which receives
a temperature feedback signal from a NTC thermistor located within the steering wheel.
Control Components - Control Components

For a detailed description of the climate control system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Control Components (412-04 Control Components, Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Refrigerant
Heater control flaps
Ducting
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Harness
Electrical connectors
Switch(s)
3.
4.
DTC Index
into account.
DTC
B105A01
B1A5911
Description
Aspirator fan fault
Recirculation servo
motor actuator sensor 5 volt supply
B1A5913
Air conditioning
pressure sensor sensor 5 volt supply
B1A6111 In car temperature
sensor circuit - short
to ground
B1A6115 In car temperature
sensor circuit - short
Possible Cause
Action
diagnostic system
Aspirator fan component fault
Sensor 5 volt supply - short to
ground
diagnostic system
Air conditioning pressure sensor Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test
5 volt supply - open circuit
air conditioning pressure sensor circuit for
open circuit
In car temperature sensor circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
- short to ground
diagnostic system
In car temperature sensor circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
- short to power, open circuit
Aspirator fan circuit - short to
B1A6901

Air conditioning
pressure sensor short to ground
Air conditioning
pressure sensor short to power, open
circuit
Right hand sun load
sensor - short to
ground
Left hand sun load
sensor - short to
ground
Vehicle sensor ground
- open circuit
Humidity sensor fault
B1A7001
Compressor fault
B1A6211
B1A6215
B1A6311
B1A6411
B1A6713
B1A9815
Stepper motor
actuator LIN Bus fault,
or power supply open circuit
B1B6013 Recirculation servo
motor actuator sensor 5 volt supply
B1B6111 Pollution sensor HC
input - short to ground
B1B6211 Pollution sensor Nox
input - short to ground
B1B6313
Recirculation servo
motor actuator ground circuit
potentiometer - short
to ground
potentiometer - short
motor fault
B1B7111
Evaporator
temperature sensor short to ground
B1B7115
Evaporator
temperature sensor short to power, open
circuit
B1B7211
Stepper motor
actuator LIN Bus
power supply - short
to ground
B1B7400 Defrost stepper motor
actuator fault
B1B7449 Defrost stepper motor
actuator fault
B1B7500
B1B7549
diagnostic system
circuit - short to ground
diagnostic system
Air conditioning pressure sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
circuit - short to power, open
circuit
diagnostic system
Air conditioning pressure sensor
Right hand sun load sensor

diagnostic system
Left hand sun load sensor circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
- short to ground
diagnostic system
Vehicle sensor ground - open
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test
circuit
vehicle sensor ground circuit for open circuit
Humidity sensor circuit - short
to power, ground, open circuit
diagnostic system
Sensor component fault
Over current detection
diagnostic system
No response from ALL steppers
for 20 seconds - LIN network
stepper motor actuator LIN Bus for open
fault
circuit
Sensor 5 volt supply - open
circuit

sensor 5 volt supply for open circuit
Pollution sensor HC input - short Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
to ground

diagnostic system
Pollution sensor Nox input Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
short to ground
diagnostic system
Recirculation servo motor
actuator ground - open circuit recirculation servo motor actuator ground for
open circuit
Recirculation servo
potentiometer circuit - short to
ground
diagnostic system
Recirculation servo
power, open circuit
diagnostic system
Recirculation servo
power, ground, open circuit
diagnostic system
Recirculation door/linkage
broken
Evaporator temperature sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
diagnostic system
Evaporator temperature sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
circuit - short to power, open
circuit
diagnostic system
Stepper motor actuator LIN Bus

power supply - short to ground stepper motor actuator LIN Bus power supply
for short to ground
Internal or external fault -
under/over voltage
Internal electronic fault - motor
over temperature
Panel/foot stepper
motor actuator fault
Panel/foot stepper
motor actuator fault
under/over voltage
over temperature

diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
B1B7600
Front left air blend

stepper motor actuator
fault
B1B7649 Front left air blend
fault
B1B7700 Front right air blend
fault
B1B7749 Front right air blend
fault
B1B7884
Air conditioning
system under pressure
under/over voltage
over temperature
under/over voltage
over temperature
Signal below allowable range
System leak
Incorrect refrigerant charge
weight
B1B7885
Air conditioning
system over pressure
Signal above allowable range
U001088
Medium speed CAN

communication
Bus off
U030000
Internal control
module software
incompatibility
Invalid configuration message is
U1A1449 Failed to initialise CAN
U300055
U300087
received
Stored vehicle
configuration data
does not match
Incorrect car configuration data
Control Module
Missing message
U300281 Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN)
received
Vehicle/component mis-match.
Corrupt VIN data being

transmitted, module previously
installed to other vehicle
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system. Check system for leaks.
Charge system with correct weight of
refrigerant
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
approved diagnostic system. Clear the DTC
and retest. If the DTC is still logged suspect
the climate control module, refer to the new
Index
Install a new climate control module, refer to
the new module installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and
re-test. If the DTC remains suspect the
climate control module, refer to the new
Index
approved diagnostic system. Check climate
control module for DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index. Check CAN network integrity using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Install original module, check for DTCs and
refer to relevant DTC Index
Control Components - Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

Removal
1.
Refer to: Exterior Mirror Cover (501-09 Rear View Mirrors,

2.
3.
4.
5.
Installation
1.
Control Components - Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator LH

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

3.
NOTE: Note the relationship between the servo

motor drive and the vent flap.
Remove the servo motor assembly.
Installation
1.
Install the servo motor assembly.

Align the servo motor drive.
Install the screws.
2.

3.

Specifications).
Control Components - Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator RH

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

3.

Installation
1.

Install the screws.
2.

3.

Specifications).
Control Components - Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator LH

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

3.
Remove the LH side footwell heater duct.

Release the lampholder.
4.
Remove the support bracket.

Remove the screw.
5.

Installation
1.

Install the screws.
2.
Install the support bracket.

Install the screw.
3.
Install the LH side footwell heater duct.

Install the screws.
4.

5.

Specifications).
Control Components - Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator RH

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

3.
Remove the LH side footwell heater duct.

4.

Installation
1.

Install the screws.
2.
Install the LH side footwell heater duct.

Install the screws.
3.

4.

Specifications).
Control Components - In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor

Removal
1.

Trim Panel (501-12, Removal and Installation).
2.
Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor.

Installation
1.
Install the in-vehicle temperature sensor.

2.

Control Components - Recirculation Blend Door Actuator

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

3.

Installation
1.

Install the screws.
2.

3.

Specifications).
Control Components - Sunload Sensor

Removal
1.
CAUTION: Protect the surrounding trim from

damage when changing the component.
Remove the center speaker grille.
2.
Remove the sunload sensor.

Installation
1.
Install the sunload sensor.

Install the screws.
2.
Install the center speaker grille.

Secure the clips.
Control Components - Climate Control Module

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

3.
Remove the A/C control module.

Installation
1.
Install the A/C control module.

2.

3.

Specifications).
4.
Control Components - Climate Control Assembly

Removal
NOTE: Removal of this component is part of the audio removal procedure.
1.
2.
Remove the audio unit.

For additional information, refer to: Audio Unit (415-01A Audio
Unit, Removal and Installation).
Installation
1.
Install the audio unit.

For additional information, refer to: Audio Unit (415-01A Audio
Unit, Removal and Installation).
2.
Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination - Instrument Cluster and Panel

Illumination
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Accessory power socket/cigar lighter
Overhead console
Instrument cluster
Dimmer switch
Driver door switch pack
Steering wheel speed control switches
Description
10
11
12
Integrated control panel
Passenger door switch pack
INTRODUCTION
Instrument cluster and panel illumination is provided by light emitting diodes which are activated in conjunction with the
exterior lights. The illumination intensity can be adjusted using a dimmer switch located in the auxiliary switch pack.
DIMMER SWITCH
The dimmer switch is a variable resistor installed in a circuit with the instrument cluster, which is used as a potential divider
to provide a high or low voltage according to its set position.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus.
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
Passenger door module
Driver door module
10
Dimmer switch
11
Accessory power socket/cigar lighter
12
Clockspring
13
14
Steering wheel speed control switches
15
16
17
Instrument cluster
18
Overhead console
When the exterior lights are on, the instrument cluster converts the voltage from the dimmer switch into an illumination level
value, which it uses to set the illumination level of the instruments. The instrument cluster also transmits the illumination
level value on the medium speed CAN bus to:
The integrated control panel
The CJB (central junction box)
The driver and passenger door modules.
The integrated control panel sets the illumination level of its switches and the TSD (touch screen display) to the value
contained in the CAN message.
The CJB transmits the illumination level value in a high speed CAN message to the JaguarDrive selector module, which sets
the illumination level of its switches and controls accordingly. The CJB also controls power outputs to set the required
illumination levels in:
The
The
The
The
overhead console
steering wheel audio, cruise control and paddle switches
accessory power socket/cigar lighter
auxiliary switch pack.
The driver and passenger door modules control power outputs to set the required illumination levels in their respective door
switch packs.
Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination - Instrument Cluster and

Panel Illumination
For a detailed description of the Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination (413-00 Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination, Description
and Operation).

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Fluid level(s)
Accessory installations
Electrical
Bulbs(s)
Fuse(s)
Wiring harness
Engine compartment components
Underbody components
Instrument cluster
Dimmer switch
Headlamp switch
Autolamp sensor
3.
4.
system.
Instrument Cluster Torque Specifications
Item
Instrument cluster surround - screw
Instrument cluster - screw
Nm
1
1.5
lb-ft
-
lb-in
9
13
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Speedometer
Message center
Tachometer
INTRODUCTION
The instrument cluster is located in the instrument panel, above the steering column. The instrument cluster comprises
analogue gages, a LCD (liquid crystal display) message center to provide vehicle operation details to the driver and a
number of indicator lamps to display system status.
The message center is a LCD located in a central position in the instrument cluster.
and Operation).
The instrument cluster also functions as an intelligent controller for a number of other vehicle systems, for example column
adjust positions, steering column multifunction switch inputs, steering Servotronic control.
The instrument cluster is the gateway for the high speed and medium speed CAN (controller area network) buses, and is also
connected to the LIN (local interconnect network) bus to the start control unit and the steering wheel audio module.
ANALOGUE GAGES
Speedometer
The speedometer is located on the LH (left-hand) side of the cluster and is available in three market variants:
Major scale mph, minor scale km/h
Major scale km/h, minor scale mph
Major scale only in km/h.
The speedometer is driven by high speed CAN signals transmitted by the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module. The wheel
speeds are measured by sensors reading the rotational speed of the rear wheels from toothed targets on the hubs. An
average of the two wheel speeds are passed from the sensors to the ABS module in the form of pulsed signals. The ABS
module converts these signals into a speed output on the high speed CAN to the instrument cluster.
The same speed outputs from the wheel speed sensors are also used to calculate the distance the vehicle has traveled.
Tachometer
The tachometer is located on the RH (right-hand) side of the instrument cluster and displays engine speeds up to 8000
rev/min.
The tachometer is driven by an engine speed signal transmitted on the high speed CAN from the ECM (engine control
module). The signal is derived from the CKP (crankshaft position) sensor. The signal is received by the instrument cluster
microprocessor and the output from the microprocessor drives the tachometer.
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

In the area above and below the message center is a LCD. The area below the message center displays a linear fuel gage,
odometer, trip distance and trip computer readouts. The area above the message center displays the transmission gear
position information and speed control related information.
NOTE: There is no engine coolant temperature gage displayed. If the engine coolant temperature increases to above a
predetermined threshold, a warning message is displayed in the message center. The message is sent from the ECM in a
high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster.
A warning message is also displayed in the message center if the coolant in the expansion tank falls below a given level. The
instrument cluster is hardwired to a level switch in the expansion tank with feed and return connections. If the switch opens
the instrument cluster detects the low coolant level and displays the applicable message.
Fuel Gage
The linear fuel gage has a colored bar which moves left or right depending on the tank contents. As the bar moves to the left
the fuel tank contents displayed is decreasing. A warning message is displayed in the message center when the fuel tank
contents fall to below the reserve level.
The fuel gage is controlled by CAN messages from the AJB (auxiliary junction box). The AJB reads the values output by the
fuel level sensors every 131 ms and transmits a fuel tank contents value, corrected for battery voltage, in a CAN message to
the instrument cluster.
A fuel pump symbol is displayed to the left of the linear gage. An arrow above the symbol shows the driver on which side of
the vehicle the fuel filler cap is located.
Above the linear fuel gage, is a LCD area which displays odometer and trip readouts. When a trip computer function is
selected, these are replaced by a trip computer display for the trip function selected.
Transmission Gear Position Display

The transmission gear position display shows the JaguarDrive selector position or, when operating the transmission in the
sequential shift mode, the selected gear.
The JaguarDrive selector module transmits a CAN message to the instrument cluster for JaguarDrive selector position. The
module also outputs a 'not in park' signal to the instrument cluster.
The TCM (transmission control module) transmits a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster with data containing
the selected gear when in sequential shift mode.
WARNING INDICATORS
Item
Part Number
Description
ABS (anti-lock braking system) (USA only)
ABS - (Canada and Mexico)
ABS - (all except Canada, Mexico and USA)
Adaptive speed control
AFS (adaptive front lighting system)
MIL (malfunction indicator lamp)
TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system)
Airbag
RH (right hand) turn signal
10
Rear fog lamps
11
DSC (dynamic stability control)
12
High beam
13
Side lamp
14
Safety belt
15
ASL (automatic speed limiter)
16
Forward alert
17
Brake (USA only)
18
Brake (all except USA)
19
LH (left hand) turn signal
The warning indicators are located in various positions in the instrument cluster. The indicators can be split into two groups;
instrument cluster controlled and externally controlled.
Instrument cluster controlled warning indicators are dependant on software logic within the instrument cluster for activation.
The cluster software controls the indicator illumination check at ignition on.
Externally controlled indicators are supplied with current from another vehicle system control module or illuminated by the
instrument cluster software on receipt of a bus message from another vehicle system. The indicator illumination check at
ignition on is also controlled by the other system module on these indicators.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item
Part Number
Battery
Power distribution box (ignition relay)
High speed CAN (controller area network) bus to other vehicle systems
Medium speed CAN bus to other vehicle systems
LIN (local interconnect network) bus from steering wheel audio switch module (via clockspring)
and start control module
Steering column adjustment switch
10
Steering column reach and rake adjustment motors
11
Steering column position potentiometer
12
Coolant level switch
13
Power steering Servotronic valve
Description
Brake fluid level switch
14
-
Steering column RH multifunction switch
16
Steering column LH multifunction switch
17
Instrument cluster
18
Auxiliary switch panel
19
Sunload sensor (with alarm LED (light emitting diode))
15
Warning Indicator Functionality
Item
Part Number
Description
LH turn signal
RH turn signal
Brake
Forward alert
ASL
ABS
AFS
MIL
10
TPMS
11
Airbag
12
DSC
13
Safety belt
14
Side lamp
15
High beam
16
Rear fog lamps
The functionality for each of the above warning indicators is described in the following section.
1. and 2. Turn Signal Warning Indicators
The turn signal indicators are controlled by the AJB on receipt of medium speed CAN signals from the instrument cluster.
The instrument cluster outputs a voltage to the turn signal indicator switch. The switch contains resistors of different values.
When the switch is operated in either the LH or RH direction, the voltage is passed to a ground connection in the instrument
cluster which detects the reduced voltage supplied via the resistors. When the turn signal indicator switch is operated in the
LH or RH direction, the instrument cluster detects the ground voltage and determines whether a LH or RH selection is made.
The instrument cluster transmits a medium speed CAN message to the AJB for operation of the applicable turn signal
indicators. The message can contain a number of states for each possible switch position and also an out of range low and
high state for circuit faults and an initial value for the switch neutral position. The turn signal indicators are not subject to
the 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The AJB software controls the flash rate of the turn signal warning indicators by sending on and off signals to the instrument
cluster, which flashes the applicable indicator in a green color. During normal operation, the warning indicator flashes slowly,
accompanied simultaneously by a sound from the instrument cluster sounder. If a fault exists, the AJB transmits a message
to the instrument cluster which responds by flashing the warning indicator and operating the sounder at double speed to
indicate a bulb failure and also displays an appropriate message and vehicle graphic in the message center.
The hazard warning indicators are controlled by the AJB on receipt of a completed ground path from the hazard warning
indicator switch. The AJB outputs a medium speed CAN message to the instrument cluster which operates both the LH and
RH turn signal indicators simultaneously. The hazard warning indicators can operate with the ignition switched off, therefore
the CAN message from the AJB will also carry a 'wake-up' message for the instrument cluster.
3. Brake Warning Indicator
This warning indicator is displayed in a red or amber color (depending on market) as a brake symbol in all markets except
USA, which has the word BRAKE in addition to the symbol. The indicator is controlled either by a hardwired input from the
brake fluid level switch or by high speed CAN messages from the ABS module and the EPB (electronic parking brake)
module. The indicator is illuminated in a red color for a 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The instrument cluster is hardwired to the level switch in the brake fluid reservoir with feed and return connections. If the
brake fluid level falls below a given level, the switch opens and the instrument cluster detects the low fluid level condition.
The instrument cluster then illuminates the warning indicator and displays the message BRAKE FLUID LOW in the message
center. The warning indicator can also be illuminated by the ABS module if an EBD (electronic brake force distribution) fault
is detected.
NOTE: If both the brake warning indicator and the ABS warning indicator illuminate simultaneously, a major fault in the
brake system has occurred.
The warning indicator also displays parking brake status. When the parking brake is applied, the warning indicator will be
illuminated by the instrument cluster and, if the vehicle is moving, the message PARK BRAKE APPLIED will be also displayed
in the message center in response to a CAN message from the EPB module.
If a condition exists where the parking brake cannot be applied, the EPB module issues a CAN message to the instrument
cluster which illuminates or flashes (depending on market) the warning lamp and is accompanied with the message CANNOT
APPLY PARK BRAKE. If a fault occurs in the parking brake system, the EPB module issues a CAN message to the instrument
cluster which illuminates the warning indicator and displays the message PARK BRAKE FAULT in the message center.
4. Forward Alert Warning Indicator
The forward alert system uses the components of the adaptive speed control system to alert the driver of the presence of a
vehicle ahead. The system can be turned on and off using a switch located in the auxiliary switch panel when the adaptive
speed control system is off. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is
switched on.
The forward alert system is controlled by the adaptive speed control module. When the switch is pressed, the forward alert
system is activated and the adaptive speed control module issues a forward alert active message on the high speed CAN bus
to the instrument cluster. The forward alert icon in the instrument cluster will illuminate in an amber color and a 'FORWARD
ALERT' message will be displayed in the message center. When the button is pressed a second time, the module issues a
forward alert off CAN message. The forward alert system will be deactivated, the forward alert icon will go off and a message
'FORWARD ALERT OFF' will be displayed in the message center.
5. Automatic Speed Limiter Warning Indicator
The ASL is controlled by the ECM. An ASL switch is located in the floor console, adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector. When
the ASL switch is pressed, this is sensed by the ECM, which issues a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster. The
instrument cluster illuminates the ASL warning indicator in an amber color to show the driver that ASL is active. The driver
sets the required speed using the speed control SET +/- switches on the steering wheel. The selected speed is shown by the
message ' LIMITER SET XXX MPH / K/MH' in the message center. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3
seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
ASL can be deselected by pressing the ASL switch, by depressing the throttle pedal initiating kick-down or by pressing the
'cancel' switch on the steering wheel. The ASL indicator will go off and the message center will display the message 'limiter
cancelled' for 4 seconds.
If a fault occurs in the ASL system, the ECM will send a message to the instrument cluster to illuminate the ASL indicator and
display the message 'LIMITER NOT AVAILABLE'.
6. Adaptive Speed Control Warning Indicator
www.JagDocs.com
The adaptive speed control system is controlled by the adaptive speed control module. Operation of the SET +/- switches on
the steering wheel will activate the system. Operation of the switches is detected by the adaptive speed control module. The
module issues a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster which illuminates the adaptive speed control indicator,
when the system is in 'follow mode', in an amber color and displays a 'SETSPEED XXX MPH / KM/H' message in the message
center. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
7. Anti-lock Braking System Warning Indicator
The ABS warning indicator is controlled by the ABS module. If a fault in the ABS system is detected by the ABS module, the
module issues a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster to illuminate the ABS warning indicator in an amber color
and display the message 'ABS FAULT' in the instrument cluster. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 seconds
indicator check when the ignition is switched on. If a fault is present when the ignition is on the indicator will remain
illuminated after the 3 seconds check period.
NOTE: The 'ABS FAULT' message is not displayed in NAS markets.
NOTE: If both the ABS warning indicator and the brake warning indicator illuminate simultaneously, a major fault in the
brake system will have occurred.
On all vehicles except NAS, the ABS warning indicator is also used for parking brake faults. The indicator in these markets
illuminates in an amber color and displays a brake symbol without the text 'ABS' in the icon.
On NAS vehicles, the ABS warning indicator is only used for ABS. The warning indicator has 'ABS' on the icon and will
illuminate amber for ABS faults only.
8. Adaptive Front Light System Warning Indicator
The AFS warning indicator is controlled by the AFS control module. The AFS warning indicator illuminates in an amber color if
a fault in the AFS system is detected by the control module. If a fault in another system occurs which prevents AFS
operation, the warning indicator will flash. The indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a high speed
CAN message from the AFS control module. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 seconds indicator check
when the ignition is switched on.
9. Malfunction Indicator Lamp Warning Indicator
The MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) is controlled by the ECM and illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a
message on the high speed CAN bus from the ECM. The MIL is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 seconds indicator check
when the ignition is switched on.
If the MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started or illuminates when driving, a fault is present and must be
investigated at the earliest opportunity. Illumination of the MIL alerts the driver to an OBD (on-board diagnostic) fault which
will cause excessive emissions output. This may relate to either an engine management system fault or a transmission fault.
10. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Indicator
The TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) warning indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a
medium speed CAN message from the TPMS module. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 seconds indicator
check when the ignition is switched on.
If the indicator illuminates and is accompanied by the message 'TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' in the message center,
then a TPMS fault has occurred. If the indicator illuminates and accompanied by a different message, then a low tire
pressure has been detected, a spare wheel has been fitted or a TPMS sensor has failed.
11. Airbag Warning Indicator
The airbag warning indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for the 3
seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on. The indicator remains illuminated after the 3 seconds period has
expired until the instrument cluster receives a turn off message on the high speed CAN bus from the RCM (restraints control
module).
12. Dynamic Stability Control Warning Indicator
The DSC indicator is controlled by the ABS module and illuminated by the instrument cluster in response to messages
received on the high speed CAN bus. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for the 3 seconds indicator check when
the ignition is switched on.
The DSC indicator is permanently illuminated in an amber color if the instrument cluster receives a high speed CAN message
from the ABS module relating to one of the following faults:
Traction control fault

Yaw control fault
Engine drag torque control fault
EBA (emergency brake assist) fault
Signal missing relating to either traction control active, yaw control active or DSC switch input.
The above faults will also generate an applicable DSC and ABS warning message in the message center.
The DSC warning indicator will flash at 2 Hz if traction control or yaw control is active when the DSC system is enabled.
If the DSC system is switched off, the warning indicator will be permanently illuminated until the DSC system is
subsequently re-activated.
13. Safety Belt Warning Indicator
The safety belt warning indicator operates for both the driver and passenger safety belts. The warning indicator is controlled
by the RCM and illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of high speed CAN bus messages. The safety belt warning
indicator is not subject to the 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The operation of the passenger safety belt buckle switch is as described below with the exception that the instrument cluster
must receive a hardwired signal from the belt minder control module to indicate that a passenger is occupying the seat.
The safety belt warning indicator is subject to a timer. The warning indicator is activated when the following conditions exist:
Ignition is switched on
One of the front safety belts is unbuckled
USA market only - 75 seconds has elapsed after ignition on mode is selected
Vehicle is not in reverse gear
Vehicle speed is more than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Once the above parameters are met, the instrument cluster flashes the warning indicator at 2 Hz for 10 seconds
accompanied by a simultaneous chime. After 10 seconds the chime ceases and the warning indicator is permanently
illuminated for 20 seconds. This sequence is repeated every 30 seconds until one of the following events occurs:
300 seconds has elapsed

The safety belt of the occupied front seats is fastened
The ignition is switched to off mode
The vehicle speed decreases to less 5 km/h (3 mph).
NOTE: On USA market vehicles, the warning indicator is not permanently illuminated.
In certain markets the belt minder function can be enabled and disabled using the driver safety belt switch. For additional
information, refer to 501-20A Safety Belt System.
14. Side Lamp Warning Indicator
The instrument cluster controls the green colored side lamp indicator on receipt of a side lamp status message on the
medium speed CAN bus from the CJB (central junction box) and the AJB. The lighting switch on theLH steering column
multifunction switch is connected to the instrument cluster. Selections using this switch are detected by the cluster which
requests the side or headlamp operation via a CAN message to the CJB and the AJB. The CJB and the AJB responds with a
side lamp active message and the cluster illuminates the side lamp indicator. The side lamp indicator is not subject to the 3
seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
15. High Beam Warning Indicator
The instrument cluster controls the blue colored high beam indicator on receipt of a high beam status message on the
medium speed CAN bus from the CJB. The lighting switch on the LH steering column multifunction switch is connected to the
instrument cluster. High beam or flash selections using this switch are detected by the cluster which requests the light
operation via a CAN message to the CJB. The CJB responds with a high beam active message and the cluster illuminates the
high beam indicator. The high beam indicator is not subject to the 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched
on.
16. Rear Fog Lamp Warning Indicator
The amber colored rear fog lamp indicator is controlled by the AJB and illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a
rear fog lamp on message on the medium speed CAN bus from the AJB. The indicator is illuminated for as long as the rear
fog lamps are active. The rear fog lamp indicator is not subject to the 3 seconds indicator check when the ignition is switched
on.

For a detailed description of the instrument cluster, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
1.
2.

Mechanical
Fluid level(s)
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Wiring harness
Instrument cluster
Engine Junction Box (EJB)
Driver Door Module (DDM)
Passenger Door Module (PDM)
3.
4.
DTC Index
into account.
DTC
B100811
Description
Wiper mode switch Circuit short to ground
Possible Cause
Switch fault
Action
wiper switch circuits for short to ground. Repair
wiring harness or replace switch as required. Clear
B100815
Wiper mode switch Circuit short to power or

open
B100951 Ignition authorisation not programmed

Switch fault
Faulty instrument cluster

Re-synchronisation error
following programming
CAN fault
B100962 Ignition authorisation signal compare failure
Low speed CAN fault

fault
Incorrect module
B100987 Ignition authorisation missing message
B102487
Start Control Unit Missing message
B104611
Front fog lamp control

switch - Circuit short to
ground
B104615
Front fog lamp control

switch - Circuit short to
battery or open
B100A62 Fuel pump authorisation

- signal compare failure
B100A64 Fuel Pump authorisation signal plausibility failure
B100A87 Fuel pump authorisation

- missing message
B100B67
Column lock ground

authorisation - signal
DTC and retest system

wiper switch circuits for short to power or open
circuits. Repair wiring harness or replace switch as
required. Clear DTC and retest system
Check ignition, power and ground supplies to
Central Junction Box and instrument cluster. Resynchronise ID by re-configuring the instrument
cluster as a new module. Check CAN
communications between instrument cluster and
tester
Check CAN communications between Central
Junction Box and instrument cluster. Check
ignition, power and ground supplies to Central
Junction Box and instrument cluster. Confirm
correct module is installed. Re-synchronise ID by
re-configuring the instrument cluster as a new
module. Check CAN network for interference/EMC
related issues
installed (Central
Junction Box/Instrument
cluster)
Re-synchronisation error
following reprogramming
Check power and ground supplies to Central
fault
Junction Box and instrument cluster. Refer to
Low speed CAN fault
electrical wiring diagrams and check CAN network
between Central Junction Box and instrument
Low battery voltage <9V
cluster. Check battery is fully charged and in
serviceable condition, refer to the battery care
manual
Loss of LIN
Check power and ground supplied to the start
communication with
control unit. Refer to circuit diagrams and check
Start Control Unit
LIN bus circuits. If no circuit faults are present
Start Control Unit failure suspect start control unit. Refer to the new module
Switch fault
switch circuits for short to ground. Repair wiring
harness or replace switch as required. Clear DTC
and retest system
Switch fault
switch circuits for short to power or open circuit.
Repair wiring harness or replace switch as
Low speed CAN fault
Check CAN communications between Auxiliary
Auxiliary Junction Box Junction Box and instrument cluster. Check power
fault
and ground supplies to Auxiliary Junction Box and
instrument cluster. Confirm correct module
Incorrect module
installed. Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the
installed (Auxiliary
Auxiliary Junction Box as a new module. Check
Junction Box/Instrument CAN network for interference/EMC related issues
cluster)
Write target SID
synchronisation error
Write target SID
Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the Auxiliary
Junction Box as a new module. Check ignition,
following repower and ground supplies to Auxiliary Junction
programming
Box and instrument cluster. Check CAN network
between Auxiliary Junction Box and instrument
fault
cluster
Low speed CAN fault
fault
power and ground supplies to Auxiliary Junction
Low speed CAN fault
Low battery voltage < 9
cluster. Check battery is fully charged and in
volts
manual
Low speed CAN fault
fault
Vehicle speed present
B100B87
Column lock ground

authorisation - missing
message
B100C67
Column lock supply

B100C87
Column lock supply

message
B100D62
Column lock
compare failure
B100D64
Column lock
B100D87
Column lock
message
B100D96
Column lock
authorisation component internal
failure
B112B87 Steering Wheel Module Missing message
when attempting to
power steering column
lock
Engine speed present
when attempting to
lock
Power mode status >
four when attempting to
perform lock action
Low speed CAN fault
fault

cluster. Check Anti-lock Braking System, Engine
Control Module and Central Junction Box for DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC Index

cluster
Low speed CAN fault
power and ground supplies to Central Junction Box
and instrument cluster. Check CAN network
fault
Vehicle speed present
cluster. Check Anti-lock Braking System, Engine
when attempting to
Control Module and Central Junction Box for DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC Index
lock
Engine speed present
when attempting to
lock
Power mode status >
four when attempting to
perform lock action
Low speed CAN fault
power and ground supplies to Central Junction Box
and instrument cluster. Check CAN network
fault
cluster
CAN fault
Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check CAN
network between steering column lock and
fault
instrument cluster. Check power and ground
Incorrect module
cluster. Confirm the correct modules are installed.
installed (Steering
Re-synchronize ID by re-configuring the steering
column lock/Instrument
column lock as new. Check CAN network for
cluster)
interference/EMC related issues
Target ID
CAN fault
network to steering column lock. Check power and
fault
ground supplies to steering column lock and
instrument cluster
CAN fault
fault
cluster
column lock < 8V
CAN fault
fault
Low temperature < -30
cluster. Check there is no torque applied to the
steering column/wheel when the unlock process is

attempted
column lock < 8 volts
Restricted bolt
movement
Loss of LIN
Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check LIN
communication with
network connections to Steering wheel module.
Steering wheel module
Check power and ground connections. Check

Switch fault
internal module fault
B10A011
Wiper/washer switch Circuit short to ground

Switch fault
B10A015
Wiper/washer switch Circuit short to battery or

open

Switch fault
B10A611 Main light switch - Circuit

short to ground

Switch fault
B10A615 Main light switch - Circuit

short to battery or open

Switch fault
B115C7A
B1A8511
Transfer fuel pump

Ambient light sensor Circuit short to ground
Fluid leak or seal failure
B1A8515
Ambient light sensor Circuit short to battery or

open

Sensor fault
B1B0100
Key transponder number of keys stored

below minimum number
required
Operator only cycles one
B1B0105
Key transponder system programming

failures
B1B0151
Key transponder - not

programmed
B1B0155
Key transponder - not

configured
B1B0162 Key transponder - signal

compare failure


Sensor fault
key during programming

Instrument cluster, start
control unit or key loses

power or circuit failure
during programming
Faulty key
Unable to programme
key due to noise/EMC
related issues
Error following start
control unit replacement
Start Control Unit fault
LIN fault
switch signal circuits. Repair wiring harness faults,

clear DTC and test. If DTC recurs suspect steering
wheel module. Refer to the new module
and retest system
and retest system
Check transfer fuel pump for leak/seal failure
ambient light sensor circuit for short to ground.
Repair wiring harness or replace sensor as
ambient light sensor circuit for short to power or
open circuit. Repair wiring harness or replace
sensor as required. Clear DTC and retest system
Ensure all keys to be programmed are available.
Check power and ground supplies to all relevant
modules. Replace faulty key. Check CAN network
for noise/EMC related issues
Re-synchronize ID by re-configuring the start

control unit as a new module. Refer to electrical
wiring diagrams and check power and ground
supplies to start control unit and instrument
cluster. Check LIN circuit between start control
unit and instrument cluster
LIN fault
Instrument cluster fault circuit between start control unit and instrument
Faulty key
cluster. Check power and ground supplies to start
Start control unit fault
control unit and instrument cluster. Ensure new
Attempted to
keys are from a known good source
programme a nondefault key
Un-programmed key
Confirm correct keys are being used
inserted in Start Control
Unit
Non-default key inserted
during key programming
Start Control Unit fault
power and ground supplies to start control unit
Incorrect module
and instrument cluster. Check correct modules are
installed (instrument
installed. Re-synchronize ID by re-configuring the
cluster/start control
start control unit as a new module. Check CAN
unit)
network for interference/EMC related issues
Error during or following
the write target SID
routine
Noise/EMC related issues
LIN fault
Key fault
cluster. Check power and ground supplies to start
control unit and instrument cluster. Confirm
Error occurred during
correct key operation. Re-run key programming
key programming

LIN fault
Key fault
cluster. Check ignition, power and ground supplies
to start control unit and instrument cluster.
Another key in close
Confirm correct key operation. Confirm single key
proximity
Attempted to
B1B0187
Key transponder missing message
B1B3305
Target I.D. transfer system programming

failures
B1B3362
Target I.D. transfer signal compare failure
B1B3364
Target I.D. transfer signal plausibility failure
B1B3387
Target I.D. transfer missing message
B1C2597
Pedal Motor Relay Component or system

operation obstructed or
blocked
B1C2612 Pedal Motor Feedback
Circuit - circuit short to
battery
programme a non
default key
IPK Cold initialisation
whilst in Ignition On
state, without key being
present in the Start
Control Unit
Race condition caused
by closing driver door
and pressing start
button within a small
time window
Passive Key search
function from last door
closed and key inserted
in the Start Control Unit
LIN fault
operation. Ensure new keys are from a known

good source. Check for intermittent power and
ground at instrument cluster. Design condition advise customer of correct starting sequence.
Design condition - determine customer
transponder key usage

LIN circuit between start control unit and
supplies to start control unit and instrument
cluster
CAN fault
network between Engine Control Module and
fault
instrument cluster. Check ignition, power and
Instrument cluster fault grounds to Engine Control Module and instrument
cluster. Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the
or instrument cluster
instrument cluster as a new module
incorrectly configured
CAN fault
Refer to electrical wiring diagrams check CAN
fault
Incorrect module
cluster. Check correct Engine Control Module and
installed (Engine Control instrument cluster installed. Re-synchronise ID by
Module/instrument
re-configuring the instrument cluster as a new
cluster)
module. Check CAN network for interference/EMC
Synchronisation error
related issues
CAN fault
fault
cluster. Check steering column lock operation.
status incomplete
Design condition - advise customer of correct start
Race condition caused
sequence
by closing driver door
and pressing start
button within a small
time window
CAN fault
fault
Low battery voltage
cluster. Check battery is in fully charged and
manual
Pedal motion fault
Check mechanical pedal mechanisms are not
obstructed or blocked. Unblock or remove
obstruction. Clear DTC and retest system
Motor fault
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check motor

feedback circuit for short to power. Repair wiring
harness or connectors as required. Clear DTC and
retest system
B1C2614
Pedal Motor Feedback

Circuit - circuit open or
short to ground
B1C3277
Steering column tilt

solenoid - Commanded
B1C3294

solenoid - Unexpected
operation
B1C3312

feedback signal - Circuit
shorted to battery
B1C3314
feedback signal - Circuit
short to ground or open
B1C3477
Steering column
telescope solenoid Commanded position not
reachable
B1C3494
Steering column
telescope solenoid Unexpected operation
B1C3512
Steering column
telescope feedback signal
- Circuit shorted to
battery
B1C3514
Steering column
telescope feedback signal
- Circuit short to ground
or open
B1C3611
Steering column
tilt/telescope switch Circuit short to ground
B1C4811
Flash to pass switch Circuit short to ground
B1C4815
Flash to pass switch Circuit short to battery or

open
B1C5311 Front wiper intermittent

data - Circuit short to
ground
B1C5315 Front wiper intermittent
data - Circuit short to
battery or open
B1D3611
Turn indicator switch Circuit short to ground
B1D3615
Turn indicator switch Circuit short to battery or

open

Motor fault
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check motor

feedback circuit for short to ground or open.
Repair wiring harness or connectors as required.
Clear DTC and retest system
Tilt motion mechanical
Check mechanical functions of column and
fault
solenoid pin. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
and check tilt solenoid and switch circuits for open
Switch fault
circuit, short to power or ground. Repair harness
or replace switch as required. Clear DTC and retest
system
Tilt motion mechanical
fault
and check tilt solenoid and switch circuits for open
Switch fault
circuit, short to power or ground. Repair harness
or replace switch as required. Clear DTC and retest
system
Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check tilt
feedback circuits for short to power. Repair
harness as required. Clear DTC and retest system
Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check tilt
feedback circuits for short to ground or open
circuit. Repair harness as required. Clear DTC and
retest system
Telescope motion
mechanical fault
and check telescope solenoid and switch circuits
Solenoid fault
for open circuit, short to power or ground. Repair
Switch fault
harness or replace switch or solenoid as required.
Telescope motion
mechanical fault
and check telescope solenoid and switch circuits
Solenoid fault
for open circuit, short to power or ground. Repair
Switch fault
harness or replace switch or solenoid as required.
telescope feedback circuits for short to power.
Repair harness as required, clear DTC and retest
system
telescope feedback circuits for short to ground or
open circuit. Repair harness as required, clear DTC
and retest system
Switch fault
switch circuit for short to ground. Repair the
harness or replace the switch as required. Clear
the DTC and retest the system
Switch fault
switch circuit for short to ground. Repair the
Switch fault
switch circuit for short to power or open circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the switch as
required. Clear the DTC and retest the system
Switch fault
switch intermittent data circuit for short to ground.
Repair the harness or replace the switch as
Switch fault
switch intermittent data circuit for short to power
or open circuit. Repair the harness or replace the
switch as required. Clear the DTC and retest the
system
Switch fault
turn switch circuits for short to ground. Repair the
Switch fault
turn switch circuits for short to power or open
circuit. Repair the harness or replace the switch as
B1D3711 Wiper switch connection

circuit - Circuit short to
ground

Switch fault
B1D3715 Wiper switch connection

battery or open

Switch fault
C004A11 Brake Lining Wear Sensor

- Circuit Short to ground

Brake linings sensor
fault
C004A15 Brake Lining Wear Sensor
- Circuit Short to battery
or open
C111064
Power steering
calibration data - Signal

Brake linings sensor
fault
Invalid Variable
Assistance Power
Steering calibration
loaded
Variable Assistance
Power Steering actuator
fault
P063511
Power steering control

ground
P063512

battery

Variable Assistance

circuit - Circuit open

Variable Assistance
P063513

fault

fault
P063522
P063544

circuit - Signal amplitude
> maximum

Internal fault within

circuit - data memory
failure
Internal Fault within
U000188
High speed CAN

communication Bus - bus
off
U001088
Medium speed CAN
communication Bus - bus
off
U010000 Lost communication with
ECM/PCM A - Missing
message
TCM - Missing message

Gear Shift Module Missing message
instrument cluster
instrument cluster
module
Break in connection to
HS CAN bus
Break in connection to
MS CAN bus
Loss of CAN
communication with
Loss of CAN
communication with
Module
Loss of CAN
communication with
Transmission Shift
Module

wiper switch connection circuits for short to
ground. Repair the harness or replace the switch
as required. Clear the DTC and retest the system
wiper switch connection circuits for short to power
or open circuit. Repair the harness or replace the
switch as required. Clear the DTC and retest the
system
Refer to electrical wiring diagrams. Check brake
linings and wear sensing circuit for short to
ground. Rectify any wiring harness faults and clear
the DTC. retest the system to confirm repair
Refer to electrical wiring diagrams. Check brake
linings and wear sensing circuit for short to power
or open circuit. Rectify any wiring harness faults
and clear the DTC. retest the system to confirm
repair
system, re-configure the instrument cluster as
new, reload Variable Assistance Power Steering
calibration data.
the power steering control circuits for short to
ground. Repair the harness or replace the actuator
to confirm correct operation
the power steering control circuits for short to
power. Repair the harness or replace the actuator
to confirm correct operation
the power steering control circuits for open circuit.
Repair the harness or replace the actuator as
required. Clear the DTC and retest the system to
confirm correct operation
the power steering actuator control circuits for
short to power, short to ground, open circuit.
Check for power and ground supply faults to
instrument cluster. Check CAN network integrity.
Repair any faults found, clear DTC and retest
system. If fault resets suspect instrument cluster,
refer to note above DTC table regarding replacing
a module/components which may be covered by
manufacturers warranty
Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check for
intermittent faults on power and ground supplies.
If no faults found suspect instrument cluster, refer
to note above DTC table regarding replacing a
module/components which may be covered by
manufacturers warranty
Check network integrity. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check HS CAN circuits
Check network integrity. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check MS CAN circuits
Check Engine Control Module for related DTCs.
Check network integrity. Refer to electrical wiring
diagrams and check the CAN circuits
Check Transmission Control Module for related
DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Check network
integrity. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and
check the CAN circuits, check power and ground
supplies to transmission control module
Check Transmission Shift Module for related DTCs
and refer to DTC Index. Check network integrity.
CAN circuits, check power and ground supplies to
the transmission shift module

cruise control module missing message
Loss of CAN
communication with
speed control module

(ABS) control module
Loss of CAN
communication with
Anti-lock Braking
System control module

Passenger Seat Module
(PSM) - missing message
with Passenger Seat

Module

Tire Pressure Monitor
Module - missing
message
Loss of CAN
communication with tire
pressure monitor
module

Park Brake control
module - missing
message
Loss of CAN
communication with the
park brake control
module

suspension control
module B - missing
message

Body Control Module Missing message
Body Control Module B missing message
Loss of CAN
communication with
loss of CAN
communication with

- missing message
Loss of CAN
communication with
Restraints Control
Module
with adaptive damping

control module.

Information Centre A Missing message

HVAC control module missing message
loss of CAN
communication with
Climate Control Module

Door Control Module A Missing message
Loss of CAN
communications with
Driver's door control
module

Door Control Module B Missing message
Loss of CAN
communications with
passenger door control
module

folding Top control
module - Missing
message
Loss of CAN
communication with
convertible roof control
module
U020800 Lost communication With

Seat Control Module A Missing message
Loss of CAN
communication with
driver's seat control
module
with infotainment control

module
Check speed control module for related DTCs and

refer to the DTC index. Check network integrity.
CAN circuits, check power and ground supplies to
the speed control module
Check Anti-lock Braking System module for related
supplies to the anti-lock braking system control
module
Check Passenger Seat Module for DTCs and refer
to DTC Index. Check network integrity. Refer to
electrical wiring diagrams and check the CAN
circuits, check power and ground supplies to the
passenger seat module
Check tire pressure monitor module for related
DTCs and refer to the DTC index. Check network
integrity. Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Check park brake control module for related DTCs
and refer to the DTC index. Check network
supplies to the park brake control module
Check adaptive damping control module for DTCs
and refer to DTC Index. Refer to electrical wiring
diagrams and check the CAN circuits, check power
and ground supplies to the adaptive damping
control module
Check Central Junction Box for DTCs and refer to
DTC Index
Check Auxiliary junction box for DTCs and refer to
the DTC index. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
and check the CAN circuits, check power and
ground supplies to the Auxiliary junction box
Check Restraints Control Module for related DTCs
and refer to the DTC index. Check network
supplies to the restraints control module
Check information and entertainment module for
supplies to the communication and infotainment
control module
Check Climate Control Module for DTCs and refer
climate control module
Check Drivers Door Module for DTCs and refer to
DTC Index. Check network integrity. Refer to
drivers door control module
Check Passenger Door Module for DTCs and refer
passenger door control module
Check convertible roof control module for related
DTCs and refer to the DTC index. Check network
supplies to the convertible roof control module
Check Drivers Seat Module for DTCs and refer to
DTC Index. Check network integrity. Refer to
drivers seat control module

Remote Function
Actuation - Missing
message
Lost CAN communication Check Remote Keyless Entry module for DTCs and

headlamp Control Module
A - Missing message
Lost CAN communication
with keyless vehicle

module
with Active Front

Lighting system control
module

Impact Classification
System Module - Missing
message
loss of CAN
communication with
Pedestrian Protection
System module

Front Controls Interface
Module A - Missing
message
U030000 Internal control module
Loss of CAN
communication with
integrated control panel
car configuration data is

instrument cluster
U200411
Auxiliary switch pack Circuit short to ground

Switch pack fault
U200415
Auxiliary switch pack Circuit short to power or

open

Switch pack fault
Control module Calibration/parameter

memory failure
U300049 Control module - Internal
electronic failure
Internal instrument
U300046
U300055
Control module - not

configured
U300087 Control module - Missing

message
U300281
data received
U300316 Battery voltage - circuit

U300317 Battery voltage - Circuit
U300362 Battery voltage - Signal
Compare Failure
refer to DTC Index. Check network integrity. Refer

to electrical wiring diagrams and check the CAN
keyless vehicle module
Check lighting control module for DTCs and refer
to DTC Index. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
ground supplies to the adaptive front lighting
control module
Check Pedestrian Protection system module for
DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Refer to electrical
wiring diagrams and check the CAN circuits, check
power and ground supplies to the pedestrian
protection system module
Check Integrated Control Panel for DTCs and refer
to DTC Index. Refer to electrical wiring diagrams
ground supplies to the integrated control panel
Re-configure the Auxiliary Junction Box using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear
DTCs and re-test. If DTC still logged, suspect the
instrument cluster. Refer to the new module
Auxiliary switch signal circuit short to ground.
Repair wiring harness or replace switch pack as
Auxiliary switch signal circuit short to ground.
Repair wiring harness or replace switch pack as
Install a new instrument cluster. Refer to the new
Index
Install a new instrument cluster, refer to the new
Index
cluster fault - corrupt

non-volatile memory
Internal instrument
cluster fault ROM/EEPROM checksum
failure
Incorrect car
configuration data
received
DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains suspect the
instrument cluster, refer to the new module
Car configuration
parameter not received manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
within 25s time period
instrument cluster for DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index. Check CAN network integrity using the
Vehicle/component mis- Install original module, check for DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC Index
being transmitted,
module previously
Circuit voltage below 9 Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
volts threshold for 1 battery care manual. Check battery state of charge
second
and starting/charging system performance
Circuit voltage above 16 Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
volts threshold for 1 battery care manual. Check battery state of charge
second
Signal compare failure Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
battery care manual. Check battery state of charge
and starting/charging system performance. Check
logic power supply circuit from Central Junction
Box to Instrument Cluster

Removal
1.
NOTE: Make sure all smart keys are available before a new
instrument cluster is installed.
If a new instrument cluster is being installed, all smart keys
must be cleared from the passive anti-theft system (PATS),
using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment prior to the
instrument cluster removal.
2.
Remove the instrument panel driver's side

3.

Remove the instrument cluster surround.
4.
Remove the instrument cluster.

Raise the steering column finisher for
access to the lower screws.
Installation
1.
Install the instrument cluster.

Connect and secure the electrical connectors.
Install the screws.
2.
Install the instrument cluster surround.

Install the screws.
3.
Install the instrument panel driver's side reinforcement trim

panel.
4.
NOTE: Make sure all smart keys are available before the new
instrument cluster is installed.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, programme
the new instrument cluster and reprogram all of the smart keys
to the vehicle.
Horn Torque Specifications
Item
Horn - stud
Nm
25
lb-ft
18
lb-in
-
Horn - Horn
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Horns
Horn switch
Horn relay and fuse (15A)
INTRODUCTION
The vehicle horns are operated by pressing the center of the steering wheel. Two horns are fitted to the vehicle; a high tone
horn and a low tone horn. Voltage supply to the horns is controlled by the horn relay, which is energized when the horn
switch is pressed.
The horn relay is located in the power distribution box and when energized provides a supply to both horns simultaneously.
Circuit protection is provided by fuse 10 (15A), which is also located in the power distribution box.
The horns are mounted on a bracket, which is secured to the center of the front bumper beam, and are also used by the
active anti-theft system.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
175 A megafuse
Horn relay
Horns
Horn switch
Clockspring
Horn - Horn
1.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Wiring Harness
Horn(s)
Relay
Horn switch
Clockspring
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Jaguar Approved Diagnostic System.
Horn - Horn V8 5.0L Petrol

Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.
Torque: 25 Nm
Installation
1.
Horn - Horn V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

Removal
1.

2.
3.
Refer to: Power Steering Fluid Cooler - Vehicles With: Supercharger

(211-02 Power Steering, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
Torque: 25 Nm
Installation
1.
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center

COMPONENT LOCATION
INTRODUCTION
The message center is a LCD (liquid crystal display) located in a central position in the instrument cluster.
The message center displays system information, vehicle status and trip computer information to the driver. The message
center is controlled by the instrument cluster and displays system information using CAN (controller area network) and hard
wired signals received from other vehicle system control modules and sensors.
MESSAGE CENTER
The message center LCD display has a viewable area of 240 pixels horizontal and 315 pixels vertical. It is divided into five
information display zones as follows, starting from the top:
Transmission position
Set speed
Warning/Message display
Odometer/Trip computer information/engine oil level
Fuel level.
The message center is active at all times when the ignition is on and can also be active when the ignition is off, dependant
on the information to be displayed.
The message center LCD is displayed at its full brightness when the ignition is on and the exterior lights are off. If the
exterior lights have been activated by the AUTO windshield wipers feature, the illumination will remain at full brightness. If
the exterior lights are on in any position other than AUTO, then the LCD will be illuminated at a brightness controlled by the
illumination dimmer which is located in the auxiliary lighting switch.
If more than one message is active, each message is displayed in turn in the order of priority. Once all messages have been
displayed, they are again displayed in turn for 2 seconds each. Warning messages can be displayed when the ignition is in
convenience mode which is the initial ignition state when a door is opened.
Message Priority
Messages are assigned priorities which are defined by the effect on driving safety and functional ability of the vehicle. When
new messages are displayed they may be accompanied by a chime from the instrument cluster sounder.
A new message will be displayed immediately, providing the currently displayed message (if there is one) has been displayed
for at least 4 seconds. A warning indicator will be activated simultaneously with the message being displayed. If more than
one fault warning message is being displayed, the messages will cycle, in priority order, with each message being displayed
for 2 seconds.
INFORMATION DISPLAY
Transmission Display
The transmission display is located in the upper section of the LCD. The transmission position information is sent from the
TCM (transmission control module) and the JaguarDrive selector module in high speed CAN messages to the instrument
cluster.
The transmission has three modes of operation:
Conventional automatic operation (JaguarDrive selector in D (drive) position)
Sport automatic operation (S (sport) selected with JaguarDrive selector)
Manual gear operation (Jaguar sequential shift).
The following table shows the JaguarDrive selector position and the highlighted indication displayed in the transmission
display.
Selector Position
P (park)
P
R (reverse)
R
N (neutral)
N
D (drive)
D
S (sport)
DS
The following table shows the Jaguar sequential shift display. Selections are made using the steering wheel mounted paddle
switches.
Jaguar Sequential Shift Gear Selection
First
1
Second
2
Third
3
Fourth
4
Fifth
5
Sixth
6
The TCM may inhibit a requested up or down shift if the requested gear is outside the normal engine speed operating range.
If this occurs, the transmission display will briefly display the gear requested by the driver, but will then change to display
the actual gear selection.
Speed Control and Set Speed Displays

The following table shows the possible messages which can be displayed, other visual or audible warnings and a description
of the message.
Message
OVERLIMIT
XXX MPH
(km/h)
Other Warnings
Reason
Action
Displayed when vehicle speed exceeds Reduce vehicle speed to ASL set
indicator illuminated at +4.8 the ASL set speed.
limit.
km/h (+3 mph) above limit.
Amber ASL warning
indicator flashing at +24
km/h (+15 mph) above
limit.
Amber ASL warning
indicator flashing and chime
emitted at +24 km/h (+15
mph) for a certain time
period.
Displayed for 4 seconds when driver None.
deselects ASL.
Displays new speed setting for the
None.
ASL.
Amber ASL warning
LIMITER
CANCELLED
LIMITER SET
XXX MPH
(km/h)
LIMITER
STANDBY
LIMITER NOT
AVAILABLE
TOO FAST TO
RESUME
None.
CRUISE
CANCELLED
None.
CRUISE
OVERRIDE
None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
GAP 1 / 2 / 3 / None.
4
SETSPEED XXX None.

MPH (km/h)
DRIVER
None.
INTERVENE
CRUISE NOT None.

AVAILABLE
RADAR
SENSOR
BLOCKED
FORWARD
ALERT OFF
None.
FORWARD
ALERT
None.
None.
Displayed when ASL is activated and

speed control is selected.
Displayed when ECM (engine control
module) has detected a fault.
Displayed when 'Resume' switch is
pressed but vehicle speed is 30 km/h
(18 mph) above the set speed.
Driver has cancelled speed control or
the brake pedal has been pressed.
None.
Use a Jaguar approved diagnostic
system to diagnose fault.
Reduce vehicle speed to set
speed then press 'Resume'
switch.
Re-activate the speed control
system or press the 'Resume'
switch on the steering wheel.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise
braking will be disabled when
this message is displayed.
Driver has pressed the accelerator

pedal, overriding the speed control
system. Message will go off when
accelerator pedal is released and
speed control is active.
Displays the current set or default
If required, adjust distance using
adaptive speed control distance.
the steering wheel switches.
Displayed along with a vehicle graphic
in the LCD. Chevrons (>) denote gap
figure selected
Displays the new speed input for the None.
speed control.
Immediate action required by the
Apply brakes if required.
driver to apply the brakes if required.
May also be displayed if
speed control system
loses CAN messages when
active.
Speed control cannot be engaged.
A fault has occurred in the speed
control system. Diagnose fault
using a Jaguar approved
diagnostic system.
The adaptive speed control radar
Remove obstruction or clean the
sensor has become dirty or
radar sensor.
obstructed.
Forward alert has been switched off. None.
No warning will be given for objects in
the vehicle's forward direction.
Forward alert has been switched on or None.
the gap settings have changed.
Warning/Message Display
Warning and information messages are displayed in the central area of the LCD. When no messages are required, an
analogue clock is present on the display.
The message display language can be changed by the driver using a selection menu on the TSD (touch screen display).
The following table shows the possible messages which can be displayed, other visual or audible warnings and a description
of the message.
Message
DSC ON
Other Warnings
flashes for a short time.
DSC OFF

illuminated.
Reason
Displayed for a short time when the
DSC switch is operated to activate the
DSC system.
DSC switch is operated to de-activate
Action
None.
None.
TRAC DSC

illuminated.
DSC NOT
AVAILABLE

illuminated.
BRAKE FLUID
LOW
Brake warning
indicator
illuminated.
Red warning
triangle illuminated
in LCD.
ABS FAULT
ABS warning
indicator
illuminated.
Amber warning
in LCD.
BRAKE ASSIST Amber warning triangle
FAULT
illuminated in LCD.
the DSC system.

DSC switch is operated to activate the
TRAC DSC system.
A fault is present in the DSC system.
Brake fluid level has become low and

activated low level switch.
A fault is present in the ABS system.

Braking system will operate but ABS
will not be available.
None.
A fault has occurred in the DSC

system. Interrogate ABS (anti-lock
brake system) module for faults and
diagnose fault using a Jaguar
Investigate fluid loss and check brake
system for leaks. Repair system as
required and replenish brake fluid
reservoir.
A fault has occurred in the ABS

system. Interrogate ABS module for
faults and diagnose fault using a
A fault is present in the braking system A fault has occurred in the brake
preventing brake assist operation.
assist system. Interrogate ABS
Braking system will operate but brake module for faults and diagnose fault
using a Jaguar approved diagnostic
assist will not be available and
increased effort on the brake pedal may system.
be required.
EBD FAULT
Red warning triangle
A fault is present in the braking system A fault has occurred in the EBD
illuminated in LCD.
preventing EBD (electronic brake force system. Interrogate ABS module for
distribution) operation. Braking system faults and diagnose fault using a
will operate but EBD will not be
available.
PARK BRAKE
None
Parking brake has been applied when
None.
APPLIED
the vehicle moving at a speed 5 km/h
(3 mph) or above.
PARK BRAKE
Brake warning
A fault is present in the parking brake A fault has occurred in the parking
FAULT
indicator
system.
brake system. Interrogate the parking
brake module for faults and diagnose
illuminated.
Red warning
system.
in LCD.
APPLY FOOT AND Amber warning triangle
The battery has been disconnected or Apply foot brake and parking brake to
PARK BRAKE
illuminated in LCD.
power supply interrupted to the parking reset the parking brake module.
brake module.
CANNOT APPLY
Brake warning
A fault is present in the parking brake A fault has occurred in the parking
indicator flashing. system and the parking brake cannot
brake system. Interrogate the parking
PARK BRAKE
Red warning
be applied.
brake module for faults and diagnose
in LCD.
system.
NOTE: In certain
markets the
brake warning
indicator does
not flash.
CHECK TYRE
TPMS (tire
A tire pressure has decreased to below Check tires for punctures and reinflate to correct pressures.
PRESSURE
pressure
the warning threshold.
monitoring system)
warning indicator
illuminated.
Vehicle graphic
displaying tire
location.
TYRE NOT
TPMS warning
One or more tire pressure
Check for local RF
MONITORED
indicator
sensors have developed a fault.
interference.
illuminated.
A temporary spare wheel or a
A wheel has been fitted
Vehicle graphic
wheel without a sensor has
without a TPMS sensor fitted
displaying tire
been fitted at the displayed
(space saver spare wheel).
location.
position.
TPMS sensor has developed a
An unapproved accessory may
fault or the battery voltage is
be interfering with the TPMS.
low.
A fault has occurred in the
TPMS. Interrogate the TPMS
module for faults and diagnose
using a Jaguar approved
diagnostic system.
CHECK ALL TYRE
TPMS warning
One or more tire pressures have
Check tires for punctures and
PRESSURES
indicator
decreased to below the warning
re-inflate to correct pressures.
illuminated.
threshold.
Message may be displayed
Amber warning
when TPMS is learning position
of a new sensor.
in LCD.
Vehicle graphic
displaying tire
location.
TYRE PRESSURE
TPMS warning
Wheels and tires without
A fault has occurred in the TPMS.
SYSTEM FAULT
indicator
sensors have been fitted to the Interrogate the TPMS module for
illuminated.
vehicle.
faults and diagnose using a Jaguar
Amber warning
TPMS sensors have become
defective.
in LCD.
A fault is present in the TPMS
system and the tire pressures
cannot be monitored.
TYRE PRESSURE
TPMS warning
TPMS has detected current tire
Check tire pressures and inflate to the
LOW FOR SPEED
indicator
pressures are too low for sustained high correct pressures if necessary.
illuminated.
speed driving
Amber warning
in LCD.
TYRE PRESSURE
TPMS warning
Wheels and tires without
A fault has occurred in the TPMS.
SYSTEM FAULT
indicator
sensors have been fitted to the Interrogate the TPMS module for
illuminated.
vehicle.
Amber warning
TPMS sensors have become
defective.
in LCD.
A fault is present in the TPMS
system and the tire pressures
cannot be monitored.
ENGINE
Engine coolant temperature has
Stop vehicle and allow engine
exceeded threshold for normal engine
to idle for 5 minutes. Switch
OVERHEATING illuminated in LCD at
temperatures of 119.4C operation.
off engine and allow to stand
(247F) or above.
for not less than 10 minutes.
Check coolant level.
If message re-appears,
investigate coolant system for
leakage.
RESTRICTED
Red or amber warning
A fault has occurred which has reduced Investigate cause of engine power
PERFORMANCE triangle illuminated in LCD engine power output.
loss. Interrogate control modules for
depending on nature of
power loss.
ENGINE SYSTEMS
MIL (malfunction
A fault has occurred in the
Investigate cause of fault.
FAULT
indicator lamp)
engine management system or,
Interrogate ECM and TCM for
illuminated for
if the MIL is illuminated, an
faults and diagnose using a
certain faults.
emissions related fault is
Jaguar approved diagnostic
Red or amber
present which has been
system.
warning triangle
detected by the On-Board
Check start/stop switch for
illuminated in LCD.
Diagnostic systems in the ECM
correct operation or short
and TCM.
circuits.
A fault has occurred with the
start/stop switch.
CHECK FUEL
(NAS only)
Tank Leakage Detection system has
Check fuel filler cap to ensure is it
FILLER CAP
Red warning
detected fuel filler cap has not been
correctly installed and secure or check
triangle illuminated correctly installed or the system has a the fuel system for leakage.
in LCD.
leak.
ENGINE
A fault has occurred in the engine
Investigate cause of engine
TEMPERATURE illuminated LCD.
management system and the engine
temperature failure. Interrogate ECM
INDICATION
temperature signal is no longer being
for faults and diagnose using a Jaguar
FAULT
received.
GEARBOX FAULT Battery symbol and amber TCM has detected a fault in the
Investigate transmission fault.
warning triangle
transmission. Transmission may default Interrogate TCM and diagnose fault
illuminated in LCD.
to 'limp home' mode and only allow
limited operation of forward gears and system.
reverse.
BATTERY NOT Red warning triangle
Charge output from generator not
Investigate cause of generator failure.
CHARGING
illuminated in LCD.
detected by ECM.
OVER 120 km/h
(Gulf States only) Vehicle has exceeded the preset 120
Reduce vehicle speed.
Red text
km/h speed value.
illuminated in LCD.
COOLANT LEVEL Red warning triangle
Coolant level in expansion tank has
Stop vehicle and allow engine
LOW
illuminated in LCD.
fallen below minimum level.
to idle for 5 minutes. Switch
BRAKE PADS
LOW
SERVICE
REQUIRED IN
XXXX MILES/km
Amber warning triangle

illuminated LCD.
illuminated LCD.
SERVICE
REQUIRED
RESETTING
SERVICE MODE
SERVICE MODE
RESET
WINTER MODE
CONFIRMED
DYNAMIC MODE
CONFIRMED
MODE CHANGE
IN PROGRESS

illuminated LCD.
illuminated LCD.
illuminated LCD.
Snow mode symbol
illuminated LCD.
Dynamic mode symbol
illuminated LCD.
None or snow mode
symbol illuminated or
dynamic mode symbol
illuminated LCDLCD
RECOMMEND None or dynamic mode
WINTER MODE symbol illuminated LCD
FOR CONDITIONS
WINTER MODE None.
OFF
DYNAMIC MODE None.
OFF
WINTER MODE Amber warning triangle
FAULT
illuminated LCD.
DYNAMIC MODE Amber warning triangle

FAULT
illuminated LCD.
SPECIAL MODES Amber warning triangle

NOT AVAILABLE illuminated LCD.
FUEL LEVEL LOW Amber warning triangle

illuminated LCD.
FUEL PUMP
SYSTEM FAULT illuminated LCD.
WASHER FLUID Amber warning triangle
LOW
illuminated LCD.
DOOR OPEN
Red text is illuminated in
LCD and vehicle view
showing open luggage
compartment lid is
displayed.
BOOT OPEN
Red text is illuminated in
showing open door
location is displayed.
BONNET OPEN Red text is illuminated in
Brake pads have reached the service

limit.
If the vehicle is within 3,200 kilometers
(1,988 miles) of a service, the message
center will display this message. The
displayed distance will decrease in
increments of 50 km (31 miles).
This is displayed if the distance to next
service drops below 1 km (0.6 miles).
Displayed during the service reset
procedure.
Displayed when the service rest
procedure has been successful.
Displayed when snow mode has been
selected.
Displayed when dynamic mode has
been selected.
Displayed when the driver has selected
an alternative JaguarDrive mode.
off engine and allow to stand

for not less than 10 minutes.
Check coolant level and
replenish expansion tank to
maximum level.
If message re-appears,
investigate coolant system for
leakage.
Replace brake pads.
None.
Vehicle requires service.

None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
Displayed when the JaguarDrive senses Select winter mode.

excessive wheel slip.
Confirmation that winter mode has
been deselected.
Confirmation that dynamic mode has
been deselected.
A sub-system fault is present and the
driver attempts to select a different
JaguarDrive control mode. The
message 'WINTER MODE FAULT' can
also in very rare circumstances be
generated by a fault in the JaguarDrive
control module.
message 'DYNAMIC MODE FAULT' can
also, in very rare circumstances, be
generated by a fault in the JaguarDrive
control module.
message 'SPECIAL MODES NOT
AVAILABLE' can also in very rare
circumstances be generated by a fault
in the JaguarDrive control module.
Fuel level in fuel tank has fallen below
low fuel warning limit.
Fuel pump or FPDM (fuel pump driver
module) fault has occurred.
Fluid level has fallen below low level
switch in windshield washer reservoir.
Door is open or incorrectly closed.
None.
None.
Investigate cause of message.
Interrogate sub-system control
modules for faults and diagnose using
a Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
If no sub-system fault is found,
investigate JaguarDrive control
module.
module.
module.
Replenish fuel tank.
Investigate cause of fault. Interrogate
ECM for faults and diagnose using a
Replenish reservoir.
Close open door.
Luggage compartment lid is open or

incorrectly closed.
Close open luggage compartment lid.
Hood is open or incorrectly closed.
Close open hood.
www.JagDocs.com
showing open door

location is displayed.
COLUMN ADJUST None.
COLUMN ADJUST None.

AUTO
MEMORY 1 / 2 / 3 None.
SETTINGS
RECALLED
MEMORY 1 / 2 / 3 None.
SETTINGS SAVED
SEAT BELT
None.
MINDER
CHECK
PEDESTRIAN
SYSTEM

illuminated in LCD.
INERTIA SWITCH Amber warning triangle

TRIPPED
illuminated LCD.
VALET MODE
None.
VEHICLE ARMED None.

SMART KEY NOT Red warning triangle
FOUND PLEASE illuminated in LCD.
INSERT IN SLOT
CHECK SMART None.

KEY
REMOVE SMART None.
KEY
SMART KEY
BATTERY LOW
None.
PRESS BRAKE None.

WHEN STARTING
GEARBOX NOT IN None.
PARK
STEERING
COLUMN LOCKED illuminated in LCD.
IGNITION ON

illuminated in LCD.
ENGINE STOP
BUTTON
PRESSED

illuminated in LCD.
LIGHTS ON
LIGHTS OFF

illuminated LCD.
None.
AUTOLAMP DELAY None.

OFF
XX:XX
Manual column adjust has been

None.
selected on steering column adjustment
switch.
Automatic column adjust has been
None.
selected on steering column adjustment
switch.
Memory button has been pressed to
None.
recall memory positions for seat,
steering column and mirrors.
Memory has been saved for one of the None.
memory button positions.
Engine has been started and driver
Fasten seat belt(s).
and/or front passenger seat belt has
not been fastened.
A fault has occurred with the pedestrian Investigate cause of fault. Interrogate
protection system or the system has
pedestrian protection system control
activated.
module for faults and diagnose using
Message appears when the crash status RCM can be rest with an ignition
signal from the RCM (restraints control on/off cycle. If fault has occurred,
module) changes to crash detected or a then investigate cause of fault and
fault in the restraints system prevents interrogate the RCM for faults and
the message from being transmitted.
diagnose using a Jaguar approved
diagnostic system.
Confirmation that valet mode has been None.
entered.
Confirmation that alarm and
None.
immobilization has been achieved.
Smart key has not been detected by
Smart key not present in vehicle. May
the passive system inside the vehicle. be caused by a flat smart key battery.
Replace internal battery in smart key.
May also be due to a communications
problem.
The smart key detected is not the
Use the correct smart key coded to
correct smart key for the vehicle.
the vehicle.
Smart key is in the start control module Remove smart key from the start
and has been recognized by the passive control module.
start system.
Battery voltage in smart key is
Replace smart key internal battery.
becoming low, resulting in a decrease
in effective range of the smart key
transmitter.
The stop/start button has been pressed To start engine, press brake pedal,
without the brake pedal depressed. This then press stop/start button.
will turn on the ignition power mode 6.
The transmission is not in the 'park'
Put transmission in the park position.
position. Engine starting will be
prohibited until 'park' is selected.
Fault has occurred preventing the
Press the stop/start button to return
steering column lock from unlocking.
to accessory mode 4. If steering
This will also prevent the engine from column is still locked, investigate
cause of fault and interrogate the CJB
starting.
(central junction box) for faults and
diagnose using a Jaguar approved
diagnostic system.
Stop/start button has been pressed
None.
without the brake pedal depressed.
Ignition is now in power mode 6.
Engine stop button has been pressed
Do not stop engine when vehicle is
when the vehicle is moving. Engine will moving unless necessary.
not be switched off until button is
pressed quickly for a second time.
Side lamps or headlamps are on and
Switch off headlamps to avoid
the driver's door has been opened.
excessive drain on battery.
Sunload/Light sensor detects low light Turn exterior lights on.
conditions and exterior lights are not in
AUTO mode.
Autolamp delay feature has been
None.
deactivated by moving light control
switch from the auto position.
Lighting control switch has been moved None.
to one of the 4 autolamp delay
HOOD OUT OF
POSITION

illuminated in LCD.
LUGGAGE COVER
OUT OF
POSITION
FORWARD ALERT
SENSOR
BLOCKED
FORWARD ALERT
FAULT

illuminated in LCD.
positions. Message displays delay timer

period selected.
Autolamp delay is selected on the light
control switch and the driver has
switched off ignition and opened
driver's door initiating the autolamp
delay.
The tail lamp LED (light emitting
diode)'s are not functioning correctly.
Location shown on vehicle image.
The brake lamp LED's are not
functioning correctly. Location shown
on displayed vehicle image.
A turn signal indicator bulb has failed.
Location is shown on displayed vehicle
image.
Convertible top not latched correctly.
System not seeing correct switch state
for header latch or tonneau latch
switches.
Finger removed from switch mid cycle
or roof unable to complete cycle due to
a switch or wiring fault.
Luggage separator not fixed in luggage
compartment to allow roof operation.

illuminated in LCD.
Forward collision warning radar

blocked.

illuminated in LCD.
Forward collision warning system fault. Investigate cause of message.

Interrogate system control modules
Forward collision warning system fault. Investigate cause of message.
Adaptive dynamics system fault.
Suspension will default to the hardest Interrogate system control modules
setting.
Electronic differential system not
available.
Electronic differential system fault.
Engine oil level low.
Top up oil level.
TAIL LAMP
FAILURE
None.
BRAKE LAMP
FAILURE
None.
INDICATOR LAMP None.

FAILURE
HOOD NOT
LATCHED

illuminated in LCD.
FORWARD ALERT Amber warning triangle

UNAVAILABLE illuminated in LCD.
ADAPTIVE
DYNAMICS FAULT illuminated in LCD.
E_DIFF NOT
AVAILABLE

illuminated in LCD.
E_DIFF FAULT

illuminated in LCD.
ENGINE OIL LOW Amber warning triangle

illuminated in LCD.
ENGINE OIL
HIGH
illuminated in LCD.
ENGINE OIL
CRITICALLY LOW illuminated in LCD.
ENGINE OIL
LEVEL MONITOR illuminated in LCD.
SYSTEM FAULT
Engine oil level too high.

Engine oil level very low.
Engine oil level monitoring system
fault.
None. Message will extinguish once

the selected delay timer has switched
off the headlamps.
Correct fault in rear lamp assembly,

RJB (rear junction box) or wiring.
Correct fault in rear lamp assembly,
RJB or wiring.
Replace failed turn signal indicator
bulb.
Correct fault in switches, wiring or
tonneau latch setting.
Reset roof, if fault persists identify

and resolve.
Fit luggage separator in fully deployed
position.
Remove obstruction or clean radar
sensor.
Reduce oil to recommended level

before running engine again.
Top up oil level.
Odometer Display
The odometer displays the total distance which the vehicle has traveled. This is calculated by the instrument cluster using
wheel speed signals from the ABS module.
The odometer can show six characters and distances up to 999,999 miles or kilometers. The total distance traveled is stored
in a EPROM (erasable programmable read only memory) and the RAM (random access memory). This ensures that the total
distance is not lost if the battery is disconnected.
The odometer value is passed to other vehicle system modules on the medium speed and high speed CAN bus. This is used
to record the total vehicle mileage for diagnostic purposes and when storing DTC (diagnostic trouble code).
Trip Computer Information Display

The instrument cluster contains software which controls the trip computer. The computer allows the driver to access
information for current fuel usage, current journey length, average speed and estimated vehicle range of fuel remaining.
The information is calculated from CAN messages from other vehicle systems, for example wheel speed signals from the ABS
module and fuel injector operating data from the ECM.
A 'Trip' button is located on the end of the LH (left-hand) multifunction switch and allows the driver to access, in sequence,
the available trip information by repeatedly pressing the button. The trip information is displayed in the following order:
Trip distance - the trip distance since the last reset is displayed.
Average speed - the average speed since the last reset is displayed.
Average fuel consumption - the average fuel consumption since the last reset is displayed.
Range - the range is displayed showing the distance which can be traveled until the fuel gage reads empty. If the
range display shows dashes (-), this indicates a failure with one or both of the fuel level sensors.
Engine oil level - the oil level icon and the applicable message from the following table are displayed:
Message
LEVEL OK
ADD X.X L/Q
Meaning
Engine oil level is satisfactory.
Engine oil requires topping up.
Action
None.
Add amount of oil described until
level reads OK.
SEE HANDBOOK Engine oil level is outside the limits for safe operation.
Add or remove oil as appropriate
until level reads OK.
NOT AVAILABLE
If accompanied by the message ENGINE OIL LEVEL
If there is a system fault,
SEE HANDBOOK
MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT in the warning/message display, a
repair as required and
fault with the oil level monitoring system is indicated.
recheck level.
If there is no ENGINE OIL LEVEL MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT
If the engine oil level is
message, the engine oil level is stabilizing.
stabilizing, wait 10 minutes
and then recheck level.
The trip computer has three independent memories; A, B and Auto. Memories A and B can be set independently. The Auto
memory is reset after each ignition cycle and therefore only contains information relating the current journey.
The trip information can also be accessed from the TSD located in the center console. The TSD allows the same information
available with the trip button on the multifunction switch to be displayed on the TSD, with the addition of the option to reset
the values in the A and B memories.
If the battery is disconnected, all trip data in memories A, B and Auto are erased.
Fuel Level Display

The fuel level display is a linear LCD display to show the usable fuel tank contents. The level display is active at all times
when the ignition is on. Low fuel level is displayed as a LOW FUEL LEVEL message and an amber warning triangle in the
message center.
The fuel level is obtained by fuel level sensors in the fuel tank. These are monitored by the auxiliary junction box software
and their output resistance values, corresponding fuel quantity, are transmitted to the instrument cluster on the medium
speed CAN bus. The instrument cluster uses the two level sensor signals to calculate the fuel tank contents. This calculation
takes into account fuel movement in the tank to display a steady fuel quantity in the LCD.
The fuel level information is transmitted on the medium speed and high speed CAN bus for use by other vehicle system
modules.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS
The instrument cluster can generate audible warnings to alert the driver to a displayed message and change of vehicle
operating condition. The audible warning is generated by a sounder located within the instrument cluster.
The audible warnings can be generated for the warnings and are listed in order of priority, with the first being the highest
priority.
Seatbelt reminder
EPB (electronic parking brake) (high pitch)
ACC Driver Intervene 1
Air bag fault
Key in ignition switch
ASL overspeed
ACC Driver Intervene 2
EPB (low pitch)
Vehicle armed (entry delay)
Gear selector not in park
Valet mode
Lights on reminder
Hood operation
PEPS (passive entry / passive start)
Memory set
Turn signal indicators
Seat belt minder.
The audible warnings can take the form of a single chime, a number of chimes or a continuous chime. The audible warnings
are initiated by a CAN message request from the requesting sub-system control module or by the instrument cluster
software.
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR

If the vehicle is within 3,200 kilometers (1,988 miles) of a service, the message center will display 'SERVICE REQUIRED IN
XXXX km or MILES'. The display reduces the 'service required in' readout by increments every 50 kilometers (30 miles). If
this distance drops below 1 km (0.6 miles), the message center will display 'SERVICE REQUIRED'.
NOTE: The message center will display distance to next service in miles on an instrument cluster fitted with a Miles Per Hour
(MPH) speedometer unless the driver has changed the display units on the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
These messages are displayed every time the vehicle enters power mode 6, for 4 seconds after the instrument cluster bulb
check routine has finished.
Reset Procedure
To re-set the service interval indicator, the following process switch presses must each be carried out within 3 seconds:
With the vehicle in power mode 0, (ignition off) press and hold the rear fog lamp switch
Allow the vehicle to enter power mode 6 (Press the start button without a foot on the brake)
Immediately release the rear fog lamp switch
Press and hold the trip computer cycle switch
Press and hold the rear fog lamp switch
Continue to hold the trip computer and rear fog lamp switches
If the process has been successful, the message center will display 'RESETTING SERVICE MODE' and then display
'SERVICE MODE RESET' after 10 seconds
Release both switches and return the vehicle ignition to off, power mode 0.
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center

1.
2.
Mechanical
Fluid level(s)
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Wiring harness
Engine compartment components
Underbody components
Instrument cluster
Door switches
Electronic modules
Boot/bonnet switch
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
Warning Devices - Warning Devices


1.
2.
Mechanical
Door ajar switch(es)
Safety belt buckle and pretensioner
Headlamp switch
Fuel gauge
Inertia switch
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Wiring harness
Switch(es)
Sensor(s)
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
Warning Devices - Low Washer Fluid Warning Indicator Switch

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the RH fender splash shield.

3.
Drain the washer reservoir fluid.

4.
Remove the low washer fluid warning indicator switch.

5.
Remove and discard the seal.
Installation
1.
Install a new seal.
2.
Install the low washer fluid warning indicator switch.

3.

4.
Refill the washer reservoir.
Parking Aid Torque Specifications
Item
Parking aid module - nut
Nm
2
lb-ft
-
lb-in
18
Parking Aid - Parking Aid

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Control switch
Control module
Rear parking aid sensors (4 off)
Front parking aid sensors (4 off)
INTRODUCTION
The parking aid system provides an audible warning to the driver when any obstacles are in the path of the vehicle during a
forward (if front sensors fitted) or reversing manouevre. The purpose of the system is to assist the driver when parking or
maneuvering in restricted space. It is not designed as a crash avoidance system or a replacement for visual interpretation by
the driver.
Audible warnings to the driver are given by the entertainment system speakers. A visual representation is shown on the TSD
(touch screen display).
The control module controls operation of the speakers via the audio head unit. A gateway module is incorporated into the
system to convert medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus messages from the control module into MOST (media
orientated system transport) messages for use by the audio head unit.
For additional information, refer to: Audio System (415-01A Audio Unit, Description and Operation).
If an obstacle is sensed by the rear parking aid sensors, the rear audio system speakers will sound. If an obstacle is sensed
by the front parking aid sensors, the front audio system speakers will sound.
The PDC audio tone pitch is different between the front and rear, the front tone is a higher pitch than the rear.
The parking aid system operates using ultrasonic signals which are transmitted by the sensors. The reflected echo from this
output is received by the sensors and used by the control module to calculate the distance from an object.
The roof console mounted control switch allows the driver to activate/deactivate the parking aid system if operation is
required or not required.
CONTROL MODULE
The parking aid control module is located in the front passenger footwell, behind a protective panel. The control module uses
a single microprocessor to perform the following tasks:
Control of the ultrasonic sensors

Monitoring of the sensors
Evaluation of received echo signals from the sensors
Noise and disturbance suppression
Control of the audio system speakers
Control and monitoring of the switch status LED (light emitting diode) and associated wiring
Evaluation and monitoring of the control inputs
Management of diagnostic and test functions
Monitoring of power supply
Communication via diagnostic link.
The control module is connected to the vehicle electrical system by either three (vehicles fitted with front and rear sensors)
or two (vehicles fitted with rear sensors only) multiplug connectors.
Inputs and Outputs

The table below shows control module inputs and outputs
Component
TCM
Control switch
Parking aid sensors
Parking aid sensors
Control switch
Description
Medium speed CAN bus message - reverse gear selected
Medium speed CAN bus message - forward gear selected
Status - On/Off
Electrical power supply
Electrical power and ground
Digital transmit and receive signals
LED illumination
Input/Output
Input
Input
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
PARKING AID SENSORS
Item
Part Number
Description
De-coupling ring
Front parking aid sensor
De-coupling ring
Rear parking aid sensor
Four sensors are positioned in the rear bumper and four in the front bumper (if fitted). The front sensor housings are glued
into position; the rear sensor housings are welded into position. The sensor bodies are then clipped into the housings from
the rear.
Each sensor has a three pin connector which connects into a common harness linking all four sensors. The three pins of each
connector provide the sensor a negative feed, a positive feed and a signal line. The rear parking aid harness connects to the
main vehicle body harness. The front parking aid harness connects to the LH (left-hand) engine compartment harness.
CONTROL SWITCH
Item
Part Number
Description
Control switch
The control switch is located in the roof console. The switch is non-latching with an integral status LED. The switch receives a
12 V output from the control module, and is also connected to ground. When the switch is operated, a momentary ground is
completed. This is interpreted by the control module as a signal to enable or disable the parking aid system.
The switch also receives a 12 V output from the control module to drive the status LED when the parking aid system is on.
NOTE: The control switch allows the driver to activate/deactivate the parking aid system if operation is required or not
required.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; P = MOST bus
Part Number
Item
1
Description
Battery
Megafuse (175A)
AJB
Control module
Right outer front sensor
Right inner front sensor
Left inner front sensor
Left outer front sensor
Right outer rear sensor
10
Right inner rear sensor
11
Left inner rear sensor
12
Left outer rear sensor
13
Audio head unit
14
To audio system speakers
15
Gateway module
16
Control switch
If reverse (R) is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on, both the front (if fitted) and rear parking aid sensors
will become operational. If a forward drive gear is subsequently selected, the front and rear parking aid sensors will remain
operational until vehicle speed increases above 16 km/h (10 mph), park (P) is selected or the PDC control switch is pressed.
If drive (D) is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on the parking aid system will have to be activated by
pressing the PDC control switch.
NOTE: The PDC system can not be activated whilst the vehicle is in park (P).
The volume output of the parking aid audible tones can be adjusted by selecting the 'Vehicle Settings' menu and selecting
'Parking' from the menu on the TSD. The volume can be adjusted using the + or - selections on the TSD.
Audible and Visual Warnings

The control module processes the distance readings from the ultrasonic parking aid sensors to determine if there are any
objects within the detection areas. If there are no objects, no audible warning is produced. If an object is detected, repeated
audible warnings are produced via the audio system speakers. The time delay between the audible warnings decreases as the
distance between the detected object and the vehicle decreases, until eventually a continuous tone is emitted from the
speakers.
A visual interpretation of the detection areas is given in the TSD.

The visual interpretation dynamically updates as the sensors detect an objets within the set parameters. This feature can
also be used as a diagnostic aid.
Distance Calculation for Audible Warning and Parking Aid Display
The detection ranges of the sensors are shown in the table below.
Item Number Sensor Location
Maximum Detection Range Audio Tone
Continuous Audio Tone
1
Rear/Front Outer
Approximately 600 mm (24 inches)
2
Rear Inner
3
Front Inner
After the initial detection of an object, if there is no decrease in the distance between an object and the central sensors, the
time delay between the audible warnings remains constant. If an object is detected by one of the corner sensors only, the
audible warnings stop after approximately 5 seconds if there is no change in the distance between an object and the corner
sensor.
Detection Calculation
When operating in the combined transmitter and receiver mode, the sensor outputs a number of ultrasonic pulses and
receives the reflected echo signal. The control module amplifies the received echo signals and compares them with a
preprogrammed threshold to calculate the distance to the object. This is achieved by determining the elapsed time between
the transmission and reception of the ultrasonic signal.
When operating in receiver mode, the sensor receives echo signals transmitted by an adjacent sensor. This mode is used to
improve the accuracy of the system.
The detection cycle consists of the control module operating one sensor in the combined transmitter and receiver mode and
transmitting a number of pulses. The control module then switches the transmitting sensor and the adjacent sensor(s) to
receiver mode. After a short time delay this sequence is repeated using a different sensor to transmit the ultrasonic signal.
This sequence is completed in 100 ms. The control module uses several measurements of the same sensors to remove errors
from the calculation.
If the detected object is directly behind a sensor, the distance is calculated using the time between the transmission and
reception of the ultrasonic signal. If the object is positioned between two sensors, the control module uses both signals to
determine the correct distance using triangulation.
To perform the triangulation calculation, the control module must know the distance between the individual sensors in the
bumper. This information is stored in the control module memory. From the received distance signal from each sensor and
using the known distance between adjacent sensors, the control module can calculate the minimum distance from the
vehicle to the detected object.
When approaching several objects, the control module recognizes the distance from the vehicle to the nearest object.
The PDC module will prioritise the objects detected, the nearest object detected will take priority and the corresponding
audio outputs will be emitted. For example if 2 objects are detected (one front one rear) the nearest detected object will take
priority and relevant audible tone will be heard.
If two objects are detected at equal distance (one front one rear) the audible tones will alternate between the front and rear
speakers.
Diagnostics
The control module has a diagnostic connection via the medium speed CAN bus to enable faults to be retrieved using the
Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment. Additionally an on-board diagnostic routine within the control module constantly
monitors the system and alerts the driver to a system fault by emitting a 3 second continuous tone through the rear audio
system speakers when the ignition is switched on. The control switch LED will also flash 6 times.
Parking Aid - Parking Aid

For a detailed description of the Park Distance Control (PDC) system, characteristics and limitations refer to the relevant
Description and Operation section in the workshop manual. REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Description and
Operation).
PDC System On-Board self-test

As part of the strategy of the system if any DTCs are detected, a long high-pitched tone approx 3 seconds will sound
and the PDC switch (where fitted) indicator LED will flash 5 times at ignition on.
If a fault is present when the PDC system is activated then the PDC switch (where fitted) status LED will flash 5
times indicating an issue with front or rear PDC sensors, wiring switch, PDC control module or hard wired
sounders.
The rear PDC sounder/audio system will emit an error tone for approx 3 seconds at ignition on if a fault is
detected with the front or rear sensors, the switch, or if there is a controller area network (CAN) bus error.
(Only applicable to vehicles fitted with front PDC and a hard wired rear PDC sounder). If there is a fault with the
rear PDC sounder the error tone will come from the front PDC sounder unit (integral with the instrument
cluster).
Audible and Visual Warnings when PDC System is in Error State
Rear PDC
Fitted and No
PDC Switch
Fitted
A long highpitched error
tone will sound
at Ignition On
for approx 3
seconds
Rear PDC Fitted and PDC Switch Fitted

A long high-pitched error tone will sound
at ignition on for approx 3 seconds and
where applicable the PDC switch
indicator LED will flash 5 times at ignition
on. Every time the PDC system is
activated within the same ignition cycle,
PDC switch indicator LED will flash 5
times
Front and Rear PDC Fitted with PDC Switch

Fitted
A long high-pitched error tone will sound at
ignition on for approximately 3 seconds and
where applicable the PDC switch indicator LED
will flash 5 times at ignition on. Every time
the PDC system is activated within the same
ignition cycle the PDC switch indicator LED will
flash 5 times

CAUTIONS:
If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is not acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor
vehicle.
Do not apply any grease based products to any PDC connector or pins.
NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the
scan tool to the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information read
by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system)
NOTE: If diagnostic trouble codes are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an
intermittent concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
1.
2.
3.
Ensure that the PDC sensor face is clear of contamination that could affect the performance of the sensor.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Electrical
Battery
Fuse(s)
Relays
Wiring harness
Front PDC sensor(s)
Rear PDC sensor(s)
PDC switch and LED
PDC control module
PDC sounder
Audio system
PDC sensor condition/damaged

PDC sensor installation and holder
PDC sensor alignment
PDC sensor contamination
Bumper cover(s)
Vehicle ride height
Non standard/non manufacturer approved accessories fitted
4.
5.
Symptom Chart
CAUTION: Do not apply any grease based products to any PDC connector or pins.
NOTE: Please note if this diagnosis is being carried out on a vehicle without a hard wired parking aid speaker, ensure
the in car infotainment system is fully functional and configured correctly
NOTE: PDC sensors that are painted incorrectly and not to the manufacturer standards, will not be considered in any
warranty claim
Symptom
NOTE:
Permanent/Intermittent fault
Possible Causes
Front or rear PDC sensors
dirty
Front or rear PDC sensor
PDC system not functioning

correctly. (No DTC's
displayed)
NOTE:
Permanent/Intermittent fault
PDC system not functioning
correctly. (No DTC's
displayed). System
characteristics or
environmental effects
position incorrect
coupling rings not

installed/incorrectly
installed
PDC control module or PDC
sensor connector not fully
latched
PDC sensors painted
without being removed from
the bumper assembly or not
painted to the manufacturer
specification
PDC sensors incorrectly
mounted
Incorrect vehicle ride height
Dirty PDC sensor face.
Ice/snow covered sensor.
Debris trapped between
PDC sensor and PDC sensor
body. Heavy rain or water
splash from the ground
Non standard, bumper,
exhausts/tailpipes, tow bar
or external spare wheel
mounting
Action
Clean front or rear PDC sensors
Check the front or PDC rear sensor position
Check the front or rear PDC sensor are
correctly installed
Check front or rear PDC sensor coupling rings
are installed/installed correctly

Ensure all PDC system connectors are
correctly latched
Remove PDC sensor and ensure correctly
painted PDC sensor is installed

PDC sensors that are painted incorrectly and
not to the manufacturer standards, will not be

considered in any warranty claim
Ensure the sensors are a tight fit in the holder
and locked. Ensure the sensors are central in

the holder and bumper and at the correct
angle
Ensure vehicle ride height is within the
specified limits. Rectify as required
Clean the sensor face as required. Defrost the
sensor and dry as required. Clear any debris
from the sensor and holder as required.
Water flowing over the sensor is a system
limitation. (no action required)
Check for non standard, bumper,
exhausts/tailpipe, tow bar or external spare
Area around vehicle is not
clear of obstacles such as

channels, gutters or other
items on the ground
Exhaust gas and warm air
clouds creating ghost
echoes
Vehicle not on level ground
or next to a gradient
PDC sensors painted
without being removed from
the bumper assembly or not
painted to the manufacturer
specification
PDC sensors are being

returned with no faults found
or signs of water
ingress/corrosion
Possible issue with sensor

connectors not latched correctly
wheel mounting that may be being detected

by the PDC system. Rectify as required
Ensure the area around the vehicle is clear of
any obstacles, move the vehicle to a suitable
area before continuing diagnosis
Ensure no exhaust gas or warm area clouds
are in the area around the PDC sensor
detection range
Ensure the vehicle is on level ground and
clear of any ramps, potholes or speed bumps,
move the vehicle to a suitable area before
continuing diagnosis
Remove PDC sensor and ensure correctly
painted PDC sensor is installed
PDC sensors that are painted incorrectly and
not to the manufacturer standards, will not be
considered in any warranty claim
When either no/intermittent operation has
been reported the following action should be
taken
Using Datalogger identify the position of the
suspect PDC sensor within the bumper
1. Visually locate the position of the suspect
PDC sensor. Inspect and provide details in
claim if the sensor has any sign of physical
damage
2. Remove the bumper. Disconnect the wiring
at the main harness connector. Inspect the
main harness connectors and terminals for
signs of damage, backed out pins, corrosion
and water ingress, or damage to the seals.
Provide details in claim if any of the above
symptom's are present
3. Attempt to remove the harness connector
from the suspect PDC sensor without using
the connector latch i.e. lightly pull back on
ALL wires together, ensuring the harness is
held close to the back of the connector, not
elsewhere on the wiring harness. DO NOT
apply excessive force. If the connector can be
removed without using the latch, provide
details in claim if connector is loose. If the
connector is fully latched, disconnect it from
the sensor
4. Inspect and provide details in claim if the
suspect sensor harness connector has any
sign of water ingress/corrosion
5. Inspect and provide details in claim if the
suspect PDC sensor harness connector shows
any sign that the terminals have backed-out
of the connector or for any damage to the
terminal seals. Replace/repair the harness as
required and proceed
6. Remove the suspect PDC sensor from the
bumper. Inspect the PDC sensor connector for
signs of water ingress/corrosion. Provide
details in claim if corrosion/water ingress is
present
7. Exchange the suspect PDC sensor with
another PDC sensor within the bumper that is
performing correctly. Reconnect all sensors
and reconnect the bumper main harness
connector. Repeat step 1. Confirm if the
original fault now appears at the new position
of the suspect PDC sensor, if so, proceed to
step
8. If not, carry out the appropriate open
circuit and short circuit checks between the
original suspect PDC sensor harness
connector and the PDC control module
9. Refit the PDC sensors to their original
position in the bumper
10. Reconnect the PDC sensor to the bumper
harness connector. Reconnect main harness
connector and refit the bumper
11. Repeat Step 1. If fault is still present,
replace only the faulty sensor
PINPOINT TEST A : PDC SYSTEM NOT FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY WITH NO DTCS LOGGED
TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: PERMANENT FAULT
1
When the PDC system is activated, there is a vibration on the PDC sensor membrane. This can be
verified by touching the PDC sensor face with a hard item such as a pencil, ball-pen, small
screwdriver, or fingernail. Ensure no damage is caused to sensor painted surface.
Are the PDC sensor(s) vibrating?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A5.
A2: SENSORS VIBRATING WITH PDC FAULT
Clean the PDC sensor face.
1
PDC system functioning correctly?
Yes
No further action required.
No
GO to A3.
Check PDC sensors correctly mounted. PDC sensor holder correctly mounted. PDC sensor
1
decoupler ring fitted or fitted correctly. PDC sensor positioning correct. PDC sensor painted
without being removed from the bumper assembly or not painted to manufacturer specification.
Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to A4.
Carry out speaker test. Only applicable to vehicles with rear hard wired PDC speakers. Check the
1
PDC speaker wiring circuit and connector. Rectify as required. Check and install a new PDC
speaker as required. Vehicles with audio PDC. Confirm audio system is functioning correctly. Refer
PDC system functioning correctly.
Yes
A5: SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PDC FAULT
1
Isolate the fault to front or rear PDC sensors
Are all rear PDC sensors vibrating?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
GO to A10.
A6: FRONT SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PDC FAULT
1
Check the PDC control module is correctly configured. Check and update the car configuration file
as required.
Yes
No
GO to A7.
Check the correct PDC control module is installed to the vehicle.
1
Yes
No
GO to A8.
If all 4 front PDC sensors are not vibrating, carry out harness test on common ground, power
1
supply. Check main PDC harness connector to bumper harness connector. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to A9.

1
Check and install a new PDC control module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module/component.
Yes
A10: REAR SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PDC FAULT
Check the PDC control module is correctly configured. Check and update the car configuration file
1
as required.
Yes
No
GO to A11.
If all 4 rear PDC sensors are not vibrating, carry out harness test on common ground, power
1
supply. Check main PDC harness connector to bumper harness connector. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to A12.
1
Check and install a new PDC control module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
installation of a new module/component.
Yes
PINPOINT TEST B : PDC SYSTEM NOT FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY WITH NO DTCS LOGGED
TEST
CONDITIONS
B1: PDC SYSTEM GIVES WARNING SIGNAL WITHOUT OBSTACLE
1
Clean the PDC sensor face. Check for any damage to the PDC sensor face. Rectify as required.
Snow, water or ice on sensor face. PDC sensor face has been repainted to the incorrect
thickness. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to B2.
Ensure the vehicle ride height is within manufacturer specified limits. Rectify as required.
1
Yes
No
GO to B3.
Check for any non standard accessories are not fitted, such as tow bar, bike rack, body kit,
1
modified exhaust, lighting or licence plate holder.
Yes
No
GO to B4.
Limitations or characteristics of the PDC system such as vehicle on a gradient, exhaust gas
1
vapour, signal reflection.
Yes
No
For a detailed description of the PDC system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Description and Operation).
DTC Index
places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the DMM
leads into account.
DTC
B1B3601
Description
Front Right Outer
Sensor - General
Electrical Failure
Possible Cause
Front Right Outer
Sensor - Component
internal failure
B1B36Front Right Outer

12
Sensor - Circuit short
to battery
B1B36Front Right Outer

96
Sensor - Component
internal failure

Front Right Outer
Sensor - Component
internal failure
Action
front bumper harness for damage/corrosion.

Check sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open circuit. Repair or
replace any wiring harness as required
Check the connector for integrity and damage,
then re-connect sensor to confirm connection
Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
system clear the DTC and run the on demand
self test
If the problem persists remove the suspect
sensor from the bumper. Inspect the sensor
connector for signs of water ingress/corrosion.
Exchange the suspect sensor with another
sensor within the bumper that is not reporting a
fault. Clear the DTC and run the on demand self
test to confirm if the fault code now appears for
the new position of the suspect sensor. Renew
the faulty sensor
front bumper harness for damage. Check sensor
circuit for short circuit to power. Repair or
self test
self test
the faulty sensor
B1B3801
Front Right Inner

Sensor - General
Electrical Failure

Front Right Inner
Sensor - Component
internal failure
B1B38Front Right Inner

12
to battery
B1B38Front Right Inner

96
Sensor - Component
internal failure

Front Right Inner
B1B4001
Front Left Outer

Sensor - General
Electrical Failure
B1B40Front Left Outer

12
to battery
Sensor - Component
internal failure

Front Left Outer Sensor
- Component internal
failure

self test
the faulty sensor
self test
self test
the faulty sensor
self test
the faulty sensor
self test
B1B40Front Left Outer
96
Sensor - Component
internal failure
Front Left Outer Sensor
B1B4201

Front Left Inner Sensor

self test
the faulty sensor
self test
the faulty sensor
self test
self test
the faulty sensor
rear bumper harness for damage/corrosion.
Front Left Inner

Sensor - General
Electrical Failure
failure
failure
B1B42Front Left Inner

12
to battery
B1B42Front Left Inner

96
Sensor - Component
internal failure

Front Left Inner Sensor
B1B4401
Rear Right Outer

Sensor - General
Electrical Failure
failure

Rear Right Outer Sensor
failure
B1B44Rear Right Outer

12
to battery
B1B44Rear Right Outer

96
Sensor - Component
internal failure

Rear Right Outer Sensor
B1B4601

Rear Right Inner Sensor
Rear Right Inner

Sensor - General
Electrical Failure
failure
failure
B1B46Rear Right Inner

12
to battery
B1B46Rear Right Inner

96
Sensor - Component
internal failure

Rear Right Inner Sensor
failure

self test
the faulty sensor
rear bumper harness for damage. Check sensor
self test
self test
the faulty sensor
self test
the faulty sensor
self test

B1B4801
Rear Left Outer

Sensor - General
Electrical Failure

Rear Left Outer Sensor -
Component internal
failure
B1B48Rear Left Outer

12
to battery
B1B48Rear Left Outer

96
Sensor - Component
internal failure

Rear Left Outer Sensor -
B1B5001

Rear Left Inner Sensor -
Rear Left Inner

Sensor - General
Electrical Failure
Component internal
failure
Component internal
failure

self test
the faulty sensor
self test
the faulty sensor
self test
self test
the faulty sensor
self test
B1B50Rear Left Inner

12
to battery
B1B50Rear Left Inner

96
Sensor - Component
internal failure

Rear Left Inner Sensor -
B1B54- Function LED - Park

11
Aid - Circuit short to
ground

Switch/LED -
B1B54- Function LED - Park

12
Aid - Circuit short to
battery

Switch/LED -
B1B57- Front Sensors Power

11
Circuit- circuit short
to ground
B1B58- Rear Sensors Power

11
Circuit - Circuit short
to ground
Component internal
failure
Component internal
failure
Component internal
failure
Control Module Component internal
failure
Control Module Component internal
failure

Control Module -
Component internal
failure

the faulty sensor
self test
self test
the faulty sensor
parking aid LED circuit for short circuit to
ground. Repair or replace any wiring harness as
required
self test. If the problem persists, suspect the
switch/LED
parking aid LED circuit for short circuit to power.
Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
switch/LED
Check front and rear bumper harness for signs
of damage and security of connections
parking assist front sensor power circuit and rear
sensor power circuit for short circuit to ground.
Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
control module
Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up
parking aid system and check corrective action
Check rear and front (if front PDC fitted) bumper
harness for signs of damage and security of
connections
parking assist rear sensor power circuit and front
sensor power circuit (if front PDC fitted) for
short circuit to ground. Repair or replace any
wiring harness as required
control module
Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up
parking aid system and check corrective action
B1C30Disable Switch 73
Actuator stuck closed

Control Switch -
Component internal
failure
U0010- Medium Speed CAN

00
Communication Bus No sub type
information
U007300
Control module
communication Bus
"A" Off - No sub type
information
Medium speed CAN
failure - bus off
Control module
communication Bus "A"
failure - bus off

00
With Body Control
information
Loss of CAN
communication with

00
With Body Control
Module "B" - No sub
type information
Loss of CAN
communication with
auxiliary junction box

00
With Instrument
Panel Cluster (IPC)
Control Module - No
Loss of CAN
communication with
instrument cluster
U030000
Internal Control
Module Software
Incompatibility - No

00
From Body Control
information

00
From Instrument
Panel Control Module
- No sub type
information
Car configuration file
stored in Parking aid

control module does not
match the master car
configuration file
Master car configuration
file not being
transmitted by master
control module
parking assist switch and switch circuit. Repair

or replace any wiring harness as required
control switch
Check the switch function
the Parking aid control module high speed CAN
bus for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high resistance, or short
circuit between the paired CAN wires
system, complete a CAN network integrity test
Cycle the ignition off, then on, and check if the
DTC is still logged
the Parking aid control module high speed CAN
bus for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high resistance, or short
circuit between the paired CAN wires
DTC is still logged
the power and ground connections to the central
junction box. Clear DTC and retest
system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
the CAN network between the central junction
box and the parking aid control module
the power and ground connections to the
auxiliary junction box. Clear DTC and retest
instrument cluster. Clear DTC and retest
system, check all other control modules, for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Check the components installed on the vehicle
were installed by the factory or a dealer
Install the original component or a new one as
required.
system, check central junction box, for related

DTC is still logged
system, check instrument cluster, for related
www.JagDocs.com
DTC is still logged


00
From Body Control
Module "B" - No sub
type information
U2100- Initial Configuration

00
Not Complete - No
U2101Control Module
00
Configuration
Incompatible - No sub
type information
U3000Control Module 49
Internal electronic
failure
Parking aid control

81
Number - invalid
VIN Mismatch, stored
U300316
Battery voltage
U300317
Battery Voltage
module not configured

Parking aid control
module configuration
error
Parking aid control
module internal failure
VIN does not match

broadcast VIN
threshold
U3003Battery Voltage 62 Signal compare failure
threshold
Signal compare failure
in battery voltage, of 2
volts or more, between
parking aid system
control module and
system, check auxiliary junction box, for related

DTC is still logged
system check and install latest relevant level of
software to the parking aid control module
system check and up-date the car configuration
file as required. Clear the DTC and re-test
system clear the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then

on, and check if the DTC is still logged
If the DTC is still logged suspect the parking aid
control module
system clear the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then
on, and check if the DTC is still logged
If the DTC is still logged replace the parking aid
control module
Check the vehicle charging system performance
to ensure the voltage regulation is correct
Refer to relevant section of workshop manual
and battery care manual. Check battery state of
charge and starting/charging system
performance
parking aid control module power and ground
circuits for short circuit to ground, short circuit
performance
performance
Parking Aid - Parking Aid Module

Removal
NOTE: The park control module is situated in the LH footwell and does not change position with the hand of drive.
1.

Charging System - General Information, Specifications).
2.
LH side: Remove the cowl side trim panel.

Remove the hood release lever.
Release the forward edge of the scuff plate
trim panel.
3.
CAUTION: Make sure the wiring harness and

electrical connectors are not damaged during the
carpet release.
Carefully release the carpet for access.
Carefully release the forward edge of the
floor console side trim panel.
4.
Release the subwoofer cover.

Remove the 4 bolts.
Position aside.
5.
Remove the parking aid module.

Position the acoustic pad aside.
Release 2 electrical harness clips from the
body and position aside.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the parking aid module.

Secure the electrical harness.
Align the acoustic pad.
2.
Install the subwoofer cover.

3.
CAUTION: Make sure the carpet is correctly installed and

that no foul-condition exists when the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
Install the carpet.
Install the floor console side panel trim.
4.
Install the cowl side trim panel.

Secure the scuff plate trim panel.
5.

Charging System - General Information, Specifications).
Parking Aid - Rear Parking Aid Sensor

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the rear bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19
Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
3.
Remove the parking aid sensor.

Repeat the above for the other 3 sensors.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: If a new sensor is installed, only the front face

must be painted. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
the component malfunctioning.
Install the parking aid sensor.
Repeat the above procedure for the remaining 3 sensors.
2.
Install the rear bumper cover.

Parking Aid - Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor

Removal
All vehicles
1.

Vehicles with 4.2L engine

2.
Remove the front bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover (50119 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).

3.

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover (50119 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
All vehicles
4.

Installation
1.

Parking Aid - Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the headlamp assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Assembly (41701 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
3.

Installation
1.

Battery and Charging System - General Information - Battery Care

Requirements
1. INTRODUCTION
This document sets out the requirements for care and maintenance of batteries and thereby the standard of battery
care at dealers and retailers for new vehicles
This applies to all types of 12 Volt Lead Acid Batteries used in Jaguar and Land Rover vehicles whether they are
conventional flooded technology or Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM also known as Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA))
technology and also applies to both Primary and Auxiliary Batteries. AGM batteries offer improved resistance to cycling
as seen in stop start applications.
In order to prevent damage to the battery and ensure a satisfactory service life, all processes detailed within this
document must be rigorously adhered to.
It is equally important therefore to note the following key points:
All new vehicles leave the factory with either a transit relay installed and/or have a transit mode programmed
into the vehicle control modules. The transit relay must be removed and the transit mode disabled (where
applicable) using an approved diagnostic system, NOT MORE THAN 72 HOURS before the customer takes
delivery.
The battery can be discharged by the following mechanisms:
Self Discharge: -A lead acid battery will very slowly discharge itself due to its own internal chemical processes
whether it is connected to a vehicle or not.
Quiescent Discharge: - The vehicle electrical systems when connected to the battery will draw charge from
the battery.
12 Volt Lead Acid Batteries rely on internal chemical processes to create a voltage and deliver current. These processes
and the internal chemical structure of the battery can be damaged if the battery is allowed to discharge over a number
of weeks / months, or is left in a discharged state for a lengthy time period.
On vehicles with conventional ignition keys, these must not be left in the ignition lock barrel when the
transit relay has been removed, otherwise quiescent current will increase and the battery will discharge more
rapidly.
For keyless vehicles, the Smart Key must be stored at least 5m away from the vehicle when the vehicle is
parked or stored.
AGM Batteries are fully sealed and cannot have the electrolyte level topped up.
NOTE: Dealers and retailers involved in the storage / handling of vehicles and replacement batteries have a
responsibility to ensure that only a fully charged battery may be processed through the distribution selling chain.
2. GENERAL RULES FOR BATTERY CARE

2.1 Dealer Demonstration Vehicles
Vehicles used as dealer demonstrator(s), in a showroom, must be connected to a showroom conditioner capable of
delivering 50 Amps. This will prevent the battery from being damaged.
2.2 Software Reflash, SDD work or Ignition On related workshop activities

Due to the high electrical current demand and high depth of Discharge that can occur during vehicle software re-flash
activities, SDD work or ignition on related work in the workshop, vehicles that are undergoing such activities MUST have
a power supply capable of delivering 50 Amps or more.
2.3 Extended Vehicle Rework

For any extended vehicle rework that results in consuming vehicle power, either the battery should be disconnected or a
suitable power supply connected.
2.4 Jump Starting New vehicles before they have been delivered to the customer
It is the dealer / retailers responsibility to make sure the battery is not allowed to go flat by following the
instructions and processes defined in this manual.

However, if circumstances dictate that a new vehicle must be jump started due to a flat battery whilst the
vehicle is in the dealer / retailers care, the battery on this vehicle must be replaced with a new one prior
to delivery to the customer at the dealer / retailers liability.
The vehicle should also undergo investigation as to why the battery went flat.
Do not connect the jump starting cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery. Always connect to the
recommended earth point. As defined in the owners handbook or service documentation for that vehicle.
2.5 AGM Batteries

AGM batteries must not be charged above 14.8 Volts. Doing so will damage them.
AGM Batteries must be tested with a capable battery tester as detailed in the equipment section (Section
5) of this procedure.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should the battery be disconnected with the engine running because under these
conditions the alternator can give a very high output voltage. This high transient voltage will damage the electronic
components in the vehicle. Loose or incomplete battery connections may also cause high transient voltage.
3. HEALTH AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGS:
BATTERY CELLS CONTAIN SULPHURIC ACID AND EXPLOSIVE MIXTURES OF HYDROGEN AND OXYGEN GASES. IT
IS THEREFORE ESSENTIAL THAT THE FOLLOWING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
Batteries emit highly explosive hydrogen at all times, particularly during charging. To prevent any potential form
of ignition occurring when working in the vicinity of a battery:
Do not smoke when working near batteries.

Avoid sparks, short circuits or other sources of ignition in the battery vicinity.
Switch off current before making or breaking electrical connections.
Ensure battery charging area is well ventilated.
Ensure the charger is switched off when: a) connecting to a battery; b) disconnecting from the battery.
Always disconnect the ground cable from the battery terminal first and reconnect it last.
Batteries contain poisonous and highly corrosive acid. To prevent personal injury, or damage to clothing or the
vehicle, the following working practices should be followed when topping up, checking electrolyte specific gravity,
removal, refitting or carrying batteries:
Always wear suitable protective clothing (an apron or similar), safety glasses, a face mask and suitable gloves.
If acid is spilled or splashed onto clothing or the body, it must be neutralized immediately and then rinsed with
clean water. A solution of baking soda or household ammonia and water may be used as a neutralizer.
In the event of contact with the skin, drench the affected area with water. In the case of contact with the eyes,
bathe the affected area with cool clean water for approximately 15 minutes and seek urgent medical attention.
If battery acid is spilled or splashed on any surface of a vehicle, it should be neutralized and rinsed with clean
water.
Heat is generated when acid is mixed with water. If it becomes necessary to prepare electrolyte of a desired
specific gravity, SLOWLY pour the concentrated acid into water (not water into acid), adding small amounts of
acid while stirring. Allow the electrolyte to cool if noticeable heat develops. With the exception of lead or leadlined containers, always use non-metallic receptacles or funnels. Do not store acid in excessively warm locations
or in direct sunlight.
Due to their hazardous contents, the disposal of batteries is strictly controlled. When a battery is scrapped, ensure
it is disposed of safely, complying with local environmental regulations. If in doubt, contact your local authority for
advice on disposal facilities.
4. BATTERY CARE REQUIREMENTS

4.1 RECEIPT OF A NEW VEHICLE
Within 24 hours of receipt of a new vehicle, a battery condition check must be carried out in accordance with the
battery test process utilizing an appropriate tester as outlined in the equipment section (Section 5) of this
procedure.
NOTE: The midtronics code must be recorded on the form.

Any actions must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in the determining battery condition section
(Section 6) of this procedure. The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the
new vehicle storage document.
For additional information, refer to: New Vehicle Storage Form (100-11, Description and Operation).
4.2 NEW VEHICLE STORAGE

If the vehicle is to be stored the transit relays MUST be refitted and / or the vehicle put into transport mode.
Transit relay removal / vehicle placed in normal mode should only be completed a maximum of 72 hours prior to
handover to customer
For vehicles without either a transit mode or transit relay the battery negative cable must be DISCONNECTED from the
battery.
The battery must be tested and/or re-charged every 30 days and MUST be re-charged after every 90 day period.
4.3 PDI / DELIVERY TO CUSTOMER

Before the vehicle is handed over to the customer and as part of the PDI, the condition of the battery needs to be
confirmed. The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing an appropriate
tester as outlined in the equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
4.4 REPLACEMENT BATTERIES FOR SERVICE

All service replacement batteries must have the battery condition checked within 24 hours of receipt and controlled on a
First In First Out basis to ensure batteries are not allowed to age unnecessarily.
For batteries in storage and not yet fitted to a vehicle, they must be stored in a dry environment, not in direct sunlight
or under any direct heat source. Any batteries exhibiting any forms of damage or corrosion must not be fitted to any
vehicle. Any batteries which are dropped must be scrapped, this applies even if no external damage is apparent.
The battery condition must be checked every 30 days in accordance with the battery test process utilizing an
appropriate tester as outlined in the equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
(Section 6) of this procedure.The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the
4.5 BATTERY MAINTENANCE

Any battery whether it is in a vehicle or a replacement part must be tested and/or re-charged every 30 days and MUST
be re-charged after every 90 day period.
4.6 BATTERY TEST PROCESS

It is recommended that this test is conducted at least 24 hours after the vehicle engine has been run or the battery
charged to avoid the need of surface charge removal. If time constraints make this unacceptable then the surface
charge must be removed.
Surface Charge Removal
A vehicle which has had its battery charged or been driven in a 24 hour period before the test, must have its surface
charge removed.
Turn on the ignition but do not start the vehicle

Switch on the headlamps on high beam for a minimum 3 minutes
Switch off the headlamps
Wait a minimum of 5 minutes before recording test results for any battery measurements
Battery Test
The battery may be tested either on a bench or on the vehicle.
The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing an appropriate tester as
outlined in the equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
CAUTION: DO NOT connect the tester to any other circuit or chassis point other than the battery negative
terminal.
5. EQUIPMENT
All equipment used must be functionally capable of meeting the compliance requirements. Please refer to the approved
equipment document.
In the case of batteries fitted to a new vehicle at the dealership, battery condition should be measured using the
appropriate hand-held Midtronics tester as follows:
Battery
Type
Battery Tester
Battery Tester
Jaguar
Land Rover
Flooded
Midtronics MCR 394 & 494 Midtronics EXP1080 &
Midtronics MCR 393 & 493 Midtronics EXP1080 &
GR1/GRX
GR1/GRX
AGM
Midtronics EXP1080, GR1/GRX
Midtronics EXP1080, GR1/GRX
The test results must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage document.
NOTE: All equipment must be calibrated
6 DETERMINING BATTERY CONDITION

TESTER RESULTS
GOOD BATTERY
GOOD RE-CHARGE
CHARGE AND RE-TEST
ACTION
Return to service.
Fully charge battery and return to service.
Fully charge battery. Remove surface charge. Re-test battery. If same result replace
battery.
REPLACE BATTERY OR BAD Verify surface charge removed. Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test. If result
CELL BATTERY
repeats after surface charge removal, replace battery. DO NOT RECHARGE.
UNABLE TO DO TEST
Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test.
7 BATTERY CHARGING
It is essential that a suitably ventilated defined area exists in each dealership / retailer for battery charging.
CAUTION: It is very important that when charging batteries using the traction charger or other stand-alone
chargers that the charger is set for the correct type of battery before charging commences. If the wrong switch is
selected the result would be a battery that is not charged fully and / or overheating can occur. Follow the manufacturers
operating instructions.
Batteries MUST BE tested and if necessary charged every 30 days and charged after 90 days irrespective of any test. It
is recommended that dealers / retailers always have fully charged batteries ready for use.
CAUTION: Do not charge AGM batteries with voltages over 14.8 Volts as this will damage the battery.
A designated controlled area must be allocated for scrap batteries and clearly controlled as such.
To bring a discharged but serviceable battery back to a fully charged condition proceed as follows:
Check and if necessary top-up the battery electrolyte level. (Flooded maintainable batteries only)
Charge the battery using a charger as detailed in the approved equipment document following the
manufacturers operating instructions.

NOTE: When using the Midtronics Diagnostic Charger, automatic mode must always be used. After charging and
analysis, the charger may display Top-Off Charging, Hit STOP To End. Do not stop charging until the current falls to 5A
or less, otherwise the battery will not be fully charged.
Following charging a post charge battery condition test must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in the
determining battery condition section (Section 6) of this procedure.
8 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
If it is determined that a battery requires replacement, always refer to the appropriate section of the workshop manual
for instructions on removing and installing the battery from the vehicle.
On in service vehicles fitted with a Battery Monitoring System (BMS), the BMS module must be reset following the
installation of a new battery. The BMS module reset procedure must be performed using an approved diagnostic
system.
9 CONFIRMING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

WARNINGS:
BEFORE CHECKING AND TOPPING-UP THE BATTERY ELECTROLYTE, REFER TO THE HEALTH AND SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS SECTION.
AGM TECHNOLOGY BATTERIES ARE FULLY SEALED FOR LIFE AND NO ATTEMPT SHOULD BE MADE TO CHECK OR
TOP UP THE ELECTROLYTE LEVEL.
On certain types of battery the electrolyte level may need to be checked.
Make sure the battery is of a type suitable for topping up. These types of batteries will have cell plugs visible on
the top face of the battery or a removable access panel to allow access to the cells.
On batteries with a clear or opaque case and level marks, check the electrolyte level by visual inspection of the
maximum level indicator mark on the battery casing indicating adequate level above the battery separators.
On batteries with black cases, remove the cell plugs or access panel and ensure the electrolyte level is level with
the indicator in the cell hole. A flashlight may be required to see the electrolyte level on this type of battery.
If the electrolyte level is low, top-up using distilled water.
NOTE: Maintenance free and Valve Regulated (AGM) batteries are sealed and therefore cannot be topped up.
CAUTION: DO NOT overfill.
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Quiescent Drain

VEHICLE QUIESCENT CURRENT TESTING

On vehicles fitted with a Battery Monitoring System (BMS), the diagnostic routine for quiescent drain testing in the
approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system should be utilized.
If a customer complains of a vehicle battery that discharges continuously or when left for a prolonged period of time, it
is recommended that a quiescent drain test is performed as described below.
The battery drain should be measured using the approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system or a Digital MultiMeter (DVOM). A procedure for quiescent drain measurement using the diagnostic system is available in the Diagnosis
and Testing section of the Workshop Manual. The vehicle should be in the locked/armed state (for example vehicle
alarm fully armed), all doors, engine and luggage compartment lids are open and latched (so as to appear closed from
an electrical point of view). The test should take place after the vehicle has entered shutdown mode. The time taken for
this to occur after the ignition is switched off varies according to model (Refer to the Topix On line resource for details).
When the vehicle is armed, the effect of the security system Light Emitting Diode (LED) flashing is to cause a pulsation
in the measured current drain. In this case, either the average current should be taken (using a Digital Multi- Meter
(DVOM) with an averaging system) or the current reading taken, ignoring the brief high current peaks.
EQUIPMENT
Approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system with current probeOR Digital Multi-Meter (DVOM) with current probe.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
Using an Approved Jaguar or Land Rover Diagnostic System.
Switch off all electrical loads and ensure that the ignition is off
Connect the current probe to the approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system
Calibrate the probe
Install a clamp around the battery lead/junction box lead
Go to the Quiescent Current Testing section in this procedure
Using a digital multimeter

Do not use an in-line DVOM to measure the quiescent drain on vehicles fitted with an electronic throttle (for example XK
2006 onwards). The current exceeds the maximum amount the fuse in the DVOM is capable of handling.
Switch off all electrical loads and ensure that the ignition is off
Connect the current probe to the digital multmeter
Calibrate the probe
Install a clamp around the battery lead/junction box lead
Go to the Quiescent Current Testing section in this procedure
QUIESCENT CURRENT TESTING

Switch ignition to on or select ignition mode in keyless vehicles and switch to off (do not crank)
Remove key from ignition switch (if equipped)
Open and latch all doors, hood and luggage compartment lid
Lock the vehicle using the remote function on the remote handset. (Single lock only to avoid volumetric alarm
arming)
Remove any other potential electrical drains such as accessories plugged into accessory sockets
Record the amperage readings after the shutdown period referenced in the Topix on line resource for details.
Note all cars from 10MY onwards and XK from 07MY and XF from 08MY should be less than 30mA after 30
minutes
Record the final reading on the battery report form
The preferred method of testing following an excessive current consumption figure is to use a current probe around
individual junction box leads to the various suspected circuits to identify a potential cause. This is in preference to the
old method of removing fuses for the following reasons:
The drain may be caused by a module remaining active and preventing the quiescent drain from reducing to
normal levels
The drain may be caused by a relay winding that is activated. Pulling the fuse can allow this to reset and the
drain will be lost and go un-diagnosed
QUIESCENT DRAIN - TYPICAL VALUES

NOTE: The quiescent drain after the initial shutdown period should not exceed the value shown in the table.
Jaguar Quiescent Drain Values
MODEL
XJS 3.2
Sovereign 3.2
XJ6 4.0
XJS
XJ6 (X300) (1995MY)
XJ8 (X300)
XK8 (X100)
S-Type (X200)
X-Type (X400)
XJ6 (X350)
XJ8 (X350)
XK (X150) - From 2006MY
SHUT DOWN PERIOD (minutes) TYPICAL VALUES BATTERY DRAIN (mA)

60
<30
60
<37.3
60
<38.6
60
<43.9
60
<43
60
<30
60
<30
60
<30
30
<30
40
<30
40
<30
<20 (after lock/arm condition)
<30
33 (unlocked)
<30
XF (X250) - From 2008MY
<30
33 (unlocked)
<30
XF (X250) - From 2013MY
<25
XF SportBrake (X250) - From 2013MY <10 (after lock/arm condition)
<25
<20 (unlocked)
<25
XJ (X351) - From 2010MY - 2012MY
10 (afterlock/arm condition)
<20
30 (unlocked)
<20
XJ (X351) - From 2013MY
<20
<20 (unlocked)
<20
F - Type (X152) - From 2013MY
<20
<20 (unlocked)
<20
NOTE:
1. The total current drain will be higher if certain approved accessories are fitted (for example: tracker, trailer module,
etc.)
2. Applies to vehicles without Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Vehicle shut-down period with TPMS is
approximately 15 minutes.
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Charging System

For a detailed description of the charging system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to:
Battery and Cables (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Description and Operation),
Generator (414-02 Generator and Regulator, Description and Operation).

1.
2.
NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition and state of charge before condemning any of the charging system
components. For additional information, refer to the battery care manual.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Generator
Drive belt
Drive belt tensioner
Generator pulley
Check the security of the generator fixings
Electrical
Generator
Battery
Fuse 5 Rear Junction Box (RJB)
Engine/generator ground connection
Circuit(s)
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart. Alternatively, check for
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Battery Not Charging
warning displayed on
message center
Battery keeps
discharging, no warning
message displayed on
message center
Possible Cause
Action
Fuse 5 RJB
Check Fuse 5 RJB. Check the battery condition and state of
Front End
charge. Refer to the battery care manual. Check the FEAD belt
Accessory Drive
tension.
(FEAD) belt
REFER to: Accessory Drive (303-05 Accessory Drive, Diagnosis
tension
and Testing).
Generator fault
Check ECM and instrument cluster for DTCs and refer to relevant
ECM
DTC Index.
Instrument cluster REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine
fault
Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing) /
Controller Area
Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Diagnosis and
Network (CAN)
Testing) /
fault
Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications
Network, Diagnosis and Testing).
No ignition power For ignition power circuit tests. GO to Pinpoint Test B. Check the
from CJB
quiescent drain. Check the battery condition and state of charge,
Battery quiescent
refer to the battery care manual.
drain
REFER to: Battery Charging (414-00 Battery and Charging
Battery fault
FEAD belt tension
Check the FEAD belt tension.
Generator pulley
REFER to: Accessory Drive (303-05 Accessory Drive, Diagnosis
fault
and Testing).
Generator failure Check RJB for DTCs B2A9016, B2A9116, Note: if battery requires
replacing and these DTCs were logged, complete and return the
battery report form listing the DTCs, see battery care manual.
Check ECM for DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine
Controls - V8 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing).
Check the generator pulley does not turn independently of the
generator
Generator noisy
FEAD belt tension

FEAD belt
FEAD belt
For noisy generator tests. GO to Pinpoint Test C.
tensioner
FEAD belt idler
pulleys
Generator failure
Radio interference
Generator
Wiring harness
For radio interference tests. GO to Pinpoint Test D.
DTC Index
DTC
Description
P163200 Generator faults
sensor/circuit
B2A9016
Battery low
B2A9116
Battery
discharged
Possible Cause
Charging
system fault
Circuit voltage
below
threshold
Circuit voltage
below
threshold
Action
Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable condition (if
battery requires replacing and this DTC is logged, complete and
return battery report form listing this DTC), refer to the battery
care manual
Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable condition (if
battery requires replacing and this DTC is logged, complete and
return battery report form listing this DTC), refer to the battery
care manual
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : P163200 CHARGING SYSTEM FAULT
TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING
Connect a suitable voltmeter across the battery terminals.
1
2
Start the engine and allow to idle with no electrical loads applied.
Measure the maximum voltage achieved at the battery after start.
Is the voltage greater than 13 volts?

Yes
GO to A2.
No
INSTALL a fully charged battery. GO to A5.
A2: CHECK THE GENERATOR 'S' TERMINAL FOR BATTERY VOLTAGE
1
2
DISCONNECT generator electrical connector PI048.
MEASURE the voltage at generator electrical connector PI048 pin 3.

3
Yes
GO to A5.
No
GO to A3.
A3: CHECK FUSE 5 IN REAR JUNCTION BOX (RJB)

1
Check fuse 5 in the RJB.
Is the fuse OK?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 3 and fuse 5 in the RJB.
CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to A4.
A4: CHECK THE GENERATOR 'S' TERMINAL FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1
MEASURE the resistance between generator electrical connector PI048 pin 3 and ground.
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 3 and fuse 5 of the RJB.
INSTALL a new fuse, CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new fuse, CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
A5: CHECK FOR BATTERY VOLTAGE AT THE GENERATOR 'L' TERMINAL
1
2
Disconnect generator electrical connector PI048.
Set ignition status to ON.
Measure the voltage at generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1.

Yes
INSTALL a new generator.
REFER to: Generator - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (414-02 Generator and Regulator,
No
GO to A6.
A6: CHECK THE GENERATOR 'L' LINE FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1
2
Disconnect battery.
MEASURE the resistance between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and ground.
3
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and the Engine
Control Module (ECM). CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to A7.
A7: CHECK THE GENERATOR 'L' LINE FOR SHORT TO POWER
MEASURE the resistance between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and battery
1
positive.
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and the Engine
Control Module (ECM). CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to A8.
A8: CHECK THE GENERATOR 'L' LINE FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1
Disconnect the ECM electrical connector PI300.
2
MEASURE the resistance between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1and ECM
electrical connector PI300 pin 16.
Yes
Install a new generator.
No
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 1 and the ECM electrical
connector PI300 pin 16. CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST B : IGNITION POWER CIRCUIT TESTS

TEST
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FOR IGNITION POWER AT GENERATOR
1
2
Measure the voltage at generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2.

4
Yes
Check for quiescent current fault, check battery condition. Refer to the Battery Care Manual.
No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK THE IGNITION POWER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Set the ignition status to OFF.
1
2
Disconnect the battery.
Check the resistance between generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2 and GROUND.

Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2 and the CJB. CLEAR
the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to B3.
B3: CHECK THE IGNITION POWER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER
1
Check the resistance between generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2 and battery positive.
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between the generator electrical connector PI048 pin 2 and the CJB. CLEAR
the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to B4.
B4: CHECK THE IGNITION POWER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1
Disconnect CJB electrical connector FL048.
2
Check the resistance between CJB electrical connector FL048 pin 12 and generator electrical
connector PI048 pin 2.
Yes
REPAIR the circuit between CJB electrical connector FL048 pin 12 and generator electrical
connector PI048 pin 2. CLEAR the DTC, test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to B5.
B5: CHECK CJB IGNITION POWER OUTPUT DRIVE
Connect the battery.
1
2
Check the voltage at CJB electrical connector FL048, component side, pin 12.
3
Yes
Check no other modules connected to this circuit are pulling to GROUND. Clear the DTC, test the
No
Install a new generator.
PINPOINT TEST C : GENERATOR NOISY

TEST
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR SECURITY
Inspect the generator fixings.
1
Is the generator secure?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
SECURE the generator. TEST the system for normal operation.
C2: CHECK THE FEAD BELT
Remove and inspect the FEAD belt.
1
REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (303-05 Accessory Drive,
Is the FEAD belt in good condition?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
INSTALL a new FEAD belt. TEST the system for normal operation.
C3: CHECK THE FEAD BELT TENSIONER
Remove and inspect the FEAD belt tensioner.

REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (303-05 Accessory
Is the FEAD belt tensioner in good condition?
Yes
GO to C4.
No
INSTALL a new FEAD belt tensioner. TEST the system for normal operation.
C4: CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR MECHANICAL NOISE
Rotate the generator pulley by hand.
1
Does the generator rotor shaft rotate smoothly and quietly?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
C5: CHECK THE FEAD BELT IDLER PULLEYS
Rotate the FEAD belt idler pulleys by hand.
1
Do the FEAD belt idler pulleys rotate smoothly and quietly?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
INSTALL new FEAD belt idler pulleys as necessary.
REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (303-05
Accessory Drive, Removal and Installation).
C6: CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR ELECTRICAL NOISE
Install the FEAD belt pulleys and belt.
1
2
Start and run the engine at 1500 rpm. Apply a high electrical load to the battery.
Is the noise only heard with the high electrical load applied?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
CHECK the air conditioning compressor.
REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (412-03 Air
Conditioning, Removal and Installation).
CHECK the power steering pump.
REFER to: Power Steering Pump - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (211-02 Power Steering,
C7: ELIMINATE THE GENERATOR AS THE CAUSE OF ELECTRICAL NOISE
1
2
Start and run the engine at 1500 rpm.
Is the noise still present?

Yes
CHECK the air conditioning compressor.
REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (412-03 Air
Conditioning, Removal and Installation).
CHECK the power steering pump.
REFER to: Power Steering Pump - Vehicles Without: Supercharger (211-02 Power Steering,
No
PINPOINT TEST D : RADIO INTERFERENCE

TEST
CONDITIONS
D1: CHECK IF THE GENERATOR IS THE CAUSE OF THE RADIO INTERFERENCE
1
2
Turn the radio to the ON position, and select the affected station.
Is the radio interference present?

Yes
GO to D3.
No
GO to D2.
D2: CHECK IF THE GENERATOR IS THE CAUSE OF THE RADIO INTERFERENCE WITH A HIGH ELECTRICAL
LOAD APPLIED TO THE BATTERY
1
2
Apply a high electrical load to the battery.
3
Yes
GO to D3. GO to D3.
No
DIAGNOSE the entertainment system.
REFER to: Audio System (415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information,
D3: ELIMINATE THE GENERATOR AS THE CAUSE OF RADIO INTERFERENCE
1
2

Yes
DIAGNOSE the entertainment system.
REFER to: Audio System (415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information,
No
CLEAN and tighten all mounting points, positive and negative cable connections (including the
hood, luggage compartment lid and engine GROUND straps). INSTALL fuse 5 to the RJB. TEST the
system for normal operation. If interference is still present, INSTALL a new generator.
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Battery Charging

General Procedures
1.
Before charging a discharged battery inspect and repair the

following conditions, if necessary:
Loose accessory drive belt.
Pinched or grounded wiring harness to the generator or
voltage regulator.
Loose wiring harness connections at the generator or
voltage regulator.
Loose or corroded connections at battery, headlamp
panel junction wire or engine ground.
Carry out generator charging checks.
Excessive battery quiescent drain due to:
1. engine compartment, load space, glove
compartment and courtesy lamps remaining on
(switch damaged or out of adjustment, glove
compartment left open).
Battery Charging - Maintenance-Free Batteries

WARNINGS:
KEEP BATTERIES OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. BATTERIES CONTAIN SULPHURIC ACID, AVOID CONTACT WITH
SKIN, EYES OR CLOTHING. SHIELD YOUR EYES WHEN WORKING NEAR THE BATTERY TO PROTECT AGAINST POSSIBLE
SPLASHING OF THE ACID SOLUTION. IN CASE OF ACID CONTACT WITH SKIN OR EYES, FLUSH IMMEDIATELY WITH
WATER FOR A MINIMUM OF 15 MINUTES AND SEEK PROMPT MEDICAL ATTENTION. IF ACID IS SWALLOWED, CALL A
PHYSICIAN IMMEDIATELY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
BATTERIES NORMALLY PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GASES WHICH CAN CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY, THEREFORE DO NOT
ALLOW FLAMES, SPARKS, OR LIGHTED SUBSTANCES TO COME NEAR THE BATTERY. WHEN CHARGING OR WORKING
NEAR A BATTERY ALWAYS SHIELD YOUR FACE AND PROTECT YOUR EYES . ALWAYS PROVIDE ADEQUATE
VENTILATION. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1.
Cold batteries will not readily accept a charge. Therefore,

batteries should be allowed to warm up approximately to 15
degrees centigrade (59 degrees Fahrenheit) before charging.
This may require 12 hours at room temperature depending on
the initial temperature and battery size.
2.
A battery which has been completely discharged may be slow to

accept a charge initially, and in some cases may not accept a
charge at the normal charger setting. When batteries are in this
condition, charging can be started by use of the 'dead battery'
switch which is fitted to certain types of battery chargers. Follow
the manufacturer's instructions when carrying out this
procedure.
3.
To determine whether a battery is accepting a charge, follow the

manufacturer's instructions for the charger.
4.
After releasing dead battery switch and with the charger still
operating, measure battery voltage. If the voltage is 12 volts or
higher, the battery may be accepting a charge and may be
capable of being recharged. If the temperature of the battery is
below 15 degrees centigrade (59 degrees Fahrenheit) the
battery may require charging for up to two hours before the
charge rate is high enough to show on the charger ammeter. It
has been found that all un-damaged batteries can be charged
by this procedure. If a battery cannot be charged by this
procedure, it should be replaced.
5.
A rapid recharge procedure has been developed for recharging

batteries that have passed the 'No-Load Test' and only need a
recharge. This can be due to non start battery failures or battery
discharged in vehicle due to key-off loads.
6.
The battery can be rapidly recharged by using either of the

following methods:
1. Perform a two hour charge using a constant current of
20 amps (manual setting on the charger).
2. Perform a two hour charge using a constant voltage
(automatic setting on the charger).
Quiescent Current Measurement

1.
NOTE: The following quiescent current measurement does not

apply to vehicles with the Tracker system installed. If the
vehicle is installed with the tracker system the quiescent current
may be up to 14 milliamps higher. If non-jaguar approved
accessories are installed the following measurements may not
apply.
Procedures).
2.
Check the vehicle off-load battery voltage. If below 12.5 volts,

install a fully charged slave battery for the tests and recharge
the vehicle battery.
3.
Connect a 'shorting' link lead between the negative battery

terminal and the negative battery lead, before connecting a
suitable ammeter to the battery (with the negative test lead clip
to the negative battery terminal, and the positive test lead clip
to the battery negative lead).
4.
NOTE: Make sure that all electrical accessories are switched off.
Operate the key fob unlock button to disarm the vehicle security
system.
Select ignition mode (without starting the engine) for
around 10 seconds.
Deselect ignition mode, close doors, hood & luggage
compartment lid latch.
Lock vehicle.
After 15 minutes on vehicles with TPMS installed or 4
minutes on vehicles without TPMS installed, remove
shorting link & note ammeter reading.
The quiescent current should be less than 35mA.
Replace Shorting link.
Unlock the vehicle.
Superlock the vehicle.
After 15 minutes, on vehicles with TPMS installed, or 4
minutes, on vehicles without TPMS installed, remove
shorting link & note ammeter reading.
The quiescent current should be less than 35mA.
5.
NOTE: In the unlocked state, the vehicle will take 30mins to

shut down to its min quiescent current.
If intermittent wake-ups are suspected, monitor battery current
continuously
6.
Disconnect the ammeter. Reconnect the battery ground cable.

Procedures).
Battery, Mounting and Cables Battery Specification
WARNINGS:
Batteries produce explosive gases which may cause personal injury. Do not expose the battery to a naked flame.
When charging or working near a battery wear protective clothing and eye protectors. Always provide adequate
ventilation. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Batteries contain sulphuric acid, avoid contact with skin, eyes and clothing. Shield your eyes when working near
the battery to protect against possible contact of the acid solution. In case of contact with the skin or eyes, flush
immediately for a minimum of 15 minutes and seek prompt medical attention. if swallowed call a physician
immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Make sure all electrical systems are off before connecting the battery ground cable. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in damage to the electrical system.
Engine Specification
All
Battery type
Varta T8
Battery
Battery Information
Specification
90 Ah
Battery Cold Cranking Specification
Item
90 Ah Battery Cold Cranking
Specification
800 Amps
Battery Disconnect/Connect Procedures
WARNING: The backup power supply energy must be depleted before any supplementary restraint system repairs
are carried out. To deplete the backup supply energy, first disconnect the battery ground cable, then disconnect the
battery positive cable and wait ten minutes to avoid accidental deployment and personal injury. Failure to follow this
CAUTION: Disconnecting the battery cables will cause all of the electronic control modules to lose all stored
data/fault codes.
NOTE: Following reconnecting of the battery, the engine should be allowed to idle as the stored idle and drive values
contained within the engine control module (ECM) will have been lost. This may cause driveability concern if the
following procedure is not carried out.
Battery disconnect procedure
1. If possible, apply parking brake or alternatively, chock
wheels.
2. If required, record any customer audio and climate
control settings. This also applies to all electronic control
module stored information.
3. Switch off ignition.
4. Open the luggage compartment lid.
5. Release the cover and disconnect the battery ground
cable.
6. If required, disconnect the battery positive cable.
Battery connect procedure

1. Connect the battery cables and tighten to 5 Nm.
Ground cable must be connected last
2. Install the battery cover and close the luggage
compartment lid.
3. Start the engine and allow to idle until the engine
reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Switch the engine off.
5. Restart the engine and allow to idle for approximately
two minutes (this will allow the ECM to learn the idle
values).
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal, select drive and allow
the engine to idle for a further two minutes.
7. Drive the vehicle for approximately five miles/eight
kilometers of varied driving to enable the ECM to complete
it's learning strategy.
8. Reset the audio unit and climate control assembly to
original customer settings.
9. Reset the door window motors.
For additional information, refer to: Door Window Motor
Initialization (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
Description
Battery positive cable terminal retaining nut
Battery negative cable terminal retaining nut
Battery clamp nuts
Nm
5
5
9
lb-ft
4
4
7
lb-in
-
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery and Cables

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Generator
Battery
Remote jump start terminal
BJB (battery junction box)
Starter motor
INTRODUCTION
Electrical power from the battery and generator is distributed throughout the vehicle through a series of junction boxes.
IGNITION MODES
The vehicle has a possible four ignition modes. The modes and systems that are active in each mode are detailed in the
following table:
Off
Exterior lamps
headlamps Dip only
approach lamps
Interior lighting
Preheat - timed in
Ignition Mode
Accessory (Convenience)
Memory functions seat, column etc
On
Exterior lamps fog lamps
directional Indicators
Crank
Stability controls
Manual adjust seat column etc.
Convertible hood
Interior lighting
Wash/Wipe
Heated/Cooled
seat
Adaptive speed
control
Electric park brake - On

Brake lights
HVAC
Adaptive damping
Instrument cluster Exterior lighting auto headlamps, reversing
EMS
TPMS
stand by, clock,
lamps, side lamps, tail lamps
odometer
Hazard warning lamps Auto infotainment previous condition (preset
Instrument cluster dials and
Pedestrian
warnings fuel gauge temperature Protection system
volume), radio standby, phone standby,
gauge lamp check
steering wheel switches
Locking and unlocking
Instrument cluster message center, trip
Windows
Gearshift control
computer
and TCM
Security
Horn
EPB power to disengage (foot
EPB power to
on break)
disengage
Cigar lighter/power socket
Restraints check
-
BATTERY
The battery is located behind a cover at the front of the luggage compartment. The cover is held in place by four retainers.
The battery sits in a tray and is secured with a clamp plate and two nuts.
The positive and negative battery cables are fitted with service loops. The service loops add extra length to the cables and
allow the battery to be slid rearward in the luggage compartment without disconnection.
Remote Jump Start Terminal

The positive battery cable is also connected to a remote jump start terminal. The remote jump start terminal is located in the
LH (left-hand) rear corner of the luggage compartment and can be accessed by removing the air vent trim. Although also
fitted to coupe vehicles, the terminal has been specifically designed to allow a convertible vehicle to be jump started if a
drained battery is experienced when the top is in the stowed condition.
The starter motor power lead is also connected to the remote jump start terminal and is insulated from the battery jump
start cable and the vehicle body by a nylon washer.
The negative jump start connection is a stud located in the spare wheel well. For more information on jump start procedure,
refer to the Owner's Handbook.
Transit Relay
The vehicle is also fitted with a transit relay. This is a disposable device and not for use by the customer. This relay is fitted
in series with the battery and ground. It disconnects the battery from the vehicles ground and thus eliminates quiescent
current drain during delivery. The relay must be removed before delivery to the customer. For more information, refer to the
PDI (pre-delivery inspection) manual.
Battery Monitoring System
The battery monitoring system module measures battery current and voltage, which it communicates to the CJB (central
junction box) over a LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection. The CJB transmits the battery information to the
instrument cluster over the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus. The instrument cluster acts as a gateway
between the medium and high speed CAN bus networks, and transmits the battery condition information to the ECM (engine
control module) over the high speed CAN bus. Based on the information received from the battery monitoring system
module, the ECM will control the output from the generator and request the switching off of electrical loads if necessary.
For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02 Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
CAUTION: Due to the self-calibration routine, it is recommended that all power supply diagnostic testing is carried out
using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system rather than a digital multimeter.
The battery monitoring system module is able to generate DTC (diagnostic trouble code)'s to help diagnose battery or
generator power supply issues. These DTC's can be read using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system. The Jaguar approved
diagnostic system can also be used to implement a battery and generator self test routine.
For additional information, refer to: Battery (414-01, Diagnosis and Testing).
If a fault is detected, the ECM will override the battery monitoring system module.
The battery monitoring system module DTC's can be used to help diagnose battery or generator power supply faults. The
DTC's are stored in both the CJB and the ECM. The Jaguar approved diagnostic system has a process for an automated
power supply diagnostic procedure. The procedure provides a menu driven process to locate a fault in a logical sequence.
The procedure uses the capability of the battery monitoring system and generator LIN bus controlled functions to provide
current flow information and will detect if the battery monitoring system or generator are functioning correctly.
www.JagDocs.com
BATTERY JUNCTION BOX
Mounted on the LH side of the battery is the BJB (battery junction box). The BJB contains three megafuses delivering battery
power to: the starter motor (400 A); the AJB (auxiliary junction box) (175 A) and the CJB (175 A). For more information,
refer to the Electrical Guide.
AUXILIARY JUNCTION BOX
The AJB is mounted on the passenger compartment rear bulkhead and secured by two nuts/studs. The junction box can be
accessed by opening the center panel of the rear seat back. The center panel is secured in position by a single stud at the
top, and hinged at the bottom.
The auxiliary junction box receives electrical power from the BJB via a 175 A megafuse. For more information on the circuits
and systems served by the auxiliary junction box, refer to the Electrical Guide.
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX
The CJB is mounted at the base of the LH A pillar and secured by two nuts/studs. Access to the CJB can be gained through a
removable panel located below the LH side of the instrument panel.
The CJB receives electrical power from the BJB via a 175 A megafuse. A second power supply lead 'daisy chains' off the CJB,
providing electrical power to the power distribution box. For more information on the circuits and systems served by the CJB,
refer to the Electrical Guide.
The CJB also controls the functionality of a number of vehicle systems. These include:
Electric steering column lock.
For additional information, refer to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Description and Operation).
Instrument cluster and panel illumination.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination (413-00 Instrument Cluster and Panel
Illumination, Description and Operation).
Exterior lighting systems.
For additional information, refer to: Exterior Lighting (417-01, Description and Operation).
Interior lighting systems. For additional information, refer to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Description
and Operation).
Active anti-theft alarm system.
Passive anti-theft alarm system.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Theft - Passive (419-01B Anti-Theft - Passive, Description and Operation).
Electric seats.
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Description and Operation).
Electric windows. For additional information, refer to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, Description and Operation).
Wipers and washers. For additional information, refer to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers,
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOX
The power distribution box is located in the LH rear of the engine compartment, beneath a closing panel. The power
distribution box is supplied electrical power from the BJB, via the CJB. For more information on the circuits and systems
served by the power distribution box, refer to the Electrical Guide.
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery

For a detailed description of the battery system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
of the workshop manual. REFER to: (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables)
Battery and Cables (Description and Operation),
Battery and Cables (Description and Operation),
Battery and Cables (Description and Operation).
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Generator
Drive belt
Drive belt tensioner
Generator pulley
Check the security of the generator fixings
Electrical
Generator
Battery
Battery connections
Starter motor
Fuses
Charge warning lamp function
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
Midtronics EXP-1080 User Guide

Carry out the following: -
PINPOINT TEST A : VOLTAGE DROP

TEST CONDITIONS
A1: GROUND CIRCUIT
NOTE: This test checks for high resistance between the battery terminal and the battery clamp
Start the engine, turn on the following:

(1) Air conditioning
(2) Blower fan on full speed
(3) Headlights on main beam
(4) Heated screen - rear
(5) Heated screen - front (if installed)
(6) Heated seats (if installed)
Connect the multimeter between the battery negative

terminal and the battery clamp as shown in picture
below (do not disconnect the battery at this stage)
3
Set the multimeter to read DC voltage and record the
reading
Is reading equal to or below 0.1 volts?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Switch all electrical loads and engine off, return the
vehicle to an ignition off condition. Disconnect the
battery negative clamp, clean clamp and terminal then
reconnect and repeat test GO to A1.
A2: POWER CIRCUIT
NOTE: This test checks for high resistance between the battery terminal and the battery clamp
Start the engine, turn on the following:
1
(1) Air conditioning
(2) Blower fan on full speed
(3) Headlights on main beam
(4) Heated screen - rear
(5) Heated screen - front (if installed)
(6) Heated seats (if installed)
Connect the multimeter between the battery positive

terminal and the battery clamp as shown in picture
below (do not disconnect the battery at this stage)
Set the multimeter to read DC voltage and record the
3
reading
Is reading equal to or below 0.1 volts?
Yes
Carry out midtronics battery test procedure
No
Switch all electrical loads and engine off, return the
vehicle to an ignition off condition. Disconnect the
battery power clamp, clean clamp and terminal then
reconnect and repeat test GO to A2.
2
Reference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Description
LCD screen with main menu
Control panel (key board and power button)
Positive and negative fly leads
Fly leads connection
Temperature sensor
Infra-red sensor (data transfer for printer)
Amp hour
Battery rating (CCA)
Rating units
Battery type
The following steps must be carried out to ensure correct operation of the EXP-1080 during the battery test procedure
Checks
Battery fluid leakage, check for battery fluid leaks or
damage to the battery casing
Action
NOTE: If visible damage to the case is evident do not return
battery under warranty
Replace the battery if there is any battery fluid leaks

evident
Battery vent pipe routing
Check for routing, ensure there are no kinks
EXP-1080 fly lead, condition of clamps
Clean or replace as required
EXP-1080 fly lead connection
Confirm secure connection
NOTE: The Midtronics EXP-1080 is suitable for testing flooded and absorbed glass mat (AGM) type batteries
Typical Values
Amp Hour
12
70
80
80
90
95
90
105
Midtronics Battery Test Procedure
CCA (Cold Cranking Amps

200
760
700
800
800
850
950
950
Rating Units
EN
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
SAE
This midtronics battery test procedure will confirm the serviceability of the battery
1. Connect the fly-lead to the midtronics EXP-1080

2. Connect the fly-leads to the battery terminals
Black lead to negative terminal
Red lead to positive terminal
Confirm the connections are secure
3. The EXP-1080 will power on automatically when connected to a battery, screen below is displayed
NOTE: MAIN MENU SCREEN

4. Main Menu. Select Battery test and press SELECT
NOTE: BATTERY LOCATION

5. Battery Location. Select either, Out of vehicle or In Vehicle as appropriate
Select Next
NOTE: BATTERY RATING

6. BATTERY RATING. Select the correct battery rating from the pre-installed list, (Goto step 10). Or,
To manually enter the correct battery type, specification and CCA rate. Scroll using the arrow keys on the
midtronics panel and select Other from the menu

Select Next
NOTE: BATTERY TYPE

7. Battery Type. Select the correct battery type (Regular or AGM)
NOTE: All AGM batteries are marked (Refer to battery label)
Select Next
NOTE: RATING UNITS

8. Rating Units. Select the correct rating units. Refer to the battery label for correct specification. Options EN,
DIN, SAE
Select Next
NOTE: BATTERY RATING

9. BATTERY RATING. Scroll using the arrow keys on the midtronics panel, select the correct CCA rating (For
CCA refer to battery label)

Select Next
NOTE: TEMPERATURE
NOTE: Ensure that the temperature sensor does not touch any part of the battery or vehicle, this will cause damage not
be covered under the midtronics warranty and will require the unit to be returned to a service center
10. Temperature. Aim the temperature sensor towards the battery casing (Maintain distance of 5cm)
Select Next
NOTE: TESTING
11. Testing. The screen displays clock hand's rotating, the EXP-1080 will automatically advance when test has
completed
NOTE: SURFACE CHARGE

NOTE: If there is no surface charge this step will not show. Go to next step
11a. Surface Charge. Ensure the ignition state is on. Switch on the headlights (high beam) until EXP-1080
shows Turn off headlights then return ignition state to off
NOTE: BATTERY CHARGE

NOTE: If the state of charge is sufficient this step will not show. Go to next step
11b. Battery Charge. Select Before Charging if battery has not been on a recommended mains charger for a
minimum of 6 hours
Select After Charging if battery has been on a recommended mains charger for a minimum of 6 hours
NOTE: DEEP SCAN TECHNOLOGY

NOTE: This test is automated and will show if required. Go to next step
12. Testing. The EXP-1080 will carry out the deep scan test, then automatically advance when test has
completed
Number
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Battery test result
CCA (Measured capacity rating)
Voltage
CCA (Manually entered)
Temperature
NOTE: RESULTS
Test Result
GOOD BATTERY
GOOD - RE-CHARGE
CHARGE AND RE-TEST
REPLACE BATTERY / BAD
CELL BATTERY
UNABLE TO COMPLETE
TEST
Action
Test complete no action required
Charge battery using a recommended mains charger (minimum 50 amp) until charging
complete
Charge battery using a recommended mains charger (minimum 50 amp) until charging
complete. Retest. If the result is the same replace battery
Replace battery. Do Not Recharge
Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test
NOTE: TEST CODE

NOTE: Battery test code, must be given if a battery, starter motor or generator is exchanged under warranty
NOTE: STATE OF HEALTH

NOTE: General health of the battery and its ability to deliver its specified performance compared with a new battery
NOTE: SOC (State Of Charge)

NOTE: BATTERY STATE OF CHARGE
Results. From the result display use the arrow keys on the control panel to view the test code
The test code must be quoted with every battery claim under warranty
Flooded Battery Care Point

If the vehicle is equipped with a flooded battery, ensure the replacement battery is a flooded battery of the same
specification (cold cranking amperage (CCA) / amp hour rating (Ah)) as the original battery
Under no circumstances should you fit a flooded battery to a vehicle that originally had an AGM battery, unless formally
instructed by Jaguar/Land Rover
AGM Battery Care Point

If the vehicle is equipped with an absorbed glass mat (AGM) battery, ensure the replacement battery is a AGM battery
of the same specification (cold cranking amperage (CCA) / amp hour rating (Ah)) as the original battery, unless
formally instructed by Jaguar/Land Rover
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery Disconnect and Connect

General Procedures
Disconnection
All vehicles
1.
Obtain and record the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
Coupe
2.
Convertible
3.
4.
All vehicles
5.
6.
Connect
1.
NOTE: Make sure that both the positive and negative battery
terminals are correctly located when installed.
Torque: 6 Nm
2.
NOTE: This step is only required when installing a new

component.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, reset the
battery monitoring system (BMS).
3.
Door Window Motor Initialization

Refer to: Door Window Motor Initialization (501-11 Glass,
Frames and Mechanisms, General Procedures).
4.
Enter the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
5.
Reset the clock to the correct time.
6.
Start the engine and allow to idle until the engine reaches
normal operating temperature.
7.
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery

Removal
All vehicles
1.
Obtain and record the audio unit preset radio frequencies.

2.
NOTE: Where fitted.

3.
4.
All vehicles
5.
6.
Torque: 5 Nm
7.

correct.
Torque: 5 Nm
8.
9.
10.
Torque: 6 Nm
Torque: 6 Nm
11.
Installation
1.
2.
NOTE: This step is only necessary when installing a new

component.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, reset the
battery monitoring system (BMS).
3.
Door Window Motor Initialization
4.
Enter the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
5.
Reset the clock to the correct time.
6.
Start the engine and allow to idle until the engine reaches
normal operating temperature.
7.
Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Description

Battery positive cable retaining nut
Nm
47
12
lb-ft
35
9
lb-in
-
Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Generator

COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: Installation on supercharged engine shown, installation on naturally aspirated engine similar.
INTRODUCTION
On 5.0L vehicles (naturally aspirated and supercharged), the electrical charging system consists of a 150 A output generator
with an integral voltage regulator. The output from the generator is set by the voltage regulator under the control of the ECM
(engine control module).
GENERATOR
The generator produces power for the vehicle electrical system and maintains the battery in a charged state.
The generator is located at the front right side of the engine and attached directly to the cylinder block and the sump body.
A terminal post on the generator provides the connection point for the battery positive cable. A single pin electrical connector
on the rear cover provides the interface for a LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection with the ECM. A pulley on the
front of the generator is driven at approximately three times engine speed by the accessory drive belt.
For additional information, refer to: Accessory Drive (303-05 Accessory Drive - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
When the engine is running the generator produces an alternating current, which is converted to a direct current internally.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network); N = Medium speed CAN; O = LIN bus
Item
Part Number
Battery
Positive remote charge terminal
Starter motor
Generator
Instrument cluster
8
9
Description
Battery monitoring sensor

The output voltage required from the generator is calculated by the battery monitoring system. For additional information,
refer to Battery, Mounting and Cables (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Description and Operation).
The battery monitoring system signals the required voltage to the ECM via the CJB (central junction box) and the instrument
cluster. The ECM then transmits the required voltage on the LIN bus connection with the voltage regulator in the generator.
The output from the generator is supplied to the battery through the main battery positive cable.
The ECM will over-ride the voltage value requested by the battery monitoring system if it detects a fault in the generator.
The ECM also signals the instrument cluster to display a warning message if it detects a fault with the generator.
Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Generator

Removal
1.

2.

stands.
3.
and Installation).
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.
Torque: 40 Nm
7.
Torque: 12 Nm
8.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the accessory drive belt is correctly located

on each pulley.

damage.
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - General Information Navigation System Map Updates
Map Update Applicability
Vehicle
Pre - 10MY
10 MY
11 MY
XK
DVD
DVD
DVD
XF
DVD
DVD
DVD
XJ
USB
USB
Freelander
DVD
DVD
DVD
Discovery 3
DVD
Discovery 4
External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool
Range Rover Evoque
Range Rover Sport
DVD
External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool
Range Rover (L322)
DVD
External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool External
Range Rover (L405)
-
12MY
13MY
DVD
DVD
USB
USB
USB
USB
DVD
DVD
USB
USB
USB
USB
USB
USB
HD Service Tool
USB
Mapping Regions
Region
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Mapping Area
North America (USA, Canada and Mexico)
Western and Eastern Europe
Japan
Middle East (Bahrain, Jordan, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia and UAE
South Africa
South America (Brazil and Argentina)
Russia
Pacific (Australia and New Zealand)
South East Asia (Malaysia and Singapore)
DVD Map Updates
Vehicles equipped with the 'remote' navigation module are supplied with a DVD map update which is loaded into and
left in the navigation module. Map data is read directly from the DVD. This update can be carried out by the customer.
External HD Service Tool Map Updates
Discovery 4, Range Rover Sport and Range Rover vehicles, equipped with a HDD (hard disc drive) integrated into the
touch screen, are updated at point of service. Dealers are supplied with a set of master pack map update DVD's which
are loaded onto the dealer Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment. The map data is then loaded from the
diagnostic equipment onto the navigation tool hard drive. The map data is loaded to the touch s screen from the
navigation tool hard drive.
The following process should be used to update the map data:
NOTE: The navigation update tool does not need the map data loading every time. This is only necessary when a new
map update DVD is released.
Using the approved Jaguar/Land Rover diagnostic equipment select the navigation update tool.
Select Setup on th navigation update tool.
Connect the navigation update tool to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment using the USB
cable and press Continue proceed.
The navigation update tool will then check the connection.
Select your preferred language from the drop down menu then press Save and Continue Setup to proceed.
When the navigation update tool confirms the initial setup is complete, press Continue to proceed.
The navigation update tool will the return to the main menu screen, select Load Map Data to proceed.
Disconnect then reconnect, the USB cable connecting to the navigation update tool to the Jaguar/Land Rover
approved diagnostic equipment, press Continue proceed.
The navigation update tool will then check the connection.
Insert map update disk 1 into the DVD drive of the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment and press
Continue proceed
The navigation update tool will then read the map data
Map data will then be copied from disk 1 to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Insert map update disk 2 into the DVD drive and press Continue proceed
Map data will then be copied from disk 2 to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Map data is now ready to be uploaded onto the navigation update tool, press Continue proceed.
The map data is now being uploaded onto the navigation update tool.
Map data upload is now complete.
Disconnect the navigation update tool from Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Connect the navigation update tool to the vehicle using the firewire cable.
Select Navigation using the touch screen display soft key.
Select Navigation Setup using the touch screen soft key.
Select Map Change using the touch screen.
Select map region using the touch screen display and press Map Data Update to continue.
The current map data version and the proposed update map data versions will now be shown, Select the
relevant region, using the related touch screen key to proceed.
Select OK to input the licence key using the touch screen.
Input the licence key using the touch screen display and press OK to continue.
Select OK using the touch screen.
The map update will begin.
When the map update is complete a message will be shown in the touch screen, select OK to continue using the
touch screen display soft key. The navigation system will restart with the new map data.
Disconnect the navigation update tool from the vehicle.
USB Map Updates
All Gen 2.1 equipped vehicles are supplied with a USB map updates, these updates can be carried out by the customer.
The following process should be used to update the map data:
Navigate to the touch screen Home Menu screen.
Insert the USB memory stick containing the map data into the vehicle USB port.
Press Continue on the touch screen to proceed with the installation of the map update.
using the touch screen enter the licence code and press OK to proceed.
NOTE: Selecting 'Cancel' returns to the 'Home Menu' screen, the map update will continue to run in the
background
The map update will begin and a message will be displayed in the touch screen display advising that navigation
is unavailable.
Map update progress can be viewed as a percentage of the completed download in the Home Menu screen.
When the update is complete a message is displayed informing the user.
The navigation will restart upon completion of the map update.
NOTE: Remove USB stick immediately
Exit, lock the vehicle and leave for at 15 minutes before using the navigation system.
Japanese Navigation
The Japanese satellite navigation system uses a separate navigation computer module.
The HDD in the ACM/IAM is not used for navigation downloads in this market.
Map updates are supplied in DVD format. The DVD is loaded into the navigation module. Map data is read directly from
the DVD.
Asia Navigation
The Asia market navigation system is an aftermarket unit.
Map updates are supplied in an SD card format. The SD card is loaded into the navigation module. Map data is read
directly from the SD card.
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Audio

System
For a detailed description of the Information and Entertainment System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the workshop manual. REFER to:
Audio System (415-01A Audio Unit, Description and Operation),
Antenna (415-02 Antenna, Description and Operation),
Speakers (415-03 Speakers, Diagnosis and Testing).
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Integrated audio module
Information and entertainment module
Audio amplifier
Compact disc player jammed, not loading
Scratched/dirty compact discs
Speakers
Electrical
Fuses
Audio amplifier
Speakers
3.
4.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Steering wheel switches
inoperative (information and
entertainment system)
Poor audio quality (all
sources)
Display
Display normal
Switch circuit fault
Possible Causes
Display normal
MOST harness
Check MOST harness connectors for
Information and
entertainment system
inoperative
Touch screen
blank or
displaying a
flashing logo
connections loose
MOST harness
connections
contaminated
MOST harness
misrouted
Too many bends
Bend radius
exceeding 25mm
MOST network fault
Action
security
Check MOST harness connectors for
contamination
Check the routing of the MOST
harness
REFER to: Communications Network
(418-00 Module Communications

DTC Index
Information and Entertainment Module
into account.
DTC
B1A5949
Description
Sensor 5volt supply internal electronic
failure
B1D21- Remote Control Switch
11
- circuit short to ground
B1D21- Remote Control Switch

15
- circuit short to battery
or open
U001000
Medium speed CAN

communication Bus no sub type information
U01564A
Lost Communication
With Information
Center "A" - incorrect
component installed
Lost Communication
With Parking Assist
Control Module "A" - no
Lost Communication
With Navigation Control
information
Lost Communication
With Navigation Control
Module - incorrect
component installed
Lost Communication
With Radio - no sub
type information
Lost Communication
With Radio - incorrect
component installed
Lost communication
with audio amplifier no sub type information
Lost Communication
With Audio Amplifier
"A" - incorrect
component installed
Lost communication
with satellite radio
tuner - no sub type
information
Lost Communication
With "Digital Audio
Control Module A" incorrect component
U015900
U016300
U01634A
U018400
U01844A
U018600
U01864A
U019300
U01934A
Possible Cause
Action
Suspect Information and Entertainment Control
Module internal fault, refer to the new module
installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
Steering Wheel Audio
Switch circuit short to
Steering wheel Audio Switch circuit for short to
ground
ground. For steering wheel audio control switch
tests. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Steering Wheel Audio
Switch circuit, short to
Steering wheel Audio Switch circuit for short to
power or high resistance power or high resistance. For steering wheel audio
control switch tests. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
CAN Bus off
Can Bus circuit for fault, if circuit is correct suspect
faulty module, refer to the new module installation
note at the top of the DTC Index.
This is not the factory
Refit original Module/Component or configure new
installed module the stored
module.
VIN does not match
CAN Bus communication
fault
Check Parking Aid Module for stored DTCs. Refer

to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Can
Bus circuit for fault.
No communication

Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to Multi
Media Module for circuit fault.

module.

VIN does not match
No communication

Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to Radio
Module for circuit fault.
module.
VIN does not match
No communication
Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to Power
Amplifier for circuit fault.
module.
VIN does not match
No communication

Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to SDARS
Receiver for circuit fault.

module.

VIN does not match
installed
00
with telephone module
- no sub type
information
4A
With Telephone Control
Module - incorrect
component installed
00
With Digital Audio
Control Module "C" - no
4A
With Digital Audio
Control Module "C" incorrect component
installed
00
With Accessory Protocol
Interface Module - no
4A
With Accessory Protocol
Interface Module incorrect component
installed
00
With Front Controls /
Display Interface
information
4A
With Front Controls /
Display Interface
Module - incorrect
component installed
U0300- Internal control module
00
- no sub type
information
U0300- Internal control module
51
- not programmed
U1A15- Incomplete MOST ring
87
reported by
Information and
Entertainment control
module - missing
message
U1A24- MOST Ring Complete.
00
No Communication - no
U2101Control Module
00
Configuration
Incompatible - no sub
type information
U3000Stored vehicle
55
configuration data does
not match - not
configured
U300087
Control module missing message
U3002-
No communication

Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to Bluetooth
Phone Module for circuit fault.

module.

VIN does not match
No communication

Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to Digital
Audio Control Module for circuit fault.

module.

VIN does not match
No communication

Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to Portable
audio interface module for circuit fault.

module.

VIN does not match
No communication

Power, Ground and MOST Ring circuit to
Infotainment Control Module for circuit fault.

module.

VIN does not match
Car Configuration data is

Information and
entertainment control
module software
System program failure
Missing message
MOST Ring communication
fault
Car-configuration
parameters incorrect
Car Configuration data is

information and
module software
Missing message
Update Information and entertainment control

module software using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system.

diagnostic system.
Clear DTC , Cycle ignition. DTC should not return.

MOST ring for circuit break.
Check and reset car configuration parameters as
required using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system.
diagnostic system.
Clear DTC, Cycle Ignition. If DTC returns update

Information and entertainment control module
software using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Clear DTC, Cycle Ignition, Read
DTCs, If DTC returns suspect Information and
entertainment control module, refer to the new
Index.
Install original module, check for DTCs and refer
81
Number (VIN) - invalid

U019100
Lost Communication
With Television - no
Lost Communication
With Television incorrect component
installed
U01914A

vehicle
No communication with TV
module

VIN does not match
to relevant DTC Index.
Check Touch Screen for stored DTCS.

module.
Audio Amplifier (vehicles with premium audio)
into account.
DTC
B1A0113
Description
Speaker #1 - circuit
open
B1A0213
open
B1A0313
open
B1A0413
open
B1A0513
open
B1A0613
open
B1A0101
B1A0201
B1A0301
B1A0401
B1A0501
B1A0601
B1A0911
Speaker#1 - general
electrical failure
Speaker #2 - general
electrical failure
electrical failure
electrical failure
electrical failure
electrical failure
Short circuit of one or
both front speaker
output - circuit short to
ground
Possible Cause
Action
Front passenger
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front
speaker circuits - high
passenger speaker circuits for high resistance.
resistance
Front driver speaker
circuits - high
driver speaker circuits for high resistance.
resistance
Rear left speaker
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear left
circuit - high
speaker circuit for high resistance.
resistance
Rear right speaker
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rear
circuit - high
right speaker circuit for high resistance.
resistance
Front center speaker
circuit - high
center speaker circuit for high resistance.
resistance
Sub-woofer speaker
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test subcircuit - high
woofer speaker circuit for high resistance.
resistance
General electrical
Carry out the pinpoint test associated with this DTC
failure
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
General electrical
failure
General electrical
failure
General electrical
failure
General electrical
failure
General electrical
failure
Short to ground
Check for additional front speaker DTCs and refer to
DTC Index.
B1A10- Short circuit of one or

11
both rear speaker
output - circuit short to
ground
B1A11- Speaker#11 - circuit
12
short to battery
U2003Fibre optic
98
communication Bus component or system
over temperature
U3000Control module 05
system programming
failures
general memory failure
U3000- Control module - data

44
memory failure
U3000Stored vehicle
55
not match - not
configured
missing message
component or system
over temperature
U3003- Battery voltage - circuit
16
voltage below
threshold
U3003- Battery voltage - circuit
17
voltage above
threshold
U3006- Control module - circuit
12
short to battery
U3006- Control module - circuit
16
voltage below
threshold
Short to ground
Check for additional rear speaker DTCs and refer to DTC

Index.
Short to power
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check all

speaker circuits for short to power.
Component or system Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Clear
over temperature
DTC and re-test/monitor condition.
Software
Re-configure the audio amplifier as an existing control

module, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
incompatibility
system.
The version of the
Local Configuration file
does not match that
expected
General memory
failure
system. Clear DTC, cycle ignition and read DTCs. If DTC
returns, suspect audio amplifier module and install a
new module. Refer to the new module installation note
at the top of the DTC Index.
Data memory failure
system. Clear DTC, cycle ignition and read DTCs. If DTC
returns, suspect audio amplifier module and install a
new module. Refer to the new module installation note
at the top of the DTC Index.
Incorrect car
Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
configuration data
diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC
received
remains suspect the audio amplifier. Refer to the new
module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
Missing message
diagnostic system. Check audio amplifier for DTCs and
refer to the DTC Index. Check CAN network integrity
Component or system Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Clear
over temperature
DTC and re-test/monitor condition.
threshold
threshold
Short to power
threshold

Install a new audio amplifier module, refer to the new
Install a new audio amplifier module, refer to the new
Digital Audio Control Module C (DACMC)
into account.
DTC
Description
B1A56- Antenna - general
02
signal failure
B1A56- Antenna - circuit
11
short to ground
Possible causes
Antenna general signal failure
Diversity antenna amplifier circuit
short to ground
B1A5612
Antenna - circuit
short to battery
B1A5613
Antenna - circuit
open
U200D- Control Module

14
Output Power A circuit short to
ground or open
Diversity antenna amplifier power
U300004
U30004A
U300055
Control Module system internal

failures
Control Module incorrect
component
installed
Control Module not configured

missing message
U300098
Control Module component or

system over
temperature
U3003- Battery Voltage 62

signal compare
failure
short to power
open circuit
Action
Renew the diversity antenna amplifier.
Refer to the electrical guides and check the
diversity antenna amplifier circuit and the
antenna for short circuit to ground.
Refer to the electrical guides and check the
diversity antenna amplifier circuit and the
antenna for short circuit to power.
NOTE: This DTC is always logged in X150 XK
2010 model year.
Repair action is not required.

NOTE: This DTC is always logged in X150 XK
supply circuit short to ground or open
2010 model year.
circuit
Diversity antenna amplifier internal
Repair action is not required.

Renew the amplifier module.
failure
Diversity antenna amplifier internal

system select the vehicle configuration main
menu, select configure existing modules
menu and program the module.
Missing message
Diversity antenna amplifier component
Consider moving the amplifier mounting
or system over temperature
position to prevent unit overheating. Cool
the vehicle interior down by ensuring it is in
the shade and have the A/C on cool. When
cool, clear the DTC and retest. If the
problem persists, renew the amplifier
module.
Mismatch in battery voltage of 2 volts Refer to the electrical guides and check that
or more for longer than 1 minute,
power supply voltage at Digital Audio
between the measured battery voltage Control Module C and Rear Junction Box is
at the Digital Audio Control Module C not different by more than 2 volts. Rectify as
and the battery voltage signal sent
required.
from the Rear Junction Box.
incorrect component installed
The module has been installed to a
vehicle not configured to accept it
Diversity antenna amplifier not
configured correctly
Integrated Audio Module
into account.
DTC
Description
B1B69- 12 Volt supply circuit
15
- circuit short to
battery or open
B1B69- 12 Volt supply circuit
11
- circuit short to
ground
B1D19- Compact disc unit 16
threshold
commanded position
not reachable
no operation
Possible Cause
- short to power, high

antenna power supply circuit for short to power and
resistance
high resistance.
Antenna power supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
- short to ground
antenna power supply circuit for short to ground.
threshold
Commanded position not
reachable
No operation
B1A01- Speaker #1 - circuit

11
short to ground
short to battery
12
1A
resistance below
threshold
1B
resistance above
threshold
1C
Front driver speaker circuits

11
short to ground
Front passenger speaker

12
short to battery
1A
resistance below
threshold
1B
resistance above
threshold
1C

11
short to ground
12
short to battery
1A
resistance below
threshold
1B
resistance above
threshold
1C
Action
Antenna power supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
- short to ground
- short to power
- resistance below threshold

- resistance above threshold

- voltage out of range
circuits - short to ground
circuits - short to power

circuits - resistance below

threshold
circuits - resistance above
threshold
circuits - voltage out of
range
Rear left speaker circuits short to ground
Rear left speaker circuits short to power
Rear left speaker circuits resistance below threshold
Rear left speaker circuits -

Rear left speaker circuits -

11
short to ground
12
short to battery
1A
resistance below
threshold
13
open
Rear right speaker circuits -

1C
short to ground
short to power
resistance below threshold

Install a new integrated audio module, refer to the

new module installation note at the top of the DTC
Index.
Index.
Index.
front driver speaker circuits for short to ground.
front driver speaker circuits for short to power.
system.
system.
system.
front passenger speaker circuits for short to
ground.
front passenger speaker circuits for short to power.
system.
system.
system.
left speaker circuits for short to ground.
left speaker circuits for short to power.
system.
system.
system.
right speaker circuits for short to ground.
right speaker circuits for short to power.
system.
system.
B1D7811
B1D7812
B1D7813
B1D7911
B1D7912
B1D7913
B113411
B113412
B113413
U300049
U300055
U300087
Auxiliary input circuit short to

ground
Auxiliary input circuit short to
battery
Auxiliary input circuit open
Microphone input circuit short to
ground
Microphone input circuit short to
battery
Microphone input circuit open
Phone input - circuit
short to ground
short to battery
open
Control module internal electronic
failure
Stored vehicle
configuration data
does not match - not
configured
Control module missing message
component or system
over temperature
U3003Battery voltage 62
signal compare
failure
Auxiliary input circuit - short
to ground
Auxiliary input circuit - short
to power
Auxiliary input circuit - high
resistance
Microphone input circuit short to ground
Microphone input circuit -
short to power
system.
Auxiliary input circuits for short to ground.
Auxiliary input circuits for short to power.
Auxiliary input circuits for high resistance.
microphone input circuits for short to ground.
microphone input circuits for short to power.
Microphone input circuit -

high resistance
microphone input circuits for high resistance.
Phone input circuit - short to
ground
phone input circuits for short to ground.
Phone input circuit - short to
power
phone input circuits for short to power.
Phone input circuit - high
resistance
phone input circuits for high resistance.
Suspect the integrated audio module, refer to the
Index.
Incorrect car configuration
data received
DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains suspect the
integrated audio module, refer to the new module
installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
Missing message
manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
integrated audio module for DTCs and refer to the
DTC Index. Check CAN network integrity using the
Component or system over Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
temperature
Clear DTC and re-test/monitor condition.
Mis-match of battery
voltage, of 2 volts or lower,
between integrated audio
system.
module and Auxiliary
Junction Box
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT TESTS
TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
1
Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2
Wait one minute for the supplemental restraints system back-up power to dissipate.
Disconnect the information and entertainment module connector, IP087.

Information and entertainment module connector, IP087 pin 07, harness side
GROUND
Is the resistance 5036.71 ohms?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A8.
A2: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL MUTE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1
PRESS and HOLD the MUTE switch

GROUND

Yes
GO to A3.
No
Install a new steering wheel audio control switch assembly.
REFER to: Steering Wheel Audio Controls (415-01A Audio Unit, Removal and Installation).
A3: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SOURCE SWITCH CIRCUIT
PRESS and HOLD the SOURCE switch
1
2

GROUND
Yes
GO to A4.
No
A4: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SEEK DOWN SWITCH CIRCUIT
1
OPERATE and HOLD the SEEK DOWN switch

GROUND
Yes
GO to A5.
No
A5: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SEEK UP SWITCH CIRCUIT
OPERATE and HOLD the SEEK UP switch
1

GROUND
Yes
GO to A6.
No
A6: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL VOLUME + SWITCH CIRCUIT
OPERATE and HOLD the VOLUME + switch
1

GROUND
Yes
GO to A7.
No
A7: CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL VOLUME - SWITCH CIRCUIT
OPERATE and HOLD the VOLUME - switch
1

GROUND
Yes
No fault is indicated with the steering wheel audio control switches or circuit. Check the integrity
of all connections, TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Disconnect the clockspring connector IP042.
1

Clockspring connector IP042, pin 03, component side
Clockspring connector IP042, pin 06, component side

Yes
GO to A13.
No
GO to A9.
1
Disconnect the clockspring connector SW001.

Clockspring connector SW001, pin 04, harness side

Yes
INSTALL a new clockspring.
REFER to: Clockspring (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and Installation).
No
GO to A10.
1
Disconnect the steering wheel audio control switch connector SW003.

Audio control switch connector SW003, pin 04, component side
Audio control switch connector SW003, pin 01, component side

Yes
GO to A11.
No
Install a new steering wheel audio control switch.
1
Audio control switch connector SW003, pin 01, harness side
Yes
REPAIR the circuit - audio control switch connector SW003, pin 01 to clockspring connector
normal operation.
No
GO to A12.
1
Audio control switch connector SW003, pin 04, harness side
Yes
REPAIR the circuit - audio control switch connector SW003, pin 04 to clockspring connector
normal operation.
No
No fault is indicated with the steering wheel audio control switches or circuit. Check integrity of
all connections and TEST system for normal operation.
1
Clockspring connector IP042, pin 03, harness side
Information and entertainment module connector IP087, pin 07, harness side
Yes
REPAIR the circuit - clockspring connector IP042, pin 03 to information and entertainment
module connector IP087, pin 07. For additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST
the system for normal operation.
No
GO to A14.
1
Clockspring connector IP042, pin 06, harness side
GROUND point G40AR/1
Yes
REPAIR the circuit - clockspring connector IP042, pin 06 to GROUND point G40AR/1. For
additional information, refer to the wiring diagrams. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
No fault is indicated with the steering wheel audio control switches or circuit. Check integrity of
all connections and TEST system for normal operation.
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Cellular

Phone
For a detailed description of the telephone system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Cellular Phone (419-08 Cellular Phone, Description and Operation).

NOTE: Prior to starting any diagnostics, ensure that the customer handset is on the Jaguar Approved Phone List (as
found in the vehicle technology information on the external Jaguar website). If the customer handset is not on the
approved phone list it should NOT be used when carrying out these diagnostics, the technician should test using an
approved handset only.
1.
Verify the customer concern by operating the telephone.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Microphone
Bluetooth antenna
Electrical
Electrical connectors
Wiring harness for damage or corrosion
Fuses
3.
4.
System/Carrier Concerns - All Systems

Dropped calls, bad connections, noisy audio and other intermittent symptoms usually indicate a system or cellular
carrier concern, and are not the fault of the phone itself. Such symptoms may occur in situations such as the following:
In certain geographic areas (for example: areas of excessive foliage or hills) or at the edge of coverage areas
At the same place each day
At the same time each day
Under bridges, tunnels, in lower freeways, or in congested downtown areas
If the customer phone exhibits any of the above symptoms or symptoms occur under the above conditions, the
customer or the dealer should contact customer assistance at their particular cellular provider/carrier.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Unable to pair
Not Auto Connecting
Poor Quality Audio
No Audio to 3rd Party
No Audio from 3rd Party
No Audio
Action
DTC Index

DTC
Description
B1A5613 Bluetooth antenna
B1D7984 Microphone input
U1A0088 Private Bus circuit

U210000
Control module
U210100
Control module
U300044
Control module
U300045
Control module
U300055
Stored vehicle
configuration data
does not match
U300087
Control module
U300098
Control module
U300362
Battery voltage
Possible Cause
Open circuit
Action
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test blue
tooth antenna circuit for open circuit
Signal amplitude < minimum
microphone input circuit for short/open circuit.
Check integrated audio module for DTCs and refer to
DTC Index.
REFER to: Audio System (415-00 Information and
Entertainment System - General Information,
BT chipset communications
Install a new telephone module, refer to the new
failure
Initial configuration not
complete
approved diagnostic system. If DTC remains, carry
out CAN network tests
Configuration incompatible
approved diagnostic system. If DTC remains,
suspect the telephone module, refer to the new
Data memory failure
Re-configure the telephone module. If the DTC
remains install a new telephone module, refer to the
Index
Program memory failure
Re-configure the telephone module. If the DTC
remains install a new telephone module, refer to the
Index
data received
approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test.
If the DTC remains suspect the telephone module,
refer to the new module installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
Missing message
approved diagnostic system. Check telephone
module for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index. Check
CAN network integrity using the manufacturer
Component or system over
Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
temperature
Clear DTC and re-test/monitor condition for reoccurrence
Mis-match of battery
voltage, of 2 volts or lower,
between telephone module
system
and RJB
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : UNABLE TO PAIR
TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: 'NO PHONE FITTED' DISPLAY
NOTE: Prior to continuing with any diagnosis, ensure that the Customer telephone and level of software is included on
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the bluetooth function is
activated and the telephone handset is placed within the vehicle cabin area.
1
Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is shown on vehicle display.
Is 'No Phone Fitted' displayed?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Locate the connected telephone and if not Customer telephone, disconnect from the system.
A2: TELEPHONE BLUETOOTH DEVICE SEARCH
1
Carry out Bluetooth device search using Customer handset.
Is 'Jaguar' identified in Bluetooth device list?
Yes
Select device from list, then continue with diagnosis.GO to A3.
No
Carry out further Bluetooth device search, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately 20
seconds between searches. If 'Jaguar' still not identified in Bluetooth device list, set ignition status
to OFF, wait approximately 30 seconds and set ignition status to ON. Carry out further Bluetooth
device search, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately 20 seconds between searches. If
'Jaguar' still not identified in Bluetooth device list, contact your local in market support for further
assistance.
A3: TELEPHONE HANDSET ERROR
Check for any error shown on the telephone handset when 'Jaguar' is selected from the Bluetooth
1
device list.
Was an error immediately shown on the telephone handset?
Yes
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt selection, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If error still being displayed, contact your local
in market support for assistance.
No
Enter PIN '1313' then continue with diagnosis.GO to A4.
A4: PIN ENTRY STATUS
Check for successful PIN entry.
1
Was PIN entry successful?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt PIN entry, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If PIN entry is still un-successful, contact your
local in market support for assistance.
A5: 'NO PHONE FITTED' DISPLAY
Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is still shown on vehicle display.
1
Is 'No Phone Fitted' still displayed?
Yes
From the telephone handset, select the connect option for the 'Land Rover' device identified in the
Bluetooth device list. If 'No Phone Fitted' is still displayed, suspect a telephone handset fault.
Carry out Pinpoint test again using known good telephone handset.
No
The telephone is paired and connected to the system. No further action is required for this
symptom.
PINPOINT TEST B : NOT AUTOMATICALLY CONNECTING

TEST
CONDITIONS
B1: BLUETOOTH MODULE PAIRED DEVICE LIST
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the bluetooth and auto
connect functions are activated and the telephone handset is placed within the vehicle cabin area.
Carry out checks to determine if the Customer telephone is shown in the Bluetooth Module paired
1
device list.
Is the Customer telephone in the Bluetooth Module paired device list?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Carry out Unable to Pair Pinpoint Test.GO to A.
B2: CUSTOMER HANDSET PAIRED DEVICE LIST
1
Carry out checks to determine if the Bluetooth Module is shown in the Customer telephone paired
device list.
Is the Bluetooth Module in the Customer telephone paired device list?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
Carry out Unable to Pair Pinpoint Test.GO to A.
B3: CUSTOMER TELEPHONE IN POSITION 1
1
Carry out checks to determine if the Customer telephone is in position 1 in the Bluetooth Module
paired device list.
Is the Customer telephone in position 1?
Yes
GO to B4.
No
Advise Customer that auto connection will only be attempted with the device that is shown in
position 1 in Bluetooth Module paired device list.
B4: CHECK FOR DTC B1A56-13
Using Manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for DTC B1A56-13.
1
Is DTC B1A56-13 logged?
Yes
Carry out remedial actions as outlined in DTC Index. If symptom remains, contact your local in
market support for assistance.
No
GO to B5.
B5: BLUETOOTH CONNECTION
Carry out checks to determine if Bluetooth connection icon is shown on Customer Bluetooth
1
telephone screen but shows 'No Phone Fitted' on vehicle screen.
Is Bluetooth connection icon shown on the Customer handset but 'No Phone Fitted' displayed on
vehicle screen?
Yes
GO to B9.
No
GO to B6.
B6: 'LAND ROVER' AUTHORISATION
NOTE: Some handsets may require operator intervention to manually authorise connection.
1
Carry out checks to determine if 'Land Rover' is authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone
device list menu.
Is 'Land Rover' authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone device list menu?
Yes
GO to B7.
No
Advise customer that 'Land Rover' needs to be authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone
device list menu, or operator intervention may be required to manually authorise connection.
B7: SEARCH FOR DEVICES SCREEN
Select the search for devices button on the vehicle display.
1
Does pressing the search for devices button bring up the searching screen on the vehicle display?
Yes
Contact your local in market support for assistance.
No
GO to B8.
B8: CYCLE IGNITION AND CHECK SEARCH FOR DEVICES SCREEN
Lock vehicle (wait 60s) before unlocking and turning Ignition status back to ON.
1
Does pressing the search for devices button bring up the searching screen on the vehicle display?
Yes
No further action required for this Symptom. Possible intermitent fault.
No
B9: PAIRED DEVICE
Check Customer telephone paired device list to establish which device the Customer telephone is
1
connected to.
Is the Customer telephone connected to the vehicle?
Yes
Lock vehicle (wait 60s) before unlocking and turning Ignition status back to ON. If Not
Automatically Connecting, contact you local in market support for assistance.
No
Using the Customer telephone controls, disconnect from the currently connected device and
delete from paired device list. Lock vehicle (wait for 60s) before unlocking and turning Igition
status to ON. If Not Automatically Connecting, contact your local in market support for
assistance.
PINPOINT TEST C : POOR QUALITY AUDIO

TEST
CONDITIONS
C1: MICROPHONE INSTALLATION
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the telephone is placed
within the vehicle cabin area and is connected to the vehicle via bluetooth.
1
Check that the microphone is installed in the correct location/orientation.
Is the microphone installed in the correct location/orientation?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
Install microphone to correct location/orientation.
C2: SIGNAL STRENGTH
1
Check the signal strength displayed on the telephone handset.
Are at least two signal strength bars shown on the telephone handset display?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
Suspect GSM Network issue. This can explain intermittent audio and dropped calls, and the
inability to initiate calls.
C3: POOR AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY ONLY
1
Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is poor audio from the Third Party only.
Is the poor audio from the Third Party only?
Yes
Suspect GSM Network issue. This can explain intermittent audio and dropped calls, and the
inability to initiate calls.
No
GO to C4.
C4: POOR AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY ONLY
1
Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is poor audio to the Third Party only.
Is the poor audio to the Third Party only?
Yes
Check and install a new microphone as necessary.
No
GO to C5.
C5: POOR AUDIO WITH VEHICLE STATIONARY
1
Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is poor audio when the vehicle is
stationary only.
Is the poor audio when the vehicle is stationary only?
Yes
Check and install a new microphone as necessary.
No
GO to C6.
C6: THIRD PARTY MOVING VEHICLE
Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if the Third Party is in a moving vehicle.
1
Is the Third Party in a moving vehicle?
Yes
There are limitations to the way the system can improve audio, and in this situation it is not
possible to determine the source of the audio degradation.
No
GO to C7.
C7: CUSTOMER HEARING ECHO
Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if the Customer is hearing an echo.
1
Is the Customer hearing an echo?
Yes
Echo from the Third Party is not vehicle failure, it is the Third Party set-up. No further action
is required for this symptom.
No
PINPOINT TEST D : NO AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY

TEST CONDITIONS
D1: MICROPHONE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Using the Manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for any logged microphone
1
DTCs in Audio Front Control module.
Is DTC B1D79-01 logged?
Yes
Carry out diagnosis of electrical failure as advised in Action column of DTC Index.
No
PINPOINT TEST E : NO AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY

TEST CONDITIONS
E1: 'IN CALL' DISPLAY
Carry out checks to determine if 'In Call' is shown on the vehicle display.
1
Is vehicle display showing 'In Call'?
Yes
No
Call has ended. No further action is required for this symptom.
PINPOINT TEST F : NO AUDIO

TEST CONDITIONS
F1: AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY
Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the Third Party.
1
Is there Audio from the Third Party?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
Refer to the 'No Audio From Third Party' Pinpoint test.GO to E.
F2: AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY
Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio to the Third Party.
1
Is there Audio to the Third Party?
Yes
GO to F3.
No
Refer to the 'No Audio To Third Party' Pinpoint test.GO to D.
F3: CD OR RADIO AUDIO
Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the CD or Radio.
1
Is there Audio from the CD or Radio?
Yes
GO to F4.
No
Suspect MOST ring fault, refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check/rectify MOST ring as
necessary.
F4: TELEPHONE HANDSET AUDIO
Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the telephone handset.
1
Is there Audio from the telephone handset?
Yes
Ensure vehicle is parked. Disconnect and reconnect handset. If issue not resolved, contact
your local in market support for assistance.
No
Contact you local in market support for assistance.
Audio Unit Torque Specifications
Item
Amplifier to bracket - screw
Audio/CD module and climate control module assembly to instrument panel - bolt
Audio/CD and climate control modules to assembly bracket - bolt
Audio/CD and climate control modules to assembly bracket - screw
Radio frequency interference suppressor to engine cover bracket - bolt
Steering wheel audio controls - bolt
Nm lb-ft lb-in
2.5
22
3
27
3
27
2.5
22
10
7
88
3.5 2.5
31
Audio Unit - Audio System

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Touch Screen Display (TSD)
Remote audio switches
Auxiliary Universal Serial Bus (USB) unit (from 2009 Model Year (MY))
Auxiliary input panel (from 2009 MY)
Information and entertainment Module
INTRODUCTION
The audio system contains the following functions:
Six disc CD autochanger.
AM/FM tuner.
Interface Protocol Option Devices (iPod) and USB connectivity (from 2009 MY).
The audio system is available in two versions, standard and premium. The standard audio system uses an internal amplifier
to drive the system speakers. The premium system uses an external amplifier and subwoofer assembly to drive the
speakers.
For additional information, refer to: Speakers (415-03 Speakers, Description and Operation).
Control of the audio system is via the integrated control panel and the TSD, located in the center of the instrument panel,
and the remote audio switches on the steering wheel.
Control signals from the integrated control panel are relayed on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus to the
information and entertainment module. The information and entertainment module relays the control signals to the rest of
the audio system on the Media Orientated System Transport (MOST) ring. The information and entertainment module is the
timing master for the MOST ring and also hosts a gateway function between the medium speed CAN bus and the MOST ring.
On premium audio systems the audio signals are sent on the MOST ring from the integrated audio module to the amplifier.
The control signal from the remote audio switches to the information and entertainment module consists of an analogue
voltage from a resistive ladder.
The iPod and USB connectivity allows audio files on portable media players and mass storage devices (i.e. portable audio
devices) to be played through the speakers of the audio system. The audio system supports portable audio devices with a
storage capacity up to 256 GB (approximately 65,000 music tracks).
The iPod and USB connectivity is provided by:
An auxiliary input panel, installed in the cubby box of the floor console.
An auxiliary USB unit, attached to the RH rear quarter panel, behind the trim of the luggage compartment.
The auxiliary input panel provides the interface between the portable audio device and the vehicles audio system. An iPod
port and a USB port are located in the top of the auxiliary input panel, underneath a protective rubber cover. An iPod
connector lead is supplied with the vehicle. Portable audio devices can be connected to both ports at the same time.
The iPod and USB ports both incorporate a charging function. The maximum charging current supplied is 500 ma.
Auxiliary Input Panel
Item
Part Number
Description
USB port
iPod port
iPod Connector Lead
The auxiliary USB unit translates the electronic signals from the auxiliary input panel into optical signals and transmits them
on the MOST ring.
Operation of the portable audio device is controlled from the TSD via the integrated audio module. For road safety reasons,
the normal control interface of the portable device is disabled when it is plugged into the auxiliary input panel, and it can
only be controlled from the TSD.
Portable Audio Device Selection on TSD
Some MP3 players have a file system that is not supported by the audio system. To use one of these MP3 players with the
audio system, the MP3 player must be set to USB Removable Device mode or Mass Storage Device mode (see the MP3
player manufacturers information for further details). Only files that have been added to the MP3 player in these modes can
be played on the audio system.
A number of other vehicle systems are operated from the TSD and the integrated control panel, or have inputs into the audio
system. These include:
Air conditioning system.
For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (412-03 Air Conditioning, Description and Operation).
Navigation.
For additional information, refer to: Navigation System (419-07 Navigation System, Description and Operation).
Parking aid.
For additional information, refer to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Description and Operation).
Telephone.
For additional information, refer to: Cellular Phone (419-08 Cellular Phone, Description and Operation).
Software in the information and entertainment module generates the graphics for the TSD.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - STANDARD AUDIO SYSTEM (UP TO 2009 MY)

NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; P = MOST ring
Item
Part Number
Description
Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB)
TSD
To speakers
Clock spring
CONTROL DIAGRAM - STANDARD AUDIO SYSTEM (FROM 2009 MY)

Item
Part Number
Description
AJB
TSD
Auxiliary USB unit
To speakers
Auxiliary input panel
Clock spring
10
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM (UP TO 2009 MY)

Item
Part Number
Description
AJB
TSD
Audio amplifier
To speakers
Clock spring
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM (FROM 2009 MY)

Item
Part Number
Description
AJB
TSD
To speakers
Audio amplifier
Auxiliary USB unit
Auxiliary input panel
Clock spring
10
11
Audio Unit - Audio System

REFER to: Audio System (415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Audio Unit - Amplifier

Removal
NOTE: The component is situated in the passenger footwell. LHD is illustrated the procedure to remove the component
on a RHD vehicle is similar.
1.
Remove the instrument panel assembly.

2.
3.
Remove the heater duct.

CAUTION: Make sure the wiring harness and electrical

connectors are not damaged during the carpet release.
4.
5.
Remove the subwoofer cover.

Remove the 4 bolts.
CAUTION: Cover fibre optic cable connectors to minimise

dust ingress and avoid bending the cables in a radius of less
than 30 mm.
Carefully disconnect the MOST connector.
6.
Remove the amplifier.

Installation
1.
Install the amplifier.
2.

Connect the MOST connector.
3.

4.

depressed.
Install the carpet.
5.
Install the heater duct.

Install the lampholder.
6.
Install the instrument panel assembly.

Audio Unit - Audio Unit

Removal
NOTE: This component is easily recognised as a CD multichanger, it is however an audio module and links to the MOST.
1.

Specifications).
2.
Remove the navigation screen module.

For additional information, refer to: Navigation System Display
Module (419-07 Navigation System, Removal and Installation).
3.
Release the audio/CD module and climatic control

assembly.
Remove the 4 module bracket Torx bolts.
4.

Separate the climatic control and audio/CD module
from the module bracket.
Remove 2 Torx screws securing the
navigation screen to the climatic control
assembly.
5.
Remove the CD unit.

Installation
1.
NOTE: Carefully check the CD access slot in the climatic control

assembly is aligned to the CD unit after tightening the screws.
This is a visual check only, do not attempt to probe the CD unit
with a sharp object or load a CD .
Carefully install the audio/CD module to the climatic control
assembly.
Tighten the Torx screws.
2.
Install the climatic control assembly and audio/CD module to

the module bracket.
Install and tighten the navigation screen Torx screws.
Install the CD module bracket Torx bolts and tighten to 6
Nm (4 lb.ft).
Install the climatic control assembly Torx bolts and
tighten to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
3.
Install the navigation screen module.

4.

Specifications).
5.
Audio Unit - Steering Wheel Audio Controls

Removal
NOTE: This procedure is identical to the removal of the steering wheel speed control switch.
1.
Remove the steering wheel switch assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Speed Control Switch (31003 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
Installation
1.

For additional information, refer to: Speed Control Switch (31003 Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
Audio Unit - Satellite Radio Tuner

Removal
Coupe
1.
Convertible
2.
3.
All vehicles
4.
5.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
2.
NOTE: If a new component is installed, a link lead

must be installed to the module in the position
shown.
Information and Entertainment System - Audio Input Control Module

This section of the manual concerns diagnostic procedures for the Dension audio input control module. For a detailed
description of the information and entertainment system, refer to the relevant description and operation sections in the
workshop manual
vehicle
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Audio input control module
Audio amplifier module
Touch screen display
Loudspeakers
Electrical
Fuses
Audio amplifier module
Loudspeakers
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, check for diagnostic trouble codes and refer to the relevant diagnostic
trouble codes index
Audio Input Control Module Diagnostics

NOTE: If problems are reported with the audio input control module, prior to further diagnostic checks or replacement
of components, first perform a hardware reset by depressing the reset button for a minimum of two seconds. If
problems persist, refer to the symptom charts below
Performing A Hardware Reset
Symptom Chart - Intermittent Fault With iPOD Playback
Symptom
Intermittent fault
with iPOD
playback
Possible Cause
The connected iPOD unit has
crashed or frozen
Action
See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
test A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD" below

The connected iPOD unit's
battery is not holding charge

and requires replacement
The iPOD dock cable is not
securely installed
The iPOD dock cable is faulty
test A2 "Check The iPOD Battery" below GO to

Pinpoint Test A.
test A3 "Check The iPOD Is Charging When
Connected To The Audio Input Control Module" below
Symptom Chart - Intermittent Fault With Playback From USB Device
Symptom
Intermittent
fault with USB
playback
Not all sound

files on the USB
are played
Possible Cause
Action
The USB memory stick
Check for correct operation by connecting another working
is damaged or faulty
USB memory stick loaded with a compatible test file (files may
be downloaded from Dension website). If fault clears, then the
original USB stick should be replaced. If problem persists,
suspect a fault with the USB extension cable
is incompatible with
the audio input control
module
The USB extension
cable is not securely
installed
The USB extension
cable is faulty
The audio input control
module power harness
is not securely installed
is faulty
Sound files may be
saved in an
incompatible file format
Sound files may be
corrupted
See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test B3
"Check The USB Extension Cable Is Operational And Securely

Installed" below GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Ensure all connectors of the audio input control module power
harness are correctly secured

If problem persists, check and install a new audio input control
Check that affected sound file is encoded in a compatible file
format
Compatible file formats: AAC (up to 320 kbit/s); MP3 (up to
320 kbit/s); MP3 variable bit rate (up to 320 kbit/s); WAV uncompressed files; OGG (up to 320 kbit/s); WMA - except
DRM protected files (up to 320 kbit/s)
Check integrity of affected files and remove any damaged files
from the memory stick
Symptom Chart - No Response From CDC Button
Symptom
No response
when the CDC
button is
pressed
Possible Cause
USB input or iPOD input
faulty
The auxiliary input may be
switched to bypass mode

module power harness is

not securely installed
module power
supply/harness is faulty
Optical cables/connectors
(if fitted) are not securely

installed
Optical cables/connectors
(if fitted) are faulty
Action
First check operation of iPOD playback. If iPOD
operates normally but USB playback is faulty, then follow

diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test B GO to
Pinpoint Test B.
If iPOD playback is faulty but USB playback operates
normally, then follow diagnostic procedures as specified in
pinpoint test A GO to Pinpoint Test A.
See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A5:
"Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary Input Unit Is
Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Ensure all connectors of the audio input control module
power harness are correctly secured
See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint tests
C1: "Check The Integrity Of Power Supply From Vehicle"
and C2: "Check The Integrity And Operation Of The Audio
Input Control Module Power Harness" below GO to Pinpoint
Test C.
Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately to avoid
pinching the cable and with no excessive bends or kinks.
Ensure all connectors of the optical cables are correctly
secured. Replace any damaged or faulty optical cables
and/or connectors as required
If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical cables
are configured in a closed loop so that the optical circuit is
intact
Symptom Chart - iPOD Related Faults
Symptom
iPOD inoperative
Possible Cause
iPOD configured or
connected incorrectly
iPOD does not operate
and in-car display shows
"99" on the screen
The connected iPOD
unit has crashed or

frozen
The connected iPOD
Action
If iPOD playback is faulty but USB playback
operates normally, then follow diagnostic procedures

as specified in pinpoint test A GO to Pinpoint Test A.
See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD playback drops

out and system reverts
to radio input
unit's battery is flat and

requires charging
The connected iPOD
unit's battery is not
holding charge and
requires replacement
The iPOD unit is not
compatible with the
audio input control
module
USB input or iPOD
input faulty
The connected iPOD
unit has crashed or

frozen
The connected iPOD
requires charging
The connected iPOD
holding charge and
The auxiliary input unit
is faulty
iPOD unit will not
charge when connected
to the audio input control
module
iPOD unit keeps cutting

out and rebooting
Unable to select specific

content on the iPOD
(ie: an individual artist,
album or song)
iPOD not recognised
when connected
compatible with the

audio input control
module
The iPOD dock cable
The iPOD dock cable
is faulty
compatible with the
audio input control
module
The iPOD dock cable
The iPOD dock cable
is faulty
The connected iPOD
requires charging
The connected iPOD
holding charge and
Content/sound files
corrupted or
incompatible with the
iPOD
The connected iPOD
unit has crashed or
frozen
USB input or iPOD
input faulty
The auxiliary input may
be switched to bypass
mode
is faulty
A2 "Check The iPOD Battery" below GO to Pinpoint

Test A.
A4 "Check The iPOD Is Compatible With The Audio

Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
operates normally but USB playback is faulty, then

follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Pinpoint Test A.
Test A.
A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary Input Unit"

below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
A3 "Check The iPOD Is Charging When Connected

To The Audio Input Control Module" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
A3 "Check The iPOD Is Charging When Connected

To The Audio Input Control Module" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
Test A.
Check if files/content can be accessed by iPOD
when it is disconnected from the audio input control

module. If fault persists, advise customer to renew or
replace the affected files
Pinpoint Test A.
operates normally but USB playback is faulty, then
follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary
Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary Input Unit"
www.JagDocs.com

The connected iPOD
iPOD connector pins

are misaligned
iPOD not working at
all. If reset, the system
will work for 6 songs
then cuts out again. CDC
button inoperative and
CD sometimes cuts off
for 2-3 seconds
iPOD inoperative.
Display shows no
magazine
iPOD inoperative.
Display shows menu for
CD6 and has to load all
the tracks

requires charging
The connected iPOD
holding charge and
compatible with the
audio input control
module
The iPOD dock cable
is faulty
Optical
cables/connectors (if
fitted) are not securely
installed
Optical
fitted) are faulty
The auxiliary input may
be switched to bypass
mode
Audio input control
module software
requires updating

Test A.

Replace dock cable as required. To ensure optimum
compatibility, the cable with the white mini-DIN

connector - Part No C2S51762 - should be used
Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately to
avoid pinching the cable and with no excessive bends
or kinks. Ensure all connectors of the optical cables
are correctly secured. Replace any damaged or faulty
optical cables and/or connectors as required
If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical
cables are configured in a closed loop so that the
optical circuit is intact
A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary
Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Download and install the latest system software.
Software releases are available on the Dension
website - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
Symptom Chart - USB Memory Stick/Storage Device Related Faults
Symptom
No playback from memory
stick/storage device
No playback from memory
stick/storage device and
in-car display shows "99"
on the screen
Possible Cause
If iPOD operates normally but USB playback is
device configured or
connected incorrectly
Sound files may be saved
in an incompatible file
format
faulty, then follow diagnostic procedures as

specified in pinpoint test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Check that sound files are encoded in a
compatible file format
Compatible file formats: AAC (up to 320 kbit/s);
MP3 (up to 320 kbit/s); MP3 variable bit rate (up
to 320 kbit/s); WAV - uncompressed files; OGG
(up to 320 kbit/s); WMA - except DRM protected
files (up to 320 kbit/s)
Check integrity of sound files and remove any
damaged files from the memory stick
test B5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The
Auxiliary Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to
Pinpoint Test B.
test B6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary
Input Unit" below GO to Pinpoint Test B.
test B4 "Check The Capacity Of The Memory
Stick/Storage Device" below GO to Pinpoint Test
B.
Stick/Storage Device" below GO to Pinpoint Test
B.
Sound files may be
corrupted
The auxiliary input may be
switched to bypass mode
The auxiliary input unit is
faulty
The storage capacity of
Connecting a device to the

USB port is causing in-car
display screen to freeze
Action
Memory stick/storage
the memory stick/storage

device is close to or
exceeds 8 Gigabytes
The storage capacity of
the memory stick/storage
device is close to or
exceeds 8 Gigabytes
Symptom Chart - System Faults
Symptom
System defaults to Audio/CD
Changer
Possible Cause
may be switched to
bypass mode
is faulty
The memory
stick/storage device is
not correctly formatted
Action
test A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The

Auxiliary Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
test A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary
Input Unit" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
test B1 "Check For Correct Formatting" below GO
to Pinpoint Test B.
The USB extension
No sound from
speakers (either
front/rear or
left/right) during
playback from
iPOD/memory stick
Audio system loses
connection to
iPOD/memory stick
during playback
iPOD and radio
playback skips after
unit has been
operating for 4
minutes

installed
The USB extension
cable is faulty
is damaged or faulty
is incompatible with
the audio input control
module
The storage capacity
of the memory
stick/storage device is
close to or exceeds 8
Gigabytes
The connected iPOD
unit's battery is flat
and requires charging
The connected iPOD
holding charge and
compatible with the
audio input control
module
The connected iPOD
unit has crashed or
frozen
is not securely
installed
module power
supply/harness is
faulty
Optical
fitted) are not securely
installed
Optical
fitted) are faulty
The iPOD dock cable
Menu operation inoperative.

Display shows menu for CD6
Poor sound quality during
iPOD or memory stick
playback
is not securely
installed
The iPOD dock cable
is faulty
The USB extension
installed
The USB extension
cable is faulty
Audio input control
module software
requires updating
Music files encoded at
too low bit rate
test B3 "Check The USB Extension Cable Is

Operational And Securely Installed" below GO to
Pinpoint Test B.
Check for correct operation by connecting another
working USB memory stick loaded with a

compatible test file (files may be downloaded from
Dension website). If fault clears, then the original
USB stick should be replaced. If problem persists,
suspect a fault with the USB extension cable
Stick/Storage Device" below GO to Pinpoint Test B.
test A2 "Check The iPOD Battery" below GO to

Pinpoint Test A.
test A4 "Check The iPOD Is Compatible With The

Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint
Test A.
test A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD"
Ensure all connectors of the audio input control
module power harness are correctly secured
tests C1: "Check The Integrity Of Power Supply
From Vehicle" and C2: "Check The Integrity And
Operation Of The Audio Input Control Module
Power Harness" below GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately
to avoid pinching the cable and with no excessive

bends or kinks. Ensure all connectors of the optical
cables are correctly secured. Replace any damaged
or faulty optical cables and/or connectors as
required
If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical
cables are configured in a closed loop so that the
optical circuit is intact
test A3 "Check The iPOD Is Charging When
Connected To The Audio Input Control Module"
test B3 "Check The USB Extension Cable Is

Operational And Securely Installed" below GO to
Pinpoint Test B.
Download and install the latest system software.
Software releases are available on the Dension

website - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
NOTE: The minimum recommended bit rate for high
quality audio reproduction is 192 kbps
Check sound quality when files are played direct
from iPOD. If problem persists, replace content

with higher bit rate files
PINPOINT TEST A : IPOD INOPERATIVE

TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE IPOD
Check if the iPOD has crashed or frozen (it is unresponsive to any control commands)
Has the iPOD crashed or frozen?

Yes
Reset the iPOD or refer to Apple service procedures
No
GO to A2.
A2: CHECK THE IPOD BATTERY
1
Check the charge state of the iPOD battery
Is the iPOD battery flat?
Yes
Charge the iPOD battery for at least 10 minutes either by connecting to the charger supplied
with the iPOD or by connecting to the audio input control module. If iPOD will not charge when
connected to the audio input control module and with the ignition on thenGO to A3.
No
GO to A3.
A3: CHECK THE IPOD IS CHARGING WHEN CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE
iPOD Dock Connector - Pin Configuration
Check that the iPOD is charging when connected to the audio input control module
Ignition switch in position II.
Ensure the iPOD dock cable is securely connected
Does the iPOD charge up while connected to the audio input control module?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
Check the integrity of the iPOD dock cable and its connections. Disconnect the iPOD and check
the voltage readings of the iPOD dock cable using a multimeter (Pin B8: 5 volts/Pin B15: GND).
If a fault is noted, replace dock cable as required. To ensure optimum compatibility, the cable with
the white mini-DIN connector - Part No C2S51762 - should be used. If iPOD will not charge after
replacement, then GO to A4.
A4: CHECK THE IPOD IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE
NOTE: Some of the earlier (pre-2004) iPOD models may not be compatible with the audio input control module. In
order to optimise functionality the audio input control module may require a firmware update and/or connection via the
latest iPOD dock cable with the white mini-DIN connector - Part No C2S51762. See the manufacturer website for
further details - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
NOTE: Some of the earlier (pre-2004) iPOD models may not be compatible with the audio input control module. In
order to optimise functionality the audio input control module may require a firmware update and/or connection via the
latest iPOD dock cable with the white mini-DIN connector - Part No C2S51762. See the manufacturer website for
further details - http://www.dension.com
Determine whether the iPOD model being used is compatible with the audio input control
1
module installed in the vehicle
Ensure the latest firmware updates are installed and an appropriate iPOD dock cable is securely
2
connected
For advice, check details on the Dension website - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
3
Is the iPOD compatible with the audio input control module?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Advise customer that an alternative device is required
A5: CHECK IF THE BYPASS SWITCH ON THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT IS ACTIVATED
Auxiliary Input Unit - Bypass Switch
Check the status of the bypass switch on the auxiliary input unit
Is the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
Toggle the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position. Turn off the ignition and
wait two minutes until the blue LED on the auxiliary input unit is extinguished. Switch ignition back
on the complete the switching process
A6: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT
Check the operation of the auxiliary input unit
1
2
Disconnect the auxiliary input unit from the audio input control module.
Ignition switch in position 0.
Wait two minutes
Install a new auxiliary input unit
Is the iPOD now working?

Yes
No
Check the integrity of the iPOD dock cable and its connectionsGO to A3.
PINPOINT TEST B : USB/STORAGE DEVICE DOES NOT POWER UP WHEN CONNECTED

TEST
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FOR CORRECT FORMATTING
NOTE: The storage device needs to be configured to FAT16 or FAT32 format
Check if the memory stick/storage device is correctly formatted
1
Is the storage device/memory stick configured to the FAT16 or FAT32 format?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Reformat the storage device as required
B2: CHECK FOR FAULTY OR INCOMPATIBLE MEMORY STICK/STORAGE DEVICE
NOTE: Test files may be downloaded from Dension website
1
Check the operation of the USB port on the auxiliary input unit by connecting another working
USB memory stick/storage device loaded with a compatible test file
Does the system operate normally when another USB memory stick/storage device is connected?
Yes
Replace the original USB memory stick/storage device
No
GO to B3.
B3: CHECK THE USB EXTENSION CABLE IS OPERATIONAL AND SECURELY INSTALLED
Check the integrity of the USB extension cable and its connections
1
Is the USB extension cable securely pushed into the USB connection port on the audio input control
module
Yes
Replace the USB extension cable
No
Secure connections and retest
B4: CHECK THE CAPACITY OF THE MEMORY STICK/STORAGE DEVICE
NOTE: The higher the capacity of the memory stick is the longer it takes to register with the audio input control module
and power up. The maximum permitted capacity is 8 Gigabytes
Check the storage capacity of the memory stick/storage device does not exceed 8 Gigabytes
Is the storage capacity of the memory stick/storage device 8 Gigabytes or less?

Yes
High capacity devices may require longer to register and should be allowed up to two minutes to
power up following connection to the USB port. If memory stick fails to power up after two
minutes, suspect a faulty memory stick GO to B2. or USB extension cable GO to B3.
No
The memory stick/storage device exceeds the maximum permitted capacity. Replace with a device
with a capacity of 8 Gigabytes or less
B5: CHECK IF THE BYPASS SWITCH ON THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT IS ACTIVATED
Auxiliary Input Unit - Bypass Switch
Check the status of the bypass switch on the auxiliary input unit
1
Is the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position?
Yes
GO to B6.
No
Toggle the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position. Turn off the ignition and
wait two minutes until the blue LED on the auxiliary input unit is extinguished. Switch ignition
back on the complete the switching process
B6: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT
Check the operation of the auxiliary input unit
1
2
Disconnect the auxiliary input unit from the audio input control module.
Ignition switch in position 0.
Wait two minutes
Replace auxiliary input unit
Is the USB memory stick/storage device now powering up?

Yes
No
Check the integrity of the USB extension cable and its connectionsGO to B3.
PINPOINT TEST C : POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/POWER HARNESS CHECKS

TEST
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY
Remove the retrofitted audio input control module power harness
1
2
Reconnect the original power harness
Are the standard infotainment components on the vehicle operating normally?

Yes
GO to C2.
No
Check power and ground connections to the affected modules. Check for related power or lost
communications DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index. Check fuses and battery charging
system. Rectify as necessary
C2: CHECK THE INTEGRITY AND OPERATION OF THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE POWER HARNESS
1
SELECT APPROPRIATE HARNESS TYPE BASED ON CONFIGURATION OF MICROFIT CONNECTOR
Audio Input Control Module Power Harness - 2x11 Microfit Connector
Reconnect the retrofit audio input control module power harness
Check the voltages of the 2x11 audio input control module microfit connector using a multimeter
Red wire: permanent 12 volts supply
Black wire: GND
Blue wire: switched 12 volts

Audio Input Control Module Power Harness - 2x2 Microfit Connector
Reconnect the retrofit audio input control module power harness
Check the voltages of the 2x2 audio input control module microfit connector using a multimeter
Red wire: permanent 12 volts supply
Black wire: GND
Purple wire: switched 12 volts

Are the voltage readings correct?
Yes
No further action
No
Replace the audio input control module power harness
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to the relevant DTC index
Antenna Torque Specifications
Item
Body earth point - nut
Electric AM/FM antenna
FM ariel splitter module - nut
Nm
9
9
7
lb-ft
7
7
5
lb-in
80
80
62
Antenna - Antenna
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
VICS beacon antenna (Japan only)
Amplitude Modulation (AM)/Frequency Modulation (FM) electric antenna
FM antenna signal splitter
GPS antenna
Bluetooth antenna
INTRODUCTION
The antenna systems on the vehicle cover the following functions:
AM/FM radio reception
Bluetooth connection with the Telephone Control Module
FM reception for the VICS/TMC function of the navigation system
Global Positioning System (GPS) signals.
GPS ANTENNA
The GPS antenna is located in the rear liftgate spoiler.
BLUETOOTH ANTENNA
The Bluetooth Antenna is located centrally behind the rear seat. The antenna is used to connect the telephone control
module to a Bluetooth compatible phone. The vehicle audio system can then be used for making and recieving telephone
calls hands free.
For additional information, refer to: Cellular Phone (419-08 Cellular Phone, Description and Operation).
ELECTRIC AM/FM ANTENNA

The electric AM/FM antenna is located on the rear RH quarter of the vehicle. The antenna is controlled by the Integrated
Audio Module, which supplies power to the antenna motor. The antenna is extended when the radio is switched on and
retracted when the system is switched off or the ignition is switched off.
AM/FM ANTENNA AND AMPLIFIER - 08 MODEL YEAR ONWARDS
Item
Part Number
Description
Antenna
FM amplifier
On all vehicles from 08MY, the AM/FM antenna is located in the rear spoiler. The antenna has a hardwire connection to the
amplifier which is mounted on the inner Left-Hand (LH) side of the lift gate, behind the trim panel. The amplifier is held in
place by a steel strap. The amplifier is connected to the integrated audio module, via the FM antenna signal splitter, by a
coaxial cable.
On coupe models, ground for the antenna amplifier is provided by a strap connected to the lift gate hinge. On convertible
models a block connected directly to the amplifier provides the ground through the vehicle body.
FM ANTENNA SIGNAL SPLITTER

The FM antenna signal splitter is located in the luggage compartment just below the RH rear lamp cluster. The splitter
divides the recieved FM signal between the Intergrated Audio Module and the navigation computer. The navigation computer
uses the FM signal for TMC information
For additional information, refer to: Navigation System (419-07 Navigation System, Description and Operation).
.
VICS BEACON ANTENNA (Japan only)

The VICS beacon antenna is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel adjacent to the windshield. The antenna
receives infra red and microwave data transmissions from roadside transmitters.
SDARS ANTENNA
Where fitted the SDARS antenna is located in the center of the liftgate just in front of the spoiler. The antenna recieves
satellite radio transmissions.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Upto 08 Model Year
NOTE: A=Hardwired; P=MOST; T=Coaxial
Item
Part Number
SDARS Antenna (where fitted)
VICS beacon antenna (Japan)
GPS antenna
AM/FM electric antenna
Description
Navigation computer
7
8
Telephone control module
Bluetooth antenna
10
SDARS module
From 08 Model Year

NOTE: A=Hardwired; P=MOST; T=Coaxial
Part Number
Part Number
Item
1
Description
SDARS Antenna (where fitted)
VICS beacon antenna (Japan)
GPS antenna
AM/FM antenna amplifier
Navigation computer
Bluetooth antenna
10
AM/FM antenna
11
SDARS module
Antenna - Antenna
Antenna - Antenna
Removal
1.
Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
2.
Raise the vehicle on the lift.

3.
4.
Release the antenna.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Lower the vehicle.

5.
Remove the antenna.

Disconnect the antenna cable.
Disconnect the antenna earth strap.
Installation
1.
Install the antenna.

Connect the antenna cable.
Connect the antenna earth strap.
2.
Raise the vehicle on the lift.
3.
Secure the antenna.

4.
Lower the vehicle.
5.
Install the RH rear quarter trim panel.
Speakers Torque Specifications
Item
Front door speaker - screw
Subwoofer speaker - screw
Subwoofer speaker cover - bolt
Subwoofer speaker housing - bolt
Subwoofer speaker housing - nut
Subwoofer speaker housing - screw
Quarter panel speaker - screw
Nm
2
5
5
5
5
5
2
lb-ft
4
4
4
4
4
-
lb-in
18
44
44
44
44
44
18
Speakers - Speakers
COMPONENT LOCATION-STANDARD AUDIO SYSTEM
Item
Part Number
Description
Front RH high range speaker
Front RH mid/low range speaker
Rear RH mid/low range speaker
Rear LH mid/low range speaker
Front LH mid/low range speaker
Front LH high range speaker
INTRODUCTION
The standard speaker system comprises 6 speakers that are driven by the Integrated Audio Modules internal amplifier.
CONTROL DIAGRAM-STANDARD AUDIO SYSTEM

NOTE: A=Hardwired
Item
Part Number
Description
COMPONENT LOCATION-PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM
Item
Part Number
Description
Subwoofer and power amplifier assembly
Center speaker
INTRODUCTION
Premium audio system is a 7 speaker system which is driven by a Dolby Prologic II Audio amplifier. The subwoofer is located
in the passenger footwell behind a false panel inside its own enclosure. The Dolby Prologic II amplifier is attached to the
front of the subwoofer enclosure.
CONTROL DIAGRAM-PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM

NOTE: A=Hardwired
Item
Part Number
Center speaker
Subwoofer
Description
7
8
9
Power amplifier
Speakers - Speakers
Speakers - Front Door Speaker

Removal
1.
Remove the front door trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (50105 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2.
Remove the front door speaker.

Installation
1.
Install the front door speaker.

2.
Install the front door trim panel.

Speakers - Front Door Tweeter Speaker

Removal
1.
Remove the exterior mirror trim panel.

2.
Release the speaker tweeter.

Release from the clips.
Installation
1.
Install the speaker tweeter.

Release from the clips.
2.
Install the exterior mirror trim panel.

Secure with the clips.
Speakers - Subwoofer Speaker

Removal
1.

2.
3.

CAUTION: Make sure the wiring harness and electrical

connectors are not damaged during the carpet release.
4.

Remove the 4 bolts.
5.

Remove the subwoofer.
6.
Remove the amplifier.

7.
8.
Release the subwoofer speaker housing

Remove the 2 nuts.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove both speaker housing support
brackets.
CAUTION: Cover fibre optic cable connectors to minimise

dust ingress and avoid bending the cables in a radius of less
than 30 mm.
Remove the subwoofer speaker housing.
Carefully disconnect the MOST connector.
Installation
1.
Install the subwoofer speaker housing.

Install the brackets.
Install the screws.
2.
Connect the subwoofer speaker housing electrical connectors.

Connect the MOST connector.
3.
Install the amplifier.
4.
Install the subwoofer.

Install the screws.
5.

6.

depressed.
Install the carpet.
7.

Install the lampholder.
8.
Install the instrument panel assembly.

www.JagDocs.com
Speakers - Quarter Panel Speaker 2-Door

Removal
1.
Remove the rear quarter trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Trim Panel 2-Door (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
2.
Remove the quarter panel speaker.

Installation
1.
Install the quarter panel speaker.

Install and tighten the Torx screws.
2.
Install the rear quarter trim panel.

Installation).
Speakers - Quarter Panel Speaker Convertible

Removal
1.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Trim Panel Convertible (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
2.

Installation
1.
Install the quarter panel speaker.

2.

and Installation).
Exterior Lighting Bulbs
Lamp
Number plate lamp
Reverse lamp
Side repeater indicator
Headlamp unit:
Cornering lamp
Dip and main beam projector unit
Direction indicator
Side lamp
Side marker
Rear lamp unit:
Direction indicator
Side marker
Stop and tail
Tail lamp
Fog lamps:
Front fog lamp
Rear fog lamp
Bulb Type
W5WL
LED (non-serviceable)
WY5W
H8
D1S35W
PY21W
W5W
WY5W
PY21W Silver Vision
W5W
P21/5W
W5W
H11 55W
LED (non-serviceable)
Adjustment
Item
Headlamp aim (ROW)
Headlamp aim (NAS)
Fog lamp aim
Adjustment Setting
-1% +/- 0.1%
-0.7%
-2% +/- 0.5%
Item
Headlamp assembly - bolt
Headlamp leveling, front sensor - bolt
Headlamp leveling module - bolt
Headlamp leveling, rear sensor - bolt
High-mounted stop lamp - screw
Rear lamp assembly to gate/lid - nut
Rear lamp assembly to fender - nut
Nm
6
20
4
20
2
2.5
2
lb-ft
4
15
3
15
-
lb-in
53
35
18
22
18
Exterior Lighting - Exterior Lighting

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Headlamp leveling/AFS control module
Light sensor
Description
Rear height sensor
Turn signal indicator repeater lamp (2 off)
Cornering lamp
Headlamp power washer
Front side lamp
Xenon headlamp module
Front turn signal indicator
10
Side marker lamp
11
Auxiliary lighting switch
12
Front fog lamp switch
13
Rear fog lamp switch
14
License plate lamps
15
Reverse or rear fog lamp
16
Side lamp
17
Rear turn signal indicator
18
Side lamp/Stop lamp
19
Rear side marker lamp
20
High mounted stop lamp
21
Lighting switch
22
Front height sensor
23
Front fog lamp (2 off)
INTRODUCTION
The lighting systems are controlled by the Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) and the central junction box (CJB). The two boxes
contain fuses, relays and microprocessors to control the power supply and functionality of the lighting systems.
Driver lighting selections using the left-hand (LH) steering column multifunction switch or the auxiliary lighting switch are
passed to the CJB via the instrument cluster.
The lighting system has an 'auto' lights function which is controlled by the CJB on receipt of signals from the light sensor. The
exterior lights are turned on or off in response to ambient light signals from the light sensor via the instrument cluster.
Two levels of headlamp are available; Bi-xenon or Bi-xenon with Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS). The AFS headlamp
has a swiveling projector module which moves the headlamp beam in the direction of travel. The AFS headlamp also features
a cornering/static bending lamp which illuminates the area at the side of the vehicle when turning into driveways for
example.
The tail lamp is in two parts. The turn signal indicator, side and stop lamps are located in each rear fender. The reverse and
rear fog lamps are located in separate units attached to the liftgate. The locations of the fog and reverse lamps changes
depending if the vehicle is left-hand drive (LHD) or right-hand drive (RHD). The turn signal indicator, side and stop lamps use
conventional glass filament bulbs. The rear fog and reverse lamp use colored light emitting diode (LED).
EXTERIOR BULB TYPE/RATING

The following table shows the bulbs used for the exterior lighting system and their type and specification.
Bulb
Xenon Headlamps - Low/High beam
Front fog lamps - Naturally aspirated
Front fog lamps - Supercharged
Rear fog lamp
Turn signal indicator lamps - Front - Rest of World (ROW)
Turn signal indicator lamps - Front - North American Specification (NAS)
Turn signal indicator repeater lamps
Turn signal indicator lamps - Rear
Side lamps - Front
Stop / Side lamps
Licence plate lamps
Reverse lamp
Cornering lamp
Side marker lamps (front/rear)
Type
Rating
Xenon D1S
35W
Halogen H11
55W
Halogen H3
55W
LED
Not applicable
Bayonet PY21W
21W
Wedge S8W 3457K
27/7W
Capless W5W
5W
Bayonet PY21W
21W
Wedge W5W
5W
Bayonet - Twin filament - P21/5
21W/5W
LED
Not applicable
Capless W5W
5W
LED
Not applicable
Halogen H8
Capless W3W
35W
3W
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX AND AUXILIARY JUNCTION BOX

The CJB is an integrated unit located in the passenger compartment LH side on the 'A' pillar.
The Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB) is located in a central position, behind the rear seat.
CJB Control
The CJB receives inputs from the following switches via the instrument cluster and the medium speed controller area
network (CAN) bus:
LH steering column multifunction switch

Side lamp position
Headlamp position
Automatic (AUTO) position
Timer delay positions
Turn signal indicators
Headlamp flash and high beam
Stop lamp switch
Hazard flasher switch
Sunload/Light sensor.
The following lamps are controlled by the CJB:
Front side lamps

Front side marker lamps
Headlamps
Cornering lamps
Front fog lamps.
AJB Control
The following lamps are controlled by the AJB:
Rear fog lamp

Reverse lamp
Stop lamps
Rear side lamps
Rear side marker lamps
Licence plate lamps
Front and rear turn signal indicators and side repeaters
The AJB is also connected via a hardwired connection to the hazard flasher switch.
Circuit Protection
The AJB and the CJB provide circuit protection for all exterior lighting circuits. The exterior lighting circuits are protected by
Field Effect Transistors (FETs). Operation of the exterior lighting circuits is protected by the FETs which can detect overloads
and short circuits. The FETs respond to heat generated by increased current flow caused by a short circuit.
On a normal circuit this would cause the fuse to blow. The FETs respond to the heat increase and disconnect the power
supply to the affected circuit. When the fault is rectified or the FET has cooled, the FET will reset and operate the circuit
normally. If the fault persists the FET will cycle, disconnecting and reconnecting the power supply.
The CJB and the AJB store fault codes which can be retrieved using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system. The fault code will
identify that there is a fault on a particular output which will assist with fault detection.
Alarm Indications
The exterior lighting system is used for alarm arm and disarm requests.
When the driver locks and arms the vehicle, a visual indication of a successful lock and arm request is displayed to the driver
by a single flash of the hazard flashers. If the vehicle is superlocked then the hazard flashers will flash a second time (200ms
off and 200ms on) to confirm the superlock request.
When the driver unlocks the vehicle, a visual indication of a successful lock and disarm request is displayed to the driver by
the hazard flashers operating twice (200ms off and 200ms on).
If the alarm is triggered, the hazard flashers are operated for ten 30 second cycles of 200ms on and 200ms off with a 10
second delay between each cycle.
NOTE: On NAS vehicles the delay between cycle when the alarm is triggered is 60 seconds.
The alarm triggered hazard flasher operation varies depending on market.
Lights on Warning Chime

When the ignition is in the off mode or accessory mode conditions and the lighting switch is in the side lamp or headlamp
position, a warning chime will sound if the driver's door is opened. This indicates to the driver that the exterior lights have
been left switched on.
The chime is generated from the instrument cluster sounder on receipt of a lights on signal, a driver's door open signal and
an ignition off or accessory mode signal via a medium speed CAN bus signal from the CJB.
Crash Signal Activation

When a crash signal is transmitted from the restraints control module, the AJB activates the hazard flashers. The hazard
flashers continue to operate until the ignition is in the off or accessory modes and then returned to the ignition on mode.
Once this condition has occurred, the restraints control module will cease transmission of the crash signal.
Headlamp Timer
The AJB controls a headlamp timer function which allows the headlamps to remain on for a period of time after leaving the
vehicle. This is a driver convenience feature which illuminates the driveway after leaving the vehicle.
To select this feature, the lighting control switch on the steering column multifunction switch must be in one of the three
headlamp timer positions when the ignition mode is changed from ignition on mode to off mode. The timer function will then
be initiated and the low beam headlamps will be illuminated for the selected timer period.
NOTE: If the lighting switch is in the AUTO position, the headlamp timer will not function when the ignition mode is changed
to off.
The timer period can be adjusted using one of the 3 positions on the lighting control switch on the LH steering column
multifunction switch. The 3 switch positions correspond to timer values of 30, 60 and 120 seconds.
LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCH
Item
Part Number
2
3
Description
Off position
Side lamp position
High beam position
right-hand (RH) turn signal indicator position
Headlamp flash/high beam off position
LH turn signal indicator position
Headlamp position
AUTO headlamp position
Headlamp timer 120 second delay position
10
Headlamp timer 60 second position
11
Headlamp timer 30 second position
The lighting control switch is located on the LH steering column multifunction switch. The switch is a rotary control with
positions for the following lighting selections:
Off
Side lamps
Headlamps
AUTO headlamps
Headlamp timer (3 time period selections).
The steering column multifunction switch also provides for the selection of low and high beam headlamps and also the
headlamp flash function.
The steering column multifunction switch is connected to the instrument cluster by 3 wires. Two wires supply a signal voltage
to the lighting switch and the headlamp timer positions. The third wire is a common ground. Each switch position is
connected to the ground return via resistors which vary the return voltage to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster
senses the voltage returning and determines the switch position selected. The instrument cluster then generates an
applicable message which is sent to the AJB and the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus for activation of the selected exterior
lamps.
The steering column multifunction switch also provides the control for the turn signal indicators. The switch can be pushed
down to select the LH turn signal indicators or pushed up to select the RH turn signal indicators. The switch has 2 positions.
If the switch is pushed up or down gently and held, the turn signal indicators will operate until the switch is released, if the
switch is pushed past a detent, the switch can be released and the selected position will automatically be cancelled when the
manoeuvre is completed. If a turn signal indicator bulb fails, the green turn signal indicator warning indicator in the
instrument cluster will flash at twice the normal rate and the audible ticking will also be at twice the normal rate.
The steering column multifunction switch also has a lane change function. If the switch is gently pushed to either turn signal
indicator direction and then released, the turn signal indicators will flash 3 times and then automatically cancel.
AUXILIARY LIGHTING SWITCH
Item
Part Number
Front fog lamp switch
Rear fog lamp switch
Description
The auxiliary lighting switch is located in the instrument panel, adjacent to the steering column. The switch has 2 buttons
which select the front and rear fog lamps. The buttons are non-latching momentary switches.
The auxiliary lighting switch is connected to the instrument cluster by 3 wires. Two wires supply a signal voltage to the each
fog lamp switch. The third wire is a common ground. Each switch position is connected to the ground return via a series of
resistors which vary the supply voltage from the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster senses the voltage and
determines the switch position selected. The instrument cluster then generates an applicable message which is sent to the
AJB and the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus for activation of the selected fog lamps.
The front fog lamps can only be activated when the ignition is in the ignition power mode and side lamps or headlamps are
active. The rear fog lamps can only be activated if the low beam headlamps are on or if the sidelamps and front fog lamps
are on. A second press of each fog lamp button will switch of the selected fog lamps. If the lighting control switch or the
ignition is changed to the off mode, then both fog lamps will be switched off and will need to be re-selected if required.
HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY
Two types of headlamp are available; Bi-Xenon and Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS). The headlamps are located with a
locating dowel through the upper front bumper bracket and secured with 3 bolts to the front body structure. Bulb
replacement requires the removal of the complete headlamp assembly.
The rear of the headlamp unit has removable access panels which allow access to the bulbs for replacement. A large cover,
which is rotated anti-clockwise to remove allows access to the Xenon D1S bulb. Another removable cover provides access to
the corning lamp bulb and the side lamp bulb, which is retained with a spring clip. A smaller cover can be rotated anticlockwise to provide access to the turn signal indicator bulb and the side marker lamp bulb.
The headlamps have two adjustment screws on the rear which allow for the manual setting of the vertical and horizontal
alignment.
On NAS vehicles the headlamp is regarded as 'Visual Optically Left' aiming. The adjustment screws have to turned equal
amounts to maintain the correlation in the vertical axis only. There is no horizontal adjustment. Refer to the Service Repair
Procedures manual for headlamp alignment data and procedures.
Each headlamp has an integral 16 pin connector which provides inputs and outputs for the various functions of the headlamp
assembly.
The low beam headlamps are switched on when the ignition is in the ignition mode and:
the lighting control switch is in the headlamp position
the lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and a 'lights on' signal is received by the CJB from a 'lights on'
message generated by the AJB.

The low beam headlamps can also be operated by the headlamp timer function.
The high beam headlamps are switched on when the ignition is in the ignition mode and:
The low beam headlamps are selected on or activated via the AUTO feature and the LH steering column multifunction
switch is pushed forward, away from the driver

The high beam lamps will be switched off when:
The LH steering column multifunction switch is moved rearwards, towards the driver.
The low beam headlamps are switched off
The ignition mode is changed to accessory or off mode.
Item
Part Number
Headlamp power washer jet
Side lamp bulb
Cornering lamp (if fitted)
Xenon projector module
Turn signal indicator bulb
Side marker lamp bulb
Cover - Side lamp and cornering lamp
Powerwash hose connection
AFS power module (if fitted)
10
Xenon control module
11
Cover - Xenon bulb
12
13
Side marker lamp bulb and holder
14
Turn signal indicator bulb and holder
15
Igniter electrical connector
16
17
Description
Igniter unit and bulb

Mounting collar
WARNING: The Xenon system generates up to 28000 volts and contact with this voltage could lead to fatality.
Make sure that the headlamps are switched off before working on the system.
The following safety precautions must be followed when working on the Xenon headlamp system:
DO NOT attempt any procedures on the Xenon headlamps when the lights are switched on.
Handling of the D1S Xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment, for example gloves and
goggles. The glass part of the bulb must not be touched.

Xenon bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
Only operate the lamp in a mounted condition in the reflector.
The Xenon headlamp is known as Bi-Xenon because it operates as both a low and high beam unit. The Xenon lamp or High
Intensity Discharge (HID) lamp as they are sometimes called, comprise an ellipsoidal lens with a solenoid controlled shutter
to change the beam output from low to high beam.
NOTE: If the lighting control switch is in the OFF position, the Xenon lamps operate when the high beam 'flash' function is
operated.
The Xenon headlamp system is controlled by the CJB using a control module for each headlamp and an igniter. The control
modules and the igniters provide the regulated power supply required to illuminate the Xenon bulbs through their start-up
phases of operation.
Xenon Headlamp Construction

Xenon Bulb Replacement
Item
Part Number
Description
Locking Ring Removal
Locking Ring Replacement
Mounting ring
Xenon bulb
Igniter
The Xenon headlamp is a self contained unit located within the headlamp assembly. The unit comprises a reflector, an
adaptor ring, the lens, a shutter controller and the xenon bulb, which together is an assembly known as the projector
module.
The reflector is curved and provides the mounting for the Xenon bulb. The bulb locates in a keyway to ensure correct
alignment in the reflector and is secured by a plastic mounting ring. The bulb is an integral part of the igniter and is
electrically connected by a connector located in the igniter unit.
The shutter controller is a solenoid which operates the shutter mechanism via a lever. The shutter is used to change the
beam projection from low beam to high beam and visa versa.
The Xenon bulbs illuminate when an arc of electrical current is established between 2 electrodes within the bulb. The Xenon
gas sealed in the bulb reacts to the electrical excitation and the theat generated by the current flow to produce the
characteristic blue/white light.
To operate at full efficiency, the Xenon bulb goes through 3 full stages of operation before full output for continuous
operation is achieved. The 3 phases are; start-up phase, warm-up phase and continuous phase.
In the start-up phase, the bulb requires an initial high voltage starting pulse of up to 30000 volts to establish the arc. This is
produced by the igniter. The warm-up phase begins once the arc is established. The Xenon control module regulates the
supply to the bulb to 2.6A which gives a lamp output of 75W. During this phase, the Xenon gas begins to illuminate brightly
and the environment within the bulb stabilizes, ensuring a continual current flow between the electrodes. When the warm-up
phase is complete, the Xenon control module changes to continuous phase. The supply voltage to the bulb is reduced and
the operating power required for continual operation is reduced to 35W. The process from start-up to continuous phase is
completed in a very short time.
The Xenon control modules (one per headlamp) receive an operating voltage from the CJB when the headlamps are switched
on. The modules regulate the power supply required through the phases of start-up.
The igniters (one per headlamp) generate the initial high voltage required to establish the arc. The igniters have integral
coils which generate high voltage pulses required for start-up. Once the Xenon bulbs are operating, the igniters provide a
closed circuit for the regulated power supply from the control modules.
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp

The turn signal indicator lamp is incorporated into the outer part of the headlamp assembly, outboard of the projector
module. The turn signal indicator lamp uses a PY21W bayonet orange colored bulb in Rest Of World (ROW) markets. A S8W
27/7W wedge bulb is used in NAS markets.
The bulb is fitted into a holder which connects with contacts in the headlamp housing. The holder is fitted into an aperture in
the headlamp housing and is rotated to lock in position. Access to the turn signal indicator bulb requires removal of the
headlamp assembly.
The turn signal indicator lamps are operated by the LH steering column multifunction switch or by the hazard flasher switch.
The steering column multifunction switch is only active when the ignition is the ignition mode. The hazard flasher switch is
active at all times. When active, the turn signal indicator lamps flash at a frequency cycle of 400 ms on and 400 ms off.
If a bulb fails, the remaining turn signal indicator lamps continue to flash at the normal speed. The applicable turn signal
indicator in the instrument cluster will flash at double speed to indicate the failure to the driver.
Side Lamp
The side lamp is incorporated into the outer part of the headlamp assembly, above the cornering lamp. The side lamp shares
the same housing and reflector as the cornering lamp.
The side lamp uses a W5W wedge fitting, orange colored bulb which is fitted in a holder and connected by wires to the main
headlamp connector. The holder is a push fit into a receptacle in the headlamp housing. The bulb is accessible by removal of
the cover on the side of the headlamp. Access to the bulb and the cover requires removal of the headlamp assembly.
The side lamps are operated by selecting side lamps or headlamps on the lighting control switch. The side lamps are
operational at all times and are not dependant on the ignition mode. The side lamps will also be illuminated when the
lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and a 'lights on' signal is received by the CJB from a 'lights on' message
generated by the AJB.
Side Marker Lamp

The side marker lamp is located on the outer part of the headlamp, adjacent to the turn signal indicator bulb. The side
marker lamp uses an orange colored W3W wedge fitting bulb, which is fitted in a holder which connects with contacts in the
headlamp housing. The holder is fitted into an aperture in the headlamp housing and is rotated to lock in position. Access to
the side marker bulb requires removal of the headlamp assembly.
The side marker lamp is active at all times when the side lamps are selected on using the lighting control switch. The side
marker lamps will also be illuminated when the lighting control switch is in the 'AUTO' position and a 'lights on' signal is
received by the CJB from a 'lights on' message generated by the AJB.
Cornering Lamp - Vehicles without AFS

The cornering lamp functionality differs between vehicles with or without the AFS system. The cornering lamps are designed
to illuminate the direction of travel when cornering at low speeds. The design of the lens projects a spread of light from the
vehicle at approximately 45 degrees to the vehicle axis.
The cornering lamp is incorporated into the inner part of the headlamp assembly, below the side lamp. The cornering lamp
uses a 35W Halogen H8 bulb which is permanently fitted in an integral holder which is located in the headlamp housing. The
holder is connected by a removable harness connector and the holder can be removed from the housing by rotating to
unlock. The bulb is accessible by removal of a cover on the side of the headlamp. Access to the bulb anc over requires
removal of the headlamp assembly.
The cornering lamps are controlled by the LH steering column multifunction switch, when the lighting control switch is in the
headlamps position and the ignition is in the ignition on mode. The cornering lamps are controlled by the CJB which uses
turn signal indicator active and vehicle speed to operate the cornering lamps. The cornering lamps are deactivated if the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) with the turn signal indicators selected on or if the headlamp high beam is active.
Only one cornering lamp will illuminate at any one time. If the LH turn signal indicators are active, the LH cornering lamp will
be illuminated and visa versa, providing the vehicle speed and the lighting control switch positions are correct.
Cornering Lamp - Vehicles with AFS

The cornering lamps fitted to vehicles with the AFS system functions differently to those fitted to vehicle with non AFS
headlamps. The construction and light distribution of the cornering lamp with AFS is as described previously for cornering
lamp without AFS.
The cornering lamps operate using high speed CAN signals from the steering angle sensor which are received by the CJB and
the AFS control module. The AFS control module transmits a cornering lamp on request to the CJB which, if all operating
conditions are correct, activates the cornering lamp.
When the operating parameters of the cornering lamp is achieved, the CJB fades the cornering lamp on using a pulse width
modulation (PWM) voltage over a period of approximately 2 seconds. When the lamp is switched off, the CJB fades the bulb
off by decreasing the PWM voltage in a linear manner depending on vehicle speed and steering angle.
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)

The AFS headlamp is similar in its construction to the Xenon, non-AFS headlamp. The projector module is constructed and
functions as described for the Xenon headlamp but with the addition of the AFS system which allows the projector module to
be moved vertically and horizontally. The AFS system is controlled by a AFS control module which is integral with the
headlamp levelling module.
The AFS headlamp assembly contains an additional carrier frame which provides location for the AFS actuators. The
remaining lamps are as described previously. The carrier frame is attached to the AFS vertical actuator. The projector
module has a central pivot point which allows the module to move horizontally in response to operation of the AFS horizontal
actuator.
The AFS actuators are bi-polar (2 phase) dc stepper motors which are driven by a power output from the AFS power module
located on the rear of the headlamp assembly. Each stepper motor receives its position information from the AFS control
module via the applicable AFS power module. When the actuators are powered to their requested positions, a holding current
is applied to maintain the actuator position.
The actuators do not supply a positional feedback signal to the AFS control module. Each stepper motor requires referencing
each time the AFS system becomes active. When the AFS system is active, each vertical actuator is driven to the low beam
position and each horizontal actuator is driven to an inboard position until a mechanical stop in the actuator is reached. Once
the stop is reached a step counter in the AFS control module is set to zero and the actuator is then powered to the operating
position as determined by the AFS control module software.
The AFS control module receives front and rear vehicle height data from the height sensors to provide headlamp levelling
adjustment via the vertical actuator motor. The AFS control module also receives vehicle speed signals from the ABS module
to adjust the projector module vertically to increase the beam range as the vehicle speed increases.
Item
Part Number
Description
Conventional headlamp beam distribution
AFS swivel headlamp beam distribution
AFS Control Module

The AFS control module is located on the bulkhead, at the bottom of the RH 'A' pillar. The AFS control module is a dual
functionality unit which also incorporates software to control the headlamp leveling. The AFS control module is connected to
the high speed CAN bus and receives inputs from other vehicle systems on the status of the following parameters:
Steering angle
Vehicle speed
Headlamp status
Engine running
Reverse gear selected
AUTO lights on.
The AFS will only operate when the AFS control module receives an engine running signal on the high speed CAN bus from
the engine control module (ECM). When the engine running signal is received the AFS control module performs its
initialisation routine.
The AFS will also function when the lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and the AFS control module receives a
lights on signal from the light sensor and an engine running signal.
The AFS control module then monitors the inputs from the other vehicle systems to control the AFS functionality according to
cornering angles and vehicle speed.
The AFS control module is connected to each AFS power module on a private Local Interconnect Network (LIN) bus. The
power modules read operating values supplied from the AFS control module and control the output drivers for the stepper
motor actuators inside the headlamp assembly.
AFS Operation
The AFS controls the swiveling angle of each projector module using speed and steering angle signals. The angles of each
projector module differ to give the correct spread of light, for example, when turning left, the LH projector module will have
a greater swiveling angle than the RH projector module.
Initialisation Procedure
When the AFS control module receives an ignition mode on signal, the control module performs the initialisation procedure
which ensures that the headlamps are correctly aligned on both their vertical and horizontal axes.
The headlamp leveling motors are powered from their current position, which can be either the upper or lower limit or
somewhere in between, to their lower position and then back to the 0 degrees position.
The AFS swivel initialisation starts less than 1 second after the headlamp leveling initialisation is activated to ensure that the
headlamps are at or below the 0 degree position in the vertical axis, thus preventing glare to oncoming vehicles. The AFS
swivel initialisation is completed in less than 2.5 seconds. The LH and RH AFS actuator motors are powered from the 0
degree position to their fully inboard position, then to their fully outboard position and then back to the 0 degree position.
Failure Mode
In the event of a failure of the AFS system, a warning indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated to warn the driver.
The AFS warning indicator illuminates when the ignition is in the ignition on mode and will flash continuously until the fault is
rectified. The AFS warning indicator will also be illuminated if a failure of the steering angle sensor or the vehicle speed
signal is detected.
Illumination of the warning indicator does not necessarily mean that there is a fault with the AFS system. The fault may be
caused by a failure of another system preventing the AFS system from operating correctly.
The AFS control module performs a diagnostic routine every time AFS is requested. If any fault is found, the AFS control
module will suspend the operation of the AFS function.
If the AFS leveling system has failed with the projector module in a position other than the correct straight ahead position,
the AFS control module will attempt to drive the projector module to a position a small amount lower than the standard
position. If the swivel function has failed, the AFS control module will lower the projector module using the leveling actuator
to a position much lower than standard to prevent excess glare to oncoming vehicles.
The AFS control module software can detect an internal failure of the control module control circuits. The control module will
power the projector modules to the zero position and prevent further operation.
Faults can be investigated by interrogating the AFS control module using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system to check for
fault codes.
AUTOMATIC HEADLAMP OPERATION

The automatic headlamp function is a driver assistance system. The driver can override the system operation by selection of
side lamp or headlamp on if the ambient light conditions require front and rear lighting to be active. The automatic headlamp
system uses a light sensor and the AJB, which is connected to the instrument cluster, via the medium speed CAN bus, to
control 'AUTO' headlamp functionality.
The light sensor is located in the centre of the instrument panel upper surface. The sensor has three functions; houses the
alarm system LED, auto lamp function for AUTO headlamps and sun load sensor for the air conditioning (A/C) system.
The sensor is hardwired to the instrument cluster which supplies a 5V current via a pull-up resistor to 2 photodiode light
sensors within the sensor housing. The ambient light signals are returned to the instrument cluster by the light sensor
varying the current drawn from the 5V output, hence varying the voltage at the 'pull-up' resistor. The instrument cluster
then outputs a message relating to the ambient light level on the medium speed CAN bus. The AJB receives the message
and determines if AUTO lamps are required to be activated.
Operation of the 'AUTO' headlamps requires the ignition to be in the ignition mode and the lighting control switch must be in
the AUTO position. The AJB will only activate the AUTO headlamps on receipt of a valid ambient light signal on the medium
speed CAN bus from the instrument cluster.
HEADLAMP LEVELING
Headlamp leveling provides for the automatic adjustment of the vertical aim of the headlamps. The leveling system is
required to minimise glare to other road users when the vehicle attitude changes due to braking or acceleration.
Headlamp leveling is controlled by a headlamp leveling module which is located on the bulkhead, at the bottom of the RH 'A'
pillar.
NOTE: On vehicles with the AFS system, the headlamp leveling software is incorporated into the AFS control module and the
module is known as the AFS control module.
The headlamp leveling system comprises the following components and information from other vehicle systems:
Front and rear vehicle height sensors

Two headlamp leveling, vertical adjustment motors
Headlamp leveling module (or AFS control module if vehicle is fitted with AFS)
Ignition in on mode
Vehicle speed information form anti-lock brake system (ABS) module.
When the ignition is in the ignition power mode, power is supplied via the ignition relay in the battery junction box to the
headlamp leveling module (or AFS control module if vehicle is fitted with AFS).
NOTE: When the headlamp leveling module receives a power supply from the ignition relay, the module performs an
initialization procedure to correctly align the vertical aim of the headlamps and to determine if the leveling motors are
functioning correctly.
The headlamp leveling module receives information relating to vehicle attitude from the front and rear height sensors. The
headlamp leveling module processes these signal and provides an output to the headlamp leveling motors to adjust the
headlamp vertical aim according to vehicle speed and attitude.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS

Refer to the daytime running lamps (DRL) section for details.
For additional information, refer to: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (417-04 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL), Description and
Operation).
FRONT FOG LAMP
Item
Part Number
Description
Fog lamp - Naturally aspirated vehicles
Bulb H11
Bulb H3
Fog lamp - Supercharged vehicles
Two front fog lamps are located in apertures in the front bumper. The fog lamps are different in design between the naturally
aspirated and supercharged vehicles.
Front Fog Lamp - Naturally Aspirated Vehicles

The front fog lamp is a conventional design with a clear lens and smooth surface reflector. An H11 55W halogen bulb is
located at the rear of the fog lamp. The bulb has an integral holder and can be removed by rotating counter clockwise to
remove from the lamp housing.
Fog lamp beam adjustment is provided by a rotary adjuster located on the underside of the lamp and is accessible from the
rear of the bumper.
The front fog lamps are controlled by the auxiliary lighting switch and the CJB. Refer to the Auxiliary Lighting Switch section
for switch operation.
Front Fog Lamp - Supercharged Vehicles

The front fog lamp is projector module, similar in design to the projector module used in the Xenon headlamp. A halogen H3
bulb is located in the rear of the lamp and secured with a spring clip. The bulb has a power lead which is secured to the rear
of the lamp connector socket.
Fog lamp beam adjustment is provided by a screw at the top of the lamp. The screw is accessible from the front of the lamp.
Front fog lamp control and operation is as described for 'Front Fog Lamp - Naturally Aspirated Vehicles.
Front Fog Lamp Functionality (NAS and Canadian Markets Only)

The front fog lamps operate as described previously but with the following differences which cover local laws governing lamp
usage.
If the low beam headlamps and the front fog lamps are on at the same time, when the high beam headlamps are switched
on, the front fog lamps will be automatically switched off. When the high beam headlamps are subsequently switched off, the
front fog lamps will be switched on automatically.
NOTE: The front fog lamps will also be switched off if the high beam 'flash' function is operated.
REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY

The rear lamp assembly is a 2 piece unit, with one part being located in the rear quarter panel and the second part being
attached to the liftgate. The outer rear lamp assembly is located in a recess in the vehicle body and is secured with 2 nuts
which screw onto studs in the lamp assembly. The inner rear lamp assembly is located in a recess in the liftgate and is
secured with 3 nuts.
Item
Part Number
Description
Inner rear lamp assembly
Outer rear lamp assembly
Rear fog lamp or reverse lamp LED (market dependant)
Turn signal indicator bulb and holder
Stop lamp and Tail lamp bulb and holder
Side marker bulb and holder
Turn signal indicator
Rear fog lamp or reverse lamp (market dependant)
Stop lamp and tail lamp
10
Side marker lamp
Rear Stop and Side Lamp

The stop and side lamp are located in the lower section of the outer rear lamp assembly. A combined, twin filament 21W/5W
bayonet fitting bulb is used. The stop lamp uses the 21W bulb filament and the side lamp uses the 5W bulb filament. The
bulb is located in a holder which connects with contacts in the rear lamp housing. The holder can be released by rotating and
pulling from the aperture.
The stop lamps are active when the ignition is in the ignition mode and the stop lamp switch is activated by pressing the
brake pedal. The high mounted stop lamp will also be activated when the brake pedal is pressed. Operation of the stop lamp
switch is sensed by the CJB which sends a message on the high speed CAN bus to the AJB which activates the stop lamps.
The stop lamps can also be activated by the adaptive speed control system. A signal from the adaptive speed control module
is sent via the high speed CAN bus to the AJB which activates the stop lamps until an off message is received.
The side lamps are operated by selecting side lamps or headlamps on the lighting control switch. The side lamps are
operational at all times and are not dependant on the ignition mode. The side lamps will also be illuminated when the
lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and a 'lights on' signal is received by the CJB from the light sensor.
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp

The turn signal indicator lamp is located in the upper section of the outer rear lamp assembly and uses a PY21W bayonet
fitting bulb. The bulb is located in a holder which connects with contacts in the rear lamp housing. The holder can be
released by rotating and pulling from the aperture.
The turn signal indicator lamps are operated by the LH steering column multifunction switch or by the hazard flasher switch.
The steering column multifunction switch is only active when the ignition is the ignition mode. The hazard flasher switch is
active at all times. When active, the turn signal indicator lamps flash at a frequency cycle of 400 ms on and 400 ms off.
If a bulb fails, the remaining turn signal indicator lamps continue to flash at the normal speed. The applicable turn signal
indicator in the instrument cluster will flash at double speed to indicate the failure to the driver.
Reversing Lamp
The reversing lamp is located in the inner rear lamp assembly. The reversing lamp uses 3 LED. Only one reversing lamp is
fitted and is located in the LH inner lamp assembly on RHD vehicles and in the RH inner lamp assembly on LHD vehicles.
The reversing lamp is activated on receipt of reverse selected message sent on the medium speed CAN signal from the
transmission control module (TCM) to the AJB.
Rear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is located in the inner rear lamp assembly. The fog lamp uses 3 LED's. Only one fog lamp is fitted and is
located in the RH inner lamp assembly on RHD vehicles and in the LH inner lamp assembly on LHD vehicles.
The rear fog lamp is controlled by the auxiliary lighting switch and the CJB. The rear fog lamp switch receives a power supply
from the instrument cluster. When the rear fog lamp switch is pressed, a ground path is completed through a resistor. The
current flow is monitored by the instrument cluster which determines that the switch has been pressed. The instrument
cluster transmits a rear fog lamp on request message on the medium speed CAN bus to the AJB which activates the power
supplies to the fog lamp provided the lighting switch is in the correct position and the ignition mode is correct.
When the ignition is in ignition on mode and the lighting control switch is in the side lamp or headlamp position and the front
fog lamps are on, pressing the rear fog lamp switch on the auxiliary lighting switch will activate the rear fog lamp. Pressing
the rear fog lamp switch for a second time will switch the rear fog lamp off. The rear fog lamp will also be deactivated if the
lighting control switch is moved to the off position or the ignition mode is changed to off mode.
LICENCE PLATE LAMPS

Two licence plate lamps are located in the underside of the liftgate (hardtop) or luggage compartment lid (convertible)
exterior trim finisher. Each lamp uses a W5W capless bulb which is located in a holder at the rear of the lamp.
The lamp can be removed from the finisher by using a wide flat blade screwdriver or similar tool, inserting it in the slot
between the lamp lens and the finisher and gently levering the lamp from the surround. The bulb is pushed into a holder
which in turn is a press fit in the lamp housing.
The licence plate lamps are illuminated at all times when the side lamps are active.
HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP

The high mounted stop lamp is located in the rear spoiler on the upper edge of the liftgate or luggage compartment lid. The
lamp comprises 24 separate LED's which illuminate through a red colored lens. The high mounted stop lamp functionality is
the same as that described for the stop lamps.
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR REPEATER LAMP

The turn signal indicator repeater lamps are located in each front fender and can be removed by sliding the lamp assembly
rearwards and releasing the front edge from the fender. The lamps use a 5W capless bulb which is located in a holder in the
rear of the lamp housing.
The repeater lamps have the same functionality as described for the turn signal indicators and the hazard flashers.
HAZARD FLASHERS
The hazard flashers are controlled by a non-latching switch located in the centre of the instrument panel. The hazard flashers
operate at all times when selected and are not dependant on an ignition mode to be selected.
When the hazard flashers are selected on by the driver, a ground path is momentarily completed to the AJB which activates
the front and rear and side repeater turn signal indicators. A second press of the switch is again sensed by the AJB and the
hazard flasher will be deactivated. When the hazard flasher are active, they override any request for turn signal indicator
operation.
The hazard flashers can also be activated by a crash signal from the restraints control module (RCM). The signal is received
on the medium speed CAN bus from the instrument cluster by the AJB which activates the hazard flashers. The hazard
flasher can be cancelled by changing the ignition mode to accessory or off mode and then changing it to ignition on mode on
or the crash mode signal is removed by the RCM.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item
Part Number
Battery
Megafuse (175A)
Megafuse (175A)
Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB)
CJB
High speed CAN bus to other vehicle systems
Description
Instrument cluster
7
-
LH steering column multifunction switch
Stop lamp switch
10
Auxiliary lighting switch
11
LH headlamp
12
13
RH headlamp
14
Rear height sensor
15
Front height sensor
16
Headlamp leveling/AFS control module
17
LH side repeater
18
RH side repeater
19
A/C control module
20
Hazard warning switch
21
Light sensor
22
LH license plate lamp
23
RH license plate lamp
24
LH front fog lamp
25
RH front fog lamp
26
27
RH tail lamp assembly
28
LH tail lamp assembly
Exterior Lighting - Headlamps

For a detailed description of the exterior lighting system, refer to the Description and Operation section 417-00 Exterior Lighting of the workshop manual.
Safety Information
WARNINGS:
The Xenon Headlamp System generates up to 28,000 volts. Make sure that the headlamps are switched off before
working on the system. Failure to follow this instruction may lead to fatality.
The following safety precautions must be followed when working on the Xenon Headlamp System:
DO NOT attempt any procedures on the Xenon Headlamps or circuits when the system is energized.
Handling of the Xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment, e.g. gloves and goggles.
The glass part of the bulb must not be touched.

Only operate the lamp in a mounted condition in the reflector.
All safety procedures and precautions must be followed to prevent personal injury.
CAUTION: Xenon bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste.

There are instructions on the correct procedures for Xenon Headlamp System repairs in the manual, refer to section
100-00 - General Information, Standard Workshop Practices of the workshop manual.
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Headlamp Leveling Module (HLM)

Bulb(s)
Photocell(s)
Ballast
Fuse(s)
3.
4.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Low beam lamp(s)
inoperative
Possible Causes
Action
Bulb failure
Check the bulb and fuse condition (see visual inspection). Check the
Fuse(s) blown
headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control switch function. Check
Circuit fault
the left-hand steering column multifunction switch operation. Refer
Lighting control switch
to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a headlamp or
High beam lamp(s)

inoperative
Low beam lamp(s)

dim
High beam lamp(s)

dim
Low beam lamp(s)

stuck on
High beam lamp(s)

stuck on
Headlamp low/high
beam switching
function inoperative
Warning lamp(s)
inoperative
Headlamp Wet Internal
fault
related circuit fault.
Left-hand steering
column multifunction
switch fault
Incorrect bulb rating
Tourist lever set in
the wrong position
Circuit fault
fault
Left-hand steering
switch fault
Circuit fault
fault
Left-hand steering
switch fault
Headlamp timer
function fault
Circuit fault
Left-hand steering
switch fault
Xenon lamp shutter
mechanism fault
Fuse(s) blown
fault
Left-hand steering
switch inoperative
Circuit fault
Instrument cluster
fault
Condensation
Water Ingress
Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the tourist lever is set
correctly. Check the headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control
switch function. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction
switch function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Check the headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control switch

function. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch
operation. Check the headlamp timer function. Refer to the electrical
guides. Check for DTCs indicating a headlamp circuit fault
Check the headlamp circuits. Check the left-hand steering column

multifunction switch operation. Check the xenon lamp shutter
mechanism operation. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs
indicating a headlamp circuit fault
Check the fuse(s) (see visual inspection). Check the lighting control
switch function. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction
switch function. Check the warning lamp circuits. Refer to the
electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating an instrument cluster or
CAN system fault.
Check for outstanding Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) relating to

'Headlamp Internal Condensation'. Carry out the instructions in the
service bulletin to determine if the fault is related to condensation or
water ingress.
DTC Index
NOTE: If the Control Module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to
into account.
NOTE: Prior to installation/replacement of the Headlamp assembly carry out all relevant internal visual and mechanical
checks for correct cable location and termination including: checks for corroded, bent or backed out pins or terminals,
incorrectly inserted connectors and harness damage due to chaffing or incorrect routing.
NOTE: If the control module has been removed and reinstalled, carry out a DTC code clear, cycle the ignition state to
off, then on. This will erase any DTCs that have been logged during the module installation procedure.
Headlamp Leveling Module (HLM)
DTC
Description
B1A59- Front or Rear Height
11
Sensors - Circuit
short to ground
B1A59- Front or Rear Height
12
Sensors - Circuit
short to power
C1A04- Front Right Height
11 Sensor - Circuit short
to ground
to power or open
circuit
64
Sensor - Signal
C1A06- Rear Right Height

to ground
to power or open
circuit
64
Sensor - Signal
B1A5701
Left Headlamp
Leveling Motor General Electrical
Failure
B1A5801
Right Headlamp
Leveling Motor General Electrical
Failure

00
with Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Control Module - No
86
with Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Control Module Signal invalid
00
with ECM - No sub
type information
Possible Cause
Action
Front or Rear Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Front and
Sensors 5 volt supply

Rear Height Sensors 5 volt supply circuit for short to
short to ground
ground
Front or Rear Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Front and
Sensors 5 volt supply Rear Height Sensor 5 volt supply circuit for short to power
short to power
Front Right Height
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Front
Sensor signal circuit
Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Front Right Height
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Front
Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to power or
short to power or
open circuit
open circuit
Sensor (PWM) Signal NOTE: This DTC may be logged if the vehicles wheels have
out of range
been raised from the floor
Rear right Height
Check the location, security and mechanical operation of

the Height Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,
and check Front Right Height Sensor signal circuit for fault
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Rear
Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to ground

short to ground
Rear right Height
Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to power or
short to power or
open circuit
open circuit
Sensor (PWM) Signal NOTE: This DTC may be logged if the vehicles wheels have
out of range
been raised from the floor
Check the location, security and mechanical operation of
the Height Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,
and check Rear Right Height Sensor signal circuit for fault
Internal Headlamp
Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the ignition state to
Motor Fault
start the engine, look for any errors in the Headlamp Beam
Internal Headlamp
movement (compare with other headlamp) and visually
Circuit Fault
inspect the lamp for internal damage or dislocation (ball
joints out). If no faults are evident refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check for circuit fault between the
Headlamp Power Module and the swiveling feedback
sensor. If no mechanical or circuit faults are evident,
suspect headlamp internal fault, replace as required. Refer
to the new module/component installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
Internal Headlamp
Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the ignition state to
Motor Fault
start the engine, look for any errors in the Headlamp Beam
Internal Headlamp
movement (compare with other headlamp) and visually
Circuit Fault
inspect the lamp for internal damage or dislocation (ball
joints out). If no faults are evident refer to the electrical
Headlamp Power Module and the swiveling feedback
sensor. If no mechanical or circuit faults are evident,
suspect headlamp internal fault, replace as required. Refer
to the new module/component installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
Lost communication Check the Anti-lock Brake System Module for stored DTCs.
with the Anti-lock
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Brake System Module
complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
CAN network fault
electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the Anti-lock
Brake System Module
Invalid signal from
Check the Anti-lock Brake System Module for stored DTCs.
the Anti-lock Brake
System Module
CAN network fault
between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the Anti-lock
Brake System Module
Lost communication
Check the Engine Control Module for stored DTCs. Using
with the Engine
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete
Control Module
the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the electrical
CAN network fault

00
with TCM - No sub
type information
Lost communication
U0443- Invalid data from

00
Body Control Module
B - No sub type
information
Invalid signal from
U0001High speed CAN

49
communication Bus Internal electronic
failure
U030062
Internal Control
Module software
incompatibility Signal Compare
Failure.
U0001High Speed CAN
88
Communication Bus
- Bus off
81
Number (VIN) Invalid Serial Data
received

Missing Calibration
U300049
Control Module Internal electronic

failure
U3000- Control Module - Not
55
Configured
U300317
Battery voltage
U300316
Battery voltage
with the Transmission

Control Module
CAN network fault
the Auxiliary Junction

Box
fault
Adaptive Front
Lighting System
(AFS) Control Module
internal electronic
failure
Configuration data
received over the

CAN BUS is different
from the stored
configuration data
CAN Bus Off
circuit diagrams and check the CAN network between the

Headlamp Leveling Module and the Engine Control Module
Check the Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs.
between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the
Check the Auxiliary Junction Box for stored DTCs. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete the
CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the CAN network between the
Headlamp Leveling Module and the Auxiliary Junction Box
electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network to
the Headlamp Leveling Module. If no CAN Bus circuit faults
are evident suspect Headlamp Leveling Module internal
fault. Refer to the new module/component installation note
Check the correct Headlamp Leveling Module is installed to
vehicle specification. Refit original or replace the module as
required. Refer to the new module/component installation
Check other modules for stored DTCs. Carry out the CAN
Network Integrity test using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
The stored Vehicle
Check the correct Headlamp Leveling Module is installed to
Identification Number vehicle specification. Refit original or replace the module as
is not the same as
required. Refer to the new module/component installation
the Central Broadcast
Number
The Headlamp
Leveling Module has
previously been
installed to another
vehicle
Height Sensors not
NOTE: Sensor calibration routine must be carried out with
calibrated to vehicle
the vehicle unladen
Internal electronic
failure
Incorrect Car
Configuration File
(CCF) data received
Calibrate the Headlamp Leveling sensors using the

manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry the out
routine 'Headlamp and Axle Sensor Calibration' from the
'Module programming and configuration - Setup and
Configuration - Lighting'
Install a new Headlamp Leveling Module, refer to the new
NOTE: The Car Configuration File (CCF) parameters
required are (Vehicle type)(Headlamp type)(Gearbox type)
and (Dayrunning light)
Re-configure the Car Configuration File (CCF) File (CCF) as

required using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains suspect
the Headlamp Leveling Module, refer to the new module
The power supply to
Suspect Charging fault. Check the battery condition and
the Module has been state of charge. Check the vehicle charging system. Refer
above 16 Volts for
to the relevant workshop manual section
more than 1000
milliseconds
The power supply to
Suspect Battery or Charging fault. Check the battery
the Module has been condition and state of charge. Check the vehicle charging
below 9 Volts for
system. Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
more than 1000
Clear the DTC, cycle ignition state to off then on, if DTC
milliseconds
returns refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
power and ground circuit to the Headlamp Leveling Module
DTC Index
NOTE: If the Control Module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to
into account.
NOTE: Prior to installation/replacement of the Headlamp assembly carry out all relevant internal visual and mechanical
checks for correct cable location and termination including: checks for corroded, bent or backed out pins or terminals,
incorrectly inserted connectors and harness damage due to chaffing or incorrect routing.
NOTE: If the control module has been removed and reinstalled, carry out a DTC code clear, cycle the ignition state to
off, then on. This will erase any DTCs that have been logged during the module installation procedure
NOTE: The Headlamp Power Module is referenced as the AFS ECU + Motors in the circuit diagrams.
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) Control Module
DTC
Description
B1A59Front or Rear Height
Sensors - Circuit short to
11
ground
B1A59Front or Rear Height
Sensors - Circuit short to
12
power
C1A04- Front Right Height Sensor
11
15
- Circuit short to power or
open circuit
64
- Signal plausibility failure
C1A06- Rear Right Height Sensor

11
15
- Circuit short to power or
open circuit
64
- Signal plausibility failure
B1D6600
Left Headlamp Power

Possible Cause
Front or Rear Height
Action
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check
Front and Rear Height Sensors 5 volt supply circuit for
short to ground
Front and Rear Height Sensor 5 volt supply circuit for
short to power
Front Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to
ground
Front Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to

short to ground
Front or Rear Height
short to power
Front Right Height
short to ground
Front Right Height
short to power or
open circuit
Sensor (PWM) Signal NOTE: This DTC may be logged if the vehicles wheels
out of range
have been raised from the floor
Check the location, security and mechanical operation

of the Height Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams, and check Front Right Height Sensor signal
circuit for fault
Rear Right Height
Sensor signal circuit Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Rear Right Height
Sensor signal circuit Right Height Sensor signal circuit for short to power or
short to power or
open circuit
open circuit
Sensor (PWM) Signal NOTE: This DTC may be logged if the vehicles wheels
out of range
have been raised from the floor
Headlamp Power
Check the location, security and mechanical operation

of the Height Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams, and check Rear Right Height Sensor signal
circuit for fault
NOTE: The power module is a service item
information
Headlamp Power
Module circuit fault
B1D6700
Right Headlamp Power

information
Headlamp Power
This DTC is logged if the Headlamp Power Module

supply voltage is above 16 volts / below 9.5 volts or
the module suffers an internal failure. Record then
clear the stored DTC, cycle the ignition state and
check headlamp operation, if the DTC returns refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power,
ground and signal circuit of the Power Module for
circuit fault. If no circuit faults are evident suspect the
Headlamp Power Module has an internal fault, replace
as required. Refer to the new module/component

Headlamp Power
This DTC is logged if the Headlamp Power Module

supply voltage is above 16 volts / below 9.5 volts or
the module suffers an internal failure. Record then
clear the stored DTC, cycle the ignition state and
check headlamp operation, if the DTC returns refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power,
ground and signal circuit of the Power Module for
circuit fault. If no circuit faults are evident suspect the
Headlamp Power Module has an internal fault, replace
as required. Refer to the new module/component
The parameter set of
the power module
does not match the
Clear the DTC. Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the
Adaptive Front
ignition state to start the engine, check for stored
Lighting System
DTCs, if DTC returns suspect the Headlamp Power
Module has an internal fault, replace as required. Refer
parameter set
to the new module/component installation note at the
The parameter set of
the power module
does not match the Clear the DTC. Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the
Adaptive Front
ignition state to start the engine, check for stored
Lighting System
DTCs, if DTC returns suspect the Headlamp Power
(AFS) Control Module Module has an internal fault, replace as required. Refer
parameter set
Module circuit fault
B1D6646
Left Headlamp Power

Module Calibration/parameter
memory failure
B1D6746

Module Calibration/parameter
memory failure
B1D68- Left Headlamp Swiveling

01
Feedback Sensor circuit General Electrical Failure
Internal Headlamp
Sensor Fault
Internal Headlamp
Circuit Fault
B1D69- Right Headlamp Swiveling

01
Feedback Sensor circuit General Electrical Failure
Internal Headlamp
Sensor Fault
Internal Headlamp
Circuit Fault
B1D64- Left Headlamp Swiveling

01
Motor circuit - General
Electrical Failure
Internal Headlamp
Motor Fault
Internal Headlamp
Circuit Fault

Turn the Headlamp Switch on, cycle the ignition state
to start the engine, look for any errors in the
Headlamp Beam movement (compare with other
headlamp) and visually inspect the lamp for internal
damage or dislocation (ball joints out). If no faults are
evident refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check for circuit fault between the Headlamp Power
Module and the Headlamp Swiveling Feedback Sensor.
If no mechanical or circuit faults are evident suspect
headlamp internal fault, replace as required. Refer to
the new module/component installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
Module and the Headlamp Swiveling Feedback Sensor.
If no mechanical or circuit faults are evident suspect
of the DTC Index
Module and the Headlamp Swiveling Motor. If no
B1D65- Right Headlamp Swiveling

01
Motor circuit - General
Electrical Failure
Internal Headlamp
Motor Fault
Internal Headlamp
Circuit Fault
B10A3- Left Headlamp Swivel

71
Actuator - Actuator stuck
Internal Headlamp
Actuator Fault
Internal Headlamp
Circuit Fault
B10A4- Right Headlamp Swivel

71
Actuator - Actuator stuck
Internal Headlamp
Actuator Fault
Internal Headlamp
Circuit Fault
B1A57- Left Headlamp Leveling

01
motor - General Electrical
Failure
Internal Headlamp
Motor Fault
Internal Headlamp
Circuit Fault
B1A58- Right Headlamp Leveling

01
motor - General Electrical
Failure
Internal Headlamp
Motor Fault
Internal Headlamp
Circuit Fault
B1C98- Left Corner Lamp circuit

11
defect - Circuit short to
ground
B1C98- Left Corner Lamp circuit

13
defect - Circuit open
Left Corner Lamp
circuit short to
ground
Left Corner Lamp
circuit open
mechanical or circuit faults are evident suspect

of the DTC Index
to start the engine, and check headlamp operation,
look for any errors in the Headlamp Beam movement
(compare with other headlamp) and visually inspect
the lamp for internal damage or dislocation (ball joints
out). If no faults are evident refer to the electrical
Headlamp Power Module and the Headlamp Swiveling
Motor. If no mechanical or circuit faults are evident
suspect headlamp internal fault, replace as required.
Refer to the new module/component installation note
Module and the Swiveling Feedback Actuator. If no
of the DTC Index
Module and the Swiveling Feedback Actuator. If no
of the DTC Index
Module and the Leveling motor. If no mechanical or
circuit faults are evident suspect headlamp internal
fault, replace as required. Refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
Module and the Leveling motor. If no mechanical or
circuit faults are evident suspect headlamp internal
fault, replace as required. Refer to the new
DTC Index
NOTE: On Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
equipped vehicles the power feed to the Corner Lamp
is supplied via the Headlamp Power Module
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Left
Corner Lamp circuit for short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Left

corner lamp circuit for open circuit
B1C99- Right Corner Lamp circuit
11
defect - Circuit short to
ground
B1C99- Right Corner Lamp circuit

13
defect - Circuit open
U1A39- Lost communication with

00
information
U1A38- Lost communication with

00
Left Headlamp Power
information

00
information

86
Module - Invalid signal

00
(ABS) Control Module No sub type information
Right Corner Lamp
circuit short to
ground
Right Corner Lamp
circuit open
Communication

Right corner lamp circuit for short to ground
Right corner lamp circuit for open circuit
NOTE: This circuit uses shielded cable
Circuit fault
Headlamp Power

Headlamp Power
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check the
Module Power or
Ground supply fault power/ground supply and Communication circuit to the
Headlamp Power Module. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear stored DTCs in the
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) Control Module.
Cycle the ignition state to off, then return to on and
check for stored DTCs. If DTCs U1A39-00 and U1A3800 return suspect Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS) Control Module internal fault, If only DTC
U1A39-00 returns suspect Headlamp Power Module
internal fault. Replace as required. Refer to the new
DTC Index
Communication
NOTE: This circuit uses shielded cable
Circuit fault
Headlamp Power
Headlamp Power
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check the
Module Power or
Ground supply fault power/ground supply and Communication circuit to the
Headlamp Power Module. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear stored DTCs in the
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) Control Module.
Cycle the ignition state to off, then return to on and
check for stored DTCs. If DTCs U1A39-00 and U1A3800 return suspect Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS) Control Module internal fault, If only DTC
U1A38-00 returns suspect Headlamp Power Module
internal fault. Replace as required. Refer to the new
DTC Index
Lost communication
Check the Steering Angle Sensor Module for stored
with the Steering
DTCs. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Angle Sensor Module
system, complete the CAN Network Integrity test.
CAN network fault
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
CAN network between the Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFS) Control Module and the Steering Angle
Sensor Module
Invalid signal from
Check the Steering Angle Sensor Module for stored
the Steering Angle
Sensor Module
CAN network fault
System (AFS) Control Module and the Steering Angle
Sensor Module
Lost communication
Check the Anti-lock Brake System Module for stored
with the Anti-lock
Brake System Module
CAN network fault
System (AFS) Control Module and the Anti-lock Brake
System Module
Invalid signal from
Check the Anti-lock Brake System Module for stored
86

(ABS) Control Module Signal invalid
the Anti-lock Brake

System Module
CAN network fault

00
ECM - No sub type
information
Lost communication

00
TCM - No sub type
information
Lost communication
U0443- Invalid data from Body

00
Control Module B - no sub
type information
Invalid signal from
U000149
with the Engine

Control Module
CAN network fault
with the Transmission

Control Module
CAN network fault
the Auxiliary Junction

Box
fault
High speed CAN

communication Bus Internal electronic failure
CAN network fault

Adaptive Front

62
software incompatibility Signal Compare Failure.
Configuration data
U0001High Speed CAN

88
Communication Bus - Bus
off
U3002Vehicle Identification
81
Number (VIN) - Invalid
Serial Data received
U3000- Control Module - Missing

54
Calibration
U3000- Control Module - Internal

49
electronic failure
U300055
Control Module - Not

Configured
Lighting System
internal electronic
failure
received over the

CAN BUS is different
from the stored
configuration data
The Headlamp
Leveling Module has
previously been
vehicle
CAN Bus Off

System (AFS) Control Module and the Anti-lock Brake
System Module
Check the Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
between the Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
Control Module and the Engine Control Module
Check the Transmission Control Module for stored
System (AFS) Control Module and the Transmission
Control Module
Check the Auxiliary Junction Box for stored DTCs.
between the Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
Control Module and the Auxiliary Junction Box
to the Headlamp Leveling Module. If no CAN Bus
circuit faults are evident suspect Adaptive Front
Lighting System (AFS) Control Module internal fault,
replace as required. Refer to the new
DTC Index
Check the correct Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS) Control Module is installed to vehicle
specification. Refit original or replace the module as
required. Refer to the new module/component
Carry out the CAN Network Integrity test using the

The stored Vehicle
Check the correct Adaptive Front Lighting System

Identification Number
(AFS) Control Module is installed to vehicle
is not the same as
specification. Refit original or replace the module as
the Central Broadcast
required. Refer to the new module/component
Number
The Adaptive Front
Lighting System
has previously been
vehicle
Height sensors not
NOTE: Sensor calibration routine must be carried out
calibrated to vehicle
with the vehicle unladen
Internal electronic
failure
Incorrect Car
Configuration File
Calibrate the Headlamp Leveling sensors using the

manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry the
out routine 'Headlamp and Axle Sensor Calibration'
from the 'Module programming and configuration Setup and Configuration - Lighting'
Suspect an internal fault, replace the Adaptive Front
Lighting System (AFS) Control Module as required,
refer to the new module installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
NOTE: The Car Configuration File (CCF) parameters
required are (Vehicle type)(Headlamp type)(Gearbox
(CCF) data received
U300317
Battery voltage
U300316
Battery voltage
type) and (Dayrunning light)
Re-configure the Car Configuration File (CCF) as

required using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains
suspect the Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
Control Module, replace as required. Refer to the new
The power supply to
Suspect Charging fault. Check the battery condition
the Module has been
and state of charge. Check the vehicle charging
above 16 Volts for
system. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
more than 1000
section
milliseconds
The power supply to Suspect Battery or Charging fault. Check the battery
the Module has been
condition and state of charge. Check the vehicle
below 9 Volts for
charging system. Refer to the relevant workshop
more than 1000
manual section. Clear the DTC, cycle ignition state to
milliseconds
off then on, if DTC returns refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check power and ground circuit to the
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) Control Module
Exterior Lighting - Front Fog Lamp Adjustment

General Procedures
1.
Align the beam setting equipment to one fog lamp.
2.
NOTE: The fog lamp beam should be set at 1.2% below the
horizontal and parallel.
Check the fog lamp beam alignment.
3.

4.
NOTE: Wheel shown removed for clarity.

5.
Adjust the fog lamp using the thumb wheel.
6.

7.
To adjust the second fog lamp, repeat the above procedure.
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Adjustment

General Procedures
1.
Align the headlamp beam setting equipment to one headlamp.
2.
NOTE: The headlamp setting is 1.2 % below horizontal and

parallel.
Check the headlamp beam alignment.
3.
Open the hood.

4.
5.
Adjust the headlamps with an Allen Key.
To adjust the second headlamp, repeat the above procedure.
Exterior Lighting - Approach Lamp

Removal
1.
Refer to: Exterior Mirror Glass (501-09 Rear View Mirrors,

2.
3.
Installation
1.
Exterior Lighting - Front Fog Lamp

Removal
1.

Procedures).
2.

3.
Remove the front wheel and tire.

4.

5.
Remove the front fog lamp.

Installation
1.
Install the front fog lamp.

2.

3.

4.

Procedures).
5.
NOTE: The fog lamp beam should be set at 1.2% below the
horizontal and parallel.
Check the fog lamp beam alignment.
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Assembly

Removal
WARNING: Vehicles fitted with Xenon headlamps, the following precautions must be observed. Failure to comply
may result in exposure to ultra violet rays, severe electric shock, burns or the risk of explosion. Ensure the headlamps
are switched off at all times. Eye and hand protection must be worn. Never switch on the lamps or test the bulbs with
the lamp holder released from the headlamp.
1.
2.
Open the hood.
3.
CAUTION: Always protect paintwork and glass when

removing exterior components.
Release the headlamp assembly.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Release the locating pegs.
4.
5.
Remove the LH headlamp assembly.

6.
Remove the headlamp bulb.

Remove the cover.
Release the clip.
7.
Remove the headlamp inner bulb.

Remove the cover.
Release the clip.
8.
Remove the turn signal indicator bulb.

Release the bulb holder.
9.
Remove the side marker bulb.

Release the bulb holder.
10.
11.
Remove the gas discharge modules.

Remove the headlamp washer jet.

Installation
1.
Install the headlamp washer jet.

2.
Install the gas discharge modules.

3.
Install the side marker bulb.

Install the bulb holder.
4.
Install the turn signal indicator bulb.

Install the bulb holder.
5.
Install the headlamp inner bulb.

Install the cover.
6.
Install the headlamp bulb.

Install the cover.
7.
Install the headlamp assembly.

Position the locating pegs.
8.
9.
Secure the headlamp assembly.

Tighten the bolts.
10.
Close the hood.
11.
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Bulb Vehicles With: High Intensity

Discharge Headlamps
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the headlamp assembly.

3.
Remove the headlamp bulb.

Remove the cover.
Release the clip.
4.
Remove the headlamp bulb retainer.

Release the clip.
Installation
1.
Attach the headlamp bulb retainer.
2.
Install the headlamp bulb.

Secure with the clip.
Install the cover.
3.

4.
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Leveling Module

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the blower motor.

For additional information, refer to: Blower Motor (412-02 Heating
and Ventilation, Removal and Installation).
3.

Remove the RH cowl side trim panel.
4.

Reposition the carpet for access.
Remove the 4 bolts.
5.
Remove the headlamp leveling module.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1.
2.
Install the headlamp leveling module.

3.

Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Leveling Front Sensor

Removal
1.

2.

3.
4.
Remove the headlamp levelling sensor.

Remove the 2 bolts.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is removed

for access only.
Remove the height sensor link.
5.

Remove the bracket.
Installation
1.

Install the bracket.
Tighten the Allen bolts to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
2.
3.
Install the headlamp levelling sensor.

Connect the height sensor link.
4.

Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Leveling Rear Sensor

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the headlamp levelling sensor.

Remove the 2 bolts.
3.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component

is removed for access only.
Remove the bracket.
Installation
1.

Install the bracket.
Tighten the Allen bolts to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
2.
Install the headlamp levelling sensor.

Exterior Lighting - High Mounted Stoplamp

Removal
1.
Remove the liftgate lower trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Liftgate Lower Trim Panel
(501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
2.
Disconnect the high mounted stoplamp electrical

connector.
3.
Remove the high mounted stoplamp.

Carefully release the Torx bolt covers.
Installation
1.
Install the high mounted stoplamp.

Install the Torx bolt covers.
2.
Connect the high mounted stoplamp electrical connector.
3.
Install the liftgate lower trim panel.

Installation).
Exterior Lighting - Rear Lamp Assembly V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L

Petrol
Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.
Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel - 2-Door (501-05 Interior Trim

and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).

3.
Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel - Convertible (501-05 Interior

All vehicles
4.
Torque: 2 Nm
5.
CAUTION: Take great care when removing

the rear lamp assembly as the forward point of the
lens can be easily damaged.
Installation
1.
Exterior Lighting - Fog Lamp Bulb

Removal
1.

Procedures).
2.

3.

4.
Remove the front fog lamp bulb.

Release and disconnect the electrical
connector.
Installation
1.
Install the fog lamp bulb.

2.

3.

Procedures).
Exterior Lighting - Rear Fog and Reversing Lamp 2-Door

Removal
1.

Installation).
2.
Remove the fog and reversing lamp.

Remove the 3 plastic nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the fog and reversing lamp.

Install the plastic nuts.
2.

Installation).
Exterior Lighting - Rear Fog and Reversing Lamp Convertible

Removal
1.
Remove the luggage compartment lid trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid
2.
Remove the reverse/fog lamp.

Remove the 3 plastic nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the reverse/fog lamp.

Install the plastic nuts.
2.
Install the luggage compartment lid trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid
Exterior Lighting - Side Turn Signal Lamp

Removal
1.
Refer to: Exterior Mirror Cover (501-09 Rear View Mirrors,

2.
3.
Installation
1.
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Left Hand (LH) vanity mirror
Overhead console (Coupe version shown)
LH map reading lamp switch
Interior lamp switch
Right Hand (RH) map reading lamp switch
Map and interior lamps
RH vanity mirror
LH and RH door puddle lamps
LH and RH footwell lamps
10
LH and RH luggage compartment lamps
11
Glovebox lamp
INTRODUCTION
The interior lamps are controlled by the Central Junction Box (CJB) and have two modes of operation: manual and automatic.
In the manual mode the interior lamps can be switched on and off using the momentary switches adjacent to each lamp or
disabled completely using the same switches. In the automatic mode the interior lamp functionality is controlled by the CJB
on receipt of various input signals.
The CJB receives the following inputs which affect the operation of the interior lamps:
Ignition switch
Door latch switches
Liftgate latch switch
Glovebox lamp switch
Unlock signal
Main interior lamp switch
Map reading lamp switches
Delayed power off relay
Vanity mirror lamp switches.
The driver's and passenger door puddle lamps are controlled by the driver's door module and the passenger door module
respectively on receipt of Controller Area Network (CAN) signals from the CJB.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
Megafuse (175A)
Megafuse (175A)
CJB
Liftgate latch switch
www.JagDocs.com
Luggage compartment lamp
7
-
Luggage compartment lamp
10
Passenger door puddle lamp
11
Driver's door module
12
Driver's door puddle lamp
13
Glovebox lamp switch
14
Glovebox lamp
15
Driver's vanity mirror
16
Passenger vanity mirror
17
Driver's footwell lamp
18
Passenger footwell lamp
19
Driver's map reading lamp
20
Interior lamp
21
Passenger map reading lamp
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting

For a detailed description of the interior lighting system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage and system integrity.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Bulb(s)
Wiring harness
Accessories
Switch(es)
3.
4.
system.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

INTRODUCTION
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) use the full intensity low beam headlamps which are permanently illuminated when the
vehicle is being driven. DRL are used in a number of markets and there are two systems to cover these markets.
For additional information, refer to: Exterior Lighting (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Description and Operation).
DRL CANADIAN MARKET

DRL for this market use full intensity low beam headlamps. The side marker lamps, tail lamps and license plate lamps
will be on, but instrument cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the following parameters are met:
PARK is not selected on automatic transmission selector lever

Power mode 6 (ignition on) detected by the auxiliary junction box
The Central Junction Box (CJB) receives an engine running signal
The lighting control switch is in the off or side lamps position.
NOTE: If the lighting control switch is moved to the headlamp position, DRL are deactivated and normal side lamp and
headlamp functionality is operational.
NOTE: Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) (where fitted) is non-functional when the DRL are active.
NOTE: When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column multifunction switch will
operate normally.
The high beam headlamp function using the left hand steering column stalk switch will be deactivated. When the
selector lever is in the PARK position on automatic transmission vehicles, DRL are turned off. This is to reduce battery
discharge during long periods of engine idling in cold climate conditions. When the selector lever is moved from the
PARK position, normal DRL functionality is restored.
DRL DENMARK, HOLLAND, NORWAY, SWEDEN, FINLAND AND POLAND

DRL for these markets use full intensity low beam headlamps. Side lamps and license plate lamps will be on, but
instrument cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the following parameters are met:
Power mode 6 (ignition on) detected by the auxiliary junction box
The CJB receives an engine running signal
The lighting control switch is in the off position.
NOTE: When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column multifunction switch will
operate normally. The high beam headlamp function using the left hand steering column stalk switch will be
deactivated.
If the lighting control switch is moved to the side lamp or headlamp positions, DRL are deactivated and normal side
lamp and headlamp functionality is operational.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

For a detailed description of the daytime running lamps, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (417-04 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL), Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage and system integrity.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Bulb(s)
Switch(es)
Wiring Harness
3.
4.
system.
Module Communications Network Torque Specifications
Item
Junction box - nut/screw
Nm
4
lb-ft
3
lb-in
35
Module Communications Network - Communications Network

INTRODUCTION
A number of different types of communication network are incorporated into the vehicle wiring harnesses for the
transmission of commands and information between control modules. The configuration installed on a particular vehicle
depends on the model and equipment level.
The communication networks available on the vehicle are:
Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus

High speed CAN bus
MOST (media orientated system transport) ring
LIN (local interconnect network) bus
Private CAN bus
Bus
Medium speed CAN bus
High speed CAN bus
MOST ring
LIN bus
Baud Rate
125 kbits/s
500 kbits/s
24 mbits/s
9.6 kbits/s
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK BUS

The CAN bus is a high speed broadcast network where control modules automatically transmit information every few
microseconds. Information is broadcast down a pair of twisted wires, known as 'CAN high' and 'CAN low'. Information is
transmitted on the CAN bus as a voltage difference between the two wires.
Two CAN bus networks are used on the vehicle; medium speed and high speed, with the instrument cluster acting as a
gateway between the two networks. The table below shows the wire colors used on both networks.
Network
Medium Speed
High Speed
High
White (W)
Yellow (Y)
Low
Blue (U)
Green (G)
Private CAN Bus

The private CAN bus networks used on the vehicle can be either medium or high speed depending on which vehicle system
they are being used. All private CAN bus networks are proprietary systems and cannot be interrogated using a Jaguar
Diagnostic Socket
The diagnostic socket allows the transfer of information between the vehicle electronic control modules and a Jaguar
approved diagnostic system. The diagnostic socket is connected directly to both the medium speed CAN bus and the high
speed CAN bus and is located below the driver side of the instrument panel.
MEDIA ORIENTATED SYSTEM TRANSPORT RING

The MOST ring uses a fibre optic cable to transport data and audio around the information and entertainment system. The
fibre optic cable is arranged in a ring, with each unit on the ring having a 'MOST in' and 'MOST out' connection.
MOST is a synchronous network. A timing master supplies the clock and all other components on the ring synchronize their
operation to this clock. The timing master for the MOST ring is the Information and Entertainment control module.
When handling MOST fibre optic cables the following precautions should be observed.
After disconnection of any cables, carefully install appropriate dust caps to protect the mating faces of the connectors
from damage or contamination.

Avoid introducing bends of less than 25 mm (0.98 inches) radius or kinks into the fibre optic cable during service or
repair. Tight bends or kinks could impair operation, cause immediate system failure, or future system failure.
Avoid excessive force, strain or stress on the fibers and connectors, especially permanent stress after reinstallation.
Software Download Socket
CAUTION: The software download socket is used for engineering purposes only and must not be used in service.
The MOST software download socket is located below the driver side of the instrument panel. A service loop is fitted to the
end of the socket to complete the MOST ring. If the service loop is removed the MOST ring will be broken and all
components on the ring will stop operating.
Ring Break Diagnostics

Incorporated into the AJB (auxiliary junction box) is a RBD (ring break diagnostics) link. The RBD link houses a copper link
which when removed initiates the ring break diagnostics mode. The ring break diagnostics mode allows the technician to
locate an optical fiber break in the MOST ring. To initiate the ring break diagnostics mode, carry out the following process:
Connect the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.

Ensure the vehicle is in power mode 4 or greater.
Remove the RBD link for the length of time specified by the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
Replace the RBD link.
After approximately 30 seconds a DTC (diagnostic trouble code) will be logged in the Information and Entertainment Control
Module, identifying the location of the fault. The DTC can be read and interrogated using a Jaguar approved diagnostic
system.
LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK BUS

The LIN bus is a low speed broadcast network that employs master and slave components. The master component transmits
a message to the slave components identifying which slave is to respond. This message has a header (slave identifier) and
an empty data field. The identified slave component fills the data field with the relevant information and returns the message
to the master component.
Unlike the CAN bus networks, the LIN bus utilizes a single wire network.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - MEDIUM SPEED CAN BUS

NOTE: N = Medium speed CAN bus.
Item
Part Number
Description
Seat climate control module
Instrument cluster
Diagnostic socket
Parking aid module
Passenger seat module
Keyless vehicle module
TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) module
10
Convertible top module
11
12
13
Driver seat module
14
15
Driver door module
16
NOTE: Only the buttons of the integrated control panel are connected to the medium speed CAN bus. The TSD (touch screen
display) is connected to the MOST ring.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - HIGH SPEED CAN BUS

NOTE: D = High speed CAN bus.
Item
Part Number
Description
Instrument cluster
Diagnostic socket
Adaptive front lighting system control module
Occupancy sensor module
Pedestrian protection module
10
11
12
RCM (restraints control module)
13
14
Electric steering column lock
15
CONTROL DIAGRAM - MOST RING

NOTE: P = MOST ring.
Item
Part Number
Software download socket
Auxiliary USB (universal serial bus) unit
Multi-media module
DAB/SDARS receiver
Cellular phone module
TSD (touch screen display)

Audio system amplifier
8
9
Description
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PRIVATE CAN BUS

NOTE: U = Private CAN bus.
Item
Part Number
Description
ABS module
Yaw rate/acceleration sensor
Adaptive speed control sensor
CONTROL DIAGRAM - LIN BUS

NOTE: O = LIN bus.
Item
Part Number
CJB
Instrument cluster
Engine start control module
Steering wheel audio switch module
Driver seat switch pack
Driver seat module
Face/Feet distribution stepper motor
LH temperature blend stepper motor
10
RH temperature blend stepper motor
11
12
ATC module
13
14
Passenger seat switch pack
15
Driver door module
16
Clockspring
17
Description
Battery backed sounder
Module Communications Network - Communications Network

For a detailed description of the Communications Network, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Description and Operation).

CAUTIONS:
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not guarantee
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.
Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result.
1.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage and system integrity
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Fuses (refer to electrical guide)
Wiring harness
Correct engagement of electrical connectors
Loose or corroded connections
Routing of fibre optic harnesses
Correct engagement of optical connectors
Correct placement of optical connectors (ring order)
Correct assembly of optical connectors (backout, etc)
Damage to fibre (chafing, abrasion, kinking, cuts, etc)
3.
If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
the next step
4.
If the cause is not visually evident check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index
Symptom Chart
Symptom
MOST network fault - Touch
screen display displaying flashing
logo
Possible Causes
MOST ring broken after the touch screen display
Control module on MOST network power or ground circuit
MOST network fault - Touch

screen display blank

Control module on MOST network internal failure
MOST ring broken between the information and
entertainment control module and the touch screen display
Information and entertainment control module or touch
screen display power or ground circuit open circuit, high
resistance
Wake up signal not received by the information and
entertainment control module
Information and entertainment control module or touch
screen display internal failure
Action
GO to
Pinpoint Test
B.
GO to
Pinpoint Test
G.
Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST)
NOTE: Items 1, 6, 7, 8 and 9 will always be present. The remaining items are optional and/or market specific.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Overview
Description
Portable audio interface module
Navigation control module
Telephone module
DAB tuner module
Power amplifier
MOST diagnostic connector
The basic guidelines are covered in the description and operation section, such as not attempting to repair fibre optic cables,
but additional precautions include:
Do not touch the exposed ends of the optical fibres (grease from skin can contaminate the fibre)
Whenever the fibre optic cable is disconnected, cover the connectors to prevent dust contamination
Do not expose the fibre optic cable to heat
Do not bend the fibre optic cable through less than a 25 mm (one inch) radius
Do not use laser pens to test the fibre optic cable's ability to pass light
MOST Diagnostic Tools

There are two dedicated tools for testing the MOST system:
MOST tester. The MOST tester is connected to the MOST network in place of a control module. It will confirm receipt of any
existing MOST signal and transmit it to the next control module on the network. Perform the following tests to validate the
operation of the MOST tester. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
MOST prism. The MOST prism is connected in the same way as the MOST tester but will simply reflect any existing signal
onward to the next control module. Using the MOST prism before or after a long run of harness may cause a ring break as a
good signal may be too weak after travelling the extended distance. Also, the MOST prism will pass light in either direction
so will not detect reversed MOST terminals elsewhere in the network. For these reasons, the MOST tester is the preferred
tool and should be used unless limited access does not permit it
MOST Ring Break Indication
A ring break in the MOST network is indicated by a blank touch screen display if the break is before the touch screen display
or a flashing logo of the break is after the touch screen display. Possible causes of ring breaks are listed in the symptom
chart
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : MOST TESTER TESTS
TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: MOST TESTER BATTERY TEST
Set the MOST tester power switch to 'on'
1
Is the power LED illuminated?
Yes
Test passed. GO to A2.
No
Test failed. Install a new battery into the MOST tester. GO to A1.
A2: 2+0 INPUT/OUTPUT TEST
NOTE: '2+0' indicates that the loop harness connector consists of 2 fibre optic terminals and 0 electrical terminals.
NOTE: The MOST tester may continue to emit a tone or illuminate the LED after the test switch is released. This does not
indicate a fault.
1
Set the connector selector switch to '2+0'
2
4
Set the indication switch to 'beep' or 'LED'

Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+0 connector and the 2+0 loop harness connector
Connect the 2+0 loop harness to the MOST tester 2+0 connector
Operate the test switch and check the MOST tester beep/LED
6
Did the MOST tester emit a tone or illuminate the LED?
Yes
No
Test failed. MOST tester or 2+0 harness fault
A3: 2+4 INPUT/OUTPUT TEST
NOTE: '2+4' indicates that the loop harness connector consists of 2 fibre optic terminals and 4 electrical terminals.
indicate a fault.
1
2
3
4
Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+4 connector and the 2+4 loop harness connector
Connect the 2+4 loop harness to the MOST tester 2+4 connector
6
Yes
No
Test failed. MOST tester or 2+4 harness fault
A4: ADAPTER HARNESS AND PRISM TEST
indicate a fault.
1
2
3

4
5
Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+0 connector, the prism, and the adapter harness
connectors
Connect the adapter harness to the MOST tester 2+0 connector
Connect the prism to the adapter harness
7
Yes
Test passed
No
Test failed. MOST tester, adapter harness or prism fault
PINPOINT TEST B : MOST NETWORK INITIAL TESTS

TEST
CONDITIONS
B1: MOST NETWORK INITIAL TEST 1
NOTE: When connecting the MOST tester, use the 2+0 or 2+4 socket as appropriate and set the connector selector switch
to match the socket in use
Switch on the audio/video system
1
2
Remove the cover from the MOST diagnostic connector
3
4

Connect the MOST tester to the MOST diagnostic connector
Check the touch screen for indication of a MOST network fault

5
Has the MOST network been restored?
Yes
The MOST diagnostic connector cover is causing the MOST network fault. GO to B2.
No
The MOST diagnostic connector cover is not causing the MOST network fault. GO to B3.
Disconnect the MOST tester
1
2
Install the cover to the MOST diagnostic connector
Yes
No
Install a new MOST diagnostic connector cover
Check the MOST tester beep/LED
1
Yes
MOST signal received. The MOST network fault is located downstream of the MOST tester. GO to
Pinpoint Test E.
No
MOST signal not received. The MOST network fault is located upstream of the MOST tester.
Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester and reconnect it to the control module.
PINPOINT TEST C : MOST NETWORK UPSTREAM TESTS

TEST
CONDITIONS
C1: MOST NETWORK UPSTREAM TEST 1
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and identify the preceding control module on the MOST
1
network
Is this control module the touch screen display?
Yes
No
GO to C2.
Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the control module
1
Direct the MOST harness connector at a suitable surface and check for the presence of red light
2
Is red light present?
Yes
The MOST network fault is in the control module or the MOST harness to the succeeding control
module. GO to C3.
No
The MOST network fault is located upstream of the disconnected control module. Reconnect the
MOST harness connector to the control module. GO to C1.
Connect the MOST harness connector to the MOST tester
1
Check the touch screen display for indication of a MOST network fault
2
Yes
The disconnected control module is causing the MOST network fault. GO to Pinpoint Test D.
No
The fault is in the MOST harness between the MOST tester and the succeeding control module.
Install a new MOST harness as necessary
PINPOINT TEST D : CONTROL MODULE TESTS

TEST
CONDITIONS
D1: CONTROL MODULE TEST 1
indicate a fault.
Connect the MOST tester to the relevant control module using the adapter harness
1
2
Yes
MOST signal received. Tests inconclusive. Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the control
module and confirm that the MOST network fault is still present. Repeat the tests from the beginning.
No
GO to D2.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the relevant control module power and ground circuits
1
for open circuit, high resistance
Are the power and ground circuits within specification?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
Repair the power and/or ground circuit
Reconnect the MOST harness to the control module
1
2
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new control module
PINPOINT TEST E : MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST

TEST
CONDITIONS
E1: MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST 1
indicate a fault.
Disconnect the MOST tester from the MOST diagnostic connector
1
2
Install the cover to the MOST diagnostic connector
Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the information and entertainment control module

5
Yes
GO to E2.
No
The fault is in the harness between the information and entertainment control module and the
preceeding control module. Install a new MOST harness as necessary
E2: MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST 2
Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester
1
4
Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the information and entertainment control module
3
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new information and entertainment control module
PINPOINT TEST F : MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TESTS

TEST
CONDITIONS
F1: MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TEST 1
indicate a fault.
Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the touch screen display
1
2
Connect the MOST tester to the touch screen display using the adapter harness
3
Yes
The fault is in the MOST harness between the touch screen display and the succeeding control
module. Install a new MOST harness as necessary
No
GO to F2.
F2: MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TEST 2
Reconnect the MOST harness to the touch screen display
1
2
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new touch screen display
PINPOINT TEST G : BLANK SCREEN TESTS

TEST
CONDITIONS
G1: BLANK SCREEN TEST 1
Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the touch screen display
1
2
Yes
No
GO to G2.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and identify the preceding control module on the MOST
1
network
Is this control module the information and entertainment control module?
Yes
GO to G5.
No
GO to G3.
Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the control module
1
2
Yes
The MOST network fault is in the control module or the MOST harness to the succeeding control
module. GO to G4.
No
The MOST network fault is located upstream of the disconnected control module. Reconnect the
MOST harness connector to the control module. GO to G2.
1
2
Yes
The disconnected control module is causing the MOST network fault. GO to Pinpoint Test D.
No
The fault is in the MOST harness between the MOST tester and the succeeding control module.
Install a new MOST harness as necessary
Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the information and entertainment control module
1
Direct the information and entertainment control module at a suitable surface and check for the
presence of red light
Yes
Install a new MOST harness between the information and entertainment control module and the
succeeding control module
No
2
PINPOINT TEST H : INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE TESTS

TEST
CONDITIONS
H1: INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE TEST 1
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the information and entertainment control
1
module for related DTCs
Is communication possible between the manufacturer approved diagnostic system and the information and
entertainment control module?
Yes
Refer to the relevant DTC index
No
GO to H2.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the information and entertainment control module
1
power and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to H3.
No
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to
1
the electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Is the medium speed CAN bus within specification?
Yes
Install a new information and entertainment control module
No
Repair the medium speed CAN bus circuit
PINPOINT TEST I : TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY TESTS

TEST
CONDITIONS
I1: TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY TEST 1
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the touch screen display power and ground circuits
1
for open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to I2.
No
I2: TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY TEST 2
Reconnect the MOST harness to the touch screen display
1
2
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new touch screen display
DTC Index
CAUTION: When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit, part
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTE: If the control module is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the Warranty Policy
and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module.
NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. Match the five digits from the
scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give additional
NOTE: If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may be
the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
Rear Junction Box (RJB)

DTC
B100A51
Description
Fuel pump
authorisation target ID
not stored
Possible Cause
RJB fault
Low speed CAN fault
B100A62
Fuel pump
authorisation signal
compare failure
Low speed CAN fault

RJB fault
B100A63
Fuel Pump
Authorisation Time Out

Incorrect module installed
(RJB/Instrument cluster)
Write target SID
following re-programming
RJB fault
Low speed CAN fault
Action
Check power and ground supplies to RJB. Check CAN
communications between RJB and instrument
cluster. Check power and ground supplies to
instrument cluster
Check CAN communications between RJB and
instrument cluster. Check power and ground supplies
to RJB and instrument cluster. Confirm correct
module installed. Re-synchronise ID by reconfiguring the RJB as a new module. Check CAN
network for interference/EMC related issues
Check power and ground supplies to RJB and

instrument cluster. Check CAN communications
between RJB and instrument cluster. Check battery
is in fully charged and serviceable condition, refer to
the battery care manual
B102612

ground circuit short to
power
B10AF12 Blower fan relay short
to power
B10AF14 Blower fan relay open
load or short to ground
B10DD12 Air bag deployed circuit
short to ground
open circuit, short to
power or no signal
signal out of
specification
B111211 Parking aid ignition
supply short to ground
or over temperature
B111213 Parking aid ignition
supply open load
B111311
Left front comfort
solenoid short to
ground or over
temperature
B111313
Left front comfort
solenoid open load
B111411
Right front comfort
solenoid short to
ground or over
temperature
B111413
Right front comfort
solenoid open load
B111511
High mounted stop
lamp control short to
ground or over
temperature
B111513
High mounted stop
lamp control open load
B111611
B111613
B111711
B111713
B111811
B111813
B111911
B111913
B111A11
B111A13
Left rear lamp

assembly control circuit
short to ground or over
temperature
Left rear lamp
open load
Right rear lamp
temperature
Right rear lamp
open load
Left rear side marker
control circuit short to
ground or over
temperature
Left rear side marker
control circuit open
load
Right rear side marker
ground or over
temperature
load
License plate lamps
ground or over
temperature
License plate lamps
Steering column lock ground
circuit - short to power

Blower fan relay circuit -
short to power
Blower fan relay circuit -

resistance
Air bag deployed circuit short to ground
Air bag deployed circuit short to power, high
resistance
Signal frequency incorrect
Parking aid ignition supply

Parking aid ignition supply
circuit - high resistance

Left front comfort solenoid

steering column lock ground circuit for short to
power
blower fan relay circuit for short to power
Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test air
bag deployed circuit for short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test air
bag deployed circuit between RCM, ECM and RJB for
short to power, ground and open circuit
parking aid ignition supply circuit for high resistance
Left front comfort solenoid
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left

front comfort solenoid circuit for high resistance
Right front comfort solenoid Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Right front comfort solenoid

control circuit - short to
ground
control circuit - high

resistance
Left rear lamp assembly
ground
Left rear lamp assembly

resistance
Right rear lamp assembly
ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right

front comfort solenoid circuit for high resistance
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test high

mounted stop lamp control circuit for high resistance

rear lamp assembly control circuit for high resistance
Right rear lamp assembly

rear lamp assembly control circuit for high resistance
resistance
Left rear side marker control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Left rear side marker control


ground

rear side marker control circuit for high resistance

rear side marker control circuit for high resistance
resistance
License plate lamps control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
License plate lamps control

license plate lamps control circuit for high resistance
load
B111D11 Luggage compartment
lid open motor control
or over temperature
B111D13 Luggage compartment
lid open motor control
circuit open load
B111E11 Luggage compartment
lid lamps power supply
or over temperature
B111E13 Luggage compartment
lid lamps power supply
circuit open load
B112311 Restraints ignition relay
short to ground
B112312 Restraints ignition relay
short to power
B113E23
External luggage
compartment lid
release switch stuck
B1A751C Fuel sender No.1 fault
B1A761C Fuel sender No.2 fault
B1A7911 Right fog lamp control
or over temperature
B1A7913 Rear fog lamp control
circuit open load
B1C5512
Horn relay short to
power
B1C5514 Horn relay open load or
short to ground
B1C8312 Heated rear window
relay coil short to
power
B1C8314 Heated rear window
relay coil open load or
short to ground
B1C9111
Fuel filler door lock
motor control circuit
temperature
B1C9113
Fuel filler door lock
motor control circuit
open load
B1D0611 Left turn signal lamp
ground or over
temperature
B1D0613 Left turn signal lamp
load
B1D0711 Right turn signal lamp
ground or over
temperature
B1D0713 Right turn signal lamp
load
B1D3523 Hazard switch stuck
B2A9016
Battery low
B2A9116
Battery discharged
C111A11 Right stoplamp short to

ground or over
temperature
C111A13 Right stoplamp control
Luggage compartment lid
open motor control circuit short to ground


open motor control circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
high resistance
Luggage compartment lid Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
lamps power supply circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
short to ground

lamps power supply circuit - luggage compartment lid lamps power supply circuit
high resistance
for high resistance
Restraints ignition relay
restraints ignition supply relay circuit for short to
ground
Restraints ignition relay
restraints ignition supply relay circuit for short to
power
Signal stuck low
Fuel sender No.1 circuit -

Fuel sender No.2 circuit voltage out of range
Right fog lamp control circuit
- short to ground

Rear fog lamp control circuit

- high resistance
fog lamp control circuit for high resistance
Horn relay circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test horn
power
control relay circuit for short to power
Horn relay circuit - short to Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Heated rear window relay
heated rear window relay circuit for short to power
Heated rear window relay
circuit - short to ground,

high resistance
Fuel filler door lock motor
ground

Fuel filler door lock motor

resistance
Left turn signal lamp control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Left turn signal lamp control

Right turn signal lamp

ground
Right turn signal lamp

resistance
Signal stuck low

turn signal lamp control circuit for high resistance

turn signal lamp control circuit for high resistance

Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable
threshold
condition, refer to the battery care manual
Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable
threshold
condition, refer to the battery care manual
Right stoplamp control circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
- short to ground
Right stoplamp control circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right
circuit open load

C111B11 Left stoplamp control
or over temperature
C111B13 Left stoplamp control
circuit open load
C112011 Reversing lamp control
or over temperature
C112013 Reversing lamp control
circuit open load
P123011 Fuel pump relay short
to ground
P123012 Fuel pump relay short
to power
U001088 Medium Speed CAN
Communication Bus
U014000 Lost communication
CJB
with instrument cluster
with climate control
module
U0206Lost communication
00
with convertible top
module - No sub type
information
U021400
Lost communication
with remote keyless
entry module
- high resistance
- short to ground
Left stoplamp control circuit
- high resistance
Reversing lamp control
Reversing lamp control

Fuel pump relay circuit short to ground
Fuel pump relay circuit short to power
bus off
Lost communication CJB
instrument cluster

Circuit short to ground, short

stoplamp control circuit for high resistance
reversing lamp control circuit for high resistance
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test fuel
pump relay circuit for short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test fuel
pump relay circuit for short to power
to power
CAN signal fault
Low battery voltage
Convertible top control
module internal fault
check the power and ground connections to

the convertible top control module
system, complete a CAN network integrity
test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the CAN network between the
auxiliary junction box and convertible top
control module
and battery care manual. Check battery state
of charge and starting/charging system
performance
Clear the diagnostic trouble code and retest.
If the problem persists, renew the convertible
top control module. Refer to the warranty
suspect
remote keyless entry module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Calibration parameter failure
U1A1449 CAN initialisation failure
U300049
Control module
U300055
Stored vehicle
not match
Number (VIN)
U300281
stoplamp control circuit for high resistance
Left stoplamp control circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
data received

vehicle

approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test,
if DTC remains, suspect the RJB, refer to the new
Install a new RJB, refer to the new module
Install a new RJB, refer to the new module
approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test.
If the DTC remains suspect the RJB, refer to the new
Install original module, check for DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC Index

DTC
B100951
B100962
Description
Ignition
authorisation
Ignition
compare failure
Possible Cause
Action
Faulty instrument cluster

Check ignition, power and ground supplies to CJB and
Target SID reinstrument cluster. Re-synchronize ID by re-configuring the
instrument cluster as a new module. Check CAN
following programming
communications between instrument cluster and tester
CAN fault
Low speed CAN fault
Check CAN communications between CJB and instrument
CJB fault
cluster. Check ignition, power and ground supplies to CJB
Instrument cluster fault and instrument cluster. Confirm correct module is installed.
Incorrect module
Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the instrument cluster
B100963
Ignition
authorisation timeout
B100964
Ignition
B102611 Steering column lock
power circuit short
to ground or over
temperature
B102613 Steering column lock
power circuit open
load
B102B67
Passive key
installed (CJB/Instrument as a new module. Check CAN network for interference/EMC

cluster)
related issues
Target SID
CJB fault
Check Power and Ground supplies to CJB and instrument
Low speed CAN fault
cluster. Check CAN communications between CJB and
instrument cluster. Check battery is in fully charged and
serviceable condition, refer to the battery care manual
CJB fault
Check power and ground supplies to CJB and instrument
cluster. Check CAN communications between CJB and
Low speed CAN fault
instrument cluster
Circuit short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test steering
column lock power circuit for short to ground
Circuit open

column lock power circuit for high resistance
CJB fault
Low speed CAN fault
Remote Keyless Entry
Check power and ground supplies to CJB and RKE module.

Check CAN communications between CJB and RKE module.
Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the RKE module as a
new module
(RKE) module fault

Write target SID
B102B87
Passive key
authorisation
missing message
B108A23
Start button stuck
CJB fault
Low speed CAN fault
RKE module fault
Key fob battery
low/battery contact issue
Interference from other
RF signal
EMC/noise
Receiver fault
Receiver not
programmed correctly
Serial communications
fault (between receiver
and RKE module)
Key fault
Passive antenna fault
Confirm placement of
key within vehicle
Signal stuck low
B108A29
Start button fault
Signal invalid
B109511 Wiper On Off relay

control circuit short
to ground
B109512 Wiper On Off relay
to power
B109612 Wiper speed relay
to power
B109614 Wiper speed relay
load or short to
ground
B109712
Heated front
windshield relay
to power
B109714
Heated front
windshield relay
load or short to
ground
B109F11
Intrusion sensor
module power circuit
short to ground
Check power and ground supplies to CJB, RKE module and

receiver. Check CAN communications between CJB and
instrument cluster. Check key fob battery. Confirm vehicle
surroundings, move vehicle. Check CAN network for
interference/EMC related issues. Disconnect battery, then
re-connect - confirm operation by re-programming keys.
Check serial circuit between receiver and RKE module.
Confirm spare key works. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and test circuits to all 3 antennas. Check
whereabouts of key
Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test wiper On
Off relay control circuit for short to ground
Circuit short to power
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test wiper On

Off relay control circuit for short to power
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test wiper speed

relay control circuit for short to power
Circuit short to ground or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test wiper speed
open
relay control circuit for high resistance or short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test heated front

windshield relay control circuit for short to power
Circuit short to ground or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test heated front
open
windshield relay control circuit for high resistance or short

to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test intrusion

sensor module power circuit for short to ground
B10AD11 Rain sensor power

circuit short to
ground or over
temperature
B10AD13 Rain sensor power
circuit open load
B10AD49 Rain sensor internal
fault
B10DB23
Front left global

close
B10DC23 Front right global
close
B10E511 ECM wake-up signal
short to ground
B10F111 Key In switch circuit
short to ground
B10F311 Front left side lamp
to ground or over
temperature
B10F313 Front left side lamp
load
B10F411 Front right side lamp
to ground or over
temperature
B10F413 Front right side lamp
load
B10F812 Cigar lighter relay
to power
B10F814 Cigar lighter relay
load or short to
ground
B10F912 Accessory socket 'B'
relay short to power
B10F914 Accessory socket 'B'
relay open load or
short to ground
B10FA12 Delayed power off
relay power output
circuits short to
power
B10FA14 Delayed power off
relay power output
circuits open load or
short to ground
B10FF11 Engine Junction Box
(EJB) and ECM
ignition relay control
circuit short to
ground or over
temperature
B10FF13 Engine Junction Box
(EJB) and ECM
ignition relay control
circuit open load
B110011 O2 sensor heater
relay control circuit
short to ground or
over temperature
B110013 O2 sensor heater
relay control circuit
open load
B113F12 Intruder detection
arm/disarm control
circuit short to
power
B114011
Engine crank
authorisation circuit
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rain sensor

power circuit for short to ground
Circuit open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test rain sensor

power circuit for high resistance
Install a new rain sensor.
REFER to: Rain Sensor (501-16 Wipers and Washers,
Signal stuck low
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Front left
global close circuit for short to ground
Signal stuck low
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Front right
global close circuit for short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test ECM wakeup signal for short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Key In
switch circuit for short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front left
side lamp control circuit for short to ground
Circuit open

side lamp control circuit for high resistance
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front right

side lamp control circuit for short to ground
Circuit open

side lamp control circuit for high resistance
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test cigar lighter

Circuit short to ground or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test cigar lighter
open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Accessory

socket 'B' relay for short to power
Circuit short to ground or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Accessory
open
socket 'B' relay for high resistance or short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test delayed

power off relay power output circuits for short to power
Circuit short to ground or
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test delayed

power off relay power output circuits for high resistance or
short to ground
open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test EJB and

ECM ignition relay control circuits for short to ground
Circuit open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test EJB and

ECM ignition relay control circuits for high resistance
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test O2 sensor

heater relay control circuit for short to ground
Circuit open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test O2 sensor

heater relay control circuit for high resistance
Engine crank
authorisation circuit short
B114013
B114211
B114213
B114311
B114313
B114411
B114413
B114611
B114613
B114711
B114713
B114811
B114813
B115A11
B115A13
B115B11
B115B13
B1A9801
B1A9881
B1A9883
short to ground or
over temperature
Engine crank
authorisation circuit
open load
Ignition supply
status circuits 1
short to ground or
over temperature
Ignition supply
status circuits 1
open load
Ignition supply
status circuits 2
short to ground or
over temperature
Ignition supply
status circuits 2
open load
Steering wheel
heater supply circuit
short to ground or
over temperature
Steering wheel
open load
Passive sounder
supply circuit short
to ground or over
temperature
Passive sounder
supply circuit open
load
Front left fog lamp
to ground or over
temperature
Front left fog lamp
load
Front right fog lamp
to ground or over
temperature
Front right fog lamp
load
Front passenger seat
short to ground or
over temperature
Front passenger seat
open load
Front driver seat
short to ground or
over temperature
Front driver seat
open load
LIN Bus short to
ground or power
LIN Bus header error
LIN Bus checksum

error
B1B651C Front left seat heater
temperature sensor
fault
B1B661C
Front right seat
heater temperature
sensor fault
to ground
Engine crank
authorisation circuit high
resistance
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test ignition
supply status circuits 1 for short to ground
Circuit open

supply status circuits 1 for high resistance

supply status circuits 2 for short to ground
Circuit open

supply status circuits 2 for high resistance

wheel heater supply circuit for short to ground
Circuit open

wheel heater supply circuit for high resistance
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test passive

sounder supply circuit for short to ground
Circuit open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test passive

sounder supply circuit for high resistance

fog lamp control circuit for short to ground
Circuit open


fog lamp control circuit for short to ground
Circuit open


passenger seat heater supply circuit for short to ground
Circuit open

passenger seat heater supply circuit for high resistance
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front driver

seat heater supply circuit for short to ground
Circuit open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test front driver

seat heater supply circuit for high resistance
General electrical failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test LIN Bus for
short to ground or power

Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test LIN circuit
received
to battery backed sounder for short to ground, power, high
resistance
Value of signal protection Install a new CJB, refer to the new module installation note
range
seat heater temperature sensor circuit for short to ground,
range
seat heater temperature sensor circuit for short to ground,
Invalid serial data
B1C4323 Master light switch

stuck
B1C4523 Front wiper park
position stuck
B1C7812 Powerwash relay
to power
B1C7814 Powerwash relay
load or short to
ground
B1C7911 Windshield washer
pump control circuit
short to ground or
over temperature
B1C7913 Windshield washer
pump control circuit
open load
B1C9811 Front left cornering
lamp control circuit
short to ground or
over temperature
B1C9813 Front left cornering
open load
B1C9911 Front right cornering
short to ground or
over temperature
B1C9913 Front right cornering
open load
B1D0011 Front left low beam
to ground or over
temperature
B1D0013 Front left low beam
load
B1D0111 Front right low beam
to ground or over
temperature
B1D0113 Front right low beam
load
B1D0211 Front left high beam
to ground or over
temperature
B1D0213 Front left high beam
load
B1D0311
Front right high
beam control circuit
short to ground or
over temperature
B1D0313
Front right high
beam control circuit
open load
B1D1711
Battery backed
sounder power
circuit short to
ground
B1D1787
Battery backed
sounder reply failure
B1D2711 Heater coolant pump
to ground or over
temperature
B1D2713 Heater coolant pump
load
P080111 Reverse inhibit to
Signal stuck low

Signal stuck low
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test master light

switch circuit for short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test wiper park
position switch circuit for short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test powerwash
Circuit short to ground or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test powerwash
open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test windshield

washer pump control circuit for short to ground
Circuit open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test windshield

washer pump control circuit for high resistance

cornering lamp control circuit for short to ground
Circuit open

cornering lamp control circuit for high resistance

cornering lamp control circuit for short to ground
Circuit open

cornering lamp control circuit for high resistance

low beam control circuit for short to ground
Circuit open

low beam control circuit for high resistance

low beam control circuit for short to ground
Circuit open

low beam control circuit for high resistance

high beam control circuit for short to ground
Circuit open

high beam control circuit for high resistance

high beam control circuit for short to ground
Circuit open

high beam control circuit for high resistance
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test battery

backed sounder power circuit for short to ground
Missing message
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test LIN Bus for
short to ground, power or high resistance
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test heater
coolant pump control circuit for short to ground
Circuit open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test heater

coolant pump control circuit for high resistance
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test reverse
P080113
U001088
U014200
U015500
U015600
U016400
U019900
U020000
U020600
rear view mirror

circuit short to
ground or over
temperature
Reverse inhibit to
rear view mirror
circuit open load
Medium speed CAN
communication Bus
Lost communication
with RJB
Lost communication
with instrument
cluster
Lost communication
with Information and
Entertainment
module
Lost communication
with climate control
module
Lost communication
with Driver Door
Module (DDM)
Lost communication
with Passenger Door
Module (PDM)
Lost communication
with convertible top
module - No sub
type information

with remote keyless
entry module
U030000
Internal control
module software
incompatibility
U030046
U1A1449
U201011
U201013
U300049
Internal control
module software
incompatibility
CAN initialisation
failure
Switch illumination
supply circuit short
to ground or over
temperature
Switch illumination
supply circuit open
load
Control module
U300055
Stored vehicle
configuration data
does not match
U300087
Control Module

Number (VIN)
inhibit to rear view mirror circuit for short to ground
Circuit open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test reverse

inhibit to rear view mirror circuit for open load
Bus Off
Lost communication with Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
RJB
instrument cluster
Lost Communication with Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Information and
Entertainment module
DDM
PDM
Circuit short to ground,

short to power
CAN signal fault
Low battery voltage
Convertible top control
module internal fault

convertible top control module
the CAN network between the auxiliary junction box
and convertible top control module
Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
battery care manual. Check battery state of charge
Clear the diagnostic trouble code and retest. If the
problem persists, renew the convertible top control
module. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module is suspect
remote keyless entry
module
message is received
diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is
still logged suspect the CJB module, refer to the new
Calibration parameter
Re-calibrate the CJB using the manufacturer approved
failure
diagnostic system
Internal electronic failure Install a new CJB, refer to the new module installation note
Circuit open

Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test switch
illumination supply circuit for short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test switch

illumination supply circuit for high resistance
Internal electronic failure Install a new CJB, refer to the new module installation note

configuration data
diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC
received
remains suspect the CJB, refer to the new module
Missing message
diagnostic system. Check CJB for DTCs and refer to the
DTC Index. Check CAN network integrity using the
Vehicle/component mis- Install original module, check for DTCs and refer to relevant
DTC Index
being transmitted,
module previously
Incorrect car
www.JagDocs.com

U300316
U300317
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
threshold
threshold
Module Communications Network - Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB)

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.
3.

Release the auxiliary junction box.

Disconnect the battery positive cable.
4.
Remove the auxiliary junction box.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the auxiliary junction box.

2.
Secure the auxiliary junction box.

Tighten the battery positive lead nut to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
3.

Secure in the clip.
4.

Specifications).
Module Communications Network - Central Junction Box (CJB)

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

Remove the 3 clips.
3.
4.
Remove the cowl side trim panel.

Remove the hood release lever.
Release the forward edge of the scuff plate
trim panel.
Release the CJB.

Release the battery positive cables.
5.
Remove the CJB.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the CJB.

Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2.
Secure the CJB.

Attach the battery positive cables.
3.
Install the cowl side trim panel.

Install the scuff plate trim panel.
Install the hood release lever and secure with the screw.
4.

5.

Specifications).
6.
Using WDS, configure a new CJB.
Module Configuration - Module Configuration

Module Configuration
There are two modes of configuration data. The first type requires configuration information so that the module can
interact with the vehicle correctly. This information will be transferred to the new module using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, so that it will contain the same settings as the old module.
New modules which require configuration after installation are:
Anti-lock control - stability assist module

Climate control module
Adaptive damping module
Headlamp levelling module
Driver door module (DDM)
Driver seat module (DSM)
Engine control module (ECM)
Navigation system display module
Integrated audio module (CD player)
Audio amplifier
Instrument cluster
Remote keyless entry (RKE) module
Multimedia (navigation) module
Parking aid module
Passenger door module (PDM)
Pedestrian protection system module
Passenger seat module (PSM)
Restraints control module (RCM)
Rear Junction Box (RJB)
Transmission control module (TCM)
Tire pressure monitoring system
Customer Driven Preferences

The second type of configuration data is customer preference driven. These are items that the customer may or may
not want to have enabled. Typically, customer preference items can be toggled on or off by the use of a compatible
scan tool. You may need to ask the customer which preferences they had enabled prior to installation of a new module,
although after installation they will automatically learn the settings by receiving information from existing modules.
To carry out the customer preference configuration process, use the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to
the configuration menu and select 'Vehicle Configuration'. Customer options can be selected or de-selected by
modifying the 'Car Configuration File'.
Wiring Harnesses Item

Wiring Harness assembly shield retaining bolts
Engine front cover ground cable retaining bolts
Transmission right-hand heatshield retaining bolts
Engine wiring harness electrical connector bolt
Fuse box retaining bolts
Starter motor battery positive terminal integral connector retaining nut
Heated oxygen sensor(HO2S) bracket retaining bolts
Nm
9
12
9
3
4
10
48
lb-ft
9
7
35
lb-in
80
80
27
35
-
Wiring Harnesses - Wiring Harness

Introduction
CAUTION: Do not use any other heat shrink sleeve other than the approved glue lined heat shrink sleeve mentioned in
the repair procedure.
The purpose of this document is to promote quick and efficient minor repair to harness connectors or cables using approved
methods and the wiring harness repair kit. Repairs may only be made to cables and connectors which have been
mechanically, not electrically damaged. It also applies where the whole extent of the damage can be clearly identified and
rectified.
Care and neatness are essential requirements in making a perfect repair.
Caution:
At the time of this first issue of the Harness Repair Guide, do not approve repairs to any of the following circuits:
Any media orientated system transport network harnesses.
Supplement restraint system (SRS) firing circuits (Air bags).
Link lead assembles, which are unique to safety critical circuits such as anti-lock brake system (ABS) and
thermocouple circuits. An example of this is the ABS wheel speed sensors with moulded connectors.
4. Screened cables, leads and wiring harness(s).
If any harness(s) with defective electrical connector terminals or wires from the above circuits are a concern,
new components must be installed.
Repair Kit
CAUTION: Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient
heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined heat
shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
The wiring harness repair kit has been produced which comprises:
Pre-terminated wiring harness(s) of different sizes and types

Three sizes of butt splice connectors
A selection of colored cable identification sleeves
Two sizes of glue lined heat shrink sleeves
Crimping pliers
A wire cutter and insulation stripper
An electrical connector terminal extraction handle and tips
A suitable heat source, for shrinking heat shrink sleeves will be required.
The pre-insulated diamond grip range of electrical connector terminals and in-line, butt splice connectors contained within
the wiring harness repair kit are the only acceptable product for the repairs of wiring harnesses. The butt connectors not
only grip the wire but also the insulation, making a very secure joint.
If an electrical connector terminal is not included in the wiring harness repair kit then approval for the repair is NOT given
and in these circumstances a new wiring harness must be installed.
Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) and Butt Splice Connectors

All pre-terminated wiring harness(s) and butt splice connectors in the wiring harness repair kit are contained in bags which
can be resealed after use. Each bag is marked with the part number of the items stored within the bag. Each storage
compartment in the wiring harness repair kit is identified with the corresponding part number. Make sure that preterminated wiring harness(s) and connectors are not mixed up it is advisable to only open one bag at a time and to reseal
the bag securely before opening another bag. Also, replace the bag in its mating part number compartment within the case.
The pre-terminated wiring harness(s) are supplied with the insulation in one of three colors, red, blue or yellow. The colors
do not apply to any particular circuit but to the harness wire size. See the Relationship Table in the Repair Method section.
Butt splice connectors are also supplied with red, blue or yellow coverings, which must be matched to the pre-terminated
wiring harness insulation color.
Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s)
The illustration shows:
The pre-terminated wiring harness(s) which are included in the wiring harness repair kit
The part number of the pre-terminated wiring harness
The letter showing the extractor tip which must be used to remove this type of electrical connector terminal
Those electrical connector terminals which are gold
Some of the pre-terminated wiring harness(s) have seals installed to the insulation for sealed connector applications. It is
essential for prevention of moisture ingress that a sealed pre-terminated wiring harness must be used where a sealed
terminal was removed.
CAUTION: Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient
heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined heat
shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
Two sizes of heat shrink sleeving are supplied in the wiring harness repair kit. Each heat shrink sleeve contains a sealant
glue. These must be used when connecting wiring harness(s) or electrical connector terminal(s) at all times. The smaller
diameter heat shrink sleeve is to be used with the red and blue butt splice connectors and the larger diameter sleeve with
the yellow butt splice connectors.
For ease and speed, some of the pre-terminated wiring harness(s) may already have the insulation partly stripped at the
splice end. If the repair requires insulation to be stripped from the cable, refer to the Relationship Table for the correct
length of insulation to be stripped.
The Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) illustration shows the electrical connector terminal type, the part number of the preterminated wiring harness and the letter of the extractor tip which must be used to extract the electrical connector terminal
from the connector housing. Additionally, those electrical connector terminal(s) which are gold are identified, all others are
therefore, tinned and not gold.
Wiring Harness Cable Identification Sleeves
A selection of colored sleeves are contained in the wiring harness repair kit for maintaining the wiring harness cable
identification on the pre-terminated wiring harness. Place the correct colored sleeve(s) over the pre-terminated wiring
harness insulation as near to the electrical connector as possible with the main wiring harness cable color nearest to the
For example, if the original wiring harness cable color is pink with a black trace put the pink wiring harness cable
identification sleeve on the pre-terminated wiring harness first followed by a black sleeve, and slide both along the wiring
harness cable to the electrical connector terminal.
Extraction Handle and Tips

The extraction handle, in conjunction with the correct tip, is used to remove a terminal from an electrical connector. Each tip
contained in the wiring harness repair kit is marked with an identification letter, A to K inclusive. Each tip has been specially
designed to extract a particular type of electrical connector terminal. The use of any other tool is not recommended and is
liable to cause damage to the electrical connector. The tip is fastened to the handle by a screw which holds the tip firmly yet
allows it to be easily replaced.
Extraction Handle and Tips
Insulation Stripper
The moving jaw has an adjuster wheel which has a series of holes in it. Turning the wheel and placing the cable in the
matching size hole will automatically adjust the jaw to the correct pressure. Note that some wiring harness(s) may have a
harder insulation and slight adjustment of the wheel may be needed to make a clean strip but exercise care not to damage
the wire.
Insulation Stripper
By pressing the outer edges of the wiring harness cable length stop together the adjuster can be slid up or down the jaw.
This decreases or increases the length by which the wiring harness cable insulation will be stripped from the pre-terminated
wiring harness or wiring harness wire. The adjuster has a position indicator to align with a graduated scale and this sets the
correct length in millimetres, of insulation to be stripped. The amount of insulation to be stripped is shown in the
Relationship Table.
The illustration shows the insulation stripper tool and a wiring harness correctly gripped in the jaws. A wire cutter is provided
on the outer side of the fixed jaw.
Cable Correctly Gripped in Stripper Blades
Crimping Pliers
Crimping Pliers
The crimping pliers have a moving jaw and a stationary jaw, with three different sized crimping enclosures. Each of the
enclosures is identified by a red, blue or yellow coloured dot which corresponds to the three colours of the pre-terminated
wiring harness(s) and butt splice connector colors.
List of Parts
Description
Wiring Harness Repair Kit
Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s)
Glue Lined Heat Shrink Pack small diameter
Part Number
418-S065
418-066 to 418-103
inclusive
418-104
Glue Lined Heat Shrink Pack larger diameter
418-105
Case Assembly Comprising carry case, lid, inner lid, base, insert, trays foam
spacers
Butt Splice Connector Red
418-106
Butt Splice Connector Blue
418-108
Butt Splice Connector Yellow
418-109
Extraction Tool Handle

Extraction Tip Pack consists of 2 spare screws plus
Tip A
Tip B
Tip C
Tip D
Tip E
Tip F
Tip G
Tip H
Tip I
Tip J
Tip K
Sleeve Identification Pack for Red insulation
Sleeve Identification Pack for Blue insulation
Sleeve Identification Pack for Yellow insulation
418-110
418-S111
418-118
418-119
418-120
418-121
418-122
418-123
418-124
418-125
418-126
418-127
418-128
418-112
418-113
418-114
50 per
pack
50 per
pack
20 per
pack
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
500
500
500
Instruction Manual
Crimping Pliers
Wire Stripping Tool
JTP 593
YRW500010
418-117
1
1
1
418-107
Quantity
1
10 each
25 per
pack
10 per
pack
1
Items can be ordered from:

SPX United Kingdom Limited
Ironstone Way
Brixworth
Northants
NN6 9UD
United Kingdom
Telephone: +44 (0) 1327 704461
Fax: +44 (0) 1327 706632
Repair Methods
CAUTION: Several different types and sizes of terminal may be found in a single electrical connector
housing.
It is necessary to identify:
The conductor (wire) size of the affected wiring harness
The electrical connector range from which the damaged wiring harness is to be removed
The terminal type
Use of the approved diagnostic tool will greatly assist in the quick identification of electrical connectors and faulty pin
terminal(s).
Reference can also be made to the vehicle Electrical Guides, held by Dealers, to identify wiring harness(s) and electrical
connector(s).
By using the Relationship Table, the wiring harness conductor (wire) size can be related to a suitable pre-terminated wiring
harness by the color of the insulation. Also, the correct length of insulation to be stripped from the wiring harness lead is
identified.
Relationship Table
CABLE RANGE
0.35 mm to 1.50 mm
1.00 mm to 2.50 mm
4.00 mm to 6.00 mm
SPLICE
RED
BLUE
YELLOW
STRIP LENGTH
6.00 to 7.00 mm
6.00 to 7.00 mm
9.00 to 9.50 mm
Electrical Connector Terminal Extraction

It must be noted that some electrical connector(s) have anti-backout devices which prevent the terminals from being
removed from the electrical connector. Some examples of these are shown in following illustrations. The anti-backout device
must be released before attempting to remove the terminal from the electrical connector. Some anti-backout devices require
a special tip to release the device and these have been included in the kit. Most can be released by carefully using a suitable
small screwdriver.
Various types of electrical connector have seals installed internally or externally to prevent moisture ingress. These normally
do not have to be removed but make sure that they are installed when the electrical connectors are connected.
The illustrations show examples of each tip used on different types of electrical connector(s). There are a large number of
different types of electrical connector used on vehicles therefore only one example using each tip is shown. Technicians
experience and judgement will dictate which type of tip should be used for those electrical connector(s) which are not shown.
Care should be exercised to avoid further damage when removing the terminals from the electrical connector.
NOTE: Examples of the extraction tips and anti-backout tips.
NOTE: The chart shows the electrical connector types, terminal pins/sockets, extractor tip and anti-backout tip.
Electrical connector terminal type
Mulitlock 040 series
Econoseal III 070 series
Econoseal III J2
Micro-timer II 1.5mm
Micro-timer II 1.5mm
Std power timer 4.8 flat
Ford 2.8 flat
Junior power timer 2.8 flat
Sumitomo TS90 connector
Modu IV gold plated
Mulitlock 040 series gold plated
Micro qualock
EECV
EECV
Kostal dia 1.50 series
AMP 6.3 flat
Junior power timer 2.8 flat
2.8 series
Sumitomo TS90 connector
Ducon 0.60 gold plated
AMP 6.3 flat
Pin or socket
D
B
B
D
D
B
B
D
B
D
B
D
D
B
D
B
B
D
D
B
D
D
B
D
B
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
B
Extractor tip
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
F
B
F
B
C
C
G
D
D
D
G
D
E
B
B
D
B
B
A
I
B
B
J
B
D
B
B
K
D
F
Anti-backout tip
I
H
Repair Procedure
CAUTIONS:
Do not use crimping pliers, insulation strippers, butt splice connectors, heat shrink sleeves or pre-terminated wiring
harness(s) that are not supplied with the Jaguar wiring harness repair kit. Each part has been designed to be used only with
the other parts in this wiring harness repair kit.
Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient heat to the
glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue lined heat shrink
sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
It is not correct to make more than five repair joints on the wiring harness to any electrical connector and if more damage is
found at the same electrical connector then a new wiring harness must be installed.
Remove the faulty terminal from the electrical connector using the extractor tool and correct tip. Make sure that any
anti-backout device is released before trying to remove the terminal.
CAUTION: : A number of electrical connector terminals are gold plated or gold flashed. When defective, they
must be installed with a gold pre-terminated wiring harness(s) from the wiring harness repair kit. It is not always
easy to identify the female as gold but the male pins are visually easier, therefore always check both male and
female terminals to identify those which are gold. Under no circumstances are gold and tin terminals to be mixed as
this will lead to early failure of the electrical contact.
NOTE: Never use a harness lead with a smaller diameter than the original harness lead.
Select the correct size and type of pre-terminated wiring harness and butt splice connector from the wiring harness
repair kit.
Using the wire cutter on the stripping tool, cut the pre-terminated wiring harness and the harness cable to the
required length.
NOTE: See illustration: Stripping Insulation
From the Relationship Table, find the correct length of insulation to be stripped from the pre-terminated wiring
harness and set the adjustable cable length stop to the correct length. Place the pre-terminated wiring harness in the
wire stripper and remove the insulation.
Put the cable identification sleeve(s) on to the wiring harness with the main cable colour nearest to the terminal.
During this next step do not over tighten. Place the selected butt splice connector in the crimping tool, matching the
aperture and the butt connector colours. Make sure that the window indentation in the butt connector is resting over
the guide bar on the lower jaw. Partially close the grip until the butt connector is securely held in the aperture. This
will give support to the butt connector while the pre-terminated wiring harness is inserted into it.
NOTE: See illustration: Splice Correctly Located
Insert the pre-terminated wiring harness into the butt connector and make sure that the wire is against the wire stop.
Close the grip firmly, crimping the lead to the butt connector. When the handles have been completely closed the
butt connector will be freed from the tool as the handles are released. If the handles have not been completely closed
then the jaws will hold the butt connector and it cannot be removed from the tool until the crimp is fully made by
closing the handles completely.
Make sure that the harness cable has been squarely cut and the correct length of insulation removed. If more than
one splice is needed the butt connectors must be not be crimped to the wiring harness at the same distance from the
connector. The splices must be staggered to prevent a bulk of splices in the same area of the wiring harness.
It is preferable to cover the butt splice joint with heat shrink sleeve. This is desirable not essential, except where the
electrical connector is a sealed electrical connector. Use the smaller diameter sleeve for red and blue pre-terminated
wiring harness(s) and the large diameter sleeve for the yellow pre-terminated wiring harness(s). It is advisable to
place the heat shrink over the completed joint but in some instances the sleeve will not pass over the terminal.
Check, and if required, place the correct size sleeve onto the harness cable or pre-terminated wiring harness before
crimping the butt splice to the wiring harness.
Place the harness cable into the butt splice with the splice window over the guide bar. Make sure that the cable
harness wire is against the stop in the butt splice, crimp the butt splice connector to the wiring harness.
Gently pull the harness cables each side of the butt splice to make sure that a secure joint has been made.
WARNING: Do not use a naked flame in areas where fuel or oil have been spilt. Clean the area of residual oil
and fuel and wait until the fuel spill has fully evaporated.
CAUTIONS:
When using a heat source make sure that it is localised and causes no damage to surrounding materials.
Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient
heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue
lined heat shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
Using a suitable heat source, shrink the sleeve over the butt splice.
If further pre-terminated wiring harness(s) are to be installed to the same electrical connector, make sure that the
lead is cut at a different length to the previous joint. This makes sure that the splices will, where possible, be
staggered on the wiring harness and prevent a bulk of splices in one area.
When all of the splices have been made, fit the terminal(s) to the electrical connector, taking care that the terminals
are correctly orientated.
Install the wiring harness cover and secure with adhesive electrical tape. Do not cover the wiring harness right to the
electrical connector as the terminals must have a little movement and not be firmly bound to the electrical connector
or wiring harness. Make sure that the cable identification sleeve(s) are showing at the wiring harness electrical
connector.
Stripping Insulation
Splice Correctly Located
Wiring Harnesses - Wiring Harness Repair

General Procedures
1.
For additional information, refer to: Wiring Harness (418-02

Wiring Harnesses, Description and Operation).
Wiring Harnesses - Fuel Tank Wiring Harness Modification

General Procedures
Repair
NOTE: Some components shown removed for clarity.
1.
For additional information on correct wiring harness
repair techniques, refer to TOPIx section 418-02.

2.

3.
Installation).
4.
5.
NOTE: Cut the wires as close as possible to the

6.
7.
Install the female terminal to the wire, and
using a suitable tool crimp the first stage.
8.
Install the wiring harness grommet to the
terminal, and using a suitable tool, crimp

the second stage.
9.
Repeat steps 5 to 8 for the second wire.
10.
CAUTION: It is essential that the wires are

installed in the correct orientation as shown. The
lug must be positioned opposite to the connector
release clip.
11.
CAUTION: Make sure that the wires are

installed correctly by pulling the wires gently to
make sure they are engaged.
Secure the electrical terminals with the
anti-backout.
12.
13.
NOTE: Cut the wires as close as possible to the

14.
15.
16.
Following the procedure above for the
female terminals, install the two male

terminals to the wires.
17.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the wires are installed to align

with the corresponding coloured wire on the
opposite connector.
It is essential that the wires are installed in

the correct orientation as shown.
www.JagDocs.com
18.
CAUTION: Make sure that the wires are

installed correctly by pulling the wires gently to
make sure they are engaged.
Secure the electrical terminals with the
anti-backout.
19.
20.
CAUTIONS:
The male connector is to be installed on the sender side.
Make sure that the wires are installed to align with the
corresponding coloured wire on the opposite connector.
It is essential that the wires are installed in the correct

orientation to the connectors.
Using the procedure outlined above for the passive side
sender, remove the wiring connectors from the active

side sender and replace with the new connectors from
the parts kit.
21.
Re-route the active side sender wires as
shown.
22.
23.
24.
Installation).
25.

Anti-Theft - Active Torque Specifications
Item
Antenna - bolt
Anti-theft alarm horn - nut
Battery backed sounder to bracket - nut
Battery backed sounder bracket to body - nut
Intrusion sensors - nut/screw
Keyless vehicle module - nut
Nm
5
8
6
8
2
5
lb-ft
-
lb-in
44
71
53
71
18
44
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft - Active

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Left hand and right hand door latch microswitches
Central door locking RF (radio frequency) receiver
Liftgate latch microswitch
Slave intrusion detection module
Intrusion detection module
Hood ajar switch
Passive anti-theft horn (if fitted)
Battery backed sounder (if fitted) or battery backed sounder with tilt sensor (if fitted)
10
Vehicle horns
INTRODUCTION
The active anti-theft system monitors the hinged panels for unauthorized opening. In some markets the anti-theft system
also incorporates:
Monitoring of the vehicle interior and vehicle tilt sensing
Control of the electric steering column lock (where fitted).
The active anti-theft alarm system is controlled by the following body system control modules:

LH (left-hand) door module
RH (right-hand) door module
Instrument cluster.
The CJB is the main controller in the system. The CJB controls the following security functions, in addition to other vehicle
functions:
Locking, double locking (where fitted) and unlocking

Monitoring of hinged panel microswitches and panel ajar states
Microwave intrusion detection modules (where fitted)
Passive anti-theft horn or battery backed sounder (market dependant)
Passive arming and disarming (where enabled)
Active arming and disarming
Panic alarm function
Transceiver coil and transponder reading
Valet function (via the TSD (touch screen display))
Interior lighting
Locking and unlocking of the electric steering column lock (where fitted).
Two alarm modes are available:

Perimeter mode, which locks and monitors all opening panels
Volumetric mode, which monitors the vehicle interior for intrusion and incorporates a tilt sensor to monitor if the
vehicle is being raised.
Door Modules
The door modules provide the interface between the door latch motors, the door and latch microswitches and the CJB. The
door modules provide door microswitch switch status information and enable the door motors on request from the CJB or the
keyless vehicle module. Additionally, the door modules also control the exterior mirror functions.
Auxiliary Junction Box and Central Junction Box

The AJB controls, in conjunction with the CJB:
The
The
The
The
The
horns
liftgate latch motors and microswitches (including the liftgate external release switch)
liftgate ajar switch
turn signal indicators
fuel filler flap operation.
The AJB also has a connection to the RCM (restraints control module) for automatic operation of the interior lights and the
turn signal indicators in the event of an accident.
The CJB and AJB are both fitted with an anti-theft sense line. If the AJB is disconnected when the alarm system is active, the
full alarm will be activated by the CJB. If the CJB is disconnected when the alarm system is active, the AJB takes control of
the security system and sounds the full alarm.
NOTE: If the CJB is replaced, the new module will require configuring to the master car configuration using the IDS
(Integrated Diagnostic System).
The CJB automatically arms and disarms the active anti-theft system when the vehicle is locked and unlocked after
successful confirmation that a valid remote handset/smart key has been used.
Keyless Vehicle Module

The keyless vehicle module interfaces with the CLS (central locking system) RF receiver and collects RF signal information
which is transmitted from the smart key. This information is translated into commands which are passed on the medium
speed CAN (controller area network) bus to the CJB, AJB, the door modules and the instrument cluster.
The keyless vehicle module also monitors the liftgate external release switch, the two interior antennae, the luggage
compartment antenna and an additional rear bumper antenna and two door handle antennae if the passive entry system is
fitted.
On vehicles with passive entry, the additional fast latch motors are controlled via the keyless vehicle module and the locking
status is passed to the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus.
Instrument Cluster
The instrument cluster controls the alarm indicator which is incorporated into the sunload/light sensor mounted on the
instrument panel.
The instrument cluster also controls, in conjunction with the ECM (engine control module), the engine immobilization. The
ECM controls the engine crank and fuel functions and the instrument cluster processes the valid transponder information.
Alarm Indicator
The alarm indicator is a LED (light emitting diode) located in the body of the sunload/light sensor. When the ignition is off
the alarm indicator gives a visual indication of the active anti-theft system status, to show if the alarm system is set or not.
When the ignition is on, the indicator provides a visual indication of the status of the passive anti-theft (engine
immobilization) system. If the immobilization system is operating correctly, the LED will be illuminated for 3 seconds at
ignition on and then extinguish.
If a fault exists in the immobilization system, the LED will be either permanently illuminated or flashing for 60 seconds. This
indicates that a fault exists and fault code has been recorded. After the 60 second period the LED will flash at different
frequencies which indicate the nature of the fault.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active, Diagnosis and Testing).
Operation of the alarm indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster, which varies the flash rate of the LED to indicate the
status of the alarm and the immobilization systems.
Passive Anti-theft Horn (If Fitted)
The passive anti-theft horn is located in the RH rear corner of the engine compartment and attached to the bulkhead. The
passive anti-theft horn is connected directly to the CJB which activates the passive anti-theft horn when the alarm is
triggered.
Battery Backed Sounder (If Fitted)
The battery backed sounder is located in the RH rear corner of the engine compartment and attached to the bulkhead.
On vehicles with a battery backed sounder, a tilt sensor can be incorporated which monitors the vehicle attitude. The CJB
monitors the tilt sensor and can detect if the vehicle is being moved, towed or raised and activate the alarm system. The
type of battery backed sounder can be identified by a suffix change to the part number; sounders without a tilt sensor have
the suffix AA and sounders incorporating a tilt sensor have the suffix BA.
Operation of the sounder is controlled by the CJB on a LIN (local interconnect network) bus. The sounder is also connected
with a permanent battery supply via the CJB. An integral, rechargeable battery powers the sounder if the battery power
supply from the CJB is interrupted.
Intrusion Detection Modules
The intrusion detection modules are an optional fitment in some markets and are not available in other markets. Two
intrusion detection modules are fitted. One module is located on the front of the floor console and monitors the front seat
area, the second module is fitted at the rear of the floor console and monitors the rear seat area. The modules are connected
in parallel, with the forward module being the master module and the rearward module being the slave module.
Each intrusion detection module comprises two microwave sensors which allow the interior of the vehicle to be monitored.
The intrusion detection modules also monitor the vehicle interior on soft top models when the soft top is down.
The intrusion detection modules are activated by the volumetric mode of vehicle locking, which is selected when the vehicle
is double locked. The vehicle can be locked and alarmed without activating the intrusion detection modules, if a pet is to be
left in the vehicle for example, by single locking the active anti-theft system. The intrusion detection modules can also be deactivated by deselecting the Intrusion/Tilt option in the Vehicle Settings screen on the TSD.
NOTE: The TSD method of de-activation of the intrusion detection modules is only for one arming cycle. They will revert to
active once the vehicle is subsequently unlocked and then locked.
When the volumetric mode is active, if the vehicle battery voltage falls to less than 9 volts, the CJB will ignore any inputs
from the intrusion detection modules to prevent false alarm activation.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN Bus
Item
Part Number
Battery
Megafuse (175A)
Megafuse (175A)
Electric steering column lock (all except NAS (north American specification))
CJB
Description
Vehicle horns
7
-
Liftgate latch ajar switch
Intrusion detection module
10
Slave intrusion detection module
11
12
Hood ajar switch
13
CLS RF receiver
14
Instrument cluster
15
Light sensor (security LED)
16
RH door module
17
LH door module
18
LH door latch ajar switch
19
RH door latch ajar switch
20
Battery backed sounder (if fitted) or battery backed sounder with tilt sensor (if fitted)
21
Passive anti-theft alarm horn (if fitted)
22
AJB
The CJB automatically arms and disarms the active anti-theft system when it operates the CLS. The CJB also locks and
unlocks the electric steering column lock (where fitted) when it operates the CLS.
On vehicles without intrusion detection modules, only the perimeter mode is available to monitor the hinged panels and the
validity of the smart key.
When perimeter mode is active, the CJB monitors panel ajar microswitches located in the latch mechanisms of the driver and
passenger doors and the liftgate. A separate hood ajar microswitch, located in the engine compartment, monitors the hood
status.
When volumetric mode is active, the CJB monitors the interior of the vehicle for movement using the two intrusion detection
modules.
Arming
On vehicles without intrusion detection modules and a tilt sensor, the active anti-theft system is armed in the perimeter
mode when the vehicle is either locked or double locked.
On vehicles fitted with intrusion detection modules, the system has two modes of operation; perimeter mode and volumetric
mode.
Perimeter Mode
Perimeter mode only monitors the hinged panels and validity of the remote handset/smart key in the start control module.
Perimeter mode is activated by a single press of the lock button on either the smart key or the door handle lock button on
vehicles with the passive entry system.
Volumetric Mode
Volumetric mode monitors the vehicle interior for intrusion. If the vehicle is fitted with a battery backed sounder which
incorporates a tilt sensor, the vehicle attitude is also monitored when volumetric mode is active. Volumetric mode is
activated by a second press of the lock button on either the Smart Key or the door handle lock button on vehicles with the
passive entry system. The second press of either lock button must occur within 3 seconds of the first press. The second press
of the lock button also activates the perimeter mode double locking feature.
The CJB arms the active anti-theft system when it locks or double locks the vehicle providing the following conditions are
met:
All doors, liftgate and hood are closed
The smart key is not sensed inside the vehicle
The CJB is not in transit mode.
When the vehicle has successfully completed its locking routine, confirmation will be given by a long single flash of the turn
signal indicators to indicate the locked condition. If double locking is activated then confirmation will be given by a double
flash of the turn signal indicators, one flash for locked and one long flash for double locked. In certain markets an audible
warning is emitted to confirm arming or double locking.
Mislock
If any door, liftgate or hood is open when a lock or double lock request is received, the anti-theft alarm system remains
disarmed and the CJB generates a short mislock sound on the battery backed sounder or passive anti-theft horn and the turn
signal indicators will not flash. Each attempt to lock will be confirmed by two audible chimes being emitted.
When the CJB arms the active anti-theft alarm system, it first enables perimeter mode and monitors the status of the hinged
panels. If the vehicle is double locked and the vehicle is fitted with a battery backed sounder, an arming signal is sent from
the CJB to enable the sounder. If the vehicle is fitted with intrusion detection modules, the CJB then sends an arming signal
to the modules and the tilt sensor when double locked. The CJB ignores the signals from the intrusion detection modules for
the first 30 seconds to allow time for the vehicle interior to settle and prevent false alarm activation.
If the liftgate is opened via the smart key, the intrusion detection modules and the tilt sensor are inhibited until the liftgate is
closed.
Disarming
The CJB will disarm the active anti-theft system when it receives an unlock request from the smart key or, on vehicles with
passive entry, when the smart key is sensed and the driver or passenger door handles are pulled.
The CJB can selectively disarm parts of the active anti-theft system to prevent false alarm activation under certain conditions
as follows:
When the vehicle active anti-theft alarm system is armed in volumetric mode, if the vehicle battery voltage decreases
to less than 9 V, the CJB will disable the volumetric mode and remain in the perimeter mode only. This prevents false
alarm activation because the intrusion detection modules do not operate below 9 volts.
On vehicles fitted with a battery backed sounder, if the vehicle battery voltage decreases from 9.5 to 9 V in more
than a 30 minute period, the CJB de-activates the battery backed sounder and if required, will use the vehicle horns
to sound an audible alarm trigger warning. This prevents false alarm activation. At voltages below 9 volts, the CJB
will not generate the 'heartbeat' signal to the battery backed sounder. If the sounder fails to receive the 'heartbeat'
signal, it interprets this as tampering with the CJB and the sounder self activates. If the battery voltage subsequently
rises above 9.5 V, the CJB will re-arm the battery backed sounder.
If the vehicle is unlocked using the unlock button on the smart key and, within 45 seconds, a hinged panel is not
opened, the CJB automatically re-locks the vehicle and re-arms the active anti-theft system (if the auto re-lock
feature is enabled). This prevents leaving the vehicle unlocked and disarmed by accidental operation of the smart key
unlock button.
Alarm
When the alarm is triggered, the CJB activates audible and visual warnings. The audible warning is produced using the
vehicles horns, the passive anti-theft horn or the battery backed sounder, or a combination of these devices. The visible
indication is produced using the turn signal indicators.
The CJB cycles the warnings on for 30 seconds and off for 5 seconds. At the end of the off period, if the alarm trigger is still
present the CJB repeats the warning cycle. The CJB activates a maximum of 10 warning cycles (3 in some markets) for any
one arming period. The CJB deactivates the alarm if the maximum number of warning cycles have been completed and the
alarm trigger is still present, or if it receives a disarm signal.
NOTE: If the battery backed sounder is triggered due to tamper detection, the visual indication using the turn signal
indicators is not activated.
The alarm can be triggered if any of the hinged panels are opened, an intrusion detection module detects movement inside
the vehicle, the tilt sensor detects vehicle movement, the CJB is disconnected or an ignition tamper is detected (invalid
smart key).
Battery Backed Sounder

When the CJB arms the active anti-theft system, in either the perimeter mode or the volumetric mode, it sends an arming
signal to the battery backed sounder on the LIN bus. When the system is armed in the volumetric mode, the CJB also sends
an arming signal to the tilt sensor (if fitted).
On receipt of the arming signals, the battery backed sounder and the tilt sensor respond with status signals. If the CJB does
not receive the status signals within 12 seconds, it assumes there is a fault and responds with a disarm signal to the battery
backed sounder and/or the tilt sensor and stores a related fault code. If the battery backed sounder is disarmed when the
active anti-theft system is armed and the system is subsequently triggered, the CJB instructs the AJB to energize the horn
relay and use the vehicle horns to sound the audio warning in place of the battery backed sounder.
When the battery backed sounder is armed, the CJB sends a periodic (heartbeat) signal to the battery backed sounder,
which prompts the battery backed sounder to monitor the vehicle battery supply and the LIN bus link with the CJB. The
sounder will operate if:
It receives an alarm signal from the CJB or the tilt sensor

The power supply or the LIN bus link from the CJB is disrupted.
The tilt sensor measures the longitudinal and lateral angle of the vehicle over a range of 16 from the horizontal. When the
active anti-theft system is armed in the volumetric mode, the tilt sensor stores the current vehicle angles in its memory and
monitors the tilt sensor readings. If the vehicle angle changes in either direction by more than the alarm limit, the tilt sensor
activates the battery backed sounder.
If the alarm system is active and the battery or battery backed sounder is disconnected, the battery backed sounder will
operate, but there will be no visual warning.
Customer Programmable Security Features

A number of security features can be programmed to the customers requirements by use of the TSD.
Global Open/Close
The global open/ close feature allows the driver to fully raise/lower the driver and passenger windows with a single press of a
smart key button. The button must be pressed and held for more than 2 seconds. Either or both of the open/close functions
can be disabled from the TSD.
NOTE: Remote global close is not available in all markets.
From the Home screen, select the Vehicle screen and select Veh. Settings. The Security button will be highlighted as the
default selection. Scroll the screen until the Global Open and Global Close selections are displayed. Global open and/or global
close can be switched on or off by touching the applicable button on the TSD.
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows unlocking of the liftgate to be inhibited. When in valet mode, if either the switch pack or exterior luggage
compartment release button is pressed, an audible warning chime is emitted to warn that the liftgate is inhibited.
Enabling Valet Mode
Using the emergency key from the smart key, lock the glovebox. From the Home screen, select the Valet button. The valet
mode screen is displayed and requires a four digit PIN (personal identification number) for access. Enter the PIN using the
digits on the TSD and press OK. When the PIN is accepted the screen displays Valet On. The glovebox and the liftgate are
now locked in valet mode. On leaving the vehicle, only give the attendant the smart key without the emergency key
installed.
Disabling Valet Mode
After entering the vehicle, access the valet mode screen, enter the four digit PIN number and touch the OK button. When the
PIN is accepted, the screen displays Valet Off. Unlock the glovebox using the emergency key and replace the emergency key
in the stowage slot in the smart key.
Single Point Entry
The single point entry feature only unlocks one door, all other panels remain locked.
On vehicles with the remote CLS, a single press of the unlock button on the smart key unlocks only the driver's door. A
second press will unlock the passenger door and the liftgate.
On vehicles with the passive entry system, the first door handle which is pulled will only open that door to gain access to the
vehicle. The remaining door and the liftgate will revert to central locking. The locked door can be unlocked by operating the
interior door release lever and the liftgate can be released using the liftgate release button in the auxiliary lighting switch,
the smart key liftgate release button or the exterior liftgate release button.
From the Home screen, select the Vehicle screen and select Veh. Settings. The Security button is highlighted by default.
Select 2 stage unlock and touch the on or off button to enable or disable the single point entry feature.
Changing from central locking to single point entry and back again can also be carried out by pressing the lock and unlock
buttons on the smart key simultaneously. The turn signal indicators will flash after 4 seconds to confirm that the change has
been performed.
Drive Away Locking
The drive away door locking feature locks the doors and the liftgate if they are unlocked when the transmission selector lever
is not in P and the vehicle speed is more than 7 km/h (5 mph).

From the Home screen, select the Vehicle screen and select Veh. Settings. The Security button is highlighted by default.
Scroll the screen until the Drive away locking section is displayed. Select the drive away locking feature on or off by touching
the applicable button on the TSD.
Smart Key Additional Features

The smart key has convenience buttons in addition to the lock/unlock buttons.
Panic alarm
A panic alarm feature allows the vehicle alarm system to be activated using the smart key. The panic button, identified by a
triangle symbol, can be pressed three times or pressed and held for more than 3 seconds to activate the panic alarm.
To cancel the panic alarm feature, press the panic button three times, press and hold the panic button for three seconds or
press the start/stop button. To prevent accidental cancellation, the panic alarm cannot be cancelled within 5 seconds of
being activated.
Global Open/Close
A global open and close feature can be operated from the smart key. This feature allows the vehicle windows to be
opened/closed by a single press of the lock or unlock button. The button must be pressed and held for more than 2 seconds
to activate the global open/close feature.
NOTE: Remote global close is not available in all markets.
Liftgate Release
A liftgate release button can be pressed to open the liftgate. This will operate with the car locked and alarmed or unlocked. If
the vehicle is locked and alarmed, when the liftgate release button is pressed, the liftgate can be opened without triggering
the alarm system. When the liftgate is subsequently closed, the alarm will be re-activated.
Headlamp Convenience
A headlamp convenience button can be pressed to operate the headlamp to assist departure or approach to the vehicle. A
single press of the button will operate the headlamps for approximately 25 seconds, after which they automatically go off. A
second press of the button will turn off the headlamps if the 25 second period has not been reached. Pressing the Stop/Start
button within the 25 second period will also turn off the headlamp convenience feature.
Convenience Mode
When a door is opened, for a vehicle with either remote RF central locking or passive entry, the vehicles electrical system
initiates the convenience mode. The following systems become active:
Memory - seat and steering column adjustment

Interior and exterior lighting
TSD and audio
Instrument cluster message center
Horn
Cigar lighter and power socket.
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft - Active

The complexity of the electronics involved with the anti-theft system, and the multiplexed communication network
which are connected to it, preclude the use of workshop general electrical test equipment. Therefore, reference should
be made to the manufacturer approved diagnostic system for detailed instructions on testing the anti-theft system.
The manufacturer approved diagnostic system systematically tests and analyses all functions and the various systems
affected by it.
Where a fault is indicated, some basic diagnostic methods may be necessary to confirm that connections are good and
that wiring is not damaged before installing a new component.
Anti-Theft - Active - Antenna

Removal
1.
Remove the floor console.

For additional information, refer to: Floor Console (501-12
2.
Remove the keyless vehicle antenna.

Installation
1.
Install the keyless vehicle antenna.

2.
Install the floor console.

Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft Alarm Horn

Removal
1.
Make the pedestrian protection system safe.

For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection System
Depowering and Repowering (501-20, General Procedures).
2.
3.

Remove the 3 clips.
Release the pedestrian protection actuator bracket.

Remove the 4 bolts.
4.
Remove the pedestrian protection actuator and bracket.

5.
Remove the anti-theft alarm horn.

Installation
1.
Install the anti-theft alarm horn.

2.
Install the pedestrian protection actuator and bracket.

3.
Secure the pedestrian protection actuator bracket.

Attach the wiring harness clips.
4.

Install the 3 clips.
Anti-Theft - Active - Rear Intrusion Sensor

Removal
1.

2.
3.
Torque: 8 Nm
Installation
1.
Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft - Passive

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Electric steering column lock (all except NAS (north American specification))
RF (radio frequency) receiver
Start control module
LF (low frequency) antennae - passive start system (3 off)
10
Starter motor and solenoid
INTRODUCTION
The PATS (passive anti-theft system) prevents the vehicle from being driven away by unauthorized persons. This is achieved
by having uniquely coded keys (both passive and transponder) and an encoded data exchange between multiple control
modules. Unauthorized starting is prevented by inhibiting the engine crank, fuel and ignition systems.
The PATS is a function of the passive start system. The system uses the following components:
Smart key(s)
Three LF antennae
A RF receiver
A keyless vehicle module
A start control module
The CJB (central junction box)
The ECM (engine control module)
The instrument cluster.
The system is automatic and requires no input from the driver. The engine starting process is initiated when the start/stop
switch and the brake pedal are pressed simultaneously. The engine management system will only allow the engine crank,
fuel and ignition functions when the following conditions are met:
A hardwired P (park)/N (neutral) signal is received from the TCM (transmission control module)
A hardwired ignition signal is received from the CJB
A hardwired crank request signal is received from the CJB
An encrypted data exchange between the instrument cluster and the ECM is verified.
Before the CJB will send the hardwired ignition signal, it must satisfactorily complete the following:
Exchange encrypted data with the keyless vehicle module to validate the smart key
Exchange encrypted data with the instrument cluster to authorize the ignition status.
Additionally, before the CJB will send the hardwired crank request signal it must receive the following signals:
Brake pressure signal from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module, which must be greater than a pre-determined
threshold
Hardwired transmission in P signal from the JaguarDrive selector.
START CONTROL MODULE
The start control module is located in the floor console, at the rear of the arm rest. The start control module is used if the
keyless vehicle module is unable to authorize the smart key.
If the keyless vehicle module is unable to identify the smart key for any reason, for example if the smart key battery voltage
is low or there is local RF interference, the transponder within the smart key can be read in the conventional manner. The
driver will be alerted to this by a chime and the message SMART KEY NOT FOUND, PLEASE INSERT IN SLOT in the
instrument cluster message center. The smart key can be inserted into the start control module.
To insert the smart key, lift the arm rest on the floor console and slide back the spring loaded access cover on the start
control module. Insert the smart key, with the key fob loop uppermost, into the slot. The start control module is motorized
and will draw the smart key into the slot once inserted.
The start control module will then read the transponder within the smart key and, if the transponder identification is valid,
pass authorization to the instrument cluster on the LIN (local interconnect network) bus.
NOTE: Inserting the smart key into the start control module will not charge the smart key battery. The battery is nonchargeable and must be replaced with a new CR2032 battery if defective.
A message REMOVE SMART KEY will be displayed if the smart key is still in the start control module and the driver's door is
opened. The smart key can be removed by pushing downwards on the key fob loop and releasing. The start control unit
motor will then drive the smart key out of the slot.
LF ANTENNA
Three LF antennae for the passive start system are positioned in the following locations:
Behind the center console, below the heater assembly and audio modules
In the floor console, between the driver and passenger seats, and below the start control module
On the battery tray.
NOTE: On vehicles with the passive entry system, three additional antennae are used. One integrated into the rear bumper
and one in each door handle assembly. These are only used by the passive entry system and have no function in the passive
start system.
The keyless vehicle module transmits an LF signal via the antennae which is received by the smart key. The smart key then
responds by transmitting a RF signal, which is received by the RF receiver and passed to the keyless vehicle module for
authorization.
KEYLESS VEHICLE MODULE
The keyless vehicle module is located on the RH (right-hand) A pillar. The module controls signal transmissions to and from
the smart key and provides authorization to allow the vehicle to be entered and started. The module has a medium speed
CAN (controller area network) connection to the CJB for authorizing vehicle unlocking and starting.
RF RECEIVER
The RF receiver is located behind the overhead console. The receiver is available in two variants; 315 Mhz or 433 Mhz
depending on market requirements. Transmissions are received from the smart key for key identification and remote
lock/unlock requests or requests for operation of additional features.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
BJB (battery junction box) (400 A megafuse, 2 x 175 A megafuses)
Starter motor and solenoid
ECM
Electric steering column lock (all except NAS)
Start/Stop switch
ABS module
10
11
RF receiver
12
13
Instrument cluster
14
At the request of the CJB, the keyless vehicle module prompts each of the LF antennae to output a LF signal. When the
Smart Key is within range, it detects the LF signals and responds with an RF identification signal. The RF signal is detected
by the RF receiver and passed to the keyless vehicle module.
NOTE: The LF antenna located in the rear bumper and in each door handle are only fitted if the vehicle has the Passive Entry
option.
The keyless vehicle module authorizes the Smart Key and passes this information to the CJB via the medium speed CAN bus.
Once the CJB receives the authorization and confirms response with internal calculation, it passes the result to the
instrument cluster on the medium speed CAN bus. Once the CJB receives the authorization and confirms the response, it
allows the ignition to be activated when the start/stop switch is pressed.
On receipt of the authorization message from the CJB the instrument cluster sets its internal key status to valid, then passes
a key valid authorization message to the AJB (auxiliary junction box) on the medium speed CAN bus.
Once the AJB receives the authorization and confirms the response with an internal calculation, it enables the FPDM (fuel
pump driver module).
The CJB also controls the engine crank request. If the transmission selector lever is in the park position and the driver
presses the brake pedal and simultaneously presses the start/stop switch, the CJB interprets this as an engine crank request.
Before the engine crank request is allowed, the CJB compares a brake pressure signal received from the ABS module. The
brake pressure signal is compared to an internally stored threshold value within the CJB. If the signal is greater than the
stored threshold value, a crank request signal is sent to the ECM on the high speed CAN bus.
NOTE: If the Smart Key is not in the vehicle and an attempt is made to start the engine by pressing the start/stop switch, a
message 'SMART KEY NOT FOUND, PLEASE INSERT IN SLOT' is displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
If the keyless vehicle module is unable to identify the Smart Key for any reason, the Smart Key can be inserted into the start
control module. The start control unit will then read the transponder within the Smart Key and, if the transponder
identification is valid, pass authorization to the instrument cluster on the LIN bus.
If a replacement Smart Key is required, two procedures with a Jaguar approved diagnostic system are required to
synchronize the passive start/entry and transponder functions of the Smart Key. If any module involved in the Smart Key
authorization process is replaced, a diagnostic procedure is also required to synchronize the replacement module into the
system.
Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft - Passive

For a detailed description of the Anti-Theft - Passive system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in
REFER to: Anti-Theft - Passive (419-01B Anti-Theft - Passive, Description and Operation).

Anti-theft - Passive
The best method to confirm the correct operation of the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) is to check the LED (located
in the center of the instrument panel). The LED should illuminate solid for 3 seconds, when the ignition status is set to
ON, and then extinguish. This validates all PATS functions (i.e. the key transponder matches a stored key code, the
challenge/response sequence between the respective modules was successful resulting in the EMS being enabled).
Ignition fails to operate
Check that the smart key is located within the vehicle interior, and that it is the correct one for the vehicle. Insert the
smart key into the start control unit (located in floor console cubby box), this is an alternative method to allow Ignition
On/Engine Start.
Check that the start button circuit to the CJB is not open circuit or short circuit to power.
Check that the CAN network is not malfunctioning, i.e. open circuit or short circuit. This would mean that the remote
keyless entry module, Central Junction Box (CJB) and instrument cluster would be unable to communicate.
Engine fails to crank
If a PATS fault is detected, the LED will flash for 60 seconds at 4Hz with a 50% duty cycle. At the end of this period, the
LED will flash a 2 digit code; this code is repeated 10 times. The meaning of these fault codes along with the frequency
of flashing is given in the accompanying table. As a general rule a fault code of 16 or less will cause the vehicle not to
crank. Additionally, the manufacturer approved diagnostic system should be used to check the instrument cluster, CJB
& ECM for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
One potential occurrence for failing to crank could be due to the 'Not In Park' switch (input to the CJB) or the P & N
start switch (input to the ECM).
Check the Crank Request output from the CJB to ECM is not short circuit to ground or open circuit.
Check the Starter Relay circuit.
NOTE: Due to Smart Start both sides of Relay Coil are switched directly from ECM (If conditions correct)
Check that the Steering Column Lock correctly operates and the steering wheel can turn freely.
Check that the CAN network is not malfunctioning, i.e. the CAN circuit is open or short circuit. This would mean that the
instrument cluster and ECM would be unable to communicate resulting in no Challenge being performed to enable the
ECM. This would be supported by LED Flash Code 24, see PATS Fault Code Table.
Also check the CAN network between the ABS module and the CJB. The CJB uses the CAN_BrakePressureTMC signal to
determine if the brake pedal has been pressed in order to allow an engine crank. The CJB uses a value of 0x03, if the
CJB sees a value less than this, it will not enable the Crank Request Output.
Engine cranks but will not start
If the Engine is cranking it means that the ECM has passed the authorisation required with the Instrument Cluster. If
this authorisation failed, the ECM would not engage the starter relay. This could be confirmed by verifying the PATS LED
prove out (illuminated solid for 3 seconds) or by reading DTCs from the instrument cluster and ECM.
In this case, the fuel pump circuit should be verified. The Fuel Pump Delivery Module (FPDM), which is supplied via the
RJB (authentication required with the instrument cluster) and controlled by the ECM, supplies the fuel pump.
In all cases of suspected non-start issues, the most logical failure modes should be eliminated first. i.e.
Check all relevant supplies and grounds to the relevant modules listed herein.
Note any unusual behaviour from other systems/functionality.
Note any functions that are not operating as expected.
PATS Fault Codes

For the various PATS modes/faults listed in the table , the instrument cluster will store a DTC and indicate this to the
customer during the detection period defined in the 'when logged' column, by illuminating the indicator as described for
60 seconds and then flashing the LED 10 times as appropriate. The indication will stop immediately the ignition status is
set to OFF any time during the fault indication sequence. Up to 4 DTCs could be stored per key read sequence (1-10
read attempts). No DTCs will be stored until all retry attempts are complete. Only the highest priority fault code will be
flashed.
To determine the fault code from the LED: The LED will flash initially ten times with 1.5 seconds between. The LED will
remain OFF for 2.5 seconds then flash a number of times with 0.5 seconds between (the number of times the LED
flashes represents the first digit of the code), the LED will remain OFF for 1.5 seconds then flash a number of times with
1.5 seconds between (the number of times the LED flashes represents the second digit of the code).
The PATS LED will be commanded on as shown under 'indication'. Normal PATS operations are complete within 400ms
of the ignition switch transition from OFF to ON or START, worst case for ECM communication problems will be less than
2 seconds. If PATS is not complete during the 2 seconds the ECM will terminate PATS and await the next ignition ON or
START event. PATS faults will be indicated via the LED as soon as possible and will terminate the LED prove out. At
ignition OFF all previous flashing will cease and the perimeter anti-theft system will control the LED when the vehicle is
locked and armed.
PATS Fault Code Table
LED
Fault
Code
Indication
N/A 3 Seconds of steady
illumination
Ignition
Status
Transition
from OFF to
ON
OFF Vehicle
locked and
armed
Any
Any
Any
OFF
Any
N/A
N/A
B1B0105
B1B0167
B1B0151
B1B0162
B1B0187
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
No
No
No
No
No
Any
Any
B1B0164
B1B0100
N/A
N/A
No Indication
No Indication
Any
B1B0155
OFF to ON B1B3364
N/A
16
During manufacturing a Target ID is

B&A/Dealer
OFF to ON B1B3305
transferred from the ECM when requested by
the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster
stores this unique vehicle number in EEPROM.
If this ID fails to store in EEPROM correctly, the
instrument cluster will set this DTC
If the status message received from the ECM Challenge/Response OFF to ON B1B3362
contains the data challenge response error, the
instrument cluster will set this DTC
22
No Indication
60 seconds of 4Hz
flashing at 50% duty
cycle followed by
fault code 16
flashing 10 times
60 seconds of steady
indication followed
by fault code 22
flashing 10 times
After the instrument cluster has transmitted its

first PATS idle message, it will start a 2 second
timer running. If the PATS sequence does not
complete (Cluster received the Enable msg)
within this time period the instrument cluster
will set this DTC
24
Mode of Operation/Fault
Prove out
When Logged
N/A
Perimeter Anti-theft Control
N/A
Start Control Unit already programmed

Start Control Unit status = invalid response
Start Control Unit programming error
Start Control Unit challenge response error
Key Programming timer expired or Key Auth
Timer expired
Transponder challenge response error
Transponder keys stored below minimum
number required
Transponder not programmed
If the instrument cluster sends a 'theft' key
status to the ECM or the ECM returns a status
message containing the data 'Disabled/Theft',
the instrument cluster will set this DTC
Key
Key
Key
Key
Key
Insert
Insert
Insert
Insert
Insert
Key Insert
B&A/Dealer
B&A/Dealer
EMS CAN
communication
Idle message
missing
DTC
N/A
OFF to ON B1B3387
23
Off or 0.5Hz flashing

at 5% duty cycle
20% until Off
Indication
Indication
Indication
Indication
Indication
indication followed
by fault code 23
flashing 10 times
indication followed
by fault code 24
flashing 10 times
1.
2.
system.
Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft Security Access

General Procedures
1.
The complexity of the electronics involved with the passive antitheft system of which the security access is a part, and the
multiplexed communication network which are connected to it
preclude the use of workshop general electrical test equipment.
Therefore, reference should be made to the Jaguar approved
diagnostic system for detailed instructions on security access .
The Jaguar approved diagnostic system systematically tests and
analyses all functions and the various systems affected by it.
Anti-Theft - Passive - Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment

General Procedures
1.
The complexity of the electronics involved with the anti-theft, of

which the key programming is a part, and the multiplexed
communication network which are connected to it preclude the
use of workshop general electrical test equipment. Therefore,
reference should be made to the Jaguar Approved Diagnostic
System for detailed instructions on key programming . The
Jaguar approved diagnostic system systematically tests and
analyses all functions and the various systems affected by it.
All new keys must be programmed using IDS. When using IDS
to programme new key(s), the lost or obsolete key(s) will cease
to function.
Remote Convenience - Universal Transmitter


1.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Damaged universal transmitter
Damaged receiver
3.
4.
If the concern is not visually evident, verify the concern and refer to the Symptom Chart. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams for schematic and connector information.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
The universal transmitter is inoperative
Possible Cause
Universal transmitter
Receiver unit
Action
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : THE UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER IS INOPERATIVE
TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY OPERATION
Check the illumination of the interior lamp.
1
Does the interior lamp illuminate?
Yes
GO to A2. .
No
Check and rectify fault with interior lamp circuit. TEST the system for normal operation.
A2: PROGRAM HAND-HELD TRANSMITTER INTO UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER
NOTE: If the garage door is equipped with rolling codes, refer to Training a Garage Door Opener
Equipped With "Rolling Codes."
Program the universal transmitter.
REFER to: Universal Transmitter Programming (419-02 Remote Convenience, General
Procedures).
Did the universal transmitter program successfully?
Yes
The universal transmitter is OK. VERIFY receiver operation.
No
REPLACE the roof console assembly. TEST the system for normal operation.
1
Remote Convenience - Universal Transmitter Programming

General Procedures
WARNING: A garage door opening system that cannot stop or reverse itself after detecting an object in its path
does not meet current federal safety standards. To decrease the risk of serious injury or death, do not use this
HomeLink transmitter with a door opening system that lacks stop and reverse features as required by federal
standards. This includes any garage door opening system manufactured before April 1, 1982. For more information, call
HomeLink customer assistance at 1-800-355-3515.
1.
CAUTION: During this procedure, the system that you are

programming will be made to operate. Make sure that people or
objects are clear of the garage door or gate being programmed.
Verify the hand-held transmitter is operative.
2.
Prepare for programming the universal transmitter by erasing

all three channels by holding down the two outside buttons
until the red light begins to flash (20-30 seconds). Release
both buttons.
3.
Select one of the three universal transmitter channels to be

programmed by pressing the desired button.
4.
Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter 50-150mm (2-6 in)

from the front surface of the universal transmitter so that the
red light can still be seen.
5.
NOTE: During programming, the hand-held

transmitter may automatically stop transmitting after
two seconds, which may not be long enough to
program the universal transmitter. If programming
this type of hand-held transmitter, continue to hold
the button on the universal transmitter while repressing the hand-held transmitter button every two
seconds (Canada only).
Use both hands to press the hand-held transmitter
button and the desired button on the universal
transmitter. Do not release either button.
6.
Hold down both buttons until the red light on the universal
transmitter flashes, first slowly and then rapidly. Release both
buttons when the rapid flashing begins. The universal
transmitter has successfully learned the new frequency signal
and can be used in place of the hand-held transmitter(s).
7.
NOTE: If the hand-held transmitter appears to program the

universal transmitter but does not open the garage door, the
garage door opener may have a "code protected" or "rolling
code" feature.
To operate, simply press the appropriate button on the universal
transmitter. The red light is on while the signal is being
transmitted.
Training a Garage Door Opener Equipped With "Rolling Codes"

1.
Program the hand-held transmitter to the universal transmitter.

For additional information, refer to Universal Transmitter
Programming in this section.

2.
Train the garage door opener receiver to recognize the universal

transmitter.
1. Remove the cover panel from the garage door opener
receiver.
2. Locate the training button on the garage door opener
receiver. Location and color of the button may vary by
garage door opener manufacturer. Refer to the garage
door opener instruction manual or call HomeLink
customer assistance at 1-800-355-3515.
3. Press the training button on the garage door opener
receiver for 1-2 seconds.
4. Press the programmed universal transmitter button for
as long as the universal transmitter red light flashes (1-2
seconds). Release the button and re-press the button to
confirm that the universal transmitter is trained to the
receiver.
5. The garage door opener should recognize the universal
transmitter.
Erasing Channels
1.
NOTE: Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be

reprogrammed using the procedures for programming.
For additional information, refer to Universal Transmitter
Programming in this section.
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the two
outside buttons until the red light begins to flash (20-30
seconds). Release both buttons.
Navigation System Torque Specifications
Item
Antenna - bolt
Display module to module bracket - bolt
Display module to module bracket - screw
Navigation system module to bracket - bolt
Nm
1.5
3
2.5
2
lb-ft
-
lb-in
13
26
22
18
Navigation System - Navigation System

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Touch Screen Display
Integrated Control Panel
Microphone
Navigation computer
AM/FM antenna
GPS antenna
10
Audio amplifier
11
Vehicle Information and Communication Systems (VICS) beacon antenna (Japan only)
INTRODUCTION
The navigation system provides audible and visual route guidance information to enable the driver to reach a desired
destination. The system allows the driver to choose the desired route using minor or major roads or motorways and the
quickest or shortest route. Directions to hospitals, museums, monuments and hotels are also available. The computer uses
map information stored on a DVD-ROM to determine the best route for the journey and provide the driver with details of
directions and approaching junctions.
The navigation system is controlled from the integrated control panel and the Touch Screen Display (TSD). Control signals
from the touch screen display are sent on the MOST ring to the navigation computer. The navigation computer uses a
dedicated GVIF bus to transmit its video signals to the TSD.
Vehicles with navigation systems also incorperate additional traffic information systems. These are market dependant and are
as follows:
Japan-Voice recognition and VICS
Europe-TMC
NAS-No TMC, VICS or voice rrecognition
Item
Part Number
Description
TSD (rear)
ICP
TSD (front)
IAM
ICM
NAVIGATION COMPUTER
The navigation computer is located in the rear loadspace next to the battery.
The navigation computer incorporates the following:

GPS receiver
VICS receiver (Japan only)
Traffic Message Channel (TMC) receiver
The navigation computer is connected to the MOST bus. The navigation computer generates its own graphics and transmits
them to the TSD on a dedicated GVIF (Gigabyte video Interface) bus.
The navigation computer contains a solid state piezo gyro which measures the motion of the vehicle around its vertical axis.
The gyro operates on the principle known as the Coriolis force. The Coriolis force is the force that appears to accelerate a body
moving away from its rotational axis against the direction of rotation of the axis.
Using inputs from the ABS module, the GPS antenna and the gyro sensor, the computer calculates the vehicle's current
position, direction and speed.
The navigation computer houses the DVD-ROM drive. The drive is used to read map data from region specific DVD's. The
regions are as follows:
Europe (3 discs)
NAS (2 discs)
Japan, Middle east and Australia (1disc)
A button, located adjacent to the DVD slot, is provided to eject the DVD from the unit. Prior to ejecting the disc the slot
protection has to be slid to the side. If the ignition is on, or the Entertainment System is in 1-hour mode, one press of the
button will eject the DVD.
The GPS receiver receives information from between 1 and 8 satellites at any one time. This information is received from the
GPS antenna. The built in GPS receiver is used for calculating the position (i.e. Latitude, longitude and height), direction and
speed.
The navigation computer uses non-volatile memory to store settings and configuration information when it is powered down.
This process takes place just before the computer turns off.
For the Japanese market the navigation computer incorporates a VICS receiver. The VICS receiver, receives information from
the beacon antenna in the center of the instrument panel and the electric FM antenna. The VICS system receiver allows the
vehicle to receive information about traffic conditions from roadside transmitters and adjust the navigation instructions
accordingly.
For ceratin European markets the navigation computer incorporates the Traffic Message Channel (TMC) receiver. The TMC
receiver decodes TMC data. The navigation computer then displays this information on the TSD and also re-routes the
navigation guidance around any traffic hold ups. The TMC data is received via the electric FM (frequency modulation) antenna
via the antenna signal splitter.
TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY (TSD)
The Touch Screen Display (TSD) is located in the center of the instrument panel. TSD is a touch sensitive 7 inch LCD (liquid
crystal display) VGA screen containing 800 x 480 pixels in a 15:9 format. The TSD is connected to the Information and
Entertainment system on the Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST) ring. The MOST ring is a fibre optic communications
data bus that allows high speed transfer of control instructions and audio around the system.
The TSD processes its own video for system operation but receives the navigation graphics from the navigation computer on a
dedicated serial link called GVIF (Gigabit Video Interface).
The TSD is also the control interface for the following vehicle systems:
Climate control
Audio system
Heated seats
Customer programmable security features
Cellular phone
Vehicle settings
The TSD navigation control signals are sent on the MOST ring to the navigation computer,
GPS ANTENNA
The GPS (global positioning system) antenna is located in the rear liftgate spoiler. The GPS antenna is connected to the GPS
computer by a single co-axial cable and passes signals from the GPS satellites to the navigation computers built in receiver for
processing.
It is possible for the GPS antenna to lose the signal from the GPS satellites:
In hilly or tree lined areas

Built up areas with tall buildings
In multi storey car parks
In garages
In tunnels
In bridges
During heavy rain or thunderstorms.
When the signal is lost the navigation computer will continue to give guidance using memory mapped data from the DVD
(digital versatile disc) map until the signal is restored.
INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE
The Information and Entertainment Control Module (ICM) is located between the TSD and the IAM. The ICM is mounted in the
vehicle using four M6 bolts.
The ICM is the gateway between the vehicle MS CAN bus and the Information and Entertainment system MOST bus.
INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL PANEL
The Information and Entertainment Control Panel is connected to the MS CAN bus. The ICP incorperates switches for audio
system control, climate control hazard warning lamps and the navigation system. The navigation system is operated from the
TSD via signals on the MOST ring. Hard switches on the ICP send CAN signals to the ICM which transfers signals to the
relevant module on the MOST ring.
VICS BEACON ANTENNA (JAPAN ONLY)

VICS Beacon Antenna
The VICS beacon antenna is located on top of the instrument panel. The antenna receives infra red and RF signals from road
side transmitters. The Antenna is connected to the navigation computer which incorperates a VICS reciever.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN; P = MOST ring; Q = GVIF; T = Coaxial
Item
Part Number
Description
ABS control module
Steering wheel controls
Audio amplifier
Speakers
Microphone
8
9
Navigation computer
Vehicle Information and Communication Systems (VICS) beacon antenna (Japan only)
10
GPS Antenna
11
AM/FM antenna splitter
12
AM/FM antenna
13
Integrated Control Panel
14
15
Clock spring
16
Instrument cluster
The system used to calculate the current position of the vehicle is called the GPS (global positioning system) . The system
utilizes satellites which are owned by the United States Department of Defense (DoD). A total of 24 satellites orbit the earth
every 12 hours at a height of 20,000 km (12500 miles), and between 5 and 11 of these satellites can be seen from a single
point at any given time. The orbits are tilted to the earth's equator by 55 degrees to ensure coverage of polar regions. Each
satellite transmits radio signals to provide information about the satellite position i.e. latitude, longitude, altitude, almanac
data and an accurate time signal generated by an on-board atomic clock. Each satellite contains four atomic clocks.
The vehicle needs to receive data from at least four different satellites to give a three dimensional fix on its current position.
As the vehicle moves, this information is continually being updated. The computer determines which satellites are 'visible' to
the system and their current position and relationship to each other. Using this information the computer can account for
positional deviations of the satellites and compensate to enhance the accuracy of the navigation system.
The GPS (global positioning system) signal is also known as the Precision Positioning Signal (PPS).
PPS predictable accuracy is:
22 meters horizontal accuracy
27.7 meters vertical accuracy
200 nanoseconds time accuracy.
The navigation system provides computer generated audible and visual route guidance information to enable the driver to
reach a desired destination. The system allows the driver to choose the desired route using minor or major roads or highways
and the quickest or shortest route. Directions to hospitals, museums, monuments and hotels are also available. The computer
uses map information stored on a DVD-ROM to determine the best route for the journey and provide the driver with details of
directions and approaching junctions.
The navigation system receives GPS (global positioning system) information via the GPS antenna. The GPS signals are used by
the navigation computer to calculate the vehicles position. Once the driver has input a desired destination the navigation
computer can calculate a route, based on the drivers pre-determined preferences or the default settings in the navigation
computer.
The navigation system is accessed by pressing the navigation soft key on the TSD.
Navigation is initiated by the driver inputting a destination. This can be achieved by:
Entering in an address using the TSD.

Entering a post code.
Choosing a previous destination.
Choosing a point of interest from the map disc database.
Chosing the home location
Chosing a memory stroed location.
The driver is then guided to the destination by a scrolling map display and voice guidance. The display can be varied by scale
and display type.
In addition to the standard navigation system there are two market dependant systems that supply extra information to the
navigation system and the driver. These are:
Traffic Message Channel (TMC)
Vehicle Information and Communication System (VICS) (Japan only).
Traffic Message Channel (TMC)

The Traffic Message Channel (TMC) is a function of the FM (frequency modulation) Radio Data System (RDS). The system
broadcasts real-time traffic and weather information. Data messages are received and decoded by the TMC receiver and
passed onto the navigation system, which then delivers them via the navigation system interface. TMC messages can be
filtered by the navigation computer so that only those relevant to the current journey are displayed, allowing the navigation
system to offer dynamic route guidance - alerting the driver of a problem on the planned route and calculating an alternative
route to avoid the incident. All TMC events on the map can be viewed not just the ones on the calculated route.
TMC traffic information systems conform to a global standard that has been adopted by traffic data gatherers, information
service providers, broadcasters and vehicle/receiver manufacturers. TMC information is received via the normal FM (frequency
modulation) radio antenna.
All TMC receivers use the same list of event codes, while the location database (on the map disc) contains both a countryspecific set of location codes for the strategic European road network.
TMC traffic data is currently broadcast in many European countries.
Vehicle Information and Communication System (VICS)

The VICS system supplies the navigation computer with information to enable the navigation computer to re-route the
navigation guidance or to inform the vehicle driver of traffic conditions in the vehicles vicinity. Information is provided to the
system through three routes:
RF transmission
Infra-red transmission
FM (frequency modulation) multiplex transmissions.
The RF transmissions are generally transmitted from road side beacons mainly on expressways. The information transmitted is
as follows:
Traffic congestion
Travel time to next intersection
Traffic conditions in surrounding areas and expressway turn offs
Traffic accidents
Speed limits
Lane regulations
Tire change
Parking availability at expressway service areas and parking areas.
The Infra-Red transmissions are received by the beacon antenna mounted on the top of the instrument panel.
Infra-Red transmissions are transmitted from road side beacons on major trunk roads. The information transmitted is:
Traffic congestion and travel time

Traffic accidents
Breakdowns
Road works restrictions
Parking availability.
FM (frequency modulation) transmissions are broadcast as part of the normal RDS FM (frequency modulation) transmission.
Information transmitted is:
Traffic congestion and travel time for wide areas
Traffic accidents, road works, speed limits and lane restrictions for a wide area
Parking availability information.
FM transmissions are received via the FM antenna and split from the normal FM transmissions by the FM signal splitter.
Navigation System - Navigation System

For a detailed description of the navigation system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Navigation System (419-07 Navigation System, Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage, water ingress and system integrity.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Electrical
Navigation system DVD player Mechanism
Navigation system display

Navigation system module
GPS antenna
Wiring harness for damage and corrosion
ABS Module
Audio unit
3.
4.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Poor satellite reception
Possible Cause
Electrical harness open/short
Action
circuit, dis-connected
Component failure
No reception from satellite
Map disc will not

insert/eject
Black screen (navigation

map screen does not
display)
Navigation map screen
color is abnormal
Vehicles current position

mark turns independently
Car current position not

stable
Map display is incomplete
No navigation voice
guidance
No response to pressing
Component failure
Map disc failure
Component failure
GVIF cable
Component failure
GVIF cable
Component failure
Vehicle on a turntable in a
parking building
Component failure
Map disc contaminated/damaged
Incorrect market map disc
Component failure
Voice guidance soft key set to
OFF position
Volume level set too low
Component failure
Interruption during map disc
navigation menu
update
Incorrect Navigation Control
Module (NCM) installed

Incorrect car configuration data
received
'NO DVD PLEASE INSERT
MAP DVD' message is
displayed
'UNABLE TO READ DATA
CONSULT YOUR DEALER'
message is displayed
TEMPERATURE IS TOO
HIGH' message is displayed
'UNABLE TO READ DVD

CORRECTLY CHECK IF THE
DVD IS DAMAGED OR
DIRTY' message is
displayed
CHECK IF MAP DVD IS
CORRECT' message is
displayed
A disc other than the map disc is
Insert the correct map disc
inserted
DVD player abnormality
Check and install a new Navigation Control

Module (NCM) as required. Refer to the new
module/component installation note at top of DTC
Index.
Operating temperature has been Move the vehicle to a cool location, and turn the
exceeded
engine OFF. Wait for a while, then verify
Navigation Control Module (NCM) conditions again. If the temperature around the
internal temperature is high
Navigation Control Module (NCM) is high, take
measures to lower temperature
Check map disc for
Clean the map disc and retest, replace the map
contamination, deformation,
disc
cracks, scratches or non-genuine
disc
Incorrect DVD map disc is
Insert a map disc with the correct part number
inserted
DTC Index
DTC
Description
B1A8911 Satellite antenna
B1A8913 Satellite antenna
B1A891B Satellite antenna
B1D5514
Antenna #2
Circuit
B1D5614
Antenna #3
Circuit
Possible Cause
Action
Satellite antenna
Check satellite antenna connections. Refer to the electrical
circuit - short to
circuit diagrams and test satellite antenna circuit for short to
ground
ground
Satellite antenna
Check satellite antenna connections. Refer to the electrical
circuit - open
circuit diagrams and test satellite antenna circuit for open
circuit
circuit
Satellite antenna Install a new navigation system module, refer to the new
circuit resistance
above threshold
TMC/VICS FM
Check TMC/VICS FM antenna connections. Refer to the
antenna circuit electrical circuit diagrams and test TMC/VICS FM antenna
open
VICS antenna
Check VICS antenna connections. Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit - open
diagrams and test VICS antenna circuit for open circuit
U200531
Control Module
Missing vehicle
Check ABS module and Instrument Cluster for speed related

DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index.
REFER to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (206-09 Anti-Lock
Control - Stability Assist, Diagnosis and Testing) /
Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Internal electronic
Install a new navigation system module, refer to the new
failure
Incorrect car
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
configuration data check/amend the Car Configuration File parameter in block 2,
received
byte 127 to match vehicle market/specification. If the DTC
remains check navigation system module part number and
ensure the correct component is installed to vehicle
market/specification
Missing message
diagnostic system. Check navigation module for DTCs and refer
to the DTC Index. Check CAN network integrity using the
Component or
Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Clear DTC
system over
and re-test/monitor condition for re-occurrence
temperature
Circuit voltage
mismatch with
navigation control
module
Circuit voltage
above threshold
speed message
U300049
Control Module
U300055
Stored vehicle
configuration data
does not match
U300087
Control Module
U300098
Control module
U300362
Battery voltage
U300317
Battery voltage
Pinpoint Tests
the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval Program is in operation,
NOTE: Navigation Diagnostic Screen Access
1.With the vehicle at rest, place the ignition switch in either "ACC", "ON", or start the engine.
2.On the "Menu" screen, press the top center of the screen for more than three seconds.
3.Enter the PIN code, and then touch "OK". 660: Diagnosis Menu screen 661: System Check screen (DTC code
verification screen) 662: GPS Information screen.

4.The diagnostics screen will be displayed.
PINPOINT TEST A : POOR SATELLITE RECEPTION

NOTE: Move the vehicle to an open area, radio waves from satellites may not be received inside buildings.
NOTE: Correct the vehicle cursor to the current location.
TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: SYSTEM CHECK FOR DTCS
Check the system for DTCs which may be logged.
1
Are any system DTCs logged?
Yes
Carry out repair actions to correct the DTCs logged.
Check satellite reception.GO to A3.
No
GO to A2.
A2: RETRO-INSTALL INSTALLATIONS CHECK
Check to see if there are any retro-install installations (anti-theft, radar, etc.)
1
Are there any retro-install installations?
Yes
Aftermarket items may cause either electrical or radio frequency interference that can cause
satellite reception to deteriorate.
Remove the power supply (including backup power supplies) from any aftermarket items
installed. If reception returns to normal after disconnection of aftermarket items, carry out the
following. Alter the installation position of any aftermarket items.Check satellite reception.GO to
A3.
No
GO to A3.
A3: SATELLITE RECEPTION CHECKS
1
Check the 'ST' column of the navigation diagnostics GPS information screen (PIN code 662) after
10 minutes have passed. There must be more than 4 Ps displayed for accurate positioning.
Check the HDOP value, this must be less than 5.

Are there more than 4 'P's displayed and is HDOP less than 5?
Yes
Satellite reception is normal.
No
Confirm the GPS antenna is connected to the navigation module.
Refer to the electrical circuit wiring diagrams and check the integrity of the coaxial cable and
connectors from the Navigation Control Module (NCM) to the GPS antenna.
Install a new GPS antenna or coaxial cable as required.
Re-check satellite reception.
PINPOINT TEST B : MAP DISC WILL NOT INSERT/EJECT

NOTE: Ensure the parking brake is applied, and ignition status is set to Auxiliary or ON.
TEST
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK NAVIGATION DISC SLOT SHUTTER
Check the navigation map disc slot shutter is open.
1
Is the navigation map disc slot shutter is open?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Open the map disc slot shutter.
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK NAVIGATION MAP DISC WILL INSERT/EJECT
Check that it is possible to insert/eject navigation map disc.
1
Is it possible to insert/eject navigation map disc?
Yes
Operation is normal.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power supply and ground connections to the
Navigation Control Module (NCM). If power supply and ground connections are good, install a new
Navigation Control Module (NCM) as required. Refer to the new module/component installation
note at top of DTC Index.
PINPOINT TEST C : BLACK SCREEN (NAVIGATION MAP SCREEN DOES NOT DISPLAY)
NOTE: Ensure the parking brake is applied, and ignition status is set to Auxiliary or ON.
TEST
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK SCREEN SAVER FUNCTION
Check the screen saver function operation.
1
Does the screen saver function operate?
Yes
Press the display panel button.GO to C2.
No
GO to C2.
C2: CHECK DISPLAY BACKLIGHT
Check the display backlight operation.
1
Does the display backlight operate?
Yes
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the GVIF cable between Navigation Control
Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected.
If the GVIF cable between Navigation Control Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly
connected, check and install a new GVIF cable as required. Refer to the new module/component
installation note at top of DTC Index.
connected and NOT damaged, check and install a new Navigation Control Module (NCM) as
required. Refer to the new module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
Re-check the system.
No
Check the HLDF display.
PINPOINT TEST D : NAVIGATION MAP SCREEN COLOUR IS ABNORMAL

TEST
CONDITIONS
D1: COLOUR BAR CHECK
Carry out the display diagnostics 'colour bar check' (PIN code 660).
1
Are the results of the display diagnostics 'colour bar check' normal?
Yes
Check the HLDF display.
No
Check the condition of the map disc for dirt or scratches.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the GVIF cable between Navigation Control
Module (NCM) and HLDF screen is properly connected.
connected, check and install a new GVIF cable as required. Refer to the new module/component
installation note at top of DTC Index.
connected and NOT damaged, check and install a new Navigation Control Module (NCM) as
required. Refer to the new module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
PINPOINT TEST E : VEHICLES CURRENT POSITION MARK TURNS INDEPENDENTLY

TEST
CONDITIONS
E1: VEHICLES CURRENT POSITION MARK TURNS INDEPENDENTLY
Determine if the ignition status was turned to Auxiliary or On, while the vehicle was in motion
1
with steering turned such as after an engine stall.
Was ignition status set to Auxiliary or On?
Yes
The angular speed of the vehicle at the time of the ignition status change will be logged as the
standard value. To re-set the standard value, turn ignition status to 'OFF' then to 'Auxiliary' or
'On' with the vehicle stationary.
Re-test the vehicle.
No
Check and install a new Navigation Control Module (NCM) as required. Refer to the new
module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
PINPOINT TEST F : CAR CURRENT POSITION NOT STABLE

TEST
CONDITIONS
F1: SYSTEM CHECK FOR DTCS
1
Yes
Re-check the system for car current position not stable.
No
GO to F2.
F2: VEHICLE SPEED INPUT CHECK
Select Vehicle Sensor from the navigation diagnostic menu screen (PIN code 660), check
1
Current speed. The current speed must match the speedometer.
From the Vehicle Sensor screen, does the current speed must match the speedometer?
Yes
GO to F3.
No
Carry out MOST ring circuit checks.
Check the Anti-Lock Brake System Module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Carry out network integrity tests using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits if required. Repair wiring harness as required.
F3: CHECK NUMBER OF SATELLITES
From the navigation diagnostic GPS information screen (PIN code 662), check the number of
1
satellites displayed.
Is the number of satellites displayed on the screen 0?
Yes
Carry out pinpoint test A "Poor Satellite Reception"
No
GO to F4.
F4: CHECK IF SYMPTOMS ARE OCCURRING IN PARTICULAR LOCATIONS
Confirm if the 'car current position not stable' symptom is occurring in particular locations.
1
Is the 'car current position not stable' symptom occurring in particular locations?
Yes
Signal reflections from buildings or a particular location may be responsible.
No
Carry out pinpoint test A "Poor Satellite Reception"
PINPOINT TEST G : MAP DISPLAY IS INCOMPLETE

TEST
CONDITIONS
G1: SYSTEM CHECK FOR DTCS
1
Yes
Re-check the system for 'Map display is incomplete'.
No
GO to G2.
G2: CHECK MAP DISC
Check map disc for contamination, deformation, cracks, scratches or non-genuine disc and
1
correct market.
Has a fault been identified with the map disc?
Yes
Replace the map disc.
Re-check the system for 'Map display is incomplete'.
No
PINPOINT TEST H : NO NAVIGATION VOICE GUIDANCE

TEST
CONDITIONS
H1: CHECK ALL AUDIO OUTPUT SYSTEMS
Check audio output across all systems.
1
Is there sound output across all systems?
Yes
GO to H2.
No
GO to H3.
H2: CHECK VOICE GUIDANCE SOFT KEY
Check navigation screen menu, voice guidance soft key is not set to OFF position.
1
Is the voice guidance soft key set to OFF position?
Yes
Set the voice guidance soft key to ON position.
Re-check the system
No
GO to H3.
H3: VOLUME LEVEL CHECK
Check the volume level is not set too low.
1
Is the volume level set too low?
Yes
Increase the volume level and re-test vehicle.
No
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of amplifier and speaker system wiring
harness and connectors.
GO to H4.
H4: NAVIGATION VOICE ONLY NOT AUDIBLE
NOTE: Only the navigation voice cannot be heard.
1
Press the 'Navigation voice repeat' soft key.
After the navigation voice repeat soft key is pressed, can voice still not be heard even though it has
become louder?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST I : NO RESPONSE TO PRESSING NAVIGATION MENU

TEST
CONDITIONS
I1: NO RESPONSE TO PRESSING NAVIGATION MENU
NOTE: 15 minutes are required for the program to update. If the engine is accidentally turned OFF, start the engine
again, and wait for 15 minutes.
1
Check that the engine was not turned 'OFF' during a navigation software update.
Was the engine turned 'OFF' during a navigation software update?
Yes
Check the correct map disc is inserted into the Navigation Control Module (NCM). Start the engine
and allow to idle for 15 minutesTurn the engine 'OFF', and then start the engine again.Verify that
the navigation screen displays. Navigation was in the program update mode.
No
GO to I3.
Check that the engine was not turned 'OFF' after inserting the new map disc.
1
Was the engine turned 'OFF' after inserting the new map disc?
Yes
and allow to idle for 15 minutesTurn the engine 'OFF', and then start the engine again.
No
GO to I3.
Check the "Loading" button on the navigation diagnostics screen (PIN code 660) has been
1
pressed, and "YES" has been selected.
Has the "Loading" button on the navigation diagnostics screen been pressed, and has "YES" been
selected?
Yes
and allow to idle for 15 minutesTurn the engine 'OFF', and then start the engine again.
No
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of navigation system wiring harness and
connectors.
GO to I4.
I4: SYSTEM CHECK FOR DTCS
1
Is DTC U300055 logged?
Yes
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check/amend the Car Configuration File
parameter in block 2, byte 127 to match vehicle market/specification. If the DTC remains check
navigation system module part number and ensure the correct component is installed to vehicle
market/specification.
No
GO to I5.
1
Turn the engine 'OFF', wait for a moment, and then turn the engine 'ON' again.
Does the navigation screen fail to display even if the navigation button is pressed?
Yes
Check the HLDF is installed correctly.
Check the Navigation Control Module (NCM) is installed correctly.
No
Navigation System - Navigation System Antenna

Removal
1.
Remove the rear spoiler.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Spoiler (501-08
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2.
3.
Remove the navigation system antenna.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1.
Install the navigation system antenna.

2.
Install the rear spoiler.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Spoiler (501-08
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Navigation System - Navigation System Display Module

Removal
1.

Procedures).
2.
Remove the instrument panel center reinforcement

trim panel.
3.

Release the navigation system module bracket.
4.

Remove the navigation screen module.
Remove the trim panel veneer upper
retaining clip.
Installation
1.
Install the navigation screen module.

Install the clip.
2.
Install the navigation system module bracket.

3.
Install the instrument panel center reinforcement trim panel.

4.

Procedures).
Navigation System - Navigation System Module

Removal
1.

For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect
(414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
2.

Remove the 4 nuts.
3.
Remove the navigation system module.

Installation
1.
Install the navigation system module.

2.

3.

For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect
(414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
Cellular Phone Torque Specifications
Item
Cellular (Bluetooth) phone antenna
Transceiver module
www.JagDocs.com
Nm
7
6
lb-ft
5
4
lb-in
62
53
Cellular Phone - Cellular Phone

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Microphone
Speakers
Bluetooth antenna
10
Audio amplifier
INTRODUCTION
The cellular phone system is based on using the customers own Bluetooth capable handset with the vehicle Information and
Entertainment system.
NOTE: There is no physical connection (cradle) between the phone handset and the Telephone Control Module.
Communications between the two components are purely Bluetooth. This can limit the available functions dependant on the
handset used.
The cellular phone system comprises the following components:
Telephone Control Module
Microphone
Bluetooth antenna
The system allows the driver to send, receive and end phone calls using the Touch Screen Display (TSD), steering wheel
switches and voice recognition system.
Phone dialing is achieved using one of the following methods:
Dialing a number using the TSD keypad
Selecting a number from the handsets phonebook
Selecting from the handsets call register, typically the last 10 calls made, received and missed.
The Telephone Control Module is connected to the Information and Entertainment system on the MOST ring. This allows
audio and control signals to be routed to and from the Telephone Control Module.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A=Hardwired; N=Medium speed CAN; P=MOST; T=Coaxial
Item
Part Number
Audio amplifier
Speakers
Description
Bluetooth antenna
7
-
Microphone
10
Clock spring
11
12
Cellular Phone - Cellular Phone Antenna

Removal
1.
Remove the rear seat armrest.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat Armrest (501-10
2.

3.
Remove the cellular phone antenna.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the cellular phone antenna.

2.

Secure in the clip.
3.
Install the rear seat armrest.

Cellular Phone - Transceiver Module

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.
Remove the transceiver module.

Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
1.
Install the transceiver module.

2.

Specifications).
Multifunction Electronic Modules Torque Specifications
Item
Driver seat module (DSM) retaining bolts
Information and entertainment module retaining bolts
Nm
10
6
lb-ft
7
-
lb-in
53
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Module Controlled Functions

COMPONENT LOCATION - MOST BUS
Item
Part Number
Description
Software download socket
Auxiliary USB (universal serial bus) unit
Cellular phone module
Navigation computer
SDARS/DAB (satellite digital audio radio service/digital audio broadcasting) module (where
fitted)
Audio amplifier
COMPONENT LOCATION - LIN AND PRIVATE CAN BUSES
Item
Part Number
Description
LH (left hand) temperature blend stepper motor
Face/Feet distribution stepper motor
RH (right hand) temperature blend stepper motor
Instrument cluster
Driver seat switch pack
Driver door module
Driver seat module
10
Passenger seat switch pack
11
COMPONENT LOCATION - LIN BUS (CONTINUED)
Item
Part Number
Description
Adaptive speed control sensor
Battery backed sounder
Clockspring
Engine start control module
Steering wheel audio switch module
Yaw rate/acceleration sensor
10
COMPONENT LOCATION - MEDIUM SPEED CAN BUS
Item
Part Number
Description
ATC module
Instrument cluster
Seat climate control module
Driver door module
Diagnostic socket
Driver seat module
10
11
TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) module
12
Convertible top control module (convertible vehicle only)
13
14
15
CJB
16
Parking aid module
COMPONENT LOCATION - HIGH SPEED CAN BUS
Item
Part Number
Description
Adaptive front lighting module
Instrument cluster
Diagnostic socket
ADCM (active damping control module)
EPB (electric park brake) module
10
11
12
13
ABS module
Pedestrian protection system module
14
15
INTRODUCTION
The vehicle electrical system consists of a number of control modules connected via two multiplexed CAN (controller area
network) busses. The Instrument cluster acts as a gateway between the two CAN bus systems.
Lower speed control modules use a LIN (local interconnect network) bus. Control modules on the LIN bus are generally
configured to be master/slave i.e. one module controls other module(s).
The vehicle entertainment system uses a fibre optic bus system, which uses the MOST (media oriented systems transport)
protocol for transmission of data and audio to the relevant components of the audio system.
Module
ECM (engine control
module)
Bus System
HS CAN
ABS (anti-lock brake

system) module
Instrument cluster
HS CAN
Function
Controls the engine in response to various
sensor inputs.
Controls the braking force applied to the road

wheels.
HS CAN, MS
Gateway between High speed and Medium
CAN and LIN speed CAN, gateway between the CAN busses
and the LIN bus.
Parking aid control module
MS CAN
Control of parking sensors and routing of audio
feedback to driver.
Navigation computer
MOST, GVIF
Route guidance output based on inputs from
GPS (global positioning system) satellites and
driver destination.
RCM (restraints control
MS CAN
Controls the deployment of supplementary
module)
restraint components.
TPMS (tire pressure
monitoring system)
module
TCM (transmission control
module)
MS CAN
Headlamp
leveling/adaptive front
lighting module
module
CJB
HS CAN
MS CAN
AJB
MS CAN
Seat climate control

module
ADCM
MS CAN
EPB (electronic parking

brake) module
ATC (automatic
temperature control)
module
Information and
module
Driver door module
HS CAN
Monitors the vehicle tires to warn of deflation.
Location
Front LH (left-hand) side in
engine compartment adjacent to
bulkhead.
In the engine compartment next
to the ECM.
On the driver side in the
instrument panel.
Lower LH A pillar below the CJB
(central junction box).
In the luggage compartment to
the right of battery.
On the transmission tunnel
between the seats under the
trim.
Behind the rear seats next to the
AJB (auxiliary junction box).
MS CAN
Electronic control of the automatic gear change. In the sump of the transmission.
MS CAN
Inhibits the steering from being turned without

the proper security parameters being met.
Controls headlamp levels and adaptive front
lighting system.
HS CAN
HS CAN
MS CAN
MS CAN
MS CAN
MS CAN
MS CAN
Driver seat module
MS CAN
MS CAN
MS CAN
Controls vehicle road speed in relation to other

vehicles when in speed control mode.
Controls body functions and power distribution.
On the steering column.

RH (right-hand)foot well
mounted against inner bulk
head.
At the bottom of the RH A pillar.
In the passenger compartment

RH side on the A pillar.
Controls body functions and power distribution. In the center behind the backrest
of the rear passenger seat.
Controls the operation of the climate control
In the instrument panel.
system in the front seats.
Controls the adjustment of the dampers.
Behind the backrest of the RH
rear passenger seat.
Controls the application and release of the
Behind the auxiliary junction
parking brake.
box.
Controls the operation of the climate control/airAttached to the side of air
conditioning system.
conditioning unit.
Gateway between the MOST and CAN systems
for information and control distribution.
Behind the TSD and above the

integrated audio unit.
Memory/adjustment functions for seats, steering In the drivers door behind the
column and mirrors and security functions.
trim.
Memory/adjustment functions for seats, steering In the passenger door behind the
column and mirrors and security functions.
trim.
Contains controls for entertainment system and Center of the instrument panel
air conditioning system.
surrounding the TSD.
Controls seat positioning and memory seat
Under the drivers seat.
functions.
Controls seat positioning and memory seat
Under the front passenger seat.
functions.
Allows the vehicle to be opened and started
Right hand A pillar.
without the use of a key.
module
Key start control module
MS CAN
Pedestrian protection
system module
HS CAN
DLM
HS CAN
LIN
Electronic control of the selected gear/driving

On top of the transmission
mode.
tunnel.
Used if the keyless vehicle module is unable to
In the center consol.
authorize the smart key.
Control and monitoring of pedestrian protection On the LH side under the wheel
arch liner at the top of the wheel
system.
arch.
Controls the operation of the motor on the
LH side of the luggage
electronic differential.
compartment, immediately
forward of the tail lamp.
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Multifunction Electronic Module


For a detailed description of the multifunction electronic control modules, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Module Controlled Functions (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Wiring Harness
3.
4.
DTC Index
NOTE: The DTC Index in this section shows information for DTCs that could be logged in the Driver Door Module (DDM)
or Passenger Door Module (PDM). For diagnosis and testing information for: Driver/Passenger Seat module.
REFER to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Diagnosis and Testing).
Information and Entertainment module.
Remote Keyless Entry module.
REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - DTC: With (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,
DTC
Description
B109C15 Front Courtesy Light
Possible Cause
Short to power or open circuit
Action
test front courtesy light circuit for short to
B109D11 Front Courtesy Light
Short to ground
B10EB11
Driver door double

locking motor
Short to ground
B10EB15
Driver door double

locking motor
B10EC11
Passenger door
double locking motor
Short to ground
B10EC15
Passenger door
double locking motor
B110811
Driver door central

locking motor
Short to ground
B110815
Driver door central

locking motor
B110911
Passenger door
central locking motor
Short to ground
B110915
Passenger door
central locking motor
B116311
Left Mirror Heater

Output short to
ground
B116315 Left Mirror Heater
Output short to power
B116411
Right Mirror Heater

Output short to
ground
B116415 Right Mirror Heater
Output short to power
B116511
B116515
B116611
B116615
B117E72
Left Front Puddle

Lamp Output short to
ground
Left Front Puddle
Lamp Output open
load or short to power
Right Front Puddle
Lamp Output short to
ground
Right Front Puddle
Lamp Output open
load or short to
battery
Front Power Window
up
Short to ground
Short to ground
Short to ground
Short to ground
Actuator stuck open
B117E73 Front Power Window

up
B117F72 Front Power Window

down
Actuator stuck open

down
B118929 Front Window Position

Sensor
Signal invalid
B118A29 Rear Window Position

Sensor
Signal invalid
B1A9411
Driver Mirror
Short to ground

test front courtesy light circuit for short
ground
test driver door double locking motor circuit
for short ground
test driver door double locking motor circuit
for short to power or open circuit
test passenger door double locking motor
circuit for short ground
test passenger door double locking motor
circuit for short to power or open circuit
test driver door central locking motor circuit
for short ground
test driver door central locking motor circuit
for short to power or open circuit
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
test left mirror heater output circuit for short
to ground
to power or open circuit
test right mirror heater output circuit for
short to ground
test right mirror heater output circuit for
test left front puddle lamp output circuit for
short to ground
test left front puddle lamp output circuit for
test right front puddle lamp output circuit for
short to ground
test right front puddle lamp output circuit for
Install a new DDM/PDM, refer to the new
Index
Index
Index
Index
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
B1A9415
Driver Mirror
B1A9511
Passenger Mirror
Short to ground
B1A9515
Passenger Mirror
B1A9883
LIN Bus Circuit #1
Value of signal protection
B1A9886
LIN Bus Circuit #1
Signal Invalid
B1A9887
LIN Bus Circuit #1
Missing Message
B1C0911
Driver Left/Right
Mirror Motor Circuit
Short to ground
B1C0915
Driver Left/Right
B1C1011
Driver Up/Down
Short to ground
B1C1015
Driver Up/Down
B1C1111 Passenger Left/Right

Short to ground

B1C1211 Passenger Up/Down

Short to ground

B1C1311
Driver Up/Down
Mirror Motor Feedback
Circuit
B1C1315
Driver Up/Down
Circuit
B1C1411
Driver Left/Right
Circuit
B1C1415
Driver Left/Right
Circuit
Short to ground
Short to ground
Short to ground
test driver mirror fold motor circuit for short

to ground
test passenger mirror fold motor circuit for
short to ground
test LIN circuit between driver switch pack
and DDM for short/open circuits, clear DTC
and re-test. If DTC remains install a new
switch pack.
REFER to: Window Control Switch (501-11
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
switch pack.
Installation).
switch pack.
Installation).
test driver left/right mirror motor circuit for
short to ground
test driver up/down mirror motor circuit for
short to ground
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
test driver up/down mirror motor feedback
circuit for short to ground
test driver left/right mirror motor feedback

Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
C1B1411
Sensor Supply #1
C1B1415
Sensor Supply #1
U001000
Medium speed CAN

communication Bus

with CJB
With Driver Seat
Module (DSM)
U030000
Internal control
module software
incompatibility
U200224
Switch
U201011
Switch illumination
U201012
Switch illumination
U201208
Car Configuration
Parameter(s)
U201324
Switch Pack
U201444
Control module
hardware
U210000
Initial configuration
not complete
Control module
U300049

Number (VIN)

Number (VIN)
U300362
Battery voltage
test passenger up/down mirror motor

feedback circuit for short to ground
feedback circuit for short to power or open
circuit
Short to ground
test passenger left/right mirror motor
circuit
Short to ground
test window sensor supply circuit for short to
ground
test window sensor supply circuit for short to
Medium speed CAN
communication Bus
diagnostic system
Logged when subscribed CAN
message missing from CJB
diagnostic system
Missing message
diagnostic system
Invalid configuration message is Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
received
the DDM/PDM, refer to the new module
Signal stuck high
Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains, install
a new passenger side window switch
Carry out CAN network tests using the
Bus signal/message failures
Cycle the ignition status and re-test. If DTC
remains, re-configure the RJB using the
Signal stuck high
a new driver side window switch pack.
Installation).
Data Memory Failure
Index
Re-configure the DDM/PDM using the
Index
Not configured
Re-configure the relevant module as new
system and re-test. If DTC remains install a
new module, refer to the new module
Mis-match of battery voltage, of Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
2 volts or lower, between
DDM/PDM and RJB
diagnostic system
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Driver Door Module (DDM)

Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
3.
Installation
1.
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Driver Seat Module (DSM)

Removal
1.
Remove the front seat.

For additional information, refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating,
2.
Remove the front seat control module.

Installation
1.
Install the front seat control module.

2.
Install the front seat.

Multifunction Electronic Modules - Information and Entertainment

Module
Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.
Remove the instrument panel center reinforcement

trim panel.
3.

4.
Remove the information and entertainment

module.
Installation
1.
Install the information and entertainment module.

2.

3.
Install the instrument panel center reinforcement trim panel.

4.

Specifications).
5.
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Passenger Door Module (PDM)

Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
3.
Installation
1.
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Module

Removal
NOTE: This module is installed on the inside of the RH A-pillar above the footwell and does not change with the hand of
drive.
1.

Specifications).
2.

Remove the RH side footwell trim panel.
Remove the 3 clips.
3.
Remove the keyless entry module.

Installation
1.
Install the keyless entry module.

Install the screws.
2.
Install the RH side footwell trim panel.

3.

Specifications).
4.
Front End Body Panels - Air Deflector

Removal
1.

2.
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
1.
Front End Body Panels - Cowl Vent Screen

Removal
CAUTION: Always protect paintwork and glass when removing exterior components.
3.
1.

Remove the 3 clips.
2.

Remove the 4 clips.

For additional information, refer to: Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16 Wipers and
Washers, Removal and Installation).
4.

Release the retaining clip.
Installation
1.

2.

3.

4.
Install the windshield wiper arms.

For additional information, refer to: Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16 Wipers and
Washers, Removal and Installation).
Front End Body Panels - Fender Splash Shield

Removal
1.
2.

3.

4.
Remove the fender splash shield, rear section.

Remove the clip.
Remove the 2 nuts.
5.
Remove the fender splash shield, front section.

Installation
1.
Install the fender splash shield, front section.

2.
Install the fender splash shield, rear section.

Tighten the nuts.
Install the clip.
3.

4.
www.JagDocs.com
Front End Body Panels - Radiator Splash Shield

Removal
1.

2.
NOTE: Note the fitted position of the washers.

Remove the radiator splash shield.
3.

for access only.
4.
Remove the 2 air deflectors.

Installation
1.
Install the air deflectors.

2.
Install the clips.
3.
Install the radiator splash shield.

Tighten the screws.
Body Closures Torque Specifications
Item
Door check strap to body - bolt
Door check strap to door - nut
Door hinge - pin bolt
Hood to hinge - nut
Hood hinge to body - bolt
Lift-gate to hinge - bolt
Lift-gate hinge to body - nut
Luggage compartment lid to hinge - nut
Luggage compartment lid hinge to body - bolt
Nm
12
12
25
23
23
23
23
23
23
lb-ft
9
9
18
17
17
17
17
17
17
lb-in
-
Body Closures - Hood Alignment

General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Actuator Aligners - Pedestrian Protection Hood Stops
501-119
1.
With assistance, loosen the 8 nuts securing the hood to the

hinges.
2.
Release the hood support struts.
3.
Lower the hood and check for alignment.

For additional information, refer to: Body and Frame (501-26
Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance
Checks, Description and Operation).
Adjust as necessary.
4.
Raise the hood.

Connect the hood support struts.
5.
Align the hood to the pedestrian protection

actuators using special tools 501-119.
Insert special tools 501-119, into the
pedestrian protection actuators.
Loosen the 8 bolts securing the pedestrian
protection actuator stops to the hood.
Gently close the hood so that the
pedestrian protection hood stops are
aligned to the actuators.
Open the hood.
Body Closures - Luggage Compartment Lid Alignment

General Procedures
1.
Remove the luggage compartment floor panel.

2.
Remove the luggage compartment lid striker

panel.
3.
Remove the luggage compartment striker.

4.
Remove the luggage compartment aperture seal.
5.
Remove the luggage compartment lid struts.

6.
Loosen the luggage compartment lid hinge fixings.

7.
Make sure the gaps between the luggage

compartment lid are all 3.5 mm.
8.
9.
Make sure the luggage compartment lid to rear

bumper gap is 6.8 mm.
Tighten the luggage compartment lid hinge nuts to 23 Nm (17

lb.ft).
10.
Loosen the luggage compartment lid hinge to body

fixings.
Loosen the 6 bolts.
11.
Make sure the gaps between the luggage compartment lid are
all 3.5 mm.
12.
Tighten the luggage compartment lid hinge to body bolts, to 23

Nm (17 lb.ft).
13.
Install the luggage compartment lid support struts.

Secure the 4 clips.
14.
With the luggage compartment lid closed, check

the profile of the luggage compartment lid to
convertible top compartment lid, and luggage
compartment lid to rear body side is flush; adjust
as necessary.
15.
Install the luggage compartment lid aperture seal.
16.
Install the luggage compartment lid striker.
17.
Install the luggage compartment lid striker trim panel.

Install the 4 Torx screws
18.
Install the luggage compartment floor panel.
Body Closures - Liftgate Alignment

General Procedures
1.
Check the gap and profiles of the liftgate are correct.

For additional information, refer to: Body and Frame (501-26
Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance
Checks, Description and Operation).
2.
Remove the loadspace floor panel.

3.
Remove the scuff plate trim panel.

4.
Remove the liftgate hinge cover.

Remove the 8 clips.
5.
Loosen the liftgate striker.

Loosen the 2 Torx bolts.
6.
Loosen the liftgate to hinge Torx bolts.
7.
8.
With the liftgate closed, check the alignment of the

liftgate to the roof panel. Profile of the liftgate to
roof panel should be 2 mm below flush.
Tighten the liftgate to hinge Torx bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
9.
Loosen the liftgate hinge to body nuts.
10.
With the liftgate closed, check the alignment of the

liftgate to the roof panel and bodyside panel. The
liftgate should be central in its aperture.
11.
Tighten the liftgate hinge to body nuts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
12.
Secure the liftgate striker.

13.

14.
With the liftgate closed, check the profile of the

liftgate to the bodyside panel. Adjust as required.
15.
Install the liftgate hinge cover.

16.
Install the loadspace floor panel.
Body Closures - Hood

Special Tool(s)
Actuator Aligners - Pedestrian Protection Hood Stops
501-119
Removal
1.
2.
With assistance, remove the hood.

Release the clips and disconnect the struts.
Remove the 8 nuts.

for access only.
Remove the hood seal end caps.
3.
Remove the hood seal.

Release the hood seal.
4.
5.
Remove the hood pad.

Remove the 2 secondary hood pads.

Remove the 4 clips.
Installation
1.
Install the secondary hood pads.

2.
Install the hood pad.

3.
Install the hood seal.

Install the clips.
Attach the hood seal.
4.
Install the hood seal end caps.

5.
With assistance install and align the hood.

Connect the struts and secure with the clips.
6.
Align the hood to the pedestrian protection

actuators using special tools 501-119.
Insert special tools 501-119 into the
pedestrian protection actuators.
Loosen the 8 bolts securing the pedestrian
protection actuator stops to the hood.
Gently close the hood so that the
pedestrian protection hood stops are
aligned to the actuators.
Open the hood.
Body Closures - Luggage Compartment Lid

Removal
1.
2.
Disconnect the 4 luggage compartment lid harness electrical

connectors.
3.
4.
Release the wiring harness.

Remove the electrical harness clip.

5.
Release the clips and disconnect the struts.
6.
7.
With assistance, remove the luggage compartment

lid.
Remove the 4 nuts.

Remove the luggage compartment lid latch
operating cable from the lock cylinder.
Release the cable from the clip.
8.
9.

assembly.
Remove the bump stops.
10.
11.
12.
Remove the luggage compartment lid lock cylinder.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the license plate lamp housing.
13.
16.
Remove the luggage compartment lid finisher.

Disconnect the license plate lamp electrical
connector.
Remove the grommets.
Remove the 4 bolts.
14.
Remove both rear lamp assemblies.

Remove the 6 nuts.
15.
Remove the luggage compartment lid wiring

harness.
Release the 8 wiring harness securing clips.
Remove the luggage compartment lid decals.

Wipe the luggage compartment lid to remove all traces
of the adhesive.
Polish the area to remove any bleaching.
Installation
1.
Install the luggage compartment lid decal.

Remove the backing from the decal.
Remove the protective cover from the decal.
Secure the decal to the luggage compartment lid.
Position and align the decal on the luggage compartment
lid.
2.
Install the luggage compartment lid wiring harness.
3.
Install both of the rear lamp assemblies.

Install the nuts.
4.
Install the luggage compartment lid finisher.

Connect the license plate lamp electrical connector.
Secure the 4 clips.
Install the 4 bolts.
Install the grommets.
Install the license plate lamp housing.
5.
Install the wiring harness.

Install the 2 bolts.
Secure in the 9 clips.
6.
Install the luggage compartment lid lock cylinder.

7.
Install the bump stops.
8.
Install the luggage compartment lid latch assembly.

Install the 3 Torx bolts.
9.
Connect the luggage compartment lid latch operating cable to

the lock cylinder.
Install the cable.
10.
With assistance, install the luggage compartment lid.

Install the 4 nuts.
11.
Install the luggage compartment lid support struts.

Secure in the 2 clips.
12.

Secure the electrical harness with the clip.
13.
Connect the 4 electrical connectors.
14.
Body Closures - Door

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

3.
Remove the window regulator motor.

4.
Release the front door inner weathershield.

5.
Remove the front door inner weathershield.

Release the front door interior handle
cable.
6.
Release the door check strap from the body.

7.
Release the door harness from the door.

Release from the locating grommet.
8.
NOTE: With assistance remove the component.

Remove the door.
Remove the 2 hinge bolts.
Installation
1.
With assistance, install the door assembly.

Lubricate the hinges and bolts tighten to 25 Nm (18
lb.ft).
2.
Install the door wiring harness.

Secure in the grommets.
Secure the clips.
3.
Install the door check strap.

Tighten the Torx screws to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
4.
Install the front door inner weathershield.

Attach the front door interior handle cable.
5.
Secure the front door inner weathershield.

Secure the wiring harness clips.
6.
Install the window regulator motor.

7.
8.

Specifications).
Body Closures - Door Check Arm

Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.

cable.
5.
Remove the door check-strap.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the door check strap.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Body Closures - Liftgate

Removal
1.

Installation).
2.
Disconnect the rear screen electrical connectors.

3.
Release the body harness from the liftgate.

Release the 2 harness grommets and
withdraw the harness from liftgate.
4.
NOTE: Support the lifgate as necessary.

Release the liftgate support struts.
5.
With assistance, remove the liftgate.

Installation
1.
With assistance, install the liftgate.

2.
NOTE: Support the lifgate as necessary.

Attach the liftgate support struts.
3.
Attach the body harness to the liftgate.

Secure the harness grommets into the liftgate.
4.
Disconnect the rear screen electrical connectors.
5.

Installation).
6.
Check and adjust the liftgate.

For additional information, refer to: Liftgate Alignment (501-03
Body Closures, General Procedures).
Interior Trim and Ornamentation Torque Specifications
Item
B-pillar trim panel - screw
Door trim panel - screw
Parcel shelf - bolt
Door scuff-plate - screw
Luggage compartment scuff plate - bolt
Rear quarter trim panel - screw
Sun visor - screw
www.JagDocs.com
Nm
3
3
6
6
4
3
1
lb-ft
2
2
4
4
3
2
-
lb-in
26
26
53
53
35
26
9
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - A-Pillar Trim Panel

Removal
1.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component

is removed for access only.
Remove the A-pillar trim panel.
2.
Remove the cellular phone microphone.

Installation
1.
Install the cellular phone microphone.

2.
Install the A-pillar trim panel.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - B-Pillar Trim Panel

Removal
1.
Remove the parcel tray.

For additional information, refer to: Parcel Shelf (501-05
2.
Remove the sun visor.

For additional information, refer to: Sun Visor (501-05 Interior
5.
3.
Remove the roof moulding.

4.
Release the B-pillar trim panel.

Remove the B-pillar trim panel.

Installation
1.
Attach the B-pillar trim panel.

2.
Secure the B-pillar trim panel.

3.
Install the roof moulding.

4.
Install the sun visor.

5.
Install the parcel tray.

For additional information, refer to: Parcel Shelf (501-05
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Engine Cover V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C

5.0L Petrol
Removal
1.

correct.
Installation
1.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Door Trim Panel

Removal
1.
Remove the exterior mirror trim panel.

2.
Release the front door trim panel.

Remove the bolt cover.
3.

cable.
4.
Remove the front door latch remote control

handle.
5.
Remove the grab handle cover.

6.
Remove the window control switch.

7.
Remove the seat control switch.

Installation
1.
Install the seat control switch.

2.
Install the window control switch.

3.
Install the grab handle cover.

4.
Install the front door latch remote control handle.

5.
CAUTION: Make sure that the cable remains correctly

installed to the front door trim panel.
6.
Secure the front door trim panel.

Tighten the Torx bolts to 10 Nm.
Install the bolt cover.
7.
Install the exterior mirror trim panel.

8.
Check the operation of the door latch remote control handle.

With the door closed, check the latch operation of the
door latch remote control handle.
With the door closed, check the lock operation of the
door latch remote control handle.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Headliner

Removal
1.
Remove the LH A-pillar upper trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05
2.
Remove the RH A-pillar upper trim panel.

3.
Remove the roof mouldings.

4.
Remove the LH B-pillar upper trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05
5.
Release the RH B-pillar upper trim panel.

6.
Remove the RH B-pillar upper trim panel.

7.
8.
Remove the front overhead console.

Remove the LH sun visor.

9.
Remove the RH sun visor.

10.
11.
Remove the sun visor retaining clips.

Release the screw covers.
Remove the screws.
Remove the headliner.

Release the clip.
Installation
1.
Install the headliner.

2.
Install the sun visor retaining clips.

Install the screws.
Install the screw covers.
3.
Install the RH sun visor.

4.
Install the LH sun visor.

5.
Install the front overhead console.

6.
Attach the RH B-pillar upper trim panel.

7.
Secure the RH B-pillar upper trim panel.

8.
Install the LH B-pillar upper trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05
9.
Install the roof mouldings.

10.
Install the RH A-pillar upper trim panel.

11.
Install the LH A-pillar upper trim panel.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Parcel Shelf

Removal
1.

2.
Release the parcel tray.

3.
Release the rear safety belts.

Remove and discard the 2 safety belt lower
anchor nuts.
4.
5.
Remove the rear safety belt trim panel.

Release from the safety belts.

Release from the safety belts.
6.

Remove the 2 child seat mounting trim panels.
Installation
1.
Install the 2 child seat mounting trim panels.

2.

Position safety belts through apertures.
3.
Install the rear safety belt trim panel.

Attach the safety belts.
4.
Secure the rear safety belts.

Install new nuts and tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
5.
Secure the parcel tray.

6.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel

Removal
1.
Remove and discard the scuff plate decal.

Release the adhesive strip.
2.
Remove the front scuff plate trim panel.

Carefully release horizontally.
Installation
1.
Install the front scuff plate trim panel.

Align the component.
2.
Install the scuff plate decal.

Remove backing tape from adhesive strip.
Clean the adhesive contact area.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Scuff Plate Trim Panel

Removal
1.
Remove the luggage compartment floor panel.
2.
Remove the tool kit tray.

3.
Remove the spare wheel and tire.

Remove the bolt.
4.

Installation
1.

2.
Install the spare wheel and tire.

Install the bolt.
3.
Install the tool kit tray.
4.
Install the luggage compartment floor panel.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Sun Visor

Removal
1.
Remove the sun visor.

Installation
1.
Install the sun visor.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Liftgate Upper Trim Panel

Removal
1.
Remove the liftgate upper trim panel.

Installation
1.
Install the liftgate upper trim panel.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Liftgate Lower Trim Panel

Removal
1.
Remove the liftgate upper trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Liftgate Upper Trim Panel
Installation).
2.
Remove the warning triangle.

Release the clip.
3.
Remove the warning triangle retaining bracket.

4.
Remove the liftgate grab handle.

5.

Installation
1.

2.
Install the liftgate grab handle.

3.
Install the warning triangle retaining bracket.

4.
Install the warning triangle.

5.
Install the liftgate upper trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Liftgate Upper Trim Panel
Installation).
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Quarter Trim Panel 2-Door

Removal
1.

2.
NOTE: Release the forward edge first.

3.
Release the rear safety belt lower anchor.

Remove and discard the Torx bolt.
4.

Release the safety belt from the trim panel.
Installation
1.

Position the safety belt through the trim panel.
Tighten the Torx bolts to 3 Nm (2.2 lb.ft).
2.
Secure the rear safety belt lower anchor.

Tighten the new Torx bolt to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).
3.

4.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Quarter Trim Panel Convertible

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the rear safety belt stalk trim panel.

3.
Remove the rear safety belt stalk.

4.

5.
NOTE: Support the convertible top lid.

Open the convertible top to the position shown.
Depress the switch.
6.
9.
Release the convertible top hinge cover tension strap.

Release from the convertible top mechanism.
7.
Carefully remove the outer waist seal.

Release each end of the seal from the
body.
8.
Release the convertible top lid seal.

Release the front safety belt lower anchor.

10.

Release the safety belt from the trim panel.
Installation
1.

Position the safety belt through the trim
panel.
Secure with the clips (1).
Check the illustrated trim dimension (2),
before tightening the Torx bolt (3) to 3
Nm (2.2 lb.ft).
2.
Secure the front safety belt lower anchor.

3.
Attach the convertible top lid seal.

4.
Install the outer waist seal.

Attach the outer waist seal to the body.
5.
Attach the convertible top hinge cover tension strap.

Attach to the convertible top mechanism.
6.
Close the convertible top.

Depress the switch.
7.

8.
Install the safety belt stalk.

9.
Install the rear safety belt stalk trim panel.

10.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Quarter Trim Sliding Panel

Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Depress the switch.
6.
Release the convertible top hinge cover tension strap.

Release from the convertible top mechanism.
7.

body.
8.
Release the convertible top lid seal.

9.
Release the rear quarter trim panel.

10.
Release the air damper unit from the trim panel.
11.
Remove the rear quarter trim sliding panel

complete with both air damper units
Carefully release the rear quarter trim
sliding panel.
Installation
1.
Carefully install the rear quarter trim sliding panel.

Position the air damper unit between the quarter trim
panel and the support brace.
2.
Install the air damper unit to the trim panel.

Tighten the Torx screws to 1.9 Nm (1.4 lb.ft).
3.

Check the illustrated trim dimension,
before tightening the Torx bolts to 3 Nm
(2.2 lb.ft).
4.
Attach the convertible top lid seal.

5.

6.
Attach the convertible top hinge cover tension strap.

Attach to the convertible top mechanism.
7.

Depress the switch.
8.

9.

10.

11.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Loadspace Trim Panel 2-Door

Removal
3.
1.
Remove the battery cover.

Remove the 4 retainers.
2.
Remove the tool kit tray.

4.
Remove the spare wheel and tire.

Remove the bolt.
5.

6.
Remove the loadspace trim panel.

Remove the clip.
Installation
1.
Install the loadspace trim panel.

Install the clip.
2.

3.
Install the spare wheel and tire.

Install the retaining bolt.
4.
Install the tool kit tray.
5.
6.
Install the battery cover.

Install the 4 retainers.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Loadspace Trim Panel Convertible

Removal
1.
Remove the battery cover.

Remove the 4 retainers.
2.
3.

4.
Remove the luggage compartment retractable cover.

5.
6.
Remove the luggage compartment retractable

cover track.
Release the fabric cover.
Remove the loadspace trim panel.

Remove the clip.
Installation
1.
Install the loadspace trim panel.

Install the clip.
2.
Install the luggage compartment retractable cover track.

Secure the fabric cover.
3.

4.
5.
Install the battery cover.

Install the 4 retainers.
6.
Install the luggage compartment retractable cover.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Luggage Compartment Lid Trim

Panel
Removal
1.
Remove the warning triangle.

Release the clip.
2.
Remove the warning triangle retaining bracket.

3.
Remove the luggage compartment lid latch handle.

Remove the locking pin.
4.

5.

Remove the luggage compartment lid grab handle.
Installation
1.
Install the luggage compartment lid grab handle.

Secure the clips.
2.

3.
Install the luggage compartment lid latch handle.

Install the pin.
4.
Install the warning triangle retaining bracket.

5.
Install the warning triangle.

Exterior Trim and Ornamentation Torque Specifications
Item
A-post outer finisher (convertible) - screw
Luggage compartment lid finisher - screw
Sill applique to body - screw
Spoiler to luggage compartment lid - nut
Spoiler to luggage compartment lid - screw
Nm
2
1.5
4
5
5
lb-ft
3
4
4
lb-in
18
13
35
44
44
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Fender Moulding

Removal
1.
2.
CAUTION: Protect the surrounding paintwork

to avoid damage.
3.

to avoid damage.
4.

to avoid damage.
5.

avoid damage.
Installation
1.
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Spoiler

Removal
1.
Remove the high mounted stoplamp.

For additional information, refer to: High Mounted Stoplamp
(417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
2.
Release the rear spoiler.

Remove the 2 nuts.
3.

Installation
1.
Install the rear spoiler.

Fit and tighten the Torx screws.
2.
Install the high mounted stoplamp.

For additional information, refer to: High Mounted Stoplamp
(417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Rocker Panel Moulding

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the front scuff plate trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Installation).
3.
Release the rocker panel moulding lower edge.

Remove the 9 clips.
4.
CAUTIONS:
Always protect paintwork and glass when

Removal of the clips is a delicate procedure,

damage will occur if any force is used.
NOTE: When removing the seal, some clips may
remain attached to the component. These clips can
be recovered and returned to their original fitted
positions.
Release the rocker panel door seal lower for
access.
5.
CAUTION: Protect the paintwork during this

operation.
NOTE: Apply a sharp horizontal force to release the
clips.
Remove the rocker panel moulding.
Release the front and rear clips.
Installation
1.
Install the rocker panel moulding.

Align and secure the front and rear rocker panel clips.
2.
Install the aperture seal.

3.
Secure the rocker panel lower edge.

Install the clips.
4.
Install the front scuff plate trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Installation).
Rear View Mirrors Torque Specifications
Item
Exterior mirror - bolt
Nm
8
lb-ft
6
lb-in
71
Rear View Mirrors - Rear View Mirrors

COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) shown, LHD (left-hand drive) mirror image.
Item
Part Number
Description
Interior mirror
Driver's door mirror
Door mirror switches
Passenger door mirror
INTRODUCTION
Movement of the door mirrors is controlled from a switch pack located on the drivers door. The switch pack contains 2 nonlatching mirror select buttons labelled 'L' and 'R' and a 4-way mirror movement switch. Door mirror movement commands
are transmitted to the driver's door module over the LIN (local interconnect network) bus. The drivers door module transmits
any mirror movement commands to the passenger door module over the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
Movement of the door mirrors is carried out by the respective door module. The door modules provide supply and ground
paths to the mirror motors and monitor mirror position via potentiometers located in the mirror housings.
An electrochromic interior mirror is mounted on the windshield and contains a forward and a rearward facing light sensor.
The light sensors control the auto dimming feature of the interior mirror to reduce glare from the headlights of following
vehicles.
When auto-dimming of the interior mirror is required, a supply is provided by the interior mirror to both door mirrors to
initiate the door mirror auto-dimming sequence.
Some vehicles may be fitted with an interior mirror featuring an electronic compass with LED (light emitting diode) display.
The compass is a self contained unit and does not interface with any other vehicle system or electronic control module.
Details of how to set and calibrate the compass can be found in the 'Mirrors' section of the Owner's Handbook.
Up to 2009 Model Year (MY), some vehicles have door mirrors with an electric foldback feature. From 2009 MY, the mirror
foldback feature is a standard fit in all markets. Where fitted, mirror foldback can be operated manually or automatically.
Manual operation of mirror foldback is initiated with the vehicle stationary or moving at 20 km/h (12 mph) or less, by
pressing then releasing the L and R mirror select buttons at the same time. The first press of the mirror select buttons
causes the two door mirrors to turn inwards to the folded position and stop. A further press of the mirror select buttons
causes the door mirrors to turn outwards to the unfolded position and stop. If the mirror select buttons are pressed while the
door mirrors are moving, they stop and reverse direction until they reach their original position. If one of the door mirrors
has been manually folded, the two door mirrors can be re-synchronized by an inward and outward operating cycle.
Automatic mirror foldback is selected and deselected on the vehicle settings menu of the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
Automatic operation is synchronised with the exterior locking and unlocking of the vehicle (it does not work with interior
locking and drive away locking). If automatic operation is selected, the door mirrors fold when the vehicle is locked and
unfold when unlocked. However, the door mirrors will not unfold automatically if they have been folded manually, even
though automatic mode is selected on the TSD.
Automatic Mirror Foldback Selection on TSD
A thermal cut-out feature is incorporated to protect the mirror foldback motors. Thermal cut-out only occurs with the door
mirrors in the unfolded position, and resets after 5 minutes.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus
Item
Part Number
Battery
Megafuse (175A)
Door mirror switches
Driver's door mirror
Description
Passenger door mirror
7
-
Interior mirror
10
Mega fuse
11
Rear View Mirrors - Rear View Mirrors

For a detailed description of the rear view mirrors, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Rear View Mirrors (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Relay
Switch
Exterior mirror(s)
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, Check DDM/PDM for rear view mirror related DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index.
DTC Index
DTC
B116311
Description
Left Mirror Heater
Output short to
ground
B116315 Left Mirror Heater
Output short to
power
Output short to
ground
Possible Cause
Short to ground
Short to ground
Action
to ground
test right mirror heater output circuit for short
to ground
B1A9411
Output short to
power
Driver Mirror
Short to ground
B1A9415
Driver Mirror
B1A9511
Passenger Mirror
Short to ground
B1A9515
Passenger Mirror
B1A9883 LIN Bus Circuit #1
Signal Invalid
Missing Message
B1C0911
Driver Left/Right
Short to ground
B1C0915
Driver Left/Right
B1C1011
Driver Up/Down
Short to ground
B1C1015
Driver Up/Down

Short to ground


Short to ground

B1C1311
B1C1315
B1C1411
B1C1415
Driver Up/Down
Mirror Motor
Feedback Circuit
Driver Up/Down
Mirror Motor
Feedback Circuit
Driver Left/Right
Mirror Motor
Feedback Circuit
Driver Left/Right
Short to ground
Short to ground
test right mirror heater output circuit for short

to ground
short to ground
switch pack.
Installation).
switch pack.
Installation).
switch pack.
Installation).
short to ground
short to ground
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
Mirror Motor
Feedback Circuit
Mirror Motor
Feedback Circuit
Mirror Motor
Feedback Circuit
Mirror Motor
Feedback Circuit
Mirror Motor
Feedback Circuit
U001000 Medium speed CAN
communication Bus
with CJB
With Driver Seat
Module (DSM)
U030000
Internal control
module software
incompatibility
U200224
Switch
U201011 Switch illumination

U201208
Car Configuration
Parameter(s)
U201324
Switch Pack
U201444
Control module
hardware
U210000 Initial configuration

not complete
U300049
Control module

Number (VIN)

Number (VIN)
U300362
Battery voltage

Short to ground
circuit
Short to ground
circuit
Medium speed CAN
communication Bus
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
Missing message
diagnostic system
received
Signal stuck high
Signal stuck high
Installation).
Data Memory Failure
Index
Index
Not configured
Mis-match of battery voltage, of 2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
volts or lower, between DDM/PDM this DTC using the manufacturer approved
and RJB
diagnostic system
Rear View Mirrors - Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror

Removal
1.
CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the clips.
Protect the surrounding trim to avoid

damage.
2.
3.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the component is

secured in the retainer.
NOTE: To install the rear view mirror, place in the
4 or 8 o'clock position and rotate to the 6 o'clock
position to lock.
2.
3.
CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the clips.
Protect the surrounding trim to avoid

damage.
Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the exterior mirror.

Installation
1.
Install the exterior mirror.

Secure the wiring harness in the clips.
2.

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Cover

Removal
1.
Refer to: Exterior Mirror Glass (501-09 Rear View Mirrors,

2.
Installation
1.
Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Glass

Removal
1.
2.
Installation
1.

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Motor

Removal
1.
Refer to: Exterior Mirror Glass (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and
Installation).
2.
3.
Installation
1.
Seating Torque Specifications
Item
Front seat track to vehicle floor - bolt*
Rear seat support bracket - nut/screw
NOTE: *New nut/bolt must be installed.
www.JagDocs.com
Nm
48
9
lb-ft
35
7
lb-in
80
Seating - Seats
COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Rear seat removable center panel
Performance front seat
Sport and luxury front seat
INTRODUCTION
There are three variants of front seat, depending on market and vehicle specification: 10-way sport, 16-way luxury and 16way performance. Sport and luxury seats have the same general appearance, but differ in the features they incorporate;
performance seats have a unique appearance. The front seats are equipped with the following:
Seat control switches (door mounted)
Cushion front tilt adjustment
Seat height adjustment

Backrest adjustment
Adjustable, active head restraints (sport and luxury variants only)
Lumbar adjustment
Fore and aft adjustment
Extendable cushion (luxury and performance variants only)
Adjustable side bolsters (luxury and performance variants only)
Seat heating (sport and performance variants only)
Seat heating and cooling (luxury variant only)
Side air bag module
Seat control module
WARNING: Prior to removal of the front seats, and before disconnecting the front seat wiring harness electrical
connectors (which includes the side air bag module electrical connectors), the battery ground cable must be disconnected
and a period of at least 1 minute allowed to elapse. The same amount of care should be taken when handling and storing the
seats as would be taken when handling and storing air bag modules.
For additional information, refer to: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General
The driver and passenger front seats, although almost identical, have some unique components. The front driver seat has a
seat position sensor and the front passenger seat has an occupancy sensing system. In both instances the components form
an integral part of the air bag SRS (supplemental restraint system).
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
The rear seat backrests are conventionally trimmed over a wire frame with a removable center panel allowing access to the
AJB (auxiliary junction box).
FRONT SEAT CONTROL SWITCHES

10-way Adjustment
Item
Part Number
Description
Backrest adjustment
Stored memory position button 3
Seat position memory store button
Lumbar adjustment, 2-way
Fore and aft adjustment, cushion tilt and seat height adjustment
16-way Adjustment
Item
Part Number
Backrest adjustment
Seat position memory store button
Seat cushion extension adjustment
Lumbar adjustment, 4-way
Fore and aft adjustment, cushion tilt and seat height adjustment
Bolster adjustment
Description
The front seat control and memory switches are installed in the driver and passenger door casings.
FRONT SEAT CONTROL COMPONENTS

NOTE: Luxury seats shown.
Item
Part Number
Description
Passenger seat
Driver seat
Height adjustment motor
Fore and aft adjustment motor
Cushion tilt motor
Seat control module
Cushion extension motor
Bolster solenoids
Lumbar solenoids
Air pump
Backrest adjustment motor
Seat position is monitored by the related seat module using inputs from Hall sensors in the seat adjustment motors. This
prevents the seat from being adjusted to a position that will contact the surrounding interior trim or a rear seat passenger
causing injury (clash avoidance).
Seat memory is standard on both drivers and passenger seats. Each seat memory can be configured for three positions,
which are set using the seat memory switches and stored in the individual seat module.
Selections on the seat adjustment and memory switches are transmitted on a LIN (local interconnect network) bus to the
related seat control module.
NOTE: In the event of a control module failure a fly lead behind the seat valance can be used to connect a power source
directly to the seat slide motor. This enables the seat to be moved to gain access to the front and rear seat fixings. The seat
can then be removed from the vehicle in order to access the control module.
Item
Part Number
Description
Fly lead
FRONT SEAT HEATING
Item
Part Number
Description
Seat backrest heater
Seat cushion heater
Seat heating is provided by two heater mats in each seat, one in the seat cushion and one in the seat backrest. Operation of
the heater mats is controlled by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module.
The heater mats in each seat contain three heater elements, two in the cushion heater mat and one in the backrest heater
mat, which are wired in series. The ATC module monitors seat temperature using a temperature sensor in the seat cushion
heater mat.
FRONT SEAT HEATING AND COOLING
Item
Part Number
Description
Climate seat control module
Air inlet cover for blower of backrest climate module
Backrest climate module
Blower
Duct
Peltier cells
Backrest liner
Cushion liner
Cushion climate module
10
Blower
11
Duct
12
Peltier cells
Seat heating and cooling is provided by climate modules in the cushion and the backrest of the seat. Operation of the climate
modules in both front seats is controlled by a climate seat control module attached to the front of the instrument panel
cross-car beam, on the driver side.
The climate modules contain Peltier cells, which heat up or cool down depending on the voltage provided by the climate seat
control module. Each climate module also contains a blower, controlled by the climate seat control module, which blows air
over the Peltier cell and into a liner in the related cushion or backrest. The heated or cooled air then flows out of holes in the
liner, and through the seat pad and seat cover.
The climate seat control module uses temperature sensors in the backrest and the cushion climate modules to regulate the
seat temperature.
ACTIVE FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS
Item
Part Number
Description
Head restraint support
Fabric tape
Head restraint movement during rear end collision
Occupant movement during rear end collision
Sport and luxury front seats are fitted with mechanical active head restraints that reduce injuries to the spinal column and
possible whiplash in the event of a rear collision. The 2 supports of the head restraints inside the seat backrest are joined
together with fabric tape. As the seat occupants back and body weight presses against the fabric tape the head restraint
moves upwards and forwards mechanically by means of a pivot point. The movement of the headrest cushions the
occupants head, altering the posture and reducing the relative motion between the body and the head. The head restraint
then returns to its original position using a spring return mechanism.
FRONT SEAT BACK TILT
Item
Part Number
Description
Sport and luxury seats
Performance seats
Safety belt guide
Release lever
Recliner assembly
Release cable
The front seats tilt forward to allow access to the rear seats. To tilt the seat forward, remove the safety belt from the belt
guide. Lift the lever and push the seat back forwards. The seat back will latch when returned to the normal position. Ensure
that the safety belt is returned to the belt guide.
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL CONFIRMATIONS

A single chime audible confirmation is generated by the instrument cluster to provide confirmation to the driver that the
memory store operation has been successfully completed.
In addition to audible confirmation there is also a visual confirmation via the instrument cluster message center.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster and Panel Illumination (413-00 Instrument Cluster and Panel
Illumination, Description and Operation).
STEERING COLUMN ADJUST
Item
Part Number
Description
Rotary joystick control switch

The instrument cluster controls the electric adjustable steering column in a rake (up and down) and reach (in and out). The
steering column can be adjusted for rake and reach by operating the rotary joystick control switch on the LH side of the
steering column.
Easy Entry Exit

The 'Easy Entry Exit' mode provides automatic movement of the steering column to allow easier entry to or exit from the
vehicle.
This mode is selected by setting the steering column adjustment switch to the 'AUTO' position.
If the 'Easy Entry Exit' feature fails to function, it can be activated as follows:
Rotate the steering column adjust switch to the 'AUTO' position
The instrument cluster will now display 'Column Adjust Auto' in the message center
For more information refer to the owners' handbook.
Steering Column Control

Adjustment of the steering column is achieved by a single Direct Current (DC) motor. Each adjustment movement is
transmitted through a solenoid actuated clutch; 1 clutch for reach movement and 1 for rake movement.
When engaged, a clutch can be released only if the system is unstressed. As the clutches are mounted on the same motor
spindle, the sequence for position adjustment is as follows:
Engage the selected clutch by powering the appropriate solenoid
After a time period (approximately 0.1 of a second), the motor is powered in the desired direction. When the motor
reaches the stop position, the solenoid and motor is released/unpowered. The clutch remains engaged under stress
At the start of the next adjustment the motor is powered in the opposite direction to enable the clutch to disengage
when the stress is released.

Simultaneous rake and reach movements are not possible since the motor must reverse direction as soon as the first axis
has reached its required position.
Steering column rake and reach is controlled via potentiometer feedback.
SEAT CONTROL MODULE

The seat control modules, located under the driver and front passenger seats, rely upon a number of inputs to control
various outputs. As with all electronic control modules, the unit needs information regarding the current operating conditions
of the engine and other related systems before it can make calculations, which determine the appropriate outputs.
CONTROL DIAGRAMS
Adjustment 10-way Seats
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus.
Item
Part Number
Battery
Recline adjustment motor
Fore/Aft adjustment motor
Description
6
-
Cushion tilt adjustment motor
Air pump
Driver door module
10
11
Instrument cluster
12
Seat control module
13
Seat adjustment/memory switchpack
Adjustment 16-way Seats

NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus.
Item
Part Number
Battery
CJB
Recline adjustment motor
Description
Fore/Aft adjustment motor
5
-
Cushion tilt motor
Cushion extension motor
Air pump
10
Driver door module
11
12
Lumbar solenoids
13
Backrest bolster solenoids
14
Instrument cluster
15
Seat control module
16
Seat adjustment/memory switchpack
Seat Heating
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; P = MOST ring.
Item
Part Number
Battery
CJB
Cushion heater mat
Backrest heater mat
ATC module
Seat Heating and Cooling
Description
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; P = MOST ring.
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
CJB
Cushion Peltier cells
Climate seat control module
Cushion blower
Backrest Peltier cells
Backrest blower
10
TSD
Drivers Memory Seat
The seat control module can store up to 3 different driver seating, mirror and steering column positions. The numbered
memory and single memory store switches control memory storage and recall operations. Each switch is a momentary action
push switch.
The seat control module broadcasts memory switch selections on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus, for
storage and recall of the door mirror and steering column positions by the door modules and instrument cluster respectively.
Memory Store
Driver's Seat
Once the driver's seat, steering column and exterior mirrors have been adjusted, the vehicle is able to memorize these
settings for future use by using the following procedure:
Push the memory button M, the red Light Emitting Diode (LED) will illuminate for five seconds
Whilst the LED is illuminated, press button 1, 2 or 3 to memorize the current settings
The LED will extinguish, and a chime will sound to confirm that the settings have been memorized. If the ignition is ON, the
message center will display a confirmation message.
Passenger Seat
The procedure to memorize a passenger seat position is the same as that for the driver seat with two exceptions. There will
be no chime or message to confirm the settings.
Memory Recall
Memory recall has 3 memory positions stored for the seats, steering column and exterior mirrors. The switches for this
function are located on driver and passenger door side trim panel. Pressing the appropriate numbered memory switch allows
the seat to start moving to the position appropriate to that memory. When the switch is released the system will operate in
manual mode. This means that when the switch is released, the seat will stop moving. In order to reach the intended
memory position, the switch must not be released until all movement has stopped.
When a memory recall is initiated, to limit the overall current consumption, only 2-seat axis will move towards their intended
position at any one time.
Both mirrors move simultaneously about the vertical axis first (left/right), and then, once all vertical axis movements are
complete, about the horizontal axis (up/down). To minimize the number of mirror drives required, a method of sharing is
implemented, which dictates that all movement about 1 axis is complete before movement about the other axis commences.
Immediate Adjustment
Pressing one of the manual adjustment switches will initiate the corresponding motor for that axis until the switch is
released.
Only 2 seat motors can be driven at any one time.
Stall Detection
Seat, steering column and mirror motors are deemed to have stalled if there is no change in the inputs that are received
from the corresponding feedback sensors for 200 ms (seat).
If a stall condition is detected then the drive to that axis is cancelled for the remainder of that memory operation (memory
recall) or until the switch is re-selected (manual movement).
If the motor movement has stopped due to loss of sensor feedback, either stall or sensor failure, then that axis may be
activated again, to move past the stall position, by re-selecting the appropriate switch and pressing for longer than 2
seconds. This allows control of the motor to be maintained if sensor feedback is lost.
Upon re-selection of movement, if sensor pulses are detected then the motor will continue to be driven until the switch is
released or another stall condition is detected. If sensor feedback is not detected then the motor is only driven for 0.5
second and then stops until the switch is released and then pressed again, when a further 0.5 second of activation is
permitted, and so on, this is known as inch mode.
For all seat motor manual movements, whenever a motor is driven and a stall occurs, the seat control module records the
position at which the stall occurred. If movement occurs beyond a stall position, then that position is erased from the control
modules memory. This will always allow movement past a previously recorded stall position once movement has been
registered beyond that position. This is the case for both manual and memory movement.
Initialization
When a replacement seat control module is fitted to a seat it should be calibrated using Jaguar approved diagnostic
equipment so that the control module can learn the seats absolute position.
Battery Monitor
If the battery voltage drops below 10.5 Volts, then the seat control module ignores all requests for a memory recall until the
battery voltage has reached 11.5 Volts. This will conserve as much power in the vehicle battery as possible to enable engine
cranking.
Stand-by Mode
The seat control module supports a stand-by mode to keep power consumption to a minimum.
If the control module is being prevented from entering stand-by mode due to motor movement, memory recall or switch
operation, then it will enter stand-by mode when the current function has terminated.
NOTE: In the case of a memory recall, all memory recall operations should be carried out before entering stand-by mode,
not just the current motor movement.
The control module will exit stand-by mode if there is any CAN bus activity.
The exchange of information between the diagnostic unit and the seat control module is via the medium-speed CAN bus.
There is a non-volatile Electronic Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) for saving detected errors. Its
contents are not lost when the power supply is disconnected. Only Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment can erase the error
memory.
Seat Heating
Seat heating selections on the TSD are transmitted on the MOST (media orientated system transport) ring to the information
and entertainment module, which relays the selections to the ATC module on the medium speed CAN bus. The ATC module
then sends a message, on the medium speed CAN bus, to the CJB (central junction box), which provides a feed to the seat
heater elements.
Seat Heating and Cooling

Seat heating and cooling for the front seats is selected on the climate menu of the TSD. Three levels of heating and three
levels of cooling are available. Heating and cooling can also be selected for either the cushion and the backrest, or just the
backrest.
Heating and cooling selections on the TSD are transmitted on a MOST ring to the information and entertainment module,
which relays the selections to the climate seat control module on the medium speed CAN bus. The climate seat control
module then energizes the Peltier cell and the blower of the climate module(s) in the appropriate seat. If full seat
heating/cooling is selected, both the backrest and the cushion climate modules are activated. If partial seat heating/cooling
is selected, only the backrest climate module is activated.
Seating - Seats
For a detailed description of the seats and seat operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Description and Operation).
vehicle.
NOTE: Prior to carrying out any diagnosis, ensure the vehicle battery is in a good serviceable condition, refer to the
battery care manual.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Electrical
Security, condition and correct installation of seat
components and fixings
Fuses/Relays
Damaged, Loose or Corroded Electrical
Connector(s)
Damage to Wiring Loom/Incorrect Location,
Stretched or Taught
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, verify the concern and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively, check for
Symptom Chart
Symptom
No seat movement from switch-pack (including no
memory recall)
Seat movement from switch-pack occurs in inch

mode (after 2 second delay from switch operation) When seat axis movement is requested from the seat
switch-pack the requested seat axis moves a short
distance (after a 2 second delay from switch
operation) then stops. This behaviour could occur on
any seat axis (slide, height, squab, tilt or cushion)
Seat movement from switch-pack occurs in inch
mode - When seat axis movement is requested from
the seat switch-pack the requested seat axis moves
a short distance then stops. This behaviour will occur
on ALL seat axis (slide, height, squab, tilt and
cushion)
Seat moves forward/rearwards via the slide axis

when the seat squab is tipped forwards/rearwards
Possible Cause
Action
Seat module has
Set ignition ON. Re-check seat
gone into sleep mode function from switch-pack. Check
Seat switch-pack
for DTC B1A9887 and refer to DTC
LIN, power or ground Index. Check for DTC B1A9888 and
refer to DTC Index
Seat switch-pack LIN
circuit - short to
power, ground
Motor Hall sensor on
Check for DTCs, B1B8731,
affected axis is not
B1B9131, B1B8931, B1B9331,
connected or not
B106331 and refer to DTC Index.
receiving expected
Re-calibrate affected seat
signals
MS CAN fault
Check Instrument Cluster and

DDM/PDM for DTCs, U020800,
U012600, U015500, U019900,
U014200 and refer to relevant DTC
Index. Check CAN network integrity
using manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Re-calibrate
affected seat
Seat module is in
Re-configure the affected seat
manufacturing mode module as a 'New Module' using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
When seat squab axis is moved to its maximum

recline position the squab makes contact with the
rear quarter casing causing the squab to twist and
bend
Front seat fore/aft movement not functioning
Front seat excessive fore/aft free play
Front seat fore/aft movement noisy
Front seat height, tilt and/or seat extension motor

movement not functioning
Front seat height, tilt and/or extension movement

noisy
Heating And Cooling - Inoperative
Heating And Cooling - Noisy Operation
Heating And Cooling - Poor Heat Or Cool Efficiency
Heating And Cooling - Heat Or Cool Operation Slow
Heating And Cooling - Intermittent Operation
Seat is out of
calibration
Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Carry out the
pinpoint test
associated to this
Symptom
Re-calibrate the affected seat.

Check for DTC U300146 and refer
to DTC Index
DTC Index
Driver/Passenger Seat Module
DTC
Description
B105D- Seat Bolster Inflate
11
Output - circuit short to
ground
B105D- Seat Bolster Inflate
15
battery or open
B105E- Seat Bolster Deflate
11
ground
B105E- Seat Bolster Deflate
15
battery or open
B105F- Seat Cushion Extension
11
Motor Output - circuit
short to ground
B105F- Seat Cushion Extension
15
Motor Output - circuit
short to battery or
open
B1060- Seat Headrest Motor
11
ground
B1060- Seat Headrest Motor
15
battery or open
B1063- Seat Cushion Extension
31
Motor Sensor - no
signal
B106431
Seat Headrest Motor

Sensor - no signal
B1065- Cushion Extend Switch

24
- signal stuck high
B1066- Cushion Retract Switch
24
- signal stuck high
B106724
Lumbar In Switch signal stuck high
B106824
Lumbar Out Switch signal stuck high
B106924
Lumbar Up Switch signal stuck high
B106A- Lumbar Down Switch 24

signal stuck high
B106B- Bolster Inflate Switch 24
signal stuck high
B106C- Bolster Deflate Switch 24
signal stuck high
B106D- Headrest Up Switch 24
signal stuck high
B106E- Headrest Down Switch
24
- signal stuck high
Possible Cause
Action
check, Seat Bolster Inflate Output for circuit
short to ground
Circuit short to power or open
circuit
check, Seat Bolster Inflate Output for circuit
check, Seat Bolster Deflate Output for circuit
short to ground
circuit
check, Seat Bolster Deflate Output circuit for
check, Seat Cushion Extension Motor Output for
circuit
check, Seat Cushion Extension Motor Output for
circuit short to power or open circuit

check, Seat Headrest Motor Output for circuit
short to ground
circuit
check, Seat Headrest Motor Output for circuit
Seat Cushion Extension Motor
Position Sensor, faulty or
check, Seat Cushion Extension Motor Position
circuit open
Sensor circuit for open circuit, if circuit is correct
suspect faulty component, refer to the new
of the DTC Index
Seat Recline Motor Speed /
Position Sensor2, faulty or
and check, Seat Recline Motor Position
circuit open
Sensor2 circuit for open circuit, if circuit
is correct suspect faulty component,
Index
Cushion Extend Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
or circuit short to power
circuit diagrams and check, Cushion Extend
Switch for fault or circuit short to power
Cushion Retract Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check, Cushion Retract
Lumbar In Switch, faulty or
Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check, Lumbar In Switch
for fault or circuit short to power
Lumbar Out Switch, faulty or
circuit diagrams and check, Lumbar Out Switch
Lumbar Up Switch, faulty or
circuit diagrams and check, Lumbar Up Switch
Lumbar Down Switch, faulty or Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check, Lumbar Down
Bolster Inflate Switch, faulty
circuit diagrams and check, Bolster Inflate
Bolster Deflate Switch, faulty
circuit diagrams and check, Bolster Deflate
Headrest Up Switch, faulty or Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check, Headrest Up Switch
Headrest Down Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check, Headrest Down
B1136Lumbar control A 11
circuit open
B1137Lumbar control B 11
circuit open
B1138Lumbar control C 11
circuit open
B1139Lumbar control D 11
circuit open
B113A- General failure on seat
00
lumbar - no sub type
information
B113B00
Lumbar Control
Multiple Failures - no
B1A9883
LIN Bus Circuit A value of signal

incorrect
B1A98LIN Bus Circuit A 86
signal invalid
B1A98LIN Bus Circuit A 87
missing message
B1B86Seat Height Motor

11
Relay - circuit short to
ground
15
battery or open
31
Speed/Position Sensor
- no signal
B1B88- Seat Slide Motor Relay

11
- circuit short to
ground
B1B88- Seat Slide Motor Relay
15
- circuit short to
battery or open
B1B89Seat Slide Motor

check, Lumbar control A circuit for circuit short
to ground
check, Lumbar control A circuit for circuit short
to power
Circuit open
check, Lumbar control A circuit for open circuit
check, Lumbar control B circuit for circuit short
to ground
check, Lumbar control B circuit for circuit short
to power
Circuit open
check, Lumbar control B circuit for open circuit
check, Lumbar control C circuit for circuit short
to ground
check, Lumbar control C circuit for circuit short
to power
Circuit open
check, Lumbar control C circuit for open circuit
check, Lumbar control D circuit for circuit short
to ground
check, Lumbar control D circuit for circuit short
to power
Circuit open
check, Lumbar control D circuit for open circuit
At least one lumbar failure has If this DTC is logged carry out an on demand
been detected during manual self test(ODST). Refer to logged DTC's after an
ODST and check for B1136, B1137, BB138,
operation
B1139 & B113B
Multiple lumbar failures are
present, the low level details check all Lumbar Control circuit A, B, C & D for
of the fault condition are
fault
unable to be determined
LIN bus checksum error
Check LIN network for interference/EMC related
issues
LIN bus Bit error / Parity
Check LIN network for interference/EMC related

issues
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test LIN
Bus between seat switch-pack and control
module for open circuit, short to power or
ground. Check power and ground supplies to
switch-pack
check, Seat Height Motor Relay circuit for short
to ground
Circuit short to power or
circuit open
check, Seat Height Motor Relay circuit for power
or circuit open
Seat Height Motor
Speed/Position Sensor, faulty check, Seat Height Motor Speed/Position Sensor
or circuit open
circuit for open circuit, if circuit is correct
of the DTC Index
check, Seat Slide Motor Relay circuit for short to
ground
Circuit short to ground short
to power or circuit open
check, Seat Slide Motor Relay circuit for short to
Seat Slide Motor
Error /Sync Error
Slave not responding or LIN
bus short circuit to ground or
to battery
31
- no signal
B1B90- Seat Tilt Motor Relay 11

B1B90- Seat Tilt Motor Relay 15
or open
B1B91Seat Tilt Motor
31
- no signal
B1B92Seat Recline Motor

11
ground
15
battery or open
31
- no signal
B1B94- Seat Height Up Switch

24
- signal stuck high
B1B9524
B1B9624
B1B9724
B1B9824
Seat Height Down

Switch - signal stuck
high
Seat Slide Forward
high
Seat Slide Backward
high
Seat Tilt Up Switch signal stuck high
B1B99- Seat Tilt Down Switch 24

signal stuck high
B1C00- Seat Recline Up Switch
24
- signal stuck high
B1C0124
Seat Recline Down

high
B1C02- Memory Store Switch 24
signal stuck high
B1C0324
Memory #1 Switch signal stuck high
B1C0424
B1C0524
U0010- Medium Speed CAN

88
U014000
Lost Communication
With Body Control
Speed/Position Sensor, faulty

or circuit open
check, Seat Slide Motor Speed/Position Sensor

of the DTC Index
check, Seat Tilt Motor Relay circuit for short to
ground
check, Seat Tilt Motor Relay circuit for short to
Seat Tilt Motor Speed/Position
Sensor, faulty or circuit open
check, Seat Tilt Motor Speed/Position Sensor
of the DTC Index
check, Seat Recline Motor Relay circuit for short
to ground
check, Seat Recline Motor Relay circuit for short
Seat Recline Motor
Speed/Position Sensor, faulty
check, Seat Recline Motor Speed/Position
or circuit open
Sensor circuit for open circuit, if circuit is correct
of the DTC Index
Seat Height Up Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check, Seat Height Up
Seat Height Down Switch,
faulty or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Seat Height Down
Seat Slide Forward Switch,
faulty or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Seat Slide Forward
Seat Slide Backward Switch,
faulty or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Seat Slide Backward
Seat Tilt Up Switch, faulty or
circuit diagrams and check, Seat Tilt Up Switch
Seat Tilt Down Switch, faulty
circuit diagrams and check, Seat Tilt Down
Seat Recline Up Switch, faulty Check switch operation. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check, Seat Recline Up
Seat Recline Down Switch,
faulty or circuit short to power circuit diagrams and check, Seat Recline Down
Memory Store Switch, faulty
circuit diagrams and check, Memory Store
Memory #1 Switch, faulty or
circuit diagrams and check, Memory #1 Switch
CAN Bus off
check Can Bus circuit for circuit fault, if circuit is
correct suspect faulty module, refer to the new
Index
Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs.
Central Junction Box (CAN Bus
U014200
U015500
U019900
U030000
U1A1449
U1A4C00
U300049
U300146
U300281

information
Lost Communication
With Body Control
Module "B" - no sub
type information
Lost Communication
information
Lost Communication
With "Door Control
Module A" - no sub
type information
Software
Incompatibility - no sub
type information
CAN Initialization
Failure - internal
electronic failure
Build / End of Line
mode Active - no sub
type information
Control Module internal electronic
failure
Control Module
Improper Shutdown calibration / parameter
memory failure
data received
U3003- Battery Voltage - circuit

16
U3003- Battery Voltage - circuit
voltage above
17
threshold
circuit fault)
check Can Bus circuit to Body Control Module

for circuit fault
Check Auxiliary Junction Box for stored DTCs.
Auxiliary Junction Box (CAN
Bus circuit fault)
check Can Bus circuit to Body Control Module B
for circuit fault
Check Instrument Panel Cluster for stored DTCs.
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
Control Module
check Can Bus circuit to Instrument Panel
Cluster for circuit fault
Check Door Control Module A for stored DTCs.

check Can Bus circuit to Door Control Module A
for circuit fault
CAN master configuration ID Re-configure the Seat Control Module using the
incorrect
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
DTCs and re-test. If DTC still logged suspect
Seat Control Module, refer to new module
installation note at top of DTC Index
Module internal electronic
Suspect Seat Control Module, refer to new
failure
Door Control Module A
Manufacturing mode has not
been removed
Module internal electronic
failure
Place seat module in to customer mode using

Suspect Seat control module, refer to new
Calibration/parameter memory Check for DTCs that could indicate power failure
failure
to the module and refer to the DTC Index
Vehicle/component misInstall original module, check for DTCs and refer

match. Corrupt VIN data being
transmitted, module
vehicle
Circuit voltage below threshold
check power and ground circuit for fault
threshold
check power and ground circuit for fault
Climate Controlled Seat Module
DTC
Description
B10B913
Blower Control
B10B94B
Blower Control
B115713 Blower Control "B"
B11574B Blower Control "B"
B120E13
Right Thermal
Electric Device
Control
B120E19
Right Thermal
Electric Device
Control
B120E4B
Right Thermal
Electric Device
Control
B122413
Left Thermal
Electric Device
Control
B122419
Left Thermal
Electric Device
Control
Possible Cause
Left blower control circuit
Action

- open circuit
Left blower motor - open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
circuit
blower control circuit for open circuit. Check and install
Climate controlled seat new left blower motor, climate controlled seat module as
required, refer to the new module/component installation
module failure
Mechanical restriction
Check for mechanical restriction within the left blower
within the left blower
motor housing. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
motor housing
and check left blower control circuit for short to ground.
Left blower control circuit
Check and install new left blower motor, climate
- short to ground
controlled seat module as required, refer to the new
Left blower motor - short
to ground
DTC Index
Climate controlled seat
module failure
Right blower control
Right blower motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
open circuit
blower control circuit for open circuit. Check and install
new right blower motor, climate controlled seat module
module failure
as required, refer to the new module/component
Mechanical restriction
Check for mechanical restriction within the right blower
within the right blower
motor housing. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check right blower control circuit for short to ground.
motor housing
Check and install new right blower motor, climate
Right blower control
controlled seat module as required, refer to the new
Right blower motor DTC Index
short to ground
module failure
Right seatback/cushion
thermal electric device
control circuits - open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
circuit
seatback/cushion thermal electric device control circuits
Thermal electric device
for open circuit. Check and install new thermal electric
failure
device/climate controlled seat module as required, refer
module failure
control circuits - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
ground
for short to ground. Check and install new thermal
failure
electric device/climate controlled seat module as
Climate controlled seat required, refer to the new module/component installation
module failure
control circuits - short to
Check for restriction in thermal electric device duct.
ground
Blocked thermal electric seatback/cushion thermal electric device control circuits
device duct (restriction in
airflow)
Thermal electric device required, refer to the new module/component installation
failure
module failure
Left seatback/cushion
control circuits - open
circuit
for open circuit. Check and install new thermal electric
failure
device/climate controlled seat module as required, refer
module failure
ground
failure
B12244B
Left Thermal
Electric Device
Control
B122A11
Right Seat
Cushion Blower
Speed Sensor
B122A12
Right Seat
Cushion Blower
Speed Sensor
B122B11
Right Seat Back

Blower Speed
Sensor
B122B12
Right Seat Back

Blower Speed
Sensor
B122C11 Left Seat Cushion

Blower Speed
Sensor
B122C12 Left Seat Cushion

Blower Speed
Sensor
B122D11
Left Seat Back

Blower Speed
Sensor
B122D12
Left Seat Back

Blower Speed
Sensor
B122E13
Right Seat
Cushion
B122E98
Right Seat
Cushion
required, refer to the new module/component installation

module failure
Check for restriction in thermal electric device duct.
ground
Blocked thermal electric seatback/cushion thermal electric device control circuits
device duct (restriction in
airflow)
Thermal electric device required, refer to the new module/component installation
failure
module failure
Right seat cushion blower Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
speed sensor circuit seat cushion blower speed sensor circuit for short to
short to ground
ground. Check and install a new motor/module as
Internal motor failure required, refer to the new module/component installation
module failure
Right seat cushion blower Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
short to power
power. Check and install a new motor/module as
module failure
Right seatback blower
speed sensor circuit - seatback blower speed sensor circuit for short to ground.
short to ground
Check and install a new motor/module as required, refer
Internal motor failure
module failure
Right seatback blower
speed sensor circuit seatback blower speed sensor circuit for short to power.
short to power
module failure
Left seat cushion blower
seat cushion blower speed sensor circuit for short to
speed sensor circuit ground. Check and install a new motor/module as
short to ground
module failure
Left seat cushion blower
short to power
power. Check and install a new motor/module as
module failure
Left seatback blower
speed sensor circuit - seatback blower speed sensor circuit for short to ground.
short to ground
module failure
Left seatback blower
speed sensor circuit seatback blower speed sensor circuit for short to power.
short to power
module failure
Right seat cushion
temperature sensor
seat cushion temperature sensor circuit for open circuit.
Check and install a new sensor/module as required, refer
Temperature sensor
failure
module failure
Blockage in the right seat Check/remove any blockage/restriction from the right
cushion thermal electric
seat cushion thermal electric device fan exhaust vent
device fan exhaust vent
Right seat cushion
B122F13
Right Seat Back
B122F98
Right Seat Back
B120F13 Left Seat Cushion
B120F98 Left Seat Cushion
B123013
Left Seat Back
B123098
Left Seat Back
B12317A
Right Seat
B12327A
Left Seat
B122313
Right Seat
Cushion
Temperature
Sensor
B122513
Right Seat Back

Temperature
Sensor
B122913
Left Seat Back

Temperature
Sensor
B123513 Left Seat Cushion

Temperature
Sensor
fan movement restricted

Right seatback
temperature sensor
Temperature sensor
failure
module failure
Blockage in the right
seatback thermal electric
Right seatback thermal
electric device fan
movement restricted
Left seat cushion
temperature sensor
Temperature sensor
failure
module failure
Blockage in the left seat
cushion thermal electric
Left seat cushion thermal
electric device fan
movement restricted
Left seatback
temperature sensor
Temperature sensor
failure
module failure
Blockage in the left
seatback thermal electric
Left seatback thermal
electric device fan
movement restricted
Temperature difference
between seatback and
cushion
Temperature difference
between seatback and
cushion
Right seat cushion
temperature sensor
Temperature sensor
failure
module failure
Right seatback
temperature sensor
Temperature sensor
failure
module failure
Left seatback
temperature sensor
Temperature sensor
failure
module failure
Left seat cushion
temperature sensor
Temperature sensor
failure

seatback temperature sensor circuit for open circuit.
Check/remove any blockage/restriction from the right
seatback thermal electric device fan exhaust vent

Check/remove any blockage/restriction from the left seat

cushion thermal electric device fan exhaust vent

Check/remove any blockage/restriction from the left
seatback thermal electric device fan exhaust vent
Check/remove any blockage/restriction from the right

seatback and cushion thermal electric device fan exhaust
vent
Check/remove any blockage/restriction from the left
seatback and cushion thermal electric device fan exhaust
vent
U000188 High Speed CAN

Communication
Bus
U001088 Medium speed Can

communication
Bus
U014000
Lost
communication
with CJB
U014200
Lost
communication
with RJB
U015500
Lost
communications
with instrument
cluster
U015600
Lost
Communication
With Information
Centre "A"
U030000 Internal control
module software
incompatibility
U040100
module failure
Bus off
Bus off
CJB
RJB
Lost communications
with instrument cluster
Lost communications
with information and

module
message is received
Invalid Data
Received From
ECM/PCM
Poor engine speed
Calibration
incomplete/corrupt
U300004
Control Module
Configuration
Incompatible
Control Module
U300362
Battery Voltage
Mis-match in battery
U210100
quality factor
voltage, of 2 volts or
more, between climate
controlled seat module
and RJB

Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
network to climate controlled seat module for short,
open circuit
network to climate controlled seat module for short,
open circuit
network to climate controlled seat module and
instrument cluster for short, open circuit
Re-configure the climate controlled seat module and the

RJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is still logged
suspect the climate controlled seat module, refer to the
new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Check ECM for speed related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index. On software levels previous to
8X23-14B663-AE clear the DTC and take no further
action if the system is operating correctly
Re-configure the climate controlled seat module using
Check and install a new climate controlled seat module
as required, refer to the new module/component
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : FRONT SEAT FORE/AFT MOVEMENT NOT FUNCTIONING
TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK FOR FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR OPERATION
WARNING: Before work is carried out, make the air bag supplemental restraint system safe. For
additional information, refer to Standard Workshop Practices section of workshop manual.
1
Set ignition status to ' ON'.
From the switch pack, operate the front seat forward-rearward seat motor switch and listen for
evidence of the motor operating.
Does the motor operate?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A3.
A2: CHECK FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR DRIVE BAR
Check front seat drive bar for correct installation and condition
1
Is the front seat drive bar correctly installed and in a serviceable condition?
Yes
Re-check for correct front seat forward-rearward movement. Remove seat to allow for further
investigation if required.
No
Correctly install front seat forward-rearward seat motor drive bar, or replace if required.
A3: CHECK FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR
WARNING: When carrying out the following steps, stand clear of all moving parts and ensure link harness is
routed accordingly.
1
Set ignition status to 'OFF'.
Disconnect front seat forward-rearward seat motor connector.
2
NOTE: It may be that the seat has been driven to the limit of travel along the relevant axis, and when
the link harness is connected, the seat will remain in the same position. If this is the case, a jolt may
be felt from the motor. To confirm the motor operation, swap the link harness to alternate motor pin
connections and the seat should travel in the opposite direction.
3
Using a locally made fused link harness and power supply, connect power and ground to forwardrearward seat motor.
Battery positive terminal
Battery negative terminal
forward-rearward seat motor pin 1
forward-rearward seat motor pin 2

Yes
Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for related Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) and carry out the repair operations specified. Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check front seat forward-rearward seat motor circuits.
No
Replace front seat forward-rearward seat motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
PINPOINT TEST B : FRONT SEAT EXCESSIVE FORWARD-REARWARD FREE PLAY

TEST
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FRONT SEAT FOR EXCESSIVE FORWARD-REARWARD FREE PLAY
1
Check all accessible front seat frame fixings are installed and to the correct torque.
Are all accessible front seat frame fixings installed and to the correct torque?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Install and tighten all accessible front seat frame fixings to correct torque and re-check for
excessive free play.
B2: COMPARE THE FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD FREE PLAY AGAINST A SIMILAR SEAT
Compare the front seat forward-rearward free play against a similar seat.
1
Is the front seat forward-rearward free play excessive when compared to a similar seat?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
The front seat frame is operating correctly. Submit Electronic Product Quality Report (EPQR) with
any further query.
B3: CHECK REMAINING FRONT SEAT FRAME FIXINGS
Remove front seat and/or any seat covers/trim to allow access to check remaining front seat
1
frame fixings are all installed and to the correct torque.
Are all remaining front seat frame fixings installed and to the correct torque?
Yes
Replace front seat frame. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
No
Install and tighten all remaining front seat frame fixings to correct torque and re-check for
excessive free play.
PINPOINT TEST C : FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD MOVEMENT NOISY

TEST
CONDITIONS
C1: COMPARE FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD MOVEMENT NOISE TO OTHER FRONT SEAT
Compare the front seat forward-rearward movement noise to other front seat.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement noise excessive when compared to other front seat?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
GO to C3.
C2: COMPARE FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD MOVEMENT NOISE TO FRONT SEAT IN OTHER VEHICLE
1
Compare the front seat forward-rearward movement noise to front seat in other vehicle.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement noise excessive when compared to front seat in other
vehicle?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
any further query.
C3: CHECK FOR DEBRIS OBSTRUCTING SEAT MOVEMENT
1
Check for debris obstructing seat movement.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement obstructed by debris?
Yes
Remove obstruction and re-check for noisy forward-rearward seat movement.
No
GO to C4.
C4: RE-ALIGN FRONT SEAT FRAME
1
Loosen front seat frame fixings.
2
Set ignition status to 'ON'.
Using the front seat switch pack drive the front seat fully forward then fully rearward.
Tighten front seat frame fixings to the correct torque.
Re-check for noisy seat movement.
Is the front seat forward-rearward movement still noisy?

Yes
GO to C5.
No
The front seat frame is now operating correctly.
C5: CHECK FRONT SEAT FORWARD-REARWARD SEAT MOTOR DRIVE BAR
Check front seat drive bar for correct installation and condition.
1
Is the front seat drive bar correctly installed and in a serviceable condition?
Yes
Replace front seat forward-rearward seat motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
No
Correctly install front seat forward-rearward seat motor drive bar, or replace if required.
PINPOINT TEST D : FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT AND/OR SEAT EXTENSION MOTOR MOVEMENT
NOT FUNCTIONING
TEST
CONDITIONS
D1: CHECK FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOTOR
WARNINGS:
Before work is carried out, make the air bag supplemental restraint system safe. For additional information, refer
to Standard Workshop Practices section of workshop manual.
When carrying out the following steps, stand clear of all moving parts and ensure link harness is routed
accordingly.
Set ignition status to ' OFF'.
1
2
Disconnect front seat height, tilt or extension motor connector.
NOTE: It may be that the seat has been driven to the limit of travel along the relevant axis, and when
the link harness is connected, the seat will remain in the same position. If this is the case, a jolt may
be felt from the motor. To confirm the motor operation, swap the link harness to alternate motor pin
connections and the seat should travel in the opposite direction.
3
Using a locally made fused link harness and power supply, connect power and ground to relevant
motor.
Battery positive terminal
Battery negative terminal
motor pin 1
motor pin 2

Yes
www.JagDocs.com
Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for related Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) and carry out the repair operations specified. Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check relevant motor circuits.
No
Replace the relevant motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
PINPOINT TEST E : FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT AND/OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT NOISY
TEST
CONDITIONS
E1: COMPARE THE HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT NOISE WITH THE OTHER FRONT SEAT
1
Compare the front seat movement noise to other front seat.
Is the front seat height, tilt or extension movement noise excessive when compared to other front
seat?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
GO to E3.
E2: COMPARE FRONT SEAT HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT NOISE TO FRONT SEAT IN OTHER
VEHICLE
Compare the front seat height, tilt or extension movement noise to front seat in other vehicle.
1
Is the front seat height, tilt or extension movement noise excessive when compared to front seat in
other vehicle?
Yes
GO to E3.
No
any further query.
E3: CHECK FOR DEBRIS OBSTRUCTING SEAT MOVEMENT
Check for debris obstructing seat movement.
1
Is the front seat height, tilt or extension movement obstructed by debris?
Yes
Remove obstruction and re-check for noisy height, tilt or extension seat movement. If still noisy
GO to E4.
No
GO to E4.
E4: CHECK FOR HEIGHT, TILT OR EXTENSION MOVEMENT MECHANISM LUBRICATION
Check and apply manufacturer approved lubrication to seat height, tilt or extension movement
1
mechanism and re-test for noise.
Is the front seat height, tilt or extension noise still apparent?
Yes
Replace the relevant motor. Refer to relevant section of workshop manual.
No
The front seat height, tilt or extension motor is operating correctly.
PINPOINT TEST F : HEATER AND COOLING - INOPERATIVE

TEST
CONDITIONS
F1: CHECK FOR STORED DTC
Check the Climate Controlled Seat Module for stored DTC's.
1
Are there any stored DTC's?
Yes
For information on stored DTC's refer to the information in the Climate Controlled Seat Module
DTC index.
No
GO to F2.
F2: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - FUNCTIONALITY CHECK
WARNING: Before work is carried out, make the air bag supplemental restraint system safe. For additional
information, refer to Standard Workshop Practices section of workshop manual.
NOTE: The Climate Controlled Seat's (heat and cool) function will only operate when the vehicle's engine is running.
NOTE: If a fault is identified and repaired, check for correct operation of the driver and front-passenger climate
controlled seat (heat and cool) functions.
Check the heat and cool function of the backrest.
1
Does the backrest heat and cool function operate correctly?
Yes
GO to F3.
No
GO to F5.
F3: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - FUNCTIONALITY CHECK
1
Check the heat and cool function at the cushion.
Does the cushion heat and cool function operate correctly?
Yes
If there are no faults evident, verify the customer concern.
No
GO to F4.
F4: CUSHION BELLOWS
1
Check the condition of the bellows.
Are the bellows obstructed, have they collapsed?
Yes
Remove the obstruction or replace collapsed bellows.
No
Suspect an internal fault with the Seat Climate Assembly. Replace as required, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2). Prior to installing a new component.
F5: BACKREST BELLOWS DUCT
1
Check the security of the bellows duct.
Is the bellows duct correctly installed?
Yes
GO to F6.
No
Securely reconnect the bellows duct.
F6: BACKREST BELLOWS
1
Check the security of the bellows.
Yes
No
Follow the link below to check operation of the Driver or Front Passenger Seat Cushion Climate
Assembly.GO to F2.
PINPOINT TEST G : HEATING AND COOLING - NOISY OPERATION

TEST
CONDITIONS
G1: CHECK FOR STORED DTC
1
Yes
DTC index.
No
GO to G2.
G2: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - NOISE
1
There is a known issue which effects a limited number of vehicles where under acceleration of the
vehicle the occupant of seat can deform the suspension mat (snake wire) which then presses on
the casing of the seat backrest climate assembly, this causes the casing to distort and the noise
issue to occur. If contact has occurred there will be a witness mark on the casing. Carry out visual
inspection of the seat backrest climate assembly that has been identified as noisy by the
customer.
Is there a witness mark on the casing?
Yes
Contact the local in market support for further information.
No
GO to G3.
G3: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - NOISE 2
Operate the heat and cool function of the seat. Listen for a 'WAH WAH' noise (the fan speeds up
1
and slows down repeatedly).
Does the fan speeds up and slow down repeatedly?

Yes
Confirm the latest Strategy and Calibration software is installed, using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system carry out the new Climate Controlled Seat Module application and update the
Climate Controlled Seat Module software if required.If the noise is still evident after software
update follow link below.GO to G4.
No
GO to G4.
G4: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - NOISE LEVEL COMPARISON
Compare the noise level of the suspect climate seat assembly to another climate seat assembly.
1
Is the noise level equal between the two seats?
Yes
The noise level is standard and comparable to the design intent.
No
PINPOINT TEST H : HEATING AND COOLING - POOR HEAT OR COOL EFFICIENCY

TEST
CONDITIONS
H1: CHECK FOR STORED DTC
1
Yes
DTC index.
No
GO to H2.
H2: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - FUNCTIONALITY CHECK
1
Check the heat and cool function of the backrest.
Yes
GO to H3.
No
GO to H5.
H3: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - FUNCTIONALITY CHECK
1
Yes
No
GO to H4.
H4: CUSHION BELLOWS
1
Yes
No
GO to H7.
H5: BACKREST BELLOWS DUCT
1
Yes
GO to H6.
No
H6: BACKREST BELLOWS
1
Yes
No
Assembly.GO to H2.
H7: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY -EFFICIENCY COMPARISON
1
Compare the efficiency of the suspect climate seat assembly to another climate seat assembly.
Is the efficiency equal between the two seats?
Yes
The efficiency is standard and comparable to the design intent.
No
PINPOINT TEST I : HEATING AND COOLING - HEAT OR COOL OPERATION SLOW

TEST
CONDITIONS
I1: CHECK FOR STORED DTC
1
Yes
DTC index.
No
GO to I2.
I2: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - FUNCTIONALITY CHECK
1
Check the heat and cool function of the backrest?
Yes
GO to I3.
No
GO to I5.
I3: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - FUNCTIONALITY CHECK
1
Yes
No
GO to I4.
I4: CUSHION BELLOWS
1
Yes
No
GO to I7.
I5: BACKREST BELLOWS DUCT
1
Yes
GO to I6.
No
I6: BACKREST BELLOWS
1
Yes
No
Assembly.GO to I2.
I7: DRIVER OR FRONT PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST CLIMATE ASSEMBLY - OPERATION COMPARISON
1
Compare the operation of the suspect climate seat assembly to another climate seat assembly.
Is the operation equal between the two seats?

Yes
The operation is standard and comparable to the design intent.
No
PINPOINT TEST J : HEATING AND COOLING - INTERMITTENT OPERATION

TEST
CONDITIONS
J1: CHECK FOR STORED DTC
1
Yes
DTC index.
No
GO to J2.
J2: CABLE CONNECTION CHECK
1
Identify from customer concern or stored DTC's which Seat Climate Assembly is operating
intermittently and confirm the harness connector is fully connected.
Is the harness connector is fully connected?
Yes
No
Disconnect the harness connector, inspect connector and terminals for damage. Repair or
replace if required. Reconnect connector and check operation.
Seating - Heater Mats

Heated seats incorporate heater elements in the cushion and the backrest of the seat. Each cushion heater element has
a thermal sensor, which supplies a feedback temperature signal to the related seat heater module. The backrest heater
elements do not have a thermal sensor, and are regulated at the same temperature as the cushion heater elements.
For a detailed description of the seat heater mat, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (501-10)
Seats (Description and Operation),
Seats (Description and Operation),
Seats (Description and Operation).

1.
2.

Visual inspection
Mechanical
Seat heater switches condition and installation
Electrical
Fuses
Seat heater module
Seat heater switches
Seat heater mat
3.
4.
NOTE: CAUTION: When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor
kit, part number 3548-1358-00.
DTC Index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to section 100-00.
Seat Heater Mat Application Chart
NOTE: To ensure an accurate resistance reading, calibrated test equipment must be used
Left Hand Drive
Right Hand Drive
Minimum Maximum
Resistance Resistance
Heater
Passenger
Passenger
Driver Side
Driver Side
Ohms At
Ohms At
Mat /
Side
Side
Vehicle / Cushion /
NTC
Connector / Connector / Connector / Connector / 20C 10 20C 10
Year
Backrest Resistor
Pin
Pin
C
C
Pin
Pin
XK 2010
Cushion
Heater
PS002/1 and DS002/1 and PS002/1 and DS002/1 and
1,2
1,6
mat
PS002/4
DS002/4
PS002/4
DS002/4
NTC
4 000
10 000
resistor
PS002/3
DS002/3
PS002/3
DS002/3
Backrest
Heater
0,35
0,47
mat
PS003/2
DS003/2
PS003/2
DS003/2
XF
Cushion
Heater
C3HS07A/1
C3HS02A/1
C3HS07A/1
C3HS02A/1
1,23
1,64
mat
and
and
and
and
C3HS07A/4
C3HS02A/4
C3HS07A/4
C3HS02A/4
NTC
C3HS07A/2
C3HS02A/2
C3HS07A/2
C3HS02A/2
4 000
10 000
resistor
and
and
and
and
C3HS07A/3
C3HS02A/3
C3HS07A/3
C3HS02A/3
Backrest
Heater
C3HS06A/1
C3HS01A/1
C3HS06A/1
C3HS01A/1
0,82
1,09
mat
and
and
and
and
C3HS06A/2
C3HS01A/2
C3HS06A/2
C3HS01A/2
XJ 2008
Cushion
Heater
SP14-1 and
SD14-1 and
SP14-1 and
SD14-1 and
1,28
1,71
mat
SP14-4
SD14-4
SP14-4
SD14-4
NTC
SP14-2 and
SD14-2 and
SP14-2 and
SD14-2 and
4 000
10 000
resistor
SP14-3
SD14-3
SP14-3
SD14-3
Backrest
Heater
SP15-1 and
SD15-1 and
SP15-1 and
SD15-1 and
0,88
1,17
mat
SP15-2
SD15-2
SP15-2
SD15-2
XJ 2010
Cushion
Heater C3HS07/1 and C3HS02/1 and C3HS07/1 and C3HS02/1 and
0,99
1,32
Front
mat
C3HS07/4
C3HS02/4
C3HS07/4
C3HS02/4
NTC
C3HS07/2 and C3HS02/2 and C3HS07/2 and C3HS02/2 and
4 000
10 000
C3HS02/3
resistor
C3HS07/3
C3HS07/3
C3HS02/3
Backrest
0,67
0,90
mat
C3HS06/2
C3HS06/2
C3HS01/2
C3HS01/2
XJ 2010
Cushion
0,99
1,32
C3HS76/4
Rear
mat
C3HS78/4
C3HS76/4
C3HS78/4
NTC
C3HS78/2 and C3HS76/2 and C3HS76/2 and C3HS78/2 and
4 000
10 000
resistor
C3HS78/3
C3HS76/3
C3HS78/3
C3HS76/3
Backrest
1,0
1,3
mat
C3HS77/4
C3HS79/4
C3HS77/4
C3HS79/4
PINPOINT TEST A : SEAT HEATER MAT

TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK FOR DTC'S
Where possible use the manufacturer approved diagnostic system to review any logged seat
1
heater mat DTC's
Were any seat heater mat DTC's logged?
Yes
Carry out the help text action for any logged DTC's. Clear the DTC and retest. If DTC's return
follow the tests listed below GO to A2.
No
GO to A2.
A2: MANUAL CHECK
NOTE: The manual check should be carried out by someone familiar with correct seat heat operation
NOTE: On full power the seat should be hot to touch
1
If required operate the vehicle air conditioning on full for 10 minutes to reduce the in vehicle
ambient temperature
2
Operate the seat heater on full power
Does the seat heater operate correctly?
Yes
Clear any stored DTC's and retest. If seat heater operation is correct no further action required
No
GO to A3.
A3: SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and the seat heater mat application chart (see above) to
identify the connector
2
Disconnect the connector
3
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the seat heater mat heater circuit and the
NTC resistor circuit for short circuit to ground
Are either of the circuits short circuit to ground?

Yes
Repair the circuit or replace the seat heater mat as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
installation of a new module/component. Clear any stored DTC's and retest
No
GO to A4.
A4: CIRCUIT CONTINUITY TEST
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the seat heater mat ( heater circuit ) for circuit
1
continuity
Does the seat heater mat heater circuit pass the continuity test?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Repair the circuit or replace the seat heater mat as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
installation of a new module/component. Clear any stored DTC's and retest
A5: POWER CONSUMPTION
NOTE: The seat heater power supply cycles on and off dependant on the seat and cabin temperature and may only
switch on for 5 seconds in 30 seconds
Reconnect the connector
1
2
3
4
Operate the vehicle air conditioning on full for 10 minutes to reduce the in vehicle ambient
temperature
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the seat heater mat ( heater circuit ) using a
current clamp
Operate the seat heater on full power
Use the chart above to calculate typical value (V/R=I) (Volts divided by Resistance equals
Current in Amps)
Examples (12 volts / 0.5 ohms =24 amps) (12 volts / 1 ohms = 12 amps) (12 volts / 2 ohms = 6
6
amps)
Does the seat heater mat consume the correct level of current?
Yes
Clear any stored DTC's and retest. If operation correct, no further action required
No
GO to A6.
A6: RESISTANCE CHECK
NOTE: Ensure the multimeter used is calibrated and a resistance reading of 0 ohms is shown when the test leads are
connected together, alternately subtract any resistance shown from the result
NOTE: The seat heater mat circuits should be checked at the seat heater module connector
NOTE: Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and to confirm the total resistance of the circuit the cushion and backrest
are connected in series
1
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and the seat heater mat application chart (see above) to
identify the terminals
2
Disconnect the connector
5
3
4
Using a multimeter, carry out a resistance check of the seat heater mat heater circuit and the
NTC resistor circuit. Record the results
Compare the results to the chart (see above)
Are the results within specification at the given ambient temperature? (tolerance +/- 0.5 Ohms)
Yes
Reconnect the connector. Clear any stored DTC's and retest. If customer concern or DTC's return
refer to electrical circuit diagrams and investigate the power and ground supply circuits
No
Replace the seat heater mat as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component. Clear any stored DTC's and retest
Seating - Front Seat

Removal
1.
Release the front seat.

Position the front seat fully forwards.
Remove and discard the 4 rear bolts.
2.
Position the front seat fully rearwards.
3.

Procedures).
4.
With assistance, remove the front seat.

Remove and discard the front 2 Torx bolts.
Installation
1.
With assistance, install the front seat.

Install the new bolts and tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb.ft).
2.

Procedures).
3.
Secure the front seat.

Position the front seat fully forwards.
Install the new bolts and tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb.ft).
Install the bolt covers.
Seating - Front Seat Backrest Cover

Removal
1.

System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering (501-20, General
Procedures).
2.

3.
Remove the front seat head reatraint.

4.
Remove the front seat head restraint guide tubes.

Release from the seat frame.
5.
Remove the front seat backrest tilt handle.

Remove the screw.
6.
Remove the front seat backrest tilt handle trim

panel.
7.
Release the front seat backrest cover lower tension

straps.
8.
9.
Release the 9 front seat backrest cover rear panel

retaining clips.
Release from the backrest cover.
Release the 5 front seat backrest cover lower retaining clips.

10.
Release the front seat backrest cover central

tension straps.
11.
Remove the side air bag module.

Release the backrest cover.
12.
Release the front seat backrest cover upper

tension straps.
Withdraw from the backrest pad.
13.
Remove the front seat backrest cover.

Remove the 16 hog rings.
Installation
1.
Install the front seat backrest cover.

Install the 16 hog rings.
2.
Secure the front seat backrest cover upper tension straps.

Pass through the backrest pad.
Attach to the seat frame.
3.
Install the side air bag module.

Attach the backrest cover.
Tighten the new nuts to 7 Nm (5 lb.ft).
4.
Secure the front seat backrest cover central tension straps.

5.
Secure the front seat backrest cover lower retaining clips.

6.
Secure the front seat backrest cover rear panel retaining clips.
Attach to the backrest cover.
7.
Secure the front seat backrest cover lower tension straps.

8.
Install the front seat backrest tilt handle trim panel.

9.
Install the front seat backrest tilt handle.

Install the screw.
10.
Install the front seat head restraint guide tube.

Secure in the seat frame.
11.
Install the front seat head reatraint.
12.

Seating - Front Seat Backrest Cover

Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and

Installation).
3.
4.
5.
Torque: 3 Nm
6.
Torque: 5 Nm
7.
WARNING: The procedure must be carried

out on both sides of the seat.
8.
Torque: 3 Nm
9.
Torque: 5 Nm
10.
11.
WARNING: The procedure must be carried

out on both sides of the seat.
12.
13.
14.
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment

and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any air bag supplementary restraints
system (SRS) components. To deplete the backup
power supply energy, disconnect the battery
ground cable and wait for one minute. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: Make sure the front seat air bag

sleeve and front seat backrest cover outer tension
straps, are secure and correctly installed to the
front seat frame to allow the air bag to deploy
correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may
Torque: 9 Nm
15.
16.
17.
Installation
1.
Seating - Front Seat Bolster

Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Front Seat Backrest Cover (501-10 Seating, Removal

and Installation).
3.
4.
CAUTION: Make sure that the clips are

correctly located.
NOTE: The procedure must be carried out on both
sides of the seat.
Installation
1.
Seating - Front Seat Bolster Pump

Removal
1.

2.

and Installation).
3.
Installation
1.
Seating - Front Seat Control Switch

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the front seat control switch.

Installation
1.
Install the front seat control switch.

Fit and tighten the Torx screws.
2.

Seating - Front Seat Cushion Cover

Removal
1.
2.

Procedures).
3.

4.
Release the front seat cushion outer trim panel.

5.
Remove the front seat cushion outer trim panel.

6.
7.
Remove the front seat hinge covers.

Remove the hinge cover retainers.

straps.
8.
Remove the front seat cushion assembly.

Release and disconnect the 2 electrical
connectors.
Release the Velcro strap.
9.
10.
Remove the front seat cushion cover.

Using WDS, calibrate a new front seat cushion cover.
Installation
1.
Install the front seat cushion cover.
2.
Secure the front seat cushion assembly.

Secure the Velcro strap.
Attach the clips.
3.
4.
Install the front seat cushion outer trim panel.

5.
Secure the front seat cushion outer trim panel.

6.
Install the front seat hinge covers.

Attach the hinge cover retainers.
7.

8.
Seating - Front Seat Lumbar Motor

Removal
1.

Procedures).
2.

3.

straps.
4.

retaining clips.
5.
6.
Release the front seat lumbar assembly.

Release the 3 electrical connectors.
Remove the clip.
Remove the front seat lumbar assembly.
Installation
1.
Install the front seat lumbar assembly.
2.
Secure the front seat lumbar assembly.

Install the clip.
Secure the electrical connectors.
3.
4.

5.
Install the front seat head reatraint.
6.

www.JagDocs.com
Seating - Front Seat Recliner Motor

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

Procedures).
3.

4.

5.
6.
Remove the front seat hinge cover.

Remove the hinge cover retainer.
Remove the front seat backrest cover.

For additional information, refer to: Front Seat Backrest Cover
(501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
7.
Remove the front seat backrest pad.

8.
9.
Release the front seat lumbar assembly.

Remove the clip.
Remove the front seat lumbar assembly.

10.
Release the front seat recliner motor.

Remove the front seat backrest shaft clip.
Remove the front seat backrest shaft.
11.
Remove the front seat recliner motor.

Drill out the rivet.
Installation
1.
Seating - Rear Seat Armrest

Removal
1.

Installation
1.

Seating - Rear Seat Backrest

Removal
1.
Remove the LH rear seat cushion.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat Cushion (501-10
2.
Repeat the above procedure for the RH seat cushion.
3.
Remove the auxiliary junction box access cover.

Release the clip.
4.

Release from the 2 retainers.
Installation
1.

Secure in the retainers.
2.
Install the auxiliary junction box access cover.

3.
Install the LH rear seat cushion.

4.
Install the RH rear seat cushion.
Seating - Rear Seat Cushion

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the rear seat cushion.

Installation
1.
Install the rear seat cushion.

2.

Seating - Front Seat Backrest Heater Mat

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

Procedures).
3.

4.

straps.
5.
6.

retaining clips.

7.

tension straps.
8.
Remove the front seat backrest heater mat.

Installation
1.
Install the front seat backrest heater mat.
2.

3.

4.
5.

6.

Specifications).
Seating - Front Seat Cushion Heater Mat

Removal
1.
2.

System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General
3.

4.

5.

6.
Remove the front seat hinge covers.

Remove the hinge cover retainers.
7.

straps.
8.
Remove the front seat cushion assembly.

Release and disconnect the 2 electrical
connectors.
Release the Velcro strap.
9.
10.
Remove the front seat cushion cover.

Remove the front seat cushion heater mat.

Carefully release from the seat cushion
pad.
Installation
1.
Install the front seat cushion heater mat.

Secure to the seat cushion pad.
2.
Install the front seat cushion cover.
3.
Secure the front seat cushion assembly.

Secure the Velcro strap.
Attach the clips.
4.
5.
Install the front seat cushion outer trim panel.

6.
Secure the front seat cushion outer trim panel.

7.
Install the front seat hinge covers.

Attach the hinge cover retainers.
8.

9.
Seating - Seat Base

Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
and air bags. Do not for any reason attempt to paint discolored or damaged air bag module trim covers or instrument
1.

Refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00 General
2.

Installation).
3.
Refer to: Front Safety Belt Buckle (501-20A Safety Belt System,
4.
Refer to: Front Seat Cushion Cover (501-10 Seating, Removal

and Installation).
5.
6.
7.
8.

installed.
Torque: 35 Nm
Installation
1.
Seating - Front Seat Track Motor

Removal
1.

Operation).
2.

Installation).
3.
4.
5.
6.
Installation
1.
2.
If a new component has been installed, configure using Jaguar

approved diagnostic equipment.
Seating - Rear Seat Backrest Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat

Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly
1.
Remove the rear outer seat backrest.

For additional information, refer to Rear Outer Seat Backrest - in
this section.
2.
Remove the rear seat head restraint.
3.

Detach the rear seat head restraint retaining post.
4.

Remove the rear seat head restraint retaining post.
5.
Detach the rear seat outer backrest cover.
6.
Detach the rear seat backrest cover and cushion.
7.
Remove the rear seat backrest cover and cushion.

Disconnect the rear seat backrest heater pad
8.
Disconnect the rear seat lumbar support electrical

connector.
9.
Detach the rear seat lumbar support control valve.
10.
Remove the rear seat lumbar support.
11.
Disconnect the rear seat head restraint motor

12.
Remove the rear seat head restraint motor.
Assembly
1.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Torque Specifications
Item
Door glass into clamp - bolt
Door glass regulator motor to door - screw
Door glass regulator to door - nut/bolt
Door glass regulator to door - screw
Rear quarter glass, seal-carrier (coupe) - screw
Rear quarter glass, regulator motor (convertible) - nut
Nm
8
4
8
4
4
9
lb-ft
-
lb-in
71
35
71
35
35
80
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Glass, Frames and Mechanisms

COMPONENT LOCATION - WINDSHIELD AND BACKLIGHT
Item
Part Number
Description
Coupe
Convertible
Rain sensor mounting boss and interior mirror mounting button
Coupe backlight
Convertible backlight
Windshield
COMPONENT LOCATION - DOOR GLASS AND REAR QUARTER GLASS MECHANISMS

NOTE: Convertible shown, coupe similar.
Item
Part Number
Description
Passenger window motor
RH quarter glass assembly (convertible only)
LH quarter glass assembly (convertible only)
Driver window motor
Driver door module
10
INTRODUCTION
The windshield, which is constructed of 5.5 mm laminated glass with a black obscuration band, is bonded and sealed to the
body aperture using Polyurethane (PU) adhesive. The mounting boss for the rain sensor is also PU bonded to the inner
surface of the screen and is common to the coupe and convertible. The mounting button for the interior mirror is attached to
the windshield using adhesive. A vertical fine-wire multi-strand element, located between the glass laminations, is available
as an option, except for North American Specification (NAS) vehicles, to de-ice and demist the windshield and is controlled
from the Touch Screen Display (TSD). The backlight is 4 mm tempered glass, green tinted and heated and bonded to the
liftgate using PU adhesive. The windshield and backlight, except for the convertible model, are direct glazed to the body.
The door glass on both models is a frameless system with 5 mm green tempered glass. Both the driver and passenger
window glass is operated electrically and raised and lowered by a Bowden cable mechanism.
Each door glass automatically drops when the door is opened or when the convertible top is raised or lowered, and raises
when either the door is shut or the top is fully raised and latched in position (glass drops fully on hood operation). The door
glass can be closed via the Smart Key. Glass operation is internally controlled from switch packs located in the driver and
passenger door arm rests via their respective control modules. The switch packs are illuminated when the sidelights are on.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = CAN bus
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
Megafuse (175A)
Megafuse (175A)
Convertible top control module (convertible only)
Passenger door switch
Rear quarter lift motors (convertible only)
10
Convertible top switch (convertible only)
11
Passenger window motor
12
Controller Area Network (CAN) input and output signals to and from various other vehicle
systems
13
Driver window motor
14
Driver door module
15
systems
16
The windshield and coupe backlight are supplied as assemblies complete with trim, which is directly bonded to the glass.
The convertible backlight is high frequency welded to the canopy and the outer seal is stitched and bonded to the top. On
both models, the heated backlight remains on for 21 minutes after being switched on unless it is manually switched off
before the time delay expires.
Front Door Glass Assembly
Item
Part Number
Description
Front door glass
'A' piller guide rail
Window motor
Bowden cables
'B' piller guide rail
One-touch up operation causes the door glass to fully close unless an object is detected ('Anti-trap') or the glass is within 45
mm of top of travel when the door is opened. If the 'Anti-trap' regulator detects an object, the glass will drop fully open or to
200 mm below the obstruction. All door glass operates with the ignition in either 'Accessory' mode or 'On' mode and after the
ignition enters 'Off' mode, until either door is opened.
The front windows must be programmed for one-touch operation in order for the convertible top to operate correctly. Failure
to program the windows results in a 10 second opening delay once the top is unlatched. The windows can be manually
programmed for one-touch operation using the following procedure:
Engine running
Raise window up to the top seal and release switch
Raise again until window stops moving
Release switch
Raise again
Lower window fully
Release switch
Press lower for a further 0.5 seconds until a relay is heard to CLICK
NOTE: Before commencing work within a door interior, all Warnings and Notes within the appropriate Removal and
Installation procedures must be read and fully understood.
To re-learn the glass operating characteristics, the associated door must be closed (door ajar switch inactive). The glass
must then be driven fully down and held stalled at the bottom of its travel for a minimum of 1 second. The glass is finally
driven to the fully up position and held stalled for a minimum of 1 second. The re-learning procedure must also be
accomplished to regain the automatic glass closing sequence.
REAR QUARTER GLASS

The coupe rear quarter glass is a fixed 4 mm, tempered, green-tinted unit fitted by a single bolt fixing on the lower front
corner of the glass assembly, and a pin into the body at the rear.
Convertible Rear Quarter Glass Assembly
Item
Part Number
Description
Convertible rear quarter glass
Base plate
Window motor
4
Lift plate
The rear quarter glass of the convertible is 5 mm, tempered, semi-flush and green tinted. A drum and wire system provides
automatic full glass drop when the top is lowered. Rear glass control is incorporated in the convertible top switch, which is
located in the roof console.
When lowering the rear quarters of the convertible at vehicle speeds up to 24 km/h (15 mph), failure to release the switch
on operation of the audible alarm will result in lowering of the top.
Rear quarter glass is automatically powered to the bottom position when the top is lowered and further operation is inhibited
until the top is raised and latched.
The rear quarters are operated automatically, up or down, when raising or lowering the convertible top. If the door glass is
in the raised position when a request to close the top is made, the door glass and the rear quarters will be powered to the
bottom of their travel. When the top is fully raised all glass will be powered up to close, rear quarters first followed by the
door glass, forming a seal with the top.
If the front glass has been either fully or partially lowered manually, the rear quarters only will be powered up. If the power
supply to the driver or passenger door module is disconnected (battery disconnected, module unplugged or fuse removed)
then the glass/system must re-learn the glass operating characteristics. The last known glass position is regarded as top of
travel by one touch operation until re-learning has taken place. One touch down, manual up and down control and the
automatic lowering of the glass for door opening are unaffected.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Glass, Frames and Mechanisms

For a detailed description of the Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Window glass
Window regulator
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Window motor
Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
Switch
Circuit(s)
3.
4.
If the concern is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
DTC
Description
up
Possible Cause
Actuator stuck open

up

down
Actuator stuck open
Action
Install a new DDM/PDM,
module installation note at
Index
Index
Index
www.JagDocs.com
refer to the new

the top of the DTC
refer to the new
the top of the DTC
refer to the new
the top of the DTC
refer to the new
down
B118929
Front Window
Position Sensor
Signal invalid
B118A29
Rear Window
Position Sensor
Signal invalid
C1B1411
Sensor Supply #1
C1B1415
Sensor Supply #1

communication Bus
with CJB
with Driver Seat
Module (DSM)
U030000
Internal control
module software
incompatibility
U200224
Switch

U201208
Car Configuration
Parameter(s)
U201324
Switch Pack
U201444
Control module
hardware
U210000 Initial configuration

not complete
U300049
Control module

Index
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
LIN circuit between driver switch pack and
DDM for short/open circuits, clear DTC and retest. If DTC remains install a new switch pack.
Signal Invalid

Installation).
Missing Message

Installation).

Installation).
Short to ground
window sensor supply circuit for short to
ground
Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
window sensor supply circuit for short to
Medium speed CAN
communication Bus
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
Missing message
diagnostic system
received
Signal stuck high
Signal stuck high
Installation).
Data Memory Failure
Index

Number (VIN)
Not configured

Number (VIN)
U300362
Battery voltage

Index

Mis-match of battery voltage, of 2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
volts or lower, between DDM/PDM this DTC using the manufacturer approved
and RJB
diagnostic system
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Fixed Window Glass

For a detailed description of the Glass, Frames and Mechanisms and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual.

NOTE: Refer to Section 100-00 General Information for window glass health and safety precautions.
1.
2.
Visually inspect for obvious mechanical faults.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Physical damage to the windshield
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Warranty Repairs
NOTE: The warranty period for the windshield is twelve months with the exception of delamination and electrical faults.
NOTE: Warranty repairs should be completed using genuine parts, in accordance with the Warranty Policy and
Procedures Manual.
1.
Draw a line around the windshield damage using a marker pen.
2.
Photograph the entire windshield. If the damage extends behind any trim, remove the trim and take further
photographs.
3.
Photograph the trademark logo and code to validate the windshield as factory fitment.
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Scratches
Chips
Cracks
Delamination
Possible Cause
Debris trapped under a wiper blade
Foreign object damage
Fouling by trim
Impact damage during assembly
Manufacturing defect
Action
PINPOINT TEST A : SCRATCH TEST

TEST CONDITIONS
A1: IDENTIFY SCRATCH
NOTE: A scratch will usually be regular in shape, following the line of the object that caused it.
Probe using the tip of a pencil to identify a groove in the windshield surface.
1
Is there a groove?
Yes
Windshield scratched. GO to A2.
No
Defect not valid.
A2: CAUSE OF SCRATCH

1
Check for trim, body panels, or foreign objects that may have caused the scratch.
Was the scratch caused by a foreign object?

Yes
The damage is not due to a defect or an assembly error.
No
Rectify as appropriate.
PINPOINT TEST B : CHIP TEST

TEST CONDITIONS
B1: CHIP TEST
NOTE: Impact damage may cause a crack to form.
1
Assess the damage by probing with the tip of a pencil.
Is the damaged area rough (indicating a breach of the windshield surface)?
Yes
Damage caused by the impact of a foreign object. Not a manufacturing defect.
No
Install a new windshield.
PINPOINT TEST C : CRACK TEST

TEST CONDITIONS
C1: IDENTIFY CRACK
NOTE: A crack will be detectable as a step in the glass.
1
Confirm the presence of a crack by probing with the tip of a pencil.
Is the windshield cracked?

Yes
Windshield cracked. GO to C2.
No
Windshield not cracked. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
C2: CAUSE OF CRACK
NOTE: Multiple cracks will radiate out from the source.
1
Assess the source of the crack by probing with the tip of a pencil.
Is there evidence of impact damage being the source of the crack?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST D : DELAMINATION TEST

TEST CONDITIONS
D1: DELAMINATION TEST
1
Visually assess the windshield for delamination.
Have the glass laminates separated?

Yes
No
No further action.
DTC Index
For a complete list of all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section
100-00.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Door Window Motor Initialization

General Procedures
1.
NOTE: After the battery has been disconnected it is necessary to

initialize each door window motor separately to operate the
"one-touch" up function.
Operate the window control switch until the door window glass
is in the fully closed position, continue to operate the window
control switch for a further two seconds.
2.
Release the window control switch.
3.
Operate the window control switch in the closed position and

continue to operate the window control switch for a further two
seconds.
4.
Operate the window control switch until the door window glass
is in the fully open position ("one-touch" down).
5.
NOTE: If the door window motor initialization has been

completed correctly, when the window control switch is
operated, the door window glass should move to the fully closed
position ("one-touch" up) automatically.
NOTE: If the door window glass does not fully close
automatically ("one-touch" up), repeat the complete procedure.
Operate the window control switch once to the close position.
6.
Repeat the door window motor initialization for each door

window motor.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Door Window Glass Adjustment

General Procedures
CAUTION: Protect the surrounding components.

NOTE: Final door glass alignment or adjustment, can be carried out without the need to remove the interior door trim
panel.
1.
Check the alignment of the front door glass.
2.
Open the door.

3.
Remove the 4 screw covers.
4.
NOTE: This step is to align the door window glass

to the nominal position and should be adjusted
from this position to achieve correct seal
engagement.
NOTE: Do not apply excessive torque when the
adjusters are at the end of their travel.
Using a 4mm Allen key, rotate the side adjusters
clockwise until they reach the end of their travel.
From this position, turn the adjuster screws
counter-clockwise for 5 revolutions.
5.
Make sure that the door window glass is aligned

correctly to the seal as illustrated.
If the alignment is incorrect, repeat Step 4
before carrying on with the procedure.
6.
NOTE: The glass must be in the lowered position to

access the adjusters.
NOTE: The glass should have 6mm +/- 2mm
engagement into the upper seal, the glass may not
have equal engagement when the 8mm door to
rear quarter glass is set.
Using a extended 5mm Allen key, rotate the lower
adjusters to adjust the glass height and achieve a
parallel 8mm gap between the rear quarter and
the door.
7.
Install the screw covers.
8.
Check the alignment of the front door glass.
9.
NOTE: For vehicles with convertible top, the door window

function should be checked with the convertible top raised and
lowered, to allow correct operation under all conditions.
When the window glass adjustment is complete the window
motor will need to be calibrated, to do this power the window
fully up and continue to hold the switch for a further 3 seconds.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Door Window Glass

Removal
1.
Raise the window glass.
2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

cable.
7.
Remove the front door window glass.

Collect the clamp and rubber washer.
Installation
1.
Install the front door window glass.

Attach the clamp and rubber washer.
Install the Torx bolts, but do not tighten fully at this
stage.
2.
NOTE: The window must be fully raised when

carrying out measurements.
Align the front door window glass longitudinally.
Position the window, forwards or
rearwards, glass edge should be 44mm
from edge of door as shown in dimension
'A'.
3.
NOTE: To adjust the window hold the locknut and

turn the centre spindle.
Align the front door window glass horizontally.
Release the retaining nut.
Align the glass to door, glass should be
12mm from door as shown in dimension
'B'.
Tighten the retaining nut to 10 Nm (7
lb.ft).
4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Door Window Regulator Motor

Removal
1.
2.

3.

4.

Installation
1.

2.

3.

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Door Window Regulator

Removal
1.
2.

Specifications).
3.

7.
4.

5.

6.

cable.

Release each end of the seal from the door frame.
8.
9.
Remove the front door window glass.

Collect the clamp and rubber washer.
Remove the window regulator assembly.

Release the rubber lining from the glass channel.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the nut.
Installation
1.
Install the window regulator assembly.

Install the rubber lining to the glass channel.
2.
Install the front door window glass.

Attach the clamp and rubber washer.
stage.
3.

4.
NOTE: The window must be fully raised when

carrying out measurements.
Align the front door window glass longitudinally.
Position the window, forwards or
rearwards, glass edge should be 44mm
from edge of door as shown in dimension
'A'.
5.
NOTE: To adjust the window hold the locknut and

turn the centre spindle.
Align the front door window glass horizontally.
Release the retaining nut.
Align the glass to door, glass should be
12mm from door as shown in dimension
'B'.
Tighten the retaining nut to 10 Nm (7
lb.ft).
6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Specifications).
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Window Control Switch

Removal
1.
Remove the grab handle cover.

2.
Remove the window control switch.

Installation
1.
Install the window control switch.

2.
Install the grab handle cover.

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Quarter Window

Glass Convertible
Removal
NOTE: The procedure to remove and install the rear quarter window glass is shown in the rear quarter window regulator
motor procedure.
1.
Remove the rear quarter window glass.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Window
Regulator Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
Installation
1.
Install the rear quarter window glass.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Window
Regulator Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Windshield Glass

Removal
CAUTIONS:
Always protect paintwork and glass when removing exterior components.
Always protect the interior components when removing body glass.
Lay the glass on felt covered supports. Do not stand on edge as this can cause chips which subsequently develop
into cracks.
NOTE: The following equipment is required: l Cutting wire and handles l Kent knife l Glazing knife l Windshield
replacement kit l Sealant applicator gun l Suction cups l A felt covered table or stand to support glass
1.

For additional information, refer to: Cowl Vent Screen (501-02
Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
2.
Remove both A-pillar trim panels.

3.

Disconnect the heated windshield electrical
connectors.
4.
Remove the rain sensor.

For additional information, refer to: Rain Sensor (501-16 Wipers
and Washers, Removal and Installation).
5.
WARNING: Eye protection must be worn.
CAUTION: The two shaded areas in the

graphic indicate the position of a body patch, that
covers a body joint. Take care not to trap the
cutting tool in the body joint.
With assistance, remove the windshield glass.
Carefully cut through the sealant using a
glazing knife or cutting wire.
Attach the suction cups.
Installation
1.
Carefully remove the sealant from the body to leave a smooth

surface.
2.
Install the windshield glass.

Use masking tape to establish reference
marks as an alignment aid.
3.
Remove the windshield glass.

4.
Apply etch primer to any bare metal.
5.
Apply primer over the etch primer.
6.
Apply glass primer to the sealant face on the windshield glass

and allow to cure.
7.
Apply activator over the old sealant on the windshield glass and
allow to cure.
8.
Fit a pre-cut nozzle to the sealer cartridge, remove the lid,

shake out the crystals and fit the cartridge to the applicator gun.
Modify the nozzle to achieve a bead section in the shape
of a right angle triangle with a base of 8 mm and a
vertical height of 12 mm.
9.
Apply a continuous bead of sealant to the

windshield glass as shown.
10.
With assistance, install the window glass.

Lightly press the window glass to seat the sealer.
11.
Test the sealer for leaks, apply additional sealer if necessary. If

water is used, allow sealer to dry before testing. Spray water
around the glass and check for leaks. Mark any area that leaks.
Dry the glass and sealer then apply additional sealer.
12.
Install the rain sensor.

For additional information, refer to: Rain Sensor (501-16 Wipers
and Washers, Removal and Installation).
13.
Connect the heated windshield electrical connectors.
14.
Install the A-pillar trim panels.

15.

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Windshield Glass

Removal
1.
2.
Refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

3.
Refer to: Rain Sensor (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal

and Installation).
4.
Remove the polyurethane (PU) adhesive cap
and heat the PU adhesive for a minimum of

30 minutes.
5.
6.
CAUTIONS:
Protect the surrounding components.
Protect the surrounding paintwork to avoid

damage.
7.
WARNING: This step requires the aid of

another technician.
Installation
1.

Prepare the window glass, window glass
flange and trimmed PU adhesive in

accordance with the instructions included
with the PU adhesive kit.
2.
CAUTION: Touching the adhesive surface will

impair rebonding.
3.
CAUTION: Make sure that no excess sealant

residue is evident.
If water is used as a means for the leak
check, then allow sealant to dry before

testing.
Spray water around the windshield glass,
mark any area that leaks. Dry the
windshield glass and sealant before
applying additional sealant.
4.
5.
Refer to: Rain Sensor (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal

and Installation).
6.
Refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

7.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Quarter Window Glass 2-Door

Removal
1.
Release the door aperture seal.

2.

Remove the bolt.
Installation
1.

2.
Attach the door aperture seal.

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Quarter Window Regulator

Motor
Removal
1.
Remove the rear quarter trim panels.

and Installation).
2.
Close the convertible top to the position shown.
3.
4.
Remove the safety belt retractor assembly.

5.
Release the rear speaker housing.

6.
Remove the rear speaker housing.

Remove the 6 bolts.
7.
Remove the safety belt guide.

Loosen the Torx bolt.
8.
9.
10.

body.
Remove the rear quarter window glass inner seal.

NOTE: Convertible top frame assembly show

removed for clarity.
Remove the rear quarter closing panel.
11.
Remove the rear quarter window glass motor

cover.
12.
CAUTION: Make sure rear quarter is covered

and protected, failure to follow this instruction may
Remove the rear quarter window glass motor.
Remove the 3 nuts.
13.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the nut.
Installation
1.

2.
CAUTION: Make sure rear quarter is covered and

protected, failure to follow this instruction may result in damage
to the vehicle.
Install the rear quarter window glass motor.
Install the nuts but do not fully tighten at this stage.
3.
Install the rear quarter window glass motor cover.

Tighten the screws.
4.
Install the rear quarter closing panel.

5.
Install the rear quarter window glass inner seal.

6.

7.
Install the safety belt guide.

8.
Install the rear speaker housing.

9.
Secure the wiring harness.

Secure the electrical connectors.
10.
Install the safety belt retractor assembly.

Install a new Torx bolt and tighten to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).
11.

12.
Raise the rear quarter glass and check seal penetration.
13.
16.
Carefully close the adjacent door ensuring that the glass does
not contact the rear quarter glass.
14.
Loosen the lower adjuster locknut.
15.
Move the rear quarter glass to achieve a parallel

8mm gap, between the front edge of the rear
quarter glass and rear edge of the door glass.
Tighten the lower adjuster locknut to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).

17.
Loosen the upper adjuster locknut.
18.
19.
Turn the upper adjuster to achieve, lateral alignment of the rear

quarter glass upper edge, with the top seal.
Tighten the upper adjuster locknut to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).

20.
Loosen the rear adjuster locknut.
21.
Turn the rear adjuster to achieve, lateral alignment of the rear

quarter glass rear edge, with the top seal.
22.
Tighten the rear adjuster locknut to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).
23.
Install the rear quarter trim panels.

and Installation).
Instrument Panel and Console Torque Specifications
Item
Armrest to console - screw
Center console installation fixing points - screw
Centre console, side trim panel to console - screw
Instrument panel to A-post - bolt
Instrument panel upper retainers - bolt
Instrument panel bracket to console - bolt
Nm
6
6
6
20
20
9
lb-ft
4
4
4
15
15
7
lb-in
53
53
53
80
Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Instrument panel end cap
Passenger airbag
Cross car beam
Instrument panel end cap
Energy absorbing brackets (2 off)
Floor console
INTRODUCTION
The instrument panel incorporates a magnesium cross car beam and 2 deformable, energy absorbing brackets. The brackets
are rivetted to the cross car beam and are not serviceable items.
The instrument panel electrical harness is mounted along the cross car beam and connects into the main vehicle harness via
4 connectors, 2 located either end of the instrument panel. To access the connectors the instrument panel end covers can be
removed by releasing a series of spring clips.
A further 3 connectors, located below the instrument panel, are used to connect the instrument panel harness to the Left
Hand (LH) and Right Hand (RH) front end harnesses. Finally, 2 connectors located below the floor console connect the
instrument panel harness to the telematics harness.
The floor console provides a location for the selector lever and the parking brake module. The floor console is secured to the
transmission tunnel and to the cross car beam by a series of M6 bolts and trim fixings. The floor console electrical harness
connects into the telematics harness via a single connector.
Instrument Panel and Console - Floor Console

Removal
1.

2.
Refer to: Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (307-05 Automatic

3.
4.
5.
Torque: 5 Nm
6.
7.
8.
Torque: 3 Nm
9.
Torque: 2 Nm
10.
Torque: 5 Nm
11.
Torque: 5 Nm
12.
13.
14.
15.
Torque: 2 Nm
Torque: 2 Nm
16.

Torque: 3 Nm
Installation
1.
Instrument Panel and Console - Floor Console Finish Panel

Removal
1.

avoid damage.
2.

avoid damage.
Installation
1.
Instrument Panel and Console - Glove Compartment

Removal
1.
Remove the instrument panel end trim panel.

2.

Remove the 3 clips.
3.
Release the glove compartment.

4.
Remove the glove compartment.

Release the glove compartment lamp
assembly.
Installation
1.
Install the glove compartment.

Install the lamp assembly.
2.

3.
Install the instrument panel end trim panel.

Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel

Removal
1.

Procedures).
2.
Remove the floor console.

3.
Remove both cowl side trim panels.

LH side only: Remove the screw and
remove hood release lever.
Release the leading edge of the scuff plate.
4.

Open the front door for access.
opposite hand.
5.
Remove both instrument panel support brackets.

Remove the self-tapping hexagonal screw
from the instrument panel carrier.
Remove the 2 bolts.
opposite hand.
6.
Disconnect the instrument panel harness ground

cable.
Remove the nut.
7.
Disconnect the 4 instrument panel LH side

electrical connectors.
8.
Disconnect the 3 instrument panel RH side

9.
12.
Release the instrument panel electrical harness

from the RH side of the transmission tunnel.
Remove the nut and disconnect the ground
cable.
Remove and discard the 2 cable ties.
10.
Disconnect the steering column intermediate shaft

from the steering column.
Remove the bolt.
11.
Carefully remove the instrument panel windshield

register trim.
opposite hand.
Remove the 2 instrument panel carrier bolts, accessed through

the upper trim panel.
13.
CAUTIONS:
Protect the surrounding trim from damage

when changing the component.
Cover fiber optic cable connectors to

minimize dust ingress and avoid bending the
cables in a radius of less than 30 mm.
Remove the 4 A-pillar instrument panel
carrier bolts.
With assistance, release and remove.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Make sure the the electrical harness is not

trapped during the installation.
With assistance, install the instrument panel assembly.
Align the pegs and install the bolts.
Evenly and progressively tighten the bolts to 20 Nm (15
lb.ft).
2.
CAUTION: Make sure that the self tapping screw engages

in the previously cut groove. Damage to the instrument panel
carrier may result if this process is not followed.
Install the instrument panel carrier bolts, access through the
upper trim panel.
3.
Install the instrument panel windshield register trim.

Repeat the above procedure on the opposite hand.
4.
Connect the instrument panel RH electrical connections
5.
Connect the instrument panel LH side electrical connectors.
6.
Install the instrument panel electrical harness to the RH side of

the transmission tunnel.
Install the ground cable.
Install new cable ties.
7.
Connect the steering column intermediate shaft to the steering

column.
8.
Install the instrument panel harness ground cable.

9.
CAUTION: Make sure that the self tapping screw engages

in the previously cut groove. Damage to the instrument panel
carrier may result if this process is not followed.
Install both instrument panel support brackets.
Tighten the self-tapping hexagonal headed screw to 9
Nm (7 lb.ft).
10.

Repeat the above procedure on the opposite hand.
11.
Install the cowl side trim panels.

Install the rocker panel scuff plate.
LH side only: Install the hood release lever and secure
with the screw.
12.
Install the floor console.

13.
Reconnect the battery ground cable.

Procedures).
Instrument Panel and Console - Overhead Console

Removal
1.
Remove the front overhead console.

Installation
1.
Install the front overhead console.

Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel

Removal
1.

Open the front door for access.
2.

3.

Carefully release and remove the rheostat switch
assembly.
4.

5.
6.
Release the MOST diagnostic port.


Release the vehicle diagnostic port.
Installation
1.
Install the rheostat switch assembly and align the instrument

panel lower trim panel.
Secure the switch assembly clips.
Connect the switch assembly electrical connector.
2.

Install and secure the diagnostic socket.
Align the clips.
3.
Install the MOST diagnostic port.

Secure the clip.
4.

5.

panel.
6.

Instrument Panel and Console - Overhead Console Switch Moulding

Removal
1.
Remove the overhead console.

For additional information, refer to: Overhead Console (501-12
2.
NOTE: Where installed.

Remove the front intrusion sensor.
3.
NOTE: Where installed.

Remove the garage door opener module.
4.
CAUTION: Make sure that only the head of

the fixing is removed. Do not drill any deeper than
necessary. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the component.
Remove the printed circuit board (PCB) cover.
Using a 5mm drill bit, carefully drill out and
remove the 4 plastic fixing heads.
5.
Remove the PCB.
6.
Remove the two switch mouldings.
7.
Remove the foam pad.
8.
Carefully remove sunroof rocker switch for reuse in

the new rear switch moulding.
Installation
1.
Select the correct switch moulding for the vehicle from the parts
kit.
2.
Remove any unnecessary switch buttons from the rear moulding

using a suitable sharp knife. Take care not to remove any
required switches.
3.
Install the sunroof rocker switch.
4.
Install the front switch moulding.
5.
Install the foam pad.
6.
Install the rear switch moulding.
7.
Install the PCB.

8.
Install the cover.

Tighten to 1.5 Nm.
9.
Install the garage door opener module.
10.
Install the front intrusion sensor.
11.
Install the overhead console.

For additional information, refer to: Overhead Console (501-12
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Torque Specifications
Item
Door, exterior handle bezel - screw
Door lock cylinder - screw
Door lock actuator to door rear panel - screw
Door striker to B-post - screw
Hood release mechanism to A-post - bolt
Hood release handle to mechanism
Luggage compartment lid, latch actuator to lid - screw
Luggage compartment lid, lock cylinder - screw
Luggage compartment lid, striker to back panel - screw
Liftgate, latch actuator to lid - screw
Liftgate, lock cylinder - screw
Liftgate, striker to back panel - screw
Nm
6
6
7
9
9
3
20
3
25
20
3
25
lb-ft
15
18
15
18
lb-in
53
53
62
80
80
27
26
26
-
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems
COMPONENT LOCATION - CENTRAL LOCKING SYSTEM (Sheet 1 of 2)
Item
Part Number
Start/Stop button
Right Hand (RH) door handle keyless LF antenna (only with passive entry option fitted)
Central locking RF receiver
LF antenna (located on battery bracket)
LF antenna (located in rear bumper - only with passive entry option fitted)
Left Hand (LH) door handle keyless LF antenna (only with passive entry option fitted)
LF antenna (center console)
LF antenna (instrument panel)
Smart Key
10
11
Description
COMPONENT LOCATION - CENTRAL LOCKING SYSTEM (Sheet 2 of 2)
Item
Part Number
Electric steering column lock
Fuel flap release switch
Liftgate release switch
RH interior door handle
RH exterior door handle
RH door latch and motor
Fuel flap release motor
Liftgate emergency key barrel
Liftgate external release switch
10
Liftgate latch and motor
11
Door emergency key barrel (LH door only)
Description
LH exterior door handle
12
-
LH door latch and motor
14
13
LH interior door handle
15
Hood release lever
16
Hood latches and hood ajar switch
INTRODUCTION
The hinged panels are secured with latches and strikers. A remotely operated Central Locking System (CLS) controls the
locking and unlocking of the door latches.
Two levels of CLS are available; remote central locking and an optional passive entry system.
CENTRAL LOCKING SYSTEM (CLS)

A Radio Frequency (RF) Smart Key, without an integrated key, is a standard fitment allowing the vehicle to be locked and
unlocked by pressing the appropriate handset buttons. The Smart Key is available in three variants depending on market
requirements. These can be identified by a suffix change to the base part number as follows:
AA = 315 MHz
BA = 433 MHz
CA = 315 MHz Low power.
A new Passive Entry and Passive Start system is introduced. This system allows the driver to unlock and start the vehicle
without using a vehicle key in a door lock or ignition switch. The passive entry system is an optional fitment. The passive
start system is a standard fitment on all vehicles and allows the driver to start the vehicle without the use of a vehicle key.
The system is combined with the passive anti-theft immobilization system.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Theft - Passive (419-01B Anti-Theft - Passive, Description and Operation).
Emergency access to the vehicle is provided by a concealed key barrel located in the LH door handle only and in the liftgate.
An emergency, removable key is fitted into the Smart Key. Operation of either key barrel unlocks the vehicle but does not
disarm the alarm system. On European market vehicles, the emergency liftgate key barrel is concealed behind the license
plate. The key barrel in the LH door is covered by a plastic cover which can be removed by inserting the blade of the
emergency key into a slot in the underside of the cover.
The vehicle can be centrally locked and unlocked using the emergency key barrel. If the alarm is not armed the vehicle can
be centrally unlocked. If the alarm is armed only the LH door can be opened using the emergency key and the alarm will be
triggered. The vehicle cannot be double locked or the alarm system armed using the emergency key.
The vehicle can be centrally locked and unlocked from inside using the interior door handle release levers. Central locking
and unlocking can also be performed using lock and unlock buttons on the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
The driver can select locking options, single point entry or drive away locking for example, from a menu available on the
TSD.
Central Locking - RF Remote System

The RF CLS provides locking and unlocking of the vehicle from inside and outside of the vehicle. The system provides
additional security by double locking the doors and liftgate from outside the vehicle.
The system is operated using buttons on the Smart Key. RF signals from the Smart Key are received by a RF receiver located
in the overhead console, above the windshield. The RF receiver is available in two variants depending on market
requirements. These can identified by a suffix change to the base part number as follows:
AA = 315 MHz
BA = 433 MHz.
Additional buttons on the Smart Key provide for the convenience operation of the liftgate release, headlamp delay and panic
alarm functions. A global open or close feature is also available in certain markets using the lock/unlock buttons.
Passive Start
The passive start system, which is standard on all vehicles, uses the Smart Key as a driver identification and authorisation
device. The system is controlled by a keyless vehicle module located on the RH 'A' pillar. Three Low Frequency (LF) antennae
(six if passive entry option is fitted) are positioned in specific locations in the vehicle and transmit a LF signal to the Smart
Key.
On receipt of the LF signals, the Smart Key transmits a RF signal which is received by the remote receiver. Once the keyless
vehicle module has approved the Smart Key, the ignition status is changed to 'accessory' by the Central Junction Box (CJB).
The ignition can be switched on by pressing the 'start/stop' button, located in the center console. Starting of the vehicle is
achieved by simultaneously depressing the brake pedal and pressing the 'start/stop' button. The engine can be switched off
by pressing the start/stop button for a second time.
NOTE: The Smart Key does not need to be in the vicinity of the vehicle to switch the engine off.
In the event that the passive start system is unable to authorize the Smart Key, a start control unit is located in the center
armrest. The start control unit allows the Smart Key to be inserted into a slot and allows the Smart Key transponder data to
be exchanged in a conventional manner. Once the transponder data is authorized, the CJB permits the ignition to be
switched on.
Passive Entry
On vehicles fitted with the optional passive entry system, the vehicle can be unlocked without the use of a key or pressing
buttons on the Smart Key. The Smart Key operates for the passive entry system in addition to the passive start system.
The passive entry system is controlled by the keyless vehicle module and the six LF antennae. When the Smart Key is within
one meter of the vehicle it receives the LF signals from the keyless vehicle module and the LF antennae and responds with
an RF transmission of its authorization code. The RF signal is received by the RF receiver and passed to the keyless vehicle
module which checks and approves the code as valid. The keyless vehicle module transmits this information to the CJB. The
CJB then passes an unlock request to the door modules. When a door handle is pulled or the exterior liftgate release button
is pressed, the applicable door module will allow the doors or the liftgate to be unlocked and opened.
Locking of the vehicle is performed by pressing a button located on each exterior door handle with the Smart Key within a
one meter range of the vehicle. When the button is pressed, the Smart Key transmits a RF signal which is verified by the
keyless vehicle module and allows the doors to be locked or double locked and the alarm system to be armed.
To double lock the vehicle, the button on the exterior door handle must be pressed twice within three seconds with the
Smart Key in a one meter range of the vehicle.
If a door, liftgate or hood is ajar when an attempt to lock the vehicle is made, an error tone is emitted and the ajar panel will
not lock.
LATCHES
Two hood latches are located on the bulkhead, below the windscreen. A hood release lever is located below the instrument
panel on the LH 'A' pillar and is connected with a Bowden cable to the latches. A hood ajar switch is integrated in the LH
hood latch.
The door latches are located at the rear of each door and engage with a striker on the 'B' pillar. Each door latch motor
assembly contains microswitches for lock and unlock and door ajar. Two motors provide for the central door locking and the
double locking feature. The electrical control for the door latch components is provided by the CJB and auxiliary junction box
via the driver's and passenger door modules.
The interior door handles are connected by a cable to the latch release mechanisms. The interior door handles also
incorporate a locking facility to allow the doors to be locked from inside the vehicle, when the doors are closed and activate
the central locking system. If a door is ajar the locking feature is inhibited.
The liftgate latch is attached to the bottom of the liftgate. The latch can be released electrically by pressing the interior
release button located in the auxiliary lighting switch, the exterior release button located in the licence plate finisher or the
liftgate release button on the Smart Key. On North American Specification (NAS) vehicles an emergency release cable is
attached to the latch. This allows the latch to be manually opened by pulling a handle located in the liftgate interior trim.
The fuel filler is electrically locked by a motor located on the fuel flap housing. The flap is locked when the vehicle is locked
and alarmed and can be released by pressing the fuel flap release switch located in the auxiliary lighting switch.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PASSIVE ENTRY SYSTEM

NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item
Part Number
Battery
Megafuse (175A)
Megafuse (175A)
CJB
Start/Stop switch
Stop lamp switch
Description
7
-
Instrument cluster
LF antenna ( LH exterior door handle - only with passive entry option fitted)
10
Unlock pull switch
11
Lock push switch
12
LH Door handle, latch motor and clutch
13
RH door handle, latch motor and clutch
14
Lock push switch
15
Unlock pull switch
16
LF antenna (RH exterior door handle - only with passive entry option fitted)
17
LF antenna (rear bumper - only with passive entry option fitted)
18
LF antenna (battery bracket)
19
LF antenna (center console)
20
LF antenna (Instrument panel)
21
RF remote receiver
22
Exterior liftgate release switch
23
24
CONTROL DIAGRAM - CENTRAL LOCKING SYSTEM

NOTE: A = Hardwired
Item
Part Number
Battery
Megafuse (175A)
Megafuse (175A)
CJB
LH door handle pull switch
LH door latch motor assembly
Description
Liftgate external release switch
7
-
LH door module
Fuel flap motor
10
Liftgate motor assembly
11
RH door latch motor assembly
12
RH door handle pull switch
13
RH door module
14
Auxiliary lighting switch (Liftgate and fuel flap release switches)
15
Instrument cluster
16
17
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems DTC: With
For a detailed description of handles, locks, latches and entry systems, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Description
and Operation).

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Misaligned door(s), hood or luggage compartment lid
Door latch(s)
Actuating rod(s)
Exterior door handle(s)
Interior door handle(s)
Door lock cylinder
Cable(s)
Luggage compartment lid exterior release switch
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Wiring harness
Door lock actuator(s)
Remote transmitter batteries
Vehicle battery
Remote transmitter
Door lock switch(s)
3.
4.
DTC Index
DTC
B10C100
Description
FL unlock pull
switch defect
B10C124
FL unlock pull
switch error
Possible Cause
Action
Carry out any pinpoint tests
DTC using the manufacturer
system
Signal stuck high - button stuck Carry out any pinpoint tests
in active position
No subtype information
associated with this

approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
B10C300
FR unlock pull
switch defect
B10C324
FR unlock pull
switch error
Signal stuck high - button stuck
TR unlock pull
switch error
Exterior Trunk
Antenna - general
electrical error
Interior Trunk
Antenna - general
electrical error
Interior Center
Antenna - general
electrical error
Interior Front
Antenna - general
electrical error
FL Latch Switch
Clutch error
Circuit intermittent
B10C524
B10C61F
B10C71F
B10C81F
B10C91F
B10CC24
B10CE24
FR Latch Switch
Clutch error
B10D124 FL lock button error
in active position
in active position
in active position
in active position
in active position
B10D324
FR lock button
error

communication Bus
U014000
U014200
U015500
U030000
U201F00
U201F13
U201F87
U210000
U210100
U300049
Lost
communication
with CJB
Lost
communication
with RJB
Lost
communication
with instrument
cluster
Internal control
module software
incompatibility
in active position
Missing message
Missing message
Missing message
Invalid configuration message
is received
Receiver
communication
error
Receiver
communication
error
Receiver
communication
error
Control
Module/ECU not
configured
Control
Module/ECU
unexpected data
values
Control module
Transmission error
Line open
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
system
system

approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic
approved diagnostic

retest. If the DTC is still logged suspect the
remote keyless entry module, refer to the new
Index
Install a new RF receiver, refer to the new
module/component installation note at top of DTC
Index
RF receiver communication circuit to remote
keyless entry module for short to ground or open
circuit
system
Configure the Remote Keyless Entry module
system
Install a new remote keyless entry module, refer
U300281
Vehicle
Identification
Number (VIN)
U300362
Battery voltage
to the new module installation note at the top of

the DTC Index
Vehicle/component mis-match. Install original module, check for DTCs and refer
Mis-match of battery voltage, of Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
2 volts or lower, between
remote keyless entry module
system
and RJB
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems
For a detailed description of the locks, latches and entry systems and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems)
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (Description and Operation),
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (Description and Operation),
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (Description and Operation).
vehicle
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
1.
Verify the customer concern, to be sure the correct issue is investigated
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Incorrectly aligned door(s), hood or tailgate
Fuel filler door lock actuator
Hood release handle
Hood release cables
Hood latch(es)
Exterior door handle(s)
Interior door handle(s)
Cable(s)
Tailgate release switch
Rear window release switch
Electrical
Fuses
Wiring harness
Wiring connector(s)
Door lock actuator(s)
Remote transmitter (key-fob or smart key)
Central locking switches
Controller Area Network (CAN) circuits
Radio frequency (RF) receiver
Central junction box (CJB)
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index
Symptom Chart
NOTE: Complete the diagnostic steps below to confirm any concern prior to replacing any component
Symptom
The message center indicates that
the hood, the luggage
compartment is open when it
appears to be closed
Vehicle indicates a miss-lock when
the hood, luggage compartment
appear to be closed
Fuel flap does not lock/unlock
Possible causes
Incorrect striker
alignment/adjustment
Ajar switch circuit short circuit to
ground
Ajar switch failure
Fuel flap cable detached from
body
Fuel flap actuator detached from
mounting bracket
Fuel flap actuator disconnected
Fuel flap actuator failure
Action
Check/adjust the strikers as
necessary
Check for DTCs indicating an ajar
switch fault. Refer to the DTC

index
Check the condition and

installation of the fuel flap cable
Check the security of the fuel flap
actuator and bracket
Check the security of the actuator
electrical connector
Check for DTCs indicating a fuel
flap actuator fault. Refer to the
DTC index
Door(s) will not unlatch/open when

using outside door handle
Door(s) will not unlatch/open when

using inside door handle
Exterior door handle
condition/installation
Exterior release cable
disconnected from exterior door
handle or door latch
Child lock(s) engaged

Interior door handle
condition/installation
Interior release cable
disconnected from interior door

handle or door latch
Door(s) will not lock/unlock from

key fob, key or internal lock switch
Wiring harness/connectors
Door lock switch
Cable fault
Door ajar or miss lock signal at

message centre when door(s) are
closed or alarm triggering
Wiring harness
Instrument cluster
Incorrect striker
Check the exterior door handle
condition and installation

Check the condition and security
of the exterior release cable

Single door will not open from
the outside (but opens from

the inside) GO to Pinpoint Test
A.
Check that the child locks are
disengaged
Check the interior door handle
condition and installation
Check the condition and security
of the interior release cable
Single Door Will Not Open
From The Inside (but opens
from the outside) GO to
Pinpoint Test B.
Check for relevant stored DTCs
Once any DTC related faults have
been rectified continue with the
diagnostic steps below
No lock / unlock function from
key-fob GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Latch Mounted Door Ajar
Switch Test GO to Pinpoint Test
D.
alignment/adjustment
Ajar switch circuit short circuit to
ground
Ajar switch failure
DTC Index
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and Testing).
Pinpoint Test
PINPOINT TEST A : SINGLE DOOR WILL NOT OPEN FROM THE OUTSIDE (BUT OPENS FROM THE
INSIDE)
TEST CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE EXTERIOR DOOR RELEASE CABLE TO EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Remove the door trim panel as necessary
1
REFER to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05, Removal
and Installation) /
Rear Door Trim Panel (501-05, Removal and
Installation).
Confirm the exterior door release cable is correctly

installed to the exterior door handle
Is the cable correctly installed?

Yes
GO to A2.
No
Connect the door release cable correctly. If the cable
is damaged, install a new door release cable. Test
the system for normal operation
A2: CHECK THE EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE RELEASE CONNECTION TO THE DOOR LATCH
1
Confirm the exterior door handle release connection to
the door latch is installed correctly
Is the exterior door handle release cable installed correctly?

Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST B : SINGLE DOOR WILL NOT OPEN FROM THE INSIDE (BUT OPENS FROM THE
OUTSIDE)
TEST CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK THE INTERIOR DOOR RELEASE CABLE TO INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
NOTE: Figure A - Child lock off position shown
1
Make sure the child lock is disengaged (rear door

only)

and Installation) /
Installation).
Confirm the interior door release cable is correctly

installed to the interior door handle
Is the cable correctly installed?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
B2: CHECK THE INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE RELEASE CONNECTION TO THE DOOR LATCH
Confirm the interior door handle release connection to
1
the door latch is installed correctly
Is the interior door handle release cable installed correctly?

Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : DOOR LATCHING AND LOCKING FUNCTION TEST

TEST CONDITIONS
C1: HARNESS CONNECTION
NOTE: Test as a single component to ensure that the door latch is not replaced unnecessarily, when another
component may be at fault
1
and Installation) /

Installation).
Disconnect harness from latch, check for corrosion or
damage to both connectors at socket points and pins.
Re-connect harness ensuring robust assembly when
all parts confirmed to be in good order. If harness or
latch connectors are damaged, install new
harness/latch as necessary. Test the system for
normal operation
Check for normal operation, does latch function correctly?

Yes
Re-assemble door trim and test for normal operation
No
GO to C2.
C2: LOCK COMMAND SIGNAL FROM VEHICLE HARNESS
Close all vehicle doors apart from door being
1
investigated, please note which door, left side or right
side is under investigation
Disconnect harness from latch to enable access to

socket points to carry-out conductivity testing as
detailed
Monitor the circuit for momentary power when locking
3
the vehicle via the key-fob or smart key between
terminals 1 and 10 left side or 8 and 10 right side
Is there momentary power (for approx 8 seconds) between
terminals 1 and 10 left side or 8 and 10 right side
when locking the vehicle via the key-fob or smart key
Yes
The vehicle electrical system is locking correctly,
providing the signal to the latch GO to C3.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and investigate
why vehicle electrical system is not providing signals
to the latch. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system check for logged DTCs to localize
the fault
C3: UNLOCK COMMAND SIGNAL FROM VEHICLE HARNESS
1
Monitor the circuit for momentary power when
unlocking the vehicle via the key-fob or smart key
between terminals 1 and 9 left side or 8 and 9 right
side
2
Is there momentary power (for approx 8 seconds) between

terminals 1 and 9 left side and 8 and 9 right side when
unlocking the vehicle via the key-fob or smart key?

Yes
The vehicle electrical system is unlocking correctly,
providing the signal to the latch GO to C4.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and investigate
why vehicle electrical system is not providing signals
to the latch. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system check for logged DTCs to localize
the fault
C4: PHYSICAL TEST 1
1
Remove latch module from door

REFER to: Front Door Latch (501-14, Removal and
Installation) /
Rear Door Latch (501-14, Removal and Installation).
Inspect latch module for any visual damage
With the latch in hand, connect the electrical

connector(s) to connect door latch to door harness
NOTE: THE LATCH IS NOW READY TO TEST
3
Close all vehicle doors except the door being

investigated
NOTE: Figure 1 - Unlatched position shown
4
NOTE: Figure 2 - First safety latched position shown

NOTE: Figure 3 - Fully latched position shown
NOTE: Test will not work if latch is only in first safety latch
position
5
Rotate latch claw (using a small screw driver or

similar), to the fully latched position (figure 3)
NOTE: Unlocked position shown

6
Confirm that the latch interior release lever is in the

unlocked position as shown
NOTE: Locked position shown

7
Press the lock button on the key-fob or smart key
Does the latch interior release lever move from the

unlocked position to the locked position?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
If this is a repeat test and the vehicle electrical test
section has been completed and confirmed that
vehicle is working correctly, then replace the door
latch. If replacing latch as part of a warranty claim,
please quote reference code LKINOP in the technician
comments section of the warranty claim
C5: PHYSICAL TEST 2
1
With the latch in the locked state (i.e. the latch

interior release lever is in the locked position), press
the key-fob or smart key unlock button
Does the latch interior release lever move from the locked
position to the unlocked position?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
If this is a repeat test and the vehicle electrical test
section has been completed and confirmed that
vehicle is working correctly, then replace the door
latch. If replacing latch as part of a warranty claim,
please quote reference code LKINOP in the technician
comments section of the warranty claim
C6: PHYSICAL TEST 3
NOTE: Fully latched position shown
1
With the latch in its unlocked state, push the latch

exterior release lever against its return spring, whilst
simultaneously applying a light pressure to release the
latch claw using a small screw driver or similar
Does the latch claw release?

Yes
GO to C7.
No
Repeat tests C5 and C6 to confirm the fault GO to C5.
If the repeat test has confirmed that the exterior
release lever will not release the claw on an unlocked
latch replace the door latch. If replacing latch as part
of a warranty claim, please quote reference code
EXTINOP in the technician comments section of the
warranty claim
C7: PHYSICAL TEST 4
NOTE: Fully latched position shown
Using a small screw driver or similar, rotate latch claw

to the second fully latched position
NOTE: Figure A - Child lock off position shown

2
If testing a rear door latch, ensure that the child lock

is turned to the off position

3
Confirm that the latch interior release lever is in the

unlocked position as shown
Whilst the latch is still in its unlocked state, push the

latch interior release lever against its return spring,
whilst simultaneously applying a light pressure to
release the latch claw using a small screw driver or
similar
Does the latch claw release?

Yes
Latch has passed all tests to confirm its correct
function. DO NOT REPLACE LATCH as part of any
attempts to resolve any locking functionality issues
No
Repeat test GO to C7. If repeat test has confirmed
that the interior release lever will not release the claw
when the latch is in the unlocked state, then replace
the latch. If replacing latch as part of a warranty
claim, please quote reference code INTINOP in the
technician comments section of the warranty claim
PINPOINT TEST D : LATCH MOUNTED DOOR AJAR SWITCH TEST

TEST CONDITIONS
D1: TEST 4 DOOR LATCH
NOTE: If a customer is complaining of issues relating to a door ajar signal e.g. door latch wont lock, or alarm system
triggering (indicated via DTCs), there may be several components that generate the fault, including
Body wiring harness / connectors
Door wiring harness / connectors
Alarm control module
Door Latch ajar switch
NOTE: To investigate the functioning of the door ajar switch contained within the door latch, to prove or eliminate the
door latch mounted door ajar switch as the root cause, follow the process below. This will prevent the unnecessary
replacement of a correctly functioning door latch
1
Remove door trim from door
and Installation) /
Installation).
Disconnect door harness from latch for access to
2
connector pins for latch electrical testing
Inspect latch module for any visual damage
3
NOTE: Figure 1 - Unlatched position shown

NOTE: Figure 2 - First safety latched position shown
NOTE: Figure 3 - Fully latched position shown
NOTE: Test will not work if latch is only in first safety
latch position
4
Using a small screw driver or similar, rotate latch claw

to the second fully latched position (figure 3)
Carry out continuity test between terminals 1 and 4

(left side) or 8 and 4 (right side) with claw closed
Does the continuity test pass?

Yes
The latch ajar switch is working correctly. Do not
replace latch. Investigate for fault elsewhere in
vehicle system
No
Release latch claw and repeat test from step 4 to
confirm result. If this is a repeat test and you are sure
that the ajar switch does not provide continuity when
fully latched. Replace the latch. If replacing latch as
part of a warranty claim, please quote reference code
AJARINOP in the technician comments section of the
warranty claim
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Door Lock Cylinder Cover
Removal
1.
2.
CAUTION: Make sure that excessive force is

not used. Failure to follow this instruction may
3.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the door lock

cylinder cover is pushed firmly in the sequence
shown to install all 3 clips, and that the door lock
cylinder cover is securely attached to the vehicle.
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Exterior Door Handle

Removal
All vehicles
1.
NOTE: Remove the screw sufficiently, only to

release the component.
Remove the door lock cylinder.
Position the door seal aside for access.
Remove the screw cover.
Loosen the Torx screw to release the lock.
2.
Release the front door exterior handle.
Vehicles with keyless entry

3.
CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the wiring

harnesses.
Make sure the electrical connector is securely

in the service position, before disconnection. If the
connector springs back after disconnection the
internal door trim panel will have to be removed
for access.
Position the electrical connector in the service
position.
Carefully pull on the harness to position the
electrical connector at the door panel (1).
Use a small screwdriver to align the
electrical connector with its service location
(2).
While retaining its alignment, push on the
electrical connector to 'click' it into its
service location (3).

4.
Installation
1.

Release the electrical connector from the
service position.
All vehicles
2.
3.
Install the exterior door handle.

Use a length of cord to hold the lock lever
against spring pressure, while engaging the
outside handle.
Install the door lock cylinder.

Tighten the Torx screw to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
Install the screw cover.
Re-position the seals if required.
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Front Door Lock Actuator
Removal
1.
Remove the window regulator.

For additional information, refer to: Front Door Window
Regulator (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
2.
Release the door latch.

3.

4.
Release the front door exterior handle.

5.
Remove the front door exterior handle.

Release from the door handle mechanism.
6.
Remove the door handle mechanism and latch

assembly.
Release the retainer.
7.

Detach the door release cable from the door
handle mechanism.
8.
Detach the door lock cable from the door latch.

9.
Remove the door handle mechanism and latch

assembly security panel.
Drill out the rivet.
Installation
1.
Install the door handle mechanism and latch assembly security

panel.
Install the new rivet.
2.
Attach the door lock cable to the door latch.

3.
Attach the door release cable to the door handle mechanism.

4.
Install the door handle mechanism and latch assembly.
5.
Install the front door exterior handle.

Attach to the door handle mechanism.
6.
Secure the front door exterior handle.

7.
8.
Secure the door latch.

9.
Install the window regulator.

For additional information, refer to: Front Door Window
Regulator (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Front Door Lock Cylinder
Removal
1.

Installation
1.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Luggage Compartment Lid

Latch Actuator
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the luggage compartment lid latch operating cable from

the lock cylinder.
3.

assembly.
Installation
1.
Install the luggage compartment lid latch assembly.

Install the 3 Torx bolts.
2.

the lock cylinder.
Install the cable.
3.
www.JagDocs.com
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Luggage Compartment Lid

Lock Cylinder
Removal
1.

2.

operating cable from the lock cylinder.
3.
Remove the luggage compartment lid lock cylinder.

Remove the bolt.
Installation
1.
Install the luggage compartment lid lock cylinder.

Install the bolt.
2.

the lock cylinder.
Install the cable.
3.
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Liftgate Lock Cylinder

Removal
1.

Installation).
2.
Remove the liftgate lock cylinder.

Release the liftgate lock cylinder cable.
Remove the liftgate lock cylinder housing.
Installation
1.
Install the liftgate lock cylinder.

Install the liftgate lock cylinder housing.
Fit and tighten the Torx screw.
Attach the liftgate lock cylinder cable.
2.

Installation).
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Liftgate Latch Actuator

Removal
1.

Installation).
2.
Remove the liftgate latch.

Release the liftgate latch cable.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
1.
Install the liftgate latch.

Attach the liftgate latch cable.
2.

Installation).
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Radio Frequency (RF)

Receiver
Removal
1.

Procedures).
2.

Installation
1.

2.

Procedures).
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Keyless Vehicle Front

Antenna
Removal
1.
Remove the navigation system display module.

2.

Remove and collect the center of the clips.
Installation
1.

2.
Install the navigation system display module.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Keyless Vehicle Center

Antenna
Removal
1.

2.

3.
Torque: 3 Nm
Installation
1.
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Hood Latch

Removal
1.
Remove the pedestrian protection actuator and bracket.

For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection Hood
Actuator LH (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Removal
and Installation) /
Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator RH (501-20C Pedestrian
Protection System, Removal and Installation).
2.
Release the hood latch.

Remove the 2 bolts.
3.
Remove the hood switch.

4.
Remove the hood latch.

Release the latch cable.
5.
Remove the pedestrian protection latch actuator.

Remove and discard the 2 Torx bolts.
Installation
1.
Install the pedestrian protection latch actuator.

Tighten the new Torx bolts to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2.
Install the hood latch.

Attach the latch cable.
3.
Install the hood switch.

4.
Secure the hood latch.

5.

and Installation) /
Wipers and Washers Torque Specifications
Item
Windshield washer reservoir - screw
Windshield wiper arm to spindle - nut
Windshield wiper motor and wiper spindles to bulkhead - screw
Nm
9
23
9
lb-ft
17
-
lb-in
79
79
Wipers and Washers - Wipers and Washers

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Washer reservoir
Wiper arms/blades (2 off)
Wiper/washer control switch
Rain sensor
Wiper arm mounting spindles (2 off)
Wiper motor
RH headlamp power wash jet
10
LH headlamp power wash jet
INTRODUCTION
The wipers have 2 speed controls, normal and fast, and an intermittent wipe mode. The wipers will park automatically
irrespective of their position, when the ignition is in the 'Off' mode or the control switch is selected.
A timed washer jet function eliminates the trail of washer fluid left on the windshield after a wiping action and reduces fluid
consumption by only operating the washer jets on the up stoke of the wiper arms.
Within the wiper and washer system the following features can be attained:
Adjustable interval intermittent wiping

Speed dependant wiping
Programmable wash and wipe sequencing
Automatic moisture sensitive wiping (rain sensor).
Moisture sensitive wiping will be initiated when the vehicle is running and not in the PARK or NEUTRAL gear position. The
wiper switch must be in the AUTO position.
The Central Junction Box (CJB) controls the system and features.
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX (CJB)

The CJB is an integrated unit located behind the instrument panel on the passenger side of the bulkhead. The CJB contains
fuses, relays and a number of microprocessors, which control the power supply and functionality of the wash/wipe system
and other vehicle systems.
Inputs and Outputs

The CJB receives and sends the following wiper and washer system inputs and outputs:
Inputs
Intermittent wipe switch

Rain sensor, if fitted
Normal (slow) speed continuous switch
Fast speed continuous switch
Flick wipe switch
Wash switch
Stop/start switch
Lighting switch
Low level reservoir status, via Medium Speed (MS) CAN bus
Vehicle speed, via MS CAN bus
Wiper motor park switch
Ambient temperature, via MS CAN bus
Outputs
Wiper motor (normal)

Wiper motor (fast)
Windshield washer pump
Heated washer jets (if fitted)
Headlamp power wash pump
WIPER ASSEMBLY
The wiper assembly comprises:
Wiper motor and linkage assembly
Wiper arms and blades (washer jets located on wiper arms)
Wiper Linkage
Part Number
Part Number
Item
1
Description
Link rod
Link rod
Driver side spindle housing
Connecting rod
Motor assembly
Passenger side spindle housing and motor mounting
The wiper linkage and motor assembly are available as separate components. The wiper linkage and motor differs between
LH and RH drive models.
The assembly is located below the leafscreen in the engine compartment and is secured with bushes, sleeves and bolts. The
rubber bushes isolate the assembly from the body mountings.
The linkage assembly comprises a main tube, with a spindle housing at each end. The motor is attached directly to the
passenger side spindle housing. A motor crank is positively attached to the motor output shaft. One link rod links the motor
crank to the passenger spindle crank. The other link rod links the driver spindle crank to the passenger spindle crank. Drive
is supplied from the motor to the driver spindle crank and then to the passenger spindle crank.
The motor crank converts rotary motion from the motor output shaft into linear movement of the link rods. The cranks,
connected between the each link rod and spindle housing, convert the linear motion to reciprocating motion at the spindle
housing. This reciprocating motion is passed to the wiper arms and blades causing the blades to wipe an arc across the
windshield.
Wiper Motor
The motor assembly comprises a dc motor, which drives a gear wheel via a worm drive attached to the motor spindle. The
gear wheel has a central spigot, which provides the attachment point for the motor crank.
A 5 pin connector (only 4 are used for this application) connects the motor electrically. The connector supplies 2 battery
voltage feeds to the motor (when switched). The motor has 3 sets of brushes with one brush connected to ground. One feed
is direct to the motor brush opposite the ground brush and operates the motor at normal (slow) speed. The second feed is
connected to a motor brush, which is offset from the ground brush and operates the motor at fast speed. With the power
supplied through this brush, the current flows through fewer coil windings. This results in a lower resistance to the current
flow to the ground brush and gives a higher motor rotational speed.
Output control of the wiper motor is through a double contact relay. The relay is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB).
The motor has an internal track switch, which signals the CJB when the wipers have reached the park position. The park
signal is closed circuit when the wipers are in the park position. When the wipers are switched off and the CJB receives the
park position signal from the motor, the CJB shorts the motor via a relay bridge circuit. This short circuit has the effect of
applying a brake to the motor, giving precise positioning of the wiper blades in the park position.
Wiper Arms
The wiper arms are positively located on tapered splines on the wiper linkage spindles.
The wiper arm has a spindle point, midway between the spindle attachment and the blade. A tension spring is connected to
the wiper arm on each side of the spindle point and applies pressure to maintain the wiper blade in contact with the
windshield.
The wiper blades are attached to the wiper arms with clips that allow the blade to pivot. The wiper blades comprise a sprung
steel curved backbone which applies pressure evenly to the windshield, to which is applied the wiping lip to the bottom
surface. An aerofoil section presses the blades onto the windshield at high vehicle speeds.
WASHER RESERVOIR AND PUMPS
Item
Part Number
Description
Reservoir
Filler neck and cap
Fluid level sensor
Headlamp washer pump
The plastic, moulded reservoir is located in the RH wheel arch, behind the liner and has a capacity of 13.3 pints (6.3 litres).
It is secured to the body and front panel with bolts. A boss on the reservoir locates into a bracket mounted off the A-pillar
casting and provides additional support.
The reservoir has 2 recessed holes on its front face, which provide location for the windshield and headlamp washer pumps.
The pumps are push fitted into grommets, which seal the pumps in their locations. A hole in the top of the reservoir allows
for the fitment of the filler neck. The windshield washer fluid hose is integrated into the harness and so follow it's routing.
The headlamp washer hose, from the reservoir, is routed over the wheel and across the body between the headlamps.
A hole with a grommet in the side of the reservoir provides the location for the fluid level sensor.
The low level sensor has a float, with integral magnet. The sensor has a contact, which is normally open when the reservoir
is full. When the fluid level reduces to approximately 1 litre, the magnetic float pivots down, which causes the switch contact
to close. This closed circuit is sensed by the instrument cluster, which displays the low fluid level message and transmits the
switch status on the medium speed CAN bus.
The instrument cluster monitors the fluid level sensor continuously. The instrument cluster checks the fluid level sensor when
the ignition is switched on to give the driver an early warning of the low fluid level. The instrument cluster then monitors the
sensor value over a 25 second period when the ignition is on to prevent invalid messages due to fluid 'sloshing' in the
reservoir.
When a low fluid level signal is transmitted to the instrument cluster, a 'WASHER FLUID LOW' message is displayed in the
instrument cluster's message centre. The first display of this message, or illumination of the indicator, is accompanied by a
'chime' sound to alert the driver to the low fluid level.
Windshield Washer Jets

A windshield washer jet is located on each wiper arm. The washer fluid feed hose from the windshield pump is connected to
a 3-way valve connector located between the 2 jets. The 3-way valve acts to prevent washer fluid draining back to the
reservoir and also to limit the amount of washer fluid, which can be forced by gravity from the jet during cornering.
Each washer jet has a fan jet, which directs the washer fluid long the length of the wiper blade and a pencil jet, which sprays
washer fluid to the heal on the wiper blade to ensure good distribution of fluid.
HEADLAMP WASHERS
Item
Part Number
Description
Reservoir
LH headlamp washer jet
RH headlamp washer jet
Washer fluid tube
The headlamp washer assembly is located below each headlamp.

The headlamp washer operation is controlled by the CJB via a headlamp washer relay. The relay is located in the BJB.
RAIN SENSOR
Item
Part Number
Description
Rain sensor
The rain sensor is located at the upper edge of the windshield, behind the interior rear view mirror. The sensor is mounted
with a clip onto a collar, which is bonded to the inner surface of the windshield during manufacture. If damage occurs to the
collar or the windshield, then a new windshield will be required and installation can only be performed by an authorised
Jaguar dealer.
The rain sensor is secured to the collar and windshield with a metal clip, which latches onto formed tags on the collar.
The sensor provides information to the CJB for the optimum wiper operation for the prevailing conditions to maintain the
shield in a clear condition at all times. The rain sensor is an optical unit, which operates on an infrared waveband. The sensor
uses the principle of the laws of reflection on interfacing surfaces between materials with differing refraction properties.
Automatic Headlamp
A separate light sensor is incorporated in a instrument panel-mounted housing to control the operation of the automatic
headlamps.
The automatic headlamps will function when the lighting control switch is in the 'AUTO' position and the CJB receives a 'lights
on' signal from the sensor (information distributed to the CJB via medium speed CAN bus messages).
WIPER CONTROL COLUMN SWITCH
Item
Part Number
Intermittent wipe rotary collar
Fast speed wipe
Normal speed wipe
Intermittent wipe
Windshield wipers off and parked
Windshield washer control
Flick wipe
Description
The wiper control column switch is located on the right hand side of the steering column and controls all wiper functions. The
wipers only operate with the ignition in the 'On' mode.
The switch comprises 5 switch positions and the intermittent rotary control. The switch positions each complete a
combination of ground paths to connections on the CJB. The CJB interprets the selected combination of switches and
operates the respective function accordingly.
The rotary potentiometer on the stalk selects 1 of the delay periods for the intermittent wipe function. The delay period is
also influenced by vehicle speed (should speed control intermittent wipe mode be configured), using a signal value derived
from the ABS module. The selected delay period decreases with an increase in road speed. When a rain sensor is
incorporated into the system, the intermittent position also initiates wiper operation controlled by the rain sensor.
For more information on wiper and washer operation refer to the owners handbook.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired: N = Medium Speed CAN bus
Item
Part Number
Description
Battery
Megafuse (175A)
systems
Column switch
Instrument cluster
systems
Rain sensor
Reservoir fluid level sensor
10
11
Headlamp washer pump
12
Wiper motor
13
Headlamp Washers
The headlamp washers are only active when the headlamps and ignition are switched on. If the washer reservoir fluid level
becomes low, the instrument cluster sends a message, via the medium speed CAN bus, to the CJB, which suspends
headlamp wash operation to preserve washer fluid in the reservoir.
With the ignition and lights on, headlamp wash is activated on the first operation of the wiper column control switch in the
wash/wipe position.
The CJB monitors the operation of the wash/wipe switch and maintains a counter to restrict headlamp washer operation to
every fourth operation of the wash/wipe switch in conjunction with a 10-minute timer. The timer prevents a second
operation of the headlamp washers within a 10-minute period. Should the washer switch be activated for more than 4
programmed wipe requests during the 10-minute period, the headlamp washer will remain disabled. Only the next
consecutive programmed wipe request, after the 10-minute timer has expired, will the headlamp washers be enabled. The
counter and timer are reset when the ignition is set in the 'Off' mode or the light switch is turned from OFF back to ON within
the same ignition cycle.
When headlamp wash is active, the CJB energises the washer pump twice per cycle. The headlamp washer pump is powered
for 2 x 800 ms periods.
Rain Sensor
Item
Part Number
Description
Clean and dry windshield
Wet and dirty windshield
Windshield - Outside surface
Optical element
Transmitter diodes (100% light transmitted)
Rain sensor assembly
Receiver diodes (100% received)
Water droplets/film
Receiver diodes (less than 100% light received)
Lost light
The rain sensor contains transmitter and receiver diodes, which transmit and receive infrared light. This is directed onto the
windshield via an optical element. The light is directed at an angle so that light is reflected 100% on the outside surface of
the shield and is transmitted back into the optical unit. To receive a 100% reflection, the outer shield surface must be clean
and dry.
The rain sensor is active when the wiper column control switch is in the intermittent position. The rain sensor suspends wiper
operation when the area of the windshield for the rain sensor is dry and operates the wipers continuously when the
windshield is subject to heavy rainfall.
Automatic Headlamp
A separate light sensor is incorporated in a instrument panel-mounted housing to control the operation of the automatic
headlamps.
The automatic headlamps will function when the lighting control switch is in the 'AUTO' position and the CJB receives a 'lights
on' signal from the sensor (information distributed to the CJB via medium speed CAN bus messages).
Wiper Motor Blocking Protection

The wiper park signal is also used by the CJB for blocking protection of the front wiper motor. This feature protects the
motor in the event of the wiper operation being obstructed.
If the CJB does not receive a wiper park signal status change for a period of 6 seconds, when the wiper motor is active, the
CJB removes the power supply to the motor. The motor will remain disabled until either an alternative motor mode has been
selected, or the ignition has been moved to the 'Off' mode and back to the 'Accessory' mode. Should a stall condition be
achieved 3 times during a single ignition position I status, then the wiper relay will remain disabled, regardless of wiper
switch positions, for 180 seconds. The CJB will not automatically switch the motor on, to prevent the risk of injury. The wiper
switch must be moved off and then on to reactivate the wiper motor. The blocking protection is active in all wiper switch
positions and will automatically be reset when the ignition enters the 'Off' mode.
Diagnostics
The diagnostic socket allows the transfer of information between the CJB and the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS). The
diagnostic socket is located in the lower instrument panel, on the driver's side, below the steering column.
The rain sensor performs an internal self-test from the ignition being switched to position I and can store fault codes, which
can be used to diagnose, faults or non-function of the rain sensor. The faults are stored in a non-volatile memory, which
retains the logged fault codes even when the power supply is disconnected. If a rain sensor fault prevents the sensor from
operating, the CJB will control wiper operation as if a rain sensor is not installed in the system.
The CJB monitors all inputs and outputs relative to the wiper system and other CJB controlled functions on the Local
Interconnect Network (LIN) bus. If a fault is detected, a code applicable to that fault is stored.
Wipers and Washers - Wipers and Washers

For a detailed description of the wipers and washers, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Wiper blade(s)
Wiper pivot arm shaft
Washer reservoir
Hose(s)
Washer jet(s)
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Wiring harness
Washer pump(s)
Wiper motor
3.
4.
system.
Wipers and Washers - Headlamp Washer Jet

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.
Open the hood.
3.
CAUTION: Always protect paintwork and glass when

Release the headlamp assembly.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Release the locating pegs.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the LH headlamp assembly.

Remove the headlamp washer jet.

Installation
1.
Install the headlamp washer jet.

2.

Position the locating pegs.
3.
4.
Secure the headlamp assembly.

Tighten the bolts.
5.
Close the hood.
6.

Specifications).
Wipers and Washers - Headlamp Washer Pump

Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.
Remove the headlamp washer pump.

5.
Installation
1.
Install a new seal.
2.
Install the windshield washer pump.

3.

4.
5.

Wipers and Washers - Rain Sensor

Removal
1.
Refer to: Auto-Dimming Interior Mirror (501-09 Rear View

Mirrors, Removal and Installation).
2.
3.
Installation
1.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the component is secured in

the retainer.
Make sure that the clips are correctly located.

Wipers and Washers - Windshield Washer Pump

Removal
1.

2.

3.

4.
Remove the windshield washer pump.

5.
Installation
1.
Install a new seal.
2.

3.

4.
Wipers and Washers - Windshield Washer Reservoir

Removal
1.

2.

3.
Remove the windshield washer reservoir filler

neck.
Release the clip.
4.
Release the washer reservoir.

Remove the 2 bolts.
5.

Remove the windshield washer reservoir.
Position a container to collect spillage.
Disconnect the 2 washer jet hoses.
6.

for access only.
Remove the washer reservoir low level sensor.
7.
Remove the headlamp washer pump.

8.
Remove the windshield washer pump.

9.
Remove the filler neck seal.

10.
Remove the rubber mount.
Installation
1.
Install the rubber mount.
2.
Install the filler neck seal.
3.

Install a new seal.
4.
Install the headlamp washer pump.

Install a new seal.
5.

for access only.
Install the washer reservoir low level sensor.
Install a new seal.
6.

Install the windshield washer reservoir.
Connect the washer jet hoses.
7.
Install the windshield washer reservoir filler neck.

Release the clip.
8.

9.
Wipers and Washers - Windshield Wiper Motor LHD RWD

Removal
1.

2.
WARNING: Do not work on or near the engine if the

engine is hot. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Remove the cowl vent screen.
3.
Remove the engine cover.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Cover - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (501-05 Interior Trim and
4.
CAUTION: Care must be taken whilst

removing the engine compartment bolts. Failure to
A/C pipes.
NOTE: Right-hand shown, left-hand similar.
Remove the engine compartment braces.
Release the grommet.
side.
5.
Detach the wiring harness.

6.
Using a suitable tool, remove the hood release

cable clip.
7.
Remove the secondary bulkhead center panel.

Remove the nut.
8.
Release the brake booster vacuum hose.

9.
Release the secondary bulkhead RH panel.

Remove the air conditioning (A/C) pipe
bracket bolt.
Remove the coolant expansion tank
mounting bracket bolt.
Remove the remaining 2 bolts.
10.
Disconnect the windshield wiper motor electrical

connector.
Detach the wiring harness clip.
11.
Remove the windshield wiper motor and linkage

mechanism.
Remove the 3 bolts.
12.
Disconnect the connecting rod.
13.
NOTE: Note the original position of the windshield

wiper motor crank arm.
Remove the windshield wiper motor.
Rotate the windshield wiper motor crank
arm 90 degrees clockwise.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
1.
NOTE: Note the original position of the windshield

wiper motor crank arm.
Rotate the windshield wiper motor crank arm 90
degrees clockwise.
2.
Install the windshield wiper motor.

Tighten the 3 bolts to 5 Nm.
Rotate the windshield wiper motor crank
arm 270 degrees clockwise to the original
position.
3.
Install the windshield wiper motor and linkage

mechanism.
Loosely install the 3 bolts.
Tighten bolt 1 to 9 Nm.
connector.
4.
Install the secondary bulkhead RH panel.

Tighten the 4 bolts to 4 Nm.
5.
Install the secondary bulkhead center panel.

Attach the hood release cable clip.
Attach the 3 wiring harness clips.
Secure the 4 clips.
6.
Position the brake booster vacuum hose to one side.

Position and secure the grommet.
7.
Install the engine compartment braces.

8.
Install the engine cover.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Cover - V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (501-05 Interior Trim and
9.

10.
Carry out the windshield wiper motor park operation.

Switch the ignition on.
Turn on the windshield wipers and make sure that the
wiper spindles perform a full cycle.

Turn off the windshield wipers.
Switch the ignition off.
11.
Install the cowl vent screen.

Wipers and Washers - Windshield Wiper Motor RHD RWD

Removal
1.

2.
Remove the coolant expansion tank.

3.
Remove the engine compartment braces.

side.
4.
Remove the secondary bulkhead panel.

Remove the nut.
5.
Release the engine compartment RH side wall.

Remove the 4 bolts.
6.
Remove the windshield wiper motor.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
1.
Install the windshield wiper motor.

2.
Install the engine compartment RH side wall.

3.
Install the secondary bulkhead panel.

4.
Install the engine compartment braces.

5.

6.

Wipers and Washers - Wiper Pivot Arm

Removal
1.
Open the hood.

2.
Remove the RH air intake cover.

Remove the 3 clips.
3.
CAUTION: Wipers arms do not lock in the

upright position. Windshield damage may occur if
the wiper pivot arms are allowed to drop against
the glass.
NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar
Remove the 2 access plugs.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Disconnect the 2 washer jet blocks from
the cowl vent screen.
4.
Remove the wiper blades.

Installation
1.
Install the wiper blades.

Position the locating clip in the upright position.
Position the blade at the end of the arm.
Secure the clip.
Repeat for the other side
2.
CAUTION: Incorrect fitting of the wiper pivot

arms will result in damage to the bonnet on
closure.
NOTE: Align the wiper with the mark on the
windscreen.
Install the windshield wiper arm.
Make sure the spindle is free from
contamination.
Apply gentle pressure on the pivot arm
hinge to make sure the pivot arm is located
evenly.
Lightly tighten the nut.
Align the tip of the wiper blade with the
mark on the windshield.
Install the covers.
Connect the washer jet hose block.
Repeat for the other side.
3.
Install the RH air intake cover.
Convertible Top Torque Specifications
Item
Convertible top, base plate to BIW - nut
Convertible top to base plate - nut
Convertible top, compartment lid striker - bolt
Convertible top, compartment lid trim panel - screw
Convertible top, compartment lid moulding - screw/nut
Convertible top striker to body - bolt
Convertible top header rail - screw
Hydraulic system, lift cylinder and motor - bolt
Luggage separator mounting bracket - bolt
Nm
25
25
9
1
4
23
1
8
4
lb-ft
18
18
17
6
-
lb-in
80
9
35
9
71
35
Convertible Top - Convertible Top

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
Front latch motor
RH front latch plate
RH actuation lever assembly
Valve block and motor
LH actuation lever assembly
Convertible top control module
LH front latch plate
INTRODUCTION
The power-operated convertible top consists of a fabric canopy with a 'Thinsulate' inner liner, which is fitted to a steel frame with cast linkages.
The fully automatic flush mounted aluminum tonneau panel conceals the stowed top and incorporates the Roll-over Protection System doors in its
trim panel. The top has a low-stack height of 200 mm (7.9 in) and manual roller blind luggage separator to optimize the luggage compartment
volume. The open and close time of the top is approximately 17 seconds depending on ambient temperature and battery voltage.
A heated glass backlight is high frequency welded to the canopy.
A pump motor and valve block provides hydraulic power to open and close the top while an electric motor controls a tension bow system to latch
and unlatch the top. A single hold-down switch located in the roof console operates the top. This switch also operates the rear quarter glass.
In the event that the top cannot be powered to the raised or lowered position, provision is made for manual operation.
For information regarding convertible top operation, manual operation and the removal and installation of the luggage separator, refer to the
Owner's Handbook.
CAUTION: The convertible top frame is located on the vehicle body accurately using a steel adjuster plate; under no circumstances must the
top steel adjuster plates be released. For more information refer to the adjuster plate section.
COMPONENTS
A control module, located behind the LH rear seat, controls the power-operated convertible top. The control module operates the top based on data
received on the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus and from the hardwired components described below:
A - Tension Bow Sensors
Item
Part Number
Description
Tension bow piston tube assembly
Tension bow 'In' sensor
Tension bow 'Out' sensor
The tension bow sensors are Hall effect sensors located in the tension bow piston tube assembly. The piston tube assembly is located next to the LH
tension bow linkage. These sensors inform the control module as to the position of the convertible top tension bow assembly.
B - Main Bow Sensors
Item
Part Number
Description
Main bow piston tube assembly
Main bow 'In' sensor
Main bow 'Center' sensor
Main bow 'Out' sensor
The main bow sensors are Hall effect sensors located in the main bow piston tube assembly. The piston tube assembly is located on the RH main
bearing bracket assembly. These sensors sense the position of the main bow piston so the control module knows the exact position of the
convertible top.
C - Tonneau Panel Open Sensor
Item
Part Number
Tonneau panel piston tube assembly
Tonneau panel open sensor
Description
The tonneau panel open sensor is a Hall effect sensor located in the tonneau panel piston tube assembly. The piston tube assembly is located
between the RH base latch plate and the lever assembly. This sensor informs the control module of when the tonneau panel is in the open position
so the convertible top can be stowed.
D - Tonneau Panel Switch 1
Item
Part Number
Description
Emergency release cable
Tonneau panel switch
Tonneau panel switch 1 is located on the RH lever assembly. This switch is a normally open microswitch that, when switched to ground, informs the
control module that the RH side of the tonneau panel is closed.
E - Pump Motor Temperature Sensor
Item
Part Number
Description
Tension bow up solenoid valve
Tension bow down solenoid valve
Tonneau panel solenoid valve
Hydraulic pump
Hydraulic fluid reservoir
The hydraulic fluid temperature sensor is a Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) sensor, which is integral to the pump assembly. The sensor
informs the control module as to the temperature of the hydraulic fluid. If the fluid temperature exceeds a predetermined value, the control module
will stop pump operation to prevent the valve block from overheating. Once the fluid temperature decreases below the predetermined value, the
control module will then resume pump operation.
F - Tonneau Panel Switch 2
Item
1
Part Number
-
Description
Tonneau panel switch
Tonneau panel switch 2 is located on the LH latch base plate assembly. This switch is a normally open microswitch that, when switched to
ground, informs the control module that the LH side of the tonneau panel is closed.
G- Luggage Separator Position Sensor
Item
Part Number
Description
Cargo net
Luggage separator (roller blind)
Luggage separator position sensor
The Luggage separator position sensor is a Hall effect sensor located on the LH luggage separator housing bracket. The sensor informs the control
module of when the separator is in the correct position. When the separator is in the correct position there is enough space in the luggage
compartment to stow the convertible top when open.
H - Front Latch Open and Close Sensors
Item
Part Number
Latch plate
Front latch open sensor
Front latch closed sensor
Description
The front latch open and closed sensors are Hall effect sensors located in the LH front latch plate. These sensors inform the control module of when
the latch is in the open or closed position.
I - Convertible Top Latched Sensor
Item
Part Number
Latching bracket
Hall sensor
Description
The convertible top latched sensor is a Hall effect sensor located in the LH latching bracket. The sensors function is to inform the control module of
when the convertible top is in the closed position.
J - Convertible Top Open and Close Switch
Item
Part Number
Description
Open and Close switch
Overhead console
The convertible top open and close switch is located in the overhead console. The switch is a momentary switch that is normally open. When
switched to ground the convertible top will start its open or close motion depending on which operation has been requested.
Adjuster Plate
The convertible top frame, actuation levers and main bow hydraulic cylinder assembly is located on the vehicle body accurately using a steel
adjuster plate, which is set to the body using adjustable shims.
Item
Part Number
Description
Steel adjuster plate
Adjuster
CAUTION: Under no circumstances must the top steel adjuster plates be released, as they are set and adjusted to the body during
manufacture, providing an accurate location for the convertible top frame. Service action and special tools will be required to reset the plate if this
area of the vehicle requires service.
Tonneau Panel Cover

A fully automatic flush mounted aluminum tonneau cover panel protects the stowed top.
WARNING: Special care must be taken when carrying out maintenance in the area underneath the aluminum tonneau cover. After
approximately five minutes the hydraulic pressure is lost due to the release of the spool valves to prevent the valves overheating. A suitable
support must be used to prevent the aluminum tonneau cover falling when the hydraulic pressure is released.
The aluminum tonneau cover panel trim also incorporates Roll Over Protection hoop doors. The roll over protection system is deployed through the
hoop doors and rear screen in the event of a vehicle roll over situation.
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Description and
Operation).
Item
Part Number
Description
Hoop doors
Aluminum tonneau cover panel
The hydraulic pump, motor and valve block assembly is located in the RH luggage area. The fluid reservoir is filled with Pentosin hydraulic oil. Two
fluid levels are marked on the pump reservoir body, the upper mark denotes the fluid level when the top is fully lowered and the lower mark
denotes the level when the top is fully raised. The hydraulic pump supplies a maximum pressure of approximately 140 bar during convertible top
operation. When the pump is idle the system pressure is approximately 0.1 bar.
NOTE: The convertible top hydraulic system is 'self-bleeding' and does not require action to expel trapped air.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = CAN bus
Item
Part Number
Battery
Megafuse (175A)
Controller Area Network (CAN) input and output signals to and from various other vehicle systems
Convertible top latched sensor
Tonneau panel sensor
Front latch open sensor
Front latch close sensor
Front latch motor
10
RH quarter glass motor
11
LH quarter glass motor
12
Main bow sensors (3 off)
13
Tension bow sensors (2 off)
14
Tonneau panel switch 1
15
Controller Area Network (CAN) input and output signals to and from various other vehicle systems
16
Tonneau panel switch 2
Description
Pump motor temperature sensor
17
18
Pump motor
19
Luggage separator position sensor
20
Convertible top control module
21
Convertible top open and close switch
The convertible top is opened and closed using four hydraulically controlled pistons. Two main bow pistons in the top frame are fixed to the body
and lift the complete top assembly into and out of the stowage area. Two tension bow pistons open and close the tension bow at the rear of the
convertible top. This allows clearance for the tonneau cover panel to be opened when the top is being retracted in to the luggage compartment. It
also seals the rear of the top with the tonneau cover panel when the top is opened.
The top and rear quarter glasses are operated using a hold-down switch located in the overhead console. The convertible top will only open if:
The
The
The
The
vehicle speed is below 24km/h (15mph)

tonneau panel is closed
luggage separator is in position
hydraulic fluid temperature sensor confirms pump is not overheated
The front windows must be programmed for one-touch operation in order for the convertible top to operate correctly. Failure to program the
windows results in a ten second opening delay once the top is unlatched. The windows can be manually programmed for one-touch operation using
this procedure:
Ignition ON
Raise window up to the top seal and release
Raise again until window stops moving
Release
Raise again
Lower window fully
Release
Press lower for a further 0.5 seconds until a relay is heard to CLICK
A luggage compartment separator prevents items from moving into the area in which the convertible top is stowed. The luggage separator
incorporates a Hall effect proximity sensor, which prevents the convertible top from operating unless the separator is in the fully deployed position.
The aluminum tonneau cover is secured in the closed position by a mechanically controlled cable operated latching system. The cables are tensioned
using a mechanical lever assembly operated by the movement of the covers hydraulic piston. The latches are released by spring tension when the
covers hydraulic piston releases the tension in the cables.
The aluminum tonneau cover is raised and lowered hydraulically by a single piston.
The convertible top incorporates a fully automatic latch and unlatch tension rod system, which uses an electric motor with a gearbox and flexible
shafts to latch and unlatch the top. Failure of a tension rod, motor gearbox or latch motor will prevent the top from unlatching. In the event of either
of these failures it is possible to release each of the top latches manually.
OPERATION LOGIC
CONVERTIBLE TOP - CLOSED TO OPEN PROCESS
Each stage of the convertible top closed-to-open process is described below. This is accompanied with the corresponding Data-Logger values
which can be monitored using Jaguar Approved Diagnostic Equipment. These values can be found in the Body Modules area of the diagnostic
equipment.
Operating Requirements
The ignition must be on to enable the convertible hood to operate.
The power operated convertible hood and rear quarter windows are controlled by the switch located on the overhead console (do not release
the switch until the hood is fully open or closed).

The hood can be operated at speeds below 24 km/h (15 mph). However, for safety it should not be opened or closed when the vehicle is
being driven.
Ensure that the luggage separator in the luggage compartment is in the fully deployed position. If it is not positioned correctly the proximity
switches will not operate and the convertible hood will not open.
The luggage compartment lid must be closed and latched.
Stage 1: Convertible Top - fully closed
Press and hold the open switch (A), this will signal the convertible top control module to commence the opening process.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top Switch inputs Convertible top DOWN switch ON).
The control module will signal the door glass and rear quarter glass to be powered for 4 seconds to the lowered position.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top motor outputs Rear Quarter down - ON).
An audible chime will confirm the start of the convertible top opening process.
The control module will confirm that the open sensor in the front latch (B) is not transmitting a signal; verifying the front latch is closed.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Front latch open sensor - INACTIVE).
Once this is confirmed the front latch motor is powered to release the roof latches from the header strikers.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs - Latch motor open ON).
Stage 2: Convertible Top - unlatched from header
The control module will confirm the open sensor in the front latch (A) is transmitting a front latch open signal; verifying the front latch has
opened.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Front latch open sensor - ACTIVE).
The control module will confirm the sensor in the top latch (B) is not transmitting a latched signal; verifying the front latch has opened.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs - Convertible Top latched sensor - INACTIVE)
The control module will confirm the in sensor in the tension bow cylinder (C) is not transmitting a tension bow up signal.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Tension bow piston IN sensor - INACTIVE).
Once confirmed the control module energizes the tension bow up solenoid valve (D-1) and powers the hydraulic pump (D-2) in the raise
direction.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs tension bow valve 2 - ON).
Stage 3: Tension Bow - raised
The control module will confirm the in sensor in the tension bow cylinder (A) is transmitting a tension bow up signal.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Tension bow piston IN sensor - ACTIVE).
The control module will confirm the open sensor in the tonneau panel cylinder (B) is not transmitting a tonneau open signal; verifying the
tonneau panel is closed.

(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Convertible top lid compartment cover piston out sensor - INACTIVE).
Once confirmed the control module energizes the tonneau panel solenoid valve (C), and the tonneau panel is opened.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs Compartment cover valve 1 ON).
Stage 4: Tonneau Panel and Convertible Top - raised
The control module will confirm the open sensor in the tonneau panel cylinder (A) is transmitting a tonneau panel open signal.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Convertible top lid compartment cover piston out sensor ACTIVE).
The control module will confirm the out sensor in the main bow cylinder (B) is not transmitting a signal; verifying the convertible top is not
fully open.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs - Main bow piston OUT sensor - INACTIVE).
Once confirmed the control module powers the hydraulic pump (C) in the lower direction.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs - Convertible top left pump - ON).
The control module will confirm the center sensor in the main bow cylinder (D) transmits a momentary signal; verifying the convertible top
is opening.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs - Main bow piston CENTER sensor - ACTIVE).
Once confirmed the control module de-energizes the tension bow up solenoid valve (E).
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs Tension bow valve 2 - OFF).
Stage 5: Tonneau Panel - raised, and Convertible Top - lowered
The control module will confirm the out sensor in the main bow cylinder (A) is transmitting a signal; verifying the convertible top is fully
open.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs - Main bow piston OUT sensor - ACTIVE).
The control module will confirm the tonneau panel switches (B) and (C), which are wired in series, are not transmitting a signal; verifying
the tonneau panel is not latched.

(Data-Logger: Convertible Top Switch inputs Convertible top lid compartment cover latch status - OFF).
Once confirmed the control module de-energizes the tonneau panel solenoid valve (D), powering the tonneau panel closed.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs Compartment cover valve 1 OFF).
Stage 6: Convertible Top - fully open
The control module will confirm the tonneau panel switches (A) and (B) which are wired in series are transmitting a signal; verifying the
tonneau panel is latched.

(Data-Logger: Convertible Top Switch inputs Convertible top lid compartment cover latch status - ON).
Once confirmed the control module powers the hydraulic pump (C) off.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs - Convertible top left pump - OFF).
An audible chime will confirm the completion of the convertible top opening cycle.
CONVERTIBLE TOP - OPEN TO CLOSE PROCESS

Each stage of the convertible top open-to-close process is described below. This is accompanied with the corresponding Data-Logger values which
can be monitored using Jaguar Approved Diagnostic Equipment. These values can be found in the Body Modules area of the diagnostic equipment.
Stage 7: Convertible Top - fully open
Press and hold the open switch (A), this will signal the convertible top control module to commence the closing process.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top Switch inputs Convertible top UP switch - ON).
The control module will confirm the open sensor in the tonneau panel cylinder (B) is not transmitting a tonneau panel open signal;
verifying the tonneau panel is closed.

(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Convertible top lid compartment cover piston out sensor INACTIVE).
Once confirmed the control module will:
Transmit a signal to the door control module to lower the door glass, if required.
Signal an audible chime to confirm the beginning of the convertible hood closing process.
Energize the tonneau panel open solenoid (C-1).
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs Compartment cover valve 1 ON)
Power the hydraulic pump (C-2) in the lower direction.
Stage 8: Tonneau Panel - primed for opening
As the tonneau panel is powered open the open sensor in the tonneau panel cylinder (A) will transmit a tonneau open confirmation signal
to the control module.

(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Convertible top lid compartment cover piston out sensor ACTIVE).
Once confirmed the control module will power the hydraulic pump (B) in the raise direction.
www.JagDocs.com
Stage 9: Tonneau Panel - open
The control module will confirm the in sensor in the main bow cylinder (A) is not transmitting a convertible top raised signal.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs - Main bow piston IN sensor - INACTIVE).
Once confirmed the control module energizes the tension bow up solenoid valve (B-1) and powers the hydraulic pump (B-2) in the raise
direction.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs Tension bow valve 2 ON).
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs - Convertible top left pump - OFF).
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs - Convertible top right pump - ON).
NOTE: The tension bow up solenoid valve (B-1) remains energized.
Stage 10: Convertible Top and Tension Bow - raised
The control module will confirm the in sensor in the main bow cylinder (A) is transmitting a signal to indicate the convertible top is raised.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs - Main bow piston IN sensor - ACTIVE).
The control module will confirm the in sensor in the tension bow cylinder (B) is transmitting a tension bow up signal; verifying the tension
bow is in the raised position.

(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Tension bow piston IN sensor - ACTIVE).
The control module will confirm the tonneau panel switches (C) and (D) which are wired in series are not transmitting a signal; verifying the
tonneau panel is not latched.

(Data-Logger: Convertible Top Switch inputs Convertible top lid compartment cover latch status - OFF).
Once confirmed the control module de-energizes the tonneau panel solenoid valve (E), powering the tonneau panel closed.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs Compartment cover valve 1 OFF).
Stage 11: Tonneau Panel - closed
The control module will confirm the tonneau panel switches (A) and (B) which are wired in series are transmitting a tonneau panel closed
signal.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top Switch inputs Convertible top lid compartment cover latch status - ON).
The control module will confirm the out sensor in the tension bow cylinder (C) is not transmitting a signal; verifying the tension bow is in
the raised position.

(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Tension bow piston OUT sensor - INACTIVE).
Once confirmed the control module de-energizes the tension bow up solenoid valve (D-1), and energizes the tension bow down solenoid
valve (D-2), causing the tension bow to lower the rear canopy onto the hood of the tonneau cover..
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs Tension bow valve 2 OFF).
Stage 12: Tension Bow - lowered
The control module will confirm the out sensor in the tension bow cylinder (A) is transmitting a signal; verifying the tension bow is in the
lowered position.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Tension bow piston OUT sensor - ACTIVE).
Once confirmed the control module switches off the hydraulic pump, and energizes the tension bow up solenoid valve (B).
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs - Convertible top right pump - OFF).
The control module will confirm that the close sensor in the front latch (C-1) is not transmitting a signal; verifying the latches are open.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Front latch closed sensor INACTIVE).
Once confirmed control module powers the front latch motor to pull the convertible top down and direct the convertible tops latch claws to
latch onto the header strikers.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs - Latch motor close - ON).
When the convertible top is fully latched, the open latch sensor (C-2) signal is lost, and the sensor (C-1) and convertible top latched sensor
(D) signals are supplied.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Front latch open sensor INACTIVE).
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Front latch closed sensor ACTIVE).
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top position sensor inputs Convertible top latched sensor ACTIVE).
The control module will confirm the sensor in the top latch (D) is transmitting a signal.
Once confirmed the control module switches off the latch motor.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs - Latch motor close - OFF).
Stage 13: Convertible Top - latched
The control module will confirm the close sensor (A) in the front latch is transmitting a signal.
Once confirmed the control module de-energizes the tension bow up solenoid valve (B-1), and the tension bow down solenoid valve (B-2).
The control module powers for 4 seconds:
both rear quarter glass windows to the raised position,
followed by the door glass windows to the raised position.
(Data-Logger: Convertible Top module motor outputs - Rear quarter up - ON).
The control module will confirm that all windows are fully closed.
An audible chime will confirm the completion of the convertible top closing process.
Convertible Top - Convertible Top

For a detailed description of the Convertible Top operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in
REFER to: Convertible Top (501-18 Convertible Top, Description and Operation).

1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Luggage separator position - ensure that this is a fully forward
position
Luggage compartment lid is closed
Latching assemblies/mechanisms
Electrical
Fuses
Wiring harness
Correct engagement of electrical
connectors
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively, check for
Symptom Chart
Symptom
There is a ten second
delay in convertible
top movement when
switch is operated
Rear quarter window
glass is not fully
closed/raised when
convertible top close
cycle is complete
Glass will not raise
after the convertible
top has been raised
manually
Glass will not raise
Excessive gap
between front edge of
convertible top and
windshield header
when manually closed
Convertible top
module memory lost
Convertible roof
inoperative
Possible Cause
Door window glass
Action
Carry out the 'Door Window Motor Initialization' procedure.
REFER to: Door Window Motor Initialization (501-11 Glass, Frames
and Mechanisms, General Procedures).
upper and lower

parameters have
not been set
Glass sticking in
Press and hold convertible top switch in close position. The door
seals
window glass will be driven down, then the rear quarter window glass
Battery voltage low will be driven up for four seconds, followed by the door window glass
to fully closed. Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable
condition. Refer to the battery care manual
Latched signal is
Manually latch the convertible top compartment lid by pushing the
not being seen
convertible top compartment lid cylinder forward until the latch has
travelled over center
Latched signal is
not being seen

Convertible top
header latch not in
fully open position
when latched with
convertible top
Ignition set to OFF
when convertible
top is mid cycle
No fuse supply
No earth
CAN failure
Battery voltage low
Faulty module
Carry out the convertible top compartment lid latch over center
bracket setting procedure
Manually open the latch when pushing the front of the convertible top
upwards until the fork is seen to locate on the pin - the top can then
be re-latched manually
Move convertible top to fully open position, this is recognised by the

module as a safe start position which will allow cycle to be re-started
Check BCMB fuse F8 and all internal connections from fuse to FTCM
pin. Check FTCM logic earth connections. Check FTCM CAN
connections. Check FTCM diagnostics function with IDS tool. Verify
battery voltage is normal. If all connections/battery good and
diagnostics are available follow standard FTCM diagnostic procedure.
If all connections/battery good and no diagnostics are available check
if lost communications DTC U0206-00 is set in BCM. Refer to the
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications
If it is set and no communications with FTCM are available replace
module.
DTC Index
DTC
B107923
Description
Convertible top up
switch
Possible Cause
Signal Stuck Low
B107A23 Convertible top down

switch
Signal Stuck Low
B107B15 Convertible top pump

motor
Convertible top pump
B107B11 Convertible top pump

motor
B107C15
Convertible top rear

quarter motor
B107C11

quarter motor
B107D15 Convertible top latch

motor
B107D11 Convertible top latch
motor
B107E15
Convertible top
compartment lid valve
1
B107E11
Convertible top
compartment lid valve
1
B107F15 Tension bow valve 2
B107F11
Tension bow valve 2
B108015
Tension bow valve 3
B108011
Tension bow valve 3
Action
system
system
convertible top pump motor circuit for short to
convertible top pump motor circuit for short to
ground
convertible top rear quarter motor circuit for short
to power, high resistance
motor circuit - short to

Convertible top pump
motor circuit - short to
ground
quarter motor circuit short to power, high
resistance
quarter motor circuit convertible top rear quarter motor circuit for short
short to ground
to ground
Convertible top latch motor
circuit - short to power,
convertible top latch motor circuit for short to
high resistance
Convertible top latch motor
convertible top latch motor circuit for short to
ground
Convertible top
compartment lid valve1
convertible top compartment lid valve1 circuit for
circuit - short to power,
short to power, high resistance
high resistance
Convertible top
compartment lid valve1
convertible top compartment lid valve1 circuit for
short to ground
Tension bow valve 2 circuit
tension bow valve 2 circuit for short to power, high
resistance
resistance
- short to ground
tension bow valve 2 circuit for short to ground
tension bow valve 3circuit for short to power, high
resistance
resistance
- short to ground
tension bow valve 2 circuit for short to ground
B107031
Convertible top
compartment lid piston
out sensor
B107131 Tension bow piston in
sensor
B107231 Tension bow piston out
sensor
B107331
Main bow piston in

sensor
B107431
Main bow piston out

sensor
B107531 Main bow piston centre

sensor
B107631
Front latch open

sensor
B107731
Front latch close

sensor
B107831 Convertible top latched

sensor
B113531
U001088
Convertible top
compartment lid
switch
Medium speed CAN
communication Bus
U014000
Lost communication
CJB
U014200
Lost communication
with RJB
U015500
Lost communication
with Instrument
Cluster
with Driver Door
Module (DDM)
with Passenger Door
Module (PDM)
U030000
Control module
software
incompatibility
U049A67 Invalid data received

from Driver Door
Module (DDM)
U050167 Invalid data received
from Passenger Door
Module (PDM)
U1A1449
CAN initialisation
failure
U1A4C68 Build/end of line mode
active
U300316
Battery voltage
No signal

system
No signal
system
No signal
system
No signal
system
No signal
system
No signal
system
No signal
system
No signal
system
No signal
system
No signal
system
Bus off
system
Lost communication CJB
system
RJB
system
Instrument Cluster
system
Driver Door Module (DDM) DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
Passenger Door Module
(PDM)
system
RJB car configuration data
is not compatible with the approved diagnostic system. Clear DTCs and reconvertible top module
test. If DTC still logged, suspect convertible top
module. Refer to new module installation note at
top of DTC Index
Signal incorrect after event
Check DDM for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
Signal incorrect after event
Check PDM for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
Install a new convertible top module, refer to the

Index
Set convertible top to customer mode using
system
system
Manufacturing mode has
not been removed

threshold
U300317
Battery voltage
threshold
Convertible Top Compartment Lid Latch, Over Center Bracket Setting Procedure
1.
Set hydraulic pump to manual override.
2.
3.
Open the convertible top compartment lid to access the top fixing nut of the latch bracket on the right hand
wheelhouse and slacken the nut.
4.
Slacken the two lower fixing nuts of the latch bracket on the right hand wheel house, these can be accessed
through the luggage compartment.
5.
Position the mechanism to the fully over center position, then push the bracket forward until the cylinder is at
it's shortest length, then release.
6.
Tighten the two lower fixing nuts to 9Nm, open the convertible top compartment lid and tighten the top fixing
nut to 9Nm.
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Compartment Lid Alignment

General Procedures
1.
Check the alignment of the convertible top lid. Adjust, if

required, using the steps below.
2.
NOTE: Support as necessary.

Depress the switch.
3.

Release the convertible top lid latches.
Loosen the 6 bolts.
Tighten the 6 bolts to 1 Nm (1 lb.ft).
4.
Release the convertible top lid lift cylinder bracket.

Loosen the 3 nuts.
Push the convertible top lift cylinder
bracket fully rearwards.
Tighten the 3 nuts to 1 Nm (1 lb.ft).
5.
Close the convertible top compartment lid.

Depress the switch.
6.
With the convertible top compartment lid closed, check the

alignment of the lid to the body. The lid should be central in its
aperture. The profile of the lid to the body should be flush.
7.
Install the convertible lid cylinder bracket lower nuts.

8.

Depress the switch.
9.
Secure the convertible top lid latches.

10.
Install the convertible lid cylinder bracket upper nut.

11.

Depress the switch.
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Alignment

General Procedures
NOTE: This procedure details how to align a new convertible top assembly.
1.
Align the convertible top to the dimensions shown

using the procedure below.
2.
With assistance, install the convertible top assembly.

Install and lightly tighten the nuts.
3.

4.

Using an Allen key, manually latch the
convertible top.
5.
Ensure the forward edge of the convertible top has

an equal 7mm gap to the header panel.
6.
Open the convertible top.

Using an Allen key, manually release the convertible top
latches.
7.
Open the convertible top compartment lid.
8.

base plate fixing nuts be loosened or removed.
Each base plate fixing nut can be identified by a
large aluminium spacer.
Release the convertible top assembly.
Loosen the 6 nuts.
9.
Adjust the convertible top.

Loosen the 2 locknuts.
Adjust the convertible top as necessary.
Tighten the locknuts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
10.
Secure the convertible top assembly.

Lightly tighten the nuts.
11.
12.

Using an Allen key, manually latch the convertible top.
13.

14.

latches.
15.
16.
Secure the convertible top assembly.

Convertible Top - Convertible Top Base Plate Adjustment

General Procedures
1.
Remove the convertible top assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Convertible Top Assembly
(501-18 Convertible Top, Removal and Installation).
2.
Remove the convertible top base plates.

Remove the 6 nuts.
Collect the washers.
3.
Adjust the 6 base plate height adjustment

washers, so they are 3mm below the underside of
the base plates.
4.
Install the convertible top base plates.

Make sure the base plates are installed central to the
studs.
Install the washers.
Lightly tighten the nuts.
5.
With assistance, install the convertible top assembly.

Install and lightly tighten the nuts.
6.

7.

Using an Allen key, manually latch the
convertible top.
8.

9.
Ensure the rear edge of the convertible top has an

equal 3mm gap to the convertible top
compartment lid and rear quarter glass outer seal
seal.
10.

latches.
11.
12.
With assistance, remove the convertible top assembly.

Remove the 6 nuts.
13.
Remove the convertible top base plates.

Remove the 6 nuts.
Collect the washers.
14.
Adjust the 6 base plate adjustment washers to the necessary

height.
15.
Install the convertible top base plates.

Align the base plates to the studs as necessary.
Install the washers.
16.
Install the convertible top assembly.

Convertible Top - Convertible Top Assembly

Removal
1.
Remove the rear quarter trim panels.

and Installation).
2.
Remove the RH loadspace trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel Convertible (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
3.
CAUTION: Do not loosen the Allen bolt more

than 2 complete turns. Failure to follow this
NOTE: The ignition must be switched off.
Release the convertible top system pressure.
Loosen the Allen bolt up to a maximum of 2
complete turns.
4.
Disconnect the convertible top hydraulic pump electrical

connectors.
5.
Release the convertible top hydraulic pump.

Remove the 3 bolts.
6.
7.
8.
Release the convertible top fluid lines and harness.

Release the 2 fluid line and harness clips.
NOTE: Support the convertible top compartment

lid.
Release the convertible top compartment lid RH lift
cylinder.
9.
10.

base plate fixing nuts be loosened or removed.
Each base plate fixing nut can be identified by a
large aluminium spacer.
NOTE: This step requires the aid of other
technicians.
Remove the 8 nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the convertible top assembly.

2.
Align the convertible top assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Convertible Top Alignment
(501-18 Convertible Top, General Procedures).
3.
4.
NOTE: Support the convertible top compartment lid.

Attach the convertible top compartment lid RH lift cylinder.
5.
Secure the convertible top fluid lines and harness.

Secure the fluid line and harness clips.
Install new cable ties.
6.
7.
Secure the convertible top hydraulic pump.

Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm.
8.
Connect the convertible top hydraulic pump electrical

connectors.
9.

Tighten the convertible top system pressure Allen
bolt.
Tighten to 2 Nm.
10.
Install the RH loadspace trim panel.

and Installation).
11.
Install the rear quarter trim panels.

and Installation).
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Headliner

Removal
1.
Remove the header rail upper trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Header Rail Upper Trim
Panel (501-18 Convertible Top, Removal and Installation).
2.
Remove the convertible top hydraulic pump access

panel
Release the clip.
3.

complete turns.
4.
5.
Release the convertible top compartment lid.

Release using the cable.

Raise the rear of the convertible top.
6.
Release the rear edge of the converible top

headliner.
Remove the securing bracket.
7.
Release the headliner from the rear window.

Release from the Velcro strip.
8.
Release the heated rear window wires from the

headliner.
Disconnect both heated rear window
Release the heated rear window wires from
the headliner.
9.
Reposition the rear window

Fold over the rear window to allow access
to the headliner retaining screws.
10.
NOTE: Take note of the routing.

Release the headliner rear tension straps.
Release the 2 springs.
11.
Release the headliner from the rear of the

convertible top frame.
12.

Release the headliner central tension straps.
13.
14.
15.
Release the headliner from the center of the

Release the headliner from the front of the

Remove the 2 bolts.
Collect the retaining bracket.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Ensure grease from latching mechanisms does

not contact the headliner.
Secure the headliner to the front of the convertible top frame.
Position the the retaining bracket.
Install and tighten the screws.
2.
Secure the headliner to the center of the convertible top frame.

3.

Attach the headliner central tension straps.
4.
Secure the headliner to the rear of the convertible top frame.

5.

Attach the headliner rear tension straps.
Attach the springs.
6.
Reposition the rear window

Fold over the rear window to allow access to the
headliner retaining screws.
Fold the rear window into fitted position.
7.
Secure the heated rear window wires to the headliner.

Attach the heated rear window wires to the headliner.
8.
Secure the rear edge of the converible top headliner.

Position the securing bracket.
9.

10.
Install the header rail upper trim panel.

11.

bolt.
Tighten to 2 Nm.
12.
Install the convertible top hydraulic pump access panel

Secure in the clip.
13.
Operate the convertible top fully in each direction.

Depress the switch.
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Latch

Removal
1.

For additional information, refer to: Header Rail Upper Trim Panel (501-18
Convertible Top, Removal and Installation).
2.
Release the convertible top locking mechanism rod.

Remove the retaining clip.
3.
NOTE: Electrical connector is installed on the LH latch only.

Release the convertible top latch assembly.
4.
Remove the convertible top latch assembly.

Remove the 4 nuts.
Release the drive cable.
Installation
1.
Install the convertible top latch assembly.

Attach the drive cable.
2.
Attach the convertible top locking mechanism rod.

Install the retaining clip.
3.

For additional information, refer to: Header Rail Upper Trim Panel (501-18
Convertible Top, Removal and Installation).
Convertible Top - Header Rail Upper Trim Panel

Removal
1.
Release the convertible top front latches.

Depress the switch.
2.

Installation
1.

2.
Close the the convertible top.

Depress the switch.
Convertible Top - Header Rail Weatherstrip

Removal
1.

Depress the switch.
2.
3.
Release the header rail weatherstrip.

Remove the 4 clips.
Remove the header rail weatherstrip.

Release from the header rail.
Installation
1.
Install the header rail weatherstrip.

Attach to the header rail.
2.
Secure the header rail weatherstrip.

Install the clips.
3.

Depress the switch.
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Compartment Lid

Removal
1.
2.

Depress the switch.
Support as necessary.
Release the convertible top compartment lid lift cylinder.

Release the clip.
3.
With assistance, remove the convertible top

compartment lid.
Remove the 4 bolts.
4.
Remove the convertible top compartment lid

buffers.
Release the clips.
5.
Remove the convertible top compartment lid pad.

6.
Remove the convertible top compartment lid lift

cylinder spigot.
7.

strikers.
Remove the 4 bolts.
8.
Remove the convertible top compartment

moulding.
Remove the 10 nuts.
9.
Remove the convertible top compartment trim

panel.
Installation
1.
Install the convertible top compartment trim panel.

2.
Install the convertible top compartment moulding.

3.
Install the convertible top compartment lid strikers.

4.
Install the convertible top compartment lid lift cylinder spigot.
5.
Install the convertible top compartment lid pad.

6.
Install the convertible top compartment lid buffers.

Release the clips.
7.
Check the convertible top compartment lid profile.

Loosen the locknut.
Adjust the striker.
Check the convertible top compartment lid profile.
8.
With assistance, install the convertible top compartment lid.

9.
Attach the convertible top compartment lid lift cylinder.

10.

Remove the support.
Depress the switch.
11.
If required, adjust the convertible top compartment lid.
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Compartment Lid Trim Panel

Removal
1.

Depress the switch.
2.

buffers.
Release the clips.
3.

4.

moulding.
Remove the 10 nuts.
5.
Remove the convertible top compartment trim

panel.
Installation
1.
Install the convertible top compartment trim panel.

2.

3.

4.

Release the clips.
5.

Remove the support.
Depress the switch.
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Compartment Lid Hinge

Removal
1.
Remove the convertible top compartment lid.

For additional information, refer to: Convertible Top
Compartment Lid (501-18 Convertible Top, Removal and
Installation).
2.

hinge.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
1.
Install the convertible top compartment lid hinge.

2.
Install the convertible top compartment lid.

Installation).
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Compartment Lid Moulding

Removal
1.

Depress the switch.
2.

buffers.
Release the clips.
3.

4.

moulding.
Remove the 10 nuts.
Installation
1.

2.

3.

Release the clips.
4.

Remove the support.
Depress the switch.
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Compartment Lid Latch

Removal
1.

Depress the switch.
2.
Release the luggage compartment retractable cover rail upper

tension strap.
3.
Release the convertible top lid latch.

Remove the 3 bolts.
4.
Release the convertible top lid position switch

Release the switch.
5.
Release the convertible top latch release cable.

Installation
1.
Attach the convertible top latch release cable.

Tighten the Torx bolt.
Install the clip.
2.
Secure the convertible top lid position switch.

Attach the switch.
3.
Secure the convertible top lid latch.

4.

Convertible Top - Convertible Top Compartment Lid Release Cables

Removal
1.

Depress the switch.
2.

Specifications).
3.

and Installation).
4.
Release the convertible top electrical connector

5.
Release the LH convertible top lid latch.

Remove the 3 bolts.
6.
Release the convertible top lid position switch

7.
Release the convertible top lid lift cylinder.

Release the clip.
8.
Release the convertible top lid lift cylinder bracket.

Remove the 2 lower nuts.
Loosen the upper retaining nut.
9.
Release the convertible top latch release cables.

10.
11.
Release the convertible top lid lift cylinder bracket

release cables.
Remove the clip.
Remove the convertible top lid release latch

cables.
Installation
1.
Install the convertible top lid release latch cables.

2.
Attach the convertible top lid lift cylinder bracket release cables.
Remove the clip.
3.
Attach the convertible top latch release cables.

4.
Attach the convertible top lid lift cylinder.

5.
Secure the convertible top lid lift cylinder bracket.

6.
Secure the convertible top lid position switch.

7.
Secure the LH convertible top lid latch.

8.
Secure the convertible top electrical connector.

9.

and Installation).
10.

Specifications).
11.
12.
If required, adjust the convertible top compartment lid.
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Compartment Lid Latch and Cable

Assembly
Removal
1.

Depress the switch.
2.

Specifications).
3.

and Installation).
4.
Release the convertible top electrical connector

5.
Release the convertible top lid latch and cable

assembly.
Release the cables from the 7 clips.
6.
Release the convertible top lid lift cylinder.

Release the clip.
7.
Release the LH convertible top lid latch.

Remove the 3 bolts.
8.
Release the convertible top lid RH latch.

Remove the 3 bolts.
9.
Remove the convertible top lid latch and cable

assembly.
Release the emergency release cable.
Installation
1.
Install the convertible top latch and cable assembly.

Attach the emergency release cable.
2.
Secure the convertible top lid RH latch.

3.
Secure the LH convertible top lid latch.

4.
Attach the convertible top lid lift cylinder.

5.
Secure the convertible top lid latch and cable assembly.

Secure the cables in the clips.
6.
Secure the convertible top electrical connector.

7.

and Installation).
8.

Specifications).
9.

Convertible Top - Convertible Top Motor

Removal
1.

2.
Release the convertible top latch motor.

3.
Remove the convertible top latch motor.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Release the latch motor drive cables.
Installation
1.
Install the convertible top latch motor.

Attach the drive cables.
2.

Convertible Top - Hydraulic System, Lift Cylinder and Motor

Removal
1.

and Installation).
2.

complete turns.
3.
Disconnect the convertible top hydraulic pump

Release the 2 electrical connectors from the
convertible top pump bracket.
4.
Release the convertible top hydraulic pump.

Remove the 3 bolts.
5.

Disconnect the convertible top hydraulic pump
hoses.
Release the hose retaining clamp.
Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
6.
Remove the convertible top hydraulic pump.
Installation
1.
Install the convertible top hydraulic pump.
2.
Connect the convertible top hydraulic pump hoses.

Attach the hoses and position the retaining clamp.
Tighten the Allen bolts to 10 Nm.
3.
Secure the convertible top hydraulic pump.

4.
Connect the convertible top hydraulic pump electrical

connectors.
Secure the electrical connectors to the convertible top
pump bracket.
5.
Fill the convertible top pump with the correct amount of fluid.
Remove the convertible top fluid filler plug.
Top-up the convertible top fluid.
Install the convertible top fluid filler plug.
6.

and Installation).
7.
Cycle the convertible top to bleed the hydraulic system.
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Module

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

Procedures).
3.

Installation).
4.
Remove the convertible top module.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the convertible top module.

2.

Installation).
3.

Specifications).
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Tension Cylinder

Removal
1.
Release the convertible top front latches.

Depress the switch.
2.

panel
Release the clip.
3.

complete turns.
4.
Release the convertible top compartment lid.

Release using the cable.
5.

8.
6.
Release the cylinder cover.

7.
Release the hydraulic cylinder.

CAUTION: Fluid loss is unavoidable care must be taken to

protect the interior of the vehicle.
Disconnect the hydraulic cylinder lines.
Withdraw the hydraulic lines from the cylinder, remove
and discard the O-rings.
9.
Remove the hydraulic cylinder.

Remove and discard the 3 cable ties.
RH hydraulic cylinder only: Disconnect the
Installation
1.
Connect the hydraulic cylinder lines.

Lubricate and install the new O-rings.
Connect the hydraulic lines to the cylinder.
2.
Install the hydraulic cylinder.

RH hydraulic cylinder only: Connect the electrical
connector.
Secure with cable ties.
3.
Install the cylinder cover.

4.

5.

bolt.
Tighten to 2 Nm.
6.

Secure in the clip.
7.

Depress the switch.
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Compartment Lid Lift Cylinder

Removal
1.

Depress the switch.
2.

panel
Release the clip.
3.

complete turns.
4.

cylinder cover.
Release the clip.
Release the lift cylinder
5.
Release the convertible top compartment lid lift

cylinder.
Disconnect the 2 fluid lines.
6.

cylinder.
Release the clip.
Installation
1.
Install the convertible top compartment lid lift cylinder.

2.
Install the convertible top compartment lid lift cylinder cover.

Attach the lift cylinder.
3.
Secure the convertible top compartment lid lift cylinder.

Connect the 2 fluid lines.
4.

5.

Tighten the convertible top system pressure Allen bolt.
Tighten to 2 Nm.
6.
Cycle the convertible top to bleed the hydraulic system.
7.
Check the convertible top fluid level.
8.

Secure in the clip.
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Material

Removal
1.
Remove the converible top headliner.

For additional information, refer to: Convertible Top Headliner
2.
NOTE: Note the fitted position of the spacers

Remove the convertible top front seal carriers.
Release the seal.
Collect the spacers.
3.
4.
Remove the convertible top side seal carriers.

Release the seal.
Drill out the 6 rivets.
Carefully release the convertible top outer material

from the rear seal.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
NOTE: Note the routing of the convertible top

tension cables.
Release the convertible top tension cables.
Remove and discard the 4 clips.
Release the tension cables from the
Withdraw from the convertible top material.
6.
Release the convertible top retaining straps.

7.
Release the front edge of the convertible top

material.
8.
Remove the convertible top outer material.

Release the convertible top material from
the frame.
Installation
1.
Install the convertible top outer material.

Secure the convertible top material to the frame.
2.
Secure the front edge of the convertible top material.

3.
Secure the convertible top outer material retaining straps.

4.
Feed the tension cables through the convertible top outer

material ensuring the correct routing.
Attach the tension cables to the convertible top frame.
Install new clips.
5.
Secure the convertible top to the rear seal.

Carefully open the rear seal sufficiently to locate the
convertible top outer material.
Attach the convertible top outer material.
Clamp the seal to retain the outer material.
6.
Install the convertible top side seal carriers.

Install the rivets.
Attach the seal.
7.
Install the convertible top front seal carriers.

Install the spacers.
Attach the seal.
8.
Install the converible top headliner.

For additional information, refer to: Convertible Top Headliner
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Striker

Removal
1.
2.

3.
Remove the header rail.

4.
Remove the convertible to latch striker.

Installation
1.
Install the convertible to latch striker.

stage.
Secure the wiring harness clip.
2.
Install the header rail.

Tighten the screws.
3.
Secure the convertible to latch striker.

4.

5.
Convertible Top - Convertible Top Rear Panel Lower Weatherstrip

Removal
1.

Depress the switch.
2.
Release the rear edge of the convertible top rear

panel lower weatherstrip.
Remove the main carrier.
3.

Depress the switch.
4.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that filings and swarf do not enter

the component.

Remove the convertible top rear panel lower
weatherstrip C-post carriers.
Release the seal.
Drill out the 6 rivets.
5.
CAUTION: LH illustration shown, RH is

similar.
Remove the convertible top rear panel lower
weatherstrip.
Carefully release the convertible top rear
panel lower weatherstrip from the outer
material.
Installation
1.
Install the convertible top rear panel lower weatherstrip carriers.

Install the convertible top rear panel lower weatherstrip
C-post carrier to the seal.
Install the convertible top rear panel lower weatherstrip
seal to the main carrier.
2.
CAUTION: Make sure that the seal is

correctly positioned and does not move during
installation. Failure to follow this instruction may
Make sure that the seal is correctly positioned.
Make sure that the datum mark is
positioned 142mm from the edge of the
main carrier.
Repeat the operation for the other side.
3.
Install the convertible top rear panel lower

weatherstrip and carriers assembly.
Clamp the convertible top outer material
between the convertible top rear lower
weatherstrip seal and the roof frame.
Install and secure the rivets in the
sequence shown.
4.

Depress the switch.
5.
6.
Secure the rear edge of the convertible top rear

panel lower weatherstrip.
Install the Torx screws and tighten to 4 Nm
in the sequence shown.
Make sure that the datum marks are still
positioned 142mm from the edge of the
main carrier.

Depress the switch.
Bumpers Torque Specifications
Item
Foam to front bumper beam (ROW markets) - screw
Front bumper cover - guide screw
Front bumper cover to vehicle panels - screw
Front bumper undertray to vehicle - screw
Rear bumper beam to crash tubes - bolt
Rear bumper cover to panel brackets - screw
Rear bumper, crash tubes to vehicle - nut
Nm
6
18
4
4
15
4
23
lb-ft
13
11
17
lb-in
53
35
35
35
-
Bumpers - Front Bumper

Removal
1.

2.

Specifications).
3.

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover (50119, Removal and Installation).
4.
Remove the crush pad.

Remove the 3 clips.
Vehicles with a pedestrian impact sensor
only: Remove 2 additional bolts.
5.
Remove the air deflector.

Remove the 3 clips.
opposite hand.
6.
Remove the front bumper.

Remove the 8 bolts.
7.

Remove the ambient air temperature sensor.
Installation
1.
Install the ambient air temperature sensor.
2.
Install the front bumper.

3.
Install the air deflectors.

Secure the clips.
4.
Install the crush pad.

Secure the clips.
Vehicles with a pedestrian impact sensor only: Install the
additional bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
5.
Install the front bumper cover.

6.

Specifications).
Bumpers - Front Bumper Cover

Removal
1.

2.

3.
4.

Torque: 4 Nm
5.

Torque: 4 Nm
6.

Torque: 4 Nm
7.
8.
Torque: 4 Nm
9.
CAUTION: Always protect paintwork and

glass when removing exterior components.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

to avoid damage.
Drill out the 3 rivets
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Installation
1.
2.
Bumpers - Rear Bumper

Removal
1.

2.

3.
With assistance, remove the bumper.

Remove the 4 bolts.
4.
Remove the 2 crush tubes.

Remove the 8 nuts.
Installation
1.
Install the 2 crush tubes.

2.
With assistance, install the bumper.

Tighten the M8 bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
3.
Install the rear bumper cover.

Bumpers - Rear Bumper Cover

Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.
Remove both rear wheels and tires.

3.
Remove the LH rear quarter trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel - 2Door (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
4.
Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.

Remove the clip.
5.
Release the rear lower edge of the LH fender

splash shield.
side.
6.
CAUTION: Take great care when removing

the rear lamp assembly as the forward point of the
lens can be easily damaged.
Remove the rear lamp assembly.
Remove the 2 nuts.
side.
7.
NOTE: Naturally aspirated graphic shown,

supercharged is similar.
Remove 4 clips from the lower edge of the bumper
cover.
8.
9.
Remove 3 bolts from the LH rear wheel arch.

side.
Remove 2 bolts from the LH inner quarter panel.

10.
Disconnect the bumper harness electrical

connector.

11.
Release the exhaust sound enhancement vacuum

pump assembly.
Remove the bolt.
Release the wiring harness clip.
All vehicles
12.
With assistance, remove the rear bumper cover.

Remove the 6 bolts.
Release the wiring harness grommet.
Release the harness.
13.

Remove the LH tire pressure antenna.
Remove the 2 clips.
side.
14.
Remove the bumper harness.

15.
Remove the bumper insert.

Remove the 2 clips.
16.

17.
Remove the lower trim panel.

Remove the 2 bolts.
18.
Installation
All vehicles
1.
Install the clips.
2.
Install the lower trim panel.

3.
Install the parking aid sensor.

4.
Install the bumper insert.

Install the clips.
5.

for access only.
6.

Install the clips.
7.
With assistance, install the rear bumper cover.

Install the bolts and tighten to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).

8.
Attach the exhaust sound enhancement vacuum pump.

Tighten the bolt to 7 Nm (5 lb.ft)
Secure the wiring harness clip.
All vehicles
9.
Secure the lower edge of the bumper cover.
10.

Install the rear lamp assembly.
Tighten the nuts to 2 Nm (1.5 lb.ft).
11.

12.
Install the RH rear quarter trim panel.

Install the clip.
13.
Install the LH rear quarter trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel - 2Door (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
14.
Install the wheels and tires.

Safety Belt System Torque Specifications
Item
Front safety belt anchorage - bolt*
Front safety belt retractor - bolt*
Rear safety belt anchorage - bolt*
Rear safety belt retractor - bolt*
Rear safety belt buckle - bolt*
* Install new nut/bolt.
Nm
35
35
35
35
35
lb-ft
26
26
26
26
26
lb-in
-
Safety Belt System - Safety Belt System

COMPONENT LOCATION
NOTE: Safety belts and retractors are a single assembly.
Item
Part Number
RH (right hand) front safety belt
RH front safety belt retractor
RH rear safety belt buckle
RH rear safety belt retractor
LH (left hand) rear safety belt retractor
LH rear safety belt retractor
LH front safety belt retractor
LH front safety belt
10
Description
LH front safety belt buckle

RH front safety belt buckle
INTRODUCTION
A three point safety belt is installed in all seating positions. Each safety belt has ELR (emergency locking retractor)
functionality.
The ELR function incorporates a lift shaft locking system with webbing sensor and car sensing activating mechanisms. The
webbing sensor activates the locking mechanism if the webbing is subjected to a sharp pull. The car sensor activates the
locking system if the vehicle is subjected to sudden deceleration or severe tilt angle.
All rear seat passengers and NAS front passenger ELRs are enhanced with ALR (automatic locking retractor) functionality.
The ALR allows webbing to be extracted to activate a ratchet device. This device allows webbing to be cinched tight to
facilitate child seat fitment. With safety belt webbing tensioned in ALR mode the safety belt is always locked.
All driver and front passenger ELRs incorporate an electrically activated webbing tension reducer (comfort device). This
device is activated at vehicle ignition on and insertion of safety belt tongue into buckle.
A safety belt warning indicator is installed in the instrument cluster to remind the front seat occupants to fasten their safety
belts. The warning indicator illuminates if the safety belt of an occupied front seat is not fastened. On NAS vehicles the belt
minder system will ignore the state of the passenger safety belt for the first 75 seconds after ignition on. The warning
indicator remains illuminated until the safety belt of each occupied front seat is fastened, or the ignition is switched off.
FRONT SAFETY BELTS

The retractor of each front safety belt is attached to the related B pillar mounting bracket. The webbing runs from the
retractor through a fixed D loop bracket mounted on the upper B pillar upper an anchor point on the sill.
The retractor for each front safety belt incorporates a load limiter that allows the retractor reel to partially unwind when the
load on the webbing exceeds a predetermined limit.
The buckle for each front safety belt is attached to a pretensioner secured to the inboard side of the related front seat frame.
Each buckle incorporates a safety belt buckle sensor that provides a status input to the RCM (restraints control module),
which uses the input to determine the air bag and pretensioner activation strategies. The RCM also relays the status of the
safety belts to the instrument cluster on the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
Belt Minder Function

Safety Belt Warning Indicator
The belt minder function provides warnings to the driver if the appropriate front safety belts are not fastened when driving.
The belt minder function is controlled by the instrument cluster using:
High speed CAN bus messages, from the RCM, to monitor the status of the front safety belts.
An input from the occupant classification system to monitor the status of the front passenger seat.
When the ignition is switched to on, the instrument cluster illuminates the safety belt warning indicator until one of the front
safety belts is fastened or the belt minder function is triggered. The belt minder function is triggered when the ignition switch
is in accessory/convenience and the following conditions coexist:
The belt minder function is enabled.

Vehicle speed is 8 km/h (5 mph) or more.
The vehicle is not in reverse.
The driver safety belt or, if the front passenger seat is occupied, the front passenger safety belt, is unfastened.
When the belt minder is triggered, the instrument cluster generates the following warnings for 10 seconds.
Flashes the safety belt warning indicator at 2 Hz.
Sounds a repeating chime in sequence with the flashing safety belt warning indicator.
After 10 seconds, the repeating chime is discontinued and the safety belt warning indicator changes from flashing to
continuously illuminated for 20 seconds. While the trigger conditions still coexist, the warnings are repeated every 30
seconds until one of the following occurs:
5 minutes has elapsed from when the warnings were first triggered.
The safety belt of each occupied front seat is fastened.
The ignition mode is position 0.
The vehicle speed decreases to 5 km/h (3 mph).
For non NAS vehicles the belt minder function can be enabled and disabled using the driver safety belt switch. The
instrument cluster changes the state of the belt minder function if, within 60 seconds of first entering ignition mode II, the
driver safety belt is fastened and unfastened nine times. Successful completion of the change is indicated by a single chime
and the safety belt warning indicator flashing five times, at 2 Hz. The belt minder function can also be enabled and disabled
using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
REAR SAFETY BELTS

The retractor of each rear safety belt is attached to the rear shelf immediately behind the seat. The retractors are located in
the center of the shelf. The webbing runs from the retractor to an anchor point in the center of the vehicle either side of the
transmission tunnel. The safety belt buckles are attached to the vehicle body on the outboard side of each seat.
Safety Belt System - Safety Belt System

For a detailed description of the safety belt system and operation, refer to the relevant description and operation
section of the workshop manual REFER to: (501-20A Safety Belt System)
Safety Belt System (Description and Operation),
Safety Belt System (Description and Operation),
Safety Belt System (Description and Operation).
Safety Information
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment the back-up power supply must be depleted before beginning any work on the
SRS system or its components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury
Do not use a multimeter to probe an SRS module. It is possible for the power from the multimeter battery to
trigger the activation of the module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury
NOTE: Do not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on the SRS system or
components
Power supply depletion
Before beginning any work on the SRS system or related components:
1.
Remove the ignition key
2.
Disconnect the battery leads, ground first
3.
Wait 2 minutes for the power circuit to discharge
There are comprehensive instructions on the correct procedures for SRS system repairs, refer to the relevant section of
the workshop manual
vehicle
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines including pinpoint tests
1.
Verify the customer concern by operating the safety belt
2.
Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Check for the installation of non-standard accessories which may affect or
obstruct the function of the safety belt system

Frayed or damaged webbing
Missing or damaged button stop
Pretensioner(s) Buckles/Stalks
Electrical
Fuses
Correct engagement of
electrical connectors
Loose or corroded
connections
Warning lamp bulb(s)
Impact sensor(s)
Buckle sensor(s)
Pretensioner(s)
Belt tension sensor(s)
Restraints control module
3.
4.
If the cause is not visually evident, carry out the test methods described below, alternatively check for
diagnostic trouble codes and refer to the relevant diagnostic trouble code index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to section 100-00.
REFER to: Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Symptom Chart for Safety Belt Rows 1, 2

Symptom
Safety belt jammed Webbing tight
Possible Causes
Safety belt jammed Webbing loose
Safety belt - Intermittent

jamming
Safety belt - Slow
retraction
Safety belt - Not

retracting
Safety Belt - Not

extracting
Safety belt - Noisy during

operation
Safety belt buckle - Not

latching / jammed
Action
Backlock effect-in action (webbing
retracted quickly and came to sudden

stop)
Safety belt retractor not installed correctly
Automatic locking retractor activated
(clicking during retraction only)
Safety belt webbing trapped in seat
Safety belt retractor webbing guide loose
Twist in webbing
Interference in webbing routing
D-loop not rotating correctly
Twist in safety belt webbing
Foreign object/debris
Backlock effect-in action (webbing
retracted quickly and came to sudden
stop)
(clicking during retraction only)
(clickingduring retraction only)
Interference in webbing routing (rubbing)
See the automatic locking
retractor description below
See the automatic locking
retractor description below
CAUTION: Do not insert any objects

or tools into the buckle head
Inertia Reel Safety Belts

The vehicle is equipped with (two row one) and (three row two) inertia reel safety belts
These safety belts are "dual sensitive" which means that they have:
Car sense system - A vehicle motion sensor, which locks the safety belt webbing under braking,
cornering, on steep hills and in adverse camber conditions, when parked on a steep incline or
driveway or two wheels on a high curb

Web sense system - A webbing motion sensor, which locks when the safety belt webbing is
extracted suddenly
The safety belts in the following positions are equipped with an automatic locking retractor function:
Carline
Market
Seat position
Automatic Locking Retractor Installed
From
XK (X150)
All
Driver
No
XK (X150)
ROW
Passenger
No
XK (X150)
US
Passenger
Yes
XK (X150)
ROW
Row 2
Yes
XK (X150)
US
Row 2
Yes
XF (X250)
All
Driver
No
XF (X250)
ROW
Passenger
No
XF (X250)
US
Passenger
Yes
XF (X250)
ROW
Row 2
No
XF (X250)
US
Row 2
Yes
XJ (X351)
All
Driver
No
XJ (X351)
ROW
Passenger
No
XJ (X351)
US
Passenger
Yes
XJ (X351)
ROW
Row 2
No
XJ (X351)
US
Row 2
Yes
The automatic locking retractor function is a feature to secure a child seat or heavy load to the seat
Model Year
2007
2007
2007
2007
2007
2009
2009
2009
2009
2009
2010
2010
2010
2010
2010
Activation
Deactivation
NOTE: When automatic locking retractor is activated, no further webbing Automatic locking retractor is deactivated by
can be drawn from the safety belt retractor, prior to disengagement of
allowing the webbing to retract until the
the automatic locking. This can be mistaken as a jammed safety belt
clicking stops (close to park position)
retractor
Activated by total extraction of the webbing
When activated the automatic locking retractor is identified by a clicking
noise during webbing retraction
When deactivated the automatic locking

retractor safety belt changes state, from a
static safety belt to an automatic safety belt
Safety Belt Locking Test

With the vehicle stationary and on level ground take firm hold of the safety belt webbing (on the tongue side of the
upper safety belt anchor) and withdraw sharply, the retractor should lock. Preventing further webbing release
(repeat this test 3 times). Any safety belt retractor which fails to lock must not be used and a new safety belt
must be installed.
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00 or for removal
and installation/description and operation see Section 501-20
Diagnostic Guide Inertia Reel Safety Belts

PINPOINT TEST A : BACKLOCK
TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: BACKLOCK
Visually inspect the condition of the suspect safety belt
Draw a maximum of 20mm of the webbing from the safety belt retractor with moderate force.
Then release the webbing
Check for correct operation twice
3
Does the webbing move freely then retract correctly?
Yes
No
For first row safety belt GO to Pinpoint Test C. For second and third row safety belts GO to
Pinpoint Test B.
PINPOINT TEST B : WEBBING-TRAPPED IN SEAT

TEST
CONDITIONS
B1: WEBBING-TRAPPED IN SEAT
1
Visually inspect the condition of the suspect safety belt
2
Lift the seat base or release the seat backrest as required
Free the trapped webbing, allow the webbing to retract Note: If the automatic locking
retractor is activated, allow the webbing to retract until the clicking stops
4
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR-WEBBING GUIDE LOOSE

TEST
CONDITIONS
C1: SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR-WEBBING GUIDE LOOSE
Refer to 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, remove any trim
1
panels required to expose the D loop (anchor point) and safety belt retractor
Check the webbing is not trapped or twisted and is centrally located on the safety belt retractor
2
spindle
Attempt to withdraw the webbing from the safety belt retractor NOTE: If the safety belt
3
webbing is jammed, the automatic locking retractor could be engaged
To release the automatic locking retractor, manually wind the webbing onto the spindle until the
4
automatic locking retractor deactivates (clicking stops)
Fully extract webbing
5
Confirm webbing guide location is correct , Confirm the fixing lugs are correctly located in the
retractor frame
Allow webbing to retract

Yes
Refer to the 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, reinstall any trim
panels, ensure there are no obstructions and the webbing does not catch or rub. No further
action required
No
PINPOINT TEST D : TWIST IN WEBBING

TEST
CONDITIONS
D1: TWIST IN WEBBING
Refer to section 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, remove any
1
trim panels required to expose the D loop (anchor point)
Twist the webbing back the correct way in the loop
2
3
Pass the twist through the pillar loop or escutcheon as required

4
Yes
action required
No
PINPOINT TEST E : INTERFERENCE-WEBBING ROUTING

TEST
CONDITIONS
E1: INTERFERENCE-WEBBING ROUTING
Refer to the 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, remove any trim
1
panels required to expose the D loop (anchor point)
Remove obstructions and foreign objects ensure the webbing does not catch or rub
2
3
Confirm the safety belt does not contact the wiring harness
Yes
action required
No
PINPOINT TEST F : SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR-INCORRECT INSTALLATION

TEST
CONDITIONS
F1: SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR-INCORRECT INSTALLATION
1
panels required to expose the D loop (anchor point) and the safety belt retractor
Refer to the 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, correctly reinstall
2
the safety belt retractor ensure that the locating "T bar" and "anti rotation pins" are correctly
located
3
Yes
action required
No
PINPOINT TEST G : D-LOOP NOT ROTATING CORRECTLY

TEST
CONDITIONS
G1: D-LOOP NOT ROTATING CORRECTLY
1
panels required to expose the D loop (anchor point) and the safety belt retractor
Ensure there are no obstructions and the webbing does not catch or rub, the D loop (anchor
2
point) rotates correctly and if installed the confirm the height adjuster operates correctly
3
Yes
action required
No
Replace as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual, or determine if any
prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component
PINPOINT TEST H : SAFETY BELT BUCKLE NOT LATCHING/JAMMED

TEST
CONDITIONS
H1: SAFETY BELT BUCKLE NOT LATCHING/JAMMED
CAUTION: Do not insert any objects or tools into the buckle head
1
Visually inspect the buckle head for evidence of damage. If damaged replace as required
2
3
4
5
Depress the buckle release (red button) and (Using a torch) carry out visual inspection for
any evidence of debris/material or foreign objects in the buckle head
If required remove the pretensioner from the vehicle. Remove the seat. Remove the
pretensioner from the seat frame
Do not insert any objects or tools buckle head With the buckle removed invert and attempt
to shake out any debris
Attempt to latch the tongue in the buckle
Does the seat belt buckle operate correctly

Yes
Reinstall any components, no further action required
No
Replace the pretensioner, REFER to:
Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing),
Front Safety Belt Retractor (501-20A Safety Belt System, Removal and Installation).
Safety Belt System - Front Safety Belt Buckle

Removal
1.
2.

Procedures).
3.

4.

straps.
5.
Remove the front seat safety belt pretensioner.

Release and disconnect the electrical
connector.
Installation
1.
Install the front seat safety belt pretensioner.

2.
3.

4.
Safety Belt System - Rear Safety Belt Buckle

Removal
1.
Remove the rear seat cushion.

2.

3.

Installation
1.

2.

3.
Install the rear seat cushion.

Safety Belt System - Rear Safety Belt Retractor 2-Door

Removal
1.

For additional information, refer to: Parcel Shelf (501-05 Interior
2.
Release the safety belt.

Remove and discard the safety belt lower
anchor nut.
3.
Remove the safety belt assembly.

Installation
1.
Install the safety belt assembly.

2.
Secure the safety belt.

Attach the safety belt lower anchor, install a new nut and
3.

For additional information, refer to: Parcel Shelf (501-05 Interior
Safety Belt System - Front Safety Belt Retractor

Removal
1.

Procedures).
2.

Installation) /
Rear Quarter Trim Panel - Convertible (501-05 Interior Trim and
3.
Remove the safety belt retractor assembly.

Installation
1.
Install the safety belt retractor assembly.

2.

Installation) /
Rear Quarter Trim Panel - Convertible (501-05 Interior Trim and
Safety Belt System - Rear Safety Belt Retractor Convertible

Removal
1.

Depress the switch.
2.

3.
4.
Release the rear seat backrest trim panel.

Remove the 2 clips.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Position the rear seat backrest trim panel
aside.
Remove the rear safety belt trim panel.

Remove the 2 nuts.
5.

Remove and discard the safety belt lower
anchor nut.
6.
Remove the safety belt assembly.

Installation
1.
Install the safety belt assembly.

Position the safety belt through the rear seat backrest
trim panel.
2.
Secure the safety belt.

Attach the safety belt lower anchor, install a new nut and
3.
Install the rear safety belt trim panel.

4.
Install the rear seat backrest trim panel.

Install the clips.
5.

6.
Close the the convertible top.

Depress the switch.
Supplemental Restraint System Torque Specifications
Item
Airbag crash sensor to B-post - bolt
Airbag crash sensor to radiator support - bolt
Child upper anchorage (coupe) - bolt
Roll-over protection unit to back seat panel - bolt
Restraints control module - nut
Nm
8
8
25
25
8
lb-ft
18
18
-
lb-in
71
71
71
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS)

Item
Part Number
Description
Passenger air bag
Air bag warning indicator
Driver air bag
PAD (passenger air bag deactivation) indicator
COMPONENT LOCATION (COUPE) - SHEET 2 OF 3

Item
Part Number
Description
Safety belt tension sensor
RH (right hand) side air bag
Side impact sensor
RH safety belt pretensioner
Side impact sensor
LH (left hand) side air bag
LH safety belt pretensioner
Seat position sensor
Front impact sensor
10
Front impact sensor
11
12
Occupancy sensor
COMPONENT LOCATION (CONVERTIBLE) - SHEET 3 OF 3

Item
Part Number
Description
Occupancy sensor
RH side air bag
Side impact sensor
RH safety belt pretensioner
Roll over protection hoop
Side impact sensor
LH side air bag
10
LH safety belt pretensioner
11
12
Front impact sensor
13
Front impact sensor
14
INTRODUCTION
WARNING: All pyrotechnic devices are dangerous. Before performing any procedures on any pyrotechnic device, read
all information contained within the Standard Workshop Practices section of this manual.
The SRS (supplemental restraint system) provides additional protection for occupants in certain vehicle accident conditions.
The SRS comprises the following sub-systems:
Driver and passenger front air bag system.

Roll over protection system (convertible only).
Driver and passenger side air bag system.
Safety belt pretension system.
Occupant detection system or classification system.
The SRS features selective activation of the air bags and safety belt pretensioners, and two stage driver and passenger air
bags. The RCM (restraints control module) monitors internal and external sensors and activates the required safety belt
pretensioners, air bags and roll over protection hoops (convertible only) if the sensors detect an impact or roll over above
preset limits.
The roll over protection system comprises two spring loaded hoops located behind the rear seat. The hoops incorporate a pin
to break the rear window glass as the hoop is released. The hoops are released by a pyrotechnic device when the RCM
detects a roll over condition.
RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE
The RCM is installed on the top of the transmission tunnel, in line with the B pillars, and controls operation of the SRS. The
main functions of the RCM include:
Crash detection and recording.
Air bag and pretensioner firing.
Self test and system monitoring, with status indication via the air bag warning indicator and non volatile storage of
fault information.
The RCM determines which elements of the SRS are to be deployed by using two internal areas:
Crash severity evaluation
This area evaluates crash severity by using data from the RCM internal accelerometer, the front impact sensor and the safety
belt sensors. Based on this data, the RCM decides which level of air bag module deployment is required and forwards the
information to the second area, the deployment handler.
Deployment handler
The status of the seat position sensor and safety belt sensors are examined before a decision is made about which restraints
should finally be deployed.
Data from the side impact sensors is used by the RCM in conjunction with acceleration data from the RCM internal
accelerometer to make a deployment decision. The RCM processes the acceleration data and subject to an impact being of
high enough severity, decides whether the side air bag module should be deployed.
On board testing of the air bag modules, safety belt pretensioner firing circuits, warning indicator circuits and module status
(the front and side impact sensors perform basic self-tests) is performed by the RCM together with the storing of fault codes.
The RCM drives the SRS warning indicator on the instrument pack via a CAN (controller area network) signal. If the warning
indicator fails, a fault code is recorded and a warning tone is sounded in place of the warning indicator if a further fault
occurs. It also provides a temporary back-up power supply to operate the air bag modules in the event that, in crash
conditions, the battery supply is lost. In the event of a crash, it records certain data which can be accessed via the diagnostic
connector.
A safing sensor in the RCM provides confirmation of an impact to verify if air bag and pretensioner activation is necessary. A
roll over sensor monitors the lateral attitude of the vehicle. Various firing strategies are employed by the RCM to ensure that
during an accident only the appropriate air bags and pretensioners are fired. The firing strategy used also depends on the
inputs from the safety belt sensors and the occupant monitoring system.
An energy reserve in the RCM ensures there is always a minimum of 150 milliseconds of stored energy available if the power
supply from the ignition switch is disrupted during a crash. The stored energy is sufficient to produce firing signals for the
driver air bag, the passenger air bag and the safety belt pretensioners.
When the ignition is switched on the RCM performs a self test and then performs cyclical monitoring of the system. If a fault
is detected the RCM stores a related fault code and illuminates the air bag warning indicator. The faults can be retrieved by a
Jaguar approved diagnostic system over the high speed CAN bus. If a fault that could cause a false fire signal is detected,
the RCM disables the respective firing circuit, and keeps it disabled during a crash event
CLOCKSPRING
The clockspring is installed on the steering column to provide the electrical interface between the fixed wiring harness of the
steering column and the components that rotate with the steering wheel, i.e. the driver air bag, the horn and the steering
wheel switch packs.
The clockspring consists of a plastic cassette which incorporates an outer cover fixed to the steering column and an inner
rotor which turns with the steering wheel. Four securing lugs attach the cover to the multifunction switch on the steering
column. The rotor is keyed to the steering wheel by a drive peg. A lug on the underside of the rotor operates the selfcancelling feature of the turn signal indicator switch. A ribbon lead, threaded on rollers in the rotor, links two connectors on
the cover to two connectors on the rotor. Link leads for the driver air bag are installed in one of the connectors on the rotor.
To prevent damage to the ribbon lead, both the steering and the clockspring must be centralized when removing and
installing the clockspring or the steering wheel. The clockspring is centralized when the drive peg is at six o'clock and 50 100% of a yellow wheel is visible in the viewing window.
Replacement clocksprings are fitted with a stopper, which locks the cover to the rotor in the central position. The stopper
must be broken off when the replacement clockspring is installed.
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
The driver air bag module is controlled by the RCM, which chooses between single or dual stage deployment depending on
the occupant position and the crash severity. To reduce the risk of an air bag module induced injury to a driver that is
positioned close to the steering wheel, the air bag module deploys radially. It has a non-azide propellant that reduces
particulates and effluents. It consists of a two stage inflator with separate chambers for the two inflation stages, each being
independently activated by the RCM. It has two electrical connectors that are color coded and mechanically keyed to the
respective connector on the inflator.
PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
Item
Part Number
Description
Passenger air bag module cover
Passenger air bag module retainer
Passenger air bag module container
Passenger air bag module inflator
The passenger air bag module is controlled by the RCM, which chooses between single or dual stage deployment depending
on the occupant status and the crash severity. It consists of a two stage inflator with two air bag electrical connectors to
accommodate the two stage inflation.
The heated gas inflator consists of a high pressure mix of clean air and hydrogen gas, triggered by two separate ignition
squibs. It produces a controlled generation of clean gas to rapidly fill the air bag. It is classified as a stored flammable gas
(not as an explosive) and, as such, has less restrictive storage and transportation requirements. It produces a very clean
burn and almost no particulates and is almost free of any toxins, making disposal or recycling much easier.
SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
Item
Part Number
Description
Side air bag
Seat frame
Side air bag electrical connector
The side air bag module is mounted in the outboard bolster of each front seat and uses compressed gas to inflate. It
provides protection for the thorax (the part of the trunk between the neck and the abdomen) and the head. In an air bag
deployment situation, it deploys through the stitch seam in the side bolster. To ensure the air bag always emerges at the
same point, a chute is attached to the inside of the trim cover and wrapped around the air bag module.
IMPACT SENSORS
Two front impact sensors are attached to the body behind the radiator grille. The RCM processes the crash data sent by the
impact sensors against stored data, and deploys the front air bags and pretensioners.
Two side impact sensors are mounted at the base of the B pillars to facilitate lateral impact sensing. In the event of a side
impact, the RCM processes the crash data against the stored data. The RCM will deploy the side air bag module on the side
the deployment request was initiated.
SEAT POSITION SENSOR
Item
Part Number
Description
Seat rail
Floor runner
4
Seat position trigger
A seat position sensor is installed on the driver seat. The seat position sensor allows the RCM to detect when the seat is
forward of a given point on the seat track. The seat position sensor consists of a Hall effect sensor attached to the seat
frame and a target plate on the seat base. While the ignition is on, the RCM supplies the sensor with a power supply of 12 V
nominal, and monitors the return voltage. When the seat frame moves forwards, the sensor moves over the target plate,
which changes the reluctance of the sensor. The change of voltage is detected by the RCM and used as a switching point.
The switching point is when the center of the sensor is 3 4 mm (0.12 0.16 in.) from the leading edge of the target plate.
When the driver seat is forward of the switching point, the RCM increases the time delay between firing the two stages of the
inflator in the driver air bag. When the seat is rearward of the switching point, the RCM uses the normal time delay between
firing the two stages.
SAFETY BELT SENSORS

The buckle of each front safety belt incorporates a Hall effect sensor that provides a safety belt status signal to the RCM.
When a safety belt is unfastened the sensor outputs a low current to the RCM. When the safety belt is fastened the switch
outputs a high current to the RCM.
The RCM broadcasts the status of the two front safety belts on the high speed CAN bus for use by the instrument cluster. In
the event of a front impact the RCM will deploy the pretensioners provided the safety belt buckles are fastened. The
pretensioners have a lower deployment threshold than that required by the air bags. Hence it is possible during a minor
collision, which exceeds the deployment threshold, that only the pretensioners will deploy.
For additional information, refer to: Safety Belt System (501-20A Safety Belt System, Description and Operation).
PRETENSIONERS
Item
Part Number
Description
Pyrotechnic pretensioner
Safety belt buckle
The pretensioners are used to tighten the front safety belts during a collision to ensure the occupants are securely held in
their seats. A pretensioner is integrated into each front safety belt buckle.
Each pretensioner has a tube containing an inflator and a piston. The inflator is connected to the RCM. The piston is attached
to a steel cable, the opposite end of which is attached to the safety belt buckle.
On receipt of a fire signal from the RCM, the inflator generates nitrogen gas that rapidly expands to drive the piston along
the tube, pulling the cable and drawing the safety belt buckle downwards.
AIR BAG WARNING INDICATOR
The air bag warning indicator consists of an amber LED (light emitting diode) behind a graphic in the tachometer of the
instrument cluster.
Operation of the air bag warning indicator is controlled by a high speed CAN bus message from the RCM to the instrument
cluster. The RCM illuminates the air bag warning indicator if a fault is detected, and for approximately 6 seconds during the
indicator check at the beginning of each ignition cycle.
OCCUPANT MONITORING
There are two types of occupant monitoring:
In all markets except NAS and Australia, vehicles have an occupant detection system
In NAS markets, vehicles have an occupant classification system.
For markets which have an occupant detection system, this has no interface with the restraints system and only provides the
belt reminder function.
For markets that have an occupant classification system, this provides the RCM with the occupancy status of the front
passenger seat. The RCM uses this and the seat buckle status in the evaluation of the firing strategy for the passenger front
air bag, side air bag and pretensioner.
Occupant Detection System
Item
Part Number
Description
Occupancy sensor
Harness connector
Control module
The occupant detection system can only determine if the front passenger seat is occupied or unoccupied. The occupant
detection system consists of a captive sensor installed between the foam padding and the cover of the front passenger seat
cushion and a control module.
The output from the sensor is fed to the control module which gives either an empty or occupied state signal to the
instrument cluster. The instrument cluster illuminates the safety belt minder lamp when it detects that the seat is occupied
and the safety belt is not engaged.
Occupant Classification System
Item
Part Number
Description
Occupancy sensor
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator
The occupant classification system can determine if the front passenger seat is unoccupied, occupied by a small person, or
occupied by a large person. The occupant classification system consists of:
An occupancy sensor, installed under the cushion of the front passenger seat
A safety belt tension sensor, integrated into the anchor point of the front passenger safety belt
An occupancy sensor module, installed under the front passenger seat
A PAD (passenger air bag deactivation) indicator, on the integrated control panel.
The occupancy sensor is a silicone filled bladder, which is connected to a pressure sensor. Any load on the pressure pad is
detected by the pressure sensor.
The safety belt tension sensor is a strain gauge that measures the load applied by the safety belt anchor to the anchor bolt.
The sensor is located in the lower safety belt anchor point.
The occupancy sensor module supplies a reference voltage to the pressure sensor and the safety belt tension sensor and,
from the returned signals, measures the loads acting on the pressure pad and the safety belt tension sensor. The load
measurement from the safety belt tension sensor is used to produce a correction factor for the load measurement from the
pressure pad. The tightness of the safety belt affects the load acting on the pressure pad, so without the correction factor
the occupant classification module cannot derive an accurate occupancy status.
The occupant classification module translates the load readings into a seat occupancy status and transmits the result to the
RCM, on the high speed CAN bus. The occupancy sensor module incorporates two load limits for the seat cushion: When the
load exceeds the lower limit, but is less than the upper limit, the occupant is classified as small; when the upper limit is
exceeded, the occupant is classified as large.
The occupant classification system has four possible states, which are detailed in the following table.
Classification
Seat Status
Empty
Empty
Occupied
The seat is occupied by a small person or a child
inhibit
restraint is being used
Occupied allow
The seat is occupied by a large person
Error
Passenger Air Bag Status

Disabled
Passenger air bag/side air bag
operation is disabled
operation is enabled
operation is disabled
PAD Indicator
Status
Off
On
Off
On
ROLL OVER PROTECTION SYSTEM

The roll over protection system fitted to the convertible vehicle comprises two roll over protection hoops located behind the
rear seat. The roll over protection system is controlled by the RCM. The RCM has an internal roll over sensor which triggers
the pyrotechnic latches that hold the roll over protection hoops in place.
Roll Over Protection Hoops
Item
Part Number
Description
Deployed
Normal state
Hoop retaining latch - deployed
Hoop retaining latch
Roll over protection hoop - deployed
4
5
6
Roll over protection hoop latch pin
Roll over protection hoop latch
The roll over protection system hoops are located behind the rear seat underneath the tonneau cover. The tonneau cover has
two hatches set into it to allow the hoops to break through once triggered. The hoops are spring loaded and held in place by
a pyrotechnic latch. The latch is fired in response to a trigger from the RCM. Once fired the latch opens and the hoops are
released. As the hoops move upwards a ratchet in the body of the hoops locks into place and prevents the hoops from being
forced back down by the weight of the vehicle. Once deployed the hoops cannot be re-set and should be replaced with new
components.
The hoops have a small pin mounted on top which breaks the rear window if the convertible top is up. This allows clear
passage for the roll over protection hoops to operate.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired connection; D = High speed CAN bus
Item
Part Number
Description
Front impact sensor
Driver air bag
Passenger air bag
Front impact sensor
Side impact sensor
Side air bag
10
Safety belt sensor
11
Safety belt pretensioner
12
13
Safety belt pretensioner
14
Safety belt sensor
15
16
Side air bag
17
Safety belt tension sensor (Canada and USA only)
18
19
Integrated control module
20
RCM
21
Occupancy sensor
22
Clockspring
23
Instrument cluster
24
Side impact sensor
In a collision, the sudden deceleration or acceleration is measured by the safing sensor in the RCM and by the impact
sensors. The RCM evaluates the readings to determine the impact point on the vehicle and whether the
deceleration/acceleration readings exceed the limits for firing any of the air bags or pretensioners. During a collision, the
RCM only fires the air bags and pretensioners if the safing sensor confirms that the data from the remote sensor(s) indicates
an impact limit has been exceeded. The RCM also monitors the vehicle for a roll over accident using the internal roll over
sensor.
The RCM incorporates the following impact thresholds to cater for different accident scenarios:
Front impact, pretensioners.

Front impact, driver and passenger
Rear impact.
LH (left-hand) side impact.
RH (right-hand) side impact.
Roll over.
air
air
air
air
bags
bags
bags
bags
stage
stage
stage
stage
1,
2,
1,
2,
belt
belt
belt
belt
unfastened.
unfastened.
fastened.
fastened.
The front impact thresholds increase in severity from pretensioners, through to driver and passenger air bag stage 2, belt
fastened.
Firing Strategies
The safety belt pretensioners are fired when either the pretensioner impact limit or the roll over limit is exceeded. The RCM
only fires the pretensioners if the related safety belt is fastened. For the front passenger pretensioner to fire, the seat must
also be occupied by a person.
The driver and passenger air bags are only fired in a frontal impact that exceeds the stage 1 threshold. Both stages of the
inflator in the driver and passenger air bags are fired. At impacts between the stage 1 and 2 thresholds, the delay between
the firing of the two stages varies with the severity of the impact; the more severe the impact the shorter the delay. At stage
2 impact thresholds and above, the two stages of the inflator are fired almost simultaneously. The time delay between firing
the two stages of the driver air bag inflator is increased if the driver seat is forward of the seat position sensor switching
point.
If a side impact limit is exceeded, the RCM fires the side air bag on that side of the vehicle.
If multiple impacts occur during a crash event, after responding to the primary impact the RCM will output the appropriate
fire signals in response to any further impacts.
www.JagDocs.com
Crash Signal
When the RCM outputs any of the fire signals, it also outputs a hard wired crash signal to the ECM (engine control module)
and the AJB (auxiliary junction box), and changes the high speed CAN bus output message from 'no crash' to 'crash
condition'.
On receipt of the crash signals:
The ECM disables the fuel tank pump.
The AJB enters the crash mode and:
Activates all of the unlock signals of the vehicle locking system, even if the vehicle is already unlocked, repeatedly for
3 seconds, in case an interior door handle is pressed (locking the door) during the crash.
Ignores all locking and superlocking inputs until the crash mode is cancelled, when it returns the locking system to
normal operation.
Activates all of the courtesy lamps, except for the approach lamps. The activated courtesy lamps remain on until the
crash mode is cancelled, when they return to normal operation.

Activates the hazard warning lamps. The hazard warning lamps remain on until the crash mode is cancelled.
The crash mode is cancelled by cycling the ignition mode.
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS)
For a detailed description of the supplemental restraint system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
in the workshop manual.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER
SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS) COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE
AND WAIT ONE MINUTE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
vehicle.
NOTE: Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to Air Bag module circuits are not
acceptable. Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the replacement of a harness.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Battery condition, state of charge
Make sure all electrical connector(s) are engaged correctly on the air bag circuits
Wiring harness
Air bag module(s)
Make sure the Restraints control module is correctly installed
Fuse(s)
Sensor(s)
Pretensioner(s)
Warning lamp bulb(s)
3.
4.
Given the complexity of the system and the potential for damage/injury, the preferred method of diagnosis is via the
If the Jaguar approved diagnostic system is not available, use a scan tool to extract DTCs and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
DTC
Description
B0001- Driver Frontal Stage 1
11
Deployment Control circuit short to ground
12
Deployment Control circuit short to battery
Deployment Control 1A
circuit resistance
below threshold
1B
Deployment Control circuit resistance
above threshold
64
Deployment Control signal plausibility
failure
95
Deployment Control incorrect assembly

11
12
1A
below threshold
1B
above threshold
64
failure
95
B0010Passenger Frontal
11
Stage 1 Deployment
Control - circuit short
to ground
12
Stage 1 Deployment
Possible Cause
Driver Airbag Ignitor
Action
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test Driver
Airbag Ignitor (Stage 1) circuit for short to ground
(Stage 1) circuit short to

ground
(Stage 1) circuit short
Airbag Ignitor (Stage 1) circuit for short circuit to
circuit to power
power
(Stage 1) circuit
Airbag Ignitor (Stage 1) circuit for short circuit (Check
resistance below
connector security at clockspring and airbag)
threshold
(Stage 1) high circuit
Airbag Ignitor (Stage 1) circuit for high resistance or
resistance
open circuit
(Stage 1) signal
Configuration error- This output has been switched off

but the Airbag is actually installed. Re-configure the
Restraints module using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
Airbag Ignitor (Stage 1) circuit for faults
(Stage 1) Incorrect
assembly. Short circuit
between two different
circuits (at least two
faults)
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Driver
(Stage 2) circuit short to
Airbag Ignitor (Stage 2) circuit for short to ground
ground
(Stage 2) circuit short
Airbag Ignitor (Stage 2) circuit for short circuit to
circuit to power
power
(Stage 2) circuit
Airbag Ignitor (Stage 2) circuit for short circuit (Check
resistance below
connector security at clockspring and airbag)
threshold
(Stage 2) high circuit
Airbag Ignitor (Stage 2) circuit for high resistance or
resistance
open circuit
(Stage 2) signal
(Stage 2) Incorrect
faults)
Front Passenger Airbag
Ignitor (Stage 1) circuit
short to ground

diagnostic system
Airbag Ignitor (Stage 2) circuit for faults
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Front

Passenger Airbag Ignitor (Stage 1) circuit for short to
ground
Passenger Airbag Ignitor (Stage 1) circuit for short
B00101A
B00101B
B001064
B001095

to battery
Passenger Frontal
Stage 1 Deployment
Control - circuit
resistance below
threshold
Passenger Frontal
Stage 1 Deployment
Control - circuit
resistance above
threshold
Passenger Frontal
Stage 1 Deployment
Control - signal
Passenger Frontal
Stage 1 Deployment
Control - incorrect
assembly
11
Stage 2 Deployment
to ground
12
Stage 2 Deployment
to battery
1A
Stage 2 Deployment
Control - circuit
resistance below
threshold
Stage 2 Deployment
1B
Control - circuit
resistance above
threshold
64
Stage 2 Deployment
Control - signal
95
Stage 2 Deployment
Control - incorrect
assembly
B0020Left Side Air Bag

11
12
1A
below threshold
1B
above threshold
64
failure
B0020Left Side Airbag
95


resistance below
threshold
Ignitor (Stage 1) high

circuit resistance
Ignitor (Stage 1) signal

Ignitor (Stage 1)
Incorrect assembly.
Short circuit between
two different circuits (at
least two faults)
short to ground


resistance below
threshold
Ignitor (Stage 2) high

circuit resistance
Ignitor (Stage 2) signal

circuit to power
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test Front
circuit (Check connectors for security)

Passenger Airbag Ignitor (Stage 1) circuit for high
resistance or open circuit

diagnostic system
Passenger Airbag Ignitor (Stage 1) circuit for faults

Passenger Airbag Ignitor (Stage 2) circuit for short to
ground
circuit to power
circuit (Check connectors for security)

Passenger Airbag Ignitor (Stage 2) circuit for high

diagnostic system
Passenger Airbag Ignitor (Stage 2) circuit for faults
Ignitor (Stage 2)
Incorrect assembly short
circuit between two
different circuits (at
least two faults)
Left Side Airbag Ignitor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Driver
circuit short to ground (LHD) / Passenger (RHD) Side Airbag Ignitor circuit for
short to ground
Left Side Airbag Ignitor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Driver
circuit short circuit to
(LHD) / Passenger (RHD)Side Airbag Ignitor circuit for
power
Left Side Airbag Ignitor
circuit resistance below (LHD) / Passenger (RHD) Side Airbag Ignitor circuit for
threshold
short circuit (Check connectors for security)
Left Side Airbag Ignitor
high circuit resistance

(LHD) / Passenger (RHD) Side Airbag Ignitor circuit for
high resistance or open circuit
Signal plausibility failure Configuration error- This output has been switched off

diagnostic system
Incorrect assembly Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test Driver
short circuit between
(LHD) / Passenger (RHD) Side Airbag Ignitor circuit for
faults
least two faults)
B0028- Right Side Air Bag

11
12
1A
below threshold
Deployment Control 1B
circuit resistance
above threshold
64
failure
B0028Right Side Airbag
95
B0050Driver Seatbelt
11
Sensor - circuit short
to ground
12
to battery
1D
Sensor - circuit
current out of range
64
Sensor - signal
B0052- Passenger Seatbelt
11
to ground
12
to battery
1D
Sensor - circuit
64
Sensor - signal
B0090- Left Frontal Restraints
11
to ground
12
to battery
64
Sensor - signal
81
Sensor - invalid serial
data received
92
Sensor - performance
or incorrect operation
96
Sensor - component
internal failure
B0092- Left Side Restraints
11
Sensor 2 - circuit
short to ground
B0092- Left Side Restraints
Right side air bag circuit

Passenger Side Airbag Ignitor circuit for short to
ground
Right side air bag circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Front
- short circuit to power Passenger Side Airbag Ignitor circuit for short circuit to
power
Circuit resistance below
threshold
Passenger Side Airbag Ignitor circuit for short circuit
(Check connectors for security)
- short to ground
High Circuit Resistance

Passenger Side Airbag circuit for high resistance or
open circuit
Incorrect assembly -
short circuit between

least two faults)
Driver Seatbelt Switch
Driver Seatbelt Switch
circuit - short circuit to

power
Circuit current out of
range
Passenger Seatbelt
Switch circuit - short to

ground
Passenger Seatbelt
Switch circuit - short
circuit to power
range
LH Front Crash Sensor

LH Front Crash Sensor

power

diagnostic system
Passenger Side Airbag Ignitor circuit for faults

Seatbelt Switch circuit for short to ground
Seatbelt Switch circuit for short circuit to power
Seatbelt Switch circuit for fault
Configuration error- This Input has been switched off
but the Sensor is actually installed. Re-configure the
diagnostic system
Passenger Seatbelt Switch circuit for short to ground
Passenger Seatbelt Switch circuit for short circuit to
power
Passenger Seatbelt Switch circuit for fault
diagnostic system
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test LH
Front Crash Sensor circuit for short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test LH
Front Crash Sensor circuit for short circuit to power

diagnostic system
LH Front Crash Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test LH
open circuit
Front Crash Sensor circuit for open circuit fault. Install
a new sensor as necessary
Sensor fault
Performance or incorrect Check component fixings for security. If secure suspect
operation
LH Front Crash Sensor internal fault
Component internal
Suspect LH Front Crash Sensor internal fault
failure
LH Side Crash Sensor

Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test LH Side

Crash (B Pillar) Sensor circuit for short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test LH Side
12
B009264
B009281
B009292
B009296
B009511
B009512
B009564
B009581
B009592
B009596
B009711
B009712
B009764
Sensor 2 - circuit
short to battery
Left Side Restraints
Sensor 2 - signal
Sensor 2 - invalid
Sensor 2 performance or
incorrect operation
Sensor 2 - component
internal failure
Right Frontal
Restraints Sensor circuit short to ground
Right Frontal
Restraints Sensor circuit short to battery
Right Frontal
Restraints Sensor signal plausibility
failure
Right Frontal
Restraints Sensor invalid serial data
received
Right Frontal
Restraints Sensor performance or
incorrect operation
Right Frontal
Restraints Sensor component internal
failure
Right Side Restraints
Sensor 2 - circuit
short to ground
Sensor 2 - circuit
short to battery
Sensor 2 - signal
B0097- Right Side Restraints

81
Sensor 2 - invalid
92
Sensor 2 performance or
incorrect operation
96
Sensor 2 - component
internal failure
B00A0Occupant
49
Classification System
- internal electronic
failure
B00A0Occupant
64
failure
circuit - short circuit to Crash Sensor (B Pillar) circuit for short circuit to power
power
Configuration error - This Input has been switched off
Signal plausibility failure but the Sensor is actually installed. Re-configure the
diagnostic system
LH Side Crash Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test LH Side
Crash Sensor circuit for open circuit fault. Install a new
Sensor fault
sensor as necessary
Performance or incorrect Suspect LH Side Crash (B Pillar) Sensor internal fault
operation
Component internal
Suspect LH Side Crash Sensor (B Pillar) internal fault
failure
RH Front Crash Sensor
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test RH

Front Crash Sensor circuit for short to ground
RH Front Crash Sensor
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test RH

Front Crash Sensor circuit for short circuit to power
power
Signal plausibility failure Configuration error - This Input has been switched off
diagnostic system
RH Front Crash Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test RH
open circuit
Front Crash Sensor circuit for open circuit fault. Install
Sensor fault
a new sensor as necessary
Performance or incorrect Check component fixings for security. If secure suspect
operation
Component internal
RH Front Crash Sensor internal fault
Suspect RH Front Crash Sensor internal fault
failure
RH Side Crash Sensor
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test RH Side

Crash Sensor (B Pillar) circuit for short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test RH Side

circuit - short circuit to Crash Sensor (B Pillar) circuit for short circuit to power
power
Signal plausibility failure but the Sensor is actually installed. Re-configure the
diagnostic system
RH Side Crash Sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test RH Side
Crash Sensor circuit for open circuit fault. Install a new
Sensor fault
sensor as necessary
Performance or incorrect Suspect RH Side Crash Sensor (B Pillar) internal fault
operation
Component internal
Suspect RH Side Crash Sensor (B Pillar) internal fault
failure
Occupant classification
system module internal

fault
Check Occupant classification system module for stored

DTCs
Signal plausibility failure For Federal specification vehicles: Configuration error -
This input has been switched off but the sensor is

actually installed. Re-configure the Restraints Control
Module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. For non-Federal specification vehicles: This
input has been switched off and the sensor is not
installed. 1) This fault may be caused by an extended
engine crank. Check for symptoms of poor engine
starting or depleted battery charge levels. 2) Check the
stowed unused safety belt tension sensor connector
B00A0Occupant
88
- bus off
B00A0Occupant
92
- performance or
incorrect operation
B00B5Driver Seat Track
11
Position Restraints
to ground
15
Position Restraints
to battery or open
1D
Position Restraints
Sensor - circuit
64
Position Restraints
Sensor - signal
B00C0Passenger Seat
96
Occupant
Classification Sensor
"A" - component
internal failure
B00C5- Passenger Seat Track
11
Position Restraints
to ground
15
Position Restraints
to battery or open
1D
Position Restraints
Sensor - circuit
64
Position Restraints
Sensor - signal
B00D2Restraint System
68
Malfunction Indicator
1 - event information
87
Malfunction Indicator
1 - missing message
12
Passenger Disable
Indicator - circuit
short to battery
14
Passenger Disable
Indicator - circuit
short to ground or
open
55
Passenger Disable
Indicator - not
configured
B00DF- Passenger Restraints
54
Disable Switch
missing calibration
B1A00Control Module 16
threshold
located on the passenger side rear heel board for any

water ingress/dampness. Dry out, clean and prevent
any further water ingress.
CAN Bus Circuit Fault
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, CAN
Bus circuit to Occupant classification system module for
fault
Occupant classification Check Occupant classification system module for stored
DTCs
fault
Driver seat position
sensor circuit - short to

ground

Seat Position Sensor circuit for short to ground
Driver seat position

sensor circuit - short Seat Position Sensor circuit for short circuit to power or
circuit to power or open
open circuit
circuit
range
Seat Position Sensor circuit for fault

diagnostic system
Occupant classification Check Occupant classification system module for stored
DTCs
fault
Only logged in the event
of incorrect module
configuration. Not used
of incorrect module
of incorrect module
of incorrect module
Re-configure the Restraints module using the




Events information
Suspect Instrument Cluster Internal fault Check for

stored DTCs
Missing message from
Check CAN Bus circuit to Instrument Cluster for circuit

fault
Instrument Cluster
Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD) Lamp

circuit short circuit to
power
Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD) Lamp
circuit short to ground or
open
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test PAD

Lamp circuit for short circuit to power (PAD Lamp
located in the Integrated Control Panel)
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test PAD
Lamp circuit for short to ground or open (PAD Lamp
located on the Integrated Control Panel)
Module Not Configured

Passenger Airbag

Disable Switch missing

calibration
System voltage low at
ECU (supply voltage less
than 9 volts)
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check,

power and ground circuit for fault
B1A00Control Module 17
circuit voltage above
threshold
B1A00Control Module
49
internal electronic
failure
B1A17- Driver Stage 1 Airbag
95
Squib Short Circuit To
Ignition Loop
incorrect assembly
B1A19- Driver Stage 2 Airbag

95
Ignition Loop
incorrect assembly
B1A2195
Passenger Stage 1
Airbag Squib Short
Circuit To Ignition
Loop incorrect
assembly
B1A2395
Passenger Stage 2
Airbag Squib Short
Circuit To Ignition
Loop incorrect
assembly
B1A29- Left Side Airbag Squib

95
Short Circuit To
Ignition Loop
incorrect assembly
B1A31Right Side Airbag
95
Ignition Loop
incorrect assembly
B1A33- Left Curtain Airbag
95
Ignition Loop
incorrect assembly
B1A35- Right Curtain Airbag

95
Ignition Loop
incorrect assembly
B1A37- Left Curtain #2 Airbag

95
Ignition Loop
incorrect assembly
B1A3995
Right Curtain #2
Airbag Squib Short
Circuit To Ignition
Loop incorrect
assembly
B1A40- Left Side (pelvic) 2 11


B1A40- Left Side (pelvic) 2 -
System voltage high
Check Engine control module for stored DTCs , Suspect

(supply voltage supply
charging system fault. Refer to the electrical circuit
greater than 16 volts) diagrams and check, power and ground circuit for fault
Internal electronic
Restraint Control Module internal fault, refer to the new
failure
module installation note at the top of the DTC index
Driver Airbag Squib
(Stage 1) Incorrect
faults)
Driver Airbag Squib
(Stage 2) Incorrect
faults)
Passenger Airbag Squib
(Stage 1) Incorrect
faults)
Passenger Airbag Squib
(Stage 2) Incorrect
faults)
Left Side Airbag Squib
Incorrect assembly.
least two faults)
Right Side Airbag Squib
Incorrect assembly.
least two faults)
Left Curtain Airbag
Squib Incorrect
faults)
Right Curtain Airbag
Squib Incorrect
faults)
Left Curtain #2 Airbag
Squib Incorrect
faults)
Right Curtain #2 Airbag
Squib Incorrect
faults)
of incorrect module
for 10MY
of incorrect module
for 10MY

Airbag Squib (Stage 1) circuit for faults

Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test Passenger

Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test Passenger

Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test Left Side

Airbag Squib circuit for faults
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test Right Side

Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test Left Curtain

Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test Right

Curtain Airbag Squib circuit for faults
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test Left Curtain

#2 Airbag Squib circuit for faults
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test Right

Curtain #2 Airbag Squib circuit for faults


1A
circuit resistance
below threshold
B1A40- Left Side (pelvic) 2 1B

circuit resistance
above threshold
signal plausibility
failure
incorrect assembly
B1A4195
Left Side (pelvic) 2

Short Circuit To
Ignition Loop
incorrect assembly
B1A55- Crash Record Output 14

or open
B1A55- Crash Record Output 64
signal plausibility
failure
B1D60- Right side (pelvic) 2 11
of incorrect module
for 10MY
of incorrect module
for 10MY
of incorrect module
for 10MY
of incorrect module
for 10MY
Left Side (pelvic) 2
incorrect assembly.
least two faults)
Crash Record Output
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Crash
circuit short to ground or
Record Output circuit for short to ground or open
open
circuit. If this has occurred after a software download
then disconnect the battery for 1 minute

B1D60- Right side (pelvic) 2 1A

circuit resistance
below threshold
B1D60- Right side (pelvic) 2 1B

circuit resistance
above threshold

signal plausibility
failure

incorrect assembly
B1D76Left Roll Over

11
Protection System circuit short to ground
B1D76Left Roll Over
12
Protection System circuit short to battery
B1D76Left Roll Over
1A
Protection System circuit resistance
below threshold
B1D76Left Roll Over
1B
above threshold
B1D76Left Roll Over
64
Protection System signal plausibility
failure
B1D76Left Roll Over
95
Protection System incorrect assembly
of incorrect module
for 10MY
of incorrect module
for 10MY
of incorrect module
for 10MY
of incorrect module
for 10MY
of incorrect module
for 10MY
of incorrect module
for 10MY
Left roll over protection
system circuit - short to
ground
Left roll over protection
system circuit - short
circuit to power
Circuit resistance below
threshold






Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left roll

over protection system circuit - short to ground
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left roll
over protection system circuit - short circuit to power
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Left Roll
Over Protection System Hoop Ignitor circuit for short to
ground
Circuit resistance above Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Left Roll
threshold
Over Protection System Hoop Ignitor circuit for short

circuit to power or open circuit
Incorrect assembly
but the component is actually installed. Re-configure

the Restraints module using the manufacturer
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check pins
are installed into correct connector cavities
B1D77Right Roll Over

11
Protection System circuit short to ground
12
Protection System circuit short to battery
1A
below threshold
Protection System 1B
circuit resistance
above threshold
64
Protection System signal plausibility
failure
95
Protection System incorrect assembly
U0001High Speed CAN
88
00
With ECM/PCM "A" no sub type
information
00
With Anti-Lock Brake
information
87
Module - missing
message
U0300Internal Control
55
Module Software
Incompatibility - not
configured
U1A02- Permanent Memory
66
Store Full signal has
too many
transitions/events
U1A03Car Configuration
87
Parameter missing
message
U1A1455
CAN Initialization
Failure - not
configured
U201A- Control Module Main
4A
Calibration Data incorrect component
installed
U201A- Control Module Main
51
Calibration Data - not
programmed
U201BControl Module
4A
Calibration Data #2 incorrect component
installed
U201BControl Module
51
Calibration Data #2 not programmed
U201C-
Control Module
Right roll over protection
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Right

system circuit - short to
Roll Over Protection System Hoop Ignitor circuit for
ground
short to ground
Right roll over protection Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test Right
system circuit - short
Roll Over Protection System Hoop Ignitor circuit for
circuit to power
Circuit Resistance below Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test Right Roll
threshold
Over Protection System Hoop Ignitor circuit for short
circuit (Check connector security)
High Circuit Resistance
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test Right Roll

Over Protection System Hoop Ignitor circuit for high
Incorrect assembly
but the component is actually installed. Re-configure

the Restraints module using the manufacturer
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check pins
are installed into correct connector cavities
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check, CAN

Bus circuit for fault
Missing message
Check ECM for stored DTCs. Refer to the electrical

circuit diagrams and check, CAN Bus circuit to ECM for
fault
Check Anti-lock braking system module for stored

DTCs. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check, CAN Bus circuit to ABS Control Module for fault
Missing message
Check Instrument Panel Cluster Control Module for

stored DTCs. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check, CAN Bus circuit to IPC Control Module for
fault
Mis-match between
Re-configure the Restraints module with the latest level

software using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
vehicle and Restraints

module software levels
Wiring harness fault.
Restraint Control Module

internal fault
Missing message
Not configured
Incorrect component
installed
Not programmed
Incorrect component
installed
Not programmed
Incorrect component
Restraint Control Module memory full - refer to the new

module installation note at the top of the DTC index
(Not warrantable change)
Lost communication with Body control module. Check
Body control module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check, CAN Bus circuit to
Body Control Module for fault
Suspect Restraints module internal fault, refer to the
new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC
and re-test, if DTC remains Suspect Restraints module
internal fault, refer to the new module/component
Re-configure the Restraints module with the latest level
software using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
4A
Calibration Data #3 incorrect component

installed
U201CControl Module
51
Calibration Data #3 not programmed
U300049
Control Module internal electronic

failure
81
Number - invalid
installed

Not programmed
Internal electronic
Suspect Restraints module internal fault, refer to the
new module/component installation note at the top of
failure
the DTC Index
Vehicle/component misInstall original module, check for DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC Index
being transmitted,
module previously
Occupant Classification System
DTC
Description
B1193- Crash Event Storage
53
Full and Locked - Deactivated
Possible Cause
Event information,
system deactivated
Action
Clear DTC, cycle ignition and re-test. If DTC remains
check for other DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index
A collision event has
occurred
Maximum number of
events stored
B1A54- Occupant Belt Tension
01
Sensor - General
electrical failure

02
Sensor - General signal
failure

11
to ground

12

Belt tension sensor has
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check belt

tension sensor circuit. Renew the safety belt buckle
jammed for 3 seconds or
assembly
longer
Belt tension sensor
failure
Pressure sensor signal
tension sensor circuit. Renew the safety belt buckle
short circuit to belt
assembly
tension sensor signal at
initialization
Belt tension sensor
failure
Pressure sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check belt
short circuit to ground for tension sensor circuit. Renew the safety belt buckle
3 seconds or longer
assembly
Belt tension sensor
failure
Pressure sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check belt
short circuit to power for tension sensor circuit. Renew the safety belt buckle
to battery
3 seconds or longer
assembly
Belt tension sensor
failure
13
Sensor - Circuit open
B1A62Pressure Sensor 02
B1A62- Pressure Sensor - Fluid

7A
leak or seal failure
B1A62- Pressure Sensor - Low

7B
fluid level
U0001High Speed CAN
Communication Bus 00
No sub type
information
00
With Restraints Control
information

00
Software
Incompatibility - No
U3000Control Module 04
U300051
Control Module - Not

programmed
U300054
Control module Missing calibration
U300316
Battery Voltage Circuit voltage below

threshold
U3003Battery Voltage 17
threshold
Pressure sensor circuit

open circuit for 3 seconds tension sensor circuit. Renew the safety belt buckle
or longer
assembly
Belt tension sensor
failure
Occupant pressure
Refer to the electrical guide and check the occupant
sensor general signal
pressure sensor circuit. Renew the sensor
failure
Occupant pressure
sensor signal short circuit
to belt tension sensor
signal at initialization
Occupant pressure
sensor failure
Occupant pressure
sensor signal short circuit pressure sensor circuit. Renew the Control module.
Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
to ground
a module is suspect
Restraints Control
module fault
Occupant pressure
sensor signal short circuit pressure sensor circuit. Renew the Control module.
to power
a module is suspect
Restraints Control
module fault
Occupant pressure
Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
sensor fluid leak or seal
renew the restraints Control module. Refer to the
failure
warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
Restraints Control
suspect
module fault
Occupant pressure
Renew the occupant pressure sensor
sensor bladder low fluid
level
Bus off
CAN High and CAN Low power and ground connections to the module. Using
are shorted together
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
Lost communications Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
CAN or hardwired
power and ground connections to the module. Using
Restraints Control
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
module fault
complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
between the Restraints Control Module and Safety
Belt System
Module is not configured Check correct occupancy classification system module
correctly
is installed for vehicle specification. Check for other
Master config ID doesn't DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Configure the
correspond
module using the approved diagnostic system
Restraints Control
Renew the occupancy classification system module.
module fault
a module is suspect
Restraints Control Module Configure the module using the approved diagnostic
not configured, circuit
system, check and repair Restraints Control Module
fault
circuit as required
Missing calibration,
Configure the module using the approved diagnostic
empty seat calibration
system
required
Battery voltage below
Check vehicle battery and charging system. Refer to
threshold (8 volts)
the relevant section in the workshop manual
Battery voltage above
threshold (18 volts)
Check vehicle battery and charging system. Refer to

the relevant section in the workshop manual. Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
supply circuits to the module
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag Disposal

General Procedures
Deployed Air Bag

1.
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an

air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when
handling an air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction
Deployed air bag modules are to be disposed of as special waste
and must comply with local environmental requirements, if in
doubt, contact Authority for disposal requirements.
2.
NOTE: The storage, transportation, disposal, and/or recycling of

air bag module components must be carried out in accordance
with all applicable federal, state and local regulations including,
but not limited to, those governing building and fire codes,
environmental protection, occupational health and safety, and
transportation.
Modules removed and deployed by Jaguar service are to be
returned to the importer for disposal.
Undeployed Air Bag Inoperative

1.
WARNINGS:
Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover
or deployment door pointed away from your body. This will
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental
deployment. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
All inoperative air bag modules have been placed on the

Mandatory Return List. All discolored or damaged air bag
modules must be treated the same as any inoperative live air
bag being returned. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
Remove the inoperative driver air bag module or passenger air
bag module. For additional information see Driver Air Bag
Module or Passenger Air Bag Module in this section.
Undeployed Air Bag Scrapped Vehicle

Remote Deployment
1.
WARNINGS:
Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag

supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling
an air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover
or deployment door pointed away from your body. This will
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental
deployment. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Remote deployment is to be carried out outdoors with all
personnel at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away to ensure personal

safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when the air bag is
deployed, hearing protection is required. Failure to follow this
Do not place the driver or passenger air bag module with

the trim cover or deployment door facing down, as the forces of
the deploying air bag can cause it to ricochet and cause
personal injury. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Equipment required: Universal deployment tool-Part N 418S135 and 12V Battery.
2.
The deployment procedure should be carried out outdoors away

from other personnel.
3.
Remove any loose debris from around air bag. Make sure that
no flammable liquids are present.
4.
Disconnect the battery ground and positive cables.
5.
Disconnect the relevant air bag module electrical connector.
6.
Connect the appropriate adaptor lead to the restraint device.
7.
Connect the deployment lead to the adaptor lead. Pass wire of

the deployment tool through window, close all doors, leave
window with lead for deployment tool open.
8.
WARNING: Before proceeding, make sure precautions

have been taken to warn personnel of a possible loud noise
upon activation. Do not allow anybody to approach closer to
restraint device than six meters. Failure to follow this instruction
Move as far from restraint device as possible and connect the
tool clips to a 12V vehicle battery.
9.
WARNING: Do not handle the deployed device immediately

after activation - it may be hot. Allow the unit to cool for at least
20 minutes. Cooling modules should be continuously monitored
to make sure heat does not create a fire with spilled liquids or
other debris. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Deploy the module by depressing both switches on the tool. If
activation does not occur, disconnect battery from tool and seek
advise from Jaguar Engineering and wait for further instructions.
10.
Repeat procedure for all air bags in vehicle.
11.
The vehicle is now to be scrapped in the normal manner with

modules installed.
Disposal of live air bag modules for driver air bag module, passenger air
bag module and side air bag module, using tyres
1.
Equipment required: Deployment tool 418-S135, Battery (12V),

Safety goggles to BS2092 grade 2, Rubber gloves to PrEN 374
class 2, Ear protectors that have been measured to BS.EN
24869, Particulate respirator to EN 149 grade FFP2S.
2.
The deployment procedure should be carried out outdoors, away

3.
Stack four scrap tyres, securing together with heavy gauge wire
or cable. While disconnected from any electrical power source,
connect deployment harness and place air bag adaptor portion
under tyre stack, ready for connection to air bag.
4.
WARNING: Power must not be connected during this step.

CAUTION: Make sure the connector is not in contact with

the inflator or it will be damaged during the test.
Connect air bag to air bag connector, make sure the locking
sleeve is fully engaged. Position the air bag with the cover
facing upwards.
5.
Make sure battery connections of deployment harness are ten

meters away from the tyre stack
6.
Remove any loose parts from around the air bag. Make sure
that no flammable liquids are present.
7.

8.

personal injury.
9.
Allow the air bag to cool for at least 20 minutes. Cooling

modules should be continuously monitored to make sure heat
does not generate a fire with spilled liquids or other debris.
10.
Remove the air bag from the tyre stack and seal in a plastic
bag, ready for disposal.
11.
In the event of any problems or queries arising from this

procedure, contact Jaguar Engineering.
Disposal of side curtain air bag module using tyres

1.
Equipment required: Deployment tool 418-S135, Battery (12V),

Safety goggles to BS2092 grade 2, Rubber gloves to PrEN 374
class 2, Ear protectors that have been measured to BS.EN
24869, Particulate respirator to EN 149 grade FFP2S.
2.
The deployment procedure should be carried out outdoors, away

3.
WARNING: Make sure that the tyre stack is stable before

and after deployment. Failure to follow this instruction my result
in personal injury.
Stack scrap tyres of a sufficient height to mask the side curtain
air bag module, securing together with heavy gauge wire or
cable. While disconnected from any electrical power source,
connect deployment harness and place air bag adaptor portion
under tyre stack, ready for connection to air bag.
4.
WARNING: Power must not be connected during this step.

CAUTION: Make sure the connector is not in contact with

the inflator or it will be damaged during the test.
Connect air bag to air bag connector, make sure the locking
sleeve is fully engaged. Position the air bag into the tyres with
the inflator canister at the lowest point.
5.
Make sure battery connections of deployment harness are ten

meters away from the tyre stack
6.
Remove any loose parts from around the air bag. Make sure
that no flammable liquids are present.
7.

8.

personal injury.
9.
Allow the air bag to cool for at least 20 minutes. Cooling

modules should be continuously monitored to make sure heat
does not generate a fire with spilled liquids or other debris.
10.
Remove the air bag from the tyre stack and seal in a plastic
bag, ready for disposal.
11.
In the event of any problems or queries arising from this

procedure, contact Jaguar Engineering.
Supplemental Restraint System - Front Impact Severity Sensor

Removal
NOTE: The LH front impact severity sensor is illustrated, removal of the RH sensor is a similar procedure.
1.
Open the hood.

2.
Remove the fan cowl.

3.
Remove the front impact severity sensor.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1.
Install the front impact severity sensor.

2.
Install the fan cowl.

Supplemental Restraint System - Driver Air Bag Module

Special Tool(s)
Driver air bag module remover
501-120
Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

Procedures).
3.
Using the special tool remove the driver air bag

module.
Rotate the steering wheel for access to slots.
Installation
1.

2.

Specifications).
3.
Supplemental Restraint System - Occupant Classification Sensor V8

Removal
WARNINGS:
personal injury.
and air bags. Do not for any reason attempt to paint discoloured or damaged air bag module trim covers or instrument
CAUTIONS:
The front passenger seat occupant classification sensor is available only as a service kit. No attempt should be
made to replace individual components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Check for correct operation of the front seat after completion of the procedure to make sure that the wiring
harness has not become trapped or stretched.
NOTE: Note the routing of the seat harness.
1.

Operation).
2.

3.

and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
NOTE: Note the position of the wiring harnesses to

aid installation.
13.

clips.
14.

aid installation.
15.
16.
17.
18.
WARNING: Do not probe supplemental

restraint system (SRS) electrical connectors.
aid installation.
19.

aid installation.
20.
Installation
1.
CAUTION: The front passenger seat occupant

classification sensor is available only as a service
kit. No attempt should be made to replace
individual components. Failure to follow this
2.
NOTE: Make sure that new hog rings are installed.

NOTE: Use hog ring pliers to close the hog rings.
Do not use any other tool. The hog rings must be
closed to overlap as illustrated.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
NOTE: Make sure that the harness is routed to the

position noted on removal.
10.

clips.
11.
12.

Torque: 4 Nm
13.
Torque: 9 Nm
14.
WARNING: Do not probe supplemental

restraint system (SRS) electrical connectors.
15.
16.
17.
18.
NOTE: An audible click is heard when the clips are

fully latched.
NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector is
securely connected.
19.
Torque: 1.3 Nm
20.

and Installation).
21.

Supplemental Restraint System - Restraints Control Module (RCM)

Removal
1.
Connect WDS to the vehicle and up-load the relevant data.
2.

Specifications).
3.

Procedures).
4.

For additional information, refer to: Radio Frequency (RF)
Receiver (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,
5.
NOTE: If the SRS component is to be replaced, the

bar code of the new unit must be recorded.
NOTE: The RCM will record and store impact data.
The module must be replaced when three records
are noted.
Remove the restraints control module (RCM).
Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
1.
Install the RCM.

2.

For additional information, refer to: Radio Frequency (RF)
Receiver (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,
3.

Specifications).
4.
Supplemental Restraint System - Passenger Air Bag Module

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

Procedures).
3.

4.
Remove the navigation system display module.

5.

Remove the center register.
6.

7.

Remove the driver side register trim panel.
8.
Remove the instrument panel passenger side

9.
Remove the passenger side register.

10.
Release the glove compartment.

11.
Remove the glove compartment.

Release the glove compartment lamp
assembly.
12.

Carefully release and remove the rheostat switch
assembly.
13.
14.
Release the MOST diagnostic port.


Release the vehicle diagnostic port.
15.

Remove the instrument cluster surround.
16.
Remove the instrument cluster.

Raise the steering column finisher for
access to the lower screws.
17.
Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor.

18.

Release the instrument panel upper trim.
Collect the compression limiters.
Release the glove box support bracket.
With assistance, separate the components.
19.
Disconnect the passenger air bag ground cable.

20.
Disconnect the passenger air bag module 2

21.

22.
Remove the passenger air bag module.

Installation
1.
Install the passenger air bag module.

2.

3.
Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
4.
Connect the passenger air bag ground cable.

Install the Torx bolt and tighten to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
5.
Install the instrument panel upper trim.

With assistance, align the components.
Install the compression limiters.
6.
Install the in-vehicle temperature sensor.

7.
Install the instrument cluster.

Install the screws.
8.
Install the instrument cluster surround.

Install the screws.
9.
Install the MOST diagnostic port.

Secure the clip.
10.

Install and secure the diagnostic socket.
Align the clips.
11.
Install the rheostat switch assembly and align the instrument

panel lower trim panel.
Secure the switch assembly clips.
Connect the switch assembly electrical connector.
12.
Install the glove compartment.

Install the lamp assembly.
13.
Install the passenger side register.

14.
Install the instrument panel passenger side reinforcement trim

panel.
15.
Install the driver side register trim panel.

16.

panel.
17.

Carefully install the center register.
18.
Install the navigation system display module.

19.

20.

Specifications).
21.
Supplemental Restraint System - Side Air Bag Module

Removal
1.

Procedures).
2.

Specifications).
3.

4.

straps.
5.
6.

retaining clips.

7.

tension straps.
8.
Remove the side air bag module.

Release the backrest cover.
Installation
1.
Install the side air bag module.

Attach the backrest cover.
Tighten the new nuts to 7 Nm (5 lb.ft).
2.

3.

4.
5.

6.

7.

Specifications).
Supplemental Restraint System - Rollover Protection Unit

Removal
1.

Specifications).
2.

Procedures).
3.

4.
Release the rear seat backrest trim panel.

Remove the 2 clips.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Position the rear seat backrest trim panel
aside.
5.
Remove the rear seat backrest retaining bracket.

6.
Remove the roll over protection unit.

Installation
1.
Install the roll over protection unit.

2.
Install the rear seat backrest retaining bracket.

3.
Install the rear seat backrest trim panel.

Install the clips.
4.

5.

Specifications).
6.
Supplemental Restraint System - Side Impact Sensor Convertible

Removal
1.

and Installation).
2.
Remove the side impact sensor.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1.
Install the side impact sensor.

2.

and Installation).
Supplemental Restraint System - Side Impact Sensor 2-Door

Removal
1.

Installation).
2.
Remove the side impact sensor.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1.
Install the side impact sensor.

2.

Installation).
Pedestrian Protection System Torque Specifications
Item
Pedestrian impact sensor strip - screw
Deployable hood, crash sensor to front bumper beam - bolt
Contact sensing system module to front bumper - screw
Hood deployment support bracket to vehicle - bolt*
Hood deployment striker to hood - bolt*
Pyrotechnic device to hood latch - bolt*
Hood deployment actuator bracket to body - screw*
Hood deployment actuator - screw*
Hood secondary latch to deployment actuator - nut*
CAUTION: *Refer to Removal and Installation procedures for important information.
Nm
6
8
6
8
8
9
8
8
9
lb-ft
-
lb-in
53
71
53
71
71
80
71
71
80
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection System

COMPONENT LOCATION
Item
Part Number
Description
RH (right hand) hood actuator
RH hood latch
LH (left hand) hood latch
LH hood actuator
Pedestrian protection system control module
LH accelerometer
PCS (pedestrian contact sensor)
RH accelerometer
INTRODUCTION
WARNING: All pyrotechnic devices are dangerous. Before performing any procedures on any pyrotechnic device, read
all information contained within the Standard Workshop Practices section of this manual.
The pedestrian protection system control module receives an impact signal from PCS (pedestrian contact sensor) and two
accelerometers mounted on the front bumper beam. The control module interprets the signals to determine whether impact
is with a pedestrian or other object, such as a traffic cone. When the control module detects a valid impact signal and the
vehicle is in the 15 to 45 km/h (9 to 28 mph) speed range, it fires the two pyrotechnic hood latch release units and two
pyrotechnic actuators which opens the hood approximately 130 mm (5.1 in.).
The pedestrian protection system is factory fit only to non Federal vehicles.
CONTROL MODULE
The control module is secured with two screws to the underside of the LH (left-hand) front fender reinforcement, behind the
wheelarch liner. The control module is hardwired to the other system components and is also connected to the high speed
CAN (controller area network) bus. The control module receives ambient air temperature, ignition state and vehicle speed on
the high speed CAN bus.
The control module uses signals from the PCS and the accelerometers to determine if the impact on the bumper is a
pedestrian or some other object. The system will always deploy where the control module determines a pedestrian impact.
The system minimizes deployment for other impacts that are similar to pedestrian impact, such as traffic cones.
PEDESTRIAN CONTACT SENSOR
Item
Part Number
--
Description
Sensor module
Sensor backing strip/rear cover
Fibre optic cable
Foam insert
Sensor front cover
The PCS is located in a slot behind the bumper foam on the front bumper beam and is secured with a single fixing.
At the end of the sensor next to the fixing there is a PCB (printed circuit board) and fibre optic transceiver, which is
connected to a fibre optic cable configured in a loop. The PCS uses this fibre optic loop to detect an impact by measuring the
amount of light returned to the fibre optic transceiver. A reduction in light levels occurs when the PCS is deformed by an
impact. The PCS monitors the level of light returned from the loop, if a reduction of a predetermined magnitude is measured
a trigger signal will be sent to the control module.
HOOD LATCH
Item
Part Number
Latch claw
Spring
Pyrotechnic pin
Latch pawl
Description
The hood latches are located at either side of the trailing edge of the hood. Each latch is released by a small pyrotechnic pin,
which is fired in response to a signal from the control module. The pyrotechnic pin engages with the latch pawl which is
holding the latch claw closed. Once the pawl is moved by the pyrotechnic pin the latch claw is released and the return spring
moves the latch claw to the open position allowing the hood to move open under the pressure of the hood actuator.
Hood Latch Deployment
Description
Item
Part Number
A
B
Latched
Deployed
Latch pawl
Latch claw
Pyrotechnic pin
HOOD ACTUATOR
The hood actuators are pyrotechnic air bags. The hood actuators are located just forward of the hood latches on either side
of the hood. The actuators comprise a pyrotechnic device to raise the hood, a secondary hood latch mechanism and a tether
sleeve. Once fired a locking device mounted on top of the actuator couples with the secondary hood latch before the air bag
inflates to raise the hood. This ensures that the hood can only deploy to a pre-determined height (approximately 130 mm
(5.1 in.)). As the hood actuator is fired two prongs located in the secondary latch housing are moved out of their retaining
clamp. The prongs are spring loaded to grip the secondary hood latch striker securing it to the actuator tether cone.
Hood Actuator and Secondary Latch
Item
Part Number
Description
Secondary hood latch striker plate
Secondary hood latch body
Secondary hood latch
Secondary hood latch spring
Secondary hood latch retaining bracket
Hood actuator assembly
ACCELEROMETER
Two accelerometers are mounted on the rear of the bumper beam. The accelerometers measure the amount of inertia when
an impact occurs and send a signal to the control module. This signal is used by the control module to calculate the firing of
the pedestrian protection system. The accelerometers are modified crash sensors. The sensors have a lower detection range
than front/side crash sensors to enable them to detect lower level impacts and therefore assist in the object discrimination
process.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
Item
Part Number
Description
Diagnostic socket
Hood latch
Accelerometer
Hood actuator
Accelerometer
PCS
10
Hood actuator
11
Hood latch
12
Pedestrian protection system control module
The system is designed to help reduce head and lower leg injuries when a pedestrian has been hit by a vehicle. This is
achieved in two main ways:
Bumper design
Pyrotechnic deployment of the hood.
The front bumper of the vehicle has been designed with a profile which encourages the pedestrians lower leg to lift upwards
rolling around the front of the bumper surface. The bumper is constructed of energy absorbing foam and plastics and is
designed to be softer around the top part of the bumper than the middle. This helps reduce injuries to the pedestrians lower
leg.
As the pedestrians leg rolls around the bumper it deforms the bumper and the sensor beneath. If the predetermined
parameters are met the pedestrian protection system control module fires the pyrotechnic hood latch pins which opens the
hood latch claw. This is followed by the pyrotechnic actuator firing to force the hood upwards. As the hood moves upwards
the secondary hood latch automatically engages with the secondary hood latch striker plate locking the hood and the body
together via the tether cone attached to the hood actuator. This ensures that the hood only rises a set amount. The raising
of the hood creates a more cushioned effect between the vehicle and the pedestrian. The hood actuators will deflate within 3
seconds of deployment to improve visibility. The secondary hood latch remains connected to the hood when the hood
actuators have deflated and can be released by squeezing the two latch forks together, either by hand or with a pair of
pliers.
The hazard warning lights will be activated and can only be switched off by pressing the engine start/stop button to turn the
engine OFF and ON again (without pressing the brake pedal) to revert to the ignition convenience mode.
A warning message CHECK PEDESTRIAN SYSTEM will appear on the message center. The vehicle must not be driven once
the bonnet has been deployed.
Hood Actuator-Deployed
Item
Part Number
Description
Secondary hood latch
Secondary hood latch spring
Tether cone
Secondary hood latch retaining bracket
Hood actuator
Secondary hood latch body
Secondary hood latch striker plate
Operating Parameters
Function
Operating speed
Hood deployment height
Hood deployment time (approximate)
www.JagDocs.com
Value
15-45 km/h (9 - 28 mph)
130 mm (5.1 in.)
30 ms
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection System

For a detailed description of the pedestrian protection system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in
Safety Information
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment the back-up power supply must be depleted before beginning any work on the
pedestrian protection system or its components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Do not use a multimeter to probe the pedestrian protection system actuators. It is possible for the power from the
multimeter battery to trigger the activation of the actuator. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
NOTE: It is advisable not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on the
pedestrian protection system or components
NOTE: Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to pedestrian protection system
circuits are not acceptable. Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the replacement of a
harness.
Power Supply Depletion
Before beginning any work on the pedestrian protection system or related components:
1.
Remove the ignition key.
2.
Disconnect the battery leads, ground first.
3.
Wait 2 minutes for the power circuit to discharge.
There are comprehensive instructions on the correct procedures for pedestrian protection system repairs in the manual.
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
vehicle.
1.
2.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Damaged, loose, or missing fixings or
components
3.
Electrical
Ensure dummy electrical connector is installed to the
pedestrian protection module

Blown fuse(s)
Damaged, loose or corroded connectors
Wiring harness
Pedestrian protection module
4.
Pedestrian Under Bonnet Airbag / Actuator Diagnostics

This procedure should be used to aid diagnosis of the following pedestrian protection actuator fault codes
PED Warning Message Status
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DTC
B1001-11
B1001-12
B1001-1A
B1001-1B
B1003-11
B1003-12
B1003-1A
B1003-1B
PINPOINT TEST A : ACTUATOR DIAGNOSTIC

TEST
CONDITIONS
A1: DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
WARNINGS:
Prior to any work on the pedestrian protection system the vehicle battery must be disconnected
Please wait for 120 seconds to allow the air bag deployment energy reserve to dissipate
Record any relevant stored DTCs or customer symptoms on the job-card
1
2
3
Check routing of harness fly-lead ensuring there is no risk snagging and sufficient strain
relief
Disconnect actuator harness fly-lead
Check connector for water ingress or signs of corrosion (white/green residue)
Check for debris in female connector and remove as required
Check for debris in male harness end connector and remove
Check that all connector terminals are clean secure and in good condition
Reconnect the connector

An audible click should be heard confirming security
Check actuator harness fly-lead is connected and correctly routed
10 Reconnect the vehicle battery

11 Clear the DTC, cycle the ignition state off / on wait 30 seconds and re-test
Is the warning lamp illuminated?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST B : ACTUATOR DIAGNOSTIC 2

TEST
CONDITIONS
B1: DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
WARNINGS:
Prior to any work on the pedestrian protection system the vehicle battery must be disconnected
Please wait for 120 seconds to allow the air bag deployment energy reserve to dissipate
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams. Disconnect and check all in line connections from
1
actuator harness fly lead to the restraint control module or pedestrian protection module
(Vehicle variant specific) for:
Debris
Water ingress or signs of corrosion (white/green residue)

Security
Damage
Cable damage
Reconnect the vehicle battery
Clear the DTC, cycle the ignition state off / on wait 30 seconds and re-test
Is the pedestrian protection system (PED) warning message showing?

Yes
Replace the actuator
No
DTC Index
CAUTIONS:
Prior to carrying out any pinpoint tests on the pedestrian protection system the back-up power supply must be
depleted. Disconnect the battery and wait two minutes for the back-up power supply to deplete.
When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit, part
number 3548-1358-00.
DTC
B100211
Description
Left hood latch
deployment control
B100212
Left hood latch

deployment control
B10021A
Left hood latch

deployment control
B10021B
Left hood latch

deployment control
B10021C
Left hood latch

deployment control
B10024A
Left hood latch

deployment control
Possible Cause
Action
control circuit - short to ground left hood latch deployment control circuit for
short to ground
Left hood latch deployment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
control circuit - short to power left hood latch deployment control circuit for
short to power
Left hood latch deployment
control circuit - circuit
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
control circuit - circuit voltage
out of range
diagnostic system
Incorrect component installed Disconnect latch actuator connector, clear DTC
and re-test. If DTC remains along with
additional DTCs, install a new pedestrian
protection module.
REFER to: Pedestrian Protection Module (501 Left hood latch deployment
B100011
Right hood latch

deployment control
B100012
Right hood latch

deployment control
B10001A
Right hood latch

deployment control
B10001B
Right hood latch

deployment control
B10001C
Right hood latch

deployment control
B10004A
Right hood latch

deployment control
B100311 Left hood deployment

control
B100312 Left hood deployment
control
B10031A Left hood deployment
control
B10031B Left hood deployment
control
B10031C Left hood deployment
control
B10034A Left hood deployment
control
B100111 Right hood deployment

control
B100112 Right hood deployment
control
B10011A Right hood deployment
control
B10011B Right hood deployment
control
B10011C Right hood deployment
control
20C Pedestrian Protection System, Removal

and Installation).
If DTC cleared install a new latch actuator.
REFER to: Pedestrian Protection Latch Actuator
(501-20C Pedestrian Protection System,
Right hood latch deployment
control circuit - short to ground right hood latch deployment control circuit for
short to ground
control circuit - short to power right hood latch deployment control circuit for
short to power
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
control circuit - circuit voltage
out of range
diagnostic system
Incorrect component installed Disconnect latch actuator connector, clear DTC
protection module.
REFER to: Pedestrian Protection Module (50120C Pedestrian Protection System, Removal
and Installation).
If DTC cleared install a new latch actuator.
REFER to: Pedestrian Protection Latch Actuator
Left hood deployment control Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test left
hood deployment control circuit for short to
ground
Left hood deployment control Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test left
hood deployment control circuit for short to
power
Left hood deployment control
circuit - circuit resistance
below threshold
diagnostic system
above threshold
diagnostic system
circuit - circuit voltage out of
range
diagnostic system
Incorrect component installed Disconnect hood actuator connector, clear DTC
protection module.
and Installation).
If DTC cleared install a new hood actuator.
REFER to: Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator
LH (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System,
Right hood deployment control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
right hood deployment control circuit for short
to ground
Right hood deployment control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
right hood deployment control circuit for short
to power
Right hood deployment control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
below threshold
diagnostic system
above threshold
diagnostic system
circuit - circuit voltage out of
range
B10014A Right hood deployment
control
B100613
Pedestrian impact
sensor
B100611
Pedestrian impact
sensor
B100612
Pedestrian impact
sensor
B100696
Pedestrian impact
sensor
B100684
Pedestrian impact
sensor
B10064A
Pedestrian impact
sensor
B10061D
Pedestrian impact
sensor
B10068F
Pedestrian impact
sensor
B100631
Pedestrian impact
sensor
B100692
Pedestrian impact
sensor

protection module.
and Installation).
If DTC cleared install a new hood actuator.
REFER to: Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator
RH (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System,
Pedestrian impact sensor
pedestrian impact sensor circuit for open
circuit
pedestrian impact sensor circuit for short to
ground
pedestrian impact sensor circuit for short to
power
Install a new pedestrian impact sensor.
REFER to: Pedestrian Impact Sensor (501-20C
Pedestrian Protection System, Removal and
Installation).
circuit - signal below allowable
range
diagnostic system
Incorrect component installed
Install a new pedestrian impact sensor.
REFER to: Pedestrian Impact Sensor (501-20C
Pedestrian Protection System, Removal and
Installation).
circuit - current out of range
diagnostic system
Sensor fault
diagnostic system
No signal
diagnostic system
Performance or incorrect
operation
diagnostic system. Install new crush pad and
air deflectors (even if no damage is apparent).
B100628
Pedestrian impact
sensor
B100654
Pedestrian impact
sensor
Missing calibration
B100513
Left pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Left pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Left pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Left pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Left pedestrian protection
B100511
B100512
B100596
B100584
B10054A
Left pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Left pedestrian
diagnostic system
Incorrect component installed Disconnect hood actuator connector, clear DTC
Signal bias level out of

range/zero adjustment failure
accelerometer circuit - open

circuit
accelerometer circuit - short to
ground
power
REFER to: Front Bumper (501-19 Bumpers,

diagnostic system
diagnostic system
left pedestrian protection accelerometer circuit
for open circuit
for short to ground
for short to power
Install a new left pedestrian protection
accelerometer.
REFER to: Pedestrian Protection Accelerometer
diagnostic system
Install a new left pedestrian protection
protection
accelerometer
B10058F
B100531
B100413
B100411
B100412
B100496
B100484
B10044A
B10048F
B100431
U012100
Left pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Left pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Right pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Right pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Right pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Right pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Right pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Right pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Right pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Right pedestrian
protection
accelerometer
Lost communication
with ABS module
Erratic
No signal
Right pedestrian protection
accelerometer circuit - open

circuit
ground
power
Erratic
No signal
Lost communication with ABS
module
U010000
Lost communication
with ECM
Lost communication with ECM
U014200
Lost communication
with RJB
Lost communication with RJB
U000155
High speed CAN

communication Bus
Not configured
U000152
High speed CAN

communication Bus
Not configured
U000188
High speed CAN

communication Bus
Bus off
U1A0266
Permanent memory
store full
Signal has too many
Stored vehicle
not match
U300049
Control module
U300087
Control Module
Missing message
U300055
transitions/events
data received
accelerometer.
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
right pedestrian protection accelerometer
circuit for short to power
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
Install a new right pedestrian protection
accelerometer.
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
Install a new pedestrian protection module.
and Installation).
Install new crush pad and air deflectors (even
if no damage is apparent).
REFER to: Front Bumper (501-19 Bumpers,
Re-configure the Auxiliary junction box using
Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains
suspect the pedestrian protection system,
refer to the new module installation note at
Install a new pedestrian protection module,
refer to the new module installation note at
U300316
Battery voltage
Circuit voltage below threshold
U300317
Battery voltage
Circuit voltage above threshold
P193429
Vehicle speed signal
Invalid signal
P007129
Ambient air
temperature sensor
range/performance
Control module
calibration data #2
Invalid signal
U201B4A
U201B51
Control module
calibration data #2
U210000 Initial configuration not

complete

Number (VIN)

software
incompatibility
Not programmed
Module is in Plant mode
approved diagnostic system. Check pedestrian

protection module for DTCs and refer to the
DTC Index. Check CAN network integrity using
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
diagnostic system
Install a new pedestrian protection module.
and Installation).
Re-configure the pedestrian protection module
system. Clear DTC and re-test, if DTC remains
install a new pedestrian protection module.
and Installation).
Place module into normal operation mode, by
running the new module programming
application, using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

Invalid configuration message Re-configure the Auxiliary junction box using
is received
Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is still
logged suspect the pedestrian protection
module, refer to the new module installation
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection Module

Removal
NOTE: The pedestrian protection module must be renewed if the system has deployed on 3 occasions.
1.
2.
Remove the front LH fender splash shield.

3.
Remove the pedestrian protection module.

Installation
1.
Install the pedestrian protection module.

2.
Install the front LH fender splash shield.

3.
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Impact Sensor

Removal
1.

stands.
2.

Installation).
3.
Torque: 9 Nm
Installation
1.
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection Latch Actuator

Removal
1.
Remove the pedestrian protection hood actuator and bracket.

and Installation) /
2.
Remove the pedestrian protection latch actuator.

Installation
1.
Install the pedestrian protection latch actuator.

2.
Install the pedestrian protection hood actuator and bracket.

and Installation) /
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection Accelerometer

Removal
1.
Remove the radiator splash shield.

For additional information, refer to: Radiator Splash Shield
(501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
2.
Remove the front bumper air ducting.

Remove the 7 clips.
3.
Remove the pedestrian protection accelerometer.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1.
Install the pedestrian protection accelerometer.

Tighten the 6 bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2.
Install the front bumper air ducting.

3.
Install the radiator splash shield.

For additional information, refer to: Radiator Splash Shield
(501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator

LH
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the pollen filter.

For additional information, refer to: Pollen Filter (412-01 Air
Distribution and Filtering, Removal and Installation).
3.
4.
Release the power distribution box and position

aside.

Remove the 4 bolts.
5.
Remove the pedestrian protection actuator and

bracket.
6.
Remove the pedestrian protection actuator.

Installation
1.
Install the pedestrian protection actuator.

2.

3.

4.
Position and install the power distribution box.

5.
Install the pollen filter.

For additional information, refer to: Pollen Filter (412-01 Air
Distribution and Filtering, Removal and Installation).
Pedestrian Protection System - Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator

RH
Removal
1.

For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection
System Depowering and Repowering (501-20, General
Procedures).
2.
3.

Remove the 3 clips.

Remove the 4 bolts.
4.
Remove the pedestrian protection actuator and

bracket.
5.
Remove the pedestrian protection actuator.

Installation
1.
Install the pedestrian protection actuator.

2.

3.

4.

Body Repairs - General Information - Body Repairs

General Information
Introduction
The all-new Jaguar XK Aluminium is unique in the industry as a complete Aluminium monocoque body structure, as distinct
from an Aluminium spaceframe with separate Aluminium exterior panels. Developed from aircraft industry methods, where
strength and light weight are critical, Jaguars manufacturing process produces a massively strong but very light structure
that is both rivetted and epoxy-bonded.
The key to the XK's character is Jaguar's industry-leading bonded and rivetted aluminium monocoque body structure,
introduced with the latest XJ saloons. The aluminium body incorporates the latest thinking in epoxy bonding and riveting
techniques to produce a chassis that is very safe and very light. In fact, the new XK's aluminium chassis is significantly
lighter and stiffer in both coupe and convertible form than the steel model it replaces. The coupe chassis is over 30 percent
stiffer than the previous XK, while the convertible is an impressive 50 percent. It also offers a 10 percent improvement in
power to weight ratio. The XK Aluminium is up to 90 percent stiffer and 180kg lighter than key rivals, with a kerb weight of
just 1595kg.
The XK takes the Lightweight Vehicle concept a step further with extended use of Aluminium castings and extrusions, as well
as pressed Aluminium panels. Its remarkable strength and light-weight come from both the way the bodyshell is constructed
and the use of new jointing technologies developed by Jaguar and its suppliers.
Jaguar guarantee high quality standards by ensuring that mechanical strength properties are tried and tested in numerous
computer simulations, crash tests, by testing materials and by employing sophisticated manufacturing technologies. In the
event of repairs it is vital that the production quality standards are upheld. This requires a well-equipped workshop, and
places particular emphasis on the qualifications of the workshop technicians. Up-to-date knowledge of current manufacturing
technologies and continuous training on new repair methods and techniques are vital for high-quality body repairs. The
model-specific repair manuals and the general repair techniques provide valuable support when undertaking body repairs.
Always follow the repair instructions published in this manual. Failure to observe this instruction can result in serious
impairment of vehicle safety. All specified safety requirements must be met after the work has been carried out.
Vehicle Design
Body
There is only a single welded joint in the XK coupe body, the one 'cosmetic' joint is on the roof. This has an environmental
benefit in that the body construction needs no high electrical current, produces no welding sparks or fumes, and needs no
water for cooling. All other joints in the XK shell are formed using self-piecing rivets applied by hydraulic pressure against a
fixed tool. Where access to only one side of the joint is possible, as in some of the new extruded box sections, a new riveting
process has been developed; and where particularly high stiffness is required in a joint, a combination of riveting and
bonding is used - with the adhesive bond in effect creating a continuos joint which is stronger than a similar, rivetted-only
joint. All visible exterior panels are bonded to the underlying structure, and a new automated seam-sealing process seals all
relevant areas of the shell before painting, to ensure that no gaps are missed.
In the XK, a secondary front bulkhead of aluminium and composite materials help reduce noise transmission from the engine
compartment and provides a dry area under the bonnet for accommodating electrical components. The new structure also
has the benefits in refinement; castings used for the mounting points for the engine, transmission and suspension make
those points significantly stiffer, further reducing transmitted noise and helping to improve suspension dynamics. In terms of
long-term strength, Jaguar's all-aluminium shell has durability approaching twice that of a traditional spot-welded steel body.
Another major advantage of this lightweight vehicle technology is that all the necessary stiffness is in the structure of the
body shell, with a very large rectangular-section side sills. So the convertible, even without a roof, does not need the
traditional stiffening panels seen on many other convertibles - meaning no added weight and no penalty in stiffness or
refinement.
The XK's all-aluminium doors are each over 6kg lighter than an equivalent steel door and their mountings are significantly
stiffer, which allows for smaller gaps. Mounting the window glass rails directly to the aluminium castings at the front and rear
of the door gives better sealing from the frameless layout, and an impressively solid sound seal.
Passenger Safety Cell

Beyond the exceptional body integrity and built-in deformation zones, the all-new XK Aluminium is also available with a host
of other safety solutions for protecting pedestrians as well as car occupants. Those include the shape and construction of the
bumpers and bonnet, plus a completely new technology, the pedestrian deployable bonnet, (European Models). This is
deployed upwards away from its rear edge, in milliseconds, in the event of a pedestrian impact. This forms a safety zone
between the bonnet and the engine and other under-bonnet hard areas to reduce significantly the potential for injuries.
Crumple Zone
Safety is another major benefit of this very strong construction method. That is partly inherent in aluminium as a material,
which absorbs significantly more energy per kilogramme of material weight than steel when it is deformed. But the strength
advantage does not only apply to high-speed impacts, it also means lower-speed accident repair costs are kept to a
minimum. The reduction in the number of joints in the XK further increases strength, and the front of the body is protected
by easily replaced 'crush cans' that absorb the energy in impacts up to 15kph.
Contents
This manual includes technical data and information for the Jaguar XK Aluminium range. The information contained within is
valid at the time of production and incorporates:
Who should use this manual?

Aluminium information
Category 'A' and 'B' definition
Equipment
Panel replacement times
Fixings
Bonding
Tolerances and gap specification
Body alignment
The methods described for panel replacement operations have been obtained from a study of physical repair operations.
In line with Jaguars continuous improvement programme, information and data contained will be updated periodically.
All activities described within are based on the use of genuine Jaguar Parts, tools and approved materials.
Aluminium
The design of the modern motor vehicle attempts to overcome two conflicting needs:
Fuel economy - lighter, aerodynamic and fuel sensitive technology.
High levels of comfort - this often equates to higher specifications and more accessories.
Aluminium alloy is the ideal material to meet these demands; it provides a lighter vehicle body with improved rigidity.
Aluminium is different from traditional steel, with the correct knowledge and suitable tools it is easily repaired.
There are two Aluminium alloys discussed in this manual, the attributes detailed in the following table should be considered
when deciding to repair or replace:
Material
Description
Location on
Vehicle
6111
6000 Series is a Magnesium / Silicon / Copper
Aluminium alloy.
This alloy is used mainly in the outer body panels.
5754
5000 Series is an Aluminium alloy with Magnesium
content.
Internal structural panels
Thickness: 0.9 - 2.0mm

High dent resistance.
Yes - Light damage only.
Thickness: 1.0 - 3.0mm

Strength and durability.
Yes - Light damage only.
Yes - caution material sensitive to heat.
Limited straightening is acceptable.

Yes - must be heated to maintain original alloy
properties.
Attributes
Repairability
Heat During
Repair
Range: 140 - 160C

Ideal panel temperature: 250C
Notes
Ideal panel temperature: 150C

Equipment: Hot air gun.
Equipment: Heat inducer.
Use panel temperature indicator strips.
Use panel temperature indicator strips.
Heat must be applied and maintained during the

straightening process.
Other materials are used in the construction of the XK Aluminium range, however, repair of these materials is not covered as
they fall outside the scope of this manual.
Steel: Used in seat belt anchorages, hinge reinforcements and various small brackets and mountings.
The following illustration shows the panels covered by this manual and the alloys used.
Galvanic Corrosion and Housekeeping

Galvanic corrosion is the 'cross-contamination' of dissimilar metals, in this case Aluminium and steel. Avoidance of galvanic
corrosion is an important issue to be considered in the repair of Aluminium bodied vehicles.
Precautions to prevent the contamination of exposed bare Aluminium surfaces should be taken. Good housekeeping /
cleanliness should be adopted throughout repairs and especially prior to welding, pre-treatment and adhesive bonding.
The repair environment requires control and protection from dust and debris from conventional steel body repairs. All
equipment must be clearly identified and used solely on Aluminium.
Tools should be kept clean and in good order. Steel fastenings are coated to prevent galvanic corrosion. Fastenings should
be examined during repairs and where damaged or suspect must be renewed
The use of graphite, "penetrating" oil, or copper based anti-seize compounds upon the steel fixings is not recommended.
Who Should Use This Information?

The information and repair methods listed are designed as an aid for Jaguar Approved Body Repair Facilities achieving the
Jaguar approved Bodyshop Operating Standards. The relevant section should be read completely before commencing any
repairs. Only technicians who have successfully completed the approved XK Aluminium range training programme should
work on the model. Jaguar Approved Bodyshop Operating Standards require that the skills of technicians be regularly
assessed and that any training needs identified are addressed within a reasonable time. This information complements the
Jaguar training programme.
Definition of Category 'A' and 'B'

Category 'A'
NOTE: Specific equipment and facilities are required to carry out Category 'A' repairs, see equipment.
Damage that requires panel(s) to be replaced with any one or combination of the following procedures:
Welded panel
Bonded panel
Panel secured with fixings
The following list identifies Category 'A' procedures
Category 'A' procedures

Hood.
For additional information, refer to: Hood (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
Front bumper cover.
For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Front bumper.
For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Auxiliary front crossmember.
For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Front Crossmember (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
Front Crossmember.
For additional information, refer to: Front Crossmember (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Fender apron panel front extension.
For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Front Extension (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Side member deformation element.
For additional information, refer to: Side Member Deformation Element (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Front side member side extension mounting.
For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member Side Extension Mounting (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal
Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Front side member side extension.
For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member Side Extension (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Front side member to deformation element bracket.
For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member To Deformation Element Bracket (501-27 Front End Sheet
Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Front side member extension.
For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member Extension (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
Suspension top mount.
For additional information, refer to: Suspension Top Mount (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Front wheel house.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheelhouse (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Front side member.
For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Fender apron panel reinforcement.
For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Reinforcement (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Fender apron panel.
For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Fender apron panel closing panel.
For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Front fender.
For additional information, refer to: Front Fender (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Door
For additional information, refer to: Door (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
A-pillar outer panel.
For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Outer Panel (501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
A-pillar assembly.
For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Assembly (501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Rocker panel.
For additional information, refer to: Rocker Panel (501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Quarter panel assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Quarter Panel Assembly - 2-Door (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Quarter Panel Assembly - Convertible (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Rear outer wheelhouse half.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Outer Wheelhouse Half (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Rear wheelhouse outer.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheelhouse Outer (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Rear side member closing panel.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Side Member Closing Panel (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
Rear side member reinforcement panel.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Side Member Reinforcement Panel (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Rear side member (section).
For additional information, refer to: Rear Side Member Section (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Spare wheel well.

Installation).
Back panel assembly.
Installation).
Liftgate.
Rear bumper cover.
Rear bumper.
Roof panel.
refer to: Spare Wheel Well (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
refer to: Back Panel Assembly (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
refer to: Rear Bumper (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
refer to: Roof Panel (501-28 Roof Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Category 'B'
Damage associated to bolt on panel(s) that are replaced, or light surface damage to exterior cosmetic panels. The
following list identifies Category 'B' procedures

Category B procedures
Hood.
For additional information, refer to: Hood (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
Front bumper cover.
For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Front bumper.
For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Auxiliary front crossmember.
For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Front Crossmember (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
Front Crossmember.
For additional information, refer to: Front Crossmember (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
Fender apron panel front extension.
For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Front Extension (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Side member deformation element.
For additional information, refer to: Side Member Deformation Element (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Front side member side extension mounting.
For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member Side Extension Mounting (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal
Front side member side extension.
For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member Side Extension (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Front fender.
For additional information, refer to: Front Fender (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
Door
For additional information, refer to: Door (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
Liftgate.
Rear bumper cover.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Rear bumper.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Equipment
All Jaguar approved body repair facilities are expected to be equipped in line with Jaguar Body and Paint Centre of Excellence
Operating Standards.
The approved body equipment for the XK Aluminium range is listed as either:
Category 'A'
Category 'B'
All approved equipment is available on a Worldwide basis from:

Country
Austria
Belgium (flemish)
Phone
+800-291714
00800-36733731
Fax
+800-291694
00800-36733292
Belgium (french)
0800-36733732
0800-36733292
Denmark
+800-36733732
+800-36733292
Finland
+800-36733732
+800-36733292
France
0800-904986
0800-901329
Germany
0800-3673373
0800-3673329
Greece
00800-49129046
00800-49129057
Hungary
+800-36733732
+800-36733292
Ireland
1800-409574
1800-409580
Italy
0800-790959
0800-780959
Netherlands
00800-36733732
00800-36733292
Norway
+800-36733732
+800-36733292
Poland
00800-4911241
00800-4911240
Portugal
+800-36733732
+800-36733292
Spain
900-998303
900-998304
Sweden
+800-36733732
+800-36733292
Swiss french
00800-36733732
00800-36733292
Swiss German
00800-36733731
00800-36733291
Turkey
00800-44910087
00800-44910096
UK
0800-214390
0800-281705
All other markets
+49 2203 106199
+49 2203 106241
A copy of the approved equipment standards for category 'A' and 'B' repair facilities is available on request from:
Jaguar Equipment Programme
Unit 6
Wollaston Crescent
Burnt Mills Industrial Estate
Basildon
Essex
SS13 1QD
0800 214390
Alternatively, you can access the programme via their website: www.eqseurope.com
Panel Replacement Times

Panel replacement times are available for the following:
Front end sheet metal.

Operation).
Side panel sheet metal.
Operation).
Rear end sheet metal.
Operation).
Roof sheet metal.
refer to: Front End Sheet Metal (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Description and
refer to: Side Panel Sheet Metal (501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Description and
refer to: Rear End Sheet Metal (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Description and
refer to: Roof (501-28 Roof Sheet Metal Repairs, Description and Operation).
Fixings
There are five groups of fixings used on the XK Aluminium range, other than conventional nuts and bolts. It is important that
the correct procedures are followed for the removal and replacement of these fixings and, where applicable, the correct tools
are used.
Self-Piercing Rivet (SPR)
Self-Piercing Rivets are available in various sizes dependant on the size of the "stack" of panels to which they are fitted. A
"stack" refers to the combined gauge of the panels being Rivetted. The following table identifies the sizes and part numbers
available:
NOTE: It is important to identify and select the correct size fixing by referencing this table prior to installation.
Size
Stack
Jaguar Service Number
4.8mm x 5.0mm
3.0mm
C2C 20589
4.8mm x 7.0mm
4.0mm
C2C 20590
4.8mm x 8.0mm
5.0mm
C2C 20591
4.8mm x 8.5mm
5.5mm
C2C 20592
4.8mm x 9.0mm
6.0mm
C2C 20593
4.8mm x 9.5mm
6.5mm
C2C 20594
4.8mm x 11.0mm
8.0mm
C2C 20595
Removal: The ESN50 is the approved removal tool for Self Piercing Fixings. The ESN50 can be used with an optional, larger,
200mm "C" frame for improved access. Where tool access is impossible, remove fixings using approved drill bits.
Installation: The ESN50 is the approved installation tool for Self Piercing Fixings. Where the original panel is being refitted,
the new fixings should be placed adjacent to the original. Only where the ESN50 cannot be used, or there is insufficient
space on the panel, should the fixings be replaced with Hemloks, unless the repair method dictates otherwise.
Using the ESN50: Ensure there is access for the ESN50 on both sides of the fixing to be removed / installed, including the
optional "C" frame if required. Removal: Align the plunger and anvil over the fixing and depress the trigger. Depressing the
trigger will allow the plunger to act on the fixing and remove it from the panel. Installation: Note: Prior to replacing a self
piercing fixing, a test, using identical materials from waste panels, should be performed, to ensure that all settings are
correct and an acceptable joint has been achieved.
Load new fixing into ESN50. Align the ESN50 over the fixing position and depress the trigger. As the trigger is depressed the
ESN50 will clamp itself onto the work piece and install the fixing.
Hemlok (rivet)
Hemloks are available in various sizes dependant on the size of the "stack" of panels to which they are fitted. A "stack"
refers to the combined gauge of the panels being Rivetted. The following table identifies the sizes and part numbers
available:
NOTE: It is important to identify and select the correct size fixing by referencing this table prior to installation.
Size
Stack
6.4mm x 13.7mm
1.5mm - 3.0mm
C2C-45252
6.4mm x 15.0mm
2.8mm - 4.8mm
C2C-36006
6.4mm x 17.0mm
4.8mm - 6.8mm
C2C-36026
6.4mm x 19.0mm
6.8mm - 8.8mm
C2C-36024
6.4mm x 20.0mm
7.5mm - 9.5mm
tbc
6.4mm x 21.0mm
8.8mm - 10.8mm
C2C-36008
Removal: Hemloks are not used in production, however, if a previous repair has been carried out they may be present.
Remove the centre of the fixing using a 4mm punch - in some instances it may be necessary to loosen the centre using a
hardened centre punch. Once the centre has been removed, drill out the remnant using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit. Remove all
debris.
Installation: The Genesis G4 is the approved installation tool for Hemloks. Prior to replacement ensure the fixing hole has
been drilled to 6.5mm, using Cryobit drill bit and all debris has been removed.
Using the Genesis G4: Ensure the fixing hole has been drilled to 6.5mm and all debris has been removed. Check that you
have the correct size Hemlok for replacement and insert it into the Genesis G4. Use the weight of the Genesis G4 to apply
light pressure as the Hemlok is inserted into its hole. Depress the trigger which will tighten the Hemlok in the hole, the
wasted stud will be ejected into the Genesis G4 once a pre-determined pressure is reached.
Monobolt (rivet)
Removal: Remove the centre of the fixing using a 4mm punch - in some instances it may be necessary to loosen the centre
using a hardened centre punch. Once the centre has been removed, drill out the remnant using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit.
Remove all debris.
Installation: The Genesis G4 is the approved installation tool for Monobolts. Prior to replacement ensure the fixing hole has
been drilled to 6.5mm, using Cryobit drill bit and all debris has been removed.
Using the Genesis G4: Ensure the fixing hole has been drilled to 6.5mm and all debris has been removed. Insert a new
Monobolt into the Genesis G4, (there is only one size of Monobolt used on the XK Aluminium Range). Use the weight of the
Genesis G4 to apply light pressure as the Monobolt is inserted into its hole. Depress the trigger which will tighten the
Monobolt in the hole, the wasted stud will be ejected into the Genesis G4 once a pre-determined pressure is reached.
Countersunk Monobolt (rivet)
Countersunk Monobolts are used in replacement where a Self-Piercing Rivet, (SPR), cannot be replicated and where a
Hemlok cannot be used because a flush surface is required.
Removal:Countersunk Monobolts are not used in production, however, if a previous repair has been carried out they may be
present. Remove the centre of the fixing using a 4mm punch - in some instances it may be necessary to loosen the centre
using a hardened centre punch. Once the centre has been removed, drill out the remnant using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit.
Remove all debris.
Installation:The Genesis G4 is the approved installation tool for Monobolts. Prior to replacement ensure the fixing hole has
been drilled to 6.5mm, using Cryobit drill bit, the hole has been countersunk, using a countersink drill bit and all debris has
been removed.
Using the Genesis G4: Ensure the fixing hole has been drilled to 6.5mm and all debris has been removed, check
Countersunk Monobolt sits flush with panel. Insert a new Countersunk Monobolt into the Genesis G4, (there is only one size
of Countersunk Monobolt used on the XK Aluminium Range). Use the weight of the Genesis G4 to apply light pressure as the
Countersunk Monobolt is inserted into its hole. Depress the trigger which will tighten the Countersunk Monobolt in the hole,
the wasted stud will be ejected into the Genesis G4 once a pre-determined pressure is reached.
Ejot (flow drilled screw)
Removal: Ejots are removed using a T30 Torx driver.

Installation: An Ejot can only be reused where its original thread remains and is intact, Ejots are installed using a T30 Torx
Driver. Where new panels have been fitted and no original threaded Ejot hole exists, a Hemlok fixing should be used.
If the Ejot cannot be re-used, and the original thread remains intact, then a Torx screw (C2C 1964) can be used in its place.
Torx Screw and Rivnut
A Torx Screw and Rivnut are used where the fitment of a Hemlok would give a poor cosmetic appearance. There are also
occasions where the Torx Screw and Rivnut replaces a Monobolt, where there is no access for the Genesis G4. The Rivnut
acts as the thread. The Rivnut is installed using the Wurth HES412 Rivet Nut Thread Setter, (Part No: 964948900).
Description
Rivnut (G)
C2C 10348
Torx screw (J)
C2G 1964
Removal: The removal of the Torx Screw is carried out using a T30 Torx Driver. The Rivnut is not an original fixing.
Installation: The Torx Screw is installed using a T30 Torx Driver. The Rivnut is installed using the Wurth HES412 Rivet Nut
Thread Setter, (Part No: 964948900).
Bonding
This section provides information on the bonded joints used in repair throughout the XK Aluminium body. The
following topics are covered:
Equipment
Materials
Bonding Pre Treatment
Bonding Application
It is a pre-requisite that any person undertaking any repairs which involve panel bonding has attended Jaguar Approved
Training and has achieved the correct skill level to undertake these processes. Bonding is classed as a Category 'A' repair.
Equipment
The approved bonding equipment consists of:
Pyrosil gas applicator kit
Approved two-pack adhesive applicator
Materials
The materials listed in this section are those approved to be used on the XK Aluminium range in conjunction with the repairs
shown in this manual.
Approved Materials
Consumable
Weld crack Penetrant
Weld crack Developer
Weld crack Cleaner
Bonding primer
Bonding adhesive
Bonding adhesive
Cavity foam
Semi rigid sealer
Seam sealer
Cleaner/De-greaser
Cleaner/De-greaser
MIG weld wire (6111)
MIG weld wire (5754)
Abrasive discs
Self-Pierce fixings (all variants)
Hemlok fixings (all variants)
Material
Rocol
Rocol
Rocol
SurAlink GP15
Structural adhesive DP490
Structural adhesive 8115
DM4330 foam
0893 2251
Terostat 1K PUR 11272C (4500010)
08984
3608S
4043 / 4047 filler wire
5554 filler wire
Roloc bristle discs 07528
JEPC
JEPC
Supplier
Equipment Programme
Equipment Programme
Equipment Programme
Equipment Programme
3M
3M
3M
Wurth
Teroson
3M
DuPont
Fronius dealer network
Fronius dealer network
3M
Jaguar Dealer Network
Jaguar Dealer Network
Jaguar
Jaguar
Jaguar
Jaguar
Bonding Pre Treatment

Pre-treating the panels to be bonded, as described in this section, promotes the improved adhesion of the bonding adhesive.
The pre-treatment is carried out using the approved "Pyrosil kit". The kit contains all of the equipment required to perform
the pre-treatment process.
Bonding without pre-treatment will reduce the performance of the joint.

The pre-treatment application is a two stage process:
Chemical application via a flame
Coupling Agent
Performing the Pre-treatment Application

NOTE: Apply caution when using a naked flame.
Remove all risk of combustion

Do not overheat the alloy
Move the flame over the work piece at a constant velocity
Remove any original adhesive, or E-Coat from new panels
Clean surface to be treated using approved pre-cleaner / degreaser
Using the Pyrosil torch, pass the flame, (use the blue tip which is the oxidisation flame), across the surface of the
joint.
Immediately brush primer onto panel surface and allow to dry
The application is colourless and has no visual indication.

Apply the bonding adhesive immediately after the pre-treatment process.
Bonding Application
The approved bonding adhesive is supplied in a two pack cartridge
A two-pack cartridge gun with a disposable mixing nozzle is used for the application of the adhesive
Apply a 5mm "zig zag" bead directly to either the replacement panel or vehicle structure
Ensure a continuous bead of adhesive surrounds fixing holes
On completion the mixing nozzle must be discarded. Ensure an air tight seal is provided for the cartridges.
NOTE: The curing process of the adhesive begins once mixed and has a working time of approx 30 minutes
Aluminium Welding
Health and Safety
Refer to equipment manufacturers' manual.
Set Up / Equipment Check

Refer to equipment manufacturers operator's manual.
Weld Process
This section provides information on aftermarkets Aluminium welding for the XK Aluminium range. It covers the
following areas:
Equipment:Metal Inert Gas (MIG)

Materials:Extruded and pressed Aluminium sheet alloy.
Weld Structure:Fusion welding process: Metal Inert Gas (MIG)
Weld Procedures: Pre-weld, test weld, weld and post weld checks.
Weld Types:
Lap Weld
Butt Weld
Plug Weld
It is a pre-requisite that any person undertaking Category 'A' welding on the XK Aluminium range is fully qualified in
Aluminium Welding.
Equipment
Approved equipment obtained from the Jaguar Equipment Programme:
Fronius Aluminium Edition - Metal Inert Gas (MIG) Welder.

Speedglas with Adflo face shield / weld mask.
Approved fume extractor.
Stainless Steel Brush.
Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
Materials
Prior to any welding activity, it is necessary to identify the type of material to be welded. The XK Aluminium range is
constructed from a number of Aluminium Alloys, each has different attributes that should be considered prior to the weld
process.
Body Materials
The repair methods shown focus on the replacement of:
Pressed Aluminium Alloy sheet - 6111 - Used in skin-panels.
Extruded Aluminium Alloy - 5754 - Used in structural panels.
Weld Wire
The approved weld wires for these alloys are:
6111 - 4043 or 4047 filler wire.
5754 - 5554 filler wire.
Weld Structure
The approved aftermarkets weld process is based on Fusion Welding.:
Metal Inert Gas (MIG) Welding
The approved MIG welder uses DC current. The Electrode, (filler wire), is Positive Pole and the work piece is Negative Pole.
The arc burns between a melting electrode, (which also acts as the filler wire) and the work piece. The shielding gas is :
Inert
MIG - (Argon, Helium or a mixture of these).
Successful Aluminium welding is partly dependent on the removal of surface Oxidisation.

Oxide MUST be removed prior to welding.The oxide melts at a different temperature:
Aluminium melting temperature - approximately 660C.

Aluminium Oxide melting temperature - approximately 2040C.
Fronius Pulsed MIG

The 2700 Alu Edition utilises a 100% digitally controlled power source, this produces final weld attributes of:
Smoothness.
Refinement.
Consistency.
Repeatability.
The accuracy of the approved equipment enables the delivery of one droplet of wire per pulse. This enables welding of
incredibly thin parent material, i.e 0.6mm sheet can be welded using a 1.2mm filler wire.
The approved MIG welder uses Direct Current, (DC) and does not produce High Frequency, (HF), at start up, (initial arc).
Safety Precautions
The following safety precautions should always be implemented:
Disconnect the vehicle battery.
Isolate the Electronic Control Modules (ECMs).
Remove any ECMs within 500mm of the weld area.
Weld Procedures
Pre-weld
Prior to starting any weld procedure you should:
Disconnect the vehicle battery.
Isolate the ECM.
The Aluminium surfaces MUST be cleaned prior to welding. Cleaning will aid penetration and avoid contamination. There are
three steps to this process:
1. Clean Surface
To remove wax and any other contaminants use a chemical surface cleaner, either:
Jaguar approved product: DuPont 3608S.
Alternatively, an Isopropyl based product.
2. Remove Oxide
This can be achieved through a number of processes:

Stainless Steel brush.
80 Grit abrasive paper.
Non-Metallic scuff pad.
Note, if a Stainless Steel brush is used it should not be contaminated by use on a steel vehicle.
3. Remove Oxide Dust
Remove dust with a lint free cloth.
Note: Oxide builds up very quickly, therefore, perform steps 2 and 3 immediately prior to welding. If left for a period of
time, steps 2 and 3 should be repeated.
Equipment Set Up
The approved welding equipment for the XK Aluminium range is the "Fronius 2700 Alu Edition". The user should
always refer to the operators manual for detailed instructions. The following provides an overview of the set-up
procedure:
Health and Safety - read operators manual.

Check correct power supply.
Check gas supply.
Check all equipment parts - safety check.
Attach power cables, connect to supply.

Purge gas bottle, attach.
Attach clamp.
Test Weld
A test weld using identical coupons from waste panels should take place prior to working on the vehicle. The test piece is
then visually checked and destructively tested to ensure all settings are correct and an acceptable weld has been achieved.
Prior to starting, the following should be checked:
Gas - Correct for the type of job.
Filler Wire - Correct for the type of material to be welded.
An effective weld should demonstrate the following qualities:

All visible weld surfaces shall be clean, bright and of a uniform profile.
The weld seam should show uniform height and width over its entire length.
There shall be complete fusion between the surfaces of the work piece and the weld metal deposit.
Correct level of penetration will be visible at the rear of the coupon as a fine continuous line.
Effective Weld Length
The effective weld length is the weld seam as described in the Body Repair Sections. The effective weld length does not
include allowances for the run-in/run-out, or termination defects, (start / stop), of the weld seam. It is permissible that the
overall weld length is longer than detailed in the repair section, as the overall weld will include a minimum of 5mm at both
the start and the stop of the weld seam, provided the function of the part is not affected, or the weld finishes on the edge of
a panel.
Post Weld Checks
Weld inspections take the form of a visual examination and destruction testing.
Visual Examinations
A visual examination of fusion welds should be carried out in accordance with the acceptance criteria detailed in the
Imperfections / Defect Levels table.
Imperfection / Defect Levels Table
Defect
Imperfection
Type
Burn-through
Seam offset, sides
melted away
Cracks
Fused weld
spatter
Details
Burn holes
Incomplete fusion
Limits
Not permitted
Not permitted within effective weld length
Any form of cracking is not

permitted at any position along
the entire length of the weld
seam
Not permitted
Limited acceptance. Not permitted on visible surfaces or in areas

where functional performance of the part is affected, e.g. mating
surfaces, sealing surfaces, etc. In such instances spatter is to be
removed. All loosely adherent spatters must be removed.
Permitted provided functional performance of the component is not
affected.
Not permitted
Visible ignition Local melting of parent metal due

marks
to arc
Open end crater Reduces the cross sectional area
of the weld seam
Visual pores
Not permitted
Weld skip
Discontinuity / interruption in
Not permitted at any position along the entire length of the weld seam
weld seam
Nominal effective weld lengths are detailed within the appropriate body repair section. Weld lengths may be greater than
that specified providing the part remains functional.
Dye penetrate testing MUST be used for detection of discontinuities, such as cracks, laps, folds, porosity and lack of fusion
that are open to the surface of the material. Typical defects include start, (cold start / incomplete fusion) and stop, (crater
cracking), defects within a fusion weld run. In addition to this lack of fusion / coalescence at the weld toe, solidification
cracks in the weld bead may also be detected.
Non-destructive Crack Inspection Process

Use the product as listed in the Approved Materials Section, this product is supplied within the Category 'A' tool kit. The
product is an aerosol applied dye system. It is designed to penetrate the finest cracks and flaws to facilitate detection, the
system includes: Cleaner, Penetrant and Developer.
The process is as follows:
1. Use the cleaner to de-grease/clean the test area, then wipe with a lint free cloth.
2. When the surface is completely dry apply the penetrant. Cover the test area and allow a minimum contact time of
10 minutes
3. Remove excess penetrant from the surface with a lint free cloth wetted with the cleaner.
Apply a THIN film of the developer and leave for a minimum of 10 minutes to draw up the retained dye from flaws or
cracks.
Suspect areas should then be examined under natural or electric light for signs of flaws and/or cracks. Cracks will
show up as lines whilst porosity will appear as pin holes.

Destructive Testing
Each test weld should be pulled apart to check the quality and penetration of the weld. Visual examination should be
conducted to evaluate and detect all the characteristic/defects detailed in the Imperfection and Defect Levels Table.
Types of Welded Joint

This section identifies the three types of joint used in Category 'A' panel replacement. It is not a guide to welding, as all
Category A repairers will have staff who are suitably qualified in welding Aluminium. This section highlights the key points for
each weld type.
Lap Joint
Key Points
Run-In/Out distance of 5mm.
Minimum overall length of 20mm.
Must use Start / Finish tabs.
Butt Joint
Key Points
Run-In/Out distance of 5mm.

Minimum overall length of 20mm.
Must use Start/Finish tabs.
Nominal penetration of fillet required.
Plug Weld
Key Points
Hole size 10mm.
Position of MIG nozzle - vertical.
Body Repairs - Corrosion Protection - Corrosion Protection

General
The application of additional corrosion protection following body repair is not necessary and not recommended.
However, it is important to be aware of galvanic corrosion and take steps to prevent its occurance.
Galvanic Corrosion
Galvanic corrosion is the 'cross-contamination' of dissimilar metals, in this case Aluminium and Steel. Avoidance of
galvanic corrosion is an important issue to be considered in the repair of Aluminium bodied vehicles.
Precautions to prevent the contamination of exposed bare Aluminium surfaces should be taken. Good housekeeping /
cleanliness should be adopted throughout repairs and especially prior to welding, pre-treatment, (Pyrosil), and adhesive
bonding.
The repair environment requires control and protection from dust and debris from conventional steel body repairs. All
equipment must be clearly identified and used solely on Aluminium.
Tools should be kept clean and in good order. Steel fastenings are coated to prevent galvanic corrosion. Fastenings
should be examined during repairs and where damaged or suspect must be renewed
The use of graphite, "penetrating" oil, or copper based anti-seize compounds upon the steel fixings is not
recommended.
Where the OE surface protection, (paint), is removed, it must be reinstated to the recommended standard.
Only Jaguar Land Rover Limited original bodywork components and Jaguar Land Rover Limited approved repair
materials, (sealer, paint, etc), are to be used for bodywork repairs.
Body Repairs - Water Leaks - Water Leaks

General
If water leaks occur after bodywork repairs, the cause can be established using the checks described below. A
systematic and logical procedure is required to locate water leaks. Before beginning extensive checks, a thorough
visual inspection must be carried out.
Visual Inspection
The following characteristics may indicate existing leaks:
Check the clearance and accurate fit of ancillary components such as the hood, tailgate, liftgate, doors, and so on.
Check for correct fit and possible damage to sealing elements such as blanking plugs, rubber door seals, and so on.
Check water drain holes for unhindered flow.
Various tests can be used to provide further information on possible leaks:
Water test
Washer test
Road test
Chalk (powder) test
Practical execution of tests and checks

Water test
NOTE: Never aim a jet of water directly at a rubber seal.
Carry out the water test with a second person present (in the passenger compartment).
Use variable washer nozzles (concentrated water jet to fine spray mist).
Start in the lower section and spray the whole area, working upwards in stages.
Washer test
Further tests can be carried out in the washer system.
Some leaks originate here, or only occur here.
The relevant passenger compartment should be checked using a torch during the wash procedure.
Road test
If no leaks are located during the tests above, road tests should be carried out on wet roads.
Road tests under various conditions:
At various speeds.
On various road surfaces (asphalt to cobbles).
With loaded or unloaded vehicle.
Driving through puddles (splash water).
Chalk test (powder test)
In this test, the clamping load and the bearing surface of the seal are checked.
Performing the test:
Dust the door seal with powder or coat with chalk.
Coat the bearing surface of the seal with a thin film of vaseline.
Slowly close the door and open it again.
Check the width and continuity of the imprint on the door seal.
Other test equipment

Other equipment such as stethoscopes, UV lamps, special mirrors or ultrasound measuring instruments can be used
to locate leaks.
Rectifying the leak using recommended tools, auxiliary equipment and materials
Tools and auxiliary equipment:

Dry, absorbent cloths
Variable washer nozzle
Torch, fluorescent tube
Mirror
Compressed air
Seal lip installer
Wet/dry vacuum cleaner
Sealing compound compressor
Remover for interior trim

Cutter blade or pocket knife
Wedge (wood or plastic)
Hot air blower
Special mirror for concealed leaks
Air flow checker
Sealing compound (tape and plastic compound)
Multi-purpose sticker
Clinched flange sealer
Window sealing compound
Water shield (PVC)
Double-sided adhesive tape for water shield
Methylated spirit (available from trade outlets)
PU adhesive
Silicone remover
Tar remover
Water leaks according to mileage or running time

Increasing mileage has an effect on the problem of leaks in a vehicle. Possible influencing factors are:
Servicing and maintenance of seals:

No maintenance, lack of maintenance or incorrect maintenance
Using an incorrect agent
Damaged seals:
As a result of aging, wear or incorrect handling/assembly.
Heavy soiling of the vehicle:
Heavy soiling of a vehicle can seriously impair the function of water drainage channels in particular, and also of
rubber seals.
Age-related factors:
Environmental factors
UV radiation
Extreme climatic conditions
Corrosion can have a serious impact on bodywork, in particular as a result of:
Lightly or heavily rusted seal carriers
Rusted body seal welds
Perforation corrosion
Water leaks after body repairs

If a vehicle develops a leak after body repairs, the following points must be taken into consideration in particular:
The correct seating of ancillary components and their seals must be checked.
The correct alignment of doors/tailgate and liftgate must be checked. The associated seals must not be damaged and
must be installed correctly.

Check that panel seams are correctly sealed.
The correct seating of rubber grommets must be checked.
Directly-glazed windows must have correct and complete bonding.
Water drainage system

If a vehicle develops water leaks, then areas into which water is routed or drained should be checked first.
Water drainage system (illustration for reference only)
Item
Part Number
Description
Water drainage, front
Water drainage, side and rear
Roof drainage
Engine compartment drainage
Water leaks, diagnosis and corrective action: Front passenger compartment

Windscreen
Diagnosis:
Ingress of water into A-pillar area or instrument cluster area and rocker panel area.
Cause:
Breaks in adhesive beads
Corrective action:
The breaks in adhesive beads can be located from inside by using compressed air. The leak can be identified from
outside by the escaping air.
The second test method is by means of a water test. The outer trims must be raised carefully using a plastic wedge.
The leak should be located from inside by a second assistant.
Side windows
In the case of side windows, the same problems can arise as for a windscreen. The same corrective actions must therefore
be used.
Door seal
Diagnosis:
Water ingress in the lower part of the interior door trim or in the rocker panel area.
Cause:
The water shield fitted behind the interior door trim exists to drain off water that has entered the door via the
drainage holes, either downwards or outwards. If the water shield seal is damaged or has been fitted incorrectly,
then water can get into the passenger compartment.
In addition to this, the drainage holes can become clogged with leaves, dirt or excess cavity protection agents. Water
gathers in the door and ingresses into the passenger compartment.
Check water shield for damage or correct fitting.
If the water shield needs to be re-bonded, then approved seam sealer should be used.
Before the water shield is installed, the drainage holes must be checked for unhindered flow.
Door seals
Diagnosis:
Ingress of water into the rocker panel area
Cause:
Insufficient clamping load between seal and door.
Corrective action:
Check clamping load:
The easiest way to check the clamping load of a seal to the respective bearing surface is by means of a paper strip
test. This consists of trapping strips of paper at various points between the door and the seal, and fully closing the
door. If it is possible to pull out the paper with no great resistance, then the clamping load is too low.
NOTE: When adjusting the clamping load, the profile alignment of the relevant components must always be taken
into consideration.
Adjust the clamping load:

The clamping load is normally adjusted using the striker. When doing so, the edge alignment from the door to the
side panel, or from the front door to the rear door must be taken into account.
Another setting method is to realign the panel flange for the seal mounting. The clamping load is increased by
moving the flange towards the door.

NOTE: Do not realign the flange too far in the direction of the door, as this can reduce the bearing surface of the seal
to the door.
Check the bearing surface:
Apply chalk evenly to the surface of the seal. Evenly coat the bearing surface of the door with vaseline.
Close the door fully, the lock must engage. Open the door. The imprint of the chalk (bearing surface) can be
identified in the film of vaseline.

The bearing surface should be at least 5mm across at all points.
Other causes:
The door seal must completely seal the door where it meets the bodywork.
Water can ingress directly or indirectly into the interior of the vehicle if the seal is damaged at any point.
Corrective action:
A damaged or worn door seal must always be renewed in full.
When renewing the seal, the following must be taken into account:
Always fit the seal first in the area of the narrow radii (corner points).
Next, secure the seal to the flange evenly by tapping lightly with a rubber hammer. The installed seal must not be
kinked at any point.
NOTE: The prescribed length of a seal must not be shortened.

Other cause:
The door seal is attached to the welded flange all the way round. If this welded flange is uneven or damaged at any
point (usually in areas with small radii) then this point could be subject to leaks.
A stretched seal carrier can also cause a leak.
In both cases, water gets into the vehicle interior under the seal carrier.
Corrective action:
Align the deformed welded flange using a hammer and anvil block, prevent and, if necessary, repair any paint
damage.
Sliding roof/tilting roof
Diagnosis:
Ingress of water at sliding roof aperture
Cause:
The sliding roof/tilting roof is installed in a water trap. The water drains off via the water trap, water drain holes and
drain hoses. The drain hoses lead downwards on both sides via the A-pillar and B-pillar.
The drain holes or drain hoses can become clogged with leaves, dirt, underbody protection and so on.
Corrective action:
NOTE: In the case of a sliding or tilting roof, the external rubber seal and the lock actuator or latch mechanism must
be checked first of all.

Check the water trap for leaks.
Check the drain hoses for leaks and for correct connection to the water trap.
Check the drainage system for unhindered flow, and blow out with compressed air if necessary.
Check the external seal and the correct adjustment of the sliding roof.
Liftgate
Diagnosis:
Ingress of water into rear headlining area and luggage area.
Cause:
The leak problems of the tailgate and liftgate correspond to those of the doors.
In addition to this, the area to be sealed is much bigger. The routing holes for cables and hoses must also be sealed.
The rubber grommets for the routing holes must be checked for damage and correct seating (fully unhooked).
The mounting points of the liftgate hinges may leak.
Corrective action:
Check the rubber grommets and renew if necessary.
Check the hinge mounting points, and re-seal with sealing compound if necessary.
Forced air extraction
Diagnosis:
Ingress of water into side luggage compartment area
Cause:
The forced air extraction for the vehicle interior is located in the quarter panel lower extension.
The rubber flap of the forced air extraction must be able to move freely.
Corrective action:
Remove the forced air extraction.
Check the seal area between the bodywork and housing, as well as the rubber flap.
Renew seal if necessary.
Rear window
Diagnosis:
Ingress of water into the luggage compartment area
Cause:
Rear window leaking.
Check for leak in the same way as for leaking windscreen.
Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks - Body

and Frame
NOTE: Dimensions are always to the hole center.
Front end dimensions The following dimensions are on the front end of the vehicle.
Detail
'A' - Rear fender fixing hole
'B' - Rear fender fixing hole to front fender fixing hole
'C' - Bumper beam top outboard fixing hole
'D' - Spring mount, forward inboard hole
'E' - Upper arm, top fixing hole
'F' - Front fender, fixing hole
'G' - Front fender fixing hole to rear fender fixing hole
Dimension
1802.6X, 814.9Y, 964Z
778.7
593.5X, 473.7Y, 678.5Z
1304X, 471.4Y, 948.2Z
1175.5X, 468.8Y, 862.8Z
1030.4X, 752.6Y, 884.9Z
1749.2
Body side dimensions

Detail
'A' - Top door hinge, rearward fixing hole
'B' - Bottom door hinge, rearward fixing hole
'C' - Door striker fixing, top hole
'D' - Body side rear tooling hole
Dimension
2136.05X, 807.4Y, 894.2Z
2138.7X, 818.2Y, 593.5Z
3352.4, 792.7Y, 728.7Z
4607.3X, 786.9Y, 819.03Z
Underbody dimensions
Detail
'A' - Front sub-frame front fixing to front sub-frame rear fixing
'B' - Front sub-frame front fixing
'C' - Front spring mount, large hole
'D' - Front sub-frame rear fixing
'E' - A-frame rear fixing hole
'F' - K-frame front fixing hole
'G' - Rear sub-frame front fixing hole
'H' - Rear spring mounting, large hole
'I' - Rear sub-frame rear fixing hole
'J' - K-frame rear fixing hole
'K' - Rear sub-frame front fixing to rear sub-frame rear fixing
Dimension
982.6
893.1X, 419.5Y, 494Z
1342.9X, 434.4Y, 934.2Z
1409.8X, 416.25Y, 493Z
2237.3X, 703.4Y, 282.2Z
3517X, 704Y, 287.6Z
3791.7X, 454.5Y, 403.1Z
4222.7X, 482.4Y, 755Z
4366.5X, 507.6Y, 595Z
4550X, 528Y, 583.1Z
1120.3
Rear end body dimensions

Detail
'A' - Liftgate, hinge fixing rear hole
'B' - Tail lamp, outboard fixing hole
'C' - Liftgate striker fixing hole
'D' - Rear bumper inner fixing hole
Dimension
3686X, 427Y, 1312.6Z
4761.1X, 709.5Y, 881Z
4985.5X, 71Y, 712.4Z
4676.2X, 396.3Y, 618Z
'E' - Liftgate spigot strut fixing hole

'F' - Liftgate, hinge fixing rear hole to liftgate striker fixing hole
4268.9X, 445.3Y, 1201.8Z

1475.0
Gap and Profile dimensions
Gap and profile information on the front end of the vehicle

Detail
'a' - Hood to front bumper
'b' - Fender to head lamp
'c' - Hood to fender
Gap
4.0 1.7
2.0 1.6
3.5 1.1
Profile
-1.0 1.1
-1.0 1.5
-1.0 1.0
Gap and profile information on the side of the vehicle

Detail
'd' - Door to fender
'e' - Door to bodyside panel
'f' - Door glass to rear quarter glass
'g' - Bodyside panel to rear bumper
'h' - Rear lamp to bodyside panel
Gap
4.0 1.0
4.0 1.0
8.0 2.0
0.0 +0.5 -0.0
2.0 0.5
Profile
0.0 +0.5 -1.5
0.0 0.5
0.0 1.0
0.0
0.0 1.0
Gap and profile information on the rear end of a Coupe vehicle

Detail
'j' - Liftgate to bodyside panel
'k' - Rear lamp to rear fog lamp
Gap
3.5 1.2
4.0 1.0
Profile
-5.0 1.2
-1.0 1.0
Gap and profile information on the rear end of a Cabriolet vehicle

Detail
'l' - Convertible hood to convertible hood compartment lid
'm' - Convertible hood compartment lid to luggage compartment lid
'n' - Luggage compartment lid to body side panel
'p' - Tail lamp to indicator lamp
Gap
3.0 3.0
5.5 1.5
3.5 1.0
4.0 1.6
Profile
N/A
0.0 1.0
-1.0 1.0
0 1.7
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs Torque Specifications
Item
Auxiliary front crossmember - bolt
Front fender - bolt
Front crossmember to fender apron panel front extension - bolt
Front crossmember to fender apron panel reinforcement - bolt
Front crossmember to front side member extension- bolt
Front crossmember to headlamp mounting bracket - bolt
Front side member
Front side member, side extension - bolt
Front side member, side extension mounting - bolt
Front side member to deformation element bracket
Side member deformation element - bolt
A = refer to Removal and Installation procedure.
Nm
25
10
20
30
25
9
A
25
70
A
70
lb-ft
18
7
15
22
18
18
52
52
lb-in
80
-
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front End Sheet Metal

Front end service panels
Item
1
2
Description
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Service part No
3
4
Auxiliary front crossmember

Headlamp mounting bracket
5
6
Front crossmember
Fender apron panel front extension
Side member deformation element
Front side member to deformation element bracket
Front side member side extension mounting
10
Front side member side extension
11
Front side member extension
12
Front side member
13
Suspension top mount
14
Front Wheelhouse
C2P 8487
R/H C2P 5457
L/H C2P 5458
C2P 4831
R/H C2P 5642
L/H C2P 5643
R/H C2P 3370
L/H C2P 3370
R/H C2P 4646
L/H C2P 4647
R/H
L/H
R/H C2P 8095
L/H C2P 8096
R/H
L/H
R/H
L/H
R/H C2P9666
L/H C2P9667
R/H C2P 8474
L/H C2P 8475
15
16
Hood
Fender apron panel reinforcement
17
Fender apron panel
18
Fender apron panel closing panel
19
Front fender
R/H C2P 8489

L/H C2P 8490
R/H C2P 8097
L/H C2P 8098
R/H
L/H
R/H
L/H
Time schedules, front end

The following information shows the total time taken to replace single panels and complete assemblies. This time includes
removal of Mechanical, Electrical and Trim, (MET), items, plus paint times based on Metallic Clear Over Base Paint, (blends to
adjacent panels are not included).
The times shown were generated by Thatcham, (the Motor Insurance Repair Research Centre), and are to be used as a guide
only.
Single panel times
Panel Description
Hood
Front bumper cover
Front fender L/H
Front Fender R/H
Front Crossmember
Engine and Suspension assembly remove and install
Combination panel replacement times
coupe
5.6
5.9
7.0
7.0
4.4
5.7
10.5
The following panel combination times show the total time to remove/refit body panels, MET items and paint times based on
Metallic Clear Over Base Paint process, (blends to adjacent panels are not included).
Combination panel times
Panel Description
Hood
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Side member deformation element L/H and R/H
Front Fender
Total Time
coupe
L/H 21.2
R/H 21.2
Panel Description
coupe
Hood
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Front side member side extension L/H and R/H
Front Fender L/H and R/H
Total Time
24.1
Panel Description
Hood
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Front bumper
Front side member to deformation element bracket.
Front side member
Front Crossmember
Fender apron panel front extension
Fender apron panel front reinforcement
Fender apron panel
Front Wheelhouse
Suspension top mount
Front Fender
Engine and suspension assembly remove and install
Total Time
coupe
L/H 45.4
R/H 43.9
Panel Description
Hood
Front bumper cover
Front bumper
Front side member side extension mounting L/H and R/H
Front side member side extension L/H and R/H
Front bumper
Front side member to deformation element bracket L/H and R/H
Front side member L/H and R/H
Front Crossmember
Fender apron panel front extension L/H and R/H
Fender apron panel front reinforcement L/H and R/H
Fender apron panel L/H and RH
Fender apron panel closing panel L/H and R/H
Front Wheelhouse L/H and R/H
Suspension top mount L/H and R/H
Front Fender L/H and R/H
Engine and suspension assembly remove and install
Total Time
coupe
60.7
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Fender

Removal
1.

2.

For additional information, refer to: Rocker Panel Moulding
(501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
3.

4.
Open the hood.
5.
Open the door.

6.
CAUTION: Protect the paintwork during this

operation.
Remove the front fender.
Remove the 12 bolts.
Release the headlamp clip.
Carefully release the fender.
7.

Remove the fender moulding assembly.
8.
Remove the inner grille.

Installation
1.
Install the inner grille.

Secure the clips.
2.
Install the fender moulding assembly.

3.
Install the front fender.

Secure the headlamp clip.
4.
Install the fender splash shield, front section.

5.
Install the rocker panel moulding.

Installation).
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Crossmember

Removal
NOTE: This is a category 'B' repair.
NOTE: In this procedure the front crossmember is removed and installed without the need to remove any other body
panels.
1.
Before commencing this procedure ensure that you are aware of

all Health and Safety requirements.
For additional information, refer to: Health and Safety
Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
2.
For further information on the methods, tools and fixings used

in this procedure refer to the body repairs - general information
section.
For additional information, refer to: Body Repairs (501-25A
Body Repairs - General Information, Description and Operation).
3.

For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect (414-01,
4.
5.
Release the air intake duct and position it aside.
6.
Release the PAS reservoir and position it aside.
7.
Remove the LH & RH radiator upper mountings, this also

releases the support braces. If the crossmember is being
renewed, completely remove the mountings and save for
fitment to the new panel.
8.
Release the crossmember wiring harness and position it aside.
9.
If the panel is being renewed, remove the RH & LH SRS front

impact severity sensors and save for installation to the new
panel.
For additional information, refer to: Front Impact Severity
Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and
Installation).
10.
Remove the 2 headlamp mounting brackets, 2

10mm Bolts on each side.
11.
Remove 4 13mm bolts, 2 each side, to the fender

apron panel front extension.
12.
Remove 4 13mm bolts, 2 each side, to the fender

apron panel reinforcement.
13.
Remove 2 10mm bolts, 1 each side, to the front

side member extension.
Installation
1.
Install is the reversal of removal.

2.
Tighten the crossmember to fender apron panel

front extension bolts to: 20 Nm (15 lb.ft).
3.
Tighten the crossmember to fender apron panel

reinforcement bolts to: 30 Nm (22 lb.ft).
4.
Tighten the crossmember to front side member

extension bolts to: 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
5.
Tighten the headlamp mounting bracket to

crossmember bolts to: 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).
6.
Check headlamp alignment, adjust as necessary.

For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Adjustment (41701 Exterior Lighting, General Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel

Removal
NOTE: This is a category 'A' repair.
NOTE: In this procedure the fender apron panel is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover
front fender
fender apron panel front extension
1.

Operation).
2.

in this procedure, refer to the body repairs - general information
section.
For additional information, refer to: Body Repairs (501-25A,
3.

Specifications).
4.

For additional information, refer to: Front Fender (501-27 Front
End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
5.
Remove the fender apron panel front extension.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Front
Extension (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
6.
Remove the hood catch.
7.

8.
Remove the pedestrian protection hood actuator.

and Installation).
9.
LH Side: Remove the pedestrian protection module.

Module (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Removal and
Installation).
10.
RH Side: Remove the windshield washer reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Windshield Washer
Reservoir (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal and
Installation).
11.
RH Side: Remove the coolant expansion tank.

12.
Release the inner wheelhouse wiring harness and position it

aside.
13.
14.
15.
Remove 6 Monobolts, 4 from the A-Pillar and 2

from the fender apron panel reinforcement.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove 15 Self

Piercing Rivets, upper edge, to the fender apron
panel reinforcement. Using the ESN50, remove 16
Self Piercing Rivets, lower edge, to the fender
apron panel closing panel.
Separate the joints and remove the panel.
Installation
1.
Remove rivet remnants.
2.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, remove adhesive residue.
3.
Offer up the new panel, using the fender to aid alignment. When
aligned, clamp into position.
4.
Remove the fender.
5.
If re-using the fender apron panel reinforcement,

transfer the location of the 13 fixing holes to the
new fender apron panel, (avoiding any internal
fixings), drill through using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill
Bit.
6.
Remove the new panel and deburr the drilled

holes.
7.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, clean and prepare the new panel joint
surfaces.
8.
Pyrosil the joints.
9.
Apply the coupling agent and allow to dry.
10.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the body panel joints.
11.
Offer up the new panel, align and clamp into position.
12.
Using the Genesis G4, install 13 Hemloks, part no:

C2C-36006, to the fender apron panel
reinforcement and install 6 Monobolts, part no:
C2P 4773, 2 to the fender apron panel
reinforcement and 4 to the A Pillar.
13.
Using the ESN50, install 18 Self Piercing Rivets,

part no: C2C 20590, along the lower edge, to the
fender apron panel closing panel.
14.
Remove any excess adhesive.
15.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel Reinforcement

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the fender apron panel reinforcement is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover

front fender
front crossmember
fender apron panel
fender apron panel closing panel
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the fender apron panel.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel (501-27
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
4.
Remove the fender apron panel closing panel.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Closing
Panel (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
5.
Remove the insulating material from the bulkhead.
8.
6.
Remove 3 Monobolts.
7.

Piercing Rivets.
Separate joints and remove the panel.
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mark the position of 10 fixing holes to the suspension top

mount.
5.
Remove the new panel.

6.
7.
Deburr the drilled holes.

8.
9.
Drill 10 pilot holes in the new panel, in the

positions marked, then, using a 9.5mm drill bit,
enlarge these holes.
Using the HES 412 Rivet Nut Tool, insert 10 Rivet

Nuts, part no: C2C 10348, into the pre-drilled
holes.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, clean and prepare the panel joint
surfaces.
10.
Pyrosil the joints.
11.

12.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the body joints.
13.

14.
NOTE: The replacement fixings must be Torx

screws and not Ejots.
Install 10 T30 Torx screws, part no: C2G 1964, to
the suspension top mount.
15.
Using the ESN50, install 7 Self Piercing Rivets, part

no: C2C 20590, 5 to the A-Pillar closing and 2 to
the front wheelhouse. Install 1 Self Piercing Rivet,
part no: C2C 20591, to the suspension top mount.
16.
Using the Genesis G4, install 3 Monobolts, part no:

C2P 4773, to the A- Pillar.
17.
18.
Install is the reverse of removal.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the fender apron panel closing panel is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover
front fender
front crossmember
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.

4.
Remove the front crossmember.

For additional information, refer to: Front Crossmember (501-27
5.
Remove the hood catch.
6.

7.
Remove the strut brace.
8.
LH Side: Remove the pedestrian protection module.

Module (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Removal and
Installation).
9.

Installation).
10.

11.
LH Side: Remove the air cleaner.

For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12,
12.
LH Side: Remove the power distribution box.
13.
LH Side: Remove the engine control module, including its

bracket.
For additional information, refer to: Engine Control Module
(ECM) (303-14, Removal and Installation).
14.

aside.
15.
LH Side: Remove the pollen filter housing.
16.
LH Side: Remove the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module.

For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Module (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist,
17.
Remove the LH & RH plenum chambers.
18.
Remove the pedestrian protection bonnet actuator and its

bracket.
19.
20.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove 7 Self Piercing Rivets,

from the fender apron panel reinforcement.
21.
22.

Piercing Rivets, from the suspension top mount.
Remove 3 Monobolts from the A-Pillar.
Installation
1.
2.
3.

4.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 5 holes to the

inner panel.
5.
Mark the position of the 6 fixing holes to the

suspension top mount.
6.
7.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 6 holes in the new panel, as
marked, at the joint with the suspension top mount.
8.
Deburr drilled holes.
9.
surfaces.
10.
Pyrosil the joints.
11.
12.
Apply a 5mm bead of adhesive to the new panel joints.
13.

14.

C2C-36026, to the suspension top mount.
15.

C2C-36026, to the fender apron panel
reinforcement.
16.
17.

C2P 4773, to the A Pillar.

no: C2C 20590, to the fender apron panel
reinforcement.
18.
19.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the front side member is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover

front bumper
auxiliary front crossmember
hood
front crossmember
front side member side extension
suspension top mount
front side member side extension mounting
front side member deformation element
front side member to deformation element bracket
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the engine and suspension as an assembly.

NOTE: It is necessary to remove the front side member lower inner and the front side member closing panel assembly
to enable the fitment of the front side member. These panels cannot be reused and will require replacement.
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.

4.
Remove the front side member to deformation element bracket.

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member To
Deformation Element Bracket (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal
5.
Remove the suspension top mount.

For additional information, refer to: Suspension Top Mount
(501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
NOTE: This procedure assumes that the suspension top mount is damaged and has been removed, however, the front
side member can be replaced with the suspension top mount in situ.
6.
Remove the engine and front suspension as an assembly.
7.

8.
LH Side: Remove the junction box.
9.

(303-03 Engine Cooling, Removal and Installation).
10.
LH Side: Remove the A/C pipe.
11.
LH Side: Remove the fuel pipes.
12.
LH Side: Remove the Anti-lock Brake System, (ABS), module.

13.
LH Side: Remove the engine control module, (ECM) and its

mounting bracket.

(ECM) (303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - Vehicles With:
14.
RH Only: Remove the secondary air injection pump.

For additional information, refer to: Secondary Air Injection
(AIR) Pump (303-08 Engine Emission Control - Vehicles
Without: Supercharger, Removal and Installation).
15.
16.

For additional information, refer to: Steering Column Lower
Shaft (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and Installation).
17.
Remove the brake pipes along the side member.
18.
Remove the side member exhaust heat shield.
19.
20.
Remove the LH and RH plenum chambers.
21.
Remove the heater supply and return hoses.
22.
Remove the brake pipes from the bulkhead.
23.
Release the side member wiring harness and position it aside.
24.
The following steps identify the procedure for removing the front
side member lower inner.
25.
Remove 3 Monobolts.
26.
Using a combination of the ESN50 and a 6.5mm

Cryobit drill bit, remove 10 Self Piercing Rivets.
27.
CAUTION: Do not discard the Ejots. They are

to be re-used during installation.
Remove 10 T30 Ejots.
28.
NOTE: Take care when making the saw cut, do not

cut into the reinforcement under the panel.
Saw cut the old panel along the point shown in the
illustration. This allows the panel to be removed
without the need to disturb the joint at the
bulkhead / floor panel.
29.
Separate the joints and remove the front side member lower
inner.
30.
Remove the rivet remnants.
31.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, remove any adhesive residue and

clean and prepare the panel joint surfaces.
32.
side member closing panel assembly.
33.
CAUTION: Do not discard the Ejot. It is to be

re-used during installation.
Remove 2 Monobolts, remove 2 21mm bolts and 1
T30 Ejot.
34.
35.

Piercing Rivets, (19 on the LH side).
NOTE: On removal, keep panel damage to a minimum as it will

be used as a template for the new panel.
Separate the joints and remove the front side member closing
panel assembly. Retain the old panel for use as a template.
36.
37.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, remove any adhesive residue and

clean and prepare the panel joint surfaces.
38.
side member.
39.
Remove 2 21mm bolts and 2 13mm bolts.
40.
Using a Belt Sander, remove the "button" heads of

2 Self Piercing Rivets, located at the rear of the
side member. Using the ESN50, remove these 2
rivets plus a further 3 Self Piercing Rivets. Using a
6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove a further 5 Self
Piercing Rivets from the bulkhead reinforcement.
41.

to be re-used during installation.
Remove 6 Monobolts and 3 Ejots.
42.
Separate the joints and remove the front side member.
Installation
1.
2.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, remove any adhesive residue.
3.
Offer up the new panel and secure using the 4 21mm and 2
13mm bolts. Check alignment, if correct proceed to next step, if
not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
4.
When aligned, clamp into position. Using a 6.5mm

Cryobit drill bit, drill 3 holes which were Ejot
fixings in the original front side member.
5.
Mark the positions of 10 fixing holes. 5 From

underneath, illustrated at 1 and 5 along the top
flange, illustrated at 2.
6.
Remove the new panel and using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill
the 10 marked holes.
7.
8.
surfaces.
9.
Pyrosil the joints.
10.
11.
12.
Offer up the new panel and secure using the 4 21mm and 2
13mm bolts. Tighten the 21mm bolts to 133 Nm (98 lb.ft).
13.
Check alignment, if correct proceed to the next step, if not,

rectify and recheck before proceeding.
14.

C2C-36026.
15.
16.
17.

C2C-36026.

C2C-36026 and 6 Monobolts, part no: C2P 4773.
NOTE: Allow the adhesive applied to the front side member to cure before installing the front side member closing panel
assembly.
18.
The following steps identify the procedure for installing the front
side member closing panel assembly.
19.
Remove 2 21mm bolts from the front side member.

20.
From the old panel, cut a template, as illustrated,

to use for alignment of the new panel.
21.
Offer up the new panel to the car and scribe

around the inside of the 2 facing holes.
22.
Offer up the template to the car and ensure that the scribe
marks and original fixing holes are aligned, if not, rectify and
recheck before proceeding.
23.
Clamp the template to the new panel and using a 6.5mm

Cryobit drill bit, drill through the 11 holes, (12 on the LH), into
the new panel.
24.
Offer up the new panel, align and clamp into position, use the 2
21mm bolts to secure.
25.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 1 hole,

illustrated at 1, through the new panel into the
front side member.
26.
CAUTION: Take care not to drill right through

as this will go into the vehicle. Drill only through
the new panel and 2 further panel thicknesses.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 1 hole,
tunnel, (there are 2 holes on the LH side).
27.
From inside the vehicle, mark the positions of 5

fixing holes for drilling.
28.
29.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill the 5 holes in the new
panel, as marked.
30.
31.
surfaces.
32.
Pyrosil the joints.
33.

34.
35.
Offer up the new panel and use the 2 21mm bolts to loose fit.
36.
Using the Genesis G4, install 7 Hemloks, part

no:C2C-36026.
37.
Using the Genesis G4, install 1 Hemlok, part no:

C2C-36026.
38.

tbc.
39.
Using the Genesis G4, install 6 Hemloks, (7 on the

LH side), part no: C2C-36024.
40.

C2P 4773. Then, fully tighten the 2 21mm bolts to
133 Nm (98 lb.ft).
41.
42.
The following steps identify the procedure for installing the front
side member lower inner.
43.
44.
Saw cut a section of the new panel corresponding

to the part cut from the old panel, as shown in the
illustration. Ensure an allowance is made for
overlap.

45.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 13 holes. Use

the existing holes in the body as a guide.
46.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 5 holes at the

point where the old and new panels overlap.
47.
48.

49.
Pyrosil the joints.
50.
51.

52.
CAUTION: If the original Ejot cannot be reused, and the original thread remains intact, then
a Torx screw (C2C 1964) can be used in its place.
Install 8 original Ejots. Using the Genesis G4,
install 1 Monobolt, part no: C2P 4773.
53.

C2P 4773.
54.

C2C-36026.
55.

tbc.
56.
57.
Install of mechanical components is the reversal of removal.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Side Member Deformation Element

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the side member deformation element is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover

front bumper
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
NOTE: Whenever there is damage to the side member deformation element, the front side member to deformation
element bracket must always be checked for damage. Where damage is evident or suspected, the bracket must be
renewed.
For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member To Deformation Element Bracket (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal
3.

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper (501-19
4.
Remove the auxiliary front crossmember.

For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Front
Crossmember (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
5.
Remove the front side member side extension mounting.

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member Side
Extension Mounting (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,
6.
Remove the radiator and A/C condenser.

For additional information, refer to: Radiator (303-03, Removal
and Installation).
7.
RH Side: Remove the fender splash shield.
8.
Release the deformation element wiring harness and position it

aside.
9.
Remove 2 T50 Torx bolts, (RH Illustrated).
10.
Remove 4 T50 Torx bolts, (only 2 on LH), RH

Illustrated.
Installation
1.
Install is the reversal of removal. Tighten the deformation

element bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb.ft).
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member Extension

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the front side member extension is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper
front crossmember
hood
side member deformation element
side member side extension
side member side extension mounting
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the auxiliary front crossmember to subframe brace.
4.
Remove the exhaust manifold heat shield.
5.
Drain the cooling system.

Filling and Bleeding (303-03, General Procedures).
6.
RH Side: Remove the heater pipes.
7.
Release the side member wiring harness and position it aside.
8.
LH Side: Release the A/C pipes and position them aside.
NOTE: In this procedure the engine remains in the vehicle. The mechanical components listed below are removed to
allow access for the Genesis G4. If the engine is removed it is not necessary to remove these additional components.
9.
LH Side: Remove the radiator bottom hose.
10.
RH Side: Remove the radiator top hose.
11.
LH Side: Remove the PAS pump.

For additional information, refer to: Power Steering Pump
12.
LH Side: Remove the A/C compressor.

For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor (412-03, Removal and Installation).
13.
RH Side: Remove the generator.

For additional information, refer to: Generator
5.0L
5.0L (414-02,
14.
Remove the hood.

For additional information, refer to: Hood (501-03 Body
Closures, Removal and Installation).
15.

16.
Remove the side member deformation element.

For additional information, refer to: Side Member Deformation
Element (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
17.
Remove the hood hinge.

18.
Remove 5 Monobolts from the side member.
19.
20.
Using the ESN50, remove 2 Self Piercing Rivets,

from the side member, as shown in the inset.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit remove 2 Self
Piercing Rivets, from the suspension top mount.
Installation
1.

2.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, remove adhesive

residue.
3.
Offer up the new panel and clamp into position, using the front
crossmember to aid alignment.
4.
Check alignment, if correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify

and recheck before proceeding.
5.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit, drill 4 holes at the

points shown; 2 through the side member and 2
through the suspension top mount, into the new
panel, ready for Hemlok fixings.
6.
7.
8.
surfaces.
9.
Pyrosil the joints.
10.
11.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the new panel joints.
12.

13.
Using the Genesis G4, install 4 Hemloks; 2 to the

suspension top mount and 2 to the side member,
part no: C2C-36006.
14.
The illustration shows the Genesis G4 being used

with the engine in place. In order to gain access
the "catcher" chamber of the Genesis G4 has to be
removed. This does not affect the operation or
safety of the gun. However, to prevent the
remnant being ejected into any engine bay
components, a plastic bag should be attached to
collect it.
15.

C2P 4773, to the side member.
16.
17.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Wheelhouse

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the front wheelhouse is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover

front fender
front crossmember
fender apron panel
fender apron panel reinforcement
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the fender apron panel reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel
Reinforcement (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
4.
Remove 4 Monobolts, from the torque box.
5.
8.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit, remove 1 Self

Piercing Rivet, from the front side member lower
outer.
6.
Using a combination of the ESN50 and 6.5mm

Cryobit Drill Bit, remove 6 Self Piercing Rivets,
from the A-Pillar closing panel.
7.

from the suspension top mount.
Installation
1.
2.
3.
Where necessary, dress the flanges of adjacent panels.
4.
Offer up the new panel and clamp into position.
5.

6.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit, drill 12 holes

ready for Hemlok fixings.
7.
8.
9.
surfaces.
10.
Pyrosil the joints.
11.

12.
13.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the new panel

joints.
14.

C2C-36006, 7 to the suspension top mount, 4 to
the A-Pillar closing panel and 1 to the side member
lower outer.
15.

no: C2C 20589 to the A-Pillar closing panel.
16.

C2P 4773, to the torque box.
17.
18.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel Front Extension
Removal
NOTE: This is a category 'A' repair
NOTE: In this procedure the fender apron panel front extension is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover
front fender
front crossmember
1.

Operation).
2.

in this procedure, refer to the body repairs - general information
section.
3.

4.

5.
Using the ESN50, remove 1 Self Piercing Rivet to

the fender apron panel.
Installation
1.
Remove the rivet remnant and deburr the hole.
2.
NOTE: The original Rivet hole should be filled using

adhesive.
Using the ESN50, install 1 Self Piercing Rivet, part
no: C2C 20590, to the fender apron panel.
3.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member Side Extension
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the front side member side extension is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover
front fender
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.

4.
LH Only: Remove the air cleaner.

5.

(AIR) Pump (303-08, Removal and Installation).
6.
Remove 2 10mm bolts.
Installation
1.
Offer up the new panel, using the fender for alignment. When
aligned tighten bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
2.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Auxiliary Front Crossmember

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the auxiliary front crossmember is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the front bumper cover

4.

5.
Remove 4 10mm bolts, 2 each side, to the side

member deformation element and remove the
panel.
Installation
1.
Offer up new panel, align and secure using the 4 10mm bolts, 2
each side. Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
2.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member Side Extension
Mounting
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the front side member side extension mounting is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover
front fender
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the front side member side extension.

Installation).
4.
Remove 4 T50 Torx bolts.
Installation
1.
Offer up the new panel and tighten the bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb.ft).
2.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member To Deformation

Element Bracket
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the front side member to deformation element bracket is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover

front bumper
side member side extension
side member side extension mounting
side member deformation element
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
NOTE: Whenever there is damage to the deformation element, the front side member to deformation element bracket
must always be checked for damage. Where damage is evident or suspected the bracket must be renewed.
NOTE: Whenever there is damage to the front side member, the front side member to deformation element bracket
must always be renewed. When renewing the bracket and side member in combination, removal of the bracket is not
required.
3.
Remove the side member deformation element.

For additional information, refer to: Side Member Deformation
Element (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
4.
5.
Remove 4 Monobolts.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the side member when

removing the bracket.
Separate and remove the bracket from the side member.
Adhesive is applied in production so the bracket will need to be
eased from the side member, use a hammer and chisel on the
lip of the bracket to remove.
Installation
1.
Using a belt sander, remove adhesive residue from inside the

side member.
2.
Bolt the bracket to the side member using 1 subframe bolt and
2 T50 Torx bolts.
3.
Install the side member deformation element and

fix with 6 T50 Torx bolts, (4 on LH Side).
4.
Check alignment, if correct, tighten the bolts to the deformation

element to 70 Nm (52 lb.ft), if not, rectify and recheck before
proceeding.
5.
Following a successful dry fit, remove the bracket with the

deformation element attached.
6.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, clean and prepare the bracket at its
joint with the side member, (engine bay side only).
7.
Pyrosil the joints.
8.
9.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the bracket on the engine bay

side.
10.
Slide the bracket into the side member.
11.
12.
Bolt on the front side member side extension

mounting using its 4 T50 Torx bolts. Check
alignment. If alignment is correct, tighten the bolts
to 70 Nm (52 lb.ft), if not, rectify and recheck
before proceeding.
Using the Genesis G4, renew 4 Monobolts, part no:

C2P 4773.
13.
14.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Suspension Top Mount

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the suspension top mount is replaced in conjunction with:
front bumper cover

front bumper
front crossmember
front fender
fender apron panel
side member extension
NOTE: It is also necessary to remove the engine and suspension as an assembly.

1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.

4.
Remove the engine and suspension as an assembly.
5.

6.
7.
8.

9.
Remove the LH and RH strut braces.
10.
Remove the heater supply and return hoses
11.
Release the brake pipes at the bulkhead and position them

aside.
12.
Release the brake pipes at the side member / inner wheelhouse

and position them aside.
13.
14.
LH Side: Remove the A/C lines.
15.
LH Side: Remove the upper suspension arm.

For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm LH (204-01,
16.
RH Side: Remove the upper suspension arm.

For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm RH (204-01,
17.

Installation).
18.

19.
Release the side member and inner wheelhouse wiring harness
and position it aside.

20.
LH Side: Remove the engine control module (ECM) and its

mounting bracket.
21.
22.
LH Side: Release the fuel pipes and position them aside.
23.

and Installation).
24.

25.
Remove the front side member extension.

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member
Installation).
26.

27.
Remove 2 Monobolts and 3 Ejots, from the side

member.
28.
29.
30.

Piercing Rivets, from the fender apron panel
closing panel.

Piercing Rivets, to the fender apron panel
reinforcement.
Installation
1.
2.
3.
Offer up new panel and bolt to jig. Use Monobolt holes to aid
alignment. If alignment is correct proceed to next step, if not,
4.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 10 holes, through the

fender apron panel reinforcement into the suspension top
mount.
5.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 6 holes, through the fender
apron panel closing panel into the suspension top mount.
6.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 7 holes, through the front
wheelhouse into the suspension top mount.
7.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 2 holes, through the front
side member into the suspension top mount.
8.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 2 holes, through the side
member lower outer into the suspension top mount.
9.
10.
If a new side member is being fitted: An

additional 3 holes will need to be drilled in the
positions of the original Ejots, as these will be
replaced with Hemloks, part no: C2C-36026.
11.
Using a 9.5mm drill bit, enlarge the 10 holes in the fender apron
panel reinforcement. Deburr the drilled holes and then, using
the HES 412 Rivet Nut Tool, insert 10 Rivet Nuts into the drilled
holes.
12.
surfaces.
13.
Pyrosil the joints.
14.
Apply the coupling and allow to dry.
15.
16.
Bolt new panel to jig bracket, align and clamp to the side
member.
17.
NOTE: The replacement fixings must be Torx

Screws and not Ejots.
Install 10 T30 Torx screws to the suspension top
mount.
18.
Install 3 Ejots, (not applicable when a new side member is being

installed).
19.
If the original side member is re-used: Install

3 Ejots and using the Genesis G4, install 2
Hemloks, part no: C2C-36026 and 2 Monobolts,
part no: C2P 4773.
20.
If a new side member is being installed: Using

the Genesis G4, install 5 Hemloks, part no: C2C36026 and 2 Monobolts, part no: C2P 4773.
21.

C2C-36026, to the suspension top mount.
22.

C2C-36026, to the front wheelhouse.
23.

C2C-36026, to the side member lower outer.
24.
25.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member and Suspension Top
Mount Assembly
Removal
NOTE: This is a category 'A' repair
NOTE: In this procedure the front side member and suspension top mount assembly is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover
front bumper
front fender
hood
front crossmember
bulkhead lower reinforcement
fender apron panel
fender apron panel reinforcement
NOTE: It is also necessary to remove the engine and suspension as an assembly.

NOTE: It is necessary to remove the secondary, inner, floor panel and the front side member closing panel to enable
the fitment of the front side member and suspension top mount assembly. These panels cannot be reused and will
require replacement, the closing panel should be retained for use as a template.
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the front side member side extension mounting.

Extension Mounting (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,
4.

5.
Remove the hood.
6.

and Installation).
7.
Remove the fender apron panel reinforcement.
For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel

Reinforcement (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
8.
Remove the bulkhead lower reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Bulkhead Lower
Reinforcement (501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs,
9.

10.
Remove the RH rear seat cushion.

11.

Installation).
12.
Remove the carpet.
13.

14.

15.
16.
17.

18.
Remove the LH and RH strut braces.
19.
Remove the heater supply and return hoses.
20.
Release the brake pipes at the bulkhead and position them

aside.
21.
Release the brake pipes at the side member / inner wheelhouse

and position them aside.
22.

23.
LH Side: Remove the A/C pipe.
24.
LH Side: Remove the Anti-lock Brake System, (ABS), module.

25.
LH Side: Remove the engine control module, (ECM) and its

mounting bracket.
26.

(AIR) Pump (303-08, Removal and Installation).
27.
28.

For additional information, refer to: Steering Column Lower
Shaft (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and Installation).
29.
LH Side: Remove the upper suspension arm.

For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm LH (204-01,
30.
RH Side: Remove the upper suspension arm.

For additional information, refer to: Upper Arm RH (204-01,
31.

Installation).
32.

33.
Release the side member and inner wheelhouse wiring harness

and position it aside.
34.
LH Side: Release the fuel pipes and position them aside.
35.
Remove the side member exhaust heat shield.
36.
37.
Remove the engine and suspension as an assembly.
38.
The following steps identify the procedure for removing the

secondary, inner, floor panel.
39.
Remove 17 Monobolts.
40.
Separate the joints and remove the secondary, (inner), floor

panel.
41.
side member closing panel.
42.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit, remove 4 Self Piercing Rivets

from the front side member lower inner. Separate this joint and
bend down to reveal 1 "hidden" self piercing rivet.
43.

Piercing Rivets, (19 on the LH side). This joint
includes the 1 "hidden" rivet. The graphic shows
the side member lower inner removed and is for
reference only.
44.
45.
Remove 2 Monobolts, remove 2 21mm bolts and 1

T30 Ejot. The illustration shows the side member
lower inner removed and is for reference only.
NOTE: On removal, keep panel damage to a minimum as it will

be used as a template for the new panel.
Separate the joints and remove the front side member closing
panel. Retain the old panel for use as a template.
46.

from the A-Pillar closing panel.
47.
Remove 3 Monobolts from the bulkhead.
48.
Remove 14 Monobolts from the floor panel.
49.

Piercing Rivets from the floor panel.
50.

Piercing Rivets from the floor panel.
51.
From inside the rocker panel, use a belt sander to

sand down the heads of 6 Self Piercing Rivets. Use
a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit to drill these out from
underneath. Remove 6 18mm bolts.
52.
Remove 3 Monobolts, from inside the vehicle.
53.
54.
Of the 2 remaining 21mm bolts to the side

member, remove the upper one. This will aid the
removal of the assembly.
Separate the joints and with assistance, remove the front side
member and suspension top mount assembly.
Installation
NOTE: The front side member and suspension top mount assembly is fitted less the closing panel and the front side
member reinforcement panel. These panels are removed from the new panel prior to its fitment. The following method
of removing these panels is specific to the replacement of the front side member and suspension top mount assembly.
1.
Using the ESN50, remove 5 Self Piercing Rivets

from the new panel.
2.
Using the ESN50, remove 5 Self Piercing Rivets

from the new panel.
3.
Remove 1 Monobolt, 2 21mm bolts and 1 Ejot from

the new panel.
4.
Separate the joints and remove the closing panel and the front
side member reinforcement panel from the new assembly.
5.
Remove rivet remnants from the new panel.
6.
Remove rivet remnants from the body.
7.
Deburr the drilled holes on the new panel and the body.
8.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, clean and prepare the body panel
joint surfaces.
9.
Of the 2 remaining 21mm bolts to the side member, remove the

upper one. This will aid the offer up and dry fit of the panel.
10.
With assistance, offer up the new assembly, install 6 18mm

bolts from inside the rocker panel, hand tighten and clamp into
position.
11.
Check alignment. If correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify

12.
Tighten the 6 18mm bolts.
13.
Offer up and clamp into position, the fender apron panel, fender
apron panel reinforcement and the fender apron panel closing
panel. Bolt on the front side member side extension and front
side member side extension mounting, the front bumper, the
hood and the fender.
14.

15.
16.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit

Drill Bit, drill 18 holes
through the floor into
the new panel.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit, drill 5 holes into

the side member. Use any existing holes that
align, where they do not align drill adjacent.
17.
Scribe the position of 6 holes through the rocker panel onto the
assembly.
18.
Remove the front bumper, the hood, the fender, the fender
apron panel, the fender apron panel reinforcement and the
fender apron panel closing panel.
19.
With assistance, remove the assembly.
20.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit, drill the 6 holes previously

marked through the rocker panel.
21.

22.
Using a 9.5mm Drill Bit, drill the lowermost fixing

hole on the torsion box.
www.JagDocs.com
23.
Using the HES 412 Rivet Nut Tool, insert 1 Rivet

Nut into the pre-drilled hole.
24.
surfaces.
25.
Pyrosil the joints.
26.

27.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the panel joints.
28.
With assistance, offer up the new assembly, install 6 18mm

bolts from inside the rocker panel, hand tighten and clamp into
position.
29.

30.
Fully tighten the 6 18mm bolts.
31.
Using the Genesis G4,

install 18 Hemloks to
the floor panel. Use
part no: C2C-36006 in
areas of 2 panel
thickness and part no:
C2C-36026 in areas of
3 panel thickness.
Install a further 7
Hemloks to the floor
panel where it meets
the bulkhead, part no:
C2C-36006, (2 panel
thickness).
32.

C2C-36006, to the floor panel.
33.

C2C-36008, to the rocker panel inner.
34.

C2C-36026, to the bulkhead.
35.

C2P 4773, to the bulkhead. Install 1 T30 Torx
Screw.
36.
Using the Genesis G4, install 14 Monobolts, part

no: C2P 4773, to the floor panel.
37.
From inside the vehicle, using the Genesis G4,

install 3 Monobolts, part no: C2P 4773, through
the bulkhead into the assembly.
38.
Install 1 21mm bolt, to the side member. Torque to: 133Nm (98
lb.ft).
39.
40.
NOTE: A new closing panel will be required as the original from

the vehicle and the one removed from the new front side
member and suspension turret assembly, will not be suitable for
reuse.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, clean and prepare the joint surfaces
of the new closing panel.
41.
Using the original closing panel removed from the

vehicle, cut a template, as illustrated, to use for
alignment
42.
Offer up the new closing panel to the assembly and scribe

around the inside of the 2 facing holes. Remove the closing
panel.
43.
Offer up the template to the assembly, so that the scribe marks

align and ensure that the fixing holes align, if not, rectify and
recheck before proceeding. Remove the template.
44.
Clamp the template to the assembly, then, using a 6.5mm

Cryobit Drill Bit, drill through the 11 holes, (12 on the LH).
45.
Offer up the closing panel to the assembly, align and clamp into
position, using the 2 21mm bolts to secure.
46.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit, drill 1 hole,

side member.
CAUTION: Take care not to drill right through as this will go into the vehicle. Drill only through the new panel and
a further 2 panel thicknesses.
47.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit, drill 1 hole,

tunnel.
48.
From inside the vehicle, mark the positions of 5

fixing holes for drilling.
49.
Remove the closing panel.
50.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit, drill the 5 holes in the closing
panel, as marked.
51.
52.
of the closing panel.
53.
Pyrosil the joints of the closing panel.
54.
Apply the coupling agent to the closing panel and allow to dry.
55.
56.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the closing panel

joints of the assembly.
Offer up the closing panel and use the 2 21mm bolts to loose fit.
57.

C2C-36026.
58.

C2C-36026.
59.

tbc.
60.
Using the Genesis G4, install 6 Hemloks, (7 on the

LH side), part no: C2C-36024.
61.

C2P 4773. Then , fully tighten the 2 21mm bolts to
133 Nm (98 lb.ft).
62.
Remove any excess adhesive from the closing panel.
63.
of the secondary, (inner), floor panel.

64.
Pyrosil the joints of the secondary, (inner), floor panel.
65.
Apply coupling agent to the secondary, (inner), floor panel joints

and allow to dry.
66.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the vehicle joint of the

secondary, (inner), floor panel.
67.
Using the Genesis G4, install 17 Monobolts, part

no: C2P 4773 and install the secondary, (inner),
floor panel.
68.
69.
The installation of mechanical components is the reversal of

removal.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Windshield Frame Convertible

Removal
NOTE: This is a category "A" repair.
NOTE: In this procedure the windshield frame is replaced in conjunction with the:
Front bumper cover

Both front fenders
Both front doors
Header rail
NOTE: The windshield glass has to be removed for access.

1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.

4.

For additional information, refer to: Windshield Glass (501-11
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
5.
Remove both convertible top strikers.

For additional information, refer to: Convertible Top Striker
6.
Disconnect the harness at the header rail and A-Pillar and

position aside.
7.
Remove both front fenders.

8.
Remove both front doors.

For additional information, refer to: Door (501-03 Body
9.

re-used when installing the header rail.
NOTE: The header rail is bonded as well as bolted,
care should be taken not to damage it on removal.
Remove the header rail. Remove 8 T30 Ejots.
10.
Remove 4 Monobolts, 2 each side, and using a

6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove 2 Self-Piercing
rivets, one each side.
11.
Using the ESN50, remove 70 Self-Piercing Rivets,

35 each side.
12.
NOTE: There is an NVH element at the top of the

panel, 1 and adhesive applied at the bottom, 2.
Installation
1.
2.
Remove any foam / adhesive residue.
3.
Offer up the new panel, clamp into position and check
alignment. If correct, proceed to next step, if not, rectify and

4.
From the inside, using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit,

drill 1 hole ready for Hemlok fixing.
5.
6.
Deburr the drilled hole.
7.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, clean and prepare the panel joints.
8.
Pyrosil to the joints.
9.
10.

11.
12.
Apply sealer / adhesive to the NVH element.

13.
Using the Genesis G4, install 2 Hemloks, 1 each

side, part no: C2C-36006, and 4 Monobolts, 2 each
side, part no: C2P 4773.
14.
18.
Using the ESN50, install 26 Self-Piercing rivets, 13

each side, part no: C2C 20589.
15.

16.

17.

Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, clean and prepare the joints on the
header rail.
19.
23.
Apply a sealing adhesive to the front edge of the

header rail.
20.
Offer up the header rail and install 8 T30 Ejots.
21.
Apply cavity foam, each side, to the inside of the

panel.
22.
When the adhesive has cured, use an air saw to

cut off the transportation brace.
The installation of associated panels and mechanical

components is the reverse of removal.
Roof Sheet Metal Repairs - Roof

Roof service panels
Item
1
2
Description
Roof panel
A-Pillar outer panel (cut from roof panel)
Service part No
Time schedules, roof panels

The following information shows the total time taken to replace single panels and complete assemblies. This time includes removal of
Mechanical, Electrical and Trim, (MET), items, plus paint times based on Metallic Clear Over Base Paint, (blends for adjacent panels not
included).
The times shown were generated by Thatcham, (the Motor Insurance Repair Research Centre), and are to be used as a guide only.
Single panel times
Panel Description
Roof panel
A-Pillar outer panel
coupe
25.9
14.0
Roof Sheet Metal Repairs - Roof Panel

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the roof panel is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover

both front fenders
both doors
liftgate

1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.

For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect (414-01
Battery, Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
4.
Disconnect the generator electrical connections.
5.

For additional information, refer to: Headliner (501-05 Interior
6.
Remove the front windshield.

7.
Remove both rear quarter window glasses.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Window Glass
- 2-Door (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
8.
Remove both front seats.

9.
Remove both roof mouldings.
10.
Remove the rear drain moulding.
11.
Remove both bodyside weatherseals.
12.
Disconnect both A-Pillar wiring harnesses and position them

aside.
13.
Disconnect both cant rail wiring harnesses and position them

aside.
14.
Remove the liftgate.
15.
Remove both fenders.

16.
Remove both doors.

17.
Saw cut the roof panel at its joints with the rear
quarter panels. Make the cut approximately 35mm
forward of the roof to quarter panel assembly
joint, (illustrated by the dotted line).
18.
Remove 4 Monobolts, 2 each side, from the APillar.
19.

15 each side, from the A-Pillar.
20.

from the front header rail.
21.

from the rear header rail.
22.

14 each side, from the cantrail.
23.
24.
Separate the roof panel joints.

25.
26.
Remove the foil patches, 1 each side, to expose 4

Self Piercing Rivets, 2 each side, to the rear
quarter panel / drain channel. Using the ESN50,
remove these 4 Self Piercing Rivets.
Using a long cutting blade, cut through the foam

between the roof and its front and rear header
rails.
With assistance, remove the old roof panel.

27.
Remove the small remnant of the roof panel that is

left, by cutting close to the weld. Using a Belt
Sander, sand back to the weld line, illustrated as
the dotted line.
Installation
1.
Remove foam residue from the header rails.
2.
3.
Dress the body flanges where necessary.
4.
With assistance, offer up the new roof panel and check

alignment. If correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify and
5.
Using a 6.5mm drill bit, drill 2 holes, 1 each side,

from inside, through the A-Pillar into the roof
panel.
6.
Using assistance, remove the roof panel.
7.
8.
surfaces.
9.
Pyrosil the joints.
10.
11.
Apply foam in the same locations as original.

12.
13.
With assistance, fit the new roof panel, align and clamp into
position.
14.
Using the Genesis G4, install 2 Hemloks, 1 each

side, part no: C2C 7792 and 4 Monobolts, 2 each
side, part no: C2P 4773 into the A-Pillar.
15.
Using the ESN50, install 14 Self Piercing Rivets, 7

each side, part no: C2C 20590, to the A-Pillar
casting.
16.

upper.
17.

upper.
18.

part no: C2C 20589, to the front header rail.
19.
NOTE: Where a Self Piercing Rivet cannot be

installed in an area of 2 panel thickness it may be
necessary to install it in an area of 3 panel
thickness. The part number of the rivet is the same
for both areas.
each side, part no: C2C 20591, to the side cant
rails.
20.
21.
The illustration shows the side cant rail joint from

inside, where the 2 and 3 thicknesses occur.

part no: C2C 20591, to the rear header rail.
22.
Cut 2 run on / run off tabs from the original panel, or from
similar material.
23.
Tack weld the run on / run off tabs into position.

24.
Lap weld the joints between the roof panel and the
rear quarter panels.
25.
Remove the run on / run off tabs.
26.
Carry out a non destructive crack inspection on the lap weld. If

correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify and recheck before
proceeding.
27.
28.

29.
30.
Using a belt sander, dress the welded joint.
When adhesive has cured, use an air saw to cut off

the transportation brace.
NOTE: Replace the foil patches on the drain channels after the
primer application.
Install is the reverse of removal.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Side Panel Sheet Metal

Side service panels
Item
1
Description
Service part No
L/H
R/H
Fender panel apron
A-Pillar outer panel (cut from roof panel)
A-Pillar assembly
Rocker panel
Quarter panel assembly
Door
Front fender
L/H
R/H
L/H
R/H
L/H
R/H
L/H
R/H
L/H
R/H
L/H
R/H
L/H
R/H
paragraph
Time schedules, side panels

adjacent panels are not included).
only.
Single panel times
Panel Description
A-Pillar outer
Rocker panel
Door
Front fender
coupe
14.0
L/H 37.1
R/H 37.3
L/H 17.2
R/H 17.2
6.4
7.0
Panel Description
Door
Front fender
Total Time
coupe
L/H 10.1
R/H 10.1
Panel Description
Door
Total Time
coupe
L/H 21.9
R/H 22.1
Panel Description
A-Pillar assembly
Door
Rocker panel
Fender apron panel.
Front fender
Rocker panel moulding
Headliner remove and install
Windshield glass remove and install
Instrument panel remove and install
coupe
Total Time
L/H 52.0
R/H 51.3
Panel Description
Door
Front fender
Rocker panel moulding
Total Time
coupe
L/H 25.1
R/H 25.4
Panel Description
A-Pillar assembly
Door
Fender apron panel
Front fender
Headliner remove and Install
Windshield glass remove and Install
Instrument panel remove and Install
Total Time
coupe
L/H 35.2
R/H 34.0
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Rocker Panel

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the rocker panel is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover

front fender
fender apron panel
door
A-Pillar assembly
rear bumper cover
liftgate
quarter panel assembly
NOTE: It is also necessary to remove the windshield glass and the instrument panel to allow for access.
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the A-Pillar assembly.

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Assembly (501-29
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
4.
The rear inner wheelhouse half has to be removed from the

vehicle to allow access for removing the rocker panel. The new
panel is supplied on the rocker panel and is installed as an
assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Inner Wheelhouse Half
(501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
5.
Remove 4 Monobolts securing the striker plate

bracket.
6.
Remove 6 13mm bolts, 3 from the inner rocker

panel and 3 from the B-Pillar reinforcement.
7.
Using a Belt Sander, remove the heads of 11 SelfPiercing Rivets, along the upper flange. Using the
ESN50, remove these rivets.
8.
Using a Belt Sander, remove the heads of 31 SelfPiercing Rivets, along the lower flange. Using the
ESN50, remove these rivets.
9.
10.
Remove 1 Monobolt, from the inner rocker panel.
Installation
1.
Remove foam residue.
2.
3.

4.
Dress flanges, where applicable.
5.
With assistance, offer up the new rocker panel.
6.
Install 6 fixing bolts, 3 to the inner rocker panel and 3 to the BPillar reinforcement, to secure the panel.
7.
Offer up the bulkhead lower reinforcement and secure with its 6

fixing bolts.
8.
Offer up the A-Pillar assembly.
9.
Check the alignment of all panels, if correct proceed to next

step, if not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
10.
When aligned, clamp into position.
11.
Mark the position of 31 holes on the lower flange of the new

panel.
12.
Using a Cryobit drill bit, drill through 5 original holes of the rear
wheelhouse outer into the new panel.
13.
Using a Cryobit drill bit, drill through 7 original holes of the rear
outer wheelhouse half into the new panel.
14.
Remove the A-Pillar.
15.
Remove 2 fixing bolts from the bulkhead lower reinforcement,

leaving the panel on the car.
16.
Remove the new rocker panel.
www.JagDocs.com
17.
Using a Cryobit drill bit, drill 31 holes at the

positions previously marked along the lower
flange.
18.
19.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, clean and prepare panel joint

surfaces.
20.
Pyrosil the joints.
21.
22.
Apply foam in the same locations as originally applied.
23.
24.
With assistance, offer up the new rocker panel.

25.
26.
Install 6 13mm bolts, 3 to the inner rocker panel

and 3 to the B-Pillar reinforcement, (illustration for
reference purposes only).
Install 2 18mm bolts, to the bulkhead lower reinforcement.
27.
Using the Genesis G4, install 31 Hemloks, to the

lower flange, part no: C2C-36026.
28.

C2C-36006, 5 to the rear wheelhouse outer and 7
to the rear outer wheelhouse half.
29.
Using the Genesis G4, install 1 Monobolt, part no: C2P 4773, to
the inner rocker panel, (front).
30.
Using the Genesis G4, install 1 Monobolt, part no: C2P 4773, to
the inner rocker panel, (rear).
31.
Using the ESN50, install 11 Self-Piercing Rivets, to

the upper flange, part no: C2C 20593.
32.
Using the ESN50, install 2 Self-Piercing Rivets, part

no: C2C 20591, to the inner B-Pillar.
33.

no: C2C 20589, to the quarter panel
reinforcement.
34.

C2P 4773, to secure the striker plate bracket.
35.
36.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Bulkhead Lower Reinforcement

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the bulkhead lower reinforcement is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover
front fender
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
LH Only: Remove the ABS Hydraulic Control Unit, (HCU).

Installation).
4.
RH Only: Remove the windshield washer reservoir.

Installation).
5.

6.
Remove 6 18mm bolts.
7.
Remove the panel.
Installation
1.
Offer up and align the new panel, tighten the 6 18mm bolts to
133 Nm (98 lb.ft).
2.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - A-Pillar Assembly

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the A-Pillar assembly is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover

front fender
door
fender apron panel
NOTE: The windshield glass and instrument panel have to be removed for access.
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.

4.
Release the front side carpet section and remove.
5.

6.
Remove the fender apron panel closing panel.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel Closing
Panel (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
7.
Remove the A-Pillar outer panel.

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Outer Panel (501-29
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
8.
Remove the bulkhead lower reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Bulkhead Lower
Reinforcement (501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs,
9.
NOTE: The fender apron panel reinforcement can

be left in situ for this procedure, however it has to
be part removed to enable the removal of the APillar assembly.
Remove 3 Monobolts from the A-Pillar assembly
and separate this joint. Using the induction heater,
apply heat to enable the flange to be eased out of
the way to allow access for the A-Pillar removal.
Remove 1 Monobolt from the windshield aperture
panel, (the other Monobolt illustrated is removed
with the A-Pillar outer panel).
10.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove 1 Self Piercing Rivet,

from the windshield aperture panel.
11.
Using a combination of the ESN50 and a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit,

remove 8 Self Piercing Rivets, from the door aperture.
12.

from the A-Pillar inner. The upper rivet is drilled from inside the
vehicle.
13.

from the rocker panel and the rocker panel upper flange.
14.

from the A-Pillar inner.
15.
16.

Cryobit drill bit, remove 16 Self Piercing Rivets,
from the roof panel and front header rail.
Installation
1.
Remove the rivet remnants. See next step.

2.
Remove rivet remnants from the roof front header

rail: Using the induction heater, heat the area, in
the position illustrated and ease down the flange.
This will enable access for the removal of 2
remnants. Use a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit to remove
the remnants. Using the induction heater, heat the
area and ease the flange back into position.
3.
MIG plug weld the 2 drilled remnant holes, after

welding use a Belt Sander to dress the 2 welds.
4.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, remove any adhesive residue.
5.
Remove the foam residue.
6.
7.
Bolt on the door hinges and offer up the door. Check gaps and
alignment, if correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify and
8.
Remove the door.
9.
Mark the position of 1 hole from the A-Pillar to the roof side cant
rail, (to be drilled when the panel is removed).
10.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 2 holes to the

roof panel front header rail.
11.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 1 hole to the windshield

aperture panel.
12.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, from inside the vehicle, drill 5
holes through the rocker panel upper flange, into the new APillar assembly.
13.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, from inside the vehicle, drill 3
holes, through the A-Pillar inner, into the new A-Pillar assembly.
14.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, from inside the engine bay, drill
6 holes, through the A-Pillar inner, into the new A-Pillar
assembly.
15.
Mark the position of 19 holes from inside the rocker panel to the
new A-Pillar assembly, (to be drilled when the panel is

removed). If the new A-Pillar assembly is to be fitted to a new
rocker panel drill 19 new holes.
16.
17.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 1 hole in the new panel, as
marked, (to the roof side cant rail).
18.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 19 holes in the new panel,
as marked, (to the rocker panel).
19.
20.
surfaces.
21.
Pyrosil the joints.
22.
23.
24.

25.

C2C-36008, to the rocker panel.
26.

C2C-36026, to the rocker panel upper flange.
27.

C2C-36008, to the rocker panel upper flange.
28.

C2C-36006, to the A-Pillar inner.
29.

C2C-45252, 1 to the roof panel side cant rail and 1
to the roof panel front header rail.
30.

C2C-36006, to the roof panel front header rail.
31.

no: C2C 20591, to the roof panel side cant rail.
32.
Using the ESN50, install 8 Self Piercing Rivets. 2,

part no: C2C 20591, to the roof front header rail
and 6, part number: C2C 20589 to the roof panel,
(3 to the screen aperture and 3 to the door
aperture).
33.
Using the ESN50, install 9 Self Piercing Rivets. 8,

part no: C2C 20591 to the door aperture and 1,
part number: C2C 20595, to the inner rocker
panel.
34.

C2C-36006 and 1 Monobolt, part no: C2P 4773, to
the windshield aperture panel.
35.
36.
If the fender apron panel reinforcement was left in place, use

the induction heater to ease back the flange to its original
position. Apply adhesive, then using the Genesis G4, install the
3 Monobolts. Remove any excess adhesive.
37.
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - A-Pillar Outer Panel

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the A-Pillar outer panel is replaced in conjunction with the:
front bumper cover
front fender
door

1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.

4.
Remove the door.

5.

6.

7.

Installation).
8.
Remove the seat.

9.
10.
Remove the door aperture weatherseal.
11.
Remove the bodyside weatherseal.
12.
Disconnect the A-Pillar wiring harness and position aside.
13.
Disconnect the cantrail wiring harness and position aside.
14.
Disconnect the generator electrical connectors.

15.
Using an air saw, cut through the roof panel at a

point 740mm from the bottom of the outer APillar / roof panel.
18.
16.
Remove 2 Monobolts, from the A-Pillar.
17.

Cryobit drill bit, remove 15 Self-Piercing Rivets,
from the A-Pillar assembly.
Installation
1.
2.
Remove any foam residue.
3.
Measure and cut a 50mm backing plate and 2 run on / run off
tabs from the original panel, or from similar material.
4.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, clean and prepare the backing plates
and run-on/run-off tabs.
5.
Offer up the new panel, clamp into position and check

alignment. If correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify and
6.
From inside, using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 1

hole ready for a Hemlok fixing.
7.
8.
Deburr the drilled hole.
9.
10.
Weld the backing plates into position on the new

panel.
11.
Apply Pyrosil to the joints, avoiding the area of the butt joint.
12.
Apply the coupling agent, avoiding the area of the butt joint and
allow to dry.
13.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the body joints, avoiding the

area of the butt joint.
14.
15.

C2C-36006 and 2 Monobolts, part no: C2P 4773.
16.

no: C2C 20589.
17.
Using the ESN50, install 1 Self-Piercing Rivet,

(through 3 thicknesses), part no: C2C 20593.
18.

no: C2C 20590.
19.
NOTE: If the original panel is being reused, use adhesive to fill

the holes left from the removal of the original Self Piercing
Rivets.
20.
Tack Weld the run-on/run-off tabs.
21.
Weld the joint between the A-Pillar and roof panel.
22.
Cut off the run-on/run-off tabs.
23.
Carry out a non destructive crack inspection on the butt joint. If

correct, proceed to next step, if not, rectify and recheck before
proceeding.
24.
Using a belt sander, remove the welded joint.
25.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear End Sheet Metal

Rear end service panels
Item
1
Description
Rear outer wheelhouse half
2
3
Rear wheelhouse outer

Rear side member closing panel
4
5
Rear side member reinforcement panel

Rear side member section, (cut from full rear side member)
6
7
8
9
Service part No
R/H =
L/H
R/H
L/H
R/H
L/H
R/H
L/H
R/H
L/H
Spare wheel well

Back panel assembly
Liftgate
Rear lamp mounting panel
10
11
12
R/H
L/H
R/H
L/H
Rear bumper
Rear bumper cover
Time schedules, rear end

adjacent panels are not included)
only.
Single panel times
Panel Description
Liftgate
Rear lamp mounting panel
Back panel assembly
Quarter panel Assembly
Rear bumper cover
coupe
6.9
4.1
25.9
L/H 17.2
R/H 17.6
6.5
Panel Description
Back panel assembly
Liftgate
Rear bumper
Rear bumper cover
Total Time
coupe
L/H 29.9
R/H 30.2
Panel Description
Back panel assembly
Liftgate
Quarter panel assembly L/H and R/H
Rear bumper
Rear bumper cover
Total Time
coupe
37.5
Panel Description
Back panel assembly
Liftgate
Rear bumper
Rear bumper cover
Rear side member closing panel
coupe
Rear side member reinforcement panel

Rear side member (section)
Spare wheel well
Rear subframe remove and install
Fuel tank remove and install
Total Time
L/H 45.6
R/H 45.8
Panel Description
Back panel assembly
Liftgate
Rear bumper
Rear bumper cover
Rear side member closing panel L/H and R/H
Rear side member reinforcement panel L/H and R/H
Rear side member (section) L/H and R/H
Spare wheel well
Fuel tank remove and install
Total Time
coupe
59.8
Panel Description
Back panel assembly
Rear bumper
Rear bumper cover
Spare wheel well
Total Time
coupe
21.1
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Wheelhouse Outer

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the rear wheelhouse outer is replaced in conjunction with the:
rear bumper cover
rear inner wheelhouse half
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the rear inner wheelhouse half.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Inner Wheelhouse Half
Installation).
4.

from the rear outer wheelhouse half.
5.
6.

(17 on the LH), from the inner wheelhouse.
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
Mark the positions of 18 holes, 17 on the LH side, on the new

panel, ready for installing Self Piercing Rivets, (avoiding the
original holes).
6.
7.
surfaces.
8.
Pyrosil the joints.
9.
10.

11.
Using the ESN50, install 21 Self Piercing Rivets. 17

to the inner wheelhouse, (16 on the LH side), part
no: C2C 20591, 3 to the rear outer wheelhouse
half, part no: C2C 20590 and 1 to the inner
wheelhouse, (through 3 thicknesses), part no: C2C
20594.
12.
13.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Inner Wheelhouse Half

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the rear inner wheelhouse half is replaced in conjunction with the:
rear bumper cover
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the quarter panel assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Quarter Panel Assembly - 2Door (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
4.
Remove 3 Monobolts, from the rocker panel.
5.

from the inner B-Pillar.
6.
7.

Piercing Rivets. 12 from the rocker panel, 5 from
the rear wheelhouse outer, 7 from the rear outer
wheelhouse half and 4 from the quarter panel
reinforcement.
Installation
1.
2.
3.

4.
Mark the position of 12 holes on the new panel,

using the original panel as a template. Using a
6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill these 12 holes.
5.
Offer up the new panel, check alignment, if correct proceed to

next step, if not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
6.
When aligned, clamp into position.
9.
7.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill through 12

original holes into the new panel, (illustration
shown for reference).
8.
Countersink 3 holes in the new panel, in readiness

for countersunk Monobolts, (illustration shown for
reference).
10.
11.

surfaces.
12.
Pyrosil the joints.
13.
Apply coupling agent and allow to dry.
14.
Apply a 5mm bead of adhesive to the body joints.
15.
16.

C2C-36024, to the rocker panel.
17.

C2C-36006, 7 to the rear outer wheelhouse half
and 5 to the rear wheelhouse outer.
18.

C2P 4773, to the rocker panel.
19.

20.

no: C2C 20589, to the quarter panel
reinforcement.
21.

C2P 4773, to the rocker panel.
22.
23.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Outer Wheelhouse Half

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the rear outer wheelhouse half is replaced in conjunction with the:
rear bumper cover

rear wheelhouse outer
rear inner wheelhouse half
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the rear wheelhouse outer.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheelhouse Outer
Installation).
4.
Using an air saw, bulk cut a section of the old

panel to allow access for the ESN50. Then using
the ESN50, remove 4 Self Piercing Rivets, from the
inner wheelhouse.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6.

Piercing Rivets, 9 from the inner wheelhouse and 4
from the inner rocker panel.
Installation
1.
2.
Remove any foam residue.
3.
4.

5.

6.
7.

8.
9.
10.
Using the old panel as a template, mark and drill

13 holes, using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, clean and prepare the

panel joint surfaces.
Pyrosil the joints.

11.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the new panel

joints.
12.
Using the Genesis G4, install 13 Hemloks to the

inner rocker panel. 9 part no: C2C-36026, (2 panel
thickness) and 4 part no: tbc, (3 panel thickness).
13.

no: C2C 20591, to the inner wheelhouse.
14.
15.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Lamp Mounting Panel

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the rear lamp mounting panel is replaced in conjunction with the:
rear bumper cover
rear bumper
back panel assembly
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the back panel assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Back Panel Assembly (50130 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
4.

remove 10 Self Piercing Rivets, to the quarter panel.
5.
Separate joints, cut through foam and remove the panel.
Installation
1.

2.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, remove adhesive

residue.
3.
4.
Offer up the new panel and check alignment. If correct proceed

to next step, if not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
5.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 7 holes through the quarter
panel lower extension, into the new panel.
6.
7.

surfaces.
8.
Pyrosil the joints.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

C2C-45252, to the quarter panel lower extension.

no: C2C 20589, to the quarter panel.
14.
15.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Spare Wheel Well

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the spare wheel well is replaced in conjunction with the:
rear bumper cover
rear bumper
back panel assembly
NOTE: The rear subframe also has to be removed for access.

1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the battery.
4.
Remove the battery tray.
5.

For additional information, refer to: Navigation System Module
(419-07 Navigation System, Removal and Installation).
6.
Remove the rear subframe.

7.
Remove the fuel tank filler pipe.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (31001 Fuel Tank and Lines - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
8.

9.
Using an air saw, bulk cut the panel to allow

access to joints for removal.
10.
11.

Piercing Rivets from the luggage floor. Remove 2
Monobolts, 1 from each side member.
NOTE: Save the remnant as it will be used as a guide for drilling

the fixing holes in the new panel, take care when separating the
joint.
Installation
1.
Remove rivet residue.
2.

3.
Offer up the old panel remnant to the new panel

and using this as a guide, drill 25 holes in the new
panel using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit.
4.
5.
Offer up the new panel. Check alignment, if correct proceed to

next step, if not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
6.
7.
surfaces.
8.
Pyrosil the joints.
9.
10.
11.
12.

C2C-36006, to the luggage floor and 2 Monobolts,
1 each side, part number: C2P 4773, to the rear
side member.
13.
14.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Side Member Section

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the rear side member section is replaced in conjunction with the:
rear bumper cover

rear bumper
back panel assembly
spare wheel well
rear side member closing panel
rear side member reinforcement panel
NOTE: The rear subframe and the fuel tank have to be removed for access.
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the rear side member reinforcement panel.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Side Member
Reinforcement Panel (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs,
4.
Remove the spare wheel well.

For additional information, refer to: Spare Wheel Well (501-30
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
5.
6.
Using a Belt Sander, sand down the heads of 8 Self

Piercing Rivets to the exhaust hanger bracket. Use
a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit to remove these 8 rivets.
7.
Using an air saw, Bulk cut the old panel at a point

measured 185mm rearward from the top of the
flange, as illustrated. Discard the cut section.
Installation
1.
Bulk cut the new panel, allowing for overlap.
2.
Offer up the new panel section, align and clamp against the old
panel.
3.
Using an air saw, cut through the new panel, using the edge of
the original panel as a guide, (at the 185mm marked point).
4.
Measure and cut a 50mm section, to be used as a backing plate

and 2 run on, run off tabs, from the remnant of the new panel.
5.
Using a Roloc Bristle disc, clean and prepare the panel joint
surfaces.
6.
7.
Clamp the backing plates and run on / run off tabs

into position and check alignment. If within
tolerance continue to weld the backing plates, then
the run on / run off tabs into position. If not,
Clamp the weld run on / run off tabs into position and then tack
weld.
8.
9.
10.
Weld the section joint.
Cut off run on / off tabs.

Carry out a non destructive crack inspection on the Butt Joint. If
correct, proceed to next step, if not, rectify and recheck before
proceeding.
11.
Using a belt sander, sand down the weld joint.
12.
Prime the area, in and around, the backing plates.
13.
Using the exhaust mounting bracket as a template, use a

6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit to drill out the 8 holes in the Side
Member.
14.
15.
Apply a 5mm bead of adhesive to the exhaust hanger bracket.
NOTE: Do not Roloc the exhaust hanger bracket.
16.
Offer up the exhaust hanger bracket, then, using

the Genesis G4, install 8 Hemloks. The 4 in the
centre, (grouped in the illustration) are part no:
tbc. The remaining 4, outer Hemloks are part no:
C2C-36026.
17.
18.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Quarter Panel Lower Extension

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the quarter panel lower extension is replaced in conjunction with the:
rear bumper cover

rear bumper
back panel assembly
rear lamp mounting panel
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.

aside.
4.
RH Side: Remove the antenna.

For additional information, refer to: Antenna (415-02 Antenna,
5.
Remove the rear lamp mounting panel.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Lamp Mounting Panel
Installation).
6.

7.
8.
Remove the foil patch at the joint with the rear

quarter panel.
Separate the joints, cut through foam and remove the panel.
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Offer up the new panel and check alignment. If correct proceed

to next step, if not, rectify and recheck before proceeding.
5.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 4 holes through the rear
quarter panel into the new panel, ready for hemlok fixings.
6.
7.

surfaces.
8.
Pyrosil the joints.
9.
10.
11.

12.
Using the Genesis G4, install 4 Hemloks, to the

quarter panel, part no: C2S-45252.
13.

no: C2C 20589, 6 to the rear side member closing
panel and 2 to the rear wheelhouse.
14.
15.
Note: Replace the foil patch at the joint with the quarter panel,
after the primer application.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Quarter Panel Assembly 2-Door

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the quarter panel assembly is replaced in conjunction with the:
rear bumper cover
liftgate
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.

For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect (414-01,
4.
Disconnect the generator electrical connections.
5.

6.

Installation).
7.
Remove the liftgate.
8.

9.

Installation).
10.
Remove the bodyside weatherseal.
11.
12.
Remove the rear drip gutter moulding.
13.
Remove the boot extractor vent.
14.

For additional information, refer to: Quarter Panel Speaker - 2Door (415-03 Speakers, Removal and Installation).
15.
Remove the front safety belt retractor.

For additional information, refer to: Front Safety Belt Retractor
(501-20A Safety Belt System, Removal and Installation).
16.
Remove the door striker.
17.
Remove the liftgate guide.
18.

19.

aside.
20.
RH side: Remove the fuel filler flap.
21.

Cryobit drill bit, remove 18 Self Piercing Rivets. 6
from the quarter panel inner reinforcement, 4 from
the back panel assembly, 2 from the rear
wheelhouse outer and 6 from the rear side
member closing panel. Remove 3 10mm bolts from
the rocker panel.
22.

from the door aperture.
23.
Remove the foil patch, located in the drain

channel.
24.
Using the ESN50, remove 16 Self Piercing Rivets.

Remove the 2 which were covered by the foil patch
and remove 14 from the drain channel. Remove
the 1 13mm liftgate strut mounting bolt.
25.
Saw cut the panel. Separate the joints and remove the panel
bulk.
26.
Mark the position of the roof panel to rear quarter panel

assembly welded joint and saw cut 3mm below this point.
27.
NOTE: There is a "hidden" Self Piercing Rivet under

the roof panel.
Measure the position of the "hidden" Rivet, (see
1), and using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill
through from the drain channel side, to remove it.
28.
Separate the joint and remove the remaining quarter panel /

drain channel remnant.
29.
Using a belt sander, sand back the welded joint,

inside and out, in preparation for the new quarter
panel assembly.
Installation
1.
2.
Remove any foam/sealer remnants.
3.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, remove the adhesive residue.
4.
5.
With assistance, offer up the new panel, align and clamp into
position.
6.

7.
8.
surfaces.
9.
Pyrosil the joints, avoiding the area of the weld joint.
10.
Apply the coupling agent, avoiding the area of the weld joint
and allow to dry.
11.
Apply Wurth semi-rigid sealer in the same locations as the old

panel.
12.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the body joints, avoiding the

area of the weld joint.
13.
With assistance, offer up the new panel, align and clamp into
position.
14.

15.
Install 3 10mm bolts to the rocker panel.
16.
Install 1 13mm liftgate strut mounting bolt.

17.

18.

part no: C2C 20593, to the B-Pillar.
19.
Using the ESN50, install 6 Self Piercing Rivets, part no: C2C
20589, to the quarter panel reinforcement.
20.
Using the ESN50, install 1 Self Piercing Rivet, part no: C2C
20593, to the rocker panel.
21.
20590, to the rear quarter window aperture, (lower side of the
weld joint).
22.
20589, to the rear quarter window aperture, (upper side of the
weld joint).
23.
Using the ESN50, install 14 Self Piercing Rivets, to

the drain channel casting. Install 2, part no: C2C
20591 and 12, part no: C2C 20590.
24.
20589, to the rear side member closing.
25.
20589, to the rear wheelhouse outer.
26.
Cut 2 run on / run off tabs from the original panel, or from
similar material.
27.
Tack weld the run on / run off tabs into position.

28.
Lap weld the joint between the quarter panel

assembly and the roof panel.
29.
Remove the run on / run off tabs.
30.
Carry out a non destructive crack inspection on the lap weld. If

correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify and recheck before
proceeding.
31.
Using a belt sander, dress the welded joint.
32.
33.
Note: Replace the foil patch on the drain channel after the
primer application.
34.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Quarter Panel Assembly Convertible

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the quarter panel assembly is replaced in conjunction with the:
rear bumper cover

rear bumper
Convertible top compartment lid
Convertible top compartment lid hinges LH and RH
Convertible top assembly
Water drain panel
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
4.

5.

Installation).
6.

7.

Installation).
8.
Remove the convertible top compartment lid hinges.
9.

- Convertible (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal
and Installation).
10.
Remove the boot extractor vent.
11.
Remove the door striker.
12.
RH side: Remove the antenna.

13.
RH side: Remove the fuel filler flap.
14.

aside.
15.
Remove 4 10mm bolts at the rocker panel.
16.
Remove 2 10mm bolts from the inner quarter

panel.
17.
Use the ESN50 to remove 1 Self Piercing Rivet at

the rear inner wheelhouse half.
18.
Use the ESN50 to remove 14 Self Piercing Rivets at

the door aperture.
22.
19.

Cryobit drill bit, remove 12 Self Piercing Rivets at
the quarter panel lower extension.
20.

the back panel.
21.

the water drain panel.
Installation
1.
2.
Remove any foam/sealer remnants.
3.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, remove the adhesive residue.
4.
5.
6.

7.
8.
9.
Pyrosil the joints.
10.
11.
Apply a flexible sealant / adhesive to the areas

illustrated, in the same locations as the old panel.
For additional information, refer to: Body Repairs
(501-25A Body Repairs - General Information,
12.
Apply a flexible sealant / adhesive to the NVH

element.
For additional information, refer to: Body Repairs
(501-25A Body Repairs - General Information,
13.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the body joints. Adhesive must

be applied between all riveted joints and any other locations
where it was originally applied.
14.
15.

16.
Install 4 10mm bolts to the Rocker Panel.
17.
Install 2 10mm bolts to the inner quarter panel.
18.

no: C2C 20589, (2 panel thickness), at the rear
inner wheelhouse half.
19.

no: C2C 20591, (2 panel thickness), at the door
aperture.
20.

part no: C2C 20593, (3 panel thickness), at the
door aperture.
21.

no: C2C 20590, (2 panel thickness), at the door
aperture.
22.

part no: C2C 20589, (2 panel thickness), at the
quarter panel lower extension.
23.

no: C2C 20589, (2 panel thickness), at the back
panel.
24.
Using the ESN50, install 3 Self Piercing rivets, part

no: C2C 20589.
25.
Using the ESN50, install 1Self Piercing rivets, part

no: C2C 20592.
26.
27.

Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Back Panel Assembly

Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the back panel assembly is replaced in conjunction with the:
rear bumper cover
rear bumper
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
4.
Remove the rear bumper.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper (501-19
5.
Remove the LH and RH extractor vents.
6.
Remove the liftgate striker.
7.
Release the back panel wiring harness and position it aside.

8.
9.

Cryobit Drill Bit, remove 54 Self Piercing Rivets.
Installation
1.
2.
NOTE: Do not clean the steel bracket on the spare wheel well.
3.
Dress flanges where necessary.
4.
Offer up the new panel and clamp into position. Check

alignment, if correct proceed to next step, if not, rectify and
5.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit, drill 4 holes, 2

each side, through the rear side member into the
new panel.
6.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit, drill 12 holes through the trunk
floor into the new panel.
7.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit Drill Bit, drill 6 holes, 3 each side,

through the side member closing into the new panel.
8.
9.
Countersink 4 holes, 2 each side, in the new panel.
10.
11.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, clean and prepare the panel surfaces.
12.
Pyrosil the joints.
13.

14.
15.
Offer up the panel, align and clamp into position.
16.
17.
Using the Genesis G4, install 18 Hemloks, 12 into

the spare wheel well and 6 , 3 each side, into the
rear side member closing panel, part no: C2C36006.
NOTE: These need to be Countersunk fixings as

the rear bumper is fixed at these points and needs
to sit flush with the back panel.
Using the Genesis G4, install 4 Countersunk
Monobolts, 2 each side, into the rear side member,
2 each side.
18.
19.

each side, into the quarter panel, part no: C2C
20589.

each side, into the rear side member, part no: C2C
20591.
20.
21.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Side Member Closing Panel
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the rear side member closing panel is replaced in conjunction with the:
rear bumper cover
rear bumper
back panel assembly
NOTE: The fuel tank and rear subframe have to be removed for access.
NOTE: The rear side member closing panel can only be installed with the rear side member reinforcement panel.
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the battery.
4.
Remove the battery tray.
5.
Remove the fuel tank.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank (310-01, Removal
and Installation).
6.
RH Side: Remove the fuel tank filler pipe.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (31001, Removal and Installation).
7.

8.

aside.
9.

For additional information, refer to: Navigation System Module
(419-07 Navigation System, Removal and Installation).
10.

11.
Using the ESN50, remove 6 Self Piercing Rivets, to

the quarter panel lower extension. Using a Belt
Sander, sand down the head of 1 Self Piercing
Rivet, (inset), accessed from underneath. (If the
quarter panel assembly or the quarter panel lower
extension is removed, the fixing can be removed
using the ESN50).
12.

Piercing Rivets, to the wheelhouse.
13.
Remove 3 Monobolts, to the rear side member

reinforcement panel.
14.
15.
Remove 2 Monobolts, to the luggage floor.
Using an air saw, Bulk Cut the old panel to enable access to
further fixings. If the quarter panel or quarter panel lower
extension is removed the Bulk Cut is not required.
16.
Using a Belt Sander, sand down the underside

heads of 20 Self Piercing Rivets, to the rear side
member. Then, using the ESN50, remove the
rivets.
17.
18.
19.
Using the ESN50, remove 5 Self Piercing Rivets, to

the rear side member.
Using an air saw, bulk cut the old panel at its joint
with the luggage floor, approx 42cm long.
Separate joints and remove the bulk of the closing panel.
Installation
1.
The side member closing panel is installed with the side member
reinforcement panel. (The procedure for removing the remaining
rear side member closing panel remnant and the installation of
the rear side member closing panel, is described in the rear side
member reinforcement panel procedure).
For additional information, refer to: Rear Side Member
Reinforcement Panel (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs,
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Side Member Reinforcement

Panel
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the rear side member reinforcement panel is replaced in conjunction with the:
rear bumper cover

rear bumper
back panel assembly
rear side member closing panel
NOTE: The fuel tank and rear subframe have to be removed for access.
NOTE: The rear side member reinforcement panel can only be installed with the rear side member closing panel.
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the rear side member closing panel.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Side Member Closing
Panel (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
4.
Using an air saw, bulk cut the panel, then, using a

6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, remove 1 Self Piercing
Rivet, to the rear suspension top mount.
5.
Separate the joints and remove the bulk of the rear side
member reinforcement panel.
6.

remove 4 Self Piercing Rivets. Separate the joints and remove
the rear side member reinforcement panel remnant.
7.
Locate 3 hidden Self Piercing Rivets, (under the

luggage floor), to the rear side member. Using a
6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill through the luggage
floor above these rivets for access. Note: The holes
may need to be enlarged slightly to expose the
rivet heads. Use a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit to
remove.
8.
9.

Piercing Rivet, from underneath the vehicle, to the
rear side member.
Separate the joints and remove the remaining remnant of the

rear side member closing panel.
Installation
NOTE: The installation of the rear side member closing panel is carried out with the rear side member reinforcement
panel.
1.
2.
3.
Offer up the rear side member reinforcement panel.
4.

7.
5.
Clamp the rear side member reinforcement panel

into position and using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit,
drill 4 holes. Countersink the holes in the body
panel ready to accept countersunk Monobolts.
6.
Offer up the rear side member closing panel to the

rear side member reinforcement panel. Use a nut
and bolt through the two panels and one of the the
rear suspension top mount fixing holes to align and
clamp into position.

8.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 11 holes

through the wheelhouse into the new closing
panel.
9.
Using a 6.5mm Cryobit drill bit, drill 4 holes

through the floor panel into the new closing panel.
3 of these holes are drilled from above, the fourth
is drilled from underneath, (as shown in the inset).
10.
Remove the new panels.
11.
12.
Using a Roloc Bristle Disc, clean and prepare both panel joint
surfaces.
13.
Pyrosil the joints of both panels.
14.
Apply the coupling agent to both panels and allow to dry.
15.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the reinforcement panel, offer up

the panel and align.
16.
Using the Genesis G4, install 1 Hemlok, from

underneath, part no: C2C-36026.
17.
18.
Using the Genesis G4, install 4 Countersunk

Monobolts.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the closing panel, offer up the

panel and align.
19.

C2C-36006, to the wheelhouse and 9 Monobolts,
part no: C2P 4773, 3 to the rear side member
reinforcement panel and 6 to the luggage floor.
20.

part no: C2C 20595, to the rear side member.
21.
If the rear quarter panel lower extension, or

quarter panel assembly is removed: Using the
ESN50, install 1 Self Piercing Rivet, part no: C2C
20590, through the rear wheelhouse outer into the
rear side member reinforcement panel, (as shown
in the illustration).
22.
If the rear quarter panel lower extension, or quarter

panel assembly is in place: Using the ESN50, install 1 Self
Piercing Rivet, part no: C2C 20595, through the rear quarter
panel lower extension into the rear side member reinforcement
panel.
23.
24.
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Water Drain Panel Convertible

Removal
NOTE: If the water drain panel is removed for access only, it will require renewal due to the holes made during its
removal.
NOTE: In this procedure the water drain panel is replaced in conjunction with the:

1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.

4.

Installation).
5.
Remove the convertible top compartment lid hinges.

Compartment Lid Hinge (501-18 Convertible Top, Removal and
Installation).
6.
7.
Using the ESN50, remove 8 Self-Piercing Rivets.
NOTE: To aid separation, use a heat gun to soften the adhesive

bond to the water drain panel reinforcement.
Installation
1.
2.
3.
Pyrosil the joints.
4.
5.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the water drain

panel reinforcement.
6.
NOTE: If the water drain panel is being fitted to

the original quarter panel, the rivets must be
installed avoiding the original removal holes.
Using the ESN50, install 6 Self-Piercing rivets, part
no: C2C 20589.
7.
NOTE: If the water drain panel is being fitted to

the original water drain panel reinforcement, the
rivets must be installed avoiding the original
removal holes.
Using the ESN50, install 2 Self-Piercing rivets, part
no: C2C 20592.
8.

Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Water Drain Panel

Reinforcement Convertible
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the water drain panel reinforcement is replaced in conjunction with the:

Water drain panel
Quarter panel
NOTE: At least one quarter panel has to be removed to enable this repair.
1.

Operation).
2.

section.
3.
Remove the water drain panel.

For additional information, refer to: Water Drain Panel Convertible (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
4.
Remove the quarter panel.

For additional information, refer to: Quarter Panel Assembly Convertible (501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
5.
6.
Remove 4 10mm bolts, 2 each side.
NOTE: To aid separation, use a heat gun to soften the adhesive

bond to the quarter panel.
Installation
NOTE: The water drain panel reinforcement cannot be installed if the quarter panel is in place. The following 4 steps
should be performed to the new panel prior to installing the quarter panel.
1.
2.
Pyrosil the joints.
3.
4.
Install the water drain panel reinforcement between its fixing

brackets, but do not secure it.
5.
Install the quarter panel.

6.
NOTE: The water drain panel rivets should be

installed before the adhesive cures.
Apply a 5mm adhesive bead to the water drain
panel reinforcement in the areas illustrated.
7.
Raise and align the reinforcement panel, once

aligned, install 4 10mm bolts, 2 each side.
8.
Install the water drain panel.
9.

Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System Torque Specifications
Item
Dash braces to engine bay - bolt
Front subframe to body - forward bolt
Front subframe to body - rear bolt
Front subframe NVH brace - bolt
Radiator brace lower to longitudinal brackets - bolt
Rear subframe to body - bolt
Rear K-frame brace - forward bolt
Rear K-frame brace - rear bolt
Reinforcer front floor pan to underfloor of BIW - screw
Nm
55
80 Nm + 360 degrees
80 Nm + 270 degrees
55
23
60 Nm + 240 degrees
133
40
40
lb-ft
40
59 lb-ft + 360 degrees
40
17
98
30
30
lb-in
-
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System - Front Subframe V8 5.0L

Special Tool(s)
303-021
303-1435
303-662
Support Beam Arm and Hook Assembly, Engine
General Equipment
Powertrain Jack
Removal
1.

2.

3.
4.
and Installation).
5.
Refer to: Wheel Knuckle (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal

and Installation).
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Torque: 45 Nm
Refer to: Steering Gear (211-02 Power Steering, Removal and

Installation).
11.
12.
13.
14.
Torque: 5 Nm
15.
Lower the vehicle.

16.
17.
NOTE: Secure with cable ties.

Secure the radiator assembly.
18.
19.

Torque:
Stage 1: 25 Nm
Stage 2: 90
20.

paintwork.
Support the engine.
Special Tool(s): 303-021, 303-662
21.

22.
General Equipment: Powertrain Jack
23.
Torque:
Front retaining bolts
Stage 1: 80 Nm
Stage 2: 360
Rear retaining bolts
Stage 1: 80 Nm
Stage 2: 270
24.

25.
26.
27.

NOTE: Note the fitted position of the fasteners.
Torque: 175 Nm
28.

Torque: 175 Nm
Installation
1.
2.
Refer to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00 Suspension System General Information, General Procedures).
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System - Rear Subframe V8 5.0L

General Equipment
Powertrain Jack
Removal
1.

2.
and Installation).
3.

4.

Installation).
5.
Torque: 10 Nm
6.

fluids.
NOTE: The fuel tank has a non-return valve in the
fuel filler stub pipe, only the fuel present in the
filler hose will be spilt.
7.
Using the special tool, press and hold the brake pedal.
8.
WARNING: If the fluid is spilled on the

paintwork, the affected area must be immediately
washed down with cold water.
CAUTION: Make sure that a new sealing

washer is installed.
Torque: 35 Nm
9.
WARNING: Make sure the axle assembly is

supported.
Torque:
M10 40 Nm
M12 133 Nm
10.
WARNING: Install the M12 subframe bolts

prior to removing axle support.
11.

Torque: 133 Nm
12.
13.
WARNING: Make Sure the axle assembly is

supported.

installed.
General Equipment: Powertrain Jack
Torque:
Stage 1: 60 Nm
Stage 2: 240
14.
Installation
1.
2.
3.
Refer to: Rear Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System General Information, General Procedures).
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System - Rear Subframe Front

Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Forcing bolt
204-469
Remover support
204-479
Reciever-bush
204-481
Remover-bush
204-482
Support-bush
204-480
Installer-bush
204-483
Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.
CAUTION: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported

3.


4.

All vehicles
5.

Using the special tools, remove and discard the
rear subframe front bushing.
Installation
All vehicles
1.

Using the special tools, Install the new front
bushings.
2.


3.

All vehicles
4.

Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System - Rear Subframe Rear

Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Forcing bolt
204-469
Reciever-bush
204-475
Replacer-bush
204-474
Remover bush
204-473
Remover support-bush
204-472
Removal
All vehicles
1.

2.


3.

4.

All vehicles
5.

Using the special tools, remove and discard the rear
subframe rear bushing.
Installation
All vehicles
1.

Using the special tools, Install the new rear bushings.

2.


3.

All vehicles
4.


1010XKworkshop PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1010XKworkshop PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Workshop Manual

General Information - About This Manual

References to LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand)

Powertrain LH and RH definition

How to use Repair Procedures

Important Safety Instructions

Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual

Trustmark Authoring Standards (TAS) Repair Procedures

Partially coated self-locking bolt

Self-locking bolt with a locking washer

Self-locking nut with a plastic locking insert

Self-locking nut with thread deformation (3 dents)

Self-locking nut with thread deformation (squeeze of thread to oval shape)

Self-locking nut with integrated locking ring

procedure advises to reapply the coating with a specified material.

moved, modified, checked, adjusted etc.

One illustration may have multiple steps assigned to it.

How to use Diagnosis and Testing procedures

General Information - Application and Use of Specifications

General Information - General Service Information

Repairs and Replacements

Service Repair Operation Numbering

References to Bank-1 and Bank-2

Disconnecting/Connecting the Battery

The vehicle to be jacked up

Reconnecting the Battery

Connecting a Slave Battery Using Jump Leads

the risk of sparks occurring when the final connection is made.

engine lifting bracket.

material dust (asbestos particles)

Calibration of Essential Measuring Equipment

WARNING: Failure to comply may result in personal injury or damage to components.

Use of Control Modules

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD)

charts with actions required to rectify concerns

After Bottom Dead Center

Battery positive voltage

Before Bottom Dead Center

Brake Traction Control

Coast Clutch Solenoid

Effective horsepower developed by an engine or motor,

Indicates camshaft position

Data Link Connector

Driver Door Module

Domestic Data Bus

SI term for the Centigrade scale, with freezing point at

Electronic module to support security system

Sensing EGR function based on temperature change

Electronic module to support engine functionality

Flash Electrically Erasable

Global Positioning System

System designed to prevent fuel vapor from escaping

Electrical conductor used as a common return for an

Heated Oxygen Sensor

Intake Air Temperature

Input Shaft Speed

Liquid Crystal Display

Lighting Control Module

Manifold Absolute Pressure

Noise, Vibration and

On-board Refuelling Vapour

Electrically heated oxygen sensor which induces fuelling